Acura TL 1999-2003

Protected by AR
@
ACURA
Service Manual
1999-2003 3.2 TL
Protected by AR
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes-

1999 Model ........................................ 1-2

2000 Model ........................................ 1-3

2001 Model ........................................ 1-4

2002 Model ........................................ 1-5
Chassis and Paint Codes- .

2003 Model ........................................ 1-6
Identification Number Locations ........ 1-7
Warning/Caution Label Locations ...... 1-8
Under-hood Emission
Control Label ..................................... 1-12
Lift and Support Points ........................ 1-14
Towing .................................................. 1-15
Parts Marking ..... .... .............. ............. ... 1-16
Revised Component Terms ................. 1-17

Protected by AR
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes - 1999 Model

Vehicle Identification Number Engine Number
19U UA5 6 4 * X A 000001 J32A1 - 1000001
IIIIIII1
ab cdefgh
I
a
I
b
a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle a. Engine Type

19U: HONDA OF AMERICA MFG., INC., U.S.A. J32A1: 3.2 ~ SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
ACURA Passenger vehicle Fuel-injected engine
b. Line, Body and Engine Type b. Serial Number
UA5: ACURA 3.2TL/J32A 1
c. Body Type and Transmission Type Transmission Number
6: 4-door Sedan/4-speed Automatic
d. Vehicle Grade (Series)
US model B7VA - 6500001
4: Base Package
5: With Navigation System
Canada model
I
a
I
b
4: Base Package
e. Check Digit
f. Model Year a. Transmission Type
X: 1999 B7VA: 4-speed Automatic
g. Factory Code b. Serial Number
A: Marysville, Ohio Factory in U.S.A.
h. Serial Number Paint Code
US model: 000001-
Canada model: 800001- Code Color US model Canada
model
B-93P Monterey Blue Pearl 0 0
G-87P Dark Emerald Pearl 0 0
G-91M Laguna Metallic 0 0
NH-578 Taffeta White 0 0
NH-592 Flamenco Black Pearl 0 0
NH-603P White Diamond Pearl 0 0
NH-623M Satin Silver Metallic 0 0
R-507P Firepepper Pearl 0 0
YR-508M Heather Mist Met1!IILc -
0 0
0: indicates applicable
COLOR LABEL
ExamDle:
Vehicle Identification Number
and Federal Motor Vehicle INT. COLOR
Safety Standard Certification. TYPEF
Vehicle Identification Number EXT. COLOR
and Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard Certification. r---I-I YR-50SM
A5XSOKA
Paint Code
BACK
1-2
Protected by AR

19U UA5 6 4 * V A 000001 J32A 1 - 2000001
II111III
8 b cdefgh
I Ib
8

19U: HONDA OF AMERICA MFG., INC., U.S.A. J32A 1: 3.2 ~ SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
UA5: ACURA 3.2TLJJ32A 1
6: 4-door Sedan/S-speed Automatic
US model M7WA - 1000001
4: Base Package
S: With Navigation System
Canada model
I Ib
8
4: Base Package
e. Check Digit
f. Model Vear a. Transmission Type
Y: 2000 M7WA: 5-speed Automatic
US model: 000001-
model
B-92P Nighthawk Black Pearl 0 0
B-93P Monterey Blue Pearl 0 0
G-87P bark Emerald Pearl 0
G-91M ~aguna Metallic 0 0
NH-S78 ;Taffeta White 0
NH-603P ~hite Diamond Pearl 0 0
R-S07P !rirepepper Pearl 0 0
YR-S24M Naples Gold Metallic 0 0
COLOR LABEL
Exam Ie:
INT. COLOR
Vehicle Identification Number TYPEF
and Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard Certification. EXT. COLOR
Vehicle Identification Number .---+-VR-50SM
and Canadian Motor Vehicle A5YSOKA
Safety Standard Certification. Paint Code
BACK
1-3
Protected by AR
General Information

19U UA5 6 6 * 1 A 000001 J32A 1 - 3400001
IIIIII1I
ab cdefgh
I
a
I
b

19U: HONDA OF AMERICA MFG ., INC., U.S.A. J32A 1: 3.2 £ SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
UA5: ACURA 3.2TLJJ32A 1
6: 4-door Sedan/S-speed Automatic
US model B7WA - 8000001
6: With Sunroof
7: With Navigation System
Canada model
I
a
I
b
6: With Sunroof
e. Check Digit
f. Model Vear a. Transmission Type
1:2001 B7WA: S-speed Automatic
US model: 000001-
model
B-92P NiQhthawk Black Pearl 0 C
B-93P Monterey Blue Pearl 0 C_
~-87P Dark Emerald Pearl 0
G-91M Laguna Metallic 0 U
NH-S78 Taffeta Wh ite 0
NH-603P White Diamond Pearl 0 0
R-S07P Firepe(!Qer Pearl 0 0
YR-S24M Naples Gold Metallic 0 0
COLOR LABEL
Ex.mDIe:
INT. COLOR
Vehicle Identification Number TVPEF
and Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard Certification. EXT. COLOR
Vehicle Identification Number .---+-1 VR-50SM
and Canadian Motor Vehicle A51S0KA
Safety Standard Certification. P.intCoda
BACK
1-4
Protected by AR
Vehicle Identification Number En ine Number
19U UA5 6 6 * 2 A 000001 J32A1 - 4400001
IIIIIIII
8 b cdefgh
I Ib
8

19U: HONDA OF AMERICA MFG., INC., U.S.A. J32A 1: 3.2 £ SOHC VTEC Sequential Multipart
ACURA Passenger vehicle Fuel-injected, 225HP engine
b. Line, Body and Engine Type J32A2: 3.2 £ SOHC VTEC Sequential Multipart
UA5: ACURA 3.2TLJJ32A 1, J32A2 Fuel-injected, 260HP engine
c. Body Type and Transmission Type b. Serial Number
6: 4-door Sedan/5-speed Automatic J32A 1: 4400001 -
d. Vehicle Grade (Series) J32A2: 1300001-
US model
6: Premium with sunroof Transmission Number
7: Prem ium with Navigation System
8: Type-S B7WA - 9000001
9: Type-S with Navigation System
Canada model
6: Premium
I Ib
8
8: Type-S
e. Check Digit
2:2002 B7WA: 5-speed Automatic
US model: 000001- Code Color US model lCanada mode
Canada model: 800001- Premium lTvOe-S Premium Irvpe-S
B-92P Niahthawk Black Pearl 0 0 0 0
J3-96P I:ternal Blue Pearl 0
B-504P ~eaean Blue Pearl 0
G-87P Park Emerald Pearl 0
G-508P Noble Green Pearl 0 0 0 0
NH-603P White Diamond Pearl 0 0 0
NH-623M lSatin Silver Metallic 0 0 0 0
NH-643M ~nthracite Metallic 0 0
~-507P irepepper Pearl 0 0
f{R-524M Naoles Gold Metallic 0 0 0
0 : indicates applicable.
COLOR LABEL
Vehicle Iclentificetion Number and Federal Ex.mpl.:
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Certificetion. INT. COLOR
Vehicle Identification Number and Canadian TVPEF
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Certificetion. EXT. COLOR
R·507P
A52SOKA
P.intCode
BACK
1-5
Protected by AR
General Information

19U UA5 6 6 * 3 A 000001 J32A1 - 5400001
IIIIII11
a b cdefgh
I
a
I
b

19U: HONDA OF AMERICA MFG., INC., U.S.A. J32A 1: 3.2 Ll, SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
ACURA Passenger vehicle Fuel-injected, 225HP engine
b. Line, Body and Engine Type J32A2: 3.2 Ll, SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
UA5: ACURA 3.2TL/J32A 1, J32A2 Fuel-injected, 260HP engine
c. Body Type and Transmission Type b. Serial Number
6: 4-door Sedan/5-speed Automatic J32A1: 5400001-
d. Vehicle Grade (Series) J32A2: 2300001 -
US model
6: Premium with sunroof Transmission Number
7: Premium with Navigation System
8: Type-S B7WA - 5000001
9: Type-S with Navigation System
Canada model
6: Premium
I
a
I
b
8: Type-S
e. Check Digit
3:2003 87WA: 5-speed Automatic
A: Marysville, Ohio Factory in U .S.A.
US model: 000001 - Code Color US model ~anada model
Canada model: 800001- Premium Type-S Premium rrype-S
B-92P Nighthawk Black Pearl 0 0 0 0
a-96P ternal Blue Pearl 0 0
B-504P Aegean Blue Pearl 0
~-508P Noble Green Pearl 0
NH-603P White Diamond Pearl 0 0 0
NH-623M Satin Silver Metallic 0 0 0 0
NH-643M Anthracite Metallic 0 0 0 0
B-507P irejlepper Pearl 0 0
VR-524M Naples Gold Metallic 0 0 0
0 : indicates applicable.
COLOR LABEL
Example:
Vehicle Identification Number and Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Certification. INT. COLOR
Vehicle Identification Number and Canadian TYPEF
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Certification. EXT. COLOR
r--+-I R-507P
A53S0KA
Paint Code
BACK
1-6
Protected by AR
Identification Number Locations
Transmission Number
Vehicle Identification
Number (VINI
BACK
1-7
Protected by AR
General Information
Warning/Caution Label Locations
SRS INFORMATION DRIVER MODULE

u.s. model CABLE REEL DANGER
CAUTION
DRIVER MODULE
DANGER
MONITOR
NOTICE
SIDE MODULE
DANGER
1-8
BACK
Protected by AR
SERVICE INFORMATION
(Under-hood Emission
Control Labell
TIRE INFORMATION
SIDE AIRBAG INFORMATION

• Located on driver's doorjamb and
passenger's doorjamb (not shown)
AIR CONDITIONING
INFORMATION
RADIATOR CAP
CAUTION
BACK
1-9
Protected by AR
General Information
Under-hood Emission Control Label (1999 Model)

Emission Group Identification Engine and Evaporative Families:
Example: Engine Family:
VEHICLE
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U. S. EPA
AHD STATE OF CAlIFOflNIA. REGUlUIONS
APPLICABLE to 1999 MDOll YUill NEW X HNX V 03.2 GL2
HEV ,ASSENGE" CARS PR OV IDED THAT
THIS VEHICLE IS ONLY INTRODUCED
INTO COMMERCE FOil SALE IN THE STA n
OF C"LlFO""I" .
VALVE LASH
J.>.£W
(I N)I. zao. '2mlll
tEX)O. 30;:0. Umm
I I I Ie I
abc d
s, . . u ' LUG GA' I. 0 • I. \mlll
NO OTHER ADJU ST MEN TS NEEDED.
XHNXV0 1. 2G12 TWC / H02S (Z)

lHNXflOllOU.B [GIII / Sfi a. Model Year
3. Zl
08011 C[I"TIFfED X: 1999
CATALYST b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
(HJ 32VHGOXG
~
P08E-LOO
c. Family Type
V:LDV
HONDA MOTOR CO . • LTD
d. Displacement
e. Sequence Characters
GF1: Federal and Tier 1
FEDERAL GL2: California TLEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1999 MODEL YEAR
NEW MOTOR VEHICLES. Evaporative Family:
CALIFORNIA TLEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO CALIFORNIA X HNX R 0130 AAB
NEW TLEV PASSENGER CARS AND TO U. S. EPA NLEV
PROGRAM REGULATIONS APPLI CABLE TO 1999
I I I Ie I
abc d
MODEL YEAR NEW TLEV PASSENGER CARS. THIS
VEHICLE MAY ONLY BE INTRODUCED INTO
COMMERCE FOR SALE IN CALIFORNIA. A STATE THAT a. Model Year
HAS THE CALIFORNIA STANDARDS IN EFFECT TO X: 1999
WHICH THIS VEHICLE HAS BEEN CERTIFIED. A STATE b. Manufacturer Subcode
THAT HAS OPTED INTO THE NLEV PROGRAM, OR A HNX: HONDA
STATE CONTIGUOUS THERETO. c. Family Type
R: EVAP/ORVR
TIER 1 d. Canister Work Capacity
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA e. Sequence Characters
NEW PASSENGER CARS.
BACK
1-10
Protected by AR
Under-hood Emission Control Label (2000 and 2001 Models)

VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

THIS YEHICU COfrIfOItUS YO U. S. f'A
NlEV REGUlATIONS ""LIC"'IU TO 2000
MODEL YEAR NEW ULEv 'ASSENGER CARS
AND CAUFO"NIA REGULATIONS
APPllCA8lE TO 2100 MODEl YEA" NEW
UlEV PASSENGER CARS.
~~~
;---,--~~p---- .... q;ILVf J V HNX V 03.2
I I I Ie I
GL4
'~~i
VALVE LASH (IN) O. 22:tO. 02M.,
(COLD I (Ex ll. lO±O .• 2... " ' abc d
(·if . : 0112
51'A'" 'LUG GA' 1. 0·1.111.
NO OTHEI! ADJUSTMENTS 'UEOlD.
, I I "
YHNXV03 . 2G l~ Iwe/H02S!21
YHNXII0130AU EGI!:/SFI
I
.. \~"
I ,
~
"
',;J
/-
"
a. Model Year
. :':~.---'::~-:-~---,-_/ ~ ~
3.2l 08011 CERTIFIED Y:2000,2001
HNX: HONDA
(HJ 32VHGJJG
(s·w) c. Family Type
HONDA !AOTOR CO , , LTD I I PIE-lOI V: LDV
d. Displacement
GF3: Federal LEV and Canadian Tier 1
FEDERAL LEV GL4: California ULEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2000, 2001 MODEL
YEAR NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS. Evaporative Family:
CALIFORNIA ULEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV V HNX R 0130 AAA
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2000, 2001 MODEL
YEAR NEW ULEV PASSENGER CARS AND
CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2000,
I I I Ie I
abc d
2001 MODEL YEAR NEW ULEV PASSENGER CARS.
CANADIAN nER 1 a. Model Vear

THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV Y:2000,2001
REGULATIONS AND CANADIAN TIER 1 STANDARDS b. Manufacturer Subcode
FOR 2000, 2001 MODEL YEAR NEW PASSENGER CARS. HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
R: EVAP/ORVR
d. Canister Work Capacity
BACK
1-11
Protected by AR
General Information

THII VUIlC U: CONFOIIiIUTOU . .s . lU. 2 HNX V 03.2 X2,

NUY UGUUT IOIU "'''LlCUlf TO
I I I Ie I
It.t.oon VUII tn. ltV .. "nGU
tAU . .~u ~
VAlVE lASH
ICOUI!
UN)' . uto . • hlll
IIX)I, !tH .• h •
abc d
• PAIl HUG.U 1. '-I . ,• •
NO O'"UI UJUI1'MUTI IIIHDlD .
2HfIIIX YIJ , lUI fw e/ HOUU ) a. Model Year

ZHNlIIUU.UF fGlI/HI
1 . 1L on 11 CUITIFIU
2:2002
b. Manufacturer Subcode
CATALYST " ~fWl
--------- HNX: HONDA
(Q) 32VAGXFG
@)
PIE-AU
c. Family Type
V: LDV
Hond, Motor Co. , ltd .
d. Displacement
X21: Federal LEV, Canadian Tier 1
FEDERAL LEV and CANADIAN TIER 1 and California LEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV HYT: California ULEV
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS.
Evaporative Family:
CALIFORNIA lEV
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2002 MODEL YEAR 1 HNX R 0130 AAF
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS AND CALIFORNIA
I I I Ie I
abc d
CALIFORNIA UlEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV a. Model Year
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2002 MODEL YEAR 2:2002
NEW ULEV PASSENGER CARS AND CALIFORNIA b. Manufacturer Subcode
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2002 MODEL YEAR HNX:HONDA
NEW ULEV PASSENGER CARS. c. Family Type
R: EVAP/ORVR
BACK
1-12
Protected by AR

VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

TillS VEllltLl CONFORMS fO U. S. nA
IfUY flUUU no •• ""ucuu TO , . "
3 HNX V 03.2 CYC
IIOIU 'Uti lEW LEV ,,,unGn CUI
AND CALifORNIA UGULArlOIU
... "lICUU TO nil MODn flU NEW
LfV ,,,UUUM CAlli .
"V-Al-"-"-IH--"-.'-.',-..-..-,,-
ICOLD) u....... ~, ~.. ~
l Ull . l i t • . I I I
I I I Ie I
abc d
, ,
~ ..... ' I ......
NO OrNEil ADJUSTMENTS "EEUD.
.' ~ \; _It " :
""nyu . zeft
JlUIIUUU
rWCJMOHUJ
EOU.f. \''C:J' I ~J a. Model Year
1.1l DID II CffITlflU ,_\ '-": 3:2003
HNX: HONDA
32VBGFFG
~
PJE·AO,
c. Family Type
V: LDV
HOld. Motor Co . , Ltd .
d. Displacement
AYC: Federal and Canadian Tier 1 (J32A 1)
FEDERAL and CANADIAN TIER 1 CYC: Federal and Canadian Tier 1 (J32A2)
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV BYT: California ULEV
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS AND CALIFORNIA
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2003 MODEL YEAR Evaporative Family:
CALIFORNIA ULEV 3 HNX R 0130 AAA

NEW ULEV PASSENGER CARS AND CALIFORNIA
I I I Ie I
abc d
NEW ULEV PASSENGER CARS.
a. Model Year
3:2003
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
R: EVAP/ORVR
BACK
1-13
Protected by AR
General Information
Lift and Support Points
If you are going to remove heavy components such as Floor Jack

suspension or the fuel tank from the rear of the vehicle,
first support the front of the vehicle with a tall safety 1. Set the parking brake.
stand. When substantial weight is removed from the
rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can change and 2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted.
cause the vehicle to tip forward on the hoist.
3. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the
Frame Hoist gearshift lever in the Park position.
1. Position the hoist lift blocks (A), or safety stands, 4. Position the floor jack under the front jacking
under the vehicle's front support points (B) and rear bracket (A) or rear jacking bracket (B), center the
support points (e). jack lift platform (e) on the jacking bracket, and jack
up the vehicle high enough to fit the safety stands
under it.
A
c
2. Raise the hoist a few inches, and rock the vehicle

gently to be sure it is firmly supported.
3. Raise the hoist to full height, and inspect the lift

points (B) for solid contact with the lift blocks.
Safety Stands B
c
To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same
support points (B and e) as for a frame hoist. Always 5. Position the safety stands under the support points
use safety stands when working on or under any and adjust them so the vehicle will be level.
vehicle that is supported only by a jack.
6. Lower the vehicle onto the stands.
BACK
1-14
Protected by AR
Towing
If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional If the vehicle cannot be transported by flat-bed, it
towing service. Never tow the vehicle behind another should be towed with the front wheels off the ground. If
vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous. due to damage, the vehicle must be towed with the
front wheels Oh the ground, do the following:
There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle.
• Release the parking brake.
Flat-bed Equipment- The operator loads the vehicle • Start the engine.
on the back of a truck. This is the best way of • Shift to ~ position for 1999 model, ~ position for
transporting the vehicle. 2000-2003 models, position, then IHl position.
• Turn off the engine.
To accommodate flat-bed equipment, the vehicle is
equipped with tie down hooks (A). It is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles (80
The tie down hooks can be used to secure the vehicle to km), and keep the speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
the truck.
INOTICE I
• Improper towing preparation will damage the
transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. If
you cannot shift the transmission or start the engine,
the vehicle must be transported on a flat-bed.
• Trying to lift or tow the vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not
designed to support the vehicle's weight.
Wheel Lift Equipment- The tow truck uses two

pivoting arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and
lift them off the ground. The other two wheels remain
on the ground.
Sling-type Equipment- The tow truck uses metal

cables with hooks on the ends. These hooks go around
parts of the frame or suspension and the cables lift that
end of the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle's
suspension and body can be seriously damaged. This
method of towing is unacceptable.
BACK
1-15
Protected by AR
General Information
Parts Marking
To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are marked with the vehicle identification number (VIN). Original
parts have self-adhesive labels attached with a break-off bolt. Replacement body parts will have self-adhesive labels,
and replacement engine and transmission parts will be stamped with a code for spare parts.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the parts marking labels during body repair. Mask the labels before repairing the part.
BACK
1-16
Protected by AR
Revised Component Terms
Beginning w ith '01 models, the following component terms have been changed to conform with the standards in SAE
document J1930. If you find a terms or abbreviation in a '01 manual that is unfamiliar to you, check this list. If a term is
not listed below, it did not change .
00 and Earlier Models '01·03 Models

Description HONDA Abbreviations Description New Abbreviations
SAE recommendation
Heated Oxygen Sensor (for H02S Air Fuel Ratio Sensor A/F SENSOR
some models)
Brake Switch Brake Pedal Position Switch BPPSwitch
Clutch Switch Clutch Pedal Position Switch
Distributor Ignition Rotor 01 Rotor Distributor Rotor
Function Sensor Engine Speed Fluctuation RPM Fluctuation
Sensor Sensor
Evaporative Emission Control EVAP Control Canister Evaporative Emission EVAP Canister
Canister Canister
Evaporative Emission Control EVAP Control Canister Evaporative Emission EVAP Canister Vent
Canister Vent Shut Valve Vent Shut Valve Canister Vent Shut Valve Shut Valve
Evaporative Emission Purge EVAP Purge Control Evaporative Emission EVAP Canister Purge
Control Solenoid Valve Solenoid Valve Canister Purge Valve Valve
Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR Valve Lift Sensor Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR Valve Position
Valve Lift Sensor Valve Position Sensor Sensor
Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR Control Solenoid Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR Valve Vacuum
Control Solenoid Valve Valve Valve Vacuum Control Control Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Valve
Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR Vacuum Control Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR Valve Vacuum
Vacuum Control Valve Valve Valve Vacuum Control Control Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Valve
Radiator Fan Control Module Fan Control Module
Fuel Tank Evaporative Fuel Tank Vapor/Liquid
Emission Valve Separation Valve
ORVR Vent Shut Valve Fuel Tank Vapor Control
Valve
ORVR Vapor Recirculation Fuel Tank Vapor Recirculation
Tube Tube
First Idle Themo Valve Idle Air Control Thermal lAC Thermal Valve
Valve
Fuel Injector Injector
Fuel Injection Air Control FIA Control Valve Intake Air Bypass Control
Valve Valve
Fuel Injection Air Control FIA Control Solenoid Intake Air Bypass Control
Solenoid Valve Valve Themal Valve
Intake Air Bypass Check Valve lAB Check Valve Intake Manifold Runner IMRC Vacuum Check
Control Vacuum Check Valve Valve
Intake Manifold Runner IMRC Actuator
Control Actuator
Intake Manifold Runner IMRC Actuator Wire
Control Actuator Wire
Intake Air Bypass Control lAB Control Diaphragm Intake Manifold Runner IMRC Diaphragm
Diaphragm Control Actuator Dia~hragm
Intake Manifold Runner IMRC Module
Control Module
(cont'd)
BACK
1-17
Protected by AR
General Information
Revised Component Terms (co nt'd)
00 and Earlier Models '01-03 Models J

Description HONDA Abbreviations Description New Abbreviations I
SAE recommendation
Intake Air Bypass Control lAB Control Solenoid Intake Manifold Runner IMRC Solenoid Valve
Solenoid Valve Valve Control Solenoid Valve
Intake Air Bypass Vacuum lAB Vacuum Tank Intake Manifold Runner IMRCVacuum
Tank Control Vacuum Reservoir
Intake Air Bypass Valve Body lAB Valve Body Intake Manifold Runner IMRCValve
Assembly Assembly Control Valve
Breather Chamber Oil/Air SeQarator
Fuel Pressure Regulator Pressure Regulator Vacuum
Control Solenoid Valve Control Solenoid Valve
Air Control Valve Check Valve Secondary Air Injection Air Control Vacuum
Control Vacuum Check Valve Check Valve
Air Control Valve Vacuum Secondary Air Injection Air Control Vacuum
Tank Control Vacuum Reservoir Reservoir
Air Control Solenoid Valve Secondary Air Injection Air Control Valve
Control Vacuum Control Vacuum Control
Solenoid Valve Solenoid Valve
Air Pump Secondary Air Injection Pump Air Pump
Air Control Valve Secondary Air Injection Pump Air Control Valve
Control Valve
Air Pump Electric Current Secondary Air Injection Pump Air Pump Electric
Sensor Electric Current Sensor Current Sensor
Shift/Clutch Pressure Control Shift Solenoid and Automatic SS and AfT Clutch
Solenoid Valve Set Transaxle Clutch Pressure Pressure Control
Control Solenoid Valve Set Solenoid Valve Set
Shift Control Solenoid Valve Shift Solenoid and Torque SS and TCC Solenoid
Set Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Set
Valve Set
Shift/Lock-up Clutch Control Shift Solenoid and Torque SS and TCC Solenoid
Solenoid Valve Assy Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
Valve
Shift Control Solenoid Valve Shift Solenoid Valve A SS Valve A
A
Shift Control Solenoid Valve Shift Solenoid Valve B SS Valve B
B
Throttle Valve Control Throttle Actuator
Module
Lock-up Clutch Control Torque Converter Clutch TCC solenoid and AfT
Solenoid Valve Set Solenoid and Automatic Clutch Pressure Control
Transaxle Clutch Pressure Solenoid Valve Set
Control Solenoid Valve Set
Lock-up Clutch Control Torque Converter Clutch TCC solenoid Valve
Solenoid Valve Solenoid Valve
Automatic Transaxle Position AfT Gear Position Transmission Range Switch TR Switch
Switch Switch
Variable Valve Timing and VTEC Pressure Switch Variable Valve Timing and VTEC Oil Pressure
Valve Lift Electronic Control Valve lift Electronic Control Switch
Pressure Switch Pressure Switch
BACK
1-18
Protected by AR
specs
Specifications
Standards and Service Limits

Engine Electrical .................................................... 2-2
Engine Assembly .................................................. 2-2
Cylinder Head ........................................................ 2-3
Engine Block .......................................................... 2-4
Engine Lubrication ................................................ 2-5
Cooling ................................................................... 2-5
Fuel and Emissions ............................................... 2-5
4-speed Automatic Transmission
and AfT Differential ........................................... 2-6
5-speed Automatic Transmission
and AfT Differential ........................................... 2-13
Steering .................................................................. 2-20
Suspension .................................... .... ............. ....... 2-20
Brakes ..................................................................... 2-21
Air Conditioning .................................................... 2-21
Design Specifications
Dimensions ............................................................ 2-22
Weight (U.S.A.) ...................................................... 2-22
Weight (CANADA) ................................................. 2-22
Engine .................................................................... 2-22
Starter .................................................................... 2-22
4-speed Automatic Transmission ........................ 2-22
5-speed Automatic Transmission ........................ 2-23
Steering .................................................................. 2-23
Suspension ............................................................ 2-23
Wheel Alignment .................................................. 2-23
Brakes ............... ...................................................... 2-23
Tires ........................................................................ 2-23
Air Conditioning .................................................... 2-24
Electrical Ratings ................................................... 2-24
Body Specifications
Illustration .............................................................. 2-25
Protected by AR
Enaine EI --------
Item Measurement QualifICation Standard or New Service Limit
I Ignit ion coil
Spark plug
Rated voltage
Firing order
Type J32A 1 engine
J32A2 engine
12V
1-4-2-5- 3-6
NGK: PZFR5F-11
DENSO: PKJ16CR-Ll1
NGK: PZFR6E-11
DEN SO: PKJ20CR-M11
Gap 1.0-1 .1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.) 1.3 mm (0.051 in.)
Ignition timing At idle (check AfT (in ~ or [fJ): 10±2°BTDC at 680 ± 50 rpm
the red mark)
Alternator- Tension adjustment Auto adjuster type
compressor belt
Alternator Output at 13.5 V and normal engine J32A 1 engine 105A
temperature J32A2 engine 120A
Coil (rotor) resistance at 68°F (20·C) 2.9 k Q
Slip ring 0.0. 14.4 mm (0.57 in.) 14.0 mm (0.55 in.)
Brush length 10.5 mm (0.41 in.) 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Brush spring tension 3.2 N (0.33 kgf, 0.73Ibs)
Starter Output 1.6kW
Commutator mica depth 0.4-0.5mm 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
(0.016-0.020 in.)
Commutator runout 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Commutator 0.0. 28.0-28.1 mm(1.102-1 .106in.) 27.5 mm (1.083 in.)
Brush length 15.8-16.2 mm (0.62-0.64 in.) 11.0 mm (0.43 in.)
- - -
Brush ~ring tensionJnew) - -~ -~
15.7-17.7 N (1.60 - 1.80 kgf, 3.53-3.97 Ibs)
E- - -- - A--- - -- bl
- -~
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service limit

Compression Pressure Minimum 930 kPa --
Check at 200 rpm with wide open (9.5 kgf/cm' , 135 psi)
throttle. Maximum 200 kPa --
(See Design Specs for ratio.) variation (2.0 kgf/cm', 28 psi)
BACK
2-2
Protected by AR
c;ylrInder Hea d
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Umit
Head Warpage -- 0.05 mm (0.002 in .)
Height 120.95-121.05 mm (4.762-4.766 in.) --
Camshaft End play 0.05-0.20 mm (0.002-0.008 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
Camshaft-to-holder oil clearance 0.050-0.089 mm (0.0020-0.0035 in.) 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Total runout 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.04 mm (0.002 in.)
Cam lobe height Intake, primary 34.615 mm (1 .3628 in.) --
J32Al engine ('99 model) Intake, mid 36.272 mm (1.4280 in.) --
Intake, 31.188 mm (1.2279 in.) --
secondary
Exhaust 36.076 mm (1 .4203 in.) --
Cam lobe height Intake, primary 34.737 mm (1 .3676 in.) --
J32A 1 engine ('00-03 models) Intake, mid 36.445 mm (1 .4348 in.) --
Intake, 34.919 mm (1.3748 in.) --
secondary
Exhaust 36.326 mm (1 .4302 in.) --
Cam lobe height Intake, primary 34.737 mm (1 .3676 in.) - -
J32A2 engine Intake, mid 36.445 mm (1 .4348 in.) --
Intake, 34.919 mm (1.3748 in.) --
secondary
Exhaust 36.389 mm (1 .4326 in.) --
Valves Clearance (cold) Intake 0.20-0.24 mm (0.008-0.009 in.) --
Exhaust 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.) --
StemO.D. Intake 5.485-5.495 mm (0.2159-0.2163 in.) 5.455 mm (0.2148 in.)
Exhaust 5.450-5.460 mm (0.2146-0.2150 in.) 5.420 mm (0.2134 in.)
Stem-to-guide clearance Intake 0.020-0.045 mm (0.0008-0.0018 in.) 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
Valve seats Width Intake 1.25-1.55 mm (0.049-0.061 in.) 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
Stem installed height Intake 46.75-47.55 mm (1.841 - 1.872 in.) 47.80 mm (1.882 in.)
Exhaust 46.68-47.48 mm (1.838 - 1.869 in.) 47 .73 mm (1 .879 in.)
Free length Intake 51.03 mm (2.009 in.) --
'99-01 models Exhaust 53.48 mm (2.106 in.) --
Valve springs Free length Intake 51.54 mm (2.029 in.) --
'02-03 models Exhaust 51.06 mm (2.010 in.) --
Valve guides 1.0. Intake 5.515 - 5.530 mm (0.2171- 0.2177 in.) 5.55 mm (0.219 in.)
Installed height Intake 21 .20-22.20 mm (0.835-0.874 in.) - -
Exhaust 20.63-21.63 mm (0.812-0.852 in.) --
Rocker arms Arm-to-shaft clearance Intake 0.026-0.067 mm (0.0010 - 0.0026 in.) 0.067 mm (0.0026 in.)
BACK
2-3
Protected by AR
E....... ---- BI k
------
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit
Block Warpage of deck 0.07 mm (0.003 in.) max. 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
Bore diameter 89.000-89.015 mm 89.065mm
(3.5039-3.5045 in.) (3.5065 in.)
Bore taper -- 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Reboring limit -- 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
Piston Skirt 0.0. at 16.0 mm (0.63 in.) from 88.975-88.985 mm 88.965 mm
bottom of skirt (3.5029-3.5033 in.) (3.5026 in.)
Clearance in cylinder 0.015-0.040 mm 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
(0.0006-0.0016 in.)
Ring groove width Top 1.220-1.230 mm (0.0480-0.0484 in.) 1.25 mm (0.049 in.)
(J32A 1 engine)
Top 1.240-1 .250 mm (0.0488 -0.0492 in.) 1.27 mm (0.050 in.)
(J32A2 engine)
Second 1.220-1.230 mm (0.0480-0.0484 in.) 1.25 mm (0.049 in.)
Oil 2.805-2.825 mm (0.1104-0.1112 in.) 2.85 mm (0.112 in. !
Piston rings Ring-to-groove clearance Top 0.035-0.060 mm (0.0014-0.0024 in.) 0.13 mm (0.005 in .. ~
(J32A 1 engine)
Top 0.055-0.080 mm (0.0022-0.0031 in.) 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)
(J32A2 engine)
Second 0.030-0.055 mm (0.0012-0.0022 in.) 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)
Ring end gap Top 0.20-0.35 mm (0.008-0.014 in.) 0.60 mm (0.024 in.)
Second 0.40-0.55 mm (0.016-0.022 in.) 0.70 mm (0.028 in.)
Oil 0.20-0.70 mm (0.008-0.028 in.) 0.80 mm (0.031 in.)
Piston pin 0.0. 21 .962-21.965 mm 21.954 mm
(0.8646-0.8648 in.) (0.8643 in.)
Pin-to-piston clearance -0.0050- + 0.0010 mm 0.004 mm (0.0002 in.)
(-0.00020- +0.00004 in.)
Connecting rod Pin-to-rod clearance 0.005-0.014 mm 0.019 mm (0.0007 in.)
(0.0002-0.0006 in.)
Small-end bore diameter 21.970 - 21 .976 mm --
(0.8650-0.8652 in.)
Large-end bore diameter Nominal 58.0 mm (2.28 in.) --
End play installed on crankshaft 0.15-0.35 mm (0.006-0.014 in.) 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
Crankshaft Main journal diameter 71 .976-72.000 mm --
(2.8337-2.8346 in.)
Rod journal diameter 54.976-55.000 mm --
(2.1644 - 2.1654 in.)
Rod/main journal taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max. 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
Rod/main journal out-of-round 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max. 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
End play 0.10-0.35 mm (0.004-0.014 in.) 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
Runout 0.020 mm (0.0008 in.) max. 0.03 mm (0.0012 in.)
Crankshaft Main bearing-to-journal oil 0.020-0.044 mm (0.0008-0.0017 in.) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
bearings clearance
Rod bearing 0.020 - 0.044 mm (0.0008-0.0017 in.) 0.050 mm (0.002 in.)
clearance
2-4 BACK
Protected by AR
" t"Ion
Engme Lub rica
Engine oil Capacity 5.04 (5.3 US qt) for engine overhaul
4.44 (4.6 US qt) for oil change, including filter
4.0 ~ (4.2 US qt) for oil change, without filter
Oil pump Inner-to-outer rotor clearance 0.04 - 0.16 mm (0.002 - 0.006 in.) 0.20 mm (O.OOSin.)
Pump housing-to-outer rotor clearance 0.14-0.19 mm (0.006 - 0.007 in.) 0.20 mm (O.OOS in.)
Pump housing-to-outer rotor axial 0.02 -0.07 mm (0.001 - 0.003 in.) 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
clearance
Oil pressure with oil temperature at at idle 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm', 10 psi)
176°F (SO°C) at 3,000 rpm 490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm', 71 psi)
coomg
r
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New I Service Umit
Radiator Coolant capacity (includes engine, Engine overhaul 7.5 ~ (7.9 US qt)
heater, hoses and reservoir) Coolant change 5.6 ~ (5.9 US qt)
Reservoir Coolant capacity '99-01 models 0.6 ~ (0.6 US qt)
'02-03 models O.S ~ (O.S US qt)
Radiator cap Opening pressure 93-123 kPa (0.95-1.25 kgf/cm' , 14-1S psi)
Thermostat Opening temperature Begins to open: 163 - 171°F (73-77°C)
'99 model
Begins to open: 169-176°F (76-S0°C)
'00-03 models
Fully open 194°F (90°C)
Valve lift at fully open 10.0 mm (0.39 in.) min.
Radiator fan Thermoswitch "ON" temperature 196-203°F (91-95°C)
switch A Thermoswitch "OFF" temperature Subtract 5-15°F (3-S0C) from actual "ON" temperature
Radiator fan Fan timer "ON" temperature 212-226°F (100-10S0C)
switch B Fan timer " OFF" temperature Subtract 5- 23°F (3-13°C) from actual "ON" temperature
Radiator fan Thermoswitch " ON" temperature 205 - 216°F (96-102°C)
switch C Thermoswitch "OFF" temperature Subtract 5- 23°F (3-13°C) from actual "ON" temperature
(J32A2 engine)
Fuel and Emissions

Fuel Pressure Pressure with regulator '99-'00 models: 2S0-330 kPa (2.9-3.4 kgf/cm', 41- 4S psi)
regulator vacuum hose disconnected through engine
number 2057690
'00 model 330 - 3S0 kPa (3.4-3.9 kgf/cm', 4S-55 psi)
(engine number
2057691 and
later), and
'01-'03 models:
Fuel tank Capacity 65 ~ (17.1 US gal)
Engine idle Idle speed with headlights In lHJ or [f] 6S0 ± 50 rpm
and radiator fan off
Idle CO% 0.1 max.
BACK
2-5
Protected by AR
4 -.----_
dA
Item
.... _.-_ .....
.. ---_ ... _--- T
Measurement
_--_ .. _.. dAfT
- Diff,
Qualification
- -
. I
- ----
Standard or New Service Umit
ATF (Automatic Capacity Use Honda F(,r fluid change: 2.7 Q (2.9 US qt)
Transmission ATF-Zl (ATF) For overhaul: 7.1 4 (7.5 US qt)
Fluid)
ATF pressure Line pressure At 1,500 rpm in BOO-B60 kPa 1760 kPa
[llJor~ (B.2-B.B kgf/cm', 120- 130 psi) ,. (7.7 kgf/cm', 110 psi)
position
4th clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in 790-B70 kPa ' 750 kPa
~ position (B.l -B.9 kgf/cm', 120- 130 psi) (7.6 kgf/cm', 110 psi)
3rd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in 790-B70kPa 750 kPa
~ position (B.l -B.9 kgf/cm', 120- 130 psi) (7.6 kgf/cm', 110 psi)
2nd clutch pressure At 1,500 rpm in 790-B70 kPa 750 kPa
00 position (B.l -B.9 kgf/cm' , 120- 130 psi) (7.6 kgf/cm', 110 psi)
1st clutch pressure At 1,500 rpm in 790-B70 kPa 750 kPa
I1l position (B.l -B.9 kgf/cm' , 120- 130 psi) (7.6 kgf/cm', 110 psi)
Torque converter Stall speed Check with 2,250 - 2,550 rpm
vehicle on level
ground
Clutches Clutch end plate-to-top disc 1st 1.2-1.4mm
clearance (0.047 - 0.055 in.)
2nd 0.B5 - 1.05 mm
(0.033-0.041 in.)
3rd 0.55-0.75 mm
(0.022-0.030 in.)
4th 0.55-0.75 mm
(0.022-0.030 in.)
Clutch return spring free length 1st 45.7 mm (1 .BO in.) 43.7 mm 11.72 In .)
2nd 63.0 mm (2.48 in.) 61.0 mm (2.40 in.)
3rd,4th 33.5 mm (1.32 in.) 31.5 mm (1.24 in.)
Clutch disc thickness 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) --
Clutch plate thickness 1st 2.0 mm (0.079 in.) When discolored
2nd 2.0 mm (0.079 in.) When discolored
3rd 2.3 mm (0.091 in.) When discolored
4th 2.0 mm (0.079 in.) When discolored
1st and 2nd clutch end plate thickness Mark 1 3.10 mm (0.122 in.) When discolored
Mark 2 3.20 mm (0.126 in.) When discolored
Mark6 2.60 mm (0.102 in.) When discolored
MarkB 2.BO mm (0.110 in.) When discolored
Mark 9 2.90 mm (0.114 in.) When discolurl!d
.- - -
MarkO 3.00 mm (0.1 lB in.) When discolored
3rd and 4th clutch end plate thickness Mark 1 2.10 mm (0.OB3 in.) When discolored
Mark2 2.20 mm (0.OB7 in.) When discolored
Mark 5 2.50 mm (0.09B in.) When discolored
MarkB 2.BO mm (0.110 in.) When discolored
L ____ Mark 9 2.90 mm (0.114 in.) When discolored
BACK
2-6
Protected by AR
Valve body Stator shaft needle bearing contact 1.0. Torque converter 27.000-27.021 mm When worn or
side (1.0630- 1.1638 in.) damaged
A Tf pump side 29.000-29.021 mm When worn or
(1.1417- 1.1426 in.) damaged
ATF pump gear thrust clearance 0.03-0.05 mm (0.001 -0.002 in.) 0.07 mm (0.003 in.)
ATf pump gear-to-body clearance Drive gear 0.210-0.265 mm (0.0083-0.0104 in.) --
Driven gear 0.070-0.125 mm (0.0028-0.0049 in.) --
ATF pump driven gear 1.0. 14.016- 14.034 mm When worn or
(0.5518-0.5525 in.) damaged
ATf pump driven gear shaft 0 .0 . 13.980- 13.990 mm When worn or
(0.5504-0.5508 in.) damaged
Reverse shift Fork finger thickness 5.60-6.00 mm 5.40 mm (0.213 in.)
fork (0.220-0.236 in.)
Park gear and When worn or
pawl damaged
Servo body Shift fork shaft bore 1.0. 14.000- 14.010 mm --
(0.5512-0.5516 in.)
Shift fork shaft valve bore 1.0. 37.000-37.039 mm 37.045 mm
(1.4567-1.4582 in.) (1.4585 in.)
Regulator valve Sealing ring contact 1.0. 32.000-32.025 mm 32.050mm
body (1.2598- 1.2608 in.) (1.2618 in.)
Accumulator Sealing ring contact 1.0. 35.000-35.025 mm 35.05 mm
body (1 .3780-1.3789 in.) (1.3799 in.)
Stator shaft Sealing ring contact 1.0. 29.000-29.013 mm 29.050 mm
(1.1417-1 .1422 in.) (1 .1437 in.)
(cont'd)
BACK
2-7
Protected by AR
4 -r -- - --- Itiel
dA
Item
-- - - - - - - --
Measurement
-- -- . oiff,
--d AIT
Qualification
- tial- (.
---- -
Standard or New
.
--t'd)
Service umit
Mainshaft Diameter of needle bearing contact at stato r sh aft 22.984-23.000 mm When worn or
area (0.9049-0.9055 in.) damaged
at 3rd gear 52.975-52.991 mm When worn or
(2.0856- 2.0863 in.) damaged
at 4th gear collar 33.975-33.991 mm When worn or
(1.3376- 1.3382 in.) damaged
1.0. of 3rd gear 59.000-59.019 mm When worn or
(2.3228-2.3236 in.) damaged
1.0. of 4th gear 40.000-40.016 mm When worn or
(1.5748- 1.5754 in.) damaged
End play of 3rd gear 0.03-0.31 mm --
(0.001 -0.012 in.)
End play of 4th gear 0.10-0.22 mm --
(0.004-0.009 in.)
41 x 73 mm thrust shim thickness No. 1 7.85 mm (0.309 in.) When worn or
damaged
No.2 7.90 mm (0.311 in.) When worn or
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
No. 6 8.10 mm (0.319 in.) When worn or
damaged
Thrust washer thickness 27 x47 x5 mm 5.00 mm (0.197 in.) When worn or
damaged
Length of 4th gear collar 58.5-58.6 mm --
(2.303-2.307 in.)
4th gear collar flange thickness 4.45-4.60 mm When worn or
(0.175-0.181 in.) damaged
Sealing ring thickness 32 mm sealing 1.85- 1.95 mm 1.800 mm (0.071 in.)
ring (0.073-0.077 in.)
29 mm sealing 1.85- 1.95 mm 1.800 mm (0.071 in.)
ring (0.073-0.077 in.)
Width of sealing ring groove 2.025 - 2.060 mm (0.080 - 0.081 in.) 2.080 mm (0.082 in.)
Clutch feed pipe 0.0. 3rd clutch 5.97 - 5.98 mm (0.2350 - 0.2354 in.) 5.95 mm (0.2343 in.)
4th clutch 11.47 - 11.48mm 11 .45 mm (0.4508 in.)
(0.4516 - 0.4520 in.)
Clutch feed pipe bushing 1.0. 3rd clutch 6.Q18 - 6.030 mm 6.045 mm (0.2380 in.)
(0.2369 - 0.2374 in.)
4th clutch 11.500 - 11.518mm 11 .530 mm
(0.4528 - 0.4535 in.) (0.4539 in.)
2-8 BACK
Protected by AR
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New ServIce Umit
Countershaft Diameter of needle bearing contact at 4th gear 34.975-34.991 mm When worn or
at 2nd gear 39.979-40.000 mm When worn or
(1.574-1.575 in.) damaged
at park gear 41.964-41 .980 mm When worn or
(1 .6521 - 1.6528 in.) damaged
at right end 38.505-38.515 mm When worn or
(1.5159 - 1.5163 in.) damaged
(1.6142-1 .6148 in.) damaged
1.0. of idler gear 50.000-50.016 mm When worn or
(1.9685-1 .9691 in.) damaged
1.0. of reverse gear 46.000-46.016 mm When worn or
(1 .8110 - 1.8116 in.) damaged
End play of 1st gear 0.00-0.33 mm --
\0.000-0.013 in.)
(0.002-0.011 in.)
End play of idler gear 0.015-0.045 mm --
(0.0006 - 0.0018 in.)
End play of reverse gear 0.10-0.25 mm --
(0.004-0.010 in.)
length of distance collar 53.92-53.96 mm --
(2.123-2.124 in.)
Cotter thickness 1.99-2.02 mm --
(0.078-0.080 in.)
Reverse selector hub 0 .0 . 55.87 - 55.90 mm When worn or
(2.1996-2.2008 in.) damaged
(cont'd)
BACK
2-9
Protected by AR
4 - .... ---
- dA- ---_ ... _--- T-- ------- ----- --- dAfT
-
. I(
Diff,---------. - -- - -.
'd)
Item Measurement Qualification ~' . '
Standard or New Service Limit
Secondary Diameter of needle bearing contact at 1st gear 37 .97£ 37.993 mm When worn or
shaft area (1 .49::; 1.4958 in.) damaged
(1.3380- 1.3385 in.) damaged
1.0. of 1st gear 44.000-44.016 mm When worn or
(1.7323- 1.7329 in.) damaged
1.0. of 2nd gear 40.000-40.016 mm When worn or
(1 .5748- 1.5754 in.) damaged
End play of 1st gear 0.07 -0. 15 mm (0.003-0.006 in.) --
End play of 2nd gear 0.04-0.12 mm (0.002-0.005 in.) --
38 x 56.5 mm splined washer No. 1 6.85 mm (0.270 in.) When worn or
thickness damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged J
37 x 55 mm thrust shim thickness No.1 4.90 mm (0.193 in.) When worn or
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
Nc . 5 5.10 mm (0.201 in.) When worn or
damaged
damaged
damaged
Cotter thickness 1.99-2.02 mm (0.078-0.080 in.) --
Sealing ring thickness 1.890- 1.950 mm (0.074-0.077 in.) 1.800 mm (0.071 in.)
Width of sealing ring groove 2.025-2.060 mm (0.080-0.081 in.) 2.080 mm (0.082 in.)
Clutch feed pipe 0.0. 7.97-7.98 mm (0.3138-0.3142 in .) 7.95 mm (0.3130 in.)
Clutch feed pipe bushing 1.0. 8.000-8.015 mm (0.3150-0.3156 in.) 8.030 mm (0.3161 in.)
Reverse Diameter of needle bearing contact at reverse idler gear 13.990-14.000 mm When worn or
idler gear area shaft (0.5508-0.5512 in.) damaged
End play 0.03 - 0.36 mm (0.001 - 0.Q14 in.) --
1.0. 18.007 - 18.020 mm When worn or
(0.7089-0.7094 in.) damaged
Thrust washer thickness Transmission 0.97 -1.03 mm (0.038 - 0.04 1 in.) --
housing side
Reverse idler gear shaft 0.97 - 1.03 mm (0.038 - 0.041 in.) --
holder side
1.0 . of reverse idler gear shaft holder 14.006 - 14.024 mm When worn or
(0.5514-0.5521 in.) damaged
1.0. of transmission housing of 14.006- 14.024 mm --
reverse idler gear shaft contact area (0.5514-0.5521 in,)
BACK
2-10
Protected by AR
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New
Wire Diameter 0.0. Free Length No. of Coils
Main valve body Modulator valve spring 1.6mm 10.4mm 33.5mm 9.8
springs (see (0.063 in.) (0.409 in.) (1.319 in.)
page 14-171). Shift valve C spring 0.8mm 6.6mm 49.5mm 21 .7
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.949 in.)
Shift valve 0 spring 0.7mm 6.6mm 35.7 mm 17.2
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.406 in.)
Shift valve E spring 0.7mm 6.1 mm 17.8 mm 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in)
Relief valve spring 1.1 mm 8.6mm 30.1 mm 10.7
(0.043 in.) (0.339 in.) (1.185 in.)
Lock-up shift valve spring 0.9mm 7.6mm 63.0mm 22.4
(0.035 in.) (0.299 in.) (2.480 in.)
Cooler check valve spring 0.6mm 5.8mm 14.4mm 6.8
(0.024 in.) (0.228 in.) (0.567 in.)
Torque converter check 1.2mm 8.6mm 34.4mm 11 .7
valve spring (0.047 in.) (0.339 in.) (1.354 in.)
Servo control valve spring 0.7mm 6.6mm 35.7 mm 17.2
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.406 in.)
Reverse CPC valve spring 0.7mm 6.1 mm 17.8mm 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in) (0.701 in.)
Regulator valve Stator reaction spring 5.5mm 37.4mm 30.3mm 2.12
body springs (0.217 in.) (1 .472 in.) (1.193 in.)
(see page 14- Regulator valve spring A 1.9mm 14.7 mm 77 .4mm 15.2
174). (0.075 in.) (0.579 in.) (3.047 in.)
Regulator valve spring B 1.6mm 9.2mm 44.0mm 12.5
(0.063 in.) (0.362 in.) (1 .732 in.)
Lock-up control valve spring 0.8mm 6.6mm 44.3mm 25.5
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.744 in.)
Lock-up timing valve spring 0.65mm 6.6mm 34.8mm 15.6
(0.026 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.370 in.)
Servo body Shift valve B spring 0.8mm 7.1 mm 40.4mm 16.9
page 14-175). Shift valve A spring 0.8mm 7.1 mm 40.4mm 16.9
(0.031 in.) (0.280 in.) (1 .591 in.)
CPC valve A spring 0.7mm 6.1 mm 17.8mm 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
CPC valve B spring 0.7mm 6.1 mm 17.8mm 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
4th accumulator spring A 2.6mm 19.6mm 66.4mm 9.7
(0.102 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.614 in.)
4th accumulator spring B 2.4mm 12.8mm 51 .5 mm 11 .5
(0.094 in.) (0.504 in.) (2.028 in.)
3rd accumulator spring A 2.6mm 19.6 mm 66.4mm 9.7
(0.102 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.614 in.)
3rd accumulator spring B 2.4mm 12.8mm 51 .5 mm 11.5
(0.094 in.) (0.504 in.) (2.028 in.)
Accumulator 1st accumulator spring B 2.7mm 14.8 mm 52.5 mm 11.3
body springs (0.106 in.) (0.583 in.) (2.067 in)
(see page 14- 1st accumulator spring A 2.6mm 21.6mm 80.5mm 11.2
176). (0.102 in.) (0.850 in.) (3.169 in)
2nd accumulator spring B 2.4mm 12.6 mm 53.5mm 12.9
(0.094 in.) (0.496 in.) (2.106 in.)
2nd accumulator spring A 2.7mm 19.6 mm 66.3mm 9.9
(0.106 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.610 in.)
(cont'd)
BACK
2-11
Protected by AR
"T---_ .. _-_ .... _-----
dA-----------
4- -.,-.--- ~ -- .. - .- --- 'd).
dAfT Diff -- -----"I(
Item Measurement Qualifica~lon Standard or New Service Limit
AfT differential Pinion shaft contact area I.D. 18.010-18.028 mm --
carrier (0.7091-0.7098 in.)
Carrier-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.023-0.057 mm 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
(0.001-0.002 in.)
Driveshaft contact area I.D. 30.025-30.045 mm --
(1.182-1 .183 in.)
Carrier-to-driveshaft clearance 0.045-0.086 mm 0.12 mm (0.005 in)
(0.002-0.003 in.)
Carrier-to-intermediate shaft clearance 0.080-0.116 mm --
(0.003-0.005 in.)
Tapered roller bearing starting torque For new bearing 2.7-3.9 N·m Adjust
(preload) (28-40 kgf·cm. 24-35Ibf·in.)
For used bearing 2.5-3.6N·m Adjust
(25-37 kgf·cm. 22 - 32Ibf·in.)
AfT differential Backlash 0.175-0.275 mm --
pinion gear (0.007-0.011 in.)
I.D. 18.042-18.066 mm --
(0.7103-0.7113 in.)
Pinion gear-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.055-0.095 mm 0.12 mm (0.005 in)
(0.0022-0.0037 in.)
BACK
2-12
Protected by AR
I erent"la I
. Ut omat"Ie Transmlsslon an dAfT D"ff
5-speedA
Item Me••urement au.lffication St.nd.rd or New Service Umit
ATF (Automatic Capacity Use Honda For fluid change: 2.9 4 (3.1 US qt)
Transmission Fluid) A TF-Zl (ATF) For overhaul: 7.24 (7.6 US qt)
ATF pressure Line pressure At 2,000 rpm in 900-960 kPa 850kPa
[!i!] or [fj position (9.2-9.8 kgf/cm', 130-140 psi) (8.7 kgf/cm', 120 psi)
5th clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in 890-970 kPa 840kPa
I!iI position (9.1-9.9 kgf/cm', 130-140 psi) (8.6 kgf/cm', 120 psi)
4th clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in 890-970 kPa 840 kPa
~position (9.1-9.9 kgf/cm', 130-140 psi) (8.6 kgf/cm', 120 psi)
3rd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in 890-970 kPa 840 kPa
R!I position (9.1-9.9 kgf/cm', 130-140 psi) (8.6 kgf/cm', 120 psi)
2nd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in 890-970 kPa 840 kPa
00 position (9.1-9.9kgf/cm', 130-140 psi) (8.6 kgf/cm', 120 psi)
1st clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in 890-970 kPa 840kPa
ill position (9.1-9.9 kgf/cm', 130-140 psi) (8.6 kgf/cm', 120 psi)
1st-hold clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm in 760-830 kPa 710 kPa
(j)position (7.7 -8.5 kgf/cm', 110-120 psi) (7.2 kgf/cm', 100 psi)
Torque converter Stall speed Check with vehicle 2,250 - 2,550 rpm
on level ground
Clutches Clutch end plate-to-top disc 1st 1.1 - 1.3 mm
clearance (0.043-0.051 in.)
2nd for Premium 0.7-0.9mm
(0.028-0.035 in.)
2nd for Type-S 0.85 - 1.05 mm
(0.033-0.041 in.)
3rd 0.7-0.9mm
(0.028-0.035 in.)
4th,5th 0.55-0.75 mm
(0.022-0.030 in.)
1st-hold 0.5-0.9mm
(0.020-0.035 in.)
Clutch return spring free length 1st 68.3 mm (2.69 in.) 66.3 mm (2.61 in.)
2nd 53.4 mm (2.10 in.) 51.4 mm (2.02 in.)
3rd 52.0 mm (2.05 in.) 50.0 mm (1.97 in.)
4th 33.5 mm (1.32 in.) 31.5 mm (1 .24 in.)
5th for Premium 33.5 mm (1 .32 in.) 31.5 mm (1.24 in.)
5th for Type-S 37.4 mm (1.47 in.) 35.4 mm (1.39 in.)
Clutch disc thickness 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) --
Clutch plate thickness 1st, 2nd 1.6 mm (0.063 in.) When discolored
3rd,4th 2.3 mm (0.091 in.) When discolored
5th 2.0 mm (0.079 in.) When discolored
1st-hold 1.8 mm (0.071 in.) When discolored
(cont'd)
BACK
2-13
Protected by AR
5 - -- dAut - - - - -- tic
-- - T- - - - - - - - - --- - - - - - -- - - dAfT oiff, - - - - - tial
- .-
- -- (
- - -- t'd)
- - - ..
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Umit i
Clutches 1st clutch end plate thickness Mark 1 3.10 mm (0.122 in .) When discolored I
,
1st-hold clutch end plate thickness 5.00 mm (0.197 in.) When discolored
2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th clutch end plate Mark 1 2.10 mm (0.083 in.) When discolored
thickness Mark2 2.20 mm (0.087 in.) When discolored
Valve body Stator shaft needle bearing contact 1.0. Torque converter 27.000-27.021 mm When worn or
side (1.0630- 1.1638 in.) damaged
ATF pump side 29.000-29.021 mm When worn or
(1 .1417 - 1.1426 in.) damaged
ATF pump gear thrust clearance 0.03-0.06 mm (0.001 -0.002 in.) 0.07 mm (0.003 in.)
ATF pump gear-to-body clearance Drive gear 0.210-0.265 mm (0.0083-0.0104 in.) --
Driven gear 0.070-0.125 mm (0.0028-0.0049 in.) --
ATF pump driven gear 1.0. 14.016- 14.034 mm When worn or
(0.5518-0.5525 in.) damaged
ATF pump driven gear shaft 0.0. 13.980-13.990 mm When worn or
(0.5504-0.5508 in.) damaged
Reverse shift Fork finger thickness 5.60-6.00 mm 5.40 mm (0.213 in.)
fork 10.220-0.236 in.)
Park gear and When worn or
pawl damaged
Servo body Shift fork shaft bore 1.0. 14.000-14.010 mm --
(0.5512-0.5516 in.)
Shift fork shaft valve bore 1.0. 37.000-37.039 mm 37.045mm
(1 .4567-1.4582 in.) (1 .4585 in.)
Regulator valve Sealing ring contact 1.0. 32.000-32.025 mm 32.050mm
body (1.2598-1.2608 in.) (1 .2618 in.)
Accumulator Sealing ring contact 1.0. 35.000 - 35.025 mm 35.05mm
body (1 .3780 - 1.3789 in.) (1.3799 in.)
Stator shaft Sealing ring contact 1.0. 29.000-29.021 mm 29.050mm
------- '-----~ - ~--- - ------ -
(1 .1417-1.1423 in.) -~
- - ~
_ (1 . 143~ in.)
2-14 BACK
Protected by AR
Item Measurement aualtftcdion Standard or New
II
Service Umlt
Mainshaft Diameter of needle bearing contact at stator shaft 22.984-23.000 mm Whenwomor
at 4th gear 52.975 - 52.991 mm When worn or
(2.0856- 2.0863 in.) damaged
at 5th gear collar 33.975-33.991 mm When worn or
(1 .3376 - 1.3382 in.) damaged
(2.3228 - 2.3236 in.) damaged
(1 .5748-1.5754 in.) damaged
(0.001-0.012 in.)
(0.004-0.009 in.)
41 x 73 mm thrust shim thickness No.1 7.85 mm (0.309 in.) When worn or
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
Thrust washer thickness 27x47x5mm 5.00 mm (0.197 in.) When worn or
damaged
Length of 5th gear collar 58.5-58.6 mm --
(2.303-2.307 in.)
5th gear collar flange thickness 4.45-4.60 mm When worn or
(0.175-0.181 in.) damaged
Sealing ring thickness 32mmsealing 1.87-1.97 mm 1.800 mm (0.071 in.)
ring (0.074-0.078 in.)
29 mm sealing 1.87-1 .97 mm 1.800 mm (0.071 in.)
ring (0.074-0.078 in.)
Width of sealing ring groove 2.025 - 2.060 mm (0.080 - 0.081 in.) 2.080 mm (0.082 in.)
Clutch feed pipe 0.0. 4th clutch 5.97 - 5.98 mm (0.2350 - 0.2354 in.) 5.95 mm (0.2343 in.)
5th clutch 11.47 - 11.48mm 11.45 mm (0.4508 in.)
(0.4516 - 0.4520 in.)
Clutch feed pipe bushing 1.0. 4th clutch 6.018 - 6.030 mm 6.045 mm (0.2380 in.)
(0.2369 - 0.2374 in.)
5th clutch 11.500 - 11 .518mm 11.530mm
(0.4528 - 0.4535 in.) (0.4539 in.)
(conrd)
BACK
2-15
Protected by AR
5 - - - - -- --"Y- - - - ----
dA --- -- --dAfT
- Diff, - --_ "... I- (.- ---'d).
Countershaft Diameter of needle bearin-;; contact at 5th gear 34.975-34.991 mm When worn or
area (1.3"'70-1.3776 in.) damaged
at 2nd gear 39.979 - 40.000 mm When worn or
(1 .574-1.575 in.) damaged
at park gear 41.964-41.980 mm When worn or
(1.6521-1.6528 in.) damaged
at right end 38.505 - 38.515 mm When worn or
(1.5159-1.5163 in.) damaged
1.0. of 5th gear 41 .000-41 .016 mm When worn or
(1 .6142-1.6148 in.) damaged
1.0. of 3rd gear 50.000-50.016 mm When worn or
(1.9685-1.9691 in.) damaged
1.0. of reverse gear 46.000-46.016 mm When worn or
(1 .8110-1.8116 in.) damaged
End play of 1st gear 0.00-0.33 mm --
(0.000 - 0.013 in.)
(0.002-0.011 in.) i
End play of 3rd gear 0.015-0.045 mm --
I
(0.0006-0.0018 in.)
End play of reverse gear 0.10-0.25 mm --
(0.004-0.010 in.)
31 x 63.5 x 8.5 mm splined washer A 3.503-3.515 mm When worn or
(0.1379-0.1384 in.) damaged I
B 3.490-3.502 mm When worn or I
(0.1374-0.1379 in.) damaged

C 3.477-3.489 mm When worn or
(0.1369-0.1374 in.) damaged
0 3.464-3.476 mm When worn or
(0.1364-0.1369 in.) damaged
Length of distance collar 53.92 - 53.96 mm --
'00-01 models (2.123- 2.124 in.)
Length of distance collar 35 x47 x 45.6 45.56- 45.60 mm --
'02-03 models (1.794-1.795 in.)
35 x 47 x7.8 5.92-5.96 mm --
(0.233-0.235 in.)
Cotter thickness 1.99-2.02 mm --
(0.078-0.080 in.)
Reverse selector hub 0.0. 55.87-55.90 mm When worn or
(2.1996-2.2008 in.) damaged
Clutch feed pipe 0.0. 8.97-8.98 mm 8.95 mm (0.352 in.)
(0.353 - 0.354 in.)
Clutch feed pipe bushing 1.0. 9.000-9.015 mm 9.030 mm (0.356 in.)
(0.354-0.355 in.)
BACK
2-16
Protected by AR
II
Service Umit
Secondary Diameter of needle bearing contact at 1st gear 37.978-37.993 mm When worn or
shaft area (1.4951-1 .4958 in.) damaged
(1 .3380- 1.3385 in.) damaged
1.0. of 1st gear 44.000-44.016 mm When worn or
(1 .7323-1 .7329 in.) damaged
1.0. of 2nd gear 40.000-40.016 mm When worn or
(1 .5748-1.5754 in.) damaged
End play of 1st gear 0.07-0.15 mm (0.003-0.006 in.) --
End play of 2nd gear 0.04-0.12 mm (0.002-0.005 in.) --
38 x 56.5 mm splined washer No.1 6.85 mm (0.270 in.) When worn or
thickness damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
37 x 55 mm thrust shim thickness No. 1 4.90 mm (0.193 in.) When worn or
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
Cotter thickness 1.99-2.02 mm (0.078-0.080 in.) --
Sealing ring thickness 1.890-1.950 mm (0.074-0.077 in.) 1.800 mm (0.071 in.)
Width of sealing ring groove 2.025-2.060 mm (0.080-0.081 in.) 2.080 mm (0.082 in.)
Clutch feed pipe 0.0. 7.97-7.98 mm (0.3138-0.3142 in.) 7.95 mm (0.3130 in.)
Clutch feed pipe bushing 1.0. 8.000-8.015 mm (0.3150-0.3156 in.) 8.030 mm (0.3161 in.)
Reverse Diameter of needle bearing contact at reverse idler gear 13.990-14.000 mm When worn or
idler gear area shaft (0.5508-0.5512 in.) damaged
End play 0.06-0.38 mm (0.002-0.015 in.) --
1.0. 18.007-18.020 mm When worn or
(0.7089-0.7094 in.) damaged
Thrust washer thickness Transmission 0.96-1.04 mm (0.038-0.041 in.) --
housing side
Reverse idler gear shaft 0.97 - 1.05 mm (0.038 - 0.041 in.) --
holder side
1.0. of reverse idler gear shaft holder 14.006-14.024 mm When worn or
(0.5514-0.5521 in.) damaged
1.0. of transmission housing of 14.006 -14.024 mm --
reverse idler gear shaft contact area (0.5514-0.5521 in.)
(cont'd)
BACK
2-17
Protected by AR
5 - -- dA . T
- --- dAfT
- ------------
. I(
- Diffl-- ------- .- - ---'d)
- - ----------------.
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or N_
Main valve body Shift valve D spring 0.7mm 6.6mm 33.7 mm 11.6
page 14-411). Shift valve C spring 0.8mm 6.6mm 49.1 mm 21.7
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.933 in.)
Kick-down valve spring 0.8mm 6.6mm 49.1 mm 21.7
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.933 in)
Modulator valve spring 1.6mm 10.4 mm 33.5mm 9.8
(0.063 in.) (0.409 in.) (1 .319 in)
Relief valve spring 1.2mm 11 .1 mm 39.0mm 9.9
(0.047 in.) (0.437 in.) (1.535 in.)
Lock-up shift valve spring 0.9mm 7.6mm 63.0mm 22.4
(0.035 in.) (0.299 in.) (2.480 in.)
Cooler check valve spring 0.6mm 5.8mm 14.5 mm 6.8
(0.024 in.) (0.228 in.) (0.571 in.)
Torque converter check 1.2mm 8.6mm 34.4mm 11.7
valve spring (0.047 in.) (0.339 in.) (1.354 in.)
Servo control valve spring 0.9mm 6.4mm 32.5mm 17.5
(0.035 in.) (0.252 in.) (1.280 in.)
Reverse CPC valve spring 0.7mm 6.1 mm 17.Bmm 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in) (0.701 in.)
Regulator valve Stator reaction spring 5.5mm 37.4mm 30.3mm 2.1
body springs (0.217 in.) (1.472 in.) (1.193 in.)
(see page 14- Regulator valve spring A 1.9mm 14.7 mm BO.6mm 16.1
414). (0.075 in.) (0.579 in.) (3.173 in.)
Regulator valve spring B 1.6mm 9.2mm 44.0mm 12.5
(0.063 in.) (0.362 in.) (1.732 in.)
Lock-up control valve spring 0.7mm 6.6mm 42.9mm 14.2
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.689 in.)
Lock-up timing valve spring 0.65mm 6.6mm 34.8mm 15.6
(0.026 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.370 in.)
Servo body CPCvalve B 0.7mm 6.1 mm 17.B mm 7.9
page 14-415). CPC valve A 0.7mm 6.1 mm 17.Bmm 7.9
(0.028 in.1 (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
Shift valve B 0.8mm 6.6mm 49.1 mm 21.7
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.933 in.)
Shift valve A 0.8mm 6.6mm 49.1 mm 21.7
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.933 in.)
Top accumulator Shift valve E 0.8mm 7.1 mm 49.0mm 17.2
body springs (0.031 in.) (0.280 in.) (1.929 in.)
(see page 14- CPCvalve C 0.7mm 6.1 mm 17.Bmm 7.9
416). (0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
5th accumulator spring A 2.2mm 16.4mm 75.7mm 14.2
(0.087 in.) (0.646 in.) (2.980 in.)
5th accumulator spring B 2.0mm 10.0 mm 45.5mm 11 .6
(0.079 in.) (0.394 in.) (1.791 in.)
4th/1st-hold accumulator spring 3.4mm 19.6mm 57.4mm 8.4
(0.134 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.260 in.)
2-18
BACK
Protected by AR
Accumulator 1st accumulator spring B 2.3mm 12.6 mm 42.0mm 9.9
body springs (0.091 in.) (0.496 in.) (1 .654 in.)
(see page 14- 1st accumulator spring A 2.4mm 19.5mm 67.7 mm 10.2
417). (0.094 in.) (0.768 in.) (2.665 in.)
2nd accumulator spring B 2.6mm 13.0 mm 44.0mm 9.0
(0.102 in.) (0.512 in.) (1 .732 in.)
2nd accumulator spring A 2.5mm 19.6mm 57.7 mm 9.5
(0.098 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.272 in)
3rd accumulator 3rd accumulator spring 3.1 mm 19.6mm 39.4mm 5.5
spring (see page (0.122 in.) (0.772 in.) (1.551 in.)
14-418).
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit

AfT differential Pinion shaft contact area 1.0. 18.000-18.025 mm --
carrier (0.7087-0.7096 in.)
Carrier-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.013-0.054 mm 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
(0.001-0.002 in.)
Oriveshaft contact area 1.0. 30.025-30.055 mm --
(1.182-1 .183 in.)
Carrier-to-driveshaft clearance 0.045-0.096 mm 0.12 mm (0.005 in)
(0.002-0.004 in.)
Carrier-to-intermediate shaft clearance 0.080-0.126 mm --
(0.003-0.005 in.)
Tapered roller bearing starting torque For new bearing 2.7-3.9 N·m Adjust
(preload) (28-40 kgf·cm, 24-35Ibf·in.)
For used bearing 2.5-3.6N·m Adjust
(25-37 kgf·cm, 22-32Ibf·in.)
AfT differential Backlash 0.175-0.275 mm --
pinion gear (0.007 - 0.011 in.)
1.0. 18.042-18.066 mm --
(0.7103-0.7113 in.)
Pinion gear-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.055-0.095 mm 0.12 mm (0.005 in)
(0.0022-0.0037 in.)
BACK
2-19
Protected by AR
s ---- -- ..
~ ~

Steering wheel Rotational play measured at outside With engine 0-10 mm (0-0.39 in.)
edge running
Starting load measured at outside With engine 25 N (2.5 kgf, 5.5Ibs)
edge running
Gearbox Angle of rack guide screw loosened 20°
from locked position
Pump Output pressure with shut-off valve 7,600-8,300 kPa (78-85 kgf/cm', 1,110-1,210 psi)
closed
Power steering Capacity Use Honda For fluid change: 0.4 A(0.42 US qt)
fluid power steering For system overhaul: 1.1 A(1.16 US qt)
fluid
Power steering Deflection with 98 N (10 kgf, 22 Ibs) Used belt: 13.0-16.5 mm (0.51-0.65 in.)
pump belt applied mid-way between pulleys New belt: 8.5-11.0 mm (0.33-0.43 in.)
NOTE: Adjust a Tension (measured with belt tension Used belt: 390-540 N (40-55 kgf, 88-121 Ibs)
new belt to the gauge) New belt: 740-880 N (75-90 kgf, 165-198Ibs)
new belt spec,
run the engine
for 5 minutes,
then readjust it
to the used belt
spec.
s --.----------
-
Wheel alignment Camber Front OOOO'±l°
Rear -0030'±30'
Caster Front 2°48'±1°
Total Toe Front 0±2 mm (O± 1/16 in.)
Rear IN 2±2 (1/16± 1116 in.)
Front wheel turning angle inside Premium 38°32'±2°
Type-S 35°1S'±2°
Front wheel turning angle outside Premium 31°03' (Reference)
Type-S 29°13' (Reference)
Aluminum wheel Runout Axial 0-0.7 mm (0-0.03 in.) [2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
Radial 0-0.7 mm (0-0.03 in.) 1,.5 mm (O.OS in.)
Wheel bearings End play Front 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.)
Rear 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.)
BACK
2-20
Protected by AR
Brakes
Item Measurement QualHication Standard or New Service Umit
Parking brake Distance travelled when 2-4 clicks
pedal pulled with 294 N (30 kgf, 66 Ibs) of
force
Brake pedal Pedal height (carpet removed) 1S9 mm (S 5/8 in.)
Free play 1 -5 mm (1/1S-3/1S in.)
Master cylinder Piston-to-pushrod clearance 0-0.4 mm (0-0.02 in.)
Brake disc Thickness Front 27.9-28.1 mm 2S.0 mm (1.02 in.)
(1.10-1.11 in.)
Rear 8.9-9.1 mm 7.5 mm (0.30 in.)
(0.350-0.358 in.)
Runout Front 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
Rear 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
Parallelism Front and rear 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.)
Brake pads Thickness Front 10.5-11.5 mm 1.S mm (O.OS in.)
(0.41 - 0.45 in.)
Rear 8.5-9.5mm 1.S mm (O.OS in.)
(0.33-0.37 in.)
A"Ir Con d"t"

Ilomng
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New I Service Limit
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Capacity of system 600-S50 g (21 -23 oz)
Refrigerant oil Type DENSO: NO-OIL 8 (PIN 38897-PR7-A01AH or 38899-PR7-A01)
Capacity of components Condenser 25 m~ (5/S fl oz)
Evaporator 40 m~ (1 1/3 fI oz)
Each line and 10 ma (1/3 fl oz)
hose
Receiver 10 mil (1/3 fl oz)
Compressor 1S0-175 ma (S 1/3-S fl OZ)
Compressor Field coil resistance at 68°F (20°C) 3.4-3.8 Q
Pulley-to-pressure plate O.S±O. 1S mm (0.02±0.00S in.)
clearance
BACK 2-21
Protected by AR
Item Measurement QualifICation Specification

DIMENSIONS Overall length 4,900 mm (192.9 in.)
Overall w idth 1,785 mm (70.3 in.)
Overall height 1,420 mm (55.9 in.)
Wheelbase 2,745mm(108.1 in.)
Track Front 1,555 mm (61 .2 in.)
Rear 1,535 mm (60.4 in.)
Ground clearance 159 mm (6.3 in.)
Seating capacity Five
WEIGHT (U.S.A.) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Premium 4,4001bs
(GVWR) Type-S 4,4751bs
WEIGHT Gross Veh icle Weight Rating Premium 1,995 kg
(CANADA) (GVWR) Type-S 2,030 kg
ENGINE Type Water-cooled, 4-stroke SOHC VTEC V6 gasoline
engine
Cylinder arrangement 60· V6-cylinder, transverse
Bore and stroke 89.0 x 86.0 mm (3.50 x 3.39 in.)
Displacement 3,210 em' (mil) (196 cu in.)
Compression ratio J32A 1 engine 9.8
J32A2 engine 10.5
Valve train Belt driven, SOHC VTEC 4 valves per cylinder
Lubrication system Forced, wet sump, with trochoid pump
Oil pump displacement at 6,000 engine rpm 58.411 (61.7 US qt)/minute
Water pump displacement at 6,000 engine rpm 17211 (182 US qt)/minute
Fuel required Premium UNLEADED gasoline with 91 Pump Octane
Number or higher _.,
STARTE r- Type Gear reduction
"1
Normal output 1.6kW
Nominal voltage 12 V
Hour rating 30 seconds
Direction of rotation Clockwise as viewed from gear end
4-SPEED Type Electronically controlled automatic, 4-speed forward , 1
AUTOMATIC .reverse
TRANSMISSION Primary reduction Direct 1:1
Gear ratio 1st 2.534
2nd 1.502
3rd 0.947
4th 0.608
Reverse 1.846
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
-
_ Ge!lr~tio_ _. _ _ _ _ 4.200 __ ___ ----- . --~
2-22 BACK
Protected by AR
Item Measurement Qualification Specification
II
5-SPEED Type Electronically controlled automatic, 5-speed forward , 1
AUTOMATIC reverse
TRANSMISSION Primary reduction Direct 1:1
Gear ratio (Premium) 1st 2.563
2nd 1.552
3rd 1.021
4th 0.653
5th 0.470
Reverse 1.846
Gear ratio (Type-S) 1st 2.563
2nd 1.552
3rd 1,021
4th 0.727
5th 0.520
Reverse 1.846
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
Gear ratio 4.428
STEERING Type Power-assisted rack and pinion
Overall ratio Premium 16.09
Type-S 16.08
Turns,lock-to-lock Premium 3.11
Type-S 2.88
Steering wheel diameter 380 mm (15.0 in.)
SUSPENSION Type Front Independent double wishbone, coil spring with stabilizer
Rear Five-link double wishbone
Shock absorber Front and rear Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen gas-filled
WHEEL Camber Front 0°
ALIGNMENT Rear -0°30'
Caster Front 2°48'
Total toe Front Omm(Oin.)
Rear In 2 mm (1/16 in.)
BRAKES Type of service brake Front Power-assisted self-adjusting ventilated disc
Rear Power-assisted self-adjusting solid disc
Type of parking brake Mechanical actuating, rear wheels
Pad friction surface area Front 58 em' x 2 (9.0 sq in x 2)
Rear 28 em' x 2 (4.3 sq in x 2)
TIRES Size of front and rear tires Premium P205/60 R16 91V M+S
Type-S P215/50 R17 93V M+S
Size of spare tires T135/80R16
BACK
2-23
Protected by AR
(cont'd)
Item Measurement Qualification Specification
AIR Cooling capacity 4,150 Kcal/h (16,470 BTU/h)
CONDITIONING Compressor Type/Manufacturer Swash plate/DEN SO
Number of cylinders 10
Capacity 188 ma/rev. (11.47 cu in/rev.)
Maximum speed 8,400 rpm
Lubricant capacity 160 ma (51/3 fl oz)
Lubricant type NO-OIL 8
Condenser Type Corrugated fin
Evaporator Type Corrugated fin
Blower Type Sirocco fan
Motor input 240W/12V
Speed control Infinite variable
Maximum capacity 518 m'/h (18,300 cu ftlh)
Temperature control Air-mix type
Compressor clutch Type Dry, single plate, Poly-V belt drive
Electrical power 40 W maximum at 12 V
consumption at 68°F (20°C)
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Quantity 600-650 g (21-23 fI oz)
ELECTRICAL Battery 12 V-65 AH/20 hours
RATINGS Starter 12V-1.6kW
Alternator 12V-10SA
Fuses Under-hood fuse/relay box 120A, 60A, 40A, 30A, 20A, 1SA
Under-hood ABS fuse/relay 40A, 20A, 7.5A
box
Under-dash driver's 30A, 1SA, 10A, 7.SA
fuse/relay box
Under-dash passenger's 30A, 20A, 10A, 7.5A
fuse/relay box
Light bulbs Headlight high beam 12 V-60 W (HB3)
Headlight low beam 12 V-35 W (HID)
Fog lights 12 V - 51 W (HB4)
Front turn signal/Front 12 V-24 W/2.2 CP (candle power) (two filaments)
parking lights
Front side marker light 12 V-5 W
Rear turn signal lights 12V- 21 W
Brake/Taillights 12V-21/5W
High mount brake light 12V-21 W
Back-up lights 12V-18W
License plate light 12V-3CP
Ceiling light 12V-7W
Trunk light 12V-5W
Door courtesy lights 12V-2CP
Vanity mirror lights 12V-1.1 W
Glove box light 12 V-2 CP
Spotlights 12 V-4 CP
Gauge lights 12V-3.0W,12 V-1.4 W
Indicator lights 12V-LED,12 V- 1.4 W, 14 V-0.S6W
Panel and pilot lights 14 V-0.56W, 0.84 W, 0.95 W
Climate control unit 14 V- 1.12 W, 0.56 W
Coin box light 12V-1.4W
Center console light 12V - 2CP
BACK
2-24
Protected by AR
Body Specifications II
Unit: mm lin. 1
1,420 (55.9)
~
... c;;
c:i
.-c:i
!! ~ !!
It! It! It!
It! 00 C')
... ...
~ "':. ...
~
BACK 2-25
Protected by AR
Maintenance
Lubricants and Fluids ....................................... 3-2
Maintenance Schedule for Normal

Conditions (1999-2000 Models)
Listed by Distance/Time ............................................... 3-4
Maintenance Schedule for Severe

Listed by Distance/Time ....................................... ........ 3-6

and Severe Conditions (1999-2000 Models)
Listed by Maintenance Item ........................................ 3-8

Conditions (2001 -2003 Models)
Listed by Distance/Time ............................................... 3-10
Maintenance Schedule for Severe

Listed by Distance/Time ..... ............ .............................. 3-12

and Severe Conditions (2001-2003 Models)
Listed by Maintenance Item ........................................ 3-14
Protected by AR
Lubricants and Fluids
For the details of lubrication points and type of lubricants to be applied, refer to the illustrated index and various work
procedures (such as Assembly/Reassembly, Replacement, Overhaul, Installation, etc.) contained in each section.
I NO.
1 Engine
LUBRICATION POINTS LUBRICANT
Honda Motor Oil API Service Grade: Use SJ "Energy
Conserving" grade oil. The oil container may also
display the API Certification seal shown below. Make
sure it says "For Gasoline Engines." SAE Viscosity: See
chart below.
2 Transmission Honda ATF-Z1·'
3 Brake system (includes ABS line) Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid0 2
4 Power steering gearbox Steering grease (P/N 08733-B070E)
5 Throttle cable end (dashboard lower panel hole) Silicone grease I
6 Shift lever ,
7 Throttle cable end (throttle link) Super High Temp Urea Grease (PIN 08798-9002) I
8 Brake booster clevis Multi-purpose grease

9 Pedal linkage
I
10 Battery terminals
11 Fuel fill door
12 Hood hinges and hood latch
13 Trunk hinges and latch
14 Door hinges, upper and lower
15 Rear brake shoe linkage Molykote Grease 44MA
16 Caliper piston boot, caliper pins, and boots Honda Caliper Grease (PIN 08C30-B0234M)
17 Power steering_s\,stem Honda Power Steerin9.-Fluid °3
18 Air conditioning compressor Compressor oil: OENSO: NO-OIL 8 (PIN 38897-PR7-A01
AH or 38899-PR7 -AO 1)
For Refrigerant: HFC-134 a (R-134 a)
API CERTIFICATION SEAL Recommended Engine Oil

Engine oil viscosity for ambient temperature ranges
'99-01 models '02-03 models
.1
-20
I I-=::*l;,j, I
0 20 40 60 10
I:
110"F
-I 11 5W~_2·0 I I II
·20 0 20 40 60 10 100°F
I
-30
I
-20
I
-10
•
10
I
21
I
30
I
4O"c
!
-30
I
-20
I
010
I
0
I
10
I
20
I
30
I
4O·C
*1: Always use Honda ATF-Z1. Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
*2: Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of
the system.
*3: Always use Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic transmission
fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering if" cold weather.
BACK
3-2
Protected by AR
NOTE:
Lubricate all hinges, latches, and locks once a year.
In corrosive areas, more frequent lubrication is necessary.
@ (j]) @ @ @ ®®
CD<V@(i)@@
@
BACK
3-3
MaintenancePSchedule
r o t e cfort Normal
e d bConditions
y AR
(1999-2000 Models)
Listed by Distance/Time
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. For Canada models, this two-page Maintenance Schedule outlines the
minimum required maintenance.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk ( * ) will not void customer's emissions
warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended interval to ensure long-term reliability.
7,500 mil 12,000 km/- o Do items in A.

15,000 mil 24,000 kml 1 year o Do items in A and B.
30,000 mil 48,000 km/2 years o Do items in A& and C.
37 ,500 mil 60,000 km/- o Do items in A.
45,000 mil 72,000 km/ 3 years
o Replace engine coolant (see page 10-13) Capacity: 5.6 ~ (5.9 US qt). Use Honda All Season Antifreeze/CoolantType 2.
D Replace brake fluid (see page 19-8). Use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Fill to between marks on reservoir.
o Do items in A and B.
52,500 mil 84.000 km/- o Do items in A.
60,000 mil 96,000 km/4 years D Do items in A, B, and C.
67,500 mi/108.ooo km/- o Do items in A.
75,000 mil120,000 km/ 5 years
D Replace engine coolant (see page 10-13) Capacity: 5.6 ~ (5.9 US qt). Use Honda All Season Antifreeze/CoolantType 2.
D Do items in A and B.
82,500 mi/132,000 km/- D Do items in A.
90,000 mi/1 44,000 km/6 years
D Replace transmission fluid. '99 model: 2.7 ~ (2.9 US qt), '00 model: 2.9 II (3.1 US qt). Use Honda ATF-Z1 ('99 model: (see page 14-109),
'00 model: (see page 14-350».
D Replace brake fluid (see page 19-8). Use Honda DOT 3. Fill to between marks on reservoir.
o Do items in A& and C.
97 ,500 mi/156,000 km/- D Do items in A.
105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 years
D Replace timing belt (see page 6-18) and inspect water pump (see page 10-12).
D Check idle speed. * Should be 680±50 rpm in [i!] or [eJ position (see page 11-157).
D Replace engine coolant (see page 10-13). Capacity: 5.6 ~ (5.9 US qt). Use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
o Inspect valve clearance (cold) Intake: 0.20-0.24 mm (0.008-0.009 in.) Exhaust: 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.) (see page 6·131.
D Replace spark plugs. Use NGK (PZFR5F-11) or DEN SO (PKJ16CR-L11). Gap: 1.0-1 .1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.) (see page 4-17).
112,500 mi/181,000 km/- o Do items in A.
120,000 mi/193,000 km/8 years D Do the items in A, B, and C.
BACK
3-4
Protected by AR
Do the items in parts A, B, and C as required for mileage/time interval listed.
A
D Replace engine oil (see page 8-5). -Capacity with filter change: 4.4 ~ (4.6 US qt).
D Rotate tires. Follow the pattern shown in the Owner's Manual - Check tire inflation and condition.
B
D Replace engine oil filter (see page 8-5).
D Inspect front and rear brakes (see page 19-11).
• Check pads and discs for wear (thickness), damage, and cracks.
• Check calipers for damage, leaks, and tightness of mount bolts.
D Check parking brake adjustment. Should be fully applied within 2 to 4 clicks.
D Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots (see page 17-35).
• Check rack grease and steering linkage.
• Check boots for damage and leaking grease.
• Check fluid line for damage and leaks.
D Inspect suspension components.
• Check bolts for tightness.
• Check condition of ball joint boots for deterioration and damage.
D Inspect driveshaft boots. Check boots for cracks and boot bands for tightness (see page 16-3).
D Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ASS). -Check the master cylinder, proportioning control valve, and ABS modulator for damage
and leakage (see page 19-30).
D Check all fluid levels and condition of fluids; check for leaks. If necessary, add ATF ('99 model: (see page 14-109), '00 model: (see page 14-
350», engine coolant, brake fluid, and windshield washer fluid.
D Inspect cooling system hoses and connections (see page 10-2).
• Check for damage, leaks, and deterioration.
• Check for proper fan operation.
D Inspect exhaust system. * Check catalytic converter heat shield, exhaust pipe, and muffler for damage, leaks, and tightness (see page 9-12).
D Inspect fuel lines and connections. * Check for loose connections, cracks and deterioration; retighten loose connections and replace
damaged parts (see page 11-167).
c
D Replace air cleaner element.
D Inspect and adjust drive belts, for cracks and damage.
• Alternator, compressor belt: Inspect auto tensioner indicator, Needs no adustment (see page 4-23).
• PIS pump belt: Press with 98 N (10 kgf, 221bs) 13.0-16.5 mm (0.51-0.65 in.) deflection (see page 17-15).
D Replace the air conditioning filter (see page 21-63).
• Replace it twice as often (at 30,000 mile interval) if the vehicle is driven mostly in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the
air from industry and diesel-powered vehicles.
• Replace it whenever airflow from the climate control system is less than normal.
BACK
3-5
r o t e for
c tSevere
e d Conditions
by AR
(1999-2000 Models)
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Use this schedule if the vehicle is driven MAINLY in Canada or in any of the
following conditions; if only OCCASIONALLY driven in these conditions, use the Normal Conditions schedule (see page 3-4).
Severe Driving Conditions
• Less than 5 miles (8 km) per trip or, in freezing temperatures, less than 10 miles (16 km) per trip
• In extremely; hot weather (over 90°F/32°C)
• Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving
• Trailer towing, driving in mountainous conditions
• On muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads
3,750 mil 6,OQQ km/- o Reg.lace oil and filter.
7,500 mil 12,000 km/ - o Do items in A.
11,250 mil 18,000 km/- o Reglace oil and filter.
15,000 mil 24,000 km/ 1 year
o Clean air cleaner element with low pressure air.
22,500 mil 36,000 km/ 1 1/2 years: o Do items in A.
26,250 mil 42,000 km/- o Reglace oil and filter
30,000 mil 48,000 km/ 2 years: o Do items in A~ and C
37,500 mil 60,000 km/2 1/2 years: o Do items in A.
41 ,250 mil 66,000 km/ - o Reglace oil and filter.
45,000 mi/72,OQO km/ 3 years:
o Replace engine coolant (see page 10-13). Use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
• Capacity: 5.6 4 (5.9 US qt).
o Replace brake fluid (see page 19-8). Use Honda DOT 3. Fill to between marks on reservoir.
48,750 mi/78,OQO km/- D ...B.!mJace oil and filter.
52,500mi/84,000 km 3 1/2 years: o Do items in A.
60,000 mi/96,000 km/ 4 years:
o Replace timing belt, and inspectthe water pump (see page 10-12) if the vehicle is regularly driven in weather over 110°F (43°C) or
under -20°F (-29°C); If not, replace the belts at 105,000 miles.
o Do items in AL Band C.
63,750 mi/102,000 km/- ~Iace oil and filter.
67,500 mi/108,OOO km 41/2 years: o Do items in A.
71 ,250 mi/114,OOO krn /- o Reglace oil and filter.
75,000mi/120,000 km/5 years:
• Capacity: 5.6 II (5.9 US qt).
78,750 mi/126,000 km/- o Reglace oil and filter.
82,500 mi/132,000 km/5 1/2 years o Do items in A.
86,250 mi/138,000 km/- ~Iace oil and filter.
90,000 mi/144,OOO km/6 years:
o Replace brake fluid (see page 19-8). Use Honda DOT 3 brake fluid; fill to between marks on reservoir.
o Do items in A. Band C.
93,750 mi/150,000 km/- o Reglace oil and filter.
97,500 mi/156,OOO km/61/2 years: o Do items in A.
101 ,250 mi/162,000 km/ - o Reglace oil and filter.
105,000 mi/168,000 km/ 7 years:
o Replace timing belt (see page 6-18), and inspect the water pump (see page 10-12) only if the belts were not replaced at 60,000 miles.
o Check idle speed. * Should be 680 ± 50 rpm in IHl or ~ position (see page 11-157).
• Capacity: 5.6 II (5.9 US qt).
o Inspect valve clearance (cold) Intake: 0.20-0.24 mm (0.008-0.009 in.), Exhaust: 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011 -0.013 in.) (see page 6-13).
o Replace spark plugs, Use NGK (PZFR5F-11) or DENSO (PKJ16CR-L 11) Gap: 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.)(see page 4-17).
o Do items in A, B.
108,750 mi/174,000 km/- 0 Replace oil and filter.
112,500 mi/180,000 km/7 1/2 .'"ears: 0 Do items in A.
116,250 mi/186,000 km/ - 0 Replace oil and filter.
120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 years: 0 Do items A, B, and C.
3-6 BACK
Protected by AR
Do the items in parts A, B, and C as required for mileage/time interval.
A
D Replace engine oil and filter (see page 8-5). - Capacity with filter change: 4.4 D(4.6 US qt).
D Inspect front and rear brakes, every 6 months if vehicle is driven less than 7,500 mile per year (see page 19-11).
D Rotate tires, if the vehicle has been driven the distance listed. Follow the pattern shown in the Owner's Manual. (Check tire inflation and
condition.)
o Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots (see page 17-35).
• Check fluid lines for damage and leaks.
B
D Check parking brake adjustment. - Should be fully applied within 2 to 4 clicks.
D Lubricate door locks, latches, and hinges with multi-perpose grease.
D Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS). Check the master cylinder, proportioning control valve, and ABS modulator for damage and
leakage (see page 19-30).
D Check fluid levels and condition of fluids; check for leaks. If necessary, add ATF ('99 model: (see page 14-109), '~O model: (see page 14-
350)), or engine coolant, brake fluid, and windshield washer fluid .
D Inspect cooling system hoses and connections (see page 10-2).
o Inspect exhaust system. * Check catalytic converter heat shield, exhaust pipe, and muffler for damage, leaks, and tightness (see page 9-12).
o Inspect fuel lines and connections. * Check for loose connections, cracks and deterioration; retighten loose connections and replace
damaged parts (see page 11 -167).
D Check all lights. Check function of all interior and exterior lights, and the positions of the headlights (see page 22-142).
D Inspect the vehicle underbody. Check the paint for damage, scratches, stone chipping, and dents.
c
D Replace air cleaner element (see page 11-186).
D Inspect and adjust drive belt. Look for cracks and damage.
• Alternator compressor belt: Inspect auto tensioner indicator. Needs no adjustment (see page 4-23).
• PIS pump belt: Press with 98 N (10 kgf, 22Ibs), 13.0-16.5 mm (0.51-0.65 in.) deflection (see page 17-15).
D Replace air conditioning filter, every 15,000 miles if vehicle is driven mostly where air has high concentration of soot from industry and
diesel-powered vehicles; also replace it anytime airflow is less than usual (see page 21-63).
D Replace transmission fluid. Use Honda ATF. ('99 model: (see page 14-109), '~O model: (see page 14-350)).
• '99 model: 2.7 D (2.9 US qt), '~O model: 2.9 ~ (3.1 US qt).
BACK
3-7
Maintenance P r o t for
Schedule e cNormal
t e dandbSevere
y AConditions
R
(1999-2000 Models)
Listed by Maintenance Item

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first.
If driven in normal conditions, do items with a dot (.) .
• If driven in severe conditions (see page 3-6) or normally driven in Canada, do items with a circle (0) and items with a dot (.).
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever miles x 1000 3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5
comes first.
km x 1000 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60
years - 1/2 - 1 - 11/2 - 2 - 21/2
Replace engine oil Nomal Conditions: Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 :r 'mths
Severe Conditions: Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 moe ' ;'5
-_ . _--
Replace engine oil filter Nomal Conditions: Every other oil change
Severe Conditions: Every oil change
Clean air cleaner element 0 I

Replace air cleaner element
Inspect valve clearance Adjust only if noisy.

•
-
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt, Nor, 1 and inspect water pump
Inspect and adjust drive belts
Inspect idle speed*

•
Replace engine coolant
Replace transmission fluid 0

Inspect front and rear brakes
Replace brake fluid

0
• 0
• 0
Check parking brake adjustment

• •
Replace air conditioning filter NOT£'
Lubricate locks, hinges, and latches 0

•
0
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once a month)
• • • • •_-.
Inspect tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots 0
• 0
•
Inspect suspension components 0
• 0
• 0
Inspect driveshaft boots 0
• 0
• 0
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ASS)
• •
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluid
• •
Inspect cooling system hoses and connection
• •
Inspect exhaust system*
• •
Inspect fuel lines and connections*
Check lights and controls

•
0
•
0
Inspect vehicle under body 0 0
NOTE:
1 If the vehicle is regularly driven in very hot or cold weather, over 110°F (43°C) or under -20°F (-29°C), replace this belt every 60,000 miles;
If not, replace it at 105,000 miles.
2 Replace the air conditioning filter every 30,000 miles if the vehicle is driven mostly where air has a high concentration of soot from industry
and diesel-powered vehicle; also replace it anytime airflow is less than usual.
BACK
3-8
Protected by AR
41 .25 45 48.75 52.5 56.25 60 63.75 67.5 71.25 75 78.75 82.5 86.25 90 93.75 97.5 101.25 105 108.75 112.5 116.25 120
66 72 78 84 90 96 102 lOS 114 120 126 132 138 1« 150 156 162 168 175 181 187 193
- 3 - 31/2 - 4 - 41/2 - 5 - 51/2 - 6 - 61/2 - 7 - 71/2 - 8
Nomal Conditions: Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months

Severe conditions: Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months
Nomal conditions: Every other oil change

Severe Conditions: Every oil change
0 0 0
• • •
Adjust only if noisy.
•
•
0
• 0
• • •
•
• • •
0
• 0
• 0
• 0
• 0
• 0
• 0
•
• •
• • • • • •
0
•
0 0
•
0 0
•
0
• • • • • • • • • • •
• 0
• 0
• 0
• 0
• 0
•
• 0
• 0
• 0
• 0
• 0
•
• 0
• 0
• 0
• 0
• 0
•
• • • • • •
• • • • • •
• • • • • •
• • • • • •
•0 •
0
•
0
•
0
•
0
•
0
0 0 0 0 0 0
* According to state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk (*) will not void customer's emissions
BACK
3-9
r o t e for
c tNormal
e d bConditions
y AR
(2001-2003 Models)
This two-page Maintenance Schedule outlines the minimum required maintenance. Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes
first. Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe conditions if the vehicle meets any of the qualifiers in the Severe Conditions schedule or if the
vehicle is normally driven in Canada.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance service items marked with an asterisk ( * ) will not void customer's
emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at the recommended interval to ensure long-term
reliability.
7,500 mil 12,000 km/ - D Do items in A.

15,000 mil 24,000 km/ 1 year D Do items in A and B.
22,500 mil 36,000 km/- 0 Do items in A.
30,000 mil 48,000 km/ 2 years D Do items in A, B, and C.
37 ,500 mil 60,000 km/ - 0 Do items in A.
45,000 mil 72,000 km/ 3 years D Do items in A and B.
- mil - km/ 3 years (every 3 years independent of distance)
D Replace brake fluid. Use Honda DOT 3. Fill to between the marks on the reservoir (see page 19-8).
52,500 mil 84,000 km/ - 0 Do items in A.
67 ,500 mi/1 08,000 km/ - D Do items in A.
75,000 mil 120,000 km/ 5 years 0 Do items in A and B.
- mil - km/ 6 years (every 3 years independent of distance)
o Replace brake fluid. Use Honda DOT 3. Fill to between the marks on the reservoir (see page 19-8).
97,500 mil 156,000 km/ - 0 Do items in A.
105,000 mil 168,000 km/ 7 years
D Inspect valve clearance (cold) (see page 6-13).
Intake: 0.20-0.24 mm (0.008-0.009 in.), Exhaust: 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.)
D Replace spark plugs (see page 4-17). Use NGK (PZFR5F-11) or DENSO (PKJ 16CR-L11) for Premium model, use NGK (PZFR6E-11) or
DENSO (PKJ20CR-M11) for Type-S.
GAP: 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in)
D Replace timing belt, Remove timing belt (see page 6-18), and install timing belt (see page 6-21). Inspect water pump (see page 10-12).
D Check idle speed (see page 11-157). Should be 680::: 50 rpm in IN] or [f] position.
D Do items in A and B.
120,000 mil 192,000 km/ 8 years 0 Do the items in A, B, and C.
120,000 mil 192,000 km/ 6 years, then every 90,000 mil 144,000 km/5 years
D Replace transmission fluid (see page 14-350). Use Honda ATF-Z1.
Capacity: 2.9 l! (3.1 US gt).
120,000 mil 192,000 km/ 10 years, then every 60,000 mil 96,000 km/ 5 years
D Replace coolant (see page 10-13). Use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
Capacity: 5.6 ~ (5.9 US gt).
BACK
3-10
Protected by AR
Do the items in parts A, B, and C as required for mileage/time interval listed.
A
D Replace engine oil (see page 8-5). - Capacity with filter change: 4.4 e (4.6 US qt).
D Rotate tires. Follow the pattern shown in the Owner's Manual -Check tire inflation and condition .
B
D Replace engine oil filter (see page 8-5).
• Check brake lining for cracking, glazing, wear and contamination.
• Check wheel cylinders for leaks.
D Check parking brake adjustment. Should be fully applied within 2 to 4 clicks.
• Check fluid line for damage and leaks.
D Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS). - Check the master cylinder, proportioning control valve, and ABS modulator for damage
and leakage.
D Check all fluid levels and condition offluids; check for leaks. If necessary, add ATF (see page 14-350), engine coolant, brake fluid, and
windshield washer fluid.
D Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.
D Inspect exhaust system. * Check catalytic converter heat shield, exhaust pipe, and muffler for damage, leaks, and tightness (J32A 1 engine
(see page 9-12), J32A2 engine (see page 9-13)).
c
D Replace air cleaner element.
• Alternator, compressor belt: Inspect auto tensioner indicator. Needs no adjustment (see page 4-23).
• PIS pump belt: Press with 98 N (10 kgf, 221bs) 13.0-16.5 mm (0.51-0.65 in) deflection (see page 17-15).
D Replace the dust and pollen filter (see page 21-63).
• Replace it twice as often (at 15,000 mile interval) if the vehicle is driven mostly in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the
air from industry and diesel-powered vehicles.
• Replace it whenever airflow from the climate control system is less than normal.
BACK
3-11
r o t e cfort Severe
ed b y AR
Conditions
(2001-2003 Models)
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Use this schedule if the vehicle is driven MAINLY in Canada or in any of the
following conditions; if only OCCASIONALLY driven in these conditions, use the Normal Conditions schedule (see page 3-10).
Severe Driving Conditions

• Less than 5 miles (8 km) pertrip or, in freezing temperatures, less than 10 miles (16 km) per trip
• In extremely; hot weather (over 90°F/32°C)
• Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving
• Trailertowing
• On muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads
• Driving in mountainous conditions
3,750 mil 6,000 kml - o Replace engine oil and filter.

11 ,250 mil 18,000 km/- o Replace engine oil and filter.
15,000 mil 24,000 kml 1 year
o Clean air cleaner element with low pressure air (Premium modell.
18,750 mil 30,000 km/- o Replace engine oil and filter.
22,500 mil 36,000 kml 1 112 years: o Do items in A.
26,250 mil 42,000 km/- o Replace engine oil and filter
30,000 mil 48,000 kml 2 years: o Do items in A, B, and C.
37 ,500 mil 60,000 kml 2 112 years: o Do items in A.
41 ,250 mil 66,000 kml - o Replace engine oil and filter.
45,000 mil 72,000 kml 3 years:
- mil - kml 3 years (every 3 years independent of distance)
o Replace brake fluid . Use Honda DOT 3. Fill to between the marks on the reservoir (see page 19-8).
48,750 min8,000 kml - 0 Replace engine oil and filter.
52,5OOmil 84,000 km 3 1/2 years: 0 Do items in A.
56,250 mil 90,000 kml - 0 Replace engine oil and filter.
60,000 mil 96,000 kml 4 years: 0 Do items in A, B, and C.
60,000 mil 96,000 km/-
o Replace timing belt.Remove timing belt (see page 6-18), install timing belt (see page 6-21). Inspect the water pump (see page 10-12) if
the vehicle is regularly driven in weather over 110°F (43°q or under - 20°F (-29°C); If not, replace the be its at 105,000 miles.
60,000 mil 96,000 kml 3 years, then every 30,000 mil 48,000 kml 2 years
o Replace transmission fluid (see page 14-350). Use Honda ATF-Zl .
Capacity: 2.94 (3.1 US 9t).
63,750 mil 102.000km/- o Replace engine oil and filter.
67,500 mil 108,000 km 41/2 years: o Do items in A.
75,000mil 120,000 kml 5 years:
78,750 mil 126,000 kml - 0 Replace engine oil and filter.
82,500 mil 132,000 kml 5112 years 0 Do items in A.
86,250 mi/138,000 km/- 0 Replace engine oil and filter.
90,000 mil 144,000 km/5 years, then every 30,000 mil 48,000 kml 2 years
o Replace transmission fluid (see page 14-350). Use Honda ATF-Zl.
Capacity: 2.9 4 (3.1 US 9t).
90,000 mi/144,000 kml 6 years: 0 Do items in A, B, and C.
- mi/- kml 6 years (every 3 years independent of distance)
o Replace brake fluid. Use Honda DOT 3. Fill to between the marks on the reservoir (see page 19-8).
93,750 mi/150,000 km/- 0 Replace engine oil and filter.
97,500 mi/156,000 kml 61/2 years: 0 Do items in A.
101 ,250 mi/162,000 km/- 0' Replace engine oil and filter.
105,000 mil 168,000 kml 7 years:
o Inspect valve clearance (cold) (see page 6-13) Intake: 0.20-0.24 mm (0.008-0.009 in.) Exhaust: 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.)
o Replace spark plugs (see page 4-17). Use NGK (PZFR5F-11) or DENSO (PKJ16CR-L 11) except for Type-S, use NGK (PZFR6E-l1) or
DENSO (PKJ20CR-M11) for Type-S. Gap: 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in).
o Replace timing belt. Remove timing belt (see page 6-18), install timing belt (see page 6-21). Inspect the water pump (see page 10-12)
only if the belts was not replaced at 60,000 miles.
o Check idle speed (see page 11-157). Should be 680±50 rpm in [NJ or [f] position.
108,750 mi/174,000 km/- o Replace engine oil and filter.
112,500 mi/180,000 kml 7 112 years: o Do items in A.
BACK
3-12
Protected by AR
120,000 mil 192,000 km/ 8 years:

D Do items A, S, and C.
D Replace timing belt.Remove timing belt (see page 6-18), install timing belt (see page 6-21), Inspect the water pump (see page 10-12)
only if the belts was replaced at 60,000 miles.
120,000 mil 192,000 km/ 7 years, then every 30,000 mil 48,000 km/ 2 years
D Replace transmission fluid (see page 14-350). Use Honda ATF-Z1.
Capacity: 2.9 ~ (3.1 US gt).
120,000 mil 192,000 km/or 10 years, then every 60,000 mil 96,000 km/ 5 years
D Replace engine coolant (see page 10-13). Use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
Capacity: 5.64 (5.9 US gt).
Do the items in parts A. S, and C as required for mileage/time interval.
A
D Replace engine oil and filter (see page 8-5). - Capacity with filter change: 4.4 Q (4.6 US qt).
D Rotate tires, if the vehicle has been driven the distance listed. Follow the pattern shown in the Owner's Manual. (Check tire inflation and
condition .)
• Check fluid lines for damage and leaks.
• Check brake lining for cracking, glazing, wear, and contamination .
• Check wheel cylinders for leaks.
B
D Replace air cleaner element (Type-S model).
D Check parking brake adjustment. - Should be fully applied within 2 to 4 clicks.
D Lubricate locks, latches, and hinges with Honda white lithium grease.
D Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS). Check the master cylinder, proportioning control valve, and ABS modulator for damage and
leakage (see page 19-30).
D Check fluid levels and condition of fluids; check for leaks. If necessary, add ATF (see page 14-350), engine coolant, brake fluid, and
windshield washer fluid.
D Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.
D Inspect exhaust system. * Check catalytic converter heat shield, exhaust pipe, and muffler for damage, leaks, and tightness(J32A 1 engine
(see page 9-12), J32A2 engine (see page 9-13)).
D Check all lights. Check function of all interior and exterior lights, and the positions of the headlights (see page 22-142).
D Inspect the vehicle underbody. Check the paint for damage, scratches, stone chipping, and dents.
c
D Replace air cleaner element in dusty conditions, otherwise use Normal Conditions schedule (Premium model).
• Alternator, compressor belt: Inspect auto tensioner indicator. Needs no adjustment (see page 4-23).
• PIS pump belt: Press with 98 N (10 kgf, 221bs) 13.0-16.5 mm (0.51-0.65 in) deflection (see page 17-15).
D Replace dust and pollen filter, every 15,000 miles if vehicle is driven mostly where air has high concentration of soot from industry and
diesel-powered vehicles; also replace it anytime airflow is less than usual (see page 21-63).
BACK
3-13
MaintenanceP r o t eforcNormal
Schedule t e dandbSevere
y AConditions
R
(2001-2003 Models)
Listed by Maintenance Item

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first.
• If driven in normal conditions, do items with a dot (.) .
• If driven in severe conditions (see page 3-12) or normally driven in Canada, do items with a circle (0 ) and items with a dot (.).
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever L miles x 1000 3.75 7.5 11 .25 J 15 18.75 j 22.5 I 26.25 j 30 33.75 37.5
comes first. L km x 1000 6 I 12 18 I 24 30136142148 54 60
I vears - I 1/2 - I 1 - 111/2 I - I 2 - 21/2
Replace engine oil Normal Conditions: Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 1 year
Severe Conditions: Everv 3 750 miles (6 000 km) or 6 months
Replace engine oil filter Normal Conditions: Every 15.000 miles (24,000 km) or 1 year
Severe Conditions: Everv 3.750 miles (6 000 kmlor 6 months
Replace air cleaner element (Type-S model) Normal Conditions: Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years
Dusty Conditions: Everv 15 000 miles (24 000 km) or lvear
Check eneine oil and coolant Check oil and coolant each fuel stoo
Clean or replace air cleaner element (Premium model) Normal Conditions: Replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or
-Use normal conditions except in dusty conditions 2 years
Dusty Conditions: Clean at 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or '.lear,
45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 3 years, 75,000 miles (120,0(" km)
or 5 years, 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Replal;';'
everv 30 000 miles (48 000 km) or 2 vears.
Insoect valve clearance Ad'ust onlv if noisv.
Reolace soark olues
Replace timine belt NOT' 1 and inspect water pumo
Insoect and adiust drive belts
Insoect idle speed*
Replace engine coolant '01 model
•
Normal Conditions: At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years,
then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Severe Conditions: At 120,000 miles (192,000 km)or 6 years,
then every 60 000 miles (96 000 km) or 5 years
'02-03 models At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000
miles (96 000 km) or 5 vears
Replace transmission fluid Normal Conditions: At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years,
then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years
Severe Conditions: At 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then
I.
every 30000 miles (48 000 km) or 2 years
.1 I.
Inspect front and rear brakes 01 .1 01 0
Replace brake fluid Even-3 years (inde endent of distance
Check~arking brake adjustment
Replace dust andpollen filter NOTE'
_L
I
I
I
.= F
Lubricate locks latches and hinaes I 0 1 I 1 0
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at least once a month) Everv 7 SOD miles (12 000 km)
Inspect tie-rod ends steering gearbox and boots
Inspect suspension comj:lonents
0
0 •• 0
0 •• J2
0
Inspect driveshaft boots
Insoect brake hoses and lines (includina ABS)
0
•• 0
•• 0
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
Inspect coolina system hoses and connections •• ••
Inspect exhaust system*
Inspect fuel lines and connections*
Check lights and controls 0
•• 0
•• .~
I
Inspect vehicle underbody 0 () I
NOTE:
1. If the vehicle is regularly driven in very hot or cold weather, over 110°F (43°C) or under -20°F (-29°C), replace this belt at 60,000 miles
(96,000 km); If not, replace it at 105,000 miles (168,000 km) .
2. Replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles if the vehicle is driven mostly where ai r has a high concentration of soot from industry
and d iesel-powered veh icle; also replace it anytime airflow is less than usual.
* According to state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked with an asterisk (*) will not void customer's emissions
BACK
3-14
Protected by AR
41.25 45 48.75' 52.5' 56.25' 60 I 63.75 67.5 I 71.25 I 75 78.75 I 82.5 I 86.25 90 93.75' 97.5 ~ 101.25 105 108.75 112.5 I 116.25 I 120
66 72 78 84 J 90 ! 96 , 102 , 108 114 , 120 , 126 , 132 , 138 144 ! 150 ! 156 ! 162 168 , 174 180 186 ! 192
- 3 - 31/2 - , 4 - 41/2 - 5 - '51/2, - 6 - ' 61/2' - 7 - 71/2 - , 8
Normal Conditions: Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 1 year
Severe Conditions: Every 3 750 miles (6 000 km) or 6 months
Normal Conditions: 15.000 miles (24,000 km) or 1 year
Severe Conditions: 3.750 miles (6 000 km) or 6 months
Check oil and coolant each fuel stOD
Normal Condition: Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years
Dustv Condition: Every 15 ooomiles (24 000 km) or 1 year
Normal Condition: Replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years
Dusty Conditions: Clean at 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 1 year, 45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 3 years, 75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 5 years,
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years.
Adiust only if noisy.

••
0_
• • • 0
•
Normal Conditions: At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Severe Conditions: At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
•
At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Normal Conditions: At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years
.,., .
Severe Conditions: At 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years
,.
,.
•
,. •
, 0 j. , 0 ,
0 ~. 0 0
, ,, ,.
Everv 3 years (inde endent of distance)
• ,, , , , , ,
,
,
•
0 ' 0
, 0 '
, •
, 0
!
, ' 0
,, 1 •
' 0
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
•• 0
0
•••
0
0 •• 0
0 •• 0
0
•••
0
0 ••
•••
0
••
0
•••
0
•• 0
••
0
••
.-•• •• ••
•
0
••
0 0
••• 0•• •••
0 n•
•
0 0 0 0 0 0
BACK
3-15
Protected by AR
Engine Electrical
Engine Electrical
Special Tools ................................................................. 4-2
Starting System
Component Location Index ......................................... 4-3
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 4-4
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting .................................. 4-5
Starter Solenoid Test ................................................... 4-6
Starter Performance Test ............................................. 4-7
Starter Replacement .................................................... 4-8
Starter Overhaul ........................................................... 4-9
Ignition System
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 4-15
Ignition Timing Inspection ........................................... 4-16
Spark Plug Inspection .................................................. 4-17
Charging System
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 4-19
Charging Circuit Troubleshooting .............................. 4-20
Alternator-Compressor Belt
Inspection and Replacement ..................................... 4-23
Alternator Replacement ............................................... 4-23
Auto-Tensioner Inspection/Replacement .................. 4-24
Alternator Overhaul ..................................................... 4-27
Cruise Control
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 4-34
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............................... 4-35
Cruise Control Communication Circuit
Troubleshooting ...................................................... '" 4-37
Control Unit Input Test ................................................. 4-38
Brake Pedal Position Switch Test ................................ 4-40
Main Switch Test/Replacement .................................. 4-40
Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Test/Replacement .......... 4-41
Actuator Test ................................................................. 4-42
Actuator/Cable Replacement ....................................... 4-43
Actuator Cable Adjustment ......................................... 4-44
Engine Mount Control System

Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 4-46
Troubleshooting ........................................................... 4-47
Protected by AR
Engine Electrical
Special Tools
Number Tool Number Description Oty

CD A973X-041-XXXXX Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0-30 in.Hg 1
® 077 46-00 10400 Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 1
® 077 49-00 10000 Driver 1
I @
,
0
,
' ~'
-:=, \ ,
G
, . '.'~=: - /
I
CD ® ®
BACK
4-2
Protected by AR r--:'I
Starting System I.:!:!..I
Component Location Index
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX (BACK SIDE)
AfT GEAR POSITION SWITCH ('99 model)

STARTER Test, page 14-144
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting, page 4-5 Replacement, page 14-145
Solenoid Test, page 4-6 TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH ('00-03 model)
Performance Test, page 4-7 Test, page 14-383
Replacement, page 4-8 Replacement, page 14-384
Overhaul, page 4-9
BATTERY
BACK 4-3
Protected by AR
Starting System
Circuit Diagram
+
=t=)
BATTERY , W
UNDER-HOODFIJS(IRELAYBOX
~
:::::' ~ --1- IGMTIONSWITOI
BAT
ST
ST HOT in START ,II
BlK/WHT
~:- -- - - - - - --- --- STARTER

CUT
RElAY
I DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
F\JSEJRELAYBOX
No.1317.5A1
~
BU<LRED WHT1RED
• PCM
• PGM-R TRANSMISSION RANGE
MAIN RELAY SWITOI
( 00Hd : (lJ1~[NJ
position
)
BlK/WHT
B I S
~[- ~
~
M I SOLENOIl
STARTER
--- Gl0l
4-4 BACK
~
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: 4. Check the battery condition. Check electrical

• Air temperature must be between 59° and 100°F (15° connections at the battery, the negative battery
and 38°C) during this procedure. cable to body, the engine ground cables and the
• After this test, or any subsequent repair, reset the starter for looseness and corrosion. Then try
powertrain control module (PCM) to clear any codes starting the engine again.
(see page 11-4).
• The battery must be installed in good condition and Did the starter crank the engine?
fully charged.
YES- Repairing the loose connection repaired the
Recommended Procedure: problem. The starting system is OK.•
• Use a starter system tester.
• Connect and operate the equipment in accordance NO-Go to step 5.
with the manufacturer's instructions.
5. Make sure the transmission is in Park or Neutral,
Alternate Procedure then disconnect the BLK/WHT wire (A) from the
starter solenoid (8). Connect a jumper wire from
1. Hook up the following equipment: the battery positive terminal to the solenoid
terminal.
• Ammeter, 0-400 A B
• Voltmeter, 0- 20 V (accurate within 0.1 volt)
• Tachometer, 0-1200 rpm
Did the starter crank the engine?
2. Remove the No.1 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse from the YES-Go to step 6.
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
NO - Remove the starter and repair or replace as
3. With the shift lever in Park or Neutral, turn the necessary.
ignition switch to start (Iff).
6. Check the following items in the order listed until
Did the starter crank the engine normally? you find the open circuit.
YES - The starting system is OK.• • Check the BLK/WHT wire and connectors
between the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
NO- If the starter wifl not crank the engine at all, go and the ignition switch, and between the driver's
to step 4. If it cranks the engine erratically or too under-dash fuse/relay box and the starter.
slowly, go to step 7. If it won't disengage from the • Check the ignition switch (see page 22-191).
torque converter ring gear when you release the • Check the AfT gear position switch ('99 model)/
key, check for the following until you find the cause. transmission range switch ('00-03 models) and
connector.
• Solenoid plunger and switch malfunction • Check the starter cut relay .
• Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning clutch.
(cont'd)
BACK
4-5
Protected by AR
Starting System
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting Starter Solenoid Test

(cont'd)
1. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the S
terminal (A) and the armature housing (ground).
7. Check engine speed while cranking the engine. There should be continuity.
Is engine speed above 100 rpm? • If there is continuity, go to step 2.

• If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
YES - Go to step 8. A
NO-Replace the starter, or remove and

disassemble it, and check for the following until
you find the cause .
• Excessively worn starter brushes

• Open circuit in commutator brushes
• Dirty or damaged helical spline or drive gear
• Faulty drive gear clutch
8. Check the cranking voltage and current draw.
Is cranking voltage greater than or equal to 8.5 V,

and current draw less than or equal to 380A?
YES-Go to step 9.
2. Check the pull-in coil for continuity between the S
NO - Replace the starter, or remove and terminal (A) and M terminal (B). There should be
disassemble it, and check for the following until continuity.
you find the cause.
• Ifthere is continuity, the solenoid is OK.
• Open circuit in starter armature commutator • If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
segments
• Starter armature dragging
• Shorted armature winding
• Excessive drag in engine
9. Remove the starter and inspect its drive gear and

the torque converter ring gear for damage. Replace
any damaged parts .•
4-6 BACK
I.!:!..I
Starter Performance Test
1. Disconnect the wires from the S terminal and the M 5. Disconnect the battery from the body. If the pinion
terminal. retracts immediately, it is working properly.
2. Make a connections as described below using as

heavy a wire as possible (preferably equivalent to s
the wire used for the vehicle). To avoid damaging
the starter, never leave the battery connected for
more than 10 seconds. 12V
BATTERY
3. Connect the battery as shown. Be sure to
disconnect the starter motor wire from the solenoid.
If the starter pinion moves out, it is working
properly.
s
6. Remove the starter (see page 4-8).
12V
BATTERY 7. Clamp the starter firmly in a vise.
8. Connect the starter to the battery as described in

the diagram below, and confirm that the motor
starts and keeps rotating.
4. Disconnectthe battery from the M terminal. If the

pinion does not retract, the hold-in coil of the
solenoid is working properly.
M s
12V
BATTERY 12V
BATTERY
9. If the electric current and motor speed meet the

specifications when the battery voltage is at 11.5 V,
the starter is working properly.
Specifications:
BACK
4-7
Protected by AR
Starting System
Starter Replacer-nent
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the 6. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make sure
radio and the navigation system, then write down the crimped side of the ring terminal is facing out.
the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then

disconnect the positive cable.
3. Remove the ATF cooler hose from the clamp on the

starter motor ('99-01 models).
4. Disconnect the starter cable (A) from the B terminal

on the solenoid, then disconnect the BLK/WHT wire
(B) from the 5 terminal.
C
10x 1.25 mm
44 N·m 14.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ftl
B
7. Connect the battery positive cable and negative
cable to the battery.
A 8. Start the engine to make sure the starter works

properly.
9. Enter the anti-theft codes for the radio and the

navigation system, then enter the customer's radio
station presets.
\ 10. Perform the powertrain control module (PCM) idle

learn procedure (see page 11-158).
11. Perform the power window control unit reset

8x 1.25mm procedure ('02-03 models) (see page 22-308).
c~
9 N·m 10.9 kgf·m,
7lbf·ftl
12x 1.25 mm
5. Remove the two bolts (C) holding the starter, then
remove the starter.
BACK
4-8
Protected by AR ~
I.!!:!..I
Starter Overhaul
Disassem bly/Reassembly
END COVER
BRUSH HOLDER
BRUSH ARMATURE HOUSING
ARMATURE
NUT ' ......m. 7Ibf.ft}
9 N·m. \
~ ~\
MOL~:~~NUM
,
/
DISULFIDE NT~_
~
MOLYBDENUM
DISULFIDE
SOLENOID LEVER
GEAR HOUSING OVERRUNA~~~~BLY

CLUTCH
(cant'd)
BACK 4-9
Protected by AR
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
1. Remove the starter (see page 4-8). S. Check the commutator diameter. If the diameter is
below the service limit, replace the armature.
2. Disassemble the starter as shown at the beginning
of this procedure. Commutator Diameter
Standard (New): 28.0-28.1 mm (1.102-1.106 in.)
Armature Inspection and Test Service Limit: 27.5 mm (1.083 in.)
3. Inspect the armature for wear or damage from

contact with the permanent magnet. If there is wear
or damage, replace the armature.
6. Measure the commutator runout .
• If the commutator runout is within the service

limit, check the commutator for carbon dust or
4. Check the commutator (A) surface. If the surface is brass chips between the segments.
dirty or burnt, resurface with emery cloth or a lathe • If the commutator runout is not within the service
within the following specifications, or recondition limit, replace the armature.
with # soo or # 600 sandpaper (B).
Commutator Runout
Standard (New): 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max.
Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
BACK
4-10
Protected by AR ~
l!!!.I
7. Check the mica depth (A). Ifthe mica is too high (B), 9. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B).
undercut the mica with a hacksaw blade to the Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core.
proper depth. Cut away all the mica (C) between If the blade is attracted to the core or vibrates while
the commutator segments. The undercut should the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace
not be too shallow, too narrow, or V-shaped (D). the armature.
Commutator Mica Depth B c

10. Check with an ohmmeter that no continuity exists

8. Check for continuity between the segments of the between the commutator (A) and armature coil
commutator. If an open circuit exists between any core (B), and between the commutator and
segments, replace the armature. armature shaft (C). If continuity exists, replace the
armature.
(cont'd)
BACK
4-11
Protected by AR
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
Starter Brush Inspection Starter Brush Holder Test
11. Measure the brush length. If it is not within the 12. Check that there is no continuity between the (+)
service limit, replace the brush holder assembly. brush holder (A) and (- ) brush holder (8). If there
is continuity, replace the brush holder assembly.
Brush Length
Standard (New): 15.8-16.2 mm (0.62-0.64 in.) B
~
Brush Spring Inspection
13. Insert the brush (A) into the brush holder, and bring
the brush into contact with the commutator, then
attach a spring scale (8) to the spring (C). Measure
the spring tension at the moment the spring lifts off
the brush. If the spring tension is not within
specification, replace the spring.
Spring Tension:
15.7-17.7 N (1.6-1.8 kgf, 3.53-3.97Ibf)
4-12 BACK
~
14. Pry back each brush spring with a screwdriver, then Overrunning Clutch Inspection
position the brush about halfway out of its holder,
and release the spring to hold it there. 17. Slide the overrunning clutch along the shaft.
Replace it if it does not slide smoothly.
NOTE: To seat new brushes, slip a strip of # 500 or
#600 sandpaper, with the grit side up, between the 18. Rotate the overrunning clutch (A) both ways. If it
commutator and each brush, and smoothly rotate does not lock in either direction or it locks in both
the armature. The contact surface of the brushes directions, replace it.
will be sanded to the same contour as the
commutator.
15. Install the armature in the housing. Next, pry back

each brush spring again, and push the brush down
until it seats against the commutator, then release
the spring against the end of the brush.
I
19. If the starter drive gear (B) is worn or damaged,
replace the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear
is not available separately.
Check the condition of the torque converter ring

gear to see if the starter drive gear teeth are
damaged.
16. Install the starter end cover (A) to retain the brush 20. Reassemble the starter in the reverse order of
holder (B). disassembly.
BACK
4-13
Protected by AR
Ignition System
IGNITION COIL
SPARK PLUG
Inspection, page 4-17
4-14
BACK
~
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNmON SWITCH

BAmRY
<±)
I
No.41112OAJ
~
No.42 IIIIIAI
WHT
(§J IIlI
IIlI HOT In ON ,.,
IIId START fill
DRIVeR'S
UNDER-DASH No.ll
FUSE/RfLAV II5AI
BOX
I'CM IIlXlYEL
A
I \
f
WHT /BLU 1'99 modell
BRN/WHT 1'00-03 modeIsl
f
Bu(/ ED
f
VEL 1'99 model}
BAN 1'00-03 modeIsl
f
BLU 1'99 model/
WHT /BLU 1'00-03 modelsl
f
RED 1'99 model/
BLU/RED I' ~=-03 modelsl
f
VEL/GRN
l l lL l &xL &xlYEL
I K:M I I ICM I I ICM I I K:M I I ICM I I ICM I

~ ~
- ~
- - IGNmON
COILS
~~ ~II. ~~- ~II JII ~II~

~ ~ ~ ~ ~
No.6 No.5 No.4 No.3 No.2 No.1
Bu(
n
r ,
r i
I,
r ,
r
" " SPARK
PLUGS
~
~ ~II- I J II- ~
....... ....... ....... ....... ......... ....... ........

GI01
ICM : lenition Control Module
BACK
4-15
Protected by AR
Ignition System
Ignition Timing Inspection
1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with 5. Point the light toward the pointer (A) on the timing
no load (in Park or Neutral) until the radiator fan belt cover. Check the ignition timing under no load
comes on, then let it idle. conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear window
defogger, and air conditioner are not operating. If
2. Check the idle speed, and adjust it if necessary (see the ignition timing differs from the specification
page 11-157). below, replace the powertrain control module
(PCM) (see page 11-4).
3. Connect the Honda PGM Tester to the data link
connector (DLC), and follow the tester's prompts in Ignition TIming:
the "SCS" menu (see the Honda PGM Tester 10o ±2° BTOC (RED mark (B)) at idle in Park or
Operator's Manual). Neutral
A
4. Connect the timing light to the No.1 ignition coil
wire.
B
6. Disconnect the Honda PGM Tester.
4-16
BACK
~
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator. 2. Do not adjust the gap of platinum tip plugs (A);
replace the spark plug if the gap is out of
Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: specification.
° Advanced ignition timing Electrode Gap:

° Loose spark plug Standard (New): 1.0 -1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in.)
° Plug heat range too hot Service Limit: 1.3 mm (0.051 in.)
° Insufficient cooling
Fouled plug may be caused by:
° Retarded ignition timing

° Oil in combustion chamber
° Incorrect spark plug gap
° Plug heat range too cold
° Excessive idling/low speed running
° Clogged air cleaner element
° Deteriorated ignition coils
Worn or deformed ~
.
electrodes
o Improper gap
° Oil-fouling 3. Replace the plug at the specified interval, or if the
Carbon deposits center electrode is rounded (A). Use only the spark
IT
{ • Cracked center
electrode insulator plugs listed below.
Spark Plugs:
~ J32A 1 engine:
NGK: PZFR5F-11
DEN SO: PKJ16CR-L 11
J32A2 engine:
NGK: PZFR6E-11
DENSO: PKJ20CR-M11
4. Apply a small quantity of anti-seize compound to

the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the
cylinder head finger-tight. Then torque them to
18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13Ibf·ft).
BACK
4-17
Protected by AR
Charging System
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATO

lin the gauge assembly)
Test, page 4-20
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
Has built-in ELECTRICAL LOAD ]
[ DETECTOR IELD) UNIT
BATTERY
Test, page 22-102
ALTERNATOR
Alternator/Regulator Test, page 4-20
Replacement, page 4-23
4-18 BACK
I.!:..I
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD RJSE/RELAY BOX

BAmRY
No.411120AI
~--~----------~------------------~
IGNITION
1 SWITCH
~ No.6 DIlVER'S
~ IlSAI UNDER-DASH
.-.- RJSE/RELAYBOX
BIJ(/YEL
BlK/YEL
CHARGING
SYSTEM
NltCATOR
UGHT
BULB
IUWI
I
WHT GRN WHT BLU
!-AijiiiNAiOR-" C
I VOLTAGE REGULATOR
FR
I
RLDWNlING
i FELD WINDING
RECTfIER RECTHR
I
wi
I
I
I
,, _.J i
"model
BACK
4-19
Protected by AR
Charging System
Charging Circuit Troubleshooting
If the charging system indicator does not come on or 9. Connect the alternator 4P connector terminal No.3
does not go off, or the battery is dead or low, test the to body ground with a jumper wire. Turn the
following items in the order listed below: ignition switch ON (II).
Battery (see page 22-102)
Charging system indicator
ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR
Alternator/regulator circuit
Alternator control system
Charging System Indicator Test 2 Wire side of

female terminals
1. Check the B terminal, that the 4P connector and 314
under-hood fuse/relay box terminals are securely
tightened. L(WHT/BLU)
Are they securely tightened?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO-Tighten or reconnect .• Does the charging system indicator come on?
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). YES-Go to step 10.
Does the charging system indicator come on? NO- Turn the ignition switch OFF. Check for a
blown No.6 (15A) fuse and a blown charging
YES - Go to step 3. system light bulb. If the fuse and bulb are OK,
repair the open in the BLK/YEL and WHT/BLU
NO-Go to step 7. wire .•
3. Start the engine. 10. Measure the voltage at the No.1 terminal of the
alternator 4P connector with the ignition switch ON
Does the charging system indicator go off? (II).
YES - Charging system indicator circuit is OK.• ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR
NO - Go to step 4.
Wire side of
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. female terminals
314
5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector from the
alternator. ¥IG (BlK/VEL)
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Does the charging system indicator come on?
YES- Turn the ignition switch OFF, and repair the

short in the BLK/YEL and WHT/BLU wire .• Is there battery voltage?
NO-Go to step 10. YES-Repair or replace the alternator.•
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NO-Repair open in the BLK/YEL wire between the
alternator and the driver's under-dash fuse relay
8. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector from the box.•
alternator.
BACK
4-20
~
Alternator and Regulator Circuit Test 9. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it
there.
1. Be sure the battery is sufficiently charged (see page
22-102). Is the voltage less than 13.5 V?
2. Connect a VAT-40 (or equivalent tester), and turn YES - Repair or replace the alternator (see page 4-
the selector switch to position 1 (starting). 27) .•
LOAD ADJUSTER FULL FIELD TESTER NO-Gotostep 10.

(CARBON PILE) LEAD (BLU)
=~=~ ___ VOLTMETER

NEGATIVE
LEAD (BLK)
10. Apply a load with the VAT-40 until the battery
voltage drops to between 12-13.5 V.
VOLTMETER
POSITIVE Is the amperage 75A or more?
LEAD (RED)
~ YES- The charging system is OK.•
NO-Gotostep 11.
N~IVETESTER
~\
11. With the engine speed still at 2,000 rpm, full-field
CABLE (BLK) the alternator. Attach the probe to the VAT-40 full-
POSmVE TESTER field test lead, and insert the probe into the full field
CABLE (RED)
access hole at the back of the alternator. Switch the
~~!S)< INDUCTIVE field selector to the" A (Ground)" position
PICK-UP (GRN)
momentarily, and check the amperage reading.
Because voltage will rise quickly when the
alternator is full-fielded, do not allow the voltage to
exceed 18 V: it may damage the electrical system.
3. Shift to Park or Neutral, and start the engine. Hold
REGULATOR
the engine at 3,000 rpm, with no load until the (Located inside
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. the end cover)
4. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it

there.
Is there voltage over 15.1 V?
YES-Replace the voltage regulator (see page 4-

27) .•
FULL FIELD
NO - Go to step 5. END ACCESS HOLE
COVER
5. Release the accelerator pedal, and let the engine
idle. Is the alternator output 75A or more?
6. Make sure all accessories are turned off. Turn the YES - Replace the voltage regulator..
selector switch to position 2 (charging).
NO- Repair or replace the alternator (see page 4-
7. Remove the inductive pick-up, and zero the 27) .•
ammeter.
8. Place the inductive pick-up over the B terminal wire

of the alternator so that the arrow points away from
the alternator.
(cont'd)
BACK
4-21
Protected by AR
Charging System
Charging Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)

Alternator Control System Test 7. Check for continuity between the PCM connector
terminal C2 and body ground.
NOTE: After troubleshooting, perform the powertrain
control module (PCM) idle learn procedure (see page PCM CONNECTOR C (31PI
11-158). ALTC (WHT/GRNI
1. Check for proper operation of the electrical load

detector (ELD) by checking the malfunction 1
indicator lamp (MIL) (see page 11-3). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector from the V 12 13 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
alternator. 23 V 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
J
3. Start the engine, and turn the headlights (high
beam) ON.
4. Measure voltage between the alternator 4P

connector terminal No.2 and the positive terminal Is there continuity?
of the battery.
YES-Repair short in the wire between the
alternator and PCM .•
NO-Check that the terminals are firmly seated at

the connector. If OK, substitute a known-good PCM,
and recheck. If prescribed voltage is now available,
replace the original PCM .•
C(WHT/GRNI 8. Turn the headlight and ignition switch OFF.
ALTERNATOR
4P CONNECTOR
ill Wire side of
female terminals
9. Disconnect the PCM connector C (31P).
ill 10. Check for continuity between the PCM connector

terminal C2 and alternator 4P connector terminal
No.2.
Is there 1 V or less?
ALTC (WHT/GRN) C(WHT/GRN)
YES-Go to step 8. 1l
NO - Go to step 5.
5. Turn the headlight and ignition switch OFF.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
r.9
6. Disconnect the powertrain control module (PCM)
connector C (31P).
/ 12 13 14 V 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
V
23 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
ALTERNATOR
PCM CONNECTOR C (31PI 4P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals
Is there continuity?
YES - Test the alternator/regulator.•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the

alternator and PCM .•
BACK
4-22
Protected by AR ~
~
Alternator-compressor Belt Alternator Replacement
Inspection and Replacement
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the
radio and the navigation system, then write down
1. Inspect the belt for cracks and damaged. If the belt the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons.
is cracks or damaged, replace it.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then
2. Check that the pointer (A) on the auto-tensioner disconnect the positive cable.
housing is not beyond the edge of the indicator rib
(B) on the tensioner base. 3. Move the auto-tensioner (A) to relieve tension from
the alternator belt (8), and remove the alternator
belt.
3. Move the auto-tensioner (A) to relieve tension from

the alternator belt (8), and remove the alternator
belt.
4. Install the new belt in the reverse order of removal.
(cont'd)
BACK
4-23
Protected by AR
Charging System
Alternator Replacement (co nt'd) Auto-Tensioner Inspection/

Replacement
4. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector (A) and BLK
wire (B) from the alternator.
1. Check the position of the auto-tensioner indicator's
pointer (A), start the engine, then check the position
of the pointer again. If the position changes, go to
step 5.
5. Remove the mount bolt (A) and alternator bracket

mounting bolt (B), then remove the harness clamp
(C) from the alternator bracket.
c 2. Check for abnormal noise from the tensioner pulley.

If you hear abnormal noise, replace the tensioner
pulley.
3. Stop the engine, then remove the alternator belt

(see page 4-23).
8x 1.25mm
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m,
A 16Ibf·ft)
10x 1.25 mm
44 N·m 14.5 kgf.m, 33Ibf·ft)
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

navigation system, then enter the customer's radio
station presets.
8. Perform the powertrain control module (PCM) idel

learn procedure (see page 11-158).

procedure ('02-03 models) (see page 22-308).
4-24 BACK
I.!!!.I
4. Check if the auto-tensioner (A) moves smoothly 6.

and check for abnormal noise when the pulley is
turned counterclockwise with the designated tool. If
the auto-tensioner does not move smoothly or if
the there is abnormal noise, replace the auto-
tensioner. Do not move the auto-tensioner beyond
its limit.
C
7. Attach a torque wrench to the pulley bolt. Measure
A the torque when the tensioner is turned
counterclockwise. If the torque is less than the
5. Stop the engine, then remove the auto-tensioner. specified value, replace the auto-tensioner.
23 N·m (2.3 kgf·m, 17 Ibf·tt)
6x1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf.m, 8.7Ibf·ftJ
(cont'd)
BACK
4-25
Protected by AR
Charging System
Auto-Tensioner Inspection/Replacement (cont'd)
8. If necessary, remove the pulley bolt (A) (left-hand

threads), and replace the tensioner pulley (8).
A
38 N·m i "gI.m,2S Ibf·ft]
BACK
4-26
I!:!.I
Alternator Overhaul
Exploded View
STATOR
DRIVE-END HOUSING
DIODE (RECTIFIER)
ASSEMBLY
REA\ HOUSING
BRUSH HOLDER
ASSEMBLY
TERMINAL INSULATOR
END COVER DUST SEAL
(cont'd)
BACK
4-27
Protected by AR
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 5. Remove the washer nut (A) and insulator (8) from
• Driver 07749-0010000 the "8" terminal, then remove the end cover (e)
• Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400 and dust seal (D) .
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during A- -~

this procedure.
1. Test the alternator and regulator before you B

remove them (see page 4-20).
2. Remove the alternator (see page 4-23).
3. If the front bearing needs replacing, remove the

pulley locknut with a 10 mm wrench (A) and a 22
mm wrench (8). If necessary, use an impact wrench.
6. Remove the brush holder.
4. Remove the three flange nuts (A) and the screw (8)
from the alternator, then remove the plate terminal
(e).
BACK
4-28
I.!!!.I
7. Remove the voltage regulator. 9. Remove the four flange nuts.
8. Remove the four screws (A), then remove the 10. Remove the four insulators (A) rear housing (8) and
rectifier (8) and rubber seal (C). washer (C).
(cont'd)
BACK
4-29
Protected by AR
Charging System
11. If you are not replacing the front bearing and/or 14. With a hammer and commercially available tools
rear bearing, go to step 18. Remove the rotor from shown, install a new rear bearing in the rotor shaft.
the stator drive end housing.
12. Inspect the rotor shaft for scoring, and inspect the 15. Remove the front bearing retainer plate.
bearing journal surface in the stator housing for
seizure marks .
• If either the rotor or stator housing is damaged,

replace the alternator.
• If both the rotor and the stator housing are OK,
go to step 13.
13. Remove the rear bearing using a puller as shown.
BACK
4-30
~
16. Support the stator housing in a vise, and drive out Rectifier Test
the front bearing with a brass drift (A) and hammer.
18. Check for continuity in each direction, between the
B terminal (A) and P terminals (B), and between the
E terminal (C) and P terminals of each diode pair.
A All diodes should have continuity in only one
direction. Because the rectifier diodes are designed
to allow current to pass in only one direction, and
the rectifier is made up of eight diodes (four pairs)
(six diodes (three pairs) for '00-03 models), you
must test each diode in both directions for
continuity with an ohmmeter that has diode
checking capability: a total of 16 checks (12 checks
for '00-03 models) .
• If any diode is faulty, replace the rectifier

assembly. (Diodes are not available separately.)
• If all the diodes are OK, go to step 19.
c
17. With a hammer and the special tools, install a new
front bearing in the stator housing. B.
07746-0010400 B, ('99 model only)
A B',
~~ ~~ . ~ ~ ..
B,
B, ('99 model only)
B,
B•
~~ ~ .. . ~ ~ ..
(cont'd)
BACK
4-31
Protected by AR
Charging System
Alternator Brush Inspection Stator Test
19. Measure the length of both brushes (A) with a 22. Check that there is continuity between each pair of
vernier caliper (B). leads (A).
• If either brush is shorter than the service limit, • If there is continuity, go to step 23.
replace the brush assembly. • If there is no continuity, replace the alternator.
• If brush length is OK, go to step 20.
Alternator Brush Length:

- _-==""".,A
~-;;:;;
Standard (New): 10.5 mm (0.41 in.)

23. Check for no continuity between each lead and the

coil core (8).
A • If there is no continuity, go to step 24.

• If there is continuity, replace the alternator.
Rotor Slip Ring test
24. Assemble the alternator in the the reverse order of
20. Check that there is continuity between the slip rings disassembly, and note these items:
(A).
• Be careful not to get any grease or oil on the slip
• Ifthere is continuity, go to step 21. rings.
• If there is no continuity, replace the alternator. • If you removed the pulley, tighten its locknut to
C 111 N·m (11.3 kgf·m, S1.7Ibf·ft)whenyou
reinstall it.
J
21. Check that there is no continuity between each slip

ring and the rotor (B) and the rotor shaft (C).
• If there is no continuity, go to step 22.

• Ifthere is continuity, replace the alternator.
BACK
4-32
Cruise Control ~
CRUISE CONTROL
SET/RESUME/CANCEL SWITCH
Test, page 4-41
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH (Built into $J8uge assembly)
Test, page 4-40 Bulb Locations, page 22-126
Adjustment, page 19-5
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
CRUISE CONTROL Input Test, page 4-38
MAIN SWITCH
Test, page 4-40
ACTUATOR ACTUATOR CABLE

Test, page 4-42 Adjustment, page 4-44
AfT GEAR POSITION SWITCH ('99 modell

Test, page 14-144
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH ('00-03 models)
Test, page 14-383
BACK
4-33
Protected by AR
Cruise Control
Circuit Diagram
DRMR'S UNDER-DASH
IGNITION SWITCH FUSE/RElAY BDX
~""""I--WHT~ ~BLK/YEL No.9 (7.5AI
(2~AI
N 47 1G1 HOlin ON (II
·9 No.6
~ (15AI
COMBWA11ON
LKlHT SWITCH
Y
and START (_I
BLKe
I REDTLK
HORN
RELAY f:- ---- --
BLKLYEL RED
CRUISE CONTROL
5 MAW SWITCH
......+-- LTGRN/BLU INDICATOR
LKlHT
10.84W)
~
I:
HORN
SET
HORN SWITCH
RE-
I 0 CEL I 0 SUME CANCEL
CRUISE
CONTROL
IRESUME/
SET/
LT RN B
~ MULTI'LEX
;
SWITCH CONTROL
UNIT (Drivar'11
LTGRN
BRAKE ILK
PEDAL
POSITION ~~-------d! ,PCM
• GAUGE
-I
SWITCH CRUISE
CABLE ASSEMBLY INDICATOR
LKlHT
(lAWI
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH GAUGE
FUSE/RELAY ASSEMBLY
BOX
BLU/8LK
L-I-I-JN
7 12 4 13
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT 10
11 8 14
IRN/WHT BRN/ILK ILK
TRANSMISSION RANGE
CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH
ACTUATOR PCM ON: III ~,rD!] for '99 model )
[ : mil,~, ~for'OO-03morfa1s
1
G202
I
G101
I
G501
BACK
4-34
I..!:!!!..I
Symptom Troubleshooting Index
NOTE:
• The numbers in the table show the troubleshooting sequence .
• Before troubleshooting,
- check that the speedometer works properly.
- check the No.9 (7.SA) and No.6 (1SA) fuses in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and No. 47 (20A) fuse in the
under-hood fuse/relay box.
- check that the horn sounds.
- check the tachometer to see if it works properly.
Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for

Cruise control cannot be set 1. Check main switch (see page 4-40) • Poor ground: G101
2. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-41) • Open circuit, loose
3. Test brake pedal position switch (see page 4-40) and or disconnected
check its adjustment (see page 19-5) terminals: BLK/YEL,
4. '99 model: Check AIT gear position switch (see page LTGRN,LTGRN/
14-144) RED, GRY, LT BLU
'00-03 models: Check transmission range switch (see (BLU/VEL for '00-
page 14-383) 03 models), BLU/
S. Check control unit (see page 4-38) WHT
Cruise control can be set, but 1. Check dimming circuit in gauge (see page 22-110) • Poor ground: GS01
indicator light does not go on 2. Check control unit (see page 4-38) • Open circuit, loose
or disconnected
terminals: YEL,
BLU/BLK
Cruise speed is noticeably 1. Check actuator and cable deflection (see page 4-42)
higher or lower than what 2. Check control unit (see page 4-38)
was set
Excessive overshooting or 1. Check actuator and cable deflection (see page 4-42)
undershooting when trying to 2. Check control unit (see page 4-38)
set speed
Speed fluctuates on a flat 1. Check actuator and cable deflection (see page 4-42)
road with cruise control set 2. Check control unit (see page 4-38)
Vehicle does not decelerate 1. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-41) Open circuit, loose or
or accelerate accordingly 2. Check control unit (see page 4-38) disconnected
when SET/RESUME/CANCEL terminals:
button is pushed LT GRf'.!/RED, LT
GRN/BLK
Set speed not cancelled 1. '99 model: Check AIT gear position switch (see page Short to ground in
(engine rpm stays high) when 14-144) the LT BLU wire (BLU
shift lever is moved to '00-03 models: Check transmission range switch (see /VEL wire for '00-03
Neutral position page 14-383) models)
2. Check control unit (see page 4-38)
Set speed not cancelled when 1. Test brake pedal position switch (see page 4-40)and Open circuit, loose or
brake pedal is pushed check its adjustmet (see page 19-5) disconnected
2. Check control unit (see page 4-38) terminals: WHT/BLK
(cont'd)
BACK
4-35
Protected by AR
Cruise Control
Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)

Set speed does not cancel 1. Check main switch (see page 4-40) Short to power in the
when main switch is pushed 2. Check control unit (see page 4-38) LTGRNwire
OFF
Set speed does not cancel 1. Check SET/RESU ME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-41) Open circuit, loose or
when CANCEL button is 2. Check control unit (see page 4-38) disconnected
pushed terminals: LT GRN/
RED, LT GRN/BLK
Set speed will not resume 1. Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-41) Open circuit, loose or
when RESUME button is 2. Check control unit (see page 4-38) disconnected
pushed (with main switch on, terminals: LT GRN/ .
set speed is temporarily BLK
cancelled)
The transmission shifts down 1. Troubleshoot the cruise control communication Open circuit, loose or
slower than normal when circuit (see page 4-37) disconnected
going up a hill with the cruise terminals: BLU/GRN
control on - --- -_ .- - - -
BACK
4-36
Protected by AR r:-:'I
l!:!!!.I
Cruise Control Communication Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: After troubleshooting, perform the powertrain 7. Connect a voltmeter between the No.8 terminal of
control module (PCM) idle learn procedure (see page the cruise control unit 14P connector and body
11-158). ground. Test-drive the vehicle at speeds over
25 mph (40 km/h) with the cruise control set, and
1. Start the engine. watch the voltmeter.
2. Turn on the cruise control main switch, then drive CRUISE CONTROL UNIT 14P CONNECTOR
the vehicle to speeds over 25 mph (40 km/h) with

the cruise control.
I--+--+--+-+-+-+--i Wire side of
'-r.l......-.l.-.l.-.L.....;;~...L.-~ female terminals
Does the cruise control operate?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO - Check the cruise control unit or cruise control

actuator..
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

Is there about 1 V?
4. Disconnect cruise control unit 14P connector and
powertrain control module (PCM) connector A YES - Go to step 8.
(32P).
NO-Substitute a known-good cruise control unt.
5. Check for continuity between the No.8 terminal of If the system works properly, replace the cruise
the cruise control unit 14P connector and body control unit.•
ground.
8. Connect a voltmeter between PCM connector
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT 14P CONNECTOR terminal A5 and body ground. Drive the vehicle at
speeds over 25 mph (40 km/h) with the cruise
control set, and watch the voltmeter.
1 234 567
Wire side of
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 female terminals PCM CONNECTOR A (32P)
BLU/GRN
/BLU/GRN
VI2 3 4 567 8 9 10 111

112113 14 15 V 17 18 19 20 21 V 23 241
Y. 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
'--

-
YES- Repair short to ground in the wire between
PCM connector terminal A5 and the cruise control Is there about 1 V?
unit 14P connector terminal No.8 .•
YES-Check for loose connectors ofthe BLU/GRN
NO- Go to step 6. wire between the cruise control unit and PCM.
If necessary replace the PCM and recheck (see page
6. Reconnect the cruise control unit 14P connector 11-4) .•
and PCM connector A (32P).
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
connector terminal A5 and the cruise control unit
14P connector terminal No.8 .•
BACK
4-37
Protected by AR
Cruise Control
Control Unit Input Test

SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the SRS before performing
repairs or service (see page 23-17).
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover.
2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the control unit.
3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact .
• If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
• If the terminals look OK, go to step 4.
LTGRN/RED
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
LTGRN/BLK
LT BLU ('99 model)

BLU/YEL ('00-03 models)
BRN/WHT
/
BLU/BLK BLU/WHT
BRN/BLK
4. With the 14P connector disconnected, make these input tests.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not
obtained
1 BRN Connect battery power Check the operation of the magnetic • Faulty actuator
clutch: Clutch should click and • Poor ground (G202)
output link should be locked. • An open in the wire
• Short to ground
2 GRY Ignition switch ON (II), main Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty brake pedal position switch
switch ON and brake pedal There should be 0 V with the pedal • An open in the wire
depressed, then released depressed and battery voltage with • Open in main switch
the pedal released. • Blown No.6 (15A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relav box
3 BlK Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
4-38 BACK
~
Cavity Wire TlISt condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not
obtained
4 BlK! Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.6 (15A) fuse in the
YEl There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
• An ODen in the wire
5 WHT/ Brake pedal depressed, then Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 47 (20A) fuse in the
BlK released There should be battery voltage with under-hood fuse/relay box
the pedal depressed, and 0 V with • Faulty brake pedal position switch
the pedal released. • An open in the wire
6 lTGRN/ Set button pushed Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 47 (20A) fuse in the
RED There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse/relay box
When testing terminal No.6, there • Faulty horn relay
should be no voltage on terminal • Faulty set/resume/cancel switch
No.7. • Faulty cable reel
7 lTGRN/ Resume button pushed Check for voltage to ground: • An open in the wire
BlK There should be battery voltage.
When testing terminal No.7, there
should be no voltage on terminal
No.6.
8 BlU/GRN Reconnect the cruise control Check for voltage to ground: There • loose connection at the PCM
unit 14P connector, start the should be about 1V • Fauty cruise control unit
engine, turn the main switch ON • Short to ground
and drive the vehicle to speeds
over 25 mph (40 km/h) with the
cruise control set.
9 BRN/wHT Connect battery power to the Check the opration of the actuator • Fauty actuator
11 BRN/BlK BRN/WHTterminal and ground motor: You should be able to hear • An open in the wire
to the BRN/BlK terminal the motor
10 BlU/ Ignition switch ON (II) Attach to ground: • Blown bulb
BlK Cruise indicator light in the gauge • Blown No.9 (7.5A) fuse in the
assembly should comes on. under-dash driver's fuse/relay box
• Faulty dimming circuit in the
gauge assembly
12 BlU/ Ignition switch ON (II) and main Check for voltage between the BlUt • FaultyPCM
WHT switch ON; raise the front of the WHT (+) and BlK (-) terminals: • An open in the wire
vehicle, and rotate one wheel There should be 0-5 Vor more • Short to ground
slowly while holding the other repeatedly.
wheel
13 lTGRN Ignition switch ON (II) and main Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.6 (15A)fuse in the
switch ON There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty main switch
• An open in the wire
14 lTBlU Shift lever in 00, ~ or.D!I (~, ~ Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty transmission range switch
(BLU/YEL or D!I for '00-03 models) There should be continuity. • Poor ground (G101)
'OO'{)3 NOTE: There should be no • An open in the wire
modelsl continuity when shift lever is in
other positions.
5. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. If all the input tests prove OK, the control
unit must be faulty. Substitute a known-good control unit and retest. If the system works properly, replace the control unit.
BACK
4-39
Protected by AR
Cruise Control
Brake Pedal Position Switch Test Main Switch Test/Replacement

1. Disconnect the 4P connector from the switch (A). 1. Carefully pry the switch (A) out of the instrument
panel.
~
B
2. Remove the brake pedal position switch. c
3. Check for continuity between the terminals 2. Disconnect the 8P connector (B) from the switch.
according to the table.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
• If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch position according to the table. If there is no
brake pedal position switch and adjust the pedal continuity, replace the bulbs (C) or the switch.
height (see page 19-5) .
• If OK, install the brake pedal position switch and Terminal
adjustthe pedal height (see page 19-5). Position
Terminal OFF
1\ 1 2 3 4
Brake Switch \ ON
DEPRESSED 0- --0
RELEASED 0 _ ._ -
-0
BACK
4-40
~
Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Test/Replacement
1. Carefully remove the set/resume/cancel switch 3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
cover (A) by prying between the cover and the switch position according to the table.
switch (8) in the sequence shown.
• If there is continuity and it matches the table, but
switch failure occurred on the cruise control unit
input test, check and repair the wire hamess on
the switch circuit .
• If there is no continuity in one or both positions,
replace the switch.
\ Terminal
1 2 3
A Position \
SET (ON) 0 -0
RESUME (ON) ""' '"
0 -0
CANCEL (ON) I -0
2. Remove the two screws (A), then remove the

switch (8).
Terminal side of male

terminals
BACK
4-41
Protected by AR
Cruise Control
Actuator Test
1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the actuator 6. Check the operation of the actuator motor in each
(B). output linkage position according to the table. You
should be able to hear the motor.
Battery power Output linkage position

polarities
+) -) ULL ~IDDLE ULL
~LOSE ~OSITION bPEN
~o. 4 ~0.3 rT'he motor [The motor trhe motor
lTerminal tr~rminal uns. uns. !stops.
No.3 No.4 [The motor [The motor trhe motor
terminal erminal ~tops . uns. runs.
Terminal side of male terminals
2. Remove the cover (A), and check the output linkage

(B) for smooth movement.
FUll CLOSE
7. If the actuator motor does not operate as specified,

replace the actuator assembly.
3. Connect the battery power to the No.2 terminal

and ground to the No.1 terminal.
4. Check for a clicking sound from the magnetic clutch.

The output linkage should be locked.
5. If the output linkage is not locked, replace the

actuator assembly.
4-42 BACK
I.!!:!!.I
Actuator ICable Replacement
1. Loosen the locknut (A)' then disconnect the 4. Remove the actuator cover (A), then remove the
actuator cable (B) from the throttle linkage. actuator cable (B) from the actuator.
2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the actuator.
6x 1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
5. Remove the actuator (A) from the bracket (B).
3. Remove the three mounting bolts, and remove the

actuator assembly (B).
6. Install in the reverse order of removal, and adjust
the free play at the throttle linkage after connecting
the actuator cable.
BACK 4-43
Protected by AR
Cruise Control
Actuator Cable Adjustment
1. Check that the actuator cable (A) moves smoothly 5. Turn the adjusting nut (A) until it is 3.75±0.5 mm
with no binding or sticking. (0.15±0.02 in.) away from the bracket (B).
3.7S±O.S mm (O.1S±O.02 in.1
IT
D
~-
~~~
C
r \ A
c/
B B
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with 6. Pull the cable so that the adjusting nut (A) touches
no load (in Park or Neutral) until the radiator fan the bracket, then tighten the locknut (B).
comes on, then let it idle.
3. Measure the amount of movement of the output

linkage (B) until the engine speed starts to increase.
At first, the output linkage should be located at the
fully closed position (C). The free play (0) should be
A~ ..
3.75±0.5 mm (0.15±0.02 in.).
4. If the free play is not within specs, move the cable

to the point where the engine speed starts to
increase, then tighten the locknut (A) and adjusting
nut (B).
/
A
/
BACK
4-44
Engine Mount Control System I.!:!!I
FRONT MOUNT
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
REAR MOUNT Troubleshooting, page 4-47
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)

Troubleshooting, page 4-47
BACK
4-45
Protected by AR
Circuit Diagram
UNDBI-HOOO FUSE/RElAY BOX
e
lAmAr No .•1 112M1
~
No.4Z I80AI
IGNITION
I J SWITCH
IGI HOT in ON III

InCISTART(II)
BU<LYEL
No.1
liSA)
IUNDER-DASH
DRIVER'S
FUSE/RElAY BOX
BlK/YEL
ENGMMOUNT
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
PCM
II
GIOI
BACK
4-46
I..:!..I
Troubleshooting
Special Tool Required 6. Measure voltage between the No.2 terminal and
Vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg body ground.
A973X-041-XXXXX
SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
NOTE: Check the vacuum hoses and lines for damage
and proper connections before troubleshooting.
Follow this procedure if the engine vibrates excessively

when idling.
Wire side of
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating female terminals
temperature (the cooling fan comes on twice).
Is the idle speed less than 680 rpm (750 rpm

for '02-03 models)?
=
YES-Go to step 2.
Is there battery voltage?
NO - Adjustthe idle speed (see page 11-157).•
YES- Go to step 7.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal.
NO- Repair open in the wire between engine
3. With the transmission in gear, have an assistant mount control solenoid valve and No.6 (15A) fuse
disconnect and reconnect the engine mount control in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box .•
solenoid valve 2P connector from the engine
mount control solenoid valve. 7. Measure voltage between the No.1 terminal and
No.2 terminal.
Is there a noticeable change in idle smoothness
when the engine mount control solenoid valve 2P ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL
connector is disconnected?
YES - Reconnect the engine mount control MCS

solenoid valve 2P connector to the solenoid valve. IG 1 (GRN/WHTI
The engine mount control system is OK.• (BLK/'/}.YE~L~I-t~;-1
NO - Go to step 4.
4. Shift to Park or Neutral position.
5. Disconnect the engine mount control solenoid Wire side of

valve 2P connector from the engine mount control female terminals
solenoid valve.
YES - Go to step 8.
NO-Repair open in the wire between powertrain

control module (PCM) (A2) and the engine mount
control solenoid valve 2P connector. If the wire is
OK, substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.•
(cont'd)
BACK
4-47
Protected by AR
Troubleshooting (cont'd)
8. Raise the engine speed above 1,000 rpm. 11. Release the vacuum, then apply vacuum again.
9. Measure voltage between the engine mount Is there a noticeable change in idle smoothness
control solenoid valve 2P connector No.1 terminal with and without vacuum applied?
and No.2 terminal.
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Replace the front engine mount and/or rear
engine mount..
MCS
IG 1 (GRN/WHTI 12. Disconnect the upper vacuum hose (A) from the
(BLK/~ engine mount control solenoid valve (8) and
connect a vacuum pump/gauge to the hose.
'---~(::i)}----' AS73X-041-XXXXX
/B
Wire side of
female terminals
YES- Repair short to body ground in the wire

between PCM (A2) and the engine mount control
solenoid valve. If the wire is OK, substitute a
known-good PCM and recheck.•
NO-Go to step 10.

Is there manifold vacuum at idle, and a decrease
10. Disconnect the upper vacuum hose (A) from the in manifold vacuum when you raise the engine
engine mount control solenoid valve (8), and speed above 1,000 rpm?
connect a vacuum pump/gauge to the hose. Apply
vacuum for 20 seconds. YES-Replace the engine mount control solenoid
valve.•
NO - A hose is restricted or pinched or the intake

manifold port is plugged.
Does the engine mount hold vacuum?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Either the vacuum hose or one of the engine

mounts has a vacuum leak. Repair as needed .•
BACK
4-48
Protected by AR
Engine Mechanical
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal ........................................................... 5-2
Engine Installation ........................................................ 5-13
Cylinder Head ........... I... ...... ..... ......... ..... ............ 6-1
Engine Block ............... I... I............. I........ .... ... .... 7-1
Engine Lubrication ................. I ••••••••• 1 ••••••••• II.... 8-1

Intake Manifold/Exhaust System ................... 9-1
Engine Cooling .................................................. 10-1
Protected by AR
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal
NOTE: 5. Remove the intake manifold cover rOO-03 models).

• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
• To avoid damage, unplug the wiring connectors
carefully while holding the connector portion.
• Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or
hoses, or interfere with other parts.
J32A2 engine shown:
,
1. Remove the support struts (A) from the engine
hood. Move the hood to a vertical position, then
I
reinstall the support strut as shown.
NOTE: Do not attempt to close the hood with the

support strut in the vertical position, as it will
damage the support strut and hood.
6. Remove the water bypass hoses (A). Disconnect

the TeS control valve actuator connector (B) and
the TeS control valve angle sensor connector (e)
from the TeS control valve assembly, then remove
// the bolt (D) securing the TeS control valve bracket
(J32A2 engine).
2. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio,
then write down the frequencies for the radio's
preset buttons.
3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first,

then the positive cable.
4. Remove the battery.
5-2 BACK
Protected by AR
7. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister 9. Remove the harness clamp (A), then remove the
hose (A) from the throttle body. battery base (B).
'99 model:
A
A
10. Remove the battery base bracket (C).

'00-03 models (J32A2 engine shown):
11 . Remove the starter cable (A).
8. Remove the vacuum hose (B) and breather pipe (C),

then remove the intake air duct (D). 12. Remove the ground cable (B) ('02-03 models).
(cont'd)
BACK 5-3
Protected by AR
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont'd)
13. Remove the throttle cable (A) and cruise control 16. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-163).
cable (8) by loosening the locknuts (C), then slip the
cable ends out ofthe accelerator linkage. Take care 17. Remove the fuel feed hose (A) and fuel return hose
not to bend the cables when removing them. (8).
Always replace any kinked cable with a new one.
'99 model:
A
~---
J//
~fjrtil
14. Remove the ground cable (A) and harness clamp

(8) (J32A2 engine). '00-03 models:
/
@)f)((fJy
15. Disconnect the engine wire harness connectors (C),

and remove the harness clamp (D) on the left side
of the engine compartment.
5-4
BACK
Protected by AR
18. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A) and 19. Remove the engine wire harness clamps.
vacuum hose (B).
'99 model:
B
'00-03 models:
(cont'd)
BACK 5-5
Protected by AR
Engine Assembly
20. Remove the vacuum hoses (A), then disconnect the 24. Disconnect the powertrain control module (PCM)
primary heated oxygen sensor (primary H02S) connectors (A) from the PCM, and remove the
connector (B). harness clamps (B).
B
~
25. Remove the grommet mounting nuts (A), then pull

A out the engine wire harness.
21 . Remove the battery cables (A) from the under-hood

fuse relay box (B).
o
22. Remove the flange bolt (C), then remove the

under-hood fuse relay box.
23. Remove the harness clamps (D).
5-6 BACK
Protected by AR
26. Move the auto-tensioner (A) to remove tension 29. Disconnect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS)
from the alternator belt (B), then remove the connector (A) ('99 model).
alternator belt.
A
27. Loosen the adjusting nut (A), remove the locknut

(B) and mounting bolt (e), then remove the power 30. Remove the power steering speed sensor (B). Do
steering (P/S) pump belt (D) and pump without not remove the hoses (J32A1 engine).
disconnecting the PIS hoses.
31. Remove the radiator cap.
32. Raise the hoist to full height.
33. Remove the front tires/wheels.
34. Remove the splash shield.
28. Remove the PIS hose clamp (E).
(cont'd)
BACK
5-7
Protected by AR
Engine Assembly
35. Loosen the drain plug in the radiator to drain the 42. Remove the bolts (A) securing the shift cable holder
engine coolant (see page 10-13). (8), then remove the shift cable cover (e). To
prevent damage to the control lever joint, be sure
36. Drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF): to remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder
• '99 model (see page 14-109). before removing the bolts securing the shift cable
• '00-03 models (see page 14-350). cover.
37. Drain the engine oil. Reinstall the drain bolt using a
new washer (see page 8-5).
38. Remove exhaust pipe A.
43. Remove the lock bolt (D) securing the control lever
(E), then remove the shift cable (F) with the control
lever. Take care not to bend the shift cable while
removing it.
39. Remove the damper forks (see step 2 on page 18- 44. Unplug the PIS hose clamps (A), and disconnect the
19). engine mount control vacuum hose (8).
40. Disconnect the suspension lower arm ball joints

(see page 18-17).
41. Remove the driveshafts (see step 10 on page 16-4).

Coat all precision finished surfaces with clean
engine oil. Tie plastic bags over the driveshaft ends.
A B
5-8 BACK
Protected by AR
45. Lower the hoist, then remove the upper radiator 47. Remove the ATF cooler hoses (A), then plug the
hose (A), and the lower radiator hose (8). ATF cooler hoses and lines ('99 model).
A
46. Remove the heater hoses.
'99 model:
JJ 48. Remove the ground cable (8) (J32A 1 engine).
49. Remove the PIS hose clamp from the rear beam.
/
'00-03 models:
(cont'd)
BACK 5-9
Protected by AR
Engine Assembly
50. Attach the chain hoist to the engine as shown. 52. Remove the rear mount bracket support nut (A) and
mounting bolt (B).
'99 model:
'00-03 models:
51. Remove the side engine mount bracket.
5-10 BACK
Protected by AR
53. Remove the front mount bracket support nut. 56. Make a mark (A) on the front beam (8) and rear
beam (e), then remove the front beam.
57. Remove the Ale compressor without disconnecting

the Ale hoses.
54. Make sure the hoist brackets are positioned

properly. Raise the hoist to full height.
55. Remove the flange bolts securing the radius rods.

o
(cont'd)
BACK 5-11
Protected by AR
Engine Assembly
58. Remove the rear mount bracket. 59. Remove the transmission lower rear mount.
'99 model:
60. Check that the engine/transmission is completely

free of vacuum hoses, fuel and coolant hoses and
'00-03 models: electrical wiring.
61. Slowly lower the engine about 150 mm (6 in.).

Check once again that all hoses and wires are
disconnected from the engine/transmission.
62. Lower the engine all the way. Disconnect the chain
hoist from the engine.
63. Remove the engine from under the vehicle.
5-12
BACK
Protected by AR
Engine Installation
1. Install the accessory brackets. Tighten their bolts and nuts to the specified torques.
8x 1.25mm
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m, 16 Ibf·ttl
P/SPUMP
BRACKET
10x 1.25 mm
38N·m
13.9 kgf·m, 28 Ibf·ttl
10x 1.25 mm
44N·m
(cont'd)
BACK
5-13
Protected by AR
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd)
2. Position the engine under the vehicle. Attach the 4. Install the rear mount bracket.
chain hoist to the engine, then lift the engine into
position in the vehicle. '99 model:
INOTICE I
Reinstall the mounting bolts/nuts in the
sequence given. Failure to follow this
sequence may cause excessive noise and
vibration, and reduce bushing life.
3. Install the transmission lower rear mount.
I
10x 1.25 mm
38 N·m (3.9 kgf·m. 28 Ibf·ft)
'00-03 models:
10 x 1.25 mm
38 N·m (3.9 kgf·m, 28 Ibf·ft)
12x L :: llm
54N·m
(5.5 kgf·m,
40 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
BACK
5-14
Protected by AR
5. Install the AlC compressor. 8. Tighten the flange bolts on the radius rods.
!
8x1.25mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
6. Install the front beam. Align mark (A) on the rear

beam (B) and front beam (C), then tighten the bolts.
9. Lower the hoist.
10. Tighten the front mount bracket support nut.
12 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 Ibf·ft)
~a
c
s:r--~o x 1.25mm
II 38N.m
~ (3.9 kgf·m, 28Ibf·ft)
J32A 1 engine:
12x 1.25mm
64N·m
(6.5 kgf·m, 40 Ibf·ft)
E J32A2 engine:
10x 1.25mm 12x 1.25mm
38N·m 113 N·m
(3.9 kgf·m, 28 Ibf·ft) /11.5 kgf·m , 83lbf·tt)
14x 1.5mm
103N·m
(10.5 kgf·m, 76 Ibf·tt)
Replace.
7. Tighten the transmission lower rear mount

mounting nuts (0) and transmission lower front
mount mounting nuts (E).
(cont'd)
BACK
5-15
Protected by AR
Engine Assembly
11. Tighten the rear mount bracket support nut (A) and 12. Install the side engine mount bracket, then tighten
mounting bolt (8). the mounting bolts in the numbered sequence
,
shown.
A
12x 1.25 mm CD 10 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m 15.5 kgf·m, 44N·m
------
40 Ibf·ftl 14.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ftl
®,,t mmJ~L
'.>5
54N·m
15.5 kgf·m,
40lbf·ft) ~
B
10 x 1.25 mm
13. Remove the chain hoist from the engine.

A
~12x1.25mm
54N·m
15.5 kgf.m, 40 Ibf·ftl
." ~2x1.25mm
/ 54
15.5N·m
kgf·m, 40 Ibf.ftl
Replace.
BACK
5-16
Protected by AR
14. Raise the hoist to full height. 19. Install the control lever (A) with the shift cable, on
the control shaft. Do not bend the shift cable any
15. Install a new spring clip on the end of each more than is necessary to install the control lever.
driveshaft, then install the drives hafts. Make sure
each clip "clicks" into place in the differential and
intermediate shaft.
6x 1.0mm
16. Connect the suspension lower arm ball joints. Use 12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m,
new cotter pins (see page 18-17). 8.7Ibf·ttl
17. Install the damper fork (see step 2 on page 18-21). ~~

18. Install exhaust pipe A (A); use new gaskets (B) and
new self locking nuts (C).
C
10 x 1.25 mm
B 54N·m
Replace.
8x 1.25 mm
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m,
16lbf.ttl
20. Install the lock bolt (B) with a new lock washer (C),
then bend the lock tab of the lock washer.
21. Install the shift cable cover (D), then install the shift
cable holder (E) on the shift cable cover.
22. Install the power steering (PIS) hose on the clamps

(A), and connect the engine mount control vacuum
hose (B).
C A
10 x 1.25 mm 10 x 1.25 mm
54N·m 33N·m
15.5 kgf·m, 40 Ibf·ttl 13.4kgf·m,
Replace. 25lbf·ttl
10 x 1.25 mm Replace.
38N·m
A B
(cont'd)
BACK
5-17
Protected by AR
Engine Assembly
23. Install the splash shield. 27. Install the upper radiator hose (A) and lower
radiator hose (B).
A
28. Install the heater hoses.

24. Install the front tires/wheels.
'99 model:
25. Lower the hoist.
26. Install the PIS hose clamp.

--lJ
6x 1.0mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m.
8.7Ibf·ft)
(/
'00-03 models:
5-18 BACK
Protected by AR
29. Install the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) cooler 36. Push the powertrain control module (PCM)
hoses (A) ('99 model). connectors through the bulkhead. Install the
grommet, and tighten the mounting nuts (A).
A
6x1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ftl
37. Connect the PCM connector (A), and install the

harness clamps (B).
30. Install the ground cable (B) (J32A 1 engine).
31. Install the alternator belt.
32. loosely install the PIS pump belt and pump.
33. Adjust the PIS pump belt (see page 17-14).
34. Install the power steering speed sensor (A) with a

new O-ring (B).
\~
8x 1.2Smm
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m, A
16lbf·ftl
35. Connect the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) connector

(C) ('99 model).
(cont'd)
BACK
5-19
Protected by AR
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (co nt'd)
38. Install the under-hood fuse relay box (A), and 41. Install the vacuum hoses (A), then connect the
tighten the flange bolt (B). primaly heated oxygen sensor (primary H02S)
connector (B).
B
6x 1.0mm
,12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m. 8.7Ibf·ftl
/
rs.._ 71D
39. Install the battery cables (e) on the under-hood fuse

relay box. Install the harness clamps (0). Install the
battery cable grommet (E).
40. Install the engine wire harness clamps.
--'' ' '
5-20 BACK
Protected by AR
42. Install the brake booster vacuum hose (A) and 43. Install the fuel feed hose (A) and fuel return hose
vacuum hose (B). (B) with new washers (e) .
'99 model: '99 model:

B A
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m,

16Ibf·ft)
'00-03 models: '00-03 models:
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m,

16Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK
5-21
Protected by AR
Engine Assembly
E~ ;~ine Installation (co nt'd)
44. Install the starter cable (A). 48. Install the battery base bracket (A). then install the
battery base (8) and harness clamp (e).
/10x 1.25 mm
, 44N·m
6x 1.0mm (4.5 kgf·m. 33 Ibf·ft)
12N·m
(1.2 kgf·m. 8.7Ibf·ft)
~
@
\
8x 1.25mm
9N·m
c
(0.9 kgf·m. 7 Ibf·ft)
45. Install the ground cable (8) ('02-03 models).
46. Install the ground cable (A) and harness clamp (8)
(J32A2 engine).
47. eonnectthe engine wire harness connectors (e).

and install the harness clamp (D) on the left side of
the engine compartment.
5-22 BACK
Protected by AR
49. Install the intake air duct (A), then install the 51. Install and adjustthe cruise control cable (see page
vacuum hose (8) and breather pipe (C). 4-44).
'99 model: 52. Install and adjust the throttle cable (see page 11-
188).
53. Tighten the bolt (A) securing the TCS control valve
bracket. Connect the TCS control valve angle
sensor connector (8), TCS control valve actuator
connector (C) and water bypass hoses (D) on the
TCS control valve assembly (J32A2 engine).
8x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 Ibf·ft)
54. Install the intake manifold cover ('00-03 models).
J32A2 engine shown:

6x 1.0mm
12N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft)
~ ,
50. Install the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister
hose (D).
(cont'd)
BACK 5-23
Protected by AR
Engine Assembly
55. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and

cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble
them and apply grease to prevent corrosion.
56. Refill the engine with engine oil (see page 8-5).
57. Refill the automatic transmission fluid (ATF):

• '99 model (see page 14-109) .
• '00-03 models (see page 14-350).
58. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed

air from the cooling system with the heater valve
open (see page 10-13).
59. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that
the AfT gear position indicator follows the
transmission range switch.
60. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch ON

(II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel pump
runs for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel
line. Repeat this operation two or three times, then
check for fuel leakage at any point in the fuel line.
61. Perform the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-
158).

63. Inspect the idle speed (see page 11-157).
64. Inspectthe ignition timing (see page 4-16).
65. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter
the customer's radio station presets.
BACK
5-24
Protected by AR
Engine Mechanical
Cylinder Head
Special Tools .................................................................... 6-2
Component Location Index ............................................. 6-3
DTC Troubleshooting ...................................................... 6-6
VTEC Solenoid Valve Test ............................................... 6-9
Engine Compression Inspection ..................................... 6-10
VTEC Rocker Arms Test ................................................... 6-11
Valve Clearance Adjustment ........................................... 6-13
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation .................. 6-16
Timing Belt Inspection ..................................................... 6-17
Timing Belt Removal ....................................................... 6-18
Timing Belt Installation .................................................... 6-21
Cylinder Head Cover Removal ........................................ 6-31
Cylinder Head Cover Installation .................................... 6-32
Cylinder Head Removal ................................................... 6-34
Cylinder Head Inspection for Warpage .......................... 6-38
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal....... ...................... ........ 6-38
Rocker Arms and Shafts Disassembly/Reassembly ..... 6-39
Rocker Arms and Shafts Inspection ............................... 6-40
VTEC Lost Motion Assemblies Inspection ..................... 6-41
Camshaft Inspection ........................................................ 6-42
Valves, Springs, and Valve Seals
Removal ...................................................................... 6-45
Valve Inspection ............................................................... 6-46
Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Inspection ................... 6-47
Valve Guide Replacement ............................................... 6-48
Valve Seat Reconditioning .............................................. 6-50
Valves, Springs, and Valve Seals Installation ................ 6-52
Camshaft/Rocker Arms, Camshaft
Seal, and Pulley Installation ...................................... 6-53
Cylinder Head Installation ............................................... 6-54
CMP (TDC) Sensor Replacement .................................... 6-59
CKP Sensor Replacement ................................................ 6-60
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Descr~ion atv i

CD 07HAH-PJ7010B Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm 1
® 07 JAA-OO 1020A Socket, 19 mm 1 I
® 07 JAB-OO 1020A Holder Handle 1

CD 07 MAB-PY30 1OA Holder Attachment, 50 mm, Offset 1 I
® 07NAJ-P07010A Pressure Gauge Adaptor 1

® 07VAJ -P8A010A VTEC Air Adaptor 1
CD 07VAJ-P8A020A VTEC Air Stopper 1
®-1 07406-0070300 A!f Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 1
®-2 07MAJ -PY4011A A!f Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 1
®-3 07MAJ-PY40120 A!f Pressure Hose Adapter 1
® 07742-0010100 Valve Guide Driver, 5.5 mm 1
I @ 07757-PJ1010A Valve Spring Compressor Attachment
..
1
~
..~--.. ---.
~
-- " ,, '
( FE - =c:: ~ ~ c::=:J
.
~ r--
CD ® ® CD
·
, ·/ ,
®
P •
-,;,.
~\ :.
,'
®
.'
I
19
_",, "
'.
CD
.
d ®-1, ® -2, ® -3
fYE
_
"
"
:v
--::..::J .'\\'
__:'i
\ ,1,
I '
® @
BACK
6-2
Protected by AR
RUBBER SEAL ENGINE MOUNT

REAR UPPER COVER BRACKET
TIMING BELT
Removal, page 6-18
Installation, page 6-21
LOWER COVER
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
RUBBER SEAL
AUTO- TENSIONER
IDLER PULLEY BOLT CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR

IDLER PULLEY
(cant'd)
BACK
6-3
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Component Location Index (cont'd)
HEAD COVER GASKET
CYLINDER HEAD BOLT
~
WASHER
OIL CONTROL ORIFICE
CYLINDER HEAD
COVER
Removal, page 6-31
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
OIL CONTROL ORIFICE
6-4 BACK
Protected by AR
ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLIES

Removal, page 6-38
CAMSHAFT THRUST COVER
CAMSHAFT
VALVE KEEPERS
VALVE KEEPERS
INTAKE VALVE SPRING

'Jp
~
~/SPRING RETAINER
'
~EXHAUST VALVE
SPRING
A__ -EXHAUST VALVE

~ SEAL
~VALVESPRING
SEAT
'EXHAUST VALVE
GUIDE
INTAKE VALVE Replacement, page 6-48
GUIDE
CYLINDER HEAD
Removal. page 6-34
Warpage, page 6-38
Valve seat reconditioning,
@'' ' 'OO,

page 6-50
p.g. 6-54
INJECTOR BASE
GASKET
\
\ OLS~L
DOWEL PIN INTAKE VALVE
Removal, page 6-45
EXHAUST VALVE Inspection, page 6-46
BACK 6-5
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC P1259: A problem in the VTEC Oil 7. Check for continuity on the VTEC oil pressure
Pressure Switch circuit or VTEC Solenoid switch between the pressure switch 2P connector
Valve circuit. terminals NO.1 and No.2.
VTEC Oil PRESSURE SWITCH
Special Tools Required 2P CONNECTOR
• Pressure Gauge Adaptor 07NAJ-P07010A
• AfT Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 07406-0070300
• AfT Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A
• AfT Pressure Adaptor 07MAJ-PY40120
1. Do the powertrain control module (PCM) reset

procedure (see page 11-4).
2. Start the engine.
3. Warm up the engine to normal operating Terminal side of male

temperature (cooling fan comes on). terminals
4. Road Test the vehicle: Is there continuity?

Accelerate in 1st gearto an engine speed over
4,000 rpm. Hold that engine speed for at least 2 YES - Go to step 8.
seconds. If DTC P1259 is not repeated during the
first road test, repeat this test two more times. NO- Replace the VTEC oil pressure switch .•
Is ore P1259 indicated? 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES-Go to step 5. 9. Measure the voltage between VTEC oil pressure

switch harness 2P connector No.1 terminal and
NO-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. body ground.
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the
VTEC solenoid valve and PCM .• VTEC Oil PRESSURE SWITCH HARNESS
2P CONNECTOR
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. VTM

IBLU/BlK)
----,
6. Disconnect the VTEC oil pressure switch 2P
connector.
-=
Wire side of female
terminals
YES-Go to step 10.
NO -Inspect for an open or short to ground in the

wire between the VTEC oil pressure switch and the
PCM (C10). If the wire is OK, substitute a known-
good PCM and recheck .•
BACK
6-6
Protected by AR
10. Measure voltage across the VTEC oil pressure 14. Remove the VTEC oil pressure switch (A) and
switch harness 2P connector. install the special tools as shown, then reinstall the
VTEC oil pressure switc.
VTEC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH HARNESS
2P CONNECTOR A
07NAJ-P07010A
'-------{ 'Y.,I-------'
YES-Go to step 11. 15. Reconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector
and VTEC oil pressure switch 2P connector.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the VTEC oil
pressure switch and G101.lfthe wire is OK, 16. Connect a tachometer.
substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.•
17. Warm up the engine to normal operating
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. temperature (cooling fan comes on).
12. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector. 18. Check oil pressure at engine speeds of ',000, 2,000
and 3,000 rpm. Keep measuring time as short as
13. Check for continuity on the VTEC solenoid valve possible because the engine is running with no
between the solenoid valve 1P connector terminal load (less than 1 minute).
and body ground.
VTEC SOLENOID VALVE Is pressure below 49 kPa (0.5 kgf/crrf , 7 psi)?
1P CONNECTOR
YES- Go to step 19.
NO-Inspectthe VTEC solenoid valve

(see page 6-9) .•
20. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector.
21. Attach the battery positive terminal to the VTEC

= solenoid valve terminal.
Terminal side of
male terminal
22. Start the engine and check oil pressure at an engine
Is there 14- 30 Q ? speed of 3,000 rpm.
YES - Go to step 14. Is pressure above 390 kPa (4.0 kgf/crrf , 57 psi)?
NO- Replace the VTEC solenoid valve .• YES - Go to step 23.
NO -Inspect the VTEC solenoid valve

(see page 6-9) .•
(cont'd)
BACK 6-7
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
OTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
23. With the battery positive terminal still connected to 27. Check for continuity between the VTEC solenoid
the VTEC solenoid valve, measure voltage between valve 1P connector terminal and body ground.
C10 and body ground. VTEC SOLENOID VALVE HARNESS
1PCONNECTOR
PCM CONNECTOR C (31P)
VTM (BLU/BLK)
i
-= -=
Wire side offemale
Wire side of female terminal
terminals
Is there battery voltage above 4,000 rpm?
YES- Repair short in the wire between the PCM
YES - Go to step 24. (B12) and VTEC solenoid valve connector.•
NO- Replace the VTEC oil pressure switch .• NO-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.
If symptom/indication goes away, replace the
24. Turn the ignition switch OFF. original PCM .•
25. Disconnect the battery positive terminal from the

VTEC solenoid valve terminal.
26. Check for continuity between the VTEC solenoid

valve harness 1P connector terminal and the PCM
connector terminal B12.
VTEC SOLENOID VALVE HARNESS

1P CONNECTOR
PCM CONNECTOR
B (25 P)
VTS (GRN/YEL)
YES-Goto step 27.

(B12) and VTEC solenoid valve connector..
BACK
6-8
Protected by AR
VTEe Solenoid Valve Test

1. Disconnect the 1P connector from the VTEC 4. If the filter is not clogged, push the VTEC solenoid
solenoid valve. valve with your finger and check its movement. If
the VTEC solenoid valve is normal, check the
2. Measure resistance between the terminal and body engine oil pressure.
ground. 6x 1.0 mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ftl
Resistance: 14-30 Q
22 N·m /2.2 ...·m. j
o &>
3. If the resistance is within specifications, remove the

VTEC solenoid valve/oil filter assembly (A) from the
oil pump, and check the VTEC solenoid valve filter
(B) for clogging. If there is clogging, replace the
engine oil filter and the engine oil.
8x 1.25 mm
U\122.~.m~
BACK
6-9
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Engine Compression Inspection
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating 6. Disconnect the intake manifold runner control
temperature (cooling fan comes on). (IMRC) actuator connector (A), then remove the
IMRC actuator (B) (J32A2 engine).
6X1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·tt)
3. Remove the No.1 (15A) fuse from the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box.
/
.___B
4. Start the engine and let it run until it stalls.
5. Remove the intake manifold cover (A) and ignition

coil cover(s) (B).
'99 model:
7. Remove the six ignition coils from the front and

rear cylinder head.
6x 1.0 mm 6x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·tt) 8.7Ibf·tt)
/
BACK
6-10
Protected by AR
VTEC Rocker Arm Test
8. Remove the six spark plugs. Special Tools Required

• VTEC Air Adaptor 07VAJ-P8A010A
9. Attach the compression gauge to a spark plug hole. • VTEC Air Stopper 07VAJ-P8A020A
1. Remove the cylinder head covers. (see page 6-31).
2. Remove the front upper cover (see page 6-17).
3. Set the No.1 piston at top dead center (TDC) (see

step 3 on page 6-13).
4. Push on the intake mid rocker arm (A) for the No.1
cylinder. The mid rocker arm should move
independently of the primary rocker arm (B) and
10. Connect a tachometer. secondary rocker arm (C).
11. Open the throttle fully, then crank the engine with • If the intake mid rocker arm does not move,
the starter motor and measure the compression. remove the mid, primary, and secondary intake
rocker arms as an assembly, and check that the
Compression Pressure: pistons in the mid and primary rocker arms move
Above 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2, 135 psi)-200rpm smoothly.
If any rocker arm needs replacing, replace the
12. Perform the same measurement on the remaining primary, mid and secondary rocker arms as an
cylinders. assembly, and retest.
• If the mid rocker arm moves freely, go to step 5.
Maximum Variation: B
Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm', 28 psi)
13. If the compression is not within specifications,

check the following items, then remeasure the
compression.
• Damaged or worn valves and seats

• Damaged cylinder head gasket
• Damaged or worn piston rings
• Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore
c A
5. Repeat step 4 on the remaining intake mid rocker

arms with each piston at TDC. When all the mid
rocker arms pass the test, go to step 6.
6. Check that the air pressure on the shop air

compressor gauge indicates over 690 kPa (7.0 kgf/
em', 100 psi).
7. Inspect the valve clearance (see page 6-13).
8. Cover the timing belt with a shop towel to protect

the belt.
(cont'd)
BACK
6-11
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
VTEC Rocker Arm Test (cont'd)
9. Remove the two end intake rocker shaft mounting 11. Make sure that the intake primary rocker arm (A)
bolts, then install and connect the special tools and and intake secondary rocker arm (B) are
an air pressure regulator with a 0-100 psi gauge mechanically connected by the piston and that the
(A) as shown below. mid rocker arm (C) does not move when pushed
manually. If any intake mid rocker arm moves
FRONT: independently of the primary and secondary rocker
arms, replace the rocker arms as a set.
A
07VAJ-PSA020A 07VAJ-PSA010A
REAR: B c
12. Remove the tools.
13. Check for smooth operation of each lost motion

assembly (see page 6-41). Replace the lost motion
assembly if it does not move smoothly.
10. Loosen the valve on the regulator, and apply the

specified air pressure.
Specified Air Pressure:

440-540 kPa (4.5-5.5 kgf/cm 2 , 64-78 psi)
NOTE: If the synchronizing pistons A and B do not

move after applying air pressure, move the primary
or secondary rocker arm up and down manually.
BACK
6-12
Protected by AR
Valve Clearance Adjustment
1. Remove the cylinder head covers (see page 6-31). 5. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting
screw (B) and the end of the valve stem and slide it
2. Remove the front upper cover (see page 6-17). back and forth; you should feel a slight amount of
drag.
3. Set the No.1 piston at top dead center (TOC). Align
the pointer (A) on the back cover with the No.1
piston TOC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.
A B
6. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the

locknut (A), and turn the adjusting screw (B) until
4. Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the the drag on the feeler gauge is correct.
valves you're going to check. A
Intake: 0.20-0.24 mm (0.00S-0.009 in.) 7 x 0.75 mm
20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14Ibf·ft)
Exhaust: 0.2S-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.)
Adjusting screw locations:

EXHAUST
REAR:
No.1 No.2 No.3
B
No.1 No.2 No.3
7. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance.
INTAKE
Repeat the adjustment if necessary.
FRONT:
No.4 No.5 No.6
No.4 No.5 No.6
EXHAUST
(cont'd)
BACK
6-13
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Valve Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
8. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer 12. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer
(A) on the back cover with the No.4 piston TOC (A) on the back cover with the No.5 piston TDC
mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.
A B
9. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance 13. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance
on No.4 cylinder. on No.5 cylinder.
10. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer 14. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer
(A) on the back cover with the No.2 piston TOC (A) on the back cover with the No.3 piston TOC
mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.
A B A B
11. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance 15. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance
on No.2 cylinder. on No.3 cylinder.
BACK
6-14
Protected by AR
16. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer

(A) on the back cover with the No.6 piston TDC
mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.
A B
17. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance

on No.6 cylinder.
BACK
6-15
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and InstaHation
Special Tools Required Installation

• Holder Handle 07JAB-001020A
• Holder Attachment, 50 mm, Offset 07MAB-PY3010A 1. Remove any oil from the pulleys (A), crankshaft (B),
• Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A bolt (C) and washer (D). Clean and lubricate the
or a commercially available 19 mm socket points shown below.
Removal o :Clean
• : Lubricate
1. Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and
~
holder attachment (B). /A A A
.;,;
D / , B
A
07 JAB-001 020A
B
07MAB-PV3010A ~ 0 ~no oBlo 0000000 I
p-~; ;~- ;~o~-
j
Install with concave
surface facing out.
'c 07JAA-001020A
(or Commercially available)
2. Install the crankshaft pulley, and tighten the bolt to
245 N·m (25.0 kgf·m, 181 Ibf·ft). Do not use an
impact wrench.
2. Remove the bolt with a heavy duty 19 mm socket -1 Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and
(C) and breaker bar. holder attachment (B).
-2 Tighten the bolt with a torque wrench and 19
mm socket (e).
B
07MAB-PV3010A
07JAA-D01020A
(or Comme'cially available)
BACK
6-16
Protected by AR
Timing Belt Inspection
1. Remove the ignition coil cover. 3. Inspect the timing belt for cracks and oil or coolant
soaking. Replace the belt if it is oil or coolant
soaked. Remove any oil or solvent that gets on the
belt.
2. Remove the front upper cover.
BACK
6-17
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Removal
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the front tires/wheels.

• Holder Handle 07JAB-001020A
• Holder Attachment, 50 mm, Offset 07MAB-PY3010A 4. Remove the splash shield.
• Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A
or a commercially available 19 mm socket
1. Turn the crankshaft so its white mark (A) lines up

with the pointer (B).
5. Move the auto-tensioner (A) to remove tension

A
from the alternator belt (8), then remove the
alternator belt.
2. Check that the rear camshaft pulley mark (A) and

rear upper cover mark (B) are aligned.
A
BACK
6-18
Protected by AR
6. Loosen the adjusting nut (A), locknut (B) and 9. Remove the dipstick and tube (A); Discard the 0-
mounting bolt (C), then remove the power steering ring (B).
(PIS) pump belt (D).
10. Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and
o holder attachment (B).
7. Support the engine with a jack and wood block B

07MAB-PV3010A
under the oil pan.
8. Remove the side engine mount bracket.
07JAA-001020A
(or Commercially available)
11. Remove the bolt with a heavy duty 19 mm socket

(C) and breaker bar.
(cont'd)
BACK
6-19
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Removal (cont'd)
12. Remove the front upper cover (A), rear upper cover 14. Screw the battery clamp bolt in as shown to hold
(B) and lower cover (e). the timing belt adjuster in its current position.
B Tighten it by hand, do not use a wrench.
15. Remove the engine mount bracket.
c
13. Remove one ofthe battery clamp bolts from the
battery tray, and grind the end of it as shown.
r/
~
BACK
6-20
Protected by AR
Timing Belt Installation
16. Loosen the idler pulley bolt (A) about five or six NOTE: The following procedure is for installing a new
turns, then remove the timing belt. timing belt. If you are installing a used timing belt, refer
to the next procedure.
New Belt
1. Clean the timing belt pulleys, and upper and lower
covers.
2. Set the timing belt drive pulley to top dead center

(TDC) by aligning the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of
the timing belt drive pulley with the pointer (8) on
the oil pump.
(cont'd)
BACK
6-21
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Installation (cont'd)
3. Clean the camshaft pulleys. Set the camshaft 6. Hold the auto-tensioner (A) with the maintenance
pulleys to TDC by aligning the TDC marks (A) on bolt pointing up. Loosen and remove the
the camshaft pulleys with the pointers (8) on the maintenance bolt (8) ('99 model).
back covers.
NOTE: Handle the auto-tensioner carefully so the
FRONT: oil inside does not spill or leak. If any ofthe oil has
spilled or leaked out of the auto-tensioner, refill it
B A
with 5W-30 motor oil. The total capacity is 6.5 me
(0.22 fl oz).
7. Clamp the boss ofthe auto-tensioner in a soft-

jawed vise. Do not grip the housing of the auto-
REAR: tensioner ('99 model).
8. Insert a flat blade screwdriver (C) into the

A
maintenance hole. Place the retainer (D) (PIN
14540-P8A-A01) on the auto-tensioner while
turning the screwdriver clockwise to compress the
bottom ('99 model).
NOTE: Take care not to damage the threads or the

gasket contact surface with the screwdriver.
9. Reinstall the maintenance bolt (A). Always use a

new gasket (8) ('99 model).
A
8 N·m (0.8 kgf·m, 6 Ibf·ft)
4. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover.
5. Remove the auto-tensioner.
10. Make sure no oil is leaking around the maintenance

bolt.
BACK
6-22
Protected by AR
11. Align the holes on the rod and housing of the auto- 13. Install the auto-tensioner.
tensioner with a pin (A)('00-03 models).
NOTE: Make sure the retainer or pin stays in place.
'99 model:
12. Set the auto-tensioner on the hydraulic press, then

slowly compress the auto-tensioner. Insert a pin of
2.0 mm (0.08 in.) diameter through the housing and
the rod ('00-03 models).
6x 1.0 mm
NOTE: The compression pressure should not 12 N·m (1.2 kgf.m.
8.7Ibf·ft)
exceed 9,800 N (1,000 kgf, 2,200Ibf).
'00-03 models:
~
6x1.Omm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m. 8.7Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK
6-23
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
14. Install the timing belt in a counter clockwise 16. Remove the retainer or pin from the auto-tensioner.
sequence starting with the drive pulley.
'99 model:
c
'00-03 models:
15. Tighten the idler pulley bolt.
10x 1.25 mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf.m, 33 Ibf·ft)
6-24 BACK
Protected by AR
17. Install the engine mount bracket. 19. Clean the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer.
20. Clean all oil off the inside face (A) of the crankshaft
pulley, and apply lubricant to the pulley bolt (B) and
washer (C).
6x 1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, C A
8.7Ibf·ftl
~10X1.25mm
&/-- 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ftl
21. Install the crankshaft pulley, and tighten the bolt to
245 N·m (25.0 kgf·m, 181 Ibf·ft). Do not use an
impact wrench.
18. Install the lower cover (A), front upper cover (B)
and rear upper cover (C). -1 Hold the pulley with holder handle (A) and
holder attachment (B).
-2 Tighten the bolt with a torque wrench and
19 mm socket (C).
B
07MAB-PY3010A
"-c 07 JAA-001 020A

(or Commercially availablel
6x 1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ftl 22. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about five or six turns
clockwise so the timing belt positions on the
pulleys.
(cont'd)
BACK
6-25
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
23. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A) 25. Install the dipstick and tube (A) with a new O-ring
lines up with the pointer (8). (8).
24. Check the camshaft pulley marks .
• If the camshaft pulley marks are at TDC, go to 26. Install and adjust the PIS pump belt
step 25 . (see page 17-14).
• If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TDC,
remove the timing belt and repeat steps 2 27. Install the alternator belt.
through 21.
28. Install the side engine mount bracket, then tighten
FRONT CAMSHAFT PULLEY: the mounting bolts in the numbered sequence
shown.
CD 10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m 14.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ft)
~
®12x1.25mm
\5.5k~.m.@lhl,~ ~
REAR CAMSHAFT PULLEY:
6-26
BACK
Protected by AR
Used Belt 3. Clean the camshaft pulleys. Set the camshaft

pulleys to TOC by aligning the TOC marks (A) on
Follow this procedure when installing a used timing the camshaft pulleys with the pointers (B) on the
belt. back covers.
1. Clean the timing belt pulleys, and upper and lower FRONT:
covers.
B A
2. Set the timing belt drive pulley to TOC by aligning
the TOC mark (A) on the tooth of the timing belt
drive pulley with the pointer (8) on the oil pump.
B
\ A
REAR:
B
A
(cont'd)
BACK
6-27
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Installation (co nt'd)
4. If the auto-tensioner has extended and the timing 7. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover.
belt cannot be installed, remove and compress the
auto-tensioner.
5. Install the timing belt in a counterclockwise

sequence starting with the drive pulley. Take care
not to damage the timing belt when installing it.
-1 Drive pulley (A).

-2 Idler pulley (8).
-3 Front camshaft pulley (e).
-4 Water pump pulley (D).
-5 Rear camshaft pulley (E).
-6 Adjusting pulley (F).
8. Install the engine mount bracket.
6. Tighten the idler pulley bolt.
~
-
D 10x 1.25mm
44 N·m 14.5 kgf·m, 33lbf·ftl
10x 1.25mm
44 N·m 14.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ft)
BACK
6-28
Protected by AR
9. Install the lower cover (A), front upper cover (8) 12. Install the crankshaft pulley, and tighten the bolt to
and rear upper cover (C). 245 N·m (25.0 kgf·m, 181 Ibf·ft). Do not use an
c impact wrench.
\ -1 Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and

holder attachment (8).
-2 Tighten the bolt with a torque wrench and
19 mm socket (C).
B
07MAB-PV3010A
/
B
~c
6x 1.0mm 07JAA-001020A
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft) (or Commercially available)
10. Clean the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer. 13. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about five or six turns
clockwise so the timing belt positions on the
11. Clean any oil off the inside face (A) of the pulleys.
crankshaft pulley, and apply lubricant to the pulley
bolt (8) and washer (C). 14. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A)
c A lines up with the pointer (8).
B A
(cont'd)
BACK
6-29
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Installation (co nt'd)
15. Check the camshaft pulley marks. 16. Install the dipstick and tube (A) with a new D-ring
(B) .
• Ifthe camshaft pulley marks are at TOC, go to A
step 16.
• If the camshaft pulley marks are not at TOC,
remove the timing belt and repeat steps 2
through 11.
FRONT CAMSHAFT PULLEY:
17. Install and adjust the PIS pump belt

(see page 17-14).
18. Install the alternator belt.
REAR CAMSHAFT PULLEY: 19. Install the side engine mount bracket, then tighten
the mounting bolts in the numbered sequence
shown.
CD 10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m(4.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ft)
~
54\.. 40 'bf·ft'
®12x 1.25mm
'gI·m.
BACK
6-30
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head Cover Removal
1. Remove the strut brace. 4. Remove the two bolts securing the wire harness
holder (J32A2 engine).
2. Remove the power steering (PIS) hose clamp (A).
5. Remove the six ignition coils from the front and

rear cylinder head.
3. Disconnect the intake manifold runner control

(IMRe) actuator connector (B), then remove the
IMRe actuator (e) (J32A2 engine).
(cont'd)
BACK
6-31
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Cover Removal Cylinder Head Cover Installation

(cont'd)
1. Install the cylinder head covers.
6. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-5). NOTE:

• Before installing the cylinder head cover, clean
7. Remove the cylinder head cover. the cylinder head contacting surfaces with a shop
towel.
• Take care not to damage the spark plug seal
when installing the cylinder head cover.
• Visually check the spark plug seals for damage.
• Replace the washer if it is damaged or
deteriorated.
2. Tighten the nuts in two or three steps. In the final

step, tighten all nuts, in sequence, to 12 N·m (1.2
kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf.ft).
® CD ®
cv ®
BACK
6-32
Protected by AR
3. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-8). 6. Install the intake manifold runner control (lMRe)
actuator (A), then connect the IMRe actuator
4. Install the six ignition coils. connector (B) (J32A2 engine).
6x 1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m. 8.7Ibf.ft~) 6 x 1.0 mm
~ 12 N·m (1 .2 kgf·m,
.............. /C 8.7 Ibf·ft)
If/ ~A
6x 1.0 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ft)
5. Install the wire harness holder, then secure the

bolts (J32A2 engine). 7. Install the power steering (PIS) hose clamp (e).
6x1 .0mm 8. Install the strut brace.

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ft)
/8x1.25mm
/ ~ 22 N'm (2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
BACK 6-33
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal
NOTE: 8. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-163).

• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces. 9. Remove the fuel feed hose (A) and fuel return hose
• To avoid damage, unplug the wiring connectors (B).
carefully while holding the connector portion.
• To avoid damaging the cylinder head, wait until the '99 model:
engine coolant temperature drops below 100°F (38°C)
'C A
before loosening the cylinder head bolts.
• Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection. , "'-._ - - -
Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or
hoses, or interfere with other parts.
preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
3. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-13).
4. Remove the alternator belt (see page 4-23).
5. Loosen the adjusting nut (A), and remove the

locknut (B) and mounting bolt (C), then remove the
power steering (PIS) pump belt (D) and pump '00-03 models:
without disconnecting the PIS hoses.
/
A
@J'(!jj
~
\ B/~ 11""0
6. Remove the ground cable (E) ('00-03 models).
BACK
6-34
Protected by AR
10. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-5). 14. Remove the fuel rails.
11 . Remove the timing belt (see page 6-18). '99 model:
12. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and

wire harness clamps from the cylinder head.
• Six injector connectors

• Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor
connector
• Radiator fan switch A connector
• Radiator fan switch 8 connector
• Coolant temperature gauge sending unit
connector ('99 model)
• Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector
• Camshaft position (CMP) (top dead center (TOC))
sensor connector
• Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector
• VTEC solenoid valve connector '00-03 models:
• VTEC oil pressure switch connector
• Oil pressure switch connector
13. Remove the vacuum hoses (A) from the intake air
bypass control valve (8).
(cont'd)
BACK
6-35
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal (cont'd)
15. Remove the heater hoses. 16. Remove the upper radiator hose (A) and lower
radiator hose (B).
'99 model: A
JJ
/
'00-03 models: 17. Remove the front and rear exhaust manifolds (see
page 9-11).
18. Remove the water passage.
6-36 BACK
Protected by AR
19. Remove the camshaft pulleys (A) and back covers

(B).
20. Remove the cylinder head covers.
21. Remove the cylinder head bolts. To prevent

warpage, unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at
a time; repeat the sequence until all bolts are
loosened.
CYLINDER HEAD BOLT LOOSENING SEQUENCE:
22. Remove the cylinder heads.
BACK
6-37
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Inspection for Rocker Arm Assembly Removal

Warpage
1. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-31).
1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-34). 2. Loosen the adjusting screws (A).
A
2. Inspect the camshaft (see page 6-42).
3. Check the cylinder head for warpage.

Measure along edges, and three ways across the
center.
• If warpage is less than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.),

cylinder head resurfacing is not required.
• If warpage is between 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) and 0.2
mm (0.008 in.), resurface the cylinder head.
• Maximum resurface limit is 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
based on a height of 121 mm (4.76 in.).
A
Cylinder Head Height:
Standard (New): 120.95-121.05 mm 3. Remove the bolts and the rocker arm assembly.
(4.762-4.766 in.)
-1 Unscrew the rocker shaft mounting bolts two
turns at a time, in a crisscross pattern, to
PRECISION STRAIGHT EDGE
prevent damaging the valves or rocker arm
assembly.
-2 When removing the rocker arm assembly, do
not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts.
The bolts will keep the springs and the rocker
arms on the shafts.
CAMSHAFT HOLDER BOLT LOOSENING

SEQUENCE:
® ® ® @ @ CD
@ @ ® CD
6-38
BACK
Protected by AR
Rocker Arms and Shafts DisassemblyIReassembly
NOTE:
o Identify parts as they are removed so they can be reinstalled in their original locations.
o Inspect the rocker shafts and rocker arms (see page 6-40).
o Rocker arms must be installed in the same positions if reused.
o When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts. The bolts will
keep the springs and rocker arms on the shaft.
o Bundle the rocker arms with rubber bands to keep them together as a set.
o Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them and apply lubricant to any contact points.
INTAKE ROCKER SHAFT

INTAKE ROCKER
lM~EMBLY
[QJ 0 0 [Q] [QJ 0 0 [QJ [Q] 0 0 [QJ
e e e e e e
rwM
EXHAUST ROCKER ~
e
~~____~~A________~~___S_P_R_IN_G__~~________B~~~
[QJ 0 0 [Q] 0
I 0 [QJ 0 0
e
\
[Q] ~ EXHAUST ROCKER
~ ~----~~--------E~X~H~A~U-ST--R-O-CK-E-R-S-H~A~FT~--------~~
..
Ar
Letter B is stamped Letter A is stamped
on rocker arm. on rocker arm.
BACK
6-39
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Rocker Arms and Shafts Inspection
1. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-38). 4. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and
check it for an out-of-round condition.
2. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker
location. Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance:
Standard (New):
Intake: 0.026 - 0.067 mm
(0.0010-0.0026 in.'
Service Limit: 0.067 mm (0.0026 in.'
Exhaust: 0.026-0.077 mm
(0.0010-0.0030 in.'
3. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter.
Inspect rocker arm

face for wear.
5. Repeat for all rockers and both shafts. If the

clearance is over the limit, replace the rocker shaft
and all overtolerance rocker arms. If any intake
rocker arm needs replacement, replace all three
rocker arms in that set (primary, mid, and
secondary).
BACK
6-40
Protected by AR
VTEC Lost Motion Assemblies

Inspection
VTEC Rocker Arms
6. Inspect the rocker arm pistons (A). Push them
manually. If they do not move smoothly, replace Push on the lost motion assembly (A) with your finger.
the rocker arm assembly. If it does not move smoothly, replace it.
NOTE:
• Apply oil to the pistons when reassembling .
• When reassembling the primary rocker arm (B),
carefully apply air pressure to the oil passage of
the rocker arm.
BACK
6-41
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Inspection
1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-18). 4. Seat the camshaft by pushing it toward the rear of
the cylinder head.
2. Remove the rocker arms.
5. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the
3. Put the rocker shafts on the cylinder head, then camshaft. Push the camshaft back and forth and
tighten the bolts to the specified torque. read the end play. If the end play is beyond the
service limit, replace the thrust cover and recheck.
Specified torque: If it is still beyond the service limit, replace the
8x 1.25 mm camshaft.
24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 17Ibf·ft)
Apply engine oil to the bolt threads and flange Camshaft End Play:
Standard (New): 0.05-0.20 mm
@ ®cv CD ® @
(0.002-0.008 in.)
@ ® (j) ®
6. Remove the camshaft thrust cover (A), then pull out
,
the camshaft (B).
BACK
6-42
Protected by AR
7. Wipe the camshaft clean, then inspect the lift 10. Clean the camshaft bearing surfaces in the cylinder
ramps. Replace the camshaft if any lobes are pitted, head. Measure the inside diameter of each
scored or excessively worn. camshaft bearing surface, and check for out-of-
round condition.
8. Measure the diameter of each camshaft journal.
• Ifthe camshaft-to-holder clearance is within
limits, go to step 12.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit and the camshaft has been replaced,
replace the cylinder head.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit and the camshaft has not been
replaced, go to step 11.
Camshaft-to-Holder 011 Clearance:

(0.0020-0.0035 in.)
9. Zero the gauge to the journal diameter.
(cont'd)
BACK
6-43
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Inspection (cont'd)
11. Check total runout with the camshaft supported on SEC MID PRI
V-blocks .
• If the total runout of the camshaft is within the FRONT BANK

service limit, replace the cylinder head .
• If the total runout is beyond the service limit,
replace the camshaft and recheck the oil EX IN EX
clearance. If the oil clearance is still out of
tolerance, replace the cylinder head. -T/B
PRI MID SEC
Camshaft Total Runout:
REAR BANK
EX IN EX
-T/B
Rotate camshaft
~
while measuring
12. Measure cam lobe height.
Cam Lobe Height Standard (New):

J32A1 enaine ('99 model)
INTAKE EXHAUST
PRI 34.615 mm 36.076mm
(1 .3628 in.) (1.4203 in.)
MID 36.272 mm
(1.4280 in.)
SEC 31 .188mm
, -~ (1 . ~~79lD_.l
J32A1 _..... - ('00-03) model _. Inspect this area for wear.

INTAKE EXHAUST
PRI 34.737 mm 36.326mm
(1 .3676 in.) (1.4302 in.)
MID 36.445 mm
(1.4348 in.)
SEC 34.919 mm
-~
(1.3748 in.)
_
J32A2 ...... _-
INTAKE EXHAUST
PRI 34.737 mm 36.389 mm
(1.3676 in.) (1.4326 in.)
MID 36.445 mm
(1 .4348 in.)
SEC 34.919 mm
I
~~3748in . ) ,
BACK
6-44
Protected by AR
Valves, Springs and Valve Seals Removal
Special Tools Required 4. Install the valve guide seal remover (A).
• Valve Spring Compressor Attachment A
01757-PJ1010A
• Valve Spring Compressor, KD383 with No. 32 jaws,
commercially available
• Valve guide seal remover, KD3350, commercially
available
Identify the valves and valve springs as they are

removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its
original position.
1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-34).
2. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A) and plastic

mallet (B), lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen
the valve keepers.
B
\ 5. Remove the valve seal.
3. Install the valve spring compressor. Compress the

spring and remove the valve keepers.
07757-PJ1010A
BACK
6-45
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Valve Inspection
'99-01 models '02-03 models

1. Remove the valves (see page 6-45). 1. Remove the valves (see page 6-45).
2. Measure the valve in these areas. 2. Measure the valve in these areas.
Intake Valve Dimensions J32A1 engine:

A Standard (New): 33.90 - 34.1 0 mm Intake Valve Dimensions
(1.335-1.343 in.) A Standard (New): 34.90-35.10 mm
B Standard (New): 114.85-115.15 mm (1.374-1.382 in.)
(4.522-4.533 in.) B Standard (New): 115.70-116.30 mm
C Standard (New): 5.485-5.495 mm (4.555-4.579 in.)
(0.2159-0.2163 in.) C Standard (New): 5.485-5.495 mm
C Service Limit: 5.455 mm (0.2148 in.) (0.2159-0.2163 in.)
D Standard (New): 0.85-1.15 mm C Service Limit: 5.455 mm (0.2148 in.)
(0.033-0.045 in.)
D Service Limit: 0.65 mm (0.026 in.) Exhaust Valve Dimensions
A Standard (New): 29.90-30.10 mm
Exhaust Valve Dimensions (1.177-1.185 in.)
A Standard (New): 28.90 -29.10 mm B Standard (New): 113.90-114.50 mm
(1.138-1.146 in.) (4.484-4.508 in.)
B Standard (New): 112.85 -113.15 mm C Standard (New): 5.450-5.460 mm
(4.443-4.455 in.) (0.2146-0.2150 in.)
C Standard (New): 5.450 - 5.460 mm C Service Limit: 5.420 mm (0.2134 in.)
(0.2146-0.2150 in.)
C Service Limit: 5.420 mm (0.2134 in.) J32A2 engine:
D Standard (New): 1.05 -1.35 mm Intake Valve Dimensions
(0.041-0.053 in.) A Standard (New): 35.90-36.10 mm
D Service Limit: 0.95 mm (0.037 in.) (1.413-1.421 in.)
B Standard (New): 116.55-117.15 mm
(4.589-4.612 in.)
C Standard (New): 5.485-5.495 mm
(0.2159-0.2163 in.)
I.. B .. I C Service Limit: 5.455 mm (0.2148 in.)
--11-- 0 Exhaust Valve Dimensions
~:
A Standard (New): 29.90-30.10 mm
(1.177-1.185 in.)
n B Standard (New): 113.90 -114.50 mm

(4.484-4.508 in.)
C Standard (New): 5.450-5.460 mm
(0.2146-0.2150 in.)
C Service Limit: 5.420 mm (0.2134 in.)
I. B .. I
C
I
6-46 BACK
Protected by AR
Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Inspection
1. Remove the valves (see page 6-45). 3. Subtract the 0.0. of the valve stem, measured with
a micrometer, from the 1.0. of the valve guide,
2. Slide the valve out of its guide about 10 mm, then measured with an inside micrometer or ball gauge.
measure the guide-to-stem clearance with a dial Take the measurements in three places along the
indicator while rocking the stem in the direction of valve stem and three places inside the valve guide.
normal thrust (wobble method). The difference between the largest guide
measurement and the smallest stem measurement
• If the measurement exceeds the service limit, should not exceed the service limit.
recheck it using a new valve.
• If the measurement is now within the service Intake Valve Stem-ta-Guide Clearance:
limit, reassemble using a new valve . Standard (New): 0.020-0.045 mm
• If the measurement with a new valve still (0.0008-0.0018 in.)
exceeds the service limit, go to step 3. Service Limit: 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
Intake Valve Stem-ta-Guide Clearance: Exhaust Valve Stem-ta-Guide Clearance:

Standard (New): 0.04-0.09 mm Standard (New): 0.055-0.080 mm
(0.002-0.004 in.) (0.0022 - 0.0031 in.)
Service Limit: 0.16 mm (0.006 in.) Service Limit: 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem-ta-Guide Clearance:

Standard (New): 0.11 - 0.16 mm
(0.004-0.006 in.)
BACK
6-47
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Valve Guide Replacement
Special Tools Required 5. Working from the camshaft side, use the driver and
• Valve Guide Driver, 5.5 mm 07742-0010100 an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 mm (0.1
• Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm 07HAH-PJ7010B in.) towards the combustion chamber. This will
knock off some of the carbon and make removal
1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see page 6- easier. Hold the air hammer directly in line with the
47). valve guide to prevent damaging the driver. Wear
safety goggles or a face shield.
2. As illustrated below, use a commercially available
air-impact valve guide driver (A) modified to fit the 6. Turn the head over and drive the guide out toward
diameter of the valve guides. In most cases, the the camshaft side of the head.
same procedure can be done using the special tool
and a conventional hammer.
A 5.3mm I
(0.21 in.) +
I:
;
(I lbo
I. . 87 mmin.) _1 __ 57(2.24mmin.)
(3.43
-I t
10.8mm
(0.42 in.)
3. Select the proper replacement guides and chill

them in the freezer section of a refrigerator for
about an hour.
4. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder

head to 300°F (150°C). Monitor the temperature
with a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head
hotter than 300°F (150°C); excessive heat may
loosen the valve seats.
7. If a valve guide won't move, drill it out with a 8 mm

(5/16 in.) bit, then try again. Drill guides only in
extreme cases; you could damage the cylinder
head if the guide breaks.
8. Remove the new guide(s) from the freezer, one at a

time, as you need them.
6-48 BACK
Protected by AR
9. Apply a thin coat of clean engine oil to the outside 10. Coat both the reamer and the valve guide with
of the new valve guide. Install the guide from the cutting oil.
camshaft side of the head; use the special tool to
drive the guide in to the specified installed height 11. Rotate the reamer clockwise the full length of the
(A) of the guide (B). If you have al112 guides to do, valve guide bore.
you may have to reheat the head.
12. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise while
Valve Guide Installed Height: removing it from the bore.
Intake: 21.20-22.20 mm (0.835-0.874 in.)
Exhaust: 20.63-21.63 mm (0.812-0.852 in.) 13. Thoroughly wash the guide with detergent and
water to remove any cutting residue.
14. Check the clearance with a valve (see page 6-47).

Verify that the valve slides in the intake and
exhaust valve guides without exerting pressure.
Turn reamer in
clockwise direction only.
BACK
6-49
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Valve Seat Reconditioning
1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see page 6- 5. Make one more very light pass with the 45° cutter
47). If the valve guides are worn, replace them (see to remove any possible burrs caused by the other
page 6-48) before cutting the valve seats. cutters.
2. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a Valve Seat Width:
valve seat cutter. Standard (New): 1.25-1.55 mm (0.049-0.061 in.)
6. After resurfacing the seat, inspect for even valve

seating: Apply Prussian Blue compound (A) to the
valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in
the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the
seat several times.
3. Carefully cut a 45° seat, removing only enough

material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat.
4. Bevel the upper and lower edges at the angles

shown in the illustration.
A
Check the width ofthe seat and adjust accordingly.
'99 model:
7. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by
the blue compound, should be centered on the seat.
If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you
must make a second cut with the 60° cutter ('99
model and '01-03 models exhaust side) or the
67.5° cutter ('01-03 models intake side) to move it
down, then one more cut with the 45 ° cutter to
restore seat width.
If it is too low (close to the valve edge), you must
make a second cut with the 30° cutter to move it
up, then make one more cut with the 45° cutter to
restore seat width.
'01-03 models: NOTE: The final cut should always be made with
the 45° cutter.
BACK
6-50
Protected by AR
8. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head and

measure the valve stem installed height (A).
Intake Valve Stem Installed Height:

11.841-1.872 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height:

(1.838-1.869 in.)
9. If the valve stem installed height is over the service

limit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is still over
the service limit, replace the cylinder head; the
valve seat in the head is too deep.
BACK
6-51
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Valves, Springs, and Valve Seals Installation
Special Tools Required 5. Install the valve spring and valve retainer. Place the
• Valve Spring Compressor Attachment end of the valve spring with closely wound coils
07757-PJ1010A toward the cylinder head.
• Valve Spring Compressor, K0383 with No. 32 jaws,
commercially available 6. Install the valve spring compressor. Compress the
• Valve guide seal installer, K03372, commercially spring and install the valve keepers.
available 07757-PJ1010A
1. Coat the valve stems with engine oil. Install the

valves in the valve guides.
2. Check that the valves move up and down smoothly.
3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head.
4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the valve guide
seal installer (B).
NOTE: Exhaust valve seals (C) have a black spring

(0) and intake valve seals (E) have a white spring
(F); they are not interchangeable.
'J 7. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem two or three
times with a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper
seating of the valve and valve keepers. Tap the
valve stem only along its axis so you do not bend
the stem.
E c
BACK
6-52
Protected by AR
Camshaft/Rocker Arms, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation
1. Apply a light coat of oil around the camshaft oil 5. Loosen the valve adjusting screws.
seal.
6. Set the rocker arm assembly in place and loosely
2. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are
cylinder head. properly positioned on the valve stems.
-1 Tap the camshaft oil seal in squarely. 7. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time in the
-2 Install the oil seal about 0.5 - 1.5 mm (0.02- sequence shown below to ensure that the rockers
0.06 in.) below the surface of the cylinder head. do not bind on the valves.
Specified torque:
8x 1.25 mm
24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 17 Ibf·ft)
Apply engine oil to the bolt threads
8. Install the injector base (A). Always use a new

gasket (B).
A
3. Insert the camshaft (B) into the cylinder head, then

install the camshaft thrust cover (C). Always use a
\
new O-ring (D).
4. Check that the oil seal lips are not distorted.
8x 1.2Smm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
(cont' d)
BACK
6-53
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Camshaft/Rocker Arms, Camshaft Cylinder Head Installation

Seal, and Pulley Installation (cont'd)
Install the cylinder head in the reverse order of
removal:
9. Install the back cover (A), then install the camshaft
pulley (B). 1. Clean the cylinder head and block surface.
8x 1.25 mm 2. Clean and install the oil control orifices (A) with the
22 N·m (2.2 kgf.m, 16lbf·ttl
new O-rings (B).
12 x 1.25 mm
90 N·m (9.2 kgf.m, 67 Ibf·ttl
Apply engine oil to the bolt threads.
3. Install the dowel pins (C) and new cylinder head

gaskets (0).
BACK
6-54
Protected by AR
4. Clean the timing belt drive pulley. 6. Clean the camshaft pulleys. Set the camshaft
pulleys to TDC by aligning the TDC marks (A) on
5. Set the timing belt drive pulley to top dead center the camshaft pulleys with the pointers (B) on the
(TDC) by aligning the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of back covers.
the timing belt drive pulley with the pointer (B) on
the oil pump. FRONT:
A
B
REAR:
B
A
(cont'd)
BACK
6-55
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
7. Apply clean engine oil to the threads and flanges of 9. Install the timing belt (see page 6-21).
the cylinder head bolts.
10. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-13).
8. Tighten the cylinder head bolts sequentially in
three steps. 11. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-32).
NOTE: Perform each step twice. 12. Install the exhaust manifold and tighten the nuts in
a crisscross pattern in two or three steps,
1st step torque: 39 N·m (4.0 kgf.m, 29Ibf·ft) beginning with the inner nut (see page 9-11).
2nd step torque: 69 N·m (7.0 kgf·m, 51 Ibf·ft) Always use new exhaust manifold gasket.
3rd step torque: 98.1 N·m (10.0 kgf.m, 72.3 Ibf·ft)
13. Install the nuts securing the exhaust pipe A and
Use a beam-type torque wrench. When using a exhaust manifold, then install the cover on the
preset-type torque wrench, be sure to tighten exhaust manifold.
slowly and not to overtighten.
If a bolt makes any noise while you are torquing it, 14. Install the water passage (A). Always use a new
loosen the bolt, and retighten it from the 1st step. O-ring (8) and new gaskets (C).
CYLINDER HEAD BOLTS TORQUE SEQUENCE: B
CD CD ® ®
8x 1.25 mm
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
6-56 BACK
Protected by AR
15. Install the fuel rails. 16. Install the vacuum hoses (A) on the intake air
bypass control thermal valve (B).
'99 model:
6X1 .0mm
9.8 N·m (1 .0 kgf·m,
/ 7.2Ibf·ftl
6x1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf.m,
8.7Ibf·ftl
17. Install the heater hoses.
'00-03 models:
'99 model:
/ 6 x 1 .0mm
~ 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ftl
6x1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ftl
'00-03 models:
(cont'd)
BACK
6-57
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
18. Install the upper radiator hose (A) and lower 24. Install the fuel feed hose (A) and fuel return hose
radiator hose (B). (B), using new washers (C).
A
'99 model:
A
~--
19. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-8).

22 N·m 12.2 kgf.m,
16lbf·ftl
20. Loosely install the PIS pump and PIS pump belt.
21. Adjust the PIS pump belt (see page 17-14). '00-03 models:
22. Install the alternator (see page 4-23).
23. Install the alternator belt (see page 4-23).
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m,

16lbf·ftl
BACK
6-58
Protected by AR
CMP (TOC) Sensor Replacement
25. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with 1. Set the No.1 piston at top dead center (TDC) (see
sandpaper, then assemble them and apply grease page 6-18).
to prevent corrosion.
2. Remove the upper covers.
26. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses and
connectors are installed correctly. 3. To hold the timing belt adjuster in its current
position, thread in the battery clamp bolt hand-tight
27. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch ON (see step 13 on page 6-20).
(II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel pump
runs for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel 4. Loosen the idler pulley bolt about five or six turns,
line. Repeat this operation two or three times, then then remove the timing belt from the front
check for fuel leakage at any point in the fuel line. camshaft pulley (see step 16 on page 6-21).
28. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed 5. Remove the front camshaft pulley.
29. Perform the powertrain control module (PCM) idle

learn procedure (see page 11 -158).

31. Inspectthe idle speed (see page 11-157).
32. Inspect the ignition timing (see page 4-16).
12x 1.25 mm
90 N·m (9.2 kgf·m, 67 Ibf·ftl
Apply engine oil to
the bolt threads.
6. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor AlB

(TDC sensor 1/2) connector, then remove the back
cover.
ax 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16lbf·ftl
(cont'd)
BACK
6-59
Protected by AR
Cylinder Head
CMP (TDC) Sensor Replacement CKP Sensor Replacement

(cont'd)
1. Move the auto-tensioner to remove tension from
the alternator belt. then remove the alternator belt
7. Remove the CMP (TOC 1/TOC 2) sensor from the (see step 5 on page 6-18).
back cover.
2. Loosen the adjusting bolt. locknut and mounting
bolt. then remove the power steering (PIS) pump
belt (see step 6 on page 6-19).
3. Remove the dipstick and tube (see step 9 on page

6-19).
4. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see step 10 on page

6-19).
5. Remove the upper and lower covers (see step 12

on page 6-20).
6. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor from

the oil pump.
8. Install the CMP (TOC 1/TOC 2) sensor in reverse

order of removal. Reinstall the timing belt (see
page 6-21) and other removed components.
, ...-6 x 1.0 mm
..- 12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m.
8.7Ibf·ftl
7. Install the CKP sensor in the reverse order of

removal.
BACK
6-60
Protected by AR
Engine Mechanical
Engine Block
Special Tools ................................................................. 7-2
Drive Plate Removal and Installation .......................... 7-6
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play
Inspection ......•............................................................. 7-7
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement ...................... 7-8
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement ...................... 7-10
Crankshaft and Pistons Removal ................................ 7-12
Crankshaft Inspection .................................................. 7-14
Block and Piston Inspection ........................................ 7-15
Cylinder Honing ............................................................ 7-17
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement ......... 7-18
Piston Rings Replacement ........................................... 7-21
Crankshaft and Piston Installation .............................. 7-23
Pulley End Crankshaft Seal Installation -In-car .......... 7-28
Transmission End Crankshaft Seal
Installation -In-car ....................................................... 7-28
Protected by AR
Engine Block
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty I

CD 07 LAD-PT30 1OA Oil Seal Driver 1
® 07VAD-P8AO 1OA Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 80 mm I.D. 1
® 077 49-0010000 ------
Driver -- --- -- -----
1 I
I II -<
":. , ,>-~--:.,
CD
8 ~'
® ®
BACK
7-2
Protected by AR
OIL PAN
Install, step 31 on page 7-27
WASHER
OIL PUMP
\
DRIVE PLATE BOLT
Torque sequence,
page 7-6
\
Overhaul, page 8-7
(cant'd)
BACK
7-3
Protected by AR
Engine Block
CRANKSHAfT
End play, page 1-7
~ Installation, page 7-23
/
MAIN BEARINGS
Oil clearance, page 7-8
Selection, page 7-8
7-4 BACK
Protected by AR
~---~!1!"~:'~~'9'1_21
6?~SNAP~NG
oPISTON PIN
Removal, page 7-18
L)LJ
~~~~~ ig~~allation, step 1 on page 7-20
~~"tion, n •• 1 on .... 1-19
PISTON
Removal, page 7-12
Measurement, page 7-15
~ ~CONNECTING
V )))
ROD
End play, page 7-7
Small end measurement,
step 1 on page 7-19
----- ENGINE BLOCK

Cylinder bore inspection,
step 3 on page 7-15
Warpage inspection, step 5 on page 7-16
Cylinder bore honing, page 7-17
Ridge removal, page 7-12
4~
o
_ _.:....-----CONNECTING ROD BEARING

.. Clearance, page 7-10
~DOWEL PIN S.I"tion, .... 1-10
4 CONNECTING ROD BEARING CAP
/
Instatiation, step 17 on page 7-25
CONNECTING ROD BOLT

Tightening, step 18 on page 7-25
BACK
7-5
Protected by AR
Engine Block
Drive Plate Removal and Installation
1. Remove the transmission:
• '99 model (see page 14-110).

• '00-03 models (see page 14-351).
2. Remove the eight drive plate bolts, then separate

the drive plate from the crankshaft flange. After
installation, tighten the bolts in the sequence
shown.
12x1.0mm
74N·m
(7.5 kgf·m, 54lbf·ftl
3. Install the transmission:
• '99 model (see page 14-117).

• '00-03 models (see page 14-359).
BACK
7-6
Protected by AR
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection
1. Remove the baffle plate (see page 7 -12). 4. Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial
indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the
2. Measure the connecting rod end play with a feeler crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back
gauge (A) between the connecting rod (8) and toward the indicator; dial reading should not
crankshaft (C). exceed the service limit.
Connecting Rod End Play: Crankshaft End Play:

Standard (New): 0.15-0.35 mm (0.006-0.014 in.) Standard (New): 0.10-0.35 mm (0.004-0.014 in.)
Service Limit: 0.45 mm (0.018 in.) Service Limit: 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
c A
5. If the end play is out-of-tolerance, replace the thrust
3. Ifthe connecting rod end play is out-of-tolerance, washers and recheck. If it is still out-of-tolerance,
install a new connecting rod and recheck. If it still replace the crankshaft.
out-of-tolerance, replace the crankshaft (see page
7-12).
BACK
7-7
Protected by AR
Engine Block
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement

Main Bearing Clearance Inspection 6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,
(remove the engine if it's still in the car), remove
1. To check main bearing-to-journal oil clearance, the crankshaft, and remove the upper half of the
remove the main caps and bearing halves. bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with the
same color code, and recheck the clearance. Do not
2. Clean each main journal and bearing half with a file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps to
clean shop towel. adjust clearance.
3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main 7. Ifthe plastigage shows the clearance is still
journal. incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the
color listed above or below that one), and check
NOTE: If the engine is still in the car when you bolt again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained
the main cap down to check the clearance, the by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearings,
weight of the crankshaft and drive plate will flatten replace the crankshaft and start over.
the plastigage further than just the torque on the
cap bolt and give you an incorrect reading. For an
accurate reading, support the crank with a jack
under the counterweights, and check only one
bearing at a time.
4. Reinstall the bearings and caps, then torque the

bolts (see step 21 on page 7-25). Do not rotate the
crankshaft.
5. Remove the cap and bearing half, and measure the

widest part of the plastigage.
Main Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance:

(0.0008-0.0017 in.'
BACK
7-8
Protected by AR
Main Bearing Selection 3. Use the crankshaft bore codes and journal codes to
Crankshaft Bore Code Location -----I.....

select the appropriate main bearings from the table.
Larger crank bore
1. Letters or Bars have been stamped on the end of

the block as a code for the size of each of the 4
main journal bores. - - - i..... Smaller bearing (Thicker)
If you can not read the codes because of an
1 or I Red! Pink Pink! Yellow
accumulation of dirt and dust. do not scrub them Pink Yellow
with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with
solvent or detergent. Pink Pinkl Yellow Yellowl
20rll Yellow Green
3 or III Pinkl Yellow! Green

Yellow Green
Yellow
40rllll Yellow Yeliowl Green Green!

Green Brown
Yellow Green Green! Brown

50rlllli Green Brown
6 or 111111 Green! Brown Brown!

Green Brown Black
NOTE:
Smaller Smaller • When using bearing halves of
main bearing different colors. it does not
Journal (Thicker) matter which color is used in the
top or bottom .
• Color code is on the edge of
Main Journal Code Locations (Numbers or Bars) the bearing.
2. Numbers or bars have been stamped on the

crankshaft No. 1 web as a code for the main journal
sizes.
No.1 JOURNAL No. 4 JOURNAL

(PUUEYEND) (DRIVE PLATE END)
BACK 7-9
Protected by AR
Engine Block
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement
Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection 6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,
remove the upper half of the bearing, install a new,
1. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearing half. complete bearing with the same color code, and
recheck the clearance. Do not file, shim, or scrape
2. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance.
with a clean shop towel.
7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still
3. Place a strip of plastigage across the rod journal. incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the
color listed above or below that one), and check
4. Reinstall the bearing half and cap, and torque the clearance again. If the proper clearance cannot be
bolts (see step 18 on page 7-25). Do not rotate the obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller
crankshaft. bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over.
5. Remove the rod cap and bearing half and measure

the widest part of the plastigage.
Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance:

(0.0008-0.0017 in.)
PLASTIGAGE STRIP
7-10 BACK
Protected by AR
Rod Bearing Selection Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations (Letters or

Bars)
Connecting Rod Bore Code Locations
3. Letters or bars have been stamped on the
1. Inspect the connecting rod for cracks and heat crankshaft No.1 web as a code for the rod journal
damage. sizes.
2. Each rod has a tolerance range (from 0 to 0.024 mm

(0.0009 in.), in 0.006 mm (0.0002 in.) increments)
depending on the size of its big end bore.
It's then stamped with a code (1, 2, 3, or 4/1, II, 11\, or
1\1\) indicating the range.
You may find any combination of 1, 2, 3, or 4/1,1\, III,
or 1111 in any engine.
If you cannot read the codes because of an
accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them
with a wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with
solvent or detergent.
Half of the number or bar is stamped on the
bearing cap and the other half is stamped on the
rod.
Normal Bore Size: 58.0 mm (2.28 in.)

No.1 JOURNAL No.6 JOURNAL
(PULLEV ENOl (DRIVE PLATE ENOl
4. Use the connecting rod bore codes and journal

codes to select the appropriate rod bearings from
the table.
---I." Smaller bearing (Thicker)

iA or I Pink Pink!
Veil ow
Vellow Vellow!
Green
Borll Pink! Veil ow Vellow! Green

Vellow Green
(; or III Veil ow Veil ow! Green I§reen!

Green Brown
o or 1111 Vellow! Green ~reen! Brown

Green Brown
Eorlllli Green Green! Brown Brown!

Brown Black
For 111111 Green! Brown Brown! Black

Brown Black
NOTE:
Smaller Smaller • When using bearing halves of
rod bearing different colors, it does not
Journal (Thickerl matter which color is used in the
top or bottom .
• Color code is on the edge of
the bearing.
BACK
7-11
Protected by AR
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Removal
1. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (A)

from the oil pump, then remove the timing belt
drive pulley (B).
pump (C).
,
4. Remove the oil screen (A), baffle plate (B) and oil
C
5. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon
2. Remove the oil pan. around the top of any cylinder, remove it with a
ridge reamer (A). Follow the reamer manufacturer's
3. Remove the engine block end cover. instructions. If the ridge is not removed, it may
damage the piston as its pushed out.
7-12 BACK
Protected by AR
6. Remove the connecting rod caps after setting the 7. Remove the bearing from the cap. Keep all caps/
crank pin at bottom dead center (BOC) for each bearings in order.
cylinder. Remove the piston assembly by pushing
on the connecting rod. Take care not to damage the 8. Remove the upper bearing halves from the
crank pin or cylinder with the connecting rod. connecting rods and set them aside with their
CORRECT respective caps.
9. After removing a piston/connecting rod assembly,

reinstall the cap on the rod.
10. To avoid mixup during reassembly, mark each

piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder
number.
11. Remove the bearing cap bolts (A) and bearing cap
side bolts (B), then remove the bearing cap (C).
A
INCORRECT
x
B
(cont'd)
BACK 7-13
Protected by AR
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Removal Crankshaft Inspection

(cont'd)
Out-of-Round and Taper
12. Lift the crankshaft (A) out of the cylinder block, 1. Remove the crankshaft from the cylinder block (see
being careful not to damage the journals. page 7-12).
A
2. Clean the crankshaft oil passages with pipe
cleaners or a suitable brush.
3. Check the keyway and threads.
4. Measure out-of-round at the middle of each rod

and main journal in two places. The difference
between measurements on each journal must not
be more than the service limit.
Journal Out-of-Round:
13. Reinstall the main caps and bearings on the

cylinder block in the proper order.
EB
o
l ttl
,f f'
5. Measure taper at the edges of each rod and main
journal. The difference between measurements on
each journal must not be more than the service
limit.
Journal Taper:
BACK
7-14
Protected by AR
Block and Piston Inspection
Straightness 1. Remove the piston from the cylinder block (see

page 7-12).
6. Place the cylinder block on the surface plate.
2. Check the piston for distortion or cracks.
7. Clean and install the bearings on the No.1 and
No.4 journal of the cylinder block. 3. Measure the piston diameter at a point 16.0 mm
(0.63 in.) from the bottom of the skirt.
8. Lower the crankshaft into the block.
Piston Diameter:
9. Measure runout on all main journals. Rotate the Standard (New): 88.975-88.985 mm
crankshaft two complete revolutions. The (3.5029 - 3.5033 in.)
difference between measurements on each journal Service Limit: 88.965 mm (3.5026 in.)
must not be more that the service limit.
Oversize Piston Diameter:
Crankshaft Total Runout: 0.25: 89.225-89.235 mm (3.5128-3.5132 in.)
Standard (New): 0.020 mm (0.0008 in.) max. 0.50: 89.475-89.485 mm (3.5226-3.5230 in.)
16.0 mm t4----~ SKIRT DIAMETER

(0.63 in.'
(cont'd)
BACK
7-15
Protected by AR
Engine Block
Block and Piston Inspection (cont'd)
4. Measure wear and taper in directions X and Y at Oversize

three levels in each cylinder as shown. 0.25: 89.250-89.265 mm (3.5138-3.5144 in.)
0.50: 89.500-89.515 mm (3.5236-3.5242 in.)
• Ifthe measurements in any cylinder are beyond
the oversize bore service limit, replace the Reboring Limit: 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
cylinder block .
• If the block is to be rebored, refer to Piston Bore Taper
Clearance Inspection (Go to step 6) after reboring. Limit: (Difference between first and third
measurement) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
5. Scored or scratched cylinder bores must be honed.
6. Check the top of the cylinder block for warpage.

Measure along the edges and across the center as
shown.
Cylinder Block Warpage:

E
PRECISION STRAIGHT EDGE
Cylinder Bore Size:

(3.5039-3.5045 in.)
Service Limit: 89.065 mm (3.5065 in)
BACK
7-16
Protected by AR
Cylinder Honing
7. Calculate the difference between cylinder bore 1. Measure the cylinder bores (see step 3 on page 7-
diameter and piston diameter. , 5). If the cylinder block is to be reused, hone the
cylinders and remeasure the bores. Only scored or
Piston-to-Block Clearance: scratched cylinder bores must be honed.
(0.0006-0.0016 in.) 2. Hone the cylinder bores with honing oil and a fine
Service Limit: 0.08 mm (0.003 in.) (400 grit) stone in a 60 degree crosshatch pattern.
NOTE:
• Use only a rigid hone with 400 grit or finer stone,
SERVICE LIMIT
such as Sunnen, Ammco, or equivalent.
0.08 mm (0.003 in.1 • 00 not use stones that are worn or broken.
60°
3. When honing is complete, thoroughlv clean the

cylinder block of all metal particles. Wash the
cylinder bores with hot soapy water, then dry and
oil them immediately to prevent rusting. Never use
solvent, it will only redistribute the grit on the
cylinder walls.
4. If scoring or scratches are still present in the

cylinder bores after honing to the service limit,
rebore the cylinder block. Some light vertical
scoring and scratching is acceptable if it is not deep
enough to catch your fingernail and does not run
the full length of the bore.
BACK
7-17
Protected by AR
Engine Block
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement
Disassembly 4. Heat the piston and connecting rod assembly to

about 158°F (70°C), then remove the piston pin.
1. Remove the piston from the cylinder block (see
page 7-12).
2. Apply engine oil to the piston pin snap rings (A)

and turn them in the ring grooves until the end
gaps are lined up with the cutouts in the piston pin
bores (B).
NOTE: Take care not to damage the ring grooves.
A B
3. Remove both snap rings (A). Start at the cutout in

the piston pin bore. Remove the snap rings
carefully so they do not go flying or get lost. Wear
eye protection.
A
7-18 BACK
Protected by AR
Inspection 3. Check the difference between the piston pin

diameter and piston pin hole diameter on the
NOTE: Inspect the piston, piston pin and connecting rod piston.
when they are at room temperature.
Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance:
1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin. Standard (New): -0.0050 to +0.0010 mm
( - 0.00020 to + 0.00004 in.)
Piston Pin Diameter: Service Limit: 0.004 mm (0.0002 in.)
(0.8646-0.8648 in.)
4. Measure the piston pin-to-connecting rod clearance.
Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Clearance:

2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter. Standard (New): 0.005-0.014 mm
(0.0002-0.0006 in.)
(cont'd)
BACK 7-19
Protected by AR
Engine Block
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement (co nt'd)
Reassembly 4. Install the piston pin (A). Assemble the piston (B)
and connecting rod (C) with the embossed marks
1. Install a piston pin snap ring (AI. (D) on the same side.
A
2. Coat the piston pin bore in the piston, the bore in

the connecting rod, and the piston pin with engine
oil.
3. Heat the piston to about 158°F (70°CI.

A.
5. Install the remaining snap ring.
7-20
BACK
Protected by AR
Piston Ring Replacement
1. Remove the piston from the cylinder block (see 4. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the
page 7-12). cylinder bore 15-20 mm (0.6-0.8 in.) from the
bottom.
2. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston
rings (B).
A 15-20mm
(0.6-0.8 in.'
3. Clean all the ring grooves throughly with a

squared-off broken ring or ring groove cleaner with
a blade to fit the piston grooves. File down the
blade if necessary. Top ring and second ring 5. Measure the piston ring end-gap (B) with a feeler
grooves are 1.2 mm (0.05 in.) wide, and the oil ring gauge:
groove is 2.8 mm (0.11 in.) wide. Do not use a wire
brush to clean the ring grooves, or cut the ring • If the gap is too small, check to see if you have
grooves deeper with the cleaning tool. the proper rings for your engine.
• If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore
NOTE: If the piston is to be separated from the diameter against the wear limits (see step 4 on
connecting rod, do not install new rings yet. page 7-16).
If the bore is over the service limit, the cylinder
block must be rebored.
Piston Ring End-Gap:
Top Ring
(0.008-0.014 in.)
Second Ring
(0.016-0.022 in.)
Oil Ring
(0.008-0.028 in.)
(cont'd)
BACK
7-21
Protected by AR
Engine Block
Piston Ring Replacement (cont'd)
6. Install the rings as shown. The top ring (A) has a 1e 7. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they
mark (J32A1 engine) or 10 mark (J32A2 engine) do not bind.
and the second ring (S) has a 2e mark. The
manufacturing marks (e) must be facing upward. 8. Position the ring end gaps as shown:
A
About 90·
OIL RING GAP SECOND RING GAP
TOP RING GAP OIL RING GAP

and SPACER
C RING GAP PISTON PIN
A ~
~/~
9. After installing a new set of rings, measure the
ring-to-groove clearance:
B~C,~"-/C Top Ring Clearance

J32A1 engine:
C~
(0.0014-0.0024 in.)
J32A2 engine:
8
(0.0022-0.0031 in.)
Second Ring Clearance

Piston Ring Dimensions:
(0.0012-0.0022 in.)
Service Limit: 0.13 mm (0.005in.)
g=r A
Top Ring (Standard)
A: 3.1 mm (0.12 in.)
B: 1.2 mm (0.05 in.)
Second Ring (Standard)
A: 3.4 mm (0.13 in.)
B: 1.2 mm (0.05 in.)
7-22 BACK
Protected by AR
Crankshaft and Piston Installation
Special Tools Required 6. Install the bearing halves in the cylinder block and
• Driver 07749-0010000 connecting rods .
• Oil Seal Driver Attachment, SO mm I.D.
07VAD-PSAO 1OA 7. Apply engine oil to the main bearings and rod
bearings.
,. Measure the diameter of each connecti ng rod bolt
at point A and point B. S. Lower the crankshaft (A) into the block.
A
35mm
11.38in.1 A
•
9. Install the thrust washers (A) in the No.3 journal.Oil

2. Calculate the difference in diameter between point the thrust washer surfaces.
A and point B.
Point A - Point B =Difference in Diameter

Difference in Diameter:
Specification: 0-0.1 mm (0-0.004 in.)
3. If the difference in diameter is out of tolerance,

replace the connecting rod bolt.
4. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with

plastigage (see page 7-10).
5. Check the main bearing clearance with plastigage A

(see page 7-S).
(cont'd)
BACK
7-23
Protected by AR
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Installation (cont'd)
12. Set the crankshaft to bottom dead center (BDC) for

10. Install the bearings (A) and bearing caps (B) with the cylinder you are working on.
the arrow (C) facing the timing belt end of the
engine. 13. Remove the connecting rod caps. Install the ring
0 0 compressor, and check that the bearing is securely
~ N C') ..q-
in place.
0 0 0 0
14. Install the piston with the arrow (A) facing the
I
<>--_._- timing belt side ofthe engine.
A
~I ~ ~ I~
~
c
B
E
10x80mm
/ A
V 15. Position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in

using the wooden handle of a hammer (A).
Maintain downward force on the ring compressor
(B) to prevent the rings from expanding before
'''r
E
m entering the cylinder bore.
A
E
10x80 mm
11. Apply engine oil to the bolt threads and flange,

then install the bearing cap bolts (D) and bearing
cap side bolts (E).
16. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and

check the connecting rod-to-crank journal
alignment before pushing the piston into place.
7-24 BACK
Protected by AR
17. Line upthe mark (A) on the connecting rod and cap, 21. Torque the bearing cap bolts (A), then torque the
then install the cap. bearing cap side bolts (8). Follow the numbered
sequence shown.
18. Apply engine oil to the bolt threads. Torque the
,"
bolts (8) to 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14Ibf·ft). NOTE: Whenever any crankshaft or connecting rod
bearing is replaced, it is necessary after
reassembly to run the engine at idling speed until it
reaches normal operating temperature, then
continue to run it for approximately 15 minutes.
A B
11 x 1.5 mm 10x 1.25 mm
76 N·m 17.8 kgf·m, 49 N·m 15.0 kgf·m,
56Ibf·ft) 36Ibf.ft)
A
~
19. Mark the connecting rod (A) and bolt head (8) as
shown.
B
20. Tighten the bolt until the mark on the bolt head
lines up with the mark on the connecting rod (turn
the bolt 90°).
(cont'd)
BACK
7-25
Protected by AR
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Installation (cont'd)
22. The seal mating surface on the engine block end 25. Clean and dry the engine block end cover mating
cover should be dry. Apply a light coat of grease to surfaces.
the crankshaft and to the lip of the seal.
26. Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or
23. Drive the crankshaft oil seal squarely into the 08718-0003, evenly to the block mating surface of
engine block end cover. the engine block end cover and to the inner threads
of the bolt holes. Install the dowel pins (A), new D-
07749-0010000
ring (8) and the left side cover (C) on the cylinder
~
block.
NOTE: Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more

have elapsed since applying the liquid gasket.
Instead, reapply liquid gasket after removing the
old residue.
A
24. Confirm that the clearance is equal all the way

around with a feeler gauge.
Clearance: 0.2-0.7 mm (0.01-0.03 in.)
B
6x 1.0 mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
0.2-0.7mm
(0.01-0.03 in.) ~ .. I
27. After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before
filling the engine with oil.
BACK
7-26
Protected by AR
28. Clean and dry the oil pump mating surfaces. 31. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces.
29. Install the oil pump (A). 32. Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or
08718-0003, evenly to the oil pan mating surface of
-1 Install a new crankshaft oil seal in the oil pump the block and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.
(see step 15 on page 8-9). NOTE: Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more
-2 Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or have elapsed since applying the liquid gasket.
08718-0003, evenly to the block mating surface Instead, reapply liquid gasket after removing the
of the oil pump and to the inner threads ofthe old residue.
bolt holes.
NOTE: Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or 33. Install the oil pan.
more have elapsed since applying the liquid
gasket. Instead, reapply liquid gasket after
removing the old residue.
-3 Grease the lip of the oil seal and apply oil to
the new a-ring (8).
-4 Install the dowel pins (C), then align the inner
rotor with the crankshaft and install the oil
pump.
-5 Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft and
check the seal for distortion.
6x 1.0mm
6x1.0mm 12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf.ftl
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ft)
"'y
\
Apply liquid gasket
along the broken line.
34. Tighten the bolts in two or three steps. In the final

step, tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 12 N·m (1.2
kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft).
CD ® ®
_~III.l"" __ @
c @
6x 1.0mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ft)
30. Install the baffle plate (D), then install the oil screen
(E).
@ @
BACK 7-27
Protected by AR
Engine Block
Pulley End Crankshaft Seal Transmission End Crankshaft Seal

Installation - In-car Installation - In-car
Special Tools Required Special Tools Required

Oil Seal Driver 07LAD-PT3010A • Driver 07749-0010000
• Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 80 mm I.D.
1. Dry the crankshaft oil seal housing. 07VAD-P8A010A
2. Apply a light coat of grease to the crankshaft and to 1. Dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.
the lip ofthe seal.
2. Apply a light coat of grease to the crankshaft and to
3. Using the seal driver, drive in the crankshaft oil seal the lip ofthe seal.
until the driver bottoms against the oil pump. When
the seal is in place, clean any excess grease off the 3. Using the special tools, drive the crankshaft oil seal
crankshaft, and check that the oil seal lip is not into the engine block end cover until the driver
distorted. attachment bottoms against the crankshaft. Align
the hole in the driver attachment with the pin on the
crankshaft.
07LAD-PT3010A
07VAD-PSA010A
4. Clean any excess grease off the crankshaft, and

check that the oil seal lip is not distorted.
BACK
7-28
Protected by AR
Engine Mechanical
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools ................................................................. 8-2
Oil Pressure Switch Test .............................................. 8-4
Oil Pressure Test ........................................................... 8-4
Engine Oil Replacement .............................................. 8-5
Engine Oil Filter Replacement ..................................... 8-5
Oil Pump Overhaul ....................................................... 8-7
Protected by AR
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty

CD 07 GAD-PH7020 1 Oil Seal Driver 1
® 07912-6110001 Oil Filter Wrench 1
CD
BACK
8-2
Protected by AR
O-RINGS
VTEC SOLENOID
VALVE FILTER
VTEC SOLENOID
VALVE ASSEMBlV
/BAFFLE
/ PLATE
OIL FILTER
~~
DOWEL PIN
/
DRAIN BOLT
OIL PUMP
Overhaul, page 8-7
Inspection, step 10 on page 8-8
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

Circuit Diagram, page 22-110
Switch test, page 8-4
Oil pressure test, page 8-4
WASHER
\
OIL PAN
Installation,
step 23 on page 8-10
BACK
8-3
Protected by AR
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pressure Switch Test Oil Pressure Test
1. Remove the VEl/RED wire (A) from the engine oil If the oil pressure warning light stays on with the
pressure switch (B). engine running, check the engine oil level. If the oil
B C level is correct:
1. Connect a tachometer.
2. Remove the engine oil pressure switch and install

an oil pressure gauge (A).
2. Cl eck for continuity between the positive terminal

Ie, and the engine (ground). There should be
continuity with the engine stopped. There should 3. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the
be no continuity with the engine running. gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem
before continuing.
4. Allow the engine to reach operating temperature

(fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should
be:
Engine Oil Temperature: 176°F (SO°CI

Engine Oil Pressure:
At Idle: 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2, 10 psi)
minimum
At 3,000 rpm: 490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm2, 71 psi)
minimum
5. If oil pressure is NOT within specifications, inspect

these items:
• Check the oil screen for clogging.

• Check the oil pump (see page 8-7).
BACK
8-4
Protected by AR
Engine Oil Replacement Engine Oil Filter Replacement
NOTE: Under normal conditions, the oil filter should be Special Tools Required
replaced at every other oil change. Under severe Oil Filter Wrench 07912-6110001
conditions, the oil filter should be replaced at each oil
change. 1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter
wrench.
Change interval:
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months 2. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the
(Normal conditions) new filter. Wipe off the seat on the engine block,
Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months then apply a light coat of oil to the filter rubber seal.
(Severe conditions). Use only filters with a built-in bypass system.
B
1. Warm up the engine.
2. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil.
B
lYll~
A
Do not overtighten.
3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B).
4. Refill with the recommended oil (see page 3-2).
Capacity
4.0 A (4.2 US qt, 3.5 Imp qt) at 011 change.
4.4 A (4.6 US qt, 3.9 Imp qt) at oil change
including filter.
5.0 A (5.3 US qt, 4.4 Imp qt) after engine overhaul.
5. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check

for oil leakage.
(cont'd)
BACK
8-5
Protected by AR
Engine Lubrication
Engine Oil Filter Replacement (cont'd)
3. Install the oil filter by hand. 5. If eight numbers (1 to 8) are printed around the
outside of the filter, use the following procedure to
4. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter tighten the filter.
clockwise with the special tool.
• Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against
Tighten: 7/8 turn clockwise. the block, and note which number is at the
Tightening torque: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft) bottom .
• Tighten the filter by turning it clockwise seven
numbers from the one you noted. For example, if
number 2 is at the bottom when the seal is lightly
seated, tighten the filter until the number 1
comes around to the bottom.
Number when rubber Number after tightening.

seal is seated.
Number when 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
rubber seal is
seated
Number after 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
tightening
6. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the

specified level, run the engine for more than 3
minutes, then check for oil leakage.
BACK
8-6
Protected by AR
Oil Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
6x 1.0mm
~_~6"""11N.m '0.6""'JbI.ftI
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
18 N·m 11.8 kgf·m, 13Ibf·ft)
1/8 in. BSPT (British standard pipe taper)
28 threadslinch. Use the
proper liquid sealant.
/ O-RING
Replace.
PUMP COVER
OUTER ROTOR
INNER ROTOR
~PUMPHOUS'NG
OIL SEAL
Replace.
REUEFVALVE
Valve
I
0 -----------
must slide freely
in the housing bore. ~~ 0
6 x 1 0 mm
Apply liquid gasket
to the mating surface of
the cylinder block
when installing.
Replace if it is scored. 12 N:m 11.2 kgf.m, 8.7Ibf.ft)
SEAUNGBOLT
SPRING 39 N·m 14.0 kgf·m, 29 Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK
8-7
Protected by AR
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
Special Tools Required Inspection

Oil Seal Driver 07GAD-PH70201
10. Check the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance
Removal between the inner rotor (A) and outer rotor (8). If
the inner-to-outer rotor clearance exceeds the
1. Drain the engine oil. service limit, replace the oil pump assembly.
2. Turn the crankshaft so that the No.1 piston is at top Inner Rotor-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance
dead center (see page 6-18). Standard (New): 0.04-0.16 mm
(0.002-0.006 in.)
3. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-18). Service Limit: 0.20 mm (O.OOS In.)
4. Remove the idler pulley.
5. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor, then

remove the timing belt drive pulley (see page 6-60).
6. Remove the VTEC solenoid valve and oil filter

assembly (see page 6-9).
7. Remove the oil pan and the oil screen (A).
11. Check the housing-to-rotor axial clearance between
J.
the rotors (A) and pump housing (8). If the housing-
to-rotor axial clearance exceeds the service limit.
replace the oil pump assembly.
Housing-to-Rotor Axial Clearance

8. Remove the mounting bolts and the oil pump (0.001-0.003 in.)
assembly (8). Service Limit: 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
9. Remove the screws from the pump housing. then

separate the housing and cover.
BACK
8-8
Protected by AR
12. Check the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance Installation

between the outer rotor (A) and pump housing (B).
If the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance 17. Reassemble the oil pump.
exceeds the service limit, replace the oil pump
assembly. 18. Check that the oil pump turns freely.
Housing-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance 19. Clean and dry the oil pump mating surfaces.
(0.006 - 0.007 in.) 20. Insta" the oil pump (A).
-1 Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or
08718-0003, evenly to the block mating surface
of the oil pump and to the inner threads of the
bolt holes.
NOTE: Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or
more have elapsed since applying the liquid
gasket. Instead, reapply liquid gasket after
removing the old residue.
-2 Grease the lip of the oil seal and apply oil to
the new O-rings (B).
-3 Insta" the dowel pins (C), then align the inner
rotor with the crankshaft and install the oil
pump.
-4 Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft, and
check the seal for distortion.
13. Inspect both rotors and the pump housing for

"Sx1.0mm
scoring or other damage. Replace parts if 12 Nom 11.2 kgfom,
necessary. 8.7Ibfoft)
14. Remove the old oil seals from the oil pump.
15. Gently tap in the new oil seals until the special tool
jI~.
bottoms on the pump.
/ 'sx1 .0mm
D 12 Nom 11.2 kgfom,
8.7Ib'oft)
21. Install the oil screen (D).
16. Apply liquid thread lock to the pump housing

screws.
(cont'd)
BACK
8-9
Protected by AR
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
22. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces.
23. Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or 08718-

0003, evenly to the oil pan mating surface of the
block and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.
NOTE: Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more

have elapsed since applying the liquid gasket.
Instead, reapply liquid gasket after removing the
old residue.
24. Install the oil pan.
Apply liquid gasket

along the broken line.
25. Tighten the bolts in two or three steps. In the final

step, tighten all bolts, in sequence to 12 N·m (1.2
kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft).
CD ® (j) ®
10.. @
~Q. @
@
@ @ @®®@ @
BACK
8-10
Protected by AR
Engine Mechanical
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System

Intake Manifold Removal and Installation ................. 9-2
Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation .............. 9-11
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement ..................... 9-12
Protected by AR
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation

Exploded View-J32A1 engine ('99 model):
8x 1.25mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m.
16Ibf·ft)
I
GASKET 6x 1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m. 8.7Ibf·ft)
R\~~~~_ INTAKE AIR
V
TEMPERATURE
/ (lAT)SENSOR
~ 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m.
13Ibf.ft)
, O-RING
Replace.
INTAKE -----12x1.5mm
MANIFOLD 26 N·m (2.7 kgf·m.
END PLATE 20Ibf·ft)
INTAKE MANIFOLD
Replace if it is cracked or
if the mating surface is
damaged.
8x 1.25 mm
I
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m.
16Ibf·ft)
GASKET
Replace.
SPACER
THROTTLE
BODY
9-2 BACK
Protected by AR
Exploded View-J32A1 engine ('00-03 models):
6x1.0mm REAR INTAKE MANIFOLD

12N·m CHAMBER
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft) Replace if it is cracked or
damaged.
48x1.25mm
22N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,16Ibf·ft)
------8 x 1.25 mm
22N·m
(2.2kgf·m,
16Ibf·ft)
FRONT INTAKE MANIFOLD

CHAMBER INTAKE MANIFOLD
Replace if it is cracked or Replace if it is cracked or
if the mating surface is 6x 1.0mm if the mating surface is
damaged. 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft) damaged.
(cant'd)
BACK
9-3
Protected by AR
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont'd)

Exploded View- J32A2 engine:
6x 1.0mm REAR INTAKE MANIFOLD

12N·m CHAMBER
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ftl Replace if it is cracked or
,4.. '2Smm
22N·m
(2.2 kgf·m. 16 Ibf·ftl
damaged.
- - - 8 x 1.25 mm
22N·m
(2.2kgf·m.
16lbf·ftl
FRONT INTAKE MANIFOLD

CHAMBER INTAKE MANIFOLD
Replace if it is cracked or Replace if it is cracked or
ifthe mating surface is 6x 1.0mm if the mating surface is
damaged. 12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ftl damaged.
9-4 BACK
Protected by AR
Removal: 2. Remove the water bypass hoses (A). Disconnect

the TCS control actuator connector (B) and the TCS
1. Remove the intake manifold cover (A) and ignition control valve angle sensor connector (C) from the
coil cover(s) (B). TCS control valve assembly, then remove the bolt
(D) securing the TCS control valve bracket (J32A2
'99 model: engine).
'OO'()3 models (J32A2 engine shown):
(cont'd)
BACK
9-5
Protected by AR
3. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister 5. Remove the throttle cable (A) and cruise control
hose (A) from the throttle body. cable (B) by loosening the locknuts (C), then
slipping the cable ends out ofthe accelerator
'99 model: linkage. Take care not to bend the cables when
removing them. Always replace any kinked cable
with a new one.

6. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and
wire harness clamps from the intake manifold.
• Intake air temperature (lAT) sensor connector

• Idle air control (lAC) valve connector
• Throttle position (TP) sensor connector
• Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
A
connector
7. Remove the intake manifold runner control (lMRC)

cable from the intake manifold side (J32A2 engine).
4. Remove the vacuum hose (B) and breather pipe (C),

then remove the intake air duct (0).
BACK
9-6
Protected by AR
8. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A), 10. Remove the intake manifold ('99 model).
vacuum hoses (B) and positive crankcase
ventilation (PCV) hose (C).
'99 model:
11. Remove the upper cover (A), then remove the

intake manifold (B) ('00-03 models).
A
'00-03 models:
9. Remove the breather hose (A) and water bypass

hoses (B).
A B
(cont'd)
BACK
9-7
Protected by AR
Installation: 2. Install the upper cover. Tighten the bolts and nuts
sequentially two or three steps. Always use a new
,. Install the intake manifold. Tighten the bolts and gasket ('00-03 models).
nuts sequentially in two or three steps. Always use
a new intake manifold gasket. Specified torque:
6x 1.0 mm
Specified torque: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
8x 1.25 mm
@ (i) @ ®
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
'99 model:
@ CD ® (f)
® ® ® ®
® ® ® ® ®
'00-03 models:
@ CD ® (f)
® ® ® ® ®
9-8 BACK
Protected by AR
3. Install the brake booster vacuum hose (A), vacuum 5. Install the throttle cable, then adjust the cable (see
hoses (S) and positive crankcase ventilation (peV) page 11-188).
hose (e).
6. Install the cruise control cable, then adjust the
'99 model: cable (see page 4-44).
7. Install the intake air duct (A), then install the

vacuum hose (S) and breather pipe (e).
'99 model:
4. Install the breather hose (A) and water bypass

hoses (S).
8. Install the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister

hose (0).
A B
(cont'd)
BACK 9-9
Protected by AR
9. Tighten the bolt (A) securing the TCS control valve 10. Install the ignition coil cover(s) (A) and intake
bracket. Connect the TCS control valve angle manifold cover (8).
sensor connector (8), TCS control valve actuator
connector (C) and water bypass hoses (0) on the '99 model:
TCS control valve assembly (J32A2 engine).
6x1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibt·ft)
8x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m. 16lbf·ftl
A
6x1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m,
/ 8.7Ibf·ftl
11. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
12. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses and

connectors are installed correctly.
13. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed

9-10 BACK
Protected by AR
Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation
NOTE:
• Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling .
• Check for folds or scratches on the surfaces of the gaskets.
FRONT:
/
:~Lr.2~O.!;~NG NUT
/Re."".
GASKET
31 N·m 13.2 kgf.m.
23Ibf·ft)
Apply engine oil to the
nut threads.
Replace.
COVER
~o/
8x 1.25 mm
v 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m.
16lbf·ftl
REAR:
/
FRONT EXHAUST MANIFOLD
I
REAR EXHAUST MANIFOLD
~\ ~
SELF-LOCKING NUT
~GASKE1Replace.
8x 1.25mm
31 N·m (3.2 kgf·m. 23 Ibf·ftl
8x 1.25 mm Apply engine oil to the
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m. 16 Ibf·ftl nut threads.
Replace.
BACK 9-11
Protected by AR
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement
NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling.
J32A1 engine:
SELF-LOCKING NUTS
10x 1.25 mm
54N·m
/5.4 kgf·m. 40 Ibf·ftl
Replace.
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10x 1.25 mm
33N·m
(3.4 kgf·m, 25 Ibf·ftl
Replace.
-------------- SELF-LOCKING NUT

10x 1.25 mm
33N·m
(3.4 kgf·m. 25 Ibf.ftl
Replace.
SECONDARY HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR
~ (SECONDARY H02S1
" ~4.5
fN.m
kgf.m. 33 Ibf·ftl
~
GASKET
Replace .
...J~
THREE WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTER
SELF-LOCKING NUTS
10 x 1.25 mm
54N·m 6x1.0mm
/5.5 kgf.m. 40 Ibf·ftl 12N·m
Replace. (1.2 kgf·m. 8.7 Ibf·ftl
THREE WAY CATALYTIC

PRIMARY HEATED CONVERTER TIGHTENING
OXYGEN SENSOR SEQUENCE
(PRIMARY H02S1
44N·m
/4.5 kgf.m. 33 Ibf·ftl 10x 1.25 mm
38 N·m /3.9 kgf·m. 28lbf·ftl
9-12 BACK
Protected by AR
NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling.
J32A2 engine:
SELF-LOCKING NUTS
10x 1.25 mm
54N·m
(5.4 kgf·m. 40 Ib'·ftl
Replace.
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10x 1.25mm
33N·m
(3.4 kgf·m. 25 Ib'·ftl
Replace.
------------
GASKETS
Replace.
SELF-LOCKING NUTS
10x 1.25 mm
54N·m
15.5 kgf·m. 40 Ib'·ftl /
Replace.
PRIMARY H02S THREE WAY CATALYTIC

44N·m CONVERTER TIGHTENING
14.5 kgf·m. 33 Ib'·ftl SEQUENCE
10x 1.25 mm
38 N-m 13.9 kgf·m. 281b'·ftl
BACK
9-13
Protected by AR
Engine Cooling
Cooling System
Coolant Temperature Gauge Test ............................... 10-7
Sending Unit Test ......................................................... 10-9
Radiator Cap Test ......................................................... 10-10
Radiator Test ................................................................. 10-10
Fan Motor Test .............................................................. 10-11
Thermostat Test ....................... .................................... 10-11
Water Pump Inspection ............................................... 10-12
Water Pump Replacement ........................................... 10-12
Coolant Replacement ................................................... 10-13
Thermostat Replacement ............................................ 10-15
Radiator and Fans Replacement ................................. 10-16
Fan Controls
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 10-20
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting ........................ 10-22
Radiator Fan Switch A Circuit Troubleshooting ........ 10-24
Radiator and Condenser Fans Circuit
Troubleshooting A .................................................... 10-25
Troubleshooting B .................................................... 10-26
Troubleshooting C .................................................... 10-28
Troubleshooting D .................................................... 10-30
Troubleshooting E .................................................... 10-31
Radiator and Condenser Fans High Speed
Circuit Troubleshooting ........................................... 10-31
Radiator Fan Switch Test ............................................. 10-33
Radiator Fan Switch A Replacement .......................... 10-33
Radiator Fan Switch B Replacement .......................... 10-34
Radiator Fan Switch C Replacement .......................... 10-34
Protected by AR
Cooling System
J32A 1 engine:
RADIATOR CAP
LOWER RADIATOR HOSE
I ATFCOOLER
HOSES
('99 model)
I
~
~o.~~
ATF COOLER HOSE DRAIN PLUG
('99 model)
ATF COOLER LINE

('99 model)
FAN MOTOR
Test, page 10-11
RADIATOR FAN l~
AIC CONDENSER FAN ASSEMBLY
RADIATOR FAN SHROUD Replacement, page 10-16
Replacement. page 10-16 Fan Motor Test. page 10-11
10-2 BACK
Protected by AR
J32A2 engine:
UPPER RADIATOR
HO~ TOR
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
RAi :IATOR t p.g. to- t6
LOWER RADIATOR / R'''''<om," .
HOSE
/
RADIATOR
SHROUD
Ft~age 10-16
Replacemen •
RADIATOR FA~ MOTOR

Test. page ~~-• page 10-16
Replaceme
/
AIC CONDENSER FAN
ASSEMBLY a e 10-16
RADIATOR ~~~ SWITCHC
Test. pagee~t • page 10-34
Replacem
R placement. p 9 ge 10-11
e Motor Test. pa
Fan
(cant'd)
BACK
10-3
Protected by AR
Cooling System
J32A1 engine ('99 model):
HEATER HOSES
UPPER RADIATOR HOSE
WATER BYPASS HOSE
LOWER RADIATOR HOSE
J32A1 engine ('00-03 models):
WATER PASSAGE
THERMOSTAT COVER WATER BYPASS HOSES
UPPER RADIATOR HOSE
II
Ii!
LOWER RADIATOR HOSE
BACK
10-4
Protected by AR
J32A2 engine:
HEATER VALVE
WATER PASSAGE
WATER BYPASS HOSE
THERMOSTAT HOUSING
LOWER RADIATOR
HOSE
(cont'd)
BACK
10-5
Protected by AR
Cooling System
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH B
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE SENDING UNIT
('99 model)
Test, page 10-9
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT)
GA~,_
SENSOR
WATER PUMP O-RINGS

O~\
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH A
O·RING
O·RING
10-6 BACK
Protected by AR
Coolant Temperature Gauge Test
'99 model: '00-03 models:

1. Check the No.9 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/ Coolant Temperature Gauge Needle Does Not Move at
relay box before testing. All:
2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF, then 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and connect
disconnect the YELJGRN wire (A) from the coolant powertrain control module (PCM) connector
temperature gauge sending unit (8), and ground it terminal A31 to body ground with a jumper wire.
with a jumper wire.
A PCM CONNECTOR A (32P)
11 12 3 4 5 6 1/ 8 9 10
LI
112V 14 15 V 17 18 19 20 21 / / 241
1/ 26 'D 28 29 30 31
-
32
MTRTW
(VEL/GRN)
_L...
=
B After 30 seconds or more, does the temperature

gauge needle move to the Hot side?
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Check that the
pointer of the coolant temperature gauge starts YES-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck
moving toward the "H" mark. Turn the ignition (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes
switch OFF before the pointer reaches "H" on the away, replace the original PCM.
gauge dial. Failure to do so may damage the gauge.
NO-Go to step 3 .
• If the pointer of the gauge does not move at all,
check for an open in the YELJGRN wire. If the 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect PCM
wires are OK, replace the coolant temperature connector A (32P).
gauge .
• If the coolant temperature gauge works, test the
coolant temperature gauge sending unit.
(cont'd)
BACK 10-7
Protected by AR
Cooling System
Coolant Temperature Gauge Test (cont'd)
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure Coolant Temperature Gauge Needle Goes Past the Hot
voltage between PCM connector terminal A31 and Mark:
body ground.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect PCM
PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) connector A (32P).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the

coolant temperature gauge.
Does the temperature gauge needle move at all?

(you may have to watch it for about 30 seconds).
YES-Go to step 3.
NO - Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck

(see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes
Wire side of female terminals away, replace the original PCM .•
Is there about 5 V? 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)
again, and watch the coolant temperature gauge.
YES-Replace the fuel and temperature gauge
assembly.• Does the temperature gauge needle immediately
go past the Hot mark?
NO-Go to step 5.
YES - Replace the fuel and temperature gauge
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for assembly .•
continuity between PCM connector terminal A31
and gauge assembly connector terminal 83. NO- The temperature gauge needle went past the
Hot mark after about 30 seconds or more. Go to
PCM CONNECTOR A (32P)
step 4.
GAUGE ASSEMBLV CONNECTOR B (18P)

YES-Replace the fuel and temperature gauge

assembly.•
NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM

connector terminal A31 and gauge connector
terminal 83 .•
10-8 BACK
Protected by AR
Sending Unit Test
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the '99 model:
gauge assembly connector 8 (18P).
1. Disconnect the YELJGRN wire (A) from the coolant
5. Check for continuity between PCM connector temperature gauge sending unit (B).
terminal A31 and gauge assembly connector A
C
terminal B3.
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR B (18P)

2. Using an ohmmeter, measure the change in
YES- Repair short in the wire between PCM resistance between the positive terminal (C) and
connector A31 and gauge connector terminal 83 .• the engine (ground) with the engine cold and with
the engine at operating temperature .
NO-Replace the fuel and temperature gauge
assembly .• Temperature 133°F (56°C) 185°F (85°C)-
212°F (100°C)
Resistance ( Q ) 137 46-30
3. Ifthe obtained readings are substantially different

from the specifications above, replace the sending
unit.
BACK 10-9
Protected by AR
Cooling System
Radiator Cap Test Radiator Test
1. Remove the radiator cap (A), wet its seal with 1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove
engine coolant, then install it on a commercially the radiator cap and fill the radiator with engine
available pressure tester (B). coolant to the top of the filler neck.
2. Attach a commercially available pressure tester (A)

B to the radiator and apply a pressure of 93 - 123 kPa
(0.95-1.25 kgf/cm 2, 14-18 psi).
A
2. Apply a pressure of 93 - 123 kPa (0.95 - 1.25

kgf/cm 2, 14-18 psi).
3. Check for a drop in pressure.
4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap.
3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in

pressure.
4. Remove the tester and reinstall the radiator cap.
5. Check for engine oil in the coolant and/or coolant in

the engine oil.
10-10 BACK
Protected by AR
Fan Motor Test Thermostat Test
1. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the radiator fan Replace the thermostat if it is open at room
motor (A) and condenser fan motor (8). temperature.
To test a closed thermostat:
LOCK
1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water.
Do not let the thermometer (8) touch the bottom of
the hot container.
I~·'--------------B
2. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the

8 terminal, and ground to the A terminal.
2. Heat the water and check the temperature with a
3. If the motor fails to run or does not run smoothly, thermometer. Check the temperature at which the
replace it. thermostat first opens, and at which it is fully open.
3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat when it is

fully open.
STANDARD THERMOSTAT
Lift height: above 10.0 mm (0.39 in.)
Starts opening: '99 model: 163-171°F (73-77°C)
'00-03 models: 169-176°F (76-
80°C)
Fully open: 194°F (90°C)
BACK
10-11
Protected by AR
Cooling System
Water Pump Inspection Water Pump Replacement
1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-18). 1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-18).
2. Turn the water pump pulley counterclockwise. 2. Remove the timing belt tensioner.
Check that it turns freely.
3. Remove the water pump (A) by removing five bolts.
3. Check for signs of seal leakage. A small amount of
"weeping" from the bleed hole (A) is normal.
A
A 6x
" 1.0mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf.m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
4. Inspect and clean the O-ring groove and mating

surface with the cylinder block.
5. Install th.' water pump with a new O-ring (8) in the

reverse order of removal.
A
6. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
BACK
10-12
Protected by AR
Coolant Replacement
,. Turn the ignition switch on (II). Set the displayed 7. Remove, drain, and reinstall the reservoir. Fill the
temperature on the climate control system to 90°F tank to the MAX mark with Honda All Season
(32°C), then turn off the ignition switch. Make sure Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
the engine and radiator are cool to the touch.
2. Remove the radiator cap.
3. loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant.

A
8. Pour Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2

into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck.
NOTE:
• Always use Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant
4. Install a rubber hose (A) on the drain bolt (B) Type 2. Using a non-Honda coolant can result in
located at the rear of the cylinder block, then loosen corrosion, causing the cooling system to
the drain bolt. malfunction or fail.
• Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a
mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Pre-
mixing is not required.
Engine Coolant Refill Capacity

5.6 A (5.9 US qt) including the reservoir capacity
Reservoir Capacity
'99-01 models: 0.6 A (0.6 US qt)
'02-03 models: 0.8 A (0.8 US qt)
B
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
5. When the coolant stops draining, tighten the drain
bolt.
6. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely.
9. Install the radiator cap loosely.

(cont'd)
BACK
10-13
Protected by AR
Cooling System
Coolant Replacement (cont'd)
10. Start the engine and let it run until it warms up (the
radiator fan comes on at least twice).
11. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator,
and add Honda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type
2 if needed.
12. Put the radiator cap on tightly, then run the engine
again and check for leaks.
BACK
10-14
Protected by AR
Thermostat Replacement
NOTE: Use new a-rings when reassembling.
PIN
RUBBER SEAL
Replace.
6x 1.0mm
12 N·m 11 .2 kgf·m. 8.7Ibf·ft)
THERMOSTAT
Install with pin up.
THERMOSTAT COVER
BACK 10-15
Protected by AR
Cooling System
Radiator and Fans Replacement
J32A 1 engine:
1. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Remove the upper and lower radiator hoses.

UPPER RADIATOR HOSE
~
ATFCOOLER
i~TOOlCAP'..
HOSES
('99 model)
,.omm
~ " ~:~ N·m (1.0 kgf·m,
~'bf.ft)
UPPER BRACKET
AND CUSHION
-----------
6x 1.0 mm
7 N·m (0.7 kgf·m,
5Ibf·ft)
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m,
~ 7.2Ibf·ft)
RADIATOR
FAN SHROUD ~~-
~ 4.4N·m (0.45 kgf.m,
3.3Ibf·ft)
A/CCONDENSER
FAN ASSEMBLV
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft) FAN MOTOR CONNECTORS
3. Remove the ATF cooler hoses ('99 model)
4. Disconnect the fan motor connectors.
5. Remove the radiator upper brackets, then pull up the radiator.
6. Remove the fan shroud assemblies and other parts from the radiator.
7. Install the radiator in the reverse order of removal.
8. Set the upper and lower cushions securely.
9. Fill the radiator with engine coolant and bleed the air.
BACK
10-16
Protected by AR
J32A2 engine:
,. Drain the engine coolant.
2. Remove the upper radiator hose and lower radiator hose.
CAP
x 1.0mm
7N·m
(0.7 kgf·m. 5 Ibf·ft)
LOWER
------------
6x1 .0mm
7N·m
,o.7k...m ••, /
RADIATOR FAN SHROUD O·RING

ASSEMBLY Replace.
AIC CONDENSER
FAN ASSEMBLY
6x 1.0mm
FAN MOTOR CONNECTORS
3. Disconnect the fan motor connectors.
4. Disconnect the radiator fan switch C connector.
5. Remove the radiator upper brackets. then pull up the radiator.
6. Remove the fan shroud assemblies and other parts from the radiator.
7. Install the radiator in the reverse order of removal. Make sure the upper and lower cushions are set securely.
8. Fill the radiator with engine coolant and bleed the air.
BACK
10-17
Protected by AR
Fan Controls
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX CONDENSER FAN
RELAY
MULTI-RELAY BOX Test, page 22-103
RADIATOR FAN RELAY

Test, page 22-103
RADIATOR FAN
CONTROL MODULE
FAN CONTROL RELAY
(J32A2 engine)
Test, page 22-103

Test, page 10-33
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH B
Test, page 10-33
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH C

(J32A2 engine)
Test, page 10-33
CONDENSER FAN ASSEMBLY

Motor Test, page 10-11
BACK
10-18
Protected by AR
J32A1 engine:
Radiator fan does not run at all Radiator fan circuit troubleshooting (see~age 10-22)
Radiator fan does not run for engine Radiator fan switch A ci rcuit troubleshooting (see page
coolinQ, but it does run with AlC ON 10-24)
Both fans do not run at all Radiator and condenser fans circuit troubleshooting A
(see page 10-25)
J32A2 engine:
Both radiator fan and condenser fan do Radiator and condenser fans circuit troubleshooting A
not run with AlC ON and when the (see page 10-25).
engine coolant temperature is above
199°F (93°C)
Radiator fan does not run at all, but Radiator and condenser fans circuit troubleshooting B
condenser fan runs with AlC ON or (see page 10-26).
when the engine coolant temperature is
above 199°F (93°C)
Condenser fan runs but radiator fan Remove the radiator fan control relay, and test.
does not run when the engine coolant • If the relay is faulty, replace it.
temperature is above 199°F (93°C), but • If the relay is OK, repair an open in the wire between
both fans run with AlC ON the radiator fan control relay 5P connector terminal
No.4 and the radiator fan motor 2P connector
terminal No.2.
Both radiator fan and condenser fan do Radiator and condenser fans circuit troubleshooting C
not run when the engine coolant (see page 10-28)
temperature is above 199°F (93°C), but
both fan s run with AlC ON
Both radiator and condenser fans do not Radiator and condenser fans circuit troubleshooting 0
run when the engine coolant (see page 10-30)
temperature is above 199°F (93°C), but
both fans chanQe speed with AlC ON
Both radiator fan and condenser fan run Radiator and condenser fans circuit troubleshooting E
with ignition switch ON (II), with AlC OFF, (see page 10-31)
and when the engine temperature is
below 199°F (93°C)
Both radiator fan and condenser fan do Radiator and condenser fans high speed circuit
not run at high speed with the AlC ON troubleshooting (see page 21-42)
Both radiator fan speed and condenser Radiator and condenser fans high speed circuit
fan speed do not change from low to Hi troubleshooting (see page 10-31)
when the engine coolant temperature is
above 210°F (99°C), but both fans
change speed with AlC ON
Condenser fan speed does not change Condenser Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
from low to Hi with AlC ON and the (see page 21-41)
engine coolant temperature above 210°F
(99°C)
BACK
10-19
Protected by AR
Fan Controls
Circuit Diagram
J32A1 engine:

IGNITION SWITCH
IIA' ~
No.411120AI No.4216OAi
,
\
WHT
r--O"
No.5712OAi
I No.58I2OAI
IGI HOT in ON
0 III
andSTARTti[HII
DRIVER'S
No.6 No.3 UNDER-DASH
1 3 1 3 115AI 17.5AI FUSE/RELAY
BOX
~~-----------~
RADIATOR
FAN
RElAY
~~-----------~ CONDENSER
FAN
RELAY
"h7
2 4 2 4
81.U BlK 81.U ~L GN YEL/WHT YL W BLK/VEL /V

.. EL V
3 1
...,..... g'NDITIONING
SYSTEM
-ro
~
. ~
FAN
CONTROL
~
MODULE
TIMER
GRN WHT/GRN BLK
~GRN---t
t-~..
GRN
2 2
RAJ: ,TOR
RADIATOR CONDENSER FAN SWITCH A FAN :WlTCHB
M FAN FAN M
[~,sed:Abo
~~
' Closed : Abo.. ..
MOTOR MOTOR
1 1
,[, 1104'CI
BlK BLK
I BlK
I
I
G201 : '99-01 models
G204 : '02-03 models
I
Gl0l
Gl02
G401
10-20
BACK
Protected by AR
J32A2 engine:
BATTERY
No.41 (l20A) No.42 (&GA)
+~~-----<~~~-o~~---------------+-~------------~o
1G1 HOT in ON (1/)
and START (III)
No.54 (4OA) No.13 (7.SA) BlKIYEL YEL

~~~----------------~YEL---~~
DRIVER'S
No.57 (30A) No.5a(3OA) PASSENGER'S No.3 UNDER-DASH
r.. UNDER·DASH (7.SA) FUSEIRELAY
FUSEIRELAY BOX BOX
BLKlYEL
1 3 1 P
u_______ ~ ~TOR U_______ ~ ~DENSER YElr YEL WHTIRED BLKlYEL BlKIYEL
n p RELAY rr .~ RELAY
3 6 7 2
2 4 2 14
Blu/yEL FAN
CONTROL
~~
MODULE
M FAN
MOTOR
1 8
BllJ.1IU( GRN QRN BLUIWHT GRN
Gl0l G401
Gl02
r-------t----------- PCM
BLKlYEL ----~
FAN
CONTROL
RELAY GRNTIJ
4 2 3 _
BlUiSLK -1----.... BLK GRN GRN •
GRN-+......... -_LGRN-+GAN ~ REDIBLJ( --{> SWITCH

AJC PRESSURE
~
GR:
GRN
Bl~~
M
RADIATOR
FAN
RADIATOR
FAN SWITCH A
Closed . Above
~~I~?fCHC
MOTOR 1 ( 1119'F (93"C) ) r(~(~~)
1
I
G204
I
Gl0l G202
I
G204
Gl02
BACK
10-21
Protected by AR
Fan Controls
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 57 (20A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/ 4. Connect a jumper wire between radiator fan relay
relay box. 4P socket terminals No.1 and No.2.
Is the fuse OK? RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
YES - Go to step 2.
lf
NO-Check for a short in the wire between the JUMPER
radiator fan relay and radiator fan motor or a faulty 2 WIRE
fan motor.•
4 3
2. Remove the radiator fan relay from the under-hood
fuse/relay box and test it (see page 22-103).
Is the relay OK? Terminal side of female terminals
YES- Go to step 3.
Does the radiator fan run?
NO-Replace radiator fan relay .•
YES-Go to step 5.
3. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay 4P
socket terminal No.1 and body ground. NO-Go to step 10.
RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET 5. Disconnect the jumper wire, and turn the ignition
switch ON (II).
~
socket terminal No.3 and body ground.
RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
1
2
Terminal side of female terminals
YES-Goto step 4.
-=
NO - Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.•
Is there [.1103 battery voltage?
YES-Troubleshooting the radiatorfan switch A

circuit (see page 10-24).
NO-Go to step 7.
BACK
10-22
Protected by AR
7. Measure the voltage between fan control module 10. Disconnect the radiator fan motor 2P connector.
SP connector terminal No.1 and body ground.
11. Measure the voltage between fan motor 2P
FAN CONTROL MODULE 8P CONNECTOR connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
RADIATOR FAN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
VEL 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Wire side of
female term inals

Is there the battery voltage?
YES- Repair an open in the wire between fan Is there battery voltage?
control module terminal No.1 and radiator fan
relay 4P socket terminal No.3 .• YES-Go to step 12.
NO - Go to step S. NO-Repair an open in the wire between radiator

fan relay 4P socket terminal No.2 and radiator 2P
S. Disconnect the fan control module SP connector. connector terminal No.2 .•
9. Check for continuity between fan control module 12. Disconnect the jumper wire.
8P connector terminal No.1 and body ground.
13. Testthe radiatorfan motor (see page 10-11).
FAN CONTROL MODULE 8P CONNECTOR
Is the fan motor OK?
YES- Repair an open in the wire between radiator

VEL 1 2 3 4 fan motor 2P connector terminal No.1 and body
ground G201 (G204 for '02-03 models) .•
5 6 7 8
NO - Replace the radiator fan motor.•
Q Wire side of
female terminals
Is there the continuity?
YES- Repair short in the wire between fan control

module SP connector terminal No.1 and radiator
fan relay 4P socket terminal No.3.
A short on the YEL wire may damage the fan
control module. If the symptom is still present after,
repairing the short, substitute a known-good fan
control module, and recheck .•
NO- Replace the fan control module .•
BACK
10-23
Protected by AR
Fan Controls
Radiator Fan Switch A Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Disconnect the radiator fan switch A 2P connector.
3. Measure the voltage between the radiator fan

switch A 2P connector terminal No.2 and body
ground.

2P CONNECTOR
Wire side of
female terminals
YES - Go to step 4
NO- Repair open in the wire between the radiator

fan switch A connector and under-hood fuse/relay
box.•
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for

continuity between the radiator fan switch A 2P
connector terminal No.1 and body ground.

2P CONNECTOR
BlK
Wire side of
female terminals
YES- Replace radiator fan switch A .•
NO-Check for open in the wire between the

radiator fan switch A connector and body ground. If
the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G101,
G102 .•
BACK
10-24
Protected by AR
Radiator and Condenser Fans Circuit Troubleshooting A
1. Check for the No.3 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's under- 6. Check for continuity between radiator fan motor 2P
dash fuse/relay box. connector terminal No.1 and body ground.
Is the fuse OK? RADIATOR FAN MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Check for these problems:

• A short in the wire between the driver's under-
dash fuse/relay box and fan control module BP
connector terminal No.2.
• A short in the wire between the driver's under-
dash fuse/relay box and fan control relay 5P
socket terminal No.5 (J32A2 engine) .•
3. Measure the voltage between fan control module Is there continuity?

BP connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
YES-Go to step B.
NO- Check for an open in the wire between
BlK/VEl radiator fan motor 2P connector terminal No.1 and
G204. Ifthe wire is OK, check for a poor ground at
1 234 G204.•
567 8 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Wire side of B. Disconnect the fan control module BP connector.

female terminals
9. Check for continuity between fan control module
BP connector terminal No.4 and body ground.
=
VES-
• J32A1 engine: Go to step 7. BlK
1 2 3 4
• J32A2 engine: Go to step 4.
5 6 7 8
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box and fan control module Wire side of
BP connector terminal No.2 .• female terminals
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. =
5. Disconnect the radiator fan motor 2P connector.

YES - Replace the fan control module. Then, if the

radiator fan does not run, replace the fan motor.•
NO - Repair an open in the wire between fan

control module terminal No.4 and G401 .•
BACK
10-25
Protected by AR
Fan Controls
Radiator and Condenser Fans Circuit Troubleshooting B
1. Check the No. 57 (30A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/ 4. Connect a jumper wire belween radiator fan relay
relay box. 4P socket terminals No.1 and No.2.
Is the fuse OK? RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
YES - Go to step 2.
~
NO-Check for a short in the wire between the JUMPER
radiator fan relay, radiator fan motor and fan 2 WIRE
control relay, and condenser fan motor or a faulty
fan motor.• 4 3
2. Remove the radiator fan relay from the under-hood

fuse/relay box and test it (see page 22-103).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 3. Does the radiator fan run?
NO-Replace radiatorfan relay .• YES-Go to step 5.
3. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay 4P NO-Go to step 10.
5. Disconnect the jumper wire, and turn the ignition
RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET switch ON (II).

~
RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
1
2

-=
YES-Go to step 4. Terminal side of female terminals
NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.•

YES- Repair an open in the wire between the

radiator fan relay and the AlC pressure switch .•
NO-Go to step 7.
BACK
10-26
Protected by AR
7. Measure the voltage between fan control module 10. Disconnect the radiator fan motor 2P connector.
11. Measure the voltage between fan motor 2P
FAN CONTROL MODULE BP CONNECTOR connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
VEL 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
Wire side of
female terminals
-= -=
YES - Repair an open in the wi re between fan Is there battery voltage?

control module terminal No.1 and radiator fan
relay 4P socket terminal No.3 . • YES-Goto step 12.
NO-Goto step S. NO-Repair an open in the wire between radiator

fan relay 4P socket terminal No.2 and radiator 2P
S. Disconnect the fan control module SP connector. connector terminal No.2 .•
9. Check for continuity between fan control module 12. Disconnect the jumper wire.
13. Testthe radiator fan motor (see page 10-11).
FAN CONTROL MODULE BP CONNECTOR
Is the fan motor OK?
YES- Repair an open in the wire between radiator

VEL 1 234 fan motor 2P connector terminal No.1 and body
ground G204.•
5 6 7 8
NO - Replace the radiator fan motor.•
Q Wire side of
female terminals
-=
Is there the continuity?
YES - Repair short in the wire between fan control

module SP connector terminal No.1 and radiator
fan relay 4P socket terminal No.3.
A short on the VEL wire may damage the fan
control module. If the symptom is still present after,
repairing the short, substitute a known-good fan
control module, and recheck .•
NO - Replace the fan control module.•
BACK
10-27
Protected by AR
Fan Controls
Radiator and Condenser Fans Circuit Troubleshooting C
1. Disconnect the fan control relay. 6. Check for continuity between condenser fan relay
4P connector terminal No.4 and radiator fan
2. Disconnect the radiator fan motor 2P connector. switch A 2P connector terminal No.2.
3. Check for continuity between fan control relay SP

connector terminal No.4 and radiator fan motor 2P RADIATOR FAN SWITCH A CONDENSER FAN
connector terminal No.2. 2P CONNECTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET
FAN CONTROL RELAY 5P SOCKET
Wire side of Terminal side of

female terminals female terminals
Wire side of female terminals YES-Go to step 7.
Is there continuity? NO-Repair an open in the wire between

condenser fan relay 4P connector terminal No. 4
YES - Go to step 4. and radiator fan switch A 2P connector terminal
No.2 .•
NO-Repair an open in the wire between fan
control relay SP connector terminal No.4 and 7. Install the condenser fan relay.
radiator fan motor 2P connector terminal No.2 .•
8. Connect a jumper wire between radiator switch A
4. Remove the condenser fan relay from the under- 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2.
hood fuse/relay box.
S. Disconnect the radiator fan switch A 2P connector. RADIATOR FAN SWITCH A

2P CONNECTOR
LK
® 1
2
GRN
JUMPER
WIRE
BACK
10-28
Protected by AR
Does the radiator fan run?
VES- Replace radiator fan switch A and recheck.•
NO-Repair an open in the wire between radiator

fan switch A 2P connector terminal No 1 and
ground G101. G102 .•
BACK
10-29
Protected by AR
Fan Controls
Radiator and Condenser Fans Circuit Troubleshooting D
1. Remove the condenser fan relay from the under- 4. Measure the voltage between fan control module
hood fuse/relay box and test it (see page 22-103). 8P connector terminal No.3 and body ground.
Is the relay OK?
YES-Goto step 2. VEL/WHT
NO- Replace the condenser fan relay .•

~
~
3. Measure the voltage between condenser fan relay
4P socket terminal No.3 and body ground.
RADIATOR FAN RELAV 4P SOCKET

2
YES - Repair an open in the wire between fan
control module terminal No.3 and condenser fan
4 I 3
relay 4P socket terminal No.3 .•
NO-Replace the fan control module .•
YES-Check these circuits:

• The wire between condenser fan relay 4P socket
terminal No. 4 and radiator fan switch A terminal
No.2.
• The connection between condenser fan relay 4P
socket terminal No.1 and fuse No. 58 (30A) in the
• The wire between condenser fan relay 4P socket
terminal No.2 and the condenser fan motor.
• The wire between the condenser fan motor and
the fan control relay .•
NO-Go to step 4.
10-30 BACK
Protected by AR
Radiator and Condenser Fans Radiator and Condenser Fans High

Circuit Troubleshooting E Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Remove the condensor fan relay, and test it (see 1. Remove the radiator fan relay and condenser fan
page 22-103). relay from the under-hood fuse/relay box.
Is the relay OK? 2. Disconnect the radiator fan switch C 2P connector.
YES- Go to step 2. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NO-Replace the relay .• 4. Measure the voltage between radiator fan switch C
2. Disconnect radiator fan switch C 2P connector and
turn the ignition switch ON ("). RADIATOR FAN SWITCH C 2P CONNECTOR
Does the radiator fan stop?
YES- Replace radiator fan switch C and recheck .•
NO-Go to step 3.
4. Remove the radiator fan relay from the under-hood =

fuse/relay box. Wire side of female terminals
5. Check for continuity between radiator fan switch C

2P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. Is there the battery voltage?
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH C 2P CONNECTOR
YES - Go to step 5.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between fan

control relay 5P socket terminal No.3 and radiator
fan switch C terminal No.1 .•
Wire side of female terminals 5. Insta" the radiator fan relay and condenser fan
relay.
YES- Repair a short in the wire between radiator

fan relay 4P socket terminal No.4, radiator fan
switch C 2P connector terminal No.1 and Ale
pressure switch .•
NO - Go to step 6.
6. Disconnect the radiator fan switch A 2P connector

and turn the ignition switch ON (").
Does the radiator fan stop?
YES - Replace radiator fan switch A..
NO- Repair a short in the wire between radiator

fan relay 4P socket terminal No.4, condenser fan
relay 4P socket terminal No.4.•
(cont'd)
BACK
10-31
Protected by AR
Fan Controls
Radiator and Condenser Fans High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
6. Connect a jumper wire between radiator fan switch

C 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2.
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH C 2P CONNECTOR
r,i2l
G~K
JUMPER
WIRE
Do the radiator and condenser fans run?
YES - Replace radiator fan switch C.•
NO-Repair an open in the wire between radiator

fan switch C 2P connector terminal No.2 and
ground G204 .•
10-32 BACK
Protected by AR
Radiator Fan Switch Test Radiator Fan Switch A Replacement
NOTE: Bleed air from the cooling system after installing 1. Disconnect the radiator fan switch A connector,
the radiator fan switch (see page 10-13). then remove radiator fan switch A (A).
1. Remove radiator fan switch A from the water

passage (see page 10-33), remove radiator fan
switch B from the cylinder head (see page 10-34),
and remove radiator fan switch C from the radiator
(see page 10-34).
2. Suspend each radiator fan switch (A) in a container

of water (C) as shown.
2 A
B 24N·m
(2.4kgf·m,
17lbf·ftl
A
2. Install radiator fan switch A with a new O-ring (B).
3. Heat the water, and check the temperature with a

thermometer (B). Do not let the thermometer touch
the bottom of the hot container.
4. Measure the continuity between terminal 1 and

terminal 2 according to the table.
1\ Terminal
1 2
Operation Temperature \
ON
196-203°F
(91-9S0C) 0- ~
SWITCH
A S-1soF (3-S0C) lower
OFF than the temperature
when it goes on
ON
212-226°F
(100-10S0C) 0- ~
SWITCH
B S-23°F (3-13°C) lower
when it goes on
20S-216°F
ON (96-102°C) 0- ~
SWITCH
C S-23°F (3-13°C) lower
when it goes on
BACK
10-33
Protected by AR
Fan Controls
Radiator Fan Switch B Replacement Radiator Fan Switch C Replacement
1. Set the No.1 piston at top dead center (TDC) (see J32A2 Engine:
page 6-18).
1. Disconnect the radiator fan switch C connector,
2. Remove the upper covers. then remove radiator fan switch C.
3. To hold the timing adjuster in its current position,

thread in the battery clamp bolt hand-tight (see
4. Loosen the idler pulley bolt about five or six turns,

then remove the timing belt from the front
camshaft pulley (see step 16 on page 6-21).
5. Remove the front camshaft pulley (see step 5 on

page 6-59).
6. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor AlB

(TDC sensor 1/2) connector, then remove the back
cover (see step 6 on page 6-59).
7. Disconnectthe radiator fan switch B connector,

C
then remove radiator fan switch B (A). 12N·m ~ A
11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
2. Install radiator fan switch C with a new O-ring (A).
8x 1.2Smm
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m, 16 Ibf·ft)
8. Install radiator fan switch B using a new O-ring (B).
BACK
10-34
Protected by AR
Fuel and Emissions
Fuel and Emissions Systems Fuel Filter Replacement ........... 11-173
Special Tools ............................ 11-2 Fuel Pump Replacement ......... 11-175
General Troubleshooting Fuel Tank Replacement ........... 11-176
Information ........................... 11-3 Fuel Gauge Test ....................... 11-179
DTC Troubleshooting Index .... 11-6 Fuel Gauge Sending Unit
Symptom Troubleshooting Test/Replacement ................ 11-180
Index ...................................... 11-9 Low Fuel Indicator Light
System Descriptions ................ 11-10 Test ........................................ 11-181
How to Set Readiness
Codes .................................... 11-91 Intake Air System
Component Location Index 11-182
PGM-FI System Throttle Body Test ................... 11-184
Component Location Index 11-93 Intake Air Bypass
DTC Troubleshooting ............. . 11-96 Control Valve Test ................ 11-184
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting .. . 11-136 Heated Air Induction
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting .. 11-140 System Test .......................... 11-185
Injectors Replacement ............ . 11-142 Air Cleaner Element
H02S Replacement ................. . 11-146 Replacement ......................... 11-186
Air Cleaner Housing
Idle Control System Disassembly/Reassembly ... 11-187
Component Location Index 11-147 Throttle Cable Adjustment ...... 11-188
DTC Troubleshooting ............. . 11-148 Throttle Body Removal/
AlC Signal Circuit Installation ............................ 11-189
Troubleshooting .................. . 11-151 Throttle Body Disassembly/
Alternator FR Signal Circuit Reassembly .......................... 11-190
Troubleshooting .................. . 11-153 IMRC System
Starter Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting ................... 11-191
Troubleshooting .................. . 11-154 IMRC Valve Inspection ............ 11-193
PSP Switch Signal Circuit IMRC Actuator Cable
Troubleshooting .................. . 11-155 Adjustment ........................... 11-194
Brake Pedal Position Switch IMRC Actuator
Signal Circuit Removal/Installation ............ 11-194
Troubleshooting .................. . 11-156 IMRC Module Unit
Idle Speed Adjustment ........... . 11-157 Removal/Installation ............ 11-195
PCM Idle Learn Procedure 11-158
Catalytic Converter System
Fuel Supply System DTC Troubleshooting .............. 11-196
Component Location Index 11-159 Tailpipe Emissions Test 11-196
PGM-FI Main Relay Circuit
Troubleshooting ................... 11-160 EGRSystem
Fuel Pressure Relieving ........... 11-163 DTC Troubleshooting .............. 11-197
Fuel Pressure Test ................... 11-164
Fuel Pump Test ........................ 11-166 PCVSystem
Fuel Lines Inspection ............... 11-167 PCV Valve Inspection and
Fuel Tube/Quick-Connect Test ........................................ 11-202
Fittings Precaution ............... 11-169
Fuel Tube/Quick-Connect EVAPSystem
Fittings Removal .................. 11-169 Component Location Index 11-203
Fuel Tube/Quick-Connect DTC Troubleshooting .............. 11-204
Fittings Installation ............... 11-170 Fuel Tank Vapor Control Valve
Fuel Pressure Regulator Test ........................................ 11-219
Replacement ......................... 11-172 Fuel Tank Vapor Control Valve
Replacement ......................... 11-221
Protected by AR
Fuel and Emissions Systems
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Oty

CD A973X-041-XXXXX Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0-30 in.Hg 1
@ 07JAZ-0010008 Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 0 - 4 in.Hg 1
@ 07SAZ-00 1OOOA 8ackprobe Set 2
G) 07VAJ-0040100 Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment 1
® 07406-004000A Fuel Pressure Gauge 1
~
~lcif
CD @ @ G)
I
~,·
. ...•'\.
~'?i~~·
~
~
BACK
11-2
Protected by AR
General Troubleshooting Information

Intermittent Failures '03 model:
The term "intermittent failure" means a system may

have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the dash does not
come on, check for poor connections or loose wires at
all connectors related to the circuit that you are
troubleshooting.
Opens and Shorts

"Open" and "Short" are common electrical terms. An
open is a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is
A
an accidental connection of a wire to ground or to
another wire. In simple electronics, this usually means
something won't work at all. In complex electronics
(like PCM's) this can sometimes mean something works, 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
but not the way it's supposed to.
4. Check the Diagnostic Trouble Code (OTC) and note
How to Use the PGM Tester or a Scan Tool it. Also check the freeze data. Refer to the OTC
Trouobleshooting Index and begin the appropriate
H the MIL (MaHunction Indicator Lamp) has come on troubleshooting procedure.
1. Start the engine and check the MIl. NOTE:

o Freeze data indicates the engine conditions when the
NOTE: If the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and first malfunction, misfire or fuel trim malfunction was
the engine is not started, the MIL will stay on for 15 detected.
-20 seconds on '01-03 models (2 seconds on '99- o The scan tool and the Honda PGM Tester can read the
00 models). OTC, freeze data, current data, and other Powertrain

Control Module (PCM) data.
2. Ifthe MIL stays on, connect the Honda PGM Tester o For specific operations, refer to the user's manual
(A) or an OBO II scan tool to the Data Link that came with the scan tool or Honda PGM Tester.
Connector (OLC) (B) located under the ashtray ('99-
02 models) or behind driver'S dashboard lower If the MIL did not come on
cover ('03 model). If the MIL did not come on, but there is a driveablility
problem, refer to the Symptom Troubleshooting index
'99-02 models: in this section.
H you can't duplicate the DTC

Some of the troubleshooting in this section requires
you to reset the PCM and try to duplicate the DTC. If the
problem is intermittent and you can't duplicate the code,
do not continue through the procedure. To do so will
only result in confusion and, possibly, a needlessly
replaced PCM.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-3
Protected by AR
General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
How to Reset the PCM How to Remove the PCM for Testing
You can reset the PCM in either of two ways: If the inspection for a trouble code requires voltage or
resistance checks at the PCM connectors, remove the
• Use the aBO II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester to PCM and test it:
clear the PCM's memory.
See the aBO II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester user's 1. Pull back the carpet from the passenger's and
manuals for specific instructions. driver's side of the center console to expose the
• Turn the ignition switch OFF, and remove the No.13 PCM.
CLOCK BACKUP fuse (7.5A) (A) from the passenger's
under-dash fuse/relay box (B) for 10 seconds. 2. Remove the two bolts from the PCM (A).
NOTE: After resetting the PCM, do the PCM idle learn NOTE: After removing the PCM, do the PCM idle
procedure (see page 11-158). learn procedure (see page 11-158).
12N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ft I A
How to End a Troubleshooting Session

(required after any troubleshooting)
1. Reset the PCM as described above.
2. 00 the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-158).
3. Oisconnect the aBO II scan tool or Honda PGM

Tester from the OLC.
NOTE: The PCM is part of the immobilizer system.

If you replace the PCM, it will have a different
immobilizer code. In order for the engine to start,
you must rewrite the immobilizer code with the
Honda PGM Tester.
BACK
11-4
Protected by AR
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM How to substitute the PCM for testing
purposes
Special Tools Required
Use this procedure if you need a known-good PCM to
• Digital Multimeter KS-AHM-32-003 (1) or a test a vehicle. It allows you to swap a PCM from a
commercially available digital multi meter "donor" vehicle without having to program it to the test
• Backprobe Set 07SAZ-001000A (2) vehicle's ignition key .
1. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking 1. Cut a temporary ignition key for the test vehicle
patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a digital with a non-immobilizer key blank.
multimeter (C).
2. Remove the PCM from the test vehicle.
A
3. Write the test vehicle's VIN on the PCM you just
removed to avoid confusing it with the donor
vehicle's PCM.
4. Remove the known-good PCM from the donor

vehicle, and install it in the test vehicle.
5. Tape the donor vehicle's ignition key head-to-head

to the test vehicle's temporary key (A). The PCM
will recognize the code from the donor vehicle's
07SAZ-001000A key (B) and allow you to start the engine with the
temporary key.
2. Using the wire insulation as a guide for the

contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide
the tip into the connector from the wire side until it
touches the end of the wire terminal.
3. If you cannot get to the wire side of the connector

or the wire side is sealed (A), disconnect the
connector and probe the terminals (B) from the
terminal side. Do not force the probe into the
connector. B
INOTICE I
Do not puncture the insulation on a wire. 6. After completing your tests, reinstall both PCMs.
Punctures can cause poor or intermittent and destroy the temporary key.
electrical connections.
BACK
11-5
Protected by AR
OTe Troubleshooting Index
DTe Temporary OTe Detection Item Note

(MIL indication*')
P0107 (3) -- Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor (see page 11 -96)
Circuit Low Voltaae
P0108 (3) -- Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor (see page 11-97)
Circuit Hiah Voltaae
P0112 (10) -- Intake Air Temperature (lAT) Sensor (see page 11-99)
Circuit Low Voltage
P0113 (10) -- Intake Air Temperature (lAT) Sensor (see page 11-100)
Circuit High Voltage
P0116 (86) P0116 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor (see page 11-101)
Range/Performance Problem
P0117 (6) -- Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor (see page 11-101)
Circuit Low Voltage
P0118 (6) -- Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor (see page 11-103)
P0122 (7) -- Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit Low (see page 11-104)
Voltage
P0123 (7) -- Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Circuit High (see page 11-106)
Voltage
P0128 (87)*3 -- Thermostat Range/Performance Problem (see page 11-108)
P0131 (1) P0130 Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary (see page 11-109)
H02S) (Sensor 1) Circuit Low Voltage
H02S) (Sensor 1) Circuit High Voltage
H02S) (Sensor 1) Slow Response
P0135 (41) -- Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Primary (see page 11-115)
H02S) (Sensor 1) Heater Circuit
Malfunction
P0137 (63) P0136 Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (see page 11-112)
(Secondary H02S) (Sensor 2) Circuit Low
Voltage
(Secondary H02S) (Sensor 2) High Voltage
(Secondary H02S) (Sensor 2) Slow
Response
P0141 (65) -- Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (see page 11-115)
(Secondary H02S) (Sensor 2) Heater
Circuit Malfunction
P0171 (45) P0170 Fuel System Too Lean (see page 11-117)
P0172 (45) P0170 Fuel S~stem Too Rich (see page 11-117)
P0300 and some of P1399 Random Misfire (see page 11-118)
P0301 (71)
P0302 (72)
P0303 (73)
P0304 (74)
P0305 (75) ,
P0306 (76)
*': These OTCs are indicated by a blinking Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) when the SCS service signal line is
..J
jumped with the Honda PGM tester.
*2: The 04 ('99 model), 05 ('00-03 models) indicator and the MIL may come on simultaneously.
*3: '03 model
11-6 BACK
Protected by AR
DTC Temporary DTC Detection Item Note

(MIL indication*')
P0301 (71) P1399 No.1 Cylinder Misfire (see page 11-119)
P0325 (23) -- Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction (seepage 11-124)
P0335 (4) -- Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor No (see page 11-125)
Signal
P0336 (4) -- Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor (see page 11-125)
Intermittent Interruption
P0401 (80) P0401 Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) (see page 11-197)
Insufficient Flow
P0420(67) -- Catalyst System Efficiency Below (see page 11-196)
Threshold
P0451 (91) P0451 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Range/ (see page 11-204)
Performance Problrm
P0452 (91) P0450 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit (see page 11-205)
Low Voltage
P0453 (91) P0450 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit (see page 11-206)
High Voltage
P0505 (14) P0505 Idle Control System Malfunction (see page 11-148)
P07xx*' (70) -- Automatic Transaxle System Malfunction Refer to the Automatic
Transmission OTC
Troubleshooting Index
P1106(13) P1106 Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor (see page 11-127)
Range/Performance Problem
P1107 (13) -- Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor (see page 11-127)
Circuit Low Voltage
P1108 (13) -- Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor (see page 11-127)
P1121 (7) P1121 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Lower Than (see page 11-107)
Expected
P1122 (7) P1122 Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Higher Than (see page 11-107)
Expected
P1128 (5) P1128 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor (see page 11-98)
Lower Than Expected
P1129 (5) P1129 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor (see page 11-98)
Higher Than Expected
--
P1259 (22) VTEC System Malfunction
.. (see page 6-6)
*': These OTCs are Indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS service signal line IS Jumped with the Honda
PGM Tester.
*2: The 04 ('99 modell, 05 ('00-03 models) indicator and the MIL may come on simultaneously.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-7
Protected by AR
DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
OTC Temporary OTC Detection Item Page

(MIL indication*')
P1297 (20) -- Electrical Load Detector (ELO) Circuit low (see page 11-128)
VoltaQe
P1298 (20) -- Electrical Load Detector (ELO) Circuit High (see page 11-129)
VoltaQe
P1361 (8) -- Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor (Top (see page 11-131)
Dead Center (TOC) Sensor) A Intermittent
Interruption
Dead Center (TOC) Sensor) A No Signal
Dead Center (TDC) Sensor) B Intermittent
Interruption
Dead Center (TDC) Sensor) B No Signal
P1456 (90) P1456 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control (see page 11-208)
System Leakage (Fuel Tank System)
P1457 (90) P1457 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control (see page 11-213)
System Leakage (EVAP Canister System)
P1486 (87) -- Thermostat Range/Performance Problem (see~l!Re 11-132)
P1491 (12) P1491 Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve (see page 11-197)
Insufficient Lift
P1498 (12) -- Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve (see page 11-201)
Position Sensor Circuit High Voltage
P1519 (14) -- Idle Air Control (lAC) Valve Circuit (see page 11-149)
Malfunction
P1607 (-) -- Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Internal (see page 11-135)
Circuit Malfunction
P1656*"*' (70) -- Automatic Transaxle Refer to the Automatic
Transmission OTC
P1676 (35) -- FPTDR Signal line Malfunction for '99 model (see page 11-
133) or for '00-03 models (see
.f!.l!ae 11-134)
P1678 (35) -- FPTOR Signal Line Malfunction (see page 11-135)
P17xx*' (70) (P17xx) Automatic Transaxle System Malfunction Refer to the Automatic
Transmission DTC
*': These DTCs are indicated by the blinking MIL when the SCS service signal line is jumped with the Honda PGM
Tester.
*': The 04 ('99 modell, 05 ('00-03 models) indicator and the MIL may come on simultaneously.
*': J32A2 engine
11-8 BACK
Protected by AR
These symptoms DO NOT trigger Diagnostic Trouble codes (DTCs) and cause the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) to
come on. If the MIL is reported on, check for DTCs. If the vehicle has one of these symptoms, do the diagnostic
procedure for it, in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.

Engine will not start 1. Test the battery (see page 22-102). • Low
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Test the starter (see page 4-7). compression
3. Testthe fuel pressure (see page 11-164). • No ignition
4. Troubleshoot the PGM-FI main relay circuit (see page spark
11-160). • Intake air leaks
• Locked up
engine
• Slipped/
broken timing
belt
• Contaminated
fuel
Engine will not start (MIL comes Troubleshoot the MIL circuit (see page 11-136).
on and stays on, or never
comes on at all, no DTCs set)
Engine will not start Troubleshoot the immobilizer system (see page 22-293).
(immobilizer indicator light
comes on)
Hard starting 1. Testthe battery (see page 22-102). • Low
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-164). compression
• Intake air leaks
• Contaminated
fuel
• Weak spark
Cold fast idle too low Check/adjust the idle speed (see page 11 -157).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
Cold fast idle too high 1. Check/adjust the idle speed (see page 11-157).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Inspect/adjust the throttle cable (see page 11-188).
3. Inspect and test the throttle body (see page 11-184).
Idle speed fluctuates 1. Check/adjust the idle speed (see page 11-157). Intake air leaks
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Inspect/adjust the throttle cable (see page 11-188).
3. Inspect and test the throttle body (see page 11-184).
Low power 1. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-164). Low
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Inspect and test the throttle body (see page 11-184). compression
3. Inspect/adlustthe throttle cable (see page 11-188).
Engine stalls 1. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-164). • Intake air leaks
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check/adjust the idle speed (see page 11-157). • Faulty harness
3. Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal and sensor
circuit. connections
Difficult to refuel 1. Test the fuel tank vapor control valve (see page 11-219).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Inspect the fuel tank signal tube between the fuel pipe
and the fuel tank vapor control valve.
3. Inspect the fuel tank vapor vent tube between the EVAP
canister and the fuel tank vapor control valve.
4. Check the EVAP canister.
Fuel overflows during refueling Replace the fuel tank vapor control valve (see page 11-221).
(No OTCs set)
BACK 11-9
Protected by AR
System Descriptions
Electronic Control System

The functions of the fuel and emission control systems are managed by the powertrain control module (PCM).
Fail-safe Function
When an abnormality occurs in a signal from a sensor, the PCM ignores that signal and assumes a pre-programmed
value for that sensor that allows the engine to continue to run.
Back-up Function
When an abnormality occurs in the PCM, the injectors are controlled by a back-up circuit independent of the system in
order to permit minimal driving.
Self-diagnosis
When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor, the PCM supplies ground for the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) and stores the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in erasable memory. When the ignition is first turned on, the PCM
supplies ground to the MIL for 15 to 20 seconds on '01-03 models (2 seconds on '99-00 models) to check the MIL bulb
condition.
Two Driving Cycle Detection Method

To prevent false indications, the "two driving cycle detection method" is used for some self-diagnostic functions.
When an abnormality occurs, the PCM stores it in its memory. When the same abnormality recurs after the ignition
switch is turned OFF and ON (II) again, the PCM informs the driver by turning on the MIL.
11-10 BACK
Protected by AR
PCM Data
You can retrieve data from the PCM by connecting the OBD II scan tool or the Honda PGM Tester to the Data Link
Connector (DLC). The items listed in the table below conform to SAE recommended practice. The Honda PGM Tester
also reads data beyond that recommended by SAE. Understanding this data may help you find the causes of
intermittent problems.
NOTE:
• The "operating values" listed are approximate and may vary depending on the environment and the individual
vehicle .
• Unless noted otherwise, "at idle speed" means idling with the engine completely warmed up, AfT in Park or neutral
position, and the AlC and all accessories turned off.
Data DescriPtion Operating Value Freeze Data

Diagnostic If the PCM detects a problem, it will store it as a code If no problem is YES
Trouble Code consisting of one letter and four numbers. Depending detected, there is no
(DTC) on the problem, an SAE-defined code (POxxx) or a output.
Honda-defined code (P1xxx) will be output to the tester.
Engine Speed The PCM computes engine speed from the signals sent Nearly the same as YES
from the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. This data is tachometer indication
used for determining the time and amount of injected At idle speed: 680±50
fuel. rpm
Vehicle Speed The PCM converts pulse signals from the countershaft Nearly the same as YES
speed sensor into speed data. speedometer
indication
Manifold The absolute pressure caused in the intake manifold by With engine stopped: YES
Absolute engine load and speed. Nearly the same as
Pressure (MAP) atmospheric pressure
At idle speed: 20-34
kPa (150-260 mmHg,
6-10 in.Hg)
Engine Coolant The ECT sensor converts coolant temperature into With cold engine: YES
Temperature voltage and signals the PCM. The sensor is a thermistor Same as ambient
(ECT) whose internal resistance changes with coolant temperature and Intake
temperature. The PCM uses the voltage signals from Air Temperature (tAT)
the ECT sensor to determine the amount of injected fuel. With engine warmed
up: about 176-212°F
(80-100°C)
Primary Heated The H02S detects the oxygen content in the exhaust 0.0-1.25 V NO
Oxygen Sensor gas and sends voltage signals to the PCM. Based on At idle speed:
(Primary H02S) these signals, the PCM controls the air fuel ratio. When about 0.1 - 0.9 V
(Sensor 1), the oxygen content is high (that is, when the ratio is
Secondary leaner than the stoichiometric ratio), the voltage signal
Heated Oxygen is lower. When the oxygen content is low (that is, when
Sensor the ratio is richer than the stoichiometric ratio), the
(Secondary voltage signal is higher.
H02S)
(Sensor 2)
(cont'd)
BACK
11-11
Protected by AR
System Descriptions (cont'd)
PCM Data (cont'd)
Data Description Operating Value Freeze Data

-
Fuel System Fuel system status is indicated as "open" or "closed". At idle speed: closed YES
Status Closed: Based on the H02S output, the PCM determines
the air/fuel ratio and controls the amount of injected
fuel.
Open: ignoring H02S output, the PCM refers to signals
from the Throttle Position (TP), Manifold Absolute
Pressure (MAP), Intake Air Temperature (tAT),
Barometric Pressure (BARO) and Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT) sensors to control the amount of
injected fuel.
Short Term Fuel The air fuel ratio correction coefficient for correcting the 0.73-1 .47 YES
Trim amount of injected fuel when the Fuel System Status is
"closed". When the ratio is leaner than the
stoichiometric ratio, the PCM increase short term fuel
trim gradually, and the amount of injected fuel
increases. The air fuel ratio gradually gets richer, I
causing a lower oxygen content in the exhaust gas.

Consequently, the short term fuel trim is lowered, and
the PCM reduces the amount of injected fuel. This cycle
keeps the air/fuel ratio close to the stoichiometric ratio
when in closed loop status.
long Term Fuel long term fuel trim is computed from short term fuel 0.80-1.20 YES
Trim trim and indicates changes occurring in the fuel supply
system over a long period.
If long term fuel trim is higher than 1.00, the amount of
injected fuel must be increased. If it is lower than 1.00,
the amount of injected fuel must be reduced.
Intake Air The IAT sensor converts intake air temperature into With cold engine: YES
Temperature voltage and signals the PCM. When intake air Same as ambient
(tAT) temperature is low, the internal resistance of the sensor temperature and ECT
increases, and the voltage signal is higher.
TI,~ottle Position Based on the accelerator pedal position, the opening At idle speed: YES
angle of the throttle valve is indicated. about 10%
Ignition Timing Ignition timing is the ignition advance angle set by the At idle speed: NO
PCM. The PCM matches ignition timing to the driving 10° ± 2° BTDC with the
conditions. SCS service signal
jumped.
Calculated load ClV is the engine load calculated from the MAP data. At idle speed: YES
Value (ClV) 16-33 %
At 2,500 rpm with no
load:
17-25%
11-12 BACK
Protected by AR
PCM Electrical Connections - '99 Model

PGM-F1 M...IN RELAY
L=
-.p
-=
Ifr!iL;
®
®
"@= II IGI
®
nI ptl
~
PUMP:
@
®
<D .-- -I
r® -.:-
- : ®
~ArrERY ST...RTER
CUT
® IIllGPl PGII12 I-
IIELAY
IIIIGP2 PG21110 I-
!!II @ - A24STS FLII ...15 ~ r- F
- ® 1121 VIIU
-=
~ +1
II2D LGI
1122 LG2 FUEL INJECTORS

1
INJ11111 "!r.
~N";.2
TOC
------------. - ---.- C20TDC1P 1NJ2 IS
SENSOlll ~ C21 TOCtM INJ31115
No.3
TOC ---- ------ .. ----- C29TDC2P 1NJ4114

No.4
SENSOR 2 ~ C3DTDC2M 1NJ5113

"".N";.5
CKP
-------_ . -- .. ----- ClCKPP 1_116
No.8
SEN SOli ~
~~L
ClCKPM
IACVll23
To SPEEOOMETEII
ToELD A3DEL
AlVSSOUT
I ., I...C V...LVE
MIL ...1. .~
~
!J I!J
O"'TA A21 K-UNE ...CC ...17 r--- To AlC CLUTCH RELAY
UNK
CONNECTOR F...NCA2D
r--- TollADl...TOIIFAN RELAY,
1lAD1...TOIII FAN SWITCH
~o
...CSA27 r--- TD AJC SWITCH
[£J
...10SCS ALTCC2
ALTFC5
-- ~~ ALT
FU SES:
~
~EII
ill BACK UP, ACC (30A)· ... IMOLMP ...12
CZl STOP (20A)· ...
Q) ACGS (15A)·A INOIC...TOII
@ BATTERY (120A)*A UGHT
(ID IG MAIN (soA)· ...
u. ---tuu~al
@ No.1 FUEL PUMP (15A). B
CD No.111G COIL (15A)·B
@ No.6 ECU (PCM) KSC22
CRUISE CONTROL (15A)·B
No.9 BACK UP LIGHT
-- KS
l
INSTRUMENT LIGHT (7.5A)·B
@No.13STARTERSIGNAL (7.SA)·B
® No.13 CLOCK BACKUP (7.SA)*c
• A :I" the under·hood fuse/relay box

• B: In the drlver's ",nder.dash fuse/relay box
* C: In the passenger's under·dash fuse/relay box
(cont'd)
BACK
11-13
Protected by AR
PCM Electrical Connections-'99 Model (cont'd)
....- - - III0CDA25
To IMMOISIUZEII
UNIT
IMOEN ...13 To IMIIOBIUZEII
UNIT
C28VCC2
TP To IIULTII'L£X
SE GOII C27TPS LUA28 CONllIOL UMT
CDfIVEII'S)
ClISG2
E, II r-- ToQAUGE
V, ..VE ...SSEMBLV
U T
ClEOIIL NE~"'I'
I TEST T...CHOMETEII
SE ~SOII CONNECTOII
B7E-EGII ToCIIUlSE
CIISAS
l!:~
CONTIIOL UNIT
E'
"
V, ..VE
EL
[IJ
"
T, IK
I' ESSUIIE
S ISO.. I A2tPTANK
EVAP P~E CDN'TlIOL SOLENOID V...LVE
ENGlN~~NT CONTIIDL SOLENOID V...LVE

'CSM
Cll1VCCI MCSA2 '1/1/
C17MAP WSOLDS
II P
SE NSOII C7SGI
EV...I' .VI'ASS SOLENOID VALVE
ToC MATE
C N'TlIOL
EC~SENSOII
-..
1 C28ECT
2WlISA3
EVAP c~~ CAMSTDI VENT SHUT V... LVE
U T wv .... , VTEC ~~NOID VALVE [~~

VTSBI2 <}-~ 0
....!..SENSOII
'SPSWITCH
~
C251 ...T
l
a
~
A261'SPSW
IGPLS1C4
1...----... I To
... ll'CM L~ =~:K

IGI'LS2 Cl4
IGI'LS3C3 No. lIGMn~ COIL
~ .PlAKE SwrrCH 1GPLS4C13

I_~ To
~ A32BKSW 1GI'LS5C12
[!] I ~ ~K
VTEC~UIIE
ICM
C
1G1'LSIC23
saH
''-.:/ Cl0VTM
1
No. 2 IGMnON COIL
1'111 I ...IIY
[~] - 1 ...----... I
] ] ICM ~ =~:K
To
H02',25 (SENSO.. I)
iii No. 31GNinON COIL
IL -AJ" Cl P02SHTC
I 1 To
~J_ ---- .--- ------- --------- CIIIPH02S
J LU I ~ :,,~:K
IF? ICII
No. 4IGNinON COIL

SEI :OND.....V
t2S CSVISOII2)
H02
1-1 To
I .... S02SHTC
LUICII I~' ~~K
....110
~- --------.- ------- ------.- A23SH02S SENSOII

(Bulllinlo
No. 51GNIn~ COIL
IhePCM)
I_~ To
ll..! ICM I ~':~:K
~~
No. IIGNInON COIL
-!~
11-14
BACK
Protected by AR
~
ATSFTPAll
E6LEDA VIIEF A7
ABSI1'CS
SHIFT
E5 LEDII THLOUT A31 CONTIIOL
INDICATOR
UNIT
E4 LEDC PRNH E3
GAUGE FPTDII El
ASSEIIIILY
2ND CLUTCH PIIESSUIIE SWITCH
OP2SWDI3 ~
MODE
E9T·IIDE
E&T·II+ 3110 CLUTCH PIIESSUIIE SWITCH

1
SWITCH
E7T.1I OP3SWII24 ~
J.
r GAUGE
ASSEIIIILY
AI4D41ND
LCDI
SHAD7
SHII D2
SHCD3
LOC,!;,\!!' CONTIIOL SOLENOID VALVE
SHI~~ONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A

VU
SHI~ONTllOL SOLENOID VALVE II
SHI~~ONTIIOL SOLENOID VALVE C

' uu
~
1114ATPNP
D6ATPII LSA+ 1117
v:~ IJ D4ATPN
DiATPD4
LSA- lIB ~ J
AIT'~~UTCH PIIESSUIIE CONTIIDL
~
SOLENOID VALVE A
,J II DBATPD3 LSII+ 1125

~ J
rr=
~ DI4ATP2 LSII- 1118
AIT ~':rrCH
PIIESSUIIE CONTIIOL
I!l DlSATPI SOLENOID VALVE II
m [!]
AlTGIAI!
POsmON
SWITCH NMDI' -------------._-- . ... .
, ~ IIAINSHAFT
NMSODI2 SPEED SENSOII
-::-
NCDIO ------------------ ------ , ~ COUNTEIISHAI'T
NCSGDIII SPEED SENSOII
PCM A(32P) PCM B(25P)
PCM C(31P) PCM O(16P) PCM E(12P)
I~m.
TERMINAL LOCATIONS
(cont'd)
BACK
11-15
Protected by AR
PCM Electrical Connections - '00-01 Models

PGM-F1 MAIN RELAY
1= 1=
® .!i>.
~ pwL
~"p
IGMTION SWITCH
® I IGI .. h .....
~
PUMP:
T 1
@ (!)
I<Dr®r-:.:- : ~
CUT IIIIGPI PG112 ~
RELAY 1.IGP2 PG2 110 ~
A I ~
':"~.
L- A24STS FLRA15 t-
)0-
O
@
121 VIU ~
~ I
~
120LGI
122 LG2
INJlIII
INJECTORS
No.1
- ~2
~SORI ~
C2IITDC1P INJ215
.~3
C21 TDC1M INJ3115
.a ____ ~~4
~OR2 Lk - .. --- .... - --

C2.TDC2P
C30TDC2M
C.CKPP
1NJ484
INJ513
INJlI5
!l2.,5
.~.
CKP
SENSOR ~
~~L
C.CKPM
IACVI23
To SPEEDOMETER
ToELD A30ELD
A.VSSOUT
-fh ~CVALVE
MIL AI'
.~
~
I]
E
DATA
UNK
A21K-UNE ACCA17 f---+ To AJC CLUTCH RELAY
CONNECTOR FANCA20
f---+ To RADIATOR FAN RELAY,
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH
ACSA27 f---+ To AJC SWITCH
~
[c3
~@
Al0SCS ALTCC2 ~
ALT
To ECTGAUGE A31 MTRTW ALTFC5 ~
FU ~ES:
CD lACK UP, ACC (40A)*A
(2) ITOP (20A)*A
IMOLMPEI
~ZER
.~ T
(3) ~CGS (15A)*A INDICATOR
LIGHT
® IAn-ERY (120A)*A
___1
~ G MAIN (60A)* A
$ 10,1 FUEL PUMP (15A)*B
a> lo,111G COIL (15A)*B
~ 10,6 ECU (PCM) KSC22 ---101
(I)
CRUISE CONTROL (15A)*B
1_'" S A _ . . , . . . . . . . _ . _
~~
K8
1
INSTRUMENT LIGHT (7.5A)*B
., No.13 STARTER SIGNAL (7.5A)*B
® No.13 CLOCK BACKUP (7,5A)*C
*A : In the under-hood fuse/relay box
*8: In the driver's under-desh funfrelay box
• c ·In the pa_nger'l under-dash fuse/rellY box
BACK
11-16
Protected by AR
ATF
IMOCDE2
- To IMMOIIUZER
RECEIVER UNIT
TEMPERATURE IMOENEI2 To IMMOIIUZER
H SEN~R RECEIVER UNIT
~
C24 TATF
TP C2IVCC2
S ENSOR C27TPS ILUA21 To SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
EGR
VALVE
POsmON
- CtISG2
1 -0
To GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
TEST TACHOMETER
S ENSOR
CI EGRL NEPAli
CONNECTOR
B7 E-EGR CRSA5 ToCRIJISE
~~
EGR CONTROL UNIT
VALVE
E
FTP
S ENSOR
I 1.21 PTANK PCSA.
EVAP CA..!!.!!!TER PURGE VALVE
ENGINi ~UNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
G CtIVCCt MCSA2 'W
MAP
J Ct7MAP VBSOLD5
S ENSOII C7SGI
EVAP ~ SOLENOID VALVE
2WBSA3
cuMATE EC!,SENSOII.1 ~~EII VENT SHUT VALVE
EVAf"
CO NTROL C21ECT VSVA4
UNIT
~
VTEC~IDVALVE F
VTS 112 . vv
IA!.SENSOR
PSPSWITCH
~
C25IAT
1
Q\ 1.26 PSPSW
'-7
1 ___ 1 To (1
~
IGPLSt C4
IGPLS2Ct4
.u ICM ~ ;r~~K
IIIAKE PEDAL IGPLS3C3 No. t IGNITION COIL
POSITION (BPP)
..,~
IGPLS4Ct3
SA 1 ___ 1 To ~
A32BKSW IGPLSI Ct2
~ ;~K
VTEC~SSUIIE
[l1CM
IGPLSlC23
S~H No. 2 IGNITION COIL
CtOVTM
'-:7
PIIIMAIIY
~ - ~-----t
~
[lICM
To ~
~PAIIK
PLUG
HO2S (SENSOR t) [C~ No. 3 IGNITION COIL
I
~~ ~
Ct P02SHTC
~ ..... ~--- - .. ---- -------- Ct6PH02S ..\..! ~ICM

To
:~K
No. 4 IGNITION COIL
SE
CS::::O R
H02
~
,l .AJ lA,
AlS02SHTC
11.110
U ICM _~ ;r: ~
To K
'W:":." . --- ---- ------ -------- AI SH02S SENSOR No. 5 IGNITION COIL
IF (Built Into
tllePCM)
~~ To ~
..I-!_ ICU ~ ~~~K
~
No. I IGNITION COIL
(cont'd)
BACK
11-17
Protected by AR

PCM Electrical Connections-'OO-01 Models (cont'd)
~
ATS"PEI7
El0LEDA VREFEI
AISII'CS
SHI" EtLEDI THLOUTE6 CONTROL
INDICATOR
UNIT
EtLEDC ""-£1
GAUGE FPTDR £1.
ASSEII'~Y
3RD CLUT~PRESSURE SWITCH

OP3SWD13
E20T~DE
EltT~+ 4TH CLUT~PRESIURE SWITCH

1
IIODE
BW1TCH E11T~ OP.sWllt
E14LHSW
C~UTCH ~
i~
TORQUE CONVERTER (TCC)
r
SOLENOID VA~VE
GAUGE
A88E11ILY
~D1 -
'HI~LENOID VA~VE A
I SHAD? 'VV
SHlFtlO~ENOID VALVE I
A14 DSlND I SHlD2
SH7~LENOID VA~VE C
SHCDa '00'
~
114ATPNP
DlATPR LSA+117
rIJ
I:..lIDlID II /)(ATPN
DlATPDS
LSA II -
' .v
NT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A
1
rI IQiI DlATPI)( LSI+IZS
I~
mi I
D14ATPD3 LSI-III
••
NT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
~ 011 ATP2
III I LSC+113
LSC 124
SOLENOID VA~VE'
'00 I
TRANSII1SSION
RANGE SWITCH NT CLUTCH PRESIURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE C
~
NIl 011
[il IlAlNlHA"
a_SENIOR
~I
NIISG 012 I
NCD10 1
~
NCSGD1.
COUNTERSHA"
SPEED SENIOR
~I
PCM A (32P) PCM 8 (25P)
PCM C (31P) PCM 0 (16P) PCM E (20P)
TERMINAL LOCATIONS
BACK
11-18
Protected by AR
PCM Electrical Connections-'02-03 Models (cont'd)

-
PGM FI MAIN RELAY
~h
-~
IGNITION SWITCH <I>
<I>
<I> B IG
'\~OT
PUMP:
@
(j)
InON( )
CD
<il -= end START ( )
(I)
iA~RY STARTER
<I>
CUT f- B1IGPl PG1B2 >-

@ I
(pallll1-20)
RELAY
@ B91GP2 PG2Bl0 >- rn
(plgl 11-20)
@
I..- A24STS FLRA15 >- I-
B21 VBU ~
~_
(pag.I'-19) ~
I
B20LGI
B22LG2
INJECTORS
~
1NJ1811
~N:.'2
C20TDC1P 1NJ2B5 -<>':l1li-
~
CMP(TDC)
SENSOR A T C21TDC1M 1NJ3B15
~
"'V
No. 4
CMP(TDC)
C29TDC2P 1NJ4B4 ou:: l1li.
SENSORB ~ T C30TOC2M INJ5B3
N!;!
"'V
No. 6
CKP
SENSOR ~ T
caCKPP INJ8B8
- "'<>"l1li
~L
C9CKPM
IACVB23
To SPEEDOMETER
ToELD A30EL
A9VSSOUT
r"
-= ~ lAC VALVE
MlLA18
~
~
r-
BJ
(PI9· - 9) Ell [Q
DATA A21 K-UNE ACe A17 _ T o A/C CLUTCH RELAY (pelll 11-20) (peg .11-21)
" '
UNK
CONNECTOR FANCA20 _ T o RADIATOR FAN RELAY,
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH
u@
ACSA27 oA/CSWITCH
~ e
(pege 11·20)
Al0SCS ALTC C2
'-
ALT
ToECTGAUGE A31 MTRTW ALTFCS
FU SES:
I BACK UP, ACC (40 A) .-
(PIT 11-19)
2 STOP (20 A) .-
S ACGS (15AI"-
4 BATTERY (120 AI .- IMOlMPEl .~
5 IG MAIN (60 AI .- IMMOBILIZER
6 No. 1 FUEL PUMP (15 AI·' INDICATOR
7 No. 111G COIL (15 AI·· LIGHT
• No.6 ECU (PCMI

CRUISE CONTROL (15 AI·'
® No.9 BACK UP LIGHT
INSTRUMENT LIGHT (7.5 AI·'
@ No. 13 STARTER SIGNAL (7.5 A! .' KSC22
]".'" ... JOI
.-
® No. 13 CLOCK BACKUP (15 AI •
: in the under-hood fuse/relay box
: in the driver', un,der-dash fuse/rela box
-
::. in the passenger, under dash fu,errelay box
V-
I~S
1
(cant'd)
BACK
11-19
Protected by AR

PCM Electrical Connections-'02-03 Models (cont'd)
ATF
TEMPERATURE
IMOCD E2
IMOEN E12
- To IMMOBIUZER
UNIT
To IMMOBILIZER
H SENSOR UNIT
,g. 11·211 ~ --..... C24 TATF
TP C28VCC2
SE
SOR C27 TPS ILU A28 To ~~L7J&g'<
C18SG2
- To GAUGE
EGI
VAL' liE ASSEMBLV
PO mON
SE' SOR
C6EGRL NEPA19 I .Ji TEST TACHOMETER
U CONNECTOR
iii B7 E·EGR CRS A5 To CRUISE
EG ""2........, CONTROL UNIT
VAL' liE '---~
FU' • (p.g.11·191
TA K I
PR
SE iib~R I A29 PlANK PCS A6
EVAPC~RPURGEVALVE
.~2.
ENGINE ~NT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(page -21) G C19 VCC1 MCS A2 VV
M, I C17MAP VBSOLD5Q-----------------------------------------------------t
SE SOR C7SG1
EVAP BYPASS SOLENOID VALVE
To' LIMATE
CO' TROL
ECT SENSOR
....... 1 C26 ECT
2WBSA3
VSV A4
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
UN;
IAT SENSOR
-....:
~
C25IAT
VTS B12
VTEC SOLENOID VALVE
00 1
(pajgel' -191
F
PSP SW~CH \------' =

~ A26PSPSW
IGPLS1 C4 I ~~ARK
I
lJ
page 11·191 T ICM ~ PLUG
-~ IGPLS2C14Q-----------------------, -6
IGPLS3 C3 No.1 IGNITION COIL
-=
., '- BRAKE PEDAL
POSmONSWITCH
~
IGPLS4C13
~
ICM
I
I Wif\.,
To
SPARK
PLUG
(page ·191 ....------------+------~-+O' A32BKSW IGPLS5C12
I VTEC PRESSURE IGPLS6 C23 No.2 IGNITION COIL
SWlTcHQ
\'" '7" C10VTM _ I To
(page 11·191 '-" I l'~ SPARK
~ -6~ - •• ,~
No.3 IGNITION COIL
~ I ~~ARK
PRIMAl IV
H02S
-MM, C1 P02SHTC j ICM I Wif\., PLUG
(SENS IR1) ~/- •••••••••••••••••••••• C16PH02S No. 4 IGNmON COIL
I ~~ARK
U ICM 1 L...ITfo., PLUG
SECON OAR" .J\, A8 S02SHTC BARO No. 5 IGNITION COIL

H02S ,. ~ SENSOR
(SENS' IR21
Er ~M\_""'" ••••••.•. A1 SH02S (Built into
~~
J ICM I
I
~' PLUG
To
~
No.6 IGNITION COIL
~ ~
BACK
11-20
Protected by AR
9 - - - - - - 9 E 1 0 LEDA "2 SEFA A7 ~-----rvv;sA;---l

~J~TOR t:::::::::::i~E~9~LE~DB~====~~"~2~S~E~AF~A22~t:::::::::::~B~~~~~"~f~L~
E8 LEDC "1 ATSFTP E17
TRANSMISSION
GEAR SELECl10N GAUGE ·1 VREFE6¢-----------~
SWITCH ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY ·1 THLOUT E5 =cgL
UNIT ·1
£20 S_MDE ·1 PFINH E7
I b~-MODE
I/O~~----t_----~::::::::::::~E;1;9;S-M~+;---_t~·:1~FP~TD~R~E~1~8~--_:~~::jl_ _ _~
r-- I E18S-M 3RDCLUTC~SSURESWITCH
OP3SWD13
TRANSMISSION
GEAR SELEcnON
j;;S;.;;W.;.;IT.;.;C;.:.H;...._ _..:.---. LOW H~WITCH 4TH CLUTC~SSURE SWITCH
.1' '-/ E14LHSH OP4SWB19
LCD1
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
S~IO VALVE ASSEMBLY
GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
SHI~NOID
, QQ
VALVE ASSEMBLY A
SHAD7
SHI~OLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY B

SHBD2
SHI!:!l.OLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY C
SHCD3 'QQ
r~:===========~~~~---t--~~~A~+2B~1;7t:====:=~~:=========::J1
~A F. B8 ~
-
I ~B+B25
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY A
~B B18
~ 1
AUT~TIC TRANSAXLE CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY B
~C+B139-------------------------~
""'"' I
AITGEAR
POSmON L____~~~C~B2~4~----~~"~~
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY C
(P~11-201
INTAKE
MANIFOLD
RUNNER t::::::::---~~~~~~----~N~M~D~1~1i-------------~
CONTROL
MODULE "2
NMSG D12 (page 11-201 1 L.: rL~ MAINSHAFT
SPEED SENSOR
~___~
__D_10~~ 8D
INTAKE MANIFOlD NCSGD16 >- +L---o::i==+=iI
'--------6,~
RUNNER CONTROL
ACTUATOR·2 COUNTERSHAFT
"1 : J32A1engine SPEED SENSOR
"2: J32A2 engine
PCMB(25PI
"'-'1"""""-:-."" - -~ IiT7Ti1
• 1011121514161/171&
PCM C (31PI PCM E (2OPI

I":""1r-T-,-r,.., I. 6 1 7 1 • 10
121411171&1,11)
TERMINAL LOCAnONS
(cont'd)
BACK
11-21
Protected by AR

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (32P) -'99 Model
8 9
V 2 3
MCS 2WBS VSV
13
4 5 6
CRS PCS VREF
7
Wr~
VSS
OUT
10
SCS
11
ATSFTP
i
I
12
Itv'O Itv'O
LMP EN
14
D4
IND
25
15
FLR
26
/
27
17 18 19
ACC MIL NEP FAi'C
20 21
V
K-L1f'.E
23
SH02S
32
24
STS I
~ ~
tvK) 28 30
CD PSPSN ACS ILU EL BKSW
NOTE: Standard battery voltage is 12 V.
Tenninal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal

number
2 GRN/WHT MCS (ENGINE MOUNT Drives engine mount At idle: about 0 V
CONTROL SOLENOID control solenoid valve. Above idle: battery voltage
VALVE)
3 BLU 2WBS (EVAP BYPASS Drives EVAP bypass With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
SOLENOID VALVE) solenoid valve.
4 LTGRN/WHT VSV (EVAP CONTROL Drives EVAP control With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
I
CANISTER VENT SHUT canister vent shut valve.
VALVE)
5 BLU/GRN CRS(CRUISE Detects cruise control With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
CONTROL SIGNAL> sianal.
6 RED/YEL PCS (EVAP PURGE Drives EVAP purge With engine running. engine coolant. below 147·F (64·C):
CONTROL SOLENOID control solenoid valve. battery voltage
VALVE) With engine running. engine coolant. above 147·F (64·C):
duty controlled
7 ORN/WHT VREF (REFERENCE Provides reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
VOLTAGE) voltage to ABS/TCS With ignition switch OFF: about 0 V
control unit.
S BLK/WHT S02SHTC Drives secondary heated With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
(SECONDARY HEATED oxygen sensor heater. With fully warmed up engine running: duty controlled
OXYGEN SENSOR
HEATER CONTROL)
9 BLU/WHT VSSOUT (V::HICLE Sends vehicle speed Depending on vehicle speed: pulses
SPEEDSPS JR sensor signal.
OUTPUT S:GNAL)
10 BRN SCS (SERVICE CHECK Detects service check With the service check signal shorted with the PGM Tester:
SIGNAL) connector signal (the about 0 V
signal causing a DTC With the service check signal opened about 5 V or battery
indication) voltage
11 LTGRN ATSFTP (AfT GEAR Sends AfT gear position With engine running in park position: about 4 V
POSITION SWITCH switch signal.
OUTPUT SIGNAL>
12 PNK IMOLMP Drives immobilizer With immobilizer indicator light turned ON : about 0 V
(IMMOBILIZER indicator light. With immobilizer indicator light turned OFF: battery
INDICATOR LIGHT) voltaae
13 BLU IMOEN (IMMOBILIZER Sends immobilizer enable
ENABLE SIGNAL) signal.
14 GRN/BLK D41ND (D4INDICATOR) Drives D4 indicator light. With D4 indicator light turned ON: about 7 V
With D4 indicator liaht turned OFF: batteryvoltaae
15 GRN/YEL FLR (FUEL PUMP Drives fuel pump relay. About 0 V for 2 seconds after turning ignition switch ON
RELAY) (II). then batterv voltaae
17 RED ACC (AIC CLUTCH Drives AlC clutch relay. With compressor ON: about 0 V
RELAY) With compressor OFF: battery voltage
11-22
BACK
Protected by AR
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (32P) - '99 Model
8 9
/ 12
2 3 4
MCS 2WBS VSV
13 14
5 6 7
CRS PCS VREF S02S VSS
HTC OUT
10
SCS
11
ATSFTP
IMO IMO D4 FlR
lMP EN IND
25
15
26 27
1/
17 18 19 20 21
ACC Mil NEP FANC Ki..Jr--E
28 29 30 31
1/ 23
SH02S
32
24
STS
IMO PSPSW ACS IlU PTANK El lH.OJT BKSW
CD
Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal

number
18 GRN/ORN MIL (MALFUNCTION Drives MIL. With MIL turned ON: about 0 V
INDICATOR LIGHT) With MIL turned OFF: battery voltage
19 BLU NEP (ENGINE SPEED Outputs engine speed With engine running: pulses
PULSE) pulse.
20 GRN FANC (RADIATOR FAN Drive radiator fan relay. With radiator fan running: about 0 V
CONTROL) With radiator fan stopped: battery voltaQe
21 GRY K-L1NE Sends and receives scan With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
tool siQnal.
23 WHT/RED SH02S (SECONDARY Detects secondary heated With throttle fully opened from idle with fully warmed up
HEATED OXYGEN oxygen sensor (sensor 2) engine: above 0.6 V
SENSOR(SECONDARY signal. With throttle quickly closed: below 0.4 V
H02S)' SENSOR 2)
24 BLU/ORN STS(STARTER Detects starter switch With starter switch ON (III): battery voltage
SWITCH SIGNAL) siQnal. With starter switch OFF: about 0 V
25 RED IMOCD (IMMOBILIZER Detects immobilizer
CODE) signal.
26 GRN PSPSW(P/S Detects PSP switch signal. At idle with steering wheel in straight ahead position:
PRESSURE SWITCH aboutOV
SIGNAL) At idle with steerinQ wheel at full lock: battery voltaQe
27 BLU/RED ACS (AlC SWITCH Detects NC switch signal. With NC switch ON: about 0 V
SIGNAL) With NC switch OFF: about 5V
28 WHT/RED ILU (INTERLOCK Drives interlock control With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal pressed:
CONTROL UNIT) unit. battery voltaQe
29 LTGRN PTANK (FUEL TANK Detects fuel tank pressure With ignition switch ON (II) and fuel fill cap opened: about
PRESSURE SENSOR) sensor siQnal. 2.5V
30 GRN/RED EL (ELD) Detects ELD signal. With parking lights turned on at idle: about 2.5 3.5V
With low beam headlights turned on at idle: about 1.5-
2.5V
31 RED/BLU THLOUT (THROTTLE Sends TP sensor signal. With throttle fully open: about 4.8 V
POSITION SENSOR With throttle fully closed: about 0.5 V
OUTPUT SIGNAL)
32 WHT/BLK BKSW(BRAKE Detects brake switch With brake pedal released: 0 V
SWITCH) signal.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-23
Protected by AR

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (25P) - '99 Model
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
IGPI PGl INJ5 INJ4 INJ2 INJ6 E-EGR LSA-
9
IGP2
10
PG2
11
INJI
12
VTSOL
V 14
AlP
NP
15
INJ3
V 17 18
LSA+ LSB-
1/ 20
LGI
21
VBU
22
LG2

23
IACV
24
OP
3SW
25
LSB+
Terminal Wire color Terminal name DescriptIon Signal

number
1 VELJBLK IGPl (POWER SOURCE) Power source for the PCM With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage I
control circuit. With ignition switch OFF: about 0 V !
2 BLK PGl (POWER GROUND) Ground for the PCM control Less than 1.0 V at all times I
circuit.
3 BLK/RED INJ5 (No.5 FUEL INJECTOR) Drives No. 5 fuel injector. With engine running: duty controlled
4 VEL INJ4 (No.4 FUEL INJECTOR) Drives No.4 fuel injector.
5 RED INJ2 (No. 2 FUEL INJECTOR) Drives No. 2 fuel iniector.
6 WHT/BLU INJ6 (No. 6 FUEL INJECTOR) Drives No. 6 fuel injector. I
7 PNK E-EGR Drives EGR valve. With EGR operation during driving with
fully warmed up engine: duty controlled
With EGR not operatina: about 0 V
8 WHT LSA-(AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE AfT clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (II): duty controlled
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A- solenoid valve A power
SIDE) supply negative terminal.
9 YELJBLK IGP2 (POWER SOURCE) Power source for the PCM With the ignition switch ON (II): battery
control circuit. voltage
With the ignition switch OFF: about 0 V
10 BLK PG2 (POWER GROUND) Ground for the PCM control Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit.
11 BRN INJl (No.1 FUEL INJECTOR) Drives No.1 fuel iniector. With enaine runnina: duty controlled
12 GRN/YEL VTSOL (VTEC SOLENOID VALVE) Drives VTEC solenoid valve. With engine at low rpm: about 0 V
With engine at high 11tm: batterv_voltaoe
14 BLU/WHT ATPNP (AT GEAR POSITION Detects AfT gear position In Park or neutral: about 0 V
SWITCH) switch signal. In anv other position: battery voltlage
15 BLU INJ3 (No.3) FUEL INJECTOR Drives No.3 fuel injector. With engine running: duty controlled
17 RED LSA + (AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE AfT clutch pressure control With the ignition switch ON (II): duty
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A + solenoid valve A power controlled
SIDE) supply positive electrode
18 GRN LSB - (AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE AfT clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (II): duty controlled
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B- solenoid valve B power
SIDE) supplv negative terminal
20 BRN/BLK LGl (LOGIC GROUND) Ground for the PCM control Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit.
21 WHT/YEL VBU (VOLTAGE BACK UP) Power source for the PCM Battery voltage at this all times
control circuit.
Power source for the DTC
memory.
22 BRN/BLK LG2 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground for the PCM control Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit.
23 BLK/BLU IACV (IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE) Drives lAC valve. With engine running: duty controlled
24 WHT/RED OP3SW (3RD OIL PRESSURE Detects 3rd oil pressure With the ignition switch ON (II): battery
SWITCH) switch. voltage
25 ORN LSB + (AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE AfT clutch pressure control With the ignition switch ON (II): duty
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B + solenoid valve B power controlled
SIDE) supplv positive terminal
11-24 BACK
Protected by AR
PCM Inputs and Outputs at connector C (31 P) - '99 Model
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
P02S
HTC ALTC IGPLS3 IGPLS1 ALTF EGAL SG1 CKPP CKPM VTM
/ 12 13 14
IGPLS5 IGPLS4 IGPLS
/ 16 17
PH02S MAP
18
SG2
19
VCC1
20 21
TDC1P TDC1M
22
KS
23
IGPLS6
/ 25
IAT
26
ECT
27
TPS
2B
VCC2
29 30
TDCZP TDCZM
/

number
1 BLK/WHT P02SHTC (PRIMARY HEATED Drives primary heated With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER oxygen sensor heater. With fully warmed up engine running: duty
CONTROLI controlled
2 WHT/GRN ALTC (ALTERNATOR Sends alternator control With fully warmed-up engine running: about 8 V
CONTROL) sianal.
3 BLU IGPLS 3 (No.3 IGNITION COIL Drives No.3 ignition coil. With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V
PULSE) With engine running: pulses
4 YEl/GRN IGPLS 1 (No. 1 IGNITION COIL Drives No.1 ignition coil.
PULSE)
5 WHT/RED ALTF (ALTERNATOR FR Detects alternator FR signal. With fully warmed up engine running: about 0 V-
SIGNAL) battery voltaae (deoendina on electrical load)
6 WHT/BLK EGRL (EGR VALVE LIFT Detects EGR valve lift At idle: about 1.2 V
SENSOR) sensor signal.
7 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR GROUN[») Ground for MAP sensor. Less than 1.0 V at all times
8 BLU CKPP (CKP SENSOR P SIDE) Detects CKP sensor. With enaine runnina: pulses
9 WHT CKPM (CKP SENSOR M SIDE) Ground for CKP sensor.
10 BLU/BLK VTM (VTEC PRESSURE Detects VTEC pressure With engine at low rpm: about 0 V
SWITCH SIGNAL) switch signal. With em:!ine at high rom: battery voltage
12 BLK/RED IGPLS 5 (No. 5 IGNITION COIL Drives No.5 ignition coil. With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V
13 YEL IGPLS 4 (No.4 IGNITION COIL Drives No.4 ignition coil.
PULSE)
14 RED IGPLS 2 (No. 21GNITlON COIL Drives No.2 ignition coil.
PULSE)
16 WHT PH02S (PRIMARY HEATED Detects primary heated With throttle fully opened from idle with fully,
OXYGEN SENSOR, SENSOR oxygen sensor (sensor 1) warmed up engine: above 0.6 V
1) siaal. With throttle auicklv closed: below 0.4 V
17 RED/GRN MAP (MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE Detects MAP sensor signal. With ignition switch ON (II): about 3 V
PRESSURE SENSOR) At idle: about 1.0 V (deoendina on enaine soeed)
18 GRN/BLK SG2 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor around. Less than 1.0 V at all times.
19 YEl/RED VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Power source to MAP With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
sensor. With ianition switch OFF: about 0 V
20 GRN TDCP (TDC SENSOR P SIDE) Detect TDC sensor 1. With engine running: pulses
21 RED TDCM (TDC SENSOR M SIDE) Ground for TDC sensor 1.
22 RED/BLU KS (KNOCK SENSOR) Detects KS sianal. With enaine knockina: oulses
23 WHT/BLU IGPLS 6 (No.6 IGNITION COIL Drives No.6 ignition coil. With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
PULSE) With enaine runnina: oulses
25 RED/YEL IAT (INTAKE AIR Detects IAT sensor signal. With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1- 4.8 V
TEMPERATURE SENSOR) (depending on intake air temperature)
26 RED/WHT ECT (ENGINE COOLANT Detects ECT sensor signal. With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1- 4.8 V
TEMPERATURE SENSOR) (deoendina on enaine coolant temoerature)
27 RED/BLK TPS (THROTTLE POSITION Detects TP sensor Signal. With throttle fully open: about 4.8 V
SENSOR) With throttle fullv closed: about 0.5 V
28 YEl/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor voltage. With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
With ianition switch OFF: about 0 V
29 YEl TDC2P (TDC2 SENSOR P Detects TDC sensor 2. With engine running: pulses
SIDE)
30 BlK TDC2M (TDC2 SENSOR M Ground for TDC sensor 2.
SIDE)
(cont'd)
BACK 11-25
Protected by AR

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector D (16P)-'99 Model
1 2 3 4 5
LC SHB SHC ATPN VBSOL
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ATPA SHA ATPD3 ATPD4 NC NM NMSG
13 14 15 16
OP2SW ATP2 ATP1 NCSG

number
1 YEL LC (LOCK-UP CONTROL Drives look-up control With lock-up ON: battery voltage
SOLENOID VALVE) solenoid valve. With lock-up OFF: about 0 V
2 GRN/WHT SHB (SHIFT CONTROL Drives shift control solenoid With engine running in 1st, 2nd gears: battery
SOLENOID VALVE B) valve B. voltage
With el}Rine runnil}Rin 3rd 4th~ears: about 0 V
3 GRN SHC (SHIFT CONTROL Drives shift control solenoid With engine running in 1st and 3rd gears: battery
SOLENOID VALVE C) valve C. voltage
With the engine running in 2nd and 4th gears: about
OV
4 RED/BLK ATPN (AT GEAR POSITION Detects NT gear position In Neutral position: OV
SWITCH) switch signal. In aI}Y othe~osition: battery voltrule
5 BLK/YEL VBSOL (BATTERY Power source of solenoid With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
VOLTAGE FOR SOLENOID valve.
VALVE)
6 WHT ATPR (AT GEAR POSITION Detects NT gear position In R position: about 0 V
SWITCH) switch signal. In any other position: battery voltage
7 BLU/YEL SHA (SHIFT CONTROL Drives shift control solenoid With engine running in 2nd, 3rd gears: battery
SOLENOID VALVE A) valve A. voltage
With el}Rine runnil}R in 1st 4th_gears: about 0 V
B PNK ATPD3 (AT GEAR Detects NT gear position In D3 position: about 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) switch signal. In any other position: battery voltage
9 YEL ATPD4 (AT GEAR Detects NT gear position In D4 position: about 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) switch signal. In any other position: about 5.0 V
10 BLU NC (COUNTERSHAFT Detects countershaft speed With ignition switch ON (II), and front wheels
SPEED SENSOR) sensor signals. rotati~ulses
11 RED NM (MAINSHAFT SPEED Detects mainshaft speed With engine running: pulses
SENSOR) sensor signals.
12 WHT NMSG (MAINSHAFT Ground for mainshaft
SPEED SENSOR GROUND) speed sensor.
13 BLU/BLK OP2SW (2ND OIL Detects 2nd oil pressure With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch.
14 BLU ATP2 (AT GEAR POSITION Detects NT gear position In 2nd position: about 0 V
SWITCH) switch signal. In arIYotherJLosition: batteJYvolt~e
15 BRN ATP1 (AT GEAR POSITION Detects NT gear position In 1st position: about 0 V
SWITCH) switch signal. In any other position: battery voltage
16 GRN NCSG (COUNTERSHAFT Ground for countershaft
SPEED SENSOR GROUND) speed sensor.
11-26 BACK
Protected by AR
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector E (12P)-'99 Model
1 345 6
FPTDR PFINH LED CLEO B LED A
7 8 9
T-M- T-M+ T-MOD

number
1 PNK FPTDR (FRAME TO Detects engine retard With TCS operating: about 5 V
POWERTRAIN TORQUE request signal. With TCS not operating: about 2.5 V
DOWN REQUEST)
3 BLU PFINH (POWERTRAIN TO Sends TCS operation Permission (normal): about 2.5 V
FRAME INHIBITION) permission signal. Inhibition (engine coolant temperature below 32°F
(O°C)): about 5 V
Failure (TCS and/or PCM is failure): about 0 V
4 BLU/BLK LEDC Drives shift indicator. In sequential sportshift mode:
• in 1st and 3rd gear positions: battery voltage
• in 2nd and 4th Qear Dositions: about 0 V
5 BLU/GRN LED B Drives shift indicator. In sequential sportshift mode:
• in 2nd and 3rd gear positions: battery voltage
• in 1st and 4th gear positions: about 0 V
6 BLU/RED LEDA Drive shift indicator. In sequential sportshift mode:
• in 4th gear positions: battery voltage
• in 1st 2nd and 3rd cear Dositions: about 0 V
7 ORN T-M- Detects downshift switch In sequential sportshift mode and shift lever pushed
signal. toward downshift position (maked with" - "): about
OV
In sequential sportshift mode and shift lever in
neutral Dosition: battel'i voltage
8 VEL T-M+ Detects upshift switch In sequential sportshift mode and shift lever pushed
signal. toward upshift position (maked with "+"): about
OV
neutral position: battry voltage
9 RED T-MODE Detects sequential In sequential sportshift mode (shift lever is
sportshift mode switch positioned in sequential sportshift mode): about 0 V
signal. In other than sequential sportshift mode: battery
voltaQe
(cont'd)
BACK
11-27
Protected by AR

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (32P) - '00-01 Models
S~2S
9
1 2
S<l2S MCS
3
2M!S
14
4
VSV
5
CRS PCS
6
V VSS
HTC OUT
10
scs /
VV D5
INO
15
FLR V 17
/>CC
18
MIL
19
NEP
20 21
FANe K-Ut\E V/ 24
STS
V~ 2:7
tCS
28
ILU
29
PTANK
30
ELO ~
32
BKSW

number
1 WHT/RED SH02S (SECONDARY Detected secondary With throttle fully opened from idle with fully warmed up
HEATED OXYGEN heated oxygen sensor engine: above 0.6 V
SENSOR SENSOR2) (sensor 2) signal. With throttle~uicklyclosed: below 0.4 V
2 GRN/WHT MCS (ENGINE MOUNT Drives engine mount At idle: about 0 V
CONTROL SOLENOID control solenoid valve. Above idle: battery voltage
VALVE)
3 BLU 2WBS (EVAP BYPASS Drives EVAP bypass With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
SOLENOID VALVE) solenoid valve.
4 LTGRN/WHT VSV (EVAP CANISTER Drives EVAP canister vent With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
VENT SHUT VALVE) shut valve.
5 BLU/GRN CRS (CRUISE Detects cruise control With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
CONTROL SIGNAL! sianal.
6 RED/YEL PCS (EVAP CANISTER Drives EVAP canister With engine running, engine coolant, below 147·F (64·C):
PURGE VALVE) purge valve. battery voltage
With engine running, engine coolant, above 147·F (64°C):
dll1Y controlled
8 BLK/WHT S02SHTC Drives secondary heated With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
(SECONDARY HEATED oxygen sensor heater. With fully warmed up engine running: duty controlled
OXYGEN SENSOR
HEATER CONTROL)
9 BLU/WHT VSSOUT (VEHICLE Sends vehicle speed Depending on vehicle speed: pulses
SPEED SENSOR sensor signal.
OUTPUT SIGNAL)
SIGNAL) connector signal (the about 0 V
indication) voltaae
14 GRN/BLK D51ND (05 INDICATOR) Drives D5 indicator light. With D5 indicator light turned ON: about 7 V
With 05 indicator lightturned OFF: batt~voltaae
15 GRN/YEL FLR (FUEL PUMP Drives fuel pump relay. About 0 V for 2 seconds after turning ignition switch ON
RELAY) (II) then battery volt~e
17 RED ACC (AlC CLUTCH Drives AlC clutch relay. With compressor ON: about 0 V
RELAY) With compressor OFF: batteryvolta~e
BACK
11-28
Protected by AR
8 9
1 2
9-02S MCS
3
2:NOO
14
4
vsv
5
CRS
6
pcs / S02S vss
HTC OUT
10
scs /
/ / 05
INO
15
FLR
V 17
ACC
18
MIL
19 20 21
NEP FANC K-UNE
/ / 24
STS
/ ~
27
/lCS
28 29 30
ILU PrANK ELO ~
32
BKSW

number
18 GRN/ORN MIL (MALFUNCTION Drives MIL. With MIL turned ON: about 0 V
INDICATOR LIGHT) With MIL turned OFF: battery volta\:le
PULSE) Dulse.
20 GRN FANC (RADIATOR FAN Drives radiator fan relay. With radiator fan running: about 0 V
CONTROL) With radiator fan stoDDed: battery volta\:le
21 GRY K-LiNE Sends and receives scan With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
tool signal.
24 BLU/ORN STS(STARTER Detects starter switch With starter switch ON (III): battery voltage
SWITCH SIGNAL) sianal. With starter switch OFF: about 0 V
26 GRN PSPSW(P/S Detects PSP switch signal. At idle with steering wheel in straight ahead position:
PRESSURE SWITCH about 0 V
SIGNAL) At idle with steering wheel at full lock: battery voltaQe
27 BLU/RED ACS INC SWITCH Detects AlC switch signal. With AlC switch ON: about 0 V
SIGNAL) With AlC switch OFF: about SV
28 WHT/RED ILU (INTERLOCK Sends interlock control With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal pressed:
CONTROL UNIT) siQnal. aboutOV
29 LTGRN PTANK (FTPSENSOR) Detects FTP sensor signal. With ignition switch ON (II) and fuel fill cap opened: about
2.5V
30 GRN/RED ELD (ELECTRICAL Detects ELD signal. With parking lights turned on at idle: about 2.S - 3.S V
LOAD DETECTOR) With low beam headlights turned on at idle: about 1.S-
2.SV
31 YEL/GRN MTRTW Sends ECT signal to ECT With ignition switch on (II): duty controlled
QaUQe.
32 WHT/BLK BKSW (BRAKE PEDAL Detects brake pedal With brake pedal released: about 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal. With brake Dedal Dressed: battery voltaQe
(cont'd)
BACK
11-29
Protected by AR

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (25P) - '00-01 Models
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
IGP1 PG1 INJ5 INJ4 INJ2 INJ6 E-EGR LSA-
14
9
IGP2
19
10
PG2
20
11 12 13
INJ1 VTSOL LSC+
21 22
ATP
NP
15
INJ3
23
/
24 25
17 18
LSA+ LSB-
OP4SVV LG1 VBU LG2 IACV LSC- LSB+

---- -

number
1 VEl../BlK IGP1 (POWER SOURCE) Power source for the PCM control With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
circuit. With ianition switch OFF: about 0 V
2 BlK PG1 (POWER GROUND) Ground for the PCM control circuit. less than 1.0 V at all times
3 BlK/RED INJ5 (No. 5 INJECTOR) Drives No.5 injector. With engine running: duty controlled
4 VEL INJ4 (No. 4 INJECTOR) Drives No.4 injector.
S RED INJ2 (No.2 INJECTOR) Drives No.2 injector.
6 WHT/BlU INJ6 INo. 61NJECTORI Drives No.6 iniector.
7 BlU/RED E-EGR Drives EGR valve. With EGR operation during driving with
With EGR not operatina: 0 V
8 WHT lSA-(AfTClUTCH PRESSURE AfT clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (II): duty controlled
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A- solenoid valve A power supply
SIDE) neaative terminal.
9 VEl../BLK IGP2 (POWER SOURCE) Power source for the PCM control With the ignition switch ON (II): battery
circuit. voltage
With the ianition switch OFF: about 0 V
10 BlK PG2 (POWER GROUND) Ground for the PCM control circuit. less than 1.0 V at all times
11 BRN INJ1 (No.1 INJECTOR) Drives No.1 injector. With engine running: duty controlled
12 GRN/YEL VTSOL (VTEC SOLENOID VALVE) Drives VTEC solenoid valve. With engine at low rpm: about 0 V
With enaine at hiah rom: batterv vol:!I~
13 GRN/RED LSC + (AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE AfT clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (II): duty controlled
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C + solenoid valve C power supply
SIDE) positive electrode
14 BLU/WHT ATPNP (TRANSMISSION RANGE Detects transmission range switch In Park or neutral: about 0 V
SWITCH) sianal. In any other position: battery voltlage
15 BLU INJ3 (No.3) INJECTOR Drives No.3 injector. With engine running: duty controlled
17 RED LSA + (AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE AfT clutch pressure control With the ignition switch ON (II): duty
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A + solenoid valve A power supply controlled
18 GRN LSB - (AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE AfT clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (II): duty controlled
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B- solenoid valve B power supply
SIDE) neaative terminal
19 BLU/YEL OP4SW (4TH Oil PRESSURE Detects 4th oil pressure switch. With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
SWITCH)
20 BRN/YEL LG1 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground for the PCM control circuit. Less than 1.0 V at all times
21 WHT/RED VBU (VOLTAGE BACK UP) Power source for the PCM control Battery voltage at all times
circuit.
Power source for the DTC memory.
22 BRN/YEL LG2 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground for the PCM control circuit. Less than 1.0 V at all times --
23 BlK/RED IACV (IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE) Drives lAC valve. With engine running: duty controlled
24 RED/BLU LSC - (AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE AfT clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (II): duty cont:~·;, . ~
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C- solenoid valve C power supply
SIDE) neaative terminal
25 BRN/BLU LSB + (AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE AfT clutch pressure control With the ignition switch ON (II): duty
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B + solenoid valve B power supply controlled
SIDE) positive terminal
BACK
11-30
Protected by AR
PCM Inputs and Outputs at connector C (31 P) - '00-01 Models
1 4
2
P02S ALTC 3 5 6 7 8 9 10
HTC IGPLS3 IGPLS1 ALTF EGRL SG1 CKPP CKPM VTM
V 12 13 14
1GPl.S5 IGPl.S4 1GPl.S2
V 16 17
PH02S MAP
18
SG2
19 20 21
VCC1 TDC1P 1TDC1M
22
KS
23 24
1GPl.S6 TATF
25
IAT
26
ECT
27
TPS
28
VCC2
29 3D
TDC2P DC2M
L

number
1 BlK/WHT P02SHTC (PRIMARY HEATED Drives primary heated oxygen With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER sensor heater. With fully warmed up engine running: duty
CONTROL) controlled
2 WHT/GRN AlTC (ALTERNATOR Sends alternator control With fully warmed-up engine running: approx.
CONTROL) signal. 8V
3 WHT/BLU IGPlS 3 (No. 3 IGNITION COil Drives No.3 ignition coil. With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V
4 YEL/GRN IGPlS 1 (No.1 IGNITION COil Drives No.1 ignition coil.
PULSE)
5 WHT/RED AlTF (ALTERNATOR FR Detects alternator FR signal. With fully warmed up engine running: 0 V-battery
SIGNAL) volt!IRe (d~ndil}R on electrical load)
6 WHT/BlK EGRl (EGR VALVE POSITION Detects EGR valve position At idle: about 1.2 V
SENSOR) sensor sl9.nal.
7 GRNIWHT SGl (SENSOR GROUND) Ground for MAP sensor. less than 1.0 V at all times
8 BLU CKPP (CKP SENSOR P SIDE) Detects CKP sensor. With engine running: pulses
9 WHT CKPM (CKP SENSOR M SIDE) Ground for CKP sensor.
10 BlU/BlK VTM (VTEC Oil PRESSURE Detects VTEC oil pressure With engine at low rpm : about 0 V
SWITCH SIGNAL) switch signal. With el}Rine at hl9.h mm: batt~ voltage
12 BlK/RED IGPlS 5 (No.5 IGNITION COil Drives No.5 ignition coil. With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V
13 BRN IGPlS 4 (No. 4 IGNITION COil Drives No.4 ignition coil.
PULSE)
14 BlU/RED IGPlS 2 (No.2 IGNITION COil Drives No.2 ignition coil.
PULSE)
16 WHT PH02S (PRIMARY HEATED Detects primary heated With throttle fully opened from idle with fully,
OXYGEN SENSOR, SENSOR 1) oxygen sensor (sensor 1) sigal. warmed up engine: above 0.6 V
With throttle Quicklv closed: below 0.4 V
17 GRN/RED MAP (MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE Detects MAP sensor signal. With ignition switch ON (II): about 3 V
PRESSURE SENSOR) At idle: about 1.0 V (deQending on engine soeed)
18 GRN/YEl SG2 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor~ound . less than 1.0 V at all times.
19 YEL/RED VCCl (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor voltage. With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
With igrlition switch OFF: about 0 V
20 GRN TDC1P (TDC SENSOR 1P SIDE) Detect TDC sensor 1. With engine runninQ : pulses
21 RED TDC1M (TDC SENSOR 1M SIDE) Ground for TDC sensor 1.
22 RED/BlU KS (KNOCK SENSOR) Detects knock sensor signal. With engine knocking : pulses
23 BlU/WHT IGPlS 6 (No. 6 IGNITION COil Drives No.6 ignition coil. With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V
PULSE) With el!Qjne runni~lses
24 BlU/YEl TATF (ATF TEMPERATURE Detects ATF temperature With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1- 4.2 V
SENSOR) sensor signal. (dependinQ on ATF temperature)
25 RED/YEl IAT (INTAKE AIR Detects IAT sensor signal. With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1 - 4.8 V
TEMPERATURE SENSOR) (dependin~ on intake air temperature)
26 RED/WHT ECT (ENGINE COOLANT Detects ECT sensor signal. With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1 4.8 V
TEMPERATURE SENSOR) ~dependil}R on el}gine coolant tem~erature)
27 RED/BlK TPS (THROTTLE POSITION Detects TP sensor signal. With throttle fully open: about 4.8 V
SENSOR) With throttle fullv closed: about 0.5 V
28 YEL/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor voltage. With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
Withignition switch OFF: about 0 V
29 YEl TDC2P (TOC SENSOR 2P SIDE) Detects TDC sensor 2. With el!Qjne runni~ulses
30 BlK TDC2M (TDC SENSOR 2M SIDE) Ground for TDC sensor 2.
(cont d)
BACK
11-31
Protected by AR

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector 0 (16P)-'OO-01 Models
,.-
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ArPA SHA ATPD4 ATPD5 NC NM NMSG
15 16
~ ATPD3
14
ATP2 NCSG
-

number
1 YEL LC (TORQUE CONVERTER Drives torque converter With lock-up ON: battery voltage
CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE clutch solenoid valve With lock-up OFF: about 0 V
ASSEMBLY) assembly_
2 GRN/WHT SHB (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid valve With engine running in 1st, 2nd gears: battery
VALVE B) B. voltage
With engine running in 3rd 4th aears: about 0 V
3 GRN SHC (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid valve With engine running in 1st and 3rd gears: battery
VALVE C) C. voltage
With the engine running in 2nd and 4th gears: about
OV
4 RED/BLK ATPN (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In Neutral position: 0 V
RANGE SWITCH) switch signal. In anv other position: battery voltage
VOLTAGE FOR SOLENOID valve.
VALVEi
6 WHT ATPR (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In R position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH) switch sianal. In anv other position: battery voltaae
7 BLU/YEL SHA (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid valve With engine running in 2nd, 3rd gears: battery
VALVE A) A. voltage
With engine running in 1st 4th gears: about 0 V
B YEL ATPD4 (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D4 position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH) switch sianal. In any other position: battery voltage
9 YEL/GRN ATPD5 (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D5 position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH) switch sianal. In anv other position: ap~ox. 5.0 V
SPEED SENSOR) sensor sianals. rotating: pulses
11 RED NM (MAINSHAFT SPEED Detects mainshaft speed With engine running: pulses
~ - --
SENSOR) sensor signals.
;2 WHT NMSG (MAINSHAFT Ground for mainshaft
SPEED SENSOR GROUNDl speed sensor.
13 BLU/WHT OP3SW (3RD OIL Detects 3rd oil pressure With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch.
14 RED ATPD3 (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D3 position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH) switch sianal. In anv other position: battery voltage
15 BLU ATP2 (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In 2nd position: about 0 V
- -- RANGE SWITCH) switch signal. In any other position: battery voltage
SPEED SENSOR GROUND> spee_d sensQL....__ - -~--- - - ---- - - - ---
11-32 BACK
Protected by AR
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector E (20P) - '00-01 Models
A"is 18 19
FTP "I'M- tM+

number
1 PNK IMOLMP Drives immobilizer With immobilizer indicator light turned ON: about
(IMMOBILIZER indicator light. OV
INDICATOR LIGHT) With immobilizer indicator light turned OFF: battery
voltaoe.
2 RED IMOCD (IMMOBILIZER Detects immobilizer signal.
CODE)
5 RED/BLU THLOUT (THROTTLE Sends TP sensor signal. With throttle fully open: about 4.8 V
OUTPUT SIGNAL)
6 ORN/WHT VREF (REFERENCE Provides reference voltage With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
VOLTAGE) to ABS/TCS control unit. With ionition switch OFF: about 0 V
7 BLU PFINH (POWERTRAIN TO Sends TCS operation Permission (normal): about 2.5 V
FRAME INHIBITION) permission signal. Inhibition (engine coolant temperature below 32°F
(O°C): about 5 V
8 BLU/BLK LEDC Drives shift indicator. In sequential sportshift mode:
• in 2nd and 4th (:lear position: about 0 V
9 BLU/GRN LED B Drives shift indicator. In sequential sportshift mode:
• in 2nd and 4th cear position: about 0 V
10 BLU/RED LEDA Drives shift indicator. In sequential sportshift mode:
• in 1st 2nd and 3rd (:lear position: about 0 V
ENABLE SIGNAL) sional
14 BRN LHSW (1ST HOLD SWITCH) Detects 1st switch signal. With LH switch ON: about 0 V
With LH switch OFF: battery voltaoe
16 PNK FPTDR (FRAME TO Detects engine retard With TCS operating: about 5 V
POWERTRAIN TORQUE request signal. With TCS not operating: about 2.5 V
DOWN REQUEST)
17 LTGRN ATSFTP (TRANSMISSION Sends transmission range With engine running in park position: about 4 V
RANGE SWITCH OUTPUT switch signal.
SIGNAL)
18 ORN T-M- Detects downshift switch In sequential sportshift mode and shift lever pushed
signal. toward downshift position (maked with" - "): about
OV
neutral position: batteryvoltaoe
19 VEL T-M+ Detects upshift switch In sequential sportshift mode and shift lever pushed
signal. toward upshift position (maked with" + "): about
OV
neutral position: battery voltage
20 RED T-MODE Detects sequential In sequental sportshift mode (shift lever is
sportshift mode switch positioned in sequential sportshift mode): about 0 V
signal. In other than sequential sportshift mode: battery
volta(:le
(cont'd)
BACK
11-33
Protected by AR

1 2
SH02S MCS 2WBS
3 4
VSV
5
CRS
6
pcs
7
SEFA
8
m~s
9
~
10
scs /
V 13 14
SVC D61NC
15
FLR / 17
ACC
18
MIL
19
NEP
20 21
FANK K-LINE SEAF
22
/ 24
STS
I
1/ 26 27
PSPSW ACS
28
ILU
29
PTANK
30
EL
31
MTRTVI
32
BKSW

number
1 WHT/RED SH02S (SECONDARY Detected secondary With throttle fully opened from idle with fully warmed up
HEATED OXYGEN heated oxygen sensor engine: above 0.6 V
SENSOR SENSOR2) (sensor 2) signal With throttle auicklv closed: below 0.4 V
2 GRN/WHT MCS (ENGINE MOUNT Drives engine mount At idle: OV
CONTROL SOLENOID control solenoid valve Above idle: battery voltage
VALVE)
3 BLU 2WBS (EVAP BYPASS Drives EVAP bypass With ignition switch ON (II) : battery voltage
SOLENOID VALVE) solenoid valve
4 LTGRNM'HT VSV (EVAP CANISTER Drives EVAP control With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
VENT SHUT VALVE) canister vent shut valve
5 BLU/GRN CRS (CRUISE Detects cruise control With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
CONTROL SIGNAL) sianal
6 RED/YEL pes (EVAP CANISTER Drives EVAP purge With engine running, engine coolant, below 147'F (64'C):
PURGE VALVE) control solenoid valve battery voltage
With engine running, engine coolant, above 147'F (64'C):
duty controlled
7* PNK SEFA (SERIAL Comunicates with the With ignition with ON (II): pulses
DATAlINE) VSA control unit
8 BLK/WHT S02SHTC Drives secondary heated With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
(SECONDARY HEATED oxygen sensor heater With fully warmed up engine running: duty controlled
OXYGEN SENSOR
HEATER CONTROL)
9 BLU/WHT VSSOUT (VEHICLE Sends vehicle speed Depending on vehicle speed: pulses
SPEED SENSOR sensor signal
OUTPUT SIGNAL)
SIGNAL) connector signal (the OV
indication) voltage
13* LTBLU SVC(lNTAKE Sends driving signal to With engine speed above 3,600 rpm: 0 V
MANIFOLD RUNNER Intake Manifold Runner With engine speed. below 3,400 rpm: about 5 V
CONTROL) control unit
14 GRN/BLK D51ND (D5INDICATOR) Drives D5 indicator light With D5 indicator light turned ON: approx. 7 V
With D5 indicator light turned OFF: 0 V
15 GRN/YEL FLR (FUEL PUMP Drives fuel pump relay o V for two seconds after turning ignition switch ON (II),
RELAY) then battery voltage
17 RED ACC (AIC CLUTCH Drives AlC clutch relay With compressor ON: 0 V
RELAY) --------- - -- -
With_compressor OFF: battelY voltage
* : J32A2 engine
11-34 BACK
Protected by AR
1 2
SH02S MCS 2WBS
3 4
YSY
5
CRS
6
pcs
7
SEFA
8
S02S
HTC
9
YSS
OUT
10
SCS / 24
V 13 14
SYC D51ND FLR
15
26
/ 17
ACC
18
MIL
19
NEP
20 21 22
FANK K-LINE SEAF
31
/ 32
STS
/ 27
PSPSW ACS
28
ILU
29
PTAN~
30
EL ~TRTW BKSW

number
18 GRN/ORN Mil (MALFUNCTION Drives Mil With Mil turned ON: 0 V
INDICATOR LIGHT) With Mil turned OFF: battery voltage
PULSE) Dulse
20 GRN FANC (RADIATOR FAN Drives radiator fan relay With radiator fan running: 0 V
CONTROL) With radiator fan stoDDed: battery voltage
21 GRY K-liNE Sends and receives scan
tool signal
22* RED/GRN SEAF (SERIAL DATA Comunicates with the With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
LINE) VSA control unit
24 BlU/ORN STS(STARTER Detects starter switch With starter switch ON (III): battery voltage
SWITCH SIGNAL) signal With starter switch OFF: 0 V
26 GRN PSPSW(P/S Detects PSP switch signal At idle with steering wheel in straight ahead position: 0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH At idle with steering wheel at full lock: battery voltage
SIGNAL)
27 BlU/RED ACS (AtC SWITCH Detects AlC switch signal With AlC switch ON: 0 V
SIGNAL) With AlC switch OFF: about 5 V
28 WHT/RED IlU (INTERLOCK Drives interlock control With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal depressed:
CONTROL UNIT) unit oV· brake pedal released: battery voltage
29 lTGRN PTANK (FUEL TANK Detects fuel tank pressure With ignition switch ON (II) and fuel fill cap opened: about
PRESSURE SENSOR) sensor signal 2.5V
30 GRN/RED El (ElD) Detects ElD signal With parking lights turned on at idle: about 2.5-3.5 V
With high beam headlights turned on at idle: about 1.5-
2.5V
31 YEl/GRN MTRTW Sends ECT signal to ECT With ignition switch on (II): duty controlled
. gauge
32 WHT/BlK BKSW (BRAKE PEDAL Detects brake switch With brake pedal released: 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) signal
*: J32A2 engine
(cont'd)
BACK
11-35
Protected by AR

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (25P) - '02-03 Models
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
IGP1 PG1 INJ5 INJ4 INJ2 INJ6 E-EGR LSA-
9
IGP2
19
10
PG2
20
11 12
21
13
INJ1 VTSOL LSC+
22
14
ATP
NP
15
INJ3
23
/24
17 18
LSA+ LSB-
25
OP4SN LG1 VBU LG2 IACV LSC- LSB+

number
1 VEL/BlK IGP1 (POWER SOURCE) Power source for the PCM control With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage I
circuit With i9.nition switch OFF: 0 V
2 BlK PGl (POWER GROUND) Ground for the PCM control circuit less than 1.0 V at all times
3 BlK/RED INJ5 (No. 5 INJECTOR) Drives No. 5 injector With engine running : duty controlled
I
4 VEL INJ4 (No. 4 INJECTOR) Drives No. 4 injector
5 RED INJ2 (No.2 INJECTOR) Drives No. 2 injector
6 WHT/BLU INJ6 (No. 6 INJECTOR) Drives No. 6 irliector
7 BlU/RED E-EGR Drives EGR valve With EGR operation during driving with
With EGR not QQ.eratirJg; 0 V
8 WHT lSA-(AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE AfT clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (II): duty controlled
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A- solenoid valve A power supply
SIDE) ne~ative terminal
9 VEL/BlK IGP2 (POWER SOURCE) Power source for the PCM control With the ignition switch ON (II): battery
circuit voltage
With the ignition switch OFF: 0 V
10 BlK PG2 (POWER GROUND) Ground for the PCM control circuit less than 1.0 V at all times
11 BRN INJ1 (No.1 FUELINJECTOR) Drives No.1 fuel injector With el"lgine running : duty controlled I
12 GRN/YEl VTSOl (VTEC SOLENOID VALVE I Drives VTEC solenoid valve With engine at low rpm: 0 V I
With ell9.ine at hjgh IQm: batt~ ·~ ) llage
13 GRN/RED lS C + (AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE AfT clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (II): duty controlled
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C + solenoid valve C power supply
14 BLU/WHT ATPNP (AfT GEAR POSITION Detects AfT gear position switch In Park or neutral: 0 V
SWITCH) signal In arrLother position: 5 V
15 BlU INJ3 (No.3) INJECTOR Drives No.3 fuel inlector With eQRine running: du~controlled
17 RED lSA + (AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE AfT clutch pressure control ~.lith the ignition switch ON (II) : duty
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A + solenoid valve A power supply controlled
18 GRN lSB - (AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE AfT clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (II): duty controlled
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B- solenoid valve B power supply I
SIDE) n~ative terminal

19 BlU/YEl OP4SW (4TH Oil PRESSURE Detects 4th oil pressure switch With ignition switch ON (II) : battery voltage
SWITCH)
20 BRNIYEl lGl (lOGIC GROUND) Ground for the PCM control circuit less than 1.0 V at all times
21 WHT/RED VBU (VOLTAGE BACK UP) Power source for the PCM control Battery voltage at all times
circuit
Power source for the DTC memoJY
22 BRN/YEl lG2 (lOGIC GROUND) Ground for the PCM control circuit less than 1.0 V at all times
23 BlK/RED IACV (IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE) Drives lAC valve With eQRine runnil}g: d~controlled
24 RED/BlU lS C (AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE AfT clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (II): duty controlled
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C- solenoid valve C power supply
SIDE) negative terminal I
25 BRN/WHT lSB + (AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE AfT clutch pressure control With the ignition switch ON (II): duty
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B + solenoid valve B power supply controlled
.
SIDE) ~ositive terminal
BACK
11-36
Protected by AR
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C (31P)-'02-03 Models
i
P6ZS 4
HTC ..tTcl'Gil.Sl IGPLSl
5 6
AUF EGRL
7
SOl
8 9 10
CKPP CKPt.4 VT'"
V 12 13 14
IGPLS! IG ..... GPLS2 V 16
~02S ....
17 18
SO>
19
\o\OCl
20 21 22
Ie"'"" C"'""" KS
~ """"" ~
23 24 25 26 27 26 30
IGPLS TATF IAT EeT TPS \o\OC2
Wir.sid.off.maletermi",ls
N oTE: Standard batte v vo taQe .IS 12V

number
1 BlK/WHT P02SHTC (PRIMARY HEATED Drives primary heated oxygen With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
OXYGEN SENSOR HEATER sensor heater With fully warmed up engine running: duty
CONTROL) controlled
2 WHT/GRN AlTC (ALTERNATOR Sends alternator control With fully warmed-up engine running: approx.
CONTROL) signal 8V
3 WHT/BLU IGPlS 3 (No. 3 IGNITION COil Drives No.3 ignition coil With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V
4 YEL/GRN IGPlS 1 (No.1 IGNITION COil Drives No.1 ignition coil
PULSE)
5 WHT/RED AlTF (ALTERNATOR FR Detects alternator FR signal With fully warmed up engine running: 0 V-battery
SIGNAL) volt~e (depending on electrical load)
6 WHT/BlK EGRl (EGR VALVE LIFT Detects EGR valve lift sensor At idle: about 1.2 V
SENSOR) sjgnal
7 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR GROUND) Ground for MAP sensor less than 1.0 V at all times
8 BlU CKPP (CKP SENSOR P SIDE) Detects CKP sensor With engine running: pulses
9 WHT CKPM (CKP SENSOR M SIDE) Ground for CKP sensor
10 BlU/BlK VTM (VTEC Oil PRESSURE Detects VTEC pressure switch With engine at low rpm: 0 V
SWITCH SIGNAU sional With el}gjne at hjgh .!Q.m: batt~ volt~e
12 BlK/RED IGPlS 5 (No.5 IGNITION COil Drives No.5 ignition coil With ignition switch ON (II): OV
13 BRN IGPlS 4 (No. 4 IGNITION COil Drives No.4 ignition coil
PULSE)
14 BlU/RED IGPlS 2 (No.2 IGNITION COil Drives No.2 ignition coil
PULSE)
16 WHT PH02S (PRIMARY HEATED Detects primary heated With throttle fully opened from idle with fully
OXYGEN SENSOR, SENSOR 1) oxygen sensor (sensor 1) warmed up engine: above 0.6 V
siQnal With throttle Quickly closed: below 0.4 V
17 GRN/RED MAP (MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE Detects MAP sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 3 V
PRESSURE SENSOR) At idle: about 1.0 V (d~endi~on engine sDeed)
18 GRN/YEl SG2 (SENSOR GROUND) SensoUlround less than 1.0 V at all times.
19 YEL/RED VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Power source to MAP sensor With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
20 GRN TDCP (CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) Detect CMP (TDC) sensor A With engine running: pulses
SENSOR (TOP DEAD CENTER (TDC)
SENSOR) A P SIDE)
21 RED TOCM (CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) Ground for CMP (TOC) sensor A
SENSOR) A M SIDE)
22 RED/BlU KS (KNOCK SENSOR) Detects KS signal With engine knocking: pulses
23 BRN/WHT IGPlS 6 (No.6 IGNITION COil Drives No.6 ignition coil With ignition switch ON (II): OV
PULSE) With el}gine runniI}Q:pulses
24 BlU/YEl TATF(ATFTEMPERATURE Detects ATF temperature With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1 4.2V
SENSOR) sensor sional Jde~endi~on ATF tel'l'lQ..erature)
25 RED/YEl IAT (INTAKE AIR Detects IAT sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1- 4.8 V
TEMPERATURE SENSOR) (depending on intake air temperature)
26 RED/WHT ECT (ENGINE COOLANT Detects ECT sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1- 4.8 V
TEMPERATURE SENSOR) (depending on engine coolant temperature)
27 RED/BlK TPS (THROTIlE POSITION Detects TP sensor signal With throttle fully open: about 4.8 V
SENSOR) With throttle ful1Y.closed: about 0.5 V
28 YEL/BlU VCC2 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor voltage With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
29 YEl TOC2P (CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) Detects CMP (TDC) sensor B With engine running: pulses
SENSOR) B P SIDE)
30 BlK TOC2M (CAMSHAFT POSITION Ground for CMP (TOC) sensor B
(CMP) SENSOR (TOP DEAD CENTER
(TOC) SENSOR) B M SIDE)
(cont'd)
BACK
11-37
Protected by AR

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector D (16P) - '02-03 Models
r----
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ATPR SHA ATPD4 ATPD5 NC NM NMSG
I
16
~
14 15
ATPD3 ATP2 NCSG
-

number
1 YEL LC (LOCK-UP CONTROL Drives lock-up control With lock-up ON: battery voltage
SOLENOID VALVE) solenoid valve With lock-up OFF: 0 V
2 GRN/WHT SHB (SHIFT CONTROL Drives shift control solenoid With engine running in 1st, 2nd gears: battery
SOLENOID VALVE B) valve B voltage
With en!;jine runninQ in 3rd 4th Qears: about 0 V
3 GRN SHC (SHIFT CONTROL Drives shift control solenoid With engine running in 1st and 3rd gears: battery
SOLENOID VALVE C) valve C voltage I
With the enaine runnil'lg in 2nd and 4th aears: 0 V

4 RED/BLK ATPN (AfT GEAR POSITION Detects AfT gear position In Neutral position: OV
SWITCH) switch sianal In any other position: battery voltaQe
VOLTAGE FOR SOLENOID valve
VALVE)
6 WHT A TPR (AfT GEAR POSITION Detects AfT gear position In R position: 0 V
SWITCH) switch sianal In anv other position: battery voltaae
7 BLU/YEL SHA (SHIFT CONTROL Drives shift control solenoid With engine running in 2nd, 3rd gears: battery
SOLENOID VALVE A) valve A voltage
With enQine runninQ in 1st 4th Qears: about 0 V
8 YEL ATPD4 (AfT GEAR Detects AfT gear position In D4 position: 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) switch sianal In anv other position: battej'y volt~
9 YEL/GRN ATPD5 (AfT GEAR Detects AfT gear position In D5 position: 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) switch sianal In anv other position: approx. 5.0 V
SPEED SENSOR) sensor signals rotating: pulses
11 RED NM (MAINSHAFT SPEE ~' Detects mainshaft speed With engine running: pulses
SENSOR) -- sensor sigl'lals _. -
12 WHT NMSG (MAINSHAFT Ground for mainshaft
SPEED SENSOR GROUND) soeed sensor -. - -
13 BLU/WHT OP3SW (3RD OIL Detects 3rd oil pressure With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch
14 RED A TPD3 (AfT GEAR Detects AfT gear position In 03 position: 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) switch signal In any other position: battery voltage
15 BLU ATP2 (AfT GEAR POSITION Detects AfT gear position In 2nd position: 0 V
SWITCH) switch sional In anv other oosition: battery voltaoe
SPEED SENSOR GROUND) speed sensor
11-38 BACK
Protected by AR
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector E (12P)-'02-03 Models
7 8 9 10
PFINH LED C LEOB LED A

number
1 PNK IMOLMP Drives immobilizer With immobilizer indicator light turned ON: OV
(IMMOBILIZER indicator light With immobilizer indicator light turned OFF: battery
INDICATOR LIGHT) vo)taQe.
2 RED IMOCD (IMMOBILIZER Detects immobilizer signal
CODE)
5** YELJGRN THLOUT (THROTTLE Sends TP sensor signal With throttle fully open: about 4.8 V
OUTPUT SIGNAL)
6** ORN/GRN VREF (REFERENCE Provides reference voltage With ignition switch ON (II): about 5 V
VOLTAGE) to ABS(TCS control unit With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
7** BLU PFINH (POWERTRAIN TO Sends TCS operation Permission (normal): about 2.5 V
FRAME INHIBITION) permission signal Inhibition (engine coolant temperature below 32°F
(O°C): about 5 V
8 BLU/BLK LED C Drives shift indicator In sequential sportshift mode:
• in 2nd and 4th~ear position: 0 V
9 BLU/GRN LED B Drives shift indicator In sequential sportshift mode:
• in 2nd and 4th gear position: 0 V
10 BLU/RED LEDA Drives shift indicator In sequential sportshift mode:
• in 1st 2nd and 3rd gear position: 0 V
ENABLE SIGNAl) siQnal
14 BRN LHSW (1ST HOLD SWITCH) Detects 1st switch signal With LH switch ON: 0 V
With LH switch OFF: battery voltage
16** PNK FPTDR (FRAME TO Detects engine retard With TCS operating: about 5 V
POWERTRAIN TORQUE request signal With TCS not operating: about 2.5 V
DOWN REQUESTj
17** LTGRN ATSFTP (AfT GEAR Sends AfT gear position With engine running in park position: about 4 V
POSITION SWITCH switch signal
OUTPUT SIGNAL)
18 ORN S-M- Detects downshift switch In sequential sportshift mode and shift lever pushed
signal toward downshift position (maked with" - "I: 0 V
neutral position: battery voltaee
19 YEL S-M+ Detects upshift switch In sequential sportshift mode and shift lever pushed
signal toward upshift position (maked with" + "): 0 V
neutral position: battery voltage
20 RED S-MODE Detects sequential In sequental sportshift mode (shift lever is
sportshift mode switch positioned in sequential sportshift mode): 0 V
signal In other than sequential sportshift mode: battery
voltage
**: J32A 1 engine
(cont'd)
BACK
11-39
Protected by AR

Vacuum Hose Routing - J32A1 engine ('99 Model)
MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
IMAP)
SENSOR
To EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION IEVAP)
CONTROL
CANISTER
- ,>
,
MOUN
I'> To ENGTINE
=moVALVE Y CHECK VALVE
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION IEVAPI
PURGE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
FRONT OF
VEHICLE
FUEL INJECTION AIR IFIAI CONTROL VALVE
11-40 BACK
Protected by AR
Vacuum Hose Routing - J32A 1 engine ('00-03 Models)
MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
(MAP) SENSOR To ENGINE To EVAPORATIVE
MOUNT EMISSION (EVAP)
CONTROL CANISTER
SOLENOID VALVE
~EVAPOIIATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE
VALVE
FRONT OF
VEHICLE
INTAKE AIR (IA)
BYPASS CONTROL VALVE
(cont'd)
BACK 11-41
Protected by AR
Vacuum Hose Routing - J32A2 engine
MANIFOLD FUEL PRESSURE

ABSOLUTE PRESSURE REGULATOR
(MAP) SENSOR
To ENGINE
MOUNT
-- I> CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION IEVAP)
CANISTER PURGE
VALVE
()
()
#
FRONT OF
VEHICLE
INTAKE AIR (tAl
BYPASS CONTROL VALVE
11-42 BACK
Protected by AR
Vacuum Distribution - J32A1 engine ('99 Model)
CD PRIMARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (PRIMARY @ EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE and
H02S) (SENSOR 1) LIFT SENSOR
® SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR ® POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE
(SECONDARY H02S) (SENSOR 2) @THREEWAYCATALYTICCONVERTER
® MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAPI CONTROL
® ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR CANISTER
~
KNOCK SENSOR @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL
6 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (lAT) SENSOR CANISTER FILTER
7 FUEL INJECTION AIR (FIA) CONTROL VALVE @ EVAPORAnVE EMISSION (EVAP) PURGE CONTROL
® IDLE AIR CONTROL (lAC) VALVE SOLENOID VALVE
® THROTTLE BODY @ EVAPORAnVE EMISSION (EVAP) CONTROL
FUEL INJECTOR
$
11 FUEL PULSATION DAMPER
I FUEL FILTER
@ FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
® EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) TWO WAY VALVE
@ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) BYPASS
SOLENOID VALVE
® FUEL PUMP @ FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
@FUEL TANK @ ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
@ AIR CLEANER VENT SHUT VALVE
i ® ONBOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)

AIR TEMPERATURE CONTROL VALVE
I AIR VALVE VAPOR RECIRCULATION VALVE
I RESONATOR @ ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(cont'd)
BACK
11-43
Protected by AR

Vacuum Distribution - J32A1 engine ('00-03 Models)
CD PRIMARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (PRIMARY @ AIR CLEANER

H02S) (SENSOR 1) @RESONATOR
® SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR @ EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE and
(SECONDARY H02S) (SENSOR 2) POSITION SENSOR
® MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR @ POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE
® ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR @THREEWAYCATALYTICCONVERTER
® KNOCK SENSOR ® EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
® INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (lAT) SENSOR @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER FILTER
o INTAKE AIR BYPASS CONTROL VALVE @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE VALVE
,1) IDLE AIR CONTROL (lAC) VALVE @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
® THROTTLE BODY VENT SHUT VALVE
@INJECTOR @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) TWO WAY VALVE
® FUEL PULSATION DAMPER @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) BYPASS
@ FUEL FILTER SOLENOID VALVE
@ FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR ® FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR
@FUELPUMP @ FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE
@FUEL TANK @ FUEL TANK VAPOR RECIRCULATION VALVE
@ ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
11-44 BACK
Protected by AR
Vacuum Distribution - J32A2 engine
28
To @
ENGINE
MOUNT
FRESH AIR
CD PRIMARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR @ EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGRI VALVE and
(PRIMARY H02S1 (SENSOR 11 POSITION SENSOR
CV SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR @POSITlVECRANKCASEVENTILATION (PCVI VALVE
(SECONDARY H02S1 (SENSOR 21 ® THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
@ MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
® ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECn SENSOR @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAPI CANISTER FILTER
® KNOCK SENSOR @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAPI CANISTER PURGE
@ ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR VALVE
CD INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (lATI SENSOR @EVAPORATIVEEMISSION(EVAPICANISTER
@ INTAKE AIR (lAI BYPASS CONTROL VALVE VENT SHUT VALVE
® IDLE AIR CONTROL (lACI VALVE @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) TWO WAY VALVE
®l THROTTLE BODY @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) BYPASS
@INJECTOR SOLENOID VALVE
@ FUEL PULSATION DAMPER @ FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
@ FUEL FILTER @ FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE
® FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR ~ FUEL TANK VAPOR RECIRCULATION VALVE
@ FUEL PUMP (FPI ® ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
@FUELTANK @ INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER CONTROL (lMRCI VALVE
@ AIR CLEANER
@RESONATOR
(cont'd)
BACK 11-45
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor

The CKP sensor determines timing for injection of each
The Programmed Fuel Injection (PGM-FIl system is a cylinder and also detects engine speed and misfire.
sequential multiport fuel injection system.
Alternator Control
The alternator signals the PCM during charging. The
PCM then controls the voltage generated at the
alternator according to the electrical load determined
by the Electrical Load Detector (ELD) and driving mode.
This reduces engine load to improve fuel economy.
A/CSwitch
The AlC (air conditioning) switch signals the PCM
whenever there is a demand for cooling.
AIC Compressor Clutch Relay

When the PCM receives a demand for cooling from the
AlC system, it delays the compressor from being
energized, and enriches the mixture to assure smooth Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
transition to the AlC mode. The ECT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor
(thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor as the engine coolant temperature increases.
The Baro sensor is inside the PCM. It converts
atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that
modifies the basic duration of the fuel injection
discharge.
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensors (Top Dead Center

(TOC) Sensors: '99·01 models)
The CMP (TDC) sensors determine ignition timing at
start up (cranking) and when crank angle is abnormal.
CMP (TOC) SENSOR B
CMP (TOC) SENSOR A I THERMISTOR
11-46 BACK
Protected by AR
Intake Air Temperature (lAT) Sensor Knock Sensor

The IAT sensor is a temperature dependent resistor The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing for
(thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases the octane rating ofthe gasoline used.
as the intake air temperature increases.
PIEZO CERAMIC
DIAPHRAGM
TERMINAL
THERMISTOR
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation

Ignition Timing Control to Readiness Codes)
The PCM contains the memory for basic ignition timing The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part
at various engine speeds and manifold absolute of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems.
pressure. It also adjusts the timing according to engine If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone
coolant temperature. dead, these codes are erased. In some states, part of
the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are
Injector Timing and Duration set. If all of them are not set, the test cannot be
The PCM contains the memory for basic discharge completed.
duration at various engine speeds and manifold
pressures. The basic discharge duration, after being To check if the readiness codes are set, turn the ignition
read out from the memory, is further modified by switch ON (II), but do not start the engine. The MIL will
signals sent from various sensors to obtain the final come on for 15 - 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the
discharge duration. readiness codes are set. If it blinks several times, the
By monitoring Long Term Fuel Trim, the PCM detects readiness codes are not set completely. To reset each
long term malfunctions in the fuel system, and will set a code, drive the vehicle or run the engine as described in
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). the procedures to set them in this section.
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure
into electrical signals to the PCM.
SENSOR UNIT
(cont'd)
BACK 11-47
Protected by AR
Primary Heated Oxygen Sensors (Primary H02S) Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The primary H02S detects the oxygen content in the The TP sensor is a potentiometer connected to the
exhaust gas and sends signals to the PCM which varies throttle valve shaft. As the throttle position changes, the
the duration of injection accordingly. To stabilize its sensor varies the signal voltage to the PCM. The TP
output, the sensor has an internal heater. The Primary sensor is not replaceable apart from the throttle body.
H02S is installed in the exhaust manifold.
By controlling the air fuel ratio with primary H02S and BRUSH HOLDER
secondary H02S, the deterioration ofthe primary H02S
can be evaluated by its feedback period. When the
feedback period exceeds a certain value during stable
driving conditions, the sensor is considered
deteriorated and the PCM sets a DTC.
ZIRCONIA SENSOR
ELEMENT TERMINALS TERMINAL
BUSHING
HEATER HEATER
TERMINALS
Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S)

The secondary H02S detects the oxygen content in the
exhaust gas in the downstream of the Three Way
Catalytic Converter (TWC) and sends signals to the PCM
which varies the duration of injection accordingly. To
stabilize its output, the sensor has an internal heater.
The secondary H02S is installed in the TWC.
ZIRCONIA SENSOR
ELEMENT TERMINALS
HEATER HEATER
TERMINALS
Starting Control
When the engine is started, the PCM provides a rich
mixture by increasing injector duration.
11-48 BACK
Protected by AR
Idle Control System Fuel Supply System
When the engine is cold, the AlC compressor is on, the Fuel Cut-off Control
transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the During deceleration with the throttle valve closed,
PIS load is high, or the alternator is charging, the PCM current to the injectors is cut off to improve fuel
controls current to the lAC valve to maintain the correct economy at speeds over 1,100 rpm.
idle speed. Refer to the System Diagram to see the Fuel cut-off action also occurs when engine speed
functional layout of the system. exceeds 6,600 rpm, regardless of the position of the
throttle valve, to protect the engine from over-revving.
Brake Pedal Position Switch When the vehicle is stopped, the PCM cuts the fuel at
The brake pedal position switch signals the PCM when engine speeds over 5,000 rpm.
the brake pedal is pressed.
Fuel Pump Control
Idle Air Control (lAC) Valve When the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the PCM
To maintain the proper idle speed, the lAC valve grounds the PGM-FI main relay which feeds current to
changes the amount of air bypassing the throttle body the fuel pump for 2 seconds to pressurize the fuel
in response to an electrical signal from the PCM. system. With the engine running, the PCM grounds the
PGM-FI main relay and feeds current to the fuel pump.
From AIR To INTAKE
CLEANER MANIFOLD When the engine is not running and the ignition switch
is turned ON (II), the PCM cuts ground to the PGM-FI
main relay which cuts current to the fuel pump.
PGM-FI Main Relay

The PGM-FI relay contains 2 separate relays. One is
energized whenever the ignition switch is turned ON (II)
which supplies battery voltage to the PCM, power to the
injectors, and power for the second relay. The second
relay is energized to supply power to the fuel pump for
2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II),
VALVE and when the engine is running.
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch

The PSP switch signals the PCM when the power
steering load is high.
Starter (Ignition) Switch

The starter switch signals the PCM when the engine is
cranking .
(cont'd)
BACK
11-49
Protected by AR
Intake Air System Intake Manifold Runner Control (lMRC) System (J32A2
engine)
Refer to the System Diagram to see the functional Satisfactory power performance is achieved by closing
layout of the system. and opening the Intake Manifold Runner Control (lMRC)
control valves. High torque at low engine speed is
Heated Air Induction System ('99 model) achieved when the valves are closed, whereas high
The heated air induction system improves fuel power at high engine speed is achieved when the
economy in cold weather conditions and when the valves are opened.
engine is cold.
W hen outside air temperature is low, the air
>~ perature control valve opens the air valve to allow IMAC CONTROL
VAlVE
,ned air into the engine.
VARIOUS
SENSORS
. : INTAKE AIR
AIR AIR VALVE

CLOSE: OPEN:
TEMPERATURE LOW ENGINE HIGH ENGINE
CONTROL SPEED SPEED
VALVE
Throttle Body
Intake Air Bypass Control System The throttle body is a single-barrel side draft type. The
When the engine is running, the intake air bypass lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by engine
control valve sends ai r to the injectors. coolant from the cylinder head. The idle adjusting
screw, which increases/decreases bypass air, is located
INJECTOR
on top of the throttle body.
~ IDLE ADJUSTING
SCREW
THROTTLE
POSITION
"
SENSOR
~/"''
To
To ~ '1\~INJECTORS
INJECTORS .•.• • Qo From
n ,· AIR
CLEANER
VALVE
INTAKE
AIR
11-50 BACK
Protected by AR
Catalytic Converter System Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System
Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) Refer to the System Diagram to see the functional
The TWC converts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon layout of the system.
monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the
exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (C02). dinitrogen (N2), EGRValve
and water vapor. The EGR valve is designed to lower peak combustion
temperatures and reduce oxides of nitrogen emissions
NOTE: The illustration shows '99 model. (NOx) by recirculating exhaust gas through the intake
manifold and into the combusition chambers.
HOUSING
(cont'd)
BACK
11-51
Protected by AR
Fu!:' and Emissions Systems

Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control
System
The PCV valve prevents blow-by gasses from escaping
into the atmosphere by venting them into the intake Refer to the System Diagram to see the functional
manifold. layout of the system.
EVAP Canister
The EVAP canister temporarily stores fuel vapor from
the fuel tank until it can be purged back into the engine
and burned (Refer to the System Diagram to see the
functional layout of the system).
EVAP Canister Purge Valve

When the engine coolant temperature is below 147°F
(64°C), the PCM turns off the EVAP canister purge valve
which cuts vacuum to the EVAP canister.
I. PCV
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
VALVE The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure
into an electrical input to the PCM.
SENSOR CHIP
- : BLOW-BY VAPOR
-:FRESHAIR
11-52 BACK
Protected by AR
Idle Control System Diagram
The idle speed of the engine is controlled by the idle air control (lAC) valve:
• After the engine starts, the lAC valve opens for a certain amount of time. The amount of air is increased to raise the
idle speed .
• When the engine coolant temperature is low, the lAC valve is opened to obtain the proper fast idle speed. The
amount of bypassed air is thus controlled in relation to engine coolant temperature.
INTAKE
MANIFOLD
/
-------~......
From
'---_ _ yELl A PGM·FI
BlK ...... MAIN
RELAY
BlK/ PCM VARIOUS SENSORS

BlK BlU
('00-01 models:
1= BlK/RED)
BlK
,
....L
Intake Air System Diagram
This system supplies air for engine needs. A resonator in the intake air pipe provides additional silencing as air is
drawn into the system.
INTAKE MANIFOLD
\ /
lAC VALVE
INTAKE AIR PIPE
AIR CLEANER
~=~t.:;;;z:;::;:;;;;:::~r--_____ ~grN~~E~:l~ER~99 model)

_--""'"11'-'
II~.-------AIR INTAKE DUCT
I~~'----------RESONATOR
From
YELl ... PGM·FI
BlK MAIN
RELAY
INTAKE AIR BYPASS

BlK/
BLU
tp
('00·01 models:
BlK/RED)
PCM
BlK
VARIOUS
SENSORS
CONTROL VALVE ...L
(cont'd)
BACK
11-53
Protected by AR
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Diagram

The EGR system reduces oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emissions by recirculating exhaust gas through the EGR valve and
the intake manifold into the combustion chambers. The PCM memory includes the ideal EGR valve position for
varying operating conditions.
The EGR valve position sensor detects the amount of EGR valve lift and sends it to the PCM. The PCM then compares it
with the ideal lift in its memory (based on signals sent from other sensors). If there is any difference between the two,
the PCM cuts current to the EGR valve.
EGRVALVE
POSITION r -_ _ _ _ _ _ YEL/
SENSOR BLU
r-------GRN/BLK
('00-03 models: GRN/YELI
'"""'f
BLirK--------~
I ~~T/
PNK
PCM VARIOUS
SENSORS
~ ~O()"03 models: BLU/REDI

EGR BLK
VALVE
-.L
~INTAKEMANIFOLD
11-54 BACK
Protected by AR
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram
The EVAP controls minimize the amount offuel vapor escaping to the atmosphere. Vapor from the fuel tank is
temporarily stored in the EVAP canister until it can be purged from the canister into the engine and burned.
• The EVAP canister is purged by drawing fresh air through it and into a port on the throttle body. The purging
vacuum is controlled by the EVAP canister purge valve, which is open whenever engine coolant temperature is
above 147°F (64°C).
• When vapor pressure in the fuel tank is higher than the set value of the EVAP two way valve, the valve opens and
regulates the flow of fuel vapor to the EVAP canister.
• During refueling, the fuel tank vapor control valve opens with the pressure in the fuel tank, and feeds the fuel vapor
to the EVAP canister.
FTP
SENSOR EVAP CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE
FUEL TANK VAPOR EVAP CANISTER
From
CONTROL VALVE PURGE VALVENo.6
ECUIPCMI
CRUISE
CONTROL
r----<~-___,'-----.._-__/_------ BLK/ _-00IIIIII 115AI
YEL ----........ lin tho
~~~~~~~g~~~~~~~@~~~I~:l
under·
dnh
fuoo/rolay
driver'.
boxl
LTGRN/
/
WHT
PCM VARIOUS
SENSORS
RED/
FUEL VEL
RU EVAPBYPASS
CAP
SOLENOID
VALVE
FUEL TANK VAPOR
RECIRCULATION
TUBE BLK-=.l...
(cont'd)
BACK
11-55
Protected by AR
PCM Circuit Diagram - '99 Model
.~; ..._G
r:===========-----------....J
YEL/RED
[~
\ ........::..J ~ MAP SENSOR
'a"'" RED/' VHT GRN/BLK' __ f:§J

~ CTSENSOR
TolMATE
CONTROL UNIT
~cz5'AT r
REDI 'EL'
GRN/BLK'
l
f:§J
I TSENSOR
-
~
(C21il VCC2 YEL/B LU YEL/BLU
GRN/BLK'
~ ,,- RED/: iLK
-
C107 r- TPSENSOR
JUNCTION
BLK'I
CONNECTOR
)~~~~ WHT
GRVALVE
YELl 1FT SENSOR
BLU
g]
YEL/BLU
WHT/BLK'
GRN/BLK'
fRr
l~~-" PNK'
EGRVALVE
,
A
C107 -
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
mY~' GRN 'BLK'
'--
(To pasia 11-571
11-56 BACK
Protected by AR
(From peg. 11-561
--------------------~
GRN/BLK'
BLK/YEL
}:-:;::;';'~-BLK/WHT'
C107
PRIMARY
H02S (SENSOR 11
JUNCTION
BLK/YEL CONNECTOR
-.CBLK/YEL
C102
~
GRN/YEL'
BLK/YEL
~
SOLENOID _
VALVE
BLU/BLK'
BRN/BLK'
VTEC PRESSURE
SWITCH
LG2
BRN/BLK'
BRN/BLK'
C105
BLK'
r-----~4-----~----~ I JUNcnON
CONNECTOR
BLK'
F
w
G101
JUNcnON
I CONNECTOR
TOe
SENSOR 1
j..:..=;:.;,:::--RED·----t----------------~
__::::~~_:!:.__-__-__-__ .YEL' :"!__~__ ~
J-+...;,;..:....--...(j::2!l!f'!! __ ~
___~
__~
__~
__~-~-~--~---~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~---~--~--~--~--~--~-_':'= :'=~__~__~__~..~._~...,..,__.,..,
__ '___ ...,..,
...,. ._.,. ._...--..-..--_
..
IdTDC2~=M~_Bur----_t----------------~
>=~-WHT"--------------------J
(cont'd)
BACK
11-57
Protected by AR
PCM Circuit Diagram-'99 Model (cont'd)
ALTC
WHT/GIIN------l
[~
)-" WHT/ ..ED' @
ALT
IILU/WHT • ~~;:~:Cy
F
LDCK-UP CDNT.. OL
SOLENOID VALVE
~,'
IILU/vEL~
SHA
G SHIFT CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A
) _._- G..N l W H r - ' - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ! - - - - !
IILK'
tfjt+J
• SHIFT CONTIIOL
SOLENOID VALVE II
/---- G..N'-----------------+----!
IILK'
tfjt+J
• SHIFT CONT..OL
SOLENOID VALVE C
E
WHr I~
GIIN' I~
7)-- ..EO' [OJ

AlTCLUTCH
P .. ESSU .. E CONT"OL
OIIN"---======_ [OJ
SOLENOID VALVE A
9
~ LSII- G.....
AlTCLUTCH
P.. ESSU .. E CONT..OL
SOLENOID VALVE II
11-58
BACK
Protected by AR
VEL/BLK'~
IF:;';"'--BRN'
No, 1 FUEL INJECTOR
YEL/BLK'~
F~--REO' OJ
No, Z FUEL INJECTOR
YEL/BLK' ~
!F'~---BLU' OJ
No, 3 FUEL INJECTOR
VEL/BLK' ~
F:;';"'--YEL' OJ
No, 4 FUEL INJECTOR
YEL/BLK' ~:
F~--BLK/ RED' OJ
No. 5 FUEL INJECTOR
r--VELtBLK'~1
iF~--WHT /BLU' OJ
No, 6 FUEL INJECTOR
H
r-VEL/BLK' -
BLU
BLK' -
,..
C10-4 lAC VALVE
}::::.:":"--VEL/BLK'
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
j=----VEL/BLK'
~
C106
r-
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
I
~
(cont'd)
BACK
11-59
Protected by AR

C204
:=:=IrruuuUUUIUIU' UUUfb~
SECONDAIIY
"025 <HHSOfIV
L M N
GIINlWHT'~
~ :::JI 3 ENGINE MOUNT
CONTIIOL
:::'J 1 3
SOLENOID VALVE
IIED/YEL'
BW/GIIN
,
J\lNCnON
-~ I
C303
--l __ .
EVA~~UIIGE
CONTI'IOL
IICIIUlSE
,,~w
CONTIIOL UIIT
~ W"T/YEL
12\ ,~~ I'MK'
[
IIIMO.UZEII
p INDlCATOII UGHT
To ,
i)""'" aLU' TACHOMETEft
o
~
• 8Lu'------
8L [ TACHe
T
BW'
CONKCTOft
Lu-.w'-1}-.w' ~
C302 C201
WHT/ftED'
IIMULn~LIX
CONTI'IOL UNIT
(DIIVEII'SI
_. 0 C204
1'~ GIIN'=Jt;:5
..-~I
G202
~,..~~ ~~
1 . . - - - - GIIN' ~ !lADiATOII FAN IIELAY,
!lA_TOIl FAN SWITCH
11-60 BACK
Protected by AR
f-_--4 _ _-{DI31}O.:.Pc..:2:::S.:.
W_ _ IILU/IIU<' _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ -lI F--:- I
2ND
CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH
1
WHT/REO'----------------------~IE--c I
3RD
CLUTCH PRESSURE -
SWITCH -
1
i~---REO'--------------------_t}
• i:MOIIIUZER
1t----IlLU'--------------------t. UNIT
MIL
r,a~
GRNI ORN
"""
I
~o
r-
I I JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
'"'
GRNI BLKI
~
Cl07 J .--
A ....-,--
IILKlIlLU - P
I-
l~l:~
R
l-
.-- N
IILUIW H T - -
~
NK' PNK'-
~
Lt! aLt!- 2
RN' IIRN'-
-1
-'--
C101 C301 -
GAUGE ASSEMIILY
o
CONNECTORK
IIU</IIL~ I - - -
WHT"
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
CO~~
r-
FUSE/RELAY
-
I
'i;OI
IILKlIlLU I---
IIOX
IILU/WHT-
- IILK/BLU- r--t\
r - -;-f-o
REO/IIU<'-
f-- ~f-o ~
- r - ~f-o
r - o,f-o
r---- 21-<>
~
r - 1- f-o -
AfT GEAR POSITION SWITCH
~l
REDI IILK'
1 ~
Cl06
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
(cont'd)
BACK
11-61
Protected by AR
System Descriptions (cont' d)
)'V' LTGRN/WHT
C551
T
LT GRN/W:-=I
BLK/YEL
rn EVAP CANISTER
VENT SHUT
VALVE
...._--t---t'--- YEUB~U ~FUELTANK

~lTGR~
LT GR PRESSURE
..-1--- GRN/BLK' SENSOR
)~"_V BLU'-----f
[ ~EVAPBYPASS
BLU""- - - - - - -....
C102 BLK/YEL ____..J ~SOLENOIOVALVE

-,
WHTNEL ~
~
GRN/
BLK'
J
I'l
T • Iil
:-~t
T T
:~/ ~~Ii
fAll EL-~:/~:~OlRB
~GRN/BLK' '--
>--
YEL/BLU -
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
~..LL
o
II
CONNECTOJ A
I I BLK/YEL
l
C101
C102 YEL/BLU -
---------GRN/BLK'
1...
-
.....- - - - - - - - - - - B L K / Y E L -
.....- - - - - - - - - - - - B L U / W H T -4
I
--------------------WHTNEL~
rm.mc
CONNECTOR I
L---~-----------------------GRN/BLK't -
L-----------------------___________ YEL
C
B
~~";..;:....:;;,..;;:..;......-~,~ ~G~~
I I (A1qv w BRN~BRN'~ CONNECTORK
~-
BLU/ORN - [
~21-"v" WHT/BLK' -
- f - I--
STARTER
CUT
~NmDN ~ 00"","""'.
RELAY
".".. H"l [ E
,
I
FUSES
A: No. 11 IG COIL (15 AI
B: No. 9 BACK UP UGHT
INSTRUMENT UGHT (7.5 AI
C: No.6 ECU (PCMI 1 I
\
CRUISE CONTROL (15 AI l
D: No. 13 STARTER SIGNAL (To pag.1HI3)
(7.5 AI
E: No.1 FUEL PUMP (15 AI
11-62 BACK
Protected by AR
(From page 11-62)

~
CONNECTORQ
.---------------BLU/oRN :-:-C r--
CONNECTO~R
.---------------RED/WHT
0
r------------------BUUYEL r--
~WHT/BLK' r--
r---~~~----------------t---WHTNEl ~~--~------~
r l I - 2_ _ _ _-t-__ ~O;NECTOR 'ct--t----'

WHT
U
~ Y
10
r-+-~~--------~~~R;UNIT
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
~GRY-----1'
~+-+----lTBlU---
L..--+--I------BRN' DATA LINK
.------~f__I-1p---BRN/BLK' - CONNECTOR
r-+-.....+--WHT/GRN -
rBlK-L-
G401
v
r---t-__Ht------WHT/YEl
WHT/BLK --n=:==,i
--l~
i BRAKE SWITCH
U
~
C101
I
C102
I
1 C201
WHT/GRN {}-WHT/ORN
YEL/BqJK
' ~YEl/BlK'-
I
--L- .r--''''':~~O
0552
FUEL PUMP
L..---+-+_t-- BlK' BLK'-

~----------_t_t_;t_-- BRN/BLK' BRN/BLK' -+-+-t-'
r-
Cl02
I~'
RED/WHT -
_.v-..... I __+ ______~--- BLU/ORN-

g..;.;-.;...._ GRN/YEl ----1JI-C_4_02______
~-
GRN/YEL - - -
BLK/YEl - ~. ~
......------; '-
POM-FI
MAIN RELAY
(cont'd)
BACK
11-63
Protected by AR
N o
J=!=~@
NNIiCTOIIC
II
E
BAN/ I--
To AIC +--- IILU/ I
PIIESSUIIE SWITCH
'-
17'1 ACS IILUIIlED' - - - - I
Lr= ~ECTOIIH
~==[~
L
v UI
COIf NECTOII.
~,=[ '-
BU(1
,III BLU~, NECTOIIJ
~={ I--
~. WHT,
IIRN!
--
I'ASSENGEII'S UNDER-DASH
fUSElIIELAY BOX
S Q T
W';ONNIiCTORC[L=1
COIfNECTOIIA
WHT/ GII
- - I I 0---
= WHT/~EL
.---{ CONNECTOIIB
•
H
YEL I 0
J
C204
I
GIIN/ RED
~--- IIED'~ ~I-------------+-

~
UNDEll-HOOO
G202 FUSEillELAYBOX
FUSES
E : No. 13 CLOCK BACK UP (7.SAl
F : IG MAIN <soAl IIATTEIIY
Q : ACU (ISAl
H : STOP C20Al
• : BACK UP ACC <3OAl
J : IIATTERY (12OAl
01
11-64 BACK
Protected by AR
~~~----------------------t-------------YaJGRN
IILK1YE~
ILK' C!:====_____---'
No.1 IGNInON COIL
~~~--------------------------_l_t----------r_--II-~;;~~.~;ARKI
IILK'--{~ PWG .
NO.2 IGNITION COIL
IILKlYE=l
~~------------------ti_r----I:--IIW
IILK' C!:===::_____.....J
No. 31GNinON COIL
No. 8 IGNITION COIL
Cl05
.r-
JUNCnON
CONNECTOR
IILK
'
G101
Cl05
t
JUNcnON
CONNECTOR
IILKIYEL =-0---
Cl02
IILKfYEL ------1
Cl03
~RED/IILU ===18 Dfh KS -
(cont'd)
BACK
11-65
Protected by AR

:') '_Uy~ IIEO'-----------------
YEL' - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - i
') ,-~- OftN'- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - l

L ====_____....
L'
MOOESWITCH
,...
) LEOA _ BLu/ lIEO
, ,-
)~....
) ~~
IIW/ OlltN2
BLU/ BLK'
~
,-
I--
lJ
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
SHIFT
INDfCATOft
C2O<
LTG I N ' - - - - - I LT GIIN ' - - - - - - I
) ."~,. O"NI' N H T - - - - i OIlN/ WHT - - - - i
REOI I W - - - - t IIEO/ BLU - - - - I
) PFINH BW
' BLu'-----t
\ r r ,yn PNK' PNK'-----I
EJ4 BLU"-----'
ABSlTCS CONTROL UNIT
11-66 BACK
Protected by AR
PCM Circuit Diagram - '00-01 Models
[~
-:::·~r-----------i+--------1 ~
VCC1
tr:-M.:,;;;;A;;.,.P
MAP SENSOR
SG1
F~-GRN/WHT' G
~tt=E=:CT.:...._ _ RED/WHT
GRN/YEL'
ECTSENSOR
ToCtMATE
CONTROL UNIT
5l-"IA.;.;T____ RED/YEL'
GRN/YEL'
IAT SENSOR
ar-;V.;;C.;;C2;;...._ YEL/BLU YEL/BLU

GRN/YEL'
~TP.;..S;;...._ _ RED/BLK'
~
Cl07r- TPSENSOR
-
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
!
rE;,;G;,;;R;:;,L--WHT/BLK'
'---
EGRVALVE
POSITION SENSOR
BLU
~
YEL/BLU
WHT/BLK'
GRN/YEL'
>--------BLU/RED'
cr~ EGRVALVE
Cl07 _
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
It-"";;';;'--GRN/YEL'
(To page 11-68)
(cont'd)
BACK 11-67
Protected by AR
PCM Circuit Diagram-'OO-01 Models (cont'd)
(From ..."" 11·1171
~I C
PH02S
1---~(C1d--""""'" ------...... -... - . --~
GRN/YEL'
BLK/YEL
~"
Cl07
PRIMARY
H02S (SENSOR 11
JUNCTION
.) • ~~~~ BLK/YEL
r BLK/YEL
, C102
CONNECTOR
~D_=_ ~=_--------+-----~VA§
I
GRN/YEL'
BLK/YEL I VALVE -
__
::::{~
BLU/BLK' _ _ _ _
BRN/YEL
VTEC PRESSURE
SWITCH
~BRN/YE 1.:, ,
!d~- , BRN/YEL' ---+----.-----~~.J_-~
r -, BLK'
~ II nl
C105
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
10'- BLK'
G101
TOe
SENSOR 1
-::::j::::::::~~=========--=.-=. .=. .=. .=

RED.----+----------------~
..
1)"n ....
TDC2P......... YEL' .~ . .... ...1...................... ...
J me
Icr--'" BLK' ----+-----------------4 SENSOR 2
~
I)~nr... WHT' ====~------------------__, ~
11-68
BACK
Protected by AR
WHT/RED'
--ID@I ALT
aLUIWHT ~~
-
~ ~r§b
· --rr- aLK aLK - !-;;;~J
TOIlOUE (Tee)
,,....- 13
,~ft.
-
----------------~~- .BILLKK - 8HIFTBOLENOID
-'
~
-----------------r-.laaILK~~~
~ -r~
SNFTBOLENOID
C
GRN'
----------------~~- BBULK(
-
--U SHiFTISOI.ENOID
VALVEC
AF
.L~3g
=-_~- IIIAINSHA
L~~=1S
---==-=l.
.~~=~--==========~"~~~I
8HAFTSPEEDS_OR
'r WItT'
. ,
==. NfCLUTCH OL
a..NIWHT
orJ.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-69
Protected by AR
YELlILK'
1) INJl IRN'. l[ ~1
No. 1 INJECTOR
YEL/ILK'
;)INJ2 RED: l[ ]
No. 2 _CTDA
5)"- ILu'
YEL/ILK'
l[ ]
No. 3 INJECTOR
VELlILK'
.)1NJ4
-- YEL' l[ ~
No. 4 INJECTOII
. - - - VELlILK'
I) INJ5 ILK 1
l[ ~
No. 5 INJECTOR
....--- VELlILK'
;)1- WHT J
l[ ]1
No. ' INJECTOR
H
r--VELlILK' ~
~
~_v. ILK/R'
-= Iuc'-, t::;j
IACVALYE
C1,!!.
L...--
,I IOPl YEll
,
JUNCnDN
CONNECTOR
--
1OP2
,)>--- YEll
JUNCnDN
~
CONNECTOfI
'--
11-70 BACK
Protected by AR
:~ ::~~-:::'if-------- f-:-:--:-:-:--:-:--:-:--:-:-:--:-:--=f-:-:-:--:-;--~-~--~-~--~-~-~--5~~
SECONDARY
H02S (SENSOR 2)
L II N
GRNlWHT'~ ~~----------------~r--+-------:~~~I ~ ENGINE MOUNT
o ~::::OVALVE
~=--- RED/YEL' t------------+--REDIYEL'] I ~
ILK/YEL .• -
JUNCTION t-------' EVAP CANISTER
I
CONNECTER C303 ILKIYEL i D PURGE VALVE
,}==----ILU/GRN"-----------------------------t-----------{I~I:::::J
CRUISE
CONTROL UNIT
r====--PNK
,
J
~WHT/RED'
~
IMMOI'i'LIZER
INDICATOR LIGHT
To
Ir"'''---- IW' ~ TACHOMETER
GAUGE ASSEMILY
~
TEST
'-----i ILu' TACHOMETER
[ CONNECTOR
I}=;;.---- WHT/RED··-----------------------1~~~IFT LOCK

SOLENOID
1 ::=:jt:51 PSPSWITCH
G2D2
F......
,_-"'"-(.e.zo}F:..:A::;NC=--GRN'-----------------------~t RADIATOR FAN RELAY,
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH
(cant'd)
BACK
11-71
Protected by AR
,) -- __ n ILU/YEL' IEuc- I
4TH
CLUTCH PRESSURE --
'WITCH
1
-
)nnn_ RED, •}
To
"___ • IIIIMOIIUZER
~ ILU' • RECevERUNIT
J;m=L
MIL
.0=.
GrIN 'ORN ...,
I
Ir-
I I JUNCnON
CONNECTOR
OR' 'ILK
I
~
C107 J ~
A
ILKlILU - ~-
~
~~~l~
f-
.--- N
,.....
ILU. W H T -
C107 W~ ya'--- ---

Do
0.
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
r--
RED'
ILU'
REO'---
ILU'- ----
Do
2
WHY" r'-
] 'c;01 C30t
CONNECTORK
ILKllq
WHT'
"-
-
]
GAUGE AIIE_LY
DRIVER"'
CONNECTORE UNDER-DAIH
~
I'IJIElRELAY
~NI r--
WIfT'-
I
C101
I=;=[ -
lOX
-1
ILUIWHT-
YE,
ILKlILU -
~
f----
r--- Rf-o
pt:\
REOlluC- f---- N"f-o :\
REi ,"- WLlORrl- f---- D;"f-o
WL' - o;f-o
RED' -"D;f-o
-~ f-o ~~
Ll
ILU ILU'
-
'--- ,
i-
,.=-
REI 'luc2
I JUNCnOH
CONNECTOR
~I
I
....
C101
11-72
BACK
Protected by AR
C551
J.=.=;';""--LTGRN/WHT LTGRN/W:-==rrn EVAP CANISTER
VENT SHUT
BLK/VEL VALVE
L...--+--+---:~~:~~!I51=l~~~~I~::
~_--<A2!I~PT..;,;A;.;;N;.;;K~_LT GRN"-----f
MI-_ _ GRN/VE~~SENSOR
~~--BLU-----~ BLUI.'- - - - - ; [ r n EVAPBVPASS

C102 ....--BLK/VEL SOLENOID VALVE
WHT/RED' -i
~ ~~
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
J K DCA Z CONNECTOR B FUSE/RELAV BOX
GRN/
VEL' ~~f
.-L
~::J/ ~~11
I Lli
Dr . I I . . . .
BLK/VEL
L....---GRN/VEL'
L....----VEL/BLU
CONNECTOR~
-----BLK/VEL
t
-
-
-
-
A
~
C101 C102 VEL/BLU

- -
---------GRN/VEL'
L..
- I--
L....-----------BLK/VEL - f--
L....-------------BLU/WHT -
L...---------------WHT/RED' -
CONNECTORI
f
L...__L....
! -_ --
_ -_
--_-_
--_-_
--_-_
--_-_
-G R
__ N
_ _/_
V _E_L '
VEL t--
B
cr~
CONNECTO RK
[
~
STS
BKSW
f---
STARTER
CONNECTO RM CUT
RELAV
~.:m" ~-+)------- [
E
FUSES
A: No. 11 IG COIL (15 AI
B: No.9 BACK UP LIGHT
INSTRUMENT LIGHT (7.5 AI
C: No.6 ECU (PCMI \ I
CRUISE CONTROL (15 AI Y
D: No. 13 STARTER SIGNAL ITo page 11·74,
(7.5 AI
E: No.1 FUEL PUMP (15 AI
(cont'd)
BACK
11-73
Protected by AR
System ;)escriptions (co nt'd)
PCM Circuit Diagram-'OO-01 Models (cont'dl
(From".ge 11-731
~
CONNECTORQ
r----------BLU/ORN ~~
III r-D F~l,f31t--+,---lf-----.J

WHT
r-::;~:~~~~-----------~
U
~ J"
Y
18
r
DRIVER'S UNDER-OASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
"~R"S"UNIT
I II L GRy r
:L....I~II---::~:L'
-·~·H~-WHT/GRN
,..;
=4 g~~~~~R
-
rBLK-L.
~ G4Cll
r-
V
1r----tl--+-III--=~~' ::[~
[!J BRAKE PEDAL
PosmON SWITCH
I 11 "" ~
IfL"".,. o--,", BLK/YEL --f0
C101
I,
Cl02
, I
...L .r-BLK-t
G552
P
FUEL PUMP
YEL/~tYEL/BLK' -
I....--~----:::~I:~I:~I::::~:/YEL' {J-:~~I I
C302
RED/WHT
C402 BLU/ORN
!:!:!!.-GRN/YEL'
----{JI I....---+---BLK/YEL GRN/YEL'
------1 L. 'L.._ _ _ _ _--'

PGM-FI
MAIN RELAY
11-74 BACK
Protected by AR
N o
CONNECTOIIC
r--+-- BLKIYE L - t l
BLK!Y E L -
E
.--+------YEL
I . - - - - - + - + - - - - - B I I N II L K ' - -
To AIC +- BLUII I E D -
PIIESSUIIE SWITCH
-
7)0'-'=--- lLU/IIED'------.
l1~ ONNECTOfIH
'L:
BLK':::::[ I-
IIEO'
v
;~E==r
L-+-+-+-----BLUIliED' I-
CONNECTOIIJ
' - - - - - WHTIIIEOI==[
I.----+-+-----IRNIYEL ~
PASSENGER S UNOEII-DASH
FUSEIRELA Y BOX
S Q T
CONNECTOIIC
F
WHT [
CONNECTOII A
G
WHT/QIIN~
~ CONNECTOIII H
WHTIYEL
WHT~
VEL
J
C204
':"
-:J
liED'
G202
UNOEII-HOOO
FUSEIRELAY lOX
FUSES
E: No. 13 CLOCK lACK UP (l.W
F : IG MAIN (lOA) IATTEIIY
Q: ACGS (1SA)
H: STOP <2OA)
I : lACK UP ACC (4OA)
J: IATTEIIY (12OAl
ci1
(cont'd)
BACK
11-75
Protected by AR
PCM Circuit Diagram-'OO-01 Models (cont'dl
:~.~~.E:KI
IOPLSl
No. 1 IGNllIOH COIL
'~~~.=~KI
'LKI~~.j~ To
I
No. 2 IGNITION COIL
W::;~~.:~K
.LK/YEL~j~ To
No. IIGNfT10H COIL
'L:?E=l~.=r:KI
No.• IONITlON COIL
:5~lEiJi·:r:KI
No. 5 IGNIT10N COIL
:~3~lEiJi·:r:KI
No. I IGNITION COIL
ClOS
.MICllOH
= r·
G101
LK
'
ClOS
CONNECTOR
t
JUNClIC»I
CONNECTOR
Cl02
=:IiI--
'LK/YEL~ .LK/YEL
.... l,.m hh ..... :~r~RED/.LU~8DI

·............l KS IJ=
11-76 BACK
Protected by AR
AED'
-
YE~'
OArl
IAN'
- MODESWlTCH
-
~='----I~U/AED' r--
~~=D.=.I---I~U/GArl
~~=DC=-_ _ IW/luC
-
r--
r--
IJ
GAUGE ASSEMI~Y
SHIFT
INDICATOA
F';:;;"';"---~TG Arl
- ~TGArl
)-'-'-=----OANIWHT OANIWHT
=
)-'o'='"'---AEDIILiI AED/lw'
=
r-="---I~U7 I~U7
irF.:..PTDA=.:._ _ PNtC PNtC

-
~I---- ILU'
":"
AISfTCS CONTAO~ UNIT
(cant'd)
BACK
11-77
Protected by AR
cl .RDCLUTCH
PRESSURE
C151
BLUIWHT r I-BLUIWHT
,Ffi'1
BLU/YEL'
ORN/yEL'~ ~ I
ATF
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
0151
[~ECT GAUGEII
MTIITW
YEL/ORN'
-= GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
~ ~~~ GRNIIIED' [r-::n

~ RED/BLU"----------------------I- ~
MCLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE C
BACK
11-78
Protected by AR
PCM Circuit Diagram - '02-03 Models

JUNCTION
CONNECTORC
~V.:;C.:.C1':"'_YEL/RED
-r,.::.M.::;A;:,P_ _ GRN/RED
MAP SENSOR
~S;,;G;.;1_ _ GRN/WHT
JUNCTION (page 11·Il1)

CONNECTORD
I I
1---I~C2 ECT
RED/WHT ----;:::===~
1~1======GRr;iiYEt:==~
GRN/YEL ~
t:::::::J
ECTSENSOR
To CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
------t-~====================~G*R;N~/Y~ELL:=====~~
:~IA.;;T'--__ RED/YEL
IATSENSOR
VCC2
YEL/BLU ---r=t:~~~::::::::::::::::~::~Y~E~L~/B~L~U~:::::::l~
TPS GRN/YEL ~~
RED/BLK - ..*, TP SENSOR
- ~
JUNCTION{pa g e11.S1)
CONNECTORD
EGRL
I
C6 WHT/BLK
- EGRVALVE
YELl POSmON SENSOR
BLU
~
B7
E·EGR
BLU/RED
L
-!:::!============YEL/BLU ::===~ WHT/BLK
GRN/YEL
EGRVALVE
A
(page 11-112) (page 11·80)
-
JUNCTION
SG2 _ _ _ _~~~::::::~ CONNECTORC
a.==--GRN/YEL
GRNI
1-
YEL
h
(page 11-115) (page 11·90)
{To page 11·80)
(cant'd)
BACK 11-79
Protected by AR
PCM Circuit Diagram-'02-03 Models (cont'd)
r~~~~----- (From lage

11-791
WHT------------------- --------------- ----------------------------
)' ~~- .. - BLK/WI iT I

r--
JUNCTIONOR D
BLK/YEL I CONNECT
BLK/VEL -
f"~ ~
~
VTSOL
GRN/YEL
.~a SOLENOID
VALVE
_
VTM (page 11-831
:::[~
BLU/BLK
r- BRN/YEL~~~RESSURE
BRN/YEL , JUNCTION
SWITCH
CONNECTORC
I I
I
BRN/YEL
t
~
~
BLK
(page 11-881
I I fifO:="'.
PG2 '-'
BLK
H
(page 11-821
..i,
~ ~
(page 11-791
L,-'I
~(
W
" ... "... -

G'" p
8g.11-861
__ if...."'""',
NCTION
bCMP(TDCI
~SENSORA
bCMP(TDCI
~SENSORB
Id'--~'" BLK ----+------------------1
)_no on WHT ----------------------------------------------------------------" 8~~~SOR
BACK
11-80
Protected by AR
---[~
F~--WHT/GRN
F:':':"--WHT/RED
ALT
~~~-BLUWHT-------------------------"~ l~~t~~tv
V E L - - - - 11---1_f+l----l
--fB~
{J TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID
l5C VALVE ASSEMBLV
(page 11-90)
~D 11---1_f+l-----l
F;;';"--BLU/VEL
BlK
{J SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE ASSEMBL V A
(page 11-90)
GRN/WHT --------------------fl-I~
rB~ -LJs;;.FT:::
~ VALVE ASSEMBLV B
GRN-------------------------------------(-p-ag-~-1-1--9-0-~-L-K-~~~
(pa~1-79) (P89:~1-90) VALVE ASSEMBLVC
,-N.;.;;..M_ _ RED _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _VE_L/_BL_U_3_---i ~

~N~M~SG=---WHT------------------------------------------------~~
(page 11-79) MAINSHAFT SPEED SENSOR
_ _L _ V E L / R - -3
--tW a
NC
BLU
NCSG
GRN
COUNTERSHAFT SPEED SENSOR
RED
WHT -----_[c::!] AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLV A
lSB+
BRN/WHT
LSB-
GRN ------------l[C!] AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLV B
(cont'd)
BACK
11-81
Protected by AR
PCM Circuit Diagram - '02-o3 Models (cont'd)
YEL/BLK
1)'''V' BRN OJ
No. 1 INJECTOR
OJ
YEL/BU< - , -
~rn"'4 RED
No. 2 INJECTOR
Is)n-~ BLU
YEL/BLK - , -
rn
~
No. 3 INJECTOR
OJ
YEL/ BlK - , -
)"'- VEL
No. 4 INJECTOR
) . -~ BU</ ED
YEL/BU< - , -
rn No. 5 INJECTOR
r--- YEL/BU< ---,-

)n .. _ WHT,
ILU
(page 11-801
OJ No. 6 INJECTOR
H
r- YEL/BU< -f!
~
1)-... • BLK/ ED
-=- BU<-
I VALVE
r--
)~ro YEL/B LK
JUNC" N
CONN TOR A
,)~" YEL/ LK
l...-
e--
JUNC N
CONN CTORC
t..
I
'--
(page 11-861
11-82 BACK
Protected by AR
:::::=IL _m
CZ04
····· ··············································1~~[~
SECONDARY
H02S (SENSOR 2.
CM N
GRN/WHT I
(page 11-87. (pag.11-85.
C301
(page 11-87.
BLK/yEL1~
GRN/WHT ~
ENGINE MOUNT
o CONTROL
~::::"'--RED/YEL ~ I------------~I--RED/YEL 1~
SOLENOID VALVE
(page 11-87.
I - - - - -.....--BLK/YEL ~
EVAP CANISTER
JUNCTION PURGE VALVE
CONNECTORE
f-_-{AS CRS
BLU/GRN ------------~::~:_---t-----1~-[I======J
CRUISE
CONTROL UNIT
AG
(page 11-8S. Ipage11-80. (page"·90.
WHT
~WHT/RED
~ J
IMMO~IZER
INDICATOR LIGHT
(page 11-87)
......- - { A 19)1:o=---BLU f+TO
TACHOMETER
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
AK
(page 11-8S.
ILU To
WHT/RED • SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
CZ04
PSPSW
GRN
0 1 ~:=iE5J PSPSWITCH
FANC G202 From

GRN ~ RADIATOR FAN RELAY,
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH
(cont'd)
BACK
11-83
Protected by AR

PCM Circuit Diagram-'02-03 Models (cont'dl
~----.,. OP4SW BLU/YEL

------:~t
"""""i- .. I
CLUTCH PRESSURE
1
r----
~m
RED }
~12) BLU _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _.... TolMMOBIUZER
•• UNIT
• MIL
GRN/ORN [[AMI!.
.... IJU"D5IND I 0~YEL--C:
JUNCTION
--fl~~~---2~--------~(P~.~ge~11~~~5~)-------
GRN/BLK CONNECTOR D
'-"~', BLUtBLK -
-
I----+-\P
r---+--------WHT- 1-----+1R
I., .ATPNP
.141'4;--- BLU/WHT __
~~~1~ ·
~~D+il,.-I-I.I-I -+I-r u~-I, ~ ::~, :: __ ~~}
CONNECTORK
BLK/BLU ---r
+-h".II II::
WHT I'
~-r----------------WHT~
RN I ={JI
WHT _ . WHT ---r I~~EIRELAY
CONNECTOR E
BLK/BLU ~
~I~]ASH
III
C101 r r r- - - - - - - . ,
YELl II :~~::-
RED/BLK
1-
III ....· - - - - - - - y E L / G R N
1o-_.....j.I-+
,.--------YEL
r---------RED
BLU IIII r-------BLU
L--
L.--
L-- "-1 ~1BLK
RED/B~ JUNCllON
CONNECTOR C
11',1 l ~1
11-84 BACK
Protected by AR
~~---LTGRNnNHT
C551
LT GRN/WHT =10] EVAP CANISTER
r-------- BLK/YEL VENT SHUT
VALVE
~+--;~~~~-LTGRN----~
I.-____ +-__+-_______y:~:~~ =f[J5;1~~~~J~::
r-.....------- GRN/YEL ==i~SENSOR
~~--BLU-----~
BLU - - - j O ] E V A P BYPASS
C102 (page 11-83) (page 11-88) ....----BLK/yEL ~ SOLENOIO VALVE
TEST
WHT/RED -I AI Z
r-----------------------ol TACHOMETER
CONNECTOR
t, ',"
(page 11-83) DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
CONNECTOR B FUSE/RELAY BOX
GRN/
VEL
-84)
BLU/
WHT
O ,.Ll,
GRN/ VEL/
VEL BLU
akNa
GRN/YEL
YEL/BLU
CONNECTOR t-
BLU-
t t---
f--
r-
II BLK/YEL -
A~
r"
C102
YEL/BLU -
GRN/YEL- -
BLK/YEL - -
BLU/WHT -
II
WHT/RED - _
CONNECTOR I
-
G~~'I VEL
BLU
B
C402 C
"" GR'-iItGRV~
g::;:;;"---BRN---iJ BRN X
~BLK/YEL
R CONNECTOR K
(page 11-86) (page 11-87) ,-
~
4joS;;.;T~S_ _ BLU/ORN
:l}B:;:K;,::S~W:""'_WHT /BLK r- r-
'-
V -
STARTER
(page 11-86) CUT
CONNECTORM
RELAY
~N~ [ E
IG1 HOT in ON ( )
and START ( )
FUSES
A: No, 111G COIL (15 AI
B: No_ 9 BACK UP LIGHT
INSTRUMENT LIGHT (7,5 AI
C: No_ 6 ECU (PCMI \ ~
CRUISE CONTROL (15 AI y
(To pag811-86)
0: No, 13 STARTER SIGNAL
(7.5 AI
E: No_ 1 FUEL PUMP (15 AI
(cont'd)
BACK
11-85
Protected by AR
PCM Circuit Diagram-'02-03 Models (cont'dl
, - -_IFrom palle
_....J __ 11-85)
_ _ _.....
_,
A
C201
Iir BLU
OI
.
CONNECTO~
BLU ~
~ ~
Ipall8 11-89) 11>1111. 11·89)
II ci~EOR[O
BLK/YEL ~
WHT/BLK
.-1-1-+---------J.--WHT/RED I-_~I_-I-------l
J, CONNECTOR P
I ~~---4----WHT~~I~~
WHT fijC::~::OR-{A I
o
Ipall.11-87)
~Q
Ipag811-87)
11>1111
811
1Vl!Xl
Y
-85)
I I I
1>1111
li-l
811
-85) "-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---1
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
4~'::UNIT
:II, .:~[DATAUNK
WHT /ORN CONNECTOR
r
0401
BLK
~ IIII
BRAKE PEDAL
-"'J; -""-
--~~~~
:=1:
Ipalle 11-80)
W
11>1111811 -87)
.r- -fO
11>II~1-80) IP.9.11~)
1~11-87) 1~
BLK/VEL
~I L. BLK - - { P
C201
FUEL PUMP
C10tl C102 1 WHT/GRN D-WHT/GRN
G552
____ --t-+-+--YEL/~tYEL/BLK -
L...-----+I-+I-+I--:~:/YEL iJ-::~1 I
C402
C302
....-f----+---BLU/ORN
II.m_
L...----fr'
11+
~1~' ~ GRN/YEL
---0 ------+-----1--0RN/VEL
......--~I_--BLK/YEL
L-.
L.....,
~ •. 0--
PGM·FI
MAIN RELAY
BACK
11-86
Protected by AR
(page 11-83) (page 11-83)

N 0
~
CONNECTORC
/VEL~ t::l
BLK
BLK /VEL
E
YEL
BRN/ BLK I--

ToA/C +--BLU/RED f0-
PRESSURE SWITCH
(page11-83) (page 11-83)
1----<......--(!Ul~A~CS:::...--BLU/RED
(page 11-86)
V (pa
U.: WKT/ RED--L
11-86) (page 11-85)
---r r- r
NNECTORH
BLK
~~/y
U
ONNECTORI
EL~
BLU/R ED ----l ' -
CONNECTORJ
WKT/RED --f
BRN/YEL --i -
(page 11-861 (page 11-86) (page 11-86) PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
S Q T
CO NNECTORC F
WHT--{ I----o~---,
CON NECTORA G
WKT/G RN - - { t----o~--+
CONNECTORB
OC202
"--WHT/RED WKT/Y
~~L:::{ t-_-o-H----o__-.
J
f-----------GRN/R:~ =:f
_C2M BLK/Y
EL
GRN:JRED
r----BLK===L~~~~
CONNECTOR 0
~~----RED ~--------~---RED----[ ToA/C

CLUTCH RELAY
UNDER-HOOD
G202 FUSE/RELAY BOX
FUSES BATTERY
E No_ 13 CLOCK BACK UP (15 AI
F IG MAIN (60 AI
G ACGS 115AI
H STOP(20AI
I BACK UP ACC 140 AI G1
J BATTERY (120 AI
(cont'd)
BACK
11-87
Protected by AR
~
~~IGP~~1 ______ ~ _ __ _
"'Na~~
YEL/B:: ICM - .
T.
~~K. I
~~~ II L BLKIYEL
BLU/RED
BLK
~~
No. 1 IGNmON COIL
ICM
L::. ~ARKT
PLUG
III I
No. 21GNmON COIL
~~"" BLK/YEL
W
BLK
~~
H T / B L U . To
ICM
SPARK
PLUG
I
IIII I
No. 31GNmoN COIL
4~ BLK/YEL
~BLK
BAN
~~
ICM
L::. S~ARK
T
PLUG
No. 41GNmON COIL
4-.· IIIII II ~
.~-~~ L::. TS~ARK
BlK/RED
BLK
ICM PLUG
1IIIIrlt
No. 61GNmON COIL
4~'~ "'mc~~
BRN/WHT
~
BLK
ICM
L::. T. SPARK
PLUG
No. 61GNmON COIL
~JUNCTION
CONNECTORB
1
0102
r-
(page 11-851
~ ~
JUNCTION
CONNECTORB
LBLK/YEL
CT"o-",mc
(pa~11-801
~~mnnRED/BLU .. _ n_nn
I-----r--e~n-
C103
f-''',OW --{H 0I I ] KS
BACK
11-88
Protected by AR
TRANSMISSION GEAR
SELECTION SWITCH
ASSEMBLY
. ~~_M~ODE~ ____ REDI __________________________________ ~
~
~~-----YEL----------------------------------~
S.MOD~~
SWITCH
I~S~~~-------~RN---------------------------------------4
SHIFT SWITCH
r
~U1SW
B
BRN-------l fl--------4--:.ri8J
~ LOW HOLD SWITCH
G501
f--
F=------BLU/GRN
F;;,;;..-----BILU/BLK
--------------------------------1 ----
--------------------...:-----------~ ~
f1
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
SHIFT
INDICATOR
-n::A~TS:::FTP~_____ILT GRN
- C2M ~r-------------------~
LT GRN-----I
~::...-----ORN/GRN ORN/GRN-----l
).:TH~O;:::UT~_ _ YEL/GRN VELIG AN
).:.:o=~--IBLU BLU-----I
,e}:o;";'::;;';"---PNK PNK-----I
-
lpa"e 11-118) BLU
CfJ L
ABS/TCS CONTROL UMT 1J32A len"lne)
C204
~:=J
PNK
SEAF
RED/GRN
lpa"e 11-118)
BLU
~ VSA CONTROL UMT lJ32A2en"ine)
(cont'd)
BACK 11-89
Protected by AR
System Descriptions (co nt'd)
(p8ge11-79)
3RDCLUTCH
PRESSURE
C151 SWITCH
(D1~0P3SW
BLU/WHT -------1------1 BLU/WHT [~
~. ~ 0< BLU /VEL GRN/YEL 'BLU/YEL

GRN/yEL~~
-~~I-,~I-a:
ATF
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
~-------------BLK
BLK~
BLK
BLK
BLK
G151
~... '"... YEL/GRN [~ECTGAUGEII

GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
~241~~v
GRN/RED
RED/BLU
[OJ
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
CLUTCH PRESSURE
(pa~-83) CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
ASSEMBLYC
Ir-------------------~~~:~~~
~1~-·v LTILU O_u- INTAKE MANIFOLD
RUNNER CONTROL
-= WHT/BLU
MODULE"
C10!l. C1r!, ILK L '- - - - - - - '
1 WK<~-!.1F,fl
~----------WHT/RED ~
INTAKE MANIFOLD
RUNNER CONTROL
ACTUATOR"
" J32A2 engine
11-90 BACK
Protected by AR
How to Set Readiness Codes
Catalytic Converter EGR Monitor
NOTE: NOTE:
• Do not turn the ignition switch OFF. • Do not turn the ignition switch OFF .
• When the battery negative cable is disconnected, all • When the battery negative cable is disconnected, all
readiness codes are cleared. readiness codes are cleared.
Required condition: 1. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector
Ambient temperature between 20-95°F (-7-35°C). (DLC).
1. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector 2. Start the engine, and hold it at 3,000 rpm with no
(DLC). load (in Park and neutral) until the radiator fan
comes on.
2. Start the engine. Hold it at 3,000 rpm with no load
(in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. 3. Drive at a steady speed with the transmission in D5
('99 model: D4) position between 50-62 mph (80-
3. Drive for about 10 minutes without stopping on a 100 km/h) for more than 10 seconds.
highway or freeway. Your speed can vary.
4. With the transmission in D5 ('99 model: D4)
4. With the transmission in D5 ('99 model: D4) position, decelerate from 62 mph (100 km/h) by
position, drive at a steady speed between 50-62 completely releasing the throttle for at least 5
mph (80 - 100 km/h) for 30 seconds. seconds. If the engine is stopped during this part of
procedure, go to step 3 and do the procedure again.
5. Do step 4 three times. Between each repetition,
close the throttle completely for 1 - 2 seconds. If 5. Check for the readiness code with the scan tool.
the engine is stopped during this part of procedure,
go to step 3 and do the procedure again.
6. Check for the readiness code with the scan tool.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-91
Protected by AR
How to Set Readiness Codes (cont'd)

EVAP Leak Monitor H02S Monitor
NOTE: NOTE:
• When the battery negative cable is disconnected, all • Do not turn the ignition switch OFF.
readiness codes are cleared. • When the battery negative cable is disconnected, all
• If the engine is stopped while doing the procedure readiness codes are cleared.
between step 6 and 16, do this procedure from step 1
again. Required condition:
Ambient temperature between 20 - 95°F (-7 - 35°C).
1. Make sure the gasoline level is 60-90 % offuel
tank capacity (not full). 1. Connect the scan tool to the Data Li nk Connector
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. (OLC).
3. Let the vehicle sit more than 8 hours.
4. Make sure the outside temperature is 20-95°F (-7 2. Start the engine, and hold it at 3,000 rpm with no
-35°C). load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes
5. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector on.
(OLC).
6. Start the engine and drive for about 15 minutes. 3. Let the engine idle for 5 seconds.
7. Keep the vehicle at a steady speed between 50 -70
mph (80-114 km/h), without moving the 4. Drive at a steady speed between 50-62 mph (80-
accelerator pedal, for about 1 minute. 100 km/h) for about 2 minutes.
8. Stop the vehicle (do not stop engine).
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 two more times. 5. With the transmission in 05 ('99 model: 04)
10. Check for the readiness code with the scan tool. If position, decelerate from 62 mph (100 km/h) by
the readiness code does not set. go to step 11. completely releasing the throttle for at least 5
11. When ambient temperature is less than 32°F (O°C), seconds. If the engine is stopped during this part of
hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load (in Park procedure, go to step 4 and do the procedure again.
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
12. When ambient temperature is more than 86°F 6. Check for the readiness code with the scan tool.
(30°C), remove the fuel fill cap, then install the fuel
fill cap. H02S Heater Monitor
13. After step 12, drive for about 20 minutes on a
freeway. NOTE: When the battery negative cable is disconnected,
14. Keep the vehicle at a steady speed between 50 -70 all readiness codes are cleared.
mph (80-114 km/h), without moving the
accelerator pedal, for about 1 minute. 1. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector
15. Stop the vehicle (do not stop the engine). (OLC).
16. Repeat steps 14 and 15 two more ti meso
17. Check for the readiness code with the scan tool. 2. Start the engine, and let the engine idle for 10
minutes.
3. Check for the readiness code with the scan tool.
BACK
11-92
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
NOTE: The illustration shows the J32A2 engine.
ELECTRICAL LOAD DETECTOR (ELD)

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
(lAT) SENSOR
CAMSHAFT POSmON (CMP)

SENSOR (TOP DEAD CENTER MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
(TDC) SENSOR: '99-01 models) AlB (MAP) SENSOR
Troubleshooting, page 11-131 Troubleshooting, page 11-96
THROTTLE POSITION
(TP) SENSOR
CRANKSHAFT POSmON
(CKP) SENSOR
Troubleshooting, page 11-125 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
(ECT) SENSOR
(cont'd)
BACK
11-93
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
J32A1 engine:
S=:}
~~PRIMARY HEATED OXYGEN
SENSOR (PRIMARY HOzS)
(SENSOR 1)
Troubleshooting. page 11-109
Replacement. page 11-146
SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN

SENSOR (SECONDARY H02S1
(SENSOR 2)
Troubleshooting. page 11 -112
J32A2 engine:
PRIMARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

~ (PRIMARY H02S) (SENSOR 1)
SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

(SECONDARY H02S) (SENSOR 2)
11-94 BACK
Protected by AR
NOTE: The illustlation shows '00-03 models.
INJECTORS ('99 model)

INJECTORS ('00-03 models)

General Troubleshooting Information, page 11-3
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) ('99-02 models) DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) ('03 model)
General Troubleshooting Information, General Troubleshooting Information, page 11-3
page 11-3
BACK
11-95
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0107: MAP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage

10. Check for continuity between the MAP sensor
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). connector terminal No.3 and body ground.
2. Check the MAP with the scan tool. MAP SENSOR3P CONNECTOR
Is about 101 kPa (760 mmHg, 30 in.Hg) or 2.9 V
indicated?
YES -Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.

MAP sensor and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Wire side of female terminals
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor connector.

YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
6. Measure voltage between the MAP sensor (C17) and the MAP sensor..
connector term inals No. 1 and No.2.
NO-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck
MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR (see page 11-5). If normal voltage is indicated,
SG1 (GRN/WHT)
W ire side of female terminals
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the PCM

(C19) and the MAP sensor. •
7. Check the MAP with the scan tool.
Is 2 kPa (15 mmHg, 0.6 in.Hg) or less indicated?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Replace the MAP sensor.•
9. Disconnect the PCM connector C (31P).
11-96 BACK
Protected by AR
Ole P0108: MAP Sensor Circuit High Voltage 9. Measure voltage between MAP sensor 3P
connector terminals No.1 and No.2.
1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with
MAP SENSOR3P CONNECTOR
no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan
Is about 101 kPa (780 mmHg, 30 in.Hg) or higher

or about 2.9 V indicated?
YES - Go to step 3. SG1 (GRN/WHT)
NO-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.

Check for poor connections or loose wires at the Wire side of female term inals
MAP sensor and the PCM .•
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Gotostep 10.
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor connector.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C7)
5. Connect MAP sensor 3P connector terminals No.2 and the MAP sensor..
and No.3 with a jumper wire .
MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
11 . Connect PCM connector terminals between C7 and
C17 with a jumper wire.
SG1 (GRN/WHT) I
SG1 (GRN/WHT) MAP (RED/GRN,
'00-03 models: GRN/RED) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/ 12 13 14 1/ 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
JUMPER WIRE 23 / 25 26 L~ 28 29 30 /
Wire side of female terminals MAP (RED/GRN,
'00-03 models: GRN / RED
JUMPER WIRE
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Wire side of female terminals

Is about 159 kPa (1,190 mmHg, 47 in.Hg) or higher
or 4.49 V or higher indicated? 13. Check the MAP with the scan tool.
YES-Go to step 8. Is about 159 kPa (1,190 mmHg, 47 in.Hg) or higher

or about 4.49 V or higher indicated?
NO- Replace the MAP sensor. •
YES - Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck
8. Remove the jumper wire. (see page 11-5). If normal voltage is indicated,
NO - Repair open in the wire between the PCM

(C17) and the MAP sensor.•
BACK
11-97
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P1128: MAP Sensor Signal Lower Than DTC P1129: MAP Sensor Signal Higher Than
Expected Expected
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with
2. Check the MAP with the scan tool. comes on, then let it idle.
Is 54.1 kPa (406 mmHg. 16.0 in.Hg) or higher 2. Check the MAP with the scan tool.
indicated?
Is 43.3 kPa (325 mmHg, 12.8 in.Hg) or less
YES-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this indicated?
time .•
YES-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this
NO-Replace the MAP sensor.• time .•
NO - Replace the MAP sensor..
11-98 BACK
Protected by AR
DTC P0112: IAT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage /s there continuity?
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(C25) and the IAT sensor..
2. Check the IAT with the scan tool.
Is 302°F (150°C) or higher (or H-Limit in Honda (see page 11-5). If normal voltage is indicated,
mode of PGM Tester) or 0 V indicated? replace the original PCM .•
YES-Go to step 3. 8. Check the temperature reading on the scan tool.
NO - Go to step 8. NOTE: If the engine is warm, the reading will be

higher than ambient temperature.
3. Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P connector.
Is the correct ambient temperature indicated? Be
4. Check the IATwith the scan tool. aware that if the engine is warm, the reading will
be higher than ambient temperature. If the engine
/s 302°F(150°C) or higher (or H-Limit in Honda is cold, the IAT and ECT will have the same valve.
mode of PGM Tester) or 0 V indicated?
YES-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
YES-Go to step 5. Check for poor connections or loose wires at the
IAT sensor and the PCM .•
NO- Replace thelAT sensor.•
NO - Replace the IAT sensor.•
6. Disconnect the PCM connector C (31 Pl.
7. Check the continuity between IAT sensor 2P

IAT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

'99 model:
'00-03 models: =
=
BACK
11-99
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
OTC P0113: IAT Sensor Circuit High Voltage 5. Check the IAT with the scan tool.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is - 4°F (- 20°C) or less (or L-Limit in Honda
YES-Go to step 6.
Is - 4°F (- 20°C) or less (or L-Limit in Honda
mode of PGM Tester) or 5 V indicated? NO - Replace the IAT sensor.•
YES - Go to step 3. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO-Intermitentfailure, system is OK atthis time. 7. Connect PCM connector terminals C18 and C25
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the with a jumper wire.
IAT sensor and the PCM .•
PCM CONNECTOR C 131P)
3. Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P connector.
4. Connect IAT sensor 2P connector terminals No.1

and No.2 with a jumper wire.
1 2 3 / 5 6 7 8 9 10
IAT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

V/ 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 1/
23 / 25 26 27 2~ 29 30 V
'99 model:
IAT IRED/VEL) 1 SG2 IGRN/BLK,
'00-03 models:
SG2 IGRN/BLK) JUMPER WIRE GRN/YEL))

JUMPER WIRE

'00-03 models:
Is - 4°F (- 20°C) or less (or L-Limit in Honda
SG2 IAT YES-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck

IGRN/YEL) IRED/VEL) (see page 11-5). If normal voltage is indicated,
JUMPER WIRE
(C18, C25) and the IAT sensor..
BACK
11-100
Protected by AR
DTC P0116: ECT Sensor Range/Performance DTC P0117: ECT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
Problem
NOTE: If DTC P0117 and/or P0118 are stored at the
same time as DTC P0116, troubleshoot those DTCs first, 2. Check the ECT with the scan tool.
then recheck for DTC P0116.
Is 302°F (150°C) or higher (or H-Umit in Honda
1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with mode of PGM Tester) or 0 V indicated?
comes on, then let it idle. YES - Go to step 3.
2. Check the ECT with the scan tool. NO-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Is 176-200°F (80-93°C) or 0.4-0.7 V ECT sensor and the PCM .•
indicated?
3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector.
Check the thermostat and the cooling system .• 4. Check the ECT with the scan tool.
NO-Check the thermostat and the cooling system. Is 302°F (150°C) or higher (or H-Umit in Honda
If they are OK, replace the ECT sensor.• mode of PGM Tester) or 0 V indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO - Replace the ETC sensor.•
6. Disconnect the PCM connector C (31 PI.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-101
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
OTe Troubleshooting (cont'd)
7. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 2P

ECT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
'99 model:
'00-03 models:
Wire side offemale terminals

(C26) and the ECT sensor.•

(see page 11-5). If normal voltage is indicated,
BACK
11-102
Protected by AR
DTe P0118: ECT Sensor Circuit High Voltage 5. Check the ECT with the scan tool.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is - 4°F (- 20°C) or less (or L-Umit in Honda
2. Check the ECT with the scan tool.
YES-Go to step 6.
Is - 4°F (- 20°C) or less (or L-Umit in Honda
mode of PGM Tester) or 5 V indicated? NO - Replace the ECT sensor.•
YES-Go to step 3. 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. 7. Connect PCM connector terminals C18 and C26
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the with a jumper wire.
ECT sensor and the PCM .•
3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector.
4. Connect ECT sensor 2P connector terminals No.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

and No.2 with a jumper wire.
ECT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
/ 12 13 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 / 25 26 27 LB 29 30 /
'99 model:
ECT (RED/WHT) I SG2 (GRN/BLK,
'00-03 models:
JUMPER WIRE GRN/VEL)
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
ECT (RED/WHT)
9. Check the ECT with the scan tool.

'00-03 models:
Is -4°F (-20°C) or less (or L-Umit in Honda
SG2 ECT
(GRN/VEL) (RED/WHT) YES-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck
JUMPER WIRE
(C18, C26) and the ECT sensor.•
BACK
11-103
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
OTe Troubleshooting (co nt'd)
Ole P0122: TP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage 9. At the sensor side, measure resistance between TP
sensor 3P connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with
1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with the throttle fully closed.
comes on, then turn the ignition switch OFF. TP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
3. Check the throttle position with the scan tool.
Is there about 10% when the throttle is fully closed

and about 90% when the throttle is fully opened?

TPS
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the TP
sensor and the PCM .•
NO - Go to step 4.
Is there about 0.5- 0.9 kQ ?
YES-Go to step 10.
5. Disconnect the TP sensor 3P connector.
NO-Replace the throttle body.•
10. Measure resistance between TP sensor 3P
7. Measure voltage between TP sensor 3P connector connector terminals No.2 and No.3 with the
terminals No.1 and No.3. throttle fully closed.
TP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
TP SENSOR 3PCONNECTOR
SG2 (GRN/BLK, VCC2 (VEL/BLUI

'00-03 models:
GRN/VELI
TPS

Is there about 5 V? Is there about 4.5kQ ?
YES - Go to step 8. YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Gotostep 14. NO- Replace the throttle body .•
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Reconnect the TP sensor connector.
BACK
11-104
Protected by AR
13. Measure voltage between PCM connector

terminals C18 and C27.
PCM CONNECTOR C (31PI
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V 12 13 14 V 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 1/ 25 26 27 I~~ 29 30 1/
TPS (RED/BLK) ~ SG2)GRN/Bl K,
'00-03 models:
':i. GRN/YELI
Is there about O.S V when the throttle is fully

closed and about 4.S V when the throttle is fully
opened?
YES-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck·

(see page 11-5). If voltage is normal, replace the
original PCM .•
NO-Repair short or open in the wire between the

PCM (C27) and the TP sensor.•

PCM CONNECTOR C (31PI
SG2 (GRN/BLK,
-
'00 03 models·
GRN/YEL)
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10
l!' 12 13 14 1/ 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 V25 26 27 28 29 30 1/
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
':i.
Is there about SV?
YES-Repair open in the wire between the PCM

(C28) and the TP sensor.•

(see page 11-5). If voltage is normal, replace the
original PCM .•
BACK
11-105
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
OTC P0123: TP Sensor Circuit High Voltage 8. Measure voltage between PCM connector
comes on, then turn the ignition switch OFF.
SG2 (GRN/BLK,
'00-03 models'
3. Check the throttle position with the scan tool. 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10
Is there about 10% when the throttle is fully closed

V 12 13 14 V 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
and about 90% when the throttle is fully opened?
23 V 25 26 27 28 29 30 /
V
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the TP
sensor and the PCM .• Wire side of female terminals
NO - Go to step 4. Is there about 5 V?
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. YES- Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(C18) and the TP sensor..
5. Disconnect the TP sensor 3P connector.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). (see page 11-5). If voltage is normal, replace the
original PCM .•
7. At the wire harness side, measure voltage between
TP sensor 3P connector terminals No.1 and No. 3.
TP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
SG2 (GRN/BLK, VCC2 (YEL/BLU)

'00-03 models:
GRN/YEL)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the throttle body .•
NO-Go to step 8.
11-106 BACK
Protected by AR
OTC P1121: TP Sensor Signal Lower Than OTC P1122: TP Sensor Signal Higher Than
Expected Expected
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) . 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Check the throttle position with the scan tool. 2. Check the throttle position with the scan tool.
Is 13.7 % or higher indicated when the throttle is Is 16.9 % or less indicated when the throttle is
fully opened? fully closed?
YES-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this YES -Intermittent failure, system is OK at this

time .• time .•
NO - Replace the throttle body.• NO-Replace the throttle body .•
BACK
11-107
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
OTC P0128 ('02-03 Models): Rangel 1. Check the engine coolant level.
Performance Problem in Thermostat
Is the engine coolant level low?
NOTE: If the DTCs listed below are stored the same
time as DTC P0128, troubleshoot those DTCs first, then YES-Refill the engine coolant. If necessary, check
recheck for P0128. the cooling system .•
P0107, P0108, P1129: MAP Sensor NO-Go to step 2.

P1106, P1107, P1108: Barometric Pressure Circuit
P1259: VTEC system 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
P0401: EGR Flow Insufficient
P1491: EGR Valve Position Insufficient 3. Check the radiator fan.
P1498: EGR Valve Position Sensor High Voltage
P0116, P0117, P0118: Engine Coolant Temperature Dose the radiator fan keep running?
Circuit
P0112, P0113: Intake Air Tenperature Circuit YES-J32A1 engine: Check the radiator fan circuit
P0335, P0336, P1359: Crankshaft Position Sensor (see page 10-22), radiator fan switch circuit (see
P0300: Random Misfire page 10-24), and the radiator fan switch (see page
P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306: Cylinder 1, 10-33).
2,3,4,5, or 6 Misfire Detected J32A2 engine: Check the radiator fan circuit (see
P0505: Idle Control System Malfuction page 10-21), radiator fan switch circuit (see page
P1519: Idle Air Control Valve 10-21), and the radiator fan switch (see page 10-21).
DTC P0128 can occasionally set when the hood is • If they are OK, substitute the PCM and recheck
opened. (see page 11-5).
• Ifthe symptom/indicator goes away, replace the
original PCM .•
NO- Testthe thermostat (see page 10-11 ).•
BACK
11-108
Protected by AR
DTC P0131: Primary H02S (Sensor 1) Circuit 11 . Check for continuity between primary H02S
Low Voltage (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminal No.1 and body
ground.
1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4).
PRIMARY H02S (SENSOR 1)
4P CONNECTOR
comes on. PH02S(WHT)
2
3. Check the primary H02S (Sensor 1) output voltage
with the scan tool during acceleration using wide 3 4
open throttle.
Does the voltage stay at 0.5 V or less?

=
YES- Go to step 4.
NO -Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the Is there continuity?
primary H02S (Sensor 1) and the PCM .•
YES- Repair short in the wire between the PCM
4. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-164). (C16) and the primary H02S (Sensor 1) .•
Is it normal? NO-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck

YES-Go to step 5. away, replace the original PCM .•
NO - Repair the fuel supply system .•
6. Disconnect the primary H02S (Sensor 1) 4P

connector.
7. Start the engine and let it idle.

with the scan tool.
Does i t stay at 0.5 V or less?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the primary H02S (Sensor 1).•
BACK
11-109
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
Dle P0132: Primary H02S (Sensor 1) Circuit 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
High Voltage
10. Connect PCM connector terminals C16 and C18
1. Resetthe PCM (see page 11-4). with a jumper wire.
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with PCM CONNECTOR C {31PI
comes on.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
with the scan tool. / 12 13 14
/ 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Does the voltage stay at 1.5 V or more?

23 V 25
PH02S{WHTI
2~ 27 2~ 29 30
SG2 {GRN/BLK,
V
'00-03 models:
YES-Go to step 4. JUMPER WIRE GRN/YELI
NO-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Wire side of female terminals

primary H02S (Sensor 1) and the PCM .•
5. Disconnect the primary H02S (Sensor 1) 4P with the scan tool.
connector.
Is there 1.5 V or more?
6. Connect primary H02S (Sensor 1) 4P connector
terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire. YES-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck
PRIMARY H02S (SENSOR 1)
4P CONNECTOR away, replace the original PCM .•
JUMPER WIRE NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM

(C16, C18) and the primary H02S (Sensor 1) .•
PH02S (WHTI I I I 2
4
SG2 {GRN/BLK,
'00-03 models:
3 GRN/YELI
7. Turr ' he ignition switch ON (II).
8. ChecK the primary H02S (Sensor 1) output voltage

with the scan tool.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO - Replace the primary H02S (Sensor 1) .•
BACK
11-110
Protected by AR
DTC P0133: Primary H02S (Sensor 1) Slow

Response
NOTE: If OTC P0131, P0132 and/or P0135 are stored at
the same time as OTC P0133, troubleshoot those OTCs
first, then recheck for OTC P0133.
1. Resetthe PCM (see page 11-4).

comes on.
3. Test-drive under following conditions.
• 55 mph (89 km/h) steady speed

• Transmission in 04 position
• Until readiness code or Temporary OTC P0133
comes on
4. Check for a Temporary OTC with the scan tool.
Is Temporary DTC P0133 indicated?
YES-Replace the primary H02S (Sensor 1)..

primary H02S (Sensor 1), and the PCM .•
BACK
11-111
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
DTe Troubleshooting (cont'd)
Ole P0137: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 10. Check for continuity between secondary H02S
Circuit Low Voltage (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No.2 and body
ground.
SECONDARY H02S
(SENSOR 214P CONNECTOR
comes on.
SH02S (WHT/REDI
2
3. Check the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) output
voltage at 3,000 rpm with the scan tool.
3 4
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Terminal side of male terminals

secondary H02S (Sensor 2), and the PCM .• Is there continuity?
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. YES- Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(A23, '00-03 models: A 1) and the secondary H02S
5. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P (Sensor 2) .•
connector.
6. Start the engine. (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original PCM.
voltage with the scan tool.
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) .•
9. Disconnect the PCM connector A (32P).
BACK
11-112
Protected by AR
DTe P0138: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. Connect PCM connector terminals A23 ('00-03
1. Resetthe PCM (see page 11-4). models: A 1) and C18 with a jumper wire.
PCM CONNECTORS
SH02S (WHTIRED)
no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan ('00-03 models)
comes on. A (32P)

Does the voltage stay at 0.8 V or more?

SG2 (GRN/BLK) C (31P)
YES-Go to step 4.

Check for poor connections or loose wires at the Wire side of female terminals
secondary H02S (Sensor 2), and the PCM .•
5. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P voltage with the scan tool.
connector.
6. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire. YES-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck
SECONDARY H02S away, replace the original PCM .•
(SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
JUMPER WIRE NO- Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(A23, '00-03 models: A1, C18) and the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) .•
.-lr---J L
~
1 2 I--
SG2(GRN/BLK, SHO 2S (WHT/RED)
'00-03 modeIs:
GRN/YEL) 3 4

voltage with the scan tool.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) .•
BACK 11-113
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
DTC P0139: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) Slow

Response

comes on.

Does the voltage stay within 0.3- 0.8 V for 2

minutes?
YES-Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) .•

secondary H02S (Sensor 2), and the PCM .•
11-114 BACK
Protected by AR
DTC P0135: Primary H02S (Sensor 1) Heater 6. Check continuity between body ground and H02S
Circuit Malfunction 4P connector terminals No.3 and No.4 individually.
DTC P0141: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) H02S 4P CONNECTOR

Heater Circuit Malfunction PRIMARY SECONDARY·
NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk ( * ) applies

to DTC P0141. 1 2
3 4
Is ore P0135 or P0141 indicated? = = = =

Terminal side of Wire side of
male terminals female terminals
YES-Go to step 3.
NO -Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. Is there continuity?

primary H02S (Sensor 1), the secondary H02S YES-Replace the H02S (primary or secondary *)
(Sensor 2), and the PCM .• (Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 * ).•
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NO- Go to step 7.
4. Disconnect the H02S (primary or secondary * ) 7. Start the engine.

(Sensor' or Sensor 2 * ) 4P connector.
8. At the wire harness side, measure voltage between
5. At the H02S side, measure resistance between H02S 4P connector terminals No.3 and No.4.
H02S 4P connector terminals No.3 and No.4.
H02S 4P CONNECTOR PRIMARY SECONDARY·

PRIMARY SECONDARY·
1 2 IG1 1 2 IG1
1 2 1 2 3 4 (BlK/YEll (BlK/YEl)
3 4
3 4 3 4
Wire side of Terminal side of

Terminal side of Wire side of female terminals male terminals
male terminals female terminals

Is there 10- 40 Q ?
YES-Go to step 9.
YES - Go to step 6.
NO-Gotostep 12.
NO - Replace the primary H02S (Sensor 1) or
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) * .• 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. Disconnect the PCM connector C (31P) (PCM

connector A, 32P * ).
(cont'd)
BACK
11-115
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
11. Check for continuity between PCM connector 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
terminal C1 (AS) * and body ground.
14. Reconnect the H02S (primary or secondary .. )
PCM CONNECTORS (Sensor 1, Sensor 2 * ) 4P connector.
15. Disconnect PCM connector C (31P) (PCM connector

A, 32P) *.

S02SHTC (BlK/WHT)"
17. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal
C1 (AS)" and 82.
PCM CONNECTORS
P02SHTC C (31P)
(BlK/W
~1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V 12 13 14 L 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
/s there continuity?
2·~ / 25 126 27 28 29 30V
~
(C1, AS") and the H02S (primary or secondary .. ) PG
(BlK) B(25P)
(Sensor 1, Sensor 2" ).•
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck 9 10 11 12 V 14 15 / 17 18
(see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes / 20 6lgf 23 24 ?5
away, replace the original PCM .•
')L S02SHTC
A (32P) (BlK/WHT)
12. Atthe wire harness side, measure voltage between
H02S 4P connector terminal No.4 and body VI2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 J
ground. 12113 14 15 V 17 18 19 120 21 / 23 24 I
~5 126 27 ~8 ~ 30 31
-32
PRIMARY SECONDARY"
Is there 0. 1 V or less?
~IG1 U3 IG1 YES - Repair open in the wire between the PCM
~(BlK/YEl) (BlK/YEl)
(C1, AS *) and H02S (primary or secondary .. )
~ (Sensor 1, Sensor 2 .. ).•
NO - Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck

':' ':'
Terminal side of
Wire side of
female terminals ma le terminals
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the primary

H02S (Sensor 1), secondary H02S (Sensor 2)"
and the No.6 ECU (PCM) CRUISE CONTROL
fuse .•
11-116 BACK
Protected by AR
OTC P0171: Fuel System Too Lean 5. With a vacuum pump, apply vacuum to the
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister purge valve
OTC P0172: Fuel System Too Rich from the intake manifold side.
NOTE: If some of the OTCs listed below are stored at Does it hold vacuum?
the same time as OTC P0171 and/or P0172,
troubleshoot those OTCs first, then recheck for P0171 YES-Check the valve clearances and adjust if
and/or P0172. necessary. If the valve clearances are OK, replace
the injectors .•
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: Manifold Absolute
Pressure (MAP) sensor NO-Replace the EVAP canister purge valve .•
P0135: Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (primary H02S)
(Sensor 1) heater
P0137, P0138: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2)
P0141: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) heater
P0401, P1491, P1498: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
system
P1259: VTEC system
1. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-164).
Is fuel pressure OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO- Check these items:
• If the pressure is too high. check the fuel

pressure regulator. and the fuel return pipe .•
• If the pressure is too low, check the fuel pump,
the fuel feed pipe, the fuel filter. and the fuel
pressure regulator .•

comes on.
3. Check the primary H02S (Sensor 1) output with the

scan tool.
Does it stay at less than 0.3 V or more than 0.6 V?
YES - Replace the primary H02S (Sensor 1) .•
NO-Go to step 4.
BACK 11-117
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System

DTC P0300: Random Misfire and Any Combination of the Following:
DTC P0301: No.1 Cylinder Misfire
DTC P030S: No.5 Cylinder Misfire
DTC P030S: No.6 Cylinder Misfire
NOTE:
• If the misfiring is frequent enough to trigger detection of increased emissions during two consecutive driving cycles,
the MIL will come on, and OTC P0300 (and some combination of P0301 through P0306) will be stored .
• If the misfiring is frequent enough to damage the catalyst, the MIL will blink whenever the misfiring occurs, and OTC
P0300 (and some combination of P0301 through P0306) will be stored. When the misfiring stops, the MIL will remain
on.
1. Troubleshoot the following OTCs first if any of them were stored along with the random misfire DTC(s):
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
P0131, P0132: Primary Heated Oxygen Sensor (primary H02S)
P0171, P0172: Fuel system
P0335, P0336: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
P0401, P1491, P1498: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system
P0505: Idle control system
P1259: VTEC system
P1361, P1362, P1366, P1367: Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor (Top Dead Center (TOC) Sensor: '99-01 models) AlB
P1519: Idle Air Control (lAC) valve
2. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the symptom.
3. Find the symptom in the chart below, and do the related procedures in the order listed until you find the cause.
Symptom Procedure(s) Also check for: I

Random misfire only Check fuel pressure (see page 11-164). • Low compression. I
at low RPM and • Low quality fuel. I
under load
Random misfire only Check fuel pressure (see page 11-164). Malfunction in the
during acceleration VTEC system (see
page 6-6). I
Random misfire at Check fuel pressure (see page 11-164). Correct valve
high RPM, under clearance (see page
load, or under 6-13).
random conditions -- ---------
11-118 BACK
Protected by AR
OTe P0301: No.1 Cylinder Misfire 7. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
OTe P0302: No.2 Cylinder Misfire Does the misfire occur in the other cylinder whose
ignition coil was exchanged?
OTe P0303: No.3 Cylinder Misfire
YES- Replace the faulty ignition coil..
NO- Go to step 8.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and reset the PCM
OTe P0306: No.6 Cylinder Misfire (see page 11-4).
1. After checking and recording the freeze data, reset 9. Exchange the spark plug from the problem cylinder
the PCM (see page 11-4). If there is no freeze data of with one from another cylinder.
misfiring, just clear the DTC.
10. Test-drive the vehicle several times in the range of
2. Start the engine and listen for a clicking sound at the freeze data or under various conditions if there
the injector in the problem cylinder. was no freeze data.
Does it click? 11. Check the DTC and the Temporary DTC with the
scan tool.
YES-Go to step 3.
Is OTe P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or
NO-Go to step 30. P0306, or Temporary OTe P1399 indicated?
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and reset the PCM YES- Go to step 12.
(see page 11-4).
NO-Intermittent misfire due to spark plug fouling,
4. Exchange the ignition coil from the problem etc. (no misfire at this time) .•
cylinder with one from another cylinder.
12. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
the freeze data or under various conditions if there Does the misfire occur in the other cylinder whose
was no freeze data. spark plug was exchanged?
6. Check the DTC and the Temporary DTC with the YES- Replace the faulty spark plug .•
scan tool.
NO-Go to step 13.
Is OTe P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or
P0306, or Temporary OTe P1399 indicated? 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and reset the PCM
(see page 11-4).
YES- Go to step 7.
14. Exchange the injector from the problem cylinder
NO-Intermittent misfire due to poor contact at the with one from the another cylinder.
ignition coil connector. (no misfire at this time) .•
15. Let the engine idle for 2 minutes.

the freeze data or under various conditions if there
was no freeze data.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-119
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
17. Check the DTC and the Temporary DTC with the 24. Check for continuity between ignition coil 3P
scan tool. connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or IGNmON COil 3P CONNECTOR

P0306, or Temporary DTC P1399 indicated?
GND
YES-Go to step 18. 2 ,tBlK)
NO-Intermittent misfire due to bad contact in the 3

injector connector (no misfire at this time) .•
18. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
Does the misfire occur in the other cylinder whose

injector was exchanged? Wire side of
female terminals
-=
YES-Replace the faulty injector
(see page 11-142).•
NO-Go to step 19.
YES - Go to step 25.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the ignition
20. Disconnect the ignition coil 3P connector from the coil and G101 (or G102) .•
problem cylinder.
25. Disconnect PCM connector C (31 PI.
22. Measure voltage between the ignition coil 3P

IGNmON COil 3P CONNECTOR
IG
tBlK/VEl)
---.
Wire side of
female terminals
NO-Repair open or short in the wire between the

No. 11 COIL (15A) fuse and the ignition coil..
11-120 BACK
Protected by AR
26. Check for continuity between body ground and the 27. Connect the appropriate ignition coil 3P connector
appropriate PCM connector terminal (see table). terminal No.1 and body ground with a jumper wire
(see table).
IGPLS3
(BLU) IGNmoN COIL 3P CONNECTOR
(WHT/BLU)· IGPLS1 (YEL/GRN)
JUMPER WIRE
1
567 8 9 10 2
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 3
26 27 28 29 30
IGPLS6
(WHT/
BLU) IGPLS2 Wire side of female terminals
(BRN/ (RED)
WHT)· (BLU/RED)·
Q PROBLEM DTC WIRE COLOR

CYLINDER
-= -=
*: '00..(11 models
-= = = = No. 1 P0301 YEL/GRN (YEL/GRN)
Wire side of female terminals No. 2 P0302 RED (BLU/RED)
No. 3 P0303 BlU (WHT/BLU)
PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE COLOR No. 4 P0304 YEL (BRN)
CYLINDER TERMINAL No.5 P0305 BlK/RED (BLK/RED)
No.1 P0301 C4 YEL/GRN (YEL/GRN) No. 6 P0306 WHT/BLU (BRN/WHT)
No.2 P0302 C14 RED (BLU/RED)
No.3 P0303 C3 BlU (WHT/BLU) 28. Check for continuity between body ground and the
No.4 P0304 C13 YEL (BRN) appropriate PCM connector terminal (see table).
No.5 P0305 C12 BLK/RED (BlK/RED)
PCM CONNECTOR c (31P)
No.6 P0306 C23 WHT/BlU (BRN/WHT) IGPLS3
(BLU)
( ): '00..01 models (WHT/BLU,·

and the ignition coil..
NO - Go to step 27.
":" ":"
PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE COLOR

CYLINDER TERMINAL
No.1 P0301 C4 YEL/GRN (YEL/GRN)
No. 2 P0302 C14 RED (BlU/RED)
No. 3 P0303 C3 BlU (WHT/BlU)
No. 4 P0304 C13 YEL (BRN)
No.5 P0305 C12 BlK/RED (BlK/RED)
No.6 P0306 C23 WHT/BlU (BRN/WHT)
( ): '00-03 models
YES-Go to step 29.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the PCM and

the ignition coil..
(cont'd)
BACK 11-121
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
29. Check the engine compression (see page 6-6). 36. Measure resistance between injector 2P connector
terminals No.1 and No.2.
Is the engine compression OK?
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck

(see page 11-S). If the symptom/indication goes
~
NO- Repair the engine .• IGP'-«J INJ

31. Disconnect PCM connector B (2SP).
32. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is there 10 Q - 13 Q?
33. Measure voltage between body ground and the YES-Go to step 37.
appropriate PCM connector terminal (see table). NO- Replace the injector (see page 11-142).•
PCM CONNECTOR B (25P)
37. Exchange the injector from the problem cylinder
INJ4(VEL) INJ2 (RED) with one from another cylinder, and reset the PCM
(see page 11-4).
(BLK/ 1
INJ5
RED) 119 1 2
10 I.. I I-I I~' I::I
I----~-
.. - __ 38. let the engine idle for 2 minutes.
19 I 20 39. Test-drive the vehicle several times in the range of

INJ1 the freeze data or under various conditions if there
(BRN)
was no freeze data.
':::L ':::L 5£ 40. Check the DTC and the Temporary DTC with the
scan tool.
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or
PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE P0306, or Temporary DTC P1399 indicated?
CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No.1 P0301 B11 BRN YES-Go to step 41.
No.2 P0302 BS RED NO-Intermittent misfire due to injector fouling,
I
No.3 P0303 B1S BlU etc .•
No.4 P0304 B4 ,
, YEl j
No.S P030S B3 I BlK/RED 41. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
No.6 P0306 B6 WHT/BLU
Does the misfire occur in the other cylinder whose
Is there battery voltage? injector was exchanged?
YES-Go to step 34. YES- Replace the faulty injector,.

NO-Go to step 42. (see page 11-S), If the symptom/indication goes
3S. Disconnect the injector 2P connector on the
problem cylinder. 43. Disconnect the injector 2P connector on the
problem cylinder.
11-122 BACK
Protected by AR
45. Measure voltage between injector 2P connector 48. Connect the appropriate injector 2P connector
terminal No.1 and body ground. terminal No.2 to body ground with a jumper wire
(see tablel.
~
~
IGP (VEL/BLK) ~
2
INJ
JUMPER WIRE _

/s there battery voltage?

PROBLEM DTC WIRE
YES - Go to step 46. CYLINDER COLOR
No.1 P0301 BRN
NO- Repair open in the wire between the injector No.2 P0302 RED
and the PGM-FI main relay .• No.3 P0303 BLU
No.4 P0304 YEL
46. Turn the ignition switch OFF. No.5 P0305 BLK/RED
No.6 P0306 WHT/BLU
47. Check for continuity between body ground and the
appropriate PCM connector terminal (see tablel. 49. Check for continuity between body ground and the
appropriate PCM connector terminals (see tablel.
PCM CONNECTOR B (25PI
INJ4(YEL) INJ2(REO) PCM CONNECTOR B (2SPI
INJ4 (YEL) 1NJ2 (RED)
INJ5
(BLK/ 1 2 345 INJ5
RED)
9 10 (BlKI 1 2 345
RED)
9 10
19 20
19 20
INJ1
(BRN) INJ1 INJ3
(BRN) (BlU)
.Q .Q
=
Wire side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals
PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE

CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No.1 P0301 B11 BRN No.1 P0301 B11 BRN
No.2 P0302 B5 RED No.2 P0302 B5 RED
No. 3 P0303 B15 BLU No.3 P0303 B15 BLU
No.4 P0304 B4 YEL No.4 P0304 B4 YEL
No.5 P0305 B3 BLK/RED No.5 P0305 B3 BLK/RED
No.6 P0306 B6 WHT/BLU No.6 P0306 B6 WHT/BLU
/s there continuity? /s there continuity?
YES - Repair short in the wire between the PCM YES - Replace the injector, then recheck. •
and the injector..
NO - Repair open in the wire between the PCM and
NO - Go to step 48. the injector..
BACK
11-123
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
DTC P0325: Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction 8. Connect the C103 knock sensor connector terminal
No.1 to body ground with a jumper wire.
KNOCK SENSOR SUB-HARNESS
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with 1P CONNECTOR (C161)
3. Hold the engine at 3,000 - 4,000 rpm for at least 60

seconds.
Is DTC P0325 indicated?
YES - Go to step 4.
KS
(RED/BLU)
1 JUMPER WIRE

NO -Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
knock sensor and the PCM. 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
5. Disconnect the C103 knock sensor connector.
6. Disconnect PCM connector C.
7. Check for continuity between PCM connector

PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) :a

-=
:a YES - Go to step 10.

Wire side of female terminals (C22) and the C103 knock sensor connector.•
10. Check the knock sensor sub-harness between C103

Is there continuity? and the knock sensor for an open or short. If it's OK,
substitute a known-good knock sensor and recheck.
(C22) and the C103 knock sensor connector.• Is DTC P0325 indicated?
NO-Go to step 8. YES-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck

NO - Replace the original the knock sensor and/or

the knock sensor sub-harness.•
BACK
11-124
Protected by AR
DTC P0335: CKP Sensor Circuit No Signal 6. Check for continuity between body ground and CKP
sensor 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2
DTC P0336: CKP Sensor Intermittent individually.
Interruption
CKP SENSOR 2PCONNECTOR
Is DTC P0335 and/or P0336 indicated?
YES - Go to step 3.

CKP sensor and the PCM .• Terminal side of male terminals

4. Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P connector.
YES- Replace the CKP sensor (see page 6-60) .•
5. Measure resistance between CKP sensor 2P
connector terminals No.1 and No.2. NO-Go to step 7.
CKP SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

7. Reconnect the CKP sensor 2P connector.
9. Measure resistance between PCM connector

r
CKP+
(BLU) (WH T)
Terminal side of male terminals Q
Is there 1,850- 2,450 Q ? 11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

V 12 13 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
YES- Go to step 6. 23 V 25 26 27 28 29 30 V
NO - Replace the CKP sensor (see page 6-60) .• Wire side of female terminals
Is there 1,850- 2,450 Q ?
NO- Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C8,

C9) and CKP sensor.•
(cont'd)
BACK
11-125
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
10. Check for continuity between body ground and

PCM connector terminal C8.
PCM CONNECTOR C 131PI
CKPP
IBLUI
I
11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
~ 12 13 14 V 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 / 25 26 27 28 29 30 V r"'

(C8) and the CKP sensor.•

11-126 BACK
Protected by AR
DTC P1106: BARO Sensor Range/Periomance DTC P1107: BARO Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
Problem
DTC P1108: BARO Sensor Circuit High
1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). Voltage
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4).
comes on, then let it idle. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Test-drive when the transmission in 2nd (2) Is DTC P1107 or P110B indicated?
position gear.
4. Accelerate for 5 seconds using wide open throttle. (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original PCM . •
5. Check for a Temporary OTC with the scan tool.
NO-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this
Is Temporary DTC P1106 indicated? time .•
YES- Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck


time .•
BACK
11-127
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
DTC P1297: ELD Circuit Low Voltage 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
1. Resetthe PCM (see page 11-4). 9. Disconnect the PCM connector A (32P).
2. Start the engine. 10. Check for continuity between body ground and
PCM connector terminal A30.
3. Turn on the headlights.
YES - Go to step 4. VI 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 I
[12113 14 15 L 17 18 19 20 21 lL' 23 24 I
NO -Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
'---
ELD and the PCM .•
4. Turn the ignition switch and the headlights OFF.
5. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector. Wire side of female terminals

7. Measure voltage between body ground and ELD 3P
connector terminal No.3. YES- Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(A 30) and the ELD.•
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
(see page 11-5). Ifthe symptom/indication goes
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the ELD.•
NO - Go to step 8.
11-128 BACK
Protected by AR
DTe P1298: ELD Circuit High Voltage 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). 9. Connect ELD 3P connector terminal No.3 to body
ground with a jumper wire.
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
3. Turn on the headlights.
YES- Go to step 4. ELD

(GRN/RED)
NO-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. JUMPER WIRE
ELD, and the PCM .• =
4. Turn the ignition switch and headlights OFF. Wire side of female terminals
5. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 10. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P).
7. Measure voltage between body ground and ELD 3P

connector terminal No.1.
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
2 3
YES - Go to step 8.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the No.6

ECU (PCM) CRUISE CONTROL (15 A) fuse and the
ELD .•
(cont'd)
BACK 11-129
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
11. Check for continuity between body ground and 13. Reconnect the ELD 3P connector and PCM
PCM connector terminal A30. connector A (32P).
PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) 14. Start the engine and let it idle.
15. While measuring voltage between PCM connector

Vl2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111 terminals A30 and 820, turn the headlights on
112113 14 15 V 17 18 19 20 21 / 23 24 1 (high).
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
'-- PCM CONNECTORS
A (32P)
Vl21s 4 ~6'7 6 9 10 1 11 1
11211S114 15 V 17 16 19 20 21 V 23 I 24 I
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 ...lL.
ELD (GRN/RED)
B(25P)
NO- Repair open in the wire between the PCM Wire side of female terminals
(A30) and the ELD.
Does the voltage drop?
12. Check for continuity between ELD 3P connector
terminal No.2 and body ground. YES-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck
ELD 3P CONNECTOR away, replace the original PCM .•
NO - Replace the ELD .•
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the ELD and

G201 .•
11-130 BACK
Protected by AR
DTC P1361: CMP (TOC: '99-01 models) 6. Check for continuity to body ground on both
Sensor A Intermittent Interruption terminals ofthe indicated sensor individually.
CMP (TOC) SENSOR AlB 4P CONNECTOR

DTC P1362: CMP (TOC: '99-01 models)
Sensor A No Signal
TOC1+ TOC1-
DTC P1366: CMP (TOC: '99-01 models) 1 2~---~
Sensor B Intermittent Interruption
3 4
DTC P1367: CMP (TOC: '99-01 models)
Sensor B No Signal
1. Resetthe PCM (see page 11-4). = = =

Is OTe P1361, P1362, P1366, or P1367
indicated? Is there continuity?
YES - Go to step 3. YES-Replace CMP (TDC) sensor AlB (see page 6-

59) .•
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the NO-Go to step 7.
CMP (TDC) sensor AlB and at the PCM .•
7. Reconnect the CMP (TDC) sensor AlB 4P connector.
8. Disconnect PCM connector C (31 Pl.
4. Disconnect the CMP (TDC) sensor AlB 4P connector.
5. Measure resistance between the terminals ofthe

indicated sensor (see table).
CMP ITDCI SENSOR AlB ~ CONIlECTOR
TDC1+ TDC1-
TDC2+ TDC2-
SENSOR OTC SENSOR PCM WIRE

TERMINAL TERMINAL COLOR
CMP P1361 1 C20 GRN
(TDC) A P1362 2 C21 RED
CMP P1366 3 C29 VEL
(TDC)B P1367 4 C30 BLK
Is there 1,850- 2,450 Q ?
YES - Go to step 6.
NO-Replace CMP (TDC) sensor AlB (see page 6-

59) .•
(cont'd)
BACK
11-131
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
9. Measure resistance between terminals of the DTC Pl486: Thermostat Range/Performance

indicated sensor on the PCM connector (see table). Problem
PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) NOTE: If the DTCs listed below are stored the same
time as DTC P1486, troubleshoot those DTCs first, then
TDC1P TDC1M recheck for P1486.
(GRN) (RED)
P0107, P0108, P1129: MAP Sensor
21314 51617 10 P1106, P11 07, P11 08: BARO Sensor
16117118119120121122 P1259: VTEC system
P0401: EGR Insufficient Flow
26127128\ 1~91~O
P1491: EGR Valve Insufficient Lift
TDC2P TDC2M P1498: EGR Valve Position Sensor High Voltage
(VEL) (BLK) P0116, P0117, P0118: Engine Coolant Temperature
(ECT) Sensor
Wire side of female terminals P0112, P0113: Intake Air Temperature (lAT) Circuit
P0335, P0336, P1359: Crankshaft Piston (CKP) Sensor
SENSOR OTC PCM WIRE COLOR P0300: Random Misfire
TERMINAL P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306: Cylinder 1,
CMP P1361 C20 GRN 2,3, 4, 5, or 6 Misfire Detected
(TDC) A P1362 C21 RED P0505: Idle Control System Malfunction
CMP P1366 C29 YEL P1519: Idle Air Control (lAC) Valve
(TDC) B P1367 C30 BLK -
DTC P1486 can set occasionally when the hood is

Is there 1,850-2,450 Q ? opened.
YES-Go to step 10. 1. Check the engi ne coolant level.
NO-Repair open in the indicated sensor wires (see Is the engine coolant level low?
table) .•
YES-Refill the engine coolant. If necessary, check
10. Check for continuity between body ground and the cooling system .•
PCM connector terminals C20 and/or C29
individually. NO- Go to step 2.
TDC1P(GRN)
[
3. Check the radiator fan.

51617
Does the radiator fan keep running?
26127/28
YES-Check the radiator fan circuit (see page 10-
22), radiator fan switch circuit (see page 10-24), and
:a the radiator fan switch (see page 10-33).
= • If they are OK, substitute the PCM and recheck
Wire side of female terminals (see page 11-5).
• If the symptom/indicator goes away, replace the
Is there continuity? original PCM .•
YES-Repair short in the indicated sensor wires .• NO- Test the thermostat (see page 10-11 ).•

11-132 BACK
Protected by AR
DTC P1676: FPTDR Signal Line Malfunction 6. Check for continuity between ABS/TCS control unit
16P connector terminal No.1 and PCM connector
'99 model terminal E1.
PCM CONNECTOR E 112P)

2. Start the engine and wait 10 seconds.
Is OTC P1676 indicated?

ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT 16P
CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Intermittent failure system is OK at this time.

Check for poor connections or loose wires at the FPTDR
(PNK)
ABS/TCS control unit and the PCM .•

4. Disconnect the PCM connector E (12P) and the
ABS/TCS control unit 16P connector. YES-Go to step 7.
5. Check for continuity between body gound and PCM NO- Repair open in the wire between the ABS/TCS
connector terminal E1. control unit and the PCM (E1) .•
PCM CONNECTOR E (12P) 7. Reconnect the PCM connector E (12P).

FPTDR
(PNK) 8. Connect PCM connector terminals E1 and C28 with
1 6 a jumper wire.
7 PCM CONNECTORS
Q FPTDR
E (12P)
~
(PNK)
11/13 r415T61
17 18 19 1/1/1/1
JUMPER
= WIRE C(31P)

r1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1/ 12 13 14 [7 16 17 18 19 2021 22
23 [7 25 26 27 28 29 301/
Is there continuity? VCC2
(YEL/BLU)
YES- Repair short in the wire between the ABS/
TCS control unit and the PCM (E1) .•
NO-Go to step 6.
YES - Substitute a known-good ABS/TCS control

unit and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original ABS/TCS control unit..

BACK
11-133
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
DTC P1676: FPTDR Signal Line Malfunction S. Check for continuity between ABSrrCS control unit
1SP connector terminal No. 1 and PCM connector
'00-03 models: terminal E16.
PCM CONNECTOR E (20P)
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Intermittent failure system is OK at this time.

ABSrrCS control unit and the PCM .•
4. Disconnect the PCM connector E (20P) and the
ABSrrCS control unit 16P connector. YES-Go to step 7.
5. Check for continuity between body gound and PCM NO-Repair open in the wire between the ABSrrCS
connector terminal E16. control unit and the PCM (E1S) .•
PCM CONNECTOR E (20P) 7. Reconnect the PCM connector E (20P).
8. Connect PCM connector terminals E16 and C28

with a jumper wire.
PCM CONNECTORS
E120P)
-
1l2VVl5T6 78910
1/1121/1141/11617181920
IFPTDR IPNKI
CI3'PI
Wire side of female terminals JUMPER 11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
WIRE 1/ 12 13 141/ 16 17 18 19 2021 22
Is there continuity? 23 1/ 25 26 27 28 29 30 [7
I VCC2 IYElIB UI
YES - Repair short in the wire between the ABS/ Wire side of female terminals
TCS control unit and the PCM (E16) .•
NO-Go to step 6.
YES-Substitute a known-good ABSrrCS control

unit and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original ABSrrCS control unit..

11-134 BACK
Protected by AR
DTC P1678: FPTDR Signal Line Malfunction DTC P1607: PCM Internal Circuit Malfunction
1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4).
2. Start the engine and wait 60 seconds. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Is DTC P1678 indicated? 3. Wait 30 seconds.
YES-Go to step 3. Is OTC P1607 indicated?
NO-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. YES-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the (see page 11-3). If the symptom/indication goes
ABS(TCS control unit and the PCM. away, replace the original PCM .•
4. Disconnect the ABS(TCS control unit 16P connector. 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. Start the engine and wait 10 seconds. 5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Is DTC P1678 indicated? 6. Wait 10 seconds.
YES-Substitute a known-good ABS/TCS control Is OTC P1607 indicated?

unit and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original ABS/TCS control unit.• YES-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck
NO-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck away, replace the original PCM .•
away, replace the original PCM .• NO-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this
time .•
BACK
11-135
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) and watch the 3. Try to start the engine.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL).
Does the engine start?
Does the MIL come on and stay on for more than
20 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON YES - Go to step 4.
(I/)?
NO-Go to step 7.
YES-If the MIL always come on and stays on, go
to step 20. But ifthe MIL sometimes works
normally, first check for these problems.• 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
• An intermittent short in the wire between the 5. Connect PCM connector terminal A 18 and body
PCM (A 10) and the Data Link Connector (OLC). ground with a jumper wire.
• An intermittent open in the wire between the
PCM (A21) and the OLC. PCM CONNECTOR A (32P)
• An intermittent short in the wire between the
PCM (A 18) and the gauge assembly.
VI 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 I
NO-Ifthe MIL is always off, go to step 2. But ifthe 112113 14 15 V 17 18 19 20 21 V 23 24 I
MIL sometimes works normally, first check for 25 26 27 12~ 29 30 31 32
these problems .• -
MIL (GRN/ORN)
• A loose No.9 BACK UP LIGHT, INSTRUMENT JUMPER WIRE
LIGHT (7.SA) fuse in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box.
--
• A loose ACG S (15A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
• A loose No.1 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse in the
driver'S under-dash fuse/relay box.
• A poor connection at PCM terminal A18. 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
• An intermittent open in the GRN/ORN wire
between the PCM (A18) and the gauge assembly. Is the MIL on?
• An intermittent short in the wire between the
PCM (C19), the manifold absolute pressure YES-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck
(MAP) sensor, and the countershaft speed sensor. (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes
• An intermittent short in the wire between the away, replace the original PCM .•
PCM (C28), the throttle position (TP) sensor,
exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve position NO-Check for an open in the wires between the
sensor, fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor, and the PCM (A18) and the gauge assembly. Also check for
mainshaft speed sensor. a blown MIL bulb .•
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and then ON (II) again.
Is the low oil pressure indicator light on?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Check for these problems .•
• A blown No.9 BACK UP LIGHT, INSTRUMENT

LIGHT (7.5A) fuse in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box.
• A short or open in the wire between No.9 BACK
UP LIGHT, INSTRUMENT LIGHT (7.5A) fuse and
the gauge assembly.
11-136 BACK
Protected by AR
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Disconnect PCM connector C (31P).
8. Inspect the ACG S (15A) fuse in the under-hood 11 . Check for continuity between body ground and
fuse/relay box. PCM connector terminals C19 and C28 individually.
Is the fuse OK? PCM CONNECTOR C (31P)
YES-Go to step 9. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NO - Check for these problems .• V 12 13 14 V 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
• A short in the wire between the ACG S (15A) fuse
23 V
25 26 27 28 29 30 /
and the PGM-FI main relay.
• A short in the wire between the PGM-FI main
relay and the PCM, injectors, or lAC valve.
• A blown ACG S (15A) fuse in the driver's under-
v=
(VEL/BLU)
~ Q VCC1
(VEL/RED)
dash fuse/relay box.

9. Inspectthe No.1 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. Is there continuity?
Is the fuse OK? YES-Go to step 12.
YES-Goto step 10. NO-Go to step 13.
NO - Check for these problems .• 12. Disconnect the 3P connector from each of these
sensors, one at a time, and check for continuity
• A blown the No.1 FUEL PUMP (15A) fuse in the between body ground and PCM connector terminal
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. C19 and C28 individually.
• A short in the wire between the No. 1 FUEL
PUMP (15A) fuse and the PGM-FI main relay. • Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor
• A short in the wire between the PGM-FI main • Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valve position
relay and the fuel pump. sensor
• A faulty PGM-FI main relay or faulty pump. • Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor
• Throttle Position (TP) sensor
• Mainshaft speed sensor
• Countershaft speed sensor

between the PCM (C19) and the MAP sensor or
countershaft speed sensor, or the PCM (C28) and
the TP sensor, EGR valve position sensor, FTP
sensor, or mainshaft speed sensor.•
NO - Replace the sensor that made continuity to

body ground go away when disconnected .•
13. Disconnect the injectors and idle air control (lAC)

valve connectors.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-137
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
Mil Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)

14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
15. Measure voltage between body ground and PCM 17. Reconnect the connectors to the sensors, then
connector terminals 81 and 89 individually. reconnect PCM connector C (31P).
PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) 18. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

IGP2
(VEl/BlK) 19. Measure voltage between body ground and PCM
1 1 2 connector terminals 82, 810, 820, and 822
9 1 10 individually.
20 21/22
PG1 (BlK)
IGP1 i
(VEl/BlK)
2 31415 61718
- - 17118

lG2
" ) (BRN/BlK.
Is there battery voltage? 'Y.. '00-03 models:
BRN/VEll
-= -- lG1 - - - -
YES-Go to step 16. (BRN/BlK,
'00-03 models:BRN/VEll
NO-Check for these problems: Wire side of female terminals
o An open in the wire(s) between the PGM-FI main Is there less than 1.0 V?
relay and PCM connector terminals 81 and 89.
o Poor connections at the PGM-FI main relay. YES-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck
o A faulty PGM-FI main relay (see page 11-160). (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes
If necessary, repair or replace the faulty part.• away, replace the original PCM .•
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) that had more than

1.0 V between G101 and the PCM (82, 810, B20,
B22) .•
21. Connect an OBO II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester

(see page 11-3).
23. Read the OBO II scan tool/Honda PGM Tester.
Does the OBO /I scan tool/Honda PGM Tester

communicate with the PCM?
NO - Go to OLC Circuit Troubleshooting (see page

11-140).
11-138 BACK
Protected by AR
24. Check the OBD scan tool/Honda PGM Tester for

DTCs.
Are any OTCs indicated?
YES-Go to the DTC Troubleshooting Index.
NO-Go to step 26.
25. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it back ON

(II).
26. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal

A10 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR A (32PI
SCS(BRN)
I
VJ2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 I
l12113 14 15 V 17 18 19 20 21 ~ 23 24 J
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 ~ 'Y..
Is there about 5 V (or battery voltage)?
NO- Repair short in the wire between the DLC and

the PCM (A10) .•
28. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P).
Is the MIL on?
YES- Repair short in the wire between the gauge

assembly and the PCM (A18) .•

BACK 11-139
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
OLC Circuit Troubleshooting
If the ECM/PCM does not communicate with the aBO II 3. Measure voltage between OLC terminals No.8 and
scan tool or Honda PGM Tester, do this troubleshooting No. 13.
procedure.
1. Measure voltage between OLC terminal No.8 and

body ground.
DATA LINK CONNECTOR IDlC)
+B IWHT/GRN)
i I
lG
IBRN/BlK,
'00-03 models:
BRN/YEl)

YES - Go to step 4.
Is there battery voltage? NO-Repair open in the wire between OLC terminal
No. 13 and the PCM (A23, A24) .•
YES-Go to step 2.
NO- Repair open in the wire between OLC terminal
No.8 and the No. 13 BACK UP (7.5A) fuse in the 5. Measure voltage between OLC terminals No. 13
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box .• and No. 15.
2. Measure voltage between OLC terminals No.8 and DATA LINK CONNECTOR IDlC)
No. 12.
DATA LINK CONNECTOR IDlC)
lG K-LiNE
IBRN/BlK, IGRY)
'00-03 models:
BRN/YEl)
Wi re side of female terminals /s there 8.5 V or more?

NO - Go to step 6.
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Repair open in the wire between OLe terminal
No. 12 and body ground .• 7. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
11-140 BACK
Protected by AR
8. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P). Make sure the Is there continuity?

OBO II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester is
disconnected from the OLC. YES- Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software, or substitute a known-good PCM, then
9. Check for continuity between OLC terminal No. 15 recheck (see page 11-5). Ifthe symptom/indication
and body ground. goes away with a known-good PCM, replace the
original PCM .•
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
NO- Repair open in the wire between OLC terminal
No. 15 and the PCM (A21). After repairing the wire,
check the OTC with the OBO II scan tool/Honda
PGM Tester, and go to the OTC Troubleshooting
Index.•

=
Wire side of female terminals 13. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P). Make sure the
OBO II scan tool or Honda PGM Tester is
disconnected from the OLC.
14. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between
OLC terminal No. 15 and the PCM (A21). After 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
repairing the wire, check the OTC with the OBO II
scan tool/Honda PGM Tester, and go to the OTC 16. Measure voltage between OLC terminals No. 13
Troubleshooting Index.• and No. 15.
NO-Go to step 10. DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
10. Check for continuity between OLC terminal No. 15

and PCM terminal A21.
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
/-'-;,.f'-,H7=-t'+~15:t-=-8:>\ Wire side of female terminals

K-LiNE
(GRY) Wire side of female terminals
Is there 0 V?
YES-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest

software, or substitute a known-good PCM, then
recheck (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication
Wire side offemale terminals goes away with a known-good PCM, replace the
original PCM .•
NO- Repair short to power in the wire between the

OLC terminal No. 15 and the PCM (A21). After
repairing the wire, check the OTC with the OBO II
scan tool/Honda PGM Tester, and go to the OTC
Troubleshooting Index .•
BACK
11-141
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
Injector Replacement
'99 model:
1. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-163).
2. Remove the intake manifold covers (see page 5-2) and the intake manifold (see page 9-2).
3. Disconnect the connectors from the injectors (A).
tn.. B
c~
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m. 7.2Ibf.ft)
4. Disconnect the vacuum hose and fuel return hose from the fuel pressure regulator (8). Place a rag or a shop towel
over the hoses before disconnecting them.
5. Remove the fuel rail bolts (e) from the fuel rail (D).
6. Remove the fuel rail.
7. Remove the injectors from the fuel rails.
11-142 BACK
Protected by AR
8. Slide new cushion rings (A) onto the injectors (B).
A--------------~---~~
B--------------~~
E - - -_ _-l.__ ,
9. Coat the new O-rings (C) with clean engine oil, and put them on the injectors.
10. Insert the injectors into the fuel rail (0) first.
11. Coat new seal rings (E) with clean engine oil, and press them into the intake manifold.
12. Install the fuel rail in the intake manifold.
13. Install and tighten the bolts.
14. Connect the vacuum hose and fuel return hose to the fuel pressure regulator.
15. Install the connectors on the injectors.
16. Install the intake manifold and the intake manifold cover.
17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for about 2 seconds, the
fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this 2 or 3 times, then check for fuel leakage.
BACK
11-143
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
Injector Replacement (cont'd)
'00-03 models:
2. J32A2 engine: Remove the VSA-TCS control valve assembly (see page 19-190).
3. Remove the intake manifold covers (see page 5-2) and the intake manifold (see page 9-2).
4. Disconnect the connectors from the injectors (A).
B
~9.8N.m
~ (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
5. Remove the fuel rail mounting bolts (8) from the fuel rail (C).
6. Remove the fuel rails.
7. Remove the injectors from the fuel rails.
11-144
BACK
Protected by AR
8. Slide new cushion rings (A) onto the injectors (8).
c
A
9. Coat the new O-rings (C) with clean engine oil, and put them on the injectors.
10. Insert the injectors into the fuel rails (0).
11. Coat new seal rings (E) with clean engine oil, and press them into the intake manifold.
12. Install the fuel rails.
13. Install the fuel rail mounting bolts.
14. Install the connectors on the injectors.
15. Install the intake manifold and the intake manifold cover.
16. J32A2 engine: Install the VSA-TCS control valve assembly.
17. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for approximately 2
seconds, the fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this two or three times, then check for fuel leakage.
BACK
11-145
Protected by AR
PGM-FI System
Primary H02S Replacement Secondary H02S Replacement

02 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, 02 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools 93750, or
or equivalent, commercially available equivalent, commercially available
1. Disconnect the primary H02S 4P connector (A), 1. Disconnect the secondary H02S 4P connector (A),
then remove the primary H02S (8). then remove the secondary H02S (8).
B '99-01 models:
44 N·m 14.5 kgf·m,
33lbf·ft
NOTE: The illustration shows '99 model.
A
B
44 N·m 14.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·tt)
2. Install the primary H02S in the reverse order of

removal.
'02·03 models:
B
44N·m
14.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·tt)
2. Install the secondary H02S in the reverse order of

removal.
BACK
11-146
Protected by AR
Idle Control System
NOTE: The illustration shows the J32A 1 engine ('00-03 models) .
IDLE AIR CONTROL (lAC) VALVE

POWER STEERING PRESSURE

(PSP) SWITCH
BACK
11-147
Protected by AR
Idle Control System
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0505: Idle Control System Malfunction 8. Put your finger on the lower port (A) in the throttle
body.
NOTE: If DTC P1519 is stored at same time as DTC
P0505, troubleshoot DTC P1519 first, then recheck for
DTC P0505.

2. Check the engine speed at idle with no-load

conditions: headlights, blower fan, rear window
defogger, radiator fan, and air conditioner off.
Is the engine running at 680± 50 rpm ('99-01

models) or 750± 50 rpm ('02-03 models)?
YES-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this Does the engine speed drop?

time.•
YES-Adjustthe idle speed (see page 11-157). If
NO-Ifthe idle speed is less than 630 rpm ('99-01 you cannot adjust the idle, replace the lAC valve .•
models) or 700 rpm ('02-03 models), go to step 3; if
it's 730 rpm or higher ('99-01 models), or 800 rpm NO- Make sure the throttle valve is completely
or higher ('02-03 models), go to step 4. closed, and check for vacuum leaks. Repair as
necessary.•
3. Disconnect the Idle Air Control (lAC) valve 3P
connector.
Dose the engine speed increase or fluctuate?
YES - Adjust the (base) idle speed (see page 11-

157). If you cannot adjust the base idle, clean the
ports in the throttle body ports .•
NO - Replace the lAC valve .•
5. J32A2 engine: Remove the VSA-TCS control valve

. assembly (see page 19-190).
6. Remove the intake air duct from the throttle body.
BACK
11-148
Protected by AR
DTC P1519: lAC Valve Circuit Malfunction 8. Check for continuity between body ground and lAC
valve 3P connector terminal No.1.
lAC VALVE 3P CONNECTOR
Is DTe P1519 indicated? 3

YES - Go to step 3.

lAC valve and the PCM .•
-=-
4. Disconnect the lAC valve 3P connector.
YES-Go to step 9.
6. Measure voltage between lAC valve 3P connector
terminal No.2 and body ground. NO- Repair open in the wire between the lAC valve
and G101 .•
lAC VALVE 3P CONNECTOR
9. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P).

PCM connector terminal 823.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
V /
?
9 10 11 12 14 15 17 18
-=-
Wire side of female terminals / 20 21 22 23 24 25
lACY IBUCIBLU.
'00·03 models: Q
Is there battery voltage? BlK/RED)
YES-Go to step 7.
=
NO- Repair open in the wire between the lAC valve Wire side of female terminals
and the PGM-FI main relay .•
YES- Repair short in the wire between the lAC
valve and the PCM (823) .•
NO - Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-149
Protected by AR
Idle Control System
OTe Troubleshooting (co nt'd)
11. Connect lAC valve 3P connector terminal No.3 to 15. Measure voltage between body ground and PCM
body ground with a jumper wire. connector terminal 823.
lAC VALVE 3P CONNECTOR PCM CONNECTOR B 125P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
IACV IBLK/RED
9 10 11 12 V14 15 /
17 18
'00-03 models: '
JUMPER WIRE I BLK/YEL) / 20 21 22 23 24 25
=
=
terminal 823 and body ground. Is there battery voltage?
YES - Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck

PCM CONNECTOR B 125P) (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NO - Replace the lAC valve .•
9 10 11 12 1/ 14 15 ~ 17 18
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the lAC valve

and the PCM (823) .•
13. Remove the jumper wire from the lAC valve 3P

connector, then reconnect the lAC valve 3P
connector.
BACK
11-150
Protected by AR
AIC Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Momentarily connect PCM connector terminals A 17
and 820 with a jumper wire several times.
2. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch 2P connector.
PCM CONNECTORS
A (32P)
VI2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
L12113 14 15 /,,1 718 19 20 21 L 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
terminals A27 and 820. ~
ACC(RED)
B(25P)
PCM CONNECTORS
A (32P)
1 2 345 6 7 8I
VI2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111 9 10 11 12 V 14 15 V 17 181
112113 14 15V 17 18 19 20 21 V 23 24 I /"" 20 21 22 23 24 25
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 '---
~
lG1 (BRN/BlK,
ACS (BlU/RED) JUMPER WIRE '00-03 models: BRN/VEl)
B (25P)
2 345 1 6 7 81
10 11 12 V 14 15 / 17 181
9
Is there a clicking noise from the AlC compressor
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
~~
clutch?
~ lG1 (BRN/BlK,
'Y.. '00-03 models: BRN/VELl
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Gotostep 15.
Is there approx. 5 V?
YES - Go to step 5.
10. Turn the blower switch ON.
NO- Go to step 12.
11. Turn theA/C switch ON .
Does the AlC operate?
6. Reconnect the A/C pressure switch 2P connector.
YES - The air conditioning signal is OK.•
NO-Go to step 16.
13. Disconnect the PCM connector A (32P)
(cont'd)
BACK
11-151
Protected by AR
Idle Control System
AIC Signal Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)

14. Check for conti nuity between body ground and 16. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal
PCM connector terminal A27. A27 and 820.
PCM CONNECTORS
PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) A (32P)
- \/\2 3 4 567 8 9 10 11 \
l12j13 14 15lL' 17 18 19 20 21 / 23 24 I
lLl2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
25 26 27 2B 29 30 31 ...1L
112113 14 15 V 17 18 19 20 21 V 23 24
ACS (BLU/RED) B(25PI
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 81
9 10 11 12 V 14 15 V 17 181
./'" 20 21 22 23 24 25
'--'--
LG1 (BRN/BLK.
'00-03 models:
BRN/YEL)
Wire side of female terminals ~
Is there less than 1.0 V?
YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM (A27)
and the AlC pressure switch .• YES - Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck
(see page' 1-5). If the symptom/indication goes
NO - Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck away, replace the original PCM. If not, inspect the
(see page 11-5). If prescribed voltage is now air conditioning system .•
available, replace the original PCM. If not, check the
AlC system for other symptoms .• NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(A27) and the AlC pressure switch .•
15. Momentarily connect under-hood fuse/relay box
16P connector terminal No. 11 to body ground with
a jumper wire several times.

CONNECTOR D (16PI
2
7 \ 8
ACC(REDI
JUMPER WIRE
=
Is there a clicking noise from the Ale compressor

clutch?

(A 17) and the AlC clutch relay .•
NO - Check the AlC system for other symptoms .•
BACK
11-152
Protected by AR
Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Disconnect the ALT 4P connector. 12. Connect ALT 4P connector terminal No.4 to body
3. Measure voltage between PCM connector AlT 4P CONNECTOR

terminals 820 and CS. r----l
1 2
PCM CONNECTORS ALTFI WHT/RED)
BIZ5P) 3 4
1 2 345 6 7 81 JUMPER WIRE
9 10 1112 V 1415 / 17 181
./'" 20 ~~ 23 24 25
lG1 IBRN/BlK,
'00-03 models: BRN/YEl)
'Y. --
=
C131P) IAlTF IWHT/RED) Wire side of female terminals
Ll 2 3 V 567 8 9 10
V 12 13 14 V 1617 1819 ZO Z1 122 13. Check for continuity between body ground and
Z3 V Z5 Z6 27 2B Z9 30 V PCM connector terminal CS.
PCM CONNECTOR C 131P)

Is there approx. 5 V?
AlTF IWHT/RED)
YES-Go to step 4. I
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NO-Go to step 14.
V 12 13 14 V 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 23 V 25 26 27 28 29 30 V
S. Reconnect the ALT 4P connector.
6. Start the engine. Holdthe engine at 3,000 rpm with = Wire side of female terminals
terminals 820 and CS. YES - Test the ALT (see step 1 on page 4-21).•
Does the voltage decrease when the headlights NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM ICS)
and rear window defogger are turned on? and the ALT.•
YES- The ALT FR signal is OK.• 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO - Go to step 8. 1S. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 16. Disconnect the PCM connector C (31 Pl.
10. Disconnect the PCM connector C 131P).
11. Disconnect the ALT 4P connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-153
Protected by AR
Idle Control System
Alternator FR Signal Circuit Starter Switch Signal Circuit

Troubleshooting (cont'd) Troubleshooting
17. Check for continuity between body ground and NOTE: Transmission in Park or neutral
PCM connector terminal CS.
PCM CONNECTOR C (31P) terminals A24 and 820 with the ignition switch in
the START (III) position.
I ALTF (WHT/RED)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PCM CONNECTORS
A (32P) --
V 12 13 14 V 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 VI2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
112113 14 15 V 11 18 19 20 21 / 23
111
24 1
23V 25 26 27 2B 29 30 / 25 26 27 2B 29 30 31 ~ I
STSW (STS) (BLU/ORN)
B(25P)
1 2 345 6 7 81
9 10 11 12 V 14 15 V 11 181
/"" 20 21 22 23 24 25
Is there continuity? '--i-
'00-03 models: BRN/YELl
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM Wire side of female terminals
(CS) and the ALT.•
(see page 11-S). If voltage is normal, replace the YES-The starter switch signal is OK.•
original PCM .•
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Inspect the No. 13 STARTER SIGNAL (7.5A) fuse in

the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Repair open in the wire between the PCM

(A24) and the No. 13 STARTER SIGNAL (7.5A)
fuse .•
NO-Repair short in the wire between the PCM

(A24) and the No. 13 STARTER SIGNAL (7.SA) fuse
or the PGM-FI main relay. Replace the No. 13
STARTER SIGNAL (7.5A) fuse .•
11-154 BACK
Protected by AR
PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. At the harness side, connect PSP switch 2P
connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper
2. Measure voltage between PCM connector wire.
terminals A26 and 820.
PSP SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
PCM CONNECTORS
A (32P)
VI2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
112113 14 15/ 17 18 19 20 21 / 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
'--- JUMPER WIRE
PSPSW(GRN)
B(25P)
':i. 1 2 345 6 7 81 Wire side of female terminals
9 10 11 12 / 14 15 / 17 181
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
lG1 (BAN/BlK,
'00-03 models: BRN/YEl)
Wire side of female terminals 10. Measure voltage between PCM connector
YES - Go to step 3.
YES - Replace the PSP switch .•
NO-Go to step 6.
NO-Check for these problems;
• An open in the wire between the PCM (A26) and
4. Turn the steering wheel to full lock position. the PSP switch.
• An open in wire between the PSP switch and
5. Measure voltage between PCM connector G201 .•
12. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector.
YES- The PSP switch signal is OK.•
NO-Go to step 11.
7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-155
Protected by AR
Idle Control System
PSP Switch Signal Circuit Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal

Troubleshooting (cont'd) Circuit Troubleshooting
14. Measure voltage between PCM connector 1. Check the brake lights.
Are the brake lights on without pressing the brake
pedal?
PCM CONNECTORS
A (32P)
VI2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 YES -Inspect the brake pedal position switch (see
112113 14 15 / 17 18 19 20 21 1/ 23 24 page 19-10).
25 26 27 2B 29 30 31 ~
NO-Go to step 2.
~PSI'SW IGRN) B(25P)
2. Press the brake pedal.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8J
'" 91 10 11 12 V 14 15 / 17 18J Do the brake lights come on?
/ 20 21 22 23 24 25
I'00-03
'--'--
lG1 (BRN/BlK,
models: BRN/vEl)
YES-Go to step 3.
Wire side of female terminals NO - Go to step 4.
Is there battery voltage? 3. Measure voltage between PCM connector

terminals A32 and 820 with the brake pedal
YES - Replace the PSP switch .• pressed.
PCM CONNECTORS
NO-Goto step 15.

PCM connector terminal A26.
PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) Is there battery voltage?
YES-The brake pedal position switch signal is

V 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 OK.•
112 13 14 15 V 17 18 19 20 21 V 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
(A32) and the brake pedal position switch .•
4. Inspect the STOP (20A) fuse in the under-hood fusel

relay box.
Is the fuse OK?

YES-Repair open in the wire between the brake
Is there continuity? pedal position switch and the STOP (20A) fuse.
Inspect the brake pedal position switch (see page
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM 19-10).•
(A26) and the PSP switch .•
NO-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
NO - Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck (A32) and the STOP (20A) fuse. Replace the STOP
(see page 11-5). If voltage is normal, replace the (20A) fuse .•
original PCM .•
BACK
11-156
Protected by AR
Idle Speed Adjustment
Adjust the idle speed using the Honda PGM Tester 6. After turning the idle adjusting screw 1/4-turn,
procedure if possible. If not, use the following check the idle speed again. If it is out of spec, turn
procedure: the idle adjusting screw 1/4-turn again.
NOTE: 7. Allow the engine to idle for 1 minute with the

• Leave the lAC valve connected. heater fan switch at HI and air conditioner on, then
• Before setting the idle speed, check these items: check the idle speed.
- The MIL has not been reported on.
- Ignition timing Idle speed should be:
- Spark plugs '99·01 models: 680±50 rpm (in Park or neutral)
- Air cleaner '02·03 models: 750±50 rpm (in Park or neutral)
- PCV system
• On Canadian models, press the parking brake pedal. NOTE:
Start the engine, then check that the headlights are • Do not turn the idle adjusting screw when the air
off. conditioner is on .
• Ifthe idle speed is not within specification, see
1. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P the Symptom Troubleshooting Index.
connector.
8. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
2. Connect a tachometer. connector.

no load (transmission in Park or neutral position)
until the radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
4. Check the idle speed with no-load conditions:

headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan,
and air conditioner off.
Idle speed should be:

'99·01 models: 680 ± 50 rpm (in Park or neutral)
'02·03 models: 750±50 rpm (in Park or neutral)
5. Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by turning the

idle adjusting screw (A) 1/4-turn clockwise or
counterclockwise.
NOTE: Do notturn the idle adjusting screw more

than 1/4-turn without checking the idle speed.
BACK
11-157
Protected by AR
Idle Control System
PCM Idle Learn Procedure
The idle learn procedure must be done so the PCM can

learn the engine idle characteristics. Do the idle learn
procedure whenever you do any of these actions:
• Reset the PCM.

• NOTE: Erasing DTCs with the Honda PGM Tester
does not require you to do the idle learn procedure.
• Remove the battery or disconnect its terminals.
• Remove the PCM or disconnect its connectors.
• Remove the driver's or passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box.
• Remove the BATTERY (120A) fuse from the under-
• Remove the BACK-UP, ACC (40A) fuse from the
• Remove the No. 13 CLOCK, BACK-UP (7.5A) fuse
from the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
• Remove the PGM-FI main relay.
• Disconnect the starter cable terminal from the under-
• Disconnect the connectors between engine wire
harness and left engine compartment wire harness.
• Disconnect the connectors between the dashboard
wire harness A and the dashboard wire harness B.
• Disconnect the ground terminals, G1, G2, G101, and
G102.
To complete the idle learn procedure, do this:
1. Make sure all electrical items (A/C, audio, rear

window defogger, lights, etc.,) are off.
2. Start the engine, and hold it at 3,000 rpm with no

load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes
on, or until the engine coolant temp ,yature reaches
194°F (90°C).
3. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the

throttle fully closed.
NOTE: If the radiator fan comes on, do not include its

running time in the 5 minutes.
BACK
11-158
Protected by AR
Fuel Supply System

FUEL PUMP
Test, page 11-166
FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT

Test/Replacement,
page 11-180
FUEL RETURN PIPE
FUEL FILL CAP
FUEL TANK
FUEL TUBE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTINGS

Precautions, page 11-169
Removal, page 11-169
FUEL RAIL
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
Replacement for '99 model, page 11-172
Replacement for '00-03 models, page 11-173
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY

BACK
11-159
Protected by AR
Fuel Supply System
PGM-FI Main Relay Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Check for a blown ACG S (15 A) fuse in the under-
2. Disconnect the PGM-FI main relay 7P connector.
Is the fuse blown?
PGM-FI main relay 7P connector terminal No.3. YES-Repair the short in the wire between the
PGM-FI main relay and the ACG S (15 A) fuse .•
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 7P CONNECTOR
NO-Repair the open in the wire between the PGM-
FI main relay and the ACG S (15 A) fuse .•
3 ,PG1(BLK)
2
4151617
7. Measure voltage between body ground and PGM-FI
main relay 7P connector terminal No.5.
Wire side of female terminals 2 L.J 3
4 15 I 6 I 7
YES - Go to step 4.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PGM-FI

main relay and G101 .•
=
4. Measure voltage between body ground and PGM-FI Wire side of female terminals
main relay 7P connector terminal No.7.
YES-Go to step 9.
2 3 NO-Go to step 8.
4 1 5 I 6 I 7 ,BAT (WHT/GRN) 8. Check for a blown No.1 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse in
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Repair the short in the wire between the

PGM-FI main relay and the No.1 FUEL PUMP (15A)
Wire side of female terminals fuse .•
Is there battery voltage? NO- Repair the open in the wire between the PGM-
FI main relay and the No.1 FUEL PUMP (15 A)
YES-Go to step 6. fuse .•
NO-Go to step 5.
BACK
11-160
Protected by AR
9. Shift to Park, then turn the ignition switch to the 13. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 7P
START (III) position, and measure voltage between connector terminal No.1 and PCM connector
body ground and PGM-FI main relay 7P connector terminal A15.
terminal No. 2.
STS (BLU/ORN)
2 3
4 5 6 7
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
17 18 19 20 21 23 24
28 29 30 31 32
= Wire side of female terminals

YES-Goto step 11.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PGM-FI
NO-Go to step 10. main relay and the PCM (A15) .•
10. Check for a blown No. 13 STARTER SIGNAL (7.5 A) 14. Reconnect the PCM connector A (32P) and the
fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. PGM-FI main relay 7P connector.
Is the fuse blown? 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES - Repair the short in the wire between the 16. Measure voltage between the PCM connector
PGM-FI main relay and the No. 13 STARTER terminals 81 and 82, and between 89 and 82.
SIGNAL (7.5 A) fuse .•
NO- Repair the open in the wire between the PGM-
FI main relay and the No. 13 STARTER SIGNAL
(7.5 A) .• PG1 (BlK)
IGP1
(YEl/Bl...K..;...)....L......,..-...J<;..-,
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 1 2
9 10
12. Disconnectthe PCM connector A (32P). IGP2
(VEl/BlK) 20
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Check for an open in the wires between the

PGM-FI main relay and the PCM (81, 89).lfthe
wires are OK, replace the PGM-FI main relay .•
(cont'd)
BACK 11-161
Protected by AR
Fuel Supply System
PGM-FI Main Relay Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
17. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then ON (II) again. 20. Connect battery power to PGM-FI main relay 7P
connector terminal No.2 and connect ground to
18. Measure voltage between PCM connector PGM-FI main relay 7P connector terminal No.1.
terminals A15 and 82 within the first 2 seconds Then check for continuity between PGM-FI main
after the ignition switch is turned ON (II). relay 7P connector terminals No.5 and No.4.
PCM CONNECTORS NOTE: Use the terminal number shown. Ignore the
A (32P)
VI2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 terminal numbers molded into the relay.
L1
12 13 14 15 V 17 18 19 20 21 ~ 23 24
25 6 27 28 29 30 31
FLR (GRN/VEL) ----
32
No.3
~ 1 2
B(25P)
3 4 5 6 7 81
9 10 11 12 / 14 15 1/ 17 18J
/' 20
----
21 22 23 24 25
To GROUND 13
Is there 1.0 V or less?
YES - PGM-FI main relay may be faulty; go to step

19. ToPCM To FUEL PUMP
(A15)
(see page 11-5). If prescribed voltage is now Is there continuity?
available, replace the original PCM .•
YES-Go to step 21.
19. Remove the PGM-FI main relay.
NO-Replace the PGM-FI main relay and reset.•
21. Connect battery power to PGM-FI main relay 7P

connector terminal No.5, and connect ground to
PGM-FI main relay 7P connector terminal No.3.
Then check for continuity between PGM-FI main
relay 7P connector terminals No.7 and No.6.
YES-Go to step 22.
NO- Replace the PGM-FI main relay and reset..
22. Connect battery power to PGM-FI main relay 7P

connector terminal No.6, and connect ground to
PGM-FI main relay 7P connector terminal No.1.
Then check for continuity between PGM-FI main
relay 7P connector terminals No.5 and No.4.
YES-The PGM-FI main relay is OK.•
NO- Replace the PGM-FI main relay and retest .•
11-162
BACK
Protected by AR
Fuel Pressure Relieving
Before disconnecting the fuel pipes or hoses, release

pressure from the system by loosening the fuel
pulsation damper on top of the fuel rail.

3. Remove the fuel fill cap.
4. Use a wrench on the fuel pulsation damper (A).
5. Place a rag or shop towel (B) over the fuel pulsation

damper.
6. Slowly loosen the fuel pulsation damper one

complete turn.
NOTE: Replace all washers whenever the fuel

pulsation damper is loosened or removed.
BACK
11-163
Protected by AR
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pressure Test
Special Tools Required 8. Attach the fuel pressure gauge .

• Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000A
• Fuel pressure gauge attachment 07VAJ-0040100

4. Use a wrench on the fuel pulsation damper (A) at

the fuel rail.
'00-03 models
07406-004000A
5. Place a rag or shop towel (8) over the fuel pulsation

damper. 9. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) of the fuel
pressure regulator, and pinch it closed with a
6. Slowly loosen the fuel pulsation damper one clamp (8).
complete turn.
10. Reconnect the negative battery cables, and start the
7. Remove the fuel pulsation damper from its fitting, engine and let it idle.
and attach the fuel pressure gauge attachment.
• If the engine starts, go to step 12.
07VAJ-0040100 • If the engine does not start, go to step 11.
11. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: listen to

the injector rails underneath the intake manifold
cover while an assistant turns the ignition switch
ON (II). You should hear the fuel flow through the
injector rails for about 2 seconds when the ignition
turned ON (II) .
• If the pump runs, go to step 12.

• Ifthe pump does not run, test the fuel pump (see
page 11-166).
11-164
BACK
Protected by AR
12. Read the pressure gauge (with the fuel pressure

regulator vacuum hose disconnected and clamped).
The pressure should be 280-330 kPa (2.9-3.4 kgf/
cm 2, 41-48 psi) for '99-00 models or 330-380 kPa
(3.4-3.9 kgf/cm2, 48-55 psi) for '01-03 models.
• If the pressure is OK and engine is running, go to

step 13. If not running, repair the cause, then
continue this test.
• If the pressure is out of spec, go to step 14.
13. With the engine running, reconnect the vacuum

hose and read the gauge again. The pressure
should be 220-270 kPa (2.25-2.75 kgf/cm2, 32-40
psi) for '99-00 models or 270-320 kPa (2.75-3.25
kgf/cm2, 40-46 psi) for '01-03 models.
• If the fuel pressure is OK, the test is complete. Go

to step 15.
• If the pressure is out of spec, go to step 14.
14. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the pressure

regulator again while you watch the pressure
gauge. The pressure should rise when you
disconnect the hose.
• If the pressure did not rise, check the vacuum

hose for leakage, clogging or loose connections.
If it's OK, then replace the fuel pressure regulator
for '99 model (see page 11-172) or for '00-03
models (see page 11-173) and recheck the fuel
pressure.
• If the pressure rose, and all your readings were
within spec, go to step 15.
• If the pressure rose, but your readings were out
of spec, check for these problems:
- Ifthe pressure is too low, check for a clogged

fuel filter and for leaks in the fuel lines.
- If the pressure is too high, check for a pinched
or clogged fuel return hose or line.
15. Reconnect the vacuum hose, remove the pressure

gauge, and reinstall the fuel pulsation damper and
a new washer. Tighten the fuel pulsation damper to
22 N·m (2.2kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft).
NOTE: Disassemble and clean the fuel pressure

gauge attachment thoroughly after use.
BACK 11-165
Protected by AR
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pump Test
If you suspect a problem with the fuel pump, check that 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
the fuel pump actually runs; when it is ON, you will hear
fuel flow if you listen to the injector rails underneath the 7. Check that battery voltage is available between fuel
intake manifold cover. The fuel pump should run for 2 pump 5P connector terminal No.5 and body
seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON(1I1. If ground when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
the fuel pump does not make noise, check as follows:
• If battery voltage is available, check the fuel
1. Remove the spare tire lid. pump ground. If the ground is OK, replace the
fuel pump (see page 11·175).
2. Remove the access panel from the floor. • If there is no voltage, check the wire harness (see
page 11·160).
FUEL PUMP 5P CONNECTOR
4. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector.
FUEL PUMP
5. Connect PGM-FI main relay 7P connector terminals IBLK/VElI
No.4 and No.5 with a jumper wire.
PGM·R MAIN RELA V 7P CONNECTOR
2 3
-=
4 5 6 7 Wire side of female terminals
FUEL PUMP IG1

IBLK/VELI IRED/WHTI
JUMPER WIRE
11-166 BACK
Protected by AR
Fuel Line Inspection
Check the fuel system lines, hoses, and fuel filter for damage, leaks, and deterioration. Replace any damaged parts.
22N·m
12.2 kgf·m, 16 Ibf·ftl
37N·m
13.8 kgf·m, 27 Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK
11-167
Protected by AR
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Line Inspection (cont'd)
Check all clamps and retighten if necessary .

.A.: Do not disconnect the hose from the pipe at these joints.
~ A
To
FUEL
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
To EVAPORAnVE
EMISSION (EVAPI
CANISTER PURGE VALVE
• 4TpClamp in the middle.
11-168 BACK
Protected by AR
Fuel Tube/Quick-Connect Fittings Fuel Tube/Quick-Connect Fittings

Precaution Removal
The fuel tube/quick-connect fittings assembly connects 1. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-163).
the in-tank fuel pump to the fuel feed pipe and the fuel
return pipe. When removing or installing the fuel pump 2. Check the fuel quick-connect fittings for dirt, and
and fuel tank, it is necessary to disconnect or connect clean if necessary.
the quick-connect fittings.
Pay attention to following: 3. Hold the connector (A) with one hand and squeeze
the retainer tabs (B) with the other hand to release
• The fuel tubes (A) and quick-connect fittings (B) are them from the locking pawls (C). Pull the connector
not heat-resistant; be careful not to damage them off.
during welding or other heat-generating procedures.
NOTE:
• The fuel tubes and quick-connect fittings are not acid- • Be careful not to damage the pipe (C) or other
proof; do not touch then with a shop towel which was parts.
used for wiping battery electrolyte. Replace them if Do not use tools.
they came into contact with electrolyte or something • If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
similar. tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push
the connector until it comes off easily.
• When connecting or disconnecting the fuel tubes and • Do not remove the retainer from the pipe; once
quick-connect fittings, be careful not to bend or twist removed, the retainer must be replaced with a
it excessively. Replace them if damaged. new one.
A disconnected quick-connect fittings can be

reconnected, but the retainer on the mating pipe cannot
be reused once it has been removed from the pipe.
Replace the retainer when
• replacing the fuel pump.
• replacing the fuel filter.
• replacing the fuel feed pipe.
• replacing the fuel return pipe.
• it has been removed from the pipe.
• it is damaged.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-169
Protected by AR
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Tube/Quick-Connect Fittings Fuel Tube/Quick-Connect Fittings

Removal (cont'd) Installation
4. Check the contact area (A) of the pipe (8) for dirt 1. Check the contact area (A) of the pipe (8) for dirt
and damage. and damage, and clean if necessary.
o If the surface is dirty, clean it.
o If the surface is rusty or damaged, replace the
fuel pump, fuel filter, fuel feed pipe or fuel return

pipe.
2. Insert a new retainer (A) into the connector (:::, ifthe

retainer is damaged, or after
B o replacing the fuel pump.
o replacing the fuel filter.
5. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out, o replacing the fuel feed pipe.
cover the disconnected connector and pipe end o replacing the fuel return pipe.
with plastic bags (A). o removing the retainer from the pipe.
NOTE:
o The retainer cannot be reused once it has been
removed from the pipe.

Replace the retainer when
- replacing the fuel pump.
- replacing the fuel filter.
- replacing the fuel feed pipe.
- replacing the fuel return pipe.
- it has been removed from the pipe.
- it is damaged.
B
BACK
11-170
Protected by AR
3. Before connecting a new fuel tube/quick-connect 5. Make sure the connection is secure and that the
fitting assembly (A), remove the old retainer from pawls are firmly locked into place; check visually
the mating pipe. and by pulling the connector.
6. Reconnect the battery negative cable, and turn the

ignition switch ON (II). The fuel pump will run for
about 2 seconds, and fuel pressure will rise. Repeat
2 or 3 times, and check that there is no leakage in
o the fuel supply system.
4. Align the quick-connect fittings with the pipe (A),

and align the retainer (B) locking pawls with the
connector (C) grooves. Then press the quick-
connect fittings onto the pipe until both retainer
pawls lock with a clicking sound.
NOTE: If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of

new engine oil on the pipe end.
Connection with new retainer:

Connection with new retainer:
Reconnection to existing retainer:
BACK
11-171
Protected by AR
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement
'99 Model: 7. Turn the fuel pressure regulator (A)

counterclockwise to set the angle as shown.
1. Remove the intake manifold cover and intake
manifold (see page 9-2).
2. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure

regulator, then relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-
163). .~.
I"\.
/
:-W-.
3. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) and fuel return
hose (B).
E
8. Tighten the locking nut to 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22

Ibf·ft).
NOTE:
A • Replace the a-ring.
• When assembling the fuel pressure regulator,
4. Loosen the locking nut (e), and remove the fuel apply clean engine oil to the D-ring and assemble
pressure regulator (D). it into its proper position, taking care not to
damage the a-ring.
5. Apply clean engine oil to a new D-ring (E), and
carefully install it into its proper position. 9. Install the intake manifold (see page 5-2) and
manifold cover (see page 9-2).
6. Install the fuel pressure regulator in the fuel rail.
Turn it by hand until stops. 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate
the starter. After the fuel pump runs for
approximately 2 seconds, the fuel pressure in the
fuel line rises. Repeat this 2 or 3 times, then check
for fuel leakage.
11-172
BACK
Protected by AR
'00-03 Models: 6. Turn the fuel pressure regulator (A)

counterclockwise to set the angle as shown.
1. Place a shop towel under the fuel pressure
regulator, then relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-
163).
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) and fuel return

hose (8).
7. Tighten the locking nut to 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22

A
Ibf·ft).
NOTE:
• Replace the O-ring .
• When assembling the fuel pressure regulator,
apply clean engine oil to the O-ring and assemble
it into its proper position, taking care not to
damage the O-ring.
8. Reconnect the vacuum hose and fuel return hose.

B
3. Loosen the locking nut (e), and remove the fuel 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate
pressure regulator (D). the starter. After the fuel pump runs for about 2
seconds, the fuel pressure in the fuel line rises.
4. Apply clean engine oil to a new O-ring (E), and Repeat this 2 or 3 times, then check whether there
carefully install it into its proper position. is any fuel leakage.
5. Install the fuel pressure regulator in the fuel joint.

Turn it by hand until stops.
BACK
11-173
Protected by AR
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Filter Replacement
The fuel filter should be replaced whenever the fuel

pressure drops below the specified value (280-330 kPa,
2.9-3.4 kgf/cm2, 41-48 psi with the fuel pressure
regulator vacuum hose disconnected and pinched) after
making sure that the fuel pump and the fuel pressure
regulator are OK.
1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-175).
2. Remove the fuel filter (A).
C~1mm
cI;
~D
3. Install the part in the reverse order of removal with
a new base gasket, then check these items:
• When connecting the wire harness, make sure

the connection is secure and the terminal (B) is
firmly locked into place.
• Check that the tab of the clamp (C) does not
interfere with the wire harness.
• Do not push the lower part of the suction filter (D).
• When installing the fuel gauge sending unit (E),
make sure the connection is secure and the
connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful
not to bend or twist it excessively.
BACK
11-174
Protected by AR
Fuel Pump Replacement
1. Remove the spare tire lid. 8. Remove the bracket (A), the fuel filter (B), the fuel
gauge sending unit (C), the hose (D), and the wire
2. Remove the access panel from the floor. harness (E).
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the

fuel tank unit 5P connector.
6. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings from the fuel

tank unit.
7. Remove the bolts (A), and the fuel pump assembly

(B).
A
4N·m
10.4 kgf·m, 3 Ibf·tt)
\
A
9. When connecting the fuel pump, make sure the
connection is secure and the suction filter (H) is
firmly connected to the fuel pump (I).
10. Install the tank unit in the reverse order of removal

with a new base gasket, then check these items:

the connection is secure and the terminal (F) is
firmly locked into the place.
• Check that the tab of the clamp (G) does not
• Do not push the lower part of suction filter.
• When installing the fuel gauge sending unit,
BACK
11-175
Protected by AR
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Tank Replacement
Removal 8. Remove the fuel pipe cover (A).
A
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-163).
3. Drain the fuel tank: Remove the fuel tank unit (see
page 11-175). Using a hand pump, hose and
container suitable for gasoline, draw the fuel from
the fuel tank.
4. Remove the spare tire lid. and the access panel (A)
from the floor. Disconnect the fuel tank 5P D
connector (8).
9. Disconnect the fuel fill neck tube (8). the fuel tank
vapor recirculation tube (C) and the fuel tank vapor
signal tube (D) from the fuel fill pipes (E).
10. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor vent tube (A) and the
quick-connect fittings (8).
G .D
5. Loosen the rear wheel nuts slightly, then raise the

vehicle and make sure it is securely supported.
Remove the rear wheels.
6. Release the parking lever fully.

B
" D
7. Remove the catalytic converter (see page 9-13).

F
11. Disconnect the hose (C).
12. Remove the hose from the pipe holder (D).
13. Disconnect the hose (E) from the EVAP two way
valve (F).
14. Remove the pipe holder (G).
11-176 BACK
Protected by AR
15. If the vehicle has ABS, disconnect the wheel sensor 18. Hook the caliper body (A) to the damper spring (B)
2P connectors (A) if not, go to step 16. with a wire.
16. Remove the stabilizer bar (A), the heat shield (B)
and the parking brake cable bracket (C). 19. Remove the parking brake cable (see page 19-32).
B
c c
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m, 16 Ibf·ft)
17. Remove the bolt (A), two caliper bolts (B) and
caliper body (C).
(cont'd)
BACK
11-177
Protected by AR
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Tank Replacement (cont'd)
20. Remove the flange bolt (A). Installation
~ 1. Install the fuel tank straps (A), and tighten the bolts
(8). Install the hose to the pipe holder (C).
a
38N·m
(3.9 kgf·m,
A
31\~
A
21. Place a jack, or support, under the rear suspension

sub frame. Remove the mounting bolts (A).
Remove the rear suspension sub frame.
2. Place the jack, or support, under the rear
suspension sub frame. Install the rear suspension
sub frame, aligning the pins (A) with the holes in
the rear suspension sub frame.
22. Remove the bolts (A), and the fuel tank straps (8).
A_ A
A
3. Install the remaining parts in the reverse order of

removal.
4. After installing, adjust the wheel alignment (see

page 18-5).
23. Remove the lines from the fuel line clip (C).
24. Lift the fuel tank out of the sub frame.
BACK
11-178
Protected by AR
Fuel Gauge Test
NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
to the Gauges Circuit Diagram (see page 22-110).
8. Install a 2 Q resistor between fuel pump 5P
1. Check the No.9 BACK UP LIGHT INSTRUMENT connector terminals No.1 and No.2.
LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/
relay box before testing. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
FUEL PUMP 5P CONNECTOR
3. Remove the spare tire lid.

2Q RESISTOR
JUMPER (VEl/BLUI
4. Remove the access panel from the floor. WIRE
5. Disconnect the fuel pump 5P connector.

(BlKI
6. Measure voltage between fuel pump 5P connector
terminals No.1 and No.2 with the ignition switch
ON (II). There should be between 10 and 12.5 V.
• If the voltage is as specified, go to step 7 . Wire side of female terminals

• If the voltage is not as specified, check for:
10. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge indicates
- an open in the YELJBlU or BlK wire. UF".
- poor ground (G501).
• If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not indicate,
FUEL PUMP 5P CONNECTOR replace the gauge .
• If the gauge is OK, inspect the fuel gauge sending
unit (see page 11-180).
(VEl/BLUI
NOTE:
The pointer of the fuel gauge returns to the bottom
on the gauge dial when the ignition switch is OFF
regardless of the fuel level.
BACK 11-179
Protected by AR
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test/Replacement
1. Remove the spare tire lid. 8. Measure resistance between No.1 and No.2
terminals with the float at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF
2. Remove the access panel from the floor. FULL), and F (FULL) positions.
If you do not get the following readings, replace the
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the fuel gauge sending unit (A).
fuel pump 5P connector.
Float Position
4. Remove the fuel fill cap. Resistance ( Q )
5. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-163).
6. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings from the fuel

pump.
7. Remove the bolts (A) and the fuel tank unit (B). Terminal side of
male terminals
A
"N·m
IO\kgf.m, "bf·ftl
9. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal

with a new base gasket and new quick connect
retainers, then check these items:

the connection is secure and the terminal (B) is
firmly locked into place.
• Check that the tabs of the clamp (C) do not
• Do not fold over the lower part of the mesh filter
(D).
• When installing the fuel gauge sending unit (A),
BACK
11-180
Protected by AR
Low Fuel Indicator Light Test
1. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test (see page 11-

179).
• If the system is OK, go to step 2.

• If the system has any malfunction, repair it.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) with the float at the

E (EMPTY) position.
• If the low fuel indicator light is on , go to step 3.
• If the low fuel indicator light is not on, refer to the
low fuel indicator circuit diagram (see page 22-
110) and check the circuit.
3. Lift the float above the LOW position.

• If the low fuel indicator light goes off, the system
is OK.
• If the low fuel indicator light is still on, refer to the
low fuel indicator circuit diagram (see page 22-
110) and check the circuit.
BACK
11-181
Protected by AR
Intake Air System
J32A 1 Engine
NOTE: The iIIustlation shows the '99 model.
AIR CLEANER
AIR CLEANER HOUSING

Disassembly, page 11-187
AIR VALVE
Test, page 11-185
THROTTLE BODY
Test, page 11-184
Removal/Installation, page 11-189
Disassembly/Reassembly, page 11-190
INTAKE AIR BYPASS CONTROL VALVE

Test, page 11-184
BACK
11-182
Protected by AR
J32A2 Engine
THROTTLE CABLE
INTAKE AIR BYPASS

CONTROL VALVE
Test, page 11-184
INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER

CONTROL (lMRC) SYSTEM THROTTLE BODY
Troubleshooting, page 11-191 Test, page 11-184
Valve Inspection, page 11-193 Removal/Installation, page 11-189
Control Cable Adjustment, page 11-194 Disassembly/Reassembly, page 11-190
Control Actuator Removal/Installation,
page 11-194
INTAKE MANIFOLD RUNNER

CONTROL (lMRC) SYSTEM
Control Unit Removal/Installation, page 11-195
BACK
11-183
Protected by AR
Intake Air System
Throttle Body Test Intake Air Bypass Control Valve

Test
NOTE:
• Do not adjust the throttle stop screw. It is preset at the
factory. Special Tools Required:
• If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) has been Vacuum pump gauge, 0-30 in.Hg
reported on, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes A973X-041-XXXXX
(DTCs) (see page 11-3).
1. Start the engine, and let it idle.
1. With the engine off, check the throttle cable
movement. The cable should move without binding NOTE: The engine coolant temperature must be
or sticking. below 104°F (40°C).
• If the cable moves OK, go to step 2. 2. Remove the vacuum hose (A) from the intake pipe,
• Ifthe cable binds or sticks, check it and its routing. and connect a vacuum gauge to the hose.
If it's faulty, reroute it, or replace it and adjust it
(see page 11-188), then go to step 2.
2. Move the throttle lever by hand to see if the throttle

valve and/or shaft are too loose or too tight.
• If there is excessive play in the throttle valve

shaft, or any binding in the throttle valve at the
fully closed position, replace the throttle body
'-~'l\
(see page 11-189).
• If the throttle valve and shaft are OK, go to step 3.
3. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector A

(DLC).
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Raise and lower the engine speed, and make sure
the vacuum gauge reading changes as the rpm
5. Check the throttle position with the scan tool. There changes.
should be about 10 % when the throttle is fully
closed and about 90 % when the throttle is fully If the vacuum reading does not change, check for
opened. these problems:
• If the throttle position is correct, the throttle body • Misrouted, leaking, broken, or clogged intake air
is OK. bypass control system vacuum lines.
• If the throttle position is not correct, replace the • A cracked or defective intake air bypass control
throttle body (see page 11-189). valve.
4. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with no load

(transmission in Park or neutral position) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
5. Raise and lower the engine speed, and make sure

the vacuum gauge reading does not change as the
rpm changes.
If the vacuum reading changes check for these

problems:
• Misrouted, leaking, broken, or clogged intake air

bypass control system vacuum lines.
• A cracked or defective intake air bypass control
valve.
BACK
11-184
Protected by AR
Heated Air Induction System Test
1. Remove the air cleaner housing cover and air 4. Check the air valve (A). The air valve should be
cleaner element. closed when the temperature at the wax element
(B) is above 50°F (10°C).
2. Check the air valve (AI. The door should be open
temperature at the wax element (B) is below 27°F • If the air valve is closed, the heated air induction
(-3°C). system is OK.
• If the air valve is not closed, check the shaft for
• If the valve is open, go to step 3. binding or sticking. If it is OK, replace the air
• If the valve is not open, check the shaft for cleaner housing.
binding or sticking. If it is OK, replace the air
A
cleaner housing.

comes on.
BACK
11-185
Protected by AR
Intake Air System
Air Cleaner Element Replacement
1. Open the cable clamp (A), and remove the throttle cable (B) from the air cleaner housing cover (e).
2. Remove the air cleaner element (0) from the air cleaner housing (E).
3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
~D
BACK
11-186
Protected by AR
Air Cleaner Housing DisassemblyIReassembly - '99 Model
1. Drain the coolant (see page 10-13).
2. Remove the air cleaner housing.
3. Remove the cover (A) and radiator (8) from the air cleaner housing (e).
c 2.9N·m
(0.3 kgf·m. 2.2 Ibf·tt)
2.2Ibf·tt)
5. Fill the coolant (see page 10-13).
BACK
11-187
Protected by AR
Intake Air System
Throttle Cable Adjustment
1. Push the throttle link (A) toward the throttle lever

(B) until there is no clearance.
2. Check cable free play at the throttle linkage. Cable

deflection (A) should be 10-12 mm (3/8-1/2 in.)
~!d
3. If deflection is not within specs (10-12 mm, 3/8-
1/2 in.) loosen the locknut (B), turn the adjusting nut
(C) until the deflection is as specified, then
retighten the locknut.
4. With the cable properly adjusted, check the throttle

valve to be sure it opens fully when you push the
accelerator pedal to the floor. Also check the
throttle valve to be sure it returns to the idle
position whenever you release the accelerator
pedal.
BACK
11-188
Protected by AR
Throttle Body Removal/Installation
NOTE:
• Do not adjust the throttle stop screw.
• After reassembly, adjust the cruise control cable (see page 4-44), and the throttle cable (see page 11-188).
• The Throttle Position (TP) sensor is not removable or adjustable.
J32A1 engine:
CRUISE CONTROL CABLE
-22N·m
GASKET (2.2 kgf ·m , 16 Ibf·ftl
Replace.
~~
THROTTLE POsmON
GASKET (TPI SENSOR
Replace.
J32A2 engine:
~THROTTLECABLE
GASKET
Replace.
22N·m
(2.2 kgf.m, 16 Ibf·ftl
THROTTLE POSITION
(TPISENSOR
BACK
11-189
Protected by AR
Intake Air System
Throttle Body DisassemblyIReassembly
2.1 N·m (0.21 kgf·m.1.5Ibf·ft)
,4
_
,
/
/MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
(MAP) SENSOR
/
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR O-RING IDLE ADJUSTING SCREW
O-RING
Replace. ~IDLE AIR CONTROL (lAC) VALVE
~3.5 N·m (0.35 kgf·m. 2.5Ibf·ft)
11-190 BACK
Protected by AR
IMRC System Troubleshooting - J32A2 Engine
1. Disconnect the IMRC module 14P connector. 5. Check the No.6 PCM (15A) fuse in the driver's
2. Check for continuity between the IMRC module 14P
connector terminal No. 10 and body ground. Is the fuse blown?
IMRC MODULE 14P CONNECTOR

YES-Replace the No.6 PCM (15A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuse
blows again, repair short in the wire between the
IMRC module and the No.6 PCM (15A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box .•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the IMRC

module and the No.6 PCM (15 A) fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box.•
=
7. Disconnect the IMRC actuator 2P connector.
Is there continuity? 8. Measure resistance between the IMRC actuator 2P

YES - Go to step 3.
IMRC ACTUATOR TERMINALS
NO- Repair open in the wire between the IMRC
module 14P connector and G302 .•
4. Measure voltage between the IMRC module 14P SVP SVM

Is there 2- 5 Q ?
YES-Go to step 9.
= NO- Replace the IMRC actuator.•
Wire side of female terminals 9. Reconnect the IMRC actuator 2P connector.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 5.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-191
Protected by AR
Intake Air System
IMRC System Troubleshooting - J32A2 Engine (cont'd)
10. Measure resistance between IMRC module 14P 14. Measure voltage between the IMRC module 14P
connector terminals No.3 and No. 11. connector terminal No.6 and body ground.
IMRC MODULE 14P CONNECTOR IMRC MODULE 14P CONNECTOR
I (WHT/RED)
4
Q b1jl~_
'-----'LJ{WHT/BLU) 'Y.
/s there 2 - 5 Q? /s there 5 V with engine speed be/ow 3,500 rpm,

and is there 0 V with engine speed above 4,000
YES-Go to step 13. rpm?
NO - Go to step 11 . YES - Replace the IMRC module .•
11. Disconnect the IMRC actuator 2P connector. NO - Go to step 15.
12. Check for continuity between the IMRC module 14P 15. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
connector terminal No.3 and No. 11 and body
ground individually. 16. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P).
IMRC MODULE 14P CONNECTOR 17. Check for continuity between the IMRC module 14P
connector No. 6 terminal and body ground.

n
/s there continuity? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Repair short in the wire between the IMRC

module and the IMRC actuator.• /s there continuity?
NO- Repair open in the wire between the IMRC YES - Repair short in the wire between the IMRC
module and the IMRC actuator.. module and the PCM .•
13. Start the engine. NO - Go to step 18.
BACK
11-192
Protected by AR
Intake Manifold Runner Control

(lMRC) Valve Inspection - J32A2
18. Connect PCM connector terminal A 13 to body Engine
PCM CONNECTOR A 132P) NOTE: Do not adjust the IMRC adjusting screw (A).
1. Check for clearance between the stopper (B) and

1112 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 .............-,
10 the screw (A). There should be no clearance .
VI13 1415 V 17 1819 20 2122 / " 24 I
L 26 27 2829 30 31 ~ • If there is a clearance, check and adjust the IMRC
SVCILTBLUI actuator cable.
• If there is clearance after adjusting the IMRC
actuator cable, the linkage may be stuck. Remove
-'-
the intake manifold (see page 9-2), then check the
IMRC valve.
19. Check for continuity between IMRC module 14P


NO- Repair open in the wire between the IMRC

module and the PCM .•
BACK 11-193
Protected by AR
Intake Air System
Intake Manifold Runner Control Intake Manifold Runner Control

(lMRC) Cable Adjustment - J32A2 (lMRC) Actuator Removal!
Engine Installation - J32A2 Engine
1. Inspect the IMRC actuator cable (A). If the cable is 1. Remove the bolts (A), IMRC actuator cable (B), and
damaged, replace it. IMRC actuator 2P connector (C).
2. Remove the IMRC actuator (D).
2. Inspect the cable free play.
Cable free play should be: 3±2 mm (1/8 ± 1/16 in.)
If the cable free play is out of specification, loosen

the lock nut (B), then adjust the cable.
BACK
11-194
Protected by AR
Intake Manifold Runner Control (IMRC) Module Removal/Inspection - J32A2

Engine
1. Remove the bolt (A) and the IMRe 14P connector
(8).
2. Remove the IMRe module (e).
BACK
11-195
Protected by AR
Catalytic Converter System
OTC Troubleshooting Tailpipe Emissions Test
DTe P0420: Catalytic System Efficiency 1. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with
Below Threshold no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan
NOTE: If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at
the same time as DTC P0420, troubleshoot those DTCs 2. Connect a tachometer.
first, then recheck for DTC P0420.
3. Check and, if necessary, adjust the idle speed (see
P0137, P0138: Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor page 11-157).
(secondary H02S) (Sensor 2)
P0141: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) heater 4. Warm up and calibrate the CO meter according to
the meter manufacturer's instructions.
5. Check idle CO with the headlights, heater blower,
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with rear window defogger, cooling fan, and air
no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan conditioner off.
comes on.
On Canadian models, pull the parking brake lever
3. Drive for about 10 minutes without stopping on a up, start the engine, then check that the headlights
highway or freeway. Your speed can vary. are off.
4. With the transmission in 05 position ('99 model: 04 The CO meter should indicate 0.1 % maximum.
position), drive at a steady speed between 50-62
mph (80-100 km/h) for 30 seconds.
5. Do step 4 three times. Between each procedure,

close the throttle completely for 1-2 seconds. If
the engine is stopped during this procedure, go to
step 3 and do the procedure again.
6. Check for the three way catalytic converter (TWC)

test result with the scan tool.
Does the scan tool indicate FAIL?
YES-Check the TWC.lf necessary, replace the

TWC.•

time .•
11-196
BACK
Protected by AR
EGRSystem
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC P0401: EGR Insufficient Flow DTC P1491: EGR Valve Insufficient Lift
1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4). 1. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4).
2. Test-drive under the following conditions. 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with
• Without any electrical load. comes on .
• Decelerate from 55 mph (88 km/h) for at least 5
seconds. 3. Drive the vehicle on the load for about 10 minutes.
Try to keep the engine speed in the 1,700-2,500
3. Check the Temporary DTC with the scan tool. rpm range.
Is Temporary DTC P0401 indicated? 4. Check the Temporary DTC with the scan tool.
YES-Clean the intake manifold EGR port with Is Temporary DTC P1491 indicated?
carburetor cleaner. Clean the passage inside the
EGR valve with carburetor cleaner or replace the YES - Go to step 5.
EGR valve .•
NO-Intermittent failure, go to step 3. Check for poor connections or loose wires at the
EGR valve and the PCM .•
5. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector.
6. Connect the battery positive terminal to EGR valve
connector terminal No.4. 7. Start the engine and let it idle.
EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR
8. Measure voltage between EGR valve 6P connector
123
EB e EGR (E-EGR) (PNK,
'00-03 models: PG1 (BLK)
BLU/RED)

7. Start the engine and let it idle, then connect the
battery negative terminal to EGR valve connector
terminal No.6. Is there battery voltage?
Did the engine stall or run rough? YES-Substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck
YES -Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time. away, replace the original PCM .•
• NO-Go to step 9.
NO- Clean the intake manifold EGR port with
caburetor cleaner. Clean the passage inside the 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
EGR valve with carburetor cleaner or replace the
EGR valve .•
(cont'd)
BACK
11-197
Protected by AR
EGRSystem
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11. Measure voltage between EGR valve 6P connector 14. At the sensor side, measure resistance between
terminals No.2 and No.3. EGR valve 6P connector terminals No.1 and No.2.

SG2 VCC2
(GRN/BLK, (YEL/BLU)
'00-03 models:
GRN/YELI
'----{( y: ) 1 - - - - - - '

Is there about 5 V? Is there continuity or resistance of 100 kQ or

higher?
YES-Go to step 13.
YES-Replace the EGR valve .•
NO-Gotostep12.
NO-Go to step 15.
terminals C1S and C2S. 15. Measure resistance between EGR valve 6P
SG2 (GRN/BLK,
'00-03 models·
GRN/YEL)
1 2 3 4 5 6 17 8 9 10
EGRL VCC2
L 12 13 14 V 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 /
25 26 27 28 29 30 V
V

Is there about 5 V?
Is there 100 kQ or higher?
YES- Repair open in the wire between the EGR
valve and the PCM (C1S) .• YES - Replace the EGR valve .•
NO-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck NO-Go to step 16.

away, replace the original PCM .• 16. Reconnect the EGR valve connector.
11-198 BACK
Protected by AR
18. Measure voltage between the PCM connector 24. Connect battery positive terminal to EGR valve 6P
terminals C6 and C18. connector terminal No.4.
EGRVALVE 6P CONNECTOR
EGRL SG2
(WHTtBLK) (GRNtBLK,
'00-03 models:
GRNtVEL)
1 2 3 4 8 9 10
E-EGR PG1
12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 25 26 27 28 29 30 EB e

Is there about 1.2 V?
YES-Go to step 22. 25. Start the engine and let it idle, then connect the
battery negative terminal the to EGR valve 6P
NO-Go to step 19. connector terminal No.6.
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Does the engine stall or run rough?
20. Disconnect PCM connector C (31P) and EGR valve YES-Go to step 26.
6P connector.
NO-Replace the EGR valve .•
terminal C6 and the body ground. 26. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

27. Disconnect the PCM connector B (25P).
~
I EGRL (WHTtBLK)
11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1/ 12 13 14 1/ 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 V 25 26 27 28 29 30 V
-'-
YES-Repair short in the wire between the EGR

valve and PCM (C6) .•
NO- Repair open in the wire between the EGR

valve and PCM (C6) .•
(cont'd)
BACK
11-199
Protected by AR
EGRSystem
28. Check for continuity between PCM connector 30. Check for continuity between EGR valve 6P
terminal 87 and EGR valve 6P connector terminal connector terminal No.6 and body ground.
No.4.

E-EGR(PNK, 2 I 3
'00-03 models: BLU/RED)
4
1 2 3 4 5 6
I
7
81
9 10 11 12 V 14 15 V 17 181
C) / 20 ~~ 23 24 25
=
Is there continui ty?
YES - Go to step 27. (see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes
NO- Repair open in the wire between the EGR
valve and the PCM (87) .• NO - Repair open in the wire between the EGR
valve and G101 .•
terminal 87 and body ground.

E-EGR (PNK,
'00-03 models: BLU/RED)
1 2 3 4 5
I
6 7 81
9 10 11 12 V 14 15 V 17 181
:1 / 20 ~.,g 23 24 25
YES- Repair short in the wire between the EGR

valve and the PCM (87) .•
NO-Go to step 28.
11-200 BACK
Protected by AR
DTC P1498: EGR Valve Position Sensor 7. Measure voltage between PCM connector
Circuit High Voltage terminals C18 and C28.

SG2 (GRN/BLK
'00-03 models: GRN/YEL)
Is OTe P1498 indicated?
1 2 3 4 5 6 ~ 8 9 10
YES - Go to step 3.
V 12 13 14 L 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
NO-Intermittent failure. system is OK at this time.
23 /
25 26 27 28 29 30 /
EGR valve and the PCM .• VCC2 (YEL/BLUI
':i
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Wire side of female terminals

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Repair open in the wire between the EGR
6. Measure voltage between EGR valve 6P connector valve and the PCM (C18) .•
terminals No.2 and No. 3.
EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR away. replace the original PCM .•
SG2 VCC2
(GRN/BLK. (YEL/BLU)
'00-03 models:
GRN/YEL)
4
L--..---I'Yr---'
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the EGR valve .•
NO- Go to step 7.
BACK 11-201
Protected by AR
PCVSystem
PCV Valve Inspection and Test
1. Check the PCV valve (A), hoses (B), and 2. At idle, make sure there is a clicking sound from the
connections for leaks or restrictions. PCV valve when the hose between the PCV valve
and intake manifold is lightly pinched (A) with your
J32A1 Engine fingers or pliers.
'99 model: If there is no clicking sound, check the PCV valve
grommet for cracks or damage. If the grommet is
OK, replace the PCV valve and recheck.
J32A 1 Engine
'99 model:
'00-03 models:
w'
I.... \ _B
kI \ '00-03 models:
~ ~
B
/~.B:i~\~
A
J
J32A2 Engine
W
\...~ \ __ B
~l\ A
J32A2 Engine
11-202 BACK
Protected by AR
Evaporative Emission Control System
EVAPORATIVE EMISSON (EVAP)

CANISTER PURGE VALVE
Troubleshooting,
step 3 on page 11-208,
FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE

Test, page 11-219
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)

CANISTER
Troubleshooting, step 27 on page 11-216
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)

CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
Troubleshooting, step 22 on page 11-211,
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) BYPASS

SOLENOID VALVE
Troubleshooting, step 11 on page 11-209,
EVAPORATIVE EMISSON (EVAP)
TWO WAY VALVE FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTPI SENSOR
Test, page 11-218 Troubleshooting, page 11-204
BACK
11-203
Protected by AR
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC P0451: FTP Sensor Range/Performance 6. Disconnect the hose between the EVAP two way
Problem valve and the FTP sensor at the EVAP two way
valve end.
Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0-30 in. Hg A973X-041-XXXXX 7. Connect a vacuum pump to the open end of that
hose.
A973X-041·XXXXX
3. Monitor the FTP sensor voltage with the Honda

PGM Tester, or measure voltage between PCM
connector terminals A29 and C18.
A (32P)
1/12 3 4
PCM CONNECTORS
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 I
'"
112]13 1415 V 17 18 1920 211L 23 24 I
2526 27 28 29 30 31 ' - 32
---
,NK(LTGRN)

SG2 (GRN/BLK, PGM Tester, or measure voltage between PCM
connector terminals A29 and C18, and slowly
Wire side of female terminals squeeze the vacuum pump a little while watching
the voltage.
Is there about 2 .5 V?
10. The voltage should smoothly drop from about 2.5 V
YES - Go to step 4. down to about 1.5 V. STOP applying vacuum when
the voltage drops to about 1.5 V or damage to the
NO-Replace the FTPsensor . • FTPsensor may occur.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Does the voltage drop to about 1.5 V and hold?
5. Open the fuel vent assembly cover (A) in front of YES-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck
the EVAP canister. (see page 11-5). Ifthe symptom/indication goes
NO- Replace the FTP sensor.•
11-204 BACK
Protected by AR
OTe P0452: FTP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
1. Check the vacuum lines at the FTP sensor for 7. Reinstall the fuel fill cap.
misrouting, leakage, breakage and clogging.
8. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.
Are the vacuum lines OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
10. Measure voltage between FTPsensor3Pconnector
NO-Repair or replace vacuum lines as terminals No.1 and No.2.
necessary.•
2. Resetthe PCM (see page 11-4). FTPSENSOR3PCONNECTOR

PGM Tester, or measure voltage between body
ground and PCM connector terminal A29. SG2 IGRN/BLK,
'00-03 models:
GRN/YEL)
k"12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1
Is there about 5 V?
112113 14 15 / 17 18 19 20 21 / 23 24 I
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 ~ YES-Go to step 11.
~ PTANI< tlT GANI
NO- Repair open in the wire between the FTP
sensor and the PCM (C28) .•
=

FTP sensor and the PCM .•
NO - Go to step 6.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-205
Protected by AR
11. Measure voltage between FTP sensor 3P connector DTC P0453: FTP Sensor Circuit High Voh;~'ge
1. Check the vacuum lines of the FTP sensor for
misrouting, leakage, breakage, and clogging.
FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
Are the vacuum lines OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Repair or replace vacuum lines as

necessary.•
SG2 IGRN/BLK,
'00-03 models: 2. Reset the PCM (see page 11-4).
GRN/YELI

Is there about 5 V?
YES - Replace the FTP sensor.• PGM Tester, or measure voltage between body
ground and PCM connector terminal A29.
NO-Go to step 12.
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. PCM CONNECTOR A (32P)

51617 8
14. Check for continuity between FTP sensor 3P

Check for poor connections or loose wi res at the
FTP sensor and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 6.
YES-Repair short in the wire between the FTP

sensor and PCM (A29) .•

BACK
11-206
Protected by AR
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Measure voltage between FTP sensor 3P connector
7. Reinstall the fuel fill cap.
8. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.
10. Measure voltage between FTP sensor 3P connector

SG2 (GRN/BLK.
FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR '00-03 models:
GRN/YEL)
Is there about 5 V?
YES - Replace the FTP sensor.•
NO-Go to step 12.

Wire side of female terminals terminals A29 and C18.
PCM CONNECTORS
A (32P)
Is there about 5 V?
VI2 3 4 567 8 9 10 11 I
/12113 14 15 V 1718 1920 21 / 23 24 I
YES-Goto step 11. 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 ~
PTANK (LTGRN)
NO- Repair open in the wire between the FTP
C(31P)
sensor and the PCM (C18) .• ':i. 11 234 567 8 9 10
V 12 1314 lL':: 16 17 1819 20 2122
23 V 25 26 27 1$ 29 30/
SG2 (GRN/BLK.
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Repair open in the wire between the FTP

sensor and PCM (A29) .•

(see page 11-5). If normal voltage is indicated.
BACK 11-207
Protected by AR
DTC P1456: EVAP Control System Leakage EVAP Canister Purge Valve Test
(fuel tank system)
3. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the EVAP
INOTice I canister purge valve (A), and connect a vacuum
The fuel system is designed to allow specified pump to the hose.
maximum vacuum and pressure conditions. Do not
deviate from the vacuum and pressure tests as '99 model:
indicated in these procedures. Excessive pressure/
vacuum would damage the EVAP components or cause A
eventual fuel tank failure.

Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0-30 in. Hg A973X-041-XXXXX
Please note that this is a 2 trip code, once cleared, they

cannot be reproduced in 1 trip. Also, certain specific
driving and ambient conditions must occur before the
PCM will complete the system checks. Additional test
drives may still not meet the specific conditions needed
'"
to reproduce the codes.
Therefore, follow these troubleshooting procedures A973X-041-XXXXX

carefully to ensure the integrity of the system and to
confirm the cause of the problem or code. '00-03 models:
A973X-041-XXXXX
NOTE: Fresh fuel has a higher volatility that will create
greater pressure/vacuum. The optimum condition for
testing is fresh fuel, and must be less than a full tank of
gas. If possible, to assist in leak detection, add 1 gallon
of fresh fuel to the tank (as long as it will not fill the
tank), just before starting these procedures.
Fuel Fill Cap Check
1. Check the fuel fill cap. It must be a gray or black

OEM cap and be tightened at least three "clicks" to
properly seal the system.
®~
Is proper fuel fill cap installed and properly "
tightened? /
YES - Go to step 2.
NO- Replace or tighten the cap .•
2. Check the fuel fill cap seal.
Is the fuel fill cap seal missing or damaged?
YES - Replace the fuel fill cap (gray or black

colored cap) .•
NO - Fuel fill cap is OK. Go to step 3.
11-208 BACK
Protected by AR
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. Disconnect the PCM connector A (32P).
5. Apply vacuum to the hose. 10. Check for continuity between EVAP purge control
solenoid valve 2P connector term inal No.2 and
Does the valve hold vacuum? body ground.
EVAP PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID
YES - EVAP canister purge valve is OK. Go to step VALVE2PCONNECTOR
11 .
NO-Go to step 6.
7. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P

connector.
8. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge =

valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE
VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
VES- Repair short in the wire between the EVAP

purge control solenoid valve and PCM (A6) .•

EVAP Bypass Solenoid Valve Test

-=
Wire side of female term inals 11 . Disconnect the vacuu m hoses from the EVAP two
way valve (A), and connect a vacuum pump to the
Is there continuity? hose.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the EVAP canister purge valve .•
A973X-041·
XXXX'" A
(cont'd)
BACK
11-209
Protected by AR
12. Connect the PCM connector teminal A3 to body 18. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
19. Measure voltage between EVAP bypass solenoid
PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) valve 2P connector terminal No.1 and body ground.
EVAP BYPASS SOLENOID
VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
VI2 3 4 5 6V 8 9 10 ~I
112113 1~ 15 V 17 18 19 20 21 V 23 24 1
.5 26 27 28 29 30 V 32
'--
2WBS(BLU)
__ JUMPER WIRE
13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Wire side of female terminals
14. Apply vacuum to the hose.
Does the valve hold vacuum?
NO-Go to step 20.
16. Disconnect the EVAP bypass solenoid valve 2P

connector.
17. Check for continuity between EVAP bypass

solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No.2 and
body ground. Is there battery voltage?
VALVE 2P CONNECTOR YES-Replace the EVAP bypass solenoid valve (A)
and O-ring (B) .•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the EVAP

bypass solenoid valve and No.6 ECU (PCM)
CRUISE CONTROL (15 A) fuse .•
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair open in wire between the EVAP bypass

solenoid valve and PCM (A3) .•
11-210 BACK
Protected by AR
20. Plug the upper port (A) of the EVAP two way valve. EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Test

canister filter (A), and connect a vacuum pump to
the hose.
A973X-041- A
XXXXX
ttl A
21. While monitoring the Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP)

sensor voltage with the Honda PGM Tester, or
measure the voltage between PCM connector
terminals A29 and C18, slowly pump the vacuum 23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
pump until the voltage drops to about 1.5 V.
24. Apply vacuum to the hose with 5 strokes of the
Does the voltage drop to 1.5 V and hold for at pump.
least 20 seconds?
YES - EVAP bypass solenoid valve/EVAP two way
valve is OK. Go to step 20. YES - Go to step 25.
NO-Repair leakage from EVAP bypass solenoid NO-EVAP canister vent shut valve is OK. Go to
valve, EVAP two way valve, FTP sensor and step 30.
O-rings .•
26. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent valve 2P

connector.
27. Check for continuity between EVAP canister vent

shut valve 2P connector terminal No.2 and body
ground.
EVAP CANISTER VENT
SHUT VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
(cont'd)
BACK
11-211
Protected by AR
Vacuum Hoses and Connections Test
30. Perform fuel tank vapor control valve tests (see

page 11-219).
Did the fuel tank vapor control valve test normal?
YES-Go to step 31 .
NO- Replace the fuel tank vapor control valve .•
31. Tighten the fuel cap three "clicks", then monitor

the FTP readings with the Honda PGM Tester.
32. Start the engine. Let the engine idle for 5 minutes.
33. Check the FTP sensor readings.
NO-Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A)

and O-ring (B).
29. Check for continuity between EVAP canister vent

shut valve 2P connector terminal No.2 and body C
ground.
EVAP CANISTER VENT

Is the reading above 4 mm Hg pressure or be/ow

- 4mm Hg vacuum?

=
(see page 11 -5). If the symptom/indication goes
Wire side of female terminals away, replace the original PCM . •
Is there continuity? NO - Check the following parts for leaks:

• Fuel tank (A)
YES-Repair short in the wire between the EVAP • Fuel fill cap (B)
canister vent shut valve and PCM (A4) •. • Fuel fill pipe (C)
• Fuel tank vapor control valve (D)
NO-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck • Fuel tank vapor recirculation valve (E)
(see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes • Fuel tank vapor recirculation tube (F)
away, replace the original PCM .• • Fuel tank vapor signal tube (G)
• Fuel tank vapor vent tube (H)
- If necessary, repair or replace the parts .•
11-212 BACK
Protected by AR
OTC P1457: EVAP Control System Leakage '00-03 models:

(EVAP canister system)
A973X-041-XXXXX
INOTICE I
The fuel system is designed to allow specified
maximum vacuum and pressure conditions. Do not
deviate from the vacuum and pressure tests as
indicated in these procedures. Excessive pressure/
vacuum would damage the EVAP components or cause
eventual fuel tank failure.

Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0-30 in. Hg A973X-041-XXXXX
Please note that this is a 2 trip code, once cleared, they

cannot be reproduced in 1 trip. Also, certain specific
driving and ambient conditions must occur before the
PCM will complete the system checks. Additional test Does the valve hold vacuum?
drives may still not meet the specific conditions needed
to reproduce the codes. YES-Go to step 3.
Therefore, follow these troubleshooting procedures NO- Replace the EVAP canister purge valve. If the
carefully +0 ensure the integrity of the system and to valve is contaminated with charcoal particles,
confirm the cause of the problem or code. replace the canister, and blowout the hoses.•
NOTE: Fresh fuel has a higher volatility that will create 3. Connect PCM connector terminal A6 to body
greater pressure/vacuum. The optimum condition for ground with a jumper wire.
testing is fresh fuel, at least half less than a full tank. If
possible, to assist in leak detection, add 1 gallon of PCM CONNECTOR A 132PI
fresh fuel to the tank (as long as it will not fill the tank),
just before starting these procedures. I PCS IRED/VELI
EVAP Canister Purge Valve Test VI2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 I

L12j13 14 15 V 17 18 19 20 21 L 23 24J
1. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the EVAP 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 ~
canister purge valve (A), and connect a vacuum
pump to the hose. JUMPER WIRE
-=
2. Apply vacuum to the hose. Wire side of female terminals
'99 model:
YES - Go to step 6.
NO - EVAP canister purge valve is OK. Go to step

11.
A973X-
041-
XXXXX 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
'"
(cont'd)
BACK 11-213
Protected by AR
DTC Troubleshooting (co nt'd)
7. Disconnectthe EVAP canister purge valve 2P EVAP Bypass Solenoid Valve Test
connector.
11. Disconnect the vacuum hose from EVAP two way
8. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge valve (A), and connector a vacuum pump to the
valve 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. hose.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE
VALVE2PCONNECTOR
A973X-041-
XXXXXtt' A
Is there continuity? 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES-Go to step 9. 13. Apply vacuum to the hose.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the EVAP Does the valve hold vacuum?
canister purge valve and PCM (A6) .•
YES - EVAP bypass solenoid valve/EVAP two way
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). valve is OK. Go to step 19.
10. Measure voltage between EVAP canister purge NO-Goto step 14.
valve 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE
VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
15. Disconnect the EVAP bypass solenoid valve 2P
connector.

body ground.

VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
-=
YES - Replace the EVAP canister purge valve .•
NO - Repair open in the wire between the EVAP

canister purge valve and No.6 ECU (PCM) CRUISE Wire side of female terminals
CONTROL (15A) fuse . •
11-214 BACK
Protected by AR
EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Test

canister vent filter (A), and connect a vacuum pump
to the hose.
YES-Go to step 17.
NO - Replace the EVAP bypass solenoid valve (A)

and O-rings (B) .• 20. Connect PCM connector terminal A4 to body
body ground.

VV '/ 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 / 1
VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
112113 14 1~ 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1
25 L~ 6 27 28 30V V
~
VSV (LT GRN/WHT)
__.... JUMPER WIRE
21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II)

=

YES - EVAP canister vent shut valve is OK. Go to
YES-Replace short in the wire between the EVAP step 28.
bypass solenoid valve and PCM (A3) .•
NO - Go to step 23.
(see page 11-5). If the symptom/indication goes 23. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
24. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-215
Protected by AR
25. Check for continuity between EVAP canister vent Canister System Leak Test
shut valve 2P connector terminal No.2 and body
ground. 28. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
EVAP CANISTER VENT
29. Connect two three-way T-fittings (A) into the hose
from the EVAP canister to the EVAP two way valve.
Connect the FTP sensor to one of the T-fittings and
the vacuum pump to the other.

canister vent shut valve and PCM (A4) .•
27. Measure voltage between EVAP canister vent shut

valve 2P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. 30. Remove the vent hose from the EVAP canister vent
EVAP CANISTER VENT
shut valve (A) and cap (8) the port to seal the fresh
SHUT VALVE 2P CONNECTOR air vent for the EVAP canister.
32. While monitoring the FTP sensor voltage with the

Honda PGM Tester, or measuring voltage between
PCM connector terminals A29 and C18 slowly
/s there battery voltage? pump the vacuum pump.
YES-Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve

(A) and O-ring (8) .•

canister vent shut valve and No.6 ECU (PCM)
CRUISE CONTROL (15A) fuse .•
BACK
11-216
Protected by AR
33. Continue to pump vacuum until the voltage drops 40. Check that voltage for 20 seconds.
to about 1.5 V. Make sure that the engine coolant
temperature still above 95°F (35°C) and your Does the voltage drop to 1.5 V and hold for at
vacuum pump has no leak. least 20 seconds?
34. Check the voltage for 20 seconds. YES -Inspect the fuel tank vapor vent tube and
connections.•
Does the voltage drop to 1.5 V and hold for at
least 20 seconds? NO-Go to step 41.
YES -Inspect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 41. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
line and connections.•
42. Disconnect the purge line hose (A) from the
NO-Go to step 35. canister at the metal line and plug (8) the hose.
36. Disconnect the Quick-connect fitting (A) from the

EVAP canister and plug (8) the canister port.
44. While monitoring the FTP sensor voltage with the

Honda PGM Tester, or measuring voltage between
PCM connector terminals A29 and C18 slowly
37. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). pump the vacuum pump.
38. While monitoring the FTP sensor voltage with the 45. Continue to pump vacuum until the voltage drops
Honda PGM Tester, or measuring voltage between to about 1.5 V. Make sure that the engine coolant
PCM connector terminals A29 and C18 slowly temperature still above 95°F (35°C) and your
pump the vacuum pump. vacuum pump has no leak.
39. Continue to pump vacuum until the voltage drops 46. Monitor that check the voltage for 20 seconds.
to about 1.5 V. Make sure the engine coolant
temperature is still above 95°F (35°C) and your Does the voltage drop to 1.5 V and hold for at
vacuum pump has no leak. least 20 seconds?
YES-Inspect EVAP canister purge valve line and

connections. If they are OK, perform the EVAP two
way valve test (see page 11-218), and fuel tank
vapor control valve test (see page 11-219) .•
NO - Replace the EVAP canister, and repeat step 43

through 46. If the system holds vacuum, the repair
is complete . •
BACK
11-217
Protected by AR
EVAP Two Way Valve Test
Special Tools Required 5. Slowly pressurize the vapor line while watching the
Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0-30 in.Hg A973X-041-XXXXX gauge. The pressure should stabilize momentarily
Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 0-4 in.Hg 07JAZ-001000B above 1.0 kPa (8 mmHg, 0.3 in.Hg) .
1. Remove the fuel fill cap. • If the pressure momentarily stabilizes (valve
opens) above 1.0 kPa (8 mmHg, 0.3 in.Hg), the
2. Disconnect the vapor line from the EVAP two way valve isOK.
valve (A) connect it to a T-fitting (B) from the • If the pressure stabilizes below 1.0 kPa (8 mmHg,
vacuum gauge and the vacuum pump as shown. 0.3 in.Hg), install a new valve and retest.
II 1 07JAZ-001000B
1:----
tt',~
A
/B
A973X-041-XXXXX
3. Apply vacuum slowly and continuously while

watching the gauge. The vacuum should stabilize
momentarily at 0.8 - 2.1 kPa (6 -16 mmHg, 0.2 - 0.6
in.Hg).
If the vacuum stabilizes (valve opens) below 0.8 kPa
(6 mmHg, 0.2 in.Hg) or above 2.1 kPa (16 mmHg,
0.6 in.Hg), install a new valve and retest.
4. Move the vacuum pump hose from the vacuum

fitting to the pressure fitting, and move the vacuum
gauge hose from the vacuum side to the pressure
side (A) as shown.
07JAZ-001000B
BACK
11-218
Protected by AR
Fuel Tank Vapor Control Valve Test
Special Tools Required Valve Test

Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0-30 in.Hg A973X-041-XXXXX
1. Make sure the fuel tank is less than half full.
Float Test
1. Make sure the fuel tank is less than half full.
3. Remove the left rear inner fender. Disconnect the
2. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the fuel tank fuel tank vapor signal tube (A).
pressure, then reinstall the cap.
3. Remove the left rear inner fender. Disconnect the

fuel tank vapor recirculation tube (A), and connect a
vacuum pump to the vapor recirculation tube (A).
4. Disconnect the vacuum hoses (A) from the EVAP

canister (B), and then plug the ports with plugs (e).
A
4. Plug the pipe (B). A973X-041-XXXXX
~
5. Apply vacuum to the fuel tank vapor recirculation
tube (A).
• If the vacuum holds, replace the fuel tank vapor

control valve (see page 11-221).
• If the vacuum does not hold, the float is OK. Go
to step 1 of the valve test.
5. Disconnect the vacuum hose (D) from the EVAP

canister vent shut valve (E), and connect a vacuum
pump to the vacuum hose.
6. Pump the vacuum pump 80 times .
• If the vacuum holds, go to step 7 .

• If the vacuum does not hold, go to step 9.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-219
Protected by AR
Fuel Tank Vapor Control Valve Test (cont'd)
7. Connect a second vacuum pump to the fuel tank 10. Fill the gas tank with fuel, then check for fuel in the
vapor signal tube (A). two way valve and fuel tank vapor recirculation
hose.
NOTE: At either location, tiny droplets of fuel are

normal.
• If the fuel run out of the hoses at either location,

replace the fuel tank vapor control valve .
• If the fuel does not run out of the hoses at either
location, the fuel tank vapor system function is
A normal.
8. Apply vacuum (1 pump) to the fuel tank vapor

signal tube (A), then check the vacuum on the
pump in step 6.

• If the vacuum is released, the fuel tank vapor
control valve is OK. Go to step 10.
9. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor quick disconnect

from the EVAP canister, then plug the port on the
canister. Reapply vacuum (80 pumps).

• If the vacuum does not hold, inspect the EVAP
canister vent shut valve O-ring. If the O-ring is OK,
replace the EVAP canister and repeat step 4.
Check for fuel

running out.
11-220 BACK
Protected by AR
Fuel Tank Vapor Control Valve Replacement
1. Remove the fuel tank (see page 11-176).
2. Remove the fuel tank vapor control valve (A) from

the fuel tank (8).
4N.m
(0.4 kgf·m, 3 Ibf.fll
3. Replace the base gasket (C).
4. Install the fuel tank vapor control valve.
5. Install the fuel tank (see step 1 on page 11-178).
BACK
11-221
Protected by AR
4-speed Automatic Transmission (1999 Model)
Automatic Transmission Transmission End Cover
Special Tools ................................................... 14-2 End Cover and Idler Gears Removal 14-161
General Troubleshooting Information ......... 14-3 Park Lever Stop Inspection and
DTC Troubleshooting Index ............................ 14-7 Adjustment .................................................. 14-163
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ................. 14-8 End Cover and Idler Gears Installation ......... 14-203
System Description ........................................ 14-18
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 14-68 Transmission Housing
Road Test ............. ........... .......... ... ... ... ... ..... ..... 14-97 Housing and Shaft Assemblies Removal ..... 14-164
Stall Speed Test .............................................. 14-99 Bearing Removal and Installation ................. 14-166
Pressure Tests ................................................ 14-100 Shaft Assemblies and Housing
Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve- Installation ................................................... 14-200
Shift Control Solenoid Valve A Assembly
Test ........................................................... 14-102 Valve Body
Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve- Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer
Shift Control Solenoid Valve A Assembly Removal ....................................................... 14-167
Replacement ............................................ 14-102 Valve Body Repair .......................................... 14-169
Shift Control Solenoid Valves B Valve Body Valve Installation ........................ 14-170
and CTest ..........................................•......... 14-103 Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection,
Shift Control Solenoid Valves Band C and Reassembly ......................................... 14-171
Replacement ............................................... 14-103 ATF Pump Inspection ..................................... 14-173
AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Regulator Valve Body Disassembly,
Valves A and B Test .................................... 14-104 Inspection, and Reassembly ...................... 14-174
AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Servo Body Disassembly, Inspection,
Valves A and B Replacement ..................... 14-105 and Reassembly ......................................... 14-175
Speed Sensor Replacement .......................... 14-106 Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection,
2nd Clutch Pressure Switch and Reassembly ......................................... 14-176
Replacement ............................................... 14-107 Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer
3rd Clutch Pressure Switch Installation ................................................... 14-198
Replacement ............................................... 14-107
ATF Level Check ............................................. 14-108 Torque Converter Housing
ATF Replacement ........................................... 14-109 Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal
Transmission Removal .................................. 14-110 Replacement ............................................. .. 14-177
Transmission Installation .............................. 14-117 Countershaft Bearing Replacement ........... .. 14-178
ATF Cooler Flushing ....................................... 14-123 Secondary Shaft Bearing Repacement 14-178
ATF Cooler Hoses Replacement ................... 14-124
Shift Lever Removal....................................... 14-125 Shafts and Clutches
Shift Lever Installation ................................... 14-126 Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection,
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly .......... 14-128 and Reassembly ....................................... .. 14-179
Shift Cable Replacement ............................... 14-129 3rd/4th Clutch Clearance Inspection ........... .. 14-180
Shift Cable Adjustment .................................. 14-132 Mainshaft Sealing Rings Replacement ...... .. 14-181
Countershaft Disassembly,
AfT Gear Position Indicator Inspection, and Reassembly ..................... . 14-182
Component Location Index ........................... 14-134 Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub and
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 14-135 3rd Gear Removal ....................................... 14-183
~ Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting ............ 14-136 Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub and
Sequential Sportshift AfT Shift Switch 3rd Gear Installation ................................... 14-184
Circuit Troubleshooting ............................. 14-139 Countershaft Bearing Hub/Bearing
Sportshift Indicator Circuit Replacement ............................................... 14-185
Troubleshooting ......................................... 14-141 Secondary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection,
Indicator Input Test ........................................ 14-142 and Reassembly ......................................... 14-186
AfT Gear Position Switch Test ....................... 14-144 Secondary Shaft Clearance Inspection ........ 14-187
AfT Gear Position Switch Secondary Shaft Idler Gear Bearing
Replacement ............................................... 14-145 Replacement ............................................... 14-189
Indicator Bulb Replacement .......................... 14-147 Clutch Disassembly ........................................ 14-190
Clutch Inspection ........................................... . 14-192
AfT Interlock System Clutch Reassembly ......................................... 14-194
Component Location Index ........................... 14-148
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 14-149 AfT Differential
Shift Lock System Circuit Component Location Index ........................... 14-209
Troubleshooting ......................................... 14-150 Backlash Inspection ........................................ 14-209
Key Interlock System Circuit Final Driven Gear/Carrier
Troubleshooting ......................................... 14-153 Replacement ............................................... 14-210
Reverse Lock System Circuit Carrier Bearing Replacement ........................ 14-210
Troubleshooting ......................................... 14-155 Oil Seal Replacement ..................................... 14-211
Control Unit Input Test ................................... 14-157 Carrier Bearing Outer Race
Key Interlock Solenoid/Switch Test .............. 14-159 Replacement ............................................... 14-212
Shift Lock Solenoid Test ................................ 14-159 Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection ............... 14-213
Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement ................. 14-160
Park Pin Switch Test ....................................... 14-160
Protected by AR
Automatic Transmission
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool Number Description Qty

CD 07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100 Mainshaft Holder 1
® 07GAD-PG40101 or 07GAD-PG40100 Seal Driver Attachment 1
® 07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A Clutch Spring Compressor Bolt Assembly 1
*0 07HAC-PK40102 Housing Puller 1
® 07 JAD-PH80 10 1 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
® 07 LAD-PW50601 Attachment, 40 x 50 mm 1
**0 07LAE-PX40100 Clutch Spring Compressor Attachment 2
® 07MAJ-PY4011A AfT Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 4
® 07MAJ-PY40120 AfT Pressure Hose Adapter 4
@ 07NAD-PX40100 Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 1
@ 07SAZ-00 1000A Backprobe Set 2
@ 07XAJ-SOK0100 Preload Inspection Tool 1
@ 07ZAE-PRP0100 Clutch Compressor Attachment 1
® 07406-0020400 or 07406-0020401 AfT Oil Pressure Gauge Set w/Panel 1
***@ 07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A Adjustable Bearing Puller, 25-40 mm 1
@ 077 46-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
@ 077 46-00 10500 Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 1
@ , 07746-0010600 Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 1
@ 077 46-0030 100 Driver 40 mm I.D. 1
® 07749-0010000 I Driver 1 i
® 07947-6340500 Driver Attachment 1
* If the top arm is too short, replace it with 07SAC-POZ01001.
** 07HAE-PL50101 may be used to substitute one ofthese tools.
I:f~
*** Must be used with commercially available 3/8"-16 slide ham.m ,. er.
-) G
,
\
,.
"=.,)
" > c..'·, cc •.• •
, (0 !
,
:0 A~
F,
..
0/ "
,7,
(2)rJ
/
'~
CD ® ® CD ® ®
~ Q ". (/ ~1
if; . ' ~ ~
~;~ ,~
~
o ® ® @ @ @
~
.
[000)
~
-
f~J ~~.
," -
'iFiFV
W/ ·iJ>
. ,
.' ",."h
" I
0
@
..'°.:',. :......
. . ~ - ;.
· .
."
®
" : . .:. .
@
'J
"---~
@@@ @ ®
14-2 BACK
Protected by AR
How to Check for DTCs with the PGM Tester IScan Tool
When the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or output systems, the ~ indicator in the gauge assembly will
usually blink and/or the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will come on. When the 16P Data Link Connector (DLC) (A)
(located behind the front console, between the seat heater switches) is connected to the OBD II Scan Tool or Honda
PGM Tester (B) as shown, it will indicate the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
If the ~ indicator or the MIL has been reported on, or if a driveability problem is suspected, follow this procedure:
1. Connect the OBD II Scan Tool (conforming to SAE J1978) or Honda PGM Tester to the 16P DLC. (See the OBD II
Scan Tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manual for specific instructions. If you are using the Honda PGM Tester,
make sure it is set to the SAE DTC type.)
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and observe the DTC on the screen.
3. Record all fuel and emissions DTCs, AfT DTCs, and freeze data.
4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC (except for
DTC P0700), DTC P0700 means there is one or more AfT DTC, and no problems were detected in the fuel and
emissions circuit ofthe PCM.
5. Get the customer's radio anti-theft code, and write down the radio station presets.
6. Reset the memory with the PGM Tester or by removing the BACK UP fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box for more than 10 seconds.
7. Calibrate the engine idle control system in the PCM (see page 11-158), drive the vehicle for several minutes under
the same conditions as those indicated by the freeze data, and then recheck for DTCs. If the AfT DTC returns, go to
the DTC Troubleshooting Index. If the DTC does not return, there was an intermittent problem within the circuit.
Make sure all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight, and then go to step 8.
8. Enter the radio code, reset the preset stations, and set the clock.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-3
Protected by AR
How to Check for DTCs
When the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or output systems, the ~ indicator (A) in the gauge assembly (B)
will usually blink and/or the MIL may come on. When the 16P Data Link Connector (OLC) (located behind the front
console, between the seat heater switches) is connected to the Honda PGM Tester, the ~ indicator will blink the
Diagnostic Trouble Code (OTC) when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
When the ~ indicator has been reported on, connect the PGM Tester to the DlC (16P). Turn the ignition switch ON (II),
then observe the ~ indicator.
Codes 1 through 9 are indicated by individual short blinks. Code 10 and above are indicated by a series of long and
short blinks. One long blink equals 10 short blinks. Add the long and short blinks together to determine the code. After
determining the code, refer to the OTC Troubleshooting Index.
Short blink (once)
OFF~' n So. DTC'
OFF ~ rLfl See DTC2
OFF~' Long blink lfLniUffitimos,

U1JLflf1JL See DTC1S
If the ~ indicator and the Mil come on at the same time, follow this procedure:
1. Record all fuel and emissions OTCs, AfT DTCs, and freeze data.
2. Check the fuel and emissions system indicated by the OTC.
3. Get the customer's radio anti-theft code, and write down the numbers of the radio station presets.
4. Reset the memory by removing the BACK UP fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box for more than 10
seconds.
the same conditions as those indicated by freeze data, and then recheck for OTCs.
If the OTC returns, refer to the OTC Troubleshooting Index. If the OTC does no return, there was an intermittent
problem within the circuit. Make sure all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight, then go to step 6.
6. Re-enter the radio code, reset the preset stations, and reset the clock.
14-4 BACK
Protected by AR
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM

8ackprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (Two required)
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS components locations, precautions, and procedures in the
SRS section before performing repairs or service (see page 23-15).
1. Pull back the carpet from passenger's side of the center console to expose the PCM.
2. Inspect the circuit on the PCM, according to the DTC troubleshooting, with the special tools and a digital
multi meter.
3. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking patch cords (8), and connect the cords to a multi meter (C).
Using the wire insulation as a guide for the contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip into the
connector from the wire side until it comes in contact with the terminal end of the wire.
07SAZ-001000A
A
07SAZ-OO1 OOOA
(cont'd)
BACK
14-5
Protected by AR
How to Reset the PCM
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the radio station presets.
3. Use one of these methods to reset the PCM memory:

• Use the OBD II Scan Tool or the Honda PGM Tester (A) .
• Removing the BACK-UP fuse (7.5A) (B) from the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box (C) for 10 seconds.
This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting.

2. Reset the PCM.
3. Disconnect the OBD 1\ Scan Tool or the Honda PGM Tester from the Data Link Connector (16P) (D).
5. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the radio station presets, and reset the clock.
6. Perform the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-158).
7. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 30 mph (48km/h).
BACK
14-6
Protected by AR
DTe Troubleshooting Index
NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot.
DTe· ~ Indicator MIL Detection Item Page
r2J
P0715 (15) Blinks ON Mainshaft speed sensor (see page 14-68)
P0720 (9) Blinks ON Countershaft speed sensor (see page 14-70)
P0730 (41) OFF ON Shift control system (see page 14-71)
P0740 (40) OFF ON Lock-up control system (see page 14-72)
P0753 (7) Blinks ON Shift control solenoid valve A (see page 14-73)
P0758 (8) Blinks ON Shift control solenoid valve B (see page 14-75)
P0763 (22) Blinks ON Shift control solenoid valve C (see page 14-77)
P1705 (5) Blinks ON AfT gear position switch (short to ground) (see page 14-79)
P1706 (6) OFF ON AfT gear position switch (open) (see page 14-82)
P1709 (24) Blinks ON AfT shift switch circuit (see page 14-85)
P1738 (25) OFF OFF 2nd clutch pressure switch (see page 14-87)
P1739 (26) OFF OFF 3rd clutch pressure switch (see page 14-89)
P1753 (1) Blinks ON Lock-up control solenoid valve (see page 14-91)
P1768 (16) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (see page 14-93)
P1773 (23) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (see page 14-95)
The DTC in the parentheses is the flash code the ~ indicator indicates when the Data Link Connector (DLC) is
connected to the Honda PGM Tester.
BACK
14-7
Protected by AR
These symptoms DO NOT trigger Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) or cause the ~ indicator to blink. If the MIL was
reported ON or the ~ indicator has been blinking, check for DTCs. But if the vehicle has one of the symptoms in the
following chart, check the probable causes(s) for it, in the sequence listed, until you find the problem.
Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
When you turn the A problem in the ihI Check the ihI indicator circuit (see page 14-136).
ignition switch ON (II), indicator circuit
the ~ indicator comes on
and stays on or never
comes on at all
Shift lever cannot be A problem in the shift lock Check interlock system - shift lock system circuit (see
moved from the ~ system ofthe interlock page 14-150).
position while you're system
pushing on the brake
pedal
Ignition key cannot be A problem in the key Check interlock system - key interlock system circuit
moved from the ACC (I) interlock system of the (see page 14-153).
position to the LOCK (0) interlock system
position when you're
pushing it with the shift
lever in the ~ position
Transmission does not A problem in the sequential Check the sequential sportshift AfT shift switch circuit
shift up and down when sportshift mode switch (see page 14-139).
operating the shift lever circuit
in the sequential
sportshift mode position
Shift indicator does not A problem in the shift Check the sport shift indicator circuit (see page 14-141).
indicate the selected gear indicator circuit
while the shift lever is in
the sequential sportshift
mode position
Shift lever cannot pass A problem in the reverse Check the interlock system - reverse lock system
through the lRl position lock system of the interlock circuit (see page 14-155).
from the [NJ position system
14-8 BACK
Protected by AR
Engine runs, but 1. Low ATF level • Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for leakage
vehicle does not 2. Shift cable broken or out and loose connections. If necessary, flush ATF cooler
move in any gear of adjustment lines.
3. Shift cable worn • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
4. ATF pump worn or transmission control shaft.
binding • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque converter
5. Regulator valve stuck or housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The symptoms
spring worn are mostly an rpm-related ticking noise or a high
6. ATF strainer clogged pitched squeak.
7. Mainshaft worn or • Measure line pressure.
damaged • Ifthe strainer is clogged, find the damaged components
8. Final gears worn or that caused debris.
damaged • Inspect the differential pinion gears for wear. If the
9. Transmission-to-engine differential pinion gears are worn, replace the
assembly error differential assembly, replace the ATF strainer,
10. Axle disengaged thoroughly clean the transmission, and flush the cooler
and lines. Replace the torque converter.
• Be careful not to damage the torque converter housing
when replacing the main ball bearing. You may also
damage the ATF pump when you torque down the main
valve body. This will result in ATF pump seizure if not
detected. Use the proper tools.
• Install the main seal flush with the torque converter
housing. If you push it into the torque converter
housing until it bottoms out, it will block the fluid return
passage and result in damage.
Vehicle moves in 1. 1st accumulator defective • Inspect 1st clutch pressure.

00 and 1Rl, but not 2. 1st gears worn or • Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/2nd clutch
in~,~, orm damaged assembly for wear and damage.
3. 1st clutch defective • Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the spring
retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-
plate-to-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for wear
and damage. If the discs and plates are worn or
damaged, replace them as a set. If they are OK, adjust
the clutch end plate clearance.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-9
Protected by AR
Vehicle moves in 1. Shift control solenoid • Check the 00 indicator, and check for loose connectors.
~, ~, [II. lBJ, but valve A defective Inspect the a-rings, and check the shift control solenoid
not in 1Il 2. Shift valve A defective valve for seizure.
3. 2nd accumulator • Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/2nd clutch
defective assembly for wear and damage.
4. 2nd gears worn or • Inspect the clutch piston and a-rings. Check the spring
damaged retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-
5. 2nd clutch defective plate-to-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
Vehicle moves in 1. Shift fork shaft stuck • Measure line pressure and 4th clutch pressure.
~, ~, 00, 00, but 2. Modulator valve • Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork shaft.
not in lBJ (or moves defective • If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
forward in lBJ) 3. Reverse CPC valve aluminum, inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is
defective OK, and no cause for the contamination is found,
4. 4th accumulator replace the torque converter.
defective • Inspect the reverse selector gear teeth chamfers, and
5. 4th clutch defective inspect engagement teeth chamfers of the countershaft
6. Reverse gears worn or 4th gear and reverse gear. Replace the reverse gears
damaged and the reverse selector if they are worn or damaged. If
the transmission makes clicking, grinding, or whirring
noises, also replace the mainshaft 4th gear, reverse
idler gear, and countershaft 4th gear.
• If the 4th clutch feed pipe guide in the end cover is
scored by the mainshaft, inspect the ball bearing for
excessive movement in the transmission housing. If the
ball bearing is OK, replace the end cover as it is dented.
The O-ring under the guide is probably worn.
• Replace the mainshaft if the bushing for the 3rd and 4th
clutch feed pipes are loose or damaged. If the 4th clutch
feed pipe is damaged or out of round, replace the end
cover.
• Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve, and
a-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage.
Inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top-disc clearance. If the
clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs
and plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates
are worn or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are
OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end plate.
~ - - - - - - - - ~- ----- - - - --- - _ . - --------- --
14-10 BACK
Protected by AR
Poor acceleration; 1. Low ATF level • Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for leakage
flares on starting 2. Shift cable broken or out and loose connections. If necessary, flush ATF cooler
off in ~ and ~: of adjustment lines.
Stall speed high in 3. ATF pump worn or • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
~, ~, [!l. and [j] binding transmission control shaft.
4. Regulator valve stuck or • Check line pressure.
spring worn • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque converter
5. ATF strainer clogged housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The symptom is
6. Torque converter check mostly an rpm-ticking noise or a high pitched squeak.
valve defective • Be careful not to damage the torque converter housing
when replacing the main ball bearing. You can also
Poor acceleration; 1. Shift cable broken or out • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
flares on starting of adjustment transmission control shaft.
off in ~ and ~: 2. 1st clutch defective • Check 1st clutch pressure.
Stall speed high in • Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the spring
~, 1D!l, and [j] retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-
off in III: 2. 2nd clutch defective • Check 2nd clutch pressure.
III retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-
Poor acceleration; 4th clutch defective • Check 4th clutch pressure.

flares on starting • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve, and
off in 00: O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage.
Stall speed is in Inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top-disc clearance. If the
specification in ~, clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs
~,III, and [1], but and plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates
high in~ are worn or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are
OK, adjust the clutch end plate clearance.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-11
Protected by AR
Poor acceleration; 1. Lock-up control solenoid • Check ATF cooling system for restriction.
Stall speed low valve defective • Check for a stuck lock-up valve in the valve body.
2. Torque converter one-
way clutch defective
3. Engine output low
4. Lock-up clutch piston
defective
5. Lock-up shift valve
defective
6. Restricted cooler
Engine idle 1. Low ATF level • Set idle rpm in gear to the specified idle speed. If still no
vibration 2. Lock-up control solenoid good, adjust the engine and transmission mounts as
valve defective outlined in the engine section of this service manual.
3. Drive plate defective or • Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for leakage
transmission and loose connections. If necessary, flush ATF cooler
misassembled lines.
4. Engine output low • Check ATF cooling system for restriction.
defective
6. ATF pump worn or
binding
defective
Vehicle moves in 1. Excessive ATF • Check the ATF level, and drain the ATF if necessary.
fHl 2. Foreign material in • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve, and
separator plate orifice O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage.
3. 1st clutch defective Inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top-disc clearance . If the
4. 2nd clutch defective clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs
5. 3rd clutch defective and plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates
6. 4th clutch defective are worn or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are I
7. Clutch clearance OK, adjust the clutch end plate clearance. I
incorrect • Check for clutch pressure in neutral.

8. Needle bearing seized up,
worn, or damaged
9. Thrust washer seized up,
worn, or damaged
BACK
14-12
Protected by AR
Late shift from the 1. Shift control solenoid • Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose connectors.
~ position to ~ valve C defective Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift control solenoid
and IO!I positions 2. A/T clutch pressure valve for seizure.
control solenoid valves • Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
AlB defective body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear and damage.
3. Shift cable broken or out Ifthe A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve is stuck,
of adjustment inspect the CPC valves.
4. Joint in shift cable and • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
transmission or body transmission control shaft.
worn • Ifthe ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
5. Shift fork shaft stuck aluminum, inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is
6. CPC valve A stuck OK, and no cause for the contamination is found,
7. Foreign material in replace the torque converter.
separator plate orifice • Check 1st clutch pressure.
S. Shift valve C defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve, and
9. Servo control valve O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage.
defective Inspectthe clutch end-plate-to-top-disc clearance. If the
10. 1st accumulator defective clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs
11. 1st check ball stuck and plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates
12. 1st clutch defective are worn or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are
Late shift from the 1. Shift control solenoid • Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose connectors.
~ position to the valve C defective Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift control solenoid
[R] position 2. A/T clutch pressure valve for seizure.
control solenoid valves • Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
AlB defective body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear and damage.
3. Shift cable broken or out Ifthe A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve is stuck,
of adjustment inspectthe CPC valves.
worn • Ifthe ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
5. Shift fork shaft stuck aluminum, inspectthe ATF pump. Ifthe ATF pump is
6. Foreign material in OK, and no cause for the contamination is found,
separator plate orifice replace the torque converter.
7. Reverse CPC valve • Check 4th clutch pressure.
defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve, and
S. 4th accumulator O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage.
defective Inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top-disc clearance. If the
9. 4th clutch defective clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs
(cont'd)
BACK
14-13
Protected by AR
No shift Modulator valve defective. Measure line pressure.
Erratic shifting 1. Shift control solenoid • Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift control solenoid valve
gears: valve A defective for seizure.
Fails to shift in the 2. Mainshaft speed sensor • Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose connectors. Inspect
~ position; does defective the AfT gear position switch. If the AfT gear position switch is
not upshift to 4th 3. Counters haft speed faulty, replace it. If the AfT gear position switch is out of
sensor defective adjustment, adjust it and the shift cable.
4. Shift valve A defective
5. Shift valve 0 defective
Erratic shifting 1. Shift control solenoid • Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose connectors. Inspect
gears: valve B defective the O-ring, and check the shift control solenoid valve for
Fails to shift in the 2. Shift fork shaft stuck seizure.
~and~ 3. Shift valve B defective • Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork shaft.
positions; does not 4. Servo control valve
upshift to 3rd and 4 defective
th
Erratic shifting 1. Shift control solenoid Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose connectors. Inspect
gears: valve B defective the O-ring, and check the shift control solenoid valve for seizure.
Fails to shift in the 2. Shift valve B defective
~,~ and [1] 3. Shift valve E defective
positions; starts off
in 3rd
Excessive shock, 1. AfT clutch pressure Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose connectors. Inspect
or flares on all control solenoid valves the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve body gasket and
upshifts and AlB defective ATF feed pipes for wear and damage. If the AfT clutch pressure
downshifts 2. CPC valve A defective control solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
3. CPC valve B defective
4. Foreign material in
separator plate orifice
Excessive shock or 1. Shift control solenoid • Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose connectors. Inspect
flares on 1-2 valve C defective the O-rings, and check the shift control solenoid valve for
upshift or 2-1 2. 2nd clutch pressure seizure.
downshift switch or circuit defective • Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose connectors. Check
3. Foreign material in that the outlet is not clogged inside of the 2nd clutch pressure
separator plate orifice switch connector.
4. Shift valve C defective • Check 1st and 2nd clutch pressures.
5. 1st accumulator defective • Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the spring retainer
6. 2nd accumulator for wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top-disc
defective clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the
7. 1st check ball stuck clutch discs and plates for wear and damage. If the discs and
8. 2nd check ball stuck plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are
9. 1st clutch defective OK, adjust the clutch end plate clearance.
10. 2nd clutch defective
14-14
BACK
Protected by AR
Excessive shock, 1. Shift control solenoid • Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose connectors.
or flares on 2-3 valve C defective Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift control solenoid
upshift or 3-2 2. 3rd clutch pressure valve for seizure.
downshift switch or circuit defective • Check 2nd and 3rd clutch pressures.
3. Foreign material in • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve, and
4. Shift valve C defective Inspectthe clutch end-plate-to-top-disc clearance. Ifthe
5. 2nd accumulator clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs
defective and plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates
6. 3rd accumulator are worn or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are
defective OK, adjust the clutch end plate clearance.
7. 2nd check ball stuck
8. 2nd clutch defective
9. 3rd clutch defective
Excessive shock, 1. Shift control solenoid • Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose connectors.
or flares on 3-4 valve C defective Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift control solenoid
upshift or 4-3 2. Foreign material in valve for seizure.
downshift separator plate orifice • Check 3rd and 4th clutch pressures.
3. Shift valve C defective • If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
4. 3rd accumulator aluminum, inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF pump is
defective OK, and no cause for the contamination is found,
5. 4th accumulator replace the torque converter, and check the stall speed.
defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve, and
6. 3rd clutch defective O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage.
7. 4th clutch defective Inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top-disc clearance. If the
clearance is out oftolerance, inspectthe clutch discs
Noise from 1. ATF pump worn or • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque converter
transmission in all binding housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The symptoms
shift lever 2. Torque converter are mostly an rpm-related ticking noise or a high
positions housing or transmission pitched squeak.
housing bearing worn or • Inspect the contact of the countershaft and secondary
damaged shaft with the bearings. Check the ATF guide plates for
damage and wear. Inspect the 1st clutch feed pipe for
damage and out of round. If the 1st clutch feed pipe is
damaged or out of round, replace it. Replace the
secondary shaft if the bushing for the 1st clutch feed
pipe is damaged or out of round.
Vehicle does not Torque converter one-way Replace torque converter.

accelerate more clutch defective
than 31 mph (50
km/h)
(cont'd)
BACK
14-15
Protected by AR
Vibration in all Drive plate defective or • Set idle rpm in gear to the specified idle speed. If still no
shift lever transmission misassembled good, adjust the engine mounts as described in the
positions engine section ofthis service manual.
• Check the stall speed.
Shift lever does 1. AfT gear position switch • Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose connectors.
not operate defective or out of Inspect the AfT gear position switch. If the AfT gear
smoothly adjustment position switch is faulty, replace it. If the AfT gear
2. Shift cable broken or out position switch is out of adjustment, adjust it and the
of adjustment shift cable.
worn
Transmission does 1. Shift cable broken or out • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
not shift into the [f] of adjustment transmission control shaft.
position 2. Joint in shift cable and • Check the park pawl spring installation and the park
transmission or body lever spring installation. If installation is incorrect,
worn install the spring correctly. Make sure that the park
3. Park mechanism lever stop is not installed upside down. Check the
defective distance between the park pawl shaft and the park lever
roller pin. If the distance is out of tolerance, adjust the
distance with the park lever stop.
Lock-up clutch 1. Lock-up control solenoid • Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose connectors.
does not valve defective Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
disengage 2. AfT clutch pressure body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear and damage.
control solenoid valves If the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve is stuck,
AlB defective inspect the CPC valves.
3. Lock-up clutch piston • Check ATF cooling system for restriction.
defective
defective
5. Lock-up control valve
defective
6. Lock-up timing valve
defective
- -_ . - -- ---
14-16 BACK
Protected by AR
Lock-up clutch 1. Lock-up control solenoid • Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose connectors.
does not operate valve defective Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
smoothly 2. A/T clutch pressure body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear and damage.
control solenoid valves If the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve is stuck,
3. Lock-up clutch piston • Center all engine mounts.
defective
4. Torque converter check
valve defective
defective
6. Lock-up control valve
defective
7. Lock-up timing valve
defective
S. Non-Honda ATF used
Lock-up clutch 1. Lock-up control solenoid Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose connectors.
does not engage valve defective Inspect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve
2. A/T clutch pressure body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear and damage. If
control solenoid valves the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve is stuck,
3. Mainshaft speed sensor
defective
4. Countershaft speed
sensor defective
defective
6. Torque converter check
valve defective
defective
S. Lock-up control valve
defective
AfT gear position 1. A/T gear position switch • Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose connectors.
indicator does not defective or out of Inspect the A/T gear position switch. If the A/T gear
indicate shift lever adjustment position switch is faulty, replace it. If the A/T gear
positions 2. Shift cable broken or out position switch is out of adjustment, adjust it and the
of adjustment shift cable.
worn
Speedometer and Countershaft speed sensor Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose connectors.
odometer do not defective
operate
BACK
14-17
Protected by AR
System Description
General Operation
The automatic transmission is a combination of a 3-element torque converter and triple-shaft electronically controlled
unit which provides 4 speeds forward and 1 reverse. The entire unit is positioned in line with the engine.
Torque Converter, Gears, and Clutches

The torque converter consists of a pump, turbine, and stator assembly in a single unit. They are connected to the
engine crankshaft so they turn together as the engine turns. Around the outside of the torque converter is a ring gear
which meshes with the starter pinion when the engine is being started. The entire torque converter assembly serves
as a flywheel, transmitting power to the transmission mainshaft. The transmission has three parallel shafts: the
mainshaft, the countershaft, and the secondary shaft. The mainshaft is in line with the engine crankshaft. The
mainshaft includes the 3rd and 4th clutches, and gears for 3rd, 4th, reverse, and idler (reverse gear is integral with the
4th gear). The countershaft includes the final drive, 1st, 3rd, 4th, reverse, 2nd, park, and idler gears (the final drive gear
is integral with the countershaft). The secondary shaft includes the 1st and 2nd clutches, and gears for 1st, 2nd, and
idler. The countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft reverse gear can be locked to the countershaft at its center,
providing 4th gear or reverse, depending with which way the selector moved. The gears on the mainshaft and the
secondary shaft are in constant mesh with those on the countershaft. When certain combinations of gears in the
transmission are engaged by the clutches, power is transmitted from the mainshaft and the secondary shaft to the
counters haft to provide ~, ~, [Il, [1], and 1Hl positions.
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), sensors, and six solenoid valves.
Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions. The PCM is located
below the dashboard, under the front lower panel behind the center console.
Hydraulic Control
The valve bodies include the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the servo body, and the accumulator body.
They are bolted to the torque converter housing. The main valve body contains the manual valve, the modulator valve,
the shift valve C, the shift valve 0, the shift valve E, the servo control valve, the torque converter check valve, the
reverse CPC valve, the lock-up shift valve, the relief valve, the cooler check valve, and the ATF pump gears. The
regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the lock-up timing valve, and the lock-up control valve. The servo
body contains the servo valve, the shift valve A, the shift valve 8, the CPC valves A and 8, and 3rd and 4th
accumulators. The accumulator body contains the 1st and 2nd accumulators and lubrication check valve. Fluid from
the regulator passes through the manual valve to the various control valves. The 1st, 3rd, and 4th clutches receive
fluid from their respective feed pipes, and the 2nd clutch receives fluid from the internal hydraulic circuit.
Shift Control Mechanism

The PCM controls shift control solenoid valves A, 8, and C, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and 8
while receiving input signals from various sensors and switches located throughout the vehicle. The shift control
solenoid valves shift the positions of the shift valves to switch the port leading hydraulic pressure to the clutch. The
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and 8 control the CPC valves A and 8 to shift smoothly between lower
gear and higher gear. This pressurizes a line to one of the clutches, engaging the clutch and its corresponding gear.
Lock-up Mechanism
In ~ position (3rd and 4th) and ~ position (3rd), pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter
through a fluid passage, causing the lock-up piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place,
the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together with hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes
the timing of the lock-up mechanism. When the lock-up control solenoid valve activates, modulator pressure changes
to switch lock-up on and off. The lock-up control valve and the lock-up timing valve control the range of lock-up
according to AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and 8. The lock-up control solenoid valve is mounted on
the torque converter housing, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and 8 are mounted on the
transmission housing. They are all controlled by the PCM.
BACK
14-18
Protected by AR
Gear Selection
The shift lever has eight positions: [f) PARK, IRl REVERSE, [f!J NEUTRAL, ~ 1stthrough 4th gear ranges, ~ 1st through
3rd gear ranges, II] 2nd gear, ill 1st gear, and the sequential sportshift mode position.
Position Description
[f) PARK Front wheels locked; park pawl engaged with park gear on countershaft. All clutches are
released.
IRl REVERSE Reverse; reverse selector engaged with countershaft reverse gear and 4th clutch locked.
[f!J NEUTRAL All clutches are released.
~DRIVE General driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd, then 4th, depending on
(1 st through 4th) vehicle speed and throttle position. Downshift through 3rd, 2nd and 1st on deceleration to stop.
The lock-up mechanism operates in 3rd and 4th gears.
~DRIVE Used for rapid acceleration at highway speeds and general driving; up-hill and down-hill
(1st through 3rd) driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, then 3rd, depending on vehicle speed and
throttle position.
Downshifts through 2nd to 1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 3rd
gear.
II] SECOND Used for engine braking or better traction starting off on loose or slippery surfaces; stays in
2nd gear, does not shift up or down.
rn FIRST Used for engine braking; stays in 1st gear, does not shift up.
Starting is possible only in the [f) and [f!J positions because of a slide-type neutral-safety switch.
Automatic Transaxle (AfT) Gear Position Indicator

The AfT gear pOSition indicator in the instrument panel shows which gear has been selected without having to look
down at the console. With the shift lever in the sequential sportshift mode position, the indicator next to the ~
indicator in the instrument panel will display the gear selected.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-19
Protected by AR
System Description (cont'd)

Clutches
The 4-speed automatic transmission uses hydraulically-actuated clutches to engage or disengage the transmission
gears. When hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch drum, the clutch piston moves. This presses the friction
discs and steel plates together, locking them so they don't slip. Power is then transmitted through the engaged clutch
pack to its hub-mounted gear. Likewise, when the hydraulic pressure is bled from the clutch pack, the piston releases
the friction discs and the steel plates, and they are free to slide past each other. This allows the gear to spin
independently on its shaft, transmitting no power.
1st Clutch
The 1st clutch engages/disengages 1st gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 1st clutch is
joined back-to-back to the 2nd clutch. The 1st clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the
secondary shaft.
2nd Clutch
The 2nd clutch engages/disengages 2nd gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 2nd clutch is
joined back-to-back to the 1st clutch. The 2nd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the secondary shaft by a
circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
3rdClutch
The 3rd clutch engages/disengages 3rd gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The 3rd clutch is joined
back-to-back to the 4th clutch. The 3rd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the mainshaft.
4th Clutch
The 4th clutch engages/disengages 4th gear, as well as reverse gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The
4th clutch is joined back-to-back to the 3rd clutch. The 4th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe
within the mainshaft.
14-20 BACK
Protected by AR
Transmission Sectional View
MAINSHAFT 4TH CLUTCH

4TH GEAR ATF PUMP DRIVEN GEAR
MAINS HAFT
REVERSE GEAR
CONVERTER
REVERSE
SELECTOR
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
PARK GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
1ST GEAR
DIFFERENTIAL
ASSEMBLY
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
(cont'd)
BACK
14-21
Protected by AR
Power Flow
POSITION PART
TORQUE 1ST GEAR 2ND GEAR 3RDGEAR 4TH REVERSE PARK
CONVERTER 1ST CLUTCH 2ND 3RD GEAR CLUTCH GEAR GEAR
CLUTCH CLUTCH
lfl 0 x x x x x x 0
[RJ 0 x x x x 0 0 x
00 0 x x x x x x x
~ 1ST 0 0 x x x x x x
2ND 0 x 0 x x x x x
3RD 0 x x 0 x x x x
4TH 0 x x x 0 0 x x
~ 1ST 0 0 x x x x x x
2ND 0 x 0 x x x x x
3RD 0 x x 0 x x x x
00 0 x 0 x x x x x
[IJ 0 0 x x x x x x
O:Operates
X :Doesn't operate
Gear Operation
Gears on the mainshaft:
• 3rd gear is engaged/disengaged with the mainshaft by the 3rd clutch.

• 4th gear is engaged/disengaged with the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
• Reverse gear is engaged/disengaged with the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
• The idler gear is splined with the mainshaft and rotates with the mainshaft.
Gears on the countershaft
• The final drive gear is integral with the countershaft.

• 1st gear, 3rd gear, 2nd gear and park gear are splined with the countershaft, and rotate with the countershaft.
• 4th gear and reverse gear rotate freely from the countershaft. The reverse selector engages the 4th gear or the
reverse gear with the reverse selector hub. The reverse selector hub is splined with the countershaft so that the 4th
gear or reverse gear engage with the countershaft.
• The idler gear rotates freely from the counters haft.
Gears on the secondary shaft
• 1st gear is engaged/disengaged with the secondary shaft by the 1st clutch.
• 2nd gear is engaged/disengaged with the secondary shaft by the 2nd clutch.
• The idler gear is splined with the secondary shaft and rotates with the secondary shaft.
14-22 BACK
Protected by AR
[tJ Position
Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. The countershaft is
locked by the park pawl interlocking the park gear.
!RI Position
Engine power transmitted from the torque converter drives the mainshaft idler gear, the countershaft idler gear, and
the secondary shaft idler gear, but hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the
countershaft. The countershaft 4th gear is engaged with the reverse selector hub and the countershaft by the reverse
selector, when the shift lever is shifted in the [HJ position from the ~ position. The countershaft reverse gear is
engaged when shifted from the [R] position.
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
IDLER GEAR
I
MAI["SHAFT
_________ ~---f:!:~F--.=.J
PARK
G~~~~~IC3IF=~----t--c-,~~~
COUNTERSHAFT
~~~~~~~--~
SECONDARY
SHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
'DLERGEAR
(cont'd)
BACK 14-23
Protected by AR

Power Flow (cont'd)
~ or R!I Position
In ~ or ~ position, the optimum gear is automatically selected from the 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears, according to
conditions such as the balance between the throttle opening (engine loading) and vehicle speed.
IR!I or ~ Position in 1st gear and [II Position

o Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear with the
secondary shaft.
o The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear.
o The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft.
o Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.
MAINSHAFT IDLER GEAR COUNTERSHAFT

1ST GEAR
MAINSHAFT \
TORQUE CONVERTER
SECONDARY
SHAFT
1ST CLUTCH
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
14-24 BACK
Protected by AR
~ or ~ Position in 2nd gear and 00 Position

o Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, then the 2nd clutch engages the secondary shaft 2nd gear with the
secondary shaft.
o The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear.
o The secondary shaft 2nd gear drives the countershaft 2nd gear and the countershaft.
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
IDLER GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
'~
~ FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
(cont'd)
BACK
14-25
Protected by AR
Power Flow (cont'd)
~ or ~ Position In 3rd gear

• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 3rd clutch, then the 3rd clutch engages the mainshaft 3rd gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the countershaft 3rd gear and the countershaft.
• Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.
300\ i=n
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
-------------
COUNTERS HAFT
/
SECONDARY
SHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
3RDGEAR
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
14-26
BACK
Protected by AR
~ Position in 4th gear

• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft 4th gear while
the shift lever is in the forward range (~, ~, 00 and [IJ position).
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft 4th gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th gear, which drives the reverse selector hub and the countershaft.
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINS HAFT 4TH CLUTCH

4TH GEAR
/
MAINSHAFT
---------
COUNTERSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
- - - - - FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
(cont'd)
BACK
14-27
Protected by AR
Power Flow (cont'd)
!Rl Position
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft (reverse gear
while the shift lever is in the !Rl position).
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft reverse gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft reverse gear drives the countershaft reverse gear via the reverse idler gear.
• The rotation direction of the countershaft reverse gear is changed via the reverse idler gear.
• The countershaft reverse gear drives the countershaft via the reverse selector which drives the reverse selector hub.
TORQUE CONVERTER
4TH CLUTCH
MAINSHAFT
" "'-COUNTERSHAFT
~
REVERSE SELECTOR
~-----r-= ) HUB
~~~
~--REVERSE
REVERSE SELECTOR
IDLER GEAR
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
14-28 BACK
Protected by AR
Functional Diagram
The electronic control system consists of the Powertrain Control Model (PCM), sensors, and six solenoid valves.
PCM
I Throttle Position Sensor I I Data Link Connector

Signal
I
PGM-FI
I I
Control System
I Engine Coolant Temperature
Sensor Signal
II
----------._.----------------
AfT Control
System
Interlock IReverse Lock
Control Signal I Shift Control
I Solenoid Valve A
I
J Shift Control
r-Dl I
'- Solenoid Valve B
I
~
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL I Shift Control
UNIT,
DRIVER'S I Solenoid Valve C
I
Shift Control
I Automatic Transaxle Clutch
Pressure Control Solenoid
Valve A I
~+SHIFT
B - INDICATOR
04
l: Automatic Transaxle Clutch
Sequential
Sportshift Mode
03
1[1
I J
Pressure Control Solenoid
ValveB
2nd Clutch Pressure

I
I
e
Switch
2
Jr
3rd Clutch Pressure
1 l Switch
J
I Lock-up Control
AfT Shift Switch
Lock-up Control
I Solenoid Valve
I
I
I Mode Switch
I I Mainshaft Speed Sensor
I Signal
J
I I
I Shift Switch 1+ 1-)
I
I
Countershaft Speed
Sensor Signal
I
-1 ;jJ Indicator
I I
I
Cruise Control Unit
(downshift request)
I
-1 Self-Diagnosis Signal
I
I
II Self-Diagnosis
Function
I
(cont'd)
BACK
14-29
Protected by AR
System Description (co nt'd)

Electronic Controls Location
KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID
MULTIPLEX CONTROL POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)

UNIT (DRIVER'S)
A/T SHIFT SWITCH SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
PARK PIN SWITCH
COUNTERSHAFT SPEED SENSOR

SHIFT LOCK RELAY
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A/B ASSEMBLY
MAINSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR
LOCK-UP CONTROL SOLENOID

VALVE/SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A ASSEMBLY
3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE
SHIFT CONTROL SWITCH
SOLENOID VALVE B SHIFT CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE C
14-30 BACK
Protected by AR
Shift Control
Shifting is related to engine torque through the solenoid valves, which are controlled by the PCM. The PCM instantly
determines which gear should be selected by various signals sent from sensors, and actuates the shift control
solenoid valves A. B, and C to control shifting. Also, a Grade Logic Control System has been adopted to control
shifting in the ~ position while the vehicle is ascending or descending a slope, or reducing speed.
The combination of driving signals to shift control solenoid valves A. B, and C are shown in the table below.
Position Gear position Shift control solenoid valves

A B C
IP;J,~ ShiftinQ from the IHl position ON ON ON
Stays in 1st OFF ON ON
ShiftinQ gears between 1st and 2nd ON ON ON
Stays in 2nd ON ON OFF
Shifting gears between 2nd and 3rd ON OFF OFF
Stays in 3rd ON OFF ON
~ Shifting gears between 3rd and 4th OFF OFF ON
Stays in 4th OFF OFF OFF
00 2nd ON ON OFF
m 1st OFF ON ON
1RJ Shifting from the [f] and IHl position OFF ON ON
Stays in reverse OFF ON OFF
Reverse inhibit OFF ON · ON
[f] Park OFF ON OFF
IHl Neutral OFF ON OFF
NOTE: For a description of the reverse inhibit mode, refer to page 14-56.
Lock-up Control
The lock-up control solenoid valve controls modulator pressure to switch the lock-up shift valve and lock-up ON and
OFF. The PCM controls the lock-up control solenoid valve and the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B.
When the lock-up control solenoid valve is turned ON, the condition of lock-up starts. The AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valves A and B regulate AfT clutch pressure control solenoid pressure and apply the pressure to the lock-up
control valve and the lock-up timing valve. The lock-up control mechanism operates in 3rd and 4th gear in the ~, and
in 3rd gear in the ~ positions.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-31
Protected by AR
Electronic Control System (cont'd)

Grade Logic Control System
How it works:
The PCM compares actual driving conditions with memorized driving conditions, based on the input from the
countershaft speed sensor, the throttle position sensor, the engine coolant temperature sensor, the brake switch
signal, and the shift level position signal, to control shifting while the vehicle is ascending or descending a slope, or
reducing speed.
SENSORS/SWITCHES SIGNALS DETECTED PCM
H Countershaft Speed } -
Sensor
III
c::
HThrottle Position
Sensor }- Driving Resistance
r--t-
.-t-
I
Judgement of Controlling Area
I
.S!
.1:: I
'0
c:: Detection of
0 Calculation standard Calculation
tJ of actual of decelera-
CII acceleration
c:: acceleration (in Memoryl tion
'>
·c
Q
HEngine Coolant
Temperature Sensor Coolant Temperature}--
1
Calculation of gradient
1
I
'----
HAfT Gear Position
Switch ~ or ~ Position
I
I
I
Selection of Shifting Mode
o Normal Mode (Flat road model

o Ascending Mode
Gradual ascending mode
o
o Medium ascending mode
o Steep ascending mode
o Descending mode
o Gradual descending mode
o Steep descending mode
o Deceleration Mode
I
Automatic 4 Speed Transmission
J
14-32 BACK
Protected by AR
Ascending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is climbing a hill in ~ and ~ positions, the system extends the
engagement area of 2nd gear and 3rd gear to prevent the transmission from frequently shifting between 2nd and 3rd
gears, and between 3rd and 4th gears, so the vehicle can run smooth and have more power when needed.
NOTE: Shift schedules stored in the PCM between 2nd and 3rd gears, and between 3rd and 4th gears, enable to
automatically select the most suitable gear according to the magnitude of a gradient.
100%
ASCENDING MODE: Upshift Schedule

- - - : FLAT ROAD MODE
• - - - - - _. : GRADUAL ASCENDING MODE
_ .. _ .. _ .. : MEDIUM ASCENDING MODE
................... : STEEP ASCENDING MODE
o
62 mph Vehicle speed
(100km/hl
Descending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is going down a hill in ~ and ~ positions, the shift-up speed from 3rd to
4th gear and from 2nd to 3rd (when the throttle is closed) becomes faster than the set speed for flat road driving to
widen the 3rd gear and 2nd gear driving areas. This, in combination with engine braking from the deceleration lock-up,
achieves smooth driving when the vehicle is descending. There are two descending modes with different 3rd gear
driving areas and 2nd gear driving areas according to the magnitude of a gradient stored in the PCM. When the
vehicle is in 4th gear, and you are decelerating when you are applying the brakes on a steep hill, the transmission will
downshift to 3rd gear. When you accelerate, the transmission will then return to higher gear.
100%
DESCENDING MODE: Downshift Schedule

g'
';:
Il
8' 50
Il • - - - - - - - : GRADUAL DESCENDING MODE
J _ .. _ .. - .. : STEEP DESCENDING MODE
o
62 mph Vehicle speed
(100 km/hl
Deceleration Control
When the vehicle goes around a corner, and needs to decelerate first and then accelerate, the PCM sets the data for
deceleration control to reduce the number oftimes the transmission shifts. When the vehicle is decelerating from
speeds above 27 mph (43 km/h), the PCM shifts the transmission from 4th to 2nd earlier than normal to cope with
upcoming acceleration.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-33
Protected by AR
PCM Electrical Connections _ConboI_

IGNITION
IA ~y
} ~
.D:t [ -
~IGI ~-
r-
os
12
va SOl
PG'
LSAP
117
j NT CUlT~ "'ESSUIIE
CONTROL SOLENOID
t:
"'"'"'-D- VALVE A
PG2 II
PGM-FI LSAM
J
MAIN
RELAY LS lIP 125
I.
- 1GP1 NT CUITCH PfIESSURE
L-
L!!. IGP2
LSIII •••
CONTROl SOLENOID
VALVE.
12.
~ ~ VBU 07
SHA
.-~~ ~
~ IKSW SHiFT CONTROL
SOl£NOID VALVE A
"-N(EUGKI ~
D2
AS SHB
CRUISE CONTROL
UN.T
J
CRS
~;:l SHIFT CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE.
ISClJoIIT
AU ATSFT~
03
TIT
J SHC
OATALINI( A'D
~ Sl!1FT CONTROL
SOlENOr> VALVE C
CCHlECTOR scs
LC
D'
-dr
GAUGE ASSE. . LY
MULTIPLEX CONTROL
UNIT (ORIVER·S) J
A2.
lUI
i!! LOCK·UfO CONTI!OL
SOlEPOO VALVE
E6
.,},-
~n ~
LED A
NM
lDU
E5
~~~
LED.
L
INDICATOR
E6
LEOC
0.2
SP!;EDOIIETER AS VSSOUT NMSG
CIRCUIT I
NC 0'0
AfT GEAA POSITION INDICATOR <$~_FT
""" SPE.EOSE~
j0$~$¢ NCSG
l D15
1C2i
VCC2
I C27 J THIIDTTLE
P J TPS POSITION
J
7r -:. I
[ ell SENSOII
'.AII/. R DIi
ATPR SG2
4-~J
D4
A1PN
D9
ATPO.
0, DI TEMPEMlURE
C26 SENSOR
ATPD, EeT
2 D" ATP2
r( 1 0.5
"4
ATP 1
ATPNP
0I'2SW
~~
2NDCUITCH
PRESSURE SWIT~
D. NlICATOR
LIGHT @ A14
D41ND
0. J lIIlCLUTCH
I'RESSURE SWITCH
NT SHIfT SWITCH
S-IIOOE SWITCH
E9
0I'3SW
~~
s.uooe
E7 LG' ,~
SHIFT SWITCH ~ S·ON
EI LG2 122
SOUP
7i 'T TIT
PCMeor...T_~
A~ • (25P) C(3'~) 0(111') E('2I')
14-34 BACK
Protected by AR
PCM Inputs and Outputs

The PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions for the AfT control system are shown. Other PCM terminal
voltage and measuring conditions are described in section 11.
PCM Connector Terminal Locations
/
1/l2 34
=;==
567
--
8 9 10 111 1 2
~
34 5 ""''''''"8]
67811234
=;==
567 re910 "1 =;==m
2 3 4 5
~
~2113 415VI 8 9 2021 V23 24J 9 10 l11Z /14 15V 1718\ V 121~ 14V 1617 1819 2021 zz 67 89 10111121
~~~ I2azs 30 31 ~ ~~ ~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~~ '-'- Z930V 131415 ~
.... -'--
miliJZ1Zt21
A (32P) B(25P) C (31P) D(16P) E (12P)
Terminal Wire Signal Description Measuring Conditions/Terminal Voltage

Number
A5 BlU/GRN CRS Downshift signal input from When cruise control is used: About 1V
cruise control unit
A9 BlU/WHT VSS Vehicle speed signal detected Depending on vehicle speed: Pulsing signal
OUT from countershaft speed sensor,
and sent to speedometer and
odometer
A10 BRN SCS Timing and adjustment service With ignition switch ON (II) and data link
check signal connector open: 5 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and data link
connector connected with Honda PGM tester:
OV
A14 GRN/BlK D41ND D4 indicator control When ignition switch is first turned ON (II):
Approx. 7 V for 2 seconds
In the ~ position: About 7 V
A28 WHT/RED IlU Interlock control With ignition switch ON (II), brake pedal
depressed, and accelerator pedal released:
Battery voltage
A32 WHT/BlK BKSW Brake switch signal output Brake pedal depressed: Battery voltage
Brake pedal released: 0 V
(cont'd)
BACK
14-35
Protected by AR

~m
/
~ ~ r-r-f81 !=-;=;::: r-r-'i( r-
~
IVl2 3 4 567 8910 111r;-'2 34 5 678111234 567 8 91 1 2 3 4 5
1~2113 1415 V1 18 9 20 21 1/23 241 9 10 11121/ 14 151/ 12 1~ 1~V 1617 1819 20 21 122
171a11/ 6 7 89 10111121
~~~ ~29 30 31 ~ ~~ ~~ ~~@2 ~IL~ ~~~ ~~[2 ~~~ ~ rTIili:0Z0
A (32P) B(25P) C(31P) D(16P) E (12P)

Number
B1 YEL/BLK IGP1 Power supply circuit from main With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
relay With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
B2 BLK PG1 Ground
B8 WHT LSAM AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A power supply
negative electrode
B9 YEL/BLK IGP2 Power supply circuit from main With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
B10 BLK PG2 Ground
B14 BLU/WHT ATPNP AfT gear position switch [f] and In the [f] and [HJ positions: 0 V
[HJ positions input In other than the [f] and [HJ position: Battery
voltage
B17 RED LSAP AfT clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (II): Pulsing signal
positive electrode
B18 GRN LSBM AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve B power supply
negative electrode
B20 BRN/BLK LG1 Ground
B21 WHT/YEL VBU Back-up power supply Always battery voltage
B22 BRN/BLK LG2 Ground
B24 WHT/RED OP3SW AfT 3rd clutch pressure switch With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
signal input (No 3rd clutch pressure)
B25 ORN LS BP AfT clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (II): Pulsing signal
..
positive ell:lctrode ----
BACK
14-36
Protected by AR
PCM CONNECTOR D (16P)

Number
D1 VEL LC Lock-up control solenoid valve During half and full lock-up conditions, and
control during deceleration condition: Battery voltage
Duringno lock-up condition: 0 V
D2 GRN/WHT SH B Shift control solenoid valve B Battery voltage in these positions:
control • rn,oo.
• ~,and ~ in 1st and 2nd gear
• (fJ, Ift), and [H]
o V in these positions:
• ~,and ~ in 3rd gear
• ~ in 4th gear
D3 GRN SHC Shift control solenoid valve C Battery voltage in these positions:
control ·rn
• ~,and ~ in 1st and 3rd gear
·00
• ~,and ~ in 2nd gear
• ~ in 4th gear
• (fJ, Ift), and [H]
D4 REO/BlK ATPN AfT gear position switch [H] In the [H] position: 0 V
position input In other than the [H] position: Battery voltage
D5 BlK/YEl VB SOL Power supply for solenoid With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
valves (Fuse No.6 in driver's With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
under-dash fuse/relay box)
D6 WHT ATPR AfT gear position switch 1ft) In the 1ft) position: 0 V
position input In other than the [RJ position: Battery voltage
D7 BlU/YEl SHA Shift control solenoid valve A Battery voltage in these positions:
control ·00
• ~,and ~ in 2nd and 3rd gear
·rn
• ~,and ~ in 1st gear
• ~ in 4th gear
• (fJ, [RJ, and [H]
08 PNK ATPD3 AfT gear position switch ~ In the ~ position: 0 V
position input In other than the ~ position: Battery voltage
D9 VEL ATPD4 AfT gear position switch ~ In the ~ position: 0 V
D10 BlU NC Countershaft speed sensor Depending on vehicle speed: Pulsing signal
input When vehicle is stopped: About 0 V
011 RED NM Mainshaft speed sensor input Depending on vehicle speed: Pulsing signal
When engine is stopped: About 0 V
012 WHT NMSG Mainshaft speed sensor ground
013 BlU/BlK OP2SW AfT 2nd clutch pressure switch With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
signal input (No 2nd clutch pressure)
014 BlU ATP2 AfT gear position switch 00 In the 00 position: 0 V
position input In other than the 00 position: Battery voltage
D15 BRN ATP 1 AfT gear position switch rn In the rn position: 0 V
position input In other than the rn
position: Battery voltage
D16 GRN NCSG Countershaft speed sensor
ground
(cont'd)
BACK
14-37
Protected by AR

/
~ r--~ ~ . . . r-rBl ~ ..... r-Tc ..... ~m
iVJ2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111 1 2 345 67811234
~2113 1415V1 18 9 2021 123 241 9 10 1112 1-4 1511 V
567
171a117
8 91 1 2 3 4 5
1 1~ 1·17 1617 1819 2021 22 6 7 8 9 1011h21
~
~~~ j2f29 30 31 ~ ~~ ~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~~~ ~'-"- 29 3011 131415 ~
I...,;~'-
miliJ21Zt21
A (32P) B(25P) C (31P) D(16P) E (12P)

Number
E4 BLU/BLK LEDC Shift indicator control In sequential sportshift mode:
• 1st and 3rd gear positions: Battery voltage
• 2nd and 4th gear positions: 0 V
E5 BLU/GRN LEDB Shift indicator control In sequential sportshift mode:
• 2nd and 3rd gear positions: Battery voltage
• 1st and 4th gear positions: 0 V
E6 BLU/RED LEDA Shift indicator control In sequential sportshift mode:
• 4th gear position: Battery voltage
• 1st, 2nd, and 3rd Qear positions: 0 V
E7 ORN S-DN Downshift switch signal input In sequential sportshift mode and shift lever
pushed toward downshift position (marked
with" - H): 0 V
neutral position: 5 V
E8 VEL S-UP Upshift switch signal input In sequential sportshift mode and shift lever
pushed toward upshift position (marked with
"+"):OV
neutral position: 5 V
E9 RED S-MODE Sequential sportshift AfT shift In sequential sportshift mode (shift lever is
switch signal input positioned in sequential sportshift mode): 0 V
'------ - - - --- -- --- - -- -- -----
In other than sequential ~ortshift mode: 5 V
14-38 BACK
Protected by AR
Hydraulic Controls
The valve body includes the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the servo body and the accumulator body. The
ATF pump is driven by splines on the left end of the torque converter which is attached to the engine. Fluid flows
through the regulator valve to maintain specified pressure through the main valve body to the manual valve, directing
pressure to each of the clutches. The shift control solenoid valves 8 and C are mounted on the outside of the torque
converter housing. The shift control solenoid valve A and the lock-up control solenoid valve are mounted on the
torque converter housing as an assembly. The AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B are mounted on the
transmission housing.
w---------------
~ 3RDCLUTCH
PRESSURE SWITCH
SERVO BODY
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVES A and B
/
/REGULATOR VALVE BODY
SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID

/VALVEC
MAIN VALVE BODY

~LOCK-UP CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE/SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A ASSEMBLY
ACCUMULATOR BODY
(cont'd)
BACK 14-39
Protected by AR
Hydraulic Controls (cont'd)

Main Valve Body
The main valve body contains the manual valve, the modulator valve, the shift valve C, the shift valve D, the shift valve
E, the servo control valve, the cooler check valve, the torque converter check valve, the reverse CPC valve, the lock-up
shift valve, the relief valve, and the ATF pump gears. The primary function of the main valve body is to switch fluid
pressure on and off and to control hydraulic pressure going to the hydraulic control system.
MODULATOR VALVE SHIFT VALVE D
SHIFT VALVE E
LOCK-UP SHIFT VALVE
COOLER CHECK VALVE

SERVO CONTROL VALVE "-
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE
Regulator Valve Body
The regulator valve body is located on the main valve body. The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the
lock-up timing valve, and the lock-up control valve.
REGULATOR VALVE BODY
~-o
LOCK-UP CONTROL VALVE
LOCK-UP TIMING VALVE
14-40 BACK
Protected by AR
Regulator Valve
The regulator valve maintains constant hydraulic pressure from the ATF pump to the hydraulic control system, while
also furnishing fluid to the lubricating system and torque converter. Fluid from the ATF pump flows through Band B'.
Fluid entering from B flows through the valve orifice to the A cavity. This pressure of the A cavity pushes the regulator
valve to the right side, and this movement of the regulator valve uncovers the fluid port to the torque converter and
the relief valve. The fluid flows out to the torque converter and the relief valve, and the regulator valve moves to the
left side. According to the level of the hydraulic pressure through B, the position of the regulator valve changes, and
the amount of fluid from B' through torque converter changes. This operation is continued, maintaining the line
pressure.
NOTE: When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the illustration below.
From ATF PUMP
VALVE
To TORQUE CONVERTER
t jt To LUBRICATION
ORIFICE
REGULATOR VALVE
Increases in hydraulic pressure according to torque are performed by the regulator valve using stator torque reaction.
The stator shaft is splined with the stator in the torque converter, and its arm end contacts the regulator spring cap.
When the vehicle is accelerating or climbing (Torque Converter Range), stator torque reaction acts on the stator shaft,
and the stator arm pushes the regulator spring cap in the direction of the arrow in proportion to the reaction. The
stator reaction spring compresses, and the regulator valve moves to increase the line pressure which is regulated by
the regulator valve. The line pressure reaches its maximum when the stator torque reaction reaches its maximum.
TORQUE CONVERTER
STATOR
STATOR SHAFT ARM STATOR SHAFT
(cont'd)
BACK
14-41
Protected by AR
Servo Body
The servo body is on the main valve body. It contains the servo valve, the shift valve A, the shift valve B, the CPC
valves A and B, and the 3rd and the 4th accumulators.
SHIFTVALVEB
SERVO VALVE
3RD ACCUMULATOR PISTON
Accumulator Body
The accumulator body is on the torque converter housing, next to the main valve body. It contains the 1st and the 2nd
accumulators, and the lubrication check valve.
LUBRICATION CHECK VALVE

2ND ACCUMULATOR PISTON
ACCUMULATOR BODY 1ST ACCUMULATOR PISTON
BACK
14-42
Protected by AR
Hydraulic Flow
Distribution of Hydraulic Pressure
As the engine turns, the ATF pump starts to operate. Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is drawn through the ATF
strainer (filter) and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, ATF flowing from the ATF pump becomes line pressure
that's regulated by the regulator valve. Torque converter pressure from the regulator valve enters the torque converter
through the lock-up shift valve and it is discharged from the torque converter. The torque converter check valve
prevents torque converter pressure from rising.
The PCM controls the shift control solenoid valves ON and OFF, and the shift control solenoid valves control shift
solenoid pressure to the shift valves. Applying shift control solenoid pressure to the shift valves moves the position of
the shift valve, and switches the port of hydraulic pressure. The PCM also controls AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valves A and B. The AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves regulate the AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid pressure and apply the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid pressure to CPC valves A and B.
When shifting between upper gear and lower gear, the clutch is engaged by pressure from the CPC pressure mode.
The PCM controls one of the shift control solenoid valves to move the position of the shift valve. This movement
switches the port of the CPC and line pressure. Line pressure is then applied to the clutch, and the CPC pressure is
intercepted. Engaging the clutch with line pressure happens when shifting is completed.
Hydraulic pressure at the ports is as follows:
PORT DESCRIPTION OF PORT DESCRIPTION OF PORT DESCRIPTION OF

NO. PRESSURE NO. PRESSURE NO. PRESSURE
1 LINE 5H CPC B or LINE 57 LS B
3 LINE 5J CPC B or LINE 58 LS Aor LS B
3' LINE 5K CPC B or LINE 90 TORQUE CONVERTER
3" LINE 5K' CPC B or LINE 90' TORQUE CONVERTER
4 LINE 6 MODULATE 91 TORQUE CONVERTER
4' LINE SA SHA 91' TORQUE CONVERTER
4" LINE SB SHB 92 TORQUE CONVERTER
4A CPCA SC SHC 93 ATFCOOLER
4B CPCB LA LC 94 TORQUE CONVERTER
5A CPCA 9 LINE 95 LUBRICATION
5D CPCB 10 1ST CLUTCH 95' LUBRICATION
58 CPCAor LINE 20 2ND CLUTCH 96 TORQUE CONVERTER
5E CPC A or LINE 25 LINE 97 TORQUE CONVERTER
5F CPC Aor LINE 30 3RDCLUTCH 99 SUCTION
5F' CPC Aor LINE 40 4TH CLUTCH X DRAIN
5C CPC B or LINE 41 4TH CLUTCH HX HIGH POSITION DRAIN
5G CPC B or LINE 56 LSA AX AIR DRAIN
NOTE:
• CPC: Clutch Pressure Control pressure
• SH: Shift Control Solenoid pressure
• LS: AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid pressure
• LC: Lock-up Control Solenoid pressure
(cont'd)
BACK 14-43
Protected by AR
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
/HI Position
The PCM controls the shift control solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift control solenoid valve and positions of
the shift valve are as follows:
• The shift control solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and the shift valve A is moved to the left side.
• The shift control solenoid valve B is turned ON, and the shift valve B remains in the right side.
• The shift control solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and the shift valve C remains in the left side.
Line pressure (,) passes through the manual valve and stops at shift valve D. Line pressure (') also flows to the
modulator valve, and becomes modulator pressure (6). Modulator pressure (6) flows to the shift control solenoid
valves and the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves. Under this condition, hydraulic pressure is not applied to
the clutches.
NOTE: When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
BACK
14-44
Protected by AR
~ Position: 1st gear shifting from IHl position

The PCM turns the shift control solenoid valves A and C ON when shifting to ~ position from 1Hl. Shift control
solenoid valve B remains ON. Shift control solenoid valve C is turned ON, and SH C pressure (SC) in the right side of
the shift valve C is released, then the shift valve C is moved to the right side. Shift control solenoid valve A is turned
ON, and SH A pressure (SA) in the left side of the shift valve A is released, then shift valve A is moved to the right side.
The AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A regulates LS A pressure (56) and applies it to CPC valve A. Line
pressure (1) becomes line pressure (4) at the manual valve, and flows to shift valve C and CPC valve A. Line pressure
(4) becomes CPC A pressure (4A) and passes through shift valve C, A, and B, then CPC A pressure (4A) becomes 1st
clutch pressure (10) at shift valve B. 1st clutch pressure (10) is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch is engaged
with pressure of the CPC pressure mode. Line pressure (4) passes through shift valve A and B, then stops at shift valve
B.
NOTE: When used, "Ieft" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-45
Protected by AR
~ Position: Driving in 1st gear

The PCM turns shift control solenoid valve A OFF, but shift control solenoid valves Band C remain ON. SH A pressure
(SA) is applied to the left side of shift valve A, then shift valve A is moved to the left side. This movement switches the
port of line pressure and CPC pressure on shift valve A. The 1st clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode, and
the 1st clutch is engaged securely. CPC A pressure (5E) stops at shift valve B.
14-46
BACK
Protected by AR
~ Position: Shifting between 1st gear and 2nd gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift control solenoid valve A OFF. Shift
control solenoid valves Band C remain ON. Then shift control solenoid valve A is turned ON, and SH A pressure (SA)
in the left side of the shift valve A is released. Shift valve A is moved to the right side to switch the port of line pressure
and CPC pressure. The PCM also controls the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid valves A and B apply their pressure to the CPC valves A and B. Line pressure (4) becomes CPC B
pressure (4B) at the CPC valve B, and CPC B pressure passes through shift valves C, B, and A, to become 2nd clutch
pressure. The 1st and 2nd clutches are engaged with the CPC pressure mode.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-47
Protected by AR
~ Position: Driving in 2nd gear

The PCM turns shift control solenoid valve C OFF, and controls AfT clutch pressure control solnoid valve A to release
LS A pressure (56). Shift control solenoid valves A and B remain ON. Releasing LS A pressure in the CPC valve A
releases CPC A pressure in the 1st clutch pressure circuit. Shift control solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and SH C
pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of shift valve C. Then shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the port
of line pressure and CPC pressure. The 2nd clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode, and the 2nd clutch is
engaged securely. The CPC B pressure (5D) stops at shift valve B.
NOTE: When used, "left" or "right" indicate direction on the hydraulic circuit.
14-48
BACK
Protected by AR
~ Position: Shifting between 2nd gear and 3rd gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift control solenoid valve B OFF. The PCM
also controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to apply LS A pressure (56) to CPC valve A. Shift control
solenoid valve A remains ON, and C remains OFF. Shift control solenoid valve B is turned OFF, and SH B pressure (SB)
is applied to the right side of shift valve B. Then shift valve B is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure
and CPC pressure. Line pressure (4) becomes CPC A pressure (4A) at the CPC valve A. The CPC A pressure (4A)
becomes 3rd clutch pressure (30) at shift valve B, and flows to the 3rd clutch. The 2nd clutch pressure is changed to
CPC pressure mode by switching the position of shift valve B.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-49
Protected by AR
~ Position: Driving in 3rd gear

The PCM turns the shift control solenoid valve C ON, and controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to
release LS B pressure (57). Shift control solenoid valve A remains ON, and B remains OFF. Releasing LS B pressure in
the CPC valve B releases CPC B pressure in the 2nd clutch pressure circuit. Shift control solenoid valve C is turned ON,
and SH C pressure (SC) in the right side of shift valve C is released. Then shift valve C is moved to the right side to
switch the port line pressure and CPC pressure. The 3rd clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode, and the 3rd
clutch is engaged securely. The CPC A pressure (4A) stops at shift valve E.
BACK
14-50
Protected by AR
~ Position: Shifting between 3rd gear and 4th gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift control solenoid valve A OFF. The PCM
also controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to apply LS B pressure (57) to CPC valve B. Shift control
solenoid valve B remains OFF, and C remains ON. Shift control solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and SH A pressure
(SA) is applied to the left side of shift valve A. Then shift valve A is moved to the left side to switch line pressure and
CPC pressure. Line pressure (4) becomes CPC B pressure (4B) at CPC valve B. The CPC B pressure (4B) becomes 4th
clutch pressure (41) at shift valve D, and flows to the 4th clutch via the manual valve. The 3rd clutch pressure is
changed to CPC pressure mode by switching the position of shift valve A.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-51
Protected by AR
~ Position: Driving in 4th gear

The PCM turns shift control solenoid valve C OFF, and controls NT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to release
LS A pressure (56). Shift control solenoid valves A and B remain OFF. Releasing LS A pressure (56) releases CPC A
pressure in the 3rd clutch pressure circuit. Shift control solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is
applied to the right side of shift valve C. Then shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure
and CPC pressure.
The CPC B pressure (5B) changes to line pressure (5B) at shift valve C, and flows to the 4th clutch via shift valve B, shift
valve C, shift valve 0, and the manual valve. The 4th clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode by switching
the position of shift valve C, and 4th clutch is engaged securely. The CPC B pressure (50) stops at shift valve A.
BACK
14-52
Protected by AR
00 Position
The PCM controls the shift control solenoid valves and the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions
of the shift control solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valve are as follows:
• Shift control solenoid valve A is turned ON, and the shift valve A is in the right side.
• Shift control solenoid valve B is turned ON, and the shift valve B is in the right side.
• Shift control solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and the shift valve C is moved to the left side.
The PCM also controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to apply LS B pressure (57) to CPC valve B. Line
pressure (4) from the manual valve becomes line pressure (5C) at shift valve C. Line pressure (5C) flows to shift valve
A via shift valve B, and becomes 2nd clutch pressure (20). The 2nd clutch pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, and
2nd clutch is engaged.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-53
Protected by AR
[IJ Position
The PCM controls the shift control solenoid valves and the NT clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions
of the shift control solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valve are as follows:
• Shift control solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and the shift valve A is moved to the left side.
• Shift control solenoid valve 8 is turned ON, and the shift valve 8 is in the right side.
• Shift control solenoid valve C is turned ON, and the shift valve C is in the right side.
Line pressure (4) becomes line pressure (58) at shift valve C. Line pressure (5C) flows to shift valve 8 via shift valve A,
and becomes 1st clutch pressure (10). 1st clutch pressure (10) is applied to the 1st clutch, then 1st clutch is engaged.
14-54 BACK
Protected by AR
[RJ Position: Shifting to [RJ position from [tJ or [fj] position

Line pressure (1) becomes line pressure (3) at the manual valve, and flows to the reverse CPC valve. Line pressure (3)
is regulated by the reverse CPC valve and becomes line pressure (3'). Line pressure (3') pushes the servo valve to the
reverse position, passes through the servo valve, and flows to the manual valve. Line pressure (3') becomes 4th clutch
pressure (40). The 4th clutch pressure (40) is applied to the 4th clutch, and 4th clutch is engaged with the reverse CPC
pressure mode.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-55
Protected by AR
IBl Position: Driving in reverse gear

The PCM turns shift control solenoid valve C OFF. Shift control solenoid valve A remains OFF, and B remains ON. Shift
control solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of the reverse CPC valve.
Then the reverse CPC valve moves to the left side, creating full line pressure. Line pressure to the 4th clutch is same as
in shifting to IBl position, and 4th clutch pressure increases. The 4th clutch is engaged with line pressure mode.
Reverse Inhibitor Control

When the IBl position is selected while the vehicle is moving forward at speed over 6 mph (10 km/h), the PCM outputs
the 1st speed signal to turn the shift control solenoid valve C ON; shift control solenoid valve A remains OFF, and shift
control solenoid valve B remains ON. The reverse CPC valve is moved to right side and covers the port to stop the line
pressure (3') to the servo valve. The line pressure (3') is not applied to the servo valve, and the 4th clutch pressure (40)
is not applied to the 4th clutch. As a result, power is not transmitted to the reverse position.
BACK
14-56
Protected by AR
[f] Position
Shift control solenoid valve C is turned OFF by the PCM, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of the
reverse CPC valve. Then the reverse CPC valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port leading line pressure (3) to
the servo valve. Line pressure (3') passes through the servo valve and flows to the manual valve. Line pressure (3') is
intercepted atthe manual valve, and is not applied to the clutches.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-57
Protected by AR
Lock-up System
In the ~ position (3rd and 4th), and ~ position (3rd), pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter
through a fluid passage, causing the lock-up piston to be held against the torque converter cover, As this takes place,
the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together with hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes
the timing of the lock-up mechanism. When the lock-up control solenoid valve activates, modulator pressure changes
to switch lock-up ON and OFF. The lock-up control valve and the lock-up timing valve control the range of lock-up
according to Aff clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. The lock-up control solenoid valve is mounted on
the torque converter housing, and Aff clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B are mounted on the
transmission housing. They are controlled by the PCM.
General Operation
1. Operation (clutch on)
With the lock-up clutch on, fluid in the chamber between the torque converter cover and the lock-up piston is
drained off, and the converter fluid exerts pressure through the piston against the torque converter cover. As a
result, the converter turbine is locked to the converter cover. The effect is to bypass the converter, placing the
vehicle in direct drive.
IPower flow I
The pow... flows by way of:
E~glne
Df'eplate
Tirque converter cover
TORQUE "n"v~~A
L<jCk·UP piston COVER
DTmper spring
Turbine
I
Mainlh8lt
MAINSHAFT
2. Operation (clutch off)

With the lock-up clutch off, fluid flows in the reverse of CLUTCH ON. As a result, the lock-up piston moves away
from the converter cover, and torque converter lock-up is released.
IPowe,flow I
E~gine
D1vePIata
T'l,qua converter cover
P~mp
Turbine
I
Malnohalt
BACK
14-58
Protected by AR
No Lock-up
The lock-up control solenoid valve is turned OFF by the PCM. The lock-up shift valve receives LC pressure (LA) on the
left side, and modulator pressure (6) on the right side. The lock-up shift valve is in the right side to uncover the port
leading torque converter pressure (92) to the left side of the torque converter. Torque converter pressure (92) becomes
torque converter pressure (94), and enters into the left side of the torque converter to disengage the lock-up clutch.
The lock-up clutch is OFF.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-59
Protected by AR
Lock-up System (cont'd)
Partial Lock-up
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the lock-up control solenoid valve is turned ON by the PCM
to release LC pressure (LA) in the left side of the lock-up shift valve. The lock-up shift valve is moved to the left side to
switch the port leading torque converter pressure to the left side and right side of the torque converter. Torque
converter pressure (92) flows to the right side of the torque converter to engage the lock-up clutch. The PCM also
controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B, and LS A or LS B pressure is applied to the lock-up
control valve and the lock-up timing valve. The position of the lock-up control valve depends on torque converter
pressure and LS A or LS B pressure. When LS A or LS B pressure (58) is lower, torque converter pressure (92) from the
regulator valve passes through the lock-up control valve, and flows to the left side of the torque converter to
disengage the lock-up clutch. LS A and LS B pressure increase, and higher pressure is applied to the lock-up control
valve to release torque converter back pressure. Torque converter back pressure goes lower, and this allows a greater
amount of pressure to work on the lock-up clutch to engage the lock-up clutch. Under this condition, the lock-up clutch
is controlled by pressure from the right side (to engage the lock-up clutch) and the left side (to disengage the lock-up
clutch); the lock-up clutch is in partial lock-up condition.
~IIIIXIULATOII"'UUfIE
"UA.LI'~
' 'COOUII
BACK
14-60
Protected by AR
Full Lock-up
When the vehicle speed further increases, the PCM controls AIT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B to
increase LS A or LS B pressure (58). The LS A or LS B pressure (58) is applied to the lock-up control valve and the lock-
up timing valve, and moves them to the left side. Under this condition, torque converter back pressure (F2) is released
fully, causing the lock-up clutch to be fully engaged.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-61
Protected by AR
Shift Lever/Sequential Sportshift Mode Mechanism

The shift lever has eight position: [l], [8], IH], ~, ~, 00, Wpositions, and the sequential sportshift mode position. The
shift lever shifts between positions along the gate in the AfT gear position indicator panel. The shift lever can shift out
of the [l] position and into the [8] position without depressing the shift lever. The shift lock/reverse lock mechanism is
an additional shift lever lockout mechanism.
The shift lever is engaged with the shift cable bracket in [l], [8], IH], ~, ~, 00, and W. This unit shifts the transmission
using the shift cable connected between the shift cable bracket and the transmission control shaft.
In the sequential sportshift mode position, the shift lever is disengaged from the cable bracket, and the shift lever can
be used to shift gears electronically between 1st through 4th, much like a manual transmission.
SHIFT LEVER
SHIFT CABLE
DETENT PLUNGER
j
AfT GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE
SHIFT LOCK STOP
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
AfT SHIFT SWITCH
LOCK LEVER REVERSE LOCK STOP
14-62 BACK
Protected by AR
When the shift lever shifts to the sequential sportshift mode position, the shift lever releases the lock lever, and the
lock lever pops up to engage the shift cable bracket to the detent bracket; the shift cable bracket and the shifting
positions in the transmission are held in the ~ position.
The lock lever receives its spring load, pops up in the sequential sportshift mode position, and is depressed by the
shift lever and does not engage the shift cable bracket to the shift lever base bracket in any position except sequential
sportshift mode.
SHIFT LEVER
AfT SHIFT SWITCH y S " ' F T CABLE BRACKET
~
r.-o>------ DETENT BRACKET
lOCK LEVER
The shift lever fits into the sequential sportshift mode position by using a detent plunger with a spring. When shifting
up or down, the detent plunger is depressed by the detent bracket inner wall, and the detent plunger spring puts the
shift lever back into the neutral position. The detent plunger also works in the [tJ position.
SEQUENTIAL SPORTSHIFT
MODE POSITION
SHIFT LEVER
DETENT PLUNGER SPRING
AfT SHIFT SWITCH
(cont'd)
BACK
14-63
Protected by AR
Shift Lock/Reverse Lock Mechanism

The shift lock system reduces the risk of unintentional engine starting. Starting the engine is possible only in the III
and IHl positions. The shift lock system and the key interlock system make up the interlock control system. The key
interlock mechanism is located in the steering lock assembly.
The shift lock mechanism consists of the shift lock solenoid, shift lock stop, shift lock release, and related parts. The
reverse lock mechanism shares the shift lock solenoid with the shift lock mechanism, and the reverse lock stop and the
shift lock stop are interlocked with the shift lock solenoid operation. The shift lock solenoid is electronically controlled
by these shift lock control system signals: brake signal, interlock control signal, and AfT gear position switch III
position signal. If the shift lock solenoid does not operate, the shift lock/reverse lock mechanism can be released by
depressing the shift lock release.
In the III position while depressing the brake pedal, the shift lock solenoid is turned ON, and the shift lock solenoid
plunger is retracted to release the shift lock stop. This allows the shift lever to be moved.
[fJ POSITIO _~_- ____-SHIFT LEVER
'>I... SHIFT LOCK STOP
When the brake pedal is released, the shift lock solenoid remains OFF, and the shift lock stop locks to block the shift
lever in the III position.
[fJposmoN ~_ _- - - - SHIFT LEVER
___________ SHIFT LOCK STOP
'0:
14-64 BACK
Protected by AR
When the shift lever is shifted to the lID position from the ~ position and the IHl position (under certain conditions), the
shift lock solenoid is turned ON, and the shift lock solenoid plunger is retracted to release the reverse lock stop. This
allows the shift lever to be moved to the [ft) position.
[RJposmON _ _ _ _ SHIFT LEVER
REVERSE LOCK STOP
If the allowable conditions of turning ON the solenoid are not met, the shift lock solenoid remains OFF, and the reverse
lock stop locks to block the shift lever in the IHl position.
[RJPOSITION _ _- - - - - - SHIFT LEVER
REVERSE LOCK STOP
(cont'd)
BACK
14-65
Protected by AR
Circuit Diagram
UMISI-HOOD FUSE/IIEiAY BOX
~~ ,I -----~------------------------------Mrr~l
NoA712DA1
~.- ______________ ~--------_:==
DRlVER'S UNDER-DASH I
,
FUSE/IIflAYBOX WHT/IIED
No.41112IIA1
~
No.421'OAJ 0'''-- I O'"'....D YEl./BIJ(
~T
~YWGIIN
No.5414OAJ I No.46I15A1 MUll"flEX CONTROL

UrtTlORlVER'SJ
~l GRN ~SltFTUl(I(
SOLENDII-
PDM-R
MAIN
RELAY Bl1
PASSENGER'S
UMlER-DASH WHT/IIED
FUSE/llELAYBOX
11BLX
8LX
Mrr/va YEUBLX
I
YELJ8U< BLX 1 POSITION
S\\ITCH
PPOSITIDN
-
-
821 BI B9 os G302 A2I G401
V8U IGPI 1GP2 V8SOl
rosv
SV-
REGULArl
I r.12V
PDWERTlIAIN CONTROL MODULE fPO,IJ
J? LED
A
vss
OUT
D4
HI
AlP
NP
EI All AI4
DRIVER'S
IIlU/BLK I BlU~ BlU/WIfT GRNIBlJ(
UMlER-DASH
FUSEIRElAY WHT I va I BlU 11IlUm"
IIlU/GRN BOX RED/BlK I PNK I IIRW
C2 GAUGE ASSEMBLY
...
l-------tl-tl ~ BLX/BLU I I • I
II'" Mrr I j STARTER
CUTRE1AY
1----+1-11 ~ RED/BLX -I ~ RED/BLX -II-I-+--t--+---t---+--+--+-+---tl SlIFTlOCl

RElAY
BLXlBW CRUIR
I)
) I
I I'A"
I ,A"
PNlt--j
lIlu--j
rt>n CONTROl
UNIT
") I I'''' BRN--j :311111111 lULU

8\1'
10
GIGI
C9
BJwTITITITIT
1
G501
I I I I
WHT va BlU ORY
sr J
RED,wHT
AfT GEAR PDSITlON SWITCH
BACK
14-66
Protected by AR
I A/T Qfl SWITCH
I S-MOOE SWITCH
T
~
IIlIAKf
SWITCH
PAJU(
, PIN
SMItH DATA LINK CRUISE
CONNECTOR CONTROL BSC
WllTIBW 11IPI UNIT UMT
t tt
BLl/WIfT BLK
1 1
WIlT BAN BLU GRN LT GAN RED WIlT BW GRN RED/BLK AED/WIfT
YEL/BLU GRN/BLK
B/2IP) CI31P1 DlllPl E112P1
BACK 14-67
Protected by AR
OTe Troubleshooting
OTC P0715: Problem in Mainshaft Speed 4. Disconnect the D (16P) connector from the PCM.
Sensor Circuit
NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot. PCM connector terminals D11 and D12 individually.
Code P0715 (15) on the PCM doesn't always mean PCM CONNECTOR D (16P)
there's an electrical problem in the mainshaft or
countershaft speed sensor circuit; code P0715 (15) may 213141 I 5
also indicate a mechanical problem in the transmission. 12
Anv problem causing irregular countershaft to
mainshaft speed difference can cause this code.
1. Check the mainshaft and the countershaft speed NM(RED)

sensor installation.
Are the mainshaft and countershaft speed sensors

installed properly?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Reinstall and recheck .•
YES - Repair short to ground in the wires between
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the mainshaft PCM connector terminals Dl 1 and D12 and the
speed sensor. mains haft speed sensor.•
3. Measure mainshaft speed sensor resistance at the NO - Go to step 6.

sensor connector.
6. Connect the mainshaft speed sensor connector.
MAINS HAFT SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
7. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
terminals D11 and D12.
213141 I 5
12
NM(RED)
Is the resistance 400- 600 Q ?
YES - Go to step 4. Wire side of female terminals
NO- Replace the mainshaft speed sensor.. Is the resistance 400- 600 Q ?
YES-Run the Electrical Troubleshooting Flowchart

for code P0720 (code 9). Check for loose terminal fit
in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a
known-good PCM and recheck .•
NO - Go to step 8.
BACK
14-68
Protected by AR
8. Disconnect the 2P connector from the mainshaft

speed sensor.

terminal D11 and the No.1 terminal of the
mainshaft speed sensor connector.
6 7
131415
MAINS HAFT SPEED

SENSOR CONNECTOR
YES-Goto step 10.
NO- Repair open in the wire between PCM

connector terminal D11 and the mainshaft speed
sensor.•

terminal D12 and the No.2 terminal of the
mainshaft speed sensor connector.
123
6 7
131415
MAINSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR CONNECTOR
YES-Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM

connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
PCM and recheck .•

connector terminal D12 and the mainshaft speed
sensor.•
BACK
14-69
Protected by AR
DTC P0720: Problem in Countershaft Speed 5. Check for continuity between body ground and
Sensor Circuit PCM connector terminals D10 and D16 individually.

NC(BLU)
1. Check the countershaft speed sensor installation.
Is the countershaft speed sensor installed

properly?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Reinstall and recheck .•
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the countershaft

speed sensor. Wire side of female terminals
3. Measure countershaft speed sensor resistance at Is there continuity?

the sensor connector.
YES-Repair short to ground in the wires between
COUNTERSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR CONNECTOR
PCM connector terminals D10 and D16 and the
countershaft speed sensor..
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Connect the countershaft speed sensor connector.

terminals D10 and D16.
NC(BLU)
.--- ......-
Is the resistance 400- 600 Q ? 1 2 3 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 r.
YES-Go to step 4.
13 14 15 16
T
NO-Replace the countershaft speed sensor.•
4. Disconnectthe D (16P) connector from the PCM.

NCSG(GRN)

NO- Repair loose terminal or open in the wires

between PCM connector terminals D10 and D16
and the countershaft speed sensor..
BACK
14-70
Protected by AR
DTC P0730: Problem in Shift Control System 6. Recheck for code P0730.
NOTE: Does the OBO /I scan tool indicate code P0730?

• Record all freeze data beofore you troubleshoot .
• Keep these replacement solenoid valves on hand: YES- Replace the transmission .•
- Lock-up control solenoid valve/shift control
solenoid valve A assembly NO - The system is OK atthis time.•
- Shift control solenoid valve B
- Shift control solenoid valve C
- AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B
1. Check whether the OBO II scan tool indicates

another code.
Does the OBO /I scan tool indicate another code?
YES - Perform the Troubleshooting Flowchart for

the indicated Code(s). Recheck for code P0730 after
troubleshooting .•
NO - Go to step 2.
NOTE: Do not continue with this troubleshooting

until the causes of any other OTCs have been
corrected.
2. Measure the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th clutch pressure

(see page 14-100).
Is each clutch pressure within the service limit?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Repair the hydraulic system as necessary .•
3. Replace the Solenoid Assembly set (lock-up control

solenoid valve/shift control solenoid valve A
assembly (see page 14-102). the shift control
solenoid valves Band C (see page 14-103) and the
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B
(see page 14-105)).

memory by removing the BACK UP fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box for more
than 10 seconds.
5. Calibrate the engine idle control system in the PCM

(see page 11-158), and drive the vehicle at a speed
over 12 mph (20 km/h) in 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th gear in
the ~ position for more than 30 seconds.
BACK
14-71
Protected by AR
DTC P0740: Problem in Lock-up Control 7. Recheck for code P0740.

System
Does the OBO /I scan tool indicate code P0740?
NOTE:
• Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot. YES - Replace the transmission and torque
• Keep these replacement solenoid valves on hand: converter.•
- Lock-up control solenoid valve/shift control
solenoid valve A assembly NO- The system is OK at this time .•
1. Check whether the OBO II scan tool indicates

another code.
YES-Perform the Troubleshooting Flowchart for

the indicated Code(s). Recheck for code P0740 after
NO - Go to step 2.

corrected.
2. Measure the line pressure (see page 14-100).
Is the line pressure within the service limit?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Repair the hydraulic system as necessary.•
3. Replace the Lock-up Control Solenoid Assembly set

(lock-up control solenoid valve/shift control
solenoid valve A assembly (see page 14-102) and
the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A
and B (see page 14-105)).

than 10 seconds.
5. Using the scan tool, check to be sure that the

engine coolant temperature is 176°F (80°C) or
above.
6. Calibrate the engine idle control system in the PCM

(see page 11-158), and drive the vehicle at 55 mph
(88 km/h) for more than 1 minute.
14-72 BACK
Protected by AR
DTC P0753: Problem in Shift Control Solenoid 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Valve A Circuit
NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot. terminals D7 and 820 or 822.
PCM CONNECTORS
2. Disconnect the 8 (25P) and D (16P) connectors from SH A (BLU/YEl)

Q D (16P)
the PCM. B(25P)
-.-- r--
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1 2 345 6 7 81 1 2 3 4 Isl
9 10 1112 / 14 15V 17 181 6 7 8 9 10 1'1121
4. Measure the voltage between PCM connector L 20 2122 23 24 25 131 415 16
~T ~1
'--
terminals D7 and 820 or 822.
PCM CONNECTORS Q
lG1 (BRN/BlK) lG2 (BRN/BlK)
SH A (BlU/YEl)
'Y.
B(25P) D (16P)
,...-- - Is the resistance 12- 25 Q ?
1 2 345 6 7 81 1 234 Isl
9 10 1112 V 1415 V 17 181 6 7 8 9 10 "1 121 YES-Go to step 11.
L 20 2122 2324 25 131 415 16
~T ~1
~
NO-Go to step 7.
'Y. 7. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal 820 and body ground, and between 822
Wire side of female terminals and body ground.
Is there voltage?
YES- Repair short to power in the wire between

PCM connector terminal D7 and the shift control
solenoid valve A .•
NO - Go to step 5.
YES - Go to step 8.
NO-Repair open in the wires between PCM

connector terminals 820 and 822 and
ground (G101). Repair poor ground (G101) .•
(cont'd)
BACK
14-73
Protected by AR
8. Disconnect the 3P connector from the lock-up 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
control solenoid valve/shift control solenoid valve
A assembly. 12. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
PCM CONNECTORS
PCM CONNECTORS VB SOL (BLK/VEL)
...----------i[~)I--------.
B (25P) D (16P)
SH A IBLU/VEL)
-.-
B(25P)
.l.l
D(16P) 2 11~4
-1 -2 345 6 7 81
-1 234 f5l
617
13114/151 116
9 10 1112 V 1415 V 17181 6 7 8 9 10 111121
L 20 2122 23 24 25 131 415 16 '-------~l~ll--------'
'-T -1 r-.
- LG1 (BRN/BLK) LG2 (BRN/BLK)

LG1 (BRN/BLK) LG2 (BRN/BLK)
Wire side of female terminals Is there battery voltage?
Is there continuity? YES-Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM

YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between PCM and recheck .•
the D7 terminal and shift control solenoid
valve A.. NO - Check for blown No.6 (15 A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
NO-Go to step 10. repair open in the wire between PCM connector
terminal D5 and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
10. Measure the resistance between the No.1 terminal box .•
of the lock-up control solenoid valve/shift control
solenoid valve A assembly connector and body
ground.
LOCK-UP CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE/
SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
ASSEMBLV CONNECTOR 13P)
SH A IGRN/WHT)
=
YES-Check for an open in the wire between PCM

connector terminal D7 and shift control solenoid
valve A..
NO-Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve/

shift control solenoid valve A assembly.•
BACK
14-74
Protected by AR
Valve B Circuit
NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot. terminals 02 and 820 or 822.
PCM CONNECTORS
SH B (GRN/WHT)
2. Disconnect the 8 (25P) and 0 (16P) connectors from J--------.,
the PCM. B(25P) D(16P)
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 234

6 7
4. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 131415 16
terminals 02 and 820 or 822.
PCM CONNECTORS
SH B (GRN/WHT)
':i.
B(25P) D 116P) .1I
,..-- ~ Is the resistance 12- 25 Q ?
1 2 345 6 7 81 1 234 ill
9 10 1112 V 1415 V 17181 6 7 8 9 10 111121 YES-Go to step 11.
L 20 2122 2324 25 1314 15 16
'-J ~1
':i.
~
NO-Go to step 7.
LG1 IBRN/BLK) LG2 (BRN/BLK) 7. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Wire side offemale terminals and body ground.
/s there voltage?
YES-Repair short to power in the wire between

PCM connector terminal 02 and the shift control 9
solenoid valve 8 .•
NO-Go to step 5.
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
Wire side of female term inals
YES - Go to step 8.

ground (G101). Repair poor ground (G101 ).•
(cont'd)
BACK
14-75
Protected by AR
8. Disconnect the 2P connector from the shift control 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
solenoid valve B.
12. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
9. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminals D5 and B20 or B22.
terminals D2 and B20 or B22.
PCM CONNECTORS
PCM CONNECTORS
VB SOL (BlK/YEl)
SH B (GRN/WHT) ,..----------i(';i,l)-- - - - - - - - ,
B(25P) D (16P)
.!.l
B 125P)
-.--
D(16P)
r-
II ~4
1 2 345 6 7 sl 1 234 151 617
9 10 1112 V 1415V 171SJ 6 7 S 9 10 1~12J 13p4j151 116
~T L-1
2122 2324 25 1314 15 16
'--
'-------{I';i,ll--------'
() lG1 (BRN/BlK) lG2 (BRN/BlK)
YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
PCM connector terminal D2 and the shift control PCM and recheck .•
solenoid valve B.•
NO-Check for blown No.6 (15 A) fuse in the
NO-Go to step 10. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
repair open in the wire between PCM connector
10. Measure shift control solenoid valve B resistance at terminal D5 and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
the solenoid valve connector. box.•
VALVE B CONNECTOR
YES-Check for an open in the wires between PCM

connector terminal D2 and the shift control
solenoid valve B and between the No.1 terminal of
the shift control solenoid valve B connector and
ground (G101) .•
NO - Replace the shift control solenoid valve B.•
14-76 BACK
Protected by AR
Valve C Circuit
NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot. terminals D3 and 820 or 822.
PCM CONNECTORS
SHC(GRN)
2. Disconnect the 8 (25P) and D (16P) connectors from .Q
the PCM. B(25P)
r---
D(16P)
r--
II
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1 2 345 6 7 8/ 1 234 151
9 10 1112 V 1415 / 17 18J 6 7 8 9 1011/12/
4. Measure the voltage between PCM connector ~ 20 2122 23 24 25 1314 15 16
PCM CONNECTORS
~T -1 -
SHC(GRN)
'::L
B(25P) D(16P) II
--
1 2 345 6 7 81
r--
1 234 151
9 10 1112 V 1415 / 17 181 6 7 8 9 10 111121 YES-Go to step 11.
Lf 2122
'--
lG1 (BRN/BlK)
23 2425
lG2 (BRN/BlK)
1314 15
'::L
16
- NO-Go to step 7.

Wire side of female terminals and body ground.
Is there voltage?

the D3 terminal and the shift control solenoid
valve C.•
NO-Go to step 5.
YES - Go to step 8.

connector terminals 820 and 822 and ground (G
101). Repair poor ground (G101) .•
(cont'd)
BACK
14-77
Protected by AR
8. Disconnect the 2P connector from shift control 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
solenoid valve 8.
9. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminals 05 and 820 or 822.
PCM CONNECTORS
PCM CONNECTORS
VB SOL (BLK/YEL)
.-----------{(~ll---------,
SHC(GRN)
D (16P)
I I
11.----,
I
B(25P)
11~4
D(16P)
11 121314 617
617
131141151 116
LG1 (BRN/BLK) LG2 (BRN/BLK) l~rl- - - - -

~--------~(Ql~-------
YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
PCM connector terminal 03 and the shift control PCM and recheck .•
solenoid valve C.•
NO-Check for blown No.6 (15 AI fuse in the
10. Measure shift control solenoid valve C resistance at terminal 05 and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
the solenoid valve connector. box.•
VALVE C CONNECTOR

connector terminal 03 and the shift control
solenoid valve C and between the No.1 terminal of
the shift control solenoid valve C connector and
ground (G1011 .•
NO-Replace shift control solenoid valve C.•
14-78 BACK
Protected by AR
OTC P1705: Short in AfT Gear Position Switch Is there battery voltage?
Circuit
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Check for a short in the wire between PCM
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). connector terminal 06 and the AfT gear position
switch or AfT gear position indicator, and check for
2. Observe the AfT gear position indicator, and shift an open in the wires between PCM connector
each position separately. terminals 820 and 822 and body ground (G 101). If
wires are OK, check for loose terminal fit in the
Do any indicators stay on when the shift lever is PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-
not in that position? good PCM and recheck .•
YES-Go to step 3. 8. Shift to all positions other than [f] or [Hl.
NO- The system is OK atthis time. Check the wire 9. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
harness for damage .• terminals 814 and 820 or 822.
3. Disconnect the AfT gear position switch connector.
Do aI/ gear position indicators go out?
YES - Replace the AfT gear position switch .•
NO - Go to step 4.
ATP NP (BLU/WHT)
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and connect the AfT
gear position switch connector.
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
6. Shift to all positions other than 00.
Is there about 5 V?
terminals 06 and 820 or 822. YES-Go to step 10.
PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P) D (16P) connector terminal 814 and the AfT gear position
switch, and in the [f] and [Hl position signal wires
between the AfT gear position indicator and the AfT
gear position switch. If necessary, substitute a
10. Shift to all positions other than R!J.

lG2 (BRN/BlK) ATPR(WHT)
I...-----{'Y. }-----'
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
(cont'd)
BACK
14-79
Protected by AR
11. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 12. Shift to all positions other than ~.
PCM CONNECTORS terminals 08 and 820 or 822.
B(25P) D (16P) PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P) D(16P)
-r-- r=:==:=l
2
LG2 (BRN/BLK)
~------~~)~------~ ATPD3 (PNK)
LG1 (BRN/BLKI ATPD4(YEL)
e~Dr-----.J
I
W ,re side of female terminals LG1 (BRN/BLK)
Is there about 5 V? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 12. Is there battery voltage?
NO-Check for a short in the wire between PCM YES - Go to step 14.
connector terminal 09 and the AfT gear position
switch. If wires are OK, check for loose terminal fit NO - Check for a short in the wire between PCM
in the PCM connectors. If necessary, substitute a connector terminal 08 and the AfT gear position
known-good PCM and recheck .• switch or AfT gear position indicator. If wires are
OK, check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
PCM and recheck.•
14-80
BACK
Protected by AR
14. Shift to all positions other than 00. Is there battery voltage?
15. Measure the voltage between PCM connector YES-Go to step 18.
PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P) D(16P)
switch or AfT gear position indicator. If wires are
-r- r-- ,.-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 OK, check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
/
9 10 11 12 14 15 17 18 / 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
li 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 1415 16
'--
'-T ')L I
'-
ATP2 (BLU) 18. Shift to all positions other than !HJ.

lG2 (BRN/BlK)
')L terminals 04 and 820 or 822.
lG1 (BRN/BlK)
PCM CONNECTORS
ATP N (RED/BlK)
')L
Is there battery voltage? B(25P)
-r-
D(16P)
-1
II
YES-Go to step 16.
1 2 345 6 7 sl 2 3 4 J5l
V
9 10 1112 1415 17 V lsi 678 9 10 111121
NO-Check for short in the wire between PCM /20 2122 23 2425 1314 15 16
switch or AfT gear position indicator. If wires are
OK, check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
-=r -1
')L
-

PCM and recheck .• Wire side of female terminals
16. Shift to all positions other than Ill. Is there battery voltage?
17. Measure the voltage between PCM connector YES-Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
terminals 015 and 820 or 822. connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P) D(16P) NO-Check for a short in the wire between PCM
,--- r- connector terminal 04 and the AfT gear position
1 2 345 6 7 81 1 234 Isl switch or AfT gear position indicator. If wires are
V
9 10 1112 1415 17 ISJ
/ 6 7 8 9 10111121 OK, check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
L 20 2122 23 24 25 1314 15 16
- connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
'--
'-T ')L I ATP1 (BRN PCM and recheck .•
lG2 (BRN/BlK)
')L
lG1 (BRN/BlK)
BACK
14-81
Protected by AR
DTC P1706: Open in AfT Gear Position Switch 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Circuit
4. Shift to the ~ position.
1. Test the AfT gear position switch (see page 14-144). terminals 09 and 820 or 822.
PCM CONNECTORS
Is the switch OK? B(25P) D(16PI
r--
YES-Go to step 2. 1 2 345 6 7 81 1 234 f5l
9 10 11 12 / 14 15 V 17 181 6 7 8 9 10 111121
NO-Replace the AfT gear position switch .•
~20
I~
2122 23 24 25 131415
"'--
.... r
':i.
terminals 820 and 822 and body ground. LG2 (BRN/BLK)
PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) V
LG1 (BRN/BLK) ATPD4(YEL)
1 12
9110
20
..,... Is there voltage?
LG1 (BRN/BLKI
YES - Repair open in the wire between PCM
connector terminal 09 and the A!T gear position
switch .•
-= NO - Go to step 6.
6. Shift to the [B] position.
YES - Go to step 3. terminals 06 and 820 or 822.
PCM CONNECTORS
B125P) D 116PI
ground (G101). Repair poor ground (G101) .•
141151 116i
LG2 (BRN/BLK) ATPR IWHTJ

I Qli-----'
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
Is there voltage?
YES-Repair open in the wire between PCM

connector terminal 06 and the A!T gear posItion
switch .•
NO - Go to step 8.
14-82 BACK
Protected by AR
8. Shift to the [f] or IHl position. 10. Shift to the ~ position.
9. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 11. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
terminals 814 and 820 or 822. terminals 08 and 820 or 822.
PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) PCM CONNECTORS
1 2 B(25P) o (16P)
.....--.....-- ..-
9 1 2
3 4 5 6 7 81 1 2 3 4 [5l
V
9 10 1112 14 15 II 17181 6 7 8 9 1011 121
V
"'-r- ~T
20 123 2~ 25 131415
II ~
ATP NP (BLU/WHT) y.
LG2 (BRN/BLK)
Y.
LG1 (BRN/BLK) LG1 (BRN/BLK) ATPD4(VEL)
/s there voltage? /s there voltage?
YES-Repair open in the wire between PCM YES- Repair open in the wire between PCM
conn'}ctor terminal 814 and the AfT gear position connector terminal 08 and the AfT gear position
switch .• switch .•
NO-Goto step 10. NO-Gotostep 12.
12. Shift to the 00 position.

PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P) o (16P)
,......
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 81 1 234 f5l
9 10 1112 II 14 15 l7 17 18\ 6 7 8 9 10 1~ 121
1/ 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 1415 16
L-
~T
Y. 1 ATP2 (BLU)
LG2 (BRN/BLK)
Y.
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
/s there voltage?
YES- Repair open in the wire between PCM

switch .•
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-83
Protected by AR
14. Shift to the III position.

PCM CONNECTORS
B (25P) o 116P)
,---
....--- ~
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 81 1 234 f5l
9 10 1112 14 15 ~ 17 1~
V 6 7 8 9 10 11112 J
~ 20 2122 23 24 25 13 14 15 16
"--
~1 -
')L I
lG2 (BRN/BlK) ATP1 (BRN)
V
lG1 (BRN/BlK)
/s there voltage?

connector terminal 015 and the NT gear position
switch .•
NO-Go to step 16.

PCM CONNECTORS
ATP N (RED/BlK)
::L
B(25P)
....--....--
o (16P)
-1
11
1 2 345 6 7 8] 234 Isl
9 10 1112 / 1415 17 181 / 6 7 8 9 10 11112]
~20 2122 23 24 25 1314 15 16
"--T "-T V
'--
/s there voltage?

connector terminal 04 and the NT gear position
switch .•
NO-Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM

PCM and recheck.•
14-84 BACK
Protected by AR
DTC P1709: Problem in AfT Shift Switch

Circuit 6. Measure the voltage between the No.1 and No.6
terminal of the AfT shift switch connector.
AfT SHIFT SWITCH CONNECTOR
BLK
2. Remove the center console.
3. Disconnect the AfT shift switch connector.

RED
5. Measure the voltage between the No.6 terminal of
the AfT shift switch connector and body ground.
1 2 3 Is there about 5 V?
4 5 678
YES-Go to step 7.
RED
NO - Repair open in the wire between the No.1
terminal of the AfT shift switch connector and
ground, and repair poor ground (GS01 ).•

=
Wire side of female terminals B. Disconnect the E (1 2P) connector from the PCM.
Is there about 5V? 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector

terminal E7 and body ground, and between EB and
YES-Go to step 6. body ground.
NO-Repair open or short in the wire between the PCM CONNECTOR E {12P)
E9 terminal of the PCM and the AfT shift switch
connector.•
YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between

PCM connector terminals E7 and EB and the AfT
shift switch connector.•
NO-Go to step 10.

(cont'd)
BACK 14-85
Protected by AR
10. Measure the resistance between the No.6 and 12. Measure the resistance between the No.4 and
No.1 terminals of the AfT shift switch connector No.1 terminals of the AfT shift switch connector
with the shift lever in the sequential sportshift while pushing the shift lever toward the" +" mark
mode position and when releasing it from the on the AfT gear position indicator panel; then
sequential sportshift mode position. measure the resistance in neutral position.
Measure the resistance between the No.5 and
AfT SHIFT SWITCH CONNECTOR No.1 terminals while pulling the shift lever toward
"-" mark; then measure the resistance in neutral
BlK position.
-,
BlK BlK
--,
ORN
213 213
Terminal side of male terminals BLU/VEl

WHT/BLU
Is the resistance 0 Q in the sequential sportshift

mode position, and 10 MQ or more when out of the Terminal side of male terminals
sequential sportshift mode position?
YES-Go to step 11. Is the resistance 0 Q with the shift lever pushed
toward the "+ "mark, and pulled toward the "- "
NO- Faulty AfT shift switch. Replace the shift lever mark, and is it 10 M Q or more with it released?
detent bracket assembly.•
11. Shift the shift lever into the sequential sportshift connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
mode position. PCM and recheck .•
NO-Faulty AfT shift switch. Replace the shift lever

14-86 BACK
Protected by AR
OTe P1738: Problem in 2nd Clutch Pressure 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Switch Circuit
4. Disconnect the D (16PI connector from the PCM.
5. Disconnect the 2nd clutch pressure switch
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (If I. connector.
2. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 6. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminals D13 and 820 or 822. terminal 013 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTORS PCM CONNECTOR D (16PI
B(25P) D (16P)
2 3 4 5
234
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 1415 16
OP2SW (BLU/BlK)
OP2SW (BlU/BlK)
'-----{)f,}------'
LG1 (BRN/BlK)
Is there battery voltage? Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 7. YES - Repair short to ground in the wire between

PCM connector terminal D13 and the 2nd clutch
NO - Go to step 3. pressure switch .•
NO - Disconnect the 2nd clutch pressure switch

connector, and go to step 15.
(cont'dl
BACK
14-87
Protected by AR
7. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 14. Measure the voltage between the 2nd clutch
securely supported. pressure switch connector terminal and body
ground.
8. Set the parking brake, and block the rear wheels
2ND CLUTCH PRESSURE
securely. SWITCH CONNECTOR
9. Start the engine, cancel the TCS, then shift to the 00

position and drive for more than 5 seconds.

PCM CONNECTORS
Bt25P) Dt16P)
...-- ,--
1 2 345 6 7 81 1 2 3 4 f5l
9 10 1112 / 1415 V 17181 6 7 8 9 10 111121 Wire side of female terminal
~ 20 2122 2324 25 1314 15 16
'--
~T Is there battery voltage?
':i. I OP2SWtBL K)
lG2 tBRN/BlK) YES-Go to step 15.
V
lG1 tBRN/BlK) NO- Repair open in the wire between the 2nd
clutch pressure switch and the PCM .•
15. Measure the resistance between the 2nd clutch
Is there about 0 V? pressure switch connector terminal and body
ground.
connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good 2ND CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
NO-Go to step 11.
12. Disconnect the 2nd clutch pressure switch

connector.
Is the resistance 10 MQ or more?

NO-Replace the 2nd clutch pressure switch Ii
BACK
14-88
Protected by AR
DTC P1739: Problem in 3rd Clutch Pressure 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Switch Circuit
4. Disconnect the 8 (25P) connector from the PCM.
5. Disconnect the 3rd clutch pressure switch
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). connector.
2. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 6. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminals 824 and 820 or 822. terminal 824 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) PCM CONNECTOR B (25P)
lG2 (BRN/BlK)
lG1 (BRN/BlK)
YES-Go to step 7. YES- Repair short to ground in the wire between

PCM connector terminal 824 and the 3rd clutch
NO - Go to step 3. pressure switch .•
NO-Disconnectthe 3rd clutch pressure switch

connector, and go to step 15.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-89
Protected by AR
7. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 14. Measure the voltage between the 3rd clutch
ground.
8. Set the park brake, and block rear wheels securely.
3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
9. Start the engine, cancel the TCS, then shift to the lQ!I
position and drive in 3rd gear for more than 5
seconds.
10. Measure the voltage between PCM connector WHT/RED

1 12 -=
Wire side of female terminal
LG2 (BRN/BLK) Is there battery voltage?
YES-Go to step 15.
LG1 (BRN/BLK) NO - Repair open in the wire between the 3rd

clutch pressure switch and the PCM .•
15. Measure the resistance between the 3rd clutch
Is there about 0 V? pressure switch connector terminal and body
ground.
3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE
connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good SWITCH CONNECTOR
PCM and recheck.•
NO-Gotostep 11.

connector.
Terminal side of male terminal

NO-Replace the 3rd clutch pressure switch .•
BACK
14-90
Protected by AR
OTe P1753: Problem in Lock-up Control 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Solenoid Valve Circuit
NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot. terminals D1 and B20 or 822.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. PCM CONNECTORS

lC (VEll
2. Disconnect the B (25P) and 0 (16P) connectors from
B(25P)
the PCM.

'-------{Q}-------'
lG1 (BRN/BLK) lG2 (BRN/BlK)

PCM CONNECTORS
NO-Go to step 7.
lG1 (BRN/BlK) lG2 (BRN/BlK) 7. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminals 820 and 822 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR B 125P)
Is there voltage?

PCM connector terminal D1 and the lock-up control
solenoid valve .•
NO - Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 8.
NO- Repair open in the wires between PCM

connector terminals 820 and 822 and ground
(G101). Repair poor ground (G101) .•
(cont'd)
BACK 14-91
Protected by AR
8. Disconnect the 3P connector from the lock-up 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
control solenoid valve/shift control solenoid valve
A assembly. 12. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
terminals 01 and 820 or 822. PCM CONNECTORS
PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P)
LC(YEL)
)--------.,
B(25P)
'-------I(Y::ll-----.....J

YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
PCM connector terminal 01 terminal and the lock- PCM and recheck .•
up control solenoid valve .•
10. Measure the resistance between the No.3 terminal terminal 05 and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
of the lock-up control solenoid valve/shift control box.•
solenoid valve A assembly connector and body
ground.
LOCK-UP CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE/
SHIFT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR (3P)
Is the resistance 12- 2SQ ?

connector terminal 01 and the lock-up control
solenoid valve.•
NO- Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve/

shift control solenoid valve A assembly.•
BACK
14-92
Protected by AR
Ole P1768: Problem in AfT Clutch Pressure 3. Disconnect the 8 (25P) connector from the PCM.
Control Solenoid Valve A Circuit
NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot. PCM connector terminals 88 and 817 individually.
1. Disconnect the 2P connector from AfT clutch PCM CONNECTOR B (25P)

pressure control solenoid valve A. LSAM(WHT)
2. Measure AfT clutch pressure control solenoid

resistance at the solenoid valve connector.
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL

SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR
=
YES- Repair short to ground in the wires between

PCM connector terminals 88 and 817 and AfT
Terminal side of male terminals clutch pressure control solenoid valve A..
Is the resistance about 5 Q ? NO-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 3. 5. Connect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid

valve A connector.
NO- Replace the AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valves A and 8 .• 6. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
terminals 88 and 817.
LSAM(WHT)
LSAP (RED)
Is the resistance about 5 Q ?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair loose terminal or open in the wires

between PCM connector terminals 88 and 817 and
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A..
(cont'd)
BACK
14-93
Protected by AR
7. Disconnect the D (16P) connector from the PCM. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminals 820 and 822 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTORS
112
!
VB SOL (BlK/YEl) 9 110
Y.. 20
B(25P) -,-
011..,
-1 -2 345 6 7 81
-1 2 3 4 5 lG1 (BRN/BlK)
9 10 1112 / 1415 / 171~ 6 7 8 9 10111 121
/20 2122 23 24 25 1314 15 16
~T ~T
~
\/ =
Wire side of female terminals Is there continuity?
Is there battery voltage? YES-Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
YES-Go to step 10. PCM and recheck .•
NO-Check for blown No.6 (15 A) fuse in the NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, connector terminals 82, 810, 820 and 822 and
repair open in the wire between PCM connector ground (G101). Repair poor ground (G101) .•
terminal D5 and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box, and between PCM connector terminals 820
and 822 and ground (G101) .•
BACK
14-94
Protected by AR
DTC P1773: Problem in AfT Clutch Pressure 3. Disconnect the B (25P) connector from the PCM.
Control Solenoid Valve B Circuit
NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot. PCM connector terminals B18 and B25 individually.
1. Disconnect the 2P connector from AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve B.


SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR

PCM connector terminals B18 and B25 and AfT
Terminal side of male terminals clutch pressure control solenoid valve B.•
Is the resistance about 5 Q ? NO-Goto step 5.
YES - Go to step 3. 5. Connect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid

valve B connector.
NO-Replace the AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valves A and B.• 6. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
terminals B18 and B25.
LSBP(ORN)
YES-Go to step 7.

between PCM connector terminals B18 and B25
and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B.•
(cont'd)
BACK 14-95
Protected by AR
7. Disconnect the 0 (16P) connector from the PCM. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
terminals 820 and 822 and body ground
9. Measure the voltage between PCM connector individually.
PCM CONNECTORS
VB SOL IBLK/VElI
Y..
Bf25PI
I\'i\
LG1 (BRN/BLKI LG2 (BRN/BLK)
YES - Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
YES-Goto step 10. connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM
repair open in the wire between PCM connector connector terminals 82, 810, 820 and 822 and
terminal 05 and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay ground (Gl0l). Repair poor ground (Gl0l) .•
box.•
BACK
14-96
Protected by AR
Road Test
8ackprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (Two required)
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
2. Apply the parking brake, and block rear wheels. Start the engine, then shift to the ~ position while depressing the
brake pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal, and release it suddenly. The engine should not stall.
3. Repeat the same test in the ~ position.
4. Connect the Honda PGM Tester (A), and go to the PGM-FI Data List; then go to step 7. If you don't have a PGM
Tester, go to step 5.
5. Remove the center console (see page 20-63), then remove the PCM (A).
6. Connect a digital multi meter (8) and the special tools (C) to check voltage between the C27 (+) terminal and 820
(-) or 822 (-) terminal of the PCM.
LG2 (BRN/BLK)
L...-_ _-{ 'Y }--_ _-..l
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
(cont'd)
BACK 14-97
Protected by AR
Road Test (cont'd)
7. Test-drive the vehicle on a flat road in the ~ position. Check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage. While driving,
check that the shift points occur at the proper speeds by monitoring the throttle position sensor voltage and
comparing your shift point speeds and voltage to those in the table. (The throttle position sensor voltage
represents the throttle opening.)
Upshift-~ ---.-_..
Throttle Opening Unit of Speed 1st- 2nd 2nd-3rd 3rd- 4th Lock-upON
Throttle position mph 16-17 24-26 34-38 47-49
---
sensor voltage: 0.7 V km/h 26-28 38-42 54-60 75-79
Throttle position mph 28-29 50-53 73-77 84-88
sensor voltage: 2.25 V km/h 43-47 80-86 118-124 135-141
Fully-opened throttle. mph 34-38 64-68 98-101 99-103
Throttle position km/h 55-61 103-109 157-163 160-166
sensor voltage: 4.5 V
hift-~ - It·
D - ---------- --- --
Throttle Opening Unit of Speed Lock-up OFF 4th-3rd 3rd-2nd 2nd-1st
Throttle position mph 44-47 17-19 -- 6-8 (3rd - 1st)
sensor voltaae: 0.8 V km/h 71-75 27-31 -- 9-13 (3rd --. 1st)
Throttle position mph 71-75 -- -- --
sensor voltage: 2.25 V km/h 115-121 -- -- --
Fully-opened throttle. mph 90-94 89-92 57-61 27-31
Throttle position kmlh 145-151 142-148 92-98 44-50
sensor voltaQe: 4.5 V
8. Accelerate to about 35 mph (57 km/h) so the transmission is in 4th, then shift from the ~ position to [!] position.
The vehicle should immediately begin slowing down from engine braking.
9. Check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage in the following positions.
[I] (1st Gear) Position

Accelerate from a stop at full throttle. Check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage. Upshifts should
not occur with the shift lever in this position.
00 (2nd Gear) Position

Accelerate from a stop at full throttle. Check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage. Upshifts and
downshifts should not occur with the shift lever in this position.
IRl (Reverse) Position

Accelerate from a stop at full throttle, and check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage.
10. Test in the [f] (Park) Position.

Park the vehicle on a slope (approx. 16°), apply the parking brake, and shift into the [f] position. Release the brake;
the vehicle should not move.
14-98 BACK
Protected by AR
Stall Speed Test
1. Engage the parking brake, and block the front wheels.
2. Connect a tachometer to the engine, and start the engine.
3. Make sure the AlC switch is OFF.
4. After the engine has warmed up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on), shift to the 00
position.
5. Fully depress the brake pedal and accelerator for 6 to 8 seconds, and note engine speed. Do not move the shift
lever while raising engine speed.
6. Allow two minutes for cooling, then repeat the test in the~, [1], and IRl positions.
NOTE:
• Do not test stall speed for more than 10 seconds at a time.
• Stall speed tests should be used for diagnostic purposes only.
• Stall speed should be the same in the ~, 00, [1], and IRl positions.
• Do not test stall speed with the AfT pressure gauges installed.
Stall Speed rpm:

Specification: 2,400 rpm
Service Limit: 2,250-2,550 rpm
TROUBLE PROBABLE CAUSE
Stall rpm high in the ~, 00, [1], and IRl • Low fluid level or ATF pump output
positions • Clogged ATF strainer
• Pressure regulator valve stuck closed
• Slipping clutch
Stall rpm high in the [1] position Slippage of 1st clutch
Stall rpm high in the 00 position Slippage of 2nd clutch
Stall rpm high in the IRl position Slippage of 4th clutch
Stall rpm low in the~, 00, [1], and IRl • Engine output low
positions • Torque converter one-way clutch slipping
BACK
14-99
Protected by AR
Pressure Tests

• AfT oil pressure gauge set 07406-0020400 or 07406-0020401
• AfT pressure hose, 2210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A
• AfT pressure hose adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
1. Before testing, be sure the transmission fluid is filled to the proper level.
2. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
3. Set the parking brake, and block rear wheels securely.
4. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely.
5. Warm up the engine (the radiator fan comes on), then stop it and connect a tachometer.
6. Connect the oil pressure gauges to each inspection hole securely, and do not allow dust or other foreign particles
to enter the holes.
TORQUE: 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 Ibf·tt)

AIT OIL PRESSURE GAUGE AIT PRESSURE HOSE, 2210 mm AIT PRESSURE HOSE ADAPTER
SETW/PANEL 07MAJ-PY4011A 07MAJ-PY 40120
07406-0020400 or (4 Required) (4 Required)
07406-0020401
~~~
B
1st CLUTCH
PRESSURE
D
3rdCLUTCH
PRESSURE
A
LINE PRESSURE
E C
4th CLUTCH PRESSURE 2nd CLUTCH PRESSURE
14-100 BACK
Protected by AR
7. Start the engine, and run it at 2,000 rpm in the [fl or [H) position.
S. Measure line pressure at line pressure inspection hole (A) in the [H) or [fl position.
NOTE: Higher pressure may be indicated if measurements are made in shift lever positions other than [H) or [fl.
9. Shift to the [IJ position, and measure 1st clutch pressure at the 1st clutch pressure inspection hole (B).
10. Shift to the 00 position, and measure 2nd clutch pressure at the 2nd clutch pressure inspection hole (C).
11. Shift to the [fl position, then press the brake pedal and hold it.
12. Shift to the ~ position, and release the brake pedal (the transmission should be in 1st gear).
13. Accelerate the engine to 2,500 rpm (the transmission will shift to 2nd gear).
14. Release the accelerator for more than 5 seconds after the transmission shifts to 2nd gear (the engine will come
down to about 1,000 rpm).
15. Press the accelerator very slowly to increase engine speed to 2,000 rpm gradually over 5 seconds, then hold it at
2,000 rpm.
16. Measure 3rd and 4th clutch pressure at the 3rd clutch pressure inspection hole (D), and the 4th clutch pressure
inspection hole (E), (the transmission will shift from 2nd gear to 3rd gear, and then to 4th gear).
17. Shift to the IBl position, and measure 4th clutch pressure at the 4th clutch pressure inspection hole.
PRESSURE SHIFT SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE FLUID PRESSURE

LEVER Standard Service Limit
POSITION
Line [H) or [fl No (or low) Torque converter, SOO-S60 kPa 760 kPa
(A) line pressure ATF pump, (S.2-8.8 kgf/cm', (7.7 kgf/cm', 110
pressure regulator 120- 130 psi) psi)
valve, torque
converter check
valve
1st clutch [IJ No or low 1st 1st clutch 790-870 kPa 750 kPa
(B) pressure (8.1 -8.9 kgf/cm', (7.6 kgf/cm', 110
2nd clutch 00 Noor low 2nd 2nd clutch 120- 130 psi) psi)
(C) pressure
3rd clutch ~ No orlow3rd 3rd clutch
(D) pressure
4th clutch No or low 4th 4th clutch
(E) IBl pressure Servo valve or 4th
clutch
1S. Reinstall the sealing bolts with new sealing washers, and tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 18 N·m (1.8 kgf.m,13 Ibf·ftl
NOTE: Do not reuse the old sealing washers.
BACK
14-101
Protected by AR
Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve- Lock-up Control Solenoid Valve-

Shift Control Solenoid Valve A Shift Control Solenoid Valve A
Assembly Test Assembly Replacement
1. Disconnect the 3P connector from the lock-up NOTE: Lock-up control solenoid valve/shift control
control solenoid valve/shift control solenoid valve solenoid valve A assembly must be removed/replaced
A assembly. as an assembly.
1. Remove the bolt securing the harness cover

connector bracket, then remove the harness cover
from the transmission hanger.
2. Remove the mounting bolts and lock-up control

assembly (A).
2. Measure the resistance of the lock-up control

solenoid valve between the No.3 terminal of the 3P
connector and body ground.
STANDARD: 12-25&2
3. Measure the resistance of the shift control solenoid

valve A between the No.1 terminal ofthe 3P
connector and body ground.
STANDARD: 12-25&2
3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage, and
4. Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve/shift install a new lock-up control solenoid valve/shift
control solenoid valve A assembly if either control solenoid valve A assembly with a new filter/
resistance is out of specification. gasket (B).
5. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the 4. Install the harness cover on the transmission
No.1 terminal of the 3P connector to the battery hanger, and install the connector bracket bolt.
positive terminal. A clicking sound should be heard.
Connect the No.3 terminal to the battery positive 5. Install the male terminal connector (C) of the
terminal. A clicking sound should be heard. solenoid connector on the harness cover.
Replace the lock-up control solenoid valve/shift
control solenoid valve A assembly if no sound is 6. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, then
heard. reconnect it.
14-102
BACK
Protected by AR
Shift Solenoid Valves Band C Test Shift Solenoid Valves Band C

Replacement
1. Remove the starter.
2. Disconnect the shift control solenoid valve B or C NOTE: If shift control solenoid valve Band Care
connector. replaced or removed at the same time, be sure to
reinstall them correctly. The shift control solenoid valve
B connector is black, and the connector color of shift
control solenoid valve C connector is brown.
1. If you are replacing shift control solenoid valve B,

remove the starter.
c
2. If necessary, remove the mounting bolt and shift
control solenoid valve B.
3. Measure the resistance between the No.1 and No.

2 terminals of shift control solenoid valve B or C.
STANDARD: 12-25 Q
4. Replace shift control solenoid valve B or C if the

resistance is out of standard.
D
5. If the resistance is within the standard, connect the
No.2 terminal of the shift control solenoid valve B
or C connector to the battery positive terminal, and
6x 1.0mm
connect the No.1 terminal to the battery negative 12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
terminal. A clicking sound should be heard.
Replace shift control solenoid valve B or C if no 3. Remove the mounting bolt and shift control
clicking sound is heard. solenoid valve C.
4. Install a new shift control solenoid valve B or C with

new O-rings (D). While installing the valves, do not
allow dust or other foreign particles to enter the
transmission.
5. Check the connector for rust, dirt or oil, then

reconnect it.
6. Install the starter, if removed.
BACK
14-103
Protected by AR
AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Test
1. Disconnect the 2P connectors from AfT clutch 7. Connect the No.1 terminal of AfT clutch pressure
pressure control solenoid valves A and B. control solenoid valves A and B to the battery
positive terminal, and connect the No.2 terminal to
A
the battery negative terminal. Make sure AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valves A and B move.
,
i )
'/
2. Measure the resistance between the No.1 and No.
2 terminals of each connector.
STANDARD: About5.0Q
3. If the resistance of either solenoid is out of

B A
standard, replace the AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valves A and B. 8. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check
valve movement.
4. Connectthe No.1 terminal of AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid valves A and B to the battery NOTE: You can see the valve movement through
positive terminal, and connect the No.2 terminal to the fluid passage in the mounting surface of the
the battery negative terminal. A clicking sound assembly body (C).
should be heard.
9. If either valve binds, or moves sluggishly, or if the
5. If not, remove the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid does not operate, replace the AfT clutch
solenoid valves A and B. pressure control solenoid valves A and B.
6. Check the fluid passage of the AfT clutch pressure

control solenoid valves for dust and dirt and clean
the passage if necessary.
14-104 BACK
Protected by AR
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement
1. Remove the ATF cooler hose (outlet line) at the ATF 5. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of
cooler line. Turn the end of the cooler hose up to the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A
prevent ATF from flowing out, then plug the line and 8 and the transmission housing.
and hose.
6. Place a new gasket (8) on the transmission housing,
2. Remove the bolt securing the harness cover then install the 8 x 18 mm ATF feed pipe (C), 8 x 26
connector bracket, then remove the harness cover mm pipe (0) and 8 x 36 mm pipe (E) with their filter
from the transmission hanger. side into the transmission housing.
3. Remove the ATF cooler line (outlet line) from the 7. Install new O-rings (F) over the feed pipes, and
transmission housing. install the 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe (G).
4. Remove the mounting bolts and the AfT clutch 8. Install the new AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
pressure control solenoid valves A and 8 (A). valves A and 8 (A) and harness clamp bracket (H).
9. Check the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid

valves A and 8 connectors for rust, dirt, or oil then
connect them securely.
10. Install the ATF cooler line (outlet line), and connect
the ATF cooler hose to the cooler line.
BACK
14-105
Protected by AR
Speed Sensor Replacement
1. Disconnect the connectors from the mainshaft and

countershaft speed sensors.
2. Remove the bolt securing the mainshaft speed

sensor, then remove the mainshaft speed sensor
from the end cover.
6x1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m,
8.71bf·ftl
3. Remove the bolt securing the countershaft speed

sensor, then remove the countershaft speed sensor
from the transmission housing.
4. Replace the O-rings with new ones before installing

the sensors.
5. Install the mainshaft and countershaft speed

sensors, then connect the connectors.
14-106 BACK
Protected by AR
2nd Clutch Pressure Switch 3rd Clutch Pressure Switch

Replacement Replacement
1. Disconnect the connector from the 2nd clutch 1. Disconnect the connector from the 3rd clutch
pressure switch. pressure switch.
2. Replace the 2nd clutch pressure switch, then install

20 N·m (2.0 kgf.m, 14lbf·ftl
a new one with a new sealing washer. Tighten the
switch on the metal part, not the plastic part.
2. Replace the 3rd clutch pressure switch, then install
3. Reconnect the connector, making sure there is no a new one with a new sealing washer. Tighten the
water, oil, dust, or other foreign particles inside it. switch on the metal part, not the plastic part.
3. Reconnect the connector, making sure there is no

water, oil, dust, or other foreign particles inside it.
BACK 14-107
Protected by AR
ATF Level Check

NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 6. If the level is below the lower mark, pour the
recommended fluid into the filler hole (A) to bring it
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating to the upper mark. Always use Honda ATF-Z1
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-
Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
2. Park the vehicle on the level ground. Turn off the
B
engine. 24x 1.5mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf.m. 33 Ibf·ttl
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A) from the
transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth.
A
7. Install the ATF filler bolt (8) with a new sealing

washer (C).
4. Insert the dipstick into the transmission. 8. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission.
5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It

should be between the upper mark (8) and lower
mark (C).
~ _ _ _B
~~
BACK
14-108
Protected by AR
ATF Replacement
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out ofthe transmission. 5. Refill the transmission with the recommended fluid
into the filler hole (A) to the upper mark on the
1. Bring the transmission up to operating temperature dipstick. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic
(the radiator fan comes on) by driving the vehicle. Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF
can affect shift quality.
2. Park the vehicle on the level ground, and turn the
engine off. Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity:
2.7 4 (2.9 US qt) at changing
3. Remove the ATF filler bolt and drain plug, and 7.1 4 (7.5 US qt) at overhaul
drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
B
NOTE: If a cooler flusher is to be used, refer to A TF 24x1.Smm
Cooler Flushing (see page 14-123). 44 N·m (4.S kgf·m, 33Ibf·tt)
6. Install the ATF filler bolt (B) with a new sealing

18x1.5mm washer (C).
49 N·m 15.0 kgf·m, 36 Ibf·ft)
4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer.
BACK 14-109
Protected by AR
Transmission Removal
1. Before disconnecting the battery, make sure you 9. Remove the ATF cooler hose (A) from the clamp (B)
have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write on the starter.
down the frequencies for the radio's preset stations.
2. Remove the bolts securing the support struts to the

hood. Secure the hood in a vertical position, then
reinstall the right strut in the lower position.
3. Disconnect the battery negative terminal, then

remove the positive terminal.
4. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then

remove the battery and battery tray.
5. Remove the battery cable clamps from the battery

base. Remove the battery base. B A
\ c
6. Loosen the mounting bolt securing the battery base 10. Remove the ATF cooler hoses (A) from the ATF
bracket, then remove the battery base bracket. cooler lines (C). Turn the ends ofthe ATF cooler
hoses up to prevent ATF flowing out, then plug the
7. Remove the intake air duct. ATF cooler hoses and lines.
8. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely NOTE: Check for any signs of leakage at the hose
supported. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain joints.
the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Reinstall
the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B). 11. Remove the starter cables (A) from the starter (B)
and clamp bracket (C), then remove the starter.
o 1~~
A
49N·m
B 15.0 kgf·m, 36 Ibf·ftl
c
12. Remove the transmission ground terminal (D).
13. Disconnect the shift control solenoid valve B

connector (E), and C connector (F), then remove the
harness clamp from the clamp bracket.
BACK
14-110
Protected by AR
14. Disconnect the connectors from the 3rd clutch 17. Disconnect the connectors from the countershaft
pressure switch (A), mainshaft speed sensor (B), speed sensor (A), and 2nd clutch pressure switch
and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A (B).
and B (C), then remove the harness clamps from
the clamp brackets.
18. Remove the AfT gear position switch connector (C)

15. Disconnect the connector from the lock-up control from the connector bracket (D), then disconnect it.
assembly (A), then remove the connector from the 19. Remove the vehicle speed sensor (VSS)/ power
harness cover (B). steering speed sensor. Do not disconnect the hoses.
16. Remove the bolt securing the connector bracket (C),

then push the harness cover rearward to remove it
from the transmission hanger (D). Remove the
ground terminal (E).
(cont'd)
BACK
14-111
Protected by AR
Transmission Removal (co nt'd)
20. Remove the nut from the front mount. 22. Lift and support the engine/transmission assembly
with an engine hanger (P/N AAR-T-12566, available
through the American Honda Tool and Equipment
~ program, or equivalent). Before attaching the
hanger, remove the front bulkhead cover (see page
20-135), and the front strut support beam.
21. Remove the front engine cover (A) and rear engine
cover (B).
23. Remove the splash shield.
BACK
14-112
Protected by AR
24. Remove the cotter pins (A), castle nuts (B), and 28. Make a reference mark (A) across the front beam
damper forks (e), then separate the ball joints from (B) and the rear beam (e).
the lower arms (D) (see page 18-9).
C
E
29. Disconnect the vacuum tube (A) on the front beam
(B), and unclamp the power steering fluid pipes (e)
from the clamps on the front beam.
25. Remove the bolts securing the radius rods (E), then
separate the radius rods from the lower arms (D).
26. Pry the driveshafts out of the differential and the

intermediate shaft (see step 10 on page 16-4).
27. Pull on the inboard joints to remove the left

driveshaft from the differential and to remove the
right driveshaft from the intermediate shaft.
30. Remove the nuts securing the transmission lower

mounts, then remove the front beam (B).
(cont'd)
BACK
14-113
Protected by AR
Transmission Removal (cont'd)
31. Remove the transmission lower rear mount (A) 35. Remove the bolts securing shift cable holder (A),
from the transmission. then remove shift cable cover (B).
NOTE: To prevent damage to the control lever joint,

remove the bolts securing the holder before
removing the bolts securing the cover.
,
32. Move the left driveshaft to the front side. Coat all
D
precision finished surfaces with clean engine oil,

then tie the plastic bags (B) over the driveshaft
ends.
33. Remove the intermediate shaft.

36. Remove the lock bolt (C) securing the control lever
(D), then remove the shift cable (E) with the control
lever. Do not bend the shift cable excessively.
37. Install a 6 x 1.0 x 14 mm bolt (A) and nut (B) on the

shift cable cover (C), then reinstall the shift cable
cover to the torque converter housing.
If you don't do this, the bolt head of the cable cover
may prevent you from removing the torque
converter during transmission removal.
B
34. Coat all precision finished surfaces with clean

engine oil, then tie the plastic bags over the both
ends of intermediate shaft.
A
/
14-114
BACK
Protected by AR
38. Remove the torque converter cover (A), then 41. Place a jack under the transmission.
remove the eight drive plate bolts (8) one at a time
while rotating the crankshaft pulley. 42. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts.
y
\ A 43. Remove the remaining transmission housing
mounting bolts (A) and the connector bracket bolt
39. Remove the engine stiffener bolts (e). (8).
40. Reml")ve the front mount bracket.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-115
Protected by AR
44. Pull the transmission away from the engine until it 47. Inspect the drive plate, and replace it if it's
clears the dowel pins, then lower it on the damaged.
transmission jack.
NOTE: If the torque converter is stuck to the drive

plate, pull it toward the transmission housing
through the starter opening.
45. Remove the shift cable cover, then remove the

torque converter assembly from the torque
converter housing.
48. Remove the 6 x 1.0 x 14 mm bolt (A) and nut (8)

from the shift cable cover (C).
B
46. Remove the transmission lower front mount.

~/
A
/
BACK
14-116
Protected by AR
Transmission Installation
1. Flush the ATF cooler (see page 14-123). 6. Attach the transmission to the engine, then install
the transmission housing mounting bolts (A) and
2. Install the transmission lower front mount. connector bracket bolt (B).
~ B
12 x 1.25 mm
10x 1.25mm
38 N·m (3.9 kgf·m, 28lbf·ftl A
12x 1.25 mm
3. Install the torque converter assembly (A) on the
mainshaft (B) with a new O-ring (e).
7. Install the transmission housing mounting bolts.
4. Install the 14 mm dowel pin (0) and 10 mm dowel

pin (E) in the torque converter housing (F).
/
12x 1.25 mm
5. Place that transmission on a jack, and raise it to

engine level.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-117
Protected by AR
Transmission Installation (cont'd)
8. Install the front mount bracket. 13. Install the control lever (A) with the shift cable (B)
on the control shaft (C). Do not bend the shift cable
10x 1.25 mm
38 N·m (3.9 kgf·m, 28 Ibf·ftl excessively.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2Ibf·ttl
6il c
B
9. Install the engine stiffener mounting bolts (A).

'8x1.25mm
C 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m,
6x 1.0 mm 16lbf·ttl
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ftl
B
14. Install the lock bolt (D) with a new lock washer (E),
then bend the lock washer tab against the bolt.
15. Install the shift cable cover (F), then install the shift
cable holder (G) on the shift cable cover.

be sure to install the shift cable holder after
~
installing the shift cable cover to the torque
converter housing.
16. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft

6x1.0mm contacts the transmission (differential) with solvent
/ 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ftl
A or carburetor cleaner, and dry with compressed air.
10 x 1.25 mm Then install the intermediate shaft in the
differential. While installing the intermediate shaft,
10. Attach the torque converter to the drive plate (B) be sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles
with eight bolts (C). Rotate the crankshaft pulley as to enter the transmission.
necessary to tighten the bolts to 1/2 of the specified
torque, then to the final torque, in a crisscross 10 x 1.25 mm
39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 30 Ibf.ttl
pattern. After tightening the last bolt, check that the
crankshaft rotates freely.
11. Install the torque converter cover (D).
12. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt as necessary (see

BACK
14-118
Protected by AR
17. Install new set rings on the right and left 20. Install the front beam (A) by aligning both reference
driveshafts. marks (8) on both rear beams (C), and tighten the
bolts.
18. Install the right and left driveshaft (see page 16-19).
A
While installing the left driveshaft in the differential,
be sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles
to enter the transmission.
NOTE:
• Clean the areas where the left driveshaft contacts
the transmission (differential) with solvent or
carburetor cleaner, and dry with compressed air.
• Turn the right and left steering knuckle fully
outward, and slide the left driveshaft into the
differential until you feel its spring clip engage
the side gear. Slide the right driveshaft into the
intermediate shaft until you feel its spring clip
engage the intermediate shaft.
19. Install the transmission lower rear mount on the

transmission.
~
10x 1.25 mm
21. Install the transmission lower mount nuts (0).
22. Connect the vacuum tube (E), and install the power
steering fluid pipes (F) on its clamps.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-119
Protected by AR
23. Install the damper forks (A), then install the ball 27. Install and tighten the nut on the front mount.
joints on each lower arm (8) with the castle nuts (e)
12x1.25mm
and new cotter pins (0). 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 Ibf.ftl
10 x 1.25 mm /
~~
.y.--
12x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m,
471bf·ftl
14x 1.5 mm
179 N·m (18.3 kgf·m,
1321bf·ftl
28. Remove the engine hanger from the engine.
29. Install the vehicle speed sensor (VSS)/power

steering speed sensor.
------
8x1.25mm
E
D C
12x 1.25 mm
49-59 N·m 15.0-6.0 kgf·m,
36-43 Ibf·ftl
24. Install the radius rods (E) on each lower arm.
25. Remove the jack from the transmission.
26. Install the splash shield.
BACK
14-120
Protected by AR
30. Connect the AfT gear position switch connector (A), 34. Connect the connectors to the 3rd clutch pressure
then install it on its connector bracket (8). switch (A), mainshaft speed sensor (8), and AfT
D A clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and 8 (C),
~
then install the clamps on the clamp brackets. Do
not allow water, fluid, oil, dust, or other foreign
particles to enter the 3rd clutch pressure switch
connector.
c
31. Connect the connectors to the countershaft speed
sensor (C), and 2nd clutch pressure switch (D). Do
not allow water, fluid, oil, dust, or other foreign
particles to enter the 2nd clutch pressure switch
connector.
32. Install the harness cover (A) on the transmission

hanger (8), then install the connector bracket (C)
and the transmission ground cable terminal (D). 35. Connect the connectors to the shift control solenoid
valve 8 (A) and shift control solenoid valve C (8),
then install the clamp on the clamp bracket.
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m,
33Ibf·ft)
B E 6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
(1.0kgf·m, 9 N·m (0.9 kgf·m,
33. Install the lock-up control solenoid valve/shift 7.2Ibf.ft) 6.5Ibf·ft)
control solenoid valve A assembly connector (E) on
the harness cover, then connect the connector. c
36. Install the transmission ground cable terminal (C).
(cont'd)
BACK
14-121
Protected by AR
37. Install the starter (0) on the torque converter 50. Reattach the right and left hood support struts.
housing. Connect the starter cables (E) to the
starter, and install the harness clamp on the clamp 51. Let the engine reach normal operating temperature
bracket. Make sure the crimped side of the starter (the radiator fan comes ori) with the transmission in
cable ring terminal is facing out. the [lJ or !J!J position, and continue to run the engine
at idle for more than 5 minutes to calibrate the
38. Connect the ATF cooler hoses (A) to the ATF cooler engine idle control system in the PCM (see page 11-
lines (B). Clamp the ATF cooler hose with the clamp 158).
(C) on the starter.
52. Turn the engine off and check the ATF level (see
page 14-108).
53. Perform a road test (see page 14-97).
54. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter
the radio station presets, and set the clock.
55. Loosen the front mount nut after the road test, then
retighten the nut to the specified torque.
12x 1.25mm
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 Ibf·ft)
B
A
,~~
~~
39. Install the battery base bracket and battery base.
40. Install the battery cable clamps on the battery base.
41. Install the battery tray and battery, then secure the
battery with its hold-down bracket.
42. Install the intake air duct.
43. Install the rear engine cover and the front engine
cover.
44. Install the front strut support beam (Torque 22 N·m,

2.2 kgf·m, 22 Ibf·ft), and the front bulkhead cover
(see page 20-135).
45. Refill the transmission with ATF (see page 14-109).
46. Connect the battery positive terminal, then connect

the negative terminal.
47. Set the parking brake. Start the engine, and shift
the transmission through all gears three times.
48. Check the shift lever operation, AfT gear position

indicator operation, and shift cable adjustment.
49. Check and adjust the front wheel alignment (see

page 18-5).
14-122 BACK
Protected by AR
ATF Cooler Flushing

Special Tools Required 7. With the water and air valves (A) off, attach the
Commercially Available Transmission Cooler Flusher water and air supplies to the flusher. (Hot water if
Kent-Moore J38405-A or equivalent available.)
This procedure should be performed before reinstalling

the transmission.
1. Check equipment for wear and cracks before using.

Replace any worn or cracked components.
2. Using the measuring cup, fill the flusher (A) with 21

ounces (approximately 2/3 full) of biodegradable
flushing fluid (J35944-20). Do not substitute with
any other fluid. Follow the handling procedure on
the fluid container.
8. Turn on the water valve for 10 seconds. If water

does not flow through the cooler, it is completely
plugged. cannot be flushed, and must be replaced.
9. Depress the trigger to mix the flushing fluid into the

water flow. Use the wire clip to hold the trigger
down.
10. While flushing with the water and flushing fluid for
2 minutes. turn the air valve on for 5 seconds every
15- 20 seconds to create a surging action.
AIR PRESSURE: MAX 845 kPa (8.45 kgf/cm',

120 psi)
3. Secure the flusher filler cap, and pressurize the 11. Turn the water valve off. Release the trigger. then
flusher with compressed airto 550-829 kpa (5.6- reverse the hoses to the cooler so you can flush in
8.45 kgf/cm2, 80 -120 psi). The air line should be the opposite direction. Repeat steps 8 through 10.
equipped with a water trap to ensure a dry air
system. 12. Release the trigger, and rinse the cooler with water
for 1 minute.
4. Hang the flusher under the vehicle.
13. Turn the water valve off and the water supply off.
5. Attach the flusher discharge hose (B) to the return
line of the ATF cooler using a clamp. 14. Turn the air valve on for 2 minutes. or until no
moisture is visible leaving the drain hose. Residual
6. Connect the drain hose (C) to the inlet line on the moisture in the cooler or lines can damage the
ATF cooler using a clamp. Securely clamp the transmission.
opposite end of the drain hose to a bucket (D) or
floor drain. 15. Remove the flusher from the cooler line. Attach the
drain hose to an ATF container.
16. Install the transmission, and leave the drain hose

attached to the cooler line.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-123
Protected by AR
ATF Cooler Flushing (cont'd) ATF Cooler Hoses Replacement
17. Make sure the transmission is in the (f] position. 1. Connect the cooler hoses (A) to the lines (8) and the
Fill the transmission with ATF. and run the engine ATF cooler. and secure them with the clips (C).
for 30 seconds or until approximately 0.952 (1.0 US
qt.) is discharged.
A E o
18. Remove the drain hose. and reconnect the cooler

return hose to the transmission.
19. Refill the transmission with ATF to the proper level

(see page 14-109).
c c
2. Clamp the ATF cooler hose with the yellow mark
(0) on the clamp (E).
14-124
BACK
Protected by AR
Shift Lever Removal
1. Shift the transmission into the [R] position. 5. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (A)
and the AfT shift switch connector (B).
2. Remove the console panel (see page 20-63).
3. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end (A),

then separate the end from the shift lever assembly.
6. Remove the four bolts (C) securing the shift lever

bracket base, then remove the shift lever assembly.
4. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B)

counterclockwise a quarter turn, then slide the
holder to remove the shift cable from the shift lever
bracket base (C).
NOTE: Do not remove the shift cable by twisting

the shift cable guide (D) and damper (E).
BACK 14-125
Protected by AR
·Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Installation
1. Install the shift lever assembly. 5. Insert a 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin (A) into the
positioning hole (B) on the shift lever bracket base
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the through the positioning hole on the shift lever
IRJ position indicator comes on. assembly. The shift lever is secured in the IRJ
position.
®
3. If necessary, push the shift cable (A) until it stops, 6. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B)
then release your hand. Pull the shift cable back toward the shift lever a quarter turn, then slide the
one step so that the shift position is in IRJ. Do not holder into the shift lever bracket base (C).
hold the shift cable guide (B) to adjust the shift Install the shift cable end (D) over the mounting
position. stud (E) by aligning its square hole (F) with the
square fitting (G) at the bottom of the stud, and
rotate the holder back a quarter turn to secure the
\ C§) u
iI~ shift cable.
NOTE: Do not install the shift cable by twisting the

shift cable guide (H) and damper (I).
+++++[8]+
14-126
BACK
Protected by AR
7. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly 10. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin that was installed
installed on the mounting stud (B). to hold the shift lever.
Properly Installed: 11. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector and the
AfT shift switch connector.
@D= T\ 12. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that
the AfT gear position indicator follows the AfT gear
A
I B
position switch.
13. Push the shift lock release, and verify that the shift
Improperly Installed: lever releases.
Cable end rides on the bottom

ofthe mounting stud.
8. If improperly installed, remove the shift cable from

the shift lever bracket base, and reinstall the shift
cable. Do not install the shift cable end on the
mounting stud while the shift cable is on the shift
cable bracket base.
9. Install and tighten the nut.
ax 1.2Smm
22N·m
12.2 kgf.m, 16 Ibf·ft)
BACK
14-127
Protected by AR
Shift Lever DisassemblyIReassembly
Apply silicone grease to these parts:

• Movable parts of the shift lever.
• Movable parts of the shift lock/reverse lock mechanism.
• Sliding surfaces on the opening ofthe indicator panel and panel holder.
• Sliding surfaces on the detent plate.
• Contact surfaces between of the shift lever assembly and the shift lock stop.
• Detent plunger and detent spring.
/ SHIFT LEVER KNOB
INDICATOR PANEL
PLATE HOLDER
INDICATOR PANEL \
PLATE
SHIFT SOLENOID
SUB HARNESS
($
fo
OOIT~ SHIFT LOCK
STOP CUSHION
~~\iro: I SHIFT LOCK STOP
AfT SHIFT SWITCH

CONNECTOR
8x 1.25 mm SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CLAMP

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m,
16Ibf·ft)
SHIFT LEVER
BRACKET BASE
SHIFT CABLE
8x1.25mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf.m, 16 Ibf·ft)
14-128 BACK
Protected by AR
Shift Cable Replacement
1. Raise the front ofthe vehicle, and make sure it is 7. Remove the floor heat shield.
securely supported (see page 1-14).
8. Remove the shift cable guide bracket (A) and
2. Set the parking brake, and block rear wheels grommet (8).
securely.
3. Shift the transmission into the [RJ position.

6x 1.0 mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
9. Remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder (A),

then remove the shift cable cover (8).
6. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (8) a

quarter turn; the tab (C) on the socket holder will be
in the opening of the shift lever bracket base (0).
Then slide the holder to remove the shift cable
from the shift lever bracket base (0).
(0), then remove the shift cable (E) with the control
lever.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-129
Protected by AR
Shift Cable Replacement (cont'd)
11. Insert the new shift cable through the grommet 17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the
hole, then install the shift cable guide bracket. [R] position indicator comes on.
12. Verify that the transmission is in the [R] position on 18. If necessary, push the shift cable (A) until it stops,
the control shaft. then release your hand. Pull the shift cable back
one step so that the shift position is in 00. Do not
13. Install the control lever (A) with the shift cable (B) hold the shift cable guide (B) to adjust the shift
on the control shaft (e). Do not bend the shift cable position.
excessively.
\@i1I~
i
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m. 7.2Ibf.ft)
• • • • • [8]+
20. Insert a 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin (A) into the

through the positioning hole on the shift lever
\
8x 1.25 mm
assembly. The shift lever is secured in the [R]
position.
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m.
16Ibf·ft)
D
6x 1.0mm
14 N·m 11.4 kgf·m.
10Ibf·ft)
14. Install the lock bolt (D) with a new lock washer (E), B
cable holder (G) on the cover.

installing the shift cable cover to the torque B A
converter housing.
16. Install the floor heat shield.
14-130 BACK
Protected by AR
21. Align the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) 23. If improperly installed, remove the shift cable from
with the slot in the bracket base (e), then slide the the shift lever bracket base, and reinstall the shift
holder into the base. Install the shift cable end (D) cable. Do not install the shift cable end on the
over the mounting stud (E) by aligning its square mounting stud while the shift cable is on the shift
hole (F) with the square fitting (G) at the bottom of cable bracket base.
the stud. Rotate the holder a quarter turn to secure
the shift cable. Do not install the shift cable by 24. Install and tighten the nut.
twisting the shift cable guide (H) and damper (I).
8x1.2Smm
22N·m
12.2 kgf·m, 16lbf·ftl
25. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin that was installed
to hold the shift lever.
position switch.
22. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly
installed on the mounting stud (B). 27. Start the engine, and check the shift lever operation
in all gears.
Properly Installed:
@D=
IA
r \ B
Improperly Installed:

of the mounting stud.
BACK
14-131
Protected by AR
Shift Cable Adjustment
1. Shift the transmission into the IBJ position. 5. Push the shift cable (A) until it stops, then release
your hand. Pull the shift cable back one step so that
2. Remove the console panel (see page 20-63). the shift position is in IBJ. 00 not push and pull the
shift cable by holding the shift cable guide (B).
\@O /I~
• • • • • [8]+
A
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and verify that the
4. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) a IBl position indicator comes on.
quarter turn; the tab (e) on the soclet holder will be
in the opening ofthe shift lever bracket base (0). 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
from the shift lever bracket base(O :, 00 not remove 8. Insert a 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin (A) into the
the shift cable by twistinf the shift cable guide (E) positioning hole (B) on the shift lever bracket base
and damper (F). through the positioning hole on the shift lever
assembly. The shift lever is secured in the IBJ
position.
'1}Y~ B
\~F
E
B A
14-132 BACK
Protected by AR
9. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) 11. If improperly installed, remove the shift cable from
toward the shift lever a quarter turn, then slide the the shift lever bracket base, and reinstall the shift
holder into the shift lever bracket base (e). cable. Do not install the shift cable end on the
Install the shift cable end (D) over the mounting mounting stud while the shift cable is on the shift
stud (E) by aligning its square hole (F) with the cable bracket base.
square fitting (G) at the bottom of the stud, and
rotate the holder back a quarter turn to secure the 12. Install and tighten the nut.
shift cable.
NOTE: Do not install the shift cable by twisting the

shift cable guide (H) and damper (I).
8x 1.25 mm
22N·m
12.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
position switch.
F 15. Push the shift lock release, and verify that the shift
lever releases.
installed on the mounting stud (B).
Properly Installed:
@D=
!A
T\ B

BACK
14-133
Protected by AR
AfT Gear Position Indicator
AfT GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

~ Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting. page 14-136
Sportshift Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting. page 14-141
Indicator Input Test. page 14-142
Indicator Bulb Replacement. page 14-147
AfT SHIFT SWITCH
Switch Circuit Troubleshooting. page 14-139 POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCMI
AfT GEAR POSITION SWITCH

Test. page 14-144
14-134 BACK
Protected by AR
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S
UNDER·DASH
UNDER·HOOD FUSEIRELAY BOX IGNITION FUSEIRELAY BOX
SWITCH
BATTERY
IGI ND.9 (7.51.)
r--------------------------------YEL------------------~
LED VSS Il4

A DUT IND
E6 AS AI.
DRIVER~
BLUlWHT GRIWU< UNDER·DASH WHT YEL
llU'IIU< BLlNAED FUSE/RELAY SLU 8LUIV\IotT
BLUIGAN ~ REDlBU< PNK BAN
R REVERSE
RELAY
C2 GAUGE ASSEMIL Y ~MULTIPLEX
r
' CONTROL
UNIT
(DAlVER~)
)-___H·7 BLKlBLU
'--
}------t-t "" WHT
~
r---t> STARTER
CUTAELAY
}----t-t AI RED/IU< -i r- RED/BU< -I N SHIFT LOCK

RELAY
ILKI8LU
rt>
CRUISE
CONTROL
3}-f----t .11 PNK ~ r--PNK--I UNIT
,
n
C7
' - - - - - - - VEL H-----1· • BLU ~ r--BLU - - I LTILU
"2
BAN ~ r--BRN--I
I. I
• 7
• , • 1 2 J G1Gl
ililili
C9
T
I
G501
RED
YEL BLU GRY REDNIHT
ST A
D3
NT GEAR POSITION
SWITCH
BACK
14-135
Protected by AR
~ Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the ~ 11. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
indicator. terminal D9 and body ground.
Does the ~ indicator come on and stay on? PCM CONNECTOR D (16P)
YES - Go to step 2. 21314 5

12
NO -If the indicator comes on for about 2 seconds
and then goes off, it's OK. If it doesn't come on at
all, go to step 12.
2. Make sure the Honda PGM Tester is not connected

to the data link connector.

4. Disconnect the A (32P) connector from the PCM.
Is there voltage?
YES-Faulty PCM or gauge assembly.•
terminal A 14 and body ground. NO-Check for a short to ground in the wire
between PCM connector terminal D9 and the AfT
gear position switch. If the wire is OK, check the AfT
gear position switch .•

D4 IND (GRN/BLK)
Does the ~ indicator come on?
YES - Check for loose terminal fit in PCM connector

A 14 and recheck the ~ indicator several times. If
the problem is intermittent, substitute a known-
Wire side of female terminals good PCM and recheck. If the indicator then works
OK every time, replace the original PCM .•
Is there voltage?
NO - Go to step 14.
YES - Repair short to power in the wire between
PCM connector terminal A 14 and the gauge 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
assembly .•
NO-Goto step 7.
8. Reconnect the A (32P) connector to the PCM.
10. Shift to any position other than~.
14-136 BACK
Protected by AR
15. Disconnect the 8 (25P) connector from the PCM. 19. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
16. Check for continuity between body ground and 20. Reconnect the 8 (25P) connector to the PCM.
PCM connector terminals 820 and B22.
21. Connect the digital multimeter between PCM
PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) connector terminals A 14 and 820 or 822.
PCM CONNECTORS
A (32P) B(25P)
D4IN'-D-(G-R-N-/B-L-K-)- - { 'Y. LG2 (BRN/BLK)

Is there continuity between ground and each
terminal?
YES-Go to step 17.
Is there voltage for at least two seconds?
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between PCM
connector terminal B20 or B22 and ground (G101), YES-Check for an open in the wire between PCM
or repair poor ground (G101) .• connector terminal A 14 and the gauge assembly. If
the wire is OK, check for a faulty ~ indicator bulb
17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). or a faulty printed circuit board in the gauge
assembly.•
terminals B1 and 822, and between terminals 89 NO-Go to step 23.
and 820.
IGP1 (YEL/BLK)
YES-Go to step 19.
NO - Repair open or short in the wire between PCM

connector terminal 81 or 89 and the PGM-FI main
relay .•
(cont'd)
BACK
14-137
Protected by AR
~ Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
24. Disconnect the A (32P) connector from the PCM.

terminal A 14 and No. 28 terminal of the gauge
assembly A (30P) connector.
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR A (30P)
D41ND (GRN/BLK)
YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM

connector terminal A 14 and the gauge assembly.•
NO-Check for loose terminal fit in PCM connector

terminal A14.lf necessary, substitute a known-
BACK
14-138
Protected by AR
Sequential Sportshift AIT Shift Switch Circuit Trouboeshooting
1. Test-drive the vehicle in the ~ position, and check 8. Check for continuity between the No.4 and No.1
whether the transmission shifts up and down terminals of the AfT shift switch connector while
normally. pushing the shift lever toward the" +" mark on the
AfT gear position indicator panel; then check for
2. Check whether the OBD II scan tool indicates continuity between the No.5 and No.1 terminals
P0753, P0758, P0763 or P1709. while pulling the shift lever toward the "-" mark.
Does the oao /I scan tool indicate any of the AfT SHIFT SWITCH CONNECTOR
codes?
BlK BlK
YES- Perform the Troubleshooting Flowchart for
the indicated Code(s) .•
NO-Go to step 3.
WHT/BlU BlU/YEl

terminal E8 and body ground, and between E7 and Terminal side of male terminals
body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR E (12P) Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO - Faulty AfT shift switch. Replace the shift lever

detent bracket assembly .•
Is there about 5V?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Run the DTC Troubleshooting for code P1709

(see page 14-85) .•
7. Disconnect the AfT shift switch connector.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-139
Protected by AR
Sequential Sportshift AfT Shift Switch Circuit Trouboeshooting (cont'd)
9. Connect the AIT shift switch connector. 12. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminals E7 and E9 while pulling the shift lever
10. Disconnect the E (12P) connector from the PCM. toward the" -" mark.
11. Check for continuity between PCM connector PCM CONNECTOR E (12PI
terminals E8 and E9 while pushing the shift lever
toward the" +" mark.
S·MODE (RED)
S·MODE (RED)
Is there continuity with the shift lever pulled

toward u _ " mark, and no continuity with it
Wire side of female terminals released?
Is there continuity with the shift lever pushed YES-Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
toward "+ " mark, and no continuity with it connectors. If necessary, sustitute a known·good
released? PCM and recheck .•
YES - Go to step 12. NO-Check for an open in the wire between PCM
connector terminal E7 and the AIT shift switch
NO-Check for an open in the wire between PCM connector. If wire is OK, replace the shift lever
connector terminal E8 and the AIT shift switch detent bracket assembly .•
connector. If wire is OK, replace the shift lever
14-140 BACK
Protected by AR
Sportshift Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
securely supported.
6. Disconnect the E (12P) connector from the PCM.
2. Set the parking brake, and block both rear wheels
securely. 7. Disconnect the gauge assembly A (30P) connector.
3. Start the engine, and move the shift lever ~ into 8. Check for continuity between PCM connector
the sequential sportshift mode position. terminals E4, E5, and E6 and body ground
individually.
terminals E4, E5, and E and body ground PCM CONNECTOR E (12P)
individually in all four sequential sportshift mode LED B (BLU/GRN)
gear positions.
LED C (BLU/BLK) LED A IBLU/RED)
LED B (BLU/GRN)
LED C (BLU/BLK) LED A IBLU/RED)
= =
= = =
VES- Repair short to ground in the wires between
PCM connector terminals E4, E5, and E6 and the
gauge assembly.•
Sequential Terminal Voltage
Sportshift NO-Check for loose terminal fit in PCM
Mode Gear E4 E5 E6 connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
Position Terminal Terminal Terminal PCM and recheck .•
1st Battery OV OV
voltage
2nd OV Battery OV
voltage
3rd Battery Battery OV

voltage voltage
4th OV OV Battery
voltage
Does the voltage match the table?
VES- Replace the AfT shift indicator in the gauge

assembly .•
NO-Go to step 5.
BACK
14-141
Protected by AR
Indicator Input Test
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the
1. Remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard (see page 22-128), then disconnect the A (30P) and C (14P)
connectors from the gauge assembly.
2. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are making good contact.
3. If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
4. Perform the following input test at the gauge assembly A (30P) and C (14P) connectors.
GAUGE ASSEMBL V CONNECTORS
A (30P) C(14P)
2 12113114 4 1 5 1 6
15116 28 129 I 30 11 I 12 1 13 1 14
Cavity Wire Color Test Condition Test: Desired Result Possible Cause
IH result is not obtained)
A7 BLK/BLU Shift lever in [fJ Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty AfT gear position
There should be no continuity. switch
A8 WHT Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: • An open in the wire
ON (II) and shift There should be 1 V or less.
lever in [RJ NOTE: There should be battery
A9 RED/BLK Ignition switch voltage in any other shift lever
ON (II) and shift position.
lever in [ii!J
A10 BLU Ignition switch
ON (II) and shift
lever in 00
A11 PNK Ignition switch
ON (II) and shift
lever in ~
A12 BRN Ignition switch
ON (II) and shift
lever in [II
A28 GRN/BLK Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty AfT gear position
ON (II) and shift There should be battery voltage. switch
lever in ~ • Faulty PCM
• An open in the wire I
14-142 BACK
Protected by AR
(If result is not obtained)
C7 VEL Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: There • Blown No.9 (7.5 A) fuse in the
(II) should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box
C9 BLK Under all Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
conditions There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
5. Connect the A (30P) and C (14P) connectors to the gauge assembly, then perform the following input test.
A4 BLU/BLK Start the engine Check for voltage to ground: There • Faulty PCM
and move the shift should be 5 V. • Faulty AfT shift switch
A5 BLU/GRN lever to the Check for voltage to ground: There • Faulty shift indicator
sequential should be 0 V. • An open in the wire
A6 BLU/RED sportshift mode 1st
_gear position
6. If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board.
BACK 14-143
Protected by AR
AfT Gear Position Switch Test
1. Remove the AfT gear position switch connector (A) from the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the connector.
2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table below.
NOTE: Terminal No.1: Neutral position switch
AfT Gear Position Switch Continuity Check
1\ Terminal
1 2 6 7 8 10
3 4 5 9
Position \
~
[BJ -
~
-.
IKl -,... - -
~
- -
'"'
~
[!)
III .., -'"'
14-144 BACK
Protected by AR
AfT Gear Position Switch Replacement
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 7. Set the AfT gear position switch to the [!U position.
NOTE: The AfT gear position switch clicks in the [!U
2. Set the parking brake, and block both rear wheels position.
securely.
3. Shift to the [!U position.
4. Remove the AfT gear position switch connector (A)

from the connector bracket (8), then disconnect the
connector.
8. Set the control shaft to the [!U position.
6. Remove the AfT gear position switch cover (e),

then remove the AfT gear position switch (D) from
the end cover.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-145
Protected by AR
AfT Gear Position Switch Replacement (cont'd)
9. Install the AfT gear position switch (A) gently on the 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever
control shaft (B), then secure it with the bolts. through all gears, and check the AfT gear position
switch synchronization with the AfT gear position
NOTE: Take care not to move the AfT gear position indicator.
switch when tightening the bolts.
6x 1.0 mm
E 12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ft)
®
13. Start the engine. Move the shift lever through all
gears, and verify the following:
• The engine will not start in any position other

6x1.0mm than [HJ or [fl.
B 12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft) • The back-up lights come on when the shift lever
is in the IRI position.
10. Install the AfT gear position switch cover (C), and
the harness clamp (0) on the end cover (E).
11. Connect the AfT gear position switch connector (Al,

then install it on the connector bracket (B).
14-146 BACK
Protected by AR
Indicator Bulb Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the

SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures
in the SRS section before performing repairs or service
(see page 23-15).
1. Remove the gauge assembly (see page 22-128).
2. Disassemble the gauge assembly.
3. Replace the bulbs (A) at the gauge assembly (B).
BACK
14-147
Protected by AR
AfT Interlock System
BRAKE SWITCH
Brake Pedal and Brake
Switch Adjustment, page 19-5
Test, page 4-45
g
~
MULTIPLEX CONTROL SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

UNIT (DRIVER'SI Test, page 14-159
Input Test, page 14-157 Replacement, page 14-160
Troubleshooting
Shift Lock System Circuit, page 14-150
Reverse Lock System Circuit, page 14-155
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY PARK PIN SWITCH
KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID Test, page 14-160
KEY INTERLOCK SWITCH
System Circuit Troubleshooting, page 14-153
Test, page 14-159
14-148 BACK
Protected by AR
Circuit Diagram
UNDER·HOOD FUSEIRELAY lOX
BATTERY
No.4712OA)
WHTIYEL - - -
DRlVE~'S
~eR-DASH
SEJllELAY lOX
No.' (1.5Aj
AfTGEAA
~f~
NPOSITION
WlfTnIED
G302
t
MULnI'lEX CONTIIOI.
UNT IDRIVER"S)
-~
~TCH
T
811
'J
WHTIRED
Ill(
AfT GEAR
POSITON
1 G501
SWITCH
PPOSITICN
G401
BACK
14-149
Protected by AR
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Press the brake pedal. 7. Press the brake pedal and measure the voltage
between PCM connector terminals A32 and 820 or
Are the brake lights ON? 822.
PCM CONNECTORS
YES - Go to step 2.
A (32P) B(25P)
NO- Repair faulty brake light circuit.•
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and shift to the [fj

position.
3. Press the brake pedal, and release the accelerator BK SW (WHTIBLK)

pedal. LG1 (BRN/BLK)
4. Measure the voltage between PCM connector ----02., LG2 (BRN/BLK)

terminal A28 and body ground.
516 171 1819 110 111
YES - Release the brake pedal. and go to step 8.
17118119120121122123124
251261271 128129130131\ ~ NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM
i
ILU (WHTIRED) connector terminal A32 and the brake switch .•
8. Reconnect the A (32P) and 8 (25P) connectors to the

PCM.

Is there battery voltage? terminals C27 and 820 or 822 .
PCM CONNECTORS
YES - Check for an open in the wi re between the A
28 terminal and the multiplex control unit (driver's),
and check for loose terminal fit in the multiplex
B(25P)
-,--
1 2 3 4 5
~-
C (31P)
6 7 811 1 234 5 6 7
.-- -- -
control unit (driver's) connectors. If necessary,

substitute a known-good multiplex control unit 9 10 1112 / 14 15 V
17181 V
1213 14V 16 1718'
(driver's) and recheck .• L20 2122 23 24 25 23 V 25 26 2728
NO-Go to step 5.
'--
"-T '::L I
LG2 (BRN/BLK)

V
LG1 (BRN/BLK) TPS (RED/BLK)
6. Disconnect the A (32P) and B (25P) connectors from
the PCM. Wire side of female terminals
Is there about 0.5 V (throttle fully closed)?
NO-Go to step 11.
14-150 BACK
Protected by AR
12. Disconnect the throttle position sensor connector. 16. Check for continuity between the No.2 terminal of
13. Measure the voltage between the No.1 and No.3 the shift lock solenoid connector and the No. 22
terminal of the throttle position sensor connector. terminal of the multiplex control unit (driver's)
connector B (22P).
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT

THROTTLE POSmON SENSOR CONNECTOR (DRIVER'S) CONNECTOR B (22P)
~
SG2tJVCC2
SHIFT lOCK SOLENOID

Terminal side of male terminals CONNECTOR

Is there about 5V?
YES - Check for short or open in the wire between
PCM connector terminal C27 and the TPS. If the YES-Go to step 17.
wire :s OK, replace the TPS .•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No. 22
NO- Go to step 14. terminal ofthe multiplex control unit (driver's)
connector B (22P) and the shift lock solenoid .•
14. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the
PCM connector. Check for continuity between the 17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
No.1 terminal and body ground, and between the
No.3 terminal and body ground. 18. Measure the voltage between the No.1 terminal of
the shift lock solenoid connector and body ground.
THROTTLE POSmON SENSOR CONNECTOR SHIFT lOCK SOLENOID

CONNECTOR
~
SG2~ ~VCC2 VEl/BlK

=
YES-Check for a short to ground between the No.
3 terminal of the TPS connector and ground. If the YES-Gotostep 19.
wire is OK, replace the PCM .•
NO-Check for blown No.8 (7.5 A) fuse in the
NO-Go to step 15.• driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
repair open or short in the wire between the No.1
15. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector. terminal of the shift lock solenoid and the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box.•
(cont'd)
BACK
14-151
Protected by AR
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
19. Connect the No.1 terminal of the shift lock solenoid

connector to the battery positive terminal, and
connect the No.2 terminal to the battery negative
terminal.
NOTE: Do not connect the No.2 terminal to the

battery positive terminal or you will damage the
diode inside the shift lock solenoid.
20. Check that the shift lock solenoid operates.
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

CONNECTOR
Does the shift lock solenoid operate properly?
YES-Check for a loose multiplex control unit

(driver's) connector. If necessary, substitute a
known-good multiplex control unit (driver's) and
recheck .•
NO - Replace the shift lock solenoid .•
14-152 BACK
Protected by AR
Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting
,. Disconnect the key switch connector (7P) from the 5. Measure the voltage between the No.7 terminal
steering lock assembly. and body ground.
2. Connect the No.7 terminal of the key switch KEY SWITCH CONNECTOR (7PI
terminal.
KEY SWITCH CONNECTOR (7PI
=
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Check for blown No. 47 (20A) fuse in the
3. Turn ~he ignition switch to ACC (I), then push the under-hood fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuse is OK, repair
ignition key. open or short in the wire between the No.7
terminal of the key switch connector and under-
4. Check the key interlock solenoid operation. A hood fuse/relay box.•
clicking sound should be heard while pushing the
ignition key, and you should not be able to turn it to
the OFF position.
Does the key interlock solenoid operate properly?
YES - Go to step 5.
NO-Faulty key interlock solenoid/switch. Replace

the ignition key cylinder/steering lock assembly.•
(cont'd)
BACK
14-153
Protected by AR
Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
6. Disconnect the AfT shift switch connector on the 9. Check for continuity between the No.3 terminal of
rear of the shift lever. the AfT shift switch connector and body ground.
7. With the shift lever in Park and pushed to the right,

check for continuity between the No.3 and No.8 A/T SHIFT SWITCH CONNECTOR
terminals of the AfT shift switch connector. BLK
A/T SHIFT SWITCH CONNECTOR
BLK/WHT
WHT/BLK Wire side of female terminals
YES-Check for loose terminal fit in the key switch
connector and AfT shift switch connector. If
Is there continuity? necessary, substitute a known-good steering lock
assembly.•
YES - Go to step 8.
NO-Repair open in the wires between the park pin terminal of the AfT shift switch connector and
switch and the AfT shift switch connector. If the ground (G501). Repair poor ground (G501) .•
wires are OK, replace the park pin switch and the
AfT shift switch assembly.•
8. Check for continuity between the No.8 terminal of

the AfT shift switch connector and the No.5
terminal ofthe key switch connector.
KEY SWITCH CONNECTOR (7P)
A/T SHIFT SWITCH

CONNECTOR
lk:J.illj
~WHT/RED
YES-Go to step 9.
NO- Repair open in the wire between No.8

terminal of the AfT shift switch connector and the
No.5 terminal of the key switch connector.•
BACK
14-154
Protected by AR
Reverse Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check whether the OBD II scan tool indicates P1705 9. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.4
or P1706. terminals of the shift lock relay while connecting
the battery positive terminal to the No.5 terminal
Does the OBO /I scan tool indicate either code? of the shift lock relay, and connecting the negative
terminal to the No.3 terminal.
YES - Perform the DTC Troubleshooting for the
indicated Code(s) . •
SHIFT LOCK RELAY
NO- Go to step 2.
3. Shift the shift lever into the [fJ position while

pushing the shift lock release.
5. Depress the brake pedal, and do not depress the Terminal side of male terminals
accelerator pedal.
6. Shift the shift lever out of the [f] position to check Is there no continuity when connecting the battery
that the shift lock solenoid operates. terminals, and continuity when disconnecting the
battery terminals?
Does the shift lever shift out of the [fJ position?
YES-Go to step 10.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO- Replace the shift lock relay .•
NO - Perform the Troubleshooting for the Shift
Lock System Circuit (see page 14-150) .• 10. Shift the shift lever into the IHl position.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Check the continuity between the No.4 terminal of
the shift lock relay socket and body ground.
8. Remove the shift lock relay.
SHIFT LOCK RELAY SOCKET
=
YES-Goto step 12.

terminal of the shift lock relay and the shift position
switch .•
(cont'd)
BACK
14-155
Protected by AR
Reverse Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
12. Shift the shift lever out of the [f!J position.
13. Check for continuity between the No. 4 terminal of

SHIFT LOCK SOCKET

the No.4 terminal of the shift lock relay and the
shift position switch .•
NO-Go to step 14.

the shift lock relay socket and the No.2 termial of
the shift lock solenoid connector.
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

CONNECTOR
YES - Check for loose terminal fit in the connectors.

Repair the reverse lock mechanism .•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No.1

terminal of the shift lock relay and the shift lock
solenoid connector .•
BACK
14-156
Protected by AR
1. Disconnect the 22P connector from the multiplex control unit, driver's, then remove the control unit from the
.. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
2. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
NOTE: Ifthe shift lock solenoid clicks when the ignition switch is turned ON (II) while depressing the brake pedal
with the shift lever in the (f] position, the shift lock system is OK. If the shift lever cannot be shifted from ~
position, test the AfT gear position switch.
3. With the control unit still disconnected from its connectors and the fuse/relay box, make these input tests.
• If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
• If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 4.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-157
Protected by AR
Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DRIVER'S, CONNECTORS
Terminal side of male terminals Wire side of female terminals
.. _--- ---- . _- ---- -- _

..... , .... ... _. -. _ -_ -_ . _.
....
A12 -- Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.9 (7.5 A) fuse in the
turned ON (II) There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
• An o~en in the wire
A3 -- Shift lever in [tJ Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty AfT gear position switch
There should be continuity. • Poor ground (G101)
.. _..... _.... -_..... _. _..... ,-.. -_. -, --. -_.... __ .._.

B11 BlK Under all Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
conditions There should be continu~. • An ~en in the wire
B22 GRN Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.8 (7.5 A) fuse in the
ON (II) There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty shift lock solenoid
• An ope!! in the wire - -_._- - -
4. Reconnect the connectors to the multiplex control unit, and make this input test.
• If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system .
• If all the input tests prove OK, substitute a known-good multiplex control unit, and recheck the system.
If the system is OK, the multiplex control unit, must be faulty; replace it.
B12 WHT/RED Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty brake switch
ON (II) and brake There should be battery • Faulty PCM
pedal pushed voltage. • Faulty multiplex control unit
Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: (driver's)
ON (II), brake pedal There should be 1 V or less. • An open in the wire
and accelerator
pedal depressed at
the same time
14-158 BACK
Protected by AR
Key Interlock Solenoid/Switch Test Shift Lock Solenoid Test
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 1. Remove the console panel (see page 20-63).
in the SRS section before performing repairs or service 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid 2P connector.
(see page 23-15).
1. Remove the driver'S dashboard lower cover (see

page 20-65).
2. Disconnect the key switch connector (7P) from the

steering lock assembly.
3. Check for continuity between the No.5 and No.7

terminals when the key is pushed, and check for no
continuity when the key is released.

terminal.
4. Check that the shift lever can be moved from the [lJ
position. Release the battery terminals from the
shift lock solenoid connector. Move the shift lever
Terminal side of male terminals back to the [lJ position, and make sure it locks.
NOTE: Do not connect power to the No.2 terminal

4. Check that the key cannot be removed with power (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode
connected to the No.7 terminal and ground inside the solenoid.
connected to the No.3 terminals.
5. Check that the shift lock releases when the release
• If the key cannot be removed, the key interlock lever is pushed, and check that it locks when the
solenoid is OK . release lever is released.
• If the key can be removed, replace the steering
lock assembly (the key interlock solenoid is not 6. If the solenoid does not work, replace it.
available separately).
BACK 14-159
Protected by AR
Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement Park Pin Switch Test
,. Remove the console panel (see page 20-63). ,. Remove the console panel (see page 20-63).
2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid 2P connector. 2. Disconnect the mode switch/park pin connector.
3. Pry the shift lock solenoid clamp (A) with a

screwdriver, then remove the shift lock solenoid (8).
3. Shift the shift lever into the [f] position, then check
for continuity between the No.3 and No.8
terminals. There should be no continuity.
4. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (e) and
plunger spring (D) in the new shift lock solenoid. 4. Shift the shift lever out of the [f] position, and check
for continuity between the terminals in step 3.
5. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of There should be continuity.
the shift lock solenoid with the tip of the shift lock
stop (E). 5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace the detent
bracket assembly.
6. Secure the shift lock solenoid with the clamp, then
connect the shift lock solenoid connector. NOTE: The park pin switch is not available
separately from the detent bracket.
14-160 BACK
Protected by AR
Transmission End Cover
End Cover and Idler Gears Removal

Exploded View
AfT GEAR PosmON END COVER

SWITCH COVER
END COVER GASKET
Replace.
AfT GEAR PosmON

SWITCH
CONICAL SPRING
WASHER
Replace.
CONICAL SPRING WASHER

Replace.
PITOT PIPE FLANGE
MAINSHAFT IDLER GEAR
Replace.
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
LINE BOLT
SEALING WASHERS LINE BOLT

Replace.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-161
Protected by AR
End Cover and Idler Gears Removal (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 6. Cut the lock tabs (A) of each shaft locknut (B) using
Mainshaft holder a chisel (C). Then remove the locknuts and conical
07GAB-PFS0101 or 07GAB-PFS0100 spring washers from each shaft.
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the NOTE:

following procedure. • Countershaft and secondary shaft locknuts have
left-hand threads.
1. Remove the AfT gear position switch cover. • Clean the old locknuts; they are used to install the
press fit idler gears on the mainshaft and
2. Remove the harness clamp bolt and the two AfT secondary shaft, and the park gear and bearing
gear position switch bolts, then remove the AfT hub on the countershaft.
gear position switch. • Keep all of the chiseled particles out of the
transmission~
iL
3. Remove the 16 bolts securing the end cover, then
1/
remove the end cover.
c
4. Slip the special tool onto the mainshaft.
7. Remove the special tool from the mainshaft.

8. Remove the pitot pipe (A) and the lubrication pitot
pipe (B) from the transmission housing (C), then
remove the pitot flange (D) from the mainshaft idler
S. Engage the park pawl with the park gear. gear (E).
14-162 BACK
Protected by AR
Park Lever Stop Inspection and

Adjustment
9. Remove the mainshaft idler gear (A) and the
secondary shaft idler gear (B) with a puller (C).
1. Set the park lever (A) in the [lJ position.
A
o
6x1.0mm
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 fbf·tt)
2. Measure the distance (B) between the park pawl

10. Remove the bearing hub (D) with the puller from shaft (C) and the park lever roller pin (D).
the countershaft, then remove the countershaft
idler gear (E) and bearings. STANDARD: 84.6-85.6 mm (3.33 - 3.37 in.'
11. Remove the park gear (F) with the puller. 3. If the measurement is out of tolerance, select and
install the appropriate park lever stop (E) from the
12. Remove the park pawl, spring, shaft, and shaft stop. table below.
13. Remove the park lever from the control shaft.
14. Remove the line bolts, then remove the ATF cooler
lines.
PARK LEVER STOP
Mark Part Number L1 L2

1 24537 -PA9-003 11.00 mm 11.00 mm
(0.433 in.) (0.433 in.)
2 24538-PA9-003 10.80 mm 10.65 mm
(0.425 in.) (0.419 in.)
3 24539-PA9-003 10.60 mm 10.30 mm
(0.417 in.) (0.406 in.)
4. After replacing the park lever stop, make sure the

distance is within tolerance.
BACK
14-163
Protected by AR
Transmission Housing
Housing and Shaft Assemblies Removal
Exploded View
REVERSE IDLER GEAR

SHAFT HOLDER
REVERSE IDLER GEAR SHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
2ND GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT ~
REVERSE GEAR ~
~,
-- TRANSMISSION HOUSING
' ~TRANSMISSION HANGER
REVERSE SELECTOR ~
HUB ~ (i5
COUNTERSHAFT
4TH GEAR
MAINSHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT SUB-ASSEMBLY
SUB-ASSEMBLY
TRANSMISSION HOUSING
GASKET
Replace.
DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
COUNTERSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
TORQUE CONVERTER HOUSING
BACK
14-164
Protected by AR
Special Tools Required 4. Align the spring pin (A) on the control shaft (B) with
Housing puller 07HAe-PK40102 the transmission housing groove (e) by turning the
control shaft.
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the
07HAC-PK40102
following procedure.
1. Remove the two bolts securing the reverse idler

gear shaft holder, then remove the reverse idler
gear shaft holder (A), shaft (B), and washer (e).
1-----8
5. Install the special tool over the mainshaft, then

remove the transmission housing (0) .
C
NOTE: If the top arm of your housing puller is too
short, replace it with Housing Puller Arm, 205 mm,
TIN 07SAe-POZ0101.
2. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts,
transmission hangers, and harness clamp bracket. 6. Remove the reverse idler gear, needle bearings,
and thrust washer from the transmission housing.
3. Move the reverse idler gear (A) to disengage it from
the mainshaft and countershaft reverse gears. 7. Remove the countershaft 2nd gear, then remove
the countershaft reverse gear and the needle
NOTE: The transmission housing will not separate bearing.
from the torque converter housing ifthe reverse
idler gear is not moved. 8. Remove the lock bolt securing the shift fork, then
remove the shift fork with the reverse selector,
reverse selector hub, countershaft 4th gear, and
needle bearing from the countershaft. If the reverse
selector hub is press-fitted, leave it and 4th gear on
the countershaft.
9. Remove the secondary shaft subassembly. If the

reverse selector hub is press-fitted, remove the
secondary shaft subassembly, countershaft
subassembly and mainshaft subassembly together.
10. Remove the countershaft subassembly.
11. Remove the mainshaft subassembly.
12. Remove the differential assembly.
BACK
14-165
Protected by AR
Bearing Removal and Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Release the pliers, then push the bearing down into
• Driver 07749-0010000 the housing until the snap ring snaps in place
• Seal driver attachment 07GAD-PG40101 or around it.
07GAD-PG40100
• Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
• Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
NOTE: Coat all parts with ATF before assembly.
1. To remove the mainshaft bearing (A), countershaft

bearing (8), and secondary shaft bearing (C) from
the transmission housing, expand each snap ring
with the snap ring pliers, then push the bearing out.
NOTE: Do not remove the snap rings unless it's

necessary to clean the grooves in the housing.
5. After installing the bearings verify the following:
• The snap rings (A) are seated in the bearing and

housing grooves .
• The ring end gaps (8) are correct.
B:0-7mm
(0-0.28 in.)
2. Install the bearings in the direction shown.
3. Expand each snap ring with the snap ring pliers,

and insert the bearing part-way into the housing.
BACK
14-166
Protected by AR
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal

Exploded View
6x1.0mm,
Two Bolts
SERVO DETENT \ 6x 1.0mm,

BASE Two Bolts
ATFFEED
ATF STRAINER PIPES
~
O-RING
\ Replace. ,
~~~WOL \ ~
O-RING \
Replace.~~ REGULATOR
VALVE BODY
\
~~~NT
6x 1.0mm,
Two Bolts
\ ~~.---------STATORSHAFT
1__- - - - - - - - - STATOR SHAFT STOP

DETENT
ARM SHAFT
ATF PUMP DRIVE GEAR

ATF PUMP DRIVEN GEAR
SHAFT
~ ATF PUMP DRIVEN GEAR
MAIN SEPARATOR PALATE
ACCUMULATOR TORQUE CONVERTER

BODY HOUSING
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE
DOWEL PINS, Three Pins
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE SPRING
(cont'd)
BACK
14-167
Protected by AR
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal (cont'd)
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the 16. Clean the inlet opening (A) of the ATF strainer (8)
following procedure. thoroughly with compressed air, then check that it
is in good condition, and that the inlet opening is
1. Remove the ATF feed pipes from the regulator not clogged.
valve body, servo body, and accumulator body.
2. Remove the servo detent base (two bolts).
3. Remove the ATF strainer (two bolts).
4. Remove the accumulator cover (two bolts).
5. Remove the bolts securing the servo body (nine

bolts), then remove the servo body, servo
separator plate and dowel pins (two).
6. Remove the accumulator body (six bolts).
7. Remove the regulator valve body (eight bolts).

17. Test the ATF strainer by pouring clean ATF through
8. Remove the stator shaft and stator shaft stop. the inlet opening, and replace it if it is clogged or
damaged.
9. Remove the regulator separator plate and dowel
pins (two).
10. Unhook the detent spring from the detent arm, then
remove the detent arm shaft, detent arm, and
control shaft.
11. Remove the cooler check valve spring and cooler

check valve (steel ball).
12. Remove the main valve body (four bolts).
13. Remove the torque converter check valve and

spring.
14. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft, then

remove the ATF pump gears.
15. Remove the main separator plate and dowel pins

(three).
14-168 BACK
Protected by AR
Valve Body Repair
NOTE: This repair is only necessary if one or more of 5. Remove the # 600 paper. Thoroughly wash the
the valves in a valve body do not slide smoothly in their entire valve body in solvent, then dry it with
bores. Use this procedure to free the valves. compressed air.
1. Soak a sheet of # 600 abrasive paper in ATF for 6. Coat the valve with ATF, then drop it into its bore. It
about 30 minutes. should drop to the bottom of the bore under its
own weight. If not, repeat step 4 and 5, then retest.
2. Carefully tap the valve body so the sticking valve If the valve still sticks, replace the valve body.
drops out of its bore. It may be necessary to use a
small screwdriver to pry the valve free. Be careful
not to scratch the bore with the screwdriver.
3. Inspect the valve for any scuff marks. Use the ATF-
soaked # 600 paper to polish off any burrs that are
on the valve, then wash the valve in solvent and
dry it with compressed air.
4. Roll up half a sheet of ATF-soaked # 600 paper and

insert it in the valve bore of the sticking valve.
Twist the paper slightly, so that it unrolls and fits
the bore tightly, then polish the bore by twisting the
paper as you push it in and out.
NOTE: The valve body is aluminum and doesn't

require much polishing to remove any burrs.
7. Remove the valve, and thoroughly clean it and the

valve body with solvent. Dry all parts with
compressed air, then reassemble using ATF as a
lubricant.
BACK 14-169
Protected by AR
Valve Body
Valve Body Valve Installation
1. Coat all parts with ATF before assembly.
2. Install the valves and springs in the sequence

shown forthe main valve body (see page 14-171),
regulator valve body (see page 14-174), and servo
body (see page 14-175), Refer to the following
valve cap illustrations, and install each valve cap so
the end shown facing up will be facing the outside
of the valve body.
EJ Ej
~ ~
~~eJ~
@@~
3. Install all the springs and seats. Insert the spring (A)
in the valve, then install the valve in the valve body
(8). Push the spring in with a screwdriver, then
install the spring seat (C).
/
\2- I
A
~~ ~ B
14-170 BACK
Protected by AR
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean a" parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blowout a"
passages.
2. Do not use a magnet to remove the check valve ball; it may magnetize the ball.
3. Check a" valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to Valve Body Repair (see page 14-169).
4. Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts worn or damaged.
5. Coat a" parts with ATF during assembly.
6. Insta" the filter in the direction shown.
MODULATOR VALVE
MAIN VALVE BODY
Inspect for scoring and
damage.
FILTER
Install in this direction.
REVERSECPC
VALVE
@
05---=----;;~- SHIFT VALVE E
VALVE
SLEEVE
\ ~~~f
®~
~~~ ;'
.¢\ \
f ® LOCK-UP SHIFT
VALVE
~~\
CD
COOLER CHECK VALVE (BALL)
MANUAL VALVE
/ @ TORQUE CONVERTER CHECK VALVE

VALVE CAP CLIP SERVO CONTROL VALVE
(cont'd)
BACK
14-171
Protected by AR
Valve Body
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly (cont'd)
Sectional View
o @
MAINVALVE / ®
Sectional V'lewBODY
MANUAL VAL
SPRING SPECIFICATIONS
No. Spring Standard INew)-Unit: mm (in.)

Wire Dia. 0.0. Free Length No. of Coils
CD Modulator valve spring 1.6 (0 .063) 10.4 (0.409) 33.5 (1.319) 9.8
® Shift valve C spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.5 (1.949) 21.7
® Shift valve D spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0 .260) 35.7 (1.406) 17.2
(!) Shift valve E spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 10.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
® Relief valve spring 1.1 (0.043) 8.6 (0.339) 30.111.185) 10.7
® Lock-up shift valve spring 0.9 (0.035) 7.6 (0.299) 63.0 (2.480) 22.4
CD Cooler check valve spring 0.6 (0 .024) 5.8 (0.228) 14.4 (0.567) 6.8
® Torque converter check valve 1.2 (0.047) 8.6 (0.339) 34.4 (1.354) 11 .7
® Servo control valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.610.260) 35.7 (1.406) 17.2
-@ Reverse CPC valve spring 0.7 (0.Q28) 6.1 (0.24Ql 17.8 (0.701) --~-
7.9
14-172 BACK
Protected by AR
ATF Pump Inspection
1. Install the ATF pump drive gear (A), driven gear (B), 2. Measure the side clearance of the ATF pump drive
and ATF pump driven gear shaft (C) in the main gear (A) and driven gear (B).
valve body (0). Lubricate all parts with ATF, and
install the ATF pump driven gear with its grooved ATF Pump Gears Side (Radial) Clearance:
and chamfered side facing up. Standard (New):
ATF Pump Drive Gear
0.210-0.265 mm (0.0083-0.00104 in.)
ATF Pump Driven Gear
0.070-0.125 mm (0.0028-0.0050 in.)
3. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft. Measure
D
I c the thrust clearance between the ATF pump driven
gear (A) and the valve body (B) with a straight edge
(C) and a feeler gauge (0).
ATF Pump Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial)

Clearance:
BACK
14-173
Protected by AR
Valve Body
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blowout all
passages.
2. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to Valve Body Repair (see page 14-169).
3. Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts are worn or damaged.
4. Hold the regulator spring cap in place while removing the stop bolt. The regulator spring cap is spring loaded .
Once the stop bolt is removed, release the spring cap slowly so it does not pop out.
5. Reassembly is the reverse of the disassembly. Install the filter in the direction shown.
6. Coat all parts with ATF during reassembly.
7. Align the hole in the regulator spring cap with the hole in the valve body, then press the spring cap into the valve
body, and tighten the stop bolt.
REGULATOR~~
0- _~
~", REGULATOR VALVE BODY
damage.
LOCK-UP TIMING VALVE / /
~
®
®
~
V'LVECAP
~@~~~~ -8 FILTER
~/~~
Install in this direction.
~cS), ~
VALVE CAP CLIP LOCK-UP CONTROL VALVE
V '"VALVE SLEEVE
®
No. Spring Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.)

Wire Dia. O_D_ Free Length No. of Coils
CD Stator reaction spring 5.5 (0.217) 37.4 (1.472) 30.3(1.193) 2.12
® Regulator valve spring A 1.9 (0.075) 14.7 (0.579) 77.4 (3.047) 15.2
® Regulator valve spring B 1.6 (0.063) 9.2 (0.362) 44.0 (1.732) 12.5
0 Lock-up control valve spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 44.3 (1.744) 25.5
® Lock-up timinQ valve sprinQ 0.65 (0.026) 6.6 (0.260) 34.8 (1.370) 15.6
14-174 BACK
Protected by AR
Servo Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
passages.
CPCVALVEA
CPCVALVEB
SHIFT VALVE A
~SERVOBODV Inspect for scoring

and damage.
SHIFTVALVEB
~O-RINGS Replace.
No. Spring Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.)

WireOia. 0.0. Free Length No. of Coils
CD Shift valve B spring 0.8 (0.031) 7.1 (0.280) 40.4 (1.591) 16.9
® Shift valve A spring 0.8 (0.031) 7.1 (0.280) 40.4 (1.591) 16.9
® CPC valve A spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
@ CPC valve B spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
® 4th accumulator spring A 2.6 (0.102) 19.6 (0.772) 66.4 (2.614) 9.7
® 4th accumulator spring B 2.4 (0.094) 12.8 (0.504) 51.5 (2.028) 11.5
(j) 3rd accumulator spring A 2.6 (0.102) 19.6 (0.772) 66.4 (2.614) 9.7
® 3rd accumulator spring B 2.4 (0.094) 12.8 (0.504) 51.5 (2.028) 11.5
BACK
14-175
Protected by AR
Valve Body
Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls; it may magnetize the balls.
passages.
STOP BOLT _ _ _ _ LUBRICATION CHECK VALVE

6x1.0mm
1~.m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
ACCUMULATOR BODY COVER

v______ VALVE CLIP
ACCUMULATOR BODY
_ _ _ _ _ _ Inspect for scoring and
damage.
<D-----.... : ..--------®
~ ~
®~~ ~ ~@
I:~
I :
1ST ACCUMULATOR PISTON ~ o~ ~ 2ND ACCUMULATOR PISTON
~A
O-RING
/E-3
Replace.
~
SNAP RINGS
~O-RING Replace.
No. Springs Standard (Newl-Unit: mm (in.1

CD 1st accumulator spring B 2.7 (0.106) 14.8 (0.583) 52.5 (2.067) 11.3
® 1st accumulator spring A 2.6 (0.102) 21.6 (0.850) 80.5 (3.169) 11.2
® 2nd accumulator spring B 2.4 (0.094) 12.6 (0.496) 53.5 (2.106) 12.9
@ 2nd accumulator spring A 2.7(0.1@) 19.6 (0.772) 66.3 (2.610) 9.9
BACK
14-176
Protected by AR
Torque Converter Housing
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Install the new oil seal flush with the housing with
• Adjustable bearing puller, 25-40 mm the special tools.
07736-AO 10008 or 07736-AO 1OOOA
• Driver 07749-0010000 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
• Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
1. Remove the mainshaft bearing and oil seal with the

special tool and a commercially available 3/8"-16
slide hammer(A).
07746-0010600
07736-A01000B or
07736-A01000A
2. Install the new mainshaft bearing until it bottoms in

the housing with the special tools.
07749-0010000
07746-0010500
BACK 14-177
Protected by AR
Countershaft Bearing Replacement Secondary Shaft Bearing

Replacement
• Adjustable bearing puller, 25-40 mm
07736-A010008 or 07736-A01000A Special Tools Required
• Driver 07749-0010000 • Adjustable bearing puller, 25-40 mm
• Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 07736-AO 10008 or 07736-AO 1OOOA
• Driver 07749-0010000
1. Remove the countershaft bearing (A) with the • Driver Attachment 07947-6340500
slide hammer (8). 1. Remove the secondary shaft bearing (A) with the
slide hammer (8) .
.~ )
~
.~.~ J,
07736-A01000B or
07736-A01000A
" ~
A
07736-A01000B or
2. Install the ATF guide plate (A). 07736-A01000A A
07749-0010000
2. Install the ATF guide plate (A).
07749-0010000
0-0.03 mm
(0-0.001 in.)
c
3. Install the new bearing (8) into the housing (C) with
the special tools. 3. Install the new bearing (8) into the housing (C) with
the special tools.
14-178 BACK
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Lubricate all parts with ATF during reassembly.
LOCKNUT (FLANGE NUT)

Replace.
226 N·m (23.0 kgf·m, 166lbf·ft)-0-
THRUST WASHER,
27 x x5 mm 167 N·m (~kgf.m, 123Ibf.ft~ONICAL SPRING WASHER
~ Replace.
THRUST NEEDLE BEARING
~~~-==--- 6x1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m,
~'bf.ft'
NEEDLE lS~j.. t1IN"',;) ~ " PITOT FLANGE
~IDLERGEAR
~TRANSMISSION
HOUSING BEARING
3RD/4TH CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
O-RINGS
Replace.
THRUST SHIM, 41 x 73 mm
Selective part
3RDGEAR
NEEDLE BEARING
Install sealing ring
/
NEEDLE BEARING
~g faces as shown.
SET RING
2. Check the clearance of the 3rd/4th clutch assembly.

3. Inspect the thrust needle bearing and the needle bearing for galling and rough movement.
4. Inspect the splines for excessive wear and damage.
5. Check shaft bearing surfaces for scoring and excessive wear.
6. Before installing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines with tape to prevent damage to the O-rings.
7. Install the conical spring washer in the direction shown.
8. Inspect condition of the sealing rings. If the sealing rings are worn, distorted, or damaged, replace them (see page
14-181'.
BACK 14-179
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
3rd/4th Clutch Clearance Inspection
1. Remove the O-rings from the mainshaft. 3. Hold the 4th gear collar (C) against the clutch
assembly (B), then measure the clearance between
2. Assemble the 41 x 73 mm thrust shim (A), 3rd/4th the clutch guide (E) and the 4th gear collar with a
clutch assembly (B), and 4th gear collar (C) on the feeler gauge (F) in at least three places. Use the
mainshaft (0). average as the actual clearance.
STANDARD: 0.03-0.11 mm (0.001-0.004 in.)
\ c
I
B
~F
4. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the
thrust shim and measure its thickness.
5. Select and install a new shim, then recheck.
No. Part Number Thickness

1 90414-P7T-000 7.85 mm (0.309 in.)
2 90415-P7T-000 7.90 mm (0.311 ;:11-
3 90416-P7T-000 7.95 mm (0.313 i~! .L
4 90417 -P7T-000 8.00 mm (0.315 iPI
5 90418-P7T-000 8.05 mm (0.317 in.)
,-----6 90419-P7T-000 8.10 mm (0.319 in.)
6. After replacing the thrust shim, make sure the

clearance is within standard.
14-180 BACK
Protected by AR
Mainshaft Sealing Rings Replacement
The sealing rings are synthetic resin with chamfered

ends. Check the condition of the sealing rings, and
replace them only if they are worn, distorted, or
damaged.
1. For a better fit, squeeze sealing rings together

slightly before installing them.
2. Appl" ATF to the new sealing rings then install

them on the mainshaft.
3. After installing the sealing rings, verify the

following:
• The rings are fully seated in the groove.

• The rings are not twisted.
• The chamfered ends of the rings are properly
joined.
BACK 14-181
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the locknut, and take off components down to the reverse selector hub.
OCKNUT IFLANGE NUTI

CONICAL SPRING WASHER Replace.
Replace. ~ Left-hand threads
;;
226 N·m 123.0 kgf·m, 166lbf·ftl-0-
167 N·m 117.0 kgf.m, 1231bf·ftl
2ND GEAR
~~~
~ BALLBEARING
~e=l/
'~:8 /BEARINGHUB
Selective part
. /" THRUST NEEDLE BEARING

~~,
_ IDLER GEAR
- NEEDLE BEARING
REVERSE SELECTOR HUB ----...
~----THRUST NEEDLE
4TH GEAR ______ ~ BEARING
NEEDLE BEARING----...
SNAPRING_ _ _ _ _
~
DISTANCE COLLAR-.......
-----1ST GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
Check splines for excessive wear and damage.
Check bearing surface for scoring, scratches, and excessive wear.
2. Remove the reverse selector hub, 3rd gear, and 1st gear (see page 14-183).
3. Check the bearing in the bearing hub for wear and rough movement. If the bearing is worn or damaged, replace it
(see page 14-185).
5. Check the splines for excessive wear and damage.
6. Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring and excessive wear.
7. Lubricate a" parts with ATF, and reassemble the shafts and gears.
BACK
14-182
Protected by AR
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub and 3rd Gear Removal
1. Remove the reverse selector hub (A) and the 4th 2. Remove the needle bearing, snap ring, distance
gear (B) from the countershaft with a press. Place a collar, and 31 mm cotters from the countershaft.
shaft protector (C) between the countershaft and
press to prevent damaging the countershaft. 3. Remove the 1st gear (A) and 3rd gear (B) together
from the countershaft with a press. Place a shaft
NOTE: Some reverse selector hubs are not press- protector (C) between the countershaft and press to
fitted, and can be removed without using a press. prevent damaging the countershaft.
BACK
14-183
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub and 3rd Gear Installation
Special Tool Required 4. Install the 31 mm cotters, distance collar, snap ring,
Driver, 40 mm J.D. 07746-0030100 needle bearing, and 4th gear (A) on the
countershaft.
1. Apply ATF to the parts.
5. Slide the reverse selector hub (8) over the
2. Align the shaft splines with those on 1st gear, then countershaft (C), and then press it into place with
press the countershaft (A) into the 1st gear (B) with the special tool and a press.
a press.
NOTE: Some reverse selector hubs are not press-
• Place an attachment (C) between the press and fitted and can be installed without using the special
countershaft to prevent damaging the tool and a press.
countershaft.
• Stop pressing the countershaft when the 1st gear
contacts the final drive gear (D).
c
3. Align the shaft splines with those on 3rd gear, then
press the countershaft into the 3rd gear with a
press.
• Place an attachment between the press and

countershaft to prevent damaging the
countershaft.
• Stop pressing the countershaft when the 3rd gear
contacts the 1st gear.
14-184 BACK
Protected by AR
Counters haft Bearing Hub/Bearing Replacement

• Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
• Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
1. Check the bearing for wear, damage, and rough

movement. If the bearing is worn or damaged,
replace it.
2. Remove the bearing (A) from the bearing hub with

the special tools, a bearing separator (B) and a
press.
07746·0010300 f- 07749-0010000
//
3. Install the new bearing on the bearing hub with the

special tools and a press.
f- 07749-0010000
07746·0010500
/
///'
BACK
14-185
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the locknut, and olsassemble the shaft and gears.

Replace.
Left-hand threads
226 N·m (23.0 kgf·m, 166lbf·ft)-0-
167 N·m (17.0 kgf·m,123Ibf·ft)
Replace.
I
~~....e ~BALLBEARING
THRUST NEEDLE ~
BEARING
SECONDARY SHAFT ~...l...~ ~~IDLERGEAR
~ NEEDLE BEARING
~EARU~W
. / TRANSMISSION
~/ HOUSING BEARING
RING ~
i~s,:GNEEDU
NEEDLE BEARING
~ ~ 1ST/2ND
ASSEMBLY
CLUTCH
~ O-RINGS
Replace.
/
-@
_ _ _ COTTERS, 32 mm
SPLINED WASHER,
38x56.5mm _COTTER RETAINER
Selective part
3. Check clearance of the secondary shaft assembly.
6. Check the idler gear bearing for wear and rough movement. If the bearing is worn or damaged, replace it (see
page 14-189).
BACK
14-186
Protected by AR
Secondary Shaft Clearance Inspection
1. Remove the O-rings from the shaft. 3. Measure the clearance between the 38 x 56.5 mm
splined washer (E) and cotters (F) with a feeler
2. Assemble the thrust needle bearing (A), needle gauge (J) in at least three places. Use the average
bearing (8), 1st gear (e), thrust needle bearing (0), as the actual clearance.
38 x 56.5 mm splined washer (E), 32 mm cotters (F),
cotter retainer (G), and snap ring (H) on the STANDARD: 0.07-0.15 mm (0.003-0.006 in.)
secondary shaft (I).
\~
c
__----G
~----H
J
/
splined washer, and measure its thickness.
5. Select and install a new splined washer, then

recheck.
SPLINED WASHER, 38 x 56.5 mm

1 90502-POZ-000 6.85 mm (0.270 in.)
2 90503-POZ-000 6.90 mm (0.272 in.)
3 90504-POZ-000 6.95 mm (0.274 in.)
4 90505-POZ-000 7.00 mm (0.276 in.)
5 90506-POZ-000 7.05 mm (0.278 in.)
6 90507 -POZ-OOO 7.10 mm (0.280 in.)
(cont'd)
BACK
14-187
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Clearance Inspection (co nt'd)
6. Remove the 27 x 47 x 5 mm thrust washer from the 9. Hold the 27 x 47 x 5 mm thrust washer (G) against
mainshaft. the clutch assembly (A), and measure the 2nd gear
axial clearance in at least three places while
7. Assemble the 1st/2nd clutch assembly (A), 37 x 55 moving the 2nd gear (E). Use the average as the
mm thrust shim (B), thrust needle bearing (e), actual clearance.
needle bearing (0), 2nd gear (E), thrust needle
bearing (F), and 27 x 47 x 5 mm thrust washer STANDARD: 0.04-0.12 mm (0.002-0.005 in.)
(removed from mainshaft) (G) on the secondary
shaft (H).
@)_ G
A
10. Ifthe clearance is out of standard, remove the 37 x
55 mm thrust shim and measure its thickness.
11. Select and install a new thrust shim, then recheck.

1 90406-POZ-000 4.90 mm (0.193 in.)
2 90407 -POZ-000 ! 4.95 mm (0.195 in.)
3 90408-POZ-000 ! 5.00 mm (0.197 in.)
4 90409-POZ-000 1 5.05 mm (0.199 in.)
5 90410-POZ-000 5.10 mm (0.201 in.)
6 90411-POZ-000 5.15 mm (0.203 in.)
7 90412-POZ-000 5.20 mm (0.205 in.)
12. Disassemble the shaft and gears.
13. Reinstall the 27 x 47 x 5 mm thrust washer on the

mainshaft.
14-188 BACK
Protected by AR
Secondary Shaft Idler Gear Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Install the bearing on the secondary shaft idler gear
• Driver 077 49-0010000 with the special tool and a press .
• Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
1. Check the bearing for wear, damage, and rough 077 49-0010000
07746-0010500
movement. If the bearing is worn or damaged, go
to step 2.
2. Place the secondary shaft idler gear in a vise with

soft jaws.
3. Remove the bearing (A) from the secondary shaft

idler gear (8) with a commercially available, 3-jaw
slide hammer (C).
BACK 14-189
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Disassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Install the special tools on the 3rd/4th clutch
• Clutch spring compressor attachment assembly.
07 LAE-PX401 00 07LAE-PX40100
• Clutch spring compressor attachment
07HAE-PL50101
• Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly
07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A
/
1. Remove the snap ring (A), then remove the clutch
end plate, the clutch discs, and the plates with a
screwdriver (B).
B
\ 07LAE-PX40100 or
07HAE-PL50101
07GAE-PG40200 or
07GAE-PG4020A
2. Remove the disc spring (A) from the 1st, 3rd, and 4. Be sure the special tool (A) is adjusted to have full
4th clutches. contact with the spring retainer (B) on the 3rd and
4th clutches.
NOTE: The 2nd clutch does not have a disc spring.
14-190 BACK
Protected by AR
5. Set the special tool (A) on the spring retainer (8) of 8. Remove the snap ring (A). Then remove the special
the 1st and 2nd clutches in such a way that the tool (8), spring retainer (C), and return spring.
special tool works on the clutch return spring (C).
9. For 3rd and 4th clutch: Wrap a shop rag around the
6. If either end of the special tool is set over an area of clutch drum (A), and apply air pressure to the fluid
the spring retainer which is unsupported by the passage to remove the piston (8). Place a finger tip
return spring, the retainer may be damaged. on the other end while applying air pressure.
7. Compress the spring until the snap ring can be

removed.
BACK
14-191
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Inspection
1ST/2ND CLUTCH
____
Q
O-RINGS SNAP RING
Replace.
___ CLUTCH END
- - .--- PLATE
CLUTCH PLATES
Six Plates
~
Standard thickness:
CLUTCH DISCS 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
Six Discs
Standard thickness:
1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
CLUTCH DISCS
Six Discs
Standard thickness:
CLUTCH PLATES 1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
Six Plates
Standard thickness:
2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
~1STCLUTCH
DRUM
CLUTCH END
PLATE
14-192 BACK
Protected by AR
3RD/4TH CLUTCH
CLUTCH DISCS
Four Discs
Standard thickness:
1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
CLUTCH PLATES
Four Plates
Standard thickness:
2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
O·RINGS
Replace.
-e
CLUTCH PLATES
Four Plates
Standard th ickness:
2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
CLUTCH DISCS
Four Discs
Standard thickness:
1.94 mm (0.076 in .)
~ _ _ /-._--=-O.RINGS
Replace.
4TH CLUTCH DRUM
------
CLUTCH END PLATE
---- lRD CLUTCH DRUM
BACK
14-193
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Reassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Install new O-rings (A) on the piston (B).
07LAE-PX40100 A
_______ A
07HAE-PL50101
• Clutch compressor attachment
07ZAE-PRP0100
Note these items during reassembly:
• Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor

cleaner, and dry them with compressed air.
• Blowout all passages.
• Apply ATF to all parts before assembly.
1. Soak the clutch discs thoroughly in ATF for a

minimum of 30 minutes.
2. Inspect the check valve (A) on the 3rd and 4th

clutch pistons (B); if it's loose or stuck, replace the
piston. A B
j 4. Install the piston (A) in the clutch drum (B). Apply

pressure and rotate to ensure proper seating.
Lubricate the piston O-ring with ATF before
installing.
c NOTE: Do not pinch the O-ring by installing the

piston with too much force.
A
14-194 BACK
Protected by AR
5. Install the return spring (A) and spring retainer (B), 7. Be sure the special tool (A) is adjusted to have full
and position the snap ring (C) on the retainer. contact with the spring retainer (B) on the 3rd and
4th clutches.
8. Set the special tool (A) on the spring retainer (B) of

6. Install the special tools on the 3rd/4th clutch the 1st and 2nd clutches in such a way that the
assembly. special tool work on the clutch return spring (C).
07LAE-PX40100 or 9. If either end of the special tool is set over an area of

07HAE-PL50101 the spring retainer which is unsupported by the
return spring, the retainer may be damaged.
07GAE-PG40200 or
07GAE-PG4020A
(cont'd)
BACK
14-195
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Reassembly (cont'd)
10. Compress the return spring. 14. Make sure the inside of the clutch drum is free of
dirt and other foreign matter.
15. Starting with a clutch plate, alternately install the

clutch plates and discs. Install the clutch end plate
(A) with the flat side toward the disc (8).
A
11 . Install the snap ring (A).
16. Install the snap ring (A) with a screwdriver (8).
12. Remove the special tools.
13. Install the disc spring in the 1st, 3rd, and 4th
clutches in the direction shown.
NOTE: The 2nd clutch does not have a disc spring.
14-196 BACK
Protected by AR
17. Set a dial indicator (A) on the clutch end plate (B). 21. If the clearance is not within the service limit, select
a new clutch end plate from the following table.
NOTE: If the thickest clutch end plate is installed,

but the clearance is still over the standard, replace
the clutch discs and clutch plates as a set.
18. Zero the indicator with the clutch end plate lifted up
to the snap ring (C).
1ST and 2ND CLUTCH END PLATES
19. Release the clutch end plate to lower it, then put the
special tool on the end plate (A). Mark Part Number Thickness
6 22551-P7T-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22552-P7T-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22553-P7T-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22554-P7T-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
0 22555-P7T-003 3.0 mm (0.118 in.)
1 22556-P7T-003 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
2 22557 -P7T-003 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
07ZAE-PRP0100 3 22558-P7T-003 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
4 22559-P7T-003 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)
3RD and 4TH CLUTCH END PLATES
D
Mark Part Number Thickness
1 22561-P7T-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
2 22562-P7T-003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
3 22563-P7T-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
4 22564-P7T-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 22565-P7T-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
20. Press the special tool down with 39 N (4 kgf, 9 Ibf) 6 22566-P7T-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
using a force gauge, and read the dial indicator (B). 7 22567 -P7T-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
The dial indicator reads the clearance (C) between 8 22568-P7T-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
the clutch end plate and top disk (0). 9 22569-P7T-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
Take measurements in at least three places, and
use the average as the actual clearance.
Clutch End Plate-to-Top Disc Clearance:

Clutch Service Limit
1st 1.2-1.4 mm (0.047-0.055 in.)
2nd 0.85-1.05 mm (0.033-0.041 in.)
3rd 0.55-0.75 mm (0.022-0.030 in.)
4th 0.55-0.75 mm (0.022-0.030 in.)
BACK
14-197
Protected by AR
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Installation

Exploded View
Torque:
-6 x 1.0 mm: 12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m. 8.7Ibf·ft)
-8 x 1.25 mm: 18 N·m 11.8 kgf·m. 13Ibf·ft)
6x 1.0mm.
Two Bolts 6 x 1.0 mm. ATF FEED PIPE.
9
Ei \ h Bolts
t 8 X\198 m / m ATF FEED PIPES.
SERVO DETENT \ 6x 1.0 mm.
BASE \ Two Bolts " . ax 85 mm, Th~......
ATFFEED
ATF STRAINER PIPES
~
O-RING
\ ~ Replace.'
O-RING
Replace~ , CONTROL \ REGULATOR
~
SHAFT VALVE BODV
6x1.0mm
Two Bolts • DETENT
ARM ""_ STATOR SHAFT
_ STATOR SHAFT STOP
DETENT _ _ _ _ DOWEL PINS. Two Pins
\ \ ARMSHAFT
0-::::---
REGULATOR
_ _ _ _ _ SEPARATOR PLATE
6 x 1.0 mm. One Bolt

~.".25mm,Th'H""
~ ~ I
~ . COOLER CHECK VALVE
SPRING
COOLER CHECK VALVE
~ ATF PUMP DRIVE GEAR
ATF PUMP DRIVEN GEAR
SHAFT
~ ATF PUMP DRIVEN GEAR
~ MAIN SEPARATOR PLATE
6x 1.0 mm.
Six Bolts
ACCUMULATOR TORQUE CONVERTER

BODY HOUSING
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE
DOWEL PINS. Three Pins
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE SPRING
14-198 BACK
Protected by AR
1. Install the main separator plate (A) and three dowel 4. Install the cooler check valve and spring on the
pins on the torque converter housing. Then install main valve body, then install the two dowel pins
the ATF pump drive gear (B), driven gear (C) and and the regulator separator plate.
ATF pump driven gear shaft (D). Install the ATF
pump driven gear with its grooved and chamfered 5. Install the stator shaft and stator shaft stop.
side facing down.
6. Install the regulator valve body (eight bolts).
7. Install the two dowel pins and the servo separator

plate on the main valve body.
8. Install the control shaft (A) in the torque converter

housing along with the manual valve (B).
2. Install the torque converter check valve and spring,

then install the main valve body (one 6 mm bolt
and three 8 mm bolts). Make sure the ATF pump
-------0
drive gear (B) rotates smoothly in the normal
operating direction, and the ATF pump driven gear
shaft (D) moves smoothly in the axial and normal
operating direction.
9. Install the detent arm (C) and arm shaft (D) in the
main valve body (E), then hook the detent arm
spring (F) to the detent arm.
10. Install the servo body (G) (nine bolts).
11. Install the accumulator cover (two bolts).
B 12. Install the ATF strainer (two bolts).

o
3. If the ATF pump drive gear and ATF pump driven 13. Install the servo detent base (two bolts).
gear shaft do not move smoothly, loosen the main
valve body bolts. Realign the ATF pump driven 14. Install the accumulator body (six bolts).
gear shaft, and retighten the bolts to the specified
torque, then recheck. Failure to align the ATF pump 15. Install the two ATF feed pipes in the servo body,
driven gear shaft correctly will result in a seized four pipes in the regulator valve body, and the ATF
ATF pump drive gear or ATF pump driven gear feed pipe in the accumulator body.
shaft.
BACK
14-199
Protected by AR
Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation

Exploded View
REVERSE IDLER GEAR 8 x 1.25 mm /TRANSMISSION HOUSING
SHAFT HOLDER 26 N·m (2.7 kgf·m. MOUNTING BOLTS
20lbf·ttl 10 x 1.25 mm
REVERSE IDLER GEAR SHAFT ~ 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m. 33 Ibf·ttl
COUNTERSHAFT
~ ~ I HARNESS CLAMP BRACKET
~ [[[ i~
REVERSE GEAR
COUNTERS HAFT
2ND GEAR
TRANSMISSION HANGER!
6x 1.0mm HARNESS CLAMP BRACKET
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m.
/
10lbf·ttl
~IA~ ..
;__ U'~7"" - TRANSMISSION HANGER
MAINSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
GASKET
Replace.
COUNTERSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY TORQUE CONVERTER HOUSING
14-200 BACK
Protected by AR
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the 5. Place the thrust washer (A) in the transmission
following procedure. housing.
1. Install the differential assembly, countershaft sub-

assembly, mainshaft sub-assembly, and secondary
shaft sub-assembly in the torque converter housing.
2. Install the countershaft 4th gear and reverse

selector hub on the countershaft. If the reverse
selector hub is a press-fitted type, refer to the
reverse selector hub installation procedures (see
page 14-183).
3. Turn the shift fork shaft (A) so the large chamfered

hole is facing the fork bolt hole. Then install the
shift fork (8) and reverse selector (e) together on
the shift fork shaft and countershaft (0). Secure the
shift fork to the shift fork shaft with the lock bolt (E) 6. Place the reverse idler gear (A) in the transmission
and a new lock washer (F), then bend the lock housing as shown, then slide it in the direction
washer against the bolt head. shown.
E
6x 1.0mm
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 Ibf.ft)
~~~F
~ ~B
4. Install the needle bearing, countershaft reverse

gear, and countershaft 2nd gear on the
countershaft.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-201
Protected by AR
Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation (cont'd)
7. Align the spring pin (A) on the control shaft (8) with 10. Engage the reverse idler gear with the countershaft
the transmission housing groove (e) by turning the reverse gear and the mainshaft reverse gear. Then
control shaft. install the needle bearings (A), reverse idler gear
shaft (8), and thrust washer (e) in the reverse idler
gear. and install the reverse idler gear shaft holder
(0) on the transmission housing.
8. Install three dowel pins and a new gasket on the

torque converter housing.
9. Place the transmission housing on the torque

converter housing, then install the transmission
housing mounting bolts along with the harness
clamp bracket (A), transmission hanger (8), and
transmission hanger/harness clamp bracket (e).
Tighten the bolts in a crisscross pattern in two or
more steps.
TORQUE: 44N·m (4.5 kgf.m. 33 Ibf·ft)
14-202 BACK
Protected by AR
End Cover and Idler Gears Installation
Special Tools Required 3. Install the park gear (A) using the old locknut (B)
Mainshaft holder and a collar (e). Hold the park pawl (D) against the
07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100 park gear, then tighten the old locknut until the
shaft splines come out slightly over the park gear
1. Install the park lever (A) and park lever stop (B) on splines.
the control shaft (e), then install the lock bolt (D)
with a new lock washer (E). Do not bend the lock NOTE:
tab of the lock washer until step 25. • Do not use an impact wrench .
• eountershaft locknut has left-hand threads.
o
/
6x1.0mm
14 N·m 11.4 kgf·m, 10 Ibf·ft)
2. Lubricate the following parts with ATF:

4. Remove the locknut and the collar, then install only
• Splines of the countershaft, the park gear, and the bearing hub/bearing assembly (A) and old
the old locknut. conical spring washer (B). Tighten the old locknut
• Threads of the countershaft and the old locknut. (e) to 226 N·m (23.0 kgf·m, 166Ibf·ft), then remove
• Old conical spring washer. the locknut and conical spring washer.
NOTE: Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut.

Do not use an impact wrench.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-203
Protected by AR
End Cover and Idler Gears Installation (cont'd)
5. Remove the bearing hub/bearing assembly (A) with 7. Set the dial indicator (A) to the countershaft idler
a puller (B). gear (B) as shown.
A
8. Measure the countershaft idler gear axial clearance

6. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), needle bearing in at least three places, while moving the
(B), countershaft idler gear (e), thrust needle countershaft idler gear.
bearing (D), bearing hub/bearing assembly (E), and Use the average as the actual clearance.
the old conical spring washer (F). Then tighten the
old locknut (G) to 164 N·m (17.0 kgf·m, 123Ibf·ft). STANDARD: 0.015-0.045 mm (0.0006-0.0018 in.)

14-204 BACK
Protected by AR
9. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the 14. Lubricate the following parts with ATF:
bearing hub/bearing assembly using a puller as o Splines ofthe mainshaft, secondary shaft, and
described on the previous page. idler gears.

o Threads of the mainshaft and secondary shaft.
10. Select and install the new bearing hub/bearing o Threads of the old mainshaft and secondary shaft
assembly, then recheck. locknuts.

o Old conical spring washers.
15. Install the mainshaft idler gear (A) and the old
conical spring washer (8) on the mainshaft (C).
Tighten the old locknut (D) to 226 N·m (23.0 kgf·m,
166Ibf·ft)

BEARING HUB
Mark Part Number Difference

A 90520-P6H-000 3.503 mm (0.1379 in.)
8 90521-P6H-000 3.490 mm (0.1374 in.)
C 90522-P6H-000 3.477 mm (0.1369 in.)
D 90523-P6H-000 3.464 mm (0.1364 in.)
11. After replacing the bearing hub/bearing assembly,

make sure the clearance is within standard.
12. Remove the old locknut and old conical spring

washer from the countershaft.
13. Install the special tool onto the mainshaft.

16. Install the secondary shaft idler gear (E) and the old
conical spring washer (F) on the secondary shaft
(G). Tighten the old locknut (H) to seat the
secondary shaft idler gear to 226 N·m (23.0 kgf·m,
166Ibf·ft)
NOTE:
o Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. Do
not use an impact wrench.

o Secondary shafts locknut has left-hand threads.
17. Remove the old locknuts and old conical spring

washers from the mainshaft and the secondary
shaft.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-205
Protected by AR
End Cover and Idler Gears Installation (cont'd)
18. Lubricate the threads of each shaft, the new 22. Install the pitc'. flange (A) on the mainshaft idler
locknuts, and the new concial spring washers with gear (B), then install the lubrication pitot pipe (e)
ATF. and the pitot pipe (D) on the transmission housing.
19. Install the new conical spring washers (A) in the 6x 1.0mm c
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m,
direction shown, and install the new locknuts (8). 8.7Ibf·ftl _
" .. 8
23. Set the park lever in the [tJ position, then verify that
20. Tighten the locknut to 167 N·m, (17.0 kgf·m, 1231bf· the park pawl (A) engages the park gear (B).
ft).
NOTE:
• Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. Do
not use an impact wrench .
• eountershaft and secondary shaft locknuts have
left-hand threads.
21. Stake each locknut into its shaft using a 3.5 mm c

punch.
A
24. If the park pawl does not engage fully, check the
distance between the pawl shaft (e) and the park
lever roller pin (D) (see page 14-163).
25. Tighten the lock bolt (E), and bend the lock tab of
the lock washer (F) against the lock bolt head.
14-206 BACK
Protected by AR
26. Install the end cover (A) with the two dowel pins, 28. Set the control shaft (A) to the lNl position by
new O-rings, new gasket, and harness clamp turning it.
bracket (B). Tighten the 16 bolts to 12 N·m, (1.2
kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft). NOTE: Be careful not to squeeze the end of the
control shaft tips together. If the tips are squeezed
together it will cause a faulty signal or position due
to the play between the control shaft and position
switch.
A ~A
27. Set the AfT gear position switch to the IHl position.
NOTE: The AfT gear position switch clicks in the IHl

position.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-207
Protected by AR
End Cover and Idler Gears Installation {cont'd)
29. Install the AfT gear position switch (A) gently on the
control shaft (B), then secure it with the bolts. Take
care not to move the AfT gear position switch when
tightening the bolts.
30. Install the AfT gear position switch cover (e); install
the harness clamp (D) on the clamp bracket (E);
install the harness clamp (F) on the end cover (G).
31. Install the ATF cooler lines and new sealing

washers. Tighten the line fittings to 28 N·m (2.9
kgf·m, 21 Ibf·ft)
32. Install the breather tube.
33. Install the ATF dipstick.
14-208 BACK
Protected by AR
AIT Differential
Component Location Index Backlash Inspection
1. Place the differential assembly on V-blocks (A), and

THRUST SHIM, 76 mm
install both axles.
~-~ // THRUSTWASHER
BEARING OUTER RACE

~_~/ Replacement, page 14-212
~ CARRIER BEARING
J'?::-----c:::~ ~ Replacement, page 14-210
lJ6'~=~<i1
~~7//fJf-@ 'FINAL DRIVEN GEAR

2. Check the backlash of the pinion gears (B) with a
dial indicator (C).
STANDARD: 0.175-0.275 mm (0.007-0.011 in.)
3. If the backlash is out of standard, replace the

differential carrier.
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
Backlash Inspection, page 14-210
~;;o;;;;;;?J --CARRIER BEARING

o
.,.-.-", -----BEARING OUTER RACE
- - - - - - - THRUST WASHER
BACK
14-209
Protected by AR
All Differential
Final Driven Gear/Carrier Carrier Bearing Replacement
Replacement
Attachment, 40 x 50 mm 07LAD-PW50601
1. Remove the final driven gear from the differential
carrier. NOTE:
• The bearing and outer race should be replaced as a
NOTE: The final driven gear bolts have left-hand set.
threads. • Inspect and adjust the bearing preload whenever
bearing is replaced.
• Check the bearing for wear and rough rotation . If the
bearing is OK, removal is not necessary.
,. Remove the carrier bearing (A) with a commercially

available bearing puller (B), bearing separator (C),
and stepped adapter (D).
o
2. Install the final driven gear with the chamfered side
on the inner tore facing the differential carrier.
3. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in a A

crisscross pattern.
2. Install the new carrier bearings with the special tool
TORQUE: 101 N·m (10.3 kgf·m, 74.5Ibf·ft) and a press.
NOTE:
• Press the bearings on until they bottom.
• Use the small end of the special tool to install the
bearing.
• Press the bearings on securely so there is no
clearance between the bearings and the
14-210 BACK
Protected by AR
Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Install the oil seal (A) in the transmission housing
• Driver 07749-0010000 with the special tools.
• Seal driver attachment 07GAD-PG40101 or
07GAD-PG40100
07749-0010000
• Oil seal driver attachment 07JAD-PH80101
2. Remove the oil seal (A) from the transmission

housing (B).
5. Install the oil seal (A) in the torque converter

housing with the special tools.
3. Remove the oil seal (A) from the torque converter

housing (B).
BACK 14-211
Protected by AR
AfT Differential
Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Install the thrust washer (A) and outer race (B) in
• Driver 077 49-0010000 the torque converter housing (C), and use the
• Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100 special tools to make sure the outer race bottoms
out in the housing.
NOTE: B
• Replace the bearing with a new one whenever the
outer race is replaced.
• Do not use shim(s) on the torque converter housing A
side.
• Adjust preload after replacing the bearing and outer
race.
• Coat all parts with ATF during installation.
1. Remove the bearing outer race from the

transmission housing by heating the housing to
about 212°F (100°C) with a heat gun. Do not heat
the housing to more than 212°F (100°C).
2. Remove the bearing outer race from the torque

converter housing.
3. Install the thrust shim (A), thrust washer (B), and

outer race (C) in the transmission housing (D) with 07749-0010000
the special tools.
07HAD-SF10100
07NAD-PX401oo
14-212 BACK
Protected by AR
Carrier Bearing Preload Adjustment
Special Tools Required 4. Select the 2.60 mm (0.102 in.) thrust shim from the
• Driver 07749-0010000 middle of the table below.
• Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100
• Preload inspection tool 07XAJ-SOK0100 THRUST SHIM, 76 mm
NOTE: If the transmission housing, torque converter NO. Part Number Thickness
housing, differential carrier, tapered roller bearing, S 41438-PX4-700 2.05 mm (0.081 in.)
outer race, or thrust shim were replaced, the bearing T 41439-PX4-700 2.01 mm (0.083 in.)
preload must be adjusted. U 41440-PX4-700 2.15 mm (0.085 in.)
A 41441-PK4-000 2.20 mm (0.087 in.)
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), thrust washer 8 41442-PK4-000 2.25 mm (0.089 in.)
(8), and thrust shim (e) from the transmission e 41443-PK4-000 2.30 mm (0.091 in.)
housing (D) by heating the housing to about 212°F 0 41444-PK4-000 2.35 mm (0.093 in.)
(1000e) with a heat gun (E). Do not heat the housing E 41445-PK4-000 2.40 mm (0.094 in.)
to more than 212°F (100 0e). F 41446-PK4-000 2.45 mm (0.096 in.)
G 41447-PK4-000 2.50 mm (0.098 in.)
NOTE: Let the transmission housing cool to room H 41448-PK4-000 2.55 mm (0.100 in.)
temperature before adjusting the bearing preload. I 41449-PK4-000 2.60 mm (0.102 in.)
J 41450-PK4-000 2.65 mm (0.104 in.)
/' K
L
M
41451-PK4-000
41452-PK4-000
41453-PK4-000
2.70 mm (0.106 in.)
2.75 mm (0.108 in.)
2.80 mm (0.110 in.)
N 41454-PK 4-000 2.85 mm (0.112 in.)
0 41455-PK4-000 2.90 mm (0.114 in.)
P 41456-PK4-000 2.95 mm (0.116 in.)
Q 41457 -PK4-000 3.00 mm (0.118 in.)
R 41458-PK4-000 3.05 mm (0.120 in.)
2. Replace the tapered roller bearing when the outer

race is to be replaced.
3. Do not use a shim on the torque converter housing

side.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-213
Protected by AR
AfT Differential
Carrier Bearing Preload Adjustment (co nt'd)
5. Install the thrust shim (A), thrust washer (8), and 8. Install the differential assembly (A), gasket (8), and
bearing outer race (C) in the transmission housing dowel pins (C) on the torque converter housing (0).
(D). Align the spring pin on the control shaft (E) with the
transmission housing groove.
10 x 1.25 ~kgf.m, 33 Ibf·tt)

"N.ml~ I.
H
F _____ ~
1rr ~~.
6. Drive in the outer race with the special tools.
~_II'0-j G
07NAD-PX40100
7. Check that there is no clearance between the thrust

washer, outer race, shim, and transmission
housing.
A o
9. Install the transmission housing (F) with the

transmission hangers (G) and harness clamp
bracket (H), then tighten the bolts.
14-214 BACK
Protected by AR
10. Rotate the differential assembly in both directions

to seat the bearings.
11 . Measure the starting torque of the differential

assembly with the special tool, a torque wrench (A),
and a socket (B). Measure the starting torque at
normal room temperature in both directions.
STANDARD:
New bearing: 2.7 - 3.9 N·m
(28-40 kgf·cm, 24-35Ibf·in)
Reused bearings: 2.5 - 3.6 N·m
(25-37 kgf·cm, 22-32Ibf·in)
12. To increase the starting torque, increase the

thickness of the shim. To decrease the starting
torque, decrease the thickness of the shim.
Changing the shim to the next size will increase or
decrease starting torque about
0.3-0.4 N·m (3-4 kgf·cm, 3-3Ibf·in).
BACK
14-215
Protected by AR
5-speed Automatic Transmission (2000-2003 Models)
Automatic Transmission Transmission End Cover
Special Tools ................................................... 14-218 End Cover, 3rd Gears, Idler Gear,
General Troubleshooting Information ......... 14-219 and 3rd Clutch Removal ............................. 14-399
DTC Troubleshooting Index ............................ 14-223 Park Lever Stop Inspection and Adjustment ......... 14-401
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ................. 14-225 Control Shaft Oil Seal Replacement ............. 14-402
System Description ........................................ 14-235 Control Shaft Bearing Replacement ............. 14-402
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 14-292 ATF Feed Pipes Replacement ........................ 14-403
Road Test ........................................................ 14-334 End Cover, 3rd Gears, Idler Gear,
Stall Speed Test .............................................. 14-337 and 3rd Clutch Installation ......................... 14-451
Pressure Tests ................................................ 14-338
Torque Converter Clutch Transmission Housing
Solenoid Valve Test .................................... 14-340 Housing and Shaft Assemblies Removal .... . 14-404
Torque Converter Clutch Bearing Removal and Installation ............... .. 14-406
Solenoid Valve Replacement ..................... 14-340 Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation ......... . 14-448
Shift Solenoid Valve B Test ........................... 14-341
Shift Solenoid Valve B Replacement ............ 14-341 Valve Body
Shift Solenoid Valves A and C Test .............. 14-342 Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal ............ .. 14·407
Shift Solenoid Valves A and C Valve Body Repair ........................................ .. 14-409
Replacement ............................................... 14-342 Valve Body Valve Installation ...................... .. 14-410
AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection,
Valves A and B Test .................................... 14-343 and Reassembly ........................................ . 14-411
AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid ATF Pump Inspection ................................... .. 14-413
Valves A and B Replacement ..................... 14-344 Regulator Valve Body Disassembly,
AfT Clutch Pressure Control Inspection, and Reassembly .................... .. 14-414
Solenoid Valve C Test ................................ 14-345 Servo Body Disassembly, Inspection,
AfT Clutch Pressure Control and Reassembly ........................................ . 14-415
Solenoid Valve C Replacement ................. 14-346 Top Accumulator Body Disassembly,
Speed Sensor Replacement .......................... 14-346 Inspection, and Reassembly ..................... . 14-416
3rd Clutch Pressure Switch Replacement .... 14-347 Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection,
4th Clutch Pressure Switch Replacement .... 14-347 and Reassembly ......................................... 14-417
ATF Temperature Sensor Replacement ....... 14-348 3rd Accumulator/End Cover Disassembly,
ATF LevE" Check ............................................. 14-349 Inspection, and Reassembly ................... .. 14-418
ATF Replacement ........................................... 14-350 Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer
Transmission Removal .................................. 14-351 Installation ................................................. .. 14-446
Transmission Installation .............................. 14-359
Shift Lever Removal ....................................... 14-366 Torque Converter Housing
Shift Lever Installation ................................... 14-367 Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly .......... 14-369 Replacement ............................................... 14-419
Shift Cable Replacement ............................... 14-370 Countershaft Bearing Replacement ........... .. 14-420
Shift Cable Adjustment .................................. 14-373 Secondary Shaft Bearing Repacement ...... .. 14-420
Control Shaft Oil Seal Replacement 14-421
Component Location Index ........................... 14-375 Shafts and Clutches
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 14-376 Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection,
~ Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting ............ 14-377 and Reassembly ......................................... 14-422
Sequential Sportshift Transmission Gear 4th/5th Clutch Clearance Inspection ............. 14-423
Selection Switch Circuit Mainshaft Sealing Rings Replacement ........ 14-424
Troubleshooting ...................................... 14-380 Countershaft Disassembly,
Sportshift Indicator Circuit Inspection, and Reassembly ...................... 14-425
Troubleshooting ......................................... 14-382 Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub and
Transmission Range Switch Test ................. 14-383 4th Gear Removal ....................................... 14-427
Transmission Range Switch .Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub and
Replacement ............................................... 14-384 4th Gear Installation ................................... 14-428
Indicator Input Test ........................................ 14-386 3rd Clutch Ball Bearing Replacement ........... 14-429
Indicator Bulb Replacement .......................... 14-388 Secondary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection,
and Reassembly ......................................... 14-430
All Interlock System Secondary Shaft Clearance Inspection ........ 14-431
Component Location Index ........................... 14-389 Secondary Shaft Idler Gear Bearing
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 14-390 Replacement ............................................... 14-433
Shift Lock System Circuit 1st Gear One-way Clutch Inspection ............ 14-434
Troubleshooting ......................................... 14-391 1st Clutch Hub Replacement ......................... 14-434
Key Interlock System Circuit Clutch Disassembly ........................................ 14-435
Troubleshooting ......................................... 14-393 Clutch Inspection ............................................ 14-437
Reverse Lock System Circuit Clutch Reassembly......................................... 14-441
Troubleshooting ......................................... 14-395
Key Interlock Solenoid/Switch Test .............. 14-397 AIT Differential
Shift Lock Solenoid Test ................................ 14-397 Component Location Index ........................... 14-458
Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement ................. 14-398 Backlash Inspection ........................................ 14-459
Park Pin Switch Test ....................................... 14-398 Final Driven Gear/Carrier Replacement ....... 14-459
Carrier Bearing Replacement ........................ 14-460
Oil Seal Replacement ..................................... 14-461
Carrier Bearing Outer Race
Replacement ............................................... 14-462
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection ............... 14-463
Protected by AR
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool Number Descr~ion Oty

CD
®
07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100
07GAD-PG40101 or 07GAD-PG40100
Mainshaft Holder
Seal Driver Attachment
1
1 I
® 07GAD-SD40101 Attachment, 78 x 90 mm 1
CD 07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A Clutch Spring Compressor Bolt Assembly 1 I
*® 07 HAC-PK40 102 Housing Puller 1 I

® 07JAD-PH80101 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
ill 07 LAD-PW50601 Attachment, 40 x 50 mm 1 I
**® 07LAE-PX40100 Clutch Spring Compressor Attachment ,- --- -2 - - ,

® 07MAJ-PY4011A Aff Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 4
I
®> 07MAJ-PY40120 Aff Pressure Hose Adapter 4
@ 07NAD-PX40100 Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 1
@ 07SAZ-001000A Backprobe Set 2
@ I
07XAJ-SOK0100 Preload Inspection Tool 1
@ 07ZAE-PRP0100 Clutch Compressor Attachment 1 I
@ 07406-0020400 or 07406-0020401 Aff Oil Pressure Gauge Set w/Panel 1
***@ 07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A Adjustable Bearing Puller, 25-40 mm 1
® 077 46-00 10500 Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 1
@ 077 46-0010600 Attachment. 72 x 75 mm 1
@ 077 46-0010800 Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 1
@ 077 46-0030100 Driver 40 mm I.D. 1
® 077 49-0010000 Driver 1
@ 07947-6340500 Driver Attachment 1
* If the top arm is too short, replace it with 07SAC-POZ01001.
** 07HAE-PL50101 may be used to substitute one of these tools.
I *** Must be used with commercially available 3/8"-16 slide hammer.
'" ~
~
CD
~
~
®
0..
--
__ .. _ _
..
®
__ " - I Gd~
CD
A
®
8
®
® ~
;.., _""
Qj/
_
Q
",r - ,::;;;,
J;..
j'~1 ~
~; ~
_
"
,,~
ill ® ® ®> @ @
v
@
~
@
[0-,U-,UJ
"iRHr'
@
, ~
@
(6)
C:J
------'
®@@
(
,~ ~
®>
... ~
C-T
~
®
w
@
14-218 BACK
Protected by AR
General Troubleshooting Information .
How to Check for DTCs with the PGM Tester/Scan Tool
When the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) senses an abnormality in the input or output systems, the ~ indicator in
the gauge assembly will usually blink and/or the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will come on. When the 16P Data
Link Connector (OLC) (A) (located behind the front console, between the seat heater switches) is connected to the OBO
II Scan Tool or Honda PGM Tester (B) as shown, it will indicate the Diagnostic Trouble Code (OTC) when the ignition
switch is turned ON (II).
If the ~ indicator or the MIL has been reported on, or if a driveability problem is suspected, follow this procedure:
1. Connect the OBO II Scan Tool (conforming to SAE J1978) or Honda PGM Tester to the 16P OLC. (See the OBO II
Scan Tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manual for specific instructions. If you are using the Honda PGM Tester,
make sure it is set to the SAE OTC type.)
2. Turn the Ignition switch ON (II), and observe the OTC on the screen.
3. Record all fuel and emissions OTCs, AfT OTCs, and freeze data.
4. If there is a fuel and emissions OTC, first check the fuel and emissions system as indicated by the OTC (except for
OTC P0700). OTC P0700 means there is one or more AfT OTC, and no problems were detected in the fuel and
emissions circuit of the PCM.
5. Get the customer's radio anti-theft code, and write down the radio station presets.
6. Reset the memory with the PGM Tester or by removing the BACK UP fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box for more than 10 seconds.
the same conditions as those indicated by the freeze data, and then recheck for OTCs. If the AfT OTC returns, go to
the OTC Troubleshooting Index. If the OTC does not return, there was an intermittent problem within the circuit.
Make sure all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight, and then go to step 8.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-219
Protected by AR
How to Check for DTCs
When the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or output systems, the ~ indicator (A) in the gauge assembly (B)
will usually blink and/or the Mil may come on. When the 16P Data Link Connector (DlC) (located behind the front
console, between the seat heater switches) is connected to the Honda PGM Tester, the ~ indicator will blink the
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
When the R!I indicator has been reported on, connect the PGM Tester to the DlC (16P). Turn the ignition switch ON (II),
select Honda Systems, and then the SCS mode, then observe the ~ indicator. If a PGM Tester is not available, jump
OlC terminal 1 (BRN) to terminal 12 (BlK), then turn the ignition switch ON (II) and observe the ~ indicator.
Codes 1 through 9 are indicated by individual short blinks. Code 10 and above are indicated by a series of long and
short blinks. One long blink equals 10 short blinks. Add the long and short blinks together to detem'lne the code. After
determining the code, refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index.
Short blink (once)
OFF~r n ... OTC1
OFf~ nJl SeeOTC2
OFF~' ..... "'"k lfuu1Jffi~ "ma,

UlJlJlJUL See OTC 15
If the ~ indicator or the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp) has been reported on, or if a driveability problem is
suspected, follow this procedure:
1. Record all fuel and emissions DTCs, AfT OTCs, and freeze data.
2. If there is a fuel and emissions OTC, first check the fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC (except for
DTC 70). DTC 70 means there is one or more AfT DTC, and no problems were detected in the fuel and emissions
circuit of the PCM.
3. 3et the customer's radio anti-theft code, and write down the radio station presets.
4 ~ set the memory by removing the BACK UP fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box for more than 10
::onds.
5 cJiibrate the engine idle control system in the PCM (see page 11-158), drive the vehicle for several minutes under
:ne same conditions as those indicated by the freeze data, and then recheck for OTCs.
If the DTC returns, refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index. If the OTC does not return, there was an intermittent
problem within the circuit. Make sure all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight, then go to step 6.
6. Re-enter the radio code, reset the preset stations, and set the clock.
14-220 BACK
Protected by AR
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM

Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (Two required)
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS components locations, precautions, and procedures in the
1. Pull back the carpet from passenger's side of the center console to expose the PCM.
2. Inspect the circuit on the peM, according to the DTe troubleshooting, with the special tools and a digital
multi meter.
3. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a multi meter (e).
Using the wire insulation as a guide for the contoured tip of the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip into the
connector from the wire side until it comes in contact with the terminal end of the wire.
NOTE: Failure to use the appropriate backprobe tools can cause connector and/or terminal damage.
A
07SAZ-001000A
(cont'd)
BACK
14-221
Protected by AR
How to Reset the PCM
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the radio station presets.
3. Use one of these methods to reset the PCM memory:

• Use the OBO II Scan Tool or the Honda PGM Tester (A) .
• Remove the BACK-UP fuse (7.5A) (B) from the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box (C) for 10 seconds.
This procedure must be done after any troubleshooting.

2. Reset the PCM.
3. Disconnect the OBO II Scan Tool or the Honda PGM Tester from the Data Link Connector (16P) (D).
6. Perform the PCM idle learn precedure (see page 11-158).
7. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 30 mph (48km/h).
14-222 BACK
Protected by AR
NOTE: Record all freeze data and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 14-219) before you
begin to troubleshoot a OTC.
For Premium Model
DTe ~ Indicator MIL Detection Item Page
IG?J
P0710(28) Blinks ON ATF temperature sensor (see page 14-292)
P0720 (9) Blinks ON Countershaft speed sensor (see page 14-297)
P0743 (1) Blinks ON Torque converter clutch solenoid valve (see page 14-302)
P0753 (7) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve A (see page 14-306)
P0758 (8) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve B (see page 14-308)
P0763 (22) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve C (see page 14-310)
P0780 (45) Blinks ON Mechanical problem in hydraulic system (see page 14-314)
P0798 (29) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (see page 14-315)
P1705 (5) Blinks ON Transmission range switch (short to ground) (see page 14-320)
P1706 (6) OFF ON Transmission range switch (open) (see page 14-323)
P1709 (24) Blinks ON Transmission gear selection switch (see page 14-326)
P1710 (63) OFF OFF 1st-hold switch (see page 14-328)
P1740 (27) OFF OFF 4th clutch pressure switch (see page 14-330)
The OTe in parentheses is the flash code the ~ indicator indicates when the OLC is connected to the Honda PGM
Tester in SCS mode (see page 14-219).
BACK 14-223
Protected by AR
OTe Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
NOTE: Record all freeze data and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 14-219) before you
begin to troubleshoot a OTC.
For Type S Model
DTe fPillndicator MIL Detection Item Page
~
P0710 (28) Blinks ON ATF temperature sensor (see page 14-292)
P0720(9) Blinks ON Countershaft speed sensor (see page 14-297)
P0753 (7) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve A (see page 14-306)
P0758 (8) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve B (see page 14-308)
P0763 (22) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve C (see page 14-310)
P1656 (37) OFF OFF PCM-to-VSA control unit communications circuit (see page 14-319)
P1705 (5) Blinks ON Transmission range switch (short to ground) (see page 14-320)
P1706 (6) OFF ON Transmission range switch (open) (see page 14-323)
P1709 (24) Blinks ON Transmission gear selection switch (see page 14-326)
P1710 (63) OFF OFF 1st-hold switch (see page 14-328)
P1740 (27) OFF OFF 4th clutch pressure switch (see page 14-330)
P1753(1) Blinks ON Torque converter clutch solenoid valve (see page 14-302)
.- -
P1778 (29) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (see page 14-315)
The OTC in parentheses is the flash code the ~ indicator indicates when the OLC is connected to the Honda PGM
Tester in SCS mode (see page 14-219).
14-224 BACK
Protected by AR
These symptoms DO NOT trigger Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) or cause the ~ indicator to blink. If the MIL was
reported ON or the ~ indicator has been blinking, check for DTCs. But if the vehicle has one of the symptoms in the
following chart, check the probable cause(s) for it in the sequence listed, until you find the problem.
When you turn the A problem in the ~ Check the ~ indicator circuit (see page 14-377).
ignition switch ON (II), indicator circuit
the ~ indicator comes on
and stays on or never
comes on at all
Shift lever cannot be A problem in the shift lock Check interlock system - shift lock system circuit (see
moved from the [f] system of the interlock page 14-391).
position while you're system
pushing on the brake
pedal
Ignition key cannot be A problem in the key Check interlock system - key interlock system circuit
moved from the ACC (I) interlock system of the (see page 14-393).
position to the LOCK (0) interlock system
position when you're
pushing in key with the
shift lever in the [f]
position
Transmission does not A problem in the sequential Check the sequential sportshift transmission gear
shift up and down when sportshift mode switch selection switch circuit (see page 14-380).
operating the shift lever circuit
in the sequential
sportshift mode position
Shift indicator does not A problem in the shift Check the shift indicator circuit (see page 14-382).
indicate the selected gear indicator circuit
while the shift lever is in
the sequential sportshift
mode position
Shift lever cannot pass A problem in the reverse Check the interlock system - reverse lock system
through the IBJ position lock system of the interlock circuit (see page 14-395).
from the IHl position system
(cont'd)
BACK
14-225
Protected by AR
Engine runs, but 1. Low ATF level • Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for leakage
vehicle does not 2. Shift cable broken or out and loose connections. If necessary, flush ATF cooler
move in any gear of adjustment lines.
3. Shift cable worn • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
4. ATF pump worn or transmission control shaft.
binding • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque converter
5. Regulator valve stuck or housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The symptoms
spring worn are mostly an rpm-related ticking noise or a high
6. ATF strainer clogged pitched squeak.
7. Mainshaft worn or • Measure line pressure.
damaged • If the strainer is clogged, find the damaged components
8. Final gears worn or that caused debris.
damaged • Inspect the differential pinion gears for wear. If the
9. Transmission-to-engine differential pinion gears are worn, replace the
assembly error differential assembly, replace the ATF strainer,
10. Axle disengaged thoroughly clean the transmission, and flush the cooler
and lines. Replace the torque converter.
• Be careful not to damage the torque converter housing
• Install the main seal flush with the torque converter
housing. If you push it into the torque converter
housing until it bottoms out, it will block the fluid return
passage and result in damage.
Vehicle moves in 1. 1st accumulator defective • Inspect 1st clutch pressure.

®, but not in ~, ~, 2. 1st clutch defective • Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/1st-hold/2nd clutch
~, or [I] assembly for wear and damage.
• Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the spring
and damage. If the discs and plates are worn and
Vehicle moves in 1. 1st gear one-way clutch • Inspect 1st clutch pressure.
00 and ®, but not defective • Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/1st-hold/2nd clutch
in ~, ~, ~, or [I] 2. 1st gears worn or assembly for wear and damage.
damaged • Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the spring
3. 1st clutch defective retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-
14-226 BACK
Protected by AR
Vehicle moves in 1. 1st-hold accumulator • Inspect 1st-hold clutch pressure.

~, ~, ~, 00 and [RJ, defective • Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/lst-hold/2nd clutch
but not in rn 2. 1st-hold clutch defective assembly for wear and damage.
• Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the spring
Vehicle moves in 1. 2nd accumulator • Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/1st-hold/2nd clutch
~,~,~,rn,[RJ, defective assembly for wear and damage.
but not in 00 2. 2nd gears worn or • Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the spring
damaged retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-
3. 2nd clutch defective plate-to-top-disc clearance. Ifthe clearance is out of
Vehicle moves in 1. Shift fork shaft stuck • Measure line pressure and 5th clutch pressure.
~, ~, ~, 00, II], 2. Modulator valve • Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift fork shaft.
but not in [RJ (or defective • If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
moves forward in 3. Reverse CPC valve aluminum, inspectthe ATF pump. If the ATF pump is
[RJ) defective OK, and no cause for the contamination is found,
4. 5th accumulator replace the torque converter.
defective • Inspect the reverse selector gear teeth chamfers, and
5. 5th clutch defective inspect engagement teeth chamfers of the countershaft
6. Reverse gears worn or 5th gear and reverse gear. Replace the reverse gears
damaged and the reverse selector if they are worn or damaged. If
the transmission makes clicking, grinding, or whirring
noises, also replace the mainshaft 5th gear, reverse
idler gear, and countershaft 5th gear.
• If the 5th clutch feed pipe guide in the end cover is
scored by the mainshaft, inspect the ball bearing for
excessive movement in the transmission housing. If the
ball bearing is OK, replace the end cover as it is dented.
The O-ring under the guide is probably worn.
• Replace the mainshaft if the bushing for the 4th and 5th
clutch feed pipes are loose or damaged. If the 5th clutch
feed pipe is damaged or out of round, replace the end
cover.
• Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve, and
O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage.
Inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top-disc clearance. Ifthe
clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs
OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end plate.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-227
Protected by AR
Poor acceleration; 1. Low ATF level • Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for leakage
flares on starting 2. Shift cable broken or out and loose connections. If necessary, flush ATF cooler
off in ~, ~ and ~: of adjustment lines.
Stall speed high in 3. ATF pump worn or • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
~, ~, ~, 11], and binding transmission control shaft.
[IJ 4. Regulator valve stuck or • Check line pressure.
spring worn • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque converter
5. ATF strainer clogged housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The symptom is
6. Torque converter check mostly an rpm-ticking noise or a high pitched squeak.
valve defective • Be careful not to damage the torque converter housing
damage the ATF pump when you torque down the main;
Poor acceleration; 2nd clutch defective • Check 2nd clutch pressure.

flares on starting • Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the spring
off in ~, ~ and ~: retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-
Stall speed high in plate-to-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
11] tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for wear
off in [ft]: 2. 5th clutch defective • Check 5th clutch pressure.
[ft] retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-
14-228 BACK
Protected by AR
Poor acceleration; 1. Torque converter clutch • Check ATF cooling system for restriction.
Stall speed low solenoid valve defective • Check for a stuck lock-up valve in the valve body.
2. Torque converter one-
way clutch defective
3. Engine output low
4. lock-up clutch piston
defective
5. lock-up shift valve
defective
6. Restricted ATF warmer
Engine idle 1. low ATF level • Set idle rpm in gear to the specified idle speed. If still no
vibration 2. Torque converter clutch good, adjust the engine and transmission mounts as
solenoid valve defective outlined in the engine section of this service manual.
3. Drive plate defective or • Check ATF level and check ATF cooler lines for leakage
transmission and loose connections. If necessary, flush ATF cooler
misassembled lines.
4. Engine output low • Check ATF cooling system for restriction.
5. lock-up clutch piston
defective
6. ATF pump worn or
binding
7. lock-up shift valve
defective
Vehicle moves in 1. Excessive ATF • Check the ATF level, and drain the ATF if necessary.
INl 2. Foreign material in • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve, and
3. Relief valve defective Inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top-disc clearance. If the
4. 1st-hold clutch defective clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs
5. 1st clutch defective and plates for wear and damage. If the discs and plates
6. 2nd clutch defective are worn or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are
7. 3rd clutch defective OK, adjust the clutch end plate clearance.
8. 4th clutch defective • Check for clutch pressure in neutral.
9. 5th clutch defective
10. Clutch clearance
incorrect
'1. Needle bearing seized up,
worn, or damaged
12. Thrust washer seized up,
worn, or damaged
(cont'd)
BACK 14-229
Protected by AR
Late shift from 1. Shift solenoid valve C defective • Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose
the !HI position to 2. AfT clutch pressure control connectors. Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift
the IQ!I, ~ and ~ solenoid valves A and B defective solenoid valve for seizure.
positions 3. AfT clutch pressure control • Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
solenoid valve C defective valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear and
4. Shift cable broken or out of damage. If the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
adjustment valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
5. Joint in shift cable and • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
transmission or body worn the transmission control shaft.
6. Mainshaft speed sensor defective • If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel
7. Countershaft speed sensor or aluminum, inspect the ATF pump. If the ATF
defective pump is OK, and no cause for the contamination is
8. ATF temperature sensor defective found, replace the torque converter.
9. CPC valve C stuck • Check 1st clutch pressure.
10. Foreign material in separator • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
plate orifice and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
11. Shift valve C defective damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top-disc
12. Shift valve E defective clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance,
13. Servo control valve defective inspect the clutch discs and plates for wear and
14. 1st accumulator defective damage. If the discs and plates are worn or
15. 1st check ball stuck damaged, replace them as a set. If they are OK,
16. 1st clutch defective adjust the clutch end plate clearance.
Late shift from 1. Shift solenoid valve C defective • Check the IIH indicator, and check for loose
the !HI position to 2. AfT clutch pressure control connectors. Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift
the [BJ position solenoid valves A and B defective solenoid valve for seizure.
3. AfT clutch pressure control • Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
solenoid valve C defective valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear and
4. Shift cable broken or out of damage. If the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
adjustment valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
5. Joint in shift cable and • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
transmission or body worn the transmission control shaft.
6. Mainshaft speed sensor defective • If the ATF strainer is clogged with particles of steel
7. Countershaft speed sensor or aluminum, inspect the ATF pump. Ifthe ATF
defective pump is OK, and no cause for the contamination is
8. ATF temperature sensor defective found, replace the torque converter.
9. Shift fork shaft stuck • Check 5th clutch pressure.
10. CPC valve C stuck • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check valve,
11. Reverse CPC valve defective and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for wear and
12. Foreign material in separator damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top-disc
plate orifice clearance. If the clearance is out of tolerance,
13. Shift valve E defective inspect the clutch discs and plates for wear and
14. 5th accumulator defective damage. If the discs and plates are worn or
15. 5th clutch defective damaged, replace them as a set. If they are OK,
adjust the clutch end plate clearance.
,
14-230 BACK
Protected by AR
No shift 1. Mainshaft speed sensor • Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose connectors.
defective • Measure line pressure.
2. Countershaft speed
sensor defective
3. Modulator valve
defective
Erratic shifting 1. Shift solenoid valve B Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose connectors.
gears: defective Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid valve for
Fails to shift in the 2. Shift valve B defective seizure.
~,~and~
positions;
starts off in 5th.
Fails to shift in the
00 position;
starts off in 4th
Erratic shifting 1. Shift solenoid valve A Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose connectors.
gears: defective Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid valve for
Fails to shift in the 2. Shift valve A defective seizure.
~,~,~andrn
positions; starts off
in 3rd
Excessive shock, 1. Aff clutch pressure Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose connectors.
or flares on all control solenoid valves Inspect the Aff clutch pressure control solenoid valve
upshifts and A and B defective body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear and damage. If
downshifts 2. Mainshaft speed sensor the Aff clutch pressure control solenoid valve is stuck,
defective inspect the CPC valves.
3. Countershaft speed Inspect the sensor O-rings.
sensor defective
4. ATF temperature sensor
defective
5. CPC valve A defective
6. Foreign material in
separator plate orifice
Excessive shock, 1. Foreign material in • Check 1st and 2nd clutch pressures.
or flares on 1-2 separator plate orifice • Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the spring
upshift or 2-1 2. 2nd accumulator retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-
downshift defective plate-to-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
3. 2nd check ball stuck tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for wear
4. 2nd clutch defective and damage. If the discs and plates are worn or
(cont'd)
BACK
14-231
Protected by AR
Excessive shock, 1. Shift solenoid valve C defective • Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose
or flares on 2-3 2. A/T clutch pressure control connectors. Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift
upshift or 3-2 solenoid valves A and B defective solenoid valve for seizure.
downshift 3. 3rd clutch pressure switch • Check for clogged orifice in the clutch pressure
defective switch connector. If the orifice is clogged, remove it
4. CPC valve B defective and clean the connector.
5. Foreign material in separator • Check 2nd and 3rd clutch pressures.
plate orifice • Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
6. Shift valve C defective spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
7. 2nd accumulator defective clutch end-plate-to-top-disc clearance. If the
8. 3rd accumulator defective clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs
9. 2nd check ball stuck and plates for wear and damage. If the discs and
10. 2nd clutch defective plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set. If
11. 3rd clutch defective they are OK, adjust the clutch end plate clearance.
or flares on 3-4 2. AfT clutch pressure control connectors. Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift
downshift 3. 4th clutch pressure switch • Check for clogged orifice in the clutch pressure
defective switch connector. Ifthe orifice is clogged, remove it
4. CPC valve B defective and clean the connector.
5. Foreign material in separator • Check 3rd and 4th clutch pressures.
plate orifice • Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
6. Shift valve C defective spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
7. 3rd accumulator defective clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. If the clearance
8. 4th accumulator defective is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates
9. 3rd clutch defective for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn
10. 4th clutch defective or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are OK,
adjust the clutch end plate clearance.
or flares on 4-5 2. AfT clutch pressure control connectors. Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift
downshift 3. A/T clutch pressure control • Check 4th and 5th clutch pressures.
solenoid valve C defective • Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
4. CPC valve B defective spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
5. CPC valve C defective clutch end-plate-to-top-disc clearance. If the
6. Foreign material in separator clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs
plate orifice and plates for wear and damage. If the discs and
7. Shift valve C defective plates are worn or damaged, replace them as a set. If
8. Shift valve E defective they are OK, adjust the clutch end plate clearance.
9. Kick-down valve or kick-down
short valve defective
10. 4th accumulator defective
11. 5th accumulator defective
L - -_ _ _ _ - - c_ _ - --- - - - '---- -
14-232 BACK
Protected by AR
Noise from 1. ATF pump worn or binding • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
transmission in all 2. Torque converter housing or converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure. The
shift lever transmission housing bearing symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking noise or
positions worn or damaged a high pitched squeak.
• Inspect the contact of the countershaft and secondary
shaft with the bearings. Check the ATF guide plates
for damage and wear. Inspect the 1st clutch feed pipe
for damage and out of round. If the 1st clutch feed
pipe is damaged or out of round, replace it. Replace
the secondary shaft if the bushing for the 1st clutch
feed pipe is damaged or out of round.
Vehicle does not Torque converter one-way clutch Replace torque converter.
accelerate more defective
than 31 mph
(50 km/h)
Vibration in all Drive plate defective or transmission • Set idle rpm in gear to the specified idle speed. If still
shift lever misassembled no good, adjust the engine mounts as described in
positions the engine section of this service manual.
• Check the stall speed.
Shift lever does 1. Transmission range switch • Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose
not operate defective or out of adjustment connectors. Inspect the transmission range switch. If
smoothly 2. Shift cable broken or out of the transmission range switch is faulty, replace it. If
adjustment the transmission range switch is out of adjustment,
3. Joint in shift cable and adjust it and the shift cable.
transmission or body worn • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
transmission control shaft.
Transmission does 1. Shift cable broken or out of • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and the
not shift into the [f] adjustment transmission control shaft.
position 2. Joint in shift cable and • Check the park pawl spring installation and the park
transmission or body worn lever spring installation. If installation is incorrect,
3. Park mechanism defective install the spring correctly. Make sure that the park
lever stop is not installed upside down. Check the
distance between the park pawl shaft and the park
lever roller pin. If the distance is out of tolerance,
adjust the distance with the park lever stop.
Lock-up clutch 1. Torque converter clutch • Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose
does not solenoid valve defective connectors. Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control
disengage 2. AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve body gasket for wear and damage. If
solenoid valve C defective the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve is stuck,
3. Lock-up clutch piston defective inspect the CPC valves.
4. Lock-up shift valve defective • Check ATF cooling system for restriction.
5. Lock-up control valve defective
6. Lock-up timing valve defective
(cont'd)
BACK
14-233
Protected by AR
Lock-up clutch does not ,. Torque converter clutch solenoid • Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose
operate smoothly valve defective connectors. Inspect the AfT clutch pressure
2. AfT clutch pressure control control solenoid valve body gasket for wear
solenoid valve C defective and damage. If the AfT clutch pressure control
3. Lock-up clutch piston defective solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
4. Torque converter check valve • Center all engine mounts.
defective
5. Lock-up shift valve defective
7. Lock-up timing valve defective
8. Non-Honda ATF used
Lock-up clutch does not ,. Torque converter clutch solenoid Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose
engage valve defective connectors. Inspect the AfT clutch pressure I,
2. AfT clutch pressure control control solenoid valve body gasket for wear and
solenoid valve C defective damage. If the AfT clutch pressure control
3. Mainshaft speed sensor defective solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
4. Countershaft speed sensor
defective
5. Lock-up clutch piston defective
6. Torque converter check valve
defective
7. Lock-up shift valve defective
AfT gear position

indicator does not
,. Transmission range switch • Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose
connectors. Inspect the transmission range
defective or out of adjustment
indicate shift lever 2. Shift cable broken or out of switch. If the transmission range switch is
positions adjustment faulty, replace it. If the transmission range
3. Joint in shift cable and switch is out of adjustment, adjust it and the
transmission or body worn shift cable.
• Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever
and the transmission control shaft.
Speedometer and Countershaft speed sensor defective Check the ~ indicator, and check for loose
odometer do not operate connectors.
Engine does not rev up Engine rocker arms defective Check the engine rocker arms as described in the
high speed, and the engine section of this service manual.
transmission shifts up
during low-rev condition.
(Engine is warmed up to
normal operating
temperature)
'--- -~ . - -~
- -
14-234 BACK
Protected by AR
System Description
General Operation
The automatic transmission is a combination of a 3-element torque converter and triple-shaft electronically controlled
unit which provides 5 speeds forward and 1 reverse. The entire unit is positioned in line with the engine.
Torque Converter, Gears, and Clutches

The torque converter consists of a pump, turbine, and stator assembly in a single unit. They are connected to the
engine crankshaft so they turn together as the engine turns. Around the outside of the torque converter is a ring gear
which meshes with the starter pinion when the engine is being started. The entire torque converter assembly serves
as a flywheel, transmitting power to the transmission mainshaft. The transmission has three parallel shafts: the
mainshaft, the countershaft, and the secondary shaft. The mainshaft is in line with the engine crankshaft. The
mainshaft includes the 4th and 5th clutches, and gears for 3rd, 4th, 5th, and reverse, (reverse gear is integral with the
5th gear). The countershaft includes the 3rd clutch, and gears for the final drive, 1st, 4th, 5th, reverse, 2nd, park, and
3rd (the final drive gear is integral with the countershaft). The secondary shaft includes the 1st, 1st-hold and 2nd
clutches, and gears for 1st, 2nd, and idler. The countershaft 5th gear and the countershaft reverse gear can be locked
to the countershaft at its center, providing 5th gear or reverse, depending with which way the selector moved. The
gears on the mainshaft and the secondary shaft are in constant mesh with those on the countershaft. When certain
combinations of gears in the transmission are engaged by the clutches, power is transmitted from the mainshaft and
the secondary shaft to the countershaft to provide ~, ~, ~, ~, [!], and ~ positions.
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists of the powertrain control module (PCM), sensors, and seven solenoid valves.
Hydraulic Control
The valve bodies include the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the servo body, and the accumulator body.
They are bolted to the torque converter housing. The main valve body contains the manual valve, the modulator valve,
the shift valve C, the shift valve D, the kick-down valve, the servo control valve, the torque converter check valve, the
reverse CPC valve, the lock-up shift valve, the relief valve, the cooler check valve, and the ATF pump gears. The
regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the lock-up timing valve, and the lock-up control valve. The servo
body contains the servo valve, the shift valve A, the shift valve B, the CPC valves A and B. The top accumulator body
contains shift valve E, CPC valve C, 1st-hold accmulator piston, 4th accumulator piston, and 5th accumulator piston.
The accumulator body contains the 1st and 2nd accumulators and lubrication check valve. Fluid from the regulator
passes through the manual valve to the various control valves. The 1st/1st-hold, 3rd, 4th and 5th clutches receive fluid
from their respective feed pipes, and the 2nd clutch receives fluid from the internal hydraulic circuit.
Shift Control Mechanism

The PCM controls shift solenoid valves A, B, and C, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B while
receiving input signals from various sensors and switches located throughout the vehicle. The shift solenoid valves
shift the positions of the shift valves to switch the port leading hydraulic pressure to the clutch. The AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valves A and B control the CPC valves A and B to shift smoothly between lower gear and
higher gear. This pressurizes a line to one of the clutches, engaging the clutch and its corresponding gear.
Lock-up Mechanism
In ~ position (3rd, 4th and 5th), in ~ position (3rd and 4th) and ~ position (3rd), pressurized fluid is drained from the
back of the torque converter through a fluid passage, causing the lock-up piston to be held against the torque
converter cover. As this takes place, the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together with
hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes the timing of the lock-up mechanism. When the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve activates, modulator pressure changes to switch lock-up on and off. The lock-up control valve and the lock-up
timing valve control the range of lock-up according to AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C. The torque
converter clutch solenoid valve is mounted on the torque converter housing, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C is mounted on the transmission housing. They are all controlled by the PCM.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-235
Protected by AR
Gear Selection
The shift lever has nine positions: ~ PARK,® REVERSE,IHI NEUTRAL, ~ 1st through 5th gear ranges, ~ 1st through
4th gear ranges, ~ 1st through 3rd gear ranges, [!] 2nd gear, [IJ 1st gear, and the sequential sportshift mode position.
Position Description
~PARK Front wheels locked; park pawl engaged with park gear on countershaft. All clutches are
released.
® REVERSE Reverse; reverse selector engaged with countershaft reverse gear and 4th clutch locked.
[HJ NEUTRAL All clutches are released.
~DRIVE General driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd, 4th then 5th, depending on
(1 stthrough 5th) vehicle speed and throttle position. Downshift through 4th, 3rd, 2nd, and 1st on deceleration to
stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 3rd, 4th and 5th gear.
~DRIVE General driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd, then 4th, depending on
(1 st through 4th) vehicle speed and throttle position. Downshift through 3rd, 2nd and 1st on deceleration to stop.
The lock-up mechanism operates in 3rd and 4th gear.
~DRIVE Used for rapid acceleration at highway speeds and general driving; up-hill and down-hill
(1st through 3rd) driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, then 3rd, depending on vehicle speed and
throttle position.
Downshifts through 2nd to 1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 3rd
gear.
[!] SECOND Used for engine braking or better traction starting off on loose or slippery surfaces; stays in
2nd gear, does not shift up or down.
[IJ FIRST Used for engine braking; stays in 1st gear, does not shift up.
--- - - -- -
Starting is possible only in the [fJ and [HJ positions because of a slide-type neutral-safety switch.
Automatic Transaxle (AfT) Gear Position Indicator

The AfT gear position indicator in the instrument panel shows which gear has been selected without having to look
down at the console. With the shift lever in the sequential sportshift mode position, the indicator light next to the ~
indicator in the instrument panel will display the gear selected.
BACK
14-236
Protected by AR
Clutches
The 5-speed automatic transmission uses hydraulically-actuated clutches to engage or disengage the transmission
gears. When hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch drum, the clutch piston moves. This presses the friction
discs and steel plates together, locking them so they don't slip. Power is then transmitted through the engaged clutch
pack to its hub-mounted gear. Likewise, when the hydraulic pressure is bled from the clutch pack, the piston releases
the friction discs and the steel plates, and they are free to slide past each other. This allows the gear to spin
independently on its shaft, transmitting no power.
1st Clutch
The 1st clutch engages/disengages 1st gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 1st clutch is
joined back-to-back to the 2nd clutch. The 1st clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the
secondary shaft.
1st-hold Clutch
The 1st-hold clutch engages/disengages 1st-hold or m position, and is located in the 1st clutch drum. The 1st-hold
clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the orifice inside the secondary shaft by a circuit connected to the
internal hydraulic circuit.
2nd Clutch
The 2nd clutch engages/disengages 2nd gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 2nd clutch is
joined back-to-back to the 1st clutch. The 2nd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the secondary shaft by a
circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
3rd Clutch
The 3rd clutch engages/disengages 3rd gear, and is located at the end of the countershaft, just behind the end cover.
The 3rd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe in the countershaft.
4th Clutch
The 4th clutch engages/disengages 4th gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The 4th clutch is joined
back-to-back to the 5th clutch. The 4th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the mainshaft.
5th Clutch
The 5th clutch engages/disengages 5th gear, as well as reverse gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The
5th clutch is jOined back-to-back to the 4th clutch. The 5th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe
within the mainshaft.
One-way Clutch
The one-way clutch is positioned between the 1st clutch hub and the secondary shaft 1st gear. The secondary shaft 1st
gear is splined to the 1st-hold clutch hub, with the 1st-hold clutch hub splined to the secondary shaft. The secondary
shaft 1st gear provides the outer race surface, and the 1st clutch hub provides the inner race surface. The one-way
clutch locks when power is transmitted from the secondary shaft 1st gear to the countershaft 1st gear. The 1st clutch
and gears remain engaged in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gear ranges in the~, ~,~ or II] position.
However, the one-way clutch disengages when the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, or 5th clutches and gears are applied in the ~, ~, ~
or II] position. This is because the increased rotational speed of the gears on the secondary shaft overrides the locking
"speed range" of the one-way clutch. Thereafter, the one-way clutch free-wheels with the 1st clutch still engaged.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-237
Protected by AR
Power Flow
Transmission Sectional View
MAINSHAFT
5TH GEAR ATF PUMP DRIVEN GEAR
4TH CLUTCH
CONVERTER
MAINS HAFT
LOCK-UP CLUTCH
MAINS HAFT PISTON
3RDGEAR
REVERSE
SELECTOR HUB
:~:~!3 TE
PARK
COUNTERSHAFT
1ST GEAR
2ND CLUTCH
1ST CLUTCH
I
SECONDARY SHAFT
1ST GEAR
DIFFERENTIAL
ASSEMBLY
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
BACK
14-238
Protected by AR
Gear operation
Gears on the mainshaft:
• Reverse gear is engaged/disengaged with the mainshaft by the 5th clutch.
• 3rd gear is splined with the mainshaft and rotates with the mainshaft.
Gears on the countershaft:
• The final gear is integral with the countershaft.
• 1st gear, 4th gear, 2nd gear and park gear are splined with the countershaft, and rotate with the countershaft.
• 5th gear and reverse gear rotate freely from the countershaft. The reverse selector engages 5th gear and reverse
gear with the reverse selector hub. The reverse selector hub is splined to the countershaft so 5th gear and reverse
gear engage with the countershaft.
• 3rd gear is engaged/disengaged with the countershaft by the 3rd clutch.
Gears on the secondary shaft:
• 1st gear is engaged/disengaged with the secondary shaft by the 1st clutch. The 1st gear is engaged with the
secondary shaft by the 1st-hold clutch and the one-way clutch when decelerating using for engine braking.
• 2nd gear is engaged/disengaged with the secondary shaft by the 2nd clutch.
• Idler gear is splined with the secondary shaft, and rotates with the secondary shaft.
MAINS HAFT TORQUE CONVERTER

MAINSHAFT 5TH GEAR
REVERSE GEAR
MAINSHAFT
3RDGEAR
MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE SELECTOR
HUB
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
1ST CLUTCH
(cont'd)
BACK
14-239
Protected by AR
Power Flow (cont'd)
~ Position
Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. The countershaft is
locked by the park pawl interlocking the park gear.
~ Position
Engine power transmitted from the torque converter drives the mainshaft 3rd gear, the countershaft 3rd gear, and the
secondary shaft idler gear, but hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the
countershaft. The countershaft 5th gear is engaged with the reverse selector hub and the countershaft by the reverse
selector, when the shift lever is shifted in the ~ position from the forward range (~,~, ~,OO, II] positions). The
countershaft reverse gear is engaged when shifted from the 1ft] position.
CONVERTER
MAINS HAFT
3RDGEAR
MAINS HAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
BACK
14-240
Protected by AR
rn Position
In rn position, hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch and the 1st-hold clutch.
The power flow when accelerating is as follows:
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear with the
secondary shaft by the one-way clutch.
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st-hold clutch, and the 1st-hold clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st
gear with the secondary shaft.
• The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft 3rd gear and the secondary shaft idler gear.
• The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft.
COUNTERSHAFT
1ST GEAR TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
3RDGEAR
MAINSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
1ST-HOLD
CLUTCH
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
(cont'd)
BACK
14-241
Protected by AR
Power Flow (cont'd)
[j] Position
The power flow when decelerating is as follows:
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch and the 1st-hold clutch. Rolling resistance from the road surface goes
through the front wheels to the final drive gear, then to the secondary shaft idler gear.
• The one-way clutch disengages because the application of torque is reversed.
• The counterforce conveyed to the secondary shaft idler gear turns the mainshaft 3rd gear via the countershaft 3rd
gear. As a result. engine braking can be obtained with 1st gear.
COUNTERSHAFT
I
MAINSHAFT
3RDGEAR
MAINSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
1ST·HOLD
CLUTCH
__ r.NAL DRIVEN GEAR
14-242 BACK
Protected by AR
~, ~ and IP.!l Positions

In~, ~ or ~ position, the optimum gear is automatically selected from the 1st. 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears according
to conditions such as the balance between the throttle opening (engine loading) and vehicle speed.
~, ~ or ~ Position in 1st gear

o Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear with the
secondary shaft.
o The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft 3rd gear and secondary shaft idler gear.
o The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft.
COUNTERS HAFT
MAINSHAFT
3RDGEAR
MAINSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
___ r'II""'L DRIVEN GEAR
(cont'd)
BACK
14-243
Protected by AR
Power Flow (cont'd)
~, ~ or ~ Position in 2nd gear and 00 Position

o Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, then the 2nd clutch engages the secondary shaft 2nd gear with the
secondary shaft.
o The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft 3rd gear and secondary shaft idler gear.
o The secondary shaft 2nd gear drives the countershaft 2nd gear and the countershaft.
o Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 2nd gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
power from 1st gear cut off at the one-way clutch.
COUNTERSHAFT
2ND GEAR CONVERTER
COUNTERSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER GEAR 2ND CLUTCH
SECONDARY SHAFT
2ND GEAR
___ rmiAL DRIVEN GEAR
14-244 BACK
Protected by AR
~, ~ or ~ Position in 3rd gear

• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 3rd clutch, then the 3rd clutch engages the countershaft 3rd gear with the
countershaft.
• The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the countershaft 3rd gear and the countershaft.
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 3rd gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
___ r""."'L DRIVEN GEAR
(cont'd)
BACK
14-245
Protected by AR
Power Flow (cont'd)
~, or ~ Position in 4th gear

• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engage the mainshaft 4th gear with the mainshaft.
• The mainshaft 4th gear drives the counters haft 4th gear and the countershaft.
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 4th gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
MAINSHAFT
4TH GEAR TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
3RDGEAR
MAINS HAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
__ t-INAL DRIVEN GEAR
BACK
14-246
Protected by AR
~ Position in 5th gear

• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft 5th gear while
the shift lever is in the forward range (~, ~, ~, [1], and [!] position).
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 5th clutch, then the 5th clutch engages the mainshaft 5th gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft 5th gear drives the countershaft 5th gear, which drives the reverse selector hub and the countershaft.
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 5th gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
5TH CLUTCH
CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
3RDGEAR
MAINSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
(cont' d)
BACK
14-247
Protected by AR
Power Flow (cont'd)

[B] Position
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft (reverse gear
while the shift lever is in the [RJ position).
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 5th clutch, then the 5th clutch engages the mainshaft reverse gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft reverse gear drives the countershaft reverse gear via the reverse idler gear.
• The rotation direction of the countershaft reverse gear is changed via the reverse idler gear.
• The countershaft reverse gear drives the countershaft via the reverse selector which drives the reverse selector hub.
COUNTERSHAFT SERVO VALVE
REVERSE GEAR
~
REVERSE ••• _ ~
..
SELECTOR HUB
REVERSE SELECTOR
CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
REVERSE
SELECTOR
_"'k'A' DRIVEN GEAR
14-248 BACK
Protected by AR
Functional Diagram
The electronic control system consists of the Powertrain Control Model (PCM), sensors, and 7 solenoid valves. Shifting
and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions.
The PCM receives input signals from the sensors, switches, switches, and other control units, perform processing data,
and outputs signals for the engine control system and AfT control system. The AfT control system includes shift
control, grade logic control, clutch pressure control, and lock-up control is stored in the PCM. The PCM switches the
shift solenoid valves and the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves to control shifting transmission gears and
lock-up torque converter clutch.
PCM
Engine RPM Signal
r---.
Throttle Position
Sensor Signal
Engine Coolant •
r-.
r---.
Temperature Sensor Signal PGM-FI
Control System Gaup;a A...mbly
Barometric Pressure
Sensor Signal r---. A/T ear Position Indicator
05 Indicator
Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor Signal r-+
ATF Temperature
Sensor Signal r--. A/TControl
System
Service Check Signal
r-+ Shift Control
Shift Solenoid Valve A r--.
r--.
Transmission
Range Switch
Signal
Pi'F-
DO
r--+
f-+
Grade Logic
Control
• Ascending
Control
Shift Solenoid Valve 8
Shift Solenoid Valve C r---+

Automatic
• Deacending 5-speed
F- Control and
Ii" f-+ Torque Convert..
Clutch Solenoid Valve ~~ Reva...
1st-hold switch
III Position Signal r-+ Clutch Pressure
Control
AfT Clutch Pressure
Control Solenoid Valve C
AfT Clutch Pressure
~I'+
Transmission Gear
Selection Switch
Control Solenoid Valve A I-r+
..
AfT Clutch Pressure
Ils-moda
Signal
Switch
f-+ Control Solenoid Valve B 1-1'+
! I!ransmission Gear
Selection Switch Signal ~
Lock-up Control
- LocIc-up
ON/OFF
I l i....+ Lock-up
r--.
Self-dlagnosisl Conditions
Malnshaft Speed Fail-safe Function Vehicle Speed Signal
Communication and IData Unk Connector
Sensor Signal
Output function I
Countarshaft Speed
Sensor Signal t--+ I Fhlft Lock Control
Rev.... Lock Control IL Shift LocIc Solenoid
3rd Clutch Pressure
Switch Signal r---.
4th Clutch Pressure
Switch Signal r---.
Brake Pedal Position
Switch Signal r-.
Cruise Control Unit
Downshift Request Signal r---.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-249
Protected by AR

Electronic Controls Location
g
c:J
g'
PARK PIN SWITCH ~/"'" '\
TRANSMISSION GEAR POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)

SELECTION SWITCH
1ST-HOLD SWITCH
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
COUNTERSHAFT
TORQUE CONVERTER SPEED SENSOR
CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVES A and B
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
MAINSHAFT SPEED
, SENSOR
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
-----
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
\ 3AD ClUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH
ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR
I
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
BACK
14-250
Protected by AR
Shift Control
The PCM instantly determines which gear should be selected by various signals sent from sensors and switches, and
it actuates the shift solenoid valves A, B, and C to control shifting.
Also, as Grade Logic Control System has been adopted to control shifting in the ~, IQ!I and ~ positions. The PCM
compares actual driving conditions with memorized driving conditions, based on the input from the throttle position
sensor, the engine coolant temperature sensor, the barometric pressure sensor, the brake pedal position switch signal,
and the shift lever position signal, to control shifting while the vehicle is ascending or descending a slope, or reducing
speed.
PCM
~h9lh. RPM Signal I Engine RPM Control
Ir,"nsmi..ion G.ar
Selection Switch
I
I
Signal
I Shift Position
Control
AfT G.... Position
Indicator 05 Indicator
[Transmi.. ion Ranga

Switch Signal
I ... ~ Fail·..fe Control
f
I
~Throttla Position I _IiDriving
ctual
Position
Shift r
L
Sensor Signal
I
-H~eed of ATF I
Ifountershlft Speed
Sansor Signal
I~ain ....ft Spaed

r--
I
T emp«atur. I
Master Target of
Shifting Position
~
Comparison i-
with
Signlls Shift Solenoid Valve A
Shift Solenoid Vllve B
Shift Solenoid Valve C
Sensor Signal
I ~onof~i:I
~=ion of Shifting
I~TF Temperature I
Senior Signal
rs~rometric P....ure
I
I
... Grade Logic Control
Calculation of
gradient
Senior Signa'
I
ling in. Coolant
Temperature
Sensor Signal
I Correction of engine
coo'ant temperature
I unsor signal data
If'UiS. Control
Downshift Raqu.st
Signal l Correction of cruis.
control signal data
I
Judgmantof
lBrak. Pedal Position I Controlijng Ar.a Shift Lock Solenoid
Switch Signal
I
Frequency Divider Vehicle Speed Signll
(cont'd)
BACK
14-251
Protected by AR
The PCM turns on the shift solenoid valves A, B, and C to control shifting transmission gear.
The combination of driving signals to shift solenoid valves A, B, and C are shown in the table below.
Position Gear position Shift solenoid valves

A B C
~,~,Ii!il Shifting from the lID position OFF ON OFF
Stays in 1st ON ON ON
Shifting gears between 1st and 2nd ON ON ON
Stays in 2nd ON ON OFF
Shifting gears between 2nd and 3rd OFF ON OFF
Stays in 3rd OFF ON ON ,
~,~ Shifting gears between 3rd and 4th OFF OFF ON

Sta~s in 4th OFF OFF OFF
~ Shifting gears between 4th and 5th ON OFF OFF
Stavs in 5th ON OFF ON
II] 2nd ON ON OFF
[iJ 1st ON ON ON
1ft] Shifting from the [f] and !HI position OFF ON ON
Stavs in reverse OFF ON OFF
Reverse inhibit ON ON ON
~ Park OFF ON OFF
[N: Neutral -~-
- __ OfE __ ~._ OlL _ _ OFF~_i
NOTE: For a description of the reverse inhibit mode, refer to page 14-280.
14-252 BACK
Protected by AR
Ascending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is climbing a hill in ~, ~, and ~ positions and the sequential sportshift
mode position, the system extends the engagement area of 2nd gear, 3rd gear, and 4th gear to prevent the
transmission from frequently shifting between 2nd and 3rd gears, between 3rd and 4th gears, and between 4th and
5th gear, so the vehicle can run smooth and have more power when needed.
NOTE: Shift schedules stored in the PCM between 2nd and 3rd gears, between 3rd and 4th gears, and between 4th and
5th gear, enable to automatically select the most suitable gear according to the magnitude of a gradient.
1000/0
'cII'"
c
"- 50
0 ASCENDING MODE: Upshift Schedule
II
=e
.I!
t-
. - - - - - - - - : GRADUAL ASCENDING MODE
_ .._ .. _ .. -: MEDIUM ASCENDING MODE
...................... : STEEP ASCENDING MODE
o
62 mph
(100 km/hl Vehicle speed
Descending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is going down a hill in ~, ~, and ~ positions and the sequential sportshift
mode position, the shift-up speed from 4th to 5th gear, 3rd to 4th gear and from 2nd to 3rd (when the throttle is closed)
becomes faster than the set speed for flat road driving to widen the 4th gear, 3rd gear and 2nd gear driving areas. This,
in combination with engine braking from the deceleration lock-up, achieves smooth driving when the vehicle is
descending. There are three descending modes with different 4th gear driving areas, 3rd gear driving areas and 2nd
gear driving areas according to the magnitude of a gradient stored in the PCM. When the vehicle is in 5th gear or 4th
gear, and you are decelerating when you are applying the brakes on a steep hill, the transmission will downshift to
lower gear. When you accelerate, the transmission will then return to higher gear.
1000/0
5TH
'c'"II
c
"-
0 50 DESCENDING MODE: Downshift Schedule
II
=e
.I!
t-
• - - - - - - - - : GRADUAL DESCENDING MODE
- .. - .. - .. - : MEDIUM DESCENDING MODE
...................... : STEEP DESCENDING MODE
o
62 mph
(100 km/hl Vehicle speed
Deceleration Control
When the vehicle goes around a corner, and needs to decelerate first and then accelerate, the PCM sets the data for
deceleration control to reduce the number of times the transmission shifts. When the vehicle is decelerating from
speeds above 27 mph (43 km/h), the PCM shifts the transmission from 5th or 4th to 2nd earlier than normal to cope
with upcoming acceleration.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-253
Protected by AR
Electronic Control System (co nt'd)

Clutch Pressure Control
The PCM actuates the A[f clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C to control the clutch pressure. When
shifting between lower and higher gears, the clutch pressure regulated by the A[f clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A, B, and C engages and disengages the clutch smoothly.
The PCM receives input signals from the various sensors and switches, performs processing data, and outputs a
current to the A[f clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C.
PCM
I
Malnshaft Speed
Sensor Signal
I
I
Actual Requirement to
Iretard ignition
Driving
timing
I
Countershaft Speed
Sensor Signal
I
I
Shift
Position
I +
I~acision of
shifting mode
I IroM-F1 Control
System
IThrottle Position
Sensor Signal
I ~
I AIT Clutch Pressure
Master Target of
Controlling Current f--+ Currant
feedback
Control Solenoid
Valves A. Band C
I
Manifold Absolute ~
Pressure Sensor Signal
~: ; :::ion of::-r
I
I
Engine RPM Signal
Barometric Pressure I
Correction of angine
torque signal data
I
Sensor Signal I
13rd Clutch Pressure I Correction of
Ihydraulic pressure
Switch Signal
14th Clutch Pressura

Switch Signal
I
application timing I
I
;Engine Coolant
Temparature
I ICorrection of engine
coolant temperature
Isensor
I
Sensor Signal I signal data
I~TF Temperature I ICorrection of ATF

Itemperature
Sensor SIgnal I data
sensor
I
I
ransmiasion Gear I ICorrection of
Selection Switch
Signal I ISequential
Sportshlfting data I
14-254 BACK
Protected by AR
lock-up Control
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve controls the hydraulic pressure to switch the lock-up shift valve and lock-up
ON and OFF. The PCM actuates the torque converter clutch solenoid valve and the AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve ON, the condition of the lock-up starts. The AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C regulates and
apply the hydraulic pressure to the lock-up control valve to control the amount of the lock-up.
The lock-up mechanism operates in the ~ position (3rd, 4th, and 5th), in the ~ position (3rd, and 4th). and in the ~
position (3rd).
PCM
IEngine Coolant
Temperature
I Engine Coolant
Temperature
Sensor Signal
I control
ITransmission Gear
Selection Switch
I . I Shifting position
Signal
I I control
I,BarometriC Pressure
Sensor Signal
I
I Gradient control
by magnitude
i+
lTransmission Range
Switch Signal
I
J
Fail·safe control
Actual
IThrottle Position
Sensor Signal
I driving
shift
I ..... ~ position
I I
~ -'Torque Converter I
H I
Countershaft Speed Lock-up Control ,Clutch Solenoid Valve
Sensor Signal I
~
Driving shift
Master Target
IMainshaft Speed
Sensor Signal
I
,
position
information
·Lock-up ON/OFF control
·Lock-up condition
control
of Controlling
Current
l I ~
Engine RPM Signal
IATFTemcerature
Sensor S gnal
I
I
I
Correction of
ATF temperature
sensor data
r...j ~OCk-up condition
learning control
I
I
Current
feedback I
tIT Clutch Pressure
Control Solenoid
ValveC
I
(cont'd)
BACK
14-255
Protected by AR

PCM Electrical Connections
Powertrain Control Module
BA' ~RY
!/
IGNITION
Ai
161
PaM-A
-
.~
DS
82
VBSOL
P01
PGZ
LSA+
LSA-
::J
B17
B8
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A
[:.J
MAIN
IG1 HOT in ON(1Il RELAY 825
and START(III) B1 LSB+
IGP1 AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE
~~ CONTROL SOLENOID
1GP2 B1B VALVEB
:::J
821 LSB-
VBU
B13
BRAKE PEDAL POSlllON LSC+
SWITCH A32
BKSW AfT CLUTCH
BRAKE UGHTS~-==r 824
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE C
LSC-
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT 1 A5
CRS SHA
D7
A10 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A

DATA LINK CONNECTOR 1 ses
• SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID A28 D2
IlU
~ ..... """"'" V"-'"

• SHIFT LOCK RELAY SHB
ABSfTCS UNIT 1 E17

ATSFTP
B
GAUGE ASSEMBLY D3
~
E10 SHC
LED A
SHIFT 81 E9 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
LED 8
INDICATOR 1 E8
LEDC
A~~~~~~I
H=~Mm'r- ~ VSSOUT
LC
vca
J D1
aB
!0RaU' """""""'''
SOLENOID VALVE
1 MAINSHAFT
UTCH
I
~I
A14 NM Dn
De
DSIND D12 l SPEED SENSOR
ATPR NMSG
~~
TRANSMI N D4
ATPN
RANGE mCH 0. D9
D. DB
ATPD5
ATPD4
TPS
C27
C1B
L....fI POSITION
THROTTLE
SENSOR
I
D. 014 SG2
ATP03
1·2 D15
ATP2
7iT B14
ATPNP HENGINE COOLANT-I
1ST·HOLD C28 TEMPERATURE
SWITCH ECT L SENSOR I
1 E14
~
ATP1
~ATF
TRANSMISSION GEAR TATF
C24 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
I
I
SELECTION SWITCH
&-MOllE owrn:tt
E20 C1'
VCC1
S·MODE D10 I COUNTERSHAFT
I SHIFT SWITCH
E1B
E1'
S-DN NC
NCSG
D18
1 SPEED
SENSOR
Jr B20
S-UP
LG1
3RDCLUTCH
D13 PRESSURE SWITCH
i B22 OP3SW 00
J;
LG2
4TH CLUTCH
819 PRESSURE SWITCH
Jr
OP4SW 00 J,.
PCM Connector Tennlnal Locations
/ 34
i[il2 =5 6~ = = r:;;....:.::
I V.3 ~~h5 1/
89 101/1 '1'2 3 4 5 6718111234 567 89 Ii( 1 234151
he 9tzt: 21 ~I/ 241 9 10 11 ~2 3~~ ~!V ~~ 1/ h~1/ ~E ,.
8~! tzt:21 \2J 6 7 89 011;12]
V~~ i!g13c31 ~ ..!!~ ~~ ~~~ ~g. ~ ~[l ~ ~~ IL ~h~ ~E ~e
A (32P) B(25P) C(31PI D(1SP) E (2OP)
BACK
14-256
Protected by AR

The PCM terminal voltage and measuring conditions for the AfT control system are shown. Other PCM terminal
voltage and measuring conditions are described in section 11.
r-- ,.-_ r - - - F"""'""r

,..............
'riTz34 56m 8 9 10 /I 1 2 3 4 5 67rsll1234 567 8 910 1 23'4 lsI'
IL)j ~4 5/ 8 9 2021 ~V 241 9 1011 3'14 W~V 1213 114/ 67 819 2C 21 22 6 7 8 9 0111121
1L~i27 2Il~3Cl31 ~ 19 20
'---
21~ ~~~ ~ ~~ ~i27~ 2S1& / ~~4 n5 ~
A (32P) B(25P) C (31P) o (16P) E (20P)

Number
AS BlU/GRN CRS Downshift signal input from When cruise control is used: About 1 V
cruise control unit
A9 BlU/WHT VSS Vehicle speed signal detected Depending on vehicle speed: Pulsing signal
OUT from countershaft speed sensor,
and sent to speedometer and
odometer
A10 BRN SCS Timing and adjustment service With ignition switch ON (II) and data link
check signal connector open: 5 V
With ignition switch ON (II) and data link
connector connected with Honda PGM tester:
OV
A14 GRN/BlK D51ND 05 indicator control When ignition switch is first turned ON (II):
About 7 V for 2 seconds
In the ~~osition: About 7 V
A28 WHT/RED ILU Interlock control With ignition switch ON (II), brake pedal
pressed, and accelerator pedal released:
Battery voltage
A32 WHT/BlK BKSW Brake pedal position switch Brake pedal pressed: Battery voltage
signal input Brake pedal released: 0 V
(cont'd)
BACK
14-257
Protected by AR
A (32P) B(25P) C (31P) o (16P) E(20P)

Number
B1 YEl/BlK IGP1 Power supply circuit from main With ignition switch ON (",: Battery voltage
B2 BlK PG1 Ground A" conditions: less than 3 V
B8 WHT lSA- AfT clutch pressure control
ne~ative electrode
B9 YEl/BlK IGP2 Power supply circuit from main With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
rell!'L With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
B10 BlK PG2 Ground A" conditions: less than 3 V
B13 GRN/RED lSC+ AfT clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (",: Pulsing signal
solenoid valve C power supply
positive electrode
B14 BlU/WHT ATPNP Transmission range switch ~ In the ~ and ~ positions: 0 V
and (it] positions input In other than the ~ and (it] position: Battery
volta~e
B17 RED lSA+ AfT clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON (II): Pulsing signal
positive electrode
B18 GRN lSB- AfT clutch pressure control
ne~ative electrode
B19 BLU/YEL AT AfT 4th clutch pressure switch With ignition switch ON ("): Battery voltage
OP4SW signal input (No 4th clutch pressure)
With 4th clutch pressure: About 0 V
B20 BRN/YEL lG1 Ground A" conditions: Less than 3 V
B21 WHT/RED VBU Back-up power supply Always battery voltage
B22 BRN/YEl LG2 Ground A" conditions: Less than 3 V
B24 RED/BlU lSC- AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve C power supply
ne~ative electrode
B25 BRN/WHT lSB+ AfT clutch pressure control With ignition switch ON ("): Pulsing signal
positive electrode -
BACK
14-258
Protected by AR

Number
C18 GRNIVEL SG2 Sensor ground All conditions: Less than 3 V
C19 VEl/RED VCC1 Power supply for sensors With ignition switch ON (II): 5 V
C24 BLUIVEL TATF ATF temperature sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): About 5 V
input With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
C28 VEl/BLU VCC2 Power supply for sensors With ignition switch ON (II): 5 V

Number
D1 VEL LC Torque converter clutch During lock-up condition: Battery voltage
solenoid valve control DurinQ no lock-up condition: 0 V
D2 GRN/WHT SH B Shift solenoid valve B control Battery voltage in these positions:
• 1II,00
• ~,~, and ~ in 1st, 2nd and 3rd gear
• [fl, IRI, and IHl
• ~,and ~ in 4th gear
• ~ in 5th gear
D3 GRN SHC Shift solenoid valve C control Battery voltage in these positions:
• III
• ~,~, and ~ in 1st, 3rd and 5th gear
·00
• ~,~, and ~ in 2nd gear
D4 RED/BLK ATPN Transmission range switch IHl In IHl position: 0 V
~osition input In other than IHl position: Batte_ry voltaQe
D5 BLK/YEL VB SOL Power supply for solenoid With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
valves (Fuse No.6 in driver's With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
under-dash fuse/relay box)
D6 WHT ATPR Transmission range switch IRI In IRI position: 0 V
position input In other than [R] position: Battery voltage
D7 BLUIVEL SHA Shift solenoid valve A control Battery voltage in these positions:
• 1II,00
• ~,~, and ~ in 1st and 2nd gear
• ~ in 5th gear
• ~,~, and ~ in 3rd gear
D8 VEL ATPD4 Transmission range switch ~ In the ~ position: 0 V
D9 VEL/GRN ATPD5 Transmission range switch ~ In the ~ position: 0 V
D10 BLU NC Countershaft speed sensor Depending on vehicle speed: Pulsing signal
input When vehicle is stopped: About 0 V
D11 RED NM Mainshaft speed sensor input Depending on vehicle speed: Pulsing signal
When engine is stopped: About 0 V
(cant'd)
BACK
14-259
Protected by AR

A (32PI B (25PI C (31PI D (1SPI E (20PI

Number
012 WHT NMSG Mainshaft speed sensor ground
013 BLU/WHT ATOP3SW AfT 3rd clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
switch signal input (No 3rd clutch pressure)
With 3rd clutch pressure: About 0 V
014 RED ATPD3 Transmission range switch ~ In the ~ position: 0 V
position input In other than the ~ position: Battery voltaoe
015 BLU ATP2 Transmission range switch 00 In the [!] position: 0 V
position input In other than the 003)osition: Battery voltaoe
016 GRN NCSG Countershaft spe~d sensor g[oullt!_ - - -- - - --

Number
ES BLU/BLK LEDC Shift indicator control In sequential sportshift mode:
• 1st, 3rd, and 5th gear positions: Battery voltage
• 2nd and 4thJlear~ositions: 0 V
E9 BLU/GRN LED B Shift indicator control In sequential sportshift mode:
• 2nd and 3rd gear positions: Battery voltage
• 1st, 4th, and 5th ~earpositions: 0 V
E10 BLU/RED LEDA Shift indicator control In sequential sportshift mode:
• 4th and 5th gear positions: Battery voltage
• 1st, 2nd, and 3rd -.aear..Q..ositions: 0 V
E14 BRN ATP 1 1st-hold switch [i] position In the [i] position: 0 V
input In other than the rn position: Battery voltaoe
E1S ORN S-DN Downshift switch signal input In sequential sportshift mode and shift lever pushed
toward downshift position (marked with H_H): 0 V
neutral_position: 5 V
E19 VEL S-UP Upshift switch signal input In sequential sportshift mode and shift lever pushed
toward upshift position (marked with H+H): 0 V
neutral3)osition: 5 V
E20 RED S-MODE Sequential sportshift In sequential sportshift mode (shift lever is
transmission gear selection positioned in sequential sportshift mode): 0 V
switch signal input In other than sequential sportshift mode: 5 V
BACK
14-260
Protected by AR
Hydraulic Controls
The valve body includes the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the servo body and the accumulator body. The
ATF pump is driven by splines on the left end of the torque converter which is attached to the engine. Fluid flows
through the regulator valve to maintain specified pressure through the main valve body to the manual valve, directing
pressure to each of the clutches. The shift solenoid valves Band C are mounted on the outside of the torque converter
housing. The shift solenoid valve A and the torque converter clutch solenoid valve are mounted on the torque
converter housing. The AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C are mounted on the transmission
housing.
3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE SWITCH ____ 4TH CLUTCH PRESSURE
~~
~---- SWITCH
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVES A and B
SERVO BODY
~~ SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE •
ACCUMULATOR BODY
~TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
SOLENOID VALVE
(cont'd)
BACK
14-261
Protected by AR
Main Valve Body

The main valve body contains the manual valve, the modulator valve, the shift valve C, the shift valve D, the servo
control valve, the cooler check valve, the torque converter check valve, the reverse CPC valve, the lock-up shift valve,
the relief valve, the kick-down valve, the kick-down short valve, and the ATF pump gears. The primary function of the
main valve body is to switch fluid pressure on and off and to control hydraulic pressure going to the hydraulic control
system.
SHIFTVALVEC
I
SHIFT VALVE D
KICK-DOWN VALVE
I
MODULATOR VALVE
REVERSE CPC VALVE
LOCK-UP SHIFT VALVE
MANUAL VALVE
-----
MAIN VALVE BODY
SERVO CONTROL VALVE

TORQUE CONVERTER CHECK VALVE
Regulator Valve Body

The regulator valve body is located on the main valve body. The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the
lock-up timing valve, and the lock-up control valve.
REGULATOR VALVE
LOCK-UP TIMING VALVE
BACK
14-262
Protected by AR
Regulator Valve
The regulator valve maintains constant hydraulic pressure from the ATF pump to the hydraulic control system, while
also furnishing fluid to the lubricating system and torque converter. Fluid from the ATF pump flows through Band B'.
Fluid entering from B flows through the valve orifice to the A cavity. This pressure of the A cavity pushes the regulator
valve to the right side, and this movement of the regulator valve uncovers the fluid port to the torque converter and
the relief valve. The fluid flows out to the torque converter and the relief valve, and the regulator valve moves to the
left side. According to the level of the hydraulic pressure through B, the position of the regulator valve changes, and
the amount of fluid from B' through torque converter changes. This operation is continued, maintaining the line
pressure.
NOTE: When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the illustration below.
From ATF PUMP
VALVE
ORIFICE
To TORQUE CONVERTER
t !t To LUBRICATION
REGULATOR VALVE
Increases in hydraulic pressure according to torque are performed by the regulator valve using stator torque reaction.
The stator shaft is splined to the stator in the torque converter, and its arm end contacts the regulator spring cap.
When the vehicle is accelerating or climbing (torque converter range), stator torque reaction acts on the stator shaft,
and the stator arm pushes the regulator spring cap in the direction of the arrow in proportion to the reaction. The
stator reaction spring compresses, and the regulator valve moves to increase the line pressure which is regulated by
the regulator valve. The line pressure reaches its maximum when the stator torque reaction reaches its maximum.
TORQUE CONVERTER
STATOR
STATOR SHAFT
(cont'd)
BACK 14-263
Protected by AR
Servo Body
The servo body is on the main valve body. It contains the servo valve, the shift valve A, the shift valve B, and CPC
valves A and B.
CPCVALVEB
CPCVALVEA
SHIFT VALVE A
SERVO VALVE SHIFT VALVE B
Top Accumulator Body

The top accumulator body contains shift valve E, CPC valve C, 4th/1st-hold accumulator, and 5th accumulator.
SHIFT VALVE E 1ST-HOLD
ACCUMULATOR
5TH ACCUMULATOR
4TH ACCUMULATOR
TOP ACCUMULATOR BODY
Accumulator Body
The accumulator body is on the torque converter housing, next to the main valve body. It contains the 1st and the 2nd
accumulators and the lubrication check valve.
3rd Accumulator
The 3rd accumulator is in the end cover.
LUBRICATION CHECK VALVE

1ST ACCUMULATOR
2ND ACCUMULATOR
ACCUMULATOR BODY
14-264 BACK
Protected by AR
Hydraulic Flow
Distribution of Hydraulic Pressure

As the engine turns, the ATF pump starts to operate. Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is drawn through the ATF
strainer (filter) and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, ATF flowing from the ATF pump becomes line pressure
that's regulated by the regulator valve. Torque converter pressure from the regulator valve enters the torque converter
through the lock-up shift valve and it is discharged from the torque converter. The torque converter check valve
prevents torque converter pressure from rising .
The PCM turns the shift solenoid valves ON and OFF, and the shift solenoid valves control shift solenoid pressure to
the shift valves. Applying shift solenoid pressure to the shift valves moves the position of the shift valve, and switches
the port of hydraulic pressure. The PCM also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. The A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valves regulate the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid pressure and apply the A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid pressure to CPC valves A and B.
When shifting gears, the clutch is engaged by pressure from the CPC pressure mode. The PCM controls one of the
shift solenoid valves to move the position of the shift valve. This movement switches the port of the CPC and line
pressure. Line pressure is then applied to the clutch, and the CPC pressure is intercepted. Engaging the clutch with line
pressure happens when shifting is completed.
Hydraulic pressure at the ports is as follows:
PORT DESCRIPTION OF PORT DESCRIPTION OF PORT DESCRIPTION OF

NO. PRESSURE NO. PRESSURE NO. PRESSURE
1 LINE 5N CPCAor LINE 56 LSA
2 LINE 5D CPC B or LINE 57 LS B
3 LINE 5G CPC B or LINE 58 LS C
3' LINE 5K CPC B or LINE 90 TORQUE CONVERTER
3" LINE 6 MODULATE 90' TORQUE CONVERTER
4 LINE SA SHA 91 TORQUE CONVERTER
4' LINE SB SH B 91' TORQUE CONVERTER
4" LINE SC SHC 92 TORQUE CONVERTER
4A CPCA LA LCA 93 ATF COOLER
4B CPC B 9 LINE 94 TORQUE CONVERTER
4C CPCC 10 1ST CLUTCH 95 LUBRICATION
5B CPCA 15 1ST-HOLD CLUTCH 95' LUBRICATION
5C CPCB 20 2ND CLUTCH 96 TORQUE CONVERTER
5H CPC B 25 LINE 99 SUCTION
5J CPC B 30 3RDCLUTCH X DRAIN
5A CPC A or LINE 40 4TH CLUTCH HX HIGH POSITION DRAIN
5E CPC A or LINE 50 5TH CLUTCH AX AIR DRAIN
5F CPC A or LINE 51 5TH CLUTCH
5M CPC A or LINE 55 CPC C or LINE
NOTE:
• CPC: Clutch Pressure Control pressure
• SH: Shift Solenoid pressure
• LS A: A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid A pressure
• LS B: AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid B pressure
• LS C: AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid C pressure
• LC: Lock-up Control Solenoid pressure
(cont'd)
BACK
14-265
Protected by AR
[H] Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift solenoid valve and positions of the shift valve
are as follows:
• The shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and the shift valve A is moved to the left side.
• The shift solenoid valve B is turned ON, anc' the shift valve B remains in the right side.
• The shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, an :. the shift valve C remains in the left side.
Line pressure (1) passes through the manual valve and becomes line pressure (25). Line pressure (25) stops at shift
valve D. Line pressure (1) also flows to the modulator valve and becomes modulator pressure (6). Modulator pressure
(6) flows to the sh ift solenoid valves and the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves. Under this condition,
hydraulic pressur:;; IS not applied to the clutches.
2ND ACCUMULATOR
.TlIa.UTCH
14-266 BACK
Protected by AR
~ Position: 1st gear shifting from!Hl position

Shift solenoid valves remain the same as in !Hl position when shifting to ~ position from !Hl position. The manual
valve is moved to ~ position, and switches the port of line pressure (4) leading to shift valve C and CPC valve B. Line
pressure (4) flows to the 1st clutch via the orifice. Line pressure (1) becomes CPC C pressure (4C) at CPC valve C, then
goes to the 1st accumulator back side. Line pressure (4) also becomes the CPC B pressure (4B) at the CPC B valve. The
1st clutch is engaged gently when shifting to ~ position from !Hl position.
,ST-MOLD,.TH 2NO ACCUMut.ATOR
ACCUMut.ATOR
(cont'd)
BACK
14-267
Protected by AR
~ Position: Driving in 1st gear

The PCM turns shift solenoid valves A and C ON, and shift solenoid valve B remains ON. SH A pressure (SA) in the
right side of shift valves A and E is released, and shift valves A and E are moved to the right side. SH C pressure (SC) in
the right side of shift valve C is released, and modulator pressure (6) is applied to the left side of shift valve C. Shift
valve C is moved to the right side. These valve movements release CPC C pressure (4C) from the back of the 1st
accumulator and the 3rd clutch, and the 1st clutch is engaged securely.
1ST-HOlD/4TH
ACCUMULATOR 1ST ACCUMULATOR 1ST/1ST-HOLDCLUTCH JllDCLUTCH 4THCLUTQI
BACK
14-268
Protected by AR
~ Position: Shifting between 1st gear and 2nd gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM controls the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valves. LS 8 pressure (57) in the right side of CPC valve 8 is released, and LS A pressure (56) is applied to the right side
of CPC valve A. Line pressure (4) becomes CPC A pressure (4A) at CPC valve A, and CPC A pressure passes through
shift valves C, A, and 8, to become 2nd clutch pressure. The 2nd clutch is engaged with CPC pressure, and the 1st
clutch is also engaged. No power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
,ST-HOLD/UH 2ND ACCUMULATOR
ACCUMULATOR 1ST ACCUMIAATOR 'ST"ST-HOUIClUTCH 3RDa.UTCH .THCl.UTCH
(cont'd)
BACK
14-269
Protected by AR

~ Position: Driving in 2nd gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and shift solenoid valves A and B remain ON. Shift solenoid valve C is
turned OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of shift valve C. Then shift valve C is moved to the left
side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure. The 2nd clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode,
and the 2nd clutch is engaged securely. The 1st clutch is also engaged. No power is transmitted because of the one-
way clutch. .
14-270 BACK
Protected by AR
~ Position: Shifting between 2nd gear and 3rd gear

As the speed ofthe vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF. The PCM also
controls the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to apply LS B pressure (57) to CPC valve B. Shift solenoid
valve B remains ON, and C remains OFF. Shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and SH A pressure (SA) is applied to the
right side of shift valves A and E. Then shift valves A and E are moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure
and CPC pressure. Line pressure (4) becomes CPC A pressure (4A) at CPC valve A, and becomes CPC B pressure (4B)
at CPC valve B. CPC B pressure (4B) becomes 3rd clutch pressure (30) at shift valve A via shift valves C and B, and
flows to the 3rd clutch. The 2nd clutch pressure is changed to CPC pressure mode by switching the position of shift
valve A. The 1st clutch is also engaged. No power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
1ST-MOLDI'TH 2ND ACCUMULATOR
ACCUMULATOR 'THCLUTCH
(cont'd)
BACK
14-271
Protected by AR
IQ!I Position: Driving in 3rd gear

The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, and controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to release LS A
pressure (56) in CPC valve A. Shift solenoid valve A remains OFF, and 8 remains ON. Releasing LS A pressure (56) in
CPC valve A releases CPC A pressure in the 2nd clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON, and SH C
pressure (SC) in the right side of shift valve C is released. Then shift valve C is moved to the right side to switch the
port of line pressure and CPC pressure. The 3rd clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode, and the 3rd clutch is
engaged securely. The 1st clutch is also engaged. No power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
1ST-HOlD/4TH 2t<mACCUMULATOR
ACCUMULATOR 1ST ACCUMULATOR 1ST/1SHtOI.DCLUTaI 4THCLUTat
14-272 BACK
Protected by AR
~ Position: Shifting between 3rd gear and 4th gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve B OFF. The PCM also
controls the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to apply LS A pressure (56) to CPC valve A. Shift solenoid
valve A remains OFF, and C remains ON . Shift solenoid valve B is turned OFF, and SH B pressure (SB) is applied to the
right side of shift valve B. Then shift valve B is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC
pressure. Line pressure (4) becomes CPC A pressure (4A) at CPC valve A, and becomes CPC B pressure (4B) at CPC
valve B. CPC A pressure (4A) becomes 4th clutch pressure (40) at shift valve D via shift valves C, A, and B, and flows to
the 4th clutch. The 3rd clutch pressure is changed to CPC pressure mode by switching the position of shift valve B. The
1st clutch is also engaged. No power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
1ST ·HOLD/UH
ACCUMULATOR 1ST ACCUMULATOR 1ST/1ST-HOlDCLUTCH 3RDCLUTCH 4THa.UTOI
(cont'd)
BACK
14-273
Protected by AR

The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to release LS B
pressure (57) in CPC valve B. Shift solenoid valves A and B remain OFF. Releasing LS B pressure (57) in CPC valve B
releases CPC B pressure in the 3rd clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and SH C pressure (SC)
is applied to the right side of shift valve C. Then shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure
and CPC pressure. Line pressure (4) from the manual valve becomes 4th clutch pressure (40) at shift valve D via shift
valves C, A, and B, and flows to the 4th clutch. The 4th clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode by switching
the position of shift valve C, and the 4th clutch is engaged securely. The 1st clutch is also engaged. No power is
transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
1ST-HOI.DI"TH
ACCUMULATOR 1ST ACCUMULATOR ISTI1ST-HOI.D Cl.UTCH .THa.lJTOt
14-274 BACK
Protected by AR
lQ!l Position: Shifting between 4th gear and 5th gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A ON. The PCM also
controls the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to apply LS B pressure (57) to CPC valve B.
Shift solenoid valveB and C remain OFF. Shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and SH A pressure (SA) in the right side
of shift valves A and E is released. Ttien shift valves A and E are moved to the left side to switch the port of line
pressure and CPC pressure. Line pressure (4) becomes CPC A pressure (4A) at CPC valve A, and becomes CPC B
pressure (4B) at CPC valve 8. CPC B pressure (48) becomes 5th clutch pressure (50) at shift valve C, and flows to the
5th clutch via shift valves B and A and the manual valve. The 4th clutch pressure is changed to CPC pressure mode by
switching the position of shift valve A. The 1st clutch is also engaged. No power is transmitted because of the one-way
clutch.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-275
Protected by AR

The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, and controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to release LS A
pressure (56) in CPC valve A. Shift solenoid valve A remains ON, and B remains OFF. Releasing LS A pressure (56) in
CPC valve A releases CPC A pressure in the 4th clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON, and SH C
pressure (SC) in the right side of shift valve C is released. Then shift valve C is moved to the right side to switch the
port of line pressure and CPC pressure. Line pressure (4) from the manual valve becomes 5th clutch pressure (50) at
the manual valve, via shift valves C, B, and A, and flows to the 5th clutch. The 5th clutch pressure is changed to line
pressure mode by switching the position of shift valve C. The 5th clutch is engaged securely, and the 1st clutch is also
engaged. No power is transmitted because ofthe one-way clutch.
2ND ACCUMUlATOR
14-276 BACK
Protected by AR
00 Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves and the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions of the
shift solenoid valves and the positions of shift valves are as follows:
• Shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and shift valve A is in the right side.
• Shift solenoid valve B is turned ON, and shift valve B is in the right side.
• Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and shift valve C is in the left side.
The PCM also controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to apply LS A pressure (56) to CPC valve A. Line
pressure (4) from the manual valve becomes 2nd clutch pressure (20) at shift valve B, via shift valves C and A. 2nd
clutch pressure (20) is applied to the 2nd clutch, and the 2nd clutch is engaged. The 1st clutch is also engaged. No
power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
,ST-HOLD/4"1lt 2ND ACCUMULATOR
ACCUMULATOR ,ST ACCUMULATOR ,ST/1ST-HOLDCLUTCH 3RDCLUTCH UHCLUTCH
(cont'd)
BACK
14-277
Protected by AR
rn Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves and the NT clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions of the
shift solenoid valves and the positions of shift valves are as follows:
• Shift solenoid valve A is turned ON, and shift valve A is in the right side.
• Shift solenoid valve 8 is turned ON, and shift valve 8 is in the right side.
• Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON, and shift valve C is moved to the right side by modulator pressure (6).
The PCM also controls NT clutch pressure control solenoid valve 8 to apply LS 8 pressure (57) to CPC valve B. Line
pressure (4) from the manual valve becomes 1st clutch pressure (10) at shift valve C. 1st clutch pressure (10) is applied
to the 1st clutch , and the 1st clutch is engaged. Line pressure (4) also flows to CPC valve 8, and becomes CPC B
pressure (4B). CPC 8 pressure (48) becomes 1st-hold clutch pressure (15) at shift valve D, via shift valves C, 8, and A.
1st-hold clutch pressure (15) is applied to the 1st-hold clutch, and the 1st-hold clutch is engaged.
2ND ACCUMULATOR
BACK
14-278
Protected by AR
IRl Position: Shifting to IRl position from [!] or [H] position

Line pressure (1) becomes line pressure (3) at the manual valve, and flows to the reverse CPC valve. Line pressure (3)
is regulated by the reverse CPC valve and becomes line pressure (3'). Line pressure (3') pushes the servo valve to the
reverse position, passes through the servo valve, and flows to the manual valve. Line pressure (3") becomes 5th
clutch pressure (50). The 5th clutch pressure (50) is applied to the 5th clutch, and 5th clutch is engaged with the
reverse CPC pressure mode.
,ST-HOUl"TH 2ND ACCUM\JlATOII
ACCUMUlATOR ,ST/1ST-HOlDa.un:tt 4THa.1J'T'Of
(cont'd)
BACK
14-279
Protected by AR
1ft] Position: Driving in reverse gear

The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF. Shift solenoid valve A remains OFF and B remains ON. Shift solenoid valve
C is turned OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of the reverse CPC valve. Then the reverse CPC
valve moves to the left side, creating full line pressure. Line pressure to the 5th clutch is the same as when shifting to
1ft] position, and 5th clutch pressure increases. The 5th clutch is engaged with line pressure mode.
Reverse Inhibitor Control

When the!RJ position is selected while the vehicle is moving forward at speeds over 6 mph (10 km/h), the PCM outputs
to turn shift solenoid valves A and C ON; and shift solenoid valve B remains ON. The reverse CPC valve is moved to
right side and covers the port to stop the line pressure (3') to the servo valve. The line pressure (3') is not applied to the
servo valve, and the 5th clutch pressure (50) is not applied to the 4th clutch. As a reSUlt, power is not transmitted to the
reverse position.
1ST-HOlIII4TH 2ND ACCUMULATOR
~LATOR 1ST ACCUMUlATOR IST/lST-HOlIIQ.UTCH .THCWTCH
14-280 BACK
Protected by AR
[f] Position
Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF by the PCM, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of the reverse CPC
valve. Then the reverse CPC valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port leading line pressure (3) to the servo
valve. Line pressure (3') passes through the servo valve and flows to the manual valve. Line pressure (3") is
intercepted at the manual valve, and is not applied to the clutches.
2ND ACCUMULAtoR
(cont'd)
BACK
14-281
Protected by AR
Lock-up System
The lock-up mechanism of the torque converter clutch operates in the ~ position (3rd, 4th, and 5th), in ~ position (3rd
and 4th), and ~ position (3rd). The pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter through a fluid
passage, causing the torque converter clutch piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place,
the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together with the hydraulic control, the PCM
optimizes the timing and amount of the lock-up mechanism. When torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned on
by the PCM, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve pressure switches the lock-up shift valve lock-up on and off.
The AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and the lock-up control valve control the amount of lock-Up.
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up ON (Engaging Torque Converter Clutch)

Fluid in the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston is drained off, and
fluid entered from the chamber between the pump and stator exerts pressure through the torque converter clutch
piston against the torque converter cover. The torque converter clutch piston engages with the torque converter cover;
torque converter clutch lock-up ON, and the mainshaft rotates at the same as the engine.
I Power flow I TORQUE CONVERTER

CLUTCH PISTON
DAMPER SPRING
The power flows by way of:
TURBINE
Engine
1
Drive plate
1 TORQUE CONVERTER
Torque converter cover COVER
1
Torque converter clutch piston
~
Damper spring
1
Turbine
~
Mainshaft
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up OFF (Disengaging Torque Converter Clutch)

Fluid entered from the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston passes
through the torque converter and goes out from the chambers between the turbine and the stator, and between the
pump and the stator. As a result, the torque converter clutch piston moves away from the torque converter cover, and
the torque converter clutch lock-up is released; torque converter clutch lock-up OFF.
I Power flow I TURBINE
Engine
1
Drive plate
~
Torque converter cover
1
Pump
1
Turbine
1
Mainshaft
MAINSHAFT
14-282 BACK
Protected by AR
No Lock-up
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned OFF by the PCM. The lock-up shift valve receives LC pressure (LA)
on the left side, and modulator pressure (6) on the right side. The lock-up shift valve is in the right side to uncover the
port leading torque converter pressure (92) to the left side of the torque converter. Torque converter pressure (92)
becomes torque converter pressure (94), and enters into the left side of the torque converter to disengage the lock-up
clutch. The lock-up clutch is OFF.
TOIIQUE COHVEIITER
a.UTCH SOUNOtO
VALVE
(cont'd)
BACK 14-283
Protected by AR
Lock-up System (cont'd)
Partial Lock-up
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned ON by
the PCM to release LC pressure (LA) in the left cavity of the lock-up shift valve. Modulator pressure (6) is applied to the
right side of the lock-up shift valve, then the lock-up shift valve is moved in the left side to switch the port leading
torque converter pressure to the right side of the torque converter. Torque converter pressure (91) is applied to the
right side of the torque converter to engage the lock-up clutch. The PCM also controls AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve C, and LS C pressure (58) is applied to the lock-up control valve and the lock-up timing valve. When LS
C pressure (58) is lower, torque converter pressure (91) from the lock-up timing valve is lower. The lock-up clutch is
engaged partially. LS C pressure (58) increases, and the lock-up timing valve is moved to the left side to uncover the
port leading torque converter pressure to high. The lock-up clutch is then engaged securely. Under this condition, the
lock-up clutch is engaged by pressure from the right side of the torque converter; this lock-up condition is partial lock-
up.
TOIIQUE CONV£RT!R
CLUTCH SOUNOID
VALVE
14-284
BACK
Protected by AR
Full Lock-up
When the vehicle speed further increases, the PCM controls NT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C to increase
LS C pressure (58). The LS C pressure (58) is applied to the lock-up control valve and the lock-up timing valve, and
moves them to the left side. Under this condition, torque converter back pressure (F2) is released fully, causing the
lock-up clutch to be fully engaged.
TOIIQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCIi SOlENOtD
VALVE
(cont'd)
BACK
14-285
Protected by AR
Shift Lever/Sequential Sportshift Mode Mechanism

The shift lever has nine positions: [f], [R], [H], ~, ~, ~, 00, 00 positions, and the sequential sportshift mode position.
The shift lever shifts between positions along the gate in the NT gear position indicator panel. The shift lever can shift
out of the [f] position and into the lID position without pressing the shift lever. The shift lock/reverse lock mechanism is
an additional shift lever lockout mechanism.
The shift lever is engaged with the shift cable bracket in [f], [R], [H], ~, ~, R!l, 00, and 00. This unit shifts the transmission
using the shift cable connected between the shift cable bracket and the transmission control shaft.
In the sequential sportshift mode position, the shift lever is disengaged from the cable bracket, and the shift lever can
be used to shift gears electronically between 1st through 5th, much like a manual transmission.
SHIFT CABLE
I
AfT GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
TRANSMISSION
SELECTION
GE~
SWITC~AR ~
1ST-HOLD SWITCH
LOCK LEVER
REVERSE LOCK STOP
BACK
14-286
Protected by AR
When the shift lever shifts to the sequential sportshift mode position, the lock lever is released, and it pops up to
engage the shift cable bracket to the detent bracket; the shift cable bracket and the shifting positions in the
transmission are held in the ~ position.
The lock lever receives its spring load, pops up in the sequential sportshift mode position, and is pressed by the shift
lever and does not engage the shift cable bracket to the shift lever base bracket in any position except sequential
sportshift mode.
SHIFT LEVER
TRANSMISSION G~ SHIFT CABLE BRACKET
SELECTION SWITCH
~
~
.~ ___
/_J?C""'=
/
The shift lever fits into the sequential sportshift mode position by using a detent plunger with a spring. When shifting
up or down, the detent plunger is pressed by the detent bracket inner wall, and the detent plunger spring puts the shift
lever back into the neutral position. The detent plunger also works in the [fJ position.
MODE POSITION
DOWNSHIFT POSITION
SHIFT LEVER
/
DETENT BRACKET
INNER WALL
TRANSMISSION GEAR
SELECTION SWITCH
(cont'd)
BACK
14-287
Protected by AR
System Description (cont'ct)
Shift Lock/Reverse Lock Mechanism

The shift lock system reduces the risk of unintentional engine starting. Starting the engine is possible only in the (f]
and [NJ positions. The shift lock system and the key interlock system make up the interlock control system. The key
interlock mechanism is located in the steering lock assembly.
The shift lock mechanism consists of the shift lock solenoid, shift lock stop, shift lock release, and related parts. The
reverse lock mechanism shares the shift lock solenoid with the shift lock mechanism. The reverse lock stop and the
shift lock stop are interlocked with the shift lock solenoid operation. The shift lock solenoid is electronically controlled
by these shift lock control system signals: brake pedal position switch signal, interlock control signal, and
transmission range switch [f] position signal. If the shift lock solenoid does not operate, the shift lock/reverse lock
mechanism can be released by depressing the shift lock release.
In the [f] position while pressing the brake pedal, the shift lock solenoid is turned ON, and the shift lock solenoid
plunger is retracted to release the shift lock stop. This allows the shift lever to be moved.
__
....o - - - - - - - - -:SHIFT LEVER
When the brake pedal is released, the shift lock solenoid remains OFF, and the shift lock stop locks to block the shift
lever in the [f] position.
__- - - - - - - - - ; S H I F T LEVER
_ _ _ _ _ _ SHIFT LOCK STOP
L
ti,
14-288 BACK
Protected by AR
When the shift lever is shifted to the [RJ position from the ~ position and the [H] position (under certain conditions), the
shift lock solenoid is turned ON, and the shift lock solenoid plunger is retracted to release the reverse lock stop. This
allows the shift lever to be moved to the [RJ position.
lID POSITION
REVERSE LOCK STOP
If the allowable conditions of turning ON the solenoid are not met, the shift lock solenoid remains OFF, and the reverse
lock stop locks to block the shift lever in the [H] position.
SHIFT LEVER
REVERSE LOCK STOP
(cont'd)
BACK 14-289
Protected by AR
Circuit Diagram
INlER-HOOO FIJS(J1I8AY lOX

IAmRY
, No.4712M1
~ I .."mn""""",, -------,...-~ WllTIlED -
,'!
:
'k
WIIT/YEL
NoJn.5AJ YWIUl - - - - - ,
o'CI ~
~
No.l'1SA1
No.1 "SAl
IR'IBrS
UNlEft-DASH
No.54'*1 I No.41'1SA1 RlSEIlELAYIOX
PASSlNGB!'S
UMlER--DASH ABSntS
FUSEJlJELAYIOX UIIT
IEDIGRN PM(
WIIT/IIED YWIUl Yn,IIIIJ: \IUt ItJ(

'f
LTORN
'T T'
IEDIG1W
I I
PM(
121 11 BIJ 12 1110 G,O, !17 1A22 Al

VlU 1GI'1 IGPZ PGl I PG2 ATSfTI' I SEAf SEFA
TaSY
TolZY
-.J
POWERTRAIN CONOOL MOOULE I'CMI
I ~ ;;.
LBl os AlP
A 1M) NP
AS A'4 DRIVER'S 1,4
UMlER-DASH
-~_i_1
BLU/BU( [ ILUjDllYBl'S BLU/WHT IRN
ILUIGIIN UNDER-DASH BLU 11LU/WHT
I\ISEIIELAY
lOX • IELAY
No.ln.5AJ cz GAUGE ASSEr.tILY MULlI'lU
, ff~
Y
va
I
PRlYER'S1
AI
LJ ""' --.. r
-1-
_A"_ _ PI« - - l
~ ILU - - l
!!L-_
va--l va--l
PI« - - l
BLU - - l
4
LTILU
-{>~
•
1
SIIFT
LOCl
IlSAY
1ST-·oUD
SWlTCt.
,POSITION
-----1
C1t 10
• • , • • • , , •
..ruT TIT T T
TIT . 1
.or
RED IRN
ILl( I
[WIlT [ va ILU I G,.,
GRY I I -
. ST A
O.
_ _ SWITCH
050,
14-290 BACK
Protected by AR
COUNmlSHAFT
SPEEO SfNSOR
MAlNFOlD AIISOLUlt
PRESSURf SENSOR
MAlNSHAFT
SPEID SENSOR
THROTlI.E
POS/I1ON SENSOR
-
COOLANT
19!f'ERATURf
SENSOR
ATF
it_TURf
SENSOR
rQ,
, , , , ,
lhh
, , , , , , ,r-;r-
~ GIIN 8lU
!
~~
'I 'I 'I 'I 'I 'I 'I 'I 'I
~
• GAUGE
I _
4m~N
_
RED~~
DASHUGHT VElJIIlD
8lU
GRN
GIINIIIED
GIIN/WHT YEUBLU
RED GIIN/YEI.
REDIBLK RED/WIfT 8LU/YEL
ASS£r.IILY - BRIGHTNESS
• PCM 640' G50, E" E'I E20 CONTROU£R t19 0'0 0,6 C7 cn C2I 011 012 CZI C'I el4
s- s- s- vee, NC NCSG SG, MAPIP1II VCCZ NM NMSG 1?S SG2 ECT TATF
lI' ON MODE
~~
LSC- !.Sct SMA SMa SMe LC LGZ

II 811 811 825 12. 811 01 Dl 01 122
4TH
CLUTCH
PRESSURE
SWITCH
GIS' GIS' G101
til lSI mi. '0

12 '4 tit ,.tlJI
AI3ZI'I IIZ5PI
til'" D'MP'
BACK
14-291
Protected by AR
OTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0710: A Problem in ATF Temperature 4. Turn the ignition ON (II).

Sensor Circuit
NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General the ATF temperature sensor connector and body
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-219) before ground.
you troubleshoot.
ATF TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Check whether the OBD II scan tool indicates a
code for the fuel and emissions system.
Does the aBO /I scan tool indicate a code for the

fuel and emissions system?
YES - Perform the troubleshooting flowchart for

the fuel and emissions system code. Recheck for
code P0710 after troubleshooting .•
NO - Go to step 2.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the ATF
temperature sensor harness. Is there about 5 V?
3. Measure ATF temperature sensor resistance at the YES-Go to step 6.

sensor connector.
NO-Go to step 7.
ATF TEMPERATURE
SENSOR CONNECTOR
6. Measure the voltage between the No.1 and No.2
terminals of the ATF temperature sensor connector.
ATFTEMPERATURE
SENSOR CONNECTOR
Is the resistance 50 Q - 2 .5 k Q ?
NO-Replace the ATF temperature sensor.. Is there about 5 V?
YES-Check for loose terminal fit atthe PCM

connectors C24, C18 and at the ATF Temperature
sensor. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM
and recheck. If the DTC recurs, substitute a known-
good ATF temperature sensor.•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the C18

terminal and the ATF temperature sensor.•
14-292 BACK
Protected by AR
7. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
9. Disconnect PCM connector C (31 Pl.
=
Is there about 5 V?
=
VES- Repair open in the wire between PCM Wire side of female terminals
connector terminal C24 and the ATF temperature
sensor.• Is there continuity?
NO - Go to step 8. VES- Repair short to ground in the wire between

PCM connector terminal C24 and the ATF
temperature sensor..

connectors C24 and C18. If necessary, substitute a
known-good PCM or ATF temperature sensor and
recheck .•
BACK
14-293
Protected by AR
OTC P0715: A Problem in Mainshaft Speed 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Sensor Circuit
8. Disconnect the PCM connector D (16P).
NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-219) before 9. Check for continuity between the No.2 terminal of
you troubleshoot. the mainshaft speed sensor connector and body
ground.
Code P0715 (15) doesn't always mean there's an
MAINSHAFT SPEED
electrical problem in the mainshaft or countershaft SENSOR CONNECTOR
speed sensor circuit; code P0715 (15) may also indicate
a mechanical problem in the transmission. Any
problem causing irregular countershaft-to-mainshaft
speed difference can cause this code.
2. Check whether the OBO II scan tool indicates the

code for the throttle position (TP) sensor or the
-=
engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor.
Does the aBO /I scan tool indicate the code for the Is there continuity?
TP sensor or the ECT sensor?
YES- Perform the troubleshooting flowchart for PCM connector terminal D11 and the mainshaft
the TP sensor (see page 11-104) or the ECT sensor speed sensor connector..
(see page 11-101). Recheck for code P0715 after
troubleshooting .• NO-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 3. 10. Reconnect the PCM connector D (16P).
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Check for continuity between the No.3 terminal of
the mainshaft speed sensor connector and body
4. Disconnect the mainshaft speed sensor connector. ground.
MAINSHAFT SPEED
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). SENSOR CONNECTOR

the mainshaft speed sensor connector and body
ground.
MAINSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR CONNECTOR
-=
YES-Go to step 12.

Wi,e side of female terminals

Is there about 5 V? connector terminal 012 and the mainshaft speed
sensor.•
YES-Goto step 7.
NO-Go to step 15.
14-294 BACK
Protected by AR
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 15. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
13. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 and No.3
PCM CONNECTOR c (3tP)
terminals of the mainshaft speed sensor connector.
MAINS HAFT SPEED
SENSOR CONNECTOR
=
Is there 4.75-5.25 V?
Wire side of female terminals YES - Repair open in the wire between PCM
connector terminal C28 and the mainshaft speed
Is there about 5 V? sensor .•
YES- Go to step 21. NO-Go to step 16.
NO-Goto step 14. 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
14. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 17. Disconnect PCM connector C (31P).
PCM CONNECTOR 0 (16P) terminal C28 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR C (3tP)
1 234
6
13141516
NM (RED) NMSG(WHT)
=
Is there about 5 V? Is there continuity?
YES-Repair open in the wire between PCM YES- Repair short to ground in the wire between
connector terminal 011 and the mainshaft speed PCM connector terminal C28 and the mainshaft
sensor.• speed sensor.•
NO- Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM NO-Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
connectors 011, 012 and C28.lf necessary, connectors 011, 012 and C28. lf necessary,
substitute a known-good PCM and recheck .• substitute a known-good PCM and recheck .•
(cont'd)
BACK
14-295
Protected by AR
19. Connect the mainshaft speed sensor connector. 21. Start the engine, and run it at idle in the [f] position.
20. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 22. Hold the engine at idle, and measure the voltage
terminals 011 and 012. between PCM connector terminals 011 and 012.
PCM CONNECTOR D (16P) PCM CONNECTOR D (16P)
1 234 5 1 234 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16
NM(RED) NMSG(WHT) NM (RED) NMSG(WHT)
Is there about 5 V or 0 V? /5 there 1.5-3.5 V?
YES-Go to step 21. YES - Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
connectors 011, 012 and C28. If necessary,
NO- Replace the mainshaft speed sensor.• substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.•
NO - Replace the mainshaft speed sensor .•
14-296 BACK
Protected by AR
OTe P0720: A Problem in Countershaft Speed 8. Disconnect PCM connector 0 (16P).

Sensor Circuit
NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General the countershaft speed sensor connector and body
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-219) before ground.
you troubleshoot.
COUNTERSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR CONNECTOR
2. Check whether the OBD " scan tool indicates the

code for the manifold absolute pressure (MAP)
sensor.
Does the OaD 1/ scan tool indicate the code for the
MAP sensor?
YES- Perform the troubleshooting flowchart for

the MAP sensor (see page 11-96). Recheck for code
P0720 after troubleshooting .•
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. PCM connector terminal 010 and the countershaft
speed sensor. •
4. Disconnect the countershaft speed sensor
connector. NO-Go to step 10.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 10. Reconnect PCM connector 0 (16P).
6. Measure-the voltage between the No.1 terminal of 11. Check for continuity between the No.3 terminal of
the countershaft speed sensor connector and body the countershaft speed sensor connector and body
ground. ground.
COUNTERSHAFT SPEED COUNTERSHAFT SPEED

SENSOR CONNECTOR SENSOR CONNECTOR
= Wire side of female terminals

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO- Repair open in the wire between PCM
NO-Go to step 15. connector terminal 016 and the countershaft speed
sensor.•
(cont'd)
BACK
14-297
Protected by AR
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 15. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
terminals of the countershaft speed sensor PCM CONNECTOR C (31 PI
connector.
COUNTERSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR CONNECTOR
Is there 4.75-5.25 V?
Is there about 5 V? connector terminal C1 9 and the countershaft speed
sensor connector .•
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 14. connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
PCM CONNECTOR D (16PI
NC(BLUI
.-- r--
1 2 3 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ~
1314 15 16
NCSG (GRNI
Is there about 5 V?

connector terminal 010 and the countershaft speed
sensor.•

substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.•
BACK
14-298
Protected by AR
16. Connect the countershaft speed sensor connector. 18. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is
securely supported.
terminals 010 and 016. 19. Set the parking brake, and block both rear wheels
securely.
PCM CONNECTOR D 116P1
20. Start the engine, then shift to the ~ position and
NC(BLUI drive the vehicle.
r-
1 2 3 5
- 21 . Measure the voltage between PCM connector
6 7 8 9 1o 11 12 'Y.
PCM CONNECTOR D 116PI
13 14 15 16
T NC IBLUI
NCSG IGRNI
;-- r-
Wire side of female terminals 1 2 3 5
6 7 8 91 o 11 12 'Y.
Is there about 5 V or 0 V?
13 14 15 16
YES-Go to step 18. T
NCSG IGRNI
NO- Replace the countershaft speed sensor.•
Is there 1.5-3.5 V?

substitute a known-good PCM and recheck .•
NO - Replace the countershaft speed sensor.•
BACK
14-299
Protected by AR
DTC P0730: Problem in Shift Control System 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and resetthe PCM
NOTE: passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box for more
• Record all freeze data and review General than 10 seconds.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-219)
before you troubleshoot . 7. Calibrate the engine idle control system in the pcm
• Keep these replacement solenoid valves on hand: (see page 11-158), and drive the vehicle at a speed
- Shift solenoid valves A, B, and C over 12 mph (20 km/h) in 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th
- AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B gear in the ~ position for more than 30 seconds.
1. Check whether the OBO " scan tool indicates 8. Recheck for code P0730.
another code.
Does the OBO 1/ scan tool indicate code P0730?
Does the OBO 1/ scan tool indicate another code?
YES- Replace the transmission .•
the indicated code(s). Recheck for code P0730 after NO- The system is OK at this time .•
NO - Go to step 2.

corrected.
2. Measure the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch

pressure (see page 14-338).
Is each clutch pressure within the service limit?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO- Repair the hydraulic system as necessary.•
3. Replace the shift solenoid valve B (see page 14-

341).
4. Replace the shift solenoid valves A and C (see page

14-342).
5. Replace the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid

valves A and B (see page 14-344).
BACK
14-300
Protected by AR
OTe P0740: Problem in Lock-up Control 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and reset the PCM
System memory by removing the BACK UP fuse in the
NOTE: than 10 seconds .
• Record all freeze data and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-219) 6. Using the scan tool, check to be sure that the
before you troubleshoot. engine coolant temperature is 176°F (80°C) or
• Keep these replacement solenoid valves on hand: above.
- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
- AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C 7. Calibrate the engine idle control system in the PCM
(see page 11-158), and drive the vehicle at 55 mph
1. Check whether the OBO II scan tool indicates (88 km/h) for more than one minute.
another code.
8. Recheck for code P0740.
Does the aBO /I scan tool indicate another code?
Does the aBO /I scan tool indicate code P0740?
the indicated code(s). Recheck for code P0740 after YES-Replace the transmission and torque
troubleshooting .• converter..
NO-Go to step 2. NO - The system is OK at this time .•

corrected.
2. Measure the line pressure (see page 14-338).
Is the line pressure within the service limit?
YES - Go to step 3.
NO- Repair the hydraulic system as necessary (see

page 14-338) .•
3. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve

(see page 14-340).

valve C (see page 14-346).
BACK
14-301
Protected by AR
DTC P0743: Premium 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

DTC P1753: Type S
Problem in Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid 6. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
Valve Circuit terminals 01 and B20 or B22.
PCM CONNECTORS
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-219) before
you troubleshoot. (0.) I rl_L_C_(Y_EL...:...)- - -
B (25P) D(16P)
2T3T4 5
2. Disconnect PCM connectors B (25P) and 0 (16P). 71819\10111112
16
3. Tjrn the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Measure the voltage between PCM connector LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2 (BRN/YEL)
terminals 01 and B20 or B22.
PCM CONNECTORS
/s the resistance 12-25Q ?
r~) LC(YEL)
I rl- - - - . : . . - - -
B(25P) D(16P) YES- Go to step 11.
2~ NO-Go to step 7.
16 7. Check for continuity between PCM connector

terminal B20 and body ground, and between B22
and body ground.
LG1 ;BRN/YEL) LG2 (BRN/YEL)
/s there voltage?

PCM connector terminal 01 and the torque
converter clutch solenoid valve .•
NO-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 8.

connector terminals 820, 822 and ground (G101).
Repair poor ground (G101 ).•
BACK
14-302
Protected by AR
8. Oisconnect the 2P connector from the torque 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) .
converter clutch solenoid valve.
9. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminals 05 and 820 or 822.
PCM CONNECTORS
PCM CONNECTORS
VB SOL (BLK/YEl)
LC (YEl) ~------{')L
B(25PI D(16PI
B (25P) D (16P) ~;::::::!
5
234 5 9 1011 12
7 8 9 1011 12 16
16
'--------<')L}-------l
lG1 (BRN/YEl) lG2 (BRN/YEll
lG1 (BRN/YEl) lG2 (BRN/YEl)
YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between connectors 05 and 01. If necessary, substitute a
PCM connector terminal 01 and the torque known-good PCM and recheck .•
converter clutch solenoid valve .•
NO-Check for blown No.6 (1SA) fuse in the
10. Measure torque converter clutch solenoid valve terminal 05 and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
resistance at the solenoid valve connector. box.•
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID

VALVE CONNECTOR
Is the resistance 12-25Q ?

connector terminal 01 and the torque converter
clutch solenoid valve, and between the No.1
terminal of the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve connector and ground (G151).•
NO - Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid

valve .•
BACK
14-303
Protected by AR
OlC P0748: Premium 3. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (25P).

OlC P1768: Type S
Problem in AfT Clutch Pressure Control 4. Check for continuity between body ground and
Solenoid Valve A Circuit PCM connector terminals 88 and 817 individually.

Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-219) before LSA-(WHT)
---,
you troubleshoot.
1 12
pressure control solenoid valve A.
19120

SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR
=

PCM connector terminals 88, 817 and AIT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A..
NO-Go to step 5.
Terminal side of male terminals 5. Connect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A connector.
YES - Go to step 3. terminals 88 and 817.
NO- Replace the AfT clutch pressure control PCM CONNECTOR B (25P)
solenoid valves A and 8 .• LSA-(WHT)
I
1 12
19120
n
LSA+ (RED)
YES-Go to step 7.

between PCM connector terminals 88, 817 and AIT
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A..
BACK
14-304
Protected by AR
7. Disconnect PCM connector D (16P).

terminals D5 and B20 or 822.
PCM CONNECTORS
VB SOL (BLK/VEL)
.-----------i'Y..
B (25P) D (16P)
2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 1011 12
131415 16
' - - - - - - - - i 'Y.. }--------'

LG1 (BRN/VEL) LG2 (BRN/VEL)
YES-Check for loose terminal fit in PCM

connectors 88, B17 and D5. If necessary, substitute
a known-good PCM and recheck .•
NO-Check for blown No.6 (15A) fuse in the

driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuse is OK,
terminals D5 and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box, and between B20, B22 and ground (G101) .•
BACK
14-305
Protected by AR
DTe P0753: Problem in Shift Solenoid Valve 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
A Circuit
NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General terminals 07 and 820 or 822.
PCM CONNECTORS
you troubleshoot.
(0) SH ~I{BLU/VELI
B{25P) o (16P)
2. Disconnect PCM connectors 8 (25P) and D (16P). 2T3l4 5

LG1 (BRN/VEL) LG2 IBRN/VEL)
PCM CONNECTORS
r------J('Y.,) SH ~I{BLU/VEL)
B{25P) o 116P)
-,---,--
5
YES-Go to step 11.
131415 16 NO-Go to step 7.
'--------l('Y..ll------' 7. Check for continuity between PCM connector

LG1 (BRN/VEL) LG2 (BRN/VEL) terminal 820 and body ground, and between 822
and body ground.
Is there voltage?
YES - Repair short to power in the wire between 112

PCM connector terminal D7 and the shift solenoid
valve A..
LG1 (BRN/VEL)
NO - Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 8.

Repair poor ground (G101) ...
14-306
BACK
Protected by AR
8. Disconnect the 2P connector from shift solenoid 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
valveA.
9. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminals D5 and 820 or 822.
PCM CONNECTORS
PCM CONNECTORS
VB SOL (BLK/VElI
r--_~_ _-{Q}--_ _ _S_H....,A (BLU/VELI r-------------{Y..
B (25PI D(16PI
B(25PI D (16PI r=;::::;;::::::J
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 1011 12
6 7 8 91011 12
131415 16
131415 16
~-----4y"}------~
~~----~Qr-------~ LG1 (BRN/VELI LG2 (BRN/VELI
LG1 (BRN/VELI LG2(BRN/VELI
YES-Repair short to ground in the wire between connectors D5 and D7.lf necessary, substitute a
PCM connector terminal D7 and shift solenoid known-good PCM and recheck .•
valve A .•
NO-Go to step 10. driver'S under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
10. Measure shift solenoid valve A resistance at the termina l D5 and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
solenoid valve connector. box.•
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR
/s the resistance 12- 25 Q ?

connector terminal D7 and shift solenoid valve A,
and between the No.1 terminal of the shift
solenoid valve A connector and ground (G151) .•
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve A..
BACK
14-307
Protected by AR
DTC P0758: Problem in Shift Solenoid Valve 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
8 Circuit
PCM CONNECTORS
you troubleshoot.
SH B (GRN/WHT)
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Q)
B(25P) D(16P)
2. Disconnect PCM connectors 8 (25P) and 0 (16P). 5

13 14 15 16
terminals 02 and 820 or 822. ~------~(Ql~------~
LG1 (BRN/YEl) LG2 (BRN/YEL)
PCM CONNECTORS
,--_ _ _ _------I(~) SH B (GRN/WHT) Wire side of female terminals
B(25P) D(16P) II
Iii I
1 2 3 4 15
67891011112
1131415 16 NO-Go to step 7.
'-----------1(~)r------J 7. Check for continuity between PCM connector

LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2 (BRN/YEL) terminal 820 and body ground, and between 822
and body ground.
Is there voltage?
YES - Repair short to power in the wire between 1 12

PCM connector terminal 02 and the shift solenoid
valve 8 .•
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
NO- Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 8.

connector terminals 820, 822 and ground (G 101).
Repair poor ground (G101) .•
14-308 BACK
Protected by AR
valve B.
PCM CONNECTORS
PCM CONNECTORS
VB SOL (BLK/YEL)
SH B (GRN/WHT) '::.f.
Q B (25P) D(16P)
B(25P) D (16P)
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
6 7 8 9 10 11
13 14 15 16
13 14 15 16
'--------<'::.f. )---------'
'--------;Q}-------' LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2 (BRN/YEL)
LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2 (BRN/YEL)
YES- Repair short to ground in the wire between connectors D5 and D2. If necessary, substitute a
PCM connector terminal D2 and shift solenoid known-good PCM and recheck.•
valve B.•
NO-Gotostep 10. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
10. Measure shift solenoid valve B resistance at the terminal D5 and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
solenoid valve connector. box.•
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR

connector terminal D2 and the shift solenoid valve
B, and between the No.1 terminal ofthe shift
solenoid valve B connector and ground (G151) .•
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve B.•
BACK
14-309
Protected by AR
DTC P0763: Problem in Shift Solenoid Valve 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
C Circuit
you troubleshoot. PCM CONNECTORS
SHC(GRNI
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. ~------,(a ---, ----,
.-,
B(25PI
2. Disconnect PCM connectors 8 (25P) and 0 (16P).

13J1 4 11 5
terminals 03 and 820 or 822. ~-------4(alr------~
LG1 (BRN/YELI LG2 (BRN/YELI
PCM CONNECTORS
SHC(GRNI Wire side of female terminals
.--------{(~ ------, 1 . - - - - ;
B(25PI D (16PI
1 2 3 4 15
YES- Go to step 11 .
67891011112
13141516 NO-Go to step 7.
~--------~(~)~------~ 7. Check for continuity between PCM connector

LG1 (BRN/YELI LG2 (BRN/YELI terminal 820 and body ground, and between 822
and body ground.
Is there voltage?

PCM connector terminal 03 and shift solenoid
valve C.•
NO-Go to step 5.
YES - Go to step 8.

connectorterminals 820, 822 and ground (G101).
BACK
14-310
Protected by AR
valve C.
PCM CONNECTORS
PCM CONNECTORS
VB SOL (BLK/YEL)
SHCIGRN) Y..
B125P)
Q
D 116P)
B(25P)
,rz
o (16P)
r-
J[
2 3 4 5
3 4 5 6 7 8J 1 2 3 4 5
9 10 1112 314 15/ 17 181 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 19 20 2122 ~2-425
13 14 15 16
-T ~T
~-- 13 14 15 16
Y..
-
'---------iQl--------' LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2 (BRN/YEL)
Wire side of fema le terminals
YES- Repair short to ground in the wire between connectors D5 and D3. If necessary, substitute a
PCM connector terminal D3 and shift solenoid known-good PCM and recheck .•
valve C.•
NO- Go to step 10. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
10. Measure shift solenoid valve C resistance at the terminal D5 and the driver'S under-dash fuse/relay
solenoid valve connector. box . •
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C CONNECTOR

connector terminal D3 and shift solenoid valve C,
and between the No.1 terminal of the shift
solenoid valve C connector and ground (G151) .•
NO- Replace shift solenoid valve C.•
BACK
14-311
Protected by AR
DTC P0778: Premium 3. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (25P).

DTC P1773:Type S
Problem in AfT Clutch Pressure Control 4. Check for continuity between body ground and
Solenoid Valve B Circuit PCM connector terminals 818 and 825 individually.
NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General PCM CONNECTOR B (25PI
you troubleshoot.

pressure control solenoid valve 8.


SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR

PCM connector terminals 818, 825 and AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve 8 .•
NO - Go to step 5.
valve 8 connector.
YES-Go to step 3. terminals 818 and 825.
NO-Replace the AfT clutch pressure control PCM CONNECTOR B (25PI

solenoid valves A and 8 .•
1I2
19120
LS B + (BRN/WHTI
Is the resistance about 5 Q?
YES-Go to step 7.

between PCM connector terminals 818, 825 and
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve 8 .•
14-312 BACK
Protected by AR
7. Disconnect PCM connector 0 (16P).

PCM CONNECTORS
VB SOL (BLK/YEL)
.----------{':i.I----------,
B(25P) D (16P)
~rl
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 1011 12
131415 16
'--------<':i.I--------J

connectors 818, 825 and 05. If necessary,

driver'S under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
terminals 05 and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box, and between 820, 822 and ground (G101) .•
BACK
14-313
Protected by AR
DTC P0780: Mechanical Problem in Hydraulic

Control System of Shift Solenoid Valve A and
AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves
A and 8 or Problem in Hydraulic Control
f
System
NOTE:
before you troubleshoot .
• Keep these replacement solenoid valves on hand:
- Shift solenoid valve A
1. Check whether the OBD II scan tool indicates

another code.
Does the OBD 1/ scan tool indicate another code?

the indicated code(s). Recheck for code P0780 after
NO - Go to step 2.
3. Replace the shift solenoid valve A (see page 14-

342).

5. Reset the PCM memory by removing the BACK UP

fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
for more than 10 seconds.
6. Calibrate the engine control system in the PCM (see

page 11-158), and drive the vehicle for several
minutes in 1st, 2nG, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears in the IPil
position.
Does the OBD 1/ scan tool indicate code P0780?
YE.S - Replace the transmission .•
NO-The problem has been corrected .•
14-314 BACK
Protected by AR
DTC P0798: Premium 3. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (25P).

DTC P1778:Type S
Problem in A/T Clutch Pressure Control 4. Check for continuity between body ground and
Solenoid Valve C Circuit PCM connector terminals 813 and 824 individually.
NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General PCM CONNECTOR B (25P)
you troubleshoot.

pressure control solenoid valve C.


SOLENOID VALVE C CONNECTOR

PCM connector terminals 813, 824 and AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve C.•
NO-Go to step 5.
valve C connector.
YES-Go to step 3. terminals 813 and 824.
NO- Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid PCM CONNECTOR B (25P)
valve C.•
YES- Go to step 7.

between PCM connector terminals 813, 824 and
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C.•
(cont'd)
BACK
14-315
Protected by AR
7. Disconnect PCM connector 0 (16P).

PCM CONNECTORS
.) VB SOL (BlK/YEll
.----------I(~~.- - - - - - - ,
B(25PI D(16PI
::::;:::::!
f = 1: ; : ,
1 2 3 4 I5
6 7 8 91011112
131415 16
'-------i(~)~-----'
lG1 (BRN/YEll lG2 (BRN/YEll


connectors 813, 824 and 05. If necessary,

terminals 05 and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box, and between 820,822 and ground (G101) .•
BACK
14-316
Protected by AR
OTC P0845: Premium 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

OTC P1739: Type S
Problem in 3rd Clutch Pressure Switch Circuit 4. Disconnect PCM connector D (16P).
NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General 5. Disconnect the 3rd clutch pressure switch
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-219) before connector.
you troubleshoot.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminal D13 and body ground.
2. Measure the voltage between PCM connector PCM CONNECTOR D (16P)

PCM CONNECTORS 1 2 3 4 5
B(25P) D (16P) 6 7 8 91011 12
131415 16
1 2 234
OP3SW (BLU/WHT)
6 8 9 1011
16
=
LG2 (BRN/YEL) OP3SW (BLU/WHT)
l..-----<'}L>------'
LG1 (BRN/YEl)
Is there battery voltage? PCM connector terminal D13 and the 3rd clutch
pressure switch. Check the pin fit of the PCM
YES-Go to step 7. connector terminal D13 .•
NO-Go to step 3. NO-Goto step 15.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-317
Protected by AR
7. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 14. Measure the voltage between the 3rd clutch
ground.
3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE
securely. SWITCH CONNECTOR
9. Start the engine, cancel the TCS or VSA (Type-S),

then shift to ~ position and drive in 3rd gear for
more than five seconds.

PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P) D (16P) =
1 12 213141 15 Wire side of female terminal
19120
71 8 19 j10p1j12 Is there battery voltage?
16
YES-Goto step 15.

LG2 (BRN/VELI OP3SW (BLU/WHTI
NO-Repair open in the wire between the 3rd
LG1(~RN/VELI (2)f-----' clutch pressure switch and the PCM . •
Wire side of female terminals 15. Measure the resistance between the 3rd clutch
pressure switch connector terminal and body
Is there about 0 V? ground.
3RD CLUTCH PRESSURE
YES-Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM SWITCH CONNECTOR
connectors 013. If necessary, substitute a known-
NO-Go to step 11.

connector.

Is the resistance 10 MQ and more?
YES-If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM

and recheck .•
NO-Replace the 3rd clutch pressure switch .•
BACK
14-318
Protected by AR
DTe P1656: Problem in PCM-to-VSA Control 4. Check for continuity between VSA control unit
Unit Communications Circuit (Type S only) connector terminal C10 and body ground.
NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (26P)
you troubleshoot.
2. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P) and VSA control

unit connector C (26P).

terminal A22 and VSA control unit connector
terminal C10. Wire side of female terminals


PCM connector terminal A22 and VSA control unit
connector terminal C10 .•
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Connect PCM connector A (32P).

7. Check for voltage between PCM connector terminal
Is there continuity? A22 and body ground.
YES-Go to step 4. PCM CONNECTOR A (32P)

connector terminal A22 and VSA control unit
connector terminal C10 .•
Is there about 10 V?
YES- Check for loose terminal fit in PCM connector

A22 and VSA control unit connector C10. If
necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and
recheck .•
NO - Replace the PCM .•
BACK
14-319
Protected by AR
DTC P1705: Short in Transmission Range /s there battery voltage?

Switch Circuit
YES-Go to step 7.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-219) before NO-Check for a short in the wire between PCM
you troubleshoot. connector terminal D6 and the transmission range
switch or NT gear position indicator, and check for
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). an open in the wires between PCM connector
terminals 820, 822 and body ground (G101). If
2. Disconnect transmission range switch connector. necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and
recheck .•
Do all gear position indicators exceptrn go out?
7. Shift to all positions other than ~ or [ffi.
YES- Replace the transmission range switch .•
NO- Go to step 3. terminals 814 and 820 or 822.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and connect
transmission range switch connector.
1 121 13\4\5
5. Shift to all positions other than [RJ.
6. Measure the voltage between PCM connector ATP NP (BLU/WHT)

LG2 (BRN/VEL)
PCM CONNECTORS
LG1 (BRN/VELI
B(25P) D (16P)
1 12 5
/s there about 5 V?
1415 16
YES - Go to step 9.
LG2 (BRNtyEL) ATPR(WHT) NO-Check for a short in the wire between PCM
connector terminal 814 and the transmission range
LG1 (~RN/VEL) (2)]-------' switch, and in the ~ and [ffi position signal wires
between the NT gear position indicator and the
Wire side of female terminals transmission range switch. If necessary, substitute
BACK
14-320
Protected by AR
9. Shift to all positions other than ~. 11. Shift to all positions other than ~.
terminals D9 and 820 or 822. terminals DB and 820 or 822.
PCM CONNECTORS PCM CONNECTORS

B(25P) D (16P) B(25P) D(16P)
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 91011 12 6 7 8 9 1011 12
131415 16 19 20 1314 16
ATP D4 (VEL)
LG2 (BRN/VEL)
'------i)L } - - - - - - - - '
LG1 (BRN/VEL) ATP D5 (VEL/GRN) LG1 (BRN/VEL)
Is there about 5 V? Is there battery voltage?
YES-Goto step 11. YES-Gotostep 13.
NO-Check for a short in the wire between PCM NO - Check for a short in the wi re between PCM
connector terminal D9 and the transmission range connector terminal DB and the transmission range
switch . If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM switch or AfT gear position indicator. If necessary,
and recheck .• substitute a known-good PCM and recheck .•
(cont'd)
BACK
14-321
Protected by AR
13. Shift to all positions other than ~. 16. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
terminals 014 and B20 or B22. PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P) D (16P)
PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P) D(16P) 11 121314
6171819/10111112
213141 15 19120
8 19 110111112
16
lG2 (BRN/VEl)
lG2 (BRN/VELl
ATPD3(RED)
lG1 (~RN/VEl) (2)l-----..--J
lG1 (~RN/VELl (2)l-------' Wire side of female terminals
Wire side of female terminals Is there battery voltage?
Is there battery voltage? YES- Go to step 17.
YES - Go to step 15. NO-Check for a short in the wire between F · 'VI
connector terminal 015 and the transmissiomge
NO-Check for a short in the wire between PCM switch or AfT gear position indicator. If neCE ry.
connector terminal 014 and the transmission range substitute a known-good PCM and recheck. ji
switch or AfT gear position indicator. If necessary,
substitute a known-good PCM and recheck .• 17. Shift to all positions other than IHJ.
15. Shift to all positions other than 00. 18. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
PCM CONNECTORS
ATP N (RED/BlK)
r--------i(y: , .-----
B (25P)
213141 15
~--------~(y:)}-------~
lG1 (BRN/VELl lG2 (BRN/VEl)
YES-If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM

and recheck .•

switch or AfT gear position indicator. If necessary.
14-322 BACK
Protected by AR
OTe P1706: Open in Transmission Range 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Switch Circuit
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3) before 6. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
you troubleshoot. terminals 09 and 820 or 822.
1. Test the transmission range switch (see page 14- PCM CONNECTORS
383). B(25P) o (16P)
Is the switch OK? 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 1011 12
YES- Go to step 2.
131415 16
NO- Replace the transmission range switch .•

LG2 (BRN/YEL)
'------l':i. )--------'
LG1 (BRN/YEL) ATP 05 (YEL/GRN)
PCM connector terminals 820 and 822 individually. Wire side of female terminals
PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) Is there voltage?
YES - Repair open in the wire between PCM

switch .•
NO- Go to step 7.
YES - Go to step 4.

(cont'd)
BACK
14-323
Protected by AR
7. Shift to the [R] position. 11. Shift to the ~ position.

B (25P) D(16P) B(25P) D(16P)
5 1 5
6
13j14 16
ATP D4 (YEL)
ATPR(WHT)
LG1 (BRN/VEL) LG1 (BRN/YEL)
connector terminal 06 and the transmission range connector terminal 08 and the transmission range
NO - Go to step 9. NO-Go to step 13.
9. Shift to the [f] or [!!J position. 13. Shift to the IP.iI position.
PCM CONNECTOR B (25P) PCM CONNECTORS
B(25P) D (16P)
1 12
112 1 5
6
19120 16
ATP NP (BLU/WHT)
ATP D3 (RED)
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
LG1 (BRN/VEL)
LG1(~RN/YEL) (2)1-------'
connector terminal 814 and the transmission range connector terminal 014 and the transmission range
NO - Goto step 11. NO-Go to step 15.
14-324 BACK
Protected by AR
15. Shift to the [!] position. 17. Shift to the [J!J position.
terminals D15 and 820 or 822. terminals D4 and 820 or 822.

B (25P) D (16P)
r---------1~ l--_ _ _AT_P_N---,(RED/BLK)
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 B (25P) o (16P)
6 7 8 12 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 1011 12
131415 16
ATP2 (BLU)
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
L...--------1~)--------'
~--~~~------~
LG1 (BRN/YEl) LG1 (BRN/YEL) LG2 (BRN/YEL)
YES-Repair open in the wire between PCM YES - Repair open in the wire between PCM
connector terminal D15 and the transmission range connector terminal D4 and the transmission range
NO-Go to step 17. NO-Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM
connector terminals 814, D4, D6, D8, D9, D14 and D
15. If necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and
recheck .•
BACK
14-325
Protected by AR
DTC P1709: Problem in Transmission Gear 6. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 and No.8
Selection Switch Circuit terminal of the transmission gear selection switch
connector.
TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTION
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-219) before SWITCH CONNECTOR
you troubleshoot.
BLK
2. Remove the center console .
3. Disconnect the transmission gear selection switch

connector.

the transmission gear selection switch connector Is there about 5 V?
and body ground.
YES-Go to step 7.
SWITCH CONNECTOR
terminal of the transmission gear selection switch
connector and ground, and repair poor ground
(G401) .•
8. Disconnect PCM connector E (20P).

terminal E18 and body ground, and between E19
W ire side of female terminals and body ground.

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair open or short in the wire between PCM

connector terminal E20 and the transmission gear
selection switch connector..
-- -

PCM connector terminals E18, E19 and the
transmission gear selection switch connector.•
NO-Go to step 10.
BACK
14-326
Protected by AR
10. Measure the resistance between the No.8 and 12. Measure the resistance between the No.6 and
No.2 terminals of the transmission gear selection No.2 terminals of the transmission gear selection
switch connector with the shift lever in the switch connector while pushing the shift lever
sequential sportshift mode position and when toward the "+" mark on the AfT gear position
releasing it from the sequential sportshift mode indicator panel; then measure the resistance in
position. neutral position.
Measure the resistance between the No.7 and
TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTION No.2 terminals while pulling the shift lever toward
SWITCH CONNECTOR
the" -" mark; then measure the resistance in
BlK neutral position.

SWITCH CONNECTOR
BlK BlK
ORN
WHT/BLU BLU/YEl
Is the resistance OQ in the sequential sportshift
mode position, and 10 M Q or more when out of the
sequential sportshift mode position? Terminal side of male terminals
YES- Go to step 11. Is the resistance 0 Q with the shift lever pushing
toward the "+ "mark, and pulling toward the "- "
NO - Faulty transmission gear selection switch. mark, and 10 M Q or more with it released?
Replace the shift lever detent bracket assembly .•
11. Shift the shift lever into the sequential sportshift connectors E18, E19 and E20. If necessary,
mode position. substitute a known-good PCM and recheck .•
NO - Faulty transmission gear selection switch.

Replace the shift lever detent bracket assembly .•
BACK
14-327
Protected by AR
DTC P1710: Problem in 1st-hold Switch 5. Measure the voltage between the No. 5 and No.1
Circuit terminals ofthe transmission gear selection switch
connector.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-219) before SWITCH CONNECTOR
you troubleshoot.
BlK
2. Disconnect the switch connector.

terminals of the transmission gear selection switch
connector when the shift lever is in the rn
position, PUR
and then in all positions other than rn.
TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTION Wire side of female terminals
SWITCH CONNECTOR
BlK Is there battery voltage?
YES-Check for loose terminal fit in the

transmission gear selection switch connector and
the PCM connectors E14. If necessary, substitute a
PUR NO - Go to step 6.

Terminal side of male termina ls terminals E14 and 820 or 822.
Is there continuity when the shift lever is in the rn PCM CONNECTORS

position, and no continui ty when the shift lever is B(25P)
in all positions other thanrn? 1T2l
YES - Go to step 4.
19120
NO-Faulty 1st-hold switch. Replace the shift lever
detent bracket assembly .•
lG2 (BRN/YEl)
lG~ (BRN/YEl) ® ATP 1 (BRN)

connector terminal E14 and the 1st-hold switch .•
NO-Go to step 7.
BACK
14-328
Protected by AR

terminal E14 and body ground.
VES- Repair short to ground in the wire between

PCM connector E, gauge assembly connector A.
and the 1st-hold switch .•

BACK
14-329
Protected by AR
OTC P1740: Problem in 4th Clutch Pressure 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Switch Circuit
4. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P).
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-219) before 5. Disconnect the 4th clutch pressure switch
you troubleshoot. connector.
terminal B19 and body ground.
terminals B19 and B20 or B22. PCM CONNECTOR B (25PI

1 12
1 12
19120
-=
OP4SW
(BLU/VEl) LG1 (BRN/VELI W ire side of female terminals
LG2 (BRN/VELI
Is there battery voltage? YES- Repair short to ground in the wire between
PCM connector terminal B19 and the 4th clutch
YES-Go to step 7. pressure switch .•
NO-Go to step 3. NO-Goto step 15.
BACK
14-330
Protected by AR
7. Raise the front ofthe vehicle, and make sure it is 14. Measure the voltage between the 4th clutch
ground.
securely. 4TH CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
9. Start the engine, cancel the TCS or VSA (Type-S),

then shift to ~ position and drive in 4th gear for
more than 5 seconds.


=
1 2 Wire side of female terminal
OP4SW NO-Repair open in the wire between the 4th

(BLU/YEL) LG1 (BRN/YELI clutch pressure switch and the PCM .•
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
Wire side of female terminals 15. Measure the resistance between the 4th clutch
pressure switch connector terminal and body
Is there about 0 V? ground.
4TH CLUTCH PRESSURE
YES-Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM SWITCH CONNECTOR
PCM and recheck.•
NO-Gotostep 11.
12. Disconnect the 4th clutch pressure switch

connector.
=
13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Terminal side of male terminal
YES- Check for loose terminal fit in the PCM

NO-Replace the 4th clutch pressure switch .•
BACK
14-331
Protected by AR
DTC P1750: Mechanical Problem in Hydraulic

Control System of AfT Clutch Pressure
Control Solenoid Valves A and 8 or Problem
f
in Hydraulic Control System

you troubleshoot.

another code.

the indicated code(s) . Recheck for code P1750 after
troubleshooting . •
NO-Go to step 2.

4. Reset the PCM memory by removing the BACK UP

fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse relay box
for more than 10 seconds.
5. Calibrate the engine control system in the PCM (see

page 11-158), and drive the vehicle for several
minutes in 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears in the ~
position.
Does the OBO /I scan tool indicate code P1750?
YES - Replace the transmission .•
NO-The problem has been corrected .•
BACK
14-332
Protected by AR
OTe P1751: Mechanical Problem in Hydraulic

Control System of Shift Solenoid Valve 8 and
AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves
A and 8, or Problem in Hydraulic Control
System
NOTE:
before you troubleshoot .
• Keep these replacement solenoid valves on hand:
- Shift solenoid valve B
- A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B

another code.
Does the aao /I scan tool indicate another code?

the indicated code(s). Recheck for code P1751 after
NO-Go to step 2.
3. Replace the shift solenoid valve B (see page 14-

341).
4. Replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid

5. Drive the vehicle for several minutes in 1st, 2nd,

3rd, 4th, and 5th gears in the ~ position.
6. Recheck for code P1751 .
Does the aao /I scan tool indicate code P1751?

YES - Replace the transmission .•
NO- The problem has been corrected .•
BACK
14-333
Protected by AR
Road Test

8ackprobe Set 07SAZ-001000A (Two required)
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
2. Apply the parking brake, and block rear wheels. Start the engine, then shift to the ~ position while pressing the
brake pedal. Press the accelerator pedal, and release it suddenly. The engine should not stall.
3. Repeat the same test in the ~, ~, 00 and [!] position.
4. Connect the Honda PGM Tester (A), and go to the PGM-Fl Data List; then go to step 7. If you don't have a PGM
Tester, go to step 5.
5. Remove the cenh:; console (see page 20-63), then remove the PCM (A).
6. Connect a digital multi meter (8) and the special tools (C) to check voltage between the C27 (+) terminal and 820
(-) or 822 (-) terminal ofthe PCM.
07SAZ-001000A
PCM CONNECTORS
A (32P) B(25P) C(31P) ) (16P
....- ,--
1 2 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
19 20 13 14 15 16
K)
-
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
BACK
14-334
Protected by AR
7. Test-drive the vehicle on a flat road in the ~ position. Check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage. While driving,
check that the shift points occur at the proper speeds by monitoring the throttle position sensor voltage and
comparing your shift point speeds and voltage to those in the table. (The throttle position sensor voltage
represents the throttle opening.)
Premium Model:
I - ~ POSition
UIPSIh·ft
Throttle Opening Unit of Speed 1st- 2nd 2nd- 3rd 3rd - 4th 4th --+ 5th Lock-upON
Throttle position mph 8-9 16-19 24-28 45-48 48-51
sensor voltage: 0.75 V km/h 13-15 26-30 39-45 72-78 78-82
sensor voltage: 2.25 V km/h 32-36 62-68 92-98 126-132 126- 132
FUlly-opened throttle. mph 34-38 59-63 91-95 -- 124-130
Throttle position km/h 55-61 95-101 147-153 -- 200-209
oowns hift-~ pOSition

Throttle Opening Unit of Speed Lock-up OFF 5th -+ 4th 4th -- 3rd 3rd- 2nd 2nd-1st
sensor voltalle: 0.75 V km/h 73-77 58-62 27-31 14-16 14-16
Fully-opened throttle. mph 94-98 -- 78-82 52-55 26-30
Throttle position km/h 152-158 -- 126-132 83-89 42-48
sensor volta~e: 4.5 V
Type S Model:
U'psh·ift~
- , pOSition
Throttle Opening Unit of Speed 1st- 2nd 2nd- 3rd 3rd - 4th 4th --+ 5th Lock-upON
Fully-opened throttle. mph 38-42 65-69 103-106 -- 132-136
Throttle position km/h 61-67 105-111 165-171 -- 213-219
sensor volta~e: 4.5 V
oownshift-~!pOSition
Throttle Opening Unit of Speed Lock-up OFF 5th- 4th 4th-3rd 3rd-2nd 2nd -1st
FUlly-opened throttle. mph 94-98 -- 82-86 53-57 29-33
Throttle position km/h 152- 158 -- 132- 138 86-92 47-53
(cont'd)
BACK
14-335
Protected by AR
Road Test (cont'd)
8. Accelerate to about 35 mph (57 km/h) so the transmission is in 4th, then shift from the ~ position to !II position.
The vehicle should immediately begin slowing down from engine braking.
9. Check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage in the following positions.
III (1st Gear) Position

Accelerate from a stop at full throttle. Check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage. Upshifts should
not occur with the shift lever in this position.
!II (2nd Gear) Position

Accelerate from a stop at full throttle. Check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage. Upshifts and
downshifts should not occur with the shift lever in this position.
1ft! (Reverse) Position

Accelerate from a stop at full throttle, and check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage.
10. Test in [f) (Park) Position.

Park the vehicle on a slope (about 16°), apply the parking brake, and shift into the [fJ position. Release the brake;
the vehicle should not move.
14-336
BACK
Protected by AR
Stall Speed Test
1. Engage the parking brake, and block the front wheels.
2. Connect a tachometer to the engine, and start the engine.
4. After the engine has warmed up to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on), shift to the 00
position.
5. Fully press the brake pedal, accelerate for 6 to 8 seconds, and note the engine speed. Do not move the shift lever
while raising engine speed.
6. Allow two minutes for cooling, then repeat the test in the~, 00, and IRl positions.
NOTE:
• Do not test stall speed for more than 10 seconds at a time.
• Stall speed tests should be used for diagnostic purposes only.
• Stall speed should be the same in the ~, 00, 00, and IRl positions.
• Do not test stall speed with the AfT pressure gauges installed.
Stall Speed rpm:

Specification: 2,400 rpm
Service Limit: 2,250 - 2,550 rpm
TROUBLE PROBABLE CAUSE
Stall rpm high in the~, 00, 00, and IRl positions • Low fluid level or ATF pump output
• Clogged ATF strainer
• Pressure regulator valve stuck closed
• Slipping clutch
Stall rpm high in the 00 position Slippage of 1st clutch or 1st gear one-way clutch
Stall rpm high in the 00 position Slippage of 2nd clutch
Stall rpm high in the IRl position Slippage of 5th clutch
Stall rpm low in the~, 00, 00, and IRl positions • Engine output low
• Torque converter one-way clutch slipping
BACK
14-337
Protected by AR
Pressure Tests

• AfT oil pressure gauge set 07406-0020400 or 07406-0020401
• AfT pressure hose, 2210 mm 07MAJ-PY401 1A
• AfT pressure hose adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
1. Before testing, be sure the transmission fluid is filled to the proper level.
2. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
3. Set the parking brake, and block rear wheels securely.
4. Allow the front wheels to rotate freely.
5. Warm up the engine (the radiator fan comes on), then stop it and connect a tachometer.
6. Connect the oil pressure gauges to each inspection hole securely, and do not allow dust or other foreign particles
to enter the holes.
TORQUE: 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13Ibf·ft)

AfT OIL PRESSURE GAUGE AfT PRESSURE HOSE, 2210 mm AfT PRESSURE HOSE ADAPTER
SETW/PANEL 07MAJ-PV4011A 07MAJ-PV 40120
07406-0020400 or (4 Required) (4 Required)
07406-0020401
~~~
<:J D <:J L> ....... D
D
2ndCLUTCH
PRESSURE B
1st CLUTCH
/ F PRESSURE
4th CLUTCH (/
PRESSURE
~g
A
LINE G
1st-HOLD PRESSURE 5th CLUTCH E B
CLUTCH PRESSURE 3rdCLUTCH 1st CLUTCH
PRESSURE PRESSURE PRESSURE
BACK
14-338
Protected by AR
7. Start the engine, and run it at 1,500 rpm in the [f] or [HI position.
8. Measure line pressure at lihe pressure inspection hole (A) in the [HI or [f] position.
NOTE: Higher pressure may be indicated if measurements are made in shift lever positions other than [HI or [fl.
9. Shift to the m position, and measure 1st clutch pressure at the 1st clutch pressure inspection hole (B) and 1st-hold
clutch pressure aqhe1st-hold clutch inspection hole (C).
10. Shift to the 00 position, and measure 2nd clutch pressure at the 2nd clutch pressure inspection hole (0).
11. Shift to the [fI position, theh press the .brake pedal and hold it.
12. Shift to the 00 position,and release the brake pedal (the transmission should be in 2nd gear).
13. Press the accelerator very slowly to increase engine speed to 2,000 rpm gradually over 10 seconds, then hold it at
2,000 rpm for the remainder of the tests.
14. Shift to the ~ position (the transmission will shift to 3rd gear), and measure 3rd cluth pressure at the 3rd clutch
pressure inspection tiole (E).
15. Shift to the ~ position (the transmission will shift to 4th gear), and measure 4th clutch pressure at the 4th clutch
pressure inspection hole (F).
16. Shift to the ~ position (the transmission will shift to 5th gear), and measure 5th clutch pressure at the 5th clutch
pressure inspection hole (G).
17. Shift to the [R] position, and measure 5th clutch pressure at the 5th clutch pressure inspection hole.
PRESSURE SHIFT SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE FLUID PRESSURE

LEVER
POSITION Standard Service Limit
Lire (A) [HI or [f] No (or low) Torque converter, ATF 900-960 kPa 850 kPa
line pressure pump, pressure (9.2-9.8 kgf/cm 2, (8.7 kgf/cm 2, 120
regulator valve, torque 130-140 psi) psi)
converter check valve
1st clutch m No or low 1st 1st clutch 890-970 kPa 840 kPa
(B) pressure (9.1-9.9 kgf/cm 2, (8.6 kgf/cm 2, 120
130 -140 psi) psi)
2nd clutch 00 No or low 2nd 2nd clutch
(0) pressure
3rd clutch ~ No or low3rd 3rd clutch

(E) pressure
4th clutch ~ No or low 4th 4th clutch

(F) pressure
5th clutch ~ No or low 5th 5th clutch

(G) pressure
[R] Servo valve or 5th
clutch
1st-hold m No or low 1st-hold clutch 760-830 kPa 710 kPa

clutch (C) 1st-hold clutch (7.7-8.5 kgf/cm2, (7.2 kgf/cm2,
110-120 psi) 100 psi)
18. Reinstall the sealing bolts with new sealing washers, and tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 18 N·m (1.8 kgf.m,13Ibf·ftl
NOTE: 00 not reuse the old sealing washers.
BACK
14-339
Protected by AR
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid

Valve Test Valve Replacement
1. Disconnect the connector from the torque 1. Remove the mounting bolt and torque converter
converter clutch solenoid valve. clutch solenoid valve.
2. Measure torque converter clutch solenoid valve 2. Install a new torque converter clutch solenoid valve
resistance at the solenoid valve connector (black). (A) with new O-rings (B). When installing the
solenoid valve, do not allow dust or other foreign
STANDARD: 12-25 Q particles to enter the transmission.
3. Replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve if 3. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then
the resistance is out of standard. reconnect it.

No.2 terminal of the torque converter clutch
solenoid valve connector to the battery positive
terminal, and connect the No.1 terminal to the
battery negative terminal. A clicking sound should
be heard.
Replace torque converter clutch solenoid valve if
no clicking sound is heard.
BACK
14-340
Protected by AR
Shift Solenoid Valve B Test Shift Solenoid Valve B Replacement
1. Disconnect the connector from the shift solenoid

valve B.
2. Measure shift solenoid valve B resistance at the 2. Install a new shift solenoid valve B (A) with new 0-
solenoid valve connector (blown). rings (B). When installing the solenoid valve, do not
STANDARD: 12-25 Q transmission.
3. Replace the shift solenoid valve B if the resistance 3. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then
is out of standard. reconnect it.

No.2 terminal of the shift solenoid valve B
connector to the battery positive terminal and
Replace the shift solenoid valve B if no clicking
sound is heard.
BACK
14-341
Protected by AR
Shift Solenoid Valves A and C Test Shift Solenoid Valves A and C

Replacement
1. Remove the starter.
2. Disconnect the shift control solenoid valve A and C NOTE: If shift solenoid valves A and C are replaced or
connectors. removed at the same time, be sure to reinstall them
correctly. The connector color of shift solenoid valve A
is black, and the connector color of shift solenoid valve
A C is brown.
1. If you are replacing shift solenoid valve C, remove

the starter.
c
2. Remove the mounting bolt and the shift solenoid
valve A.
3. Measure the shift solenoid valve A and C resistance

at each solenoid valve connector.
STANDARD: 12-25 Q
4. Replace shift solenoid valve A or C if the resistance

is out of standard.
B
No.2 terminal of the shift solenoid valve A or C
6x 1.0mm
connect the No.1 terminal to the battery negative 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ftl
Replace shift solenoid valve A or C if no clicking 3. Remove the mounting bolt and shift solenoid valve
sound is heard. C.
4. Install a new shift solenoid valve A or C with new
a-rings (8). While installing the valves, do not
transmission.
5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then

reconnect it.
6. Install the starter, if removed.
14-342
BACK
Protected by AR
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Test
1. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the AfT clutch 6. Connect the No.1 terminal of AfT clutch pressure
pressure control solenoid valves A (A) and 8 (8). control solenoid valves A and B to the battery
positive terminal, and connect the No.2 terminal to
the battery negative terminal. Make sure the AfT
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B
move.
\;:;::==::?/
2. Measure the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid

valves A and B resistances at each solenoid valve
connector.
STANDARD: About 5.0 Q
3. If the resistance of either solenoid is out of

standard, replace AfT clutch pressure control
A B
solenoid valves A and B.
7. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check
4. Connect the No.1 terminal of AfT clutch pressure valve movement.
control solenoid valves A and B to the battery
positive terminal, and connect the No.2 terminal to NOTE: You can see the valve movement through
the battery negative terminal. A clicking sound the fluid passage in the mounting surface of the
should be heard. Remove AfT clutch pressure solenoid valve body (C).
control solenoid valves A and B, if no sound is
heard. 8. If either valve binds, or moves sluggishly, or if the
solenoid does not operate, replace the AfT clutch
5. Check the fluid passage of the AfT clutch pressure pressure control solenoid valves A and B.
control solenoid valves for dust and dirt, and clean
the passage if necessary.
BACK 14-343
Protected by AR
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Replacement

1. Remove the harness cover from the transmission 3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passages of
hanger. AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and 8
and the transmission housing.
2. Remove the mounting bolts and AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valves A and 8 (A). 4. Place a new gasket (8) on the transmission housing,
then install the 8 x 18 mm ATF feed pipes (C) with
their filter sides into the transmission housing.
A
/
5. Install new O-rings (D) over the feed pipes, and
install the 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe (E).
F 6. Install new AfT clutch pressure control solenoid

valves A and 8 (A) and harness clamp bracket IF).
7. Check the AfT clutch pressure control solene

valve connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, then CO " ;;, gct
them securely.
8. Install the harness cover on the transmission

hanger.
BACK
14-344
Protected by AR
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test
1. Disconnect the connector from NT clutch pressure 6. Connect the No 1 terminal of NT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve C. control solenoid valve C to the battery positive
terminal, and connect the No.2 terminal to the
battery negative terminal. Make sure AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve C (A) moves.
2. Measure NT clutch pressure control solenoid valve

C resistance at the solenoid valve connector. A
STANDARD: About 5.0Q

7. Disconnect one of the battery terminals and check
3. If the resistance is out of standard, replace the NT valve movement.
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C.
NOTE: You can see the valve movement through
4. Connect the No.1 terminal of NT clutch pressure the fluid passage in the mounting surface of the
control solenoid valve C to the battery positive body (B).
terminal. and connect the No.2 terminal to the
battery negative terminal. A clicking sound should 8. If the valve binds, or moves sluggishly, or if the
be heard. Remove NT clutch pressure control solenoid does not operate, replace NT clutch
solenoid valve C if no sound is heard. pressure control solenoid valve C.
5. Check the fluid passage of AfT clutch pressure

control solenoid valve C for dust and dirt.
BACK
14-345
Protected by AR
AfT Clutch Pressure Controi Speed Sensor Replacement

Solenoid Valve C Replacement
1. Disconnect the connectors from the mainshaft and
countershaft speed sensors.
1. Disconnect the connector from AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve C. 2. Remove the bolt securing the mainshaft speed
sensor, then remove the mainshaft speed sensor
2. Remove AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve (A) from the end cover.
CIA).
c
A \
~
\"" .s:i
~
~
~
6x 1.0mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf.ftl
B 3. Remove the bolt securing the countershaft speed
sensor, then remove the countershaft speed sensor
(B) from the transmission housing.
3. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C and
the transmission housing.
4. Install the 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe (B) with its filter

side into the transmission housing.
5. Install the new gasket (C) in the mounting groove of

AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C body
properly, then install them on transmission
housing. Do not pinch the gasket.
6. Check the solenoid connector for rust, dirt, or oil,

and connect it securely.
4. Replace the O-rings (C) with new ones before

installing the sensors.
5. Install the mainshaft and countershaft speed

sensors. When installing sensors, do not allow dust
or other foreign particles to enter the transmission.
6. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then

connect the connectors.
BACK
14-346
Protected by AR
3rd Clutch Pressure Switch 4th Clutch Pressure Switch

Replacement Replacement
1. Remove the switch cover (A). 1. Disconnect the connector from the 4th clutch
-----A
pressure switch (A).
~
6X1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf.m. 8.7Ibf·ft)
2. Disconnect the connector from the 3rd clutch

pressure switch (8). 2. Replace the 4th clutch pressure switch, then install
a new one with a new sealing washer (8). Tighten
3. Replace the 3rd clutch pressure switch, then install the switch on the metal part, not the plastic part.
a new one with a new sealing washer (e) . Tighten
the switch on the metal part, not the plastic part. 3. Reconnect the connector, making sure there is no
water, oil, dust, or other foreign particles inside it.
4. Reconnect the connector. making sure there is no
water, oil, dust. or other foreign particles inside it.
5. Install the switch cover.
BACK
14-347
Protected by AR
ATF Temperature Sensor Replacement
1. Disconnect the connector (A) from the ATF

temperature sensor.
6X1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m. 7.2Ibf·ftl
B
~~~
c
2. Remove the bolts securing the sensor harness
clamp and ATF temperature sensor, then remove
the ATF temperature sensor (B).
3. Install the new ATF temperature sensor with a new

O-ring (e).
4. Install the harness clamp. then connect the

connector.
14-348 BACK
Protected by AR
ATF Level Check

NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 6. If the level is below the lower mark, pour the
recommended fluid into the filler hole (A) to bring it
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating to the upper mark. Always use Honda ATF-Z1
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-
Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
2. Park the vehicle on the level ground. Turn off the
engine.
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A) from the

transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth.
B
24x 1.5 mm
44N·m
14.5 kgf·m,
33lbf·ftl

washer (C).
8. Insert the dipstick back into the transmission.
4. Insert the dipstick into the transmission.
5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It

should be between the upper mark (B) and lower
mark (C).
L----·
~--- c
BACK
14-349
Protected by AR
ATF Replacement
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission . 5. Refill the transmission with the recommended fluid
into the filler hole (A) to the upper mark on the
1. Bring the transmission up to operating temperature dipstick. Always use Honda ATF-Z1 Automatic
(the radiator fan comes on) by driving the vehicle. Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-Honda ATF
can affect shift quality.
2. Park the vehicle on the level ground, and turn the
engine off. Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity:
2.9 ~ (3.1 US qtl at changing
3. Remove the ATF filler bolt and drain plug, and 7.2 ~ (7.6 US qt) at overhaul
drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
B
24x 1.5mm
44N·m
(4.5 kgf·m,
33lbf·ftl
18x1.5mm A
49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36Ibf·ft)
4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer. washer (e).
14-350 BACK
Protected by AR
Transmission Removal
Special Tools Required 8. Remove the intake air duct.

Engine hanger, A and Reds AAR-T-12566 or equivalent. • Premium: Remove the intake air duct .
commercially available. • Type-S: Remove the intake air duct-TeS control
valve assembly.
1. Before disconnecting the battery, make sure you The illustration shows the Type S.
have the anti-theft code for the radio and
navigation system, then write down the
frequencies for the radio's preset stations.
2. Remove the bolts securing the support struts on

both sides of the hood. Secure the hood in a
veritical position, then install the left strut in the
lower position.
NOTE: Do not attempt to close the hood with the

support struit in the vertical position; it will damage
the support strut and hood.
9. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely

supported. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain
the automatic transmission fluid (ATF). Reinstall
the drain plug with a new sealing washer (B).
3. Disconnect the battery negative terminal, then

remove the positive terminal.
4. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, then

remove the battery and battery tray.
5. Remove the battery cable clamps from the battery

base, then remove the battery base.
6. Loosen the mounting bolt securing the battery base

bracket, then remove the battery base bracket.
A
7. Remove the engine covers. 49N·m
B (5.0 kgf·m, 36 Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK
14-351
Protected by AR
10. Remove the starter cables (A) from the starter (B), 13. Remove the 8P connector (C) from the connector
then remove the starter. braket (D), then disconnect the connector.
E
11. Remove the harness clamps (B) from the clamp

brackets (D), then disconnect the connectors from
the shift solenoid valves A and C, AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve C (E), 4th clutch A
pressure switch (F), and mainshaft speed sensor
(G). 14. Remove the harness clamp (E) from the clamp
bracket (F), then disconnect the connectors from
A D B AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B.
15. Disconnect the connectors from the torque

converter clutch solenoid valve (A) and shift
solenoid valve B.
12. Remove the transmission ground cable (H).
14-352 BACK
Protected by AR
16. Remove the joint connector (A) and transmission 21 . Only for Premium; Remove the power steering
range switch connector (B) from the connector speed sensor. Do not remove the hoses.
bracket (C).
17. Disconnect the transmission range switch

connector (B), then remove the harness clamp (D)
from the clamp bracket (E). 22. Remove the nut from the front mount.
18. Disconnect the connector from the countershaft

speed sensor (F).
19. Put shop rags around the ATF warmer (B) to

remove the ATF that flows out.
20. Remove the bolts (A) securing the ATF warmer (B),
then remove the ATF warmer from the
transmission housing. Cover the fluid passages on
the transmission and ATF warmer with tape. Do not
allow dust or other particles to enter. Do not
disconnect the hoses (C).
(cont'd)
BACK
14-353
Protected by AR
23. Lift and support the engine/transmission assembly 25. Remove the cotter pins (A), castle nuts (B), and
with an engine hanger (P/N AAR-T-12566, available damper forks (e), then separate the ball joints from
through the American Honda Tool and Equipment the lower arms (D) (see page 18-9).
program, or equivalent). Before attaching the C
hanger, remove the front bulkhead cover (see page
20-135), and the front support beam. \
26. Remove the bolts securing the radius rods (E), then
separate the radius rods from the lower arms (D).
24. Remove the splash shield. 27. Pry the driveshafts out of the differential and the
intermediate shaft (see step 10 on page 16-4).
28. Pull on the inboard joints to remove the left

driveshaft from the differential and to remove the
right driveshaft from the intermediate shaft.
BACK
14-354
Protected by AR
29. Make a reference mark (A) across the front beam 32. Remove the transmission lower rear mount (A)
(8) and the rear beam (C). from the transmission.
30. Disconnect the vacuum tube (A) on the front beam 33. Move the left driveshaft to the front side. Coat all
(8), and unclamp the power steering fluid pipes (C) precision finished surfaces with clean engine oil,
from the clamps on the front beam. then tie the plastic bags (8) over the driveshaft
ends.
34. Remove the intermediate shaft.
31. Remove the nuts securing the transmission lower 35. Coat all precision finished surfaces with clean
mounts, then remove the front beam (8). engine oil, then tie the plastic bags over both ends
of intermediate shaft.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-355
Protected by AR
36. Remove the bolts securing shift cable holder (A), 39. Remove the torque converter cover (A), then
then remove shift cable cover (8). remove the eight drive plate bolts (8) one at a time
while rotating the crankshaft pulley.
remove the bolts securing the holder before B
removing the bolts securing the cover.
c
/ A
A 40. Remove the engine stiffener bolts (e).
41. Remove the front mount bracket.
37. Remove the lock bolt (e) securing the control lever
(D), then remove the shift cable (E) with the control
lever. Do not bend the shift cable excessively.
38. Install a 6 x 1.0 x 14 mm bolt (A) and nut (8) on the

shift cable cover (e), then reinstall the shift cable
cover to the torque converter housing.
If you don't do this, the bolt head of the cable cover
may prevent you from removing the torque
converter during transmission removal.
I c
A
BACK
14-356
Protected by AR
42. Place a jack under the transmission. 45. Pull the transmission away from the engine until it
clears the dowel pins, then lower it on the
43. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts. transmission jack.
NOTE: If the torque converter is stuck to the drive

plate, pull it toward the transmission housing
through the starter opening.
46. Remove the shift cable cover, then remove the

torque converter assembly from the torque
converter housing.
44. Remove the remaining transmission housing

mounting bolts (A) and the rear mount bracket bolt
(8).
47. Remove the transmission lower front mount.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-357
Protected by AR
48. Inspect the drive plate, and replace it if it's

damaged.
49. Remove the 6 x 1.0 x 14 mm bolt (A) and nut (B)

from the shift cable cover (C).
s
~ I~
A
/
BACK
14-358
Protected by AR
Transmission Installation
1. Install the transmission lower front mount. 5. Attach the transmission to the engine, then install
the transmission housing mounting bolts (A) and
rear mount bracket bolt (B).
B
______ 12 x 1.25 mm
64N·m
(6.5 kgf·m,
47Ibf·ft)
A
10 x 1.25 mm 12x 1.25mm
38 N·m (3.9 kgf·m, 28 Ibf·ft) 64N·m
(6.5 kgf·m,
2. Install the torque converter assembly (A) on the 47Ibf·ft)
mainshaft (B) with a new O-ring (e) .
6. Install the transmission housing mounting bolts.
12x 1.25mm
3. Install the 14 mm dowel pin (D) and 10 mm dowel 64N·m
pin (E) in the torque converter housing (F). (6.5 kgf·m,
47Ibf·ft)
4. Place the transmission on a jack, and raise it to

engine level.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-359
Protected by AR
7. Install the front mount bracket. 12. Install the control lever (A) with the shift cable (B)
on the control shaft (C). Do not bend the shift cable
10x 1.25mm
38 N·m (3.9 kgf·m. 28 Ibf·ftl excessively.
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m. 7.2Ibf·ftl
6iI c
B
8. Install the engine stiffener mounting bolts (A).
C
6x1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m. 8.7Ibf·ftl
B
13. Install the lock bolt (D) with a new lock washer (E),
cable holder (G) on the shift cable cover.

converter housing.
15. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft

/ 6x1.0mm contacts the transmission (differential) with solvent
A 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m. 8.7Ibf·ftl
or carburetor cleaner, and dry with compressed air.
10x 1.25mm Then install the intermediate shaft in the
differential. While installing the intermediate shaft,
9. Attach the torque converter to the drive plate (B) be sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles
with eight bolts (C). Rotate the crankshaft pulley as to enter the transmission.
necessary to tighten the bolts to 1/2 of the specified
torque, then to the final torque, in a crisscross 10 x 1.25 mm
pattern. After tightening the last bolt, check that the
crankshaft rotates freely.
10. Install the torque converter cover (D).
11. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt as necessary (see

BACK
14-360
Protected by AR
16. Install new set rings on the right and left 19. Install the front beam (A) by aligning both reference
driveshafts. marks (B) on both rear beams (C), and tighten the
bolts.
17. Install the right and left driveshafts (see page 16-19). A
While installing the left driveshaft in the differential,
be sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles
to enter the transmission.
NOTE:
o Clean the areas where the left driveshaft contacts
the transmission (differential) with solvent or
carburetor cleaner, and dry with compressed air.
o Turn the both steering knuckles fully outward,
and slide the left driveshaft into the differential
until you feel its spring clip engage the side gear.
Slide the right driveshaft into the intermediate
shaft until you feel its spring clip engage the
intermediate shaft.
18. Install the transmission lower rear mount on the

transmission.
, '-......10 x 1.25 mm
38 N·m 13.9 kgf.m,
28lbf·ftl
20. Install the transmission lower mount nuts (D).
21. Connect the vacuum tube (E), and install the power
steering fluid pipe (F) on its clamp.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-361
Protected by AR
Transmission Installation (co nt'd)
22. Install the damper forks (A), then install the ball 26. Install and tighten the nut on the front mount.
joints on each lower arm (B) with the castle nuts (e)
12x1.25mm
and new cotter pins (0).
~'"
/
54N·m (55
. k gf·m, 40 Ibf·ttl
10x 1.25 mm
,~~
43 N·m (4.4 kgf·m, 32 Ibf·ttl
V
12x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m,
47lbf·ttl
14x1.5mm
179 N·m (18.3 kgf.m,
132lbf·ttl
27. Remove the engine hanger from the engine.
28. Only for Premium; Install the power steering speed

sensor.
E
/""-~:
B ~
/ /i
D . C
8x1.25mm
26N·m
12 x 1.25 mm (2.7 kgf·m,
49-59 N·m (5.0-6.0 kgf·m, 20lbf·ttl
36-43 Ibf·ttl
23. Install the radius rods (E) on each lower arm.
24. Remove the jack from the transmission.
25. Install the splash shield.
14-362 BACK
Protected by AR
29. Install the ATF warmer (A) with new O-rings (8) on 33. Connect the connectors to the torque converter
the transmission housing. Do not pinch the O-rings. clutch solenoid valve (A) and shift solenoid valve 8
(8).
30. Connect the transmission range switch connector 34. Connect the connectors to AfT clutch pressure
(A), then install it on its connector bracket (8). control solenoid valves A and 8, then install the
Install the harness clamp on the bracket. harness clamp on the bracket.
A B
31. Install the joint connector (C) on its connector 35. Connect the 8P connector (C), then install it on its
bracket (D). connector bracket (D).
32. Connect the connector to the countershaft speed

sensor (E).
(cont'd)
BACK
14-363
Protected by AR
36. Install the transmission ground cable (A). 39. Install the battery base bracket and battery base.
E 40. Install the battery cable clamps on the battery base.
41. Install the battery tray and battery, then secure the
battery with its hold-down bracket.
42. Install the intake air duct.

• Premium; Install the intake air duct.
F
• Type S; Install the intake air duct-TCS control
valve assembly.
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m.
7.2Ibf·ftl
37. Connect the connectors to the mainshaft speed
sensor (B). 4th clutch pressure switch (C). AfT
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (D). and
shift solenoid valves A (E) and C (F). then install the
harness clamps on the clamp brackets. Do not
allow water. fluid. oil. dust, or other foreign
particles to enter any of the connectors.
38. Install the starter (A) on the torque converter

housing. Connect the starter cables (B) to the
starter, and install the harness clamp on the clamp
bracket. Make sure the crimped side ofthe starter
cable ring terminal facing out. 43. Install the rear engine cover and the front engine
cover.
10 x 1.25 mm
44N·m
(4.5 kgf·m.
33lbf·ftl
t
1/"
A
12 x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf.m. 47 Ibf·ftl
BACK
14-364
Protected by AR
44. Install the front strut support beam (torque 22 N·m,

2.2 kgf·m, 22 Ibf·ft), and the front bulkhead cover
(see page 20-135).
45. Refill the transmission with ATF (see page 14-350).
46. Connect the battery positive terminal, then connect

the negative terminal.
47. Set the parking brake. Start the engine, and shift
the transmission through all gears three times.
48. Check the shift lever operation, AfT gear position

indicator operation, and shift cable adjustment.
49. Check and adjust the front wheel alignment (see

page 18-5).
50. Reattach the right and left hood support struts.
51 . Let the engine reach normal operating temperature

(the radiator fan comes on) with the transmission in
the [f] or [f!] position, and continue to run the engine
at idle for more than 5 minutes to calibrate the
engine idle control system in the PCM (see page 11-
158).
52. Turn the engine off and check the ATF level (see
page 14-349).

54. Perform a road test (see page 14-334).
navigation system, then enter the radio station
presets, and set the clock.
56. Loosen the front mount nut after the road test, then
retighten the nut to the specified torque.
12x 1.25mm
54 N·m (5.5 kgf.m, 40 Ibf·ftl
~/~
(
BACK
14-365
Protected by AR
Shift Lever Removal
1. Shift the transmission into the [R] position. 5. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (A)
and the transmission gear selection switch
2. Remove the console panel (see page 20-63). connector (B).

B B
6. Remove the four bolts (C) securing the shift lever

bracket base, then remove the shift lever assembly.
A
4. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) a
in the opening of the shift lever bracket base (D).
from the shift lever bracket base (D). Do not remove
the shift cable by twisting the shift cable guide (E)
and damper (F).
14-366
BACK
Protected by AR
Shift Lever Installation
1. Install the shift lever assembly. 5. Insert a 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin (A) into the
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the through the positioning hole on the shift lever
[RJ position indicator comes on. assembly. The shift lever is secured in the [RJ
position.
3. If necessary, push the shift cable (A) until it stops,

then release your hand. Pull the shift cable back 6. Align the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B)
one step so that the shift position is in [RJ. Do not with the slot in the bracket base (C), then slide the
push and pull the shift cable by holding the shift holder into the base. Install the shift cable end (D)
cable guide (B). over the mounting stud (E) by aligning its square
hole (F) with the square fitting (G) at the bottom of
the shift cable. Do not install the shift cable by
(cont'd)
BACK
14-367
Protected by AR
Shift Lever Installation (cont'd)
7. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly 10. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin that was installed
installed on the mounting stud (8). to hold the shift lever.
Properly Installed:
11. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector and the
r
transmission gear selection switch connector.
((@D= 12. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that
the AfT gear position indicator follows the
I
A
\ B
13. Push the shift lock release, and verify that the shift
lever releases.
@D= y
8. If improperly installed, remove the shift cable from

the shift lever bracket base, and reinstall the shift
cable. Do not install the shift cable end on the
mounting stud while the shift cable is on the shift
cable bracket base.
9. Install and tighten the nut.
8x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf.m,
16Ibf·ft)
14-368
BACK
Protected by AR
Shift Lever DisassemblyIReassembly
Apply silicone grease to these parts:

• Movable parts of the shift lever.
• Movable parts of the shift lock/reverse lock mechanism.
• Sliding surfaces on the opening of the indicator panel and panel holder.
• Sliding surfaces on the detent plate.
• Contact surfaces between of the shift lever assembly and the shift lock stop.
• Detent plunger and detent spring.
/ SHIFT LEVER KNOB
INDICATOR PANEL
PLATE HOLDER
INDICATOR PANEL \ 98 N·m

PLA... ~ .• 'gI.m, 72 Ibf.ftJ
SHIFT SOLENOID
SUB HARNESS ~
,
DETE~ o
SHIFT LOCK
STOP CUSHION
~~~~~~~~l~~;:::====!!~t------SHIFTLOCKSTOP
TRANSMISSION GEAR
SELECTION SWITCH
CONNECTOR
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
8x 1.25mm SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CLAMP

22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m.
16lbf·ftl
SHIFT LEVER
BRACKET BASE
SHIFT CABLE
8x1.25mm
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m. 16 Ibf·ftl
BACK
14-369
Protected by AR
Shift Cable Replacement
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 7. Remove the floor heat shield.
8. Remove the shift cable guide bracket (A) and
2. Set the parking brake, and block the rear wheels grommet (B).
securely.
3. Shift the transmission into the [BJ position.

~
B 6x1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 IbUtl
9. Remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder (AI,

then remove the shift cable cover (B).
6. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) a

in the opening of the shift lever bracket base (0).
from the shift lever bracket base (0).
(0), then remove the shift cable (E) with the control
lever.
/'
BACK
14-370
Protected by AR
11. Insert the new shift cable through the grommet 17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the
hole, then install the shift cable guide bracket. lID position indicator comes on.
12. Verify that the transmission is in the lID position on 18. If necessary, push the shift cable (A) until it stops,
the control shaft. then release your hand. Pull the shift cable back
one step so that the shift position is in lID. Do not
13. Install the control lever (A) with the shift cable (B) push and pull the shift cable by holding the shift
on the control shaft (e). Do not bend the shift cable cable guide (B).
excessively.
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
c \(§)=11 i,€UD=
• • • • • rBJ ..
20. Insert a 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin (A) into the

positioning hole (8) on the shift lever bracket base
through the positioning hole on the shift lever
\
8x1.2Smm
assembly. The shift lever is secured in the lID
position.
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m,
16Ibf·ft)
6x 1.0mm
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m.
10Ibf·ft)
14. Install the lock bolt (D) with a new lock washer (E), B
cable holder (G) on the cover.

converter housing.
16. Install the floor heat shield.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-371
Protected by AR
Shift Cable Replacement (cont'd)
21 . Align the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) 23. If improperly installed, remove the shift cable from
8x 1.25mm
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m,
16Ibf.ft)
F the AfT gear position indicator follows the
installed on the mounting stud (B). 27. Start the engine, and check the shift lever operation
in all gears.
Properly Installed:
@D)=
IA
r \ B
@)= y
14-372 BACK
Protected by AR
Shift Cable Adjustment
,. Shift the transmission into the rID position. 5. Push the shift cable (A) until it stops, then release
your hand. Pull the shift cable back one step so that
2. Remove the console panel (see page 20-63). the shift position is in rID. Do not push and pull the
shift cable by holding the shift cable guide (B).
A
\§)
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the

A
rID position indicator comes on.
4. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) a 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
quarter turn; the tab (e) on the socket holder will be
in the opening of the shift lever bracket base (D). 8. Insert a 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin (A) into the
Then slide the holder to remove the shift cable positioning hole (B) on the shift lever bracket base
from the shift lever bracket base (D). Do not remove through the positioning hole on the shift lever
the shift cable by twisting the shift cable guide (E) assembly. The shift lever is secured in the IRl
and damper (F). position.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-373
Protected by AR
Shift Cable Adjustment (cont'd)
9. Align the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) 11. If improperly installed, remove the shift cable from
8x 1.2Smm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m,
16Ibf·ft)
F the AfT gear position indicator follows the
installed on the mounting stud (B). 15. Push the shift lock release, and verify that the shift
lever releases.
Properly Installed:
@D=
IA
r \ B
@D= T=
14-374 BACK
Protected by AR
AIT Gear Position Indicator
AJT GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

l!!!]lndicator Circuit Troubleshooting, page 14-377
Sportshift Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting, page 14-382
Indicator Input Test, page 14-386
Indicator Bulb Replacement, page 14-388
TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTION SWITCH

Circuit Troubleshooting, page 14-380 POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH

Test, page 14-383
BACK
14-375
Protected by AR
Circuit Diagram
1ST-HOlD
--
8aiCI1OII SWITtIt
T-MODE SWI1tH
~
1G1l1OT1n0N1ll
.... START l1li
IWIIT/llU I I
OlIN
J 11
rtLTL
IfL.N'1 'I 'I IIJ( va OlIN

'I
lED
I 1G411 G611
Ell Ell ElO
5- 5- 5-MODE
U!' DII
POWEIITRAIN CONllIOL MODUIf_ 1L

J7 ~
LED
A
Y5$
OUT
115
II) ,.
All'
All AI4 DIIMIrS

UNDER-DASH
ILU/IIX IlUIRfD ILU/WIIT GRN/IIJ( RJSE/REIAY WIlT YEL/GRN
lOX
IlU/GIW RED/ILK YEL
REVEllSE
IIElAY
CZ GAUGE_Y
.. 1lUl.1IPLfX
CONllIOl
UIIT
IlII'IBI'SI
-1-
C1
IlJIIW
AI
.
AI
va--j
4
va--j
10'>=
IElAY
CRUISE
PNl--j PNK--j CONllIOL
UN!
ILU--j 1lU--j lTlLU
IRN
cn 11
ax
IIJ(
B+ T T+T WIlT
T
RED
I
VEl IlU
T
R
I T+ T 1
GII'I 1 IED/WIIT
I I I GIf'
ST I A IE
_ _ IIoINGESWIItII
GIlt
14-376 BACK
Protected by AR
~ Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the ~ 11 . Measure the voltage between PCM connector
indicator. terminal 09 and body ground.
Does the ~ indicator come on and stay on? PCM CONNECTOR 0 (16P)
YES- Go to step 2.
1 2 3 4 5
NO -If the indicator comes on for about 2 seconds 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
and then goes off, it's OK. If it doesn't come on at
all, go to step 12.


Is there voltage?
YES-Faulty PCM or gauge assembly.•
terminal A14 and body ground. NO - Check for a short to ground in the wire
between PCM connector term inal 09 and the
PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) transmission range switch. If the wire is OK, check
the transmission range switch .•

Does the ~ indicator come on?

=
YES-Check for loose terminal fit in PCM connector
Wire side of female terminals A 14 and recheck the ~ indicator several times. If
the problem is intermittent, substitute a known-
good PCM and recheck. If the indicator then works
Is there voltage? OK every time, replace the original PCM .•
YES - Repair short to power in the wire between NO-Go to step 14.
PCM connector terminal A 14 and the gauge
assembly.• 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO-Go to step 7.
8. Reconnect PCM connector A (32P).
10. Shift to any position other than ~.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-377
Protected by AR
~ Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
15. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P). 19. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
16. Check for continuity between body ground and 20. Reconnect PCM connector 8 (25P).
PCM connector terminals B20 and B22.
21. Connect a digital multi meter between PCM
PCM CONNECTOR B (25PI connector terminals A 14 and 820 or 822.
PCM CONNECTORS
A (32PI B (25PI
'----------1(':i,l}--------'
Wire side of female terminals 05 INO (GRN/BLKI LG2 (BRN/YELI
Is there continuity between ground and each Wire side of female terminals
terminal?
YES-Go to step 17.
Is there voltage for at least 2 seconds?
NO- Repair open in the wire(s) between PCM
connector terminal B20 or B22 and ground (G101). YES-Check for an open in the wire between PCM
Repair poor ground (G101) .• connector terminal A14 and the gauge assembly. If
the wire is OK, check for a faulty ~ indicator bulb
17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). or a faulty printed circuit board in the gauge
assembly.•
terminals B1 and B22, and between terminals B9 NO-Go to step 23.
and B20.
LG1 (BRN/YELI LG2(BRN/YELI
YES-Go to step 19.
NO- Repair open or short in the wire between PCM

connector terminal B1 or B9 and the PGM-FI main
relay .•
14-378 BACK
Protected by AR

terminals A14 and 820 or 822.
PCM CONNECTORS
A (32P) B (25P)
'--------{Qf-------'
D5 IND (GRN/BLK) LG2 (BRN/YEL)
YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM

connector terminal A 14 and the gauge assembly .•
NO- Check for loose terminal fit in PCM connector

terminal A 14. If necessary, substitute a known-
BACK
14-379
Protected by AR
Sequential Sportshift Transmission Gear Selection Switch Circuit
Troubleshooting
1. Test-drive the vehicle in the ~ position, and check 8. Check for continuity between the No.6 and No.2
whether the transmission shifts up and down terminals of the transmission gear selection switch
normally. connector while pushing the shift lever toward the
"+" mark on the AfT gear position indicator panel;
2. Check whether the OBD II scan tool indicates P0753, then check for continuity between the No.7 and No.
P0758, P0763, or P1709. 2 terminals while pulling the shift lever toward the
"-" mark. Check for continuity between the No.8
Does the aBO /I scan tool indicate any of the and No.2 terminals while in the sequential
codes? sportshift mode position.
YES- Perform the troubleshooting flowchart for TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTION

SWITCH CONNECTOR
the indicated code(s) .•
BLK BlK
NO - Go to step 3.

terminal E19 terminal and body ground, and
between E18 terminal and body ground. WHT/BlU BLU/VEl
BlK
PCM CONNECTOR E (20P) .....,
ORN
YES-Go to step 9.
Is there about 5 V?
NO - Faulty the transmission gear selection switch.
YES - Go to step 5. Replace the shift lever detent bracket assembly.•
NO- Run the troubleshooting flowchart for code P

1709 (see page 14-326) .•
7. Disconnect the transmission gear selection switch

connector.
14-380 BACK
Protected by AR
9. Connect the transmission gear selection switch 12. Check for continuity between PCM connector
connector. terminals E18 and E20 while pulling the shift lever
toward the "-" mark.
terminals E19 and E20 while pushing the shift lever
toward the "+" mark.
PCM CONNECTOR E (20P) S-MODE

(RED/WHT)
S-MODE
(RED/WHT) Wire side of female terminals
Is there continuity with the shift lever pulled

toward the "- " mark, and no continuity with it
Wire side of female terminals released?

Is there continuity with the shift lever pushed connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
toward the "+ " mark, and no continuity with it PCM and recheck .•
released?
NO-Check for an open in the wire between PCM
YES-Go to step 12. connector terminal E18 and the transmission gear
selection switch connector. If the wire is OK,
NO-Check for an open in the wire between PCM replace the shift lever detent bracket assembly.•
connector terminals E19, E20 and the transmission
gear selection switch connector. lfthe wire is OK,
replace the shift lever detent bracket assembly .•
BACK
14-381
Protected by AR
Sportshift Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
securely supported.
2. Set the parking brake, and block both rear wheels
securely. 7. Disconnect the gauge assembly A (30P) connector.
3. Start the engine, and move the shift lever from lP!I 8. Check for continuity between PCM connector
into the sequential sportshift mode position. terminals ES, E9, and E10, and body ground
individually.
terminals ES, E9, and E10, and body ground PCM CONNECTOR E (20P)
individually in all five sequential sportshift mode LED A
gear positions. LED C (BLU/BLK) (BLU/RED)
LED A
LED C (BLU/BLK) (BLU/RED)
It
-=
'Y..

PCM connector terminals ES, E9, and E10, and the
Sequential Terminal Voltage gauge assembly .•
Sportshift
Mode Gear E8 E9 E10 NO-Check for loose terminal fit in PCM
Position Terminal Terminal Terminal connectors E8, E9 and E10. If necessary, substitute
1st Battery OV OV
voltage
2nd OV Battery OV
voltage
3rd Battery Battery OV

voltage voltage
4th OV OV Battery
voltage
5th Battery OV Battery

voltage voltage
Does the voltage match the table?
YES-Replace the gauge assembly.•
NO - Go to step 5.
14-382 BACK
Protected by AR
Transmission Range Switch Test
1. Remove the transmission range switch connector (A) from the connector bracket (B), then disconnect the
connector.
2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table below.
NOTE: Terminal No.1: Neutral position switch
Transmission Range Switch Continuity check
[\ Terminal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Position \
~
[f] ~
[BJ
!Hl -
~ ~
~
- - ~
~ -
~
~ ~
OO&[j]
BACK
14-383
Protected by AR
Transmission Range Switch Replacement
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 7. Set the transmission range switch to the ~ position.
NOTE: The transmission range switch clicks in the
2. Set the parking brake, and block both rear wheels ~ position.
securely.

~
4. Remove the transmission range switch connector
(A) from the connector bracket (8), then disconnect
the connector.
8. Set the control shaft to the ~ position.
5. Remove the clamp from the harness clamp bracket

on the transmission housing, and remove the
harness clamp (A) from the end cover (8).
B
, ~ ,-~,
l~--,
~
~
~
6. Remove the transmission range switch cover (e),

then remove the transmission range switch (0)
from the end cover.
14-384 BACK
Protected by AR
9. Install the transmission range switch (A) on the 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever
control shaft (B), then secure it with the bolts. through all gears, and check the transmission
range switch synchronization with the AfT gear
NOTE: Take care not to move the transmission position indicator.
range switch when tightening the bolts.
E
D
, 3. Start the engine. Move the shift lever through all

gears, and verify the following:
6x 1.0mm C
B 12N·m
A 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft) • The engine will not start in any position other
than lHl or [fl .
10. Install the transmission range switch cover (e), and • The back-up lights come on when the shift lever
the harness clamp (D) on the end cover (E). is in the [RJ position.
11. Connect the transmission range switch connector

(A), then install it on the connector bracket (B).
BACK
14-385
Protected by AR
Indicator Input Test
1. Remove the gauge assembly from the dashboard (see page 22-128), then disconnect the A (30P) and C (14P)
connectors from the gauge assembly.
2. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are making good contact.
3. If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
4. Perform the following input test at the gauge assembly A (30P) and C (14P) connectors.
GAUGE ASSEMBLV CONNECTORS
A(30PI C (14PI
1121/1415
15116117118119
11112113114
27 128 129 130 k1 ~ I: 11OM1111:11~K4l
A7 BlK/BLU Shift lever in [f) Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty transmission range
There should be no continui!Y. switch
A8 WHT Ignition switch ' Check for voltage to ground: • An open in the wire
ON (II) and shift There should be 1 V or less.
lever in [R] NOTE: There should be battery
A9 RED/BlK Ignition switch voltage in any other shift lever
ON (II) and shift position.
lever in IHl
A10 BlU Ignition switch
ON (II) and shift
lever in [!]
A11 PNK Ignition switch
ON (II) and shift
lever in ~
A12 BRN Ignition switch • Faulty 1st-hold switch
ON (II) and shift • An open in the wire
lever in [l]
A27 VEL Ignition switch • Faulty transmission range
ON (II) and shift switch
lever in ~ • A n open in the wire
A28 GRN/BlK Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: • '-Bulty transmission range
ON (II) and shift There should be battery voltage. switch
lever in ~ • Faulty PCM
-- --- - - - - --- - --- -
• An ooel'linthe wire
14-386
BACK
Protected by AR
C7 VEL Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: There • Blown No.9 (7.S A) fuse in the
ON (II) should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box
C10 BLK Under all Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (GS01)
S. Connect the A (30P) and C (14P) connectors to the gauge assembly, then perform the following input test.
A4 BLU/BLK Start the engine Check for voltage to ground: There • Faulty PCM
and move the shift should be S V. • Faulty transmission gear
AS BLU/GRN lever to the Check for voltage to ground: There selection switch
A6 BLUJRED sequential should be 0 V. • Faulty shift indicator
sportshift mode 1st • An open in the wire
gear position
6. If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board.
BACK
14-387
Protected by AR
Indicator Bulb Replacement

(see page 23-15).
2. Disassemble the gauge assembly.
3. Replace the bulbs (A) in the gauge assembly (B).
14-388 BACK
Protected by AR
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY

KEY INTERLOCK SWITCH
System Circuit Troubleshooting, page 14-393
Test, page 14-397
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting,
page 14-391
BRAKE PEDAL POSmON SWITCH Reverse Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting,
page 14-395
Test, page 14-397
PARK PIN SWITCH

Test, page 14-398
BACK
14-389
Protected by AR
AIT Interlock System
Circuit Diagram
11,.'£11-11000 FUSE/IIElAY BOX sruRNl LOCI(

ASSBolIlY
BATTERY
No.4712OA1
+ ~ WHT/YEl' 111-----,
DIlVER'S KEY
UNDER-DASH INTERlOCK
,
FUSE/RELAY BOX SWITCH
IGMTION ~~cc 1 No.8 17.sA) 1 YEUBIJ(

~ BRAKE
PEDAL KEY
No.6(15A1
POSI11ON INTERlOCK
SWlTai SOLENOIl
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
NPOSI11ON
TIIIOllLE POSI11ON SENSOR

BLK/YEL WHT/RED
I., ~ WHT/BLK 1 ,
PARK
PIN
SWIlCH
4I ~ BIJ(JWHT
1 2
SHIFT 511FT
lOCK lOCK
RELAY SOLENOID
BIJ( ILK
1 1
G302 G501
VEL/BlU RED/BLK GRN/YEl WHT/RED WHT/BIJ(
C28 C27 CIS A28 A32

VCC2 TPS SG2 III BKSW
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODllLE
BACK
14-390
Protected by AR
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Press the brake pedal. 8. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
terminals C27 and 820 or 822.
Are the brake lights ON?
PCM CONNECTORS
YES-Go to step 2.
B(25P) C (31P)
r=;:::;;:::::::J
NO- Repair faulty brake light circuit. • 1 2
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and shift to the (f]

19 20
position.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. lG2 (BRN/VEl)
4. Disconnect PCM connectors A (32P) and 8 (25P). '---------{'Y.,J-------'

lG1 (BRN/VEl) TPS (RED/BlK)
5. Press the brake pedal, and measure the voltage Wire side of female terminals
between PCM connector terminals A32 and 820 or
822. Is there about 0.5 V (throttle fully closed)?
PCM CONNECTORS
YES-Go to step 13.
A (32P) B(25P)
NO- Go to step 9.
10. Disconnect the throttle position sensor (TPS)

connector.
lG1 (BRN/VEl)
11 . Measure the voltage between the No.1 and No.3
'Y., lG2 (BRN/VEl) terminal of the throttle position sensor connector.

THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR CONNECTOR
YES - Release the brake pedal and go to step 6.
NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM VCC2

(VEl/BLU)
connector terminal A32 and the brake pedal
position switch .•
6. Reconnect PCM connectors A (32P) and 8 (25P).

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Check for a short or open in the wire between

PCM connector terminal C27 and the TPS. If the
wire is OK, replace the throttle body .•
NO-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-391
Protected by AR
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect PCM 16. Connect the No.1 terminal of the shift lock solenoid
connector C (31 Pl. Check for continuity between the connector to the battery positive terminal, and
No.3 terminal and body ground. connect the No.2 terminal to the battery negative
terminal.
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR CONNECTOR
NOTE: Do not connect the No.2 terminal to the
battery positive terminal or you will damage the
diode inside the shift lock solenoid.
17. Check that the shift lock solenoid operates.
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

CONNECTOR
YES - Check for a short to ground between the :t:

No. 3 terminal of the TPS connector and ground. If
the wire is OK, replace the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 13.
Does the shift lock solenoid operate properly?
13. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector.
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). connector terminal A28 and the shift lock
solenoid .•
the shift lock solenoid connector and body ground. NO - Replace the shift lock solenoid .•
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Check for blown No.8 (7.5A) fuse in the

repair open or short in the wire between the No.1
terminal of the shift lock solenoid and the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box .•
BACK
14-392
Protected by AR
Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Disconnect the key switch connector (7P) from the 5. Measure the voltage between the No.7 terminal
steering lock assembly. and body ground.
2. Connect the No.7 terminal of the key switch KEY SWITCH CONNECTOR (7PI
terminal.
=
YES-Go to step 6.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I), then push the under-hood fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair
ignition key. open or short in the wire between the No.7
terminal of the key switch connector and under-
4. Check the key interlock solenoid operation. A hood fuse/relay box .•
clicking sound should be heard while pushing the
ignition key, and you should not be able to turn it to
the OFF position.
Does the key interlock solenoid operate properly?
YES- Go to step 5.
NO-Faulty key interlock solenoid/switch. Replace

the ignition key cylinder/steering lock assembly .•
(cont'd)
BACK
14-393
Protected by AR
Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
6. Disconnect the transmission gear selection switch 9. Check for continuity between the No. 4 terminal of
connector on the rear of the shift lever. the transimission gear selection switch connector
and body ground.
7. With the shift lever in Park and pushed to the right,
check for continuity between the No.4 and No. 10 TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTION
SWITCH CONNECTOR
terminals of the transmission gear selection switch
connector. BLK

SWITCH CONNECTOR

WHT/RED
YES - Check for loose termi nal fit in the key switch
Is there continuity? connector and transmission gear selection switch
connector. If necessary, substitute a known-good
YES - Go to step 8. steering lock assembly.•
NO-Repair open in the wires between the park pin NO - Repair open in the wire between the No. 4
switch and the transmission gear selection switch terminal of the transmission gear selection switch
connector. If the wires are OK, replace the shift connector and ground (G501). Repair poor ground
lever detent bracket assembly .• (G501) .•

the transmission gear selection switch connector
and the No.5 terminal of the key switch connector.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire between No. 10

terminal of the transmission gear selection switch
connector and the No.5 terminal of the key switch
connector .•
BACK
14-394
Protected by AR
Reverse Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting
,. Check whether the OBD II scan tool indicates P1705 9. Check for continuity between the NO.1 and No.4
or P1706. terminals of the shift lock relay while connecting
the battery positive terminal to the No.5 terminal
Does the 080 /I scan tool indicate either code? ofthe shift lock relay, and connecting the negative
terminal to the No.3 terminal.
the indicated code(s) .•
SHIFT LOCK RELAY
NO-Go to step 2.
3. Shift the shift lever into the ~ position while

pushing the shift lock release.
5. Press the brake pedal, and do not press the Terminal side of male terminals
accelerator pedal.
6. Shift the shift lever out of the ~ position to check Is there no continuity when connecting the battery
that the shift lock solenoid operates. terminals, and continuity when disconnecting the
battery terminals?
Does the shift lever shift out of the [f] position?
YES-Go to step 10.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the shift lock relay .•
NO- Perform the troubleshooting flowchart for the
Shift Lock System Circuit (see page 14-391 ).• 10. Shift the shift lever into the [HJ position.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Check the continuity between the No.4 terminal of
8. Remove the shift lock relay.
SHIFT LOCK RELAY SOCKET
YES-Go to step 12.

terminal of the shift lock relay and the transmission
range switch .•
(cont'd)
BACK
14-395
Protected by AR
Reverse Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
12. Shift the shift lever out of the IW position.

SHIFT LOCK SOCKET

the No.4 terminal of the shift lock relay and the
transmission range switch .•
NO-Go to step 14.

the shift lock relay socket and the No.2 terminal of
the shift lock solenoid connector.
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

CONNECTOR
YES-Check for loose terminal fit in the connectors.

Repair the reverse lock mechanism .•

terminal of the shift lock relay and the shift lock
solenoid connector .•
14-396 BACK
Protected by AR
Key Interlock Solenoid/Switch Test Shift Lock Solenoid Test
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 1. Remove the console panel (see page 20-63).
in the SRS section before performing repairs or service 2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid 2P connector.
(see page 23- 15).
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see

page 20-65).
2. Disconnect the key switch connector (7P) from the

steering lock assembly.

terminals when the key is pushed, and check for no
continuity when the key is released.

terminal.
4. Check that the shift lever can be moved from the [f)
position. Release the battery terminals from the
shift lock solenoid connector. Move the shift lever
Terminal side of male terminals back to the [f) position, and make sure it locks.
NOTE: Do not connect power to the No.2 terminal

4. Check that the key cannot be removed with power (reverse polarity) or you will damage the diode
connected to the No.7 terminal and ground inside the solenoid.
connected to the No.3 terminals.
5. Check that the shift lock releases when the release
• If the key cannot be removed, the key interlock lever is pushed, and check that it locks when the
solenoid is OK . release lever is released.
• If the key can be removed, replace the steering
lock assembly (the key interlock solenoid is not 6. If the solenoid does not work, replace it.
available separately).
BACK
14-397
Protected by AR
Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement Park Pin Switch Test
1. Remove the console panel (see page 20-63). 1. Remove the console panel (see page 20-63).
2. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid 2P connector. 2. Disconnect the transmission gear selection switch
connector.
3. Pry the shift lock solenoid clamp (A) with a
screwdriver, then remove the shift lock solenoid (B).
3. Shift the shift lever into the [f] position, then check
for continuity between the No.4 and No. 10
4. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (e) and terminals. There should be continuity.
plunger spring (D) in the new shift lock solenoid.
4. Shift the shift lever out of the [f] position, and check
5. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of fo ! ~ontinuity between the terminals in step 3.
the shift lock solenoid with the tip of the shift lock There should be no continuity.
stop (E).
5. If the park pin switch is faulty, replace the detent
6. Secure the shift lock solenoid with the clamp, then bracket assembly. (The park pin switch is not
connect the shift lock solenoid connector. available separately.)
14-398 BACK
Protected by AR
End Cover, 3rd Gears, Idler Gear, and 3rd Clutch Removal
Exploded View
ATF TEMPERATURE CONNECTOR BRACKET
SENSOR
GROUND TERMINAL
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH COVER
AfT WIRE
HARNESS
ATF FILTER LINE
END COVER
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH
ATFFILTER
3RDCLUTCH Replace.
ASSEMBLY
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVEC
COUNTERSHAFT
3RDGEAR
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE

PARK GEAR CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVES A and B
(cont'd)
BACK
14-399
Protected by AR
End Cover, 3rd Gears, Idler Gear, and 3rd Clutch Removal (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 10. Slip the special tool onto the mainshaft.
• Mainshaft holder
07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A

1. Remove the ATF temperature sensor connector

from the connector bracket, then disconnect the
connector.
2. Remove the ATF temperature sensor harness

clamp bolts and the ATF temperature sensor, then
remove the switch cover.
3. Remove the AfT wire harness ground terminal from

the connector bracket, and disconnect the 3rd
clutch pressure switch connector, then remove the 11. Engage the park pawl with the park gear.
connector bracket.
12. Cut the lock tabs (A) of each shaft locknut (B) using
4. Remove the transmission range switch cover. a chisel (C). Then remove the locknuts and conical
spring washers from each shaft.
5. Remove the transmission range switch harness
clamp bolts and harness clamp, then remove the NOTE:
transmission range switch. • Countershaft and secondary shaft locknuts have
left-hand threads.
6. Remove the line bolt, the ATF hose, and the ATF • Clean the old locknut; they are used to install the
filter line. press fit mainshaft 3rd gear, secondary shaft
idler gear, park gear, and 3rd clutch assembly on
7. Remove the ATF filter line bracket and ATF filter. the countershaft.
Remove the ATF passage body if necessary. • Keep all of the chiseled particles out of the
transmission.
tL
8. Remove the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C.
c
9. Remove the remaining 11 bolts on the end cover,
then remove the end cover. ~/
A
B/
14-400 BACK
Protected by AR
Park Lever Stop Inspection and

Adjustment
14. Remove the 3rd clutch assembly using the special
tool and a commercially available 3/8-16" slide
hammer (A). 1. Set the park lever (A) in the [f] position.
6x1.0mm
07736-A01000B or 14 N·m 11.4 kgf·m, 10 Ibf·ft)
07736-A01000A
15. Remove the splined washer, thrust needle bearing, 2. Measure the distance (B) between the park pawl
countershaft 1st gear, needle bearing, and thrust shaft (C) and the park lever roller pin (0).
needle bearing from the countershaft.
STANDARD: 84.6-85.6 mm (3.33-3.37 in.'
16. Remove the mainshaft 3rd gear (A), secondary
shaft idler gear (B), and park gear (C) with a puller 3. If the measurement is out of tolerance, select and
(0). install the appropriate park lever stop (E) from the
table below.
A
PARK LEVER STOP
Mark Part Number L1 l2

1 24537-PA9-003 11.00 mm 11.00 mm
B
(0.433 in.' (0.433 in.)
17. Remove the park pawl, park pawl spring, park pawl 2 24538-PA9-003 10.80 mm 10.65mm
shaft, and stop shaft. (0.425 in.) (0.419 in.)
3 24539-PA9-003 10.60 mm 10.30 mm
18. Remove the park lever from the control shaft. (0.417 in.' (0.406 in.)
19. Remove the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid 4. After replacing the park lever stop, make sure the
valves A and B. distance is within tolerance.
BACK
14-401
Protected by AR
Control Shaft Oil Seal Replacement Control Shaft Bearing Replacement

• Driver 07749-0010000 • Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment. 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800 • Attachment. 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800
1. Remove the oil seal (A) from the end cover (B). 1. Remove the oil seal from the end cover. then
remove the bearing.
B/~~r~
2. Install the new oil seal flush to the end cover with
the special tools.
f" / 07749""0000
2. Install the new bearing flush to the end cover with
the special tools.
-IL
./ om9""0000
3. Install the new oil seal.
14-402 BACK
Protected by AR
ATF Feed Pipes Replacement
1. Remove the snap rings (A), ATF feed pipes (8) and
feed pipe flanges (e) from the end cover (0).
2. Install the new O-ring (E) over the ATF feed pipe.
3. Install ATF feed pipe in the end cover with aligning

the feed pipe tabs with the indentations in the end
cover.
4. Install the new O-ring (F) in the end cover, then

install the feed pipe flange over the ATF feed pipe
and O-rings.
5. Secure the ATF feed pipe and feed pipe flange with
the snap ring .
BACK
14-403
Protected by AR
Housing and Shaft Assemblies Removal
Exploded View
REVERSE IDLER GEAR
SHAFT HOLDER TRANSMISSION HOUSING
!
MOUNTING BOLTS
REVERSE IDLER GEAR SHAFT HARNESS CLAMP BRACKET
TRANSMISSION HOUSIN~
~
iJJ ~ ~ /
COUNTERSHAFT
2ND G....
"'-..
~ ~1.1!3 TRANSMISSION HANGER
COUNTERSH~FT
REVERSE G E A R .
c /
ATF DIPSTICK
,_
0
/:~:!.;UIDE"PE
31/
REVERSESELE~
REVERSE SELECTOR ~
HUB ~
COUNTERSHAFT
5TH GEAR
MAINSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
GASKET
Replace.
COUNTERSHAFT DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY

SUB-ASSEMBLY
14-404 BACK
Protected by AR
Special Tools Required 5. Align the spring pin (A) on the control shaft (B) with
Housing puller 07HAe-PK40102 the transmission housing groove (e) by turning the
control shaft.
1. Remove the ATF dipstick guide pipe.
2. Remove the two bolts securing the reverse idler

gear shaft holder, then remove the reverse idler
gear shaft holder (A), shaft (B), and washer (e).
6. Install the special tool over the mainshaft, then

remove the transmission housing (D).
NOTE: If the top arm of your housing puller is too

short, replace it with Housing Puller Arm, 205 mm
07SAe-POZ0101.
7. Remove the reverse idler gear, needle bearings,

3. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts, and thrust washer from the transmission housing.
transmission hangers, and harness clamp bracket.
8. Remove the countershaft 2nd gear, then remove
4. Move the reverse idler gear (A) to disengage it from the countershaft reverse gear and the needle
the mainshaft and countershaft reverse gears. bearing.
NOTE: The transmission housing will not separate 9. Remove the lock bolt securing the shift fork, then
from the torque converter housing if the reverse remove the shift fork w ith the reverse selector. If
idler gear is not moved. the reverse selector hub is not press-fitted, remove
the reverse selector hub, countershaft 5th gear, and
needle bearing from the countershaft.
10. Remove the secondary shaft subassembly. If the

reverse selector hub is press-fitted, remove the
secondary shaft subassembly, countershaft
subassembly and mainshaft subassembly together.
11. Remove the countershaft subassembly.
12. Remove the mainshaft subassembly.
BACK
14-405
Protected by AR
Bearing Removal and Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Release the pliers, then push the bearing down into
• Driver 07749-0010000 the housing until the snap ring snaps in place
• Seal driver attachment 07GAD-PG40101 or around it.
07GAD-PG40100
• Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
• Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
NOTE: Coat all parts with ATF before assembly.
1. To remove the mainshaft bearing (A), countershaft

bearing (B), and secondary shaft bearing (C) from
the transmission housing, expand each snap ring
with the snap ring pliers, then push the bearing out.
NOTE: Do not remove the snap rings unless it's

necessary to clean the grooves in the housing.
A
B
5. After installing the bearings verify the following:
• The snap rings (A) are seated in the bearing and

housing grooves .
• The ring end gaps (B) are correct.
B:0-7mm
10-0.28 in.)
c
A
2. Install the bearings in the direction shown.
3. Expand each snap ring with the snap ring pliers,

and insert the bearing part-way into the housing.
14-406 BACK
Protected by AR
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal

Exploded View
ATF FEED PIPE,
6x 1.0mm, 8x 198mm
Two Bolts
6x 1.0mm, \
Ei~
6 x 1.0mm, ATF FEED PIPES,
Two Bolts 8x85mm,
SERVO DETENT \
BASE Three Pipes
/
ATF STRAINER
O-RI~~
RePla~
~
\ \ ATF FEED PIPES,
8x 180.5 mm
O-RING
Replace.
CONTROL ~ ~ REGULATOR
6x 1.0mm, VALVE BODY
\ ~:NT
Seven Bolts
SHAFT r '" _ _ _ _ _ STATOR SHAFT
.....- - - - - - S T A T O R SHAFT STOP
_
_________ DOWEL PINS, Two Pins
ARM SHAFT
i ~
_____ REGULATOR
SEPARATOR PLATE
e~----- 6 x 1.0 mm, One Bolt
~i;g~~~::::::=:===='- 8 x 1.25 mm, Three Bolts

=----?~'--: - MAIN VALVE BODY
ACCUMULATOR COOLER CHECK VALVE

BODY SEPARATOR SPRING
PLATE _ _ _ _ _ _ COOLER CHECK VALVE
ATF FEED PIPE,

8x220mm ATF PUMP DRIVEN GEAR
SHAFT
o ~ATFPUMPDRIVENGEAR
MAIN SEPARATOR PALATE
DOWEL PINS,
Two Pins
SERVO SEPARATOR
PLATE
TORQUE CONVERTER
6x1 .0mm, HOUSING
Seven Bolts
ACCUMULATOR
BODY
ATF PUMP DRIVE GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE SPRING
(cont'd)
BACK
14-407
Protected by AR
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal (cont'd)
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the 16. Clean the inlet opening (A) of the ATF strainer (B)
following procedure. thoroughly with compressed air, then check that it
is in good condition and that the inlet opening is
1. Remove the ATF feed pipes from the regulator not clogged.
valve body, servo body, top accumulator body, and
accumulator body.
2. Remove the servo detent base (two bolts).
3. Remove the ATF strainer (two bolts).
4. Remove the top accumulator body (seven bolts),

then remove the accumulator body separator plate
and dowel pins (two).
5. Remove the servo body (five bolts), then remove

servo separator plate and dowel pins (two).
6. Remove the regulator valve body (eight bolts).

17. Test the ATF strainer by pouring clean ATF through
7. Remove the stator shaft and stator shaft stop. the inlet opening, and replace it if it is clogged or
damaged.
8. Remove the regulator separator plate and dowel
pins (two).
9. Unhook the detent spring from the detent arm, then

remove the detent arm shaft, detent arm, and
control shaft.
10. Remove the cooler check valve spring and cooler

check valve (ball).
11. Remove the main valve body (four bolts).
12. Remove the torque converter check valve and

spring.
13. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft, then

remove the ATF pump gears.
14. Remove the accumulator body (seven bolts).
15. Remove the main separator plate and dowel pins

(three).
14-408 BACK
Protected by AR
Valve Body Repair

NOTE: This repair is only necessary if one or more of 5. Remove the # 600 paper. Thoroughly wash the
the valves in a valve body do not slide smoothly in their entire valve body in solvent, then dry it with
bores. Use this procedure to free the valves. compressed air.
1. Soak a sheet of # 600 abrasive paper in ATF for 6. Coat the valve with ATF, then drop it into its bore. It
about 30 minutes. should drop to the bottom of the bore under its
own weight. If not, repeat step 4 and 5, then retest.
2. Carefully tap the valve body so the sticking valve If the valve still sticks, replace the valve body.
drops out of its bore. It may be necessary to use a
small screwdriver to pry the valve free. Be careful
not to scratch the bore with the screwdriver.
3. Inspect the valve for any scuff marks. Use the ATF-
soaked # 600 paper to polish off any burrs that are
on the valve, then wash the valve in solvent and
dry it with compressed air.
4. Roll up half a sheet of ATF-soaked # 600 paper and

insert it in the valve bore of the sticking valve.
Twist the paper slightly, so that it unrolls and fits
the bore tightly, then polish the bore by twisting the
paper as you push it in and out.
NOTE: The valve body is aluminum and doesn't

require much polishing to remove any burrs.
7. Remove the valve, and thoroughly clean it and the

valve body with solvent. Dry all parts with
compressed air, then reassemble using ATF as a
lubricant.
BACK
14-409
Protected by AR
Valve Body
Valve Body Valve Installation
1. Coat all parts with ATF before assembly.
2. Install the valves and springs in the sequence

shown for the main valve body (see page 14-411),
regulator valve body (see page 14-414), servo body
(see page 14-415), and top accumulator body (see
page 14-416). Refer to the following valve cap
illustrations, and install each valve cap so the end
shown facing up will be facing the outside of the
valve body.
EJ Ej
lB ~
EJ~EJ~
~@~
BACK
14-410
Protected by AR
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
,. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blowout all
passages.
2. Do not use a magnet to remove the check ball, it may magnetize the ball.
3. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to Valve Body Repair (see page' 4-409).
5. Coat all parts with ATF during assembly.
6. Install the filter in the direction shown.
KICK-DOWN SHORT VALVE

SHIFTVALVEC
SPRING
11 /
CD1 SEAT VALVE CAP KICK-DOWN VALVE
t;2L~LATO.
SHIFT VALVE D ~""
~~ ~~
MAIN VALVE BODY
~ l~4~
'
damage.
FILTER
Install in this direction . ®
!~ (/
~
SPRING
REVERSECPC
VALVE ~ i. SEAT
"'~I
~~~
- -REUEF
~ VALVE
o~ '~\ \I ~~~~,"\\
\I~,"~\. .
LOCK-UP SHIFT
® VALVE
CD
/
MANUAL VALVE
COOLER CHECK VALVE IBALLI
TORQUE CONVERTER CHECK VALVE
(cont'd)
BACK
14-411
Protected by AR
Valve Body
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly (cont'd)
Sectional View
® ® ®
®
CD
MANUAL VALVE @
®
,
No. Spring Standard INew)-Unit: mm (in.) ,
WireOia. 0.0. Free Length No. of Coils !
CD Shift valve 0 spring 0.710.028) 6.610.260) 33.7 (1.327) 11.6 I

ill Shift valve C spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1 .933) 21.7
® Kick-down valve spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1.933) 21.7
® Modulator valve spring 1.6 (0.063) 10.4 (0.409) 33.5 (1.319) 9.8 i
® Relief valve spring 1.2 (0.047) 11.1 (0.437) 39.0 (1.535) 9.9
® Lock-up shift valve spring 0.9 (0.035) 7.6 (0.299) 63.0 (2.480) 22.4
(J) Cooler check valve spring 0.6 (0.024) 5.8 (0.228) 14.5 (0.571) 6.8
® Torque converter check valve spring 1.2 (0.047) 8.6 (0.339) 34.4 (1.354) 11.7
® Servo control valve spring 0.9 (0.035) 6.4 (0.252) 32.5 (1 .280) 17.5
@) Reverse CPC valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
14-412
BACK
Protected by AR
ATF Pump Inspection
1. Install the ATF pump drive gear (A), driven gear (B), 2. Measure the side clearance of the ATF pump drive
and ATF pump driven gear shaft (C) in the main gear (A) and driven gear (B).
valve body (D). Lubricate all parts with ATF, and
install the ATF pump driven gear with its grooved ATF Pump Gears Side (Radial) Clearance:
and chamfered side facing up. Standard (New):
ATF Pump Drive Gear
0.210-0.265 mm (0.0083-0.00104 in.)
ATF Pump Driven Gear
0.070-0.125 mm (0.0028-0.0050 in.)
3. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft. Measure
D
/ c the thrust clearance between the ATF pump driven
gear (A) and the valve body (B) with a straight edge
(C) and a feeler gauge (D).
ATF Pump Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial)

Clearance:
BACK
14-413
Protected by AR
Valve Body
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
passages.
4. Hold the regulator spring cap in place while removing the stop bolt. The regulator spring cap is spring loaded.
Once the stop bolt is removed, release the spring cap slowly so it does not pop out.
5. Reassembly is the reverse of the disassembly. Install the filter in the direction shown.
7. Align the hole in the regulator spring cap with the hole in the valve body, then press the spring cap into the valve
body, and tighten the stop bolt.
REGULATORS~
® .~
~",
", REGULATOR VALVE BODY
damage.
LOa(-UP TIMING V~ ® I /
VALVE CAP (j)~" ' - . .

~ ~ ~
------
FILTER
~V ~~~~, Install in this direction.
~ ~~~~, ~
VALVE CAP CUP f ~""-..(j) LOCK-UP CONT1IOL VALVE
~ VALVESLEEV£
VALVE CAP CLIP
No. Spring Standard (New)-Unlt: mm (in.)

WireDla. 0.0. Free Lenath No. of Coils
CD Stator reaction spring 5.5 (0.217) 37.4 (1.472) 30.3 (1.193) 2.1
® Regulator valve spring A 1.9 (0.075) 14.7 (0.579) 80.6 (3.173) 16.1
® Regulator valve spring B 1.6 (0.063) 9.2 (0.362) 44.0 (1.732) 12.5
(!) Lock-up control valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 42.9 (1.689) 14.2
® Lock-up timino valve sprino 0.65 (0.026) 6.6 (0.260) 34.8 (1.370) 15.6
14-414 BACK
Protected by AR
Servo Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
passages.
SHIFT VALVE B
® VALVE CAP
SERVO VALVE
Inspect for scoring and t~
\§\~
\t~
d'~ VALVE CAP CLIP
~
, relJl
"- "Z~SPRINGSEAT
~®
SHIFT VALVE A
- - - - - - - - - - - SERVO VALVEI
SHIFT FORK SHAFT
O-RING
Replace.
No. Spring Standard (New)·Unit: mm (in.)

CD CPC valve A spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
® CPC valve B spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
® Shift valve B spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1.933) 21.7
CD Shift valve A sprinQ 0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1.933) 21.7
BACK
14-415
Protected by AR
Valve Body
Top Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
passages.

CPCVALVEC
<D ~ ~-------- VALVE CAP

~\\'I" "~ \1------------
VALVE CAP CLIP
~~~"i\~Q
" \~SPRINGSEAT
~ CD
TOP ACCUMULATOR BODY SHIFT VALVE E
Inspect for scoring and damage.
O-RING
Replace.
~---~-
_________
--0 ,-.~@
~ ~
I' 1
i~! ~'u~/________
1ST-HOLD
PISTON ACCUMULATOR <!l
®_ _~
~ ~ ~
O-RING
Replace.
4HT ACCUMULATOR A ~ ____________ STH ACCUMULATOR PISTON
~~?CVo~ O-RING
Replace.
SNAP RINGS
No. Springs Standard (New)-Unit: mm Un.)

Wire Dia. 0.0. Free Length No. of Coils
CD CPC valve C spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
® Shift valve E spring 0.8 (0.031) 7.1 (0.280) 49.0 (1.929) 17.2
® 5th accumulator spring A 2.2 (0.087) 16.4 (0.646) 75.7 (2.980) 14.2
@ 5th accumulator spring B 2.0 (0.079) 10.0 (0.394) 45.5 (1.791) 11.6
® 4th/1st-hold accumulator spring 3.4 (0.134) 19.6 (0.772) 57.4 (2.260) 8.4
14-416 BACK
Protected by AR
Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls; it may magnetize the balls.
passages.
6x 1.0mm /LUBRICATION CHECK VALVE

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
ACCUMULATOR.ODYCO~ V____ VALVE CLIP
_ _ _ _ 1ST/2ND ACCUMULATOR BODY

~ Inspect for scoring and damage.
CHECK BALLS,
Two Balls
~
I'~
CD
O·RING
~ ~R'PI'~.
~ 1ST ACCUMULATOR PISTON
o
V
Replace.
O·RING
Replace.
SNAP RINGS
No. Springs Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.)

WireOia. 0.0. Free Length No.otCoils
CD 1st accumulator spring B 2.3 (0.091) 12.6 (0.496) 42.0 (1.654) 9.9
® 1st accumulator spring A 2.4 (0.094) 19.5 (0.768) 67.7 (2.665) 10.2
@ 2nd accumulator spring B 2.6 (0.102) 13.0 (0.512) 44.0 (1.732) 9.0
CD 2nd accumulator sprinQ A 2.5 (0.098) 19.6 (0.772) 57.7 (2.272) 9.5
BACK
14-417
Protected by AR
Valve Body
3rd Accumulator/End Cover Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
passages.
END COVER
ACCUMULATOR BODY COVER
SNAP RING
No. Springs Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.)

WireOia. I 0.0. I Free Length I No. of Coils
CD 3rd accumulator spring 3.1 (0.122) I 19.6 (0.772) I 39.4 (1.551) I 5.5
14-418 BACK
Protected by AR
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Install the new oil seal flush to the housing with the
• Adjustable bearing puller, 25-40 mm special tools.
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
• Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
1. Remove the mainshaft bearing and oil seal with the

slide hammer (A).
07736-A01000B or
07736-A01000A
2. Install the new mainshaft bearing until it bottoms in

the housing with the special tools.
07749-0010000
07746·0010500
BACK
14-419
Protected by AR
Countershaft Bearing Replacement Secondary Shaft Bearing

Replacement
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A Special Tools Required
• Driver 07749-0010000 • Adjustable bearing puller, 25-40 mm
• Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500 07736-A010008 or 07736-A01000A
• Driver 07749-0010000
1. Remove the countershaft bearing (A) with the • Driver attachment 07947-6340500
slide hammer (B). 1. Remove the secondary shaft bearing (A) with the
slide hammer (8).
07736-A01oo0B or
07736-A01OO0A A
2. Install the ATF guide plate (A). A
2. Install the ATF guide plate (A).

077 49-0010000
07749-0010000
07746-0010500
c
A
the special tools.
the special tools.
14-420 BACK
Protected by AR
Control Shaft Oil Seal Replacement

• Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800

housing (B).
2. Install the new oil seal flush to the torque converter

t-/ .7149-.......
077 46·0010800
BACK
14-421
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Lubricate all parts with ATF during assembly.

THRUST WASHER, Replace.
27x47x5mm 226 N·m (23.0 kgf·m, 166Ibf·ft)--0--
167 N·m 117.0 kgf.m, 123Ibf·ft)
~ n
~WASHER
CONICAL SPRING
Replace.
~3RDGEAR
5TH GEAR COLLAR
'~=IN~S"~~NG
4TH/5TH CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
MAINS HAFT
~I\
~- 4TH GEAR
NEEDLE BEARING
Install sealing ring THRUST NEEDLE BEARING

mating surface as shown.
2. Check the clearance of the 4th/5th clutch assembly.

4. Inspect the splines for excessive wear and damage.
5. Check shaft bearing surfaces for scoring and excessive wear.
6. Before installing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines with tape to prevent O-ring damage.
7. Install the conical spring washer and 41 x 73 mm thrust washer in the direction shown.
8. Inspect the condition of the sealing rings. If the sealing rings are worn, distorted, or damaged, replace them (see
page'4-424).
14-422
BACK
Protected by AR
4th/5th Clutch Clearance Inspection
1. Remove the O-rings from the mainshaft. 3. Hold the 5th gear collar (C) against the clutch
assembly (8), then measure the clearance between
2. Assemble the 41 x 73 mm thrust shim (A), 4th/5th the clutch guide (E) and the 5th gear collar with a
clutch assembly (8), and 5th gear collar (C) on the feeler gauge (F) in at least three places. Use the
mainshaft (D). average as the actual clearance.
STANDARD: 0.03-0.11 mm (0.001-0.004 in.)
\ c
~F
thrust shim and measure its thickness.
5. Select and install a new shim, then recheck.

1 90414-P7W-000 7.85 mm (0.309 in.)
2 90415-P7W-000 7.90 mm (0.311 in.)
3 90416-P7W-000 7.95 mm (0.313 in.)
4 90417 -P7W-000 8.00 mm (0.315 in.)
5 90418-P7W-000 8.05 mm (0.317 in.)
6 90419-P7W-000 8.10 mm (0.319 in.)
6. After replacing the thrust shim, make sure the

clearance is within standard.
BACK
14-423
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft Sealing Rings Replacement
The sealing rings are synthetic resin with chamfered

ends. Check the condition of the seali ng rings, and
replace them only if they are worn, distorted, or
damaged.
1. For a better fit, squeeze sealing rings together

slightly before installing them.
2. Apply ATF to the new sealing rings then install

them on the mainshaft.
3. After installing the sealing rings, verify the

following:
• The rings are fully seated in the groove.

• The rings are not twisted.
• The chamfered ends ofthe rings are properly
joined.
BACK
14-424
Protected by AR
Countershaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
'00-01 Models:

RePlace.
Left-hand threads
226 N·m (23.0 kgf·m, 166Ibf·ft)-0-
167 N·m (17.0 kgf·m, 123Ibf·ft)
/
n CONICAL SPRING WASHER
~Replace.
_ _-==--O-RINGS
Replace.
REVERSE SELECTOR HUB
BEARING
2. Remove the reverse selector hub, 4th gear, and 1st gear (see page 14-427).
3. Check the bearing on the 3rd clutch for wear and rough movement. If the bearing is worn or damaged, replace it
(see page 14-429).
7. Lubricate all parts with ATF, and reassemble the shafts and gears.
8. Install the conical spring washer, 31 x 63.5 mm splined washer, reverse selector, reverse selector hub, and
distance collar in the direction shown.
BACK
14-425
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly (cont'd)
'02-03 Models:
Replace.
Left-hand threads
226 N·m (23.0 kgf·m, 166lbf·ft)..... 0.....
167 N·m 117.0 kgf.m, 123Ibf·ft)
2ND GEAR
~ G
~--
CONICAL SPRING
~WASHER
Replace.
___ 3RD CLUTCH

---- ASSEMBLY
~ ==- O-RINGS
Replace.
DISTANCE COLLAR,
35 x 47 x 7.8 mm
~ DISTANCE COLLAR,
35 x 47 x 45.6 mm
L .~
~
'UY
4TH GEAR
TRANSMISSION
~'STGEA.
HOUSING BEARING
/
COUNTERSHAFT
2. Remove the reverse selector hub, 4th gear, and 1st gear (see page 14-427).
3. Check the bearing on the 3rd clutch for wear and rough movement. If the bearing is worn or damaged, replace it
(see page 14-429).
4. Inspect the thrust needle bearing and the needle bearing for gal;,ng and rough movement.
7. Lubricate all parts with ATF, and reassemble the shafts and gears.
8. Install the distance collars, reverse selector hub, reverse selector, splined washer, and conical spring washer in
the direction shown.
14-426 BACK
Protected by AR
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub and 4th Gear Removal
1. Remove the reverse selector hub (A) and the 5th 2. Remove the following parts from the countershaft:
gear (8) from the countershaft with a press. Place a
shaft protector (C) between the countershaft and • '00-01 models:
press to prevent damaging the countershaft. - Needle bearing
- Snap ring
NOTE: Some reverse selector hubs are not press- - Distance collar
fitted, and can be removed without using a puller. - Cotters, 31 mm
I-c
• '02-03 models:
- Needle bearing
- Snap ring
~ - Distance collar, 35 x 47 x 7.8 mm
- Cotters, 31 mm
- Distance collar, 35 x 47 x 45.6 mm
- Cotters, 31 mm
3. Remove the 1st gear (A) and 4th gear (8) together
from the countershaft with a press. Place a shaft
protector (C) between the countershaft and press to
prevent damaging the countershaft.
BACK
14-427
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft 4th Gear and Reverse Selector Hub Installation
Special Tool Required 5. Install the following parts on the countershaft:

Driver, 40 mm 1.0. 07746-0030100
• '00-01 models:
1. Apply ATF to the parts. - Cotters, 31 mm
- Distance collar
2. Install the 1st gear on the countershaft by hand. - Snap ring
- Needle bearing
3. Align the shaft splines with those on 4th gear, then - 5th gear (A)
press the countershaft (A) into the 4th gear with a
press. Place an attachment (8) between the press • '02-03 models:
and countershaft to prevent damaging the - Cotters, 31 mm
counters haft. - Distance collar, 35 x 47 x 45.6 mm
- Cotters, 31 mm
- Distance collar, 35 x 47 x 7.8 mm
- Snap ring
- Needle bearing
- 5th gear (A)
6. Slide the reverse selector hub (8) over the

countershaft (C), and then press it into place with
the special tool and a press.
NOTE: Some reverse selector hubs are not press-

fitted and can be installed without using the special
tool and a press.
4. Stop pressing the countershaft when the 4th gear

contacts the 1st gear (C).
I /0""0030'00
14-428 BACK
Protected by AR
3rd Clutch Ball Bearing Replacement

• Driver 077 49-0010000
• Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
NOTE: Check the bearing for wear and rough

movement. If the bearing is OK, removal is not
necessary.
,. Remove the ball bearing (A) from the 3rd clutch

with a commercially available bearing puller (8),
bearing separator (C), and stepper adapter (D).
D A
2. Install the new bearing on the 3rd clutch with the

special tools and a press.
07746-0010500
BACK
14-429
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the locknut, and disassemble the shaft and gears.

Replace.
Left-hand threads
226 N·m (23.0 kgf·m, 166 Ibf·ft)-O-
167 N·m (17.0 kgf·m, 123lbf.ft)
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
BALL BEARING
'" A
In CONICAL SPRING WASHER
SECONDARY SHAFT ~ ~ Replace.
2NDGEA~
'"
~ ~~
. / TRANSMISSION
/ HOUSING BEARING
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
1ST-HOLD
CLUTCH HUB
1ST~~
HUB
-------
SPLINEDWASHER,
THRUST NEEDLE -@
:n 38 x 56.5 mm
Selective part
BEARING
----COTTERS, 32 mm
~COTTER RETAINER
~SNAPRING
~SEALING RINGS, 35 mm
2. Inspect the thrust needle bearing and needle bearing for galling and rough movement.
3. Check the clearance of the secondary shaft assembly.
6. Check the idler gear bearing for wear and rough movement. If the bearing is worn or damaged, replace it (see
page 14-433).
9. Install the conical spring washer and splined washer in the direction shown.
BACK
14-430
Protected by AR
Secondary Shaft Clearance Inspection
1. Remove the O-rings from the secondary shaft. 3. Measure the clearance between the 38 x 56.5 mm
splined washer (E) and cotters (F) with a feeler
2. Assemble the thrust needle bearing (A), 1st gear gauge (J) in at least three places. Use the average
assembly (B), needle bearings (C), thrust needle as the actual clearance .
bearing (0), 38 x 56.5 mm splined washer (E), 32
mm cotters (F), cotter retainer (G), and snap ring (H) STANDARD: 0.07 - 0.15 mm (0.003 -0.006 in.)
on the secondary shaft (I).
~A
4. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the

-F splined washer, and measure its thickness.
-G
H 5. Select and install a new splined washer, then
recheck the clearance.
SPLINED WASHER, 38 x 56.5 mm

1 S0502-POZ-000 6.85 mm (0.270 in.)
2 S0503-POZ-000 6.S0 mm (0.272 in.)
3 S0504-POZ-OOO 6.S5 mm (0.274 in.)
4 90505-POZ-000 7.00 mm (0.276 in.)
5 S0506-POZ-000 7.05 mm (0.278 in.)
6 90507 -POZ-000 7.10 mm (0.280 in.)
(cont'd)
BACK
14-431
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
6. Remove the 27 x 47 x 5 mm thrust washer from the 9. Hold the 27 x 47 x 5 mm thrust washer (G) against
mainshaft. the clutch assembly (A), and measure the 2nd gear
axial clearance in at least three places while
7. Assemble the 1st/1st-hold/2nd clutch assembly (A), moving the 2nd gear (E). Use the average as the
37 x 55 mm thrust washer (B), thrust needle actual clearance.
bearing (e), needle bearings (D), 2nd gear (E),
thrust needle bearing (F), and 27 x 47 x 5 mm thrust STANDARD: 0.04-0.12 mm (0.002-0.005 in.)
washer (removed from mainshaft) (G) on the
secondary shaft sub-assembly (H).
© ___ G
.______F
~ _ _E
10. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the

37 x 55 mm thrust washer and measure its
thickness.
11. Select and install a new thrust washer, then

recheck the clearance.
H
8. Set the dial indicator (I) on the 2nd gear (E). No. Part Number Thickness
1 90406-POZ-000 4.90 mm (0.193 in.)
2 90407 -POZ-000 4.95 mm (0.195 in.)
3 90408-POZ-000 5.00 mm (0.197 in.)
4 90409-POZ-000 5.05 mm (0.195' in.)
5 90410-POZ-OOO 5.10 mm (0.2C:. I~
6 90411-POZ-000 5.15 mm (0.2t:o,.n.L
7 ~0412-eOZ-000 5.20 mm (0.20~_1f'l.)
12. Disassemble the shaft and gears.
13. Reinstall the 27 x 47 x 5 mm thrust washer on the

mainshaft.
BACK
14-432
Protected by AR
Secondary Shaft Idler Gear Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Install the bearing on the secondary shaft idler gear
• Driver 077 49-0010000 with the special tools and a press .
• Attachment, 78 x 90 mm 07GAD-SD40101
1. Check the bearing for wear, damage, and rough

movement.lfthe bearing is worn or damaged, go
to step 2. ~077"'OO'O'"
2. Place the secondary shaft idler gear in a vise with
soft jaws.
3. Remove the bearing (A) from the secondary shaft

idler gear (8) with a puller (C).
07GAD·SD40101
BACK
14-433
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
1st G, '. n One-way Clutch Inspection 1st Clutch Hub Replacement
1. He, ~ 1st-hold clutch hub (A), and turn the 1st Special Tools Required
gea; , .:i) in the direction shown to be sure it turns • Driver 07749-0010000
freely. Also make sure the 1st gear does not turn in • Driver attachment 07947-6340500
the opposite direction. • Attachment, 78 x 90 mm 07GAD-SD40101
A
1. Remove the 1st-hold clutch hub (A) from the 1st
gear (8) with the special tools and a press.
c B
2. If any problem occurs on the 1st gear one-way 2. Remove the 1st clutch hub (e) from the 1st gear,
clutch, replace the 1st clutch hub (e). The 1st gear then install the new 1st clutch hub in the 1st gear.
one-way clutch is not available separately from the
1st clutch hub. 3. Install the 1st-hold clutch hub (A) in the 1st gear (8)
with the special tools and a press .
.7GAD~k=OO1-
B
14-434 BACK
Protected by AR
Clutch Disassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Install the special tools on the 4th/5th clutch
• Clutch spring compressor attachment assembly and 1st clutch.
07LAE-PX40100 07LAE-PX40100
07HAE-PL50101
/
1. Remove the snap ring (A), then remove the clutch
end plate, the clutch discs, and the plates with a
screwdriver (B).
B
\ 07LAE-PX40100 or
07HAE-PL50101
07GAE-PG40200 or
07GAE-PG4020A
2. Remove the disc spring (A) from the 1st, 3rd, 4th 4. Be sure the special tool (A) is adjusted to have full
and 5th clutches. contact with the spring retainer (B) on the 4th, 5th
and 1st clutches.
NOTE: The 2nd clutch and 1st-hold clutch do not
have a disc spring.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-435
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Disassembly (cont'd)
5. Set the special tool (A) on the spring retainer (B) of 8. Remove the snap ring (A). Then remove the special
the 2nd and 3rd clutches so the tool works on the tool (B), spring retainer (C), and the return spring.
clutch return spring (C).
i,""!!Ii \ b, 4 1 _ _ _111111,,,,",,,,
I i
/A
9. Wrap a shop rag around the clutch drum (A), and

6. If either end of the special tool is set over an area of apply air pressure to the fluid passage to remove
the spring retainer which is unsupported by the the piston (B). Place a finger tip on the other end
return spring, the retainer may be damaged. while applying air pressure.
7. Compress the spring until the snap ring can be B--1Jrr><=s_~

removed.
BACK
14-436
Protected by AR
Clutch Inspection
1st/1st-hold/2nd Clutch-Premium Model

• Clutch disc standard thickness: 1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
• Clutch plate standard thickness: • 1st clutch: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
• 2nd clutch: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
• 1st-hold clutch: 1.8 mm (0.071 in.)
SNAP RING
. - . _...
/..... CLUTCH END PLATE
~./ ~ ~ CLUTCH DISCS,

~ Five Discs
(Q)
~gwCLUTCH /
..
O-RINGS
pl.re.
~
CLUTCH PLATES,
Five Plates
e ______ RETURN SPRING
/SPRING RETAINER
S....._____SNAP RING
___ CLUTCH PLATES, ::----SNAP RING

Three Plates
~r.~"""':'1~--- CLUTCH DISCS,

Three Discs
8 ..-----SPRING RETAINER
_____ RETURN SPRING
____
O-RINGS
Replace_
.....-----
2ND CLUTCH DRUM
§;:~~~~CLUTCH
i_ ~ Five Plates
PLATES,
~ - CLUTCH DISCS,
~ FiveDiscs
CLUTCH END
~PLATE 1ST/1ST-HOLD CLUTCH
DRUM
SNAP RING
(cont'd)
BACK
14-437
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Inspection (cont'd)
1st/1st-hold/2nd Clutch-Type 5 Model

• Clutch plate standard thickness: • 1st clutch: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
• 2nd clutch: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
• 1st-hold clutch: 1.8 mm (0.071 in.)
CLUTCH END PLATE

~
~--CLUTCH DISCS,
~ /O-RINGS Six Discs
~
/ Replace.
~
~ OJB CLUTCH PLATES
Six Plates
____ yRETURNSPRING
~~li~~LD CLUTCH ~
/SPRING RETAINER
~SNAPRING
~~-"CLUTCH PLATES,
Three Plates
L __ CLUTCH DISCS,
Three Discs
~ B 'ST-HOLD
CLUTCH
ft. . . . . . . . .
8
~SNAPR'NG
____ SPRING RETAINER

~~RETURN SPRING
~JDISCSPRING {O}~
n . CLUTCH PLATES,
FiYe Plates
---CLUTCH DISCS,
FiyeDiscs
~~ O-RINGS
~Replace.
2ND CLUTCH DRUM

~
----CLUTCH END
I
PLATE
~SNAPRING
1ST/1ST-HOLD CLUTCH
DRUM
14-438
BACK
Protected by AR
3rd Clutch
• Clutch plate standard thickness: 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
___________ CLUTCH PISTON
-e DISC SPRING
- - - - - C L U T C H PLATES,
Do.S_ _ _.lfO(]~iVe Plates
CLUTCH DISCS,
~ FiveDiscs
~ ClUTCHENDPlATE
SNAP RING
(cont'd)
BACK
14-439
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Inspection (co nt'd)
4th/5th Clutch
• Clutch plate standard thickness: • 4th clutch: 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
• 5th clutch: 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
~SNAPRING
~CLUTCHENOPLATE
I
~ _____ CLUTCH DISCS

({f§j ~_____ Four DisCi •
___ CLUTCH PLATE
~ Four Plates S.
~UTCH PISTON
B oose SPRING
-----RETURN SPRING
CLUTCH PLATES
Four Plates '**~~ ----------5TH CLUTCH PISTON
~..--- --- ---------O-RINGS

Replace.
- - - - - 5 T H CLUTCH DRUM
14-440 BACK
Protected by AR
Clutch Reassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Install new O-rings (A) on the piston (B).
07LAE-PX40100 A
_ _ _ _A
07HAE-PL50101
o Clutch compressor attachment
07ZAE-PRP0100
o Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor

cleaner, and dry them with compressed air.
o Blowout all passages.
o Apply ATF to all parts before assembly.
1. Soak the clutch discs thoroughly in ATF for a

minimum of 30 minutes.
2. Inspect the check valve (A) on the clutch pistons (B).

If the check valve is loose or stuck, replace the
pisto'1. A
A
! 4. Install the piston (A) in the clutch drum (B). Apply

pressure and rotate to ensure proper seating.
Lubricate the piston O-ring with ATF before
installing.
NOTE: Do not pinch the O-ring by installing the

piston with too much force.
A
(cont'd)
BACK
14-441
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
5. Check the 1st-hold clutch plate-to-top-disc 9. Install the special tools on the clutch assembly.
clearance; starting with a clutch plate, alternately 07LAE-PX40100
install the clutch plate and discs in the 1st-hold
clutch drum, then install the 1st-hold clutch plate B.
~
6. Measure the 1st-hold clutch clearance between the

1st-hold clutch plate B and the top disc (A) with a
feeler gauge (C) while pressing the 1st-hold clutch
plate B down. Take measurements in at least three
places, and use the average as the actual clearance.
1st-hold Clutch Plate B-to-Top-disc Clearance

Service Limit: 0.5-0.9 mm (0.020-0.035 in.)
07LAE-PX40100 or
c .07HAE·Pl50101
07GAE-PG40200 or
07GAE·PG4020A
10. Be sure the special tool (A) is adjusted to have full

contact with the spring retainer (B) on the 4th, 5th,
and 1st clutches.
7. If the clearance is out of standard, replace the 1st-

hold clutch plates and discs as a set, and recheck.
8. Install the return spring (A) and spring retainer (B),

and position the snap ring (C) on the retainer.
~,---c
BACK
14-442
Protected by AR
11. Set the special tool (A) on the spring retainer (B) of 13. Compress the return spring.
the 2nd and 3rd clutches so the tool works on the
clutch return spring (e).
14. Install the snap ring (A).

12. If either end of the special tool is set over an area of
the spring retainer which is unsupported by the
return spring, the retainer may be damaged.
15. Remove the special tools.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-443
Protected by AR
Shafts and Clutches
16. Install the disc spring in the 1st, 3rd, 4th, and 5th
clutches in the direction shown.
NOTE: The 2nd clutch and 1st-hold clutch do not

have a disc spring.
20. Set a dial indicator (A) on the clutch end plate (8).
17. Make sure the inside of the clutch drum is free of

dirt and other foreign particles.
18. Starting with a clutch plate, alternately install the

clutch plates and discs. Install the clutch end plate
(A) with the flat side toward the disc (8).
A
21. Zero the indicator with the clutch end plate lifted up
to the snap ring (e).
BACK
14-444
Protected by AR
22. Release the clutch end plate to lower clutch end 1ST CLUTCH END PLATES
plate, then put the special tool on the end plate (A).
1 22551-P7W-003 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
2 22552-P7W-003 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
3 22553-P7W-003 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
4 22554-P7W-003 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)
5 22555-P7W-003 3.5 mm (0.138 in.)
6 22556-P7W-003 3.6 mm (0.142 in.)
07ZAE-PRP0100 7 22557 -P7W-003 3.7 mm (0.146 in.)
8 22558-P7W-003 3.8 mm (0.150 in.)
9 22559-P7W-003 3.9 mm (0.154 in.)
A
2ND CLUTCH END PLATES
D
1 22551-PY4-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
2 22552-PY4-003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
3 22553-PY 4-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
4 22554-PY 4-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
23. Press the special tool down with 39 N (4 kgf, 9 Ibf) 5 22555-PY 4-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
using a force gauge, and read the dial indicator (B). 6 22556-PY 4-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
The dial indicator reads the clearance (e) between 7 22557 -PY 4-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
the clutch end plate and top disc (D). 8 22558-PY 4-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
Take measurements in at least three places, and 9 22559-PY 4-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
use the average as the actual clearance.
3RD CLUTCH END PLATES
Clutch End Plate-to-Top Disc Clearance:
Service Limit: Mark Part Number Thickness
• 1st Clutch: 1.1-1.3 mm (0.043-0.051 in.' 1 22551-PX4-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
• 2nd Clutch: 2 22552-PX4-003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
• Premium model: 3 22553-PX4-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
0.7-0.9 mm (0.028-0.035 in.' 4 22554-PX4-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
• Type-S model: 5 22555-PX4-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
0.85-1.05 mm (0.033-0.041 in.' 6 22556-PX4-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
• 3rd Clutch: 0.7 -0.9 mm (0.028-0.035 in.' 7 22557 -PX4-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
• 4th Clutch: 0.55-0.75 mm (0.022-0.030 in.' 8 22558-PX4-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
• 5th Clutch: 0.55-0.75 mm (0.022-0.030 in.' 9 22559-PX4-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
24. If the clearance is not within the service limit, select 4TH and 5TH CLUTCH END PLATES
a new clutch end plate from the following table.
NOTE: If the thickest clutch end plate is installed, 1 22561-P7T-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
but the clearance is still over the service limit, 2 22562-P7T-003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
replace the clutch discs and plates as a set. 3 22563-P7T-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
4 22564-P7T-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 22565-P7T-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
6 22566-P7T-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22567 -P7T-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22568-P7T-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22569-P7T-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
BACK
14-445
Protected by AR
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Installation

Exploded View
Bolt Tightening torque: 8 x 1.0 mm: 12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
8 x 1.25 mm: 18 N·m 11.8 kgf.m, 13 Ibf·ft)
6x1.0mm, ATF FEED PIPE,

6x 1.0 mm, 8x 198mm
SERVO Two Bolts
DETENT
BASE 6X1.omm, E~\ ATF FEED PIPES,
/ 8 x 85 mm, Three Pipes
Two Bolts
/ /
ATFSTRAINER \
RePlace~
O-RING
\ /
ATF FEED PIPES,
8x 180.5mm
6xl.Om~~
O-RING
Rep
\
SevenBolt~
ATFFEED
PIPES,
,
ENT REGULATOR
VALVE BODY
8x82mm DETENT -----STATOR SHAFT
Two Pipes ARM SHAFT STATOR SHAFT STOP
TOP
ACCUMULATOR
BODY
ACCUMULATOR BODY
\ _ DOWEL PINS, Two Pins
____---REGULATOR
SEPARATOR PlATE
SEPARATOR PLATE
___---MAIN VALVE BODY

ATFFEED
PIPE,
8x220mm COOLER CHECK VALVE
SPRING
~
ATF
FEED
PIPE
8X1.0~~, ~
Five BOlt.:-----
10x80mm I~........ ATF PUMP DRIVEN GEAR
SERVOBO~ I ~~MAINSEPARATOR
DOWEL/PNS,
Two Pins
SERVOSEPARATO~~g:j!
PLATE ~ ~
. , PLATE
~
S_8/
8x1.0%'n~ / TORQUE CONVERTER
HOUSING
DOWEL PINS, Thre~ Pins

ACCUMULATOR
BODY ATF PUMP DRIVE GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE SPRING
BACK
14-446
Protected by AR
1. Install the main separator plate (A) and three dowel 4. Install the torque converter check valve and spring,
pins on the torque converter housing. Then install and the cooler check valve and spring on the main
the ATF pump drive gear (B), driven gear (C), and valve body, then install the two dowel pins and the
ATF pump driven gear shaft (0). Install the ATF regulator separator plate.
pump driven gear with its grooved and chamfered
side facing down. 5. Install the stator shaft and stator shaft stop.
6. Install the regulator valve body (eight bolts).
7. Install the two dowel pins and the servo separator

plate on the main valve body.
8. Install the control shaft (A) in the torque converter

housing along with the manual valve (B).
2. Install the main valve body (one 6 mm bolt and

three 8 mm bolts). Make sure the ATF pump drive
gear (B) rotates smoothly in the normal operating
direction, and the ATF pump driven gear shaft (0)
moves smoothly in the axial and normal operating
direction.
9. Install the detent arm (C) and arm shaft (0) in the
main valve body (E), then hook the detent arm
spring (F) to the detent arm.
10. Install the servo body (G) (five bolts).
11. Install the top accumulator body separator plate

with two dowel pins on the servo body, then install
the top accumulator body (seven bolts).
B 12. Install the ATF strainer (two bolts).

D
3. If the ATF pump drive gear and ATF pump driven 13. Install the servo detent base (two bolts).
gear shaft do not move smoothly, loosen the main
valve body bolts. Realign the ATF pump driven 14. Install the accumulator body (seven bolts).
gear shaft, and retighten the bolts to the specified
torque, then recheck. Failure to align the ATF pump 15. Install the one ATF feed pipe in the servo body, four
driven gear shaft correctly will result in a seized pipes in the regulator valve body, four pipes in the
ATF pump drive gear or ATF pump driven gear top accumulator body, and one pipe in the
shaft. accumulator body.
BACK
14-447
Protected by AR
Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation
Exploded View
~: 1.25 mm HC:~6~~ GEAR

REVERSE TRANSMISSION HOUSING
SHAFT MOUNTING BOLTS
~f':ft12.7
10x 1.25 mm
44 N·m 14.5 kgf·m. 33 Ibf·ft)
20 kgf.m/
~~~~R:~l~ER ~
~~~':'HA~l
COUNTERSHA ~ ~':;~::':SSION~n rr ~ ff~
~:~.omm
REVERSE GEAr
L
~\. ~ o~
LOCK WASHER ~
Replace. ______
TRANSMISSION HANGER
SHIFT FORK
________ "I
REVERSESELEC~
REVERSESELE~~
HUB ~
COUNTERS HAFT
5TH GEAR
MAINSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
GASKET
Replace.
SECONDARY SHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
COUNTERSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
14-448
BACK
Protected by AR
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the 6. Place the thrust washer (A) in the transmission
following procedure. housing.
,. Install the differential assembly in the torque

converter housing.
2. Ifthe reverse selector hub is press-fitted type, join

the mainshaft, countershaft, and secondary shaft
together, then install them in the torque converter
housing.
3. If the reverse selector hub is not press-fitted type,

install the countershaft, mainshaft, and secondary
shaft in the torque converter housing, then install
the countershaft 5th gear and reverse selector hub
on the countershaft.
4. Turn the shift fork shaft (A) so the large chamfered 7. Place the reverse idler gear (A) in the transmission
hole is facing the fork bolt hole. Then install the housing as shown, then slide it in the direction
shift fork (B) and reverse selector (e) together on shown.
the shift fork shaft and countershaft (0). Secure the
shift fork to the shift fork shaft with the lock bolt (E)
and a new lock washer (F), then bend the lock
washer against the bolt head.
E
6x 1.0 mm
14 N·m 11.4 kgf.m, 10 Ibf·ft)
5. Install the needle bearing, countershaft reverse

gear, and countershaft 2nd gear on the
countershaft.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-449
Protected by AR
Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation (cont'd)
8. Align the spring pin (A) on the control shaft (B) with 11. Engage the reverse idler gear with the counte rshaft
the transmission housing groove (C) by turning the reverse gear and the mainshaft reverse gear. Then
control shaft. install the needle bearings (A), reverse idler gear
shaft (B), and thrust washer (C) in the reverse idler
NOTE: Be careful not to squeeze the end of the gear, and install the reverse idler gear shaft holder
control shaft tips together. If the tips are squeezed (D) on the transmission housing.
together it will cause a faulty shift signal or position
due to the play between the control shaft and the
@:::
B
9. Install three dowel pins and a new gasket on the

torque converter housing.
10. Place the transm ission housing on the torque

converter housing, then install the transmission
housing mounting bolts along with the harness
clamp bracket (A) and transmission hangers (B).
Tighten the bolts in a crisscross pattern in two or
more steps.
TORQUE: 44N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ft)

B
BACK
14-450
Protected by AR
End Cover, 3rd Gears, Idler Gear, and 3rd Clutch Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Remove the locknut and collar.

• Mainshaft holder
07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100 5. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), needle bearing
• Adjustable bearing puller, 25- 40 mm (B), 3rd gear (C), thrust needle bearing (D), 31 x 63.5
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A mm splined washer (E), 3rd clutch assembly (F),
and old conical spring washer (G) on the
1. Install the park lever (A) and park lever stop (B), on countershaft (H). Tighten the old locknut (I) to
the control shaft (C), then install the lock bolt (D) 226 N·m (23.0 kgf·m, 166Ibf·ft).
with a new lock washer (E). Do not bend the lock
tab of the lock washer until step 28. NOTE: Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut.
o
/
6x 1.0mm
2. Lubricate the following parts with ATF:
• Splines of the countershaft, the park gear, and

the old locknut.
• Threads of the countershaft and the old locknut.
• Old conical spring washer.
3. Install the park gear (A) using the old locknut (B)
and a collar (C). Hold the park pawl (D) against the
park gear, then tighten the old locknut until the
shaft splines come out over the park gear splines.
NOTE:
• Do not use an impact wrench.
• Countershaft locknut has left-hand threads.
C------....
D~.
o
(cont'd)
BACK
14-451
Protected by AR
End Cover, 3rd Gears, Idler Gear, and 3rd Clutch Installation (cont'd)
6. Set the dial indicator (A) to the countershaft 3rd 8. Remove the locknut and conical spring washer.
gear (8).
9. Remove the 3rd clutch assembly (A) with the
special tool and a commercially available 3/8-16"
slide hammer (8).
7. Measure the countershaft 3rd gear axial clearance

in at least three places, while moving the
countershaft 3rd gear (A).
Use the average as the actual clearance.
A
If the clearance is out of standard, select the
appropriate 31 x 63.5 mm splined washer in step
16. 10. Remove the parts that were installed in step 5.
STANDARD: 0.015-0.045 mm (0.0006-0.0018 in.) 11. Install the special tool onto the mainshaft.
07GAB-PF501010r
07GAB-PF50100
14-452 BACK
Protected by AR
12. Lubricate the following parts with ATF: 16. If the 3rd gear axial clearance is out of standard
(measured in step n, measure the difference of the
• Splines of the mainshaft 3rd gear and secondary 31 x 63.5 mm splined washer, and select the
shaft idler gear. appropriate splined washer from the table below.
• Threads of the mainshaft and secondary shaft.
• Threads of the old mainshaft and secondary shaft
locknuts.
• Old conical spring washer.
13. Install the mains haft 3rd gear (A) and the old
conical spring washer (8) on the mainshaft (e).
Tighten the old locknut (D) to seat the 3rd gear to SPLINED WASHER, 31 x 63.5 mm
226 N·m (23.0 kgf.m, 166Ibf·ft).
Mark Part Number Difference
NOTE: Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. A 90520-P7W-000 3.503 mm (0.1379 in.)
Do not use an impact wrench. 8 90521-P7W-000 3.490 mm (0.1374 in.)
e 90522-P7W-000 3.477 mm (0.1369 in.)
D 90523-P7W-000 3.464 mm (0.1364 in.)
17. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), needle bearing

(8), 3rd gear (e), thrust needle bearing (D), and 31 x
63.5 mm splined washer (E) on the countershaft (F).
18. Wrap the shaft splines with tape to prevent a-ring

damage, then install new a-rings (G).
19. Remove the tape, then install the 3rd clutch

assembly (H), and old conical spring washer (I).
Tighten the old locknut (J) to 226 N·m (23.0 kgf·m,
166Ibf·ft).

14. Install the secondary shaft idler gear (E) and the old
conical spring washer (F) on the secondary shaft
(G). Tighten the old locknut (H) to seat the
secondary shaft idler gear to 226 N·m (23.0 kgf·m,
166Ibf·ft).
NOTE:
• Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. Do
not use an impact wrench.
• Secondary shaft locknut has left-hand threads.
15. Remove the old locknuts and old conical spring

washers from the mainshaft and secondary shaft.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-453
Protected by AR
End Cover, 3rd Ge t~}· s, Idler Gear, and 3rd Clutch Installation (cont'd)
20. Remove the old locknut and old conical spring 26. Set the park lever in the ~ position, then verify that
washer from the countershaft. the park pawl (A) engages the park gear (B).
21 . Lubricate the threads of each shaft, the new

locknuts, and new conical spring washers with ATF.
22. Install the new conical spring washers (A) in the

B
direction shown, and install the new locknuts (B).
/B A
c
~-e B
E
6x 1.0mm F
14 N·m 11.4 kgf·m, 10 Ibf·ft)
27. If the park pawl does not engage fully, check the
distance between the pawl shaft (e) and the park
23. Tighten the locknuts to 167 N·m (17.0 kgf.m, 123 lever roller pin (D) (see page 14-401).
Ibf·ft).
28. Tighten the lock bolt (E), and bend the lock tab of
NOTE: the lock washer (F) against the lock bolt head.
• Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknuts. Do
not use an impact wrench. 29. Install the end cover (A) with the two dowel pins,
• eountershaft and secondary shaft locknuts have new O-rings, new gasket, harness clamp bracket
left-hand threads. (B), and connector bracket (e). Tighten the 13 bolts
to 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft).
A
25. Stake each locknut into its shaft using a 3.5 mm
punch. c
BACK
14-454
Protected by AR
30. Install the 8 x 12 mm ATF feed pipe (A) with its filter 36. Place the new ATF passage body gasket (A) on the
side into the transmission housing. transmission housing, then install the 8 x 14 mm
dowel pin (8) and the 10 x 25.5 mm ATF feed pipe
6X1.0mm
12N·m
(C) with the new O-ring (D). Install the ATF passage
A body (E) on the transmission housing, if it was
11.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft)
/ removed.
E D
6x 1.0mm 6x 1.0mm
12N·m 12N·m
11.2 kgf·m, 11.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf.ft) 8.7Ibf·ft)
6x1.0mm
31. Install the new gasket (8) in the mounting groove of 12N·m
the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C 11.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ftl
body (C) properly, then install them on the
transmission housing. Do not pinch the gasket.
32. Install the ATF dipstick guide pipe (D) with the new
O-ring (E).
33. Place the new gasket (F) on the transmission

housing, then install the 8 x 18 mm ATF feed pipes
(G) with their filter side into the transmission
housing.
34. Install the new O-rings (H) over the feed pipes, and
install the 8 x 40 mm ATF feed pipe (I).
35. Install the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid

valves A and 8 (J) and the harness clamp bracket
(K).
(cont'd)
BACK
14-455
Protected by AR
End Cover, 3rd Gears, Idle Gear, and 3rd Clutch Installation (cont'd)
37. Install the new ATF filter (A) on the transmission 45. Set the transmission range switch to the (N] position.
housing.
NOTE: The transmission range switch clicks in the
H (N] position.
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
72\/,
C (1.0 kgf·m,
G
6x 1.0mm
6x 1.0mm
9.BN·m
(1.0kgf·m,
~
S.BN·m 7.2Ibf.ft)
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
_____ 8
F
46. Set the control shaft (A) to the (N] position by
turning it.
NOTE: Be careful not to squeeze the end of the

A control shaft tips together. If the tips are squeezed
22N·m together it will cause a faulty shift signal or position
(2.2 kgf·m,
16Ibf·ft) due to the play between the control shaft and the
switch.
K J
2BN·m
(2.9 kgf.m, 21 Ibf·ft)
38. Install the filter line bracket (B) on the ATF filter,
and loosely install the bolts (C).
39. Install the new O-ring (0) to the filter line (E), then
install the filter line on the ATF filter.
40. Secure the end of the filter line on the bracket (F)
with the bolt (G).
41. Secure the filter line on the filter line bracket with
the bolts (H).
42. Tighten the bolts (C) on the filter line bracket to the
specified torque.
43. Install the ATF hose (I) and line bolt (J) with the new
sealing washers (K).
44. Connect the hose to the filter line, and secure it

with the clip (L).
BACK
14-456
Protected by AR
47. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on 49. Connect the 3rd clutch pressure switch connector
the control shaft (8). Take care not to move the (A) and AfT wire harness ground terminal (8) on the
transmission range switch when t ightening its bolts. connector bracket (C), then install the clamps (D) on
the clamp bracket (E).
48. Install the transmission range switch cover (C);
secure the harness with the bolt on the end cover
(D); install the harness clamps (E) on the clamp
brackets (F).
6x 1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m. 8.7Ibf·ft)
0'(
/
//A
"
~: ~:~i1~2
8.7 Ibf·ft)
kgf.m.
D
B
~~
50. Install the switch cover (F).
51 . Install the ATF temperature sensor (G) with the new

O-ring (H), then secure the harness with the bolts.
Connect the sensor connector to the AfT wire
harness connector, then install it on the connector
bracket (C).
52. Install the dipstick.

E F
BACK
14-457
Protected by AR
AfT Differential
THRUST SHIM, 81 mm
~ //THRUSTWASHER
~
, / BEARING OUTER RACE
~'/ Replacement, page 14-462
I~ CARRIER BEARING
~ Replacement, page 14-460
~FINAL DR""iNp~~~4-459
Replacemen ,
~-?Jfr ----CARRIER BEARING

~
..Q,;.- - - - - - - BEARING OUTER RACE
~ THRUST WASHER
14-458 BACK
Protected by AR
Backlash Inspection Final Driven GearICarrier

Replacement
1. Install both axles, and place the differential
assembly on V-blocks (A).
1. Remove the final driven gear from the differential
carrier.
NOTE: The final driven gear bolts have left-hand

threads.
A
2. Check the backlash of the pinion gears (B) with a

dial indicator (C).
STANDARD: 0.175-0.275 mm (0.007-0.011 in.)
3. If the backlash is out of standard, replace the

differential carrier. 2. Install the final driven gear with the chamfered side
on the inner bore facing the differential carrier.
3. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in a

crisscross pattern.
TORQUE: 101 N·m (10.3 kgf.m, 74.5 Ibf·ft)
BACK
14-459
Protected by AR
AfT Differential
Carrier Bearing Replacement

Attachment, 40 x 50 mm 07LAO-PW50601
NOTE:
• The bearing and outer race should be replaced as a
set.
• Inspect and adjust the bearing preload whenever
bearing is replaced.
• Check the bearing for wear and rough rotation. If the
bearing is OK, removal is not necessary.
1. Remove the carrier bearing (A) with a commercially

available bearing puller (B), bearing separator (C),
and stepped adapter (0).
2. Install the new carrier bearings with the special tool

and a press.
NOTE:
• Press the bearing on until it bottom.
• Use the small end of the special tool to install the
bearing.
• Press the bearing on securely so there is no
clearance between the bearing and the
l/07LAD-PW50601
14-460 BACK
Protected by AR
Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Install the oil seal (A) in the transmission housing
• Driver 077 49-00 10000 with the special tools.
• Seal driver attachment 07GAD-PG40101 or
07GAD-PG40100
• Oil seal driver attachment 07 JAD-PH801 01 01749-0010000
2. Remove the oil seal (A) from the transmission

housing (8).
07GAD-PG40101 or
07GAD-PG40100
5. Install the oil seal (A) in the torque converter

A
housing (8).
BACK
14-461
Protected by AR
AIT Differential
Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Install the thrust washer (A) and outer race (B) in
• Driver 07749-0010000 the torque converter housing (C), and use the
• Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100 special tools to make sure the outer race bottoms
out in the housing.
NOTE:
• Replace the bearing with a new one whenever the
outer race is replaced.
• Do not use shim(s) on the torque converter housing A
side.
• Adjust preload after replacing the bearing and outer
race.
• Coat all parts with ATF during installation.
1. Remove the bearing outer race from the

transmission housing by heating the housing to
about 212°F (100°C) with a heat gun. Do not heat
the housing to more than 212°F (100°C).
2. Remove the bearing outer race from the torque

converter housing.
3. Install the thrust shim (A), thrust washer (B), and 07749·0010000
outer race (e) in the transmission housing (D) with
the special tools.
07NAD-PX40100
07NAD·PX40100
14-462
BACK
Protected by AR
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection
Special Tools Required 4. Select the 2.60 mm (0.102 in.) thrust shim from the
• Driver 07149-0010000 table below.
• Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100
• Preload inspection tool 07XAJ-SOK0100 THRUST SHIM, 81 mm
NOTE: If the transmission housing, torque converter No. Part Number Thickness
housing, differential carrier, tapered roller bearing, A 41438-P7T-700 2.05 mm (0.081 in.)
outer race, or thrust shim were replaced, the bearing AA 41438-PG H-OOO 2.075 mm (0.082 in.)
preload must be adjusted. B 41439-P7T-700 2.10 mm (0.083 in.)
BB 41439-PGH-000 2.125 mm (0.084 in.)
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), thrust washer C 41440-P7T-700 2.15 mm (0.085 in.)
(B), and thrust shim (C) from the transmission CC 41440-PGH-000 2.175 mm (0.086 in.)
housing (D) by heating the housing to about 212°F 0 41441-P7T-000 2.20 mm (0.087 in.)
(100°C) with a heat gun (E). Do not heat the housing DO 41441-PGH-000 2.225 mm (0.088 in.)
in excess of 212°F (100°C). E 41442-P7T-000 2.25 mm (0.089 in.)
EE 41442-PGH-000 2.275 mm (0.090 in.)
NOTE: Let the transmission housing cool to room F 41443-P7T-000 2.30 mm (0.091 in.)
temperature before adjusting the bearing preload. FF 41443-PGH-000 2.325 mm (0.092 in.)
G 41444-P7T-000 2.35 mm (0.093 in.)
GG 41444-PGH-000 2.375 mm (0.094 in.)
H 41445-P7T-000 2.40 mm (0.094 in.)
HH 41445-PGH-000 2.425 mm (0.095 in.)
I 4 1446-P7T-000 2.45 mm (0.096 in.)
II 41446-PG H-OOO 2.475 mm (0.097 in.)
J 41447-P7T-000 2.50 mm (0.098 in.)
JJ 41447-PGH-000 2.525 mm (0.099 in.)
K 41448-P7T-000 2.55 mm (0.100 in.)
KK 41448-PGH-000 2.575 mm (0.101 in.)
L 41449-P7T-000 2.60 mm (0.102 in.)
LL 41449-PGH-000 2.625 mm (0.103 in.)
M 41450-P7T-000 2.65 mm (0.104 in.)
MM 41450-PG H-OOO 2.675 mm (0.105 in.)
N 41451-P7T-000 2.70 mm (0.106 in.)
NN 41451-PG H-OOO 2.725 mm (0.107 in.)
0 41452-P7T-000 2.75 mm (0.108 in.)
00 41452-PGH-000 2.715 mm (0.109 in.)
P 41453-P7T-000 2.80 mm (0.110 in.)
PP 41453-PGH-000 2.825 mm (0.111 in.)
a 41454-P7T-000 2.85 mm (0.112 in.)
2. Replace the tapered roller bearing when the outer 00 41454-PGH-000 2.875 mm (0.113 in.)
race is to be replaced. R 41455-P7T-000 2.90 mm (0.114 in.)
RR 41455-PG H-OOO 2.925 mm (0.115 in.)
3. Do not use a shim on the torque converter housing S 41456-P7T-000 2.95 mm (0.116 in.)
side. SS 41456-PGH-000 2.975 mm (0.117 in.)
T 41457 -P7T-000 3.00 mm (0.118 in.)
TT 41457 -PG H-OOO 3.025 mm (0.119 in.)
U 41458-P7T-000 3.05 mm (0.120 in.)
(cont'd)
BACK
14-463
Protected by AR
AfT Differential
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection (cont'd)
5. Install the thrust shim (A), thrust washer (B), and 8. Install the differential assembly (A), gasket (B), and
bearing outer race (C) in the transmission housing dowel pins (C) on the torque converter housing (D).
(D). Align the spring pin on the control shaft (E) with the
transmission housing groove.
10x 1.25mm
44 N·m 14.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf.ft)
~ H
~~ [ [ G
G
6. Drive the outer race with the special tools, and
install it securely in the transmission housing.
7. Check that there is no clearance between the thrust

washer, outer race, shim, and transmission
housing. B
9. Install the transmission housing (F) with the

transmission hangers (G) and harness clamp
07NAD-PX40100 bracket (H), then tighten the bolts.
14-464 BACK
Protected by AR
10. Rotate the differential assembly in both directions

to seat the bearings.
11. Measure the starting torque of the differential

assembly with the special tools, a torque wrench
(A) and a socket (8). Measure the starting torque at
normal room temperature in both directions.
STANDARD:
New bearing: 2.7 - 3.9 N·m
(28-40 kgf·cm, 24-35Ibf·in)
Reused bearings: 2.5 - 3.6 N·m
(25-37 kgf·cm, 22-32Ibf·in)
07XAJ-SOK0100
12. To increase the starting torque, increase the

thickness ofthe shim. To decrease the starting
torque, decrease the thickness of the shim.
Changing the shim to the next size will increase or
decrease starting torque about
0.3-0.4 N·m (3-4 kgf·cm, 3-3Ibf·in).
BACK
14-465
Protected by AR
Transaxle
Drivelinel Axle
Special Tools ................................................................. 16-2
Driveshaft Inspection ................................................... 16-3
Driveshafts Removal .................................................... 16-3
Driveshafts Disassembly ............................................. 16-5
Dynamic Damper Replacement .................................. 16-8
Driveshafts Reassembly .............................................. 16-9
Driveshafts Installation ................................................ 16-19
Intermediate Shaft Removal ........................................ 16-21
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly ................................. 16-21
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly .................................. 16-23
Intermediate Shaft Installation .................................... 16-25
Protected by AR
Driveline/Axle
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty

CD 07LAF-SM40300 Support Base Attachment 1
® 07 MAC-SL00200 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 1
® 07XAC-001020A Threaded Adapter, 24 x 1.5 mm 1
(!) 07746-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
® 07749-0010000 Driver 1
® 07947-SD90101 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
(J) 07947-4630100 Fork Seal Driver, 39.2 x 49.5 x 15 mm 1
® 07947 -6340500 Driver Attachment 1
® 07965-SD90100 Support Base 1
CD ® ®
~
.~ ,
~ ~
(~
I (!) ® ®
~
~
~
.~
'-=='"
- y '
--
(J) ® ®
16-2 BACK
Protected by AR
Driveshaft Inspection Driveshafts Removal
1. Check the inboard boot (A) and the outboard boot Special Tools Required
(B) on the driveshaft (C) for cracks, damage, leaking Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200
grease, and loose boot bands (D). If any damage is
found, replace the boot and boot bands. 1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly.
2. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with

safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-
14).
3. Remove the wheel nuts and front wheels.
2. Turn the driveshaft by hand, and make sure the

splines (E) and joint are not excessively loose.
3. Makp sure the driveshaft is not twisted or cracked;

if it is, replace it. B
4. Lift up the locking tab (A) on the spindle nut (B),

then remove the nut.
5. '99 model: If the left driveshaft is removed, drain

the transmission fluid (see page 14-109). It is not
necessary to drain the transmission fluid when the
right driveshaft is removed.
'00-03 models: If the left driveshaft is removed,
drain the transmission fluid (see page 14-350). It is
not necessary to drain the transmission fluid when
the right driveshaft is removed.
6. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and 10 mm flange

bolts (B and C), then remove the damper fork (D).
(cont'd)
BACK
16-3
Protected by AR
DrivelinelAxle
Driveshafts Removal (cont'd)
7. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the lower arm ball 10. Pry the inboard joint (A) with a prybar, and remove
joint castle nut (8), and remove the nut. the driveshaft from the differential case or bearing
support as an assembly. Do not pull on the
driveshaft (8), because the inboard joint may come
apart. Draw the driveshaft straight out to avoid
damaging the differential oil seal or the
intermediate shaft outer seal.
NOTE: Use the following procedure if the left axle

inboard joint is stuck in the differential.
-1 Remove the intermediate shaft.

-2 Look in the right side of the differential, and
9 ___ 8 center the set ring on the end of the inboard
joint with a long flat tip screwdriver.
~---A -3 Pry the inboard joint away from the differential
as described in step 10.
8. Separate the ball joint from the lower arm (e) with
the special tool (see page 18-9).
9. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint from the

front wheel hub using a plastic hammer.
A
Right driveshaft with intermediate shaft:
BACK
16-4
Protected by AR
Driveshafts Disassembly
Special Tools Required Low Profile Type

• Threaded adapter, 24 x 1.5 mm 07XAe-001020A
• Slide hammer set, commercially available
• Boot band pincers, commercially available
Inboard Joint Side:
1. Remove the set ring from the inboard joint.
3. Make a mark (A) on each roller (B) and inboard joint

(e) to identify the locations of rollers and grooves
in the inboard joint. Then remove the inboard joint
on the shop towel (0). Be careful not to drop the
rollers when separating them from the inboard
joint.
2. Remove the boot bands. Be careful not to damage

the boot and dynamic damper.
B
• If the boot band is a double loop type (A). lift up
the band bend (B).
• If the boot band is a welded type, cut the boot
band.
• If the boot band is a low profile type (e), pinch the
boot band using a commercially available boot
band pincers (0).
Double Loop Type

A
B
(cont'd)
BACK
16-5
Protected by AR
Drivelinel Axle
Driveshafts Disassembly (cont'd)
4. Make a mark (A) on the rollers (8 or e) and spider Outboard Joint Side:
(0) to identify the locations of rollers on the spider,
then remove the rollers. 1. Remove the boot bands. Be careful not to damage
the boot and dynamic damper.
NOTE: The roller (8) is '01-03 models; roller (e) is
for '99-00 models. • If the boot band is a double loop type (A), lift up
the band bend (B).
B • If the boot band is an ear clamp type (e), lift up
I the three tabs (0) with a screwdriver.
~.
Double Loop Type (Rubber type boot)
~ \
5. Remove the circlip (E).
6. Mark the spider (0) and driveshaft (F) to identify the

position of the spider on the shaft. Ear Clamp Type (TPE type boot)
7. Remove the spider (0).
8. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape

(A) to prevent damage to the boot.
9. Remove the inboard boot. Be careful not to damage

the boot.
10. Remove the vinyl tape.
BACK
16-6
Protected by AR
2. Slide the outboard boot (A) to the inboard joint side. 5. Carefully clamp the driveshaft in a vise.
Be careful not to damage the boot.
A
/ 6. Remove the outboard joint (A) using the special
3. Wipe off the grease to expose the drives haft and tool and a commercially available 5/8" x 18 slide
the outboard joint inner race. hammer (B).
4. Make a mark (A) on the driveshaft (B) at the same 7. Remove the driveshaft from the vise.
position of the outboard joint end (C).
8. Remove the stop ring from the driveshaft.
(cont'd)
BACK
16-7
Protected by AR
DrivelinelAxle
Driveshafts Disassembly (co nt'd) Dynamic Damper Replacement
9. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape 1. Remove the inboard joint (see page 16-5).
(A) to prevent damage to the boot.
2. Remove the dynamic damper bands. Be careful not
to damage the dynamic damper (see page 16-5).
• If the boot band is a welded type, cut the boot

band.
• If the boot band is a double loop type, lift up the
band bend, and push it into the clip.
• If the boot band is a low profile type, pinch the
boot band using the commercially available boot
band pincers.
3. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape

(A) to prevent damage to the dynamic damper.
10. Remove the outboard boot. Be careful not to

damage the boot.
11 . Remove the vinyl tape.
4. Remove the dynamic damper. Be careful not to

damage the dynamic damper.
5. Adjust the position of the new dynamic damper to

the figure below.
'99 model: 251-255 mm (9.9 - 10.0 in.)

'00-03 models: 276.3 - 281.3 mm (10.88 - 11.07 in.)
~modM I' .:
~~
'~3m_ r -I
~~
6. Install the dynamic damper band (see step 13 on
page 16-13).
7. Install the inboard joint (see step 2 on page 16-19).
BACK
16-8
Protected by AR
Driveshafts Reassembly
Exploded View
'99-01 models
/ ............... ~99-00 models
/ ~ ...... )
/ /4 /
l....... /
:
~CLlPJi/ ................ / ROLLER

DOUBLE LOOP BAND
~~/ . ~S~DER
~'; ()
Replace.
(Replacement parts only)
()
~
packcav:::~th
j
'@)1/Io
i............
specified amount of grease.
.I 'O-(@;~ ~
-
.................Y
. ../ f
. 0
~~
INBOARD BOOT
Pack cavity with

'01 model ~T:Jk:I
~
V LOW PROFILE BAND
Replace.
~
'DOUBLE LOOP BAND
~ Replace.
-------
DYNAMIC DAMPER/
DYNAMIC DAMPER BAND
Replace.
DRIVES HAFT
(cont'd)
BACK
16-9
Protected by AR
DrivelinelAxle
Driveshafts Reassembly (cc ,t'd)
Exploded View
'02-03 models
ROLLER
a~ (j DOUBLE LOOP BAND
~~t~
/~
Replace.
/
"'DE" ()
------------ ~
O ~ '"k
~
INBOARD BOOT
Pack cavity with

®- -
w;:!,,,, 0' ,re.".
~~;"d.mo ",;Iy
LOW PROFILE BAND

A Replace.
V'DOUBLE LOOP BAND
~
Replace.
(Replacemen t parts only)
DYNAMIC DAMPER/
DYNAMIC DAMPER BAND
Replace.
EAR CLAMP BAND

RePlace. OUTBOARD BOOT
/
(TPEI EAR CLAMP BAND
~
Pack cavity with
16-10 BACK
Protected by AR
Special Tools Required 3. Install the spider (A) on the driveshaft by aligning
o Boot band tool, KD-3191 or equivalent, commercially the marks (B) on the spider and end of the
available driveshaft.
o Boot band pincers, Kent-Moore J-35910 or equivalent,
commercially available B O---c

NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during
this procedure. ~A
B~
Inboard Joint Side:
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent

damage to the inboard boot.
4. Fit the circiip (C) into the driveshaft groove. Always

rotate the circlip in its groove to make sure it is fully
seated.
A
5. Fit the rollers (A or B) onto the spider (C) with their
high shoulders facing outward, and note these
items;
o Reinstall the rollers in their original positions on

the spider by aligning the marks (C).
2. Install the inboard boot on the driveshaft, then o Hold the driveshaft pointed up to prevent the
remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to damage the rollers from falling off.
inboard boot. o The roller (A) is for '01-03 models, roller (B) is
for '99-00models.
(cont'd)
BACK
16-11
Protected by AR
DrivelinelAxle
Driveshafts Reassembly (cont'd)
6. Pack the inboard joint with the joint grease 8. Make sure the ends of the boot are seated in the
included in the new driveshaft set. grooves in the driveshaft and joint, then install the
boot bands.
Grease quantity
'99-01 models Inboard joint: o For the double loop type, go to step 12.
120-130 9 (4.2 - 4.6 oz) (Replacement boot bands only)
'02-03 models Inboard joint: o For the low profile type, go to step 9.
150-160 9 (5.3-5.7 OZ)
9. Install the new low profile band (A) onto the boot
(8), then hook the tab (C) of the band.
7. Fit the inboard joint (A) onto the driveshaft, and

note these items:
o Reinstall the inboard joint (A) onto the driveshaft 10. Close the hook portion of the band (A) with a
by aligning the marks (8) on the inboard joint and commercially available boot band pincers (8), then
the rollers. hook the tabs of the band.
o Hold the driveshaft with the inboard joint
pointing up to prevent it from falling off.
o For '99-00 models, align the roller holders (C)
with the grooves in the inboard joint.
~'.'
/~
. .
c 11. Install the boot band on the other end of the boot,
and repeat steps 9 and 10.
BACK
16-12
Protected by AR
12. Adjust the inboard joint until the rollers are in the 16. Thread the free end of the band through the nose
middle of the joint. section of the commercially available boot band
tool KD-3191 or equivalent (A), and into the slot on
13. Fit the boot ends onto the driveshaft and the the winding mandrel (8).
inboard joint, then install the new double loop band
(A) onto the boot.
14. Pull up the slack in the band by hand.
15. Make a mark (A) on the band 10-14 mm

(0.4-0.6 in.) from the clip (8).
17. Place a wrench on the winding mandrel of the boot
band tool, and tighten the band until the marked
spot (C) on the band meets the edge of the clip.
A
18. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of
the band 90° to the clip. Center-punch the clip, then
fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
(cont'd)
BACK
16-13
Protected by AR
DrivelinelAxle
19. Unwind the boot band tool, and cut off the excess 22. Install the new set ring.
free end of the band to leave a 5 -1 0 mm
(0.2-0.4 in.) tail protruding from the clip.
\))
20. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it down with a
hammer.
NOTE:
• Make sure the band and clip do not interfere with
anything, and the band does not move .
• Remove any grease remaining on the
surrounding surfaces.
21. Repeat steps 12 through 20 for the band on the

other end of the boot.
BACK
16-14
Protected by AR
Outboard Joint Side: 5. Install the new stop ring into the drives haft groove
(A).
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent
damage to the outboard boot.
Rubber type
6. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the outboard joint (B)

until the stop ring (e) is close to the joint.
TPEtype
/
B
2. Install the new boot bands (B) (TPE type).
3. Install the outboard boot. Be careful not to damage

the outboard boot.
4. Remove the vinyl tape.
(cont'd)
BACK
16-15
Protected by AR
DrivelinelAxle
7. To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the 9. Pack the outboard joint (A) with the joint grease
driveshaft and joint, and drop them from about included in the new joint boot set.
10 cm (4 in.) onto a hard surface. Do not use a
hammer as excessive force may damage the Grease quantity
driveshaft. Be careful not to damage the threaded Outboard joint (Rubber): 130-140 g (4.6-4.9 oz)
section (A) of the outboard joint. Outboard joint (TPE): 140-150 g (4.9-5.3 oz)
10. Adjust the length of the driveshafts to the figure

10cm below, then adjust the boots to halfway between
(4 in.)
full compression and full extension. Make sure the
ends of the boots seat in the groove of the
driveshaft and joint.
8. Check the alignment of the paint mark (A) with the '99 model:
outboard joint end (B). Left Driveshaft: 542-547 mm (21.3-21.5 in.'
Right Driveshaft:532-537 mm (20.9-21.1 in.)
'00-03 models:
Left Driveshaft: 554-559 mm (21.8-22.0 in.)
Right Driveshaft:544-549 mm (21.4-21.6 in.)
'99 model
I' 'I
~~
'00-03 models
50: 'I
·IIIIII~
BACK
16-16
Protected by AR
11. Install the boot bands. 15. Make a mark (A) on the band 10 - 14 mm
(0.4-0.6 in.) from the clip (B) .
• For rubber type boot, go to step 12.
B
• For TPE type boot, go to step 22.
12. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (B) and A
outboard joint (C).
16. Thread the free end of the band through the nose
section of the commercially available boot band
tool KD-3191 or equivalent(A), and into the slot on
B
the winding mandrel (B).
13. Fit the boot ends onto the driveshaft and the
inboard joint, then install the new double loop band
(A) onto the boot.
14. Pull up the slack in the band by hand.

17. Place a wrench on the winding mandrel ofthe boot
band tool, and tighten the band until the marked
spot (C) on the band meets the edge of the clip.
(cont'd)
BACK
16-17
Protected by AR
Driveline/Axle
18. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of 20. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it down with a
the band 90° to the clip. Center punch the clip, then hammer.
fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
NOTE:
• Make sure the band and clip do not interfere with
anything, and the band does not move .
• Remove any grease remaining on the
surrounding surfaces.
A
19. Unwind the boot band tool, and cut off the excess
free end of the band to leave 5 -1 0 mm
(0.2-0.4 in.) from the clip.
21. Install the boot band on the other end of the boot,
and repeat step 14 through 20.
22. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (B) and
outboard joint (C).
16-18
BACK
Protected by AR
Driveshafts Installation
23. Close the ear portion (A) of the band with a 1. Apply 0.3-1.0 g (0.01-0.04 oz) of specified grease
commercially available boot band pincers Kent- to the whole splined surface (A) of the left
Moore J-35910 or equivalent (B). driveshaft (for vehicles with intermediate shaft).
After applying grease, remove the grease from the
splined grooves at intervals of 2-3 splines and
from the set ring groove (B) so that air can bleed
from the intermediate shaft.
A B
\ \
24. Check the clearance between the closed ear portion

of the band. If the clearance is not within the
standard, close the ear portion of the band further.
2. Install a new set ring onto the set ring groove of the
6.0 mm (0.24 in.) MAX
driveshaft.
3. Clean the areas where the driveshaft contacts the

differential thoroughly with solvent or brake
cleaner, and dry with compressed air. Insert the
inboard end (A) of the driveshaft into the
differential (B) or intermediate shaft (C) unitl the set
ring (0) locks in the groove (E).
A D E
~-,~
3.0 mm (0.12 in.) MAX
25. Repeat steps 23 and 24 for the band on the other

end of the boot. B
(cont'd)
BACK
16-19
Protected by AR
DrivelinelAxle
Driveshafts Installation (cont'd)
4. Install the outboard joint (A) into the front hub (B). 7. Install the damper fork (A) over the driveshaft and
onto the lower arm. Install the damper in the
damper fork so the aligning tab (B) is aligned with
the slot in the damper fork. Loosely install the
flange bolt (C).
5. Install the knuckle (A) onto the lower arm (B). Be -E

10 x 1.25 mm 12 x 1.25 mm
careful not to damage the ball joint boot (C). Wipe 43N·m 64N·m
(4.4 kgf·m, 32 Ibf·ft) (6.5 kgf·m, 47 Ibf·ft)
off the grease before tightening the nut at the ball
joint. Torque the new castle nut (D) to the lower
torque specification, then tighten it only far enough 8. Loosely install the flange bolt (0) and a new self-
to align the slot with the pin hole. 00 not align the locking nut (E).
nut by loosening.
9. Install a new spindle nut (A), then tighten the nut.
After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut
shoulder (B) against the driveshaft.
A
'7·m.,. .
12x 1.5 mm
108N·m
c ~<, -\6
Obl·ft,
B
12x 1.25 mm
49-S9N.m E
(5.0-6.0 kgf·m, 36-43 Ibf·ft)
A
24x 1.5mm
6. Install the new cotter pin (E) into the pin hole, and 245 N·m (25.0 kgf·m, 181 Ibf·ft)
bend the cotter pin as shown.
10. Clean the mating surfaces ofthe brake disc and the
front wheel, then install the front wheel with the
wheel nuts.
11. Tighten the flange bolts and the self-locking nut

with the vehicle's weight on the damper.
12. '99 model: Refill the transmission with

recommended fluid (see page 14-109).
'00-03 models: Refill the transmission with
recommended fluid (see page 14-350).
13. Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if

necessary (see page 18-5).
16-20 BACK
Protected by AR
Intermediate Shaft Removal Intermediate Shaft Disassembly

1. '99 model: Drain the transmission fluid (see page Special Tools Required
14-109). • Driver 07749-0010000
'00-03 models: Drain the transmission fluid (see • Driver attachment 07947-6340500
page 14-350). • Support base attachment 07LAF-SM40300
• Support base 07965-5090100
2. Remove the left driveshaft (see page 16-3). • Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
3. Remove the flange bolt (A) and two dowel bolts (B). 1. Remove the heat shield (A) and outer seal (B) from
the bearing support (C).
"\«"(~ " ' 0.

~" ~
6>
4. Remove the intermediate shaft (A) from the 2. Remove the external snap ring (D).
differential. Hold the intermediate shaft horizontal
until it is clear of the differential to prevent damage 3. Press the intermediate shaft (A) out of the
to the differential oil seal (B). intermediate shaft bearing (B) using the special
A tools and a press. Be careful not to damage the
metal rings (C) on the intermediate shaft during
disassembly.
Press
07749-001
~~~~=l~~"965..SD90100
(cont'd)
BACK 16-21
Protected by AR
DrivelinelAxle
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly (cont'd)
4. Remove the internal snap ring.
5. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) out of the

bearing support (B) using the special tools and a
press.
07746-001
07965-SD90100
07LAF-SM40300
16-22 BACK
Protected by AR
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly
Exploded View
FLANGE BOLTS
6x 1.0 mm
10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ftl
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT RING
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT EXTERNAL
~~::::::y '-RING
Grease splines.
0.3-1.0 9 (0.01-0.04 ozl
OUTER SEAL
Replace.
~
Pack the interior of the outer seal.
3.0-4.0 9 10.11-0.14 oz)
(cont'd)
BACK
16-23
Protected by AR
DrivelinelAxle
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 4. Press the intermediate shaft (A) into the shaft
• Driver 07749-0010000 bearing using the special tool and a press.
• Support base attachment 07LAF-SM40300
• Support base 07965-5090100
• Oil seal driver attachment 07947-5090101
• Fork seal driver, 39.2 x 49.5 x 15 mm 07947-4630100
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during

this procedure.
1. Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry

them with compressed air. Do not wash the rubber
parts with solvent.
2. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) into the

bearing support (8) using the special tools and a o
press.
I I I I
----07947-4630100
01749-0010000
5. Seat the external snap ring (A) into the groove of

the intermediate shaft (8).
~
A
3. Seat the internal snap ring into the groove of the

B
bearing support.
A
16-24 BACK
Protected by AR
Intermediate Shaft Installation
6. Pack the interior of the outer seal (A). Install the 1. Use solvent or carburetor cleaner to thoroughly
outer seal into the bearing support (8) using the clean the areas where the intermediate shaft (A)
special tools and a press. contacts the transmission (differential) and dry with
compressed air. Insert the intermediate shaft
07749-0010000
assembly into the differential. Hold the
intermediate shaft horizontal to prevent damage to
the differential oil seal (8).
Peck the interior

of the outer see I.
3.0-4.0g
(0.11-0.14ozl
B A
07~1ti5"5D'901 00
2. Install the flange bolt (A) and two dowel bolts (8).
7. Install the heat shield onto the bearing support.
B
10 x 1.25 mm
3. Install the right driveshaft (see page 16-19).
BACK
16-25
Protected by AR
Steering
Power Steering
Special Tools ................................................................. 17-2
Hard Steering Troubleshooting .................................. 17-7
Steering Wheel Rotational Play Check ....................... 17-8
Power Assist Check with Vehicle Parked .................... 17-8
Power Assist Check at Road Speed ............................ 17-9
Power Steering Speed Sensor Replacement ............. 17-10
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection ................. 17-11
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-0010001 ........... 17-12
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-001000A ........... 17-13
Fluid Leakage Inspection ............................................. 17-14
Pump Belt Inspection and Adjustment ....................... 17-16
Fluid Replacement ........................................................ 17-18
Hoses, Lines and Pressure Switch Replacement ....... 17-19
Pump Replacement ...................................................... 17-21
Pump Overhaul ............................................................. 17-22
Steering Wheel Removal ............................................. 17-27
Steering Wheel Disassembly and Reassembly ......... 17-28
Steering Wheel Installation ......................................... 17-29
Steering Column Removal and Installation ............... 17-30
Steering Column/Tilt Lever Inspection/
Adjustment .................................................................. 17-32
Steering Lock Replacement ......................................... 17-33
Rack Guide Adjustment ............................................... 17-34
Steering Gearbox Removal ......................................... 17-35
Steering Gearbox Overhaul ......................................... 17-38
Steering Gearbox Installation ..................................... 17-69
Tie-Rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement ......................... 17-75
Protected by AR
Power Steering
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool Number --,-. Descr~tion Qty

CD 07GAF-PH70100 Pilot Collar 1
® 07HAG-SF10l00 or 07HAG-SF10l0A Piston Seal Ring Guide 1
® 07HAG-SF1020A or 07HAG-SF10200 Piston Seal Ring Sizing Tool 1
*0 07JGG-001000A or 07JGG-001010A Belt Tension Gauge 1
® 07NAD-SR3020A Cylinder End Seal Remover Attachment 1
(J) 07NAG-SR3090A Valve Seal Ring Sizing Tool 1
® 07RAK-S040121 PIS Joint Adaptor (Hose) 1
® 07VAK-P8AOllA PIS Joint Adaptor (Pump) 1
®l 07VAK-P8A012A PIS Joint Adaptor Plate (Pump) 1
® 07406-0010001 or 07406-001 OOOA PIS Pressure Gauge 1
@ 07725-0030000 Universal Holder 1
@ 077 46-0010100 Attachment, 32x3S mm 1
@ 077 49-00 10000 Driver 1
@ 07916-SASOOO 1 Locknut Wrench, 40 mm 1
@ 07974-SAS020A or 07974-SAS0200 Sleeve Seal Ring Sizing Tool 1
@ 07974-SAS0800 Ball Joint Boot Clip Guide 1
* Included in the Belt Tension Gauge Set, 07TGG-001000A.
0 (j U / ~
'--.-' ." -
"':?"/ ' , '::/
-- ._- .--
, ' -
-'
, ,'
--/
/~ ' -
CD ® ® CD ®
e'= ®
~
, '::..--""'--=-==='-.~'
(J)
rB~
C@
®
0
~';" ;
'~
®
~
~~
@
c;;? / /
~
d _ /
;.,,,, '"
, ,I"
® @ @ (ill @
~
W
~
, :.
~r
~
.<:~
:
, Q
@ @
BACK
17-2
Protected by AR
'99-03 Premium models:
POWER STEERING FLUID

RESERVOIR
Fluid Replacement, page 17-18
Hoses and Lines Replacement, page 17-19 SRS CABLE REEL
Fluid Leakage Inspection, page 17-14 Removal/Installation,
page 23-231
POWER STEERING PUMP

Pump Pressure Test DRIVER'S AIRBAG
with T/N 07406-0010001, page 17-12 ASSEMBLY
Pump Pressure Test Removal/Installation,
with T/N 07406-001000A, page 17-13 page 23-219
Pump Belt Inspection
and Adjustment, page 17-16
Pump Replacement, page 17-21
Pump Overhaul, page 17-22
IGNmON SWITCH
Removal/Installation,
page 17-33
STEERING WHEEL
Steering Wheel Removal,
page 17-27
Steering Wheel Disassembly
and Reassembly, page 17-28
Steering Wheellnstaliation,
page 17-29
STEERING COLUMN
Steering Column Removal and Installation,
page 17-30
Steering Column/Tilt Lever Inspection/
Steering Lock Replacement, page 17-33
POWER STEERING GEARBOX

Rack Guide Adjustment, page 17-34
Steering Gearbox Removal, page 17-35
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH Steering Gearbox Overhaul, page 17-38
Replacement, page 17-19 Steering Gearbox Installation, page 17-69
Troubleshooting, page 11-155 Tie Rod Ball Joint Boot
POWER STEERING SPEED SENSOR
Power Steering Speed Sensor
BACK
17-3
Protected by AR
Power Steering
'02-03 Type-S models:
POWER STEERING FLUID

RESERVOIR
Fluid Replacement, page 17-18
Hoses and lines Replacement, page 17-20
Fluid Leakage Inspection, page 17-15
POWER STEERING PUMP DRIVER'S AIRBAG

Pump Pressure Test ASSEMBLY
with TIN 07406-0010001, page 17-12 Removal, page 23-219
Pump Pressure Test Installation, page 23-220
with TIN 07406-001000A, page 17-13
Pump Belt Inspection
and Adjustment, page 17-16
Pump Replacement, page 17-21
Pump Overhaul, page 17-22
STEERING WHEEL
Steering Wheel Removal,
page 17-27
Steering Wheel Disassembly
and Reassembly, page 17-28
Steering Wheel Installation,
page 17-29
STEERING COLUMN
Steering Column Removal and Installation,
page 17-30
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH Steering Column/Tilt Lever Inspectionl
Replacement, page 17-20 Adjustment, page 17-32
Troubleshooting, page 11-155 Steering Lock Replacement, page 17-33
SRS CABLE REEL
Removal/Installation,
page 23-231
POWER STEERING GEARBOX
Rack Guide Adjustment, page 17-34
Steering Gearbox Removal, page 17-35
Steering Gearbox Overhaul, page 17-54
Steering Gearbox Installation, page 17-72
Tie-Rod Ball Joint Boot
17-4 BACK
Protected by AR
FIn d t he symptom In e ow, an dd o t h ere ate d proce d ures

t h e c h art b' In
.,
t he or d er ,.Iste d untl YOU f In d t he cause.
Symptom Procedure(s) Also check for:
Hard steering Troubleshoot the system (see page 17-7). • Modified
suspension
• Tire sizes, tire
varieties, and air
pressure
Assist (excessively 1. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-34). Front wheel
light steering at 2. Check the power assist at road speed (see page 17-9). alignment (see
high speed) ~aJJe 18-5).
Shock or vibration 1. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-34).
when the wheel is 2. Check the power steering pump belt for slippage and adjust as
turned to full lock necessary (see page 17-16).
3. Replace the steering gearbox (see page 17-35).
Steering wheel will 1. Check cylinder lines A and B for deformation.
not return 2. Check wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
smoothly 3. Replace the steering gearbox (see page 17-35).
4. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-34).
Uneven or rough 1. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-34).
steering 2. Check the power steering pump belt adjustment (see page 17-16).
3. Check for low or erratic engine idle speed (see page 11-157).
4. Check for air in the power steering system due to low fluid level.
5. Check for low fluid level in the power steering reservoir due to
possible leaks in system.
6. Replace the steering gearbox (see pa~e 17-35).
Steering wheel 1. Check power steering pump belt adjustment (see page 17-16).
kicks back during 2. Check the system fluid pressures with TIN 07406-0010001 (see
wide turns page 17-12) or with TIN 07406-001000A (see page 17-13).
Humming 1. Check when the noise occurs. Pump pressure
• If the noise is heard 2 - 3 minutes after starting the engine in
cold weather, this is normal.
• If the noise is heard when the wheel is turn with the vehicle
stopped, this is normal due to the fluid pulsation.
2. Check for the high-pressure hose touching the subframe or body.
3. Check for automatic transmission converter noise.
Remove the power steering belt, and recheck.
Rattle or chattering 1. Check for loose steering components (tie-rod and ball joints).
(Rack rattle) Tighten or replace as necessary.
2. Check the steering column shaft for wobbling. If the steering
columns wobbles, replace the steering column assembly (see
page 17-30).
3. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-34).
4. Check the power steering pump pulley.
• Ifthe pulley is loose, tighten it (see step 31 on page 17-26).
• If the pump shaft is loose, replace the pump (see page 17-21).
(cont'd)
BACK
17-5
Protected by AR
Power Steering
Symptom Procedure(s) Also check for:

Hissing 1. Check the fluid level. If low, fill the reservoir to the proper level
and check for leaks.
2. Check the reservoir for leaks.
3. Check for crushed inlet hose or loose hose clamp allowing air into
the suction side of the system.
Pump noise ,.
4. Check the power steering pump shaft oil seal for leaks.
Compare the pump noise at normal operating temperature to
another alike vehicle, (pump noise up to 2-3 minutes after starting
the engine in cold weather is normal).
2. Remove and inspect the pump for wear and damage (see page 17-
22).
Squeaking Check the power steering belt tension and adjust as necessary
(see page 17-16).
Fluid leaks from 1. Fluid leaks from the top of the valve body unit:
the steering Replace the valve body unit.
gearbox 2. Fluid leaks from the left tie-rod boot:
Replace the valve oil seal on the pinion shaft.
Replace the cylinder end seal on the gearbox side.
3. Fluid leaks from the right tie-rod boot: Replace the cylinder end
seal.
4. Fluid leaks from pinion shaft near the lower steering joint bolt:
Replace the valve body unit.
Fluid leaks from 1. Fluid leaks from the sensor outlet or the sensor inlet hose fittings
power steering on the vehicle speed sens or (VSS)/power steering speed sensor:
speed sensor Replace the hose clamps on the fittings and recheck. If it still leaks,
replace the hoses (see page 17-19).
2. Fluid leaks from the sensor body mating surfaces. Replace the
vehicle speed sensor (VSS)/power steering speed sensor (see
page 17-10).
Fluid leaks from 1. Fluid leaks from the cylinder line A or B connections (flare nuts):
lines Tighten the connection and retest. If it still leaks, replace the fitting
I
O-rings.
2. Fluid leaks from a damaged cylinder line A or B:
Replace the cylinder line (see page 17-38).
3. Fluid leaks from the pump outlet hose or return line fitting on the
valve body unit (flair nuts): Tighten the fitting and retest. If it still
leaks, replace the hose, line, or valve body unit as necessary (see
page 17-19).
.
Fluid leaks from 1. Fluid leaks from the front oil seal: Replace the front oil seal.
pump 2. Fluid leaks from the power steering pump housing:
Replace the leaking O-rings or seals (see page 17-22), and if
necessary replace the power steering pump (see page 17-21).
Fluid leaks from 1. Fluid leaks from around the reservoir cap: Fluid level is too high:
reservoir drain the reservoir to the proper level.
2. Fluid leaks from reservoir: Check the reservoir for cracks and
replace as necessary. Aerated fluid: check for an air leak on the
inlet side of pump.
Fluid leaks from 1. Check the fitting for loose bolts. If the bolts are tight, replace the
pump outlet hose fitting O-ring.
(high-Qressure) 2. Fluid leaks at the swagged joint: Replace the outlet hose
Fluid leaks from Check the hose for damage, deterioration, or improper assembly.
pump inlet hose Replace or repair as necessary.
L(LOIi\l-pressure) _. _. --
17-6 BACK
Protected by AR
Hard Steering Troubleshooting
,. Check the power assist with vehicle parked (see Is the pressure 7,600-8,300 kPa (78-85 kgflcnf,
page 17-8). 1,110-1,210 psi) or less?
YES-Go to step 7.
Is the power assist more than 25N (2.5 kg', 5.5 NO-Faulty gearbox .•
Ibf)?
7. Adjust the rack guide (see page 17-34), and retest.
YES-Go to step 2.
NO - Power assist is OK.• Is the steering OK?
2. Measure the power assist with the sensor inlet YES-Repair is completed .•
fitting and hose plugged (see page 17-9). NO-Faulty gearbox.•
Is the power assist more than 25 N (2.5 kgf, 5.5 8. Check for fluid leaks at the hoses, lines, joints and
Ibf)? connections.
YES - Go to step 3. Are the hoses, lines, joints and connections OK?
NO- Go to step 8.
YES - Faulty power steering speed sensor or valve
3. Measure steady-state fluid pressure from the pump body unit.•
at idle with TIN 07406-0010001 (see page 17-12) or NO- Repair or replace the lines or hoses .•
with TIN 07406-001000A (see page 17-13).
9. Check the supply and return lines between the
Is thl'! pressure 1,500 kPa (15 kgflcnf, 213 psi) or pump and the gearbox for clogging and
less? deformation.
YES-Go to step 4. Are the lines clogged or deformed?

NO- Go to step 9.
YES - Repair or replace the lines .•
4. Measure the pump relief pressure at idle with TIN NO-Faulty valve body unit..
07406-0010001 (see page 17-12) or with TIN 07406-
001000A (see page 17-13). 10. Check the flow control valve (see page 17-22) for
smooth movement and leaks.
Is the pressure 7,600-8,300 kPa (78-85 kgflcnf,
1,110-1,210 psi) or less? Is the flow control valve OK?
YES-Go to step 5. YES-Faulty pump assembly.•

NO-Go to step 10. NO-Faulty flow control valve .•
5. With a spring scale, measure the power assist in 11. Check the cylinder lines A and B for deformation.
both directions, to the left and to the right.
Are the A or B lines deformed?
Are the 2 measurements within 5.0 N (0.51 kgf,
1.12Ibf) of each other? YES- Replace the lines.•
NO-Go to step 12.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 11. 12. Check for a bent rack shaft or misadjusted rack
guide (too tight).
6. Measure the fluid pressure with both pressure
gauge valves open (if so equipped), while turning Is the rack shaft bent or the rack guide adjusted
the steering wheel fully to the left and fully to the too tight?
right.
YES - Replace the rack shaft or readjust the rack
guide .•
NO- Faulty valve body unit.•
BACK
17-7
Protected by AR
Power Steering
Steering Wheel Rotational Play Power Assist Check With Vehicle

Check Parked
1. Turn the front wheels to the straight ahead position. 1. Check the power steering fluid level (see page 17-
18) and pump belt tension (see page 17-16).
2. Measure how far you can turn the steering wheel
left and light without moving the front wheels. 2. Start the engine, let it idle, and turn the steering
wheel from lock-to-Iock several times to warm up
• If the play is within the limit, the gearbox and the fluid.
linkages are OK .
• If the play exceeds the limit, adjust the rack guide 3. Attach a commercially available spring scale to the
(see page 17-34). If the play is still excessive after steering wheel. With the engine idling and the
rack guide adjustment, inspect the steering vehicle on a clean, dry floor, pull the scale as
linkage and gearbox (see page 17-11). shown and read it as soon as the tires begin to turn.
ROTATIONAL PLAY: 0-10 mm 10-0.39 in.' • If the scale reads no more than 25 N (2.5 kgf, 5.5
Ibt) the gearbox and pump are OK.
-+1 I+- • If the scale reads more than 25 N (2.5 kgf, 5.5 Ibt),
go on step 4.
17-8 BACK
Protected by AR
Power Assist Check at Road Speed
4. Stop the engine. Disconnect the sensor inlet hose Special Tools Required
(A) from the power steering speed sensor (B), and Bypass tube joint 07406-0010101 (Included with 07406-
plug (C) the hose and sensor fitting. (The VSS 0010001 or 07406-001000A)
connector is only on vehicles equipped with the
navigation system). 1. Check the power steering fluid level (see page 17-
A
2. Start the engine, let it idle, and turn the steering
wheel from lock-to-Iock several times to warm up
B the fluid.
3. Stop the engine, to simulate speeds above 62 mph

(100 km/h), disconnect the sensor inlet hose (A) and
sensor outlet hose (B) from the power steering
speed sensor (C), and connect them to the bypass
tube joint (D). Plug (E) the end of the bypass tube
joint (The vehicle speed pulse connector is only on
vehicles equipped with the navigation system).
5. Start the engine, and let it idle.
• Ift"'e scale reads still more than 25 N (2.5 kgf, 5.5

Ibf) the power steering speed sensor is OK.
The problem maybe the pump or gearbox.
• Measure the pump pressure with TIN 07406-

0010001 (see page 17-12) or with TIN 07406-
001000A (see page 17-13).
• Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-34).
• If the scale reads 25 N (2.5 kgf, 5.5 Ibf) or less, o

07406-0010101
check for fluid leaks at the speed sensor inlet
hose. If there are no leaks in the hose, the power
steering speed sensor is leaking internally.
Replace the speed sensor (see page 17-10).
(cont'd)
BACK
17-9
Protected by AR
Power Steering
Power Assist Check at Road Speed Power Steering Speed Sensor

(cont'd) Replacement
4. Attach a comercially available spring scale to the 1. On vehicles equipped with the navigation system,
steering wheel. Start the engine, with the idling and disconnect the VSS connector (A) from the power
vehicle on a clean, dry floor, pull the scale as steering speed sensor (8). Remove the sensor
shown and read it as soon as the tires begin to turn. mounting bolt (C), and remove the power steering
speed sensor.
o If the scale reads more than 25 N (2.5 kgf, 5.5 Ibf)
the valve body unit is OK. The problem is in the A
power steering speed sensor, replace it (see page
17-10). and road test. E
Vo
/
o If the scale reads 25 N (2.5 kgf, 5.5 Ibf) or less,
problem is in the pump. Check the pump
pressure with TIN 07406-0010001 (see page 17-
12), or with TIN 07406-001000A (see page 17-13).
C
19 Nom /1.9 kgf·m,
141bfoftl
2. Disconnect the sensor inlet hose (D) and sensor

outlet hose (E), and plug the hose ends.
3. Install the power steering speed sensor in the

reverse order of removal, and note these items;
o Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (see page

17-18).
o Start the engine and run it at first idle, then turn
the steering wheellock-to-Iock several times to
bleed air from the system.
BACK
17-10
Protected by AR
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection
DUST SEAL
Inspect for damage and deterioration.
STEERING COLUMN
Inspect for loose column
mounting bolts and nuts.
JOINTS
Check for loose joint bolts.
TIE-ROD LOCKNUT
Check for loose locknut.
STEERING GEARBOX
Inspect loose mounting bolts.
GEARBOX MOUNTING CUSHIONS TIE-ROD END BALL JOINT
Inspect for deterioration. Inspect for faulty movement
and damage.
BALL JOINT BOOT

BOOT
BACK
17-11
Protected by AR
Power Steering
Pump Pressure Test with TIN 07406-0010001
Special Tools Required 5. Fully open the shut-off valve (A).

• PIS joint adapter (pump) 07VAK-P8A011A
• PIS joint adapter plate (pump) 07VAK-P8A012B
• PIS joint adapter (hose) 07RAK-S040121
• PIS pressure gauge 07406-0010001
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine

whether the trouble is in the pump or gearbox.
1. Check the power steering fluid level (see page 17-

18) and pump belt tension (see page 17-16). B
2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the

pump outlet with care so as not to spill the power
steering fluid on the frame and other parts, Install
the PIS joint adapter (pump) on the pump outlet (B)
with the PIS joint outlet plate. 6. Fully open the pressure control valve (B).
8. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-Iock several

times to warm the fluid to operating temperature.
9. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the

engine is idling. If the pump is in good condition,
6x1.0mm
_ 11 N·m the gauge should read less than 1,500 kPa
~ 11.1 kgf·m, 8 Ibf·ft) (15 kgf/cm2, 213 psi). If it reads high, check for:
r-__~
07406-0010001 • Clogged or deformed feed or return line between
the pump and gearbox.
• Clogged valve body unit.
10. Close the pressure control valve, then close the

shut-off valve gradually until the pressure gauge
needle is stable. Read the pressure.
6x 1.0 mm INOTICEI
11 N·m 07VAK-P8A012B Do not keep the pressure control valve closed more
than 5 seconds or the pump could be damaged by
3. Connect the PIS joint adapter (hose) to the PIS over-heating.
pressure gauge, then connect the pump outlet hose
(A) to the PIS joint adapter (hose). 11. Immediately open the pressure control valve fully.
If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should
4. Install the PIS pressure gauge to the PIS joint read at least 7,600 - 8,300 kPa (78 - 85 kgf/cm2 ,
adapter (pump). 1,110- 1,210 psi). A low reading means pump
output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace
the pump.
17-12 BACK
Protected by AR
Pump Pressure Test with TIN 07406-001000A
Special Tools Required 5. Open the pressure control valve (A) fully.
• PIS joint adapter (pump) 07VAK-P8A011A
A
• PIS joint adapter plate (pump) 07VAK-P8A0128
• PIS joint adapter (hose) 07RAK-S040121
• PIS pressure gauge 07406-001000A
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine

whether the trouble is in the pump or gearbox.
1. Check the power steering fluid level (see page 17-

2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the

pump outlet with care so as not to spill the power
steering fluid on the frame and other parts, Install
the PIS joint adapter (pump) on the pump outlet (8)
with the PIS joint outlet plate. 6. Start the engine and let it idle.
07RAK-S040121 7. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-Iock several

times to warm the fluid to operating temperature.
8. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the

engine is idling. If the pump is in good condition,
the gauge should read less than 1,500 kPa
(15 kgf/cm2, 213 psi). If it reads high, check for:
• Clogged or deformed feed or return line between

the pump and gearbox .
• Clogged valve body unit.
9. Close the pressure control valve gradually and read

07VAK-P8A011A
the pressure.
INOTICE I
Do not keep the pressure control valve closed more
than 5 seconds or the pump could be damaged by
6x 1.0mm over-heating.
11 N·m 07VAK-P8A012B
(1 .1 kgf·m, 8Ibf·ft)
10. Immediately open the pressure control valve fully.
3. Connect the PIS joint adapter (hose) to the PIS If the pump is in good condition, the gauge should
pressure gauge, then connect the pump outlet hose read at least 7,600-8,300 kPa (78-85 kgf/cm2,
(A) to the PIS joint adapter (hose). 1,110-1,210 psi). A low reading means pump
output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace
4. Install the PIS pressure gauge to the PIS joint the pump.
adapter (pump).
BACK
17-13
Protected by AR
Power Steering
Fluid Leakage Inspection
PUMP ASSEMBLY
Check for leaks at the pump
seal, inlet and outlet fittings.
GEARBOX and VALVE BODY UNIT

Check for leaks at the mating surface
and flare nut connections.
HOSES and LINES

Inspect hoses for damage, leaks, interference and twisting.
Inspect fluid lines for damage, rusting and leakage.
Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections.
17-14
BACK
Protected by AR
GEARBOX and VALVE BODY UNIT

Check for leaks at the mating surface
and flare nut connections.
HOSES and LINES

Inspect hoses for damage, leaks, interference and twisting.
Inspect fluid lines for damage, rusting and leakage.
Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections.
BACK
17-15
Protected by AR
Power Steering
Pump Belt Inspection and Adjustment

Special Tools Required Adjustment
Belt tension gauge set 07 JGG-001 OOOA or Belt tension
gauge 07JGG-001010A 3. Loosen the power steering pump mounting nut (A)
and bolt (B).
Belt tension gauge method
Inspection
1. Attach the belt tension gauge to the belt with the

gauge face toward the engine, and measure the
tension of the belt. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions. If the belt is worn or damaged, replace
it.
NOTE: Remove the belt tension gauge carefully to

avoid hitting the gauge reset lever.
B A
24N·m 24N·m
Tension: 12.4 kgf·m, 17 Ibf·ttl 12.4 kgf·m, 17 Ib'·ttl
Used Belt: 390-540 N (40-55 kgf, 88-121Ibf)
New Belt: 740-880 N (75-90 kgf, 165-198Ibf) 4. Turn the adjusting nut (C) to get the proper belt
tension, then retighten the mounting nut and bolt.
5. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel from

lock-to-Iock several times, then stop the engine and
recheck the tension of the belt.
2. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5

minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt
specifications.
17-16 BACK
Protected by AR
Deflection Method Adjustment
Inspection 3. Loosen the power steering pump mounting nut (A)

and bolt (B).
1. Apply a force of 98 N (10 kgf, 22 Ibf) and measure
the deflection between the power steering pump
pulley (A) and the crankshaft pulley (B).
Deflection:
Used Belt: 13.0-16.5 mm (0.51-0.65 in.)
New Belt: 8.5-11.0 mm (0.33-0.43 in.)
B A
24N·m 24N·m
12.4 kgf·m, 17 Ibf·tt) 12.4 kgf·m, 17 Ibf·tt)
4. Turn the adjusting nut (e) to get the proper belt

tension, then retighten the mounting nut and bolt.
5. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel from

lock-to-Iock several times, then stop the engine and
recheck the tension of the belt.
.....
2. If you installed a new belt, run the engine for 5
minutes, then readjust the belt to the used belt
specifications.
BACK
17-17
Protected by AR
Power Steering
Fluid Replacement
Check the reservoir (A) at regular intervals, and add the 1. Raise the reservoir, then disconnect the return hose
recommended fluid as necessary. Always use Honda (A) to drain the reservoir. Take care not to spill the
Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power fluid on the body and parts. Wipe off any spilled
steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause fluid at once.
increased wear and poor steering in cold weather.
SYSTEM CAPACITY:
1.1 I 11.16 US. qt) at disassembly
RESERVOIR CAPACITY:
0.41 (0.42 US. qt)
A
2. Connect a hose (8) of suitable diameter to the

disconnected return hose, and put the hose end in a
suitable container.
3. Start the engine, let it run at idle, and turn the

steering wheel from lock-to-Iock several times.
When fluid stops running out of the hose, shut off
the engine. Discard the fluid.
4. Reinstall the return hose on the reservoir.
5. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (C).
6. Start the engine and run it at fast idle, then turn the
steering from lock-to-Iock several times to bleed air
from the system.
7. Recheck the fluid level and add more if necessary.

Do not fill the reservoir beyond the upper level line.
BACK
17-18
Protected by AR
Hoses, Lines, and Pressure Switch Replacement
Note these items during installation:

• Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or
adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown.
• Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace with the clamps new ones if necessary.
• Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks.
ADJUSTABLE HOSE CLAMP (A) HOSE CLAMP (BI
2.S-S.Smm
(0.01-0.22 in.!
2.S-S.Smm 2.0-4.0mm
(0.01-0.22 in.! (0.08-0.16 in.!
POWER STEERING SENSOR INLET HOSE

PRESSURE SWITCH
12N·m
PUMP OUTLET HOSE 11.2 kgf.m, 8.7 Ibf·ft!
11 N·m
11.1 kgf·m, 8.0 Ibf·ftl SENSOR RETURN LINE
12N·m
11 .2 kgf.m, 8.7Ibf·ftl
PUMP INLET HOSE
CYLINDER LINES
17N·m
11.7 kgf·m, 12lbf·ftl
SENSOR INLET
HOSE FITTING
13N·m
11.3 kgf·m, 9.4Ibf·ftl SUPPLY LINE
11 N·m
11 .1 kgf·m, 8.0 Ibf·ftl
BACK
17-19
Protected by AR
Power Steering
Hoses, Lines, and Pressure Switch Replacement (cont'd)
Note these items during installation:

• Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or
adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown.
• Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace with the clamps new ones if necessary.
• Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks.
ADJUSTABLE HOSE CLAMP (A) HOSE CLAMP (B)
2.S-S.Smm
(0.01-0.22 in.1
2.S-S.Smm 2.0-4.0mm
(0.01-0.22 in.1 (0.08-0.16 in.1
POWER STEERING
PRESSURE SWITCH
PUMP OUTLET HOSE 12N·m
11 N·m (1.2 kgf·m. 8.7 Ibf·ft)
(1.1 kgf·m. 8.0 Ibf·ft)
RETURN HOSE
PUMP~
/
~ _____ RETURN LINE
~ 28N·m
~~,~ 12.9 kgf·m. 21Ibf·ft)
CVUNDER UNES
17N·m
(1.7 kgf·m. 12Ibf·ft)
17-20 BACK
Protected by AR
Pump Replacement
1. Place a suitable container under the vehicle. 6. Loosely install the pump in the pump bracket with
the mounting bolts and nut.
2. Drain the power steering fluid from the reservoir.
7. Install the pump belt (A) on the pulley (B).
3. Cover the crankshaft pulley with several shop
towels to protect if from spilled power steering Note these items during belt installation:
fluid. Disconnect the pump inlet hose (A) and pump
outlet hose (B) from the pump (C), and plug them. • Make sure that the power steering belt is
Take care not to spill the fluid on the body or parts. properly positioned on the pulleys.
Wipe off any spilled fluid at once. • Do not get the power steering fluid or grease on
the belt or pulley faces. Clean off any fluid or
6x 1.0mm BOLT
grease before installation.
11 N'm (1.1 \m, 8 Ibf·ft]
F
24N·m
12.4 kgf.m, 17 Ibf·ttl
G
24N·m
12.4 kgf·m. 17 Ibf·ttl
8. Adjust the pump belt adjustment (see page 17-16).
9. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (see page

17-18).
E
4. Remove the belt (D) by loosening the pump

adjusting nut (E), then remove pump mounting
bolts (F), nut (G) and pump. Do not turn the steering
wheel with pump removed.
5. Connect the pump outlet hose and inlet hose to the

pump. Tighten the pump fittings securely.
BACK
17-21
Protected by AR
Power Steering
Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
Replace the pump as an assembly if the parts indicated with asterisk (*) are worn of damaged.
4.5 mm ROLL PIN
.~
"OUTER SIDE PLATE FLANGE BOLTS
·PUMP CAM RING "'" \ '"
~"
"PUMP COVER
~ ,~~
·SIDE PLATE
~ -----smmROLLPIN
~~PUMPCOVERSEAL
________r'l~
Replace.
II :ioUMI P VANES
pates)
15.2 x 2.4 mm O-RING

Replace. *PUMPROTOR
~v
51 x 2.4 mm O-RING
Replace.
13x1.9mmO-RING
V
Replace.
, / INLET JOINT
FLANGE BOLTS
/ 11 N·m (1.1 kgf·m
Slbf·ft) ,
__- - - - -...... FLOW CONTROL VALVE
I.. "SPRING
~-----15.2 x 2.4 mm O-RING

Replace.
~ "FLOW
40 mm SNAP RING
PULLEVNUT CONTROL VALVE CAP
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 Ibf·ftl 49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 Ibf·ftl
17-22 BACK
Protected by AR
l'g'l
Special Tools Required Inspection
Universal holder 07725-0030000
9. Check the flow control valve for wear, burrs, and
Disassembly other damage to the edges of the grooves in the
valve.
1. Remove the power steering pump (see page 17-21).
2. Drain the fluid from the pump.
3. Hold the steering pump (A) in a vise with soft jaws,

o 0
hold the pulley (B) with the special tool, and
remove the pulley nut (C) and pulley. Be careful not
to damage the pump housing with the jaws ofthe
vise.
07725-0030000
10. Inspect the bore of the flow control valve on the

pump housing for scratches and wear.
11. Slip the flow control valve back in the pump

housing, and check that it moves in and out
smoothly. If OK, go to step 12; if not, replace the
pump as an assembly. The flow control valve is not
available separately.
4. Loosen the flow control valve cap with a hex

wrench, and remove it and the a-ring, flow control
valve and spring.
5. Remove the pump cover and pump cover seal.
6. Remove the outer side plate, pump cam ring, pump

rotor, pump vanes, side plate and a-rings.
7. Remove the snap ring, then remove the pump drive

shaft by tapping the shaft end with the plastic
hammer.
8. Remove the pump seal spacer and pump seal.
(cant'd)
BACK
17-23
Protected by AR
Power Steering
Pump Overhaul (co nt'd)
12. Attach a hose (A) to the end of the flow control Reassembly
valve (B) as shown. Then submerge the flow
control valve in a container of power steering fluid 15. Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry
or solvent (C), and blow in the hose. them with compressed air. Do not dip rubber parts
in solvent.
• If air bubbles leak through the valve at less than
98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm 2 , 14.2 psi). replace the pump 16. Install the new pump seal (A)(with its grooved side
as an assembly. The flow control valve is not facing in) into the pump housing by hand, then
available separately . install the pump seal spacer (B).
• If the flow control valve tests OK, set it aside for
reassembly later. 0-- -F
E
.".
©) ____ B
D ____A
B c
13. Inspect the ball bearing by rotating the outer race

slowly. If you feel any play (axial or radial) or
roughness remove the faulty ball bearing (A), and 17. Position the pump drive shaft (C) in the pump
install a new one (B). housing (D), then drive it in using a socket (E).
B 18. Install the 40 mm snap ring (F) with its radiused

side facing out.
•
A 19. Coat the new pump cover seal (A) with power
steering fluid, and install it into the groove in the
pump cover (B).
14. Inspect each part shown with an asterisk in the

Exploded View; if any of them are worn or
damaged, replace the pump as an assembly.
20. Install the outer side plate (C) over the 2 roll pins
(D).
17-24 BACK
Protected by AR
21. Set the pump cam ring (A) over the 2 roll pins with 24. Coat the new O-ring (A) with power steering fluid,
its "." mark (B) facing downward. and install it into the groove in the side plate (B).
22. Assemble pump rotor (A) pump cover (B) with its 25. Install the side plate on the cam ring (C) by aligning
"." mark (C) facing downward. the roll pins set holes (D) in the side plate with the
roll pins (E).
A
26. Coat the new O-ring (A) with power steering fluid,
and position it in the bottom of the pump housing
(B).
8x 1.25 mm
20N·m
(2.0 kgf·m, 14Ibf·ft)
23. Set the 10 vanes (D) in the grooves in the rotor.

Make sure that the round ends (E) of the vanes are
in contact with the sliding surface of the cam ring.
27. Install the pump cover assembly (C) in the pump

housing.
(cont'd)
BACK
17-25
Protected by AR
Power Steering
Pump Overhaul (co nt'd)
28. Coat the flow control valve (A) with power steering 31. Install the pulley (A), then loosely install the pulley
fluid, then install it and the spring (B) in the pump nut (B). Hold the steering pump in a vise with soft
housing. jaws. Be careful not to damage the pump housing
with the jaws of the vise.
07725-0030000
D
49N·m
32. Hold the pulley with the special tool, and tighten
29. Coat the new O-ring (C) with power steering fluid, the pulley nut.
and install it on the flow control valve cap (D), then
install the cap on the pump housing, and tighten it. 33. Check that the pump turns smoothly by turning the
pulley by hand.
30. Coat the new O-ring (A) with power steering fluid,
and install it on the inlet joint (B). Install the inlet
joint on the pump housing, and tighten the flange
bolt.
l' N·m
1.1 kgf·m, 8 Ibf·ftl
17-26 BACK
Protected by AR
Steering Wheel Removal
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 3. Loosen the steering wheel bolt (A), and install a
SRS component locations (see page 23-14), precautions steering wheel puller (8) on the steering wheel (e).
(see page 23-17), and procedures in the SRS section Free the steering wheel from the steering column
before performing repairs or service. shaft by turning the pressure bolt (D) of the puller.
1. Align the front wheels straight ahead, then remove Note these items when removing the steering
the driver's airbag assembly from the steering wheel:
wheel (see page 23-219).
• Do not tap on the steering wheel or the steering
2. Disconnect the radio remote switch connectors (A) column shaft when removing the steering wheel.
and cruise control switch connector (8). • If you thread the puller bolts (E) into the wheel
hub more than 5 threads, the bolts will hit the
A B
cable reel and damage it. To prevent this, install
a pair of jam nuts 5 threads up on each puller bolt.
E
4. Remove the steering wheel puller, then remove the

steering wheel bolt and steering wheel from the
steering column.
BACK
17-27
Protected by AR
Power Steering
Steering Wheel Disassembly and Reassembly
STEERING DYNAMIC DAMPER
\
Q)o~
HOOK PLATE
~ ~...,
O-Jli; lb·
~.
·0
/
4·
/~~
I \
RADIO REMOTE SWITCH ~~ COVER
/
CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH
ACCESS PANEL
COVER
17·28 BACK
Protected by AR
Steering Wheel Installation

1. Before installing the steering wheel, make sure the 3. Install the steering wheel bolt and tighten it to 39 N·
front wheels are aligned straight ahead, then center m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 Ibf·ft).
the cable reel (A). Do this by first rotating the cable
reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it 4. Connect the radio remote switch connector and
counterclockwise about two and halfturns. The cruise control switch connector.
arrow mark (B) on the cable reel label point should
point straight up. 5. Install the driver's airbag and confirm that the
system is operating properly (see step 1 on page
A B 23-220).
6. Check the horn, radio remote switches, cruise

control set/resume switches and turn signal
cancelling for proper operation.
2. Position the 2 tabs (A) of the turn signal cancelling

sleeve (B) as shown, and install the steering wheel
on to the steering column shaft, making sure the
steering wheel hub (C) engages the pins (D) of the
cable reel and tabs ofthe canceling sleeve. Do not
tap on the steering wheel or steering column shaft
when installing the steering wheel.
BACK
17-29
Protected by AR
Power Steering
Steering Column Removal and Installation
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 23-14), precautions (see
page 23-17), and procedures in the SRS section before performing repairs or service.
Removal
1. Record the radio station presets, and disconnect the battery.
2. Remove the driver's airbag, steerring wheel, and cable reel (see page 23-231).
3. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page 20-65).
4. Remove the column covers (A).
23 N·m 12.3 kgf·m,

17Ibf·tt)
23 N·m 12.3 kgf·m,

17lbf·ft)
16 N·m 11.6 kgf.m, 12Ibf·tt)
5. Remove the combination switch assembly (B) from the steering column shaft by removing the three mounting
screws, and disconnecting the connectors.
6. Disconnect the ignition switch connectors.
7. Remove the steering joint cover (e).
8. Disconnect the steering joint (D), and remove it from the column shaft.
9. Remove the steering column (E) by removing the attaching nuts and bolts.
17-30 BACK
Protected by AR
Installation
1. Install the steering column and make sure the wires

are not caught or pinched by any parts.
2. Insert the upper end of the steering joint onto the

steering shaft (A) (line up the bolt hole (B) with the
flat portion (C) on the shaft).
3. Slip the lower end of the steering joint onto the

pinion shaft (E) (line up the bolt hole (F) with the
groove (G) the around the shaft), and loosely install
the lower joint bolt. Be sure that the lower joint bolt
is securely in the groove in the pinion shaft.
4. Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the

steering joint is fully seated. Then install the upper
joint bolt and tighten it.
5. Finish the installation, and note these items:
• Make sure the wire harness is routed and

fastened properly.
• Make sure the connectors are properly connected.
• Reinstall the steering wheel (see page 17-29).
• Reconnect the battery and reset the radio presets.
• Verify cruise control, horn, radio remote, and
turn signal switch operation.
• Check wheel alighment (see page 18-5).
BACK
17-31
Protected by AR
Power Steering
Steering Column/Tilt Lever Inspection/Adjustment

• Check the steering column ball bearing (A) and the steering joint bearings (B) for play and proper movement. If any
bearing is noisy or has excessive play, replace the steering column as an assembly.
• Check the retaining collar (C) for damage. If it is damaged, replace the steering column as an assembly.
• Check the absorbing plates (D) for distortion or breakage. If there is distortion breakage replace the steering column
as an assembly.
A~
17-32 BACK
Protected by AR
Steering Lock Replacement
1. Move the tilt lever (A) from the loose position to the 1. Remove the steering column (see page 17-30).
lock position 3 to 5 times; then measure the tilt
lever preload 10 mm (0.4 in.) from the end of the tilt 2. Center punch each of the 2 shear bolts, and drill
lever. their heads off with a 5 mm (3/16 in.) drill bit. Be
careful not to damage the switch body when
Preload: 70-90 N (7-9 kgf, 15-20 Ibfl removing the shear bolts.
2. If the measurement is out of the specification,

adjust the preload using the following procedures.
• Loosen the tilt lever, and set the steering column 3. Remove the shear bolts from the switch body.
in the neutral position.
• Remove the 6 mm lock bolt (B), and remove the 4. Install the switch body without the key inserted.
stop (C). Be careful not to loosen the tilt lever
when installing the stop or tightening the 6 mm 5. Loosely tighten the new shear bolts.
lock bolt.
• Adjust the preload by turning the tilt lock bolt (0) 6. Insert the ignition key, and check for proper
left or right. operation of the steering wheel lock and that the
• Pull up the tilt lever to the uppermost position, ignition key turns freely.
and install the stop. Check the preload again. If
the measurement is still out of specification, 7. Tighten the shear bolts (A) until the hex heads (B)
repeat the above procedures to adjust. twist off.
[
RW)lmmm
B
/
BACK
17-33
Protected by AR
Power Steering
Rack Guide Adjustment
Special Tools Required 7. Check for unusual steering effort through the
Locknut wrench, 40 mm 07916-SA50001 complete turning travel.
1. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position. 8. Check the steering wheel rotational play and the
power assist (see page 17-8).
2. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut (A) with the
special tool, then remove the rack guide screw (B).
07916-SA50001
3. Remove the old sealant from rack guide screw, and

apply new sealant all around the threads (C).
Loosely install the rack guide screw on the steering
gearbox.
20'
4. Tighten the rack guide screw to 25 N·m (2.5 kgf·m,

18 Ibf·ft), then loosen it.
5. Retighten the rack guide screw to 3.9 N·m (0.4 kgf·

m, 2.9 Ibf·ft) then back it off to specified angle.
Specified Return Angle: 20°
6. Tighten the locknut while holding the rack guide

screw.
17-34 BACK
Protected by AR
Steering Gearbox Removal
Special Tools Required 7. Remove the steering joint bolts (A), disconnect the
Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 steering joint by moving the steering joint (B)
toward the column.
Note these items during removal:
B
o Using solvent and a brush, wash any oil and dirt off
of the valve body unit its lines, and the end if the
gearbox. Blow dry with compressed air.
o Be sure to remove the steering wheel before
disconnecting the steering joint. Damage to the cable
reel can occur.
1. Drain the power steering fluid (see page 17-18). ~~

supported.
3. Remove the front wheels.

\ A
8. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the 10 mm nut (B),

4. Remove the driver's airbag assembly (see page 23- and loosen the nut.
219).
5. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-27).
6. Remove the steering joint cover.
07MAC·SLOO200
9. Separate the tie-rod ball joint and knuckle using the

special tool (see page 18-9).
(cont'd)
BACK 17-35
Protected by AR
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Removal (co nt'd)
10. Grasp the right tie-rod and pull the rack all the way 13. '99-03 Premium models:
to the right, then remove the right and left tie-rod Disconnect the supply line (A), the return line (8),
ends (A), and locknuts (8). the sensor inlet hose (e), and the sensor return line
(D) from the valve body unit. Remove the sensor
A B inlet hose fitting (E).
D
11. Remove the exhaust pipe A and mounting bracket

8 (see page 9-12).
e 14. '02-03 Type-S models:

Loosen the 14 mm flare nut (A), and disconnect the
pump outlet hose (8). Loosen the 17 mm flare nut
(e), and remove the return line (D).
e
D
A
12. '99 model: Disconnect the AfT shift cable (e) from
the transmission (see page 14-129).
'00-03 models: Disconnect the AfT shift cable (e)
from the transmission (see page 14-370).
17-36
BACK
Protected by AR
15. After disconnecting the hoses and lines, plug or 17. Pull the steering gearbox (A) down until the pinion
seal them with a piece of tape or equivalent to shaft (8) clears the bulkhead, and remove the
prevent foreign materials from entering. pinion shaft grommet from the top of the valve
body unit.
NOTE: Do not loosen the cylinder line A and 8
between the valve body unit and cylinder. NOTE: Apply vinyl tape to the pinion shaft splines
and the line fitting surfaces on the valve body unit
16. Remove the stiffener plates (A), then remove the to protect them during removal.
right mounting brackets (8) and the cushion (e).
DRIVER'S SIDE REAR OF CAR
B
,-'
, PASSENGER'S
SIDE
-(
A A
18. Move the steering gearbox to the passenger's side

unit the driver's side rack end rests on the end of
the rear beam.
19. To get the driver's side rack end around the rear
beam, push up and back on the passenger's side
rack end, then pull down on the driver's side of the
steering gearbox.
BACK
17-37
Protected by AR
Power Steering
- ~ .... ,
Steering Ge '~~rbox Overhaul
Exploded View
ASSIST CONTROL VALVE

FLANGE BOLTS
FLANGE NUTS
17 N·m 11 .7 kgf·m, 12Ibf·ft)
I --O-RING
~ Replace.
" VALVE OIL SEAL

' " Replace.
Wil ~WAVEWASHER
PINION SHAFT
~
CYLINDER END SEAL
Replace .
RACK GUIDE
CYLINDER END
69 N·m (7.0 kgf·m, 51Ibf·ft)
17-38 BACK
Protected by AR
Special Tools Required 3. Unbend the lock washer.

• Cylinder end seal remover attachment
07NAD-SR3020A
• Pilot collar 07GAF-PH70100
• Valve seal ring sizing tool 07NAG-SR3090A
• Sleeve seal ring guide 07SAG-SW50100
• Sleeve seal ring sizing tool 07GAG-SD4020A
• Attachment, 32 x 35 mm 07746-0010100
• Driver 07749-0010000
• Piston seal ring guide 07XAG-SOK020A
• Piston seal ring sizing tool 07XAG-SOK010A
• Pincers, Oetiker 1098 or equivalent, commercially
available.
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during 4. Hold the flat surface sections (A) of the right side
this procedure. steering rack (B) with a wrench, and unscrew the
both rack ends (C) with a wrench. Be careful not to
Removal damage the rack surface with the wrench. Remove
the lock washer (D) and stop washer (E).
1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-35).
Disassembly
2. Remove the boot bands (A) and tie-rod clips (B).

Pull the boots away from the ends of the gearbox.
5. Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the rack guide

screw (8).
6. Remove the spring (C) and the rack guide (D) from
the gearbox.
(cont'd)
BACK
17-39
Protected by AR
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Overhaul (cont'd)
7. Remove the cylinder lines from the gearbox. 10. Drill a 3 mm (0.12 in.) diameter hole approximately
2.5-3.0 mm (0.10-0.12 in.) in depth in the staked
point (A) on the cylinder. Do not allow metal
shavings to enter the cylinder housing. After
removing the cylinder end, remove any burrs (8) at
the staked point.
8. Drain the fluid from the cylinder fittings by slowly

moving the steering rack back and forth.
9. Remove the 2 flange bolts, then remove the valve

body unit (A) from the gearbox (8).
11. Attach the yoke of a universal puller (A) to the
steering gearbox mounts with bolts. Clamp the
yoke in a vise with soft jaws as shown, then loosen
and remove the cylinder end (8). Do not clamp the
cylinder housing or gearbox housing in the vise.
BACK
17-40
Protected by AR
12. Install the bearing separator (A) on the gearbox 16. Insert a 24" long, 3/8" drive extension (A) and the
housing as shown. special tool into the cylinder from the left side.
Make sure that the special tool is securely
positioned on the backup ring edges. Be careful not
A to damage the inner surface of the cylinder with the
special tool.
c 07NAD·SR3020A
~D
13. Place a appropriate size deep socket wrench (B) on
the steering rack (e).
14. Set the steering gearbox in a press so the left side

points upward, then press the cylinder end seal (0)
and steering rack out of the gearbox. Hold the
steering rack to keep it from falling when pressed
clear. Be careful not to damage the inner surface of
the cylinder housing with the tool.
15. Remove the cylinder end seal from the steering

rack.
(cont'd)
BACK
17-41
Protected by AR
Power Steering
17. Setthe gearbox in a press, then press out the 18. Carefully pry the piston seal ring (A) and O-ring (B)
cylinder end seal (A) and backup ring (B) from the off the rack piston. Be careful not to damage the
gearbox. inside ofthe seal ring groove and piston edges
when removing the seal ring.
Note these items when pressing the cylinder end
seal:
• Keep the tool straight to avoid damaging the

cylinder wall. Check the tool angle, and correct it
if necessary, when removing the cylinder end
seal.
• Use a press to remove the cylinder end seal. Do
not try to remove the seal by striking the tool. It
will break the backup ring, and the cylinder end
seal will remain in the gearbox .
• 19. Before removing the valve housing (A), apply vinyl

tape (B) to the splines on the pinion shaft (C).
20. Separate the valve housing from the pinion shaft!

valve using a press.
17-42 BACK
Protected by AR
21. With your finger, check the inner wall of the valve 23. Remove the snap ring (A) and sleeve (B) from the
housing where the seal ring slides. If there is a step pinion shaft.
in the wall, the housing is worn. Replace it.
NOTE: There may be sliding marks from the seal

ring on the wall ofthe valve housing. Replace the
valve housing only if the wall is stepped.
24. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut and

remove the 5 seal rings from the sleeve. Be careful
not to damage the edges of the sleeve grooves and
outer surface when removing the seal rings.
22. CheC'1( for wear, burrs and other damage to the

edges of the grooves in the sleeve.
NOTE: The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precision

matched set. If either the pinion shaft or sleeve
must be replaced, replace both parts as a set.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-43
Protected by AR
Power Steering
25. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut the valve 27. Press the valve oil seal (A) and bushing (B) out of
seal ring (A) and a-ring (B) at the groove (C) in the the valve housing using a hydraulic press and
pinion shaft. Remove the valve seal ring and a-ring. special tool.
Be careful not to damage the edges of the pinion
shaft groove and outer surface when removing the
valve seal ring and a-ring. A
28. Remove the cap (A) and cap seal (B) from the valve
body.
26. Remove the valve oil seal (A) and wave washer (B)
from the pinion shaft.
Note these items during disassembly:
• Inspect the ball bearing (C) by rotating the outer

race slowly. If there is any excessive play,
replace the pinion shaft and sleeve as an
assembly .
• The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precise fit; do
not intermix old and new pinion shafts and
sleeves.
B
c
29. Remove the pressure control valve (A), assist
control valve (B) and springs (C).
~
c
A
~
BACK
17-44
Protected by AR
30. Check the assist control valve (AI and pressure 31. Separate the valve body (A) and valve housing (8).
control valve (8). If the valves are damaged,
replace the valve body as an assembly.
Inspect its surface for scoring and scratches. Slip it
back into the valve body unit, and make sure it
slides smoothly without drag or side play.
Assist Control Valve
32. Remove the valve housing seal (C) dowel pins (0).

them with compressed air. 00 not dip rubber parts
in the solvent.
Reassembly
34. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the stepped portion of the

pinion shaft, and coat the surface of the vinyl tape
Pressure Control Valve with the power steering fluid.
35. Install the wave washer (8).
36. Coat the inside surface of the new valve oil seal (C)
with power steering fluid, and install the seal with
its grooved side facing opposite the bearing, then
slide it over the pinion shaft, being careful not to
damage its sealing lip (0). Remove the vinyl tape.
(cont'd)
BACK
17-45
Protected by AR
Power Steering
37. Applv vinyl tape (A) to the splines and stepped 42. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the
portion of the shaft, and coat the surface of the pinion shaft (A). Slide the sleeve (B) onto the pinion
vinyl tape with the power steering fluid. shaft by aligning the locating pin (e) on the inside
of the sleeve with the cutout (0) in the shaft. Then
c install the new snap ring (E) securely in the pinion
B shaft groove.
/1 Note these items during reassembly:
• Be careful not to damage the valve seal ring

when inserting the sleeve .
• Install the snap ring with its radiused side toward
the sleeve.
38. Fit the new O-ring (B) in the groove of the pinion
shaft. Then slide the new valve seal ring (e) over
the shaft and in the groove on the pinion shaft.
39. Remove the tape, and apply power steering fluid to A

the surface of the valve seal ring (A).
07NAG-SR3090A
i c
/ B
40. Apply power steering fluid to the inside of the

special tool. Set the larger diameter end of the
special tool over the valve seal ring, and move the
special tool up and down several times to make the
valve seal ring fit in the pinion shaft groove.
41. Remove the special tool, turn it over, slide the

smaller diameter end over the valve seal ring.
Move it up and down several times to make the
valve seal ring fit snugly in the pinion shaft groove.
17-46 BACK
Protected by AR
43. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the 47. Coat the housing seal (A) with power steering fluid,
special tool. Slip 5 new seal rings (A) over the and install it in the groove of the valve housing (B).
special tool from the smaller diameter end, and Install the 2 dowel pins (C) and valve body (D) on
expand them. the valve housing.
Note these items when installing the seal ring:
• Do not over-expand the seal ring. Install the resin

seal rings with care so as not to damage them.
After installation, be sure to contract the seal
rings using the special tool (sizing tool).
o There are 2 types of sleeve seal rings: black and
brown. Do not mix the different types of rings as

they are not compatible.
07SAG-SWS0100
/ 9 N·m (0.9 N·m, 6.S Ibf·ttl
48. Install the valve springs (A).
A i
44. Align the special tool with each groove (B) in the
sleeve, and slide a sleeve seal ring into each
groove. After installation, compress the seal rings
with your fingers temporarily.
45. Apply power steering fluid to the seal rings on the

sleeve, and to the entire inside surface of the
special tool, then slowly insert the sleeve into the
special tool. 49. Coat the pressure control valve (B) and assist
control valve (C) with power steering fluid, and
install them into the valve body.
46. Move the special tool back and forth several times
to make the seal rings snugly fit in the sleeve. Be
sure that the seal rings are not twisted. (cont'd)
BACK 17-47
Protected by AR
Power Steering
50. Coat the cap seal (A) with power steering fluid, and 53. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the pinion shaft, then coat
install it in the groove of the cap (B). Install the cap the vinyl tape with power steering fluid.
on the valve body.
9 N·m 10.9 kgf.m.~
Ai
B i
51. Apply power steering fluid to the seal ring lip of the
new valve oil seal (A), then install the seal in the
valve housing (B) using a hydraulic press and
special tools. Install the seal with its grooved side
(C) facing the tool.
54. Insert the pinion shaft into the valve housing (B). Be
07746-0010100
careful not to damage the valve seal rings (C).
07749-0010000 55. Remove the vinyl tape from the pinion shaft, then
remove any residue from the tape adhesive.
56. Press the pinion shaft/steeve into the valve housing

with a hydraulic press. Check that the pinion shaft/
sleeve turns smoothly by hand after installing it.
52. Press the bushing (D) into the valve housing with a
hydraulic press and special tool.
17-48
BACK
Protected by AR
57. Coat the special tool with power steering fluid, then 62. Wrap vinyl tape (A) around the rack teeth and rack
slide it onto the rack, big end first. end edges, then coat the surface of the tape with
power steering fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape
58. Position the new O-ring (A) and new piston seal is wrapped carefully so there is no stepped portion.
ring (B) on the special tool, then slide them down
toward the big end of the tool.
• Do not over expand the resin seal rings. Install

the resin seal rings with care so as not to damage
them. After installation, be sure to contract the
seal ring using the special tool (sizing tool) .
• Replace piston's O-ring and seal ring as a set.
\ A
63. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal
(A) with power steering fluid, then install it onto the
steering rack with its grooved side toward the
piston. When installing the cylinder end seal, be
careful not damage the lip ofthe seal with the
edges or teeth of the steering rack.
59. Pull the O-ring off into the piston groove, then pull
the piston seal ring off into the piston groove on
top of the O-ring.
60. Coat the piston seal ring (A) and the inside of the
special tool with power steering fluid, then
carefully slide the tool onto the rack and over the
piston seal ring.
61. Move the special tool back and forth several times
to make the piston seal ring fit snugly in the piston.
64. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack, then
remove any adhesive residue.
A
i
07XAG-SOK010A
(cont'd)
BACK
17-49
Protected by AR
Power Steering
65. Install the new backup ring (A) on the steering rack, 67. Insert an appropriate size deep socket wrench (A)
then place the cylinder end seal (8) against the onto the steering rack as shown.
piston.
A
B
B
66. Grease the steering rack teeth, then insert the
steering rack into the gearbox housing. Be careful
not to damage the inner surface of the cylinder wall 68. Install the cylinder end seal (B) into the bottom of
with the rack edges. the cylinder by pressing on the tool with a press.
Do not push on the tool with excessive force as it
may damage the cylinder end seal.
69. Remove the deep socket wrench, and center the

steering rack.
70. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack end edges, and
coat the surface of the tape with the power steering
fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape is wrapped
carefully so there is no stepped portion.
17-50 BACK
Protected by AR
71. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal 75. Coat the inside surface (A) of the cylinder end with
with power steering fluid, then install the seal onto power steering fluid, then install the cylinder end
the steering rack with its grooved side toward the by screwing it into the cylinder (B).
piston.
Ii
C
69 N ·m (7.0 kgf·m, 51Ibf·ft)
72. Push in the cylinder end seal with your finger. Be 76. Remove the yoke from the gearbox, then, after
careful not to damage the face of the seal with the tightening the cylinder end (C), stake the point of
threads and burrs at the staked position of the the cylinder shown (opposite from where the stake
cylinder housing. was removed during disassembly).
73. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack, then 77. Coat the new O-ring (A) with grease, and carefully
remove any adhesive residue. fit it on the valve housing.
74. Attach the yoke of a universal puller (A) to the D

20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14Ibf·ft)
steering gearbox mounts with bolts, then clamp the
yoke in a vise with soft jaws. Do not clamp the
78. Apply grease to the needle bearing (B) in the

gearbox housing, then install the valve body unit
(C) by engaging the gears. Note the valve body unit
installation position (direction of the line
connections).
79. Tighten the flange bolts (D) to the specified torque.
(cont'd)
BACK
17-51
Protected by AR
Power Steering
80. Install the cylinder lines. 84. Install the stop washer (A), and the lock washer (B)
on the rack (C). Align the lock washer tabs (0) with
Note these items during reassembly: the slots (E) in the rack. Install the rack end (F) while
holding with lock washer in place. Repeatthis step
• Thoroughly clean the joints of the cylinder lines. for the other side of the rack.
The joints must be free of foreign material.
• Install the cylinder lines by tightening the flare
nuts by hand first, then tighten the flare nuts to
the specified torque.
85. Hold the flat surface sections of the right side

steering rack with a wrench, and tighten the both
l? rack ends. Be careful not to damage the rack
surface with the wrench.
81. Grease the sliding surface of the rack guide (A), and
install it onto the gearbox housing. 86. Bend the lock washer back against the flat spots on
the rack end joint housing.
82. Apply sealant to the all around threads on the rack

guide screw (B), then install the spring (C), rack
guide screw and locknut (0).
83. Adjust the rack guide screw (see page 17-34). After
adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by
sliding it right and left.
BACK
17-52
Protected by AR
87. Apply multipurpose grease to the circumference of 90. Install the new boot bands by aligning the tabs (A)
the rack end joint housing (A). with holes (8) of the band.
88. Apply a light coat of silicone grease to the boot 91. Close the ear portion (A) of the band with
grooves (B) on the rack end. commercially available pincers Oetiker 1098 or
equivalent (B).
89. Center the steering rack within its stroke. Install the
boots on the rack ends with the tie-rod clips. After
installing the boots, wipe the grease off the
threaded section (A) of the rack end.
92. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the
boots are not deformed or twisted.
BACK
17-53
Protected by AR
Power Steering
Exploded View
FLANGE BOLTS
,
I 20 N·m (2.0 kgf.m, 14lbf·ftl
~/VALVEHOUSING
~
~ 0 C I R CReplace
LIP.
VAL-V-E-O-I-L-SE-A-L---t--~ ~/ /SLEEVE
Replace. ~ ~
, __________ SLEEVE SEAL RINGS
BUSHING
~ Replace.
~~VALVE SEAL RING

iIt:3 Replace.
~
~_ O-RING
~ Replace.
CYLINDER LINE B ~:-----
_____ - VALVE OIL SEAL
~ ~ Replace.
~ "'wAVE WASHER
FLARE NUTS
17N·m
(1.7 kgf·m, 12Ibf·ft) 'ad ~PINION SHAFT
( _______ O-RING
~ Replace.
_Olfg
~--\~ ~~LOCKNUT
, ~ RACK GUIDE SCREW
GEARBOX HOUSING SPRING

((o @()o RACK GUIDE
I 1O-RING
Replace.
PISTON SEAL RING

Replace.
CYLINDER END SEAL STEERING RACK @I

Replace.
CYLINDER END tCKUPRING

69 N·m (7.0 kgf·m, 51Ibf·ft) Replace.
/
CYLINDER END SEAL
Replace.
BACK
17-54
Protected by AR
Special Tools Required 3. Unbend the lock washer.

• Cylinder end seal remover attachment
07NAD-SR3020A
• Pilot collar 07GAF-PH70100
• Piston seal ring sizing tool 07NAG-SR3090A
• Ball joint boot clip guide 07974-SA50800
• Sleeve seal ring sizing tool 07974-SA5020A or 07974-
SA50200
• Attachment, 32 x 35 mm 07746-0010100
• Driver 077 49-0010000
• Piston seal ring guide 07HAG-SF10100 or 07HAG-
SF1010A
• Piston seal ring sizing tool 07HAG-SF1020A or 07HAG-
SF10200
• Pincers, Oetiker 1098 or equivalent, commercially 4. Hold the flat surface sections (A) of the right side
available. steering rack (B) with a wrench, and unscrew the
both rack ends (C) with a wrench. Be careful not to
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during damage the rack surface with the wrench. Remove
this procedure. the lock washer (D) and stop washer (E).
Removal
1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-35).
Disassembly
2. Remove the boot bands (A) and tie-rod clips (8).

Pull the boots away from the ends of the gearbox.
5. Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the rack guide

screw (8).
6. Remove the spring (e) and the rack guide (D) from
the gearbox.
(cont'd)
BACK
17-55
Protected by AR
Power Steering
7. Remove the cylinder lines from the gearbox. 10. Drill a 3 mm (0.12 in.) diameter hole approximately
2.5-3.0 mm (0.10-0.12 in.) in depth in the staked
point (A) on the cylinder. Do not allow metal
shavings to enter the cylinder housing. After
removing the cylinder end (8), remove any burrs at
the staked point.
8. Drain the fluid from the cylinder fittings by slowly

moving the steering rack back and forth.
9. Remove the two flange bolts, then remove the

valve body unit (A) from the gearbox (8).
/ B
11. Attach the yoke of a universal puller (A) to the

steering gearbox mounts with bolts. Clamp the
yoke in a vise with soft jaws as shown, then loosen
and remove the cylinder end (8). Do not clamp the
A
~~
~.
BACK
17-56
Protected by AR
12. Install the bearing separator (A) on the gearbox 16. Insert a 24" long, 3/8" drive extension (A) and the
housing as shown. special tool into the cylinder from the left side.
Make sure that the special tool is securely
positioned on the backup ring edges. Be careful not
B to damage the inner surface of the cylinder with the
special tool.
A
c
07NAD-SR3020A
~D
13. Place a appropriate size deep socket wrench (B) on
the steering rack (e).
14. Set the steering gearbox in a press so the left side

points upward, then press the cylinder end seal (0)
and steering rack out of the gearbox. Hold the
steering rack to keep it from falling when pressed
clear. Be careful not to damage the inner surface of
the cylinder housing with the tool.
15. Remove the cylinder end seal from the steering

rack.
(cont'd)
BACK
17-57
Protected by AR
Power Steering
17. Set the gearbox in a press, then press out the 18. Carefully pry the piston seal ring (A) and O-ring (B)
cylinder end seal (A) and backup ring (B) from the off the rack piston. Be careful not to damage the
gearbox. inside of the seal ring groove and piston edges
when removing the seal ring.
Note these items when pressing the cylinder end
seal:
• Keep the tool straight to avoid damaging the

cylinder wall. Check the tool angle, and correct it
if necessary, when removing the cylinder end
seal.
• Use a press to remove the cylinder end seal. Do
not try to remove the seal by striking the tool. It
will break the backup ring, and the cylinder end
seal will remain in the gearbox .
•
,
19. Before removing the valve housing (A), apply vinyl
tape (B) to the splines on the pinion shaft (C).
~~B
______ c
1/
A
20. Separate th .c. valve housing from the pinion shaft!

valve using a press.
BACK
17-58
Protected by AR
21. With yourfinger check the inner wall ofthe valve 23. Remove the circlip (A) and sleeve (B) from the
housing where the seal ring slides. If there is a step pinion shaft.
in the wall, the housing is worn. Replace it.
NOTE: There may be sliding marks from the seal

ring on the wall of the valve housing. Replace the
valve housing only if the wall is stepped.
24. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut and

remove the four seal rings from the sleeve. Be
careful not to damage the edges of the sleeve
grooves and outer surface when removing the seal
rings.
22. Check for wear, burrs and other damage to the
edges ofthe grooves in the sleeve.
NOTE: The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precision

matched set. If either the pinion shaft or sleeve
must be replaced, replace both parts as a set.
(cont'd)
BACK
17-59
Protected by AR
Power Steering
25. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut the valve 27. Press the valve oil seal (A) and bushing (B) out of
seal ring (A) and O-ring (B) at the cutting groove the valve housing using a hydraulic press and
position (C) in the pinion shaft. Remove the valve special tool.
seal ring and O-ring. Be careful not to damage the
A
edges ofthe pinion shaft groove and outer surface
when removing the valve seal ring and D-ring.
07GAF-PH70100

them with compressed air. Do not dip rubber parts
26. Remove the valve oil seal (A) and wave washer (B) in the solvent.
from the pinion shaft.
Note these items during disassembly:

• Inspect the ball bearing (C) by rotating the outer
race slowly. If there is any excessive play or wear,
replace the pinion shaft and sleeve as an
assembly .
• The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precise fit; do
not intermix old and new pinion shafts and
sleeves.
j !
Oro
17-60 BACK
Protected by AR
Reassembly 34. Remove the tape, and apply power steering fluid to
the surface of the valve seal ring (A).
29. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the stepped portion of the 07NAG-SR3090A
A
/
pinion shaft, and coat the surface of the vinyl tape
with the power steering fluid.
30. Install the wave washer (8).

A
31. Coat the inside surface of the new valve oil seal (C)
with power steering fluid, and install the seal with 35. Apply power steering fluid to the inside of the
its grooved side facing opposite the bearing, then special tool. Set the larger diameter end of the
slide it over the pinion shaft, being careful not to special tool over the valve seal ring, and move the
damage its sealing lip (0). special tool up and down several times to make the
valve seal ring fit in the pinion shaft groove.
32. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the splines and stepped
portion of the shaft, and coat the surface of the 36. Remove the special tool, turn it over, slide the
vinyl tape with the power steering fluid. smaller diameter end over the valve seal ring.
Move it up and down several times to make the
valve seal ring fit snugly in the pinion shaft groove.
33. Fit the new O-ring (8) in the groove of the pinion
shaft. Then slide the new valve seal ring (C) over
the shaft and in the groove on the pinion shaft.
(cont'd)
BACK
17-61
Protected by AR
Power Steering
37. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the 41. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the
special tool. Slip two new seal rings (A) over the pinion shaft (A). Slide the sleeve (B) onto the pinion
special tool from the smaller diameter end, and shaft by aligning the locating pin (e) on the inside
expand them . Install only two rings at a time from of the sleeve with the cutout (D) in the shaft. Then
each end of the pinion shaft sleeve (B). install the new circlip (E) securely in the pinion
shaft groove.
Note these items when installing the seal ring:
• Do not over-expand the seal ring. Install the resin Note these items during reassembly:
seal rings with care so as not to damage them. • Be careful not to damage the valve seal ring
After installation, be sure to contract the seal when inserting the sleeve .
rings using the special tool (sizing tool) . • Install the circlip with its radiused side facing in.
• There are two types of sleeve seal rings: black
and brown. Do not mix the different types of
rings as they are not compatible.
A 42. Apply power steering fluid to the seal ring lip of the
new valve oil seal (A). then install the seal in the
38. Align the special tool with each groove in the valve housing (B) using a hydraulic press and
sleeve, and slide a sleeve seal ring into each special tools. Install the seal with its grooved side
groove. After installation, compress the seal rings facing the tool.
with your fingers temporarily.
077 49-0010000
39. Apply power steering fluid to the seal rings on the
sleeve, and to the entire inside surface of the
special tool, then slowly insert the sleeve into the
special tool. B
40. Move the sleeve back and forth several times to

make the seal rings snugly fit in the sleeve. Be sure
that the seal rings are not twisted.
17-62 BACK
Protected by AR
43. Press the bushing (A) into the valve housing with a 47. Press the pinion shaft/sleeve into the valve housing
hydraulic press and special tool. with a hydraulic press. Check that the pinion shaft/
sleeve turns smoothly by hand after installing it.
07749-0010000
~
07746-0010100
Y
44. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the pinion shaft, then coat
the vinyl tape with power steering fluid.
48. Coat the special tool with power steering fluid, then
slide it onto the rack, big end first.
49. Position the new D-ring (A) and new piston seal
ring (B) on the special tool, then slide them down
toward the big end of the tool.

• Do not over expand the resin seal rings. Install
the resin seal rings with care so as not to damage
them. After installation, be sure to contract the
seal ring using the special tool (sizing tool) .
• Replace piston's D-ring and seal ring as a set.
i
1/ 07HAG_SF101OO or
07HAG-SF1010A
B
45. Insert the pinion shaft into the valve housing (B). Be
careful not to damage the valve seal rings (C). 50. Pull the D-ring off into the piston groove, then pull
the piston seal ring off into the piston groove on
46. Remove the vinyl tape from the pinion shaft, then top of the D-ring.
remove any residue from the tape adhesive.
(cont'd)
BACK
17-63
Protected by AR
Power Steering
51. Coat the piston seal ring (A) and the inside of the 54. Coatthe inside surface ofthe new cylinder end seal
special tool with power steering fluid, then (A) with power steering fluid, then install it onto the
carefully slide the tool onto the rack and over the steering rack with its grooved side toward the
piston seal ring. piston. When installing the cylinder end seal, be
careful not damage the lip of the seal with the
52. Move the special tool back and forth several times edges or teeth of the steering rack.
to make the piston seal ring fit snugly in the piston.
I
A
07HAG-SF1020A or
07HAG-SF10200
i
53. Wrap vinyl tape (A) around the rack teeth and rack
end edges, then coat the surface of the tape with
power steering fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape
is wrapped carefully so there is no stepped portion.
55. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack, then
56. Install the new backup ring (A) on the steering rack,
then place the cylinder end seal (B) against the
piston.
A
----
17-64 BACK
Protected by AR
57. Grease the steering rack teeth, then insert the 61. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack end edges, and
steering rack into the gear box housing. Be careful coat the surface of the tape with the power steering
not to damage to inner surface of the cylinder wall fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape is wrapped
with the rack edges. carefully so there is no stepped portion.
62. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal
58. Insert an appropriate size deep socket wrench (A) with power steering fluid, then install the seal onto
onto the steering rack as shown. the steering rack with its grooved side toward the
piston.
59. Install the cylinder end seal (B) into the bottom of 63. Push in the cylinder end seal with your finger.Be
the cylinder by pressing on the tool with a press. careful not to damage the face of the seal with the
Do not push on the tool with excessive force as it threads and burrs at the staked position of the
may damage the cylinder end seal. cylinder housing.
60. Remove the tool, and center the steering rack. 64. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack, then
(cont'd)
BACK
17-65
Protected by AR
Power Steering
65. Attach the yoke of a universal puller (A) to the 68. Coat the new O-ring (A) with grease, and carefully
steering gearbox mounts with bolts, then clamp the fit it on the valve housing.
yoke in a vise with soft jaws. Do not clamp the
D
cylinder housing or gearbox housing in the vise. 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m. 14 Ibf·ft)
A
66. Coat the inside surface of the cylinder end (A) with
power steering fluid, then install the cylinder end
by screwing it into the cylinder (8).
40mm~/B B_--UiDt
I'.'.;.~
69. Apply grease to the needle bearing (8) in the
\ I I
f 1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
==/
gearbox housing, then install the valve body unit
• (C) by engaging the gears. Note the valve body unit
installation position (direction of the line
connections) .
70. Tighten the flange bolts (D) to the specified torque.
C
69 N·m (7.0 kgf·m, 51Ibf·ft)
67. Remove the yoke from the gearbox, then, after

tightening the cylinder end (C), stake the point of
the cylinder shown (opposite from where the stake
was removed during disassembly).
BACK
17-66
Protected by AR
71. Install the cylinder lines. 75. Install the stop washer (A), and screw each rack end
(B) into the rack while holding the lock washer (C)
Note these items during reassembly: so its tabs (0) are in the slots (E) in the end of the
rack .
• Thoroughly clean the joints of the cylinder lines. 69 N·m (7.0 kgf·m. 51lbf·ftl
The joints must be free of foreign material.
• Install the cylinder lines by tightening the flare
nuts by hand first, then tighten the flare nuts to
d
~:rk;.m,
20lbf·ftl
r-;:::.~",::,.;urz
76. Hold the flat surface sections of the right side

steering rack with a wrench, and tighten the both
rack ends. Be careful not to damage the rack
surface with the wrench.
72. Grease the sliding surface of the rack guide (A), and 77. Bend the lock washer back against the flat spots on
install it onto the gearbox housing. the rack end joint housing.
73. Remove the old sealant from the rack guide screw
(B), then apply sealant all around the threads.
Install the spring (C), rack guide screw and locknut
(0).
74. Adjustthe rack guide screw (see page 17-34). After

adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by
sliding it right and left.
(cont'd)
BACK
17-67
Protected by AR
Power Steering
78. Apply mUltipurpose grease to the circumference of 81. Install the new boot bands by aligning the tabs (A)
the rack end joint housing (A). with holes (8) of the band.
~
(PIN 08798-90131
79. Apply a light coat of silicone grease to the boot 82. Close the ear portion (A) of the band with
grooves (8) on the rack end. commercially available pincers Oetiker 1098 or
equivalent (8).
80. Center the steering rack within its stroke. Install the
boots on the rack ends with the tie-rod clips. After
installing the boots, wipe the grease off the
threaded section (A) of the rack end.
&
83. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the
boots are not deformed or twisted.
BACK
17-68
Protected by AR
Steering Gearbox Installation
'99-03 Premium models: 6. Install the mounting cushion (A) on the steering
gearbox.
1. Before installing the gearbox, slide the rack all the
way to right. A
NOTE: Apply vinyl tape to the pinion shaft splines

and the line fitting surfaces on the valve body unit
to protect them from the rearbeam during B
installation.
2. Pass the passenger's side of the steering gearbox

(A) above and through the passenger's side of the
rear beam. Be careful not to bend or damage the
power steering lines and cylinder lines when
installing the gearbox.
G
/ F G G
C, G: 38 N·m 13.9 kgf·m, 28Ibf·ft)

3. Raise the driver's side of the steering gearbox F: 43 N·m 14.4 kgf·m, 32 Ibf·ft)
above and through the driver's side of the rear
beam. Then insert the pinion shaft (B) up through 7. Install the mounting brackets (B) over the mounting
the bulkhead. cushion, then install the 2 gearbox mounting bolts
(C). Position the split portion (0) of the mounting
4. Remove the vinyl tape from the pinion shaft and cushion as shown.
the valve body unit.
8. Install the stiffener plates (E) with the 2 gearbox
5. Install the pinion shaft grommet (A). Align the slot mounting bolts (F) and 6 stiffener plate attaching
(B) in the pinion shaft grommet with the lug portion bolts (G). Install the bolts loosely first, then tighten
on the valve housing. them securely.
9. Center the steering rack within its stroke.
(cont'd)
BACK
17-69
Protected by AR
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Installation (cont'd)
10. Install the steering joint (AI, and reconnect the 12. Install the steering joint cover (A) with the clamps
steering shaft (B) and pinion shaft (C) . Make sure (B) and clips (C).
the steering joint is connected as follows:
o Insert the upper end of the steering joint onto the

steering shaft (line up the bolt hole (D) with the
flat portion (E) on the shaft).
o Slip the lower end of the steering joint onto the
pinion shaft (line up the bolt hole (F) with the
groove around the shaft), and loosely install the
lower joint bolt. Be sure that the lower joint bolt
o Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the
steering joint is fully seated. Then install the
upper joint bolt and tighten it.
/
13. Install the sensor inlet hose fitting (A).
! A
12x1.0mm
13 N·m 11.3 kgf·m,
9.4Ibf·ftl
16x1.5mm
28 N·m 12.9 kgf·m,
21Ibf·ft)
E D
F
D
11 . Center the cable reel by first rotating it clockwise

until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise 6x 1.0mm
(approximately 2 and halfturns) until the arrow 12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ftl
mark on the label points straight up. 6x 1.0mm
Reinstall the steering wheel (see page 17-29). 11 N ·m 11 .1 kgf·m,
8.0Ibf·ft)
14. Connect the supply line (B), the return line (C), the
sensor inlet hose (D), and the sensor return line (E)
to the valve body unit.
BACK
17-70
Protected by AR
15. Thread the right and left tie-rod ends (A) and 18. '99 model: Connect the AfT shift cable (A) (see page
locknut (B) onto the rack an equal number of turns. 14-129) to the transmission.
'00-03 models: Connect the AfT shift cable (A) (see
A B page 14-370) to the transmission.
A
16. Wipe off any grease contamination from the ball

joint tapered section and threads then reconnect
tie-rod ends (A) to the steering knuckles. Install the
10 mm nut (B) and tighten it.
19. Install the exhaust pipe (B) and mounting bracket
c (C) (see page 9-12).
20. Install the front wheels.
21. Fill the system with power steering fluid, and bleed
air from the system (see page 17-18).
22. After installation, perform the following checks.
• Start the engine, allow it to idle, and turn the

B steering wheel from lock-to-Iock several times to
43N·m warm up the fluid. Check the gearbox for leaks
(4.4 kgf·m, 32 Ibf·ttl (see page 17-14).
• Adjust the front toe (see page 18-6).
17. Install the new cotter pin (C) and bend it as shown. • Check the steering wheel spoke angle. Adjust by
turning the right and left tie-rods equally, if
necessary.
BACK
17-71
Protected by AR
Power Steering
'02-03 Type-S models: 5. Install the mounting cushion (A) on the steering
gearbox.
1. Before installing the gearbox, slide the rack all the
way to right.
2. Pass the passenger's side ofthe steering gearbox

(A) above and through the passenger's side of the D
rear beam. Be careful not to bend or damage the
power steering lines and cylinder lines when B
installing the gearbox.
I F G
3. Raise the driver's side of the steering gearbox G
above and through the driver's side ofthe rear
beam. Then insert the pinion shaft (B) up through C, G: 38 N·m (3.9 kgf·m, 28 Ibf·ft)
the bulkhead. F: 43 N·m (4.4 kgf.m, 32 Ibf·ft)
4. Install the pinion shaft grommet (A). Align the slot 6. Install the mounting brackets (B) over the mounting
(B) in the pinion shaft grommet with the lug portion cushion, then install the two gearbox mounting
on the valve housing. bolts (C). Position the split portion (D) of the
mounting cushion as shown.
7. Install the stiffener plates (E) with the two gearbox

mounting bolts (F) and six stiffener plate attaching
bolts (G). Install the bolts loosely first, then tighten
them securely.
8. Center the steering rack within its stroke.
BACK
17-72
Protected by AR
9. Install the steering joint (A), and reconnect the 11. Install the steering joint cover (A) with the clamps
steering shaft (8) and pinion shaft (C). Make sure (8) and clips (C).
the steering joint is connected as follows:
o Insert the upper end of the steering joint onto the

steering shaft (line up the bolt hole (D) with the
flat portion (E) on the shaft).
o Slip the lower end of the steering joint onto the
pinion shaft (line up the bolt hole (F) with the
groove around the shaft), and loosely install the
lower joint bolt. 8e sure that the lower joint bolt
o Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the
steering joint is fully seated. Then install the
upper joint bolt and tighten it.
12. Connect the return line (A) and feed line (8) to the
valve body unit (C). After connecting the fluid lines,
make sure that there is no interference between the
lines and other parts.
16x1.5mm
B 28 N·m (29 kgf·m, 21 Ibf·tt)
E A
10. Center the cable reel by first rotating it clockwise

until it stops. Then rotate it counterclockwise
B
(approximately two and half turns) until the arrow
mark on the label points straight up.
Reinstall the steering wheel (see page 17-29).
14x 1.5 mm
37N·m
(3.8 kgf·m, 27 Ibf·tt)
(cont'd)
BACK
17-73
Protected by AR
Power Steering
13. Thread the right and left tie-rod ends (A) and 16. Connect the AfT shift cable (see step 12 on page 14-
locknut (8) onto the rack an equal number of turns. 371) to the transmission.
A B A
14. Wipe off any grease contamination from the ball

joint tapered section and threads then reconnect
tie-rod ends (A) to the steering knuckles. Install the 17. Install the exhaust pipe A (8) and mounting bracket
10 mm nut (8) and tighten it. 8 (C) (see page 9-12).
c 18. Install the front wheels.
19. Fill the system with power steering fluid. and bleed
air from the system (see page 17-18).
20. After installation. perform the following checks.
• Start the engine. allow it to idle. and turn the

steering wheel from lock-to-Iock several times to
warm up the fluid. Check the gearbox for leaks
43N·m (see page 17-14).
14.4 kgf·m. 32 Ibf·ftl • Adjust the front toe (see page 18-5).
• Check the steering wheel spoke angle. Adjust by
turning the right and left tie-rods equally. if
15. Install the new cotter pin (C) and bend it as shown. necessary.
BACK
17-74
Protected by AR
Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement

Front hub dis/assembly tool 07965-SA50500
1. Remove the boot from the tie-rod end, and wipe the
old grease off the ball pin.
2. Pack the lower area of the ball pin (A) with fresh
mUltipurpose grease.
3. Pack the interior ofthe new boot (B) and lip (e) with
fresh multipurpose grease.
Note these items when installing new grease:
• Keep grease off the boot installation section (0)

and the tapered section (E) if the ball pin .
• Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials
to enter the boot.
4. Install the new boot (A) using the special tool. The
boot must not have a gap at the boot installation
sections (8). After installing the boot, check the ball
pin tapered section for grease contamination, and
wipe it if necessary.
BACK
17-75
Protected by AR
Suspension
Front and Rear Suspension

Special Tools ................................................................. 18-2
Wheel Alignment .......................................................... 18-5
Wheel Bearing End-Play Inspection ........................... 18-8
Wheel Runout Inspection ............................................ 18-8
Ball Joint Removal ....................................................... 18-9
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Replacement .......................................... 18-10
Ball Joint Boot Replacement ....................................... 18-15
Upper Arm Replacement ............................................. 18-16
Lower Arm Replacement ............................................. 18-17
Damper/Spring Replacement ...................................... 18-18
Rear Suspension
Hub/Bearing Unit Replacement .................................. 18-22
Knuckle Replacement ................................................... 18-24
Upper Arm Replacement ............................................. 18-26
Trailing Arm Replacement ........................................... 18-27
Leading Arm Replacement .......................................... 18-27
Lower Arm Replacement ............................................. 18-28
Control Arm Replacement ...........................................
Damper/Spring Replacement ......................................
18-28
18-29 \1
Protected by AR
Special Tools
Ref.No. Tool Number DescriPtion Otv

CD 07 GAF-SEOO 100 Hub Dis/Assembly Tool 1
® 07GAG-SD40700 Ball Joint Boot Clip Guide 1
CD 07965-SA00600 Bearing Driver Attachment 1
® 077 49-00 10000 Driver 1
@ 07947-6340201 Attachment, 58 x 72 mm 1
IJ) 07965-SD90 100 Support Base 1
~ @
. ,~
D '-_ / 0:::: . _
CD ® ® CD,@
H
®
o IJ)
BACK
18-2
Protected by AR
FRONT DAMPER
Removal, step 1 on page 18-19
Disassembly/Inspection, step 1 on page 18-19
Reassembly, step 1 on page 18-20
Installation, step 1 on page 18-21
______ UPPER ARM

~ Replacement, page 18-16
LOWER ARM
KNUCKLE/HUB
BACK 18-3
Protected by AR
REAR DAMPER
Removal, step 1 on page 18-30
Disassembly/Inspection, step 1 on page 18-30
Reassembly, step 1 on page 18-31
Installation, step 1 on page 18-32
LEADING ARM
UPPER ARM
'\"
HUB (includes bearingl

TRAIUNGARM
18-4 BACK
Protected by AR
Wheel Alignment
Caster Inspection Caster Adjustment
For proper inspection/adjustment of the wheel Caster angle can be adjusted by increasing/decreasing
alignment, check and adjust the following before the number of the adjusting shims. Remove and install
checking the alignment: the radius rod each time the caster angle is adjusted.
• Check that the suspension is not modified. 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is
• Check the tire size and tire pressure. securely supported.
Tire size: 2. Remove the self-locking nut (A) on the end of the
Type S: P215/50 R17 93 V radius rod (B).
Premium: P205/60 R16 91 V
Tire pressure
Front/Rear: 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2, 32 psi)
• Check the runout of the wheels and tires.

• Check the suspension ball joints. (Hold a wheel with
your hands and move it up and down and right and
\
left to check for wobbling).
A B
12x 1.25 mm
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 Ibf·ft)
3. Remove the flange bolts at the radius rod (B) on the

lower arm, and remove the radius rod (see page
18-17).
4. Adjust the caster angle by increasing/decreasing

the adjusting shims (C).
Note these items during adjustment:
• Do not use more than two adjusting shims.

• One adjusting shim changes the caster angle by
Use commercially-available computerized four wheel 35' and the caster angle can be adjusted by 1°10'
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment maximum.
(caster, camber, toe, and/or turning angle). Follow the • One adjusting shim is 3.2 mm (0.13 in) in
equipment manufacturer's instructions. thickness.
1. Check the caster angle. 5. After the adjustment, install the radius rod onto the
lower arm, and tighten the flange bolts (see page
Caster angle: 2°48' ± 1° 18-17).
2. If out of specification, record the caster reading, 6. Tighten the new self-locking nut to specified torque.
then adjust the caster.
(cont'd)
BACK
18-5
Protected by AR
Wheel Alignment (cont'd)
Camber Inspection Front Toe Inspection/Adjustment
Use commercially-available computerized four wheel Use commercially-available computerized four wheel
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
(caster, camber, toe, and/or turning angle). Follow the (caster, camber, toe, and/or turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions. equipment manufacturer's instructions.
1. Check the camber angle. 1. Check the tire pressure.
Camber angle: 2. Center steering wheel spokes.

Front: 0°00' ± 1°
Rear: - 0°30' ± 30' 3. Check the toe with the wheels pointed straight
ahead.
2. If out of specification, check for bent or damaged
suspension components. Front Toe-in: 0 ± 2 mm 10 ± 1/16 in.'
• If adjustment is required, go on to step 4.

• If no adjustment is required, remove alignment
equipment.
4. Loosen the tie-rod locknuts (A), and turn the tie-

rods until the toe is within specification and the
measurements are the same for the left and right
wheels.
A
14x 1.5 mm
5. After adjusting, tighten the tie-rod locknuts.

Reposition the tie-rod boot if it is twisted or
displaced.
BACK
18-6
Protected by AR
Rear Toe InspectionlAdjustment Turning Angle Inspection
Use commercially-available computerized four wheel Use commercially-available computerized four wheel
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
(caster, camber, toe, and/or turning angle). Follow the (caster, camber, toe, and/or turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions. equipment manufacturer's instructions.
1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect 1. Turn the wheel right and left while applying the
measurement. brake, and measure the turning angle of both
wheels.
2. Check the toe.
Turning angle:
Rear Toe-in: 2±2mm (1/16±1/16in.) Inward wheel:
Type S: 35°16'±2°
• If adjustment is required, go to step 3. Premium: 38°32' ± 2°
• If no adjustment is required, remove alignment Outward wheel (reference):
equipment. Type S: 29°13'
Premium: 31°03'
3. Hold the adjusting bolt (A) on the rear control arm,
and loosen the self-locking nut (B).
B
10x 1,25 mm
4. Adjust the rear toe by turning the adjusting bolt 2. If the turning angle is not within the specifications,
until toe is correct. check for bent or damaged suspension
components.
5. Install the self-locking nut, and tighten it while
holding the adjusting bolt.
BACK
18-7
Protected by AR
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection Wheel Runout Inspection
1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely 1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely
supported. supported.
2. Remove the wheels, then reinstall the wheel nuts. 2. Check for bent or deformed wheels.
3. Attach the dial gauge. On the front, place the dial 3. Set up the dial gauge, and measure axial runout by
gauge against the hub flange. On the rear, place the turning the wheel.
dial gauge against the center of the hub cap.
Front and Rear Wheel Axial Runout:
Front/Rear: Standard:
Standard: 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.' Aluminum Wheel: 0-0.7 mm (0-0.03 in.'
Front:
!
r
-t
4. Readjust the dial gauge to the position shown, and
measure radial runout.
Rear:
Front and Rear Wheel Radial Runout:
Standard:
Aluminum Wheel: 0-0.7 mm (0-0.03 in.'
!
l~
4. Measure the bearing end play moving the disc
inward or outward.
-t
5. If the bearing end play measurement is more than 5. If the wheel runout is more than the service limit,
the standard, replace the wheel bearing. replace the wheel.
BACK
18-8
Protected by AR
Ball Joint Removal
Special Tools Required 4. Once the special tool is in place, turn the adjusting
Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 bolt (A) as necessary to make the jaws parallel.
Then hand-tighten the pressure bolt (B), and
1. Install a hex nut onto the threads of the ball joint. recheck the jaws to make sure they are still parallel.
Make sure the nut is flush with the ball joint pin end
to prevent damage to the threads end of the ball
joint.
2. Apply grease (A) to the special tool on the areas

shown. This will ease installation of the tool and
prevent damage to the pressure bolt (B) threads.
A
,,
,,
I
5. After making the adjustment to the adjusting bolt,

make sure the head of the adjusting bolt is in this
position (A) to allow the jaw (C) to pivot.
6. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt (B) until

the ball joint shaft pops loose from the steering
suspension arm. If necessary, apply penetrating
3. Install the special tool as shown. Insert the jaws type lubricant to loosen the ball joint.
carefully, making sure you do not damage the ball
joint boot. Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the 7. Remove the tool, then remove the nut from the end
pressure bolt. of the ball joint and pull the ball joint out of the
steering/suspension arm. Inspect the ball joint boot,
and replace it if damaged.
07MAC-SL00200
BACK
18-9
Protected by AR
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Replacement
Exploded View
CASTLENUT
10 x 1.25 mm
39-47 N·m (4.0-4.8 kgf·m, 29-35 Ibf·ft)
/
~ __ COTTER PIN
" Replace.
WHEEL BEARING
Replace.
SNAP RING SPLASH GUARD
L
/
/ / WASHER~~
6x14mm
~e--BALLJOINTBOOTO
SET RING 9.3 N·m (0.95 kgf·m, 6.9 Ibf·ft)
/
• Check for deterioration
• and damage.
~7-----COTTER PIN
CASTLE NUT Replace.
12x 1.25 mm
49-59 N·m (5.0-6.0 kgf·m, 36-43 Ibf·ft)
, ~1
FRONT HUB
Check for damage and
cracks.
BRAKE DISC WHEELNUT

Check for wear and 12x 1.5 mm
rust. 108N·m
(11.0 kgf·m,
80Ibf·ft)
SPINDLE NUT /
24x1.5mm
245 N·m (25.0 kgf·m, 181 Ibf·ft) ~~
.~~
Replace.
BACK
18-10
Protected by AR
Special Tools Required 7. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle (B).
• Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector.
• Hub dis/assembly tool 07GAF-SE00100
• Attachment 58 x 72 mm 07947-6340201
• Bearing driver attachment 07965-SA00600 B
• Driver 077 49-0010000
• Support base 07965-SD90100
1. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly.
2. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is

securely supported.
D
C 9.3N·m
3. Remove the wheel nuts and front wheel. 9.3N·m (0.95 kgf·m,
(0.95 kgf.m, 6.9 Ibf·ft) 6.9Ibf·ft)
4. Raise the locking tab on the spindle nut (A), then
remove the nut. 8. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A).
""'-=~~ A
245 N·m (25.0 kgf·m, 181 Ibf·ft) 9. Screw 2 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (B) into the disc to push
it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 2 turns at a
5. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts (A). time to prevent cocking the disc excessively.
10. Remove the brake disc from the knuckle.
11. Check the front hub for damage and cracks.
12. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball
joint, then loosen the nut (B).
6. Remove the caliper mounting bolts (B), and hang

the caliper assembly (e) to one side. To prevent 07MAC·SL00200
damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use
a short piece of wire to hang the caliper from the
undercarriage.
(cont'd)
BACK
18-11
Protected by AR
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Replacement (cont'd)
13. Remove the tie-rod ball joint from the knuckle using 18. Pull the knuckle outward, and remove the
the special tool (see page 18-9). driveshaft outboard joint (B) from the knuckle (A)
by tapping the driveshaft end (e) with a plastic
14. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the lower arm ball hammer, then remove the knuckle.
joint castle nut (B), and remove the nut.
B
12x 1.25mm
49-59N·m
15.0-6.0 kgf·m.
36-43 Ibf·ft) A B C
15. Remove the lower ball joint from the knuckle using 19. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the
the special tool (see page 18-9). special tool and a hydraulic press. Take care not to
distort the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep
16. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the upper ball joint it from falling when pressed clear.
castle nut (B), and remove the nut.
07GAF-SE00100
07MAC-SL00200
B
10x 1.25 mm
39-47N·m
14.0-4.8 kgf.m,
29-35 Ibf.ft)
17. Remove the upper ball joint from the knuckle using
BACK
18-12
Protected by AR
20. Remove the snap ring (A) and the splash guard (B) 22. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) from the hub
from the knuckle (e). (B) using the special tool, a commercially available
bearing separator (e), and a press.
07'.:iAI··51~oo100
Press
21. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B)
using the special tools and a press. 23. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash
point solvent before reassembly.
Press
24. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B)
using the old bearing (e), a steel plate (0), the
special tool, and a press. Place the wheel bearing
on the knuckle with the pack seal side facing (metal
color) toward the inside. Be careful not to damage
the sleeve ofthe pack seal.
BLACK COLOR
/
07965·5090100 B
(cont'd)
BACK
18-13
Protected by AR
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Replacement (cont'd)
25. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B). 28. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal,
and pay particular attention to the following items:
D
9.3 N·m (0.95 kgf·m, 6.9 Ibf·ttl
o Be careful not to damage the ball joint boots
when installing the knuckle.
o Torque all mounting hardware to the specified
torque values.
o Torque the castle nuts to the lower torque
~\. C specifications, then tighten them only far enough
to align the slot with the pin hole. Do not align
the castle nut by loosening.
o Install new cotter pins on the castle nuts after
torquing .
o Raise the locking tab on the spindle nut (C), then
remove the nut.

• Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating
surface of the front hub and the inside of the
brake disc.
26. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws o Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small
(D). amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the

nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the
27. Install the hub (A) on the knuckle (B) using the spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft.
special tools shown and a hydraulic press. Be o Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
careful not to distort the splash guard (C). surface of the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
Press
o Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if
... /07749-0010000
~079".SA"'"
_____ c
~07965-SD90100
BACK
18-14
Protected by AR
Ball Joint Boot Replacement
Special Tools Required 5. For a lower ball joint, adjust the special tool with
Ball joint boot clip guide 07GAG-SD40700 the adjusting bolt (B) until its base is just above the
groove around the bottom of the boot. Then slide
1. Remove the boot clip and the boot. the clip over the tool and into position on the boot.
2. Pack the interior of the boot and lip (A) with grease.
Do not contaminate the lower collar of the boot (B)
with grease.
A c
6. For an upper ball joint, just hold the tool over the
joint, then slide the clip over the tool and into
B B position on the boot.
3. Wipe the grease off the tapered portion of the shaft 7. After installing a boot, wipe any grease off the
and pack fresh grease into the base. Do not let dirt, exposed portion of the ball joint shaft.
or other foreign materials get into the boot.
4. Install the boot on the ball joint, then squeeze it

gently to force out any air.
BACK
18-15
Protected by AR
Front Suspension
Upper Arm Replacement
Special Tools Required 6. Remove the flange bolts (A) from the upper arm (B).
Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200
B
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is
securely supported. Remove the front wheel.
2. Remove the front damper (see step 1 on page 18-

19).
3. Remove the wheel sensor bracket nut (A) from the

upper arm (B).
A
10x 1.25 mm
64N·m
7. Install the upper arm in the reverse order of

removal, and note these items:
o Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when

connecting the upper arm to the knuckle.
o Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified
torque values.Tighten the castle nut to the lower
A torque value, then tighten it only far enough to
9.3 N·m (0.95 kgf.m, 6.9 Ibf·lt)
align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not
align the castle nut by loosening it.
o Use a new cotter pin on the castle nut.
4. Remove the cotter pin from the upper ball joint o Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
castle nut, and remove the nut. surface on the brake disc and the inside ofthe
wheel.
o Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if
10x 1.2Smm
39-47N·m
(4.0-4.8 kgf.m, 29-35 Ibf·lt)
5. Remove the upper ball joint from the knuckle using

BACK
18-16
Protected by AR
Lower Arm Replacement
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is 5. Remove the lower arm.
-1 Remove the self-locking nut from the stabilizer
2. Remove the damper fork. link (A).
-2 Remove the radius rod bolts (B).
-1 Remove the damper pinch bolt (A). -3 Remove the lower arm mounting bolt (C).
-2 Remove the lower bolt and self-locking nut (B) -4 Remove the lower arm (D) from the rear beam.
from the damper fork.
-3 Remove the damper fork (C) from the damper.
C
12x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.S kgf·m,
c 47Ibf·tt)
\
~~... :
~ ,"
~:.::::: /
43N·m
{4.4 kgf·m ,
B
12 x 1.25 mm
32lbf·ttl 64 N·m{6.S kgf·m. 47 Ibf·ttl
6. Install the lower arm in the reverse order of
3. Remove the cotter pin from the lower ball joint removal, and note these items:
castle nut, and remove the nut.
• Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
connecting the lower arm to the knuckle.
• Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified
torque values.
• Tighten the castle nut to the lower torque value,
then tighten it only far enough to align the slot
with the hole in the stud. Do not align the castle
nut by loosening it.
• Use a new cotter pin on the castle nut.
• Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surfaces on the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
• Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if
12 x 1.25 mm
49-S9N·m
{S.O-6.0 kgf.m, 36-43 Ibf·ttl
4. Remove the lower ball joint from the knuckle using

BACK
18-17
Protected by AR
Front Suspension
DamperISpring Replacement
Exploded View
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
/ /WASHER
.'
0/ __ RUBBER BUSHING
------- Check for deterioration
@------- and damage.
0.. COLLAR
DAMPER SPRING
Check for weakened compression
~_ MOUNT BASE
and damage.
Cc5'::\ RUBBER BUSHING
~... Check for deterioration
-
and damage.
SPRING CUSHION
Check for deterioration
and damage.
BUMP STOP PLATE
DUST COVER /
/d;>=------~~!:~..':.'kn'"
/1 and damage.
Check for bending

,"dd.m.g,~
/
/ / ~-
;
n LOWER SEAT
PROTECTOR
/
DUST COVER
Check for bending
and damage.
BACK
18-18
Protected by AR
Special Tools Required DisassemblyIinspection

Strut spring compressor Branick MST-580A or Model
7200 or equivalent, commercially available 1. Compress the damper spring with a commercially
available strut spring compressor (A) according to
Removal the manufacturer's instructions, then remove the
self-locking nut (B). Do not compress the spring
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is more than necessary to remove the nut.
B
2. Remove the damper fork.
-1 Remove the damper pinch bolt (A).

-2 Remove the lower bolt (B) and self-locking nut
(C) from the damper fork.
-3 Remove the damper fork (0) from the damper.
2. Release the pressure from the strut spring

compressor, then disassemble the damper as
shown in the Exploded View.
3. Reassemble all parts, except the spring.
4. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and

c check for smooth operation through a full stroke,
both compression and extension. The damper
3. Remove the damper by removing the 5 flange nuts. should move smoothly. If it does not (no
compression or no extension), the gas is leaking,
NOTE: Damper springs are different, left and right. and the damper should be replaced.
Mark the springs Land R before you continue.
5. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, or binding
during these tests.
(cont'd)
BACK
18-19
Protected by AR
Front Suspension
Damper/Spring Replacement (cont'd)
Reassembly 5. Install the rubber bushing, washer (Al. and a new

10 mm self-locking nut (B).
1. Install the damper unit on a commercially available A
strut spring compressor (A).
,... A
B
10x 1.25 mm
29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 fbf·ftl
6. Hold the damper shaft, and tighten the 10 mm self-

locking nut.
2. Assemble the damper in the reverse order of
removal except for the washer and self-locking nut.
Align the bottom of the damper spring and the
spring lower seat (B).
3. Position the mount base (A) on the damper unit.
0'±3'
.~ .
4. Compress the damper spring with the spring

compressor.
BACK
18-20
Protected by AR
Installation 5. Raise the knuckle with a floor jack until the vehicle
just lifts off the safety stand.
1. Loosely install the damper (A) on the frame with
the aligning tab (8) facing inside, then loosely 6. Tighten the damper pinch bolt.
install the five flange nuts (e).
7. Tighten the flange bolt and the self-locking nut.
c
10 x 1.25 mm
50 N·m 15.1 kgf·m, 8. Tighten the flange nuts on the top of the damper to
37lbf·ftl the specified torque.
9. Install the front wheel.

C
8x 1.25 mm A
17N·m
11.7 kgf·m,
12lbf·ftl
2. Install the damper fork (0) over the driveshaft and

onto the lower arm. Install the front damper in the
damper fork so the aligning tab (8) is aligned with
the slot in the damper fork.
10x 1.25 mm F
IUkgf·m, 12x 1.25mm
32lbf·ftl 64 N·m 16.5 kgf·m, 47 Ibf·ftl
3. Loosely install the damper pinch bolt (E) into the

damper fork.
4. Loosely install a new self-locking nut (F) with the

flange bolt (G).
BACK
18-21
Protected by AR
Rear Suspension
Hub/Bearing Replacement
Exploded View
FLANGE NUT
16x1.5mm
140 N·m (14.3 kgf.m,103Ibf·ft)
\ PARKING BRAKE ASSEMOLV
/ HUB (In,'ud.. be.ringl
/ iKEDI~ SPINDLE NUT 22 x 1.5 mm

181 N·m (18.5 kgf·m, 1341bf·ftl
Replace.
WHEEL CENTER CAP
KNUCKLE
FLAT-HEAD SCREW
6x1.0mm
9.3 N·m (0.95 kgf·m,
6.9Ibf·ft)
WHEEL NUT 12 x 1.5 mm

108 N·m (11.0 kgf·m, 80 Ibf·ftl
BACK
18-22
Protected by AR
,. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is 9. Remove the 6 mm brake disc retaining screws (A).
securely supported.
A
9.3N·m
2. Remove the wheel nuts and rear wheel. 10.95 kgf.m, 6.9 Ibf·ftl
3. Press down on the parking brake pedal.
4. Remove the hub cap (A).

A
10. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (B) into the disc (C) to
push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt two turns
at a time to prevent cocking the disc excessively.
11. Remove the hub bearing unit from the knuckle.
B
22x 1.5mm
181 N·m
118.5 kgf·m, 134 Ibf.ttl
'7
12x1.5mm
108N·m
111 .0 kgf·m, 80 Ibf·ttl
5. Raise the locking tab on the spindle nut (B), then

remove the nut.
6. Release the parking brake pedal.
7. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A).
c B
55 N·m 15.6 kgf·m,
41lbf·ttl
12. Install the bearing in the reverse order of removal,
and pay particular attention to the following items:
o Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating

surfaces of the rear hub and brake disc.
o Wash the bearing and spindle thoroughly in high
A
y o
flash point solvent before reassembly.
To prevent damage to the caliper or brake hose,
use a short piece of wire to hang the caliper from
8x1.25mm the undercarriage.
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m, 16 Ibf·ttl o After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle
nut shoulder against the spindle.
8. Remove the caliper bracket mounting bolts (B), and
hang the caliper (C) to one side. To prevent damage
to the caliper or brake hose, use a short piece of
wire to hang the caliper from the undercarriage.
BACK
18-23
Protected by AR
Rear Suspension
Knuckle Replacement
Special Tools Required 7. Remove the flange nut (A) from the stabilizer link
Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL00200 while holding the stabilizer link joint pin with a hex
wrench (B) .
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is
C A
securely supported. Remove the rear wheel. 10x 1.25 mm 10x 1.25 mm
59 N·m (6.0 kgf. m, 39 N·m (4.0 kgf.m.
2. Remove the rear brake caliper, the caliper 43lbf·ftl 29lbf·ftl
mounting bracket, and the brake hose mounting
bolt from the rear knuckle (see step 7 on page 18-
23).
3. Remove the rear brake disc and hub (see step 8 on

page 18-23).
4. Remove the cotter pin from the upper ball joint

D
07MAC-SLOO200
8. Remove the damper lower mount bolt (C), and the
stabilizer link mounting bracket (D).
9. Remove the control arm mounting nut from the

rear knuckle.
12 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m.
43lbf·ftl
49-58N·m
(5.0-6.0 kgf·m,
36-43 Ibf· ftl
\ 'OJ
5. Separate the upper ball joint from the knuckle

using the special tool (see page 18-9).
6. Remove the ABS sensor from the brake backing

plate (see page 19-106).
ED
BACK
18-24
Protected by AR
10. Remove the leading arm mounting bolt from the 12. Remove the parking brake cable mounting bolt (A)
rear knuckle. from the trailing arm, then remove the trailing arm
mounting bolt (B) from the rear knuckle.
12x 1.25 mm
59 N·m {6.0 kgf·m, 43 Ibf·ftl A
22 N·m {2.2 kgf·m,
B-----
12x25mm
59 N·m {6.0 kgf·m,
16lbf.ftl 43lbf·ftl
11. Remove the backing plate mounting nuts, then
remove the backing plate. 13. Remove the lower arm mounting bolt (A) and nut
(B), then remove the knuckle.
16 mm FLANGE NUT
140 N·m {14.3 kgf·m,
1031bf·ftl
10 mm FLANGE NUT B
38 N·m {3.9 kgf.m, 28 Ibf·ftl 12x 1.25 mm
59 N·m {6.0 kgf·m, 43 Ibf·ftl
14. Reinstall the knuckle in the reverse order of

• Be careful not to damage the boot joint boot

when connecting the upper arm to the knuckle.
torque values.
• Tighten the castle nut to the lower torque
specifications, then tighten it only far enough to
align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not
align the castle nut by loosening it.
• Use a new cotter pin in the castle nut.
surfaces on the brake disc and inside of the
wheel.
• Check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust it if
BACK
18-25
Protected by AR
Rear Suspension
Upper Arm Replacement
Special Tools Required 6. Remove the upper arm bolt (A). Remove the upper
Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-Sl00200 arm (B) from the vehicle.
B

securely supported. Remove the rear wheel.
07MAC-SL00200
A
12x 1.25mm
7. Install the upper arm in the reverse order of

o Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when

o Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified
3. Remove the upper ball joint from the knuckle using torque values.
the special tool (see page 18-9). o Tighten the castle nut to the lower torque

4. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts (A). align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not
A align the castle nut by loosening it.
B 9.3 N·m (0.95 kgf·m, 6.9 Ibf·ftl o Use a new cotter pin in the castle nut.
9.3 N·m (0.95 kgf·m, o Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
6.9Ibf·ftl
wheel.
5. Remove the wheel sensor mounting bolt (B).
BACK
18-26
Protected by AR
Trailing Arm Replacement Leading Arm Replacement
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is
securely supported. Remove the rear wheel. securely supported. Remove the rear wheel.
2. Remove the parking cable mounting bolt (A) from 2. Remove the leading arm mounting bolts (A), and
the trailing arm (B). remove the leading arm (B) from the vehicle.
3. Remove the trailing arm mounting bolts (C). B
4. Remove the trailing arm (B) from the vehicle.
C
12x 1.25 mm
59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 43 Ibf·tt)
A
12 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 43 Ibf·tt)
3. Install the leading arm in the reverse order of


torque values.
B 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 Ibf·tt) • Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
5. Install the trailing arm in the reverse order of wheel.
removal, and note these items: • Check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust it if
torque values.
wheel.
BACK
18-27
Protected by AR
Rear Suspension
Lower Arm Replacement Control Arm Replacement
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is
securely supported. Remove the rear wheel. securely supported. Remove the rear wheel.
2. Remove the leading arm mounting bolts (A), and 2. Remove the control arm from the vehicle.
remove the leading arm (B) from the vehicle.
-1 Remove the self-locking nut (A) from the
A
12x 1.25mm knuckle bolt.
o 59 N·m 16.0 kgf·m, 43 Ibf·ftl -2 Remove the self-locking nut (B) from the rear
suspension subframe.
- 3 Remove the control arm (C) from the vehicle.
A
12 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m 16.0 kgf·m,
43lbf·ftl
B
12x 1.25mm
\ OtJ
ED
3. Install the leading arm in the reverse order of

torque values.
• Before installing the wheel, clean the mating c
wheel. 3. Install the control arm in the reverse order of
• Check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust it if removal, and note these items:
torque values.
wheel.
18-28
BACK
Protected by AR
DamperISpring Replacement
Exploded View
SELFOLOCKING NUT
10 x 1.25 mm
29 N·m 13.0 kgf·m. 22 rbf·tt)
Replace.
~ ______ WASHER
.0/ _______ Check for weakness .
•
@ .. RUBBER BUSHING
e-----
i------COLLAR
MOUNT BASE
@---------------RUsaER BUSHING
u..-::,......I=---- ------.J ~ RUBBER
SPRING MOUNT
CUSHION
Check for deterioration
DAMPER SPRING and damage.
--------------r~ /
®~--------SPRING
~
SEAT CUSHION
'ii Check for deterioration

and damage.
~ BUMP STOP PlATE
BUMP STOP
Check for weakness
and damage.
DUST COVER
Check for bending and damage.
DAMPER UNIT
(cont'd)
BACK
18-29
Protected by AR
Rear Suspension

Special Tools Required Disassembly,lnspection
Strut spring compressor, Branick MST-580A or Model
7200 or equivalent, Commercially Available 1. Compress the damper spring with the
commercially available strut spring compressor (A)
Removal according to the manufacturer's instructions, then
remove the self-locking nut (B). Do not compress
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is the spring more than necessary to remove the self-
securely supported. Remove the rear wheel. locking nut.
2. Remove the rear shelf (see page 20-56).
3. Remove the two flange nuts (A).
A
10x 1.25mm
2. Release the pressure from the strut spring

compressor, then disassemble the damper as
shown in the Exploded View.
4. Remove the flange bolt (A) from the knuckle.
3. Reassemble all parts, except the spring.
B
A 10x 1.25 mm
10 x 1.25 mm 39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 4. Compress the damper by hand, and check for
59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 29Ibf·ft9
43lbf·ftl smooth operation through a full stroke, both
compression and extension. The damper should
~ move smoothly. If it does not, replace it.
5. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding

during these tests.
5. Remove the flange nut (B) from the stabilizer link.
6. Lower the rear suspension, and remove the

damper (C) from the vehicle.
NOTE: Damper springs are different, left and right.

Mark the springs Land R before you continue.
18-30 BACK
Protected by AR
•
Reassembly 5. Install the washer (A), and loosely install a new self-
locking nut (8).
1. Install the damper unit on a commercially available B
strut spring compressor (A). 10 x 1.25 mm
2. Assemble the damper in reverse order of
disassembly, except for the washer and self-
locking nut. Align the bottom of the damper spring
and the spring lower seat (8).
A
6. Hold the damper shaft with a hex wrench, and

tighten the self-locking nut.
3. Position the damper mounting base on the damper

unit.
4. Compress the damper spring with the spring

compressor.
(cont'd)
BACK
18-31
Protected by AR
Rear Suspension
Installation 3. Raise the rear suspension with a floor jack until the
vehicle just lifts off the safety stand.
1. Lower the rear suspension, and position the
damper (A), and loosely install the two flange nuts 4. Tighten the flange bolt at the bottom of the damper
(8). to the specified torque.
B
10x1.25mm 5. Tighten the flange nut of the stabilizer link ball joint
50 N·m 15.1 kgf·m, 37 Ibf·ft) to the specified torque while holding the joint pin
with a hex wrench.
6. Tighten the two flange nuts on top of the damper to

7. Install the rear shelf (see page 20-561.
8. Install the rear wheels.
9. Check the rear wheel alignment and adjust it if

A necessary (see page 18-5).
2. Loosely install the flange bolt (A) and nut (8).

B
A 10 x 1.25 mm
10x 1.25 mm 39 N·m 14.0 kgf·m,
59 N·m 16.0 kgf·m, 29lbf·ft)
43lbf·ft)
BACK
18-32
Protected by AR
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components

Special Tools ................................................................. 19-2
Brake System Operation and
Leakage Check ................ ............................ .... ............ 19-4
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch
Adjustment .................................................................. 19-5
Parking Brake Check and
Adjustment .................................................................. 19-6
Brake System Bleeding ................................................ 19-8
Brake System Indicator Circuit
Diagram ....................................................................... 19-9
Parking Brake Switch Test ........................................... 19-10
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test ...................................... 19-10
Front Brake Pads Inspection/
Replacement ............................................................... 19-11
Front Brake Disc Inspection ......................................... 19-13
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul ...................................... 19-14
Master Cylinder Replacement ..................................... 19-15
Master Cylinder Inspection .......................................... 19-16
Master Cylinder Pushrod Clearance
Adjustment .................................................................. 19-16
Brake Booster Test ....................................................... 19-18
Brake Booster Replacement ........................................ 19-19
Rear Brake Pads Inspection/
Replacement ................. ................ .............................. 19-20
Rear Brake Disc Inspection .......................................... 19-22
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul ....................................... 19-23
Parking Brake Inspection ............................................. 19-24
Parking Brake Shoes Replacement ............................. 19-26
Lining Surface Break-in ................................................ 19-29
Brake Hoses and Lines Inspection .............................. 19-30
Brake Hose Replacement ............................................. 19-31
Parking Brake Cable Replacement .............................. 19-32
ABS/TCS (Anti-Lock Brake

System/Traction Control
System) Components ............................... 19-35
VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist)

System Components .................................... 19-107
Protected by AR
Special Tools
Tool Number DescriDtion

07JAG·SD40100 Push rod Adjustment Gauae
CD
BACK
19-2
Protected by AR
INDICATOR
Brake System Indicator Circuit
Diagram, page 19-9
Parking Brake Switch
Test, page 19-10
Brake Fluid Level Switch
Test, page 19-10
BRAKE HOSES/LINES
Brake Hoses and Lines
Brake Hose Replacement,
page 19-31
PARKING DRUM BRAKE

Parking Brake
Parking Brake Shoes
MASTER CYLINDER Replacement, page 19-26
Brake System Bleeding. Lining Surface
page 19-8 Break-in, page 19-29
Master Cylinder Replacement,
page 19-15
Master Cylinder Inspection, REAR DISC BRAKE
page 19-16 Rear Brake Pads Inspetion!
Master Cylinder push rod Replacement, page 19-20
Clearance Adjustment, Rear Brake Disc
page 19-16 Inspection, page 19-22
Rear Brake Caliper
Overhaul, page 19-23
BRAKE BOOSTER
Brake Booster Test, PARKING BRAKE CABLE
page 19-18 Parking Brake Cable
Brake Booster Replacement, page 19-32
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

Parking Brake Check and
BRAKE PEDAL Adjustment, page 19-6
Brake Pedal Adjustment,
page 19-5
FRONT BRAKES
Front Brake Pads Inspection/
Front Brake Disc
Front Brake Caliper
Overhaul, page 19-14
BACK
19-3
Protected by AR
Brake System Operation and Leakage Check
Check all of the f -- .. _.... ... . __ ..... _.

~
Component Procedure
Brake Booster (A) Check brake operation by applying the brakes during a test drive. If the brakes do not
work properly, check the brake booster. Replace the brake booster as an assembly if it
does not work properly or if there are signs of leakage. ,
Piston Cup and • Check brake operation by applying the brakes. Look for damage or signs of fluid
Pressure Cup leakage. Replace the master cylinder as an assembly if the pedal does not work
Inspection (B) properly or if there is damage or signs of fluid leakage .
• Check for a difference in brake pedal stroke between quick and slow brake
applications. Replace the master cylinder ifthere is a difference in pedal stroke.
Brake Hoses (C) Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage. Replace the brake hose with a new one if it
is damaged or leaking.
Caliper Piston Seal and Check brake operation by applying the brakes.
Piston Boots (0) Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage. If the pedal does not work properly, the
brakes drag, or there is damage or signs of fluid leakage, disassemble and inspect the
brake caliper. Replace the boots and seals with new ones whenever the brake caliper
~--- ---- _ .- cl~disassembl~d.
19-4
BACK
Protected by AR
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment
Pedal Height 4. Screw in the brake pedal position switch until its
plunger is fully pushed in (threaded end (AI
1. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch (brake touching the pad (8) on the pedal arm). Then back
switchl connector, loosen the brake pedal position off the switch 1/4 turn to make 0.3 mm (0.01 in.) of
switch locknut (A), and back off the brake pedal clearance between the threaded end and pad.
position switch (81 until it is no longer touching the Tighten the locknut firmly.
brake pedal. Connect the brake pedal position switch connector.
Make sure that the brake lights go off when the
2. Pull back the carpet. At the insulator cutout, pedal is released.
measure the pedal height (Cl from the middle of
the right side of the pedal pad (Dl.
Standard Pedal Height Iwith carpet removedl:

169 mm 1610/16 in.1
5. Check the brake pedal free playas described below.
Pedal Free Play
1. With the engine off, inspect the pedal free play (A)
on the pedal pad (8) by pushing the pedal by hand.
Free Play: 1-5 mm 11/16-3/16 in.1
3. Loosen the pushrod locknut (AI, and screw the

push rod in or out with pliers until the standard
pedal height from the floor is reached. After
adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not
adjust the pedal height with the pushrod pushed in.
c
2. If the pedal free play is out of specification, adjust

the brake pedal position switch (Cl. If the pedal free
play is insufficient, it may result in brake drag.
BACK 19-5
Protected by AR
Parking Brake Check and Adjustment
Check Minor Adjustment

1. Press the parking brake pedal (A) with 294 N (30 kgf, 1. Raise the rear wheels off the ground, and support
66 Ibf) of force. The parking brake pedal should the vehicle on safety stands.
travel within the specified number of clicks (B).
2. Tighten the adjusting nut (A) until the parking
Pedal Notches: 2- 4 brakes drag slightly when the rear wheels are
turned.
If the number of clicks is excessive, adjust the
parking brake pedal.
Minor parking brake pedal adjustment (1 - 2
clicks) can be made with the adjusting nut in the
parking brake pedal.
If a larger adjustment is required, follow the major
adjustment procedure using the adjuster at the
parking brake drum.
NOTE: After installing new brake shoes and/or new

rear brake disc/drums, make sure you drive the
vehicle for "Break-in" (see page 19-29).
l
A 3. Back off the adjusting nut in halfturn increments,
and check for proper adjustment.
19-6 BACK
Protected by AR
Major Adjustment 6. Check the number of clicks by pressing the parking

brake pedal with 294 N (30 kgf, 66 Ibfl of force.
, . Raise the rear wheels off the ground, and support
the vehicle on safety stands. Pedal Clicks: 2- 4
2. Release the parking brake pedal, and back off the If number of clicks exceed the specification, follow
adjusting nut (AI in the parking brake pedal. the minor adjustment procedure.
7. Install the access plug and rear wheels.
3. Remove the rear wheels.
4. Remove the access plug (A).
5. Turn the brake shoe adjuster (B) up with a flat blade

screwdriver (C) until the shoes lock, then back off 8
notches.
BACK 19-7
Protected by AR
Brake System Bleeding
NOTE: Pressure Bleeding

• Do not reuse the drained fluid.
• Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non- 1. Install the appropriate power probe pressure
Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease bleeder adapter onto the master cylinder.
the life of the system.
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed 2. Use the bleeding sequence below, and follow the
to contaminate the brake fluid . bleeding instructions that come with your pressure
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage bleeder.
the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it BlEEDING SEQUENCE:
off immediately with water.
• The reservoir on the master cylinder must be at the ® Front Right @ RNrRight
~C J
MAX (upper) level mark at the start of bleeding
procedure and checked after bleeding each brake
caliper. Add fluid as required.
Conventional Method <D Front Left ® R•• rLeft
1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir is at

the MAX (upper) level line (A).
Bleed Screw Locations
FRONT:
9 N·m (0.9 kgf·m. 7 Ibf·ttl
2. Attach a length of clear drain tube to the bleed

screw.
3. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal

several times, then apply steady pressure.
4. Loosen the left-front brake bleed screw to allow air

to escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed REAR:
screw securely.
9 N·m (0.9 kgf.m. 7 Ibf·tt)
5. Repeat the procedure for each wheel in the

sequence shown until air bubbles no longer appear
in the fluid coming out of the drain tube.
BlEEDING SEQUENCE:
® Front Right @ R... rRight
~C J
<D Front L.tt @ RearLeft
6. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX

(upper) level line.
19-8 BACK
Protected by AR
Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram
UNDER·HOOD FUSE/ IGNITION

RELAY BOX SWITCH
BA&-BLK_e2_20_A_'_ _ 1G_1_M~WHT~
BLK/YEL
I
BLK/YEL
BACK UP LIGHT DRIVER'S UNDER·DASH

(7.5A' FUSE/RELAY BOX
1 Canada
GAUGE BRAKE
ASSEMBLY DRL
SYSTEM INDICATOR
INDICATOR UGHT
GRN/RED 1
GRN/BLU BLU/WHT .
• ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT

• MULnPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DRIVER'S , I 1
\J ,
~m ------~~------------~
1
1 MULnPLEX CONTROL UNIT, 1

, DRIVER'S 1
1_ .. _ .. _ ..- ._ .. _ .. -'
..
_··_··-· -I·-··- ·· - r- ··
I GRN/REO i
1
GRN/REDI
GRN/BLU
1
1
I
L. _ .. _ .. _ _ ..Canada .1._ .. USAI
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH BRAKE FLUID

CLOSED: P..tal depressed LEVEL SWITCH
OPEN: P..tal released CLOSED: Float down
OPEN: Float up
BLK
.J...
G302
BACK 19-9
Protected by AR
Parking Brake Switch Test Brake Fluid Level Switch Test
1. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector (A) 1. Remove the reservoir cap (A). Check that the float
from the switch (B). (B) moves up and down freely; if it doesn't, replace
the reservoir cap assembly.
A
B qj,....... D
k ~J -----c
2. Check for continuity between the terminals with the

float in the down position (C) and the up position
2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal (D):
(C) and body ground. • With the float up, there should be no continuity .
• With the float down, there should be continuity .
• With the parking brake pedal pressed, there
should be continuity .
• With the parking brake pedal released, there

should be no continuity.
NOTE(Canada): If the parking brake switch is OK,

but the brake system indicator does not function,
do the input test for the daytime running lights
control unit (see page 22-163).
19-10 BACK
Protected by AR
Front Brake Pads Inspection and Replacement
5. Using vernier calipers, measure the thickness of

ACAUTION each brake pad lining. The measurement does not
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of include pad backing plate (A) thickness.
material composition, could be hazardous to your
health. Brake Pad Thickness:
• Avoid breathing dust particles. Standard: 10.5-11.5 mm (0.41-0.45 in.)
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake Service Limit: 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum
cleaner.
1. Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly. Raise the front

of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely
supported. Remove the front wheels.
2. Remove the brake hose mounting bolts (A) from

the knuckle.
6. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service

limit, replace the front pads as a set.
7. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and

check for grooves and cracks.
B 8. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks.

c
9. Install the pad retainers (A).
3. Remove caliper bolt, and pivot the caliper (C) up
out ofthe way. Check the hoses and pin boots for A
damage and deterioration.
4. Remove the pad shims (A), pad retainers (B), and

pads (C).
(cont' d)
BACK 19-11
Protected by AR
Front Brake Pads Inspect · and Replacement (cont'd)
10. Apply Molykote M77 grease or Oaikai ub 5280 12. Push in the piston (A) so the caliper witt fit over the
grease to the pad side of the shims (A) and back of pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to
the pads (B). Wipe excess grease off the shim. prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper
Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping down.
ability. Keep grease off the discs and pads.
B
/ 4 9 N·m (5.0 kgf.m, 36 Ibf·ftl
~.
A
B 13. Pivot the caliper down into position. Being careful

not to damage the pin boot, install the caliper bolt
11. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. (B), and torque it to proper specification.
Install the pad with the wear indicator (C) on the
inside. 14. Install the brake hose onto the knuckle.
If you are reusing the pads, always reinstall the 15. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure
brake pads in their original positions to prevent a the brakes work, then road-test.
momentary loss of braking efficiency.
NOTE: Engagement of the brake may require a
greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake
pads have been replaced as a set. Several
applications of the brake pedal witt restore the
normal pedal stroke.
16. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line

joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
BACK
19-12
Protected by AR
Front Brake Disc Inspection
Runout Thickness and Parallelism

1. Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly, then raise the 1. Loosen the front wheel nuts slightly, then raise the
vehicle and make sure it is securely supported. vehicle and make sure it is securely supported.
Remove the front wheels. Remove the front wheels.
2. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-11 I. 2. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-11 I.
3. Inspect the disc surface for damage and cracks. 3. Using a micrometer, measure disc thickness at
Clean the disc thoroughly, and remove all rust. 8 points, approximately 45° apart and 10 mm (0.4 in.1
in from the outer edge of the disc. Replace the
4. Use wheel nuts and suitable flat washers (AI to brake disc if the smallest measurement is less than
hold the disc securely against the hub, then mount the max. refinishing limit.
a dial indicator as shown, and measure the runout
at 10 mm (0.4 in. I from the outer edge of the disc. Brake Disc Thickness:
Standard: 27.9-28.1 mm (1.10-1.11 in.)
Brake Disc Runout: Max. Refinishing Limit: 26.0 mm (1.02 in.)
Service Limit: 0.10 mm (0.004 in.) Brake Disc Parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.) max.
NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference

between the thickness measurements.
A
108 N·m (11.0 kgf.m, 80 Ibf.tt)
5. If the disc is beyond the service limit, refinish the

brake disc with an on-car brake lathe. The Kwik-
Lathe produced by Kwik-way Manufacturing Co.
and the "Front Brake Disc Lathe" offered by Snap-
on Tools Co. are approved for this operation. When 4. If the disc is beyond the service limit for parallelism,
refinishing a front brake disc make sure the TCS refinish the brake disc with an on-car brake lathe.
switch is OFF. The Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-way
Manufacturing Co. and the "Front Brake Disc
Max. Refinish Limit: 26.0 mm (1.02 in.) Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved
for this operation. When refinishing a front brake
NOTE: disc, make sure the TCS switch is OFF.
• If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
refinishing, replace it (see page 18-101 . NOTE: Ifthe brake disc is beyond the service limit
• A new disc should be refinished if its runout is for refinishing, replace it (see page 18-101.
greater than 0.10 mm (0.004 in.l.
BACK 19-13
Protected by AR
Front Brake Caliper Overhaui
ACAUTION
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health.
o Avoid breathing dust particles.
o Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
o Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately with water.
o To prevent dripping, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels.
o Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blowout all passages with compressed air.
o Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
o Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
o Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
o Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads.
o When reusing pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
o Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
o Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
o Coat the piston, piston seal groove, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid.
o Replace all rubber parts with new ones.
o After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
~
(PIN 08C3O-B0234MI
PIN BOOT
Replace.
WEAR INDICATOR
Install inner pad with
its wear indicator upward.
~ FLANGE BOLTS
(PIN 08C3 0·B0234MI
PIN 12x1.25mm
108 N·m (11.0 kgf·m,
~-
80lbf·ftl
~~~~
~~AILING ~ ~ B~~~·B0234MI
fib (PIN 0
WASHERS . zi) PIN
~: :f~
~13.5 ~ ~
BANJO BOLT p.oo. I": -- '.pl.".
'- PAD RETAINERS CALIPER
kgf.m, ..BRAKE;;;;- •
N.m;"......m. 361b1.ft, OUTER PAD\SHN BRACKET
ft..\ II ~
~a~
CAlLIPER BODY PISTON SEAL
BRAKEHO~/ ~
Replace.
~D
SILICONEG
I I
0~ \..IVO~
~
SCREW PISTON REASE
Replace. T
7./
7,..
0
......m. ~
PISTON BOO
(PIN 08C3 0·B0234MI
19-14
BACK
Protected by AR
Master Cylinder Replacement
INOTICE I 5. Disconnect the brake lines (A) from the master

Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may cylinder. To prevent spills, cover the hose joints
damage the paint. If brake fluid does contact with rags or shop towels.
the paint, wash it off immediately with water.
1. Remove the 8 mm flange nuts (A).

o
A
8x 1.25 mm
~ 22 N·m (2.2 kgf.m.
~ 16lbf·ft)
-"""",,-,~-~~
c
~
Silicone
E
2. Remove the strut brace (B).
3. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connectors

(A), and remove the reservoir cap (B).
6. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (B) and

washers.
7. Remove the master cylinder (C) from the brake

booster (D). Be careful not to bend or damage the
brake lines when removing the master cylinder.
8. Remove the rod seal (E) from the master cylinder.
9. Install the master cylinder in the reverse order of

• Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever

removed.
• Coat the lip of the new rod seal with
recommended seal grease in the master cylinder
4. Remove the brake fluid from the master cylinder set.
reservoir (C) with a syringe. • Install the rod seal onto the master cylinder with
its grooved side (F) toward the master cylinder.
BACK 19-15
Protected by AR
Master Cylinder Inspection Master Cylinder Pushrod Clearance

Adjustment
NOTE:
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of
dust and other foreign particles. Special Tool Required
• Do not try to disassemble the master cylinder Pushrod adjustment gauge 07JAG-SD40100
assembly. Replace the master cylinder assembly with
a new part if necessary. NOTE: Master cylinder pushrod-to-piston clearance
• Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to contaminate the must be checked and adjustments made, if necessary,
brake fluid. before installing master cylinder.
1. Set the special tool (A) on the master cylinder body

(B), push in the center shaft (C) until the top of it
contacts the end of the secondary piston (D) by
RESERVOIR SEAL turning the adjusting nut (E).
Check for damage and
/ deterioration.
_ _ _ _ STRAINER
~~ Remove accumulated
sediment.
B
c
MASTER CYLINDER A .. [
Check for leaks, rust and damage. 07JAG-SD40100
2. Without disturbing the center shaft's position,

install the special tool (A) onto the booster.
C
0-101 kPa A
(0-760 mmHg, 30 in.Hg) 07JAG-SD40100
3. Install the master cylinder nuts (B). and tighten to
4. Connect the booster in-line with a vacuum gauge

(C) 0- 101 kPa (0-760 mmHg, 30 in.Hg) to the
booster's engine vacuum supply, and maintain an
engine speed that will deliver 66 kPa (500 mmHg,
20 in.Hg) vacuum.
19-16 BACK
Protected by AR
5. With a feeler gauge (A), measure the clearance 9. Check the pushrod length (A) as shown if the
between the gauge body and the adjusting nut (B) booster is removed. If the length is incorrect,
as shown. loosen the push rod locknut (B), and turn the clevis
If the clearance between the gauge body and (C) in or out to adjust.
adjusting nut is 0.4 mm (0.02 in.), the pushrod-to- A
piston clearance is 0 mm. However, if the clearance 116 mm 14.6 in.)
between the gauge body and adjusting nut is 0 mm,
the pushrod-to-piston clearance is 0.4 mm (0.02 in.)
or more. Therefore it must be adjusted and
rechecked.
Clearance: 0-0.4 mm (0-0.02 in.)
B
7'
15N·m
\c
11.5 kgf.m, 11 Ibf·ft)
10. Install the master cylinder (see page 19-15).
6. If the clearance is incorrect, loosen the star locknut

(A), and turn the adjuster (B) in or out to adjust .
• Adjust the clearance while the specified vacuum

is applied to the booster .
..
• Hold the clevis (C) while adjusting.
A
0-0.4 mm (0-0.02 in.) 22N·m
122 ' 'OJ '.'b' ft,

o
\\ B C
7. Tighten the star locknut securely.
8. Remove the special tool (0).
BACK
19-17
Protected by AR
Brake Booster Test
Functional Test Booster Check Valve Test
1. With the engine stopped, press the brake pedal 1. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (check
several times to deplete the vacuum reservoir, then valve built-in) (A) at the booster (B).
press the pedal hard and hold it for 15 seconds. If
the pedal sinks, either the master cylinder is A
bypassing internally, or the brake system (master
cylinder, lines, modulator, proportioning valve, or
caliper) is leaking.
2. Start the engine with the pedal pressed. If the pedal

sinks slightly, the vacuum booster is operating
normally. If the pedal height does not vary, the
booster or check valve is faulty.
3. With the engine running, press the brake pedal

lightly. Apply just enough pressure to hold back
automatic transmission creep. If the brake pedal
sinks more than 10 mm (3/8 in.) in 3 minutes, the
master cylinder is faulty. A slight change in pedal 2. Start the engine, and let it idle. There should be
height when the AlC compressor cycles on and off vacuum available. If no vacuum is available, the
is normal. (The AlC compressor load changes the check valve is not working properly. Replace the
vacuum available to the booster.) brake booster vacuum hose and check valve, and
retest.
Leak Test
1. Press the brake pedal with the engine running, then

stop the engine. If the pedal height does not vary
while pressed for 30 seconds, the vacuum booster
is OK. If the pedal rises, the booster is faulty.
2. With the engine stopped, press the brake pedal

several times using normal pressure. When the
pedal is first pressed, it should be low. On
consecutive applications, the pedal height should
gradually rise. If the pedal position does not vary,
check the booster check valve.
19-18 BACK
Protected by AR
Brake Booster Replacement
1. Remove the master cylinder (see page 19-15). 8. Pull the brake booster (A) forward. then turn it to
the right until the clevis (B) is clear of the bulkhead
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the brake (e).
booster (B).
A
D
E
/
3. Remove the fuel feed line bracket (e). 9. Install the brake booster in the reverse order of
removal. and note these items:
4. Remove the starter cable clamps (D).
• Adjust the push rod length before installing the
5. Remove the windshield wiper intermittent relay brake booster.
bracket (E). • Use a new lock pin.
• After installation. adjust the brake pedal height
6. Remove the lock pin (A) and clevis pin (B). and brake pedal free play (see page 19-5).
C
8x 1.2Smm
13 N·m 11.3 kgf·m. 9.4Ibf·ftl
7. Remove the four booster mounting nuts (e).
BACK 19-19
Protected by AR
Rear Brake Pads Inspection and Replacement
4. Remove the pad shims (A) and brake pads (B).

ACAUTION
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless A
~\\
of material composition, could be hazardous to
your health .
• Avoid breathing dust particles.
~
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum
cleaner.
A

securely supported. Remove the rear wheel.
2. Release the parking brake.
3. Remove the brake hose from the suspension arm

by removing the mounting bolt, then remove the
two caliper bolts (A) and caliper (B) from the
bracket.
\ B
5. Using vernier calipers, measure the thickness of

Thoroughly clean the outside of the caliper to each brake pad lining. Measurement does not
prevent dust and dirt from entering inside. include pad backing plate (A) thickness.
Support the caliper with a piece of wire so that it
does not hang from the brake hose. Brake Pad Thickness:
Standard: 8.5-9.5 mm (0.33-0.37 in.)
A Service Limit: 1.6 mm (0.06 in.'
~
M
B
A
19-20 BACK
Protected by AR
6. Remove the pad retainers (A). 12. Push in the piston so the caliper will fit over the
pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to
prevent damaging it when installing the caliper.
13. Install the brake caliper (A).
B
23N·m
7. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and

check for grooves and cracks.
8. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks.
9. Install the pad retainers.

14. Install and torque the caliper bolts (B) to proper
10. Apply Molykote M77 grease or Daikalub 528D specification.
grease to the pad side of the shims (A) and back of
the pads (B). Wipe excess grease off the shim. 15. Install the brake hose onto the suspension arm with
Contaminated brake discs or pads reduce stopping the mounting bolt.
ability. Keep grease off the discs and pads.
16. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line
joints and connections, and retighten if necessary.
17. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure

the brakes work, then road-test.
NOTE: Engagement ofthe brake may require a

greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake
pads have been replaced 8S a set. Several
applications of the brake pedal will restore the
normal pedal stroke.
11. Install the brake pads (B) and pad shims on the
caliper bracket. Install the inner pad with its wear
indicator (C) facing downward.
If you are reusing the pads, always reinstall the

pads in their original positions to prevent a
momentary loss of braking efficiency.
BACK
19-21
Protected by AR
Rear Brake Disc Inspection

Runout Thickness and parallelism
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is 1. Loosen the rear wheel nuts slightly, then raise the
securely supported. vehicle and make sure it is securely supported.
Remove the rear wheels.
2. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-20).
2. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-20).
3. Inspectthe disc surface for damage and cracks.
Clean the disc thoroughly, and remove all rust. 3. Using a micrometer (A), measure disc thickness at
8 points, approximately 45° apart and 10 mm (0.4 in.)
4. Use wheel nuts and suitable flat washers (A) to in from the outer edge of the disc. Replace the
hold the disc securely against the hub, then mount brake disc if the smallest measurement is less than
a dial indicator (B) as shown, and measure the the max. refinishing limit.
runout at 10 mm (0.4 in.) from the outer edge ofthe
disc. Brake Disc Thickness:
Standard: B.9-9.1 mm (0.350-0.358 in.'
Brake Disc Runout: Max. Refinishing limit: 7.5 mm (0.30 in.'
Service limit: 0.10 mm (0.004 in.' Brake Disc Parallelism: 0.015 mm
(0.0006 in.' max.
This is the maximum allowable difference between

the thickness measurements.
B
A
108 N·m (11 kgf·m,80 Ibf·ft)
5. Ifthe disc is beyond the service limit, refinish the

brake disc.
Max. Refinishing limit: 7.5 mm (0.30 in.'

4. If the disc is beyond the service limit for parallelism,
NOTE: A new disc should be refinished if its runout refinish the brake disc.
is greater than 0.10 mm (0.004 in.).
NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit
for refinishing, replace it (see page 18-22).
19-22 BACK
Protected by AR
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul
ACAUTION
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health.
o Avoid breathing dust particles.
o Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
o Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
o Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blowout all passages with compressed air.
o Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
o Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
o Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
o Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads.
o When reusing pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
o Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
o Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
o Coat the piston, piston seal groove, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid.
o Replace all rubber parts with new ones.
o After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
CALIPER BOLTS
23 N·m (2.3 kgf.m. 17 Ibf·ft)
CALIPER BODY
~
LEEDSCREW Check for scoring on
BANJO BOLT 9 N·m (0.9 kgf·m. cylinder wall.
34 N·m (3.5 kgf.m. 7 Ibf·ft)
25Ibf~_ ~ '~r6i#IP~ /=~REASE

~
(PIN OSC30-B0234M) ,,@ ~,~
/0 /PISTON
~
SEALING WASHERS
Replace.
~ ~ 0 ~ /
(PIN 08C30-B0234M)
"--Vtfi)
INNER PAD SHIM B
(STAINLESS)
INNER PAD
\ I \
~
PIN BOOTS
==----...~
t--J A
J \~ PAD SPRING
PISTON SEAL
\
~ ~ Rep~lace. ~ /~ Replace. PISTON BOOT
(PIN 08C30-B0234M) ~ INNER PAD Replace.
~
~ SHIMA '-
~ ~ WEAR INDICATOR "~OUTERPADSHIM
...... ~ Install inner pad with its
wear indicator downward.
~---PAD RETAINERS OUTER PAD
---CALIPER BRACKET
Check for cracks.
BACK
19-23
Protected by AR
Parking Brake Shoes and Drum Inspection
ACAUTION
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health .
• Avoid breathing dust particles
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
1. Block the front wheels, then raise the rear of the vehicle, and make sure it is securely supported.
2. Release the parking brake, and remove the rear caliper and rear brake disc/drum (see page 18-22).
16 mm FlANGE NUT WAVE WASHER

140 N·m (14.3 kgf·m, 103 Ibf·ftl
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
ROD SPRING
Check for weakness
J and damage.
RETAINER SPRING
~
TENSION PIN
Insta" securely on
tension pin.
"00:0,-'-',
!models only:1
!~i~
L._._._ ...i
~
10 mm FLANGE NUT
t
BACKING PLATE ...---
CONNECTING ROD
~BRAKESHOE
ADJUSTER ASSEMBLY
Check ratchet teeth
P ~ for wear and damage.
UPPER RETURN SPRINGS

Check for weakness
and damage.
/.
PARKING BRAKE SHOE

\
LOWER RETURN SPRING
Check for weakness
Check for wear. and damage.
19-24 BACK
Protected by AR
3. Check the parking brake linings (A) for cracking, 7. Measure the inside diameter of the parking brake
glazing, wear, and contamination. drum brake with inside vernier calipers.
A Parking Brake Drum Inside Diameter:

Standard: 169.9-170.0 mm (6.689-6.693 in.)
4. Measure the parking brake lining thickness (B).

Measurement does not include brake shoe
thickness.
8. If the inside diameter of the parking brake drum is
Parking Brake Lining Thickness: more than the service limit, replace the rear brake
Standard: 1.9-2.5 mm (0.075-0.098 in.) disc/drum brake.
9. Check the parking brake drum for scoring, grooves,
5. If the brake lining thickness is less than the service and cracks.
limit, replace the parking brake shoes as a set.
6. Check the bearings in the hub unit for smooth

operation.
BACK
19-25
Protected by AR
Parking Brake Shoes Replacement
NOTE: 5. Disconnect the rod spring (A), and remove the

• Contaminated brake linings or drums reduce connecting rod (B).
stopping ability.
• Block the front wheels before jacking up the rear of A
the vehicle.

securely supported.
2. Release the parking brake, and remove the rear

caliper and rear brake disc/drum (see page 18-22).
3. Disengage the upper return spring (A) with the tool

(B).
6. Lower the parking brake shoe assembly, then

separate the brake shoes by removing the lower
return spring (A).
A B
B
4. Remove the tension pins (A) by pushing the return

spring (B).
A
7. Remove the brake shoe adjuster assembly (B).
19-26 BACK
Protected by AR
8. Remove the parking brake shoe by disconnecting 10. Apply Molykote 44 MA grease to the sliding surface
the parking brake cable (A) from the parking brake of the pivot pin (A), and insert the pin into the
lever (8). parking brake shoe.
9. Remove the U-clip (A), wave washer (8), pivot pin D C

(e), and parking brake lever (D) trom the parking
brake shoe (E). 11. Install the parking brake lever (B) and wave washer
(e) on the pivot pin, and secure them with a new U-
clip (D) .
• Install the wave washer with its convex side

facing out.
• Pinch the U-clip securely to prevent the pivot pin

from coming out from the brake shoe.
(cont'd)
BACK 19-27
Protected by AR
Parking Brake Shoes Replacement (cont'd)
12. Apply Molykote 44 MA grease to the shoe ends (A), 14. Clean the threaded portions of the clevis (A), and
sliding surface (8), and opposite edges of the coat the threads of the clevis with grease. Clean the
parking brake shoe (C) as shown. Wipe off any sliding surface of the clevis (8), and coat the sliding
excess. Don't get grease on the brake linings. surface of the clevis 8 with grease.
Install the clevis A and 8 on the adjuster (C), and
c shorten the clevis A by turning the adjuster.
E D
B
Gr.asing symbols:
.... Brake shoe ends
::~:'o Opposite the edge of the shoe
c>- Sliding surface 15. Reinstall the brake shoe adjuster assembly (D), and
hook the lower return spring (E) on the parking
brake shoes.
13. Reconnect the parking brake cable (A) to the
parking brake lever (8). 16. Hook the rod spring (A) to the connecting rod (8)
first with the spring end (C) pointing downward.
B Then hook the rod spring to the parking brake shoe,
and install the connecting rod on the parking brake
shoes.
19-28 BACK
Protected by AR
Parking Brake Lining Break-in
17. Reinstall the tension pins (A) and retainer springs NOTE:
(8). Make sure the tension pin does not contact the • Do brake linings surface break-in when replacing
parking brake lever. shoes with new linings and/or new rear brake disc .
• Check the number of parking brake pedal clicks.
A Adjust the pedal before lining surface break-in (see
page 19-6).
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
2. Release the parking brake pedal.
3. Press the parking brake pedal 1 click while driving

the vehicle at the about 31 mph (50 km/h) for 400 m
(1/4 mile).
18. Reinc;tall the upper return springs (A).
4. Stop the vehicle for 5 -10 minutes to allow the

drums to cool. Repeat step 3.
5. Check the parking brake pedal adjustment (see

page 19-6).
19. Reinstall the rear brake disc/drum and rear brake

caliper (see step 12 on page 18-23).
20. Adjustthe parking brake (see page 19-6).
BACK
19-29
Protected by AR
Brake Hoses and Lines Inspection
1. Inspect the brake hoses for damage, cracks, leaks, interference, and twisting.
2. Check the brake lines for damage, rusting, and leakage. Also check for bent brake lines.
3. Check for leaks at hose and line joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
4. Check the master cylinder and ABS{TCS modulator unit for damage and leakage.
NOTE: Replace the brake hose clip whenever the brake hose is serviced.
ABS/TCS MODULATOR UNIT-to-MASTER BRAKE LlNE-to-BRAKE HOSE

CYLINDER BRAKE LINES 15 N·m (1.S kgf·m. '1 Ibf·ft)
19 N·m (1.9 kgf·m. 14Ibf·ft)
ABS/TCS MODULATOR UNIT-to-OTHERS BRAKE LINE BRAKE LlNE-to-BRAKE HOSE
15 N·m (1 .S kgf·m.11Ibf·ft) 15 N·m (1.S kgf·m.11Ibf·ft)
BRAKE HOSE-to-CALIPER
(BANJO BOLT)
34 N·m (3.S kgf·m, 25 Ibf·ft)
BLEED SCREW
MASTER CYLINDER-to-BRAKE LINE 9 N·m (O.9 kgf·m. 7 Ibf·ft)
19 N·m (1.9 kgf·m. 14Ibf·ft)
BLEED SCREW
9 N·m (O.9 kgf·m. 7 Ibf·ft) PROPORTIONING CONTROL VALVE-to-
BRAKE HOSE-to-CALIPER BRAKE LINES
(BANJO BOLT) 15 N·m (1.S kgf·m.11Ibf·ft)
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 Ibf·ft)
19-30 BACK
Protected by AR
Brake Hose Replacement
NOTE: 6. Install the brake hose (A) on the knuckle with 6 mm

• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of flange bolts (B) first, then connect the brake hose to
dust and other foreign materials. the caliper with the banjo bolt (C) and new sealing
• Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to washers (D).
do so.
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage
the paint. If brake fluid gets on the paint. wash it off B
6x 1.0mm
immediately with water. 9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf.m, 7.2Ibf·ftl
1. Replace the brake hose (A) if the hose is twisted, -----t:~~\
cracked, or if it leaks.
;;<" ,
2. Disconnect the brake hose from the brake line (B)

using a 10 mm flare-nut wrench (C).
3. Remove and discard the brake hose clip (A) from

the brake hose (B).
8. Connect the brake line (D) to the brake hose.

B
9. After installing the brake hose, bleed the brake
/~
system (see page 19-8).
o 10. Do the following checks:
c
/ • Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and
tighten if necessary .
• Check the brake hoses for interference and
4. Remove the banjo bolt (C), and disconnect the twisting.
brake hose from the caliper.
5. Remove the brake hose from the knuckle by

removing the 6 mm flange bolts (D).
BACK 19-31
Protected by AR
Parkif ;) Brake Cable Replacement
Exploded View
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft) PARKING BRAKE PEDAL ASSEMBLY
~ /
PARKING BRAkE SW1T~
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

Check for smooth operation. ----------=:...
G;!J
_$W
ISlldln........' ~/~ l' ;/
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
LEFT PARKING BRAKE CABLE

Check for faulty movement.
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 Ibf·ft)
,/ ~-~
9.B N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
II, \
PARKING BRAKE CABLE A
RIGHT PARKING BRAKE CABLE EQUALIZER
19-32 BACK
Protected by AR
NOTE: The parking brake cable must not be bent or 7. Remove the control arm mounting nut from the
distorted. This will lead to stiff operation and premature rear knuckle.
cable failure. Refer to the Exploded View as needed
10mm
during this procedure. FLANGE NUT
59 N·m 16.0 kgf·m, 43 Ibf·ft)
securely supported, then remove the rear wheel.

\ (@~
8. Remove the leading arm mounting bolt from the

rear knuckle.
.9N.\6..
10x 1.25 mm
'gf·m, 43 Ibf·ft)
3. Separate the upper ball joint from the knuckle

using the special tool (see page 18-9).
4. Remove the ASS sensor from the brake backing

plate (see page 19-106).
5. Remove the flange nut (A) from the stabilizer link

while holding the stabilizer link stud with a hex
wrench (S).
C A
10x 1.25 mm 10 x 1.25 mm
59 N·m 16.0 kgf. m, 39 N·m 14.0 kgf.m,
43lbf·ft) 29Ibf·ft)
D B
6. Remove the damper lower mounting bolt (e), and

the stabilizer link mounting bracket (0). (cont'd)
BACK
19-33
Protected by AR
Parking Brake Cable Replacement (cont'd)
9. Remove the backing plate mounting nuts. 15. Remove the parking brake cable mounting bolts
from the backing plate (A), and remove the cable
16 mm FLANGE NUT (B).
140 N·m 114.3 kgf·m, 103 Ibf·ftl
9.8 N~.7.2Ibf.ftl
10 mm FLANGE NUTS
38 N·m (3.9 kgf.m, 28 Ibf·ftl
10. Remove the rear brake caliper, the caliper 16. Reinstall the parking brake cable in the reverse
mounting bracket, and the brake hose mounting order of removal, and note these items:
bolt from the rear knuckle (see step 3 on page 18-
23). • Be careful not to damage the joint boot when
11. Remove the rear brake disc and hub (see step 8 on
page 18-23). • Tighten the castle nut to the lower torque
12. Remove the parking brake shoes from the backing align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not
plate (see page 19-26). align the castle nut by loosening it.
13. Remove the backing plate from the rear knuckle. • Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified
torque values.
14. Remove the parking brake cable mounting bolt (A)
from the trailing arm (B). • Use a new cotter pin in the castle nut.

surfaces on the brake disc and inside of the
wheel.
• Adjust the parking brake (see page 19-6).

A
19-34 BACK
Protected by AR
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components 19-1
ABS/TCS (Anti-lock Brake System/Traction

Control System) Components
General Troubleshooting Information ....................... 19-37
DTC Troubleshooting Index ........................................ 19-42
System Description ...................................................... 19-44
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 19-58
DTC Troubleshooting ................................................... 19-62
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting ...................... 19-99
TCS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting ....................... 19-101
Modulator Unit Removal and Installation .................. 19-103
TCS Switch Test ............................................................ 19-104
ABS{TCS Control Unit Replacement ........................... 19-105
Wheel Sensor Inspection ............................................. 19-105
Wheel Sensor Replacement ........................................ 19-106
VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) System

Components ......... ............ ........... .................. 19-107
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
DRIVER'S UNDER·DASH RIGHT ·REAR WHEEL SENSOR

LAY BOX Inspection, page 19-105
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
ABS RELAY BOX
-------------
LEFT·REAR
WHEEL SENSOR
MODULATOR UNIT
Removal and Installation,
page 19-103 .
RIGHT·FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
Inspection, page 19-105 LEFT·FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
Replacement, page 19-106 PCM Inspection, page 19-105
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT
19-36
BACK
Protected by AR
~
~
ABS/TCS Indicators • The ABS is not operational when the ABS indicator is
ON; the TCS is not operational when the TCS
• If the system is OK, the ABS indicator goes off once indicator is ON.
after turning the ignition switch ON(II) without • When the ABS and TCS indicators are both ON,
starting the engine, and then comes on again and troubleshoot the ABS first.
goes off several seconds later after starting the • When the TCS indicator and MIL are both ON,
engine. This occurs because the ABSfTCS control unit troubleshoot the PGM-FI system first.
is turned on by the IG2 power source.
• The TCS or ABS indicator comes on when the TCS Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
control unit detects a problem in the system.
However, even though the system is operating properly, • The memory can hold any number of DTCs. However,
the TCS or ABS indicator will come on, under the when the same DTC is detected more than once, the
following conditions: more recent DTC is written over the earlier one.
• For ABS or TCS Indicator: Therefore, when the same problem is detected
- Only drive wheels rotate repeatedly. It is memorized as a single DTC.
- One drive wheel is stuck • The DTCs are indicated in ascending number order,
- The vehicle goes into a spin. not in the order that they occur.
- The ABS continues to operate for a long time. • The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM (non-
- The vehicle is subjected to an electrical signal volatile memory). Therefore, the memorized DTCs
disturbance. cannot be canceled by disconnecting the battery.
• For TCS Indicator: Perform the specified procedures to clear the DTCs.
- The TCS operated when the front brake pad
temperature was excessively high. SeH-diagnosis
- The TCS switch is OFF.
- One or more of these components are faulty: • Self-diagnosis can be classified into 2 categories:
Heated oxygen sensor, Manifold absolute pressure - Initial diagnosis: Performed right after the engine
sensor, Crankshaft position sensor, Engine coolant starts and until the ABS or TCS indicator goes off.
temperature sensor, Throttle position sensor, Top - Regular diagnosis: Performed right after the initial
dead center sensor, Top dead center sensor 2, diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
Intake air temperature sensor, Exhaust gas • When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the
recirculation, Barometric pressure sensor, Idle air ABSfTCS control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.
control valve, VTEC pressure switch, Knock sensor,
Fuel supply system, Automatic transaxle, Misfire Kickback
detection system of the PGM-FI system.
The pump motor operates when the ABS is functioning,
To determine the actual cause of problem, question the and the fluid in the reservoir is forced out to the master
customer about the problem, taking these conditions cylinder, causing kickback at the brake pedal.
into consideration:
Pump Motor
• When a problem is detected and the ABS or TCS
indicator comes on, there are cases when the • The pump motor operates when the ABS is
indicator stays on until the ignition switch is turned functioning.
OFF, and cases when the indicator goes off • The ABSfTCS control unit checks the pump motor
automatically when the system returns to normal. For operation during initial diagnosis when the vehicle is
ABS DTCs 61 and 62, the indicator goes off started. You may hear the motor operate at this time,
automatically when the system returns to normal. For but it is normal.
all other codes, the indicator stays on until the
ignition switch is turned OFF. Brake Fluid Replacement/Air Bleeding
• For ABS DTCs 12, 14, 16, 18,21,22,23,24,51,52 and
53, the ABS indicator goes off when the vehicle is Brake fluid replacement and air bleeding procedures
driven again and the system is OK after the ignition are identical to the procedures used on vehicles not
switch is turned from OFF to ON (II). However, if the equipped with ABS/TCS. To ease bleeding, start with
DTC is cleared, the CPU resets and the indicator goes the front wheels.
off right after the engine is started if the system is OK.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-37
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
General Troubleshooting In 'fr~rmatio n (cont'd)
How to Troubleshoot ABS and TCS urcs '03 model:
The troubleshooting procedures assume that the cause

of the problem is still present and the ABS and/or TCS
indicator is still on. Following the procedure when the
ABS and/or TCS indicator does not come on can result
in incorrect diagnosis.
The connector illustrations show the female terminal
connectors with a single outline and the male terminal
connectors with a double outline.
1. Question the customer about the conditions when

the problem occured, and try to reproduce the
same conditions for troubleshooting. Find out
when the ABS and/or TCS indicator came on, such
as during ABS control, after ABS control, when
vehicle speed was at a certain speed, etc. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and follow the
prompts on the Honda PGM Tester to display the
2. When the ABS or TCS indicator does not come on DTC(s) on the screen. After determining the DTC,
during the test drive, but troubleshooting is refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index.
performed based on the DTC, check for loose
connectors, poor contact of the termi nals, etc. NOTE: See the Honda PGM Tester user's manual
before you start troubleshooting. for specific instructions.
3. After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs and test-drive Service Check Signal Circuit Method:
the vehicle. Be sure the ABS and TCS indicators do
not come on. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connectthe Honda
PGM Tester (A) to the 16P Data Link Connector
How to Retrieve ABS or TCS DTCs (DLC) (B) located under the ashtray ('99-02
models) or behind the driver's dashboard
Honda PGM Tester Method: lower cover ('03 model).
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connectthe Honda '99-02 models:

(DLC) (B) located under the ashtray ('99-02
lower cover ('03 model).
'99-02 models:
BACK
19-38
Protected by AR
~
~
'03 model: How to Clear ABS DTCs

Honda PGM Tester Method:
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the Honda

(OLC) (B) located under the ashtray ('99-02
'99-02 models:
2. Short the SCS circuit to body ground using the

Honda PGM Tester.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) without pressing the
brake pedal.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is pressed when turning
the ignition switch ON (II), the system shifts to the
OTC clearing mode.
4. The blinking frequency indicates the OTC.
(see the example)
NOTE: If the OTC is not memorized, the ABS or TCS
indicator will go off for 3.6 seconds, and then come
'03 model:
back on.
The system will not indicate the OTe unless these
conditions are met:
• The TCS switch is not pushed.
• The brake pedal is not pressed.
• The ignition switch is turned ON (II).
• The engine is stopped.
• The SCS circuit is shorted to body ground before
the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
c d
ON
OFF ---- --- -----

2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and clear the
OTC(s) by following the screen prompts on the
a Honda PGM Tester.
Ignition switch First cycle Second NOTE: See the Honda PGM Tester user's manual
ON III) cycle
a: 2 sec. d: 0.4 sec. for specific instructions.
b: 3.Ssec. e: 0.5 sec.
c: 1.3 sec. f : 0.3 sec.
6. Disconnect the Honda PGM Tester from the OLC.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-39
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
Service Check Signal Circuit Method: 7. After the ABS indicator goes off, release the brake
pedal again.
PGM Tester (A) to the 16P Data Link Connector You cannot clear the DTC unless these conditions
(DLC) (B) located under the ashtray ('99-02 are met:
models) or behind the driver's dashboard • The vehicle is stopped or the front wheels are
lower cover ('03 model). turning no faster than 6 mph (10 km/h).
'99-02 models: the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
• The brake pedal is pressed before the ignition
ON
ABS
indicator a
OFF
Pressed t t
Brake
pedal
Released ----~- - - ...... ~ ...... .
Ignition switch ON (II)
a: 2 sec. c: 0.3 sec.
b: 4 sec. d: within 3 sec.
'03 model:
8. After a few seconds, the ABS indicator blinks twice
and the DTC is cleared. If the indicator does not
blink twice, repeat steps 1 through 7. Ifthe indicator
stays on after the indicator blinks twice, check the
DTC because a problem was detected during initial
diagnosis before shifting to DTC clearing mode.
10. Disconnect the Honda PGM Tester from the DLC.
2. Short the SCS circuit to body ground using the

Honda PGM tester.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) while keeping the

brake pedal pressed.
5. After the ABS indicator goes off, release the brake

pedal.
6. After the ABS indicator comes on, press the brake

pedal again.
19-40
BACK
Protected by AR
~
~
How to Clear TCS DTCs SCS Circuit Method:
Honda PGM Tester Method: 1. Press the parking brake pedal with the SCS circuit
open. Keep the pedal pressed during the entire DTC
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the Honda clearing procedure.
(DLC) (8) located under the ashtray ('99-02 2. Press and hold the TCS switch, then turn the
models) or behind the driver's dashboard ignition switch ON (II) without starting the engine.
3. Continue to hold the TCS switch for 4 seconds, then
'99-02 models: turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Within 6 seconds, turn the ignition switch back ON

(II) for at least 4 seconds, then release the TCS
switch, and watch the TCS indicator.
5. After a few seconds, the TCS indicator will come on

after blinking to indicate that the DTC is cleared. If
the indicator blinks repeatedly, repeat steps 1
through 4.

Standard Indication Pattern
Continues ON
ON -···- -r---..,
TCS Indicator
OFF ·· ·_· ..... .
'03 model:
Ignition Switch ON (II) a a

Abnormal Indication Pattern
blinks repeatedly
ON ···· ...---.....
TCS Indicator
OFF ·· _··
a a a: 0.3 sec.
Ignition Switch ON 1111

DTC(s) by following the screen prompts on the
Honda PGM Tester.
NOTE: See the Honda PGM Tester user's manual

for specific instructions.
BACK
19-41
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
DTe Troubleshooting Index
ABSDTCs
DTC Detection Item Note
11 Right-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-62)
12 RiQht-front wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see paQe 19-63)
13 Left-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-62)
14 Left-front wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see paQe 19-63)
15 Right-rear wheel sensor (op_en/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-62)
16 RiQht-rear wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruPtion) (see page 19-63)
17 Left-rear wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short topower) (seepage 19-62)
18 Left-rear wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-63) -.-
21 RiQht-front pulser (see paQe 19-64'
22 Left-front pulser (see page 19-641
23 RiQht-rear pulser (see paQe 19-64)
24 Left-rear pulser (see page 19-64)
31 RiQht-front inlet solenoid (see paQe 19-65)
32 Right-front outlet solenoid (see page 19-65)
33 Left-front inlet solenoid (see page 19-65)
34 Left-front outlet solenoid (seepage 19-65)
35 Right-rear inlet solenoid (see page 19-65)
36 RiQht-rear outlet solenoid (see paae 19-65)
37 Left-rear inlet solenoid (see page 19-65)
38 Left-rear outlet solenoid (see paQe 19-65)
41 Right-front wheel lock (see page 19-68)
42 Left-front wheel lock (see paQe 19-68)
43 Right-rear wheel lock (see page 19-68)
44 Left-rear wheel lock (see page 19-68)
51 Motor lock (seepage 19-69)
52 Motor stuck OFF (see page 19-69)
53 Motor stuck ON (see~ge 19-74)
54 ABS Fail-safe relay (see page 19-78)
61 Low ignition voltaQe (see paQe 19-81)
62 High ignition voltage (see page 19-81)
71 Different diameter tire (see paQe 19-82)
81 Central Processing Unit (CPU) diagnosis and ROM/RAM diagnosis (see page 19-82)
TCSDTCs
DTC Detection Item Note
24 RF TCS NO solenoid (seepage 19-83)
25 RF TCS NC solenoid (see page 19-83)
26 LF TCS NO solenoid (seepage 19-83)
27 LF TCS NC solenoid (see page 19-83)
28 TCS relay (see paQe 19-86)
31 Engine retard command (PFINH) signal (see page 19-89)
32 EnQine speed (NEP) siQnal (see page 19-91)
34 Reference voltage (VREF) signal (see page 19-93)
36 Throttle position sensor output (THLOUT) siQnal (see paQe 19-94)
61 AfT shift position (ATSFTP) signal (see page 19-96)
81 Continuous TCS operation (see paQe 19-98)
BACK
19-42
Protected by AR
~
~
Symptom Diaanostic procedure Also check for

ABS indicator does not come on ABS indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page
19-99)
ABS indicator does not go off and no ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page
DTC is stored 19-99)
ABS indicator came on once, but it is The vehicle is OK at this time (see page 19-37)
OK now
TCS indicator does not come on TCS indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page
19-101)
TCS indicator does not go off and no TCS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page
DTC is stored 19-101 )
TCS indicator came on once, but it is The vehicle is OK at this time (see page 19-37)
OK now
BACK
19-43
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
System Description
ABS/TCS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector A (26P)
ABS{TC5 CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26P)
~1~1,.k1/1 ~I/I~I~I~~~&'I,~
VI~I~VI~VI~KI~I~I~I~~I~
Terminal Wire color Terminal sign Description Me.surement

number (Terminal name) Terminal Conditions Voltage
(lanition switch ON 11111
1 BlK GND1 Ground l-GND -- BelowO.3V I
(Ground 1)
2 VEL/GRN NCl Drives left TCS normally 2-GND TCS OFF Battery
(Normally closed leftt closed solenoid valve Indicator Voltage
3 GRV NOl Drives left TCS normally 3-GND ON BelowO.3V
(Normally open left) open solenoid valve (Disconnect
16P connector
to turn
indicator on)
4 BlU/WHT ABS Drives ABS indicator 4-GND ABS OFF 4-6V
(Turns the indicator drive indicator ON Below 1.0V
transistor to ON. then
turns off the indicator)
6 BRN SCS (Service check Detects service check 6-GND SCS Circuit Shorted BelowO.3V
signal) connector signal (Use for Opened About 5 V
DTC indication)
8 BRN FlW(-) Detects left-front wheel 8-9 Wheel Turn wheel at AC:
(Front-left wheel sensor signal 1 turn/second 0.053Vor
neQative) above
9 GRN/BlU FlW(+) (Reference)
(Front-left wheel Oscilloscope:
positive) 0.15 Vp-p or
10 GRN FRW(-) Detects right-front wheel 10-11 above
(Front-right wheel sensor signal I
neQative) I
11 GRN/BlK FRW(+) Stopped 0.25 V-

(Front-right wheel 1.15 V
positive)
12 WHT/BlK STOP Detects brake switch 12-GND Brake pedal Pressed Battery
signal VoltaQe
Released BelowO.3V I
13 VEL/BlK IG2 Power source for 13-GND Ignition switch ON (II) Battery
(Ignition 2) activating the system Voltage
Start (III) BelowO.3V
BACK
19-44
Protected by AR
~
~
Terminal Wire color Terminal sign Description Measurement

number (Terminal name) Terminal Conditions Voltage
(Ignition switch ON (II))
15 RED/GRN NCR Drives right TCS normally 15-GND TCS indicator OFF Battery
(Normally closed right) closed solenoid valve Voltage
16 LT/BLU NOR Drives right TCS normally 16-GND ON Below 0.3 V
(Normally opened open solenoid valve (Disconnect
right) 16P connector
to turn
indicator on)
18 RED/WHT TCS1 Drives TCS indicator 18-GND TCS indicator Engine Battery
(Turns the indicator drive running Voltage
transistor to ON, then ON About 2 V
20 GRN MCK Detects pump motor 20-GND Pump motor ON Battery
(Motor check) drive signal VoltaQe
OFF BelowO.3V
Remove MCK fuse About 10V
21 LTBLU RLW(+) Detects left-rear wheel 21-22 Wheel Turn wheel at AC:
(Rear-left wheel sensor signal 1 turn/second 0. 053Vor
Dositive) above
22 GRY RLW( ) (Reference)
(Rear-left wheel Oscilloscope:
positive) 0.15 Vp-p or
23 GRN/YEL RRW(+) Detects right-rear wheel 23-24 above
(Rear-right wheel sensor signal
Dositive)
24 BLU/yEL RRW(-) Stopped 0.25 V-
(Rear-right wheel 1.15 V
negative)
25 YEl/GRN FSR Drives ABS fail-safe relay 25-GND ABS Warning Below 0.3 V
(Fail-safe relay) (ABS fail-safe relay is (SCS circuit Normal About llV
turned OFF to shut off the must be open)
power source to the
solenoid and pump
motor relay when a
Droblem occurs.)
26 LTBLU DLC Communicates with the -- -- --
(Data link connector) Honda PGM Tester
(cont'd)
BACK
19-45
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components

ABS/TCS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector B (16P)
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16PI
7
AT I8
SFTP LG1

number (Terminal namel Terminal Conditions Voltage
(Ignition switch ON (1111
1 PNK FPTDR Outputs engine retard 1-GND TCS Not operating About 2.5 V
(Frame to powertrain request signal (5V dutv501
toraue down reauest) Operatina About5V
2 ORN/GRN VREF Reference voltage for the 2-GND About5V
(Voltage reference) sensors of the PGM-FI
system
4 ORN/WHT TCSSW Detects TCS switch signal 4-GND TCS TCS switch Battery
(TCS switch) switch Dressed Volta~
OFF (TCS indicator OV
isON)
7 LTGRN ATSFTP Detects AfT shift position 7-GND Shift the transmission to l.fJ About 4 V
(AT shift position) sianal position then start the engine.
8 BRN/YEL LG1 Ground for logic circuit 8-GND -- Below 0.3 V
ILoaic around 1)
9 VEL/GRN THLOUT Detects throttle position 9-GND Throttle FuilYclosed AboutO.5V
(Throttle out) sensor sianal valve I Fuilyopened About4.8V
10 BLU PFINH Detects TCS operation 10-GND Permission (normal) About2.5V
(Powertrain to frame permission signal (5V duty 50)
inhibition) Inhibition (the coolant About5V
temperature is o·e or below)
Failure (TeS andlor PCM has AboutOV
failed)
11 BLU NEP Detects engine speed 11-GND Engine idling About 6 V
(Enaine speed pulse) sianal
13 GRN/YEL TCSR Drives TeS relay (TeS 13-GND TCS (SCS Warning Below 0.3 V
(TCS relay) relay is turned OFF to circuit Normal About 11 V
shut off the power source must be
to the TCS solenoid and opened)
pump motor relay when a
problem occurs)
14 GRN/RED PARK Detects parking brake 14-GND With Pressed BelowO.3V
(Parking) switch signal engine Released Battery
running, Voltage
parking
brake
15 VEL/RED PMR
(Pump motor relay)
Drives pump motor relay 15-GND ABS
indicator
OFF I I
Pump I ON
motor OFF
Below 1.0V
Battery
Voltage
ON BelowO.3V
16 RED/WHT TCS2 Drives TeS indicator 16-GND TCS OFF Battery
(Turns the indicator drive indicator Voltaee
transistor to ON, then ON About 2 V
BACK
19-46
Protected by AR
~
~
ABS/TCS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector C (12P)
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (1ZP)

number (Terminll name) Terminal Conditions Voltage
2 BRN/VEl lG2 Ground for logic circuit 2-GND -- Below 0.3 V
(loaic around 2)
3 VEI./WHT RR-OUT Drives right-rear outlet 3-GND ABS indicator OFF Battery
(Rear-right outlet) solenoid valve Voltage
4 VEl/BlU Fl-OUT Drives left-front outlet 4-GND
(Front-left outlet) solenoid valve
5 VEl/GRN RL-OUT Drives left-rear outlet 5-GND ON Below 0.3 V
(Rear-left outlet) solenoid valve (Disconnect
6 VEl/BlK FR-OUT Drives right-front outlet 6-GND 16P connector
(Front-right outlet) solenoid valve to turn
indicator on)
7 BlK GND3 Ground 7-GND -- BelowO.3V
(Ground 3)
8 RED/WHT RR-IN Drives right-rear inlet 8-GND ABS indicator OFF Battery
(Rear-right inlet) solenoid valve Voltage
9 RED/BlU Fl-IN Drives left-front inlet 9-GND
(Front-left inlet) solenoid valve
10 RED/GRN Rl-IN Drives left-rear inlet 10-GND ON BelowO.3V
(Rear-left inlet) solenoid valve (Disconnect
11 RED/BlK FR-IN Drives right-front inlet 1,-GND 16P connector
(Front-right inlet) solenoid valve to turn
indicator on)
(Ground 2)
(cont'd)
BACK
19-47
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
Outline
This system consists of the ABS(TCS control unit, the modulator unit, four wheel sensors, and the PCM. The system
integrates the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) and the TCS (Traction Control System) and controls both systems using
the brakes.
rl ABS control .Improves maneuverability and stability when braking.
IABS/TCS r---
.Improves accelerating ability from a standstill on slippery road surfaces.
TCS control _
------ H ·Improves traction when one drive wheel is on a slippery road surface.
MASTER CYUNDER
WHEEL
SENSOR
r"I~~'==
i
i
i
iN
RESERVOIR RESERVOIR
--- -- - '-- -- ---MODULATOR uNiT--- -----
WHEEL
~ENSOR
~
NO: Normally Open
NC: Normally Closed
19-48 BACK
Protected by AR
~
~
ABS Features
When the brake pedal is pressed while driving, the wheels can lock before the vehicle comes to a stop. In such an
event, the maneuverability of the vehicle is reduced if the front wheels are locked, and the stability of the vehicle is
reduced if the rear wheels are locked, creating an extremely unstable condition. The ABS precisely controls the slip
rate of the wheels to ensure maximum grip force from the tires, and it thereby ensures maneuverability and stability
of the vehicle.
The ABS calculates the slip rate ofthe wheels based on the vehicle speed and the wheel speed, then it controls the
brake fluid pressure to reach the target slip rate.
Grip Force of Tire and Road Surface
COEFFICIENT OF
FRICTION
ROTATIONAL
DIRECTION
RADIAL
DIRECTION
OFTHE
ROTATIONAL
DIRECTION
SLIP RATE
TCS Features
The TCS provides low speed traction. When a drive wheel loses traction on a slippery road surface and starts to spin,
the ABS(TCS control unit sends a brake signal to the modulator unit, which applies brake pressure to slow the
spinning wheel. At that time, the ABS/TCS control unit sends an engine retard signal to the PCM to prevent damage to
the transmission .
1' , ' 1 1
NORMAL ROAD SURFACE
,1 , 1, ' SLIPPERY ROAD SURFACE
1' , 1,'
1'1 t , I
, 1,1 1 1
,I J I, J
,' ,I,'
It/I, j
,',I ,'
,',II'
I 1,', 1, '
J
, I I I I I
(cont'd)
BACK
19-49
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
ABS Main Control
The ABS/TCS control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel sensor signal it received, then it calculates the
vehicle speed based on the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during deceleration
based on the rate of deceleration.
The ABS/TCS control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel, and it transmits the control signal to the modulator
unit solenoid valve when the slip rate is high.
The pressure reduction control has three modes: pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing.
i
i
~IRIGHT'REAR
L
BS
Control 1..~2!!!!.2!!~r1- SOLENOID
i
~ LEFT·REAR
~ ,- SOLENOID
rABsI..-..~
·lw..... SpHdI) ~ .. ~~-~I~_ .. U.W
TCS Main Control
The ABS/TCS control unit controls the TCS based on signal inputs from the throttle position sensor, engine speed
sensor, shift position sensor, and the wheel sensors. In addition, the ABS/TCS control unit sends an engine retard
request signal to the PCM if necessary. The ABS/TCS control unit uses the modulator unit to control the TCS. The
pressure intensifying control has three modes: pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing.
L-":'==":'; ';';': -': -.:.:J.,I r--I~-:I~~I-----,~- .I ___...~a_""',

Shift position signll ~I-----'
BACK
19-50
Protected by AR
~
~
ABS Self-Diagnosis
• The ABS/TCS control unit is equipped with a main CPU and a sub CPU. Each CPU checks the other for problems.
• The CPUs check the circuit of the system.
• Self-diagnosis can be classified into 2 categories:

- Initial diagnosis: Done right after the engine starts and until the ABS or TCS indicator goes off.
- Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
• When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the ABS/TCS control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.
ABSSeHd' - Table
- lagnosls
Diagnostic Trouble Detection Item Detection Timing Fall-safe Mode
Code (DTCI Initial Regular
Diagnosis Diagnosis
", 13, 15, 17 Wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) 0 0 AO
12, 14, 16, 18 Wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) 0 AO,LO
21-24 Pulser 0 AO,LO
31-38 Solenoid (short to body ground/short to wire) 0 0 Sl
41 -44 Wheel lock 0 AO,LO
51 Motor lock 0 AO,LO
52 Motor stuck OFF 0 AO,LO
53 Motor stuck ON 0 0 AO,LO
54 Fail-safe relay 0 0 Sl
61 Low ignition voltage 0 BO
62 High ignition voltage 0 BO
71 Different diameter tire 0 S1
Bl Central Processing Unit (CPU), ROM/RAM 0 0 S1
ABSO'peratlon MdT
o e abl e
Operation Mode Description ABS Indicator TCS Indicator
Regular operation Operation in normal condition OFF OFF
Fail-safe mode-Sl The ABS/TCS control unit turns the system off (ABS fail-safe relay off) when the ON ON
control unit detects a problem.
Fail-safe mode-AO If the ABS/TCS control unit detects a malfunction while the ABS or TCS is ON ON
operating, it will turn off the malfunctioning component, and continue to
modulate the rest of the ABS system until completing the ABS or TCS operation.
At that time, the entire system will be turned off until the problem goes away.
Fail-safe mode-LO The ABS/TCS control unit stores a DTC in back-up memory when it detects a ON ON
problem. If a problem is detected when the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the
ABS/TCS control unit will turn the system off. If the problem goes away, the
ABS/TCS control unit will turn the system on again.
Fail-safe mode-BO The ABS/TCS control unit will turn the system off if ignition voltage drops, and ON ON
will turn it on ~ain when ignition voltage returns to normal.
On-board Diagnosis Function

The ABS can be diagnosed with the Honda PGM Tester.
The ALB Checker cannot be used with this system. For air bleeding, and checking wheel sensor signals, use the Honda
PGM Tester. See the Honda PGM Tester User's manuals for specific operating instructions.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-51
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
TCS Self-diagnosis
• The ABS/TCS control unit is equipped with a main CPU and a sub CPU. Each CPU checks the other for problems.
• The CPUs check the circuit of the system.
• Self-diagnosis can be classified into 2 categories:

- Initial diagnosis: Done right after the engine starts and until the ABS or TCS indicator goes off.
• When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the ABS/TCS control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.
TCSSelf-d'
Diagnostic Trouble
, Tabl
.. ---- .. .- Detection Item Detection Timing Fall-sllfa Mode
Code (DTC) Initial Regular
Diagnosis Diagnosis
24·27 TCS solonoid (short to body ground/short to wire) 0 0 S1 ,
28 TCS relay 0 S1 i
31 Engine retard command (PFINH) signal (open/short to body 0 A2
ground)
I
32 Engine speed(NEP)signal (open/short to body ground) 0 A2
34 Reference voltage(VREF) signal(open/short to body ground) 0 0 A2
36 Throttle position sensor output(THLOUT)signal(open/short to 0 0 A2
body ground)
61 AfT shift position(ATSFTP) signal (open/short to body ground) 0 A2
~81 - - _ . _. Continuous TC~_o!>Bration ---- - 0 A2
TC - _. ---_ ..... -._-- . ----

Operation Mode Description ASS Indicator TCS Indicator
Regular operation Operation in normal condition OFF OFF
Fail·safe mode·S1 The ABS/TCS control unit tums the system off (fail-safe relay off) when the ON ON
control unit detects a problem .
Fail-safe mode-A2 If the ABS/TCS control unit detects a malfuction while the TCS is operating, it OFF ON
will turn off the malfunctioning component, and continue to modulate the rest of
the TCS system until completing the TCS operation. At that time, the TCS
system will be turned off.
TCS deactivate If the front brake pad temperature rises excessively, the ABS/TCS control unit OFF Comes ON when
mode stops the TCS system and it turns the TCS indicator on. When the brake pad the front brake pad
temperature lowers, the ABS/TCS control unit turns off the TCS indicator and temperature rises
restarts the TCS system. excessively.
TCS OFF mode The ABS/TCS control unit cancels the TCS system under these conditions: ON or OFF ON
• If the ABS/TCS control unit detects a problem with the PGM-FI (ON: When the
communication circuit. ABS system is
• The ABS system is faulty. faulty)
• The TCS system is OFF.
If these conditions return to normal, the ABS/TCS control unit restarts the TCS
system.
On-board Diagnosis Function

The TCS can be diagnosed with the Honda PGM Tester.
The ALB Checker cannot be used with this system. For air bleeding, and checking wheel sensor signals, use the Honda
PGM Tester. See the Honda Tester User's manuals for specific operating instructions.
BACK
19-52
Protected by AR
~
~
Modulator Unit
The modulator unit consists of the inlet solenoid valve, outlet solenoid valve, TCS normally open (NO) solenoid valve,
TCS normally closed (NC) solenoid valve, reservoir, pump, pump motor, and the damping chamber.
The modulator controls the caliper fluid pressure directly. It is a circulating-type modulator because the brake fluid
circulates through the caliper, the reservoir, and the master cylinder.
The hydraulic control has three modes: pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing.
The hydraulic circuit is an independent four channel type, one channel for each wheel.
ASS Control
Pressure intensifying mode

TCS NO valve open, TCS NC valve closed, inlet valve open, outlet valve closed.
Master cylinder fluid is pumped out to the caliper.
Pump Motor
When starting the pressure reducing mode, the pump motor is ON. When stopping ABS operation, the pump motor is
OFF.
The reservoir fluid is pumped out by the pump, though the damping chamber, to the master cylinder.
MASTER CYUNOER
i
i
i
I
i
i
i
.J
AI. FR Fl RR
Pressure retaining mode

TCS NO valve open, TCS NC valve closed, inlet valve closed, outlet valve closed.
Caliper fluid is retained by the inlet valve and outlet valve.
MASTER CYl.IMJER
AI. FA Fl
""
(cont'd)
BACK
19-53
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
Pressure reducing mode

TCS NO valve open, TCS NC valve closed, inlet valve closed, outlet valve open.
Caliper fluid flows through the outlet valve to the reservoir.
MASTER CYUNDER
RL FA FL RR
TCSControl
Pressure intensifying mode
TCS NO valve closed, TCS NC valve open, inlet valve open, outlet valve closed, pump motor ON.
The reservoir and master cylinder fluid is pumped out by the pump, through the damping chamber, to the front caliper.
!
I
i
i
i
!
I
J
ftL FA FL All
BACK
19-54
Protected by AR
~
~
Pressure retaining mode

TCS NO valve open, TCS NC valve open, inlet valve closed, outlet valve closed, pump motor ON.
Front caliper fluid is retained by the inlet valve and outlet valve.
... FA FL NO
Pressure reducing mode

TCS NO valve closed, TCS NC valve open, front inlet valve closed, front outlet valve open, pump motor ON.
Caliper fluid flows through the outlet valve to the reservoir.
FL
RL FA
""
(cont'd)
BACK
19-55
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
Wheel Sensor
The wheel sensors are the magnetic contactless type. As the gear pulser teeth rotate past the wheel sensor's magnetic
'
coil, AC current is generated. The AC frequency changes in accordance with the wheel speed. The ABS/TCS control
unit detects the wheel sensor signal frequency and thereby detects the wheel speed.
GEARPULSER
WHEEL SENSOR .t HIGH SPEED
0 I:~~ ~ UftR~~AM~~ r \
g .
.tLOWSPEED
Wheel Speed and Modulator Control (ABS)
SPEED VEHICLE SPEED
WHEEL SPEED
PRESSURE't
. !. 6 :~
~ ,,
~'I..
" ,, ,, ,,
.~
:
"
: : : : . .
~~[W ONt [] !: [] .: []
OFF - . . : : .
~iCJ. ONt
OFF -
0 hI
MOTOR ONt
OFFL_~---------------------------------
When the wheel speed drops sharply below the vehicle speed, the outlet valve opens momentarily to reduce the
caliper fluid pressure. The pump motor starts at this time. As the wheel speed is restored, the inlet valve opens
momentarily to increase the caliper fluid pressure.
BACK
19-56
Protected by AR
~
~
Wheel Speed and Modulator control (TCS)
DRIVE WHEEL SPEED
SPEED
t
DRIVEN WHEEL SPEED
IVEHICLE SPEED I
-TIME
BRAKE
PRESSURE
OUTLET ON
VALVE OFF
INLET ON
VALVE OFF
ON
TCS NCVALVE
OFF
ON
TCS NO VALVE
OFF
ON
MOTOR
OFF
When the front wheel speed rises sharply above the vehicle speed, the TCS NC valve opens, the TCS NO valve closes,
and the pump motor starts to intensify the front caliper fluid pressure. When the wheel speed drops, the front inlet
valve closes momentarity to ratain the front caliper fluid pressure. When the wheel speed drops further, the front
outlet valve opens momentarity to reduce the front caliper fluid pressure.
BACK
19-57
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
Circuit Diagram
'99-01 Models
+
nUNDER.ftOOD,.,./lELAv-ax ""'ItEI'EDAL~lMTtM
~CIoMd:"'''''''''''''''''
WHT/atJ( _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
aTOPI2OA1
I CT\ WHTIYlL~
==TlM
GAUGE ........
.........
...- ........
~~
IG,""'-...I
MfT~~L
""'"'"
? ~.~ ~
_. "..,OW] ~
""", .......
........ lMwflyld
~ ~ ...
-_m-
"""'" ... ft'~I"~_
I
I
~~n~~~DJ
....
4
I ft~
'i"EUQRN
,"""'.
...
=r MD/.a.U -IfUrUIUI ,"'"
I'AlIENOBrllWDlJll-"AIH
FUaIMLAYM»t
r'T:' .
.... MOTQIIICHlClln.IAI
-- 2 MOIIULATOfI UMT
gR
Ilm:"
~
:=
==
......
....
....ouT
..
-"
-..w
1=-=
Ilm:
==
==
:="""
"'....
.....
= .......,.
..."
,-
-..uo
,"u_
........ == , ....
,.."
liolruIi:.
;:!!
== ,"'"
1= ,NDO
ftU_
~
ao,
LTkU
L.. ...DJIIW , I=~

== ,"""
",*'IIIOTOfI~
MDICIIIIN
_'OW , M ,
"'""'l..
UNDER·HooD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTORS BRAKE SWITCH CRUISE CONTROl/ ABS PUMP MOTOR
CONNECTOR A (18PI CONNECTOR A (18PI CONNECTOR TCS SWITCH CONNECTOR RELAY CONNECTOR
[~litiUllLs?3lA/U17rn I; 1ill I; 1 ~
tlli:I mmf!EE J:TI2ITL
[IlJ::TI
DRIVER'S UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTORS
CONNECTOR 0 (2OPI CONNECTOR I (18PI FAIL·SAFE RELAY/
TCS RELAY CONNECTOR
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTORS

CONNECTOR 0 (20P1 CONNECTOR J (16PI m
MODULATOR UNIT
CONNECTOR
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTORS

CONNECTOR A (3OPI CONNECTOR C (14PI

BACK
19-58
Protected by AR
~
~
. .O/WHT ---"""'1Cp--...-
.. ---"':':::~j)-I
_____________________________________ ft~ __ ~~~~~~,~
============-~~
----------------------------------------,,~
----------------------------------------- ...
~
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTORS

CONNECTOR A (261') CONNECTOR B (16P) CONNECTOR C (12P) DATA LINK CONNECTOR 1161')
~
PCM CONNECTORS
'99 Model:
CONNECTOR A (32P) CONNECTOR E (12P)
1~fi1rnUrn
WHEEL SENSOR CONNECTOR
FRONT/REAR
'00-01 Models:
<ill)
CONNECTOR A (32P) CONNECTOR E (2OP)
BACK
19-59
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
'02-03 Models
~ .... _, ...............
--
UMJM.M)OONIIIMtAYIOX
-
...... NDoll"*"ON I\IIITCM
.
~ ",",-.
~
wtfTfftL J@!
~=o . =r
,
Eli]
MCa~f7.M1
J
"1M1111NIIMI
.or-e..-
=r:' LIeU ......' '"' ""
__ I(tr
I'/c . . . . n .1ot.I
~- .. '"
n + U_
... ="'..."'lIL, ...
-w~
I
~+.- ,::- . l I L:. .
~ i;~DL~
OJ :: ..
.-
l!
&I'r-W _ti
----
""'"'
"'1M'
~.... ".... ;t: .. - .... ........ -

--..--
..
........
-----
:~ . ;::: ~.....".
""'- ~.
;:::
~
...,--
,~
I~
"'"
"'"....
;:::
-"'-
:~
~
~
...""'
----
""""
,....
......
-- -.-
~--
~ ':---
YO",,",
I:l;~ '""
,-
YOu_
;=:
I =:.ll': : .... lTau
...---- == ~
w""au ,
~ IU+
~1'UR""'f IlOX~
~ r~ ~,~
~"I'" ~."'"
MitiUi1bMUM7~ u,M,;1 ~ m...mLJ

rml [illl!lllZJ
CINVIIt'S~...-..u.,.cntCOfMC'TOM . AIL·.........."
~"c.J ~~CWI TCI . . . . . . CCJMe:TOfl
BmOOffil f@M&brM R=l

~
~ ..
UNDllloHOOD .... IllUIIJIIILAVIOXC~
~ ~.~
ttfml tmJ"
GAUGI~v~
~A""" ~. I... ~CI1. .
~i~~001;@AAs4...............
1~~~1%&i\fi\tW
..,...
mogl1~
BACK
19-60
Protected by AR
~
~
I'CMIICSI
l CONNECTCftIW'J
A'ICS MN~MN
L:::_~~~
_ _ _ _ _ _-OON/W"' "":==<!;)-...1
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ IIlD/eLU
-------------------------------------..~
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ IIED/OftN
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ WLJGIIN
-------------------------------------~,---~~
_______________________ 'M.~
L-__________________J ~".--::f1 OG ~
CON. .CTOR 8 ('IPI CONNECTQlII c n2P) DATA UNIt CONNECTOR (,.,
1 2 '" 7 8
90113461 7
234 5 S
91011
e;dsVf5'\ 23V115
12 667891 ......,...
WH!I!L IINSOft2P CONNeCTOR
24 1 14 617 8 9
BACK
19-61
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
DTC Troubleshooting
ABS DTC 11, 13, 15, 17: Wheel Sensor (Open/ 4.'.::heck for continuity between the appropriate
Short to Body Ground/Short to Power) wheel sensor (+) circuit terminal and body ground
(see table).
1. Disconnect ABS(TCS control unit connector A (26P).
DTC Appropriate Terminal
2. Start the engine. 11 (Riaht-front) No. 11 : FRW (+ )
13 (Left-front) No.9: FLW (+)
3. Measure the voltage between the appropriate 15 (Riaht-rear) No. 23: RRW (+)
wheel sensor (+) circuit terminal and body ground . 17JLeft-rear) ,----No. 21: RLW (+)
(see table).
DTC Appropriate Terminal ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26P)

11 (Rjght-front) No.11 : FRW (+)
13 (Left-front) No.9:FLW(+)
15 (Right-rear) No. 23: RRW (+)
17 (Left-rear) No. 21: RLW (+)
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26P)
FLW (+) (GRN/BLU)
YES - Go to step 5.
=
NO - Go to step 6.
Is there 1 V or more? 5. Disconnect the harness 2P connector from the

appropriate wheel sensor, then check for continuity
YES - Repai r short to power in the ( + ) ci rcuit wi re between the No.1 and No.2 terminals of the
between the ASS(TCS control unit and the harness and body ground.
appropriate wheel sensor.•
NO-Go to step 4.
YES - Repair short to body ground in the No.1 or
No.2 circuit wire between the ABS(TCS control unit
and the wheel sensor.•
NO- Replace the wheel sensor.•
BACK
19-62
Protected by AR
~
~
6. Check the resistance between the appropriate ABS DTC 12, 14, 16, 18: Wheel Sensor
wheel sensor (+) and (-) circuitterminals (see (Electrical Noise/Intermittent Interruption)
table).
NOTE: If the ABS indicator comes on for the reasons
OTe Appropriate Terminal described below, the indicator goes off when you test-
(+)Side (-)Side drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h).
11 (Right-front) No. 11:FRW No. 10 : FRW
(+) (-) • Only the drive wheel rotated
13 (Left-front) No.9: FLW No.8: FLW • The vehicle spun
(+) (-) • Electrical noise
15 (Right-rear) No. 23: RRW NO.24: RRW
(+) (-) 1. Visually check for appropriate wheel sensor and
17 (Left-rear) No. 21: RLW No. 22: RLW pulser installation (see table).
(+) (-)
OTe Appropriate Wheel Sensor
12 Right-front
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26PI 14 Left-front
FLW 1+1 (GRN/BLUI FRW (-I (GRNI 16 Right-rear
18 Left-rear
Are they installed correctly?
YES- Go to step 2.
RRW(-I
(BLU/YELI NO- Reinstall or replace the appropriate wheel
sensor or pulser..
~-....JRRW(+I
RLW (-I (GRYI (GRN/YELI 2. Disconnect ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P).
3. Measure the resistance between the appropriate
Is the resistance between 450- 2,000 Q ? wheel sensor (+) and ( - ) circuit terminals (see
table).
YES-Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit
connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good OTe Appro~riate Terminal
ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck .• (+)Side ( - )Side
12 (Right-front) No. 11 : FRW No. 10: FRW
NO-Go to step 7. (+) (-)
14 (Left-front) No.9: FLW No.8: FLW
7. Disconnect the harness 2P connector from the (+) (-)
appropriate wheel sensor, and check the resistance 16 (Right-rear) No. 23: No. 24:
between the (+) and (-) terminals of the wheel RRW(+) RRW(-)
sensor. 18 (Left-rear) No. 21: RLW No. 22: RLW
(+) (-)
Is the resistance between 450- 2,000 Q ?
Is there less than 450 Q ?
YES- Repair open in the (+) or (-) circuit wire, or
short beween the (+) circuit wire and the (-) YES - Go to step 4.
circuit wire between the ABS/TCS control unit, and
the wheel sensor .• NO - Go to step 5.
NO - Replace the wheel sensor..
(cont'd)
BACK
19-63
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
4. Disconnect the harness 2P connector from the ABS OTC 21, 22, 23, 24: Pulser
appropriate wheel sensor and measure the
resistance between the (+ ) and ( - ) circuit 1. Clear the DTC.
terminals.
2. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.
Does the ABS indicator come on and are orcs 21,
YES - Replace the wheel sensor.• 22, 23, or 24 indicated?
NO-Repair short in the appropriate wheel sensor YES-Go to step 3.

(+) and (-) circuit wires .•
NO - The system is OK at this time .•
5. Check for continuity between the appropriate
wheel sensor (+) circuit terminal and other wheel 3. Check the appropriate pulser gear for a chipped
sensor (+) circuit terminals (see table). tooth (see table).
DTC Appropriate Other Terminal DTC ~~iate Pulser

Terminal I 21 Right-front
12 No. 11 : No.9: No.23: No. 21: I 22 Left-front
FRW FLW(+) RRW RLW I 23 Right-rear
(+) (+) (+) 24 Left-rear
14 No.9: No. 11 : A19: No. 21: I
FLW(+) FRW RRW RLW Is the pulser OK?
(+) (+) (+) !
16 No. 23: No. 11 : No.9: No. 21: YES-Check for loose ABS(TCS control unit
RRW FRW FLW(+) RLW connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
(+) (+) (+) ABS(TCS control unit, and recheck .•
18 No. 21: No. 11 : No.9: No.23:
RLW(+) FRW(+) FLW(+) RRW(+) • NO - Replace the driveshaft or the hub unit.
(Chipped pulser gear).
YES - Repair short to wire between the appropriate

wheel sensor and the other wheel sensor.•
NO-Clear the DTC, and test-drive the vehicle. If

the ABS(TCS indicator comes on and the same DTC
is indicated, replace the ABS(TCS control unit . •
BACK
19-64
Protected by AR
~
~
ABS DTe 31, 32, 33, 34, 35,36, 37, 38: 5. Connect the modulator unit 24P connector.
Solenoid
6. Check for continuity between the appropriate ASS/
1. Verify the DTC. TCS control unit connector C (12P) solenoid circuit
terminal and body ground (see table).
Is DTC 54 indicated?
OTC Appropriate Terminal
YES - Do the appropriate troubleshooting for 31: FR-IN No. 11
DTC54 .• 32: FR-OUT No. 6
33: FL-IN No. 9
NO-Go to step 2. 34: FL-OUT No. 4
35: RR-IN No.8
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 36: RR-OUT No.3
37: RL-IN No. 10
3. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector and 38: RL-OUT No. 5
ABS/TCS control unit connector C (12P).
4. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/

TCS control unit connector C (12P) solenoid circuit
OTC Al)propriate Terminal

31: FR-IN No.11
32: FR-OUT No.6
33: FL-IN No.9
34: FL-OUT No.4
35: RR-IN No.8
36: RR-OUT No.3
37: RL-IN No.10
38: RL-OUT No.5 Wire side of female terminals
YES - Replace the modulator unit.•
NO- Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector.
YES- Repair short to body ground in the

appropriate solenoid circuit wire between the ASS/
TCS control unit and the modulator unit.•
NO-Go to step 5.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-65
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
8. Connect the appropriate modulator unit 24P 9. Check for continuity between the appropriate ASS/
connector solenoid circuit terminal to body ground TCS control unit connector C (12P) solenoid circuit
with a jumper wire (see table). terminal and body ground (see table).
OTC Appropriate Terminal OTC Appropriate Terminal

31 : FR-IN No.11 31: FR-IN No. 11
32: FR-OUT No. 19 32: FR-OUT No.6
33: FL-IN No. 14 33: FL-IN No.9
34: FL-OUT No. 22 34: FL-OUT No. 4
35: RR-IN No. 13 35: RR-IN No.8
36: RR-OUT No. 21 36: RR-OUT No.3
37: RL-IN No. 12 37: RL-IN No. 10
38: RL-OUT N~. 2Q 38: RL-OUT No.5
MODULATOR UNIT 24P CONNECTOR ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (12P)

RL-IN (RED/GRN) RR-IN (RED/WHT)
FR-IN
(RED/BLK) liER¥.lW' ~ '~1~7I{1r~~~/BLU)
-=
FR-OUT FL-OUT
(VEL/BLK) I RL-OUT RR-OUT I (VEL/BLU) RL-IN
(VEL/GRN) (VEL/WHT) (RED/
GRN)
-=
Wire side offemale terminals Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the appropriate solenoid

circuit wire between the ASS/TCS control unit and
the modulator unit.•
10. Remove the jumper wire from the modulator unit

24P connector.
11. Connect the modulator unit 24P connector.
BACK
19-66
Protected by AR
~
~
12. Connect the ASS fail-safe relay 4P connector remove the jumper wire from the ABS fail-safe
terminal No.2 to body ground with a jumper wire. relay 4P connector terminal.
The wire colors ofthe ASS fail-safe relay connector
are WHT/GRN, BRN/BLK, SLK, and YEL/GRN. 15. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/
TCS control unit connector C (12P) terminal and all
ABS FAll·SAFE RELAY 4P CONNECTOR other ABS and TCS solenoid circuit terminals (see
table).
SOLENOID OTC Appropriate Terminal

IBRN/BlK) 31: FR-IN No.11
32: FR-OUT No. 6
JUMPER 33: FL-IN No.9
WIRE 34: FL-OUT No.4
35: RR-IN No.8
36: RR-OUT No.3
37: RL-IN No. 10
38: RL-OUT No. 5
13. Check the resistance between the appropriate ASS/ ABSITCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C 112 PI
TCS control unit connector C (12P) terminal and
body ground (see table).
IN: 8-10 Q (at 20°C, 68°F)
OUT: 3-5 Q (at 20°C, 68°F)

31: FR-IN No.11
32: FR-OUT No.6
33: FL-IN No.9
34: FL-OUT No.4 Wire side of female terminals
35: RR-IN No.8
36: RR-OUT No.3
37: RL-IN No. 10
38: RL-OUT No.5 ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26 PI
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (12P)
8 9 10 11 12 13
21 22 23 24 25 26
YES - Repair short in the appropriate wires

Is there resistance OK? between the ABS/TCS control unit and the
modulator unit..
NO-Go to step 16.
NO-Check for loose modulator unit connectors. If
necessary, replace the modulator unit..
14. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector, and (cont'd)
BACK
19-67
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
16. Connect the modulator unit 24P connector. ABS DTC 41, 42, 43, 44: Wheel Lock
17. Check for continuity between the appropriate 1. Check for brake drag.
ABS(TCS control unit connector C (12P) terminal
and all other ABS and TCS solenoid circuit Do the brakes drag?
terminals (see table).
YES- Repair the brake drag .•
31: FR-IN No.11 NO - Go to step 2.
32: FR-OUT No.6
33: FL-IN No. 9 2. Check the installation of the appropriate wheel
34: FL-OUT No.4 sensor (see table).
35: RR-IN No.8
36: RR-OUT No.3 DTC Appropriate Wheel Sensor
37: RL-IN No. 10 41 Right-front
38: RL-OUT No.5 42 Left-front
43 Right-rear
44 Left-rear
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C 112 PI
Is it correct?
YES - Go to step 3 .•
NO-Reinstall the wheel sensor correctly.•
3. Check the modulator using the Honda PGM Tester.
Is kickback felt in the pedal?
Wire side of female terminals YES- The probable cause was the vehicle spun
during cornering. If the problem recurs, check for
loose connectors, or try a known-good ABS(TCS
control unit, and recheck .•
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A 126 PI
NO - Check for loose modulator unit connectors. If
necessary, replace the modulator unit .•
8 19 110111112113
21 1221 231 24 I 251
Ii
26
NO - Check for loose ABS(TCS control unit

ABS(TCS control unit, and recheck .•
BACK
19-68
Protected by AR
~
~
ABS DTC 51: Motor Lock ABS DTC 52: Motor Stuck OFF
('99-01 Models)
1. Clear the OTC.
1. Check the ASS MOTOR (30A) fuse in the under-
2. Test-drive the vehicle at 6 mph (10 km/h) or more. hood fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.
Does the ABS indicator come on and is DTC 51 Is the fuse OK?
indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
YES- Replace the modulator unit.•
NO - Replace the fuse, and go to step 2.
NO- The system is OK at this time .•
2. Connect the pump motor relay connector terminal
No.4 to No.5 with a jumper wire for a moment,
and check the fuse.
PUMP MOTOR RELAY CONNECTOR
+B(WHT) MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
Is the fuse blown?
YES - Check for a short to body ground in the

motor power source circuit .•
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check the ASS MOTOR CHECK (7.5A) fuse in the

passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and
reinstall the fuse if it is OK.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 5.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-69
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
4. Connect the pump motor relay connector terminal 9. Measure the voltage between the modulator unit
No.4 to No.5 with a jumper wire for a moment, connector terminal No.1 and body ground.
and check the fuse.
MODULATOR UNIT CONNNeCTOR
PUMP MOTOR RELAY CONNECTOR MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
-=

+B(WHTI MOTOR(WHT/BLUI
Is ' here battery voltage?

JUMPER WIRE
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the under-
hood ASS relay box and pump motor..
Is the fuse blown?
10. Measure the voltage between the modulator unit
YES - Check for a short to body ground in the MCK connector terminal No.1 and No. 16.
circuit..
MODULATOR UNIT CONNNECTOR
NO-Goto step 5.
MOTOR IWHT/BLU)
5. Check the pump motor relay in the under-hood

ASS relay box (see page 22-103).
Is the relay OK?

MOTOR GND (BlK)
YES - Go to step 6. Terminal side of female terminals
NO-Replace the pump motor relay .• Is there battery voltage?
6. Connect the pump motor relay connector terminal YES-Replace the modulator unit.•
No.4 to No.5 with a jumper wire for a moment. NO-Repair open in the wire between the pump
motor and body ground (G203) .•
Does the pump motor operate?
11. Disconnect the ASS/TCS control unit connector
YES-Go to step 11. S (16P).
NO-Go to step 7. 12. Connect the pump motor relay connector terminal
No.1 to NO.5 with a jumper wire.
7. Disconnect the modulator unit connector.
PUMP MOTOR RELAY CONNNECTOR
8. Connect the pump motor relay connector terminal

No.4 to No.5 with a jumper wire.
JUMPER WIRE ~
3 1
IVEL/RED)
+BIWHll 5 4
Terminal.ide offernale terminal.
BACK
19-70
Protected by AR
~
~
13. Measure the voltage between the ABSfTCS control ABS DTC 52: Motor Stuck OFF
unit connector S (16P) terminal No. 15 and body ('02-03 Models)
ground.
1. Check the PUMP MOTOR (40A) fuse in the under-
hood ASS fuse/relay box.
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNNECTOR B 11S PI
/s the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the fuse, and go to step 2.
2. Remove the ASS pump motor relay from the

under-hood ASS fuse/relay box.

3. Connect the ASS pump motor relay connector + S
and MOTOR terminals with a jumper wire for a
/s there battery voltage? moment, and check the fuse.

ABS PUMP MOTOR RELAV CONNECTOR
NO- Repair open in the wire between the under-
hood ASS relay box and the ABSfTCS control
unit..
, 4. Remove the jumper wire from the pump motor

relay connector.
MOTOR
TERMINAL
, 5. Start the engine.
JUMPER WIRE
16. Measure the voltage between the ABSfTCS control
unit connector B (16P) terminal No. 15 and body
ground.
Is the fuse blown?

ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNNECTOR B 11SP)
YES-Check for a short to body ground in the

NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check the MTR CHECK (7.5A) fuse in the under-

hood ABS fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?

YES - With the fuse removed, go to step 6.

NO- Replace the fuse, and go to step 5.
the under-hood ASS relay box and the ASSfTCS
control unit.•
NO -If the problem recurs, replace the ABSfTCS

control unit.•
(cont'd)
BACK
19-71
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
5. Connect the ABS pump motor relay connector + B 8. Measure the voltage between ABS/TCS control unit
and MOTOR terminals with a jumper wire for a connector A (26P) terminal No. 20 and body ground.
moment, and check the fuse.
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNrr CONNECTOR A (26P)
PUMP MOTOR RELAY CONNECTOR
MOTOR
TERMINAL Wire side of female terminals
JUMPER WIRE
YES - Repair open in the wire between the

under-hood ABS fuse/relay box and the ABS/TCS
Is the fuse blown? control unit.•
YES-Check for a short to body ground in the MCK NO-Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit
circuit.• connectors. If the problem recurs, replace the ABS/
TCS control unit..
NO - Remove the fuse, and go to step 6.
9. Check the ABS pump motor relay in the
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). under-hood ABS fuse/relay box.
7. Measure the voltage between under-hood ABS Is the relay OK?

fuse/relay box connector B (2P) terminal No.2 and
body ground. YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the ABS pump motor relay .•

UNDER-HOOD ABS FUSE/RELAY BOX
CONNECTOR B (2P)
10. Connect the ABS pump motor relay connector + B
and MOTOR terminals with a jumper wire for a
moment.
~
r:f.Ck 'GRNI
ABS PUMP MOTOR RELAY CONNECTOR
00
MOTOR
+BTERMINAl TERMINAL
Wire side of female terminals JUMPER WIRE
YES-Go to step 9. Does the ABS pump motor operate?
NO - Go to step 8. YES- Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 11.
BACK
19-72
Protected by AR
~
~
11. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector. 17. Check for continuity between the ASS fail-safe
relay connector terminal No. 2 and under-hood
12. Connect the ASS pump motor relay connector +S ASS fuse/relay box connector A (3P) terminal No.1.
and MOTOR terminals with a jumper wire.
13. Measure the voltage between the modulator unit ABS FAil-SAFE RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
MODULATOR UNIT 24P CONNECTOR
SOLENOID (BRN/BlK)
MOTOR (WHT/BlU)
5 6 7
11 2131
Q
= CONNECTOR A (3P)

Wire side of female termi nals
/s there battery voltage? /s there continuity?
YES - Go to step 14. YES-Go to step 18.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the NO- Repair open in the wire between the ASS
under-hood ASS fuse/relay box and the pump fail-safe relay and the under-hood ASS fuse/relay
motor.• box . •
14. Measure the voltage between the modulator unit 18. Disconnect ASS/TCS control unit connector S (16P),
24P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 16. and reconnect under-hood ASS fuse/relay box
connector A (3P).
19. Connect the ASS pump motor relay connector +S
and PMR terminals with a jumper wire.
MOTOR (WHT/BlU)
5 678 ABS PUMP MOTOR RELAY CONNECTOR

11121314
9 1
MOTORGND
(BlK) JUMPER PMR
WIRE TERMINAL

+BTERMINAl
VES- Replace the modulator unit .•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the pump

15. Remove the fail-safe relay from the ASS relay box.
16. Disconnect under-hood ASS fuse/relay box

connector A (3P).
(cont'd)
BACK
19-73
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
20. Measure the voltage between the ABS,TCS control ABS OTC 53: Motor Stuck ON ('99-01 Models)
unit connector B (16P) terminal No. 15 and body
ground. 1. Check that the pump motor operates with the
ignition switch OFF.
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)
YES- Replace the pump motor relay. (Pump motor

relay stuck ON.).
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Remove the ABS MOTOR CHECK (7 .5A) fuse in the

passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?

YES- Remove the fuse, and go to step 3.

NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck .•
YES-Go to step 21.
3. Connect a voltmeter between the passenger's
NO-Repair open in the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box connector J (16P)
under-hood ABS fuse/relay box and ABS/TCS terminal No.5 and body ground, then turn the
control unit.• ignition switch ON (II).
21. Remove the jumper wire from the ABS pump

motor relay connector. PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR J 116P)
22. Check for continuity between the ABS fail-safe

relay 4P connector terminal No.3 and body ground. MCKIGRN)
ABS FAIL-SAFE RELAV 4P CONNECTOR
-= Is there about 10 V momentarily when the ignition

switch is first turned ON?
Wire side of female terminals YES - Go to step 4.
Is there continuity? NO-Repair open in the wire between the

passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and the
YES-Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit ABS/TCS control unit.•
ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck. 4. Reinstall the ABS MOTOR CHECK (7.5A) fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the ABS
fail-safe relay and body ground (G202) .•
19-74
BACK
Protected by AR
~
~
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Remove the pump motor relay, then connect relay
terminals No.3 and No.5 together with a jumper
6. Disconnect the modulator unit connector. wire.
7. Connect a voltmeter between terminal No.1 and Does the pump motor run?
body ground, and turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES-Go to step 11.
MODULATOR UNIT CONNECTOR
NO - Replace the pump motor.•
MOTOR (WHT/BLU) 11. Disconnect the ABS(TCS control unit connector

B (16P).
12. Check for continuity between terminal No. 15 and

body ground.

Terminal side offemale terminals
Is there about 10 V momentarily when the ignition

switch is first turned on? 9
YES - Go to step 8.

hood ABS relay box and the pump motor.•

9. Connect a voltmeter between the modulator unit
connector terminal No.1 and No. 16, and turn the Is there continuity?
ignition switch ON (II).
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the under-hood ABS relay box and the
MODULATOR UNIT CONNECTOR
ABS(TCS control unit.•
MOTOR (WHT/BLU) NO -If the problem recurs, replace the ABS(TCS

control unit.•
MOTOR GND(BLK)

NO - Repair open in the wire between the pump

BACK
19-75
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
ABS OTC 53: Motor Stuck ON ('02-03 Models) 4. Connect a voltmeter between ABS/TCS control unit
connector A (26P) terminal No. 20 and body ground,
,. Check for pump motor operation with the ignition then turn the ignition switch ON (II).
switch OFF.

YES-Replace the pump motor relay. (Pump motor 8 I 9 110111112113

relay stuck ON.).
21 I 22 I 23 I 241 251 26
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Remove the MTR CHECK (7 .5A) fuse in the

under-hood ABS fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK? =

YES - Remove the fuse, and go to step 3.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck .• switch is first turned ON?
3. Connect a voltmeter between under-hood ABS YES-Repair open in the wire between the
fuse/relay box connector B (2P) terminal No.2 and under-hood ABS fuse/relay box and the ABS/TCS
body ground, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). control unit.•
NO-Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit

UNDER-HOOD ABS FUSE/RELAY BOX connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
CONNECTOR B (2P)
ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck .•
5. Reinstall the MTR CHECK (7.5A) fuse in the

under-hood ABS fuse/relay box.
Wf.r~MCK'GRNI 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

YES-Go to step 5.
NO- Turn the ignition switch OFF, and go to step 4.
BACK
19-76
Protected by AR
~
~
8. Connect a voltmeter between terminal No.1 and 12. Remove the pump motor relay, then connect relay
body ground, and turn the ignition switch ON (II). + B and MOTOR terminals together with a jumper
wire.
PUMP MOTOR RELAV CONNECTOR
MOTOR (WHTIBLU)
5 6 7 8
11121314
9 21
= MOTOR
TERMINAL
Wire side of female terminals JUMPER WIRE

Does the pump motor run?
YES-Go to step 9.
YES-Go to step 13.
hood ABS fuse/relay box and the pump motor.. NO- Replace the modulator unit..
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 13. Disconnect ABS/TCS control unit connector B (16P).
10. Connect a voltmeter between the modulator unit 14. Check for continuity between terminal No. 15 and
24P connector terminal No.1 and No. 16, and turn body ground.
the ignition switch ON (II).

MOTORGND
IBLK)


switch is first turned ON? Is there continuity?
YES-Gotostep 11. YES- Repair short to body ground in the wire

between the under-hood ABS relay box and the
NO- Repair open in the wire between the pump ABS/TCS control unit.•
NO - Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit
11. Connect the modulator unit 24P connector. connectors. If the problem recurs, replace the
ABS/TCS control unit.•
BACK
19-77
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
ABS DTC 54: ABS Fail-safe Relay 4. Measure the voltage between the ABS fail-safe
relay 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
1. Check the ABS F/S (20A) fuse in the under-hood
ABS FAIL-SAFE RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
fuse/relay box ('99-01 models) or the ABS+B (20A)
fuse in the under-hood ABS fuse/relay box ('02-03
models).
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Reinstall the fuse, and go to step 2.
NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse

blows with the ignition switch OFF, repair short to
body ground between the ABS fail-safe relay and
ABS F/S (20A) fuse or ABS + B (20A) fuse .•
Does the fuse blow? Is there battery voltage?
YES- Repair short to body ground in the wire YES - Go to step 5.

between the ABS fail-safe relay, TCS relay, ABS
pump motor relay, and modulator unit.• NO-Repair open in the wire between the
under-hood ABS fuse/relay box and the ABS
NO- Go to step 3. fail-safe relay .•
3. Check the ABS fail-safe relay in the ABS relay box. 5. Connect the ABS fail-safe relay 4P connector
The wire colors of the ABS fail-safe relay terminal No.1 to No.2 with a jumper wire.
connectors are WHT/GRN, BRN/BLK, BLK, and YEL!
GRN.
Is the relay OK?
YES - Leave the ABS fail-safe relay removed, and JUMPER WIRE
go to step 4.
NO- Replace the ABS fail-safe relay .•
BACK
19-78
Protected by AR
~
~
7. Measure the voltage between terminal No.2 and 10. Disconnect ASS/TCS control unit connector A (26P).
body ground.

12. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 25 and
body ground.
8 9 10 11 12 13
21 22 23 24 25 26
FSR (YEL/GRN)

=
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the ASS /s there battery voltage?
fail-safe relay and the modulator unit.•
8. Remove the jumper wire from the ASS fail-safe the ASS/TCS control unit and the ASS fail-safe
relay 4P connector. relay .•
9. Measure the voltage between the modulator unit NO-Go to step 13.

the ABS fail-safe relay, TCS relay, modulator unit,
and under-hood ASS fuse/relay box.•
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-79
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
13. Check for continuity between ABS/TCS control unit 14. Check for continuity between the ABS fail-safe
connector A (26P) terminal No. 25 and body ground. relay 4P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26PI ABS FAIL-SAFE RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
819110111112113
21 122 123 1 241 251 26
FSR (YEL/GRNI
Is there continuity? Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire YES-Go to step 15.

between the ABS/TCS control unit and the ABS fail-
safe relay .• NO- Repair open in the wire between the ABS
fail-safe relay and body ground, or a loose or poor
NO- Go to step 14. connection at body ground (G202) .•
15. Connect the ABS fail-safe relay 4P connector

terminals No.3 and No.4 with a jumper wire.
GND(BLKI FSR (YEL/GRNI
JUMPER WIRE
BACK
19-80
Protected by AR
~
~
16. Check for continuity between ABSrrCS control unit ABS OTC 61, 62: Ignition Voltage
connector A (26P) terminal No. 25 and body ground.
1. Clear the DTC.
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26P) 2. Test-drive the vehicle at 6 mph (10 km/h) or more.
Does the ABS indicator come on?

8 9 10 11 12 13
YES-Go to step 3.
21 22 23 24 25 26
NO - The system is OK at this time .•
FSR (YEL/GRN)
3. Verify the DTC.
Is DTC 61 or 62 indicated?

=
YES-Check the charging system .•
Is there continuity? NO- Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the

DTC .•
YES - Check for loose ABSrrCS control unit
ABSrrCS control unit, and recheck .•
NO- Repair open in the wire between the ABSrrCS

control unit and the ABS fa il-safe relay .•
BACK
19-81
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
ABS DTC 71: Different Diameter Tire ABS DTC 81: Central Processing Unit (CPU)
Diagnosis, and ROM/RAM Diagnosis
,. Clear the DTC.
1. Check for other ABS or TCS DTCs.
2. Test-drive the vehicle.
Are there any other OTCs indicated?
Does the ABS indicator come on and is OTC 71
indicated? YES- Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the
DTC indicated .•
YES - Make sure all four tires are the specified size
and properly inflated .• NO- Go to step 2.
NO-Intermittent failure; the vehicle is OK at this 2. Clear the DTC.

time .•
Does the ABS indicator come on and is OTC 81

indicated?
YES- Replace the ABS{TCS control unit..
NO-Intermittent failure; the vehicle is OK at this

time .•
BACK
19-82
Protected by AR
~
~
TCS DTC 24, 25, 26, 27: TCS Solenoid 5. Connect the modulator unit 24P connector.
1. Verify the TCS DTC. 6. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/
TCS control unit connector A (26P) solenoid circuit
Is TCS DTC 28 indicated? terminal and body ground (see table).
YES - Do the appropriate troubleshooting for TCSDTC Appropriate Terminal

DTC28 .• 24: NOR No. 16
25: NCR No.15
NO-Go to step 2. 26: NOL No.3
27: NCL No.2
3. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector and ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26P)
ABS{TCS control unit connector A (26P).
NOL(GRV)
4. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/
TCS control unit connector A (26P) TCS solenoid
circuit terminal and body ground (see table).
TCSDTC Appropriate Terminal

No. 16
-=-
24: NOR
25: NCR No. 15
26: NOL No.3
27: NCL No.2
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26P) Is there continuity?
NOL(GRV) YES- Replace the modulator unit.•
NO-Go to step 7.

-=-
YES- Repair short to body ground in the

appropriate solenoid circuit wire between the ASS/
TCS control unit and the modulator unit..
NO-Go to step 5.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-83
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
8. Connect the appropriate modulator unit 24P 9. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/
connector rcs solenoid circuit terminals to body rcs control unit connector A (26P) solenoid circuit
ground with jumper wires (see table). terminal and body ground (see table).
TeSOTe Appropriate Terminal TeSOTe Appropriate Terminal

24: NOR No.5 24: NOR No. 16
25: NCR No. 6 25: NCR No. 15
26: NOL No.8 26: NOL No.3
27: NCL No.7 27: NCL No.2
MODULATOR UNIT 24P CONNECTOR ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26P1
NCR (RED/GRNI
-=- -=-
JUMPER WIRE JUMPER WIRE
YES-Go to step 10.
NO- Repair open in the appropriate rcs solenoid

circuit wire between the ABS/TCS control unit and
the modulator unit .•
10. Remove the jumper wires from the modulator unit

24P connector.
11. Connect the modulator unit 24P connector.
BACK
19-84
Protected by AR
~
~
12. Remove the TCS relay, and connect the TCS relay 14. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector, and
4P connector terminal No.2 to body ground with a remove the jumper wire from the TCS relay
jumper wire. The wire colors of the TCS relay 4P connector terminal.
connector are BlU, RED/BlU, BRN/BlK, and
GRN/YEL. 15. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/
TCS control unit connector A (26P) terminal and
TCS RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
each of the other terminals listed (see table).
TeSOTe ApproPriate Terminal

TCS
SOLENOID 24: NOR No. 16
(RED/BLU) 25: NCR No. 15
26: NOl No.3
JUMPER 27: NCl No.2
WIRE

=
8 9 10 11 12 13
13. Check the resistance between the appropriate ABS/
TCS control unit connector A (26P) terminal and 21 22 23 24 25 26
body ground (see table).
NOR, NOl, NCR, NCl: 8-10 Q (at 20°C, 68°F)
TeSOTe Appropriate Terminal Wire side of female terminals

24: NOR No. 16
25: NCR No. 15
26: NOl No.3
27: NCl No.2
NOL(GRY)
=

Is the resistance OK? YES-Repair short in the appropriate wires

between the ABS/TCS control unit and the
YES-Go to step 14. modulator unit.•
NO- Replace the modulator unit.• NO-Go to step 16.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-85
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
16. Connect the modulator unit 24P connector. TCS DTC28:TCS Relay
17. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/ 1. Check the TCS (20A) fuse in the under-hood
TCS control unit connector A (26P) terminal and all fuse/relay box.
other ABS and TCS solenoid circuit terminals (see
table). Is the fuse OK?
TeSOTe Appropriate Terminal YES-Reinstall the fuse, and go to step 2.

24: NOR No. 16
25: NCR No.15 NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse
26: NOL No.3 blows with the ignition switch OFF, repair short to
27: NCL No. 2 ground between the under-hood ABS fuse/relay
box and the TCS relay .•
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A 126P) 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Does the fuse blow?

,.J" .. ~ .. n.....,
1 LI~ 4 / 6 1/8 9 10 11 12 13 I
15 16 between the TCS relay, and modulator unit.•
V =- 1/ 18 1/ 20
::'r.LI. . 21 22 23 24 25 26
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check the TCS relay in the ABS relay box. The wire
colors ofTCS relay 4P connectors are BLU, RED/
Wire side of female terminals BLU, BRN/BLK, and GRN/YEL.
Is the relay OK?

ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C 112P)
YES-Do not reinstall the TCS relay, and go to
step 4.
NO- Replace the TCS relay .•
4. Measure the voltage between the TCS relay 4P

TCS RELAY CONNECTOR


+rm IBLU
')L
)
3
~4
NO-Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit

connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good Wire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the undci-

hood fuse/relay box and the TCS relay.•
BACK
19-86
Protected by AR
~
~
5. Connect the TCS relay 4P connector terminal No.1 9. Measure the voltage between the modulator unit
to No.2 with a jumper wire. 24P connector terminal No. 17 and body ground.
TCS RELAY 4P CONNECTOR MODULATOR UNIT 24P CONNECTOR
JUMPER WIRE
TCS SOLENOID ~1'F7I~

IRED/BLU)
Wire side of female terminals Wire side offemale terminals

7. Measure the voltage between terminal No.17 and the TCS relay and the modulator unit.•
body ground.
NO - Go to step 10.
10. Disconnect ABSrrCS control unit connector B (16P).
5 6 7 8 11 . Measure the voltage between terminal No. 13 and

11 21 14 body ground.
9 21
TCS SOLENOID (RED/BLU) ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)
1 2 7 8
=
9 10 11
YES - Go to step 8.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the TCS Wire side offemale terminals
relay and the modulator unit .•
8. Remove the jumper wire from the TCS relay 4P
connector. YES- Repair short to power in the wire between
the ABSrrCS control unit and the TCS relay .•
NO-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-87
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
12. Check for continuity between ABS/TCS control unit 16. Measure the voltage between the rcs relay 4P
connector B (16P) terminal No. 13 and body ground. connector terminal No.3 and body ground.
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P) TCS RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
1 I2
9
TCSR (GRN/YEl)
/s there continuity? Is there battery voltage?
VES- Repair short to body ground in the wire YES-Go to step 17.
between the ABS/TCS control unit and the TCS
relay .• NO-Repair open in the wire between the fail-safe
relay and TCS relay .•
NO-Goto step 13.
17. Connectthe TCS relay 4P connector No. 3 and
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. No.4 with a jumper wire.
14. Remove the fail-safe relay. The wire colors ofthe NOTE: Make sure ABS/TCS control unit connector
fail-safe relay 4P connector are WHT/GRN, BRNI B (16P) is disconnected.
BlK, BlK, and YEl/GRN.
TCS RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
15. Connect the fail-safe relay 4P connector terminal
FAil-SAFE RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
SOLENOID
JUMPER WIRE ~+B(WHT/GRN) (BRN/BlK)
L
JUMPER WIRE
SOLENOID 2
(BRN/BlK) 3 4
BACK
19-88
Protected by AR
~
~
18. Measure the voltage between ABS(TCS control unit TCS DTC 31: Engine Retard Command
connector B (1SP) terminal No. 13 and body ground. (PFINH) signal
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P) NOTE: If the MIL or ABS indicator is ON, troubleshoot
the PGM-FI or ABS first.
1. Disconnect the PCM connector E (12P: '99 model,

9 20P: '00-03 models) and ABS(TCS control unit
connector B (1SP).
2. Check for continuity between the PCM connector E

terminal No.3 ('99 model) or No.7 ('00-03 models)
and body ground.
= '99 model:
PCM CONNECTOR E I12P)

PFINH(BLU)
YES - Check for loose ABS(TCS control unit

NO- Repair open in the wire between the TCS

relay and the ABS(TCS control unit..
'00-03 models:

between the PCM and the ABS(TCS control unit..
NO - Go to step 3.
3. Connect PCM connector E (12P).
(cont'd)
BACK
19-89
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
5. Measure the yoltage between the PCM connector E 6. With an analog yoltmeter set to the 10 V or si milar
terminal No.3 ('99 model) or No.7 ('00-03 models) range, measure the yoltage between the ABS(TCS
and body ground. control unit connector B (16P) terminal No. 10 and
body ground.
NOTE: Use the 10 V range or similar range in an
ABS/TCS ~ONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16PI
analog tester.
'99 model:
PCM CONNECTOR E (12PI
PFINH(BLUI
~~ I;51 Iffiru] -=
SY
'00-03 models:
About 2.SY-·
PCM CONNECTOR E (20PI
OY ····

=
Wire side of female terminals YES-Check for loose ABS(TCS control unit

the ABS/TCS control unit..
Sy
About 2.SY-·
OY ······
YES - Go to step 6.
NO-Check for loose PCM connectors. If necessary,

substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck .•
BACK
19-90
Protected by AR
~
~
TCS DTC 32: Engine speed (NEP) Signal 3. Measure the voltage between PCM connector A
(32P) terminal No. 19 and body ground.
NOTE: If the MIL or ABS indicator is ON, troubleshoot
1. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P) and ABS/TCS VI 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1

control unit connector B (16P). 112113 14 15 / 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 J
25 26 27 28 1,9 30 31 32
2. Check for continuity between PCM connector A (32 -
P) terminal No. 19 and body ground. NEP(BLU)
PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) ':i.

1/12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
=
112113 14 15 / 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 :2~ 30 31 32
NEP IBLU) Is there more than 1 V?
Q YES-Repair short to power in the wire between
the PCM and the ABS/TCS control unit..
= NO-Go to step 4.
4. Connect PCM connetor A (32P).
5. Start the engine, warm it up to normal operating
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire temperature, and let it idle.
between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control unit.
NO - Go to step 3.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-91
Protected by AR
ASS/lCS Components
6. With an analog voltmeter set to the 10 V or similar 7. With the engine still idling, measure the voltage
range, measure the voltage between PCM between ABS/TCS control unit connector B (16P)
connector A (32P) terminal No. 19 and body ground. terminal No. 11 and body ground with the analog
voltmeter again.

V 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
l12 13 14 15 V 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 ~9 30 31 32
NEP (BLU)
-= Wire side of female terminals

12V ············ 12V· .. ·········
Approx. 6V- · About 6V- ·_ ·_ ·
OV ...... . OV ...... .
Is there about 6 V? Is there about 6 V?
YES-Goto step 7. YES - The system is OK at this time. If the problem

recurs, check for loose ABS/TCS control unit
NO - Check for loose PCM connectors. If necessary, connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck .• ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck .•

BACK
19-92
Protected by AR
~
~
TCS OTC 34: Reference Voltage (VREF) Signal 5. Measure the voltage between PCM connector A
(32P) terminal No.7 ('99 model) or connector E
NOTE: Ifthe MIL or ABS indicator is ON, troubleshoot (20P) terminal No.6 ('00-03 models) and body
the PGM-FI or ABS first. ground.
1. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P) ('99 model) or '99 model:

connector E (20P) ('00-03 models) and ABS/TCS
control unit connector B (16P). PCM CONNECTOR A (32P)
2. Check for continuity between PCM connector A

(32P) terminal No.7 ('99 model) or connector E VREF (ORN/WHT)
(20P) terminal No.6 ('00-03 models) and body
~
ground. VI 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 I
112113 14 15 V 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1
'99 model: 25 26 27 2B 29 30 31 32
'---
PCM CONNECTOR A (32P}

VREF (ORN/WHT}
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 '00-03 models:
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
= PCM CONNECTOR E (20P)
'00-03 models:
VREF (ORN/WHTI
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 6.
Wire side of female terminals NO-Check for loose PCM connectors. If necessary,

between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control unit.•
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Connect PCM connector A (32P) ('99 model) or

connector E (20P) ('00-03 models).

(cont'd)
BACK
19-93
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
Ole Troubleshooting (cont'd)

6. Measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS control TCS DTC 36: Throttle Position Sensor Output
unit connector B (16P) terminal No.2 and body (THLOUT) Signal
ground.
NOTE: Ifthe MIL or ABS indicator is ON, troubleshoot
1. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P) ('99 model) or
connector E (20P) ('00-03 models) and ABS/TCS
control unit connector B (16P).

(32P) terminal No. 31 ('99 model) or connector E
(20P) terminal No. 5 ('00-03 models) and body
ground.
'99 model:
Is there about 5 V? 516171 1819110 I 11

171181191201211221 23 1 24
YES-The system is OK at this time. If the problem 251261271 1281291301311 I 32
i
recurs, replace the ABS/TCS control unit.•

'00-03 models:
=

between the PCM and the ABS/TCS control unit..
NO-Go to step 3.
BACK
19-94
Protected by AR
~
~
3. Measure the voltage between PCM connector A 6. Measure the voltage between PCM connector A
(32P) terminal No. 31 ('99 model) or connector E (32P) terminal No. 31 ('99 model) or connector E
(20P) terminal No.5 ('00-03 models) and body (20P) terminal No.5 ('00-03 models) and body
ground. ground with the throttle fully opened and fully
colsed. There should be a smooth transition from
'99 model: about 0.5 V and 4.5 V.
PCM CONNECTOR A 132P)
'99 model:
VI2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1
112113 14 15 !/ 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1
VI2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1
UW¥L~
25 26 27
112113 14 15 / 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1
y"IYEL/GRN) 25 26 27
UW~~L~
':L (YEL/GRN)
'00-03 models: Wire side of female terminals
PCM CONNECTOR E 120P) '00-03 models:
THLOUT IYEL/GRN) PCM CONNECTOR E (20P)
THLOUT (YEUGRN)
=

Is there more than 1 V?
VES- Repair short to power in the wire between Is the voltage as specified?
the PCM and the ABS/TCS control unit.•
VES- Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
NO - Check for loose PCM connectors. If
4. Connect PCM connector A (32P) ('99 model) or necesssary, substitute a known-good PCM, and
connector E (20P) ('00-03 models). recheck .•
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the

engine.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-95
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
7. Measure the voltage between ABS(TCS control unit TCS OTC 61: AfT Shift Position (ATSFTP)
connector B (16P) terminal No.9 and body ground Signal
with the throttle fully closed.
NOTE: Ifthe MIL or ABS indicator is ON, troubleshoot
1. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P) ('99 model) or
connector E (20P) ('00-03 models) and the ABS(TCS
control unit connector B (16P).

(32P) terminal No. 11 ('99 model) or connector E
(20P) terminal No. 17 ('00-03 models) and body
ground.
'99 model:
Is there about 0.5 V? ATSFTP (LT GRN)
YES- The system is OK at this time. If the problem 2 13 14 1 15 16 I 71 1 81 9 1 10

recurs, check for loose ABS(TCS control unit 121131141151/1171181191201211221 23
connectors. If necessay, substitute a known-good 251261271 1281291301311 I 32
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM and =

the ABS(TCS control unit.. Wire side of female terminals
'00-03 models:

between the PCM, and the ABS(TCS control unit..
NO- Go to step 3.
BACK
19-96
Protected by AR
~
-=-
PCM connector A I
. (32P) term~nal
3 Measure the vo Igate11 between
('99 model) or)connector
No. 17 ('00-03 models an
d bodyE 6. Start the engine. 0 the 10 V or similar
aenaa~~;e vol~age be~;~~9

(20P) terminal No. voltmeter set t PCM
ground. 7. With an the model) or
range, m A (32P) terminal No. 7 ('00-03 models)
'99 model: connector OP) terminal No.1
connector E (2 d
and body groun .
PCMC ONNECTOR A (32P)
'99 model:
ATSFTP (LT GRN) PCM CONNECTOR A (32P)
ATSFTP (LT GRN)
=
. 0 f female ter minals
Wire side
, 03 models:
Wiresl
' , als
'de of female termm
00- PCMCONNECTOR E (20P)
~M
de Is'
'00-03 mo CONNECTOR E (20P)
, 'de of female terminals

Wiresl
=
, als
~v~~.-r-r-.
Wiresl
' 'de of female termm
OV '"''
voltage?
/s there battery . e between
YES-Repair short~~~CS control unit.•

ower in the WI~
the PCM and the A /s there about 4 V?
NO - Go to step 4.
YES - Go to step 8. If necessary,
4 Connect PCM connector. NO - Check for loose Po~ PCM, and recheck .•
.. M connectors.
substitute a known-go
. to [f] position.
5.. Shift the trans mission
(cont'd)
I
BACK
19-97
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
8. With an analog voltmeter set to the 10 V or similar TCS DlC 81: Continuous TCS Operation
range, measure the voltage between ABSfTCS
control unit connector B (16P) terminal No. 7 and NOTE: If the MIL or ABS indicator is ON, troubleshoot
body ground. the PGM-FI or ABS first.
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P) 1. Clear the OTC.
Does the TCS indicator come on, and is orc 81

indicated?
YES - Replace the ABS/TCS control unit..

=
Wire side offemale terminals time .•
:' ~~ :~'~ .
About. 4V- ...,.,'"
'" .• ........
5V " TII .• ,' ;~' .
'~ '~ ~~~~
..,......, .,....,.." ',,",,~
OV .···.
III! II! !
""
1I1I1 111
" ,' ,:, : ",:
!i...i....L.lI! I
Is there about 4 V?
YES - Check for loose ABSfTCS control unit

ABSfTCS control unit and recheck .•

the ABS/TCS control unit.•
BACK
19-98
Protected by AR
~
~
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the TCS 9. Check for continuity between the gauge assembly
indicator. connector B (18P) terminal No. 16 and body ground.
GAUGE ASSEMBLV CONNECTOR B (18P)
YES -If the ABS indicator comes on and goes off, 1 2 3 4

it's OK. If the ABS indicator stays on, go to step 13.
9 10 11 12
NO- Go to step 2.•
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF then ON (II) again.
Does the brake system indicator come on?

=
YES-Go to step 3.• Wire side of female terminals
NO- Repair open in the brake system indicator Is there continuity?

circuit.
• Blown BACK-UP LIGHT (7.5A) fuse. YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire
• Open in the wire between the BACK-UP LIGHT between the gauge assembly and the ABSrrCS
(7.SA) fuse and gauge assembly. control unit.•
• Open circuit inside the fuse box.
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Connect gauge assembly connector B (18P).
4. Disconnect ABSrrCS control unit connector A (26P).
11. Connect gauge assembly connector C (14P)
S. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminal No. 10 to body ground with a jumper wire.
Does the ABS indicator come on? GAUGE ASSEMBLV CONNECTOR C (14P)
YES-Check for loose ABSrrCS control unit

4 5 6
ABSrrCS control unit, and recheck.• 11 12 13 14
NO - Go to step 6.• JUMPER WIRE GND(BLK)
6. Check the ABS indicator bulb in the gauge

assembly. =
Is the bulb OK?
YES-Goto step 7.•

12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II}.
NO - Replace the ABS indicator bulb .•
YES-Repair open in the wire between the gauge
8. Disconnect gauge assembly connector B (18P). assembly and body ground (GS01) .•
NO- Replace the printed circuit board in the gauge

assembly.•
(cont'd)
BACK
19-99
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Check the R/C MIRROR (7.5A) fuse in the driver's 17. Connect the ABS(TCS control unit connector
under-dash fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if A (26P) terminal No. 4 to body ground with a
itisOK. jumper wire.
Is the fuse OK? ABS/TCS CONTROL CONNECTOR A (26PI
NO - Replace the fuse and recheck.•
14. Connect the ABS(TCS control unit connector

A (26P) terminal No.1 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
ABS/TCS CONTROL CONNECTOR A (ZIP)

JUMPER
WIRE
Does the ABS indicator go off?
-= YES - Check for loose ABS(TCS control unit

Wire side of female terminals ABS(TCS control unit, and recheck .•
NO- Go to step 18.

18. Connect the gauge assembly connector B (18P)
Does the ABS indicator go off? terminal No. 16 to body ground with a jumper wire.
YES - Repair open in the wire between the ABS/ GAUGE ASSEMBLV CONNECTOR B (18PI
TCS control unit and body ground (G403) .•
NO-Go to step 16.
16. Measure the voltage between the ABS(TCS control

unit connector A (26P) terminal No. 13 and body
~ 11~ll~ L:I~1,5511~ll~18
ground. ABS
JUMPER WIRE I (BLU/WHTI
ABS/TCS CONTROL CONNECTOR A (Z6PI

-=
YES- Repair open in the wire between the gauge
Wire side of female terminals assembly and the ABS(TCS control unit..
NO-Replace the printed circuit board in the gauge

Is there battery voltage? assembly.•
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the R/C

MIRROR (7.5A) fuse and ABS(TCS control unit.•
BACK
19-100
Protected by AR
~
~
TCS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Start the engine, and watch the TCS indicator. 5. Remove the jumper wire at the gauge assembly,
and connect the ABSITCS control unit connector
Does the TCS indicator come on? B (16P) terminal No. 16 and body ground with a
jumper wire.
YES-Ifthe TCS indicator comes on and goes off, it's
OK. If the TCS indicator stays on, go to step 7. ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Turn the engine OFF, then restart it again.
Does the brake system indicator come on? JUMPER TCS2

WIRE (RED/WHT)
YES- Go to step 3.
NO-Repair open in the brake system indicator

circuit .• Wire side of female terminals
• Blown BACK-UP LIGHT (7.5A) fuse.
• Open in the wire between the BACK-UP LIGHT
(7.5A) fuse and gauge assembly. Does the TCS indicator come on?
• Open circuit inside the fuse box.
YES - Go to step 6.
3. Turn the engine OFF, and check the TCS indicator
bulb in the gauge assembly. NO- Repair open in the wire between the gauge
assembly and the ABSrrCS control unit..
Is the bulb OK?
6. Connect the ABSrrCS control unit connector
YES - Go to step 4. C (12P) terminal No.2 and body ground with a
jumper wire.
NO-Replace the TCS indicator bulb.•
4. Connect the gauge assembly connector A (30P)
terminal No. 29 and body ground with a jumper
wire. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). LG2 (BRN/YELI
GAUGE ASSEMBLV CONNECTOR A (30P)

~I IS <"I I"L..
JUMPER V"'2 3 4 5 6
WIRE 7 8 9 10 11 12
TCS
(RED/WHT)
--
=
JUMPER
WIRE
Does the TCS indicator come on?

YES-Repair open in the wire between the ABS/
Does the TCS indicator come on? TCS control unit and body ground (G101) .•
YES - Go to step 5. NO - Check for loose ABSITCS control unit

NO- Replace the printed circuit board in the gauge ABSrrCS control unit, and recheck .•
assembly.•
(cont'd)
BACK
19-101
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
TCS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
7. Check the R/C MIRROR (7.5A) fuse in the driver's

under-dash fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if
itis OK.
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck .•
8. Measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS control

unit connector A (26P) terminal No. 13 and body
ground.
ABS/TCS CONTROL CONNECTOR A (26P)
YES-Goto step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the driver's

under-dash fuse/relay box and ABS/TCS control
unit.•
10. Disconnect ABS/TCS control unit connector A (26P)

and connector B (16P).
11. Turn the ignition switch ON(II).
Does the res indicator go off?

YES - Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit
NO- Repair short to body ground in the wire

between the gauge assembly and the ABS/TCS
control unit..
BACK
19-102
Protected by AR
~
~
Modulator Unit Removal and Installation
NOTE:
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
• Take care not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation.
• To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent
material.
Removal
1. Push the modulator unit connector lock (A), and turn the connector lever (B).
2. Disconnect the modulator unit connector (e).
3. Disconnect the brake lines, then remove the modulator unit (D).
Installation
1. Install the modulator unit in the reverse order of removal.
2. Bleed the brake system, starting with the front wheels.
3. Start the engine, and check that the ASS indicator and TeS indicator go off.
4. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator and TeS indicator do not come on.
To right-front
6mmNUT
9.8 N·m 11 .0 kgf.m.
7.2Ibf·ftl
~~
~ 8mmBOLT
22 N·m 12.2 kgf.m, 16lbf·ftl
BACK
19-103
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
Tes Switch Test

,. Remove the cruise control[TCS switch (AI from the 2. Check for continuity between terminal No.5 and
switch panel. No. 6. There should be continuity when the TCS
switch is pushed.
CRUISE CONTROl/TCS SWITCH CONNECTOR
4
IG2
(BlK/VEll
A
\ Wire side of female terminals
BACK
19-104
Protected by AR
~
~
ABS/TCS Control Unit Replacement Wheel Sensor Inspection
1. Remove the passenger's side kick panel. 1. Inspect the front and rear pulsers for chipped or
damaged teeth.
2. Remove the ABS(TCS control unit (A).
2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and
pulser all the way around while rotating the pulser.
..... r. Remove the rear brake disc to measure the gap on
~ ~ ..
.' \ the rear wheel sensor. If the gap exceeds 1.0 mm
(0.04 in), check for a bent suspension arm.
Standard: 0.4 -1.0 mm 10.02 - 0.04 in)
Front
t
3. Disconnect ABS(TCS control unit connectors (B).
4. Install the ABS(TCS control unit in the reverse order

of removal.
Rear
BACK
19-105
Protected by AR
ABS/TCS Components
Wheel Sensor Replacement
Install the sensors carefully to avoid twisting wires.
Front
6mmBOLT
9.8 N·m 11.0 kgf·m,
/,Ibf.ftl
\
WHEEL SENSOR
Rear
6mmBOLT
9.' N·m 1~21b1.ftl
WHEEL SENSOR
BACK
19-106
Protected by AR
Brakes
Conventional Brake System 19-1
ABS/TCS (Anti-lock Brake System/

Traction Control System) Components ...... 19-35
VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist)

System Components
General Troubleshooting Information ....................... 19-109
DTC Troubleshooting Index ........................................ 19-113
System Description ...................................................... 19-115
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 19-132
DTC Troubleshooting ................................................... 19-134
ASS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting ...................... 19-179
VSA System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting ......... 19-182
VSA Activation Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting .... 19-184
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement ......................... 19-187
Yaw Rate Sensor Replacement ................................... 19-188
Lateral Acceleration Sensor Inspection ...................... 19-188
Neutral Position Memorization ................................... 19-189
VSA-TCS Control Valve Assembly Replacement ...... 19-190
Modulator Unit Removal and Installation .................. 19-191
VSA Modulator Fluid Replacement ............................ 19-192
VSA Off Switch Test ............ .......................... ............... 19-193
VSA Control Unit Replacement ................................... 19-194
Wheel Sensor Inspection .............................................
Wheel Sensor Replacement ........................................
19-194
19-195 @VSA
Protected by AR
VSA System Components
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

YAW RATE SENSOR
-REAR WHEEL SENSOR

'I--L Replacement, page 19-195
UNDER-HOOD ----~Jf--./~f--_
-.L
FIJ~~/R~lAY BOX
MODULATOR UNIT
Removal and
Installation,
page 19-191
RIGHT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR

Inspection, page 19-194 ACCELERATION SENSOR
Replacement, page 19-195 Inspection, page 19-188
LEFT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR

VSACONTROL Inspection, page 19-194
UNIT Replacement, page 19-195
\
VSA-TCS CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY

ABS RELAY BOX
ABS FAIL-SAFE RELAY
VSARELAY
SUB-THROTTLE MOTOR RELAY
19-108 BACK
Protected by AR
System Indicatorsc • The ABS is not operational when the ABS indicator is
ON; the VSA is not operational when the VSA system
• If the system is OK, the ABS indicator goes off 2 indicator is ON.
seconds after turning the ignition switch ON (II). • When the VSA system indicator and MIL are both ON,
• The ABS indicator or VSA system indicator comes on troubleshoot the PGM-FI system first.
when the VSA control unit detects a problem in the
system. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
• The ABS indicator or VSA system indicator will also
come on under these conditions, even though the • All of the VSA DTCs are indicated by the ABS
system is operating properly: indicator blinking.
- The vehicle goes into a spin • The memory can hold any number of DTCs. However,
- The ABS continues to operate for a long time when the same DTC is detected more than once, the
- The vehicle is subjected to an electrical signal more recent DTC is written over the earlier one.
disturbance Therefore, when the same problem is detected
• If the VSA off switch is pushed, or if there is a fault in repeatedly, it is memorized as a single DTC.
one or more of these components, only the VSA • The DTCs are indicated in ascending number order,
system indicator comes on: not in the order that they occur.
- Yaw rate sensor, lateral acceleration sensor, • The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM (non-
steering angle sensor, apply/dump solenoids, volatile memory). Therefore, the memorized DTCs
modulator unit, PGM-FI communication, neutral cannot be canceled by disconnecting the battery.
position, TCS control valve sensor, TCS control Perform the specified procedures to clear the DTCs.
valve actuator.
- Heated oxygen sensor, manifold absolute pressure Self-diagnosis
sensor, crankshaft position sensor, engine coolant
temperature sensor, throttle position sensor, top • Self-diagnosis can be classified into two categories:
dead center sensor, top dead center sensor 2, - Initial diagnosis: Done right after the engine starts
intake air temperature sensor, exhaust gas and until the ABS or VSA system indicator goes off.
recirculation, barometric pressure, idle air control - Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial
valve, VTEC pressure switch, knock sensor, fuel diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
supply system, automatic transmission, misfire • When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the
detection system of the PGM-FI system. VSA control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.
• The VSA activation indicator will flash when only the
drive wheels rotate, one of the drive wheels is stuck, Kickback
or if the system detects an understeer or oversteer
condition. The pump motor operates when the ABS is functioning,
and the fluid in the reservoir is forced out to the master
To determine the actual cause of the problem, question cylinder, causing kickback at the brake pedal.
the customer about the problem, taking these
conditions into consideration. Pump Motor
• When a problem is detected, and the ABS or VSA • The pump motor operates when the ABS or VSA is
system indicator comes on, there are cases when the functioning.
indicator stays on until the ignition switch is turned • The VSA control unit checks the pump motor
OFF, and cases when the indicator goes off operation during initial diagnosis when the vehicle
automatically when the system returns to normal. For starts moving. You may hear the motor operate at
DTCs 61 and 62, the indicator goes off automatically this time, but it is normal.
when the system returns to normal. For all other • The pump runs at 7 mph and again at 15 mph.
codes, the indicator stays on until the ignition switch
is turned OFF. Brake Fluid Replacement/Air Bleeding
• For DTCs 12, 14, 16, 18, 21,22,23,24,41,42,43,44, Brake fluid replacement and air bleeding procedures
51, and 52, the ABS indicator goes off when the are identical to the procedures used on vehicles not
vehicle is driven again and the system is OK after the equipped with ABSNSA. To ease bleeding, start with
ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON (II). However, the front wheels. Replace the VSA fluid in the
if the DTC is cleared, the CPU resets, and the indicator modulator reservoir after replacing the brake fluid.
goes off right after the engine is started if the system
isOK. (cont'd)
BACK 19-109
Protected by AR

'03 model:
How to Troubleshoot DTCs
The troubleshooting flowchart procedures assume that
the cause of the problem is still present and the ABS
and/or VSA system indicator is still on. Following the
flowchart when the ABS and/or VSA system indicator
does not come on can result in incorrect diagnosis.
The connector illustrations show the female terminal
connectors with a single outline and the male terminal
connectors with a double outline.
1. Question the customer about the conditions when A

the problem occured, and try to reproduce the
same conditions for troubleshooting. Find out
when the ABS and/or VSA system indicator came 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and follow the
on, such as during ABS control, after ABS control, prompts on the Honda PGM Tester to display the
what the vehicle speed was, etc. DTC(s) on the screen. After determining the DTC,
refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index.
2. When the ABS or VSA system indicator does not
come on during the test drive, but troubleshooting NOTE: See the Honda PGM Tester user's manual
is performed based on the DTC, check for loose for specific instructions.
connectors, poor contact of the terminals, etc.
before you start troubleshooting. Service Check Signal Circuit Method:
3. After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs and test-drive 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the Honda
the vehicle . Make sure the ABS and VSA system PGM Tester (A) to the 16P Data Link Connector
indicators do not come on. (DLC) (B) located under the ashtray (,99-02 models)
or behind the driver's dashboard lower cover
How to Retrieve DTCs ('03 model).
Honda PGM Tester Method: '99-02 models:

(DLC) (B) located under the ashtray (,99-02 models)
or behind the driver's dashboard lower cover
('03 model).
'99·02 models:
'03 model:
19-110 BACK
Protected by AR
2. Short the SCS circuit to body ground using the How to Clear DTCs
Honda PGM Tester.
Honda PGM Tester Method:
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) without pressing the
brake pedal. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the Honda
NOTE: If the brake pedal is pressed when turning (DLC) (B) located under the ashtray (,99-02 models)
the ignition switch ON (II). the system shifts to the or behind the drivers dashboard lower cover ('03 model).
DTC clearing mode.
'99-02 models:
4. The ABS indicator will blink. The blinking frequency
indicates the DTC.
NOTE: If the DTC is not memorized. the ABS

indicator will go off for 3.6 seconds, and then come
back on.
The system will not indicate the DTC unless these

conditions are met:
• The brake pedal is not pressed.
• The ignition switch is turned ON (II).
Example of DTC 23 '03 model:
20 3
:r
a e .
ON
OFF
Example of DTC 111
100 10 1 A
~ .......
f a d
ON

OFF
DTC(s) by following the screen prompts on the
f b e Honda PGM Tester.
a: 1.3 see. d: 0.3 sec.
b: 0.5 lee. e: 3.6.ee. NOTE: See the Honda PGM Tester user's manual
e: 0.4 see. f : 0.1 lee. for specific instructions.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-111
Protected by AR
Service Check Signal Circuit Method: 7. After the ASS indicator goes off, release the brake
pedal again.
PGM Tester (A) to the 16P Data Link Connector You cannot clear the OTC unless these conditions
(OLC) (B) located under the ashtray (,99-02 models) are met:
or behind the driver's dashboard lower cover o The vehicle speed is 6 mph (10 km/h) or less.
(,03 model). o The SCS circuit is shorted to body ground before

'99·02 models: o The brake pedal is pressed before the ignition

c
ON ~ ..... -)
ABS
indicator a
OFF
Depressed I I
Brake
pedal
Released
I
Ignition switch ON 1111
a : 2 sec. c : 0.3 sec.
b : .. sec. d : within 3 sec.
'03 model:
8. After a few seconds, the ASS indicator blinks twice

and the DTC is cleared. If the indicator does not
blink twice, repeat steps 1 through 7. If the indicator
stays on after the indicator blinks twice, check the
DTC because a problem was detected during initial
diagnosis before shifting to DTC clearing mode.
11. Do the neutral position memorization (see page 19-

189).
2. Short the SCS circuit body ground using the

Honda PGM Tester.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) while keeping the

brake pedal pressed.
5. After the ASS indicator goes off, release the brake

pedal.
6. After the ASS indicator comes on, press the brake

pedal again.
19-112 BACK
Protected by AR
DTC Troubleshooting Index
Ole Detection Item Note

11 RiQht-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see paQe 19-134)
12 Right-front wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-136)
13 Left-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see paQe 19-134)
14 Left-front wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-136)
15 Right-rear wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-134)
16 RiQht-rear wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (seepage 19-136)
17 Left-rear wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power) (see page 19-134)
18 Left-rear wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) (see page 19-136)
21 Right-front pulser (see page 19-137)
22 Left-front pulser (see paQe 19-137)
23 Right-rear pulser (see page 19-137)
24 Left-rear pulser (see page 19-137)
25 Yaw rate sensor (see page 19-138)
26 Lateral acceleration sensor (see page 19-141)
27 SteerinQ anQle sensor (see page 19-143)
31 Right-front inlet solenoid (see page 19-146)
32 RiQht-front outlet solenoid (see paQe 19-146)
33 Left-front inlet solenoid (see page 19-146)
34 Left-front outlet solenoid (see page 19-146)
35 Right-rear inlet solenoid (see page 19-146)
36 Right-rear outlet solenoid (see page 19-146)
37 Left-rear inlet solenoid (see paQe 19-146)
38 Left-rear outlet solenoid (see page 19-146)
41 RiQht-front wheel lock (see page 19-150)
42 Left-front wheel lock (see 1'age 19-150)
43 Right-rear wheel lock (see page 19-150)
44 Left-rear wheel lock (see paQe 19-150)
45 Right-front apply solenoid (see page 19-151)
46 RiQht-front dump solenoid (see page 19-151)
47 Left-front apply solenoid (see page 19-151)
48 Left-front dump solenoid (see page 19-151)
51 Motor lock (see page 19-154)
52 Motor stuck OFF (see page 19-154)
53 Motor stuck ON (see page 19-157)
54 Fail-safe relay (see page 19-159)
55 VSA relay (see page 19-162)
61 Low ignition voltaQe (see paQe 19-164)
62 High ignition voltage (see page 19-164)
64 Sensor power source (see page 19-165)
71 Different diameter tire (see page 19-167)
72 Modulator unit (see page 19-167)
81 VSA control unit (see page 19-168)
83 PGM-FI communication (see page 19-168)
84 Neutral position (see page 19-170)
93 Throttle position sensor (see page 19-171)
94 VSA-TCS control valve sensor (see page 19-171)
97 VSA-TCS control valve actuator (see page 19-173)
101 Barometric pressure sensor (see paQe 19-177)
111 Sub-throttle motor relay (see page 19-177)
BACK 19-113
Protected by AR
SYmptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for

ASS indicator does not come on ASS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page
19-179)
ASS indicator does not go off and no ASS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see step 1
DTC is stored on page 19-180)
VSA system indicator does not come VSA System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
on (see page 19-182)
VSA system indicator does not go off VSA System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
and no DTC is stored (see step 1 on page 19-183)
VSA activation indicator does not VSA Activation Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
come on (see page 19-184)
VSA activation indicator does not go VSA Activation Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
off and no DTC is stored (see step 1 on page 19-186)
BACK
19-114
Protected by AR
System Description
VSA Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector A (22P)
VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)
I><'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
L
Terminal Wire color Terminal Description Measurement

number sign Terminal Conditions Voltage
(Ignition switch ON (II»
1 BlK GND7 Ground 1-GND -- Below 0.3 V
2 GRY TH2 Detects VSA-TCS 2-GND VSA-TCS control valve About 0.5 V-
control valve sensor is fully closed. About 3.7 V
signal VSA-TCS control valve
is fully open.
3 RED/GRN Rl-IN Drives left-rear inlet 3-GND ABS indicator is OFF. Battery Voltage
solenoid valve
4 RED/BlK FR-IN Drives right-front 4-GND
inlet solenoid valve
5 YEL/BlU Fl-OUT Drives left-front inlet 5-GND
solenoid valve
6 YEL/WHT RR-OUT Drives right-rear inlet 6-GND
solenoid valve
7 GRY FRA Drives right-front 7-GND VSA system indicator Battery Voltage
apply solenoid valve is OFF.
8 YEL/GRN FLA Drives left-front 8-GND
apply solenoid valve
9 BlU/WHT ABS Drives ABS indicator 9-GND ABS lON 4-6V
indicator I OFF Below 1.0V
10 VEL VP Power source for the 10-GND Ignition switch ON (II) Battery Voltage
VSA-TCS control
valve actuator
11 GRY/WHT M(+) Drives VSA-TCS 11-21 VSA is functioning. OV
control valve VSA is not functioning. Battery Voltage
actuator
(cont'd)
BACK
19-115
Protected by AR

(Ignition switch ON (III)
12 BLK GNDS Ground 12-GND -- Below 0.3 V
13 GRN MCK Detects pump motor 13-GND Pump ON Battery
drive signal motor Voltage
OFF BelowO.3V
Remove MCK fuse About 10 V
14 YELJGRN RL-OUT Drives left-rear outlet 14-GND ABS indicator is OFF. Battery
solenoid valve Voltage
15 YELJBLK FR-OUT Drives right-front 15-GND
outlet solenoid valve
16 RED/BLU FL-IN Drives left-front 16-GND
17 RED/WHT RR-IN Drives right-rear 17-GND
18 LTBLU FRO Drives right-front 1S-GND VSA system indicator Battery
dump solenoid is OFF. Voltage
19 RED/GRN FLO Drives left-front 19-GND
dump solenoid
20 ORN/WHT VSAOFF Detects VSA off 20-GND VSAoff While Battery
SW switch signal switch pressing Voltage
the switch
Released OV
21 BLU/YEL M(-) Drives VSA-TCS 21-11 VSA is functioning. Battery
control valve Voltage
actuator VSA is not functioning. OV
--- -
22 BLK MG -
Ground for the motor 22-GND "---
--
- _.- - -
Below 0.3 V
19-116 BACK
Protected by AR
VSA Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector B (16P)
VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)
567 8
1213141516

(Ignition switch ON (1111
1 ORN VSA Drivers VSA 1-GND VSA ON 4-6V
system indicator system OFF Below 0.3 V
indicator
3 LTBLU DLC Communicates -- -- --
with the Honda
PGM Tester
5 GRN/RED PARK Detects parking 5-GND With Pressed Below 0.3 V
brake switch engine Released Battery
signal running, Voltage
parking
brake
6 LTBLU RLW(+) Detects left-rear 6-18ofthe Wheel Spin wheel AC: 0.053 V or
wheel sensor connector C at 1 rev/ above
signal (26P) second (Reference)
Oscilloscope
0.15 Vp-p or
above
Stopped 0.25 V-1.15 V
7 LTBLU SVCC Power source for 7-GND -- About 5 V
steering angle
sensor, yaw rate
sensor, lateral
acceleration
sensor, VSA-TCS
control valve
sensor
8 GRN/YEL RRW(+) Detects left-rear 8-20 of the Wheel Spin wheel AC: 0.053 V or
wheel sensor connectorC at 1 rev/ above
Oscilloscope
0.15 Vp-p or
above
(cont'd)
BACK
19-117
Protected by AR

10 BRN SCS Detects -- -- --
service
check
connector
signal (Use
for DTC
indication)
12 LTGRN THR Drives sub 12-GND ABS OFF VSA OFF
Below 1.OV
throttle indicator indicator ON Battery
motor relay Voltage
ON Below 0.3 V
13 GRN/BLK FRW(+) Detects 13-6ofthe Wheel Spin wheel at 1 rev/ AC: 0.053 V or
right-front connector C second above
wheel (26P) (Reference)
sensor Oscilloscope
signal 0.15 Vp-p or
above
Stopped 0.25V-1.15V
14 VEL/RED PMR Drives pump 14-GND ABS OFF Pump ON Below 1.0V
motor relay indicator motor OFF Battery
Voltage
ON Below 0.3 V
15 GRN/BLU FLW(+) Detects left- 15-4ofthe Wheel Spin wheel at 1 rev/ AC: 0.053 V or
front wheel connectorC second above
sensor (26P) (Reference)
signal Oscilloscope
0.15 Vp-p or
above
Stopped 0.25V-1.15V'
16 GRN/YEL VSAR Drives VSA 16-GND ABS OFF VSA OFF Below 1.OV
relay indicator indicator ON Battery
Voltage
- --- - ----- O"L _ _ _. ~~Iow 0.3 V_
19-118 BACK
Protected by AR
VSA Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector C (26P)

VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (26P)
r><:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 V
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
~

1 BlK/YEl IG1 Power source for 1-GND Ignition ON (II) Battery
activating the switch Voltage
system Start (II) Battery
Voltaj)e
3 WHT/BlK STOP Detects brake 3-GND Brake Pressed Battery
switch signal pedal Voltaj)e
Released BelowO.3V
4 BRN FlW(-) Detects left-front 4-150fthe Wheel Spin wheel AC: 0.053 V or
wheel sensor connector B at 1 rev/ above
Oscilloscope
0.15 Vp-p or
above
5 GRN/WHT RYAW Detects yaw rate 5-GND Vehicle stopped 2.5V
sensor signal
6 GRN FRW(-) Detects right- 6-130fthe Wheel Spin wheel AC: 0.053 V or
front wheel connector B at 1 rev/ above
sensor signal (16P) second (Reference)
Oscilloscope
0.15 Vp-p or
above
Stopped 0.25V-1.15V
7 VEL GlAT Detects lateral 7-GND Vehicle stopped 2.5V
accelleration
sensor signal
8 YEL/BlU ACT Drives VSA 8-GND VSA ON Below3V
activation activation OFF Battery
indicator indicator Voltage
9 RED/YEl STRA Detects steering 9-GND Turn the steering wheel 5V-OV-5V
angle sensor slowly
signal
10 RED/GRN SEAF Communicates 10-GND With engine running About 6 V
with PCM
11 BLU NEP Detects engine 11-GND With engine running About 3 V-
speed signal 6V
(cont'd)
BACK
19-119
Protected by AR
System Description (cont' d)

(Ignition switch ON (11))
15 YEL/GRN FSR Drives fail-safe 15-GND ABS WarninQ BelowO.3V
relay Normal Battery
Voltage
17 BLU/WHT SDIAG Detects self- 17-GND -- About 5 V
diagnosis signal
of steering angle
sensor
18 GRY RlW(-) Detects left-rear 18-6 of the Wheel Spin wheel AC: 0.053 V or
wheel sensor connector B at 1 rev/ above
Oscilloscope
0.15 Vp-p or
above
19 ORN RDIAG Detects self- 19-GND -- About 5 V
diagnosis signal
of yaw rate
sensor
20 BlU/YEl RRW(-) Detects right- 20-8 of the Wheel Spin wheel AC: 0.053 V or
rear wheel connector B at 1 rev/ above
sensor signal (16P) second (Reference)
Oscilloscope
0.15 Vp-p or
above
Stopped 0.25V-1.15V
21 YEL/RED STRB Detects steering 21-GND Turns the steering wheel 5V-OV-5V
angle sensor slowly
signal
22 PNK SEFA Communicates 22-GND With engine running About6V
with PCM
23 BlK SLD Shield for M (+) 23-GND -- Below 0.3 V
and M (-)
circuits
24 lTGRN SG Ground for 24-GND -- Below 0.3 V
steering angle
sensor, yaw rate
sensor, lateral
acceleration
sensor, VSA-TCS
control valve
19-120 BACK
Protected by AR
Outline
This system consists of the VSA control unit, the modulator unit, four wheel sensors, the VSA-TCS control valve
assembly (the VSA-TCS control valve actuator (sub-throttle motor) and the VSA-TCS control valve sensor), the
steering angle sensor, the yaw rate sensor, the lateral acceleration sensor, and the PCM. The system integrates the
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System), the VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) system, and the TCS (Traction Control System). The
TCS includes brake TCS, engine TCS, and throttle TCS.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-121
Protected by AR
System Description (co nt'd)
ABS Features
When the brake pedal is pressed while driving, the wheels can lock before the vehicle comes to a stop. In such an
event, the maneuverability of the vehicle is reduced if the front wheels are locked, and the stability of the vehicle is
reduced if the rear wheels are locked, creating an extremely unstable condition. The ABS precisely controls the slip
rate of the wheels to ensure maximum grip force from the tires, and it thereby ensures maneuverability and stability
of the vehicle.
The ABS calculates the slip rate of the wheels based on the vehicle speed and thE) wheel speed, then it controls the
brake fluid pressure to reach the target slip rate.
Grip Force of Tire and Road Surface
COEFFICIENT OF
FRICTION
ROTATIONAL
DIRECTION
RADIAL
DIRECTION
OF THE
ROTATIONAL
DIRECTION
SLIP RATE
TCS Features
The TCS provides low speed traction. When a drive wheel loses traction on a slipperly road surface and starts to spin,
the VSA control unit sends a brake signal to the modulator unit, which applies brake pressure to slow the spinning
wheel. At that time, the VSA control unit sends a traction control signal to reduce engine power.
SLIPPERY ROAD SURFACE

NORMAL ROAD SURFACE
19-122 BACK
Protected by AR
VSA System Features
Oversteer control
• Applies the brake to the front outside tire
The brake makes the yaw rate opposite

to the turning direction
Understeer control (in acceleration)
• Applies the brake to the front inside tire

• Cuts the engine torque by controlling the sub-throttle
The brake increases the yaw rate toward

the turning direction
The sub-throttle control effect;
• reduces vehicle speed
• increases cornering force
(cont'd)
BACK
19-123
Protected by AR

Self-Diagnosis
• The VSA control unit is equipped with a main CPU and a sub CPU. Each CPU checks the other for problems.
• The CPU checks the circuit of the system.
• Self-diagnosis can be classified into two categories:

- Initial diagnosis: Done right after the engine starts and until the ABS or VSA system indicator goes off.
• When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the VSA control unit shifts to fail-safe mode .
DTe Detection Item .Detection Timing Indicators

Initial Regular ABS VSA
Diaanosis Dia nosis System
11 Rieht-front wheel sensor lODen/short to body eround/short to Dowerl 0 ON ON
12 Rieht-front wheel sensor lelectrical noiselintermittent interruDtion) ON ON
13 Left-front wheel sensor looen/short to body around/short to Dower) 0 ON ON
14 Left-front wheel sensor lelectrical noiselintermittent interruDtion) ON ON
15 Riaht-rear wheel sensor lopen/short to body around/short to Dower) 0 ON ON
16 Right-rear wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption) ON ON
17 Left-rear wheel sensor looen/short to bodyground!short to..Qowe()_ 0 ON ON
18 Left-rear wheel sensor lelectrical noise/intermittent interruDtion) ON ON
21 Rieht-front Dulser ON ON
22 Left-front Dulser ON ON
23 Riaht-rear Dulser ON ON
24 Left-rear pulser ON ON
25 Yaw rate sensor 0 OFF ON
26 Lateral acceleration sensor 0 OFF ON
27 Steerina anele sensor 0 OFF ON
31 Rieht-front inlet selenoid 0 ON ON
32 Rieht-front outlet solenoid ON ON
33 Left-front inlet solenoid ON ON
34 Left-front outlet solenoid ON ON
35 Rieht-rear inlet solenoid ON ON
36 Rieht-rear outlet solenoid 0 ON ON
37 Left-rear inlet solenoid 0 ) ON ON
38 Left-rear outlet solenoid 0 ON ON
41 Rieht-front wheel lock ON ON
42 Left-front wheel lock ON ON
43 Rieht-rear wheel lock ON ON
44 Left-rear wheel lock ON ON
45 Rieht-front aDDlv solenoid 0 OFF ON
46 Rieht-front dumD solenoid 0 OFF ON
47 Left-front aDDlv solenoid 0 OFF ON
48 Left-front dump solenoid OFF ON
51 Motor lock ON ON
52 Motor stuck OFF ON ON
53 Motor stuck ON 0 ON ON
54 Fail-safe relav ) ON ON
55 VSA relav ) ON/OFF ON
61 Low ienition voltaee ON ON
62 Hieh ignition voltaee ON ON
64 Sensor power source ON ON
71 Different diameter tire ON/OFF ON
72 Modulator unit 0 OFF ON
81 VSA control unit ) ON ON
83 PGM-FI communication OFF ON
84 Neutral Dosition OFF ON
93 Throttle position sensor OFF ON
94 VSA-TCS control valve sensor 0 ON/OFF ON
97 VSA-TCS control valve actuator 0 OFF ON
101 Barometric Dressure sensor OFF ON
111 Sub-throttle motor relav ) ON ON
19-124 BACK
Protected by AR
Modulator Unit
The modulator unit consists of the four inlet solenoid valves, four outlet solenoid valves, two front apply valves,two
front dump valves, reservoir, relied valves, regulator valve, ABS pump, VSA pump, and pump motor.
The modulator controls the brake fluid pressure directly. It is a circulating-type modulator because the brake fluid
circulates through the caliper, the reservoir, and the master cylinder.
The hydraulic control has three modes: pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing .
The hydraulic circuit is an independent four channel type, one channel for each wheel.
LEFT·REAR RlGHT·FRONT LEFT.fRONT RIGHT-MAR
(cont'd)
BACK 19-125
Protected by AR
Modulator Operation
Conventional brake mode
The brake fluid is provided to the brake calipers through four inlet valves. In ASS mode, the VSA control unit drives
four inlet valves, four outlet valves, ASS pump, and pump motor the same as conventional ASS.
VSA mode (pressure intensifying operation)

In pressure intensifying operation, the apply valve opens, the dump valve closes, and the pump motor operates. The
cut off valve is closed by the brake fluid for VSA control pressing on the pressure piston. At the same time, the brake
fluid in the pressure chamber provides pressure to the brake caliper.
19-126 BACK
Protected by AR
VSA mode (pressure reducing operation)

The VSA control unit opens the dump valve and closes the apply valve. The brake fluid for VSA control is reduced
from the pressure chamber to the VSA reservoir. The pressure piston returns to standard position, and the cut off
valve opens.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-127
Protected by AR

Wheel Sensor
The wheel sensors are the magnetic contactless type. As the gear pulser teeth rotate past the wheel sensor's magnetic
,.
coil, AC current is generated. The AC frequency changes in accordance with the wheel speed. The VSA control unit
detects the wheel sensor signal frequency and thereby detects the wheel speed.
GEAR PUlSER
WHEEL SENSOR .t HIGH SPEED
0 I:~ ~ UftR~n~tHtn~ (-\

g
.t LOW SPEED
Wheel Speed and Modulator Control (ABS)
SPEED VEHICLE SPEED
WHEEL SPEED
PRESSURES ' .,: ; ' TIME
~ dTI'. ~
OUTLET t !!
~ ~ !! :
iii!! ! :::; ::
VALVE ON !n: : : :. : ::
OFF ~ :::! D !i:: 0
INLET
VALVE ON
OFF
+l i n ;--1------.JI hi
. . ...
MOTOR ONt
OFF~-~I------------------------------
When the wheel speed drops sharply below the vehicle speed, the outlet valve opens momentarily to reduce the
caliper fluid pressure. The pump motor starts at this time. As the wheel speed is restored, the inlet valve opens
momentarily to increase the caliper fluid pressure.
19-128 BACK
Protected by AR
Steering Angle Sensor
The steering angle sensor detects the steering wheel turning angle. A disk with evenly spaced slits is positioned
between the facing parts of a light emitting part (LED), and a light receiving part (photo transistor). As the disk rotates,
it interrupts the light from the LED. The light which passes through a slit is converted into the electric current by the
photo transister, and the waveform of this electric current is converted by the comparator into a square wave output of
the disk's rotation.
The output signal is a 2-phase output (A-phase and 8-phase), and the steering wheel turning angle and the turning
direction are calculated by the VSA control unit.
5V
LED ..---~r_<>_--"A·PHASE
5V v tJl1fU1MfU111f .
,___-~r_<>_--.. B·PHASE
v LJ1JlJ1fUlJlJ1J1 .
STEERING WHEEL TURNING ANGLE
SENSOR SIDE VSA CONTROL UNIT SIDE
Lateral Acceleration Sensor
The lateral acceleration sensor detects crisscross direction acceleration against the fixed electrode and movable
electrode. The sensor is a static-electricity capacity type, and the sensor detects static-electricity between the fixed
electrode and movable electrode which is changed by lateral acceleration.
DETECTING OUTPUT CHARACTERISTIC

DIRECTION V
CIRCUIT BOARD
5
4
---- !
---
MOVABLE ~_~_ 2.5 ...................
ELECTRODE
FIXED
ELECTRODE
1G - - - OG - - 1G
(cont'd)
BACK
19-129
Protected by AR

Yaw Rate Sensor
The yaw rate sensor detects the direction change (angular speed) of the vehicle. The sensor is an oscillation gyro.
Sensor Element Structure

The sensor element is shaped like a tuning fork, and it consists of the piezoelectric parts, the metal block, and the
support pin. There are four piezoelectric parts: one to drive the oscillators, one for monitoring that maintains the
oscillation at a regular frequency, and two to detect angular velocity. The two oscillators have a 90 degree twist in the
center, are connected at the bottom by the metal block, and supported by the support pin. A detecting piezoelectric
part is attached to the top of each oscillator. The driving piezoelectric part is attached to the bottom of one oscillator,
and the monitoring piezoelectric part is attached to the bottom of the other oscillator.
Oscillation Gyro Principles

The piezoelectric parts have "electric/mechanical transfer characteristics. " The piezoelectric parts bend vertically
when voltage is applied to both sides of the parts, and voltage is generated between both sides of the piezoelectoric
parts when then are bent by an external force. The oscillation gyro fuctions by utilizing this charactoristic of the
piezoelectric parts and "Coriolis force." (Coriolis force deflects moving objects as a result of the earth's rotation.) In
the oscillation gyro, this force moves the sensor element when the angular velocity is applied.
Operation
1. The driving piezoelectric part oscillates the oscillator by repeatedly bending and returning when an AC voltage at
6 kHz is applied to the part, The monitoring-side oscillator resonates because it is connected to the driving-side
oscillator by the metal block.
2. The monitoring piezoelectric parts bend in proportion to the oscillation and outputs voltage (the monitor signal).
The VSA control unit control circuit controls the drive signal to stabilize the monitor signal.
3. When the vehicle is stopped, the detecting piezoelectric parts oscillate right and left with the oscillators, but no
signal is output because the parts are not bent (no angular force).
4. When the vehicle turns to the right, the sensor element moves in a circular motion with the right oscillator
bending forward and the left oscillator bending rearward. The amount of forward/rearward bend varies according
to the angular velocity of the vehicle.
S. The detecting piezoelectric parts output voltage (the yaw rate signal) according to the amount of bend. The
amount of vehicle direction change is determined by measuring this voltage.
Enlarged view of sensor element Sensor element top view
DETECTING PIEZOELECTRIC
PARTS
SUPPORT PIN OSCILLATORS

Turnto~
right
~ Coriolis force
Oscillation-4- --~
- - - - -$--- - - - - -.-.... Oscillation
Coriolis force
('
Bend
~i' MONITORING PIEZOELECTRIC

METAL BLOCK PART
19-130 BACK
Protected by AR
TCS Control Valve Assembly
The TCS control valve assembly consists of the TCS control valve actuator (DC motor), TCS control valve sensor, TCS
control valve, return spring, and three gears.
When the TCS is activated, the VSA control unit signals the TCS control valve actuator and PCM. The actuator is linked
to the TCS control valve which is normally held in the fully open position by the return spring. Although the throttle
valve is still within the driver's control, the engine output is reduced by the TCS control valve and PCM to achieve
optimum traction.
TCS CONTROL VALVE
TCSCONTROL
VALVE SENSOR
TCS CONTROL VALVE ACTUATOR
BACK
19-131
Protected by AR
Circuit Diagram
'$, r=...... _--

~~ ~~~ "~------------------------
'---_':':O;.:z:---9-WH1'11'IL ~
IA""".-
.., - -
:=Ill:'
~._
~'-
="utraII-OAIH
J11:7..,~"':t
GAUGE"'. . . ....
....fl·
..:;....."'" -:;ta_AL--:
I =- :;l ......
I
~-~~_~_~
I ~---~---+~,~.~~
AUMLIVIOX
~ -f'T
~
WWHTll -
. ~~
I L::-==-____
-'IS"'" Ihl T...._ ~,i 7;-::::::::::::::::::::~-
-~ n"+' ~~~ u
=..~.- , I. ~
~~y~
~!!:.+...,..,
_~r 1 ~ --------~----~------~I l
__ D T~ "R
r------------
I ,
~ ... a- c," IL =------------------------

-l- ~=f]~ =t.y~i11
~ I~ 1~=~'~~-~~==~~c==0~_________________--------
~;;::$=':'·::L-*-l:::""":.11
M1IICHICI.I7.1A1
C ::. ...
:IIl.-OLrf DJOUI
U-.u
===========
_ o.u ::rJ::" ~ , - ::::::::::::::::::=
: ...- !! 11.... _---------------________
I 1I.<>On'
...~ 1!1'1'.- i :::.

!aU
.....-
Ul,';,,__
:!!!
=~_<i~~---=
==
_______________________
DIklJ
lOW ='-'_
1aIT.tWINT
..........
~
~
:_ 1kU
L--_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , ~---.<!J.--i:
UM»n-HOOD FUIII/JIIILAVaoX ~ IIWCI! .WITCH CIlUtaCONTllQU MODULATOR UMT COfr,N!CT'()R'

COMWKTOR A 11.-! CONLWCTOII. (7'" "'CONNIe"'" YIA 0" IWfTCH .cor..C'TOfII CO....CTOII. (10P'1 CONNIC'TOIII.,
rT"ffl-n I'fflo.
rnllilAll~~17W tmlilII lllil ffimfW1 1 234
5 678
~
tm!ili:l
......... UNDIR-OMM NIlIMUY IIC)XCOMIIICT'CIfII J fWI
9 10
_"-IIIOTOO
9lt831~if.
111 3f4~61il81
.C~DII
16 18
dIb
fAl..-loVllttlAy,
~DM'~n~YIlOX~
VSAItII"AY/
~OIIACIJII'I CONNIC1Oft ItIPI lUI THROnu MOTOfl RILA,.
.. ...-cTOIO
IJ:till] Ufu
_.-
QAUQf.~'~
_.- &
1112~4~5~7~12~1~
1516li18921 28 141516171 )8910 IT~I
f;1'1"1 M11121H4
WIN . . . ., ..............
19-132 BACK
Protected by AR
l{~,,,_
-------------------""""'---"""<:ED---.....
__________________ ~~w,~-~~~~--~~~-'
r
_______________________________ r8W _ _ _~~~--__- - - - ,
___________________.WM. __ ~~~_~~,
------------------,,~--~~~-~
________________________________________ MD_U------~~~~,
---------------------------------""""'--~~~
________________________________________ MD,.. ____.....ul®
_________________________________________
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ' ' ' '.''D..
______________________________,~ ---4~~
~----~~~
---illJ.<iiW
--------------------.~---=~~
________________________________________
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ' " ' ' 'M.~~--
-------------------------------'~----~~
____
' ' ' --=lIl<lil
~~
--------------------------------------------------~~-----------.~---~~~----~~
...
1 2 3 4 6 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 6 6 7 8
2131415161718192021 10 1213141616
LATiMLACCIU!IiIATION
SlNSOI'I JP CONNECTOfiI
24
DATA LINK CONNIC'TOIIIWI
BACK 19-133
Protected by AR
OTe Troubleshooting
OTC 11, 13, 15, 17: Wheel Sensor (Open/Short 5. Check for continuity between the appropriate
to Body Ground/Short to Power) wheel sensor (+) circuit terminal and body ground
(see table).
1. Disconnect VSA control unit connector 8 (16P) and
connector C (26P). OTC Appropriate Terminal
11 (Right-front) No. 13: FRW (+)
2. Start the engine. 13 (Left-front) No. 15: FLW (+)
15 (Right-rear) No.8: RRW (+)
3. Measure the voltage between the appropriate 17 (Left-rear) No.6: RLW (+)
wheel sensor (+) circuit terminal of VSA control
unit connector 8 (16P) and body ground (see table). VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B 116P)
OTC I Appropriate Terminal

11 (Right-front) I No. 13 : FRW (+ )
13 (Left-front) I No. 15: FLW (+)
15 (Right-rear) I No.8: RRW (+)
~7(~eft-rear) L 1".10.6: RLW(+)
VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B 116P)
-=
YES - Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 7.
Wire side of female terminals 6. Disconnect the harness 2P connector from the
appropriate wheel sensor, then check for continuity
Is there 1 V or more? between the (+) and (-) terminals of the harness
and body ground.
YES - Repair short to power in the (+) circuit wire
between the VSA control unit and the appropriate Is there continuity?
wheel sensor .•
YES - Repair short to body ground in the (+) or (-)
NO-Go to step 4. circuit wire between the VSA control unit and the
wheel sensor..
NO-Replace the wheel sensor. •
19-134 BACK
Protected by AR
7. Check the resistance between the appropriate 8. Disconnect the harness 2P connector from the
wheel sensor (+) and (-) circuit terminals (see appropriate wheel sensor, and check the resistance
table) . between the (+) and (-) terminals of the wheel
sensor.
(+ )Side (- )Side Is the resistance between 450- 2,000 Q ?
ConnectorB ConnectorC
(16P) (26P) YES-Repair open in the (+) or (-) circuit wire, or
11 (Right-front) No. 13: FRW No.6: FRW short beween the (+) circuit wire and the (- )
(+) (-) circuit wire between the VSA control unit and the
13 (Left-front) No. 15 : FLW No.4:FLW wheel sensor..
(+) (-)
15 (Right-rear) No.8: RRW No. 20 : RRW NO - Replace the wheel sensor.•
(+) (-)
17 (Left-rear) No.6: RLW No. 18: RLW
(+) (-)
VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B 116P)
RLW 1+1 ILT BLU) RRW 1+1 IGRN/YEL)
Q Q
VSACONTROL
UNIT CONNECTOR
CI26PI
FLWI-I
IBRNI FRW I-I IGRN)
RLW I-I IGRY) RRW (-I IBLU/YELI

Is the resistance between 450- 2,000 Q ?
YES-Check for loose VSA control unit connectors.

If necessary, substitute a known-good VSA control
unit, and recheck .•
NO-Go to step 8.
BACK 19-135
Protected by AR
DTC 12, 14, 16, 18: Wheel Sensor (Electrical 3. Measure the resistance between the appropriate
Noise/Intermittent Interruption) wheel sensor (+) and (- ) circuit terminals (see
table).
NOTE: If the ABS indicator comes on for the reasons
described below, the indicator goes off when you OTC Appropriate Terminal_
test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h). (+1 Side (-) .:'It
ConnectorB ConnF.' ,rC
• Only the drive wheels rotated (16P) (2(, _ _
• The vehicle spun 12 (Right-front) No. 13: FRW No.6. FRW
• Electrical noise (+) (-)
14 (Left-front) No. 15: FLW No.4: FLW
1. Visually check for appropriate wheel sensor and (+) (-)
pulser installation (see table). 16 (Right-rear) No. 8: RRW No.20: I
(+) RRW(-)
OTC Appropriate Wheel Sensor 18 (Left-rear) No.6: RLW No. 18: RLW
12 Right-front (+) (-) I
14 Left-front
VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16Pl
16 Right-rear
18 Left-rear RLW (+1 ILT BLUI RRW 1+1 IGRN/VELI
i
Are they installed correctly?
YES-Go to step 2. FRW(+1 FLWI+I

IGRN/BLKI (GRN/BLUI
NO- Reinstall or replace the appropriate wheel
sensor or pulser.•
a a
2. Disconnect VSA control unit connector B (16P) and
connector C (26P).
RLW (-IIGRV) RRW (-I (BLU/VELI
YES- Repair short to another wire between the

appropriate wheel sensor (+) and (-) circuits .•
NO - Go to step 4.
19-136 BACK
Protected by AR
4. Check for continuity between the appropriate DTC 21, 22, 23, 24: Pulser
wheel sensor (+) circuit terminal and other wheel
sensor (+) circuit terminals (see table). 1. Clear the OTC.
DTC Appropriate Other Terminal 2. Test-drive the vehicle at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more.
Terminal
12 No. 13 : No.15 No.8 No.6 Does the ABS indicator come on and are OTCs 21 ,
FRW 22,23, or 24 indicated?
(+)
14 No. 15: No. 13 No.8 No. 6 YES- Go to step 3.
FLW
(+) NO - The system is OK at this time .•
16 No. 8: No.13 No. 15 No.6
RRW 3. Check the appropriate pulser gear for a chipped
(+) tooth (see table).
18 No.6: No. 13 No. 15 No.8
RLW DTC Appropriate Pulser
(+) 21 Right-front
22 Left-front
Is there continuity? 23 Right-rear
24 Left-rear
YES- Repair short to another wire between the
appropriate wheel sensor and the other wheel Is the pulser OK?
sensor.•
YES - Check for loose VSA control unit connectors.
NO-Clear the OTC, and test-drive the vehicle. If If necessary, substitute a known-good VSA control
the ASS indicator comes on and the same OTC is unit, and recheck . •
indicated, check for loose VSA control unit
connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good NO - Replace the driveshaft or the hub unit
VSA control unit, and recheck.• (Chipped pulser gear) .•
BACK 19-137
Protected by AR
DTC 25: Yaw Rate Sensor 8. Measure the voltage between the yaw rate sensor
1. Clear the DTC.
YAW RATE SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)
again.
3. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.

SVCC IlT BlU)
4. Verify the DTC.
)L
Is DTC 27 or 64 indicated?
-=
YES-Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the
DTC .• Wire side of female terminals
NO- Go to step 5.
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 9.
6. Check for continuity between the yaw rate sensor
4P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. NO-Repair open in the wire between the VSA
control unit and the yaw rate sensor.•
10. Disconnect VSA control unit connector C (26P) and

the yaw rate sensor 4P connector.
11 . Check for continuity between the yaw rate sensor

4P connector terminal NO.1 and body ground.
Is there continuity? RDIAGIORN)
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the VSA

control unit and the yaw rate sensor..

between the VSA control unit and the yaw rate
sensor.•
NO-Go to step 12.
19-138 BACK
Protected by AR
12. Start the engine. 16. Connect VSA control unit connector C (26P) and the
yaw rate sensor 4P connector.
13. Measure the voltage between the yaw rate sensor
4P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground. 17. Turn the ignition switch on (II).

18. Measure the voltage between the yaw rate sensor

=
Is there 1 V or more? Wire side of female terminals
YES- Repair short to power between the VSA

control unit and the yaw rate sensor.. Is there about 0 V?
NO-Go to step 14. YES- Replace the yaw rate sensor..
15. Check for continuity between the yaw rate sensor 19. Measure the voltage between VSA control unit
4P connector terminal No.3 and body ground. connector C (26P) terminal No. 19 and body ground.
YAW RATE SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (26P)
RYAW (GRN/WHTI
RDIAG(ORN)
Q
=
=
Is there continuity? Is there about 0 V?
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire YES-Repair open in the wire between the VSA
between the VSA control unit and the yaw rate control unit and the yaw rate sensor..
sensor.•
NO- Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 16.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-139
Protected by AR
20. Measure the voltage between the yaw rate sensor 22. Substitute a known-good yaw rate sensor.
189).
24. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of right and

left hand corners.
Is the DTC 25 indicated?
YES-Check for loose VSA control unit connectors.

If necessary, replace the VSA control unit..
-=
NO-Check for loose yaw rate sensor connectors. If
Wire side of female terminals necessary, replace the yaw rate sensor..
YES-Go to step 21.
NO-Replace the yaw rate sensor.•
21. Measure the voltage between the VSA control unit

connector C (26P) terminal No.5 and body ground.

RYAW (GRN/WHTI
')L
YES-Go to step 22.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the VSA

control unit and the yaw rate sensor..
19-140
BACK
Protected by AR
DTC 26: Lateral Acceleration Sensor 8. Measure the voltage between the lateral
acceleration sensor 3P connector terminal No.1
1. Clear the DTC. and body ground.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II) LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
again.

left hand corners.
4. Verify the DTC.
Is ore 64 indicated? =
YES- Do the appropriate troubleshooting for Terminal side of male terminals
DTC64 .•
NO - Go to step 5. Is there about 5 V?
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. YES-Go to step 9.
6. Check for continuity between the lateral NO- Repair open in the wire between the VSA
acceleration sensor 3P connector terminal NO.3 control unit and the lateral acceleration sensor.•
and body ground.
LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
10. Disconnect VSA control unit connector C (26P) and
the lateral acceleration sensor 3P connector.
12. Measure the voltage between the lateral

and body ground.
=
YES-Go to step 7.

control unit and the lateral acceleration sensor..
=
Is there 1 V or more?

the VSA control unit and the lateral sensor.•
NO-Go to step 13.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-141
Protected by AR
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 18. Measure the voltage between VSA control unit
14. Check for continuity between the lateral
acceleration sensor 3P connector terminal No.2 VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (26PI
and body ground.
GLAT(VELI
.)1.
Terminal side of male terminals Is there about 2.5 V?
YES - Check for loose VSA control unit connectors.

Is there continuity? If necessary. substitute a known-good VSA control
unit. and recheck .•
between the VSA control unit and the lateral NO- Repair open in the wire between the VSA
acceleration sensor .• control unit and the lateral acceleration sensor.•
NO - Go to step 15.
15. Connect VSA control unit connector C (26P) and the

lateral acceleration sensor 3P connector.
16. Do the lateral acceleration sensor inspection (see

page 19-188).
Is it OK?
NO-Replace the lateral acceleration sensor.•
BACK
19-142
Protected by AR
DTC 27: Steering Angle Sensor 6. Disconnect VSA control unit connector C (26P) and
the steering angle sensor 5P connector.
2. Measure the voltage between the steering angle
sensor 5P connector terminal No. 5 and body 8. Measure the voltage between body ground and the
ground. steering angle sensor 5P connector terminals No. 2,
No. 3 and No. 4 individually.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SP CONNECTOR
SVCC ILT BLU)

Is there about 5 V? Is there 1 V or more?
YES-Go to step 3. YES - Repair short to power in the wire between

the VSA control unit and the steering angle
NO- Repair open in the wire between the VSA sensor..
control unit and the steering angle sensor..
NO- Go to step 9.
4. Check for continuity between the steering angle
sensor 5P connector terminal No.1 and body 10. Check for continuity between body ground and the
ground. steering angle sensor 5P connector terminals No.2,
No.3 and No.4 individually.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR SP CONNECTOR
SDIAG (BLU/WHT)

YES- Go to step 5. YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire

between the VSA control unit and the steering
NO- Repair open in the wire between the VSA angle sensor.•
control unit and the steering angle sensor.•
NO-Goto step 11.
(conrd)
BACK
19-143
Protected by AR

1 . Connect VSA control unit connector C (26P). 15. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 16. Connect the steering angle sensor 5P connector.
13. Measure the voltage between body ground and 17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
VSA control unit connector C (26P) terminals No.9
and No. 21 individually. 18. Measure the voltage between the steering angle
sensor 5P connector terminal No. 3 and body
VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (26P) ground.
STRA (RED/VEl)
STRB (VEL/RED)
':i. ':i.

Is there about 5 V?
YES - Go to step 14. Is there about 0 V?
NO-Check for loose VSA control unit connectors. YES-Check for loose connectors, if necessary,
If necessary, substitute a known-good VSA control replace the steering angle sensor .•
NO-Go to step 19.
14. Measure the voltage between body ground and the
steering angle sensor 5P connector terminals No.2
and No. 4 individually.
STRA (RED/VELI STRB (VEL/RED)
':i.
Is there about 5 V?

control unit and the steering angle sensor..
19-144 BACK
Protected by AR
19. Measure the voltage between VSA control unit 20. Measure the voltage between body ground and the
connector C (26P) terminal No. 17 and body ground. steering angle sensor 5P connector terminals No.2
and No.4 individually while turning the steering
VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (26PI wheel slowly.
SO lAG (BLU/WHT)
STRA (RED/VEL) STRB (VEL/RED)
'Y.. 'Y..
=
Wire side of female termi nals

Is there about 0 V?
YES-Repair open in the wire between the VSA Is there 0 V to 5 V repeatedly?

control unit and the steering angle sensor .•
YES - The system is OK at this time. If the problem
NO- Go to step 20. recurs, check for loose VSA control unit connectors.
unit, and recheck.•
NO - Check for loose connectors, if necessary,

replace the steering angle sensor.•
BACK 19-145
Protected by AR

DTC 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38: Solenoid 4. Cneck for continuity between the appropriate VSA
control unit connector A (22P) solenoid circuit
1. Verify the DTC. terminal and body ground (see table).
Is Dre 54 indicated? OTe Appropriate Terminal

31: FR-IN No.4
YES - Do the appropriate troubleshooti ng for 32: FR-OUT No.15
DTC 54 .• 33: FL-IN No. 16
34: FL-OUT No.5
NO-Go to step 2. 35: RR-IN No. 17
36: RR-OUT No.6
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 37: RL-IN No.3
38: RL-OUT
- -- - - ----- - -
No.14
3. Disconnect the modulator unit connector A (1 OP)
and the VSA control unit connector A (22P). VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)
FR-IN FL-OUT
(RED/BLK) (VEL/BLU)
RL-IN RR-OUT
(RED/GRN) (VEL/WHT)
i ,
RL-OUT
(VEL/GRN)
FR-OUT
(VEL/BLK)
1 M·~
(RED/WHTI
FL-IN
(RED/BLU)
-= ~- J;
-
Wire side of female treminals
YES-Repair short to body ground in the

appropriate solenoid circuit wire between the VSA
control unit and the modulator unit..
NO - Go to step 5.
19-146 BACK
Protected by AR
5. Connect modulator unit connector A (10P). 8. Connect the appropriate modulator unit connector
A (10P) solenoid circuit terminal to body ground
6. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA with a jumper wire (see table).
control unit connector A (22P) solenoid circuit
terminal and body ground (see table). DTC ~~~iate Terminal
31: FR-IN No.1
DTC Alm"opriate Terminal 32: FR-OUT No.5
31: FR-IN No.4 33: FL-IN No. 4
32: FR-OUT No.15 34: FL-OUT No.8
33: FL-IN No. 16 35: RR-IN No.3
34: FL-OUT No.5 36: RR-OUT No.7
35: RR-IN No. 17 37: RL-IN No.2
36: RR-OUT No.6 38: RL-OUT No.6
37: RL-IN No.3
38: RL-OUT No. 14 MODULATOR UNIT CONNECTOR A (10PI
Rl-IN RR-IN
VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22PI (RED/GRNI (RED/WHTI
FR-IN Fl-OUT FR-IN Fl-IN
(RED/BlKI (VEl/BLUI (RED/BlKI (RED/BLUI
RR-OUT
(VEl/WHTI

Rl-OUT RR-IN
(VEl/GRNI (RED/WHTI
FR-OUT Fl-IN
(VEl/BlKI (RED/BLUI
.Q
-= -= -= -=
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect modulator unit connector A (10P).
(cont'd)
BACK 19-147
Protected by AR
9. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA 12. Connect the fail-safe relay 4P connector terminal
control unit connector A (22P) solenoid circuit No.2 to body ground with a jumper wire. The wire
terminal and body ground (see table). colors of the fail-safe relay 4P connector are
WHT/GRN. BRN/BLK. BLK. and YEL/GRN.
DTC A~ropriate Terminal
FAIL-SAFE RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
31: FR-IN No.4
32: FR-OUT No. 15
33: FL-IN No. 16
34: FL-OUT No.5 SOLENOID
35: RR-IN No. 17 (BRN/BLK)
36: RR-OUT No.6 r--
37: RL-IN No.3
38: RL-OUT No. 14 JUMPER
WIRE
FR-IN FL-OUT
(RED/BLK) (YEL/BLU)
RL-OUT RR-IN
(YEL/GRN) (RED/WHT)
I
FR-OUT FUN
(YEL/BLK) (RED/BLU)
:a
=
YES-Goto step 10.
NO- Repair open in the appropriate solenoid

circuit wire between the VSA control unit and the
modulator unit. •
10. Remove the jumper wire from modulator unit

connector A (lOP). .
11. Connect modulator unit connector A (lOP).
19-148 BACK
Protected by AR
13. Check the resistance between the appropriate VSA 14. Disconnect modulator unit connector A (10P) and
control unit connector A (22P) terminal and body connector S (8P), and remove the jumper wire from
ground (see table). the fail-safe relay 4P connector.
IN: 8-10 Q (at 20°C, 68°F)
OUT: 3-5 Q (at 20°C, 68°F) 15. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA
control unit connector A (22P) terminal and all
OTC Appropriate Terminal other ASS and VSA solenoid circuit terminals (see
31: FR-IN No.4 table).
32: FR-OUT No.15
33: FL-IN No. 16 OTC Appropriate Terminal
34: FL-OUT No.5 31: FR-IN No.4
35: RR-IN No. 17 32: FR-OUT No.15
36: RR-OUT No.6 33: FL-IN No.16
37: RL-IN No.3 34: FL-OUT No.5
38: RL-OUT No.14 35: RR-IN No.17
36: RR-OUT No.6
VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P) 37: RL-IN No.3
FR-IN FL-OUT 38: RL-OUT No.14
(RED/BLK) (YEL/BLU)
VSA Solenoid Appropriate Terminal
RL-IN RR-OUT
(RED/GRN) (YEL/WHT) FRA No.7
FRO No. 18
FLA No.8
FLO No. 19

RL-OUT RR-IN
(YEL/GRN) (RED/WHT)
FR-OUT FL-IN
(YEL/BLK) (RED/BLU)
.Q
-= -= -= -=
Is the resistance OK? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 14.

NO- Replace the modulator unit.•
YES- Repair short in the appropriate wires
between the VSA control unit and the modulator
unit.•
NO-Go to step 16.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-149
Protected by AR

16. Connect modulator unit connector A (10P) and DTC 41, 42, 43, 44: Wheel Lock
connector B (ap).
1. Check for brake drag.
17. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA
control unit connector A (22P) terminal and all Do the brakes drag?
other ABS and VSA solenoid circuit terminals (see
table) . YES-Repair the brake drag .•
DTC Appropriate Terminal NO - Go to step 2.

31: FR-IN No.4
32: FR-OUT No. 15 2. Check the installation of the appropriate wheel
33: FL-IN No. 16 sensor (see table).
34: FL-OUT No.5
35: RR-IN No. 17 -
DTC ~~iate Wheel Sensor
36: RR-OUT No.6 41 Right-front
37: RL-IN No.3 -
42 Left-front
38: RL-OUT No. 14 43 Right-rear
44 Left-rear
VSA Solenoid Appropriate Terminal
FRA No.7 Is it correct?
FRO No. 18
FLA No.8 YES-Go to step 3.
~LD - - - -
No. 19 _____
NO - Rei nstall the wheel sensor correctly.•
3. Check the modulator using the Honda PGM Tester.
Is kickback felt in the pedal?
YES - The probable cause was the vehicle spun

during cornering. If the problem recurs, check for
loose connectors, or try a known-good VSA control
unit.•
NO-Check for loose modulator unit connectors. If

Wire side of female terminals necessary, replace the modulator unit..
YES-Replace the modulator unit.•
NO-Check for loose VSA control unit connectors.

19-150 BACK
Protected by AR
OTe 45, 46, 47, 48: VSA Solenoid 5. Connect the modulator unit connector B (BP).
1. Verify the DTC. 6. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA
control unit connector A (22P) VSA solenoid circuit
Is DTC 54 or 55 indicated? terminal and body ground (see table).
YES- Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the OTC 6n........ riate Terminal
DTC .• 45: FRA No. 7
46: FRO No.1B
NO - Go to step 2. 47: FLA No.B
48: FLO No.19
3. Disconnect modulator unit connector B (BP) and
VSA control unit connector A (22P). FRA(GRY) FLA (YEL/GRN)
4. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA

control unit connector A (22P) VSA solenoid circuit

45: FRA No.7
46: FRO No.1B
47: FLA No.B
48: FLD No. 19 Wire side of female terminals
VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P) Is there continuity?
YES - Replace the modulator unit .•
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect modulator unit connector B (8P).
YES-Repair short to body ground in the

appropriate VSA solenoid circuit wire between the
VSA control unit and the modulator unit..
NO-Go to step 5.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-151
Protected by AR
B. Connect the appropriate modulator unit connector 9. Check for continuity between the appropriat -:;A
B (BP) VSA solenoid circuit terminal to body ground control unit connector A (22P) VSA solenoic. v '< :.lit
with a jumper wire (see table). terminal and body ground (see table).
,-
OTC Appropriate Terminal OTC Appropriate Terminal
45: FRA No. 6 45: FRA No.7
46: FRO No.5 46: FRO No. 18
47: FLA No. B 47: FLA No.8
48:FLD No.7 48: FLO No. 19

MODULATOR UNIT CONNECTOR B (8P)
FRD(LT~ ~I ~I ;I~I"LA'T:
FLO
IREDI
GRN) =
= =

YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the appropriate VSA solenoid

circuit wire between the VSA control unit and the
modulator unit.•
10. Remove the jumper wire from modulator unit

connector B (8P).
11. Connect modulator unit connector B (8P).
19-152 BACK
Protected by AR
12. Connect the VSA relay 4P connector terminal No.2 15. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA
to body ground with a jumper. The wire colors of control unit connector A (22P) terminal and all
the VSA relay connector are GRN, RED/BLU, GRN/ other VSA solenoid circuit terminals (see table).
YEL, and BRN/BLK.
OTC _Appropriate Terminal
VSA RELAY 4P CONNECTOR 45: FRA No.7
46: FRD No. 18
47:FLA No.8
VSA SOLENOID
(RED/BLU) 48:FLD No. 19
VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOA A (22P)
JUMPER
WIRE

13. Check the resistance between the appropriate VSA Is there continuity?
control unit connector A (22P) terminal and body
ground (see table). YES-Repair short in the appropriate wires
APPLY/DUMP: 3-5 Q (at 20°C, 68 OF) between the VSA control unit and the modulator
unit.•
45: FRA No.7 NO-Go to step 16.
46: FRD No. 18
47: FLA No.8 16. Connect modulator unit connector B (8P).
48:FLD No.19
17. Measure the resistance between the appropriate
VSA control unit connector A (22P) terminal and all
other VSA solenoid circuit terminals (see table).

45: FRA No.1
46: FRD No. 18
47: FLA No.8
= 48:FLD No. 19
Is the resistance OK?
NO- Replace the modulator unit.• Is there less than 3 Q ?
14. Disconnect modulator unit connector B (8P), and YES - Replace the modulator unit.•
remove the jumper wire from the VSA relay 4P
connector. NO-Check for loose VSA control unit connectors.
BACK 19-153
Protected by AR
DTC 51: Motor Lock DTC 52: Motor Stuck OFF
1. Clear the DTC. 1. Check the PUMP MOTOR (40A) fuse in the under-
189). Is the fuse OK?
3. Test-drive the vehicle at 6 mph (10 km/h) or more. YES - Reinstall the fuse, and go to step 4.
Do the ABS and VSA system indicators come on? NO-Replace the fuse, and go to step 2.
YES - Do the appropriate troubleshooting for 2. Remove the ASS pump motor relay.
DTC52 .•
3. Connect the ASS pump motor relay connector + S
NO- The system is OK at this time.• and MOTOR terminals with a jumper wire for a
moment, and check the fuse.
+B \ J MOTOR
TERMINAL '-........./ TERMINAL
JUMPER
WIRE
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Check for a short to body ground in the

NO - Go to step 4.

Is the fuse OK?
YES - Remove the fuse, and go to step 6.
19-154 BACK
Protected by AR
5. Connect the ASS pump motor relay connector + S 8. Check the ASS pump motor relay in the under-
and motor terminals with a jumper wire for a hood ASS fuse/relay box.
moment, and check the MTR CHECK (7.5A) fuse.
Is the relay OK?
ABS PUMP MOTOR RELAY CONNECTOR YES - Go to step 9.
NO- Replace the ASS pump motor relay .•
9. Connect the pump motor relay connector + Sand

MOTOR terminals with a jumper wire for a moment.
MOTOR Does the pump motor operate?

+B TERMINAL
TERMINAL JUMPER
WIRE
NO- Go to step 10.
Is the fuse blown? 10. Disconnect the pump motor 2P connector.
YES - Check for a short to body ground in the MCK 11. Connect the ASS pump motor relay connector +S
circuit.. and MOTOR terminals with a jumper wire.
NO-Remove the MTR CHECK (7.5A) fuse in the 12. Measure the voltage between the pump motor 2P
under-hood ASS fuse/relay box, and go to step 6. connector terminal No.1 and body ground.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). PUMP MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
7. Measure the voltage between under-hood ASS

fuse/relay box connector S (2P) terminal No.2 and
body ground.
UNDER-HOOD ASS FUSE/RELAY BOX

CONNECTOR B (2P)
Wire side of female terminals NO- Repair open in the wire between the under-
hood ASS fuse/relay box and pump motor.•
YES - Go to step 8.

hood ASS fuse/relay box and the VSA control
unit.•
(cont'd)
BACK
19-155
Protected by AR
13. Measure the voltage between the pump motor 2P 17. Disconnect the pLimp motor 2P connector and the
connector terminal No.1 and No.2. VSA control unit connector S (16P).
PUMP MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR 18. Connect the ASS pump motor relay connector +B
and PMR terminals with a jumper wire.

MOTOR (WHT/BLUt;JMOTOR GND (BLK)
1 2
Y. PMR TERMINAL
JUMPER
WIRE
+BTERMINAL

19. Measure the voltage between VSA control unit
NO-Repair open in the wire between the pump connector B (16P) terminal No. 14 and body ground.
14. Remove the fail-safe relay from the ASS relay box.
15. Disconnect under-hood ASS fuse/relay box

connector A (3P).
16. Check for continuity between the fail-safe relay

connector terminal No.2 terminal and under-hood
ASS fuse/relay box connector A (3P) terminal No.1.
FAIL-SAFE RELAY UNDER-HOOD ABS Wire side of female terminals

4P CONNECTOR FUSE/RELA Y BOX
3P CONNECTOR
2
YES-Go to step 20.
'SOLENOID
(BRN/BLK)
hood ASS fuse/relay box and the VSA control
unit..
20. Remove the jumper wire from the ABS pump
motor relay connector.
21. Reconnect VSA control unit connector B (16P), and
YES-Goto step 17. reinstall the fail-safe relay in the ABS relay box.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the fail-safe 22. Start the engine.
relay and the under-hood ASS fuse/relay box.•
19-156 BACK
Protected by AR
23. Measure the voltage between VSA control unit DTC 53: Motor Stuck ON
connector B (16P) terminal No. 14 and body ground.
1. Check that the pump motor operates with the
VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16PI ignition switch OFF.
YES- Replace the ABS pump motor relay .•
NO-Go to step 2.

= hood ABS fuse/relay box.
Wire side of female terminals Is the fuse OK?
YES- Remove the fuse, and go to step 3.

NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck .•
the under-hood ABS fuse/relay box and the VSA 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
control unit.•
4. Measure the voltage between under-hood ABS
NO -If the problem recurs, check for loose VSA fuse/relay box connector B (2P) terminal No.2 and
control unit connectors. If necessary, substitute a body ground.
known-good VSA control unit, and recheck .•
CONNECTOR B (2PI
=
YES-Go to step 5.

hood ABS fuse/relay box and the VSA control
unit..
5. Reinstall the MTR CHECK (7.5A) fuse in the under-

hood ABS fuse/relay box.
6. Disconnect the pump motor 2P connector.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-157
Protected by AR
7. Measure the voltage between the pump motor 2P 10. Remove the ASS pump motor relay, then connect
connector terminal No.1 and body ground. relay + S and MOTOR terminals together with a
jumper wire.
PUMP MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
ABS PUMP MOTOR RELAV CONNECTOR
+B \ J MOTOR
TERMINAL "----" TERMINAL
Wire side of female terminals JUMPER
WIRE
Does the pump motor run?
YES - Go to step 8.
VES-Gotostep 11.
hood ASS fuse/relay box and the pump motor.• NO-Replace the pump motor..
8. Measure the voltage between the pump motor 2P 11. Disconnect VSA control unit connector S (16P).
connector terminal No.1 and No.2.
12. Check for continuity between terminal No. 14 and
PUMP MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR body ground.

MOTOR (WHT/BlUt;JMOTOR GND (BlK)
1 2
'Y PMR (VEL/RED)
n

YES-Go to step 9. Is there continuity?
NO- Repair open in the wire between the pump YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire
motor and body ground (G203) .• between the under-hood ASS fuse/relay box anc
the VSA control unit.•
9. Reconnect the pump motor 2P connector.
NO-Check for loose VSA control unit connect:. .•.
19-158 BACK
Protected by AR
DTC 54: Fail-safe Relay 4. Measure the voltage between the fail -safe relay 4P
1. Check the ABS + B (20A) fuse in the under-hood
ABS fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.
Is the fuse OK?

+8 (WHT IGRN)
YES-Go to step 2.
NO- Replace the fuse, and recheck.•
2. Reinstall the fuse, and turn the ignition switch ON

(II).
Does the fuse blow?

between the fail-safe relay, pump motor relay, VSA Is there battery voltage?
relay, sub-throttle motor relay, and modulator
unit.. YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Go to step 3. NO - Repair open in the wire between the under-

hood fuse/relay box and the fail-safe relay.•
3. Check the fail-safe relay in the under-hood ABS
fuse/relay box. The wire colors of the fail-safe relay 5. Connect the fail-safe relay 4P connector terminal
4P connector are WHT/GRN, BRN/BlK, BlK, and No.1 to No.2 with a jumper wire.
YELJGRN.
Is the relay OK?
YES - With the fail-safe relay removed, and go to

step 4.
JUMPER WIRE
NO- Replace the fail-safe relay .•
6. Disconnect modulator unit connector A (10P).
(cont'd)
BACK 19-159
Protected by AR
7. Measure the voltage between body ground and 10. Disconnect VSA control unit connector C (26P).
terminals No.9 and No. 10 individually.
MODULATOR UNIT CONNECTOR A (10PI
12. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 15 and
body ground.
VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (26PI
YES-Go to step 8. Wire side of female terminals
NO-Repair open in the wire between the fail-safe Is there battery voltage?
relay and the modulator unit.•
8. Remove the jumper wire from the fail-safe relay the VSA control unit and the fail -safe relay .•
connector.
NO - Go to step 13.
9. Measure the voltage between body ground and
modulator unit connector A (10P) terminals No.9 13. Check for continuity between VSA control unit
and No. 10 individually. connector C (26P) terminal No. 15 and body ground.
MODULIl.TOR UNIT CONNECTOR A (10PI VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (26PI
=
=
YES-Repair short to power in the wire between YES- Repair short to body ground in the wire
the ABS pump motor relay, fail-safe relay, VSA between the VSA control unit and the fail-safe
relay, sub-throttle motor relay, and modulator unit. relay .•
• NO-Gotostep 14.
NO-Go to step 10.
19-160 BACK
Protected by AR
14. Check for continuity between the fail-safe relay 4P 16. Check for continuity between VSA control unit
connector terminal No.3 and body ground. connector C (26P) terminal No. 15 and body ground.
FAil-SAFE RELAY 4P CONNECTOR VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (26P)
= =
YES-Go to step 15. YES-If the problem recurs, check for loose VSA
control unit connectors. If necessary, substitute a
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the known-good VSA control unit, and recheck.•
fail-safe relay and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G202 .• NO-Repair open in the wire between the VSA
control unit and the fail-safe relay .•
15. Connect the fail-safe relay 4P connector terminals
FAil-SAFE RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
GND (BlK) FSR (GRN/YELI
JUMPER WIRE
BACK 19-161
Protected by AR
DTC 55: VSA Relay 6. Measure the voltage between the VSA relay 4P
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)
again. VSA RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
2. Verify the DTC.

+B(GRNI
r----
Is OTe 54 indicated?
YES - Do the appropriate troubleshooting for

DTC 54.•
NO-Goto step 3.
=
3. Check the VSA F/S (20A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box. Wire side of female terminals
Is the fuse blown? Is the.re battery voltage?
YES-Check for a short to body ground in the wire YES-Go to step 7.

between the under-hood fuse/relay box and the
VSA relay, or the VSA relay and modulator unit. If it NO- Repair open in the wire between the under-
is OK, replace the fuse, and recheck.• hood fuse/relay box and the VSA relay .•
NO - Go to step 4. 7. Connect the VSA relay 4P connector terminals

4. Check the VSA relay in the ABS relay box.
VSA RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO- Replace the VSA relay .•

JUMPER WIRE ~(GRNI
VSA SOLENOI 2
5. Remove the VSA relay. (RED/BLUI 3 4
8. Disconnect modulator unit connector B (8P).
19-162 BACK
Protected by AR
9. Measure the voltage between body ground and 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
modulator unit connector B (8P) terminals No.1,
No.2, No.3, and No.4 individually. 14. Disconnect VSA control unit connector A (22P).
MODULATOR UNIT CONNECTOR B (BP) 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
FRA+ FLD+
(RED/BLU) (RED/BLU) 16. Measure the voltage between body ground and
FLA+ VSA control unit connector A (22P) terminals No.7,
;....-+m::::r:w.rI;.;.R_EDIBLU) No.8, No. 18, and No. 19 individually.
4
FRA (GRY) FLA (YEL/GRN)
r-------------~
NO-Repair open in the wire between the VSA Wire side of female terminals
relay and the modulator unit.•
10. Remove the jumper wire from the VSA relay 4P
connector. YES- Repair short to power in the wire between
the VSA control unit and the modulator unit..
NO-Go to step 17.
12. Measure the voltage between the VSA relay 4P
connector terminal No.2 and body ground. 17. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
VSA RELAY 4P CONNECTOR 18. Connect the fail-safe relay 4P connector terminals
+B IWHT/GRN)

SO<Ei'D
IBRN/BLK)
I! ~ !I
Is there battery voltage? Wire side of female terminals

the VSA relay and the VSA control unit.•
NO-Go to step 13.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-163
Protected by AR
19. Measure the voltage between the VSA relay 4P DTC 61, 62: Ignition Voltage
1. Clear the OTC.
VSA RELAV 4P CONNECTOR
2. Test-drive the vehicle at 6 mph (10 km/h) or more.
Does the ASS indicator come on?
YES-Go to step 3.
3. Verify the OTC.
Wire side of female terminals Is DTC 61 or 62 indicated?
YES-Check the charging system .•

NO - ~o the appropriate troubleshooting for the
YES-Go to step 20. OTC.•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the fail-safe

relay and the VSA relay .•
20. Install the VSA relay.

VSAR (GRN/VEl)
':i.
YES-The system is OK atthis time. If the problem

recurs, check for loose VSA control unit connectors.

control unit and the VSA relay .•
19-164 BACK
Protected by AR
DTC 64: Sensor Power Source 4. Check for continuity between VSA control unit
connector B (16P) terminal No.7 and body ground.
1. Disconnect VSA control unit connector B (16P),
steering angle sensor 5P connector, yaw rate
sensor 4P connector, lateral acceleration sensor 3P
connector, and VSA-TCS control valve sensor 3P SVCC (LT BLU)
connector.

connector B (16P) terminal No.7 and body ground. Q

=
SVCC (LT BLU)

between the VSA control unit, steering angle
sensor, yaw rate sensor, lateral acceleration sensor,
and VSA-TCS control valve sensor.•
=
Wire side of female terminals NO-Go to step 5.
Is there about 1 V or more?

the VSA control unit, steering angle sensor, yaw
rate sensor, lateral acceleration sensor, and VSA-
TCS control valve sensor .•
NO-Go to step 4.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-165
Protected by AR
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Connect VSA control unit connector B (16P). 11. Check for continuity between the lateral
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). and body ground.
8. Measure the voltage between VSA control unit LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
connector B (16P) terminal No.7 and body ground.

SVCC ILT BLU)
i I
'Y. Terminal side of male terminals
YES- The system is OK atthis time. If the problem

Is there about 5 V? recurs, check for loose VSA control unit connectors.
YES-Go to step 9. unit, and recheck .•
NO-Check for loose VSA control unit connectors. NO-Repair open in the wire between the VSA
If necessary, substitute a known-good VSA control control unit and the lateral acceleration sensor.•
9. Measure the voltage between the lateral

and body ground.
-=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 10.

control unit and the lateral acceleration sensor.•
19-166 BACK
Protected by AR
OTC 71: Different Diameter Tire OTC 72: Modulator Unit

1. Clear the DTC. 1. Clear the DTC.
2. Test-drive the vehicle. 2. Test-drive the vehicle at 18 mph (30 km/h) or more.
Does the ABS or VSA system indicator come on Does the VSA system indicator come on and is
and is DTC 71 indicated? DTC 72 indicated?
YES- Make sure all four tires are the specified YES - Replace the modulator unit.•
size and properly inflated .•
NO-The system is OK atthis time .•
time .•
BACK
19-167
Protected by AR
DTC 81: VSA Control Unit DTC 83: PGM-FI Communication
1. Check for other DTCs. NOTE: If the VSA indicator and MIL are both ON,
troubleshoot the PGM-FI system or automatic
Are there any other orcs indicated? transmission system first.
YES - Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the 1. Disconnect the VSA control unit connector C (26P)
DTC.• and PCM connector A (32P).
NO-Go to step 2. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC. 3. Measure the voltage between body ground and
VSA control unit connector C (26P) terminals No. 10
3. Test-drive the vehicle. and No. 22 individually.
Does the ABS indicator come on and is orc 81 VSA CONTROL UNrr CONNECTOR c (26P)
indicated?
,SEAF (RED/GRN)
YES-Replace the VSA control unit .•

time .•
':L
"::' "::'
/s there voltage?

the VSA control unit and the PCM .•
NO - Go to step 4.

connector C (26P) terminal No. 11 and body ground.
VSA CONTROL UNrr CONNECTOR C (26P)
NEP(BLU)
':L
"::'
/s there voltage?

the VSA control unit and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 5.
19-168 BACK
Protected by AR
5. Check for continuity between body ground and 7. Check for continuity between VSA control unit
VSA control unit connector C (26P) terminals No. 10 connector C (26P) terminal No. 10 and PCM
and No. 22 individually. connector A (32P) terminal No. 22.

VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (Z6P)
SEAF (RED/GRN)
SEFA (PNK)
Q Q
= =

between the VSA control unit and the PCM .• YES - Go to step 8.
NO - Go to step 6. NO- Repair open in the wire between the VSA

control unit and the PCM .•
6. Check for continuity between VSA control unit
connector C (26P) terminal No. 11 and body ground. 8. Check for continuity between VSA control unit
connector C (26P) terminal No. 22 and PCM
connector A (32P) terminal No. 7.
NEP (BLU) VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (Z6P)
Q PCM CONNECTOR A (32P)
= 8 9 10
24
28293031 32
between the VSA control unit and the PCM .• Is there continuity?
NO-Goto step 7. YES - Go to step 9.

(cont'd)
BACK 19-169
Protected by AR
9. Check for continuity between VSA control unit DTC 84: Neutral Position
connector C (26P) terminal No. 11 and PCM
connector A (32P) terminal No. 19. 1. Clear the OTC.
PCM CONNECTOR A (32PI 2. Do the neutral position memorization (see page 19-
189).
3. Test-drive the vehicle at 24 mph (40 km/h)-36 mph

(60 km/h) without wheel spin for 2-3 minutes.
Is the VSA activation indicator on or blinking?
YES - Go to step 4.
4. Verify the OTC.

Is DTC 25,26, or 27 indicated?
YES - Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the
YES-Go to step 10. OTC, and recheck .•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the VSA NO-Go to step 5.

5. Substitute a known-good lateral acceleration
10. Check for loose connectors at the PCM and the VSA sensor.
control unit. If necessary, substitute a known-good
VSA control unit, and recheck. 6. Do the neutral position memorization (see page 19-
189).
11. Connect all of the disconnected connectors.
7. Test-drive the vehicle at 24 mph (40 km/h)-36 mph
12. Do the neutral position memorization (see page 19- (60 km/h) without wheel spin for 2-3 minutes.
189).
Is the VSA activation indicator blinking?
left hand corners. YES - Go to step 8.
14. Verify the OTC. NO-Replace the lateral acceleration sensor.•
Is DTC 83 indicated? 8. Substitute a known-good steering angle sensor.
YES - Check for loose PCM connectors. If 9. Test-drive the vehicle at 24 mph (40 km/h)-36 mph
necessary, substitute a known-good PCM, and (60 km/h) without wheel spin for 2-3 minutes.
recheck .•
Is the VSA activation indicator blinking?
NO - Replace the VSA control unit.•
YES-Replace the yaw rate sensor.•
NO - Replace the steering angle sensor.•
19-170 BACK
Protected by AR
DTC 93: Throttle Position Sensor DTC 94: VSA-TCS Control Valve Sensor
NOTE: If the VSA system indicator and MIL are both ON, NOTE: Ifthe VSA system indicator and MIL are both ON,
troubleshoot the PGM-FI system first. troubleshoot the PGM-FI system first.
1. Clear the DTC. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Start the engine. 2. Measure the voltage between the VSA-TCS control
valve sensor 3P connector terminal No.1 and body
3. Watch the MIL. ground.
Does the MIL stay on? VSA-TCS CONTROL VALVE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
YES- Troubleshoot the PGM-FI system .•
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Verify the DTC.
Is OTC 93 indicated?
YES- Go to step 5. Wire side of female terminals
NO-The system is OK at this time .•

Is there about 5 V?
5. Substitute a known-good VSA control unit.
YES - Go to step 3.
189). NO- Repair open in the wire between the VSA
control unit and the VSA-TCS control valve
7. Start the engine. sensor.•
8. Watch the VSA system indicator. 3. Measure the voltage between the VSA-TCS control
valve sensor connector terminals No. 1 and No.3.
Does the VSA system indicator stay on?
VSA-TCS CONTROL VALVE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 9.
NO - Replace the VSA control unit.•

SVCC (LT B L t : JSG
) (LT GRN)
1 2 3
9. Verify the DTC.
Is OTC 93 indicated?
'Y
YES-Replace the PCM .•

NO - Troubleshoot the DTC indicated .•
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 4.

sensor.•
(cont'd)
BACK
19-171
Protected by AR
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Connect battery power to the VSA-TCS control
valve actuator 2P connector terminal No.1 and
5. Disconnect VSA control unit connector A (22P). ground connector terminal No.2 for 1 second.
NOTE:
6. Check for continuity between the VSA-TCS control • Be careful not to short the terminals.
valve sensor 3P connector terminal No.2 and body • After checking, disconnect the terminals.
ground.
VSA·TCS CONTROL VALVE ACTUATOR 2P CONNECTOR
VSA·TCS CONTROL VALVE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

MI+J M(-j
{GRY/WHn IBLU/YELJ
BATTERY
Wire side of female terminals 11. Measure the voltage between the VSA control unit
connector A (22P) terminal No.2 and body ground.
NOTE:
Is there continuity? VSA-TCS control valve is fully closed: about 0.5 V
VSA-TCS control valve is fully open: about 1...5 V
VES - Repair short to body ground in the wire There should be a smooth transition from about
between the VSA control unit and the VSA-TCS 4.5 V to 0.5 Vas the VSA-TCS control valve IS
control valve sensor.• closed.
NO-Go to step 7. VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P)

TH2 (GRV)
7. Disconnect the VSA-TCS control valve actuator 2P
connector.
8. Connect the VSA control unit connector A (22P) and

VSA-TCS control valve sensor 3P connector.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) .

Y..
Is the voltage within specification?
VES- The system is OK atthis time. Ifthe problem

recurs, check for loose VSA control unit connectors.
NO - Check for an open in the wire between the

VSA control unit and the VSA-TCS control valve
sensor. If the wire is OK, replace the VSA-TCS
control valve assembly (faulty VSA-TCS control
valve sensor), and recheck .•
19-172 BACK
Protected by AR
DTC 97: VSA-TCS Control Valve Actuator 3. Measure the voltage between the sub-throttle
motor relay 4P connector terminal No.1 and body
1. Check the VSA TH MOTOR (20A) fuse in the under- ground.
hood fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.
SUB-THROTILE MOTOR RELAV 4P CONNECTOR
Is the fuse OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO- Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse is

blown, check for a short to body ground in the
wires between the under-hood fuse/relay box and
the sub-throttle motor relay, and between the sub-
sthrottle motor relay and VSA control unit .• =
2. Check the sub-throttle motor relay, and leave the Wire side of female terminals
relay removed if it is OK.
Is the relay OK? Is there battery voltage?
YES- Go to step 3. YES- Go to step 4.
NO- Replace the relay, and recheck .• NO- Repair open in the wire between the under-
hood fuse/relay box and the sub-throttle motor
relay .•
5. Measure the voltage between the sub-throttle

motor relay 4P connector terminal No.4 and body
ground.
SUB-THROTILE MOTOR RELAV 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 6.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the fail-safe

relay and the sub-throttle motor relay.•
(cont'd)
BACK
19-173
Protected by AR
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Check for continuity between VSA control unit
connector B (16P) terminal No. 12 and sub-throttle
7. Disconnect VSA control unit connector A (22P). motor relay 4P connector terminal No.3.
8. Connect the sub-throttle motor relay 4P connector
terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire.
SUB-THROTTLE MOTOR RELA V 4P CONNECTOR
SUB-THROTTLE MOTOR
RELAV4PCONNECTOR
JUMPER WIRE

9. Measure the voltage between VSA control unit YES-Go to step 12.
VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22P) control unit and the sub-throttle motor relay .•

MG(BLK)
n
YES-Gotostep 10. Wire side of female terminals

control unit and the sub-throttle motor relay .• Is there continuity?
10. Disconnect VSA control unit connector B (16P), and YES- Go to step 13.
remove the jumper wire from the sub-throttle
motor relay 4P connector. NO-Repair open in the wire between the VSA
control unit c',d body ground .•
13. Disconnect the VSA-TCS control valve actuator 2P

connector.
19-174 BACK
Protected by AR
14. Check for continuity between body ground and the 18. Check for continuity between VSA control unit
VSA control unit connector A (22P) terminals No. 11 connector A (22P) terminal No. 11 and VSA-TCS
and No. 21 individually. control valve actuator 2P connector terminal No.1.
VSA-TCS CONTROL VALVE ACTUATOR 2P CONNECTOR
M (+) (GRV/WHT)
M(+)
(GRV/WHT)
M(-) VSA CONTROL UNIT

(BLU/VEL) CONNECTOR A (22P)
Q Q

YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire YES-Go to step 19.

between the VSA control unit and the VSA-TCS
control valve actuator.. NO- Repair open in the wire between the VSA
NO-Gotostep 15. actuator .•
15. Reconnect VSA control unit connector A (22P) and 19. Check for continuity between VSA control unit
connector B (16P). connector A (22P) terminal No. 21 and VSA-TCS
control valve actuator 2P connector terminal No.2.
SLD(BLK) VSA-TCS CONTROL VALVE

ACTUATOR2PCONNECTOR
Q 1 2·1----'

Is there continuity? YES-Go to step 20.
YES - Go to step 17. NO- Repair open in the wire between the VSA
NO-Replace the VSA control unit, and recheck .• actuator.•
17. Disconnect VSA control unit connector A (22P) and

connector B (16P).
(cont'd)
BACK 19-175
Protected by AR
20. Check for continuity between the VSA-TCS control 22. Connect battery power to the TCS control valve
valve actuator 2P connector (actuator side) terminal actuator 2P connector terminal No.1, and ground
No.1 and body ground. connector terminal No.2 for 1 second.
NOTE:
VSA-TCS CONTROL VALVE ACTUATOR 2P CONNECTOR • Be careful not to short the terminals.
• After checking, disconnect the terminals.
:a
':'
BATTERY
.--
Is there continuity? Terminal side of male terminals
YES-Replace the VSA-TCS control valve

assembly.• Does the TCS control valve operate smoothly?
NO-Go to step 21. YES-Check for loose VSA control unit connectors.
21. Measure the resistance between the VSA-TCS unit, and recheck .•
control valve actuator 2P connector (actuator side)
terminals No.1 and No.2. NO- Replace the TCS control valve assembly .•
M
1+[!jM1-' 1 2
Is there 1.1 t02.0 Q ?
NO- Replace the VSA-TCS control valve

assembly .•
19-176 BACK
Protected by AR
OlC 101: Barometric Pressure Sensor OTC 111 : Sub-Throttle Motor Relay
NOTE: If the VSA system indicator and the MIL are both 1. Check the VSA TH MOTOR (20A) fuse in the under-
ON, troubleshoot the PGM-FI system first. hood fuse/relay box.
1. Verify the OTC. Is the fuse OK?
Is any oTC except oTC 101 indicated? YES - Install the fuse, and go to step 2.
YES-Do the appropriate troubleshooting for the NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck.lfthe fuse is
OTC .• blown, check for a short to body ground in the
wires between the under-hood fuse/relay box and
NO - Go to step 2. the sub-throttle motor relay, and between the sub-
throttle motor relay and the VSA control unit.•
2. Clear the OTC.
2. Check the sub-throttle motor relay.
3. Substitute a known-good VSA control unit.
Is the relay OK?
4. Do the neutral position memorizing (see page 19-
189). YES - With the relay removed, go to step 3.
5. Test-drive the vehicle . NO - Replace the relay, and recheck .•
Does the VSA system indicator come on and is

oTC 101 indicated?
YES-Replace the PCM .•
NO - Replace the VSA control unit .•
(cont'd)
BACK 19-177
Protected by AR

3. Measure the voltage between the sub-throttle 8. Check for continuity between VSA control unit
motor relay 4P connector terminal No.1 and body connector A (22P) terminal No.1 0 and sub throttle
ground. motor relay 4P connector terminal No.2.
SUB-THROTTLE MOTOR RELAY 4P CONNECTOR

SUB-THROTTLE MOTOR RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
'::L VSA CONTROL UNIT

CONNECTOR A I22P)
-=
YES - Go to step 4. Is there continuity?
NO- Repair open in the wire between the under- YES-Go to step 9.
hood fuse/relay box and the sub-throttle motor
relay .• NO- Repair open in the wire between the VSA
control unit and the sub-throttle motor relay .•
9. Disconnect VSA control unit connector B (16P).
5. Measure the voltage between the sub-throttle
motor relay 4P connector terminal No.4 and body 10. Check for continuity between VSA control unit
ground. connector B (16P) terminal No. 12 and sub-throttle
motor relay 4P connector terminal No.3.
SUB-THROTTLE MOTOR RELAY 4P CONNECTOR VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)
SUB-THROTTLE MOTOR
RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
YES - Go to step 6. Is there continuity?
NO- Repair open in V-,e wire between the fail-safe YES-Goto step 11.
relay and the sub-throttle motor relay .•
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. control unit and the sub-throttle motor relay .•
7. Disconnect VSA control unit connector A (22P).
19-178 BACK
Protected by AR
ABS Indicator Circuit

Troubleshooting
, 1. Check for continuity between VSA control unit
ABS indicator does not come on
VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16PI
,. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the ABS
indicator.
YES - The system is OK at this time .•
NO-Go to step 2.
= 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)
Wire side of female terminals again.

YES-Go to step 3.
between the VSA control unit and the sub throttle NO- Repair open in the indicator power source
motor relay . • circuit.•
• Blown BACK UP LIGHT (7.5A) fuse.
NO-Go to step 12. • Open in the wire between the BACK UP LIGHT
(7.5A) fuse and gauge assembly.
12. Install the sub-throttle motor relay. • Open circuit inside the fuse box.
• Faulty printed circuit board in the gauge
13. Connect all of disconnected connectors. assembly.
14. Do the neutral position memorization (see page 19- 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
189).
4. Disconnect VSA control unit connector A (22P).
Does the VSA system indicator come on and is
ore 111 indicated? Does the ABS indicator come on?
YES-Check for loose VSA control unit connectors. YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA control
If necessary, substitute a known-good VSA control unit connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-
unit, and recheck .• good VSA control unit, and recheck .•
NO-The system is OK atthis time .• NO - Go to step 6.
6. Check the ABS indicator bulb in the gauge

assembly.
Is the bulb OK?
YES- Go to step 7.
NO - Replace the ABS indicator bulb . •

8. Remove the gauge assembly.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-179
Protected by AR
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)

9. Disconnect gauge assembly connector B (18P). ABS indicator does not go off
10. Check for continuity between gauge assembly ,. Check the ECU (15A) fuse in the driver's under-dash
connector B (18P) terminal No. 16 and body ground. fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR B (18P) Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse is

ABS (BLU/WHT) blown, check for a short to body ground in this fuse
circuit. If the circuit is OK, check for loose VSA
=
Wire side of female terminals 2. Disconnect VSA control unit connector C (26P).

4. Measure the voltage between the VSA control unit
YES - Repair short to body ground in the wire connector C (26P) terminal No.1 and body ground.
between the gauge assembly and the VSA control
unit.• VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (26PI
NO-Gotostep 11.
11. Connect gauge assembly connector B (18P), and

disconnect gauge assembly connector C (14P).
12. Check for continuity between gauge assembly

GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR C (14P)
':i.
Wi re side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 5.

control unit and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box .•
YES-Check for loose terminals in the gauge

assembly connectors. If the connectors are OK,
replace the printed circuit board in the gauge
assembly.•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the gauge

assembly and body ground (G501) .•
19-180 BACK
Protected by AR
6. Check for continuity between VSA control unit 9. Connect gauge assembly connector 8 (18P)
connector C (26P) terminal No. 14 and body ground. terminal No. 16 and body ground with a jumper
wire.
GAUGE ASSEMBLV CONNECTOR B (18PI
ABS (BLU/WHTI
JUMPER
WIRE
=
=
YES-Go to step 7.
YES- Repair open in the wire between the VSA
NO-Repair open in the wire between the VSA control unit and the gauge assembly.•
control unit and body ground (G402) .•
NO - Check for loose terminals in gauge assembly
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). connector 8 (18P). Ifthe connector is OK, replace
the printed circuit board in the gauge assembly.•
8. Connect VSA control unit connector A (22P)
terminal No. 9 and body ground with a jumper wire.
VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (22PI

ABS (BLU/WHTJ
JUMPER
WIRE
=
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA control

unit connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-
good VSA control unit, and recheck .•
NO-Gotostep9.
BACK 19-181
Protected by AR
VSA System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
VSA system indicator does not come on 10. Check for continuity between gauge assembly
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the VSA
system indicator. GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR A (30P)
Does the VSA system indicator come on?
YES-The system is OK at this time .•

VSA(ORN)
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II) :a

again.
Does the brake system indicator come on? Wire side of female terminals
YES- Go to step 3.
NO-Repair open in the indicator power source
circuit .• YES- Repair short to body ground in the wire
o Blown BACK UP LIGHT (7.5A) fuse. between the gauge assembly and the VSA control
o Open in the wire between the BACK UP LIGHT unit..
o Open circuit inside the fuse box. NO-Go to step 11.
o Open on the printed circuit board in the gauge
assembly. 11. Connect gauge assembly connector A (30P), and

disconnect gauge assembly connector C (14P).
12. Check for continuity between gauge assembly
4. Disconnect VSA control unit connector B (16P). connector C (14P) terminal No. 10 and body ground.
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR C (14P)
Does the VSA system indicator come on?
YES - Check for loose terminals in the VSA control

NO-Go to step 6.
6. Check the VSA system indicator bulb in the gauge

-=
assembly.
Is the bulb OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
YES - Check for loose terminals in the gauge
NO- Replace the VSA system indicator bulb.• assembly connectors. If the connectors are OK,
replace the printed circuit board in the gauge
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. assembly.•
8. Remove the gauge assembly. NO-Repair open in the wire between the gauge
assembly and body ground (G501) .•
9. Disconnect gauge assembly connector A (30P).
19-182 BACK
Protected by AR
VSA system indicator does not go off 6. Check for continuity between VSA control unit
connector C (26P) terminal No.1 4 and body ground.
1. Check the ECU (15A) fuse in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
GND1 (BLK)
NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse is
blown, check for a short to body ground in this fuse
circuit. Ifthe circuit is OK, check for loose VSA Q
2. Disconnect VSA control unit connector C (26P).
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is there continuity?
4. Measure the voltage between VSA control unit YES-Go to step 7.

control unit and body groud (G402) .•
8. Connect VSA control unit connector B (16P)

terminal No.1 and body ground with a jumper wire.
JUMPER
Is there battery voltage? WIRE
YES - Go to step 5.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the VSA Wire side of female terminals
control unit and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box .•
Does the VSA system indicator go off?
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA control
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
BACK 19-183
Protected by AR
VSA System Indicator Circuit VSA Activation Indicator Circuit

Troubleshooting (cont'd) Troubleshooting
9. Connect gauge assembly connector A (30P) VSA activation indicator does not come on
terminal No. 20 and body ground with a jumper
wire. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the VSA
activation indicator.
GAUGE ASSEMBLV CONNECTOR A (30P)
Does the VSA activation indicator come on?
YES- The system is OK at this time .•
V5A(ORN) NO-Go to step 2.
JUMPER 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)

WIRE again.

YES - Go to step 3.
Does the VSA system indicator go off? NO-Repair open in the indicator power source
circuit.•
YES-Repair open in the wire between the VSA • Blown BACK UP LIGHT (7.5A) fuse.
control unit and the gauge assembly .• • Open in the wire between the BACK UP LIGHT
NO-Check for loose terminals in gauge assembly • Open circuit inside the fuse box.
connector A (30P). If the connector is OK, replace • Open on the printed circuit board in the gauge
the printed circuit board in the gauge assembly.• assembly.
3. Check the VSA activation indicator bulb in the

gauge assembly.
Is the bulb OK?
YES - Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the VSA activation indicator bulb .•
BACK
19-184
Protected by AR
4. Connect gauge assembly connector B (18P) 8. Connect VSA control unit connector C (26P)
terminal No. 15 and body ground with a jumper terminal No. 14 and body ground with a jumper
wire. wire.
GAUGE ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR B (18PI VSA CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR C (26P)
ACT (YEL/BLUI GND1 (BLK)
JUMPER JUMPER
WIRE WIRE
=
Does the VSA activation indicator come on? Does the VSA activation indicator come on?
YES - Go to step 5. YES-Repair open in the wire between the VSA

control unit and body ground (G402) .•
NO- Replace the printed circuit board in the gauge
assembly .• NO-Check for loose VSA control unit connectors.
5. Remove the jumper wire from gauge assembly unit, and recheck .•
connector B (18P).
6. Connect VSA control unit connector C (26P)

terminal No.8 and body ground with a jumper wire.
ACT (YEL/BLU)
JUMPER
WIRE
Does the VSA activation indicator come on?
YES-Go to step 7.

control unit and the gauge assembly.•
7. Remove the jumper wire from VSA control unit

connector C (26P).
(cont'd)
BACK
19-185
Protected by AR
VSA Activation Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
VSA activation indicator does not go off

189).
Does the VSA activation indicator go off?
YES- The system is OK atthis time . •
NO - Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect VSA control unit connector C (26P).
Does the VSA activation indicator go off?
YES - Replace the VSA control unit.•
NO - Repair short to body ground in the wire

between the VSA control unit and the gauge
assembly. If the wire is OK, replace the gauge
assembly printed circuit board .•
19-186 BACK
Protected by AR
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement
NOTE: Do not damage or drop the steering angle sensor as it is sensitive.
1. Remove the combination light switch.
2. Remove the circlip and screws, then remove the steering angle sensor from the combination switch.
STEERING
ANGLE SENSOR
JOINT
LOWER COVER
3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: Do not apply any grease or oil to the steering angle sensor.
BACK
19-187
Protected by AR
Yaw Rate Sensor Replacement Lateral Acceleration Sensor

Inspection
NOTE:
• Do not damage or drop the sensor as it is sensitive .
• Do not use an impact wrench. NOTE:
• Do not damage or drop the sensor as it is sensitive.
1. Remove the seat-back. • Do not use an impact wrench.
• For an acurate reading, the vehicle must be level.
2. Remove the yaw rate sensor (A).
1. Remove the center console panel.
A
2. Remove the lateral acceleration sensor (A) from the
left lower side with the connector connected.
t '-
3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. 9.8N·m

(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ftl
189).
19-188 BACK
Protected by AR
Neutral Position Memorization
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: To ensure accuracy, the vehicle must be level.
4. Measure the voltage between the lateral 1. Clear the DTC.

and body ground. 2. Short the Service Check Signal circuit (see page 19-
• When the connector side is level, the voltage is 110).
about 2.5 V.
• When the connector side is facing up, the voltage 3. Release the parking brake.
is about 3.5 V.
• When the connector side is facing down, the 4. Press the brake pedal, and hold it.
voltage is about 1.5 V.
6. After the ABS indicator goes off, apply the parking
brake, release the parking brake, and apply it again.
7. The VSA activation indicator blinks twice in 2

seconds, and the indicator goes off. If the indicator
does not go off, repeat from step 1.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then remove the

= Honda PGM Tester from the data link connector.
5. If the voltage is not as specified, replace the lateral

acceleration sensor.
6. After replacing the lateral acceleration sensor, do

the neutral position memorization (see page 19-
189).
BACK
19-189
Protected by AR
VSA-TCS Control \ ·· lve Assembly Replacement
NOTE: Be careful not to dama~e the TeS control valve when handling the TeS control valve assembly.
1. Remove the battery.
2. Remove the intake air duct (A).
j/-?)
.~
,,/
/A
3. Disconnect the TeS control valve sensor 3P connector (A) and TeS control valve actuator 2P connector (e), then
remove the TeS control valve assembly.
/.m. ,.,bf·ft,
8mmNUT
22N·m
4. Install the TeS control valve assembly in the reverse order of removal.
19-190 BACK
Protected by AR
Modulator Unit Removal and Installation
NOTE:
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
• Take care not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation.
• To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent
material.
Removal
1. Disconnect modulator unit connector A (10P), connector B (8P) and the pump motor 2P connector (e).
6mmNUT
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
2. Disconnect the six brake lines (D), then remove the modulator unit.
Installation
1. Install the modulator unit in the reverse order of removal.
2. Bleed the brake system, starting with the front wheels.
3. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator and VSA system indicator go off.
4. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator and VSA system indicator do not come on.
BACK
19-191
Protected by AR
VSA Modulator Fluid Replacement
1. Clean the area around of the modulator unit 8. Operate the pump motor by driving the vehicle at
6 mph (10 km/h) or more.
2. Remove the reservoir cap (A), diaphragm plate (B),
filter (C), and diaphragm (D). 9. Repeat steps 1 through 8.
5mmBOLT 10. Test-drive the vehicle at 18 mph (30 km/h) or more

4 N·m (0.4 kgf.m. 3 Ibf·ft)
for the few seconds, and check that the ABS
/ indicator and VSA system indicator do not come on.
11. Tighten the VSA reservoir cap bolts to the specified

torque.
3. Clean the filter.
4. Remove the brake fluid from the VSA reservoir.
NOTE: Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may

damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint,
wash it off immediately with water.
5. Install the filter.
6. Fill the VSA reservoir with brake fluid until it

reaches the upper line of the filter.
7. Install the diaphragm, diaphragm plate, and

reservoir cap, then hand-tighten the bolts.
BACK
19-192
Protected by AR
VSA Off Switch Test
1. Remove the cruise controlNSA off switch (AI from 2. Check for continuity between terminal No.5 and
the switch panel. No.6. There should be continuity when the VSA off
switch is pushed.
CRUISE CONTROl/TCS SWITCH CONNECTOR
4
IG2
(BlK/YELI

A
BACK 19-193
Protected by AR
VSA Control Unit Replacement Wheel Sensor Inspection
1. Remove the passenger's kick panel. 1. Inspect the front and rear pulsers for chipped or
damaged teeth.
2. Remove the VSA control unit (A).
2. Measure the air gap between the wheel sensor and
pulser all the way around while rotating the pulser.
Remove the rear brake disc to measure the gap on
the rear wheel sensor. If the gap exceeds 1.0 mm
(0.04 in), check for a bent suspension arm.
Standard:
Front: 0.4 -1.05 mm (0.02 - 0.04 in)
Rear: 0.19-1.14 mm (0.01-0.05 in)
Front
B ~
3. Disconnect the VSA control unit connectors (B). t
4. Install the VSA control unit in the reverse order of
removal.

189).
Rear
.a,
t
19-194 BACK
Protected by AR
Wheel Sensor Replacement
Install the sensors carefully to avoid twisting wires.
Front
6mmBOLT
9.8N·m
1'.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
\
WHEEL SENSOR
Rear
6mmBOLT
UN.mt~2Ibf."
WHEEL SENSOR
BACK 19-195
Body Protected by AR
Door Seats
Component Location Index-Front Door ....... 20-2 Component Location Index ........................... 20-77
Component Location Index-Rear Door ........ 20-4 Front Seat Removal/Installation ................... 20-78
Front Door Panel Removal! Front Seat Disassembly/
Installation ................................................... 20-6 Reassembly-4-way Power ......................... 20-80
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement ........ 20-7 Front Seat Disassembly/
Front Door Latch Replacement ..................... 20-10 Reassembly-8-way Power ......................... 20-82
Front Door Glass and Regulator Front Seat Wire Harness
Replacement ............................................... 20-11 Installation ................................................... 20-84
Rear Door Panel Removal/ Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/
Installation ................................................... 20-12 Reassembly-4-way Power ......................... 20-88
Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement ......... 20-14 Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/
Rear Door Latch Replacement ...................... 20-15 Reassembly-8-way Power ......................... 20-89
Rear Door Glass, Quarter Glass, and Front Seat Cover Replacement ..................... 20-90
Regulator Replacement .............................. 20-16 Rear Seat Removal/Installation ..................... 20-95
Rear Door Hook Pin and Rear Seat Armrest Replacement .................. 20-96
Catch Replacement ..................................... 20-20 Trunk Pass-through Cover Key Cylinder
Front and Rear Door Glass Adjustment ....... 20-20 Replacement ............................................... 20-97
Front and Rear Door Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement ............. 20-98
Position Adjustment ................................... 20-22 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Replacement ....... 20-99
Front and Rear Door Striker Adjustment ..... 20-23
Bumpers
Mirrors Front Bumper Removal/Installation ............. 20-101
Component Location Index ........................... 20-24 Front Bumper Disassembly/
Power Mirror Replacement ............................. 20-25 Reassembly ................................................. 20-105
Mirror Holder Replacement ........................... 20-26 Rear Bumper Removal/Installation ............... 20-106
Rearview Mirror Replacement ...................... 20-27
Hood
Glass Replacement ................................................... 20-108
Component Location Index ........................... 20-29 Adjustment ..................................................... 20-109
Windshield Replacement ............................... 20-30 Hood Insulator Replacement ......................... 20-112
Rear Window Replacement ........................... 20-36 Hood Seal Replacement ................................ 20-113
Moonroof Trunk Lid

Component Location Index ........................... 20-42 Replacement ................................................... 20-114
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ................. 20-43 Adjustment ..................................................... 20-116
Glass Height Adjustment ............................... 20-44 Trunk Lid Torsion Bar Replacement ............. 20-117
Glass Replacement ........................................ 20-44 Trunk Lid Weatherstrip Replacement ........... 20-118
Drain Channel Replacement .......................... 20-45 Trunk Lid Dynamic Damper Replacement ... 20-119
Sunshade Replacement ................................. 20-46
Motor Replacement ....................................... 20-47 Exterior Trim
Frame and Drain Tube Replacement ............ 20-48 Hood Molding Replacement ......................... 20-120
Drain Channel Slider and Cable Front Grille Replacement ............................... 20-120
Assembly Replacement ............................. 20-50 Front Grille Disassembly/
Limit Switch Adjustment ............................... 20-52 Reassembly ................................................. 20-122
Closing Force and Opening Drag Check ...... 20-53 Emblem Replacement .................................... 20-124
Roof Molding Replacement ........................... 20-125
*Interior Trim Roof Drip and Rear Pillar Moldings
Component Location Index ........................... 20-54 Replacement ............................................... 20-126
Trim Removal/Installation-Door Area .......... 20-55 Fender/Door Moldings Replacement ........... 20-127
Trim Removal/Installation Side Sill Panel Replacement .......................... 20-128
-Rear Shelf Area .......................................... 20-56
Trim Removal/Installation-Trunk Area ......... 20-58 Fenderwell
Headliner Removal/Installation ...•................. 20-59 Inner Fender Replacement ............................ 20-129
Carpet Replacement ....................................... 20-61 Fuel Pipe Protector Replacement .................. 20-130
Rear Air Outlet Replacement ......................... 20-130
Console
Rear Console Removal!lnstallation .............. 20-62 Openers
Console Panel Removal/Installation ............. 20-63 Component Location Index ........................... 20-131
Hood Opener Cable Replacement ................ 20-132
*Dashboard Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable
Instrument Panel Removal! Replacement ............................................... 20-133
Installation ................................................... 20-65 Trunk Lid Opener Cable Replacement .......... 20-134
Dashboard Lower Cover Hood Release Handle Replacement ............. 20-135
Removal/Installation .................................. 20-65 Hood Latch Replacement .............................. 20-135
Glove Box Removal/Installation ................... 20-66 Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement .............. 20-137
Passenger's Center Vent Removal and Fuel Fill Door Latch Replacement ................. 20-138
Installation ................................................... 20-68 Trunk Lid Latch Replacement ........................ 20-139
Passenger's Side Vent Removal and
Installation ................................................... 20-68 Frame
Side Defogger Vent Trim Removal and Subframe Replacement ................................. 20-140
Installation ................................................... 20-69 * Frame Repair Chart
........................................ 20-142
Dashboard Removal/Installation .................. 20-70
Steering Hanger Beam Replacement ........... 20-74
Protected by AR
Doors
Component Location Index - Front Door
/ ~ ,/Oft
DOOR UPPER SEAL
SASH TRIM
~Ci
DOOR GLASS OUTER WEATHERSTRIP
DOORW~ /
POWER WINDOW
CONTROL UNIT
~,~~~
(Left side on '03 model)
_ r::f'
GROMMET
~
h~
~-
~
HINGE
-DETENT ROD
... HINGE
DOOR LOWER WEATHERSTRIP
Passenger's: STORAGE
/ COMPARTMENT
~~
~ ~SWITCH TRIM
ARMREST
~4Sffj;
~\
POWER WINDOW
POWER WINDOW SWITCH I SWITCH
MULTIPLEX CONTROL
UNIT,DOOR DOOR PANEL
Removal/Installation, page 20-6
COURTESY
LIGHT LENS TRUNK LID
OPENER SWITCH
20-2 BACK
Protected by AR
GLASS
Replacement, page 20-"
LOWER RUN CHANNEL Adjustment, page 20-20
('00-03 modelsl
GLASS RUN CHANNEL
CENTER LOWER \ ('99 modell
CHANNEL
~ /
/GLASS RUN CHANNEL
('00-03 modelsl
\\\1 _.:1---- WINDOW

POWER
MOTOR
LOCK ROD PROTECTOR &'? ______ FRONT LOWER
~ ~ (/' ..----- CHANNEL
LOCK KNOB
_____~ ~
~ &'? /coUTER HANDLE
PROTECTOR
---.... REGULATOR
Replacement, page 20-" ,
CYLINDER ROD LOCK CYLINDER ~
, ell
_______ CYLINDER , ' ) .tf1)
SWITCH . 4J U It) '" ~
fi'A"'- ""---:::.. ' ." dO \ , .. .. OUTERHANDLf
________ ~""® ( G ft T ~\ Replacement,
~':~~t~.",. p.g. :2~~ ~~\~ Wol- HAN::~~;~ p.g.201
LATCH
/~:
LATCHLATCH PROTECTOR
PROTECTOR
! INNER HANDLE
(Without driving position
memory switchl
~~~~~~~~----------~--
POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
With driving position memory switch ('02-03 modelsl:

Replacement,page 20-10 POWER DOOR • DRIVING POSITION
LOCK ACTUATOR o...~&:iIIJ\~ MEMORY SWITCH
INNER HANDLE POWER DOOR

(driver'sl LOCK SWITCH
BACK
20-3
Protected by AR
Doors
Component Location Index - Rear Dc;or
DOOR UPPER SEAL
~ -~ DOOR
Position Adjustment, page 20-22
DOOR GLASS OUTER WEATHERSTRIP
'5)
~~
DOOR ~~HINGE
"'W>
WEATHERSTRIP
LOWER
WEATHERSTRIP
STORAGE
PLASTIC COVER COMP\'NT
POWER WINDOW ~
SWITCH ~~
~>SWITCHTRN DOOR PANEL

Removaillnstallation,
page 20-12
g? \
ARMREST
BACK
20-4
Protected by AR
GLASS
QUARTER GLASS Replacement, page 20-16
Replacement, page 20-16 Adjustment, page 20-20
/SS RUN CHANNEL
QUARTER GLASS
SEAL COLLAR / F R O N T LOWER CHANNEL
INNER HANDLE
ROD ~
STRIKER
Adjustment,
o.,,~O
~'NNER
page 20-23 POWER DOOR
LOCK ACTUATOR
HANDLE
LATCH
BACK
20-5
Protected by AR
Doors
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation
Special Tool Required 3. Remove the screw from the arm rest portion of the
Trim pad remover, Snap-on A 177A or equivalent, door panel. Release the clips that hold the door
commercially available. panel (A) with a commercially available trim pad
remover (8), then remove the door panel by pulling
1. Remove the mirror mount cover (see step 2 on it upward. Remove the door panel with as little
page 20-25). Take care not to scratch the door panel. bending as possible to avoid creasing or breaking it.
2. Remove the inner handle (A). Take care not to

scratch the door panel. 12 mm L~_(_3._74_i_n._)--'~I
-1 Pry out the cap (8), and remove the screw.
-2 Pull the inner handle forward and out half-way.
(0.41;0.( t~ ::=
-3 Disconnect the inner handle rod (e). power
door lock switch connector (D), and on '02-03
models, driving position memory switch
connector (E) (driver's).
Fastener Location
1mm
(0.04 in.)
L
r-C
';G-
~I
45mm
~·~ I
(1.77 in.1
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 1 1>: Clip, 9

Without driving position memory switch '99-01 models: 9
(driver's side on '99-01 models, and passenger's side:) '02-03 models: 8
I~
D
eWXW)
c
A
'99-01 models only.
c
With driving position memory switch

(driver's side on '02-03 models) :
D E
C,® A
20-6
BACK
Protected by AR
Front Door Outer Handle

Replacement
4. Disconnect the power window switch connectors
(A), power mirror switch connector (8) (driver's),
security indicator connector (C) (driver's), driver's NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
door subharness connector (D), and courtesy light
bulb socket (passenger's) (E), and detach the 1. Remove these items:
harness clips (F) from the passenger's door panel.
• Door panel (see page 20-6)
C • Plastic cover, as necessary (see page 20-2)
2. Raise the glass fully.
3. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as necessary

A
('99 model), and remove the bolt, then remove the
B center lower channel (8) by pulling it downward.
On '00-03 models, remove it with the lower glass
run channeI(C).
Fastener Location
~: Bolt, 1
A
6x1 .0mm
8N·m
(O.8kgf·m,
6lbf.ftl
E
5. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal, '99 model:
and note these items:
• Replace any damaged clips.

• Make sure the connectors and courtesy light bulb
socket are plugged in properly, and the rod is
connected properly.
• Check the window and power door lock
operation.
'00-03 models:
(cont'd)
BACK
20-7
Protected by AR
Doors
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement (cont'd)
4. Use a small screwdriver to release the retainer clip 6. Disconnect the cylinder switch connector (A), and
(A), then remove the lock cylinder (B). Disconnect detach the harness clips (B).
the cylinder rod (e).
~J A
B~
5. Remove the screw, then separate the lock cylinder

(A) and cylinder switch (B).
Fastener Location
~: Screw, 1 7. Remove the hole seal (A), and remove the bolts
securing the outer handle protector (B) and outer
~ handle (e).
Fastener Locations
~: Bolt, 2
6x 1.0mm
fF(\\\."", 9.8 N·m
~ (1.0kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft) c
BACK
20-8
Protected by AR
8. Remove the outer handle protector (A) from the 10. Pull out the outer handle (A). Pry the outer handle
outer handle (8) by releasing the hook (C). rod (8) out of its joint (C) using diagonal cutters (D).
NOTE:
o To ease reassembly, note the distance (E) of the
outer handle rod on the joint before

disconnecting it.
o Take care not to bend the outer handle rod .
o Use a shop towel (F) to protect the opening in the
door.
¥
9. Detach the harness clip (D) from the outer handle
protector, then remove the outer handle protector
and cylinder switch (E) from the door.
11. Replace the bushing (G) on the outer handle.
(cont'd)
BACK
20-9
Protected by AR
Doors
Front Door Outer Handle Front Door Latch Replacement

Replacement (cont'd)
NOTE; Put on gloves to protect your hands.
12. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal, 1. Raise the glass fully.
and note these items;
2. Remove the outer handle (see page 20-7).
• Make sure the cylinder switch harness is routed
properly. 3. Detach the harness clip (A) and inner handle rod (B),
• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly, and disconnect the actuator connectors (C).
and each rod is connected securely.
• Make sure the door locks and opens properly. Fastener Locations
• When installing the lock cylinder, leave the outer ~ : Screw, 3
door handle bolts loose so the inner protector
does not interfere with the lock cylinder. 6x 1.0mm
6N·m
• Install the lock cylinder retaining clip (A) on the ~ (0.6 kgf·m,
handle (B), then install the lock cylinder (C). Be ~ 4Ibf·ft)
sure the clip is fully seated in the slot on the lock
cylinder.
• When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the
plastic cover is installed properly and sealed
B
around its perimeter.
G \.~
4. Remove the screws, then remove the latch (D)

through the hole in the door. Take care not to bend
the outer handle rod (E), cylinder rod (F), lock rod
(G) and inner handle rod (B).
5. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items;
• Make sure the actuator connectors are plugged in

properly, and each rod is connected securely.
• Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
20-10 BACK
Protected by AR
Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement
,. Remove these items: 3. Disconnect and detach the connector (A) and
harness clip(s) (B) from the door. Remove the bolts
• Door panel (see page 20-6) (C, D) and loosen the bolts (E), then remove the
• Plastic cover (see page 20-2) regulator (F) through the hole in the door.
2. Carefully raise the glass until you can see the bolts,
then remove them. Carefully pull the glass out Fastener Locations
through the window slot. Take care not to drop the c ~ : Bolt, 3 D ~ : Bolt, 1 E~ : Bolt, 3
glass inside the door. 6x 1.0mm
~ 9.8N·m
Fastener Locations ~ (0.8 kgf·m,
6Ibf·ft)
~ : Bolt, 2
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK 20-11
Protected by AR
Doors
Front Door Glass and Regulator Rear Door Panel Removal/

Replacement (cont'd) Installation
4. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding Special Tool Required

surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown. Trim pad remover, Snap-on A177A or equivalent,
commercially available .
... ~ 1. Remove the inner handle (A). Take care not to
scratch the door panel.
-1 Pry out the cap (B), and remove the screw.

-2 Move the inner handle forward and half-way
out, then disconnect the inner handle rod (e).
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1
~ B
Q)
5. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order
of removal, and note these items: ~
• Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves
freely without binding.
• Make sure that there is no clearance between the
glass and glass run channel when the glass is
closed .
• Adjust the position ofthe glass as necessary (see
page 20-20).
plastic cover is installed properl and sealed
around its perimeter. A
20-12 BACK
Protected by AR
2. Remove the screw from the armrest portion of the 3. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal,
door panel. Release the clips that hold the door and note these items:
panel (A) with a commercially available trim pad
remover (8), then remove the door panel by pulling • Replace any damaged clips.
it upward, and disconnecting the power window • Make sure the connector is plugged in properly,
switch connector (C). Remove the door panel with and the rod is connected properly.
as little bending as possible to avoid creasing or • Check the window and power door lock
breaking it. operation.
12mm
(0.47 in.)
1mm
(0.04 in.)
45mm
(1.17 in.)
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 1 [>: Clip, 7
BACK
20-13
Protected by AR
Doors
Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 7. Release the hook (A) while holding the outer handle
(8), then remove the outer handle and outer handle
1. Remove these items: protector (e) from the door.
o Door panel (see page 20-12)

o Plastic cover, as necessary (see page 20-4)
2. Raise the glass fully.
3. Remove the rod protector (see step 3 on page 20-

15).
4. Disconnect the lock rod from the lock crank (see

step 4 on page 20-15) .
5. Remove the screws securing the latch, and detach

the lock rod and inner handle rod from the rod
holder, then move the latch down (see step 5 on
page 20-15). 8. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal,
6. Remove the bolts securing the outer handle (A).
o Make sure the door locks and opens propelly.
Fastener Locations
o When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the
~ : Bolt. 2 plastic cover is installed properly and seaded
6x 1.0mm around its perimeter.
d)mn 9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m.
7.2Ibf·ft)
20-14 BACK
Protected by AR
Rear Door Latch Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 5. Remove the screws securing the latch (A), and
detach the lock rod (B) and inner handle rod (C)
1. Remove these items: from the rod holder (D). Take care not to bend any
of the rods .
• Door panel (see page 20-12)
• Plastic cover, as necessary (see page 20-4) Fastener Locations
~ : Screw,3
2. Raise the glass fully. 6x1.0mm
@))})))))) ))) 6 N·m
3. Remove the screw, and release the hooks (A), then 10.6 kgf·m,
4Ibf·ft)
remove the rod protector (B).
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1
~ B
A
6. Move the latch (A) until you can disconnect each
rod, and disconnect the inner handle rod (B), lock
rod (C) and connectors (D) from the latch. Take care
4. Disconnect the lock rod (A) from the lock crank (B). not to bend any of the rods.
A
o
(cont'd)
BACK
20-15
Protected by AR
Doors
Rear Door Latch Replacement Rear Door Glass, Quarter Glass, and
(cont'd) Regulator Replacement
7. Remove the latch (A) through the hole in the door. NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
1. Remove these items:
o Door panel (see page 20-12)

o Plastic cover (see page 20-4)
o Rod protector (see step 3 on page 20-15)
2. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the
A bolts, then loosen them. Push the glass against the
center channel (8).
Fastener Locations
~Bolt.2
6x 1.0mm
@mID 9.8N·m
(1.0kgf·m.
7.2Ibf·ft)
A
note these items:
o Make sure the connectors are plugged in

properly, and each rod is connected securely.
o Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
o When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the
BACK
20-16
Protected by AR
3. Remove the bolts (A, B) and collar (C) from the rear 4. Move the rear channel (A) away from the quarter
channel (0). Pull the upper seal (E) away as needed, glass (B) and the rear door glass (C). Take care not
and remove the screw (F). Pull the glass run to damage the door molding (0).
channel (G) away as needed from the rear channel.
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Bolt, 1 B ~ : Bolt, 1
6x1.0mm
lilliliilillill fO~~f.m,
6Ibf·ft)
F~: Screw, 1
4xO.8 mm
~ 4N·m
\!Y"'" (0.4 kgf·m,
3Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK
20-17
Protected by AR
Doors
Rear Door Glass, Quarter Glass, and Regulator Replacement (cont'd)
5. Remove the rear channel (A) out through the 6. Remove the quarter glass (A). Take care not to
window slot. Take care notto damage the door damage the door molding (B).
molding.
~
CD
7. Remove the bolts, then carefully remove the glass

(A) out through the window slot. Take care not to
drop the glass inside the door.
Fastener Locations
~:Bolt,2 I A
........................................•. \
. ..i ~ofJ
o \
BACK
20-18
Protected by AR
8. Disconnect and detach the connector (A) and 10. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order
harness clip (8) from the door. Remove the bolts of removal, and note these items:
(e), and loosen the bolts (D), then remove the
regulator (E) through the hole in the door. • Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves
freely without binding.
Fastener Locations • Make sure that there is no clearance between the
C~ : Bolt,3 D~:Bolt,4 glass and glass run channel when the glass is
6x1.0mm closed.
8N·m, • Adjust the position of the glass as necessary (see
(O.8kgf·m.
6Ibf·ft) page 20-20)
• When reinstalling the door panel, malce sure the
9. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding

surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown.
BACK
20-19
Protected by AR
Doors
Rear Door Hook Pin and Catch Front and Rear Door Glass
Replacement Adjustment
1. With a Torx T 40 bit, remove the door hook pi n (A) NOTE:

from the door. • Check the weatherstrips and glass run channel for
damage or deterioration, and replace them if
necessary.
• Wipe the run channel clean with a shop tow I.
• lubricate the run channel with Shin-Etsu grease
P/N08798-9013.
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
• Door panel, front door (see page 20-6), rear door

(see page 20-12)
• Plastic cover, front door (see page 20-2), rear
door (see page 20-4)
2. With a Torx T40 bit. remove the bolts, then remove 3. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the
the door catch (A) from the body. glass mounting bolts (B), then loosen them.
Fastener Locations
Front:
~: Bolt,2
8x 1.25mm c A
22N·m
0- (2.2kgf·m,
16Ibf·ft)
A~& /
~/J./(
/i
/ //'
/
3. Install the hook pin and catch in the reverse order
of removal, and apply liquid thread lock to the
threads of the door hook pin.
BACK
20-20
Protected by AR
Rear: 7. Check for water leaks. Run water over the roof and
on the sealing area as shown, and note these items:
c
• Use a 12mm (112 in.) diameter hose (A).
• Adjust the rate of water flow as shown (8).
• Do not use a nozzle.
• Hold the hose about 300 mm (12 in.) away from
the door (C).
n
12 mm (0.47 in.'
~A
I '11\Y;O~
n
I
~
0.Sm(18in.'
U~B
300 mm (12 in.'

B
4. Push the glass (A) against the center channel (C),

then tighten the glass mounting bolts.
5. Check that the glass moves smoothly.
6. Raise the glass fully, and check for gaps. Check that
the glass (A) contacts the glass run channel (8) 8. Attach the plastic cover, and install the door panel,
evenly. front door (see page 20-6), rear door (see page 20-
12).
BACK
20-21
Protected by AR
Doors
Front and Rear Door Position Adjustment
NOTE: After installing the door, check for a flush fit with 3. Check that the door and body edges are parallel. If
the body, then check for equal gaps between the front, necessary, adjust the door cushions (A) to make the
rear, and bottom door edges and the body. Check that rear of the doors flush with the body.
the door and body edges are parallel.
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface when

adjusting the doors.
2. Adjust at the hinges (A):
• Loosen the door mounting bolts (8) slightly, and

move the door in or out until it's flush with the
body.
• With a shop towel (C) on the jack (0), move the A A
door up or down as necessary to equalize the
gaps.
4. Grease the pivot portions of the hinges indicated by

the arrows.
.. ..fiiiW
5. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts,

and around the hinges.
6. Check for water leaks (see step 7 on page 20-21).
BACK
20-22
Protected by AR
Front and Rear Door Striker Adjustment
Make sure the door latches securely without slamming

it. If necessary, adjust the striker (A): The striker nuts
are fixed, but the striker can be adjusted slightly up or
down, and in or out.
1. Loosen the screws (8), then insert a shop towel (e)

between the body and striker.
B C
8x 1.25 mm
18 N·m 11.8 kgf·m, 13Ibf.ft)
2. Lightly tighten the screws.
3. Wrap the striker with a shop towel, then adjust the

striker by tapping it with a plastic hammer (D). Do
not tap the striker too hard.
4. Loosen the screws, and remove the shop towel.
5. Lightly tighten the screws.
6. Hold the outer handle out, and push the door

against the body to be sure the striker allows a
flush fit. If the door latches properly, tighten the
screws and recheck.
BACK
20-23
Protected by AR
Mirrors
MIRROR MOUNT COVER
POWER MIRROR
ACTUATOR
SHAFT
C~~~~LlP Mt~~~~OVER
HARNE~~7
REARVISEWS REARVIERU
WIRE COVER
~ LU~~
~
/
~
REARVIEW MIRROR
BASE LOWER COVER
REARVIEW MIRROR REARVIEW MIRROR
(Without OnStar system) (With OnStar system, '03 modell
Replacement, page 20-27 BRACKET COVER Replacement, page 20-28
BACK
20-24
Protected by AR
Power Mirror Replacement
1. Lower the door glass fully. 5. While holding the mirror, push out the clip (A), and
remove the mirror (B). Take care not to scratch the
2. Carefully pry out the mirror mount cover (A) by door.
hand in the sequence shown.
A
Fastener Locations
3. Remove the door panel (see page 20-6). 6. Install the mirror in the reverse order of removal,
4. Disconnect the connector (A), and detach the
harness clip (B), then remove the nuts securing the • Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
mirror. • Attach the harness clip.
Fastener locations
.:Nut.3
@ 5xO.8mm
5N·m
(O.5kgf·m.
4lbf·ftl
BACK
20-25
Protected by AR
Mirrors
Mirror Holder Replacement
1. Pry the mirror holder (A) out from the bottom until 3. Remove the actuator shafts (A) and rubber boots
you can see the pivot (B) of the actuator, then (B) from the old mirror holder (C). Check the
detach the pivot using a flat-tip screwdriver actuator shaft and rubber boot for damage or
wrapped with a shop towel. Take care not to deterioration, and replace them if necessary.
scratch the mirror (C). A
~.
~ I
c~
A c 4. Install the holder in the reverse order of removal,
2. Pull out the actuator shafts (A), release the hooks
(B) from the actuator (C), and remove the mirror • Before installing the mirror holder, install the
holder (D). Disconnect the mirror defogger actuator shafts and boots on the mirror holder.
terminals (E). • Make sure the mirror defogger terminals are
plugged in properly.
• Grease the pivot (A), actuator shafts (B), and if
equipped, mirror position sensor pins (C).
• Reattach the mirror holder (D) to the pivot (A) and
actuator shafts (B) to the actuator, then carefully
B push on the pivot and actuator shaft portions of
the holder until it locks into place.
• To ease installation of the mirror holder, it may
be necessary to heat the pivot and actuator shaft
joint portions of the mirror holder.
• Make sure the actuator shaft boots are installed
into the actuator. If necessary, use a small
screwdriver to reinstall them. Take care not to
scratch the mirror.
• Check the operation of the actuator.
~~
BACK
20-26
Protected by AR
Rearview Mirror Replacement
Without OnStar System 4. Remove the wire cover (A) from the mirror bracket
(B) by releasing the hooks (C) in the sequence
NOTE: When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it shown.
with protective tape to prevent damage.
c B
1. Remove the roof console (see page 20-59).
2. Disconnect the connector (A), and carefully remove

the bracket cover (B) by releasing the hooks (C).
Take care not to scratch the cover and mirror
bracket (D).
A C
5. Install the rearview mirror (A) by sliding it over the

D lug (B) until the spring contacts the lug. Gently tap
the mirror bracket with a flat-tip screwdriver and a
B-.~
plastic hammer. Be careful not to damage the wires.
3. Slide the rearview mirror (A) forward to release the

spring (B), by gently tapping the mirror bracket
with a flat-tip screwdriver and a plastic hammer.
Remove the mirror from the lug (C).
6. Install the wire cover (A) in the sequence shown.

Take care not to damage the hooks (B).
7. Install the bracket cover, and connect the connector,

then install the roof console.
BACK 20-27
Protected by AR
Mirrors
Rearview Mirror Replacement (cont'd)
With Onstar system 3. Disconnecgt the connector (A), and loosen the
screw (B) with a Torx T20 bit, then slide the
NOTE: When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it rearview mirror (C) rearward and off the lug (D).
with protective tape to prevent damage.
1. Carefully pry the hooks (A) with a flat-tip

screwdriver, then remove the reaview mirror base
lower cover (B) from the rearview mirror base (C).
B
5xO.8mm
2.8 N·m 10.29 kgf·m,
2.1Ibf·ft}
c
4. Install the mirror in the reverse order of removal,

o Before installing the mirror, remove the Torx

screw, and apply lipuid thread lock to it.
2. Carefully pry the hooks (A) with a flat-tip o Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
screwdriver, then remove the rearview mirror
harness upper cover (B) from the rearview mirror
harness clip (C).
A ~ B
20-28 BACK
Protected by AR
Glass
MOLDING UPPER SEAL. 2
~
WINDSHIELD MOLDING
/
" /._'-''-~ / ~O~~£lNGodMIDDLE UPPER SEAL
~ m els)
FASTENER,2
(Self-adhesive-type, g Iass side)
.
G;;J
/
2typ"
FASTENER 2
bodV "de,
/
WINDSHIELD
~
WINDOW ANTE~:N~N~A:~~~~~==J
WINDOW ANTENNA
TERMINAL COVER TERMIN\ALBASE COVER RUBBER DAM
~
~ /UPPERCUP 2
~ ('02-03 m:d~r;f'pe,
(Self-adh ( glass side)
G;j~ ~ ~ _______ UPPER CUP 2
~
~ 1~~03-type, body side)
c- - models)
........,--
~ UPPER FASTENER 2
" ~'99-01 mod~r;Fe.
ISeW-adhe . ' glass side)
UP.pER FASTENER 2
REAR WINDOW (Chp-type bodY Side)
.'
MOLDING ('99-01 '
models)
====------
~
~"'4t------- LOWER FASTENER 2
(SeW-adhesive '
S ('99-01 model;Fe, glass side)
REAR WINDOW
Replacement, page 20-36 t~WER FASTENER 2
, elf-adhesive-typ • bod .
LOWER SPACER 2 ( 99-01 models) e, YSide)
('02-03 models) ,
BACK
20-29
Protected by AR
Glass
Windshield Replacement
NOTE: 4. Apply protective tape (A) along the edge of the

• Put on gloves to protect your hands. dashboard (B) and body as shown. Using an awl,
• Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces. make a hole through the rubber dam (C), adhesive
• Wear eye protection when removing the glass with (D), and dashboard seal (E) from inside the vehicle.
piano wire. Push a piece of piano wire (F) through the hole, and
wrap each end around a piece of wood.
1. Remove the windshield wiper arms and cowl cover
(see page 22-286). F \ A
2. Remove the molding (A) from the edge of the ~

windshield (B). If necessary, cut the molding with a
~
utility knife.
F
I! A
D ..-
-; B
B
D C
5. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)

back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
wire as close to the windshield as possible to
prevent damage to the body and dashboard.
Carefully cut through the rubber dam and adhesive
around the entire windshield.
3. Pull down the front portion of the headliner (see

page 20-59). Take care not to bend the headliner
excessively, as you may crease or break it.
6. Carefully remove the windshield.
20-30 BACK
Protected by AR
==
7. With a knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a 10. Glue the rubber dam (A), fasteners (B) with
thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the bonding adhesive tape (3M 4215, or equivalent) and
surface around the entire windshield opening dashboard seal (C) to the inside face of the
flange: windshield (D) as shown:
• Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the • Be sure the rubber dam, fasteners and
body; damaged paint will interfere with proper dashboard seal line up with the alignment marks
bonding. (E).
• Remove the rubber dam and fasteners from the • Be careful not to touch the windshield where
body. adhesive will be applied.
• Mask off surrounding surfaces before painting.
12.5 mm 12mm
(0.49in.1 (0.47 in.1
8. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge
dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil,
grease and water from getting on the clean surface.
9. If the old windshield is to be reinstalled, use a putty

knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, the
fasteners, the rubber dam and the dashboard seal
from the windshield. Clean the shaded portion of
the windshield (A) with alcohol where new
adhesive is to be applied. Make sure the bonding
surface is kept free of water, oil, and grease.
A
A
c \o
c
A E
(cont'd)
BACK
20-31
Protected by AR
Glass
Windshield Replacement (cont'd)
11. Apply primer (3M N-200, or equivalent) to the areas 12. Glue the molding (A) with adhesive tape (3M 4212,
between the alignment marks (A), then apply the or equivalent) (B) to the edge of the windshield (e):
adhesive tape (B) (NITTO 501, or equivalent) to the
edge of the windshield. Be careful not to touch the • Be sure the alignment mark (0) of the molding
windshield where adhesive will be applied. lines up with the alignment mark (E) of the
windshield.
_ : Apply primer here. • Be careful not to touch the windshield where
adhesive will be applied.
D A
/
r~
Bottom~~1
~
. 4mmIO.2In)
40 mm 11.6 in)
B
Thickness 2 mm 10.1 in.)
20-32 BACK
Protected by AR
13. Glue the molding middle upper seal (A), molding 14. Set the windshield in the opening, and center it.
upper seals (B), butyl tapes (OIABONO H13, or
equivalent) (C) and molding side seals (0) to the Fastener Location
molding (E). Be careful not to touch the windshield [> Fastener, 2
where adhesive will be applied.
~ ~
/
15. Make alignment marks (A) across the windshield

and body with a grease pencil at the four points
shown. Be careful not to touch the windshield
16. Remove the windshield.
(cont'd)
BACK
20-33
Protected by AR
Glass
Windshield Replacement (cont'd)
17. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer 18. With a sponge, apply a light coat of body primer to
around the edge of the windshield (A) between the the original adhesive remaining around the
dam (B) and molding (e) as shown, then lightly windshield opening flange. Let the body primer dry
wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth: for at least 10 minutes:
• Apply glass primer to the molding. • Do not apply glass primer to the body, and do not
• Do not apply body primer to the windshield, and get glass and body primer sponges mixed up.
do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed • Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
up. • Mask off the dashboard before painting the
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. flange.
If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the
windshield properly, causing a leak after the
_ : Apply body primer here.
windshield is installed.
• Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away 20mm
(0.79 in.)
from the primed surface.
_ : Apply gl8ss primer here.

B
B.5mm
(0.33 in.) /1'41
~WI;§:C
A
19. Before filling a cartridge, cut a "v" in the end ofthe

nozzle (A) as shown.
10 mm (0.39 in.)
B~~
Ii-----A 7 mm (0.27 in.)
20-34 BACK
Protected by AR
20. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets 21. Use suction cups (A) to hold the windshield over
to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a the opening. Align it with the alignment marks (8)
caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) made in step 15, and set it down on the adhesive.
around the edge ofthe windshield (8) between the Lightly push on the windshield until its edges are
dam (e) and molding (D) as shown. Apply the fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. Do
adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass not open or close the doors until the adhesive is dry.
primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner.
A B
2mm
(0.08 in.'
-t-t-
13mm I~
(0.51 in.' I-!
8 mm (0.31 in"e I A
1~D
B
22. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty

knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted
surface or the windshield, wipe with a soft shop
towel dampened with alcohol.
23. Let the adhesive dry for at least 1 hour, then spray
water over the windshield and check for leaks.
e Mark leaking areas, and let the windshield dry, then
seal with sealant:
• Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after

windshield installation. If the vehicle has to be
used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven
slowly.
• Keep the windshield dry for the first hour after
B installation.
24. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. Install the

rearview mirror after the adhesive has dried
thoroughly.
NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following

things for 2 to 3 days:
• Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up.

• Twist the body excessively (such as when going
in and out of driveways at an angle or driving
over rough, uneven roads).
BACK
20-35
Protected by AR
Glass
Rear Window Replacement
NOTE: 3. Disconnect the rear window defogger connectors
--
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. (A).
• Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces.
• Wear eye protection when removing the glass with
piano wire.
• Do not damage the rear window defogger grid lines,
window antenna grid lines, and terminals.
• Trunk lid (see page 20-114)

• Rear seat-back and cushion (see page 20-95)
• Rear shelf, both sides, '99-01 models (see page
20-56), '02-03 models (see page 20-57)
2. Remove the window antenna terminal cover (A) A

from the window antenna terminal base (B), and
disconnect the window antenna connector (e). 4. Remove the molding (A) from the edge of the rear
-- window (B). If necessary, cut the molding with a

utility knife.
---------
---
~ \=--r-=:::Jj ----- (
~
\
B
A
5. Pull down the rear portion of the headliner (see

page 20-59). Take care not to bend the headliner
excessively, as you may crease or break it.
20-36
BACK
Protected by AR
6. Apply protective tape (A) along the inside and 9. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth
outside edges of the body as shown. Using an awl, to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the
make a hole through the adhesive (B) from inside bonding surface around the entire rear window
the vehicle. Push a piece of piano wire (C) through opening flange:
the hole, and wrap each end around a piece of
wood. • Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the
body; damaged paint will interfere with proper
bonding.
• Mask off surrounding surfaces before painting.
I_---C • Remove the fasteners from the body.
10. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge

dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil,
grease and water from getting on the surface.
11. If the old rear window is to be reinstalled, use a

putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive and
the fasteners from the rear window. Clean the
shaded portion of the rear window (A) with alcohol
- where new adhesive is to be applied. Make sure the

bonding surface is kept free of water, oil, and
grease.
7. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)

back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
wire as close to the rear window as possible to
prevent damage to the body, and carefully cut
through the adhesive around the entire rear
window.
8. Carefully remove the rear window.
(cont'd)
BACK
20-37
Protected by AR
Glass
Rear Window Replacement (cont'd)
12. Glue the clips (A) with adhesive tape (3M 4216, or 13. Apply the adhesive tape (A) (3M 4216, or
equivalent) and spacers (B) with adhesive tape (3M equivalent) to the edge of the rear window (B):
5357, or equivalent) to the inside face of the rear
window as shown. If necessary, apply primer (3M • Be sure the adhesive tape lines up with the
N-200, or equivalent) to the areas where the alignment marks (e).
window antenna terminal base (e) will be glued, • Be careful not to touch the rear window where
then glue the base on with adhesive tape (3M 4211, adhesive will be applied.
or equivalent):
• Be sure the fasteners (and window antenna

terminal base cover) line up with the alignment
marks (0) .
• Be careful not to touch the rear window where
Wl& : Apply primer here.

A
Fastener Locations
A[>: Clip,2
13.5mm
B [>: Spacer, 2
13.5mm
I
sZ. ~ 14. Glue the molding (A) around the edge of the rear
window (B):
• Be sure the joint (e) lines up with the alignment

mark (0).
• Be careful not to touch the rear window where
20-38 BACK
Protected by AR
15. Install the clips. 18. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer
along the edge of the rear window (A) and molding
Fastener Locations
(B) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or
[>:Clip.2 cheesecloth:
~ • Do not apply body primer to the rear window,

and do not get body and glass primer sponges
mixed up.
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the rear
window properly, causing a leak after the rear
window is installed.
• Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away
from the primed surface.
_ : Apply glass primer here.
9mm
16. Set the rear window in the opening, and center it. (0.35 in.)
Make alignment marks (A) across the rear window
and body with a grease pencil at the four points
shown. Be careful not to touch the rear window
17. Remove the rear window.
(cont'd)
BACK
20-39
Protected by AR
Glass
Rear Window Replacement (cont'd)
19. With a sponge, apply a light coat of body primer to 21. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets
the original adhesive remaining around the rear to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a
window opening flange. Let the body primer dry for caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A)
at least 10 minutes: around the edge of the rear window (8) as shown.
Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after
• Do not apply glass primer to the body, and do not applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker
get glass and body primer sponges mixed up. bead at each corner.
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
20mm
_ : Apply body primer here. 10.08 in.'
--H--
I~
13mm :A
10.51 in.'
j.o---..i
8 mm 10.31 in.'
B /A
,§ ~§~
20mm
10.79 in.'
20. Before filling a cartridge, cut a "V" in the end of the

nozzle (A) as shown.
10 mm 10.39 in.'
B A
7 mm 10.27 in.'
20-40 BACK
Protected by AR
22. Use suction cups (A) to hold the rear window over
the opening, align it with the alignment marks (B)
you made in step 16, and set it down on the
adhesive. Lightly push on the rear window until its
edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way
around. Do not open or close the doors until the
adhesive is dry.
23. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty

knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted
surface or the rear window, use a soft shop towel
dampened with alcohol.
24. Let the adhesive dry for at least 1 hour, then spray
water over the rear window and check for leaks.
Mark the leaking areas, let the rear window dry,
then seal with sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at
least 4 hours after rear window installation. If the
vehicle has to be used within the first 4 hours, it
must be driven slowly.
25. Reinstall all remaining removed parts.
NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following

things for 2 to 3 days:
• Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up .

• Twist the body excessively (such as when going
in and out of driveways at an angle or driving
over rough, uneven roads).
BACK
20-41
Protected by AR
Moonroof
GLASS
Height Adjustment, page 20-44
Closing Force and Opening Drag
Check, page 20-53
SUNSHADE
~ J CABLE ASSEMBLY
FRAME SEALS ~ Replacement, page 20-50
'\ MOTOR
Replaceme
P''''~
nt , page 20-47
f\
-I)I"ONT
~
~/
REAR DRAIN VALVE
~
DRAIN TUBE
'{i;I'\'PI".m,"c P'g, 20-48
REAR DRAIN TUBE
FRAME
FRONT DRAIN VALVE Replacement, page 20-48
20-42 BACK
Protected by AR
Water leaks 1. Check for a clogged drain tube. Glass height

2. Check for a gap between the glass weatherstrip and the roof adjustment
panel.
3. Check for a defective or an improperly installed glass
weatherstrip.
4. Check for a gap between the drain seal and the roof panel.
Wind noise 1. Check for excessive clearance between the glass weatherstrip Glass height
and the roof panel. adjustment
Motor noise 1. Check for a loose motor. Check closing force

2. Check for a worn gear or bearing.
3. Check for a deformed cable assembly.
Glass does not move, 1. Check for a defective gear, inner cable, or clutch.
but motor turns 2. Check for foreign matter stuck between the guide rail and the
slider.
3. Check for a loose inner cable.
4. Make sure the cable assembly is attached properly.
Glass does not move 1. Check for a blown fuse.

and motor does not 2. Check for a faulty moonroof switch.
turn (glass can be 3. Check the open/close-tilt/close switches.
moved with 4. Check for a run down battery.
moon roof wrench) 5. Check for a defective motor.
6. Check for a faulty relay.
BACK
20-43
Protected by AR
Moonroof
Glass Height Adjustment Glass Replacement
The roof panel (A) should be even with the glass 1. Tilt the glass all the way up.
weatherstrip (B), to within 2 + 0.5/ -1 mm (0.08 + 0.02/-
0.04 in.) all the way around. If not, make the following 2. Slide the sunshade all the way back.
adjustment:
3. Remove the caps (A) and screws, then remove both
bracket covers (B). Remove the nuts and shims (C)
from both glass brackets (D).
Fastener Locations
~: Screw,2 e: Nut, 4
~
6x 1.0 mm
, @)) 9N·m
@ (0.9 kgf·m,
7Ibf·ft)
D
A
~
~~
~ ~ ~\
1. Open the glass all the way, and remove the bracket
cover.
2. Loosen the nuts (A), and install the shims (B)

between the glass frame (e) and glass bracket (D)
on each side.
d Forward e ___ A B
Shim thickness: Front and rear max. 2 mm (0.08 in.)

4. Remove the glass (A) by lifting it up. Do not
B C B
damage the roof panel.
~ v~
A
... Forward
A
6x 1.0mm
3. Repeat on opposite side if necessary.
5. Install the glass in the reverse order of removal,

and adjust the glass height.
6. Check for water leaks. Use free-flowing water from

a hose without a nozzle. Do not use high-pressure
spray, or a car wash to test.
20-44
BACK
Protected by AR
Drain Channel Replacement
1. Remove the moon roof glass (see page 20-44). 4. Remove the drain channel (A).
2. With the moon roof wrench, move both glass A

brackets (A) to the position where the moon roof
normally pivots down, and remove the screws
securing the drain channel (8).
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 2
5. Install the channel in the reverse order of removal,

• Push the drain channel onto the hooks until a

faint click is heard .
• Check the glass height adjustment.
6. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from
3. Release the drain channel (A) from both hooks (8) a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure
of the drain channel slider by pulling the drain spray, or a car wash to test.
channel forward.
BACK
20-45
Protected by AR
Moonroof
Sunshade Replacement
,. Remove the drain channel (see page 20-45). 4. While lifting the front portion of the sunshade (A),
move the sunshade forward until you can see both
2. Slide the sunshade (A) until you can see both sunshade rear hooks (B). Do not damage the
sunshade slider spacers (B). sunshade and hooks.
Fastener Locations Fastener Locations
~:Screw,4 ~:Screw,4
~I ~ B
3. Remove the screws, then remove both spacers. 5. Remove the screws, then remove both hooks.
BACK
20-46
Protected by AR
Motor Replacement
6. Release both rear sunshade base sliders (A) from 1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-59).
the guide rail portions of the frame, then remove
the sunshade. 2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect
and detach the connector (A), and remove the bolts,
then remove the motor (B).
Fastener Locations
~: 801t,2
6X1.0mm
9N·m
(O.9kgf·m,
7Ibf.ft)
7. Remove both front sunshade base sliders (A).
A 3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal,

8. Install the sunshade in the reverse order of removal, • Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
and check the glass height adjustment (see page • Check the motor operation.
20-44).
9. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from
a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure
spray, or a car wash to test.
BACK
20-47
Protected by AR
Moonroof
Frame and Drain Tube Replacement
• Headliner (see page 20-59)

• Moonroof glass (see page 20-44)
2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the motor connector (A), open/close-tilt/close switch connector
(B), and the drain tubes (e).
Fastener Locations
~: Bolt, 10
•
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m III -c
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2 Ibf.ft)
~-
C~
A
:to /C
B
G
F
c H
3. Remove the ceiling light harness (D) by detaching the harness clips (E), and remove the harness cushion (F).
4. With an assistant holding the frame (G), remove the bolts, and release the rear hooks (H) by moving the frame
forward, then remove the frame. Remove the front bolts last.
5. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the frame through the door opening. Take care not to scratch the
interior trim and body, or tear the seat covers.
20-48 BACK
Protected by AR
6. To remove a front drain valve (A) from the body, 8. Install the frame and drain tube in the reverse order
remove the kick panel, left or right (see page 20-55). of removal, and note these items:
Tie a string to the end of the drain tube, then pull
the front drain tube (B) down out of the front pillar. o Before installing the frame, clear the drain tubes
and drain valves using compressed air.
o Check the frame seal.
o Clean the surface of the frame.
o When installing the frame, first attach the rear
hooks into the body holes.
o Make sure the connectors are plugged in
properly.
o When connecting the drain tube, slide it over the
frame nozzle at least 10 mm (0.39 in.).
o Install the tube clip (A) on the drain tube (B) as
B shown.
Upward
1
7. To remove a rear drain valve (A) from the body, B
remove these parts (see page 20-58):
o Trunk floor 9. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from
• Trunk rear trim panel a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure
o Trunk side pocket, left or right spray, or a car wash to test.
Tie a string to the top end of the drain tube, then

pull back the trunk side trim panel and pull the
drain tube down out of the pillar.
BACK
20-49
Protected by AR
Moonroof
Drain Channel Slider and Cable ASSE: 'nbly Replacement
1. Remove the frame (see page 20-48). 4. While pushing down on the hook (A), slide the
drain channel sliders (B) back on both sides.
2. Remove these parts from the frame:
• Sunshade (see page 20-46)

• Moonroof motor (see page 20-47)
3. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the

slide stops (A), cable tube rear brackets (B), cable
tube side bracket mounting bolts (C) and the cable
tube mounting screws (0) from both sides of the
frame (E).
Fastener Locations
c~ : 801t,2 D~: Screw, 2
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
~
~ (1 .0 kgf.m, Iflh-...
~ 7.2Ibf.ttl ~ 5. Turn both cable tube side brackets (A) up, and
F~ : Screw, 2 G~: Screw, 2 remove the drain channel sliders (B).
~ ~ B
"\ G
c
~
1
BACK
20-50
Protected by AR
6. Pivot the glass bracket (A) down by sliding the link 8. Install the sliders and cables in the reverse order of
lifter (B) back, then slide both glass brackets back removal, and note these items:
with the link lifter.
• Damaged parts should be replaced.
• Apply multipurpose grease to the glass bracket
(A) and guide rail portion of the frame (B)
indicated by the arrows.
• Before reinstalling the moonroof motor, make
sure both link lifters are parallel, and in the fully
closed position.
• Before reinstalling the moonroof motor, install
the frame and glass, then check the opening drag
(see page 20-53).
7. Slide the cable assembly (A) and both glass

brackets (B) back, then remove them from the
frame (e).
BACK 20-51
Protected by AR
Moonroof
Limit Switch Adjustment

,. Remove the headliner (see page 20-59).
2. With the moon roof wrench, close the glass (A) fully:
• Make sure both link lifters (B) are parallel, and in the position shown.
• Check the glass fit to the roof panel and the glass height (see page 20-44).
~ F E
.
C
6x1.0mm
9.8 N·m(1.0 kgf.m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
3. With an open-end wrench, loosen the position switch mounting bolts (C).
4. Adjust the limit switch (0):
• Move the switch plate (E) a I:rtle at a time, then secure it at the position where you hear a faint click when the
switch cam (F) pushes the position switch (open/close).
• Check that the switch plate contacts the switch bracket (F).
5. Check the operation of the glass (from the tilt-up position to the fully closed position, and from the fully open
position to the fully closed position) by operating the moonroof switch.
20-52 BACK
Protected by AR
Closing Force and Opening Drag Check
1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-59). 4. Opening drag check: Protect the leading edge of the
glass with a shop towel (A). Measure the effort
2. Closing force check: required to open the glass using a spring scale (B)
as shown.
o With a shop towel (A) on the leading edge of the
glass (B), attach a spring scale (C) as shown.
o Have an assistant hold the switch to close the
glass while you measure the force required to
stop it.
o Read the force as soon as the glass stops moving,
then immediately release the switch and spring
scale.
Closing Force: 200-290 N (20-30 kgf, 44-66lbf)
5. If the load is over 40 N (4 kgf, 9 Ibf), check:
o The side clearance and glass height adjustment

(see page 20-44).
o For broken or damaged sliding parts. If any
sliding parts are damaged, replace them.
3. If the force is not within specification, remove the

moonroof motor (see page 20-47), then check:
o The gear portion and the inner cable for breakage

and damage. If the gear portion is broken,
replace the motor. If the inner cable is damaged,
remove the frame (see page 20-48), and replace
the cable assembly (see page 20-50).
o The moonroof motor (see page 22-218). If the
motor fails to run or doesn't turn smoothly,
replace it.
o The opening drag. Go to step 4.
BACK
20-53
Protected by AR
Interior Trim
CENTER PILLAR UPPER TRIM

page 20-55
FRONT DOOR TRIM
page 20-55
CENTER PILLAR LOWER TRIM PANEL
page 20-55
FRONT PILLAR TRIM
page 20-55
/ HEADLINER
I~.
~~~ . / Removal/Installation,
~ ~ page 20-59
~
KICK PANEL
page 20-55
~
CARPET
REAR DOOR SILL TRIM

page 20-55
SEAT SIDE TRIM
'99-01 models, page 20-56
REAR SHELF
REAR SPEAKER GRILLE

TRUNK FLOOR '99-01 models, page 20-56
page 20-58 '02-03 models, page 20-57
I
TRUNK REAR TRIM PANEL
page 20-58
REAR PILLAR TRIM
TRUNK SIDE TRIM PANEL

page 20-58
BACK
20-54
Protected by AR
Trim Removal/Installation - Door Area
NOTE:
• Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage.
• Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels.
1. Remove the trim as shown.
2. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:

• Apply liquid thread lock to the front seat belt upper anchor bolt before installation.
• Before installing the anchor bolts, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the belts.
Fastener Locations
A [> : Clip, 5 B [> : Clip, 9 FRONT SEAT BELT UPPER ANCHOR BOLT
7116-20UNF
CENTER PILLAR
UPPER TRIM
FRONT SEAT BELT
. / SHOULDER ANCHOR
/' ADJUSTER
-,i"
~W
\
Remove the rear seat
cushion. TAB t I
CENTER PILLAR [B] FRONT DOOR
LOWER TRIM SILL TRIM
PANEL
""'-[B]
[A] portions: [B] portions:
TRIM TRIM
BACK
20-55
Protected by AR
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Shelf Area
'99-01 Models
NOTE:
1. On '00-01 models, remove the child seat tether anchors to remove the speaker grille housing and both rear
shelves (see page 23-12).

• When installing the rear shelves, slip the rear seat belts and center belt through the slits in the rear shelf.
• Make sure the high mount brake light connectors are plugged in properly.
• '00-01 models: Make sure the child seat tether anchors are installed securely.
Festener Locations
iJ~ij ij ij
SPEAKER GRILLE HOUSING LEFT REAR SHELF
/
REAR PILLAR TRIM
Rem~ 'he m" '"'-00'''
Remove high mount
brake light sockets.
REAR DOOR TRIM
~
[Al
REAR SEAT BELT
[Al portions:
~
TRIM DOOR TRIM TRIM
BACK
20-56
Protected by AR
'02·03 Models
NOTE:

• When installing the rear shelves, slip the rear seat belts and center belt through the slits in the rear shelf.
• Make sure the high mount brake light connectors are plugged in properly.
Fastener Locations
REAR PILLAR TRIM

Remove the rear seat-back.
REAR SPEAKER GRILLE LEFT REAR SHELF
~
RIGHT REAR
SHELF
~
SEAT SIDE TRIM

TRIM DOOR TRIM
BACK
20-57
Protected by AR
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Area
NOTE:
• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective t ape to prevent damage.
2. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips.
Fastener Locations
~jJ~~ TRUNK FLOOR
~
ANCHOR
HOOK C
~
LEFT TRUNK SIDE
r ___ ""'f"#!~ .~
))
ANCHOR
______ HOOK
TRIM PANEL
(With OnStar system)
Remove the rear
seat-back
i, T:bOdY.
ANCHOR
HOOK
6x1.0mm
PIN
III <Y b' HI ANCHOR

LEFT TRUNK SIDE HOOK
TRIM PANEL
(Without OnStar system)
Remove the rear
seat-back
TRUNK SIDE
POCKET
TAB
/
TRUNK REAR /
. RIGHT TRUNK SIDE
TRIM PANEL
TRIM PANEL TRUNK SIDE Remove the rear seat-back
POCKET
TAB
BACK
2v" 58
<"
Protected by AR
Headliner Removal/Installation
NOTE: 3. Remove the roof console.

• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
protective tape to prevent damage. -1 Remove the lens (A).
• Take care not to bend and scratch the headliner. -2 Remove the screws.
• Be careful not to damage the dashboard and other -3 Pull out the roof console (B), and disconnect
interior trim. the spotlight connector (C).
1. Remove these items: Fastener Locations
• Front pillar trim, both sides, and the center pillar c

upper trim, both sides (see page 20-55)
• Ceiling light (see page 22-181)
• Rear window antenna terminal cover (see step 2
on page 20-36)
2. Remove the sunvisor (A) from each side.

Disconnect the vanity mirror light connectors (B)
(driver's and passenger's). Push in the tab (C) and
twist the holder (D), then remove it.
Fastener Locations
~:Screw.4
5 xO.8 mm
~4N.m
~ (0.4 kgf·m.
3lbf·ftl 4. Lower the grab handle, then pull back the caps (A).
D
Remove the bolts. then remove the grab handles
(B) (driver's and each passenger's).
Fastener Locations
~: Bolt. 2
6 x 1.0 mm View from outside
(©)mD 9.8N·m
(1.0kgf·m.
7.2Ibf.ftl
of vehicle
(cont'd)
BACK
20-59
Protected by AR
Interior Trim
Headliner Removal/Installation (cont'd)
5. Remove the headliner. 6. Install the headliner in the reverse order of removal,
-1 Remove the upper portion of the rear pillar
trim (A) from each side, '99-01 models (see o When reinstalling the headliner through the door
page 20-56), '02-03 models (see page 20-57). opening, be careful not to fold or bend it. Also, be
-2 Remove the socket plug (B) and roof trim (C). careful not to scratch the body.
-3 With the help of an assistant, detach the clips, o When reinstalling the roof trim (A), install the
and lower the headliner (0) . joint (B) toward the rear center.
-4 Remove the headliner through the front o Check that both sides of the headliner are
passenger's door opening. securely attached to the trim .
Fastener Locations
~:Clip,3
~ A
B A
A
B
20-60 BACK
Protected by AR
Carpet Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 3. Remove the clips (A, B, C), and release the retainers
SRS component locations (see page 23-14) and the (D), hooks (E) and fasteners (F), then remove the
precautions and procedures (see page 23-17) in the carpet (G).
SRS section before performing repairs or service.
Fastener Locations
NOTE:
• Take care not to damage, wrinkle, or twist the carpet.
• Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other
ATI B~i:~;~ 1 CC>'~2i
interior trim pieces.
• Front seats, both sides (see page 20-78)

• Dashboard lower cover (see page 20-65)
• Rear console (see page 20-62)
• Console panel (see page 20-63)
• Rear vent duct (see page 20-70)
• Rear seat cushion (see page 20-95)
• Center pillar lower trim panel, both sides, and the
kick panel, both sides (see page 20-55).
• Front seat belt lower anchor bolt, both sides (see
page 23-4)
• Fuel lid opener cover (see step 1 on page 20-137)
2. Remove the bolts (A, B), then remove the spring (C),
and disconnect the parking brake cables (D) from
the equalizer (E).
4. Install the carpet in the reverse order of removal,
Fastener Locations and note these items:
A ~: Bolt, 2 B ~: Bolt. 2
8 x 1.25 mm
©)nmnn @mD 22N·m
12.2 kgf·m,
• Take care not to damage, wrinkle, or twist the
carpet.
16Ibf·ft) • Make sure the seat harness is routed correctly.
• Slip the slits in the carpet over the hooks.
• Make sure the parking brake cables are
connected correctly. Asjust the parking brake
cables (see page 19-6).
BACK
20-61
Protected by AR
Console
Rear Console Removal/Installation
NOTE:
• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage .
• Take care not to scratch the front seat, dashboard and related parts.
1. Remove the rear console as shown.
2. Install the console in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Replace any damaged clips .

• Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly.
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw,4 1>: Clip, 10
~~
PASSENGER'S FRONT
CONSOLE TRIM
REAR CONSOLE MAT
DRIVER'S FRONT
CONSOLE TRIM
REAR CONSOLE
20-62
BACK
Protected by AR
Console Panel Removal/Installation
NOTE: 3. Remove the shift indicator trim ring.

protective tape, and apply protective tape around the
related parts to prevent damage .
• Take care not to scratch the front seat, dashboard,
and related parts.
• Driver's and passenger's front console trim (see

page 20-62)
• Rear console (see page 20-62)
2. Remove the driver's front console cover (A) and

passenger's front console cover (B).
4. Remove the console panel tray (A).
-1 Remove the screw (C, D).
-2 Detach the rear clips (E) by pulling both covers -1 Carefully insert a flat-tip screwdriver next to
outward. the clip (B), and detach the clips by prying on
-3 Pull both trim back to detach the front clips (F). the driver'S seat heater switch (C) and
passenger's seat heater switch (D). Take care
Fastener Locations not to scratch the console panel tray.
C~:Screw,5 -2 Pull out the switches, then disconnect the seat
Omw@ I heater switch connector (E).
-3 Gently pull out the console panel tray to
release the hooks (F) and tabs (G).
(cont'd)
BACK
20-63
Protected by AR
Console
Console Panel Removal/Installation (cont'd)
5. Remove the console panel (AI.
-1 Remove the screws (B, CI.

-2 Release the tabs (D).
-3 Disconnect the accessory socket connector (E).
Fastener Locations
B~: Screw, 2 C~Screw, 2
~ &J1U> I
D
6. Install the console panel in the reverse order of

• Replace any damaged clips .

• Make sure the connectors are plugged in
properly.
20-64
BACK
Protected by AR
Dashboard
Instrument Panel Removall Dashboard Lower Cover Removall

Installation Installation
NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the

• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with SRS component locations (see page 23-14) and the
protective tape, and apply protective tape around the precautions and procedures (see page 23-17) in the
related parts, to prevent damage . SRS section before performing repairs or service.
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related
parts. NOTE:
1. Tiltthe steering column down. protective tape, and apply protective tape around the
related parts, to prevent damage .
2. Remove the steering column upper cover (see page • Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related
17-27). parts.
3. Remove the instrument panel (A). 1. Detach the clips, and release the hook (A), then
remove the left dashboard side cover (8).
-1 Remove the screws.
Fastener Locations
-2 Gently pull out along the bottom to release the
lower clips (8), then along the top to release
I> : Clip, 3
the remaining clips (8 and C).
-3 Disconnect the TCS/cruise control main switch
connector (D) (3.2 TL) or VSA/cruise control
main switch connector (D) (3.2 TL-S), front fog
light switch connector ('02-03 models) (E), A
moonroof switch connector (F), select/reset
switch connector (G) and hazard warning
switch connector (H). Without navigation unit,
disconnect the clock connector and climate
control unit connectors.
Fastener Locations
~B~C~
Pry here with screwdriver
while pulling out on the
bottom of the cover.
4. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal,

and make sure each connector is plugged in
properly.
(cont'd)
BACK
20-65
Protected by AR
Dashboard
Dashboard Lower Cover Removall Glove Box Removal/Installation

Installation (cont'd)
SRS component locations (see page 23-14) and the
2. Remove the dashboard lower cover (A). precautions and procedures (see page 23-17) in the
SRS section before performing repairs or service.
-1 Remove the screw.
-2 Gently pull down on the lower cover to release NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and
the right clip (B), then detach the remaining related parts.
clips.
-3 Disconnect the panel brightness controller 1. Remove the screw, then remove the damper (A)
connector (C), and remove the cover. from the glove box.
Fastener Locations Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1 [> : Clip,S
~:Screw, 1
~~ ~
c
A B
3. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal,

and make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
2. While holding the glove box, remove the glove box

stop (C) on each side.
20-66 BACK
Protected by AR
3. Remove the screws, then remove the glove box. 6. Remove the screws (A and B), and detach the clips
(e and D). Disconnect the trunk lid opener main
Fastener Locations switch connector (E) and glove box light bulb
~:Screw,2 socket (F), then remove the glove box cover (G).
~
Fastener Locations
A ~: Screw, 3 B ~ : Screw, 2 Cl>: Clip, 3
Dl>: Clip,1
4. Remove the passenger's front console cover (see

5. Detach the clips, and release the hook (A), then

remove the right dashboard side cover (B).
Fastener Locations
l> : Clip, 3
~
7. Install the glove box in the reverse order of
removal, and make sure the trunk lid opener main
switch connector and glove box light bulb socket
are plugged in properly.
BACK
20-67
Protected by AR
Dashboard
Passenger's Center Vent Removal Passenger's Side Vent Removall

and Installation Installation
1. Wrap a flat-tip screwdriver with protective tape, 1. Wrap a flat-tip screwdriver with protective tape,
and apply protective tape around the related parts and apply protective tape around the related parts
to prevent damage. Carefully insert a flat-tip to prevent damage. Carefully insert a flat-tip
screwdriver next to the clip, and detach the clips by screwdriver next to the clip, and detach the clips by
prying on the passenger's center vent (A). Take prying on the passenger's side vent (A). Take care
care not to scratch the dashboard and related parts. not to scratch the dashboard and related parts.
Fastener Locations Fastener Locations
~!
[>: Clip, 2
~ B B
/ _ .'7,,' °.,
" .
\.r:,~~>
I •
.."::; ....
/'/ ,I ;
!J\
.' :
: :
l/ ,:~ ....:' / .. f
.-.;, ... ~: ....
;' f
./ :' :"
....... -......... '": -........... .....:" /:
~,· ....I..·........·
A
2. Remove the vent by releasing the hooks (8).
3. Reinstall the hook portions of the vent first, then 2. Remove the vent by releasing the hooks (8).
push the clip portions into place securely.
3. Reinstall the hook portions of the vent first, then
push the clip portions into place securely.
BACK
20-68
Protected by AR
Side Defogger Vent Trim Removal and Installation
,. Wrap a flat-tip screwdriver with protective tape,

and apply protective tape around the related parts
to prevent damage. Carefully insert a flat-tip
screwdriver next to the clip, and detach the clips by
prying on the side defogger vent trim (A). Take care
not to scratch the dashboard and related parts.
Fastener Location
2. Remove the vent trim by releasing the hook (8).
3. Reinstall the hook portion of the vent trim first, then

securely push the clip into place.
BACK
20-69
Protected by AR
Dashboard
Dashboard Removal/Installation
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 4. Remove the ground bolt (A) and mounting bolts (B).
SRS component locations (see page 23-14) and the Detach the clips, and wire harness clip (D), and on '
precautions and procedures (see page 23-17) in the 99-02 models, remove the data link connector (C)
SRS section before performing repairs or service. from the bracket. Release the tabs (E), then remove
the rear vent duct (F).
NOTE:
Fastener Locations
protective tape, and apply protective tape around the A~: Bolt, 1 B~:Bolt,2
related parts to prevent damage.
@mD
• An assistant is helpful when removing and installing 6x1 .0mm
the dashboard.
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m.
7.2Ibf.ft)
@ill- 5xO.8mm
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard, body, and
other related parts.
preset buttons.
o

• Console panel (see page 20-63)
• Glove box cover (see page 20-66)
• Audio unit (see page 22-202)
• Front pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-55)
• Rear console (see page 20-62) E
5. Disconnect the cable reel connector, immobilizer

receiver unit connector, steering angle sensor
connector, combination switch connectors, ignition
switch connectors and driver's airbag connector,
and lower the steering column (see page 17-27).
To prevent damage to the steering column, wrap it
with a shop towel.
BACK
20-70
Protected by AR
'99-01 models
6. Disconnect the side wire harness connectors (A), engine compartment wire harness connectors (8), door wire
harness connectors (C), dashboard wire harness connectors (D), steering hanger beam wire harness connectors
(E), brake switch connector (F), SRS wire harness connector(s) (G), ECM/PCM connectors (H), air mix control
motor connector (I), evaporator temperature sensor connector (J), mode motor connector (K), shift lock solenoid
connector (L), AfT mode switch connector (M), recirculation control motor connector (N), blower motor connector
(0), power transistor connector (P), roof wire harness connectors (Q) and air hose (R). On '00-01 models,
disconnect the passenger's door subharness connector (5). Using a Torx T30 bit, remove the ground bolt (T).
Detach all of the harness and connector clips.
Fastener Locations '00-01 models:
1>: Harness clip and connector clip
(cont'd)
BACK 20-71
Protected by AR
Dashboard
Dashboard Removal/ln:: :tallation (cont'd)
'02-03 models
7. Disconnect the side wire harness connectors (A), engine compartment wire harness connectors (8), door wire
harness connectors (e), passenger's door subharness connector (D), dashboard wire harness connectors (E),
steering hanger beam wire harness connectors (F), brake switch connector (G), SRS wire harness connector (H),
EeM/PeM connectors (I),lateral acceleration sensor connector (J) (3.2 TL-S), air mix control motor connector (K),
evaporator temperature sensor connector (L), mode motor connector (M), shift lock solenoid connector (N), AfT
mode switch connector (01, recirculation control motor connector (PI. blower motor connector (a), power
transistor connector (RI, roof wire harness connectors (S) and air hose (TI.Using a Torx T30 bit, remove the
ground bolt (U). Detach all ofthe harness and connector clips.
Fastener Locations
t> :Harness clip and connector clip E
~ ... R
E
Q
U
6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m · B '")~llJ
,
(1.0 kgf·m, JJ..~_E
7.2Ibf.ftl A
20-72 BACK
Protected by AR
8. From outside the driver's door, remove the caps (AI, then remove the bolts (B, C, 0, E, FI, and lift up on the
dashboard (GI to release it from the guide pins (HI.
Fastener Locations
B ~ : Bolt, 6 C ~ : Bolt, 3 D~: Bolt. 1 E ~ : Bolt. 3 F ~ : Bolt. 1
~ ~))))))!)))III1D
8x 1.2Smm
@J1I1I1!I}))ID 22 N·m 12.2 kgf.m.
16Ibf·ft)
H H G
H
B
A
9. Carefully remove the dashboard through the front door opening.
10. Install the dashboard in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Make sure the dashboard fits onto the guide pins correctly.
• Before tightening the bolts, make sure the dashboard wire harness and steering hanger beam wire harness are
not pinched.
• Make sure the connectors are plugged in properly, and the antenna lead is connected properly.
• Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets.
• Reset the clock.
BACK
20-73
Protected by AR
Dashboard
Steering Hanger Beam Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 4. Remove the screws (A and B), then remove the
brackets (C) from the dashboard (0). Disconnect the
1. Remove the dashboard (see page 20-70). equalizer unit connector (E).
2. Remove the following parts from the dashboard: Fastener Locations

A~;Scr.w,2 B~ : Scr.w,2
Q}» I ~
• Instrument panel (see page 20-65)
• Display unit (see page 22-434)
3. Release the wire harness (A) from the hooks (B).

Remove the sunlight sensor (C) by detaching the E D
clips (D), and disconnect the connector (E).
E
D
B A B
20-74 BACK
Protected by AR
5. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness connectors (A), cruise control unit connector (8), SRS wire harness
connector (e). On '03 model, disconnect the memory erase signal (MES) connector (D) from the driver's under
dash fuse/relay box. Detach the dashboard wire harness connector from the connector holder (E), and on '02-03
models, release it from the steering hanger beam wire harness connector (F). Release the passenger's airbag
connector (G) from the connector holder (H), and disconnect the connector. Remove the ground bolts (I). Detach
the harness clip and connector clips.
Fastener Locations
[>: Harness clip and connector clip
JC I
. ~6x1.0mm
~ 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2lbf.ftl
I
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ftl
A
I
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2lbf·ftl
(cont'd)
BACK
20-75
Protected by AR
Dashboard
Steering Hanger Beam Replacement (cont'd)
6. Remove the screws and the front passenger's airbag mounting nuts from the dashboard.
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Screw, 7 B ~ : Screw, 2 • : Nut, 3

(Gold) (Black)
~~ ~
6x1.0mm
® 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
7. Separate the dashboard (A) and steering hanger beam (8).
8. Install the beam in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Make sure the dashboard wire harness (e) and steering hanger beam wire harness (D) are not pinched .
• Make sure the connectors are connected properly.
20-76 BACK
Protected by AR
Seats
TRUNK PASS·THROUGH COVER
ARMREST
FRONT SEATS REAR SEAT

Removal/Installation, page 20·78 Removal/Installation, page 20-95
Disassembly/Reassembly.4·Way Power, page 20·80 Armrest Replacement, page 20-96
Disassembly/Reassembly-8-Way Power, page 20-82 Trunk Pass-through Cover Key Cylinder
Seat Wire Harness Installation, page 20-84 Replacement, page 20-97
Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly-4-Way Power, page 20-88 Seat-back Cover Replacement, page 20-98
Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly-8-Way Power, page 20-89 Seat Cushion Cover Replacement, page 20-99
Seat Cover Replacement, page 20-90
BACK
20-77
Protected by AR
Seats
Front Seat Removal/Installation
'00-03 models: SRS components are located in this area. 3. Lift up the front seat, then disconnect the seat
Review the SRS component locations (see page 23-14) harness connector (A). On '00-01 models,
and the precautions and procedures (see page 23-17) in disconnect the side airbag connector (B). And on
the SRS section before performing repairs or service. the '00-01 models passenger's seat only,
disconnect the OPDS unit connector (e), and detach
1. '00-03 models: Make sure you have the anti-theft the harness clips (D) and connector clip (E).
code for the radio, then write down the frequencies
for the radio preset buttons. Disconnect the '99 model 4-way power seat (passenger's):
negative cable from the battery, and wait at least 3
minutes before beginning work.
2. Remove the seat track end covers (A), and remove

the bolts securing the front seat (B). When prying
with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with protective
tape to prevent damage. Take care not to scratch
the body or tear the seat covers.
Festener Loc:etions
! • : Bolt. 4
~ 10X1.25mm
34N·m
(3.5kgf·m.
• 25Ibf·ft) A
'00 model 4-way power seat (passenger's):
o
'01-03 models 4-way power seat (passenger's):
.:J
o
B 0
BACK
20-78
Protected by AR
'99 modelS-way power seat (driver's): 4. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the
front seat through the front door opening.
5. Install the seat in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
• Make sure the seat harness connector is

connected properly.
• '00-03 models: Enter the anti-theft code for the
radio, then enter the customer's radio station
presets.
• '00-03 models: Reset the clock.
'00 modelS-way power seat (driver's):
B A
'01-03 models S-way power seat (driver's):
BACK
20-79
Protected by AR
Seats
Front Seat Disassembly/ F ~assembly - 4-Way Power
'99 Model
,. Disassemble the front seat as shown.
2. Reassemble the seat in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
• Route the seat wire harness correctly (see page 20-84).

• Make sure the bushing and pivot washer are installed correctly.
• Apply multipurpose grease to the moving portion of the seat track.
• To prevent wrinkles in the seat-back cover, stretch the material evenly over the pad.
HOOKS
SEAT·BACK
HEATER HARNESS
SEAT CUSHION
COVER
~ JL---= - HOOKS
POWER SEAT
SWITCH
10x 1.25 mm
47 N·m 14.8 kgf·m,
35lbf·ftl
SEAT LINKAGE
10 x 1.25 mm
47 N·m 14.8 kgf·m,
35lbf·ftl
CAPS SWITCH KNOBS
BACK
20-80
Protected by AR
'00-03 Models
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 23-14) and the precautions,
and procedures (see page 23-17) in the SRS section before performing repairs or service.
1. Disassemble the front seat as shown.
• Route the seat wire harness correctly, '00 model (see page 20-85), '01 model (see page 20-86), '02-03 models
(see page 20-87).
• Apply mUltipurpose grease to the moving portion of the seat track.
SIDEAIRBAG
HARNESS
SEAT CUSHION
COVER
HOOKS
OPDSUNIT
HARNESS
SEAT CUSHION
HEATER HARNESS
POWER SEAT
SWITCH
RECLINE COVER
10x 1.25mm
47 N·m 14.8 kgf·m,
35Ibf·ft)
10x 1.25mm SEAT LINKAGE

47 N·m 14.8 kgf.m,
35Ibf·ft)
CAPS
BACK
20-81
Protected by AR
Seats
Front Seat DisassemblyIReassembly - B-Way Power
'99-01 Models
'00-01 models: SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 23-14) and
the precautions and procedures (see page 23-17) in the SRS section before performing repairs or service.
1. Disassemble the front seat as shown.
• Route the seat wire harness correctly, '99 model (see page 20-84), '00 model (see page 20-85), '01 model (see
page 20-86).
• Apply multipurpose grease to the moving portion ofthe seat track.
PIVOT NUT
8x 1.25mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 Ibf·ft)
HOOKS
CLIPS
Replace.
10x 1.25 mm
47 N·m (4.8 kgf.m,
35Ibf·ft)
10x 1.25 mm
47 N·m (4.8 kgf·m,
35Ibf·ft)
POWER SEAT
A
SWITCH
10 x 1.25 mm f.
47 N·m (4.8 kgf·m,
35Ibf·ft)
tf)
SEAT LINKAGE
SWITCH KNOBS
BACK
20-82
Protected by AR
'02-03 Models
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 23-14) and the precautions,
and procedures (see page 23-17) in the SRS section before performing repairs or service.
1. Disassemble the front seat as shown. The driver's seat for the 3.2 TL is shown, the 3.2 TL-S is similar.
• Route the seat wire harness correctly (see page 20-87).

• Apply multipurpose grease to the moving portion of the seat track.
PIVOT NUT
HOOKS
CLIPS
Replace.
FRONT COVER
10x 1.25 mm
47 N·m (4.8 kgf·m,
35lbf·ftl
SEAT LINKAGE
HEIGHT OUTER
COVER
RECLINE COVER
BACK
20-83
Protected by AR
Seats
Front Seat Wire Harness Installation
'99 Model S-way power seat (with seat heater):
When assembling the seat cushion, make sure the seat D E

belt switch harness (A), seat harness (B), seat heater
harnesses (e), connectors (D), clips (E) and wire tie (F)
are fastened correctly.
D
4-way power seat (with seat heater):
E B E
A
E
E .. F."llil
9~ I, ,III E
c
To seat cushion To seat-back
F heater. heater.
E
To recline Toseet
motor. cushion.
To seat-back To seat cushion

heater. heater.
D B
To seat To recline
cushion. motor.
B D
BACK
20-84
Protected by AR
'00 Model S-way power seat:
When assembling the front seat, make sure the seat

belt switch harness (A), seat harness (8), seat heater
harnesses (e), side airbag harness (0), OPOS unit
harness (E), connectors (F), clips (G) and wire tie (H) are
fastened correctly.
4-way power seat: D
To seat cushion [A] [B)

heater.
To recline
motor. [C]
[C)
To recline
motor.
~ F B
L---, ~
~
G
B F
BACK
20-85
Protected by AR
Seats
Front Seat Wire Harness Installation (cont'd)
'01 Model a-way power seat (with driving position memory and
seat heater);
When assembling the seat cushion, make sure the seat
harnesses (e), side airbag harness (0), OPOS unit
o
fastened correctly.
H
"'t,., 7-n~H
H C
H
G
F G
F
G
To seat cushion
heater.
To recline
E ~~
~
[AlB]
" A
To seat cushion
heater.
~ F B
iGtJO
To recline
[C] motor.
~~ : B F
20-86 BACK
Protected by AR
'02-03 Models a-way power seat (with driving position memory and
seat heater):
When assembling the seat cushion, make sure the seat
harnesses (e), side airbag harness (D), OPDS unit
D
fastened correctly.
H C
A
III '\,!,~-t-. ~-!..tiJ~t-/-ttt--F
~Gi=;:=o-4+---G
H
B
F G
H
F D
C
. To seat cushion
heater.
To recline
motor. [C]
~ F B
To recline
[C] motor.
L--, ~
I~
G
~j~ B F
BACK
20-87
Protected by AR
Seats
Front Seat Linkage DisassemblyIReassembly - 4-Way Power
NOTE:
• Put on gloves to protect your hands .
• To remove the slide motor and slide gearbox, slide the front seat backward fully.
,. Disassemble the linkage as shown.
2. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
• Before installing the slide motor and slide gearbox, align portion (AI as shown to align both slide gearbox
positions.
• Apply mUltipurpose grease to the sliding and pivot portions of the linkage.
• Check operation of the recline and slide adjusters.
RECLINE MOTOR
8x 1.25 mm
14N·m
6x 1.0mm
/
9 N.m
kgf m 7 Ibf.ttl
~IiI~:~',\DE
'O·~f ~~ENDCAP
6X1.0mm /NDCAP
~Il~t-~ j
9N·m
(0.9 kgf·m, 7 Ibf·ttl
-IJI
~ ~ I ",)51 ~
~t .. ~m
6x 1.0mm
8N·m
ff
~
~.:.."a
..... 1. ~ L
~
N.m
9(0.9 f m , 7 Ibf.ttl
k g.
SLIDE JOINT CABLE
~
3.7 N·m (0.38 kgf.m, 2.7Ibf·ttl
SLIDE MOTORI
LEFT SLIDE GEARBOX
[A] 6x 1.0mm
9N·m
(0.9 kgf·m, 7 Ibf·ttl
BACK
20-88
Protected by AR
Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly - B-Way Power
NOTE:
• Before removing the front seat, raise the seat cushion to its maximum height.
• To remove the slide motor and slide gearbox, slide the front seat backward fully.
1. Disassemble the linkage as shown.
2. Reassemble the linkage in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
• Replace the bushing with new ones.

o Before installing the slide motor and slidegearbox, align portion (A) as shown to align both slidegearbox
positions.
• Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding and pivot portions.
• Check operation of the recline adjuster and slide/up-down adjusters.
li~~~.:~o Ibf.ft) /RECUNE BOOT
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR ~ . ..
DAMPERS ~~·~EARUP_DOWN
~ MOTOR
8x1.25mm
A14N.m
~
~
o \ '1.4 kgf·m, 10 Ibf.ft)
~ , ...____RECUNE ADJUSTER
[al[el ~
6x 1.0mm
9N·m
~DCAP
[/~
~t
[E]
~ ~1r"~~ r
~G " _____
SUDE/UP-DOWN
ADJUSTER
BUSHING 8 x 1.25 mm
RIGHT --------~~'lt..I"I..;,'oo;i~ ~ ~Replace. 14N·m
[~ A_(1.4 kgf.m, 10 Ibf·ft) 5 x 0.8 mm
S~"OX ~ 3.4N·m
00 ' - - - E N D CAP (0.35 kgf·m. 2.5Ibf·ft)
" " 8 x 1.25 mm

~t LINK COVERS ~~ ~f~p·4 kgf·m.
w~ Apply liquid thread lock.
6x 1.0mm
6 x 1.0 mm 9 N·m (0.9 kgf·m. 7 Ibf·ft)
9N·m
SLIDE MOTORI (0.9 kgf·m. 7 Ibf·ft)
" LEFT SUDEGEARBOX
3.7N·m \ 6x1.0mm
(0.38 kgf·m. 2.7 Ibf·ft) SLIDE JOINT CABLE 9 N·m (0.9 kgf·m. 7 Ibf.ft)
BACK
20-89
Protected by AR
Seats
Front Seat Cover Replacement
'00-03 models: SRS components are located in this area. Seat-back Cover
Review the SRS component locations (see page 23-14)
and the precautions and procedures (see page 23-17) in 1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-78).
the SRS section before performing repairs or service.
2. '99 model: Remove the seat-back heater harness
NOTE: from the seat cushion.
• '00-03 models: Seats with airbags are marked "SIDE
AIRBAG" on the seat-back. Because the component - 1 Disconnect the seat-back heater connector (A).
parts (seat-back cover, cushion, etc.) of seats with -2 Release the hooks (B), and pull back the seat
and without airbags are different, make sure you cushion cover (e).
install only the correct replacement parts. -3 Release the wire tie (D).
• '00-03 models: Do not repair torn or frayed seat-back -4 Pull out the harness (E).
covers. If necessary, replace the seat-back cover.
• Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat Driver's seat (the passenger's seat is similar):
covers.
B
• '00-03 models: Do not touch the OPDS sensor in the
seat-back pad and keep it away from oils. Oils can
corrode the sensor causing it to fail.
To seet-beck
heeter.
3. Fold the seat-back forward.
4. Remove the back panel, 4-way power seat

on '99 model (see page 20-80), 4-way power seat
on '00-03 models (see page 20-81), 8-way power
seat on '99-01 models (see page 20-82), 8-way
power seat on '02-03 models (see page 20-83).
5. Driver's seat: Remove the clip (A), then remove the

lumbar support knob (B).
~
;J
A~f
BACK
20-90
Protected by AR
6. Release the hooks (A. B, C), clips (0), and springs 3.2TL-S:
(E) (3.2 TL-S), then loosen the seat-back cover (F).
3.2 TL ('99 model):
F A
A A
7. Pull out the headrest guides (A) while pinching the

end of the guides, and remove them.
D A D
3.2 TL ('00-03 models):
B
A
\ A
(cont'd)
BACK
20-91
Protected by AR
Seats
Front Seat Cover Replacement (cont'd)
8. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover all the 9. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal,
way around, and release the clips (A) and fastener and note these items:
(B) (3.2TL-S), then remove the seat-back cover.
• To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back
3.2TL: cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly
over the pad before securing the hooks and clips.
• '99 model: Make sure the seat heater connector
is connected properly, and the seat heater
harness is routed properly.
• Replace any clips you removed with new ones.
A Install them with commercially available
upholstery ring pliers.
• Use only original Acura replacement seat-back
covers ('00-03 models).
• '00-03 models: Reinitialize the OPDS control unit
(see page 23-33).
3.2n-s:
20-92 BACK
Protected by AR
Seat Cushion Cover 5. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the
way around, and release the clips (A), then remove
1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-78). the seat cushion cover.
2. Remove the seat cushion, 4-way power seat 3.2TL:

on '99 model (see page 20-S0), 4-way power seat
A
on '00-03 models (see page 20-S1), S-way power
seat on '99-01 models (see page 20-82), 8-way
power seat on '02-03 models (see page 20-S3).
3. Remove the front cover from the seat cushion,

4-way power seat on '99 model (see page 20-S0),
4-way power seat on '00-03 models (see page 20-
81), 8-way power seat on '99-01 models (see page
20-82), 8-way power seat on '02-03 models (see
page 20-S3).
4. Release the clips (A) and hooks (8) from under the
seat cushion, then loosen the seat cushion cover
(e).
c A
3.2TL-S:
B B
(cont'd)
BACK
20-93
Protected by AR
Seats
Front Seat Cover Replacement (co nt'd)

• To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat

cushion cover, make sure the material is
stretched evenly over the pad before securing
the clips and hooks .
• Replace any clips you removed with new ones
(A). Install them with commercially available
upholstery ring pliers (8).
BACK
20-94
Protected by AR
Rear Seat Removal/Installation
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body or tear the seat covers.
1. Remove the rear seat as shown. The 3.2 TL is shown, the 3.2 TL-S is similar.
2. Install the seat in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
o Before attaching the rear seat-back and cushion, make sure there are no twists or kinks in the rear seat belts and
center belt.
o When installing the seat cushion, slip the seat belt buckles through the slits in the seat cushion.
Fastener Locations CENTER BELT
Remove the center belt from
A ~ : Bolt, 1 B ~ : Bolt, 3 the center belt guide.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
11.0 kgf·m,
7.21bf.ftl
HOOK
REAR SEAT
BELT BUCKLE
REAR SEAT BELT BUCKLE
BACK
20-95
Protected by AR
Seats
Rear Seat Armrest Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to tear the seams or damage the 3. Remove the beverage holder (A) from the armrest
seat covers. (B).
1. Remove the clip (A) from the left portion of the

armrest pivot.
2. Remove the armrest.
-1 Slide the armrest (A) toward the driver's side of

the vehicle.
-2 Remove the pivot shaft (B) from the collar (C)
on the passenger's side of the vehicle by
pulling up on the armrest, and remove the
pivot shaft (B) from the collar (0) by pulling up
on the armrest.
4. Install the armrest in the reverse order of removal.
20-96 BACK
Protected by AR
Trunk Pass-through Cover Key Cylinder Replacement
NOTE: 4. Remove the trunk handle (A) and rear seat handle
• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with (B) together at the same time .
protective tape to prevent damage .
• Take care not to scratch the cover.
,. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, pry the rear seat

handle (A) up at either hook portion (B) of the trunk
pass through cover (e). Then slide the handle half-
way up.
5. Remove the retainer clip (e), then remove the trunk

2. From the trunk compartment side of the cover, use pass-through cover key cylinder (0) from the cover
a small screwdriver and press the inside hook (A) (E).
down through the access hole (B).
6. Install the key cylinder in the reverse order of
• Put the two handles together before installing

them on the trunk pass-through cover .
• Make sure the trunk pass-through cover opens
properly and locks securely.
3. While pressing the hook, pry the trunk handle (e)

up with a flat-tip screwdriver.
BACK
20-97
Protected by AR
Seats
Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement
NOTE: 5. Release all the clips (A) and hook strips (8), and
• Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat fold back the seat-back cover (e).
covers .
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. '99-01 models:
1. Remove the seat-back (see page 20-95). B A B B
2. Remove the armrest (see page 20-96).
3. Remove the screws, and detach the hooks (A). then

remove the trunk pass-through cover (8).
Fastener Locations
~:Screw,2
~
A
B~ '02-03 models:
B A B B
4. Remove the screws, then remove the center belt

guide (A).
B
~~:Ui,o;th~
kk
~
20-98 BACK
Protected by AR
Rear Seat Cushion Cover

Replacement
6. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover (A) all the
way around, and release the clips (B) and fastener 1. Remove the seat cushion (see page 20-95).
(e) (3.2TL-S), then remove the seat-back cover.
2. Release all the clips (A) from under the seat
3.2TL: cushion, and fold back the seat cushion cover (B).
B B A
\ '-:1......1.....,:.'
B
3.2TL-S:
3. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the
way around, and release the clips (A) and fasteners
(B) (3.2TL-S), then remove the seat cushion cover.
3.2TL:
A
3.2TL-S:
A
c c
c B c
B B
7. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal, B
• To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back

cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly
over the pad before securing the hooks, clips,
and fasteners .
• Replace any clips you removed with new ones.
Install them with commercially available
upholstery ring pliers.
(cont'd)
BACK
20-99
Protected by AR
Seats
Rear Seat Cushion Cover Replacement (cont'd)

• To prevent wrinkles, make sure the material is

stretched evenly over the pad before securing
the clips and fasteners .
• Replace any clips (A) you removed with new
ones. Install them with commercially available
upholstery ring pliers (B).
A
BACK
20-100
Protected by AR
Bumpers
Front Bumper Removal/Installation
'99-01 Models
NOTE:
• An assistant is helpful when removing the front bumper.
• Take care not to scratch the front bumper and body.
1. Remove the front bumper as shown.
2. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Make sure the front bumper engages the side clips and hooks of the upper beam securely .
Fastener Locations
A~: Bolt, 2 B ~ : Screw. 2 C [> : Clip. 3 D [> : Clip, 6
_. f--,---,?~::' ~ jj ~ FRONT BULKHEAD COVER

HOOKS
FRONT BUMPER
UPPER BEAM
To upper beam.
D A
FRONT BUMPER
D
(cont'd)
BACK
20-101
Protected by AR
Bumpers
Front Bumper Removal/Installation (cont'd)
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Bolt, 6 B ~ : Bolt, 1 c ~: Bolt,6
~@n-
•
6x 1.0mm 8x 1.2Smm
9.8N·m 22N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, (2.2kgf·m,
7.2Ib(.ft) 16Ibf·ft)
FRONT BUMPER
UPPER BEAM
/
ABSORBER
ABSORBER BOX
FRONT BUMPER BEAM
20-102 BACK
Protected by AR
'02-03 Models
NOTE:
• An assistant is helpful when removing and installing the front bumper.
• Take care not to scratch the front bumper and body.
1. Remove the front bumper as shown.
• Make sure the front bumper engages the side clips and hooks of the corner upper beam on each side securely .
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Bolt, 2 B ~ : Screw, 2 C [> : Clip, 10 D [> : Clip, 6 E [> : Clip, 2
~
~~~~
6X1.0mm
9.8N·m
11.0 kgf·m,
7.21bf.ftl
RIGHT FRONT BUMPER

CORNER UPPER BEAM
-----------
INNER FENDER
A
D FRONT FOG LIGHT
CONNECTOR
(cont'd)
BACK
20-103
Protected by AR
Bumpers
Front Bumper Removal/Installation (cont'd)
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Bolt, 6 B ~ :Bolt,6
6X1.0mm SX1.25mm
9.SN·m 22N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, (2.2kgf·m,
• 7.2Ibf·ft) • 16Ibf·ft)
LEFT FRONT BUMPER

CORNER UPPER BEAM
FRONT BUMPER BEAM
ABSORBER BOX
BACK
20-104
Protected by AR
Front Bumper DisassemblyIReassembly
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the front bumper and front spoiler.
,. Disassemble the front bumper as shown.
2. Reassemble the bumper in the reverse order of disassembly. and replace any damaged clips.
Fastener Locations
~ : Bolt. 5 !> : Clip. 8
_@-6_X'.O~I ~
FRONT BUMPER
FRONT SPOILER
SPOILER
BACK 20-105
Protected by AR
Bumpers
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation
NOTE:
• An assistant is helpful when removing the rear bumper.
• Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and body.
1. Remove the rear bumper as shown.
• Make sure the rear bumper engages the hooks of the bumper spacers and upper beam on each side securely.
• Make sure the license plate light connector is plugged in properly.
~jSJ~ '.
r Locations B [> : Clip, 2
GROMMET
CLIP REAR BUMPER
A
REAR BUMPER
BACK
20-106
Protected by AR
Fastener Locations
. : Nut. 4 A ~ : Screw. 2 B ~ : Screw. 4
8.1.25mm
22N·m
12.2 kgf·m.
~ I~ ~
~
16Ibf·ft)
REAR BUMPER
UPPER BEAM
BUMPER SPACER
- __ B
B
ABSORBER BOX
BUMPER SPACER
BUMPER SPACER
REAR BUMPER
UPPER BEAM
BACK
20-107
Protected by AR
Hood
Replacement
1. Disconnect the windshield washer tube (A).
Fastener Locations
~ : Bolt, 4 6 x 1.0 mm I
@mID ~ .2 9.8N·m
10k ·m,
Ibrft) )
c _______
A
r
-XI-?
o
8x1.25mm
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m,
16Ibf·ft)
2. With a flat-tip screwdriver, pry the clips (B) out of the support struts (C) on each hood side, then release both
support struts from the pivot bolts (0) with the help of an assistant. Do not remove the clips from the support
struts. If necessary, release the support strut from the pivot bolt on the body, then remove the support strut.
3. With the help of an assistant, remove the bolts, then remove the hood (E). Take care not to damage the hood and
body.
4. Install the hood in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Before reattaching the support struts, adjust the hood alignment (see page 20-109).
• Make sure the hood opens properly and locks securely.
• Make sure the windshield washer tubes are connected properly.
• When reattaching the support struts, set the clips (A) to the original position, then attach the support struts (B)
on the pivot bolts (C) by pushing the support strut.
c -.:-\
20-108 BACK
Protected by AR
Adjustment
'99-01 Models
1. Remove the support strut from each side of the hood (see step 2 on page 20-108).
2. Slightly loosen each hood hinge bolt.
3. Adjust the hood alignment in this sequence .
• Adjust the hood right and left, as well as forward and rearward, by using the elongated holes on the hood hinge
(A) .
• Turn the hood edge cushions (B), as necessary, to make the hood fit flush with the body at front and side edges.
6x1.0mm
9.8 N·m 11 .0 kgf.m.
7.2Ibf·ft)
c o
\
6x1 .0mm
9.8 N·m 11.0 kgf·m.
7.2Ibf·ftl
4. Remove the front bulkhead cover (see step 1 on page 20-135), and adjust the hood latch (e) to obtain the proper
height at the forward edge, and move the hood latch right or left until the striker (0) is centered in the hood latch.
5. Tighten each bolt securely.
(cont'd)
BACK
20-109
Protected by AR
Hood
Adjustment (cont'd)
6. Install the support strut to each side of the hood

(see step 4 on page 20-108).
7. Check that the hood opens properly and locks

securely.
8. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting and

around the hinges.
9. Grease each location of the hood latch and hood

hinge as indicated by the arrows.
_---fiiiiDi
10. Reinstall the front bulkhead cover (see step 1 on

page 20-135).
20-110 BACK
Protected by AR
'02-03 Models
1. Remove the support strut from each side of the hood (see step 2 on page 20-108).
2. Slightly loosen each hood hinge bolt.
3. Adjust the hood alignment in this sequence .
• Adjust the hood right and left, as well as forward and rearward, by using the elongated holes on the hood hinge
(A) .
• Turn the hood edge cushions (B), as necessary, to make the hood fit flush with the body at front and side edges.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf.m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
4. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-103), and the hood latch cover (see step 2 on page 20-136). Adjust the
hood latch (e) to obtain the proper height at the forward edge, and move the hood latch right or left until the
striker (0) is centered in the hood latch.
(cont'd)
BACK
20-111
Protected by AR
Hood
Adjustment (cont'd) Hood Insulator Replacement
6. Install the support strut to each side of the hood 1. Using a clip remover, detach the clips. Release the
(see step 4 on page 20-108). hooks (A), then remove the hood insulator (B). Take
care not to scratch the hood.
7. Check that the hood opens properly and locks
securely.
Fastener Locations
8. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting and l>: Clip, 15
around the hinges.
9. Grease each location of the hood latch and hood

hinge as indicated by the arrows.
~ B
-~
---fiiiim
~
2. Install the insulator in the reverse order of removal,
and replace any damaged clips.
..$i9
10. Reinstall the front bumper (see page 20-103).
BACK
20-112
Protected by AR
Hood Seal Replacement
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the hood .
• Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
, . Remove the hood seal as shown.
2. Install the seal in the reverse order of removal, and

replace any damaged clips.
Fastener Locations
A 1>: Clip, 10
U;pi' ~~"_I
~ HOOD SEALS
HOOD SEAL
BACK
20-113
Protected by AR
Trunk Lid
Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
1. Using a clip remover, detach the clips, then remove the trunk lid trim (A).
Fastener Locations
[>: Clip, 15
2. Disconnect the trunk lid latch switch connector (A), and disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (B) from the trunk lid
latch.
~A
C~
~
D
C
3. Detach the harness clips (e), then remove the wire harness (D) and trunk lid opener cable from the trunk lid.
BACK
20-114
Protected by AR
4. Remove the bolts, then remove the trunk lid.
Fastener Locations
~: Bolt. 4
6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf.m,
7.2Ibf.ft)
5. Install the trunk lid in the reverse order of removal. and note these items:
• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly and opener cable is connected properly. and the wire harness
and opener cable are routed properly.
• Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely.
• Adjust the trunk lid alignment (see page 20-116).
BACK
20-115
Protected by AR
Trunk Lid
Adjustment
1. Slightly loosen each bolt.
2. Adjust the trunk lid alignment in the following sequence.
• Remove the rear shelves, '99-01 models (see page 20-56), '02-03 models (see page 20-57), and adjust the trunk
lid hinges (A) right and left, as well as forward and rearward, by using the elongated holes. Take care not to hit
the rear window when loosening the bolts (B).
• Turn the trunk lid edge cushions (e), in or out as necessary, to make the trunk lid fit flush with the body at the
rear and side edges.
• Remove the trunk rear trim panel (see page 20-58) and striker cover (0), and adjust the fit between the trunk lid
and the trunk lid opening by moving the striker (E).
B
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m
7.2Ibf·ft)
6x1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft) E
,,-\
:"" :
4. Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely.
BACK
20-116
Protected by AR
Trunk Lid Torsion Bar Replacement
1. If equipped, remove the navigation unit (see page 4. Remove the torsion bar center clip from the body.
22-433).
2. Remove the torsion bars (A) from the torsion bar

center clip (B).
B 5. Install the torsion bars in the reverse order of

3. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the • The shapes of the right torsion bar (A) and left
torsion bars with the torsion bar tool (A) from both torsion bar (B) are shown. Install the torsion bars
trunk lid hinges. First remove the right torsion bar properly.
(B), then remove the left torsion bar (e). • Adjust the torsion bars forward or rearward with
the torsion bar assembly tool.
B c • Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks
securely.
A
•o ==Higher
Normal position
tension
BACK
20-117
Protected by AR
Trunk Lid
Trunk Lid Weatherstrip Replacement
1. Remove the trunk lid weatherstrip by pulling it off. 3. Locate the painted alignment mark (A) on the trunk
lid weatherstrip (B). Align the painted mark with the
2. Apply sealant (SUNRISE MEISEl B-33C, or alignment tab in the center of the trunk, and install
equivalent) (A) in the groove of the trunk lid the weatherstrip. Make sure it's seated completely
weatherstrip (B) in the areas indicated by arrows. and facing in the direction shown. Make sure there
are no wrinkles in the weatherstrip.
Unit: mm lin.1
Center
523120.61
t ':;
ForN,... 1
~~I /
\ B
B
A Forward .
4. Check for water leaks.
BACK
20-118
Protected by AR
Trunk Lid Dynamic Damper Replacement
For Some Models
1. Remove the trunk lid trim (see page 20-114).
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the trunk lid

dynamic damper (A). Take care not to scratch the
trunk lid.
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
3. Install the damper in the reverse order of removal.
BACK
20-119
Protected by AR
Exterior Trim
Hood Molding Replacement Front Grille Replacement
'02-03 Models '99-01 Models
1. Remove the nuts, and detach the clip (A), then ,. Remove the nuts, and detach the clips, then
remove the hood molding (B). Take care not to remove the front grille (A) from the hood. Take care
scratch the hood. not to scratch the hood.
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations
• : Nut, 4
4xO.8mm .:Nut,5 1>: Clip, 2
@
J 6N·m
~
6x1.0mm
(O.6kgf·m,
4lbf·ftl G§ 9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf.ftl
/,,-
~,.
~ ~/ """"-
n - ~
' //
".j;
" B
2. Install the molding in the reverse order of removal,

and replace the clip if it's damaged. 2. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal,
BACK
20-120
Protected by AR
'02-03 Models
1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-103).
2. Remove the clips, and release the hooks (A) (three

places), then remove the front grille (B) from the
front bumper (C) by pulling it out. Take care not to
scratch the front bumper.
Fastener Locations
3. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal,

BACK
20-121
Protected by AR
Exterior Trim
Front Grille DisassemblyIReassembly
'99-01 Models
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the front grille and molding .
• Take care not to damage the lip. If the lip is damaged, replace the front grille and lip as an assembly.
1. Disassemble the front grille as shown.
2. Reassemble the grille in the reverse order of disassembly.
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 18
~
SPECIAL BOLT
FRONT GRILLE CUPS
~
~
~
f.'"~UP
,
EMBLEM
FRONT GRILLE
CENTER MOLDING
MOLDING
BACK
20-122
Protected by AR
'02-03 Models
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the front grille and molding.
,. Disassemble the front grille as shown.
2. Reassemble the grille in the reverse order of disassembly.
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw. 18
~ FRONT GRILLE BASE
FRONT GRILLE
MOLDING
FRONT GRILLE
CENTER MOLDING
FRONT "A" EMBLEM
BACK
20-123
Protected by AR
Exterior Trim
Emblem Replacement
NOTE: When removing the emblems, take care not to scratch the trunk lid.
Apply the emblem where shown, and note these items:
• Clean the trunk lid surface with a sponge dampened in alcohol.

• After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water off the surface.
3.2Tl and TYPE "S" EMBLEM
TRUNK LID
ACURA EMBLEM
Unit: mm (in.)
REAR "A" EMBLEM 3.2Tl EMBLEM
ALIGNMENT PINS
] 27
(1.1)
Edge of the trunk lid.

_ : Adhesive tapes _ : Adhesive tape (3M 4213. or equiralent)
REAR "A" EMBLEM (3M4213E, or equivalent)
ACURA EMBLEM (NITTO 500, or equivalent)
3.2TL EMBLEM
_ : Adhesive tape (3M 4213. or equicalent)
20-124
BACK
Protected by AR
Roof Molding Replacement
1. Apply protective tape to the body (A). Using a flat- 4. Pull up and release the rear bracket (A) from the pin
tip screwdriver wrapped with protective tape (8), (8), then remove the roof molding (C).
pry up on the roof molding (C). Take care not to
scratch the body.
/ A
5. Install the molding in the reverse order of removal,

A • Take care not to damage the windshield and rear

window moldings .
• Make sure the roof molding is installed securely.
c
2. Pull up and slide the roof molding to release the

front bracket (D) from the pin (E).
3. Pull up the front portion of roof molding.
BACK
20-125
Protected by AR
Exterior Trim
Roof Drip and Rear Pillar Moldings Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
1. Remove the screw from the front edge of the roof drip molding. Detach the moldings from each clip, then remove
the roof drip molding (A) and rear pillar molding (B) as an assembly. Take care not to scratch the body.
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, , C [> : Clip, 9 D[>: Clip.' E [> : Clip,' F [>: Clip, 2
~
€)mm>
2. Separate the roof drip molding and rear pillar molding.
3. Install the moldings in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• After joining the rear pillar molding (B) with the roof drip molding (A), lightly tap the locking tabs (e) .
20-126 BACK
Protected by AR
Fender IDoor Moldings Replacement
NOTE:
• Wrap the blade of your putty knife or flat-tip screwdriver with protective tape to prevent damage to the door.
• Be careful not to pry too far or you may bend the molding.
1. Prepare to release the molding clips from inside the vehicle.
• To remove the front fender molding, remove the inner fender (see page 20-129).
• To remove the front door molding, remove the front door panel (see page 20-6) and plastic cover.
• To remove the rear door molding, remove the rear door panel (see page 20-12) and plastic cover.
2. Release the clips (A), then remove the front fender molding (B). Release the clips (e) and gently pry the front door
molding (D) or rear door molding (E) away from the door while removing the adhesive tape (F) (3M 4212, or
equivalent).
Fastener Locations
A[>: Clip, 2 C [> : Clip, 12
D E
3. Install the moldings in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips and adhesive tape.
BACK
20-127
Protected by AR
Exterior Trim
Side Sill Panel Replacement
1. Remove the side sill panel.
-1 If equipped, remove the splash guard (A).

-2 Pull the inner fender (B) back as necessary, and remove the expansion clips (C).
-3 Slide the side sill panel (0) forward and remove it. Side clips (E) will stay in the body.
-4 Remove the side clips from the body.
Fastener Locations
~~
E~
~~
c
o
2. Replace any damaged clips.
3. Install the side clips on the side sill panel.
4. Hold the panel up, and fit all the side clips into the holes in the body, then push on the panel until the clips snap
into place.
5. Install all the expansion clips.
6. Install the inner fender and splash guard (if equipped).
20-128 BACK
Protected by AR
Fenderwell
Inner Fender Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body.
,. Remove the inner fender as shown.
2. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips.
Fastener Locations
A~: Bolt, 1 B ~ : Screw, 4 C [> : Clip, 9 0[>: Clip, 3
6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m
7.2Ibf·ft)
SIDE SILL PANEL

SPLASH SHIELD
FRONT
BUMPER
FRONT SPOILER
HOOK
To side
sill panel. B
SPLASH GUARD
(For some models)
BACK
20-129
Protected by AR
Fenderwell
Fuel Pipe Protector Replacement Rear Air Outlet Replacement
1. Remove the clips, then remove the fuel pipe ,. Remove the rear bumper (see page 20-106).
protector (A). Take care not to scratch the body.
2. Remove the screws, then remove the rear air outlet
Fastener Locations
(A). Take care not to scratch the body.
[>: Clip, 3 Fastener Locations
~
~: Screw, 2
~I
A
---
A
3. Install the outlet in the reverse order of removal.
2. Install the protector in the reverse order of removal,

BACK
20·130
Protected by AR
Openers
TRUNK LID OPENER CABLE

TRUNK LID OPENER

MOTOR
~c:::::-.Test, page 22-364
FUEL FILL DOOR LATCH

TRUNK LID
OPENER
SWITCH
Test, page 22-213
FUEL FILL DOOR OPENER CABLE
HOOD LATCH HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

Replacement, page 20-135 Replacement, page 20-135
BACK
20-131
Protected by AR
Openers
Hood Opener Cable Replacement
• Front bulkhead cover, '99-01 models (see step 1 on page 20-135), '02-03 models (see page 20-103).
• Front bumper, '02-03 models (see page 20-103).
• Hood hinge cover, '02-03 models (see step 2 on page 20-136).
• Inner fender, left side (see page 20-129)
• Kick panel, left side (see page 20-55)
2. Disconnect the hood opener cable (A) from the hood latch (B), '99-01 models (see page 20-135), '02-03 models
(see page 20-136), and hood release handle (C) (see page 20-135).
NOTE: '99-01 models are shown. '02-03 models are similar except the front bumper should be removed before
replacing the hood opener cable.
Fastener Locations
~gj
3. Using a clip remover, detach the clips (0, E) from the body, then remove the hood opener cable from the vehicle.
Take care not to bend the cable.
4. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips.
20-132
BACK
Protected by AR
Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement
• Rear seat cushion and rear seat-back (see page 20-95)

• Left rear shelf, '99-01 models (see page 20-56), '02-03 models (see page 20-57)
• Left seat side trim, '99-01 models (see page 20-56), '02-03 models (see page 20-57)
• Center pillar lower trim panel, left side (see page 20-55)
• Trunk side trim panel, left side (see page 20-58)
2. Pull the carpet back as necessary (see page 20-61).
3. Disconnect the fuel fill door opener cable (A) from the opener (B) (see step 2 on page 20-138).
Fastener Locations
4. Release the opener cable from the clips (C, D), and on '99-00 models, use a clip remover to detach the clip (E).
Then remove the fuel fill door latch (F).
5. Remove the fuel fill door opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to bend the cable .
6. Install the fuel fill door opener cable in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips.
BACK
20-133
Protected by AR
Openers
Trunk Lid Opener Cable Replacement
• Trunk lid trim (see page 20-114)

• Trunk side trim panel, left side (see page 20-58)
2. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (A) from the trunk lid latch (B) (see page 20-139).
Fastener Locations
C I> : Clip D I> : Clip, 3 E I> : Clip
'99-00 models, 2 With navigation, 2
~_"3 Jl\J ~T~

'99-00 models: '01-03 models:
B
Without navigation model only.
3. Release the opener cable from the clips (e,D). Using a clip remover, detach the clips (E), then remove the cable
bracket (F) from the body.
4. Remove the trunk lid opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to bend the cable.
5. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips.
BACK
20-134
Protected by AR
Hood Release Handle Replacement Hood latch Replacement
1. Remove the left kick panel (see page 20-55). '99-01 Models
2. Disconnect the hood opener cable (A) from the 1. Detach the clips, then remove the front bulkhead
hood release handle (8). Take care not to bend the cover (A). Take care not to scratch the cover.
cable.
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations
~ : Bolt, 2
6x1.Omm
~9.8N.m
~ (1.Okgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood latch (A)

3. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood release from the body.
handle.
Fastener Locations
4. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal, ~: Bolt, 3
6x 1.0mm
and note these items: 9.8N.m
(1.0 kgf·m A
• 7.2Ibf·ft)
• Make sure the hood opener cable is connected
properly .
• Make sure the hood opens properly.
(cont'd)
BACK
20-135
Protected by AR
Openers
Hood Latch Replacement (cont'o,
3. Detach the hood la .;.;n switch connector (A) and '02-03 Models
harness clip (B) ('01 model) from the body.
Disconnect the hood opener cable (C) from the 1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-103).
hood latch (D), and disconnect the hood latch
switch connector. Take care not to bend the cable. 2. Remove the clips, and release the hooks (A), then
remove the hood latch cover (B).
Fastener Locations
B
4. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and 3. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood latch (A)
note these items: from the body.
Fastener Locations
• Grease each location of the hood latch indicated
by the arrows. ~ : Bolt,3
• Make sure the hood opener cable is connected 6X1.0mm
properly and hood latch switch connector is 9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, B
plugged in properly. • 7.2Ibf·ft)
• Adjust the hood latch alignment (see step 4 on
page 20-109).
• Make sure the hood opens properly and locks
securely.
4. Detach the hood latch switch connector (B) from

the body. Disconnect the hood opener cable (C)
from the hood latch, and disconnect the hood latch
switch connector. Take care not to bend the cable.
20-136 BACK
Protected by AR
Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement
5. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and 1. Remove the screw, and release the hooks (A) by
note these items: sliding the opener cover (8) forward while pulling
up the opener knob (e), then remove the opener
• Grease the hood latch at each location indicated cover.
by the arrows.
Fastener Location
• Make sure the hood opener cable is connected
properly and the hood latch switch connector is ~ : Screw, 1
plugged in properly.
• Adjust the hood latch alignment (see step 4 on
page 20-111). A
• Make sure the hood opens properly and locks
securely.
(cont'd)
BACK
20-137
Protected by AR
Openers
Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement Fuel Fill Door Latch Replacement
(cont'd)
1. Pull the rear edge of the left trunk side trim panel
2. Loosen and remove the bolts, then remove the fuel back (see page 20-58).
fill door opener (A) from the body.
2. Turn the fuel fill door latch (A) 90°, and remove it.
Fastener Locations
~: Bolt. 2
6x 1.0 mm
@mmmm 9.8N·m
(1.0kgf·m.
7.2Ibf·ft)
3. Disconnect the fuel fill door opener cable (B), then

remove the opener. Take care not to bend the cable
4. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal,

• Make sure the opener cable is connected

properly .
• Make sure the fuel fill door opens properly.
20-138 BACK
Protected by AR
Trunk Lid Latch Replacement
3. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and 1. Remove the trunk lid trim (see step 1 on page 20-
note these items: 114).
• Grease each location indicated by the arrows. 2. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (A) and trunk
• Make sure the fuel fill door opens properly and lid latch switch connector (B), and detach the trunk
locks securely. lid latch switch connector from the trunk lid. Take
care not to bend the opener cable.
Fastener Locations
~: Bolt, 2
4. Check that the fuel fill door fits flush against the
body. If necessary, adjust it.
Fastener Locations
~ : Bolt,2 B
6x 1.0mm
@mID> 9.8N·m
(1 .0 kgf·m, 3. Remove the bolts, then remove the trunk lid latch
7.2Ibf·ftl (C).

note these items:
• Grease the locations of the trunk lid latch

indicated by the arrows.
• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly
and the opener cable is connected properly.
• Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks
securely.
BACK
20-139
Protected by AR
Frame
Subframe Replacement
After loosening the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones.
FRONT BEAM
Reference holes alignment:
REAR BEAM REFERENCE

HOLE
(Body side)
REAR BE
DAMPER
U"""" ~2'7kgf.m'20Ibf.ft)
t ~'
8x1.25
26 N·m
m
kgf.m.2.,~~1!l ~
AM
~~~ ).CJ:\~
~~F~~.rR~ . . . . = . ....---~~ARBEAM
8x 1.25mm
. REAR BEAM
26N.m (27 _____ II 11 DAMPER
fi~ SCREWDRIVER
or TAPERED PUNCH INSTALLATION
GEARBOX...............
•
------- -
REFERENCE
'R"'b.. m'~dOL)E
. . o. < MPER BRACKET •
7 :~~~~~TlON
(Both side~~ HOLES
Bottom view
(four places) :
--------~n -
~
REAR BEAM •
~
0
STIFFENER
A?>.o-...,.....r;::::::../ ~ 10x1.25mm
38 N·m (3.9 kgf·m,
28Ibf·ft)
~SPECIAL BOLT
14x 1.5 mm
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m. 76 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
/I~" N·m '6.5 kgf·m••7'''·ft'
WASHER ~ LOWER INSULATOR
~PECIAL BOLT
1~3x~.5mm
76Ibf.1:j (10.5 kgf.m.
20-140 BACK
Protected by AR
Reference holes alignment:
SUBFRAME
REAR SUSPENSION
SUBFRAME
11~~~:+_ _-INSTAlLATION
1.1 REFERENCE HOLE Bottom view
(Subframe side) (two places) :
SCREWDRIVER,
or TAPERED PUNCH
, / ~lOWER
~ INSULATOR
/
REAR SUSPENSION
SUBFRAME
To body.
REAR SUSPENSION
~ME8~T
8x 1.25 mm
22N·m
\
(2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
SPECIAL BOLTS
14x1.5mm
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76Ibf·ft)
Replace.
BACK
20-141
Protected by AR
Frame
Frame Repair Chart
Top View:
Unit : mm (inJ
0: Inner diameter
POINTh
~
POINT I
r-.-'~~~~~~Ff-7Jt1~~~=;;;=~~
o
ift';;ii
11:l~~ ,..CD
Ni=:
~:~~iii;;;;;; ;;;
..
i ..
0 Gi ii
,..:
!2.a==~Ift:nS ~ -C"I n n
i§g~i
0
0 ~
CENTER ..... en en CD ID ! Ci 1&

LINE
!
J
Uo",-'
D
., HIHI· 1ft 0 ?3) I
::;1/
130 410.21
15.12 77 13.01
200 17.9) 280 '11.01
268110.61 425116.71
321112.61
490 119.31 l 595 123.41
610124.01
1425 (56.10)
....
<
;~ r=========---=
20 .. 142 BACK
Protected by AR
POINTn
POINTq
~
POINTr
POINTm
'DIm.
-~
@
0
I I
I
I
rll~
~E!1
~~~~M
- r--;~.r- \ I ~ 0
\
1 1I > - -
..- -..,. ~ \
~
is ..,
iii is is !)r-
III!
....
0 en ,...
·0 ~ ~
~
ci iii .., 0 III III
..!::!
~
.., !!!.
N
....
!::!
~
.. ..
N
III ~ en -
......
lSi t-- -
:;:~
Nen
ri
0
I
ri
g
en
t--
V
.A"'l--,
~~ ~.
~
0
I I ~.~
®
I~\ , II ([ r - -
~~ ~~.
:\~W
' .......
~ '~
@
I
I
MI
tlll\~
~ ~ (
\.-
--- ~
~PaNT.
POINTp POINTt
2175 (85.63)
2266 (89.21 )
2395 (94.29)
2780(109.4)
2929 (115.3)
3001 (118.1)
3028 (119.2)
3038(119.6)
3230 (127.2)
~
3652(143.8)
(cont'd)
BACK
20-143
Protected by AR
Frame
Frame Repair Chart (cont'd)
Side View:
.11.510..&5
Unit : mm (in.)
iii: Inner diameter 2 - .11
10.(3)
.11 .510.(5)
POINTe
POINTf
269(10.6)
SECTlONBB SEcnONAA
POINTe POINTg
Upper Arm Point A Front Damper Center
M10x 1.25
Upper Arm Point

.11 10.(3) Engine Mount Point
M10x 1.25 M10 x 1.25
M14 x 1.5
.13 10.5) Engine Mount Point
20-144 BACK
Protected by AR
2-013
10.5)
SEcnONDD
Rear Damper Center
POINTw
~~irt:;~j~~==tI:::I;;~~020 10.8) Loc:ate Hole
I~
"I::
:..------=:3
POINTt
For Rear
09 10.35) For Rear Suspension
Suspension Sub·
Sub·frame Stay
frame
M14x 1.5
01510.59) Loc:ate Hole

POINTr
0810.31) For Rear
Suspension Sub·
POINTm , trame Stay
020 10.81 Locate tlole
011 .410.449) For Rear Suspension
Sub·frame
BACK
20-145
Protected by AR
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning)

Climate Control Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Special Tools ................................ 21-2 Replacement and Test ............. 21-54
Component Location Index ........ 21-3 Sunlight Sensor
NC Service Tips and Replacement and Test ............. 21-55
Precautions ............................... 21-6 Evaporator Temperature
NC Refrigerant Oil Sensor Test .............................. 21-56
Replacement ............................ 21-6 Power Transistor Test ................. 21-56
General Troubleshooting Air Mix Control Motor
Infomation ................................ 21-8 Test and Replacement ............. 21-57
DTC Troubleshooting Index ....... 21-9 Mode Control Motor
Symptom Troubleshooting Test and Replacement ............. 21-58
Index ......................................... 21-10 Recirculation Control Motor
System Description ..................... 21-12 Test and Replacement ....•.•...... 21-59
Circuit Diagram ............................ 21-16 Climate Control Unit Removal
DTC Troubleshooting .................. 21-20 and Installation ........................ 21-60
Recirculation Control Motor Climate Control Unit Bulb
Circuit Troubleshooting .......... 21-34 Replacement ............................ 21-61
ECT Sensor Circuit Evaporator Removal and
Troubleshooting ...................... 21-35 Installation ................................ 21-62
Communication Line Circuit Evaporator Components
Troubleshooting ...................... 21-36 Replacement ............................ 21-63
Climate Control Dust and Pollen Filter
Power and Ground Replacement .........•...........••..... 21-64
Circuits Troubleshooting ........ 21-37 * Blower Unit Removal and
Radiator and Installation ................................ 21-65
Condenser Fans Low Speed Blower Unit Components
Condenser Fan High Speed * Heater Unit/Core
Radiator and Heater Valve Cable
Condenser Fans High Speed Adjustment ............................... 21-68
Circuit Troubleshooting ....•..... 21-42 Compressor Replacement .......... 21-69
Condenser Fan Circuit Compressor Clutch Check .......... 21-71
Troubleshooting ...................... 21-43 Compressor Clutch Overhaul ..... 21-72
Radiator Compressor Relief Valve
and Condenser Fans Common Replacement ....................•....... 21-73
Circuit Troubleshooting .......... 21-45 Condenser Replacement ............ 21-74
Compressor Clutch Circuit Refigerant Recovery .................... 21-75
Troubleshooting ...................... 21-46 System Evacuation ...................... 21-76
NC Pressure Switch Circuit System Charging ......................... 21-77
Troubleshooting ...................... 21-50 Refrigerant Leak Test .................. 21-78
In-car Temperature Sensor NC System Tests ........................ 21-79
Replacement and Test ............. 21-53
Protected by AR
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning)
Special Tools
Tool Number Description

07SAZ-001000A
~
~7~J7
CD
I
21-2
BACK
Protected by AR
Climate Control
SERVICE VALVE
(LOW-PRESSURE SIDE)
RECEIVER/DRYER
COMPRESSOR
Clutch Check, page 21-71
Clutch Overhaul, page 21-72
Relief Valve Replacement, page 21 -73
(cont' d)
BACK 21-3
Protected by AR
Climate Control
FAN CONTROL RELAY (Type S model)

(Located in the multi-relay box)
Test, page 22-103
AIC PRESSURE SWITCH
RADIATOR FAN
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Test, page 21-54
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY,
RADIATOR FAN RELAY,
CONDENSER FAN RELAY, CONDENSER FAN
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
(Located in the under-hood fuse/relay box)
Test, page 22-103
21-4 BACK
Protected by AR
EVAPORATOR
Removal and Installation, page 21-62
EVAPORATOR COMPONENTS
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Test, page 21 -56
RECIRCULAnON CONTROL MOTOR

Test, page 21 -59
BLOWER UNIT
Removal and
DUST AND POLLEN FILTER

AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR

Test, page 21-57
CUMATE CONTROL UNIT

(With navigation system)
Removal and Installation, page 21-60
Bulb Replacement, page 21-61
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Test, page 21 -53
MODE CONTROL MOTOR CUMATE CONTROL UNIT

Test, page 21-58 (Without navigation system)
Replacement, page 21-58 Removal and Installation, page 21-60
BACK 21-5
Protected by AR
Climate Control
A/C Service Tips and Precautions \/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement

Recommended PAG oil: DENSO NO-OIL 8:
AWARNING
• Compressed air mixed with R-134a forms a • PIN 38897-PR7-A01AH: 120 mQ (4 fl·oz)
combustible vapor. • PIN 38899-PR7-A01: 40 mQ (11/3 fI·oz)
• The vapor can burn or explode causing serious
injury. Add the recommended refrigerant oil in the amount
• Never use compressed air to pressure test listed if you replace any of the following parts.
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air
conditioning systems. • To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the
container once dispensed, and never mix it with other
refrigerant oils.
• Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on
ACAUTION the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor absorption.
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. • Do ncit spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it off
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. immediately.
Condenser ............ 25 mQ (5/6 fl·oz, 0.9 imp.oz)

The air conditioning system uses HFC-134a (R-134a) Evaporator ............ 40 mQ (11/3 fl·oz, 1.4Imp·oz)
refrigerant and polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil, Line or hose .......... 10 mQ (1/3 fl·oz, 0.4Imp·oz)
which are not compatible with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant Receiver/Dryer ..... 10 mQ (1/3 fI·oz, 0.4Imp·oz)
and mineral oil. Do not use R-12 refrigerant or mineral Leakage repair ..... 25 mQ (5/6 fl·oz, 0.9 Imp·oz)
oil in this system, and do not attempt to use R-12 Compressor ......... For compressor replacement,
servicing equipment; damage to the air conditioning subtract the volume of oil drained
system or your servicing equipment will result. from the removed compressor from
Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is 160 mQ (51/3 fl·oz, 5.6Imp·oz), and
certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to drain the calculated volume of oil
remove R-134a from the air conditioning system. from the new compressor: 160 mQ (5
1/3 fl·oz, 5.6 Imp·oz) - Volume of
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work removed compressor =Volume to
area before resuming service. drain from new compressor.
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning NOTE: Even if no oil is drained from
systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested the removed compressor, don't
with compressed air. drain more than 50 mQ (1 2/3 fl·oz,
1.8 Imp·oz) from the new
Additional health and safety information may be compressor.
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant
manufacturers.
REMOVED NEW
COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR
• Always disconnect the negative cable from the
~ ~
battery whenever replacing air conditioning parts.
• Keep moisture and dirt out of the system. When
disconnecting any lines, plug or cap the fittings
immediately; don't remove the caps or plugs until () 0 () ()
just before you reconnect each line.
• Before connecting any hose or line, apply a few drops
of refrigerant oil to the O-ring.
• When tightening or loosening a fitting, use a second
wrench to support the matching fitting.
]~.!l- ~VEL -'~!l}
Li.J SAME . ."".
[] DRruNW<G
VOLUME } : A
• When discharging the system, use a R-134a

refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station; don't A: 160 m4 (5 1/3 fl·oz, 5.6Imp·ozl
release refrigerant into the atmosphere.
21-6 BACK
Protected by AR
EVAPORATOR
RECEIVER/DRYER
!fii;;o-.c::::::.._ _ _ CONDENSER LINE
CD
COMPRESSOR
BRACKET
®
COMPRESSOR
CD Discharge hose to the compressor (6 x 1.0 mml: 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ftl
® Discharge hose to the condenser (6 x 1.0 mml : 9.8 N·m (1 .0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ftl
® Condenser line to the condenser (6 x 1.0 mml : 9.8 N·m (1 .0 kgf.m, 7.2 Ibf·ftl
® Condenser line to the receiver/dryer (6 x 1.0 mml : 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ftl
® Receiver line to the receiver/dryer (6 x 1.0 mml : 9.8 N·m (1 .0 kgf.m, 7.2 Ibf·ftl
® Receiver line to the evaporator: 13 N·m (1.3 kgf·m, 9.4Ibf·ftl
<J) Suction hose to the evaporator: 31 N·m (3.2 kgf·m, 23 Ibf·ftl
® Suction hose to the compressor (6 x 1.0 mml: 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ftl
® Compressor to compressor bracket (8 x 1.25 mml : 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16lbf·ftl
® Compressor bracket to the engine block (10 x 1.25 mml : 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ft)
BACK 21-7
Protected by AR
Climate Control
How to Retrieve a DTC If there is any abnormality in the system, the

temperature indicator will light up the segment (A
The climate control unit has a self-diagnosis function. through N) corresponding to the error. The temperature
indicator will then alternate every second between
Running the SeH-diagnosis Function displaying "88" (all segments lit) and the error code
segment (A through N).
With Navigation System
NOTE: The system will only display the DTC when the
AUTO and OFF buttons are pressed. If you release the
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR buttons, the display will go blank. To return the display,
simply press the AUTO then the OFF buttons again.
r-----I/-----,
Ii ...· 1·::-..)
I~)~mly A) (m
To determine the meaning of the DTC, refer to the DTC
Troubleshooting Index. If there is no abnormality, the
segments will not light up.
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
AUTO BUTTON
C E B D
~il
Without Navigation System
L-:~O [f;;;0:-:
G-T#DfM-
A
I J
OI~~=~O
K I H N
Resetting the Self-diagnosis Function
«.~Io'~ (~I ~ D Turn the ignition switch OFF to cancel the self-diagnosis
function. After completing repair work, run the self-
diagnosis function again to make sure that there are no
AUTO BUTTON OFF BUTTON other malfunctions.
2. Press the AUTO button and then the OFF button.

Continue to hold both buttons down for 1 minute.
21-8 BACK
Protected by AR
To retrieve the OTC, you must run the self-diagnosis function (see page 21-8). In the case of multiple problems, the
respective indicator segments will come on. If indicator segments A, C, E, G, I and L come on at the same time, there
may be an open in the common ground wire of the sensors.
C E B D
A=@o~O=F
G_DrPo~O-J
K I H N
OTC Detection Item Page

(Temperature
Indicator segment)
A An open in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-20)
B A short in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see~age 21-21)
C An o~en in the outside air temp_erature sensor circuit (see page 21-21)
0 A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-23)
E An open in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-23)
F A short in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-24)
G An open in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-25)
H A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-26)
I An open in the air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-27)
J A Short in the air mix control motor circuit (see page 21 -27)
K A problem in the air mix control linkage, door or motor (see page 21-28)
L An open or short in the mode control motor circuit (see page 21-29)
M A problem in the mode control linkage, door, or motor (see page 21-30)
N A problem in the blower motor circuit (see~_age 21-31)
BACK 21-9
Protected by AR
Climate Control
TypeS Model
Recirculation control doors do not Recirculaion Control Motor Circuit • Blown fuse No.3 (7.5A) in the
change between Fresh and Troubleshooting (see page 21-34) driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
Recirculate • Cleanliness and tightness of all
connectors
The blower motor does not run ECT Sensor Circuit Troubleshooting Cleanliness and tightness of all
immediately even through the (see page 21-35) connectors
engine is fully warmed up
NOTE: The temperature control
dial or button must be set
between 60°F (18°C) and 90°F
(32°C)
No access to climate control Communication Line Circuit Cleanliness and tightness of all
functions from navigation panel Troubleshooting (see page 21-36) connectors
display
Both heater and AlC do not work Climate Control Power and Ground • Blown fuse No. 54 (40A) in the
Circuits Troubleshooting (see page 21- under-hood fuse/relay box, No.3
37) (7.5A) in the driver'S under-dash
fuse/relay box, and No. 13 (7.5A)
in the passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box
• Poor ground at No. G401
• Cleanliness and tightness of all
connectors
Both fans do not run at low speed Radiator and Condenser Fans Low • Blown fuse No. 58 (30A) in the
with the AlC on when the Speed Circuit Troubleshooting (see under-hood fuse/relay box, and
refrigerant pressure is below page 21-38) No.3 (7.5A) in the driver's under-
1,520 kPa (15.5 kgf/cm2, 220 psi) dash fuse/relay box
connectors
Condenser fan does not run at Condenser Fan High Speed Circuit • Blown fuse No.3 (7.5A) in the
high speed when the engine Troubleshooting (see page 21-41) driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
coolant temperature is above • Poor ground at No. G302
210°F (99°C) or the refrigrant • Cleanliness and tightness of all
pressure is above 1,520 kPa (15.5 connectors
kg/cm2, 220psi) with the AlC on
Both fans do not run at high speed Radiator and Condenser Fans High Cleanliness and tightness of all
with the AlC on when the Speed Circuit Troubleshooting (see connectors
refrigerant pressure is above page 21-42)
1,520 kPa (15.5 kg/cm2, 220 psi)
Compressor clutch does not Compressor Clutch Circuit • Blown fuse No. 58 (30A) in the
engage Troubleshooting (see page 21-46) under-hood fuse/relay box, No. 14
(7.5A) in the passenger's under-
clach fuse/relay box, and No.3
(7.5A) in the driver'S under-dash
fuse/relay box
connectors
AlC System does not come on AlC pressure Switch Circuit Cleanliness and tightness of all
(both fans and compressor) Troubleshooting (see page 21-50) connectors
BACK
21-10
Protected by AR
Except Type S Model

Recirculation control doors do not Recirculaion Control Motor Circuit • Blown fuse No.3 (7.5A) in the
change between Fresh and Troubleshooting (see page 21-34) driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
Recirculate • Cleanliness and tightness of all
connectors
The blower motor does not run ECT Sensor Circuit Troubleshooting Cleanliness and tightness of all
immediately even through the (see page 21-35) connectors
engine is fully warmed up
NOTE: The temperature control
dial or button must be set
between 60°F (18°C) and gO°F
(32°C)
No access to climate control Communication Line Circuit Cleanliness and tightness of all
functions from navigation panel Troubleshooting (see page 21-36) connectors
display
Both heater and AlC do not work Climate Control Power and Ground • Blown fuse No. 54 (40A) in the
Circuits Troubleshooting (see page 21- under-hood fuse/relay box, No. 3
37) (7.5A) in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box, and No. 13 (7.5A)
in the passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box
connectors
Condenser fans does not run at all Condenser Fan Circuit • Blown fuse No. 58 (20A) in the
(but radiator fan runs with the AlC Troubleshooting (see page 21-43) under-hood fuse/relay box, and
on) No. 3 (7.5A) in the driver's under-
dash fuse/relay box
connectors
Both fans do not run with the AlC Radiator and Condenser Fans • Blown fuse No. 57 (20A) and
on Common Circuit Troubleshooting (see No. 58 (20A) in the under-hood
page 21-45) fuse/relay box, and No.3 (7.5A) in
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box
connectors
Compressor clutch does not Compressor Clutch Circuit • Blown fuse No. 58 (20A) in the
engage Troubleshooting (see page 21-45) under-hood fuse/relay box, and
No.3 (7.5A) in the driver's under-
dash fuse/relay box
connectors
AlC System does not come on AlC Pressure Switch Circuit Cleanliness and tightness of all
(both fans and compressor) Troubleshootifl9 (see paoe 21-51) connectors
BACK 21-11
Protected by AR
Climate Control
System Description
The air conditioning system removes heat from the passenger compartment by circulating refrigerant through the
system as shown below.
6LUW~HFAN EVAPORATOR
EVAPORATOR IAh"nrntinn of heat)
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
EQUALIZING TUBE
EXPANSION VALVE (Meters pressure and
(Meters the required improves the expansion
amount of refrigerant valve reaction time)
into the evaporator)
CAPILLATV TUBE SENSING BULB

A/C PRESSURE SWITCH (Controls the temperature of the
When the refrigerant is below refrigerant leaving the evaporator
196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm' ,28 psi) by metering the expansion valve)
or above 3,140 kPa (32 kgf/cm' ,
455 psi), the NC pressure RELIEF VALVE
switch opens the circuit to (Relieves pressure at the
the NC switch and stops the compressor when the
air conditioning to protect the pressure is too high)
compressor.
When the refrigerant is above
1,520 kPa (15.5 kgf/cm' ,
220 psi), the NC pressure
switch switches the radiator
and condenser fans to high
speed.
HIGH PRESSURE VAPOR

RECEIVER/DRYER
(Traps debris, and
removes moisture) (i)i;Si,£,f2h1iMfiJ3 HIGH PRESSURE LIQUID
CONDENSER LOW PRESSURE LIQUID

(Radiation of heat)
LOW PRESSURE VAPOR
This vehicle uses HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant which does not contain chlorofluorocarbons. Pay attention to the
following service items:
• Do not mix refrigerants CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). They are not compatible.
• Use only the recommended polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil (OENSO NO-OILS) designed for the R-134a
compressor. Intermixing the recommended (PAG) refrigerant oil with any other refrigerant oil will result in
compressor failure.
• All AlC system parts (compressor, discharge line, suction line, evaporator, condenser, receiver/dryer, expansion
valve, O-rings for joints) have to be proper for refrigerant R-134a. Do not confuse with R-12 parts.
• Use a halogen gas leak detector designed for refrigerant R-134a.
• R-12 and R-134a refrigerant servicing equipment are not interchangeable. Use only a recovery/recycling/charging
station that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to service R-134a air conditioning
system.
• Always recover the refrigerant R-134a with an approved recovery/recycling/charging station before disconnecting
any AlC fitting.
21-12 BACK
Protected by AR
Ale Pressure Switch (Type S Model)

The AlC pressure switch consists of a High-Low pressure switch (AiC pressure switch A) and a Middle pressure switch .
(AiC pressure switch B) .
• High-Low pressure switch

If the refrigerant pressure becomes too high (due to blockage), or too low (due to leakage), the AlC pressure switch
sends a signal to the PCM to prevent the compressor from operating.
20kpa 590 kpa

(0.2 kgf/cm', 2.8 psi) (6.0 kgf/cm', 85 psi)
ON .•••...••.••.•
225kpa 2,550 kpa
(2.3 kgf/cm', 33 psi) (26.0 kgf/cm', 370 psi)
OFF
196 kpa 3,140kpa
(2.0 kgf/cm', 28 psi) (32.0 kgf/cm', 455 psi)
• Middle pressure switch

If the refrigerant pressure goes above or below 1,520 kpa (15.5 kgf/cm 2 , 220 psi), the AlC pressure switch sends a
signal to the climate control unit to change the speed of the condensor fan and radiator fan (High-Low).
290 kpa (3.0 kgf/cm', 43 psi)
ON ...................... .
1.520 kpa
(15.5 kgf/cm', 220 psi)
OFF
1,230 kpa
(12.5 kgf/cm', 178 psi)
HIGH-LOW
PRESSURE
SWITCH
MIDDLE
PRESSURE
SWITCH
(cont'd)
BACK 21-13
Protected by AR
Climate Control
System De~;: cription (cont'd)

Climate Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
CUMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTORS
CONNECTOR A (12P) CONNECTOR B (20P)
112 31415 ~ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
617 10111112 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
CONNECTOR A (0 on Circuit Diagram)
,
Cavity Wire color
BLU/BlK MODE DEF
Signal
OUTPUT
2 RED/YEl AIR MIX HOT OUTPUT
3 BlK GROUND OUTPUT
4 BRN/yEl REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY INPUT
5 RED/BlK TAilLIGHT RELAY INPUT
6 BlU/WHT MODE VENT OUTPUT
7 RED/WHT AIR MIX COOL OUTPUT
8 BlULRED BLOWER FEEDBACK INPUT
9 ORN/BlK POWER TRANSISTOR OUTPUT
10 WHT/YEl" +B (Power) INPUT
WHTJRED"
11 BlK/YEl IG2 (Power) INPUT
12 RED - - MU1.TIf'1EXJ::ONTROL UNIT (DRIVER'S) - _ . -- OUTPUT
CONNECTOR B (0 on Circuit Diagram)
Cavity Wire color Sianal

1 -- -- --
2 WHT/RED SUNLIGHT SENSOR OUTPUT
3 RED/WHT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR OUTPUT
4 BRNIWHT OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT
5 YEURED IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT
6 GRY AIR MIX POTENTIAL + 5V OUTPUT
7 PNK/BlK AIR MIX POTENTIAL OUTPUT
8'\ lTGRN/WHT NAVIGATION DISPLAY (ClK2) OUTPUT
9 GRN/WHT RECIRCULATE INPUT
10 GRN/RED FRESH INPUT
11 YEL/GRN AlC PRESSURE SWITCH INPUT
12 '\ lTGRN/RED NAVIGATION DISPLAY (501 OUTPUT
13 BRN EVAPOLATOR TEMPERRATURE SENSOR OUTPUT
14'\ lTGRN/BlK NAVIGATION DISPLAY (Sfl INPUT ...-
15 YEL/GRN SENSOR COMMON GROUND INPUT
16 BlU/WHT VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR IVSSI OUTPUT "-
17 GRN/BlK MODE 14 OUTPUT
18 GRN/YEl MODE 2 OUTPUT
19 lTGRN/BlK MODE36 OUTPUT
20 BlU/GRN MODE 5 OUTPUT - -
* 1: With navigation system

* 2: '99 model
* 3: '00-03 models
21-14 BACK
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Circuit Diagram
TypeS Model
UNDER-DASIf
IGNmON SWITCH FUSE/RELAYBOX
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/lIELAY BOX IGI HOT in ON III and START III i
No.6I1SAI
I I II
p~ rl--------------------~
+~
No.•11120AI No.4Z I&GAI
-@= IBLK/YEL ~BLK/YEL

Hol17.5A1
~mm~.~.
M« m~' m~=
~~ ~~ ,
II ~~--mm--i ~~ . . . - .. .... ~
~~--··---···i I I~--·------·~11
ZI RADIATOR z I CONDENSER Z I COMPRESSOR I3 BLOWER
FAN FAN CLUTCH MOTOR
RELAY RELAY RElAY RELAY
WHT
.-~
FUSE/RELA~H
UNDER-D
BOX
No.1.
I7.SAI ~
TI ~~~ rI .:lr
BLU'JBLK GRN BLU(va REO BLK YE~BLK
Z ~
CONOENSER0
FAN G20Z
MOTOR M
1
MULTI-RELAY
BOX
BLU/WHT BLKi.YEL
11
• J GRN ---+-{Azo RED/WHT REO/WHT -
ENGINE
COOlANT
mlPERATURE
&1
FAN
CONTROL 1 IECTI SENSOR
RELAY
GRN/YEL
• I ZI
A/C
GL
PRESSURE
1 I BLutl
~GRN -
~ - ~~~~'T~:I',--
1
A/C
DIOOE C
......- - - - + - G R N
A/C
DIODE A
ZG::i]1
L!:!I
BLU
RED/BLK
D
3
B
-_-_- Z
~1
~~DEB
BI.~BLK ~
Z 1 AIC PRESSURE SWITCH A :
RADIATOR RADIATOR RADIATOR
The high-low switch open when
M FAN ,FAN , FAN the refrigerant prauure Is below
MOTOR 2 ~ITCH C SWITCH A 196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm', 28 psll or
1 Cloud : Above ) 1 (Closed: Abo.. ) above 3,140 kPa (32.0 kgf/cm',
1O'f I99'CI 199'F 193'Cl
r
455 psi)
BLK
I
AIC PRESSURE SWITCH B :
Tha middle switch close when the
........ refrigerant pressure is above
1,520 kPa (15.5 kgf/cm', 220 psll
GZ01 GZOI G302 G1D1
21-16 BACK
Protected by AR
, : With navigation syst..
BLK/VEL
NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT'
5V
4 SO
No.13
17.5AI
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
l-{ 2 CLK2
SV
BLOWER
MOTOR
BlJ( EL WHT/RED
BLKIYEL WHT ED
3 SI
BLU RED
POWER
TRANSISTOR
RADIATOR
FAN
- YEL/WHT CONTROL
MOOULE
---YEL
GAUGE
l
ASSEMBlY
---GRN
1
RADIATOR
, FAN A : IN-CAR TEMPERATURE
SWITCHB SENSOR
~19'f
2 Closed : Abo.. B : 0UTSI0f All
1104'CI ) TEMPERATURE SENSOR
C : SUNLIGHT SENSOR
1 1 SV
D : EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATUllE SENSOR
VEUGRN
G401 G101
GALIGE
RED/WHT ASSEMBLY
SSV S-COM
AMD-P
All MIX
M-COOL CONTROL
MOTOR
M-HOT
M-VENT 10
S-COM
M-DEF
11:
MOOE2
-----------------------VEUG~
MODE1 MODE
CONTROL
REAR MODU MOTOR
~=ER [ ) - - - B~/YEL MOOES
RELAY MODel
MODE6
TAUlJGHT ~ RED/BLK
RELAY ~
MULTI'LEX FRS REaRCULATION

~OL <r-RED
CONTROL
REC MOTOR 1G2 BLK/YEL
IDRIVER'S)
PCM IVSSI <:}-- BLU/WHT --@__~""-I o :CONNECTOR A(1ZPI

~--------------~
CUMATE CONTROL UNIT
o: CONNECTOR 8 (2OPI
G401
BACK
21-17
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Except Type S Model
ORIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
IGNITION SWITCII RJSf/RELAY BOX
UNDER-HOOD RJSfIRELAY BOX IGI HOT in ON 1111 ond START III I
No.6115A1
No.4216OA1 }yEL BlK/VEL
WKT~
iG2 YEL
';3n.5A1
BLK/YEL
IV
No.411120AI No.54I40AI IG2 HDT in ON lUI
L r- BLK/VEL
YEL
No.5614OA1
No57120AI No.5812OA1
RADIATOR CONDENSER COMPRESSOR BLOWER

FAN FAN CUJTQI MOTOR
RELAY 1 RELAY 4 RELAY RELAY
f:- ----------- f:------ ----- - ------ ------:1
t:-
8LU EL
~=-I L
GRN
BLU LK GRN
G202
A/C
PRESSURE
SWITCH
RADIATOR
FAN
BLU/RED
~ YWGRN -
5 HA
Closed : Above) 1
199'F 193'CI GAN
~-Ji~-- 2
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
IECTI SENSOR
GRN/BLK-2 1
GAN/YEL-3
~ATOR M CONlENS
FAN M
ITOR MOTOR
BLKJYEL
YEl/WKT
YEL
WKT
BlK/VEL
BLK
5
lr •
1
2
RADIATOR
FAN
=:~bo
~'9'F .
1104'CI )
r
G201 G1Dl G201 G1Dl GCOI
21-18 BACK
Protected by AR
'1 : Wr1h nlvigllion system

'2 : '99 model
'3 : '00-03 models
NAVIGATION DISPLAY UMT'1

5V
4 SO
11
LTGRN/RED YEll LK
2 COO BLOWER
LTGRN/WHT MOTOR M
5V
3 SI
LTGRN/BiJ( SLU/ EO
No.13
17.5.\1 POWER
TRANSISTOR
PASSENGER'S
lNIER-DASH
FUSE/llELAY
lOX
GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
A : IN-CAR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
- - - t " 'W'',M--t B : ~mM~RE SENSOR
. . .-----=~:~ --t"'V\/Irl--1
C : SUNLIGHT SENSOR
0:~~if:E SENSOR
------------YELJGRN ~f--.-K:I-1H-""'- YEL/GRN
- - - - - - - REDtwHT - 0 ( 3 ) - - -........,
-----oQSSV S-'COIo1IQ---i
AMD-P
AIR MIX
M-COOL CONTROL
!lEAR MOTOR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER [:>- BRN/YEL DRMNG
M-HOT
RELAY QRCUIT
M-VENT 10
S-CO
M- DEF
[:>- REO/BiJ(
11:
TAlWGHT MODE2
RELAY
MODEl MODE
CONTROl.
M0DE4 MOTOR
LIGHTS
MODE5
IIULTPLEXUNT
CONTlIOL
PRMR'SI
<J- RED ~-1L.J--
MOO£3
MODES
5V
B
FRS RECIRCULA110N
PCM (VSSI <}- BLU/WHT -o{j8)-"~""'" CONTROL
REC MOTOR 1G2 BLK/VEL
o: CONNECTOR A112PI
ClMA TE CONTROl. LlNIT

o: CONNECTOR B(2OP1
G401
BACK
21-19
Protected by AR
Climate Control
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC indicator light A: An Open in the In-car 4. Check for continuity between the No.5 terminal of
Temperature Sensor Circuit climate control unit connector B (20P) and the No. 2
terminal of the in-car temperature sensor 2P
1. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (see page connector.
21-53).
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
2. Measure the resistance between the No.1 and
No.2 terminals of the in-car temperature sensor.
*Check for a change in resistance by heating or
cooling the sensor with a hair drier.
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

12 YES - Go to step 5.
11
10 1\ NO - Repair open in the wire between the climate
9
\ control unit and the in-car temperature sensor.•
8
\
7
\ 5. Check for continuity between the No. 15 terminal of
RESISTANCE \ climate control unit connector B (20P) and the No.1
kQ 6
terminal of the in-car temperature sensor 2P
5
4
3
'"'" I~
connector.
2 " ........ .......... Wire side of female terminals
1 r--
-~
14 32 50 68 86 104 of
-10 0 10 20 30 40 °C
TEMPERATURE
"Is the resistance within the specifications shown

on the graph?
YES-Go to step 3. IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

NO- Replace the in-car temperature sensor.•
3. Disconnect climate control unit connector 8 (20P).
YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at
climate control unit connector B (20P) and at the in-
car temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
connections are good, substitute a known-good
climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/
indication goes away, replace the original climate
control unit..
NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate

control unit and the in-car temperature sensor..
21-20 BACK
Protected by AR
DTC indicator light B: A Short in the In-car DTC indicator light C: An Open in the Outside
Temperature Sensor Circuit Air Temperature Sensor Circuit
,. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (see page ,. Remove the outside air temperature sensor (see
2'-53). page 21 -54).
2. Testthe in-car temperature sensor (see page 21-53). 2. Measure the resistance between the No. , and
No.2 terminals ofthe outside air temperature
/s the resistance within the specifications shown sensor.
on the graph? * Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure
resistance. Then pour hot water on the sensor, and
YES-Go to step 3. check for a change in resistance.
NO- Replace the in-car temperature sensor.• OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

climate control unit connector 8 (20P) and body
ground.
CliMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
YEL/RED
I~ 12
/ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
1\
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 10
9
\
8
\
.Q \
RESISTANCE 7
kQ 6
= 5 '\
4
3
2
'"."" i'-.
......
1 r---
between the climate control unit and the in-car 14 32 50 68 86 104 of
-10 0 10 20 30 40°C
temperature sensor..
TEMPERATURE
NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit, * /s the resistance within the specifications shown
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, on the graph?
replace the original climate control unit.•
YES - Go to step 3.
NO - Replace the outside air temperature sensor.•
(cont'd)
BACK
21-21
Protected by AR
Climate Control
4. Check for continuity between the No.4 terminal of 5. Check for continuity between the No. 15 terminal of
climate control unit connector B (20P) and the No.1 climate control unit connector B (20P) and the No.2
terminal of the outside air temperature sensor 2P terminal of the outside air temperature sensor 2P
connector. connector.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P) CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES- Go to step 5. YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at

climate control unit connector B (20P) and at the
NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate outside air temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
control unit and the outside air temperature connections are good, substitute a known-good
sensor .• climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/
control unit.•

control unit and the outside air temperature
sensor.•
21-22 BACK
Protected by AR
DTC indicator light D: A Short in the Outside DTC indicator light E: An Open in the
Air Temperature Sensor Circuit Sunlight Sensor Circuit
1. Remove the outside ai r temperature sensor (see 1. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
page 21-54).
2. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (20P).
2. Test the outside air temperature sensor (see page
21-54). 3. Check for continuity between the No.2 terminal of
climate control unit connector B (20P) and the No.1
Is the resistance within the specifications shown terminal of the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
on the graph?

YES-Go to step 3.
NO- Replace the outside air temperature sensor..

7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
climate control unit connector B (20P) and body
ground.
SUNLIGHT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

BRN/WHT
I ~
V 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
.Q YES-Go to step 4.

control unit and the sunlight sensor .•

between the climate control unit and the outside air
temperature sensor .•
NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,

and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original climate control unit .•
(cont'd)
BACK
21-23
Protected by AR
Climate Control
4. Check for continuity between the No. 15 terminal of DTC indicator light F: A Short in the Sunlight
climate control unit connector B (20P) and the No.2 Sensor Circuit
terminal of the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
1. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
Wire side of female terminals 2. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (20P).

2 I 3 I 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 I 8 I 9 I 10
11 112113114115116117118119120 ground.
i
VEL/GRN
VEL/GRN
lWHT/RED ~
SUNLIGHT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

/ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Wire side of female terminals 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
YES-Go to step 5.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the climate
control unit and the sunlight sensor.. Is there continuity?
5. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector. YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the climate control unit and the sunlight
6. Reconnect climate control unit connector B (20P) . sensor .•
7. Testthe sunlight sensor (see page 21-55). NO - Go to step 4.
Is the sunlight sensor OK? 4. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at 5. Reconnect climate control unit connector B (20P).
climate control unit connector B (20P) and at the
sunlight sensor 2P connector. If the connections are 6. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-55).
good, substitute a known-good climate control unit,
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, Is the sunlight sensor OK?
replace the original climate control unit..
YES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
NO-Replace the sunlight sensor .• and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
NO-Replace the sunlight sensor.•
21-24 BACK
Protected by AR
DTe indicator light G: An Open in the 4. Check for continuity between the No. 13 terminal of
Evaporator Temperature Sensor Circuit climate control unit connector B (20P) and the No.2
terminal ofthe evaporator temperature sensor 2P
1. Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector.
connector.
No. 2 terminals of the evaporator temperature
sensor.
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

40 Is there continuity?
YES - Go to step 5.
30
~
RESISTANCE
kQ NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate
20 control unit and the evaporator temperature
~ I'--...
sensor .•
10
---
32 50 68 86°F
o 10 20 30°C
TEMPERATURE
Is the resistance within the specifications shown

on the graph?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO- Replace the evaporator temperature

sensor.•
(cont'd)
BACK 21-25
Protected by AR
Climate Control
5. Check for continuity between the No. 15 terminal of DTC indicator light H: A Short in the
climate control unit connector B (20P) and the No.1 Evaporator Temperature Sensor Circuit
terminal ofthe evaporator temperature sensor 2P
connector. 1. Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor 2P
connector.
2. Test the evaporator temperature sensor (see page
21-56).
Is the resistance within the specifications shown

on the graph?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO - Replace the evaporator temperature

sensor.•
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR 3. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (20P).
Is there continuity? climate control unit connector B (20P) and body
ground.
YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
climate control unit connector B (20P) and at the CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
connections are good, substitute a known-good 15<'1
climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/ 10
control unit.•
20
NO - Repair open in the wire between the climate

control unit and the evaporator temperature
sensor.•
~-

between the climate control unit and the
evaporator temperature sensor .•

and recheck.lfthe symptom/indication goes away,
21-26 BACK
Protected by AR
DTC indicator light I: An Open in the Air Mix DTC indicator light J: A Short in the Air Mix
Control Motor Circuit Control Motor Circuit
1. Disconnect the air mix control motor 5P connector. 1. Disconnect the air mix control motor 5P connector.
2. Disconnect climate control unit connectors A (12P) 2. Disconnect climate control unit connectors A (12P)
and B (20P). and B (20P).
3. Check for continuity between following terminals 3. Check for continuity between body ground and
of climate control unit connectors A (12P) and B climate control unit connector A (12P) terminals
(20P) and the air mix control motor 5P connector. No.2 and 7 individually, and between body ground
12P: 5P: and climate control unit connector B (20P)
No. 2 No.1 terminals No.6, 7 and 15 individually.
No.7 No.2
20P: 5P:
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (12P)
No.6 No.4
No. 7 No.3
No. 15 No. 5


Is there continuity? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at Is there continuity?

climate control unit connectors A (12P) and B (20P)
and at the air mix control motor 5P connector. If the YES-Repair any short to body ground in the
connections are good, substitute a known-good wire(s) between the climate control unit and the air
climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/ mix control motor.•
control unit.. NO - Go to step 4.
NO-Repair any open in the wire(s) between the

climate control unit and the air mix control
motor.•
(cont'd)
BACK 21-27
Protected by AR
Climate Control
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same DTC indicator light K: A Problem in the Air
terminals for voltage. Mix Control Linkage, Door, or Motor
1. Test the air mix control motor (see page 21-57).
Is the air mix control motor OK?
YES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,

NO-Goto step 2.
2. Remove the air mix control motor (see page 21-57).
3. Check the air mix control linkage and door for

Wire side of female terminals smooth movement.
Do the air mix control linkage and door move

smoothly?
YES-Replace the air mix control motor.•
NO - Repair the air mix control linkage or door.•
Is there any voltage?

the climate control unit and the air mix control
motor. This short also damages the climate control
unit. Repair the short to power before replacing the
climate control unit .•

21-28 BACK
Protected by AR
DTC indicator light L: An Open or Short in the 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same
Mode Control Motor Circuit terminals for voltage.
1. Disconnect the mode control motor 1OP connector.

2. Disconnect climate control unit connectors A (12P)
and B (20P).

climate control unit connector A (12P) terminals
No.1 and 6 individually, and between body ground
and climate control unit connector B (20P)
terminals No. 15, 17, 18, 19 and 20 individually.

Wire side of female terminals LTGRN/BLK
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P) = = =

Is there any voltage?
VES- Repair short to power in the wire between

the climate control unit and the mode control motor.
This short also damages the climate control unit.
Repair the short to power before replacing the
climate control unit.•
NO-Go to step 5.
VES- Repair any short to body ground in the wire

(s) between the climate control unit and the mode
control motor..
NO-Go to step 4.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-29
Protected by AR
Climate Control
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for DTC indicator light M: A Problem in the Mode
continuity between following terminals of climate Control Linkage, Doors, or Motor
control unit connectors A (12P) and B (20P) and the
mode control motor 10P connector. 1. Test the mode control motor (see page 21-58).
12P: 10P:
No.1 No.2 Is the mode control motor OK?
No.6 No.1
20P: 10P: YES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
No. 15 No. 10 and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
No. 17 No.6,9 replace the original climate control unit.•
No. 18 No.8
No. 19 No. 4,7 NO-Goto step 2.
No. 20 No. 5
2. Remove the mode control motor (see page 21-58).
3. Check the mode control linkage and doors for
smooth movement.
Do the mode control linkage and doors move

smoothly?
BLU/WHT
YES-Replace the mode control motor.•
LT GRN/BLK r. '
:0' , I.Q)I------.
NO- Repair the mode control linkage on doors .•
MODE CONTROL MOTOR

10 P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female
terminals
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT

CONNECTOR B (20P)
Wire side of female
terminals
YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at

climate control unit connectors A (12P) and B (20P)
and at the mode control motor 10P connector. If the
climate control unit, and recheck. Ifthe symptom/
control unit.•
NO - Repair any open in the wire(s) between the

climate control unit and the mode control motor..
21-30 BACK
Protected by AR
OTC indicator light N: A Problem in the 7. Check for continuity between the No.5 terminal of
Blower Motor Circuit the power transistor 5P connector and body ground.
1. Check the No. 56 (40A) fuse in the under-hood POWER TRANSISTOR SP CONNECTOR
fuse/relay box, and the No.3 (7.5A) fuse in the
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO- Replace the fuse(s), and recheck .•

Q
2. Connect the No.1 terminal of the blower motor 2P -=
connector to body ground with a jumper wire.
BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES - Go to step 8.
NO- Check for an open in the wire between the

JUMPER BLU/RED power transistor and body ground. If the wire is OK,
WIRE check for poor ground at G401 .•
8. Connect the No.4 and No.5 terminals of the power

transistor 5P connector with a jumper wire.
-=
Wire side of female terminals POWER TRANSISTOR SP CONNECTOR
Does the blower motor run?
YES - Go to step 4.
BLU/RED BLK
NO-Go to step 17.

JUMPER WIRE
5. Disconnect the jumper wire. Wire side of female terminals
6. Disconnect the power transistor 5P connector. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Does the blower motor run at high speed?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the power

transistor and blower motor.•
11. Disconnect the jumper wire.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-31
Protected by AR
Climate Control
12. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (12P). 15. Reconnect climate control unit connector A (12P).
13. Check for continuity between the No.8 and No.9 16. Testthe power transistor (see page 21-56).
terminals of climate control unit connector A (12P)
and body ground individually. /s the power transistor OK?
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (12P) YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
climate control unit connector A (12P) and atthe
power transistor 5P connector. If the connections
are good, substitute a known-good climate control
unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original climate control unit.•
NO - Replace the power transistor..

= = 17. Disconnect the jumper wire.
18. Disconnect the blower motor 2P connector.
/s there continuity? 19. Measure the voltage between the No.2 terminal of
the blower motor 2P connector and body ground.
YES - Repair any short to body ground in the
wire(s) between the climate control unit and the BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
power transistor.•
NO-Go to step 14.
14. Check for continuity between the following

terminals of climate control unit connector A (12P)
and power transistor 5P connector.
12P: 5P:
No.8 No.1
No.9 No.3 Wire side of female terminals

YES-Replace the blower motor .•
NO - Go to step 20.
21. Remove the blower motor relay from the under-

hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-103).
POWER TRANSISTOR 5P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals /s there relay OK?
/s there continuity? YES - Go to step 22.
YES - Go to step 15. NO - Replace the blower motor relay .•

climate control unit and the power transistor..
21-32 BACK
Protected by AR
22. Measure the voltage between the No.4 terminal of 25. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
the blower motor relay 4P socket and body ground.
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET the blower motor relay 4P socket and body ground.
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET
Is there battery voltage? =
YES-Go to step 23. Is there contnuity?
NO- Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.• YES- Repair open in the wire between the blower
motor relay and the blower motor .•
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the
24. Measure the voltage between the No.1 terminal of blower motor relay and body ground. If the wire is
the blower motor relay 4P socket and body ground. OK, check for poor ground at G202 .•
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET
YES-Go to step 25.

fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and
the blower motor relay .•
BACK 21-33
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No.3 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's under- 8. Check for continuity between the No.9 and No. 10
dash fuse/relay box. terminals of climate control unit connector B (20P)
and body ground individually.
Is the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck .•
2. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 5P

connector.

-=
the recirculation control motor 5P connector and
body ground. Wire side of female terminals
RECIRCULAnON CONTROL MOTOR Is there continuity?

5P CONNECTOR
wire(s) between the climate control unit and the
recirculation control motor.•
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and check the same

wires for voltage.

YES-Go to step 5.

the recirculation control motor.• -= -=
6. Test the recirculation control motor
(see page 21-59). Is there any voltage?
Is the recirculation control motor OK? YES-Repair short to power in the wire between
the climate control unit and the recirculation
YES-Go to step 7. control motor. This short also damages the climate
control unit. Repair the short to power before
NO-Goto step 12. replacing the climate control unit.•
7. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (20P). NO-Go to step 10.
21-34
BACK
Protected by AR
ECT Sensor Circuit Troubleshooting
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 1. Check the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).
11. Check for continuity between the following Does the malfunction indicator lamp come on?
terminals of climate control unit connector B (20P)
and the recirculation control motor 5P connector. YES - Refer to the fuel and emissions section (see
20P: 5P: page 11-3) .•
No.9 No.1
No. 10 No. 2 NO-Go to step 2.

3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector (see page
GRN/WHT 11-93).

RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR ground.
5P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)

climate control unit connector B (20P) and at
recirculation control motor 5P connector. If the
control unit.•
NO- Repair any open in the wire(s) between the Wire side of female terminals
climate control unit and the recirculation control
motor.. Is there about 5 V?
12. Remove the recirculation contol motor YES- Check for loose wires or poor connections at
(see page 21-59). climate control unit connector B (20P) and at the
ECT sensor 2P connector. If the connections are
13. Check the recirculation control linkage and doors good, substitute a known-good climate control unit,
for smooth movement. and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original climate control unit..
Do the recirculation control linkage and doors
move smoothly? NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate
control unit and the ECT sensor .•
YES- Replace the recirculation control motor .•
NO- Repair the recirculation control linkage or

doors .•
BACK 21-35
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Communication Line Circuit Troubleshooting
With Navigation System 4. Check for continuity between the body ground and
climate control unit connector B (20P) terminals
1. Disconnect navigation display unit connector A (5P). No.8, 12 and 14 individually.
CLIMATE CONTf'OL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)

3. Check for continuity between the following LTGRN/WHT

terminals ofthe climate control unit connector B 1 9 110
(20P) and navigation display unit connector A (5P).
19 I 20
20P 5P
No.8 No.2
No. 12 No.4
No. 14 No.3


wire(s) between the climate control unit and the
n navigation display unit.•
NO-Check for loose wires or poor connections at

climate control unit connector B (20P) and at
navigation display unit connector A (5P). If the
climate control unit. If the problem still exists,
NAVIGATION DISPLA V UNIT CONNECTOR A (5P) replace the navigation display unit.•
YES-Go to step 4.

climate control unit and the navigation display
unit .•
21-36 BACK
Protected by AR
Climate Control Power and Ground Circuits Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 54 (40A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/ 6. Measure the voltage between the No. 10 terminal
relay box, the No.3 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's of climate control unit connector A (12P) and body
under-dash fuse/relay box, and the No. 13 (7.5A) ground.
fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES- Go to step 2.
NO - Replace the fuse(s), and recheck .•
2. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (12P).

=
4. Measure the voltage between the No. 11 terminal Wire side of female terminals
of climate control unit connector A (12P) and body
ground. /s there battery voltage?
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (12P) YES-Go to step 7.
NO- Repair open in the wire between the No. 13

and the climate control unit.•

climate control unit connector A (12P) and body
ground.
=
YES-Go to step 5.

fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and =
the climate control unit.•

climate control unit connector A (12P). Ifthe
connections are good,substitute a known-good
control unit..

climate control unit and body ground. If the wire is
OK, check for poor ground at G401 . •
BACK 21-37
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Radiator apd Condenser Fans Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
TypeS Model 4. Connect the No .., and No.2 terminals of the

condenser fan relay 4P socket with a jumper wire.
,. Check the No. 58 (30A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and the No.3 (7.5A) fuse in the CONDENSER FAN RELA V 4P SOCKET
Are the fuses OK?

JUMPER
YES-Go to step 2. WIRE
1
NO - Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.•
2
BLU/VEL
2. Remove the condenser fan relay from the under-
hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-103). ,-413~
Is the relay OK?
Does the condenser fan run?
YES-Go to step 3.
YES - Go to step 5.
NO - Replace the condenser fan relay .•
NO-Go to step 14.
the condenser fan relay 4P socket and body ground. 5. Disconnect the jumper wire.
CONDENSER FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET 6. Tu ,··' the ignition switch ON (II).

the condenser fan relay 4P socket and body ground.
2 CONDENSER FAN RELAV 4P SOCKET
4 I 3
YES - Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.• Is there battery voltage?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 32.
9. Reinstall the condenser fan relay.
10. Remove AlC diode A from the right side of dash.
21-38 BACK
Protected by AR
11. Check for current flow in both directions between 17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then turn the AlC
the No.1 and No. 2 terminals of AlC diode A. and fan switches ON.

A/C DIODE A
the condenser fan 2P connector and body ground.
CONDENSER FAN 2PCONNECTOR
1 2
10 ~ 02
Is there current flow in only one direction?

YES-Gotostep 12.
NO-Replace AlC diode A..
NO- Repair open in the wire between the
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). condenser fan relay and the condenser fan .•
13. Measure the voltage between the No.2 terminal of 19. Turn the AlC and fan switches OFF, then turn the
AlC diode A 2P connector and body ground. ignition switch OFF.
A/C DIODE A 2P CONNECTOR 20. Reconnect the condenser fan 2P connector.
21. Connect the No.1 terminal of the condenser fan 2P

connector to body ground with jumper wire.
CONDENSER FAN 2P CONNECTOR
BLU/WHT
JUMPER
WIRE
YES - Repair open in the wire between AlC diode A

and the AlC pressure switch .• 22. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then turn the AlC
and fan switches ON.
condenser fan relay and AlC diode A.. Does the condenser fan run?
14. Disconnect the jumper wire. YES - Go to step 23.
15. Reinstall the condenser fan relay. NO - Replace the condenser fan motor.•
16. Disconnect the condenser fan 2P connector.

(cont'd)
BACK
21-39
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Radiator and Condenser Fans Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
23. Turn the AlC and fan switches OFF, then turn the 30. Check for continuity between the No.4 terminal of
ignition switch OFF. the fan control relay 5P socket and the No.2
terminal of the radiator fan 2P connector.
FAN CONTROL RELAY SP SOCKET
25. Remove the fan control relay from the multi-relay

box, and test it (see page 22-103).
2
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 26.
NO- Replace the fan control relay .•
26. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then turn the AlC
and fan switches ON. RADIATOR FAN 2P CONNECTOR
the fan control relay 5P socket and body ground. Is there continuity?
FAN CONTROL RELAY SP SOCKET

YES-Goto step 31.
iBLU/WHT NO-Repair open in the wire between the fan

control relay and the radiator fan .•
2
the radiator fan 2P connector and body ground.
RADIATOR FAN 2P CONNECTOR

condenser fan and the fan control relay .• Wire side of female terminals
28. Turn the AlC and fan switches OFF, then turn the
ignition switch OFF. Is there continuity?
29. Disconnect the radiator fan 2P connector. YES - Replace the radiator fan motor.•

radiator fan and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G201 .•
21-40 BACK
Protected by AR
Condenser Fan High Speed Circuit

Troubleshooting
32. Measure the voltage between the No. 3 terminal of
the radiator fan control module 8P connector and
body ground with the 8P connector connected. Type S Model
RADIATOR FAN CONTROL MODULE 1. Check the No.3 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's under-
8P CONNECTOR dash fuse/relay box.
VEL/WHT
Is the fuse OK?
1 234
YES-Go to step 2.
567 8
NO- Replace the fuse, and recheck .•
2. Remove the fan control relay from the multi-relay

box, and test it (see page 22-103).
Is the relay OK?
Is the battery voltage? YES - Go to step 3.
YES- Repair open in the wire between the NO- Replace the fan control relay .•
condenser fan relay and the radiator fan control
module .• 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NO- Perform the radiator and condenser fans 4. Measure the voltage between the No. 5 terminal of
circuit troubleshooting A (see page 10-25) .• the fan control relay 5P socket and body ground.
FAN CONTROL RELA V 5P SOCKET
YES- Go to step 5.

the fan control relay .•
(cont'd)
BACK 21-41
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Condenser Fan High Speed Circuit Radiator and Condenser Fans High
Troubleshooting (cont'd) Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
6. Check for continuity between the No.2 terminal of TypeS Model

the fan control relay 5P socket and body ground .
1. Remove AlC diode B from the right side of the
FAN CONTROL RELAY SP SOCKET under-dashboard area.
2. Check for current flow in both directions between

2 IBLK the No.1 and No.2 terminals of AlC diode B.
A/CDIODEB
-=
YES-Repair open in the wire between the fan 10 IIIIIIII 02

control relay and AlC diode B.•
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the fan Is there current flow in only one direction?
control relay and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G302 .• YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Replace AlC diode B.•

AlC diode B 2P connector and body ground.
AIC DIODE B 2P SOCKET
-=
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the radiator

fan relay and AlC diode B.•
21-42
BACK
Protected by AR
Condenser Fan Circuit

Troubleshooting
6. Reinstall AlC diode B. Except Type 5 Model

7. Disconnect the AlC pressure switch 4P connector. 1. Check the No. 58 (20A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and the No.3 (7.5A) fuse in the
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
9. Measure the voltage between the No.2 terminal of Are the fuses OK?
the AlC pressure switch 4P connector and body
ground. YES-Go to step 2.
AIC PRESSURE SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR NO- Replace the fuse(s), and recheck .•
2. Remove the condenser fan relay from the under-

hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-103).
Is the relay OK?
YES - Go to step 3.
Wire side of female terminals NO- Replace the condenser fan relay .•

Is there battery voltage? the condenser fan relay 4P socket and body ground.
YES-Go to step 10. CONDENSER FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
NO-Repair open in the wire between AlC diode B

and the AlC pressure switch .•
2
4 3
terminals of the AlC pressure switch 4P connector.
AIC PRESSURE SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
YES - Go to step 4.
NO - Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.•

YES - Replace the AlC pressure switch .•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the AlC

pressure switch A and B.•
(cont'd)
BACK
21-43
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Condenser Fan Cin ,,it Troubleshooting (cont'd)
4. Connect the No.1 and No 2 terminals of the 8. Measure the voltage between the No.3 terminal of
condenser fan relay 4P socket with a jumper wire. the radiator fan control module 8P connector and
body ground with the 8P connector connected.
RADIATOR FAN CONTROL MODULE
CONDENSER FAN RELA V 4P SOCKET 8P CONNECTOR
VEL/WHT
iliJill
JUMPER
WIRE ~
U/VEL '::/..
Does the condenser fan run? /s there battery voltage?
YES - Go to step 5. YES-Repair open in the wire between the

condenser fan relay and the radiator fan control
NO-Go to step 9. module .•
5. Disconnect the jumper wire. NO - Perform the radiator and condenser fans
circuit troubleshooting A (see page 10-25).•
the condenser fan relay 4P socket and body ground. 10. Disconnect the condenser fan 2P connector.
CONDENSER FAN RELAV 4P SOCKET 11. Check for continuity between the No.2 terminal of
the condenser fan relay 4P socket and the No.2
terminal of the condenser fan 2P connector.
CONDENSER FAN RELA V 4P SOCKET
4
BLU/VEL
VEL/WHT
-=
YES-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.• Wire side of female terminals
NO - Go to step 8. /s there continuity?
NO - Repai r open in the wi re between the

condenser fan relay and the condenser fan .•
21-44 BACK
Protected by AR
Radiator and Condenser Fans

Common Circuit Troubleshooting
the condenser fan 2P connector and body ground.
Except Type S Model
1. Check the No. 57 (20A), No. 58 (20A) fuses in the
under-hood fuse/relay box, and the No.3 (7.5A)
fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO- Replace the fuse(s), and recheck .•

4. Using a 8ackprobe Set, measure the voltage
YES - Replace the condenser fan motor.. between the No. 20 terminal of PCM connector A
(32P) and body ground with the PCM connectors
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the connected.
condenser fan and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G201 .• PCM CONNECTOR A(32PI
YES-Check for loose wire or poor connections at

PCM connector A(32P).lf the connections are good,
substitute a known-good PCM,and recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes awaY,replace the original
PCM .•
NO - Repair open in the wire between the radiator

fan relay, the condenser fan relay and the PCM .•
BACK
21-45
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting
TypeS Model 5. Connect the No. 1 and No.2 terminals of the

compressor clutch relay 4P socket with a jumper
1. Check the No. 58 (30A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/ wire.
relay box, No. 14 (7.5A) in the passenger's under-
dash fuse/relay box, and the No.3 (7.5A) fuse in the COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELA V 4P SOCKET
Are the fuses OK? JUMPER

WIRE
YES-Go to step 2.
2
1--,---11 WHT
NO - Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.•
4 I 3
2. Check the engine coolant temperature.
Is the coolant temperature above normal? Does the compressor clutch click?
YES- Troubleshoot and repair cause of high YES-Go to step 6.

engine coolant temperature .•
NO-Go to step 15.
NO - Go to step 3.
3. Remove the compressor clutch relay from the
under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22- 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
103).
Is the relay OK? the compressor clutch relay 4P socket and body
ground.
YES-Go to step 4. COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELA V 4P SOCKET
NO-Replace the compressor clutch relay .•

2
the compressor clutch relay 4P socket and body 3
ground.
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELA V 4P SOCKET
4 1 3 Is there battery voltage?
YES-Go to step 9.
Sf.
the compressor clutch relay .•
YES-Go to step 5.
10. Reinstall the compressor clutch relay.
NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.•
BACK
21-46
Protected by AR
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 15. Disconnect the jumper wire.
13. Using the Backprobe Set, measure the voltage 16. Reinstall the compressor clutch relay.
between the No. 17 terminal of PCM connector A
(32P) and body ground with the PCM connectors 17. Check the No. 14 (7.5A) fuse in the passenger's
connected. under-dash fuse/relay box.
PCM CONNECTOR A (32P) /s the fuses OK?
8 9 10 YES-Gotostep 18.
20 21 ZZ Z4
Z8 Z9 30 31 32 NO - Replace the fuse, and recheck .•
18. Disconnect the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay

box 16P connector.
Wire side of female terminals 19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then turn the NC
and fan switches ON.
/s there battery voltage? 20. Measure the voltage between the No.7 terminal of
the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box 16P
YES-Go to step 14. connector and body ground.
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE!

NO- Repair open in the wire between the RELAV BOX 16P CONNECTOR
compressor clutch relay and the PCM .•
14. Using the Backprobe Set, measure the voltage

connected.
PCM CONNECTOR A (32PI
5 6 7 8 9 10 =
17 18 19 20 21 ZZ Z4
Z8 Z9 30 31 3Z Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 21.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the No. 14
/s there battery voltage? and the compressor clutch relay .•

PCM connector A (32P). If the connections are good,
substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original PCM .•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM and

the NC pressure switch .•
(cont'd)
BACK 21-47
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
21. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Except Type S Model
22. Reconnect the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay 1. Check the No. 58 (20A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/
box 16P connector. relay box, and the No.3 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's
23. Disconnect the compressor clutch 1P connector.
Are the fuses OK?
24. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then turn the AlC
and fan switches ON. YES-Go to step 2.
25. Measure the voltage between the No.1 terminal of NO - Replace the fuse(s), and recheck .•
the compressor clutch 1P connector and body
ground. 2. Check the engine coolant temperature (Use the
Honda PGM Tester PGM-FI data list if possible).
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH 1P CONNECTOR
Is the coolant temperature above nomal?
YES- Troubleshoot and repair cause of high

engine coolant temperature .•
NO - Go to step 3.
3. Remove the compressor clutch relay from the

under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it
(see page 22-103).
Is the relay OK?
Is there battery voltage? YES - Go to step 4.
YES - Check the compressor clutch clearance and NO- Replace the compressor clutch relay .•
the compressor clutch field coil..
NO- Repair open in the wire between the No. 14 the compressor clutch relay 4P socket and body
fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box ground.
and compressor clutch .• COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY 4P SOCKET
1
2
413
-=
YES-Go to step 5.
NO - Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box . •
21-48 BACK
Protected by AR
5. Connect the No.1 and No.2 terminals of the 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
compressor clutch relay 4P socket with a jumper
wire. 10. Reinstall the compressor clutch relay.
12. Using the Backprobe Set, measure the voltage

1
1
JUMPER
WIRE
connected.
PCM CONNECTOR A(32P)

2
RED
41 3
RED
Does the compressor clutch click?
YES - Go to step 6.
-=-
NO-Go to step 13.
YES-Check for loose wire or poor connections at
8. Measure the voltage between the No.4 terminal of PCM connector A (32P). If the connections are good,
the compressor clutch relay 4P socket and body substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. If the
ground. symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original PCM .•
NO- Repair open in the wire between the
compressor clutch relay and the PCM .•
14. Disconnect the compressor clutch 1P connector.
-=-
YES-Go to step 9.

the compressor clutch relay .•
(cont'd)
BACK 21-49
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Compressor Clutch Circuit AIC Pressure Switch Circuit

Troubieshooting (cont'd) Troubleshooting
15. Check for continuity between the No.2 terminal of Type S Model
the compressor clutch relay 4P socket and the NO.1
terminal of the compressor clutch 1P connector. 1. Disconnect the AlC pressure switch 4P connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (III.

1-----11 RED the AlC presure switch 4P connector and body
ground.
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH 1P CONNECTOR

Terminal side of male terminals 'Y.
Is there continuity? -=
YES- Check the compressor clutch clearance and
the compressor clutch field coil (see page 21-711 .•
compressor clutch relay and the compressor YES-Go to step 4.
clutch .•
NO-Repair the open in the wire between AlC
diode A, the PCM, and the AlC pressure switch .•

terminals of the AlC pressure switch.
AIC PRESSURE SWITCH
YES - Go to step 6.
NO-Goto step 10.
21-50
BACK
Protected by AR
6. Reconnect the AlC pressure switch 4P connector. Except Type S Model
7. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (20P). 1. Disconnect the AlC pressure switch 2P connector.
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
9. Measure the voltage between the No. 11 terminal 3. Measure the voltage between the No.2 terminal of
of climate control unit connector B (20P) and body the AlC presure switch 2P connector and body
ground. ground.
CUMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (20P)
-=
-=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 4.
YES - Check for loose wi res or poor connections at
climate control unit connector B (20P) and at the NO-Go to step 10.
AlC pressure switch 4P connector. If the
connections are good, substitute a known-good 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
indication goes away, replace the original climate 5. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2
control unit.. terminals of the AlC pressure switch.
NO- Repair the open in the wire between the

climate control unit and the AlC pressure switch .• AIC PRESSURE SWITCH
10. Check for proper AlC system pressure.
Is the pressure within specifications?
YES-Replace the AlC pressure switch .•
NO - Repair the AlC pressure problem .•
YES - Go to step 6.
NO-Goto step 11.
(cont'd)
BACK
21-51
Protected by AR
Climate Control
AIC Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
6. Reconnect the AlC pressure switch 2P connector. 10. Using a Backprobe Set, measure the voltage
7. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (20P). (32P) and body ground with the PCM connectors
connected.
PCM CONNECTOR A(32P)
9. Measure the voltage between the No. 11 terminal
of climate control unit connector B (20P) and body
ground.
Is there about 5 V?

Wire side of female terminals and the AlC pressure switch .•
Is there about 5 V? NO-Check for loose wires or poor connections at

PCM connector A (32P). If the connections are good,
YES - Check for loose wires or poor connections at substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. If the
climate control unit connector B (20P) and at the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
AlC pressure switch 2P connector. If the original PCM .•
climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/ 11. Check for proper AlC system pressure.
control unit.• Is the pressure within specifications?
NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate YES-Replace the AlC pressure switch .•
control unit and the AlC pressure switch .•
NO- Repair the AlC pressure problem .•
21-52 BACK
Protected by AR
In-car Temperature Sensor In-car Temperature Sensor Test

Replacement
Check for a change in resistance by heating or cooling
the sensor with a hair drier.
1. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (A) from the
dashboard, then disconnect the 2P connector (B) Compare the resistance reading between the No.1 and
and the air hose (C). Be careful not to damage the No.2 terminals of the in-car temperature sensor with
sensor or the dashboard. the specifications shown in the graph; the resistance
should be within the specifications.
12
11
10
\
9
A C 8
\
~
RESISTANCE 7
2. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. (kQ) 6
Be sure to connect the air hose securely.
5
4 '""-
3
2
1
'" ......,
........
14 32 50 68 86 104"F
-10 0 10 20 30 40"C
TEMPERATURE
BACK
21-53
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Outside Air Temperature Sensor Outside Air Temperature Sensor

Replacement Test
1. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the outside Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the resistance.
air temperature sensor(B). Lift the tab (C) to release Then pour hot water on the sensor, and check for a
the lock, and remove the outside air temperature change in resistance.
sensor.
Compare the resistance reading between the No.1 and
No.2 terminals of the outside ai r temperature sensor
with the specifications shown in the graph; the
resistance should be within the specifications.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
12
11
10
\
9
8
\
2. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. \
RESISTANCE 7
(kQ) 6 \.
5
4 "-
3 I'" I'-...
2 .................
1
14 32 50 68 86 104 of
-10 0 10 20 30 40°C
TEMPERATURE
BACK
21-54
Protected by AR
Sunlight Sensor Replacement Sunlight Sensor Test
1. Remove the sunlight sensor from the dashboard, Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Measure the voltage
then disconnect the 2P connector. Be careful not to between the terminals with the (+) probe on the No.1
damage the sensor or the dashboard. terminal and the (-) probe on the No.2 terminal with
the 2P connector connected. The voltage will not
change under the light of a flashlight or a fluorescent
lamp. Voltage should be:
• 3.6-3.7 V or more with the sensor out of direct

sunlight .
• 3.3-3.5 V or less with the sensor in direct sunlight.
\\ ~
~ ,
WHT/RED VEL/GRN
2. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.
BACK
21-55
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Evaporator Temperature Sensor Power Transistor Test

Test
1. Disconnect the SP connector from the power
transistor.
1. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the
resistance between its terminals. 2. Measure the resistance between the No.1 and
No.4 terminals of the power transistor. It should be
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR about 1.4-1.S kQ.
• If the resistance is within the specifications, go to

step 3.
• If the resistance is not within the specifications,
replace the power transistor.
POWER TRANSISTOR
2. Then pour hot water on the sensor, and check for a

change in resistance.
3. Compare the resistance readings with the

specifications shown in the graph; the resistance
should be within the specifications.
40 3. Carefully release the lock tab on the No.3 terminal

(ORN/BLK) (A) in the SP connector, then remove the
30 terminal and insulate it from body ground.
I~
RESISTANCE
kQ
20
~ .........
10
-- A
32 50 68 86°F
o 10 20 30°C
TEMPERATURE
(To 12 V power
source on vehicle)
4. Reconnect the SP connector to the power transistor.
S. Supply 12 volts to the No.3 cavity with a jumper

wire.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the

blower motor runs.
• If the blower motor does not run, replace the

power transistor.
• Ifthe blower motor runs, replace the climate
control unit.
BACK
21-56
Protected by AR
Air Mix Control Motor Test Air Mix Control Motor Replacement
1. Disconnect the 5P connector from the ai r mix 1. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the air mix
control motor. control motor (8). Remove the self-tapping screws
and the air mix control motor from the heater unit.
2. Connect battery power to the No. 1 terminal of the
air mix control motor, and ground the No.2
terminal; the air mix control motor should run, and
stop at Max Hot. If it doesn't, reverse the
connections; the air mix control motor should run,
and stop at Max Cool. If the air mix control motor
does not run, remove it, then check the air mix
control linkage and door for smooth movement.
• Ifthe linkage and door move smoothly, replace

the air mix control motor.
• If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them
as needed.
AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
~ 2. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.

After installation, make sure the air mix control
motor runs smoothly.
1 2 3 4 5

No. 5 terminals. It should be between 2.1 k to
3.9 kQ.
4. Reconnect the air mix control motor 5P connector,

then turn the ignition switch ON (II).

terminals.
Max Cool - about 1 V

Max Hot - about 4 V
6. If either the resistance or voltage readings are not

as specified, replace the air mix control motor.
BACK
21-57
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Mode Control Motor Test Mode Control Motor Replacement

1. Disconnect the 1OP connector from the mode 1. Disconnect the 1OP connector (A) from the mode
control motor. control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws
and the mode control motor from the heater unit.
2. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal of the
mode control motor, and ground the No.2
terminal; the mode control motor should run
smoothly, and stop at Vent. If it doesn't, reverse the
connections; the mode control motor should run
smoothly, and stop at Defrost. When the mode
control motor stops running, disconnect battery
power immediately.
MODE CONTROL MOTOR
~
2. Install the motor in the reverse order of remC';,·al.
After installation, make sure the mode contro .
motor runs smoothly.
3. If the mode control motor does not run in step 2,

remove it, then check the mode control linkage and
doors for smooth movement .
• If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace

the mode control motor .
• If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair them
as needed.
4. Use a digital multi meter with an output of 1 mA or

less at the 20 k Q range. With the mode control
motor running as in step 2, check for continuity
between the No.4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, terminals and the
No. 10 terminal individually. There should be
continuity for a moment as each terminal.
5. If there is no continuity for a moment at each

terminal, replace the mode control motor.
21-58
BACK
Protected by AR
Recirculation Control Motor Test Recirculation Control Motor

Replacement
1. Disconnect the 5P connector from the recirculation
control motor.
1. Remove the evaporator (see page 21-62).
INOTICE I
Incorrectly applying power and ground to the 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the
recirculation control motor will damage it. recirculation control motor (8). Remove the self-
Follow the instructions carefully. tapping screws and the recirculation control motor
from the blower unit.
2. Connect battery power to the No. 5 terminal of the
recirculation control motor, and ground the No.1
and No.2 terminal; the recirculation control motor
should run smoothly. To avoid damaging the
recirculation control motor, do not reverse power
and ground. Disconnect the NO.1 or No.2
terminals from ground; the recirculation control
motor should stop at Fresh or Recirculate. Don't
cycle the recirculation control motor for a long time.
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR
3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.

After installation, make sure the recirculation
control motor runs smoothly.
3. Ifthe recirculation control motor does not run in

step 2, remove it, then check the recirculation
control linkage and doors for smooth movement .
• If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace

the recirculation control motor .
• If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair them
as needed.
BACK 21-59
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Climate Control Unit Removal and Installation
With Navigation System Without Navigation System
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, 1. Remove the instrument panel together with the
and the navigation system, then write down the climate control unit (see page 20-65).
frequencies for the radio's preset buttons.
2. Remove the self-tapping screws and the climate
2. Remove the climate control unit together with the control unit (A) from the instrument panel (8).
audio unit (see page 22-202).
3. Remove the screws and climate control unit (A)

from the audio unit (8).
3. Install the control unit in the reverse order of

removal. After installation, operate the climate
control unit to see whether it works properly.
4. Install the control unit in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items: 4. Run the self-diagnosis function to confirm that
there are no problems in the system.
• After installation, operate the climate control unit (see page 21 -8).
controls to see whether it works properly.
• Run the self-diagnosis function to confirm that
there are no problems in the system
(see page 21-8).
• Enter the anti-theft code for radio, and the
navigation system, then enter the customer's
radio station presents.
21-60 BACK
Protected by AR
Climate Control Unit Bulb Replacement
With Navigation System
1. Discharge the static electricity (which accumulated

on you when you removed the climate control unit)
by touching the door striker or other body parts.
2. Remove the self-tapping screws, then carefully

separate the climate control unit display (A) and
control unit (8). Do not kink or pull on the wires
between the display and the control unit. Do not
touch the electronic components on the printed
circuit board in the control unit.
3. Remove the bulb(s) with a flat-tip screwdriver.
4. Install the bulb in the reverse order of removal.
BACK
21-61
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Evap )rator Removal and Installation
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, 8. Remove the self-tapping screws, the mounting nut,
and the navigation system, then write down the the mounting bolts and the evaporator.
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 Ibf·ftl
3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box, but do not

disconnect the connectors.
4. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/

charging station (see page 21-75).
5. Disconnect the suction line (A) and the receiver line

(B) from the evaporator. Plug or cap the lines
immediately after disconnecting them to avoid
moisture and dust contamination.
~
6x1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ftl
9. Install the evaporator in the reverse order of

removal, and note these items.
• If you're installing a new evaporator, add

refrigerant oil (DEN SO NO-OIL 8) (see page 21-6)
• Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing them. Be sure to use the right O-rings
for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
6. Remove the glove box and the glove box cover (see • Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap
page 20-66). on the container, and seal it to aviod moisture
absorption.
7. Remove the wire harness connectors (A) from the • Do not spill the refrigent oil on the vehicle; it may
evaporator. Disconnect the connector (B) from the damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil contacts
evaporator temperature sensor. the paint, wash it off immediately.
A
• Make sure that there is no air leakage.
• Charge the system (see page 21-77).
• Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, and the
radio station presets.
BACK
21-62
Protected by AR
Evaporator Components Replacement
1. Remove the filter lid (A), then pull out the dust and pollen filters (B).
9th fin from inlet side
A~
E
2. Pull out the evaporator temperature sensor (C) from the evaporator fins.
3. Remove the screws, carefully separate the upper housing (0) from the lower housing (E), then remove the
evaporator core (F).
4. If necessary, remove the expansion valve (G). Use a second wrench to hold the other fitting on the valve so the
evaporator line won't twist. Leave the first fitting loosely connected so you can use it to hold the valve while you
loosen the second fitting.
5. Reassemble the evaporator in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
• Replace all O-rings, with new ones at each fitting and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them.
Be sure to use the right O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
• Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption.
• Install the capillary tube (H) directly against the outlet line, and wrap it with electrical tape (I).
• Reinstall the evaporator temperature sensor in its original location.
• Make sure no air is leaking from the upper housing and the lower housing fitting.
BACK 21-63
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement
The dust and pollen filter should be replaced every 4. Remove and replace the filter (A) from the housing
30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months whichever (8).
comes first. Replace the filter more often if the airflow is
less than usual.
1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-66).
2. Cut the plastic cross brace (A) in the glove box

opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown.
Remove the cross brace and the two mounting
screws (8) from the glove box opening. Retain
these parts to be reinstalled later.
5. Install the filters in the reverse order of removal.

Make sure that there is no air leaking out of the
evaporator.
6. Install the cross brace (A) into the glove box

opening by aligning the tabs (8) with the slots (e).
3. Remove the filter lid (A) from the evaporator, then

pull out the upper and lower dust and pollen filters
(8) .
7. Secure the cross brace with the two mounting

screws (D) removed in step 2.
8. Reinstall the glove box.

A
BACK
21-64
Protected by AR
Blower Unit Removal and Blower Unit Components

Installation Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the Note these items when overhauling the blower unit:
SRS component locations (see page 23-14), and
precautions, and procedures (see page 23-17) in the • The recirculaion control motor (A), the power
SRS section before performing repairs or service. transistor (B) and the blower motor (C) can be
replaced without removing the blower unit.
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio • Before reassembly, make sure that the recirculation
and the navigation system, then write down the control linkage and doors move smoothly without
frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. binding.
• After reassembly, make sure the recirculation control
2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. motor runs smoothly (see page 21 -59).
3. Remove the front passenger's airbag

(see page 23-221).
4. Remove the evaporator (see page 21 -62).
5. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the blower

motor, the power transistor and the recirculation
control motor, then remove the wire harness clips
(B). Remove the mounting nuts, the mounting bolt
and the blower unit (C).
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m '1 .0 kgf.m. 7.2Ibf·ft)
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2lbf·ft)
6. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
• Make sure that there is no air leakage .

• Enter the anti-theft code for the radio and the
navigation system, then enter the customer' s
BACK 21-65
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Heater Unit/Core Replacement

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. Slide the hose clamps (A) back, then disconnect the
SRS component locations (see page 23-14), and inlet heater hose (B) and outlet heater hose (C)
precautions, and procedures (see page 23-17) in the from the heater unit. Engine coolant will run out
SRS section before performing repairs or servicing. when the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a
clean drip pan. Be sure not to let coolant spill on
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, the electrical parts or the painted surfaces. If any
and the navigation system, then write down the coolant spills, rinse it off immediately.
A
3. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A),

then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the
heater valve arm (C). Turn the heater valve arm to
the fully opened position as shown.
B
c
6. Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit.

Take care not to damage or bend the fuel lines, the
A brake lines, etc.
4. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant

from the radiator (see page 10-13).
ax 1.2Smm
13 N·m (1.3 kgf·m, 9.4Ibf.ft)
BACK
21-66
Protected by AR
7. Remove the dashboard (see page 20-70). 11. Install the heater core in the reverse order of
removal.
8. Remove the evaporator (see page 21-62).
12. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of
9. Remove the mounting bolts and the heater unit. removal, and note these items:
• Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater

hoses.
• Install the hose clamps securely.
• Refill the cooling system with engine coolant (see
page 10-13).
• Adjust the heater valve cable (see page 21-68).
• Make sure that there is no coolant leakage.
• Make sure that there is no air leakage.
10. Remove the self-tapping screws, the mode control

motor (A) and the linkage (B). Remove the self-
tapping screws and the brackets (e). Remove the
self-tapping screws, then carefully separate hte
upper housing (D) from the lower housing (E). Be
careful not to bend the inlet and outlet pipes when
removing the heater core (F).
BACK
21-67
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Heater Valve Cable Adjustment
1. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), 5. From under the hood, turn the heater valve arm (C)
then disconnect the heater valve cable (8) from the to the fully closed position as shown, and hold it.
heater valve arm (C). Attach the heater valve cable (8) to the heater valve
arm, and gently pull on the heater valve cable
housing to take up any slack, then install the heater
valve cable housing into the cable clamp (A).
~~~
A
2. From under the dash, disconnect the heater valve

cable housing from the cable clamp (A), and A c
disconnect the heater valve cable (8) from the air
mix control linkage (C).
3. Set the temperature control button or dial on Max

Cool (60°F or 18°C) with the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Attach the heater valve cable (8) to the air mix

control linkage (C) as shown above. Hold the end of
the heater valve cable housing against the stop (D),
then snap the heater valve cable housing into the
cable clamp (A).
BACK
21-68
Protected by AR
Compressor Replacement
1. If the compressor is marginally operable, run the 7. Remove the bolt and the nut, then disconnect the
engine at idle speed, and let the air conditioning suction line (A) and discharge line (B) from the
work for a few minutes, then shut the engine off. compressor. Plug or cap the lines immediately after
disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust
2. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, contamination.
and the navigation system, then write down the

charging station (see page 21-75).
6. Remove the compressor clutch connector (A) from

the condenser fan shroud (B), then disconnect the
compressor clutch connector. Disconnect the
condenser fan connector (e), then remove the wire
harness clips (D) from the condenser fan shroud.
Remove the cruise control actuator cable (E) from
the clamp. loosen the lower mounting bolt, then
remove the upper mounting bolts and the
condenser fan shroud. Be careful not to damage 8. Remove the mounting bolts and the compressor.
the radiator fins when removing the condenser fan Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when
shroud. removing the compressor.
6x1.0mm
9.a N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
~
ax1.2Smm
6x 1.0mm
9.a N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ftl
(cont'd)
BACK 21-69
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Compressor Replacement (cont'd)
9. If necessary, remove the mounting bolts and the 10. Install the compressor in the reverse order of
compressor bracket. removal, and note these items:
• If you're installing a new compressor, you must

calculate the amount of refrigerant oil to be
removed from it (see page 21-6).
• Use refrigerant oil (OENSO NO-OIL 8) for HFC-
134a OENSO piston type compressor only.
• To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to
the container once dispensed, and never mix it
with other refrigerant oils.
• Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap
on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
absorption.
10 x 1.25 mm • Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it
44 N·m 14.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ft) may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil
contacts the paint, wash it off immediately.
• Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when
installing the compressor and the condenser fan
shroud.
• Evacuate the system (see page 21-76).
• Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, and the
BACK
21-70
Protected by AR
Compressor Clutch Check

1. Check the plated parts of the pressure plate for 4. Check resistance of the field coil. If resistance is not
color changes, peeling or other damage. If there is within specifications, replace the field coil
damage, replace the clutch set (see page 21-72). (see page 21-72).
2. Check the pulley bearing play and drag by rotating Field Coil Resistance: 3.4-3.8 ohms at 68°F (20°C)
the pulley by hand. Replace the clutch set with a
new one if it is noisy or has excessive play/drag
(see page 21-72).
3. Measure the clearance between the pulley (A) and

the pressure plate (B) with a dial indicator. Zero out
the indicator, then apply battery voltage to the
compressor clutch. Measure the movement of the
pressure plate when the voltage is applied. If the
clearance is not within the specified limits, the
pressure plate must be reshimed (see page 21-72).
Clearance: O.5±O.15 mm (O.020±O.OO6 in.)
NOTE: The shims are available in four thicknesses:

0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.5 mm and 1.5 mm.
BACK
21-71
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Compressor Clutch Overhaul
Special Tool Required 3. If you are replacing the field coil, remove the snap
Ale clutch holder, Robinair 10204, Kent-Moore J37872 ring (A) with snap ring pliers, then remove the
or Honda Tool and Equipment KMT-J33939, pulley (B). Be careful not to damage the pulley or
commercially available the compressor.
1. Remove the center bolt (A) while holding the

pressure plate with a commercially available Ale
clutch holder (B).
A
A
18 N·m 11 .8 kgf·m, 13Ibf·ft)
2. Remove the pressure plate (A) and shim(s) (B), 4. Remove the screw from the field coil ground
taking care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch terminal (A). Remove the snap ring (B) with snap
needs adjustment, increase or decrease the ring pliers, then remove the field coil (e). Be careful
number and thickness of shims as nesessary, then not to damage the field coil or the compressor.
reinstall the pressure plate, and recheck its
CB~~
clearance (see page 21-71).
NOTE: The shims are available in four thickness:

0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.5 mm and 1.5 mm.
~~
BACK
21-72
Protected by AR
Compressor Relief Valve

Replacement
5. Reassemble the clutch in the reverse order of
disassembly, and note these items:
• Install the field coil with the wire side facing charging station (see page 21-75).
down, and align the boss on the field coil with the
hole in the compressor. 2. Remove the relief valve (A) and the O-ring (B). Plug
• Clean the pulley and compressor sliding surfaces the opening to keep foreign matter from entering
with contact cleaner or other non-petroleum the system and the compressor oil from running
solvent. out.
• Install new snap rings, note the installation
direction, and make sure they are fully seated in
the groove.
• Make sure that the pulley turns smoothly after it's
reassembled.
• Route and clamp the wires properly or they can
be damaged by the pulley.
A
13.2 N·m 11.35 kgf·m, 9.76Ibf·ft)
3. Clean the mating surfaces.
4. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief

valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing it.
5. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief

valve.
6. Charge the system (see page 21-77).
BACK
21-73
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Condens Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/ 5. Remove the bolts, then remove the condenser by
charging station (see page 21-75). lifting it up. Be careful not to damage the radiator
or the condenser fins when removing the
2. Remove the front bulkhead cover (see page 20-135). condenser.
3. Remove the bolts and the radiator upper mount

brackets.
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m 11.0 kgf.m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
4. Remove the bolts, then disconnect the discharge

line (A) and condenser line (B) from the condenser. 6x 1.0mm
Plug or cap the lines immediately after 9.S N·m 11.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust
contamination. 6. Install the condenser in the reverse order of
A
• If you're installing a new condenser, add
refrigerant oil (DENSO NO-OIL 8) (see page 21-6).
• Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap
B on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
absorption.
• Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it
6x 1.0mm
9.S N·m 11.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft) may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil
contacts the paint, wash it off immediately.
• Be careful not to damage the radiator and
condenser fins when installing the condenser.
BACK
21-74
Protected by AR
Refrigerant Recovery
1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/

ACAUTION charging station (A) to the high-pressure service
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. shown, following the equipment manufacturer's
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. instructions.
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor.
Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is

certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to
remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning
system.
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work

area before resuming service.
Additional health and safety information may be

manufacturers.
./
(
2. Measure the amount of refrigerant oil removed

from the AlC system after the recovery process is
completed. Be sure to put the same amount of new
refrigerant oil back into the AlC system before
charging.
BACK 21-75
Protected by AR
Climate Control
System Evacuation

ACAUTION charging station (A) to the high-pressure service
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. shown, following the equipment manufacturer's
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. instructions. Evacuate the system.
Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is

system.


obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant /
. / .,
manufacturers.
/"
1. When an NC System has been opened to the /
atmosphere, such as during installation or repair, it \
must be evacuated using a R-134a refrigerant
recovery/recycling/charging station (If the system
'''.
has been open for several days, the receiver/dryer
should be replaced, and the system should be
evacuated for several hours.)
3. If the low-pressure does not reach more than 93.3

kPa (700 mm Hg, 27 .6 in.Hg) in 15 minutes, there is
probably a leak in the system. Partially charge the
system, and check for leaks (see step 3 on page 21-
78).
BACK
21-76
Protected by AR
System Charging
2. Evacuate the system (see page 21-76).

ACAUTION
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor 3. Add the same amount of new refrigerant oil to the
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. system that was removed during recovery. Use
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. only DENSO NO-OIL 8 refrigerant oil.
4. Charge the system with the specified amount of
R-134a refrigerant. Do not overcharge the system;
Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is the compressor will be damaged.
remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning Select the appropriate units of measure for your
system. refrigerant charging station.
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work Refrigerant capacity:

area before resuming service. 600 to 650 9
0.60 to 0.65 kg
Additional health and safety information may be 1.3 to 1.41bs
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant 21.2 to 22.9 oz
manufacturers.
5. Check for refrigerant leaks (see page 21-78).
charging station (A) to the high-pressure service 6. Check for system performance (see page 21-79).
port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as
shown, following the equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
.. / .
./
BACK
21-77
Protected by AR
Climate Control
Refrigerant Leak Test
Special Tool Required 1. Connect a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/

Leak detector, Honda Tool and Equipment YGK-H-10PM, charging station (A) to the high-pressure service
commercially available port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as
shown, following the equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
AWARNING
• Compressed air mixed with R-134a froms a
combustible vapor.
injury.
• Never use compressed air to pressure test
conditioning system.
ACAUTION
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor /, .. _.. '/'
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat.

• Be careful when connecting service equipment.
/
\
' '.
Use only service equipment that is U.l.-listed and is
certiified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to
system.

2. Open high pressure valve to charge the system to
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning the specified capacity, then close the supply valve,
systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested and remove the charging system couplers.
with compressed air.
Select the appropriate units of measure for your
Additional health and safety information may be refrigerant charging station.
obtained from the refrigerant and lulbricant
manufacturers. Refrigerant capacity:
600 to 650 g
0.60 to 0.65 kg
1.3 to 1.41bs
21.2 to 22.9 oz
3. Check the system for leaks using a R-134a

refrigerant leak detector with an accuracy of 14 g
(0.5 oz) per year or better.
4. If you find leaks that require the system to be

opened (to repair or replace hoses, fittings, etc.),
recover the system.
5. After checking and repairing leaks, the system

must be evacuated.
BACK
21-78
Protected by AR
Ale System Tests

Pressure Test
Test results Related SYmDtoms Probable cause Remedy
Discharge (high) After stopping compressor, pressure Air in system Recover, evacuate (see page 21-76),
pressure drops to about 196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm' , and recharge with specified amount
abnormally high 28 psi) quickly, and then falls (see page 21-77).
gradually,
Reduced or no air flow through • Clogged condenser or radiator • Clean
condenser fins • Check voltage and fan rpm.
• Condenser or radiator fan not • Check fan direction.
working properlv
line to condenser is excessively hot. Restricted flow of refrigerant in Restricted lines
svstem
Discharge pressure High and low pressures are • Faulty compressor discharge Replace the compressor.
abnormally low balanced soon after stopping valve
compressor. Low side is higher than
normal.
· Faulty compressor seal
Outlet of expansion valve is not

frosted, low-pressure gauge
·· Faulty expansion valve
Moisture in system
• Replace
• Recover, evacuate, and recharge
indicates vacuum. with specified amount.
Suction (low) Expansion valve is not frosted, and • Frozen expansion valve (Moisture • Recover, evacuate, and recharge
pressure low-pressure line is not cold. Low- in system) with specified amount.
abnormally low pressure gauge indicates vacuum.
Discharge temperature is low, and
· Faultv expansion valve
Frozen evaporator
• Replace the expansion valve.
Run the fan with compressor off,
the air flow from vents is restricted. then check evaporator temperature
sensor.
Expansion valve is frosted. Cloaaed expansion valve Clean or replace.
Receiver/dryer outlet is cool, and Clogged receiver/dryer Replace
inlet is warm (should be warm
during operation).
Suction pressure Low-pressure hose and check joint • Expansion valve open too long Repair or replace.
abnormally high are cooler than the temperature • Loose expansion capillary tube
around evaporator.
Suction pressure is lowered when Excessive refrigerant in system Recover, evacuate, and recharge
condenser is cooled bv water. with specified amount.
High and low-pressure are equalized • Faulty gasket Replace the compressor.
as soon as the compressor is • Faulty high-pressure valve
stopped, and both gauges fluctuate • Foreign particle stuck in high-
while runnina . pressure valve
Suction and Reduced air flow through condenser. • Clogged condenser or radiator • Clean
discharge fins • Check voltage and fan rpm.
pressures • Condenser or radiator fan not • Check fan direction.
abnormallv high working properly
Suction and Low-pressure hose and metal end Clogged or kinked low-pressure Repair or replace.
discharge pressure areas are cooler than evaporator. hose Darts
abnormally low Temperature around expansion Clogged high-pressure line Repair or replace.
valve is too low compared with that
around receiver/dryer.
Refrigerant leaks Compressor clutch is dirty. Compressor shaft seal leaking Replace the compressor.
Compressor bolt(s) are dirty. Leaking around bolt(s) Tighten bolt(s) or replace
compressor.
Comoressor aasket is wet with oil. Gasket leakina Reolace the comoressor.
(cont'd)
BACK
21-79
Protected by AR
Climate Control
ft ;.C System Tests (cont'd)
Performance Test 3. Insert a thermometer in the center air vent.
~WARNING
• Compressed air mixed with R-134a forms a
combustible vapor.
injury.
• Never use compressed air to pressure test
conditioning systems.
~CAUTION
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. 4. Test conditions:
• Be careful when connecting service equipment.
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. • Avoid direct sunlight.
• Open hood.
• Open front doors.
The performance test will help determine if the air • Set the temperature control button or dial on
conditioner system is operating within specifications. Max Cool (60°F or 18°C), the mode control switch
on Vent and the recirculation control switch on
Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is Recirculate.
certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to • Turn the AlC switch on and the fan switch on Max.
remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the air conditioning • Run the engine at 1,500 rpm.
system. • No driver or passengers in vehicle.
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work 5. After running the air conditioning for 10 minutes
area before resuming service. under the above test conditions, read the delivery
temperature from the thermometer in the dash
R-134a service equipment or vehicle ai r conditioning vent, the intake temperature near the blower unit
systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested behind the glove box and the high and low system
with compressed air. pressure from the AlC gauges.

manufacturers.

charging station to the high-pressure service port
and the low-pressure service port, following the
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
2. Determine the relative humidity and air

temperature.
BACK
21-80
Protected by AR
6. To complete the charts:
• Mark the delivery temperature along the vertical line.

• Mark the intake temperature (ambient air temperature) along the bottom line.
• Draw a line straight up from the air temperature to the humidity.
• Mark a pOint 10 % above and 10 % below the humidity level.
• From each point, draw a horizontal line across the delivery temperature.
• The delivery temperature should fall between the two lines.
• Complete the low-side pressure test and high-side pressure test in the same way.
• Any measurements outside the line may indicate the need for further inspection.
kP.
(k~"cm')
pail
2900
(30)
[430) 80%
HUMIDITY
LEVEL
2500
(25)
[360)
DELIVERY
PRESSURE
30%
2000
(20)
[280)
kP.
(kgf/cm') 'F
('C)
[psi)
1500 80%
400 86
(15) (4) 130)
[210) [57) 80%
HUMIDITY
LEVEL
DELIVERY
PRESSURE 980 300 77
(10) (3) (25)
[140) [43]
30,..
HUMIDITY
LEVEL
200 68
(2) (20) 30%
[28]
100 59
111 (15)
[14]
INTAKE
PRESSURE
0 50
(10)
DELIVERY
TEMPERATURE
DELIVERY
TEMPERATURE
41
(5)
I I I I I
68 77 86 95 104 OF
(20) (25) (3D) (35) 140) ('C)
INTAKE TEMPERATURE
BACK
21-81
Protected by AR
Body Electrical
Body Electrical Dash Lights Brightness Controls
Special Tools ................................................... 22-2 Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-185
General Troubleshooting Information ......... 22-3 Control Unit Input Test ................................... 22-186
Relay and Control Unit Locations ........ 22-7 Controller Test ................................................ 22-188
Connectors and Harnesses ................... 22-15 Entry Light Control System
Fuse/Relay Boxes .............. ... ................. 22-92 Component Location Index ........................... 22-189
Power Distribution ............ ......... ........... 22-96 Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-190
Ground Distribution .............................. 22-100 Ignition Key Switch Test ................................ 22-191
Under-dash Fuse/ Relay Box ................ 22-101 Ignition Key Light Test ................................... 22-191
Battery .................................................... 22-102 Control Unit Input Test ................................... 22-192
Relay:s ...................................................... 22-103 *Stereo Sound System
*Ignition Switch Component Location Index ........................... 22-197
Test ...........•...................................................... 22-106 Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-198
Replacement ................................................... 22-107 Audio Unit Connector Replacement ............. 22-200
*Gauges Stereo Amplifer and Equalizer
Component Location Index ........................... 22-108 Unit Connector Replacement .................... 22-201
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-110 Audio Unit Removal/Installation ................... 22-202
Gauge Bulb Replacement .............................. 22-126 Stereo Amplifier Replacement ...................... 22-203
Gauge Assembly Replacement ..................... 22-128 Equalizer Unit Replacement .......................... 22-203
Select/Reset Switch Test .............................. 22-128 Speaker Replacement .................................... 22-204
VSS Circuit Troubleshooting ........................ 22-129 Radio Remote Switch Test ............................ 22-205
Maintenance Required Indicator reset Window Antenna Coil Test ............................ 22-205
Procedure ................................................... 22-130 Window Antenna Test ................................... 22-206
Outside Air Temperature Indicator Test ...... 22-131 Window Antenna Repair ............................... 22-206
Safety Indicator System Homelink Remote Control System
Component Location Index ...........................
Circuit Diagram ...............................................
22-133
22-134
A;~~~~~~lJ~:!~~oc.k~t . ... . . . . . . ... . . .. 22-207
Safety Indicator Input Test ............................ 22-136 Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-208
Brake Light Failure Sensor Test .................... 22-138 Front Socket Test/Replacement .................... 22-209
Lights-on, Key-in, Seat Belt Reminder, Rear Socket Test/Replacement ..................... 22-210
Key Light Timer, Engine Oil Pressure Trunk Lid Opener
Indicator Systems Component Location Index ........................... 22-211
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-139 Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-212
Control Unit Input Test ................................... 22-140 Main Switch Test ............................................ 22-213
Exterior Lights Switch Test ...................................................... 22-213
Component Location Index ........................... 22-142 Automatic Inside Dimming Mirror
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-146 Description ...................................................... 22-214
Back-up Lights Circuit Diagram .................... 22-154 Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-214
Brake Lights Circuit Diagram ........................ 22-155 Test/Replacement ........................................... 22-215
Auto-off Headlight Function Moonroof
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-156 Component Location Index ........................... 22-216
Fog Lights Circuit Diagram ............................ 22-157 Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-217
Combination Light Switch Switch Test ...................................................... 22-218
Test/Replacement ....................................... 22-158 Motor Test ....................................................... 22-218
Control Unit Input Test ................................... 22-160 Limit Switch Test ............................................ 22-219
DRL Control Unit Input Test .......................... 22-163 Rear Window Defogger
HID Lamp System Troubleshooting ............. 22-165 Component Location Index ........................... 22-220
HID Bulb Removal .......................................... 22-166 Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-221
Headlight Adjustment .................................... 22-168 Function Test .................................................. 22-222
Headlight Replacement ................................. 22-170 Defogger Wire Repair .................................... 22-222
Taillight Replacement .................................... 22-170 Clock
High Mount Brake Light Replacement ......... 22-171 Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-223
License Plate Light Replacement .................. 22-171 Replacement ................................................... 22-223
Bulb Replacement .......................................... 22-172 Horns
Fog Light Replacement .................................. 22-172 Component Location Index ........................... 22-224
Fog Light Adjustment .................................... 22-173 Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-225
Fog Light Switch Test/Replacement ............. 22-173 Horn Test/Replacement ................................. 22-226
Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher System Switch Test ...................................................... 22-227
Component Location Index ........................... 22-174 Power Seats
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-175 Component Location Index ........................... 22-228
Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test ............ 22-176 Circuit Diagram
Hazard Warning Switch Test ......................... 22-177 8-way Adjustable ........................................ 22-229
Interior Lights 4-way Adjustabie ........................................ 22-230
Component Location Index ........................... 22-178 Switch Test/Repla cement
I
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-179 8-way Adjustable ........................................ 22-231
Spotlight Test ..........................•.•.........•........... 22-180 4-way Adjustable ............•........................... 22-232
Ceiling Light Test ............................................ 22-181 Motor Test
Vanity Mirror Lights Replacement ................ 22-182 8-way Adjustable ........................................ 22-233
Courtesy Light Replacement ......................... 22-182 4-way Adjustable ........................................ 22-234
Glove Box Light Replacement ....................... 22-183
Console Box Light Replacement ................... 22-183
Trunk Light Test .............................................. 22-184
Trunk Lid Latch Switch Test .......................... 22-184
Protected by AR
Power Mirrors Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System
Component Location Index ........................... 22-235 Component Location Index ........................... 22-334
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-236 System Description ........................................ 22-336
Function Test .................................................. 22-237 Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-337
Power Mirror and Mirror Defogger Control Unit Input Test ................................... 22-345
Switch Test .................................................. 22-238 Door Lock Actuator Test ................................ 22-361
Power Mirror Actuator Test ........................... 22-239 Door Lock Knob Switch Test ......................... 22-362
Power Mirror Actuator Replacement ........... 22-240 Door Key Cylinder Switch Test ..................... 22-363
Driving Position Memory System (DPMS) Door Lock Switch Test ................................... 22-363
Component Location Index ........................... 22-242 Trunk Lid Opener Solenoid/
Descriptions .................................................... 22-244 Latch Switch Test ........................................ 22-364
Self-diagnostic Procedure ............................. 22-245 Security Horn Test .......................................... 22-364
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart .......... 22-247 Security Indicator Test ................................... 22-365
Circu it Diagram ............................................... 22-248 Hood Switch Test ........................................... 22-365
Control Unit Input Test ................................... 22-254 Transmitter Test ............................................. 22-366
Power Seat Control Unit Input Test .............. 22-260 Transmitter Programming ............................ 22-366
Driving Position Memory Switch Keyless Buzzer Test ........................................ 22-367
Test/Replacement ....................................... 22-265 Keyless Buzzer Replacement ......................... 22-367
Power Seat Position Sensor Keyless Receiver Unit Input Test .................. 22-368
Troubleshooting ......................................... 22-266 OnStar System
Power Mirror Position Sensor Component Location Index ........................... 22-370
Troubleshooting ......................................... 22-270 Description ...................................................... 22-371
Driver's Power Seat Motor Test .................... 22-274 Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-374
Seat Heaters Troubleshooting ............................................. 22-376
Component Location Index ........................... 22-275 OnStar Control Unit Input
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-276 Test/Replacement ....................................... 22-377
Switch Test .................................... .................. 22-277 OnStar System Interlace Unit Input Test ..... 22-380
Heater Test ...................................................... 22-277 OnStar System Radio Frequency Modulator
Wiper/Washer Unit Input Test/Replacement ..................... 22-382
Component Location Index ........................... 22-278 OnStar Buttons and Microphone
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-279 Input Test ..................................................... 22-384
Control Unit Input Test ................................... 22-281 Cellular Phone Antenna Replacement ......... 22-385
Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement .... 22-284
Wiper Motor Test ........................................... 22-285 Navigation System ................................ 22-387
Washer Motor Test ......................................... 22-285
Wiper Motor Replacement ............................ 22-286
Washer Reservoir Replacement ................... 22-287
Washer Level Switch Test (Canada) ............. 22-287
Washer Tube Replacement ........................... 22-288
Immobilizer System
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-290
Troubleshooting ............................................. 22-293
Immobilizer Reciever Unit Replacement ...... 22-294
Multiplex Control System
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-296
Troubleshooting ......................................... 22-298
Multiplex Control Unit Input Test ................. 22-302
Seat Belt Tension Reducer
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-305
Test .................................................................. 22-306
Power Windows
Descriptions .................................................... 22-308
Circuit Diagram ............................................... 22-309
Control Unit Input Test ................................... 22-321
Master Switch Replacement ......................... 22-330
Passenger's Window Switch
Test/Replacement ....................................... 22-331
Driver's Window Motor Test ......................... 22-332
Passenger's Window Motor Test .................. 22-333
Protected by AR
Body Electrical
Special Tools
Tool Number Descri tion

07WAZ-001010A MPCS Service Connector
CD
I
BACK
22-2
~
Tips and Precautions • Some connectors have a clip on their side used to
attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on
Before Troubleshooting another component. This clip has a pull type lock.
1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay • Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected
box. unless you first release the lock and remove the
connector from its mount bracket (A).
2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and
clean and tight connections.
INOTICE I
• Do not quick-charge a battery unless the battery
ground cable has been disconnected, otherwise
you will damage the alternator diodes .
• Do not attempt to crank the engine with the
battery ground cable loosely connected or you
will severely damage the wiring.
3. Check the alternator belt tension.
Handling Connectors
• Make sure the connectors are clean and have no
loose wire terminals. • Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their
• Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with wires; pull on the connector halves instead.
grease (except watertight connectors). • Always reinstall plastic covers.
• All connectors have push-down release type locks (A).
A • Before connecting connectors, make sure the

terminals (A) are in place and not bent.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-3
Protected by AR
Body Electrical
• Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (B). Handling Wires and Harnesses
• Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with
their respective wire ties at the designated locations.
A • Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A).
B
• The backs of some connectors are packed with

grease. Add grease if necessary. If the grease is • Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the
contaminated, replace it. hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to
release the clip.
... ..Qijffi
~
• After installing harness clips, make sure the harness
• Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is doesn't interfere with any moving parts.
securely locked. • Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust pipes and
• Position wi res so that the open end of the cover faces other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and
down. holes, and from exposed screws and bolts.
• Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not
leave grommets distorted (B).
~/
T -~
BACK
22-4
Protected by AR ~
a=.J
Testing and Repairs • Use a probe with a tapered tip.

• Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation.
Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break
with electrical tape.
• After installing parts, make sure that no wires are
pinched under them.
• When using electrical test equipment, follow the
manufacturer's instructions and those described in
this manual.
• If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire
side (except waterproof connector) .
• Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for

identification and replacement of connector terminals.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-5
Protected by AR
Body Electrical
Five-step Troubleshooting Wire Color Codes
1. Verify The Complaint The following abbreviations are used to identify wire
Turn on all the components in the problem circuit colors in the circuit schematics:
to verify the customer complaint. Note the WHT.................................... White
symptoms. Do not begin disassembly or testing yEl...................................... Yellow
until you have narrowed down the problem area. BlK...................................... Black
BlU ... .................................. Blue
2. Analyze The Schematic GRN..................................... Green
look up the schematic for the problem circuit. RED .................. ................... Red
Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by ORN....................... ........... ... Orange
tracing the current paths from the power feed PNK........... ........................ .. Pink
through the circuit components to ground. If BRN..................................... Brown
several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or GRy..................................... Gray
ground is a likely cause. PUR ..................................... Purple
l T BLU ................................ Light Blue
Based on the symptoms and your understanding of l T GRN ............................... Light Green
the circuit operation, identify one or more possible
causes of the problem. The wire insulation has one color or one color with
another color stripe. The second color is the stripe.
3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit
Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made
in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting.
Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to
make tests at points that are easily accessible.
-sJK
~
4. Fix The Problem
Once the specific problem is identified, make the
repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe
procedures.
5. Make Sure The Circuit Works

Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all
modes to make sure you've fixed the entire
problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure
to test all of the circuits on the fuse. Make sure no
new problems turn up and the original problem
does not recur.
22-6 BACK
Relay and Control Unit Locations I.!!!...I
Engine Compartment
'99-01 Models
ABS FAIL-SAFE RELAY

Wire colors: VEL/GRN, BlK, ]
[ BRN/BlK and WHT/GRN
~
BS PUMP MOTOR RELAY
UNDER-HOOD
Wire colors: VEL/RED,
BRN/BlK, WHT/BlU and WHT ] FUSE/RELAY BOX
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
CONDENSER FAN RELAY
RADIATOR
FAN RELAY
TCSRElAY
Wire colors: GRN/YEl, ]
[ BRN/BlK. RED/BlU and BLU
INTERMITTENT
WIPER RELAY
Wire colors: GRN/BlK. ]
WHT, BlK, GRN/RED
[ and BlU/WHT
MULTI-RELA Y BOX
• ~ECURITV HORN RELAY ('99 model)

Wire colors: l T GRN/RED, ]
WHT/YEl, BlU/RED • SHIFT LOCK RELAY ('99 model)
andWHT/YEl Wire colors: YEL/GRN , ]
[ RED/BlK, BlK and GRN
• ~TAIUIGHTS RELAY ('00-01lodeIS) • HIGH BEAM CUT RELAY (Canada)
Wire colors: RED/GRN,
RED/YEl. RED/GRN ('00-01 models)
and RED/BlK Wire colors: BlU. BLU/RED, ]
[ ORN and ORN/WHT
• SEAT HEATER RELAY ('99 model)

Wire colors: VEL/BLK, BLK, ]
[ WHT/BLK and WHT/GRN
SEAT HEATER RELAY ('00-01 models)
• SEAT LOCK RELAY ('00-01 mjdelS) Wire colors: VEL/BLK, BLK, ]
rWire colors: VEL, RED/BlK.
LBLK, and WHT/RED /WHT/BlK and WHT/GRN
BACK 22-7
Protected by AR
Relay and Control Unit Locations
Engine Compartment (cont'd)
'02-03 Models
HORN RELAY
HEADLIGHT
RELAY 2
CONDENSER FAN RELAY
,.. RADIATOR
FAN RELAY
AIC COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH RELAY
\
'\
~~ ..
.\
"'\ \
MULTI-RELAY BOX
FAN CONTROL RELAY (TYPE 5)
Wire colors: BlU/WHT, BlK, ]
[ GRN, BlU/BlK and BlK/YEl
-::======:::/
(COO]
• VSA RELAY (TYPE S)
Wire colors: RED/BlU, GRN,
[ GRN/YEl and BRN/BlK
• TCS RELAY (PREMIUM)
rwire colors: RED/BLU, BlU,
OOl/J LGRN/YEl and BRN/BlK
VSA THROTTLE MOTOR

RELAY (TYPE S) ABS FAIL-SAFE RELAY
Wire colors: PNK, YEl, ] Wire colors: YELlGRN, BlK, ]
[ l T GRN and BRN/BlK [ BRN/BlK and WHT/GRN
22-8 BACK
I.!!.I
'02-03 Models
SHIFT LOCK RELAY MULTI·RELA Y BOX

Wire colors: WHT/RED, BLK,
[ RED/BLK, and YEL
SEAT HEATER RELAY

Wire colors: WHT/GRN, ]
[ WHT/BLK, BLK and YEL/BLK
TAILLIGHT RELAY
Wire colors: RED/BLK,
RED/GRN, RED/YEL
[ and RED/GRN
INTERMITTENT WIPER RELAY

Wire colors: GRN/BLK, WHT, ]
[ BLK, GRN/RED and BLU/WHT
BACK 22-9
Protected by AR
Dashboard
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
RADIATOR FAN
CONTROL MODULE
INTAKE MANIFOLD
RUNNER CONTROL
MODULE (TYPE SI
STARTER CUT RELAY
AfT REVERSE RELAY
22-10 BACK
~
With Navigation System:
NAVIGATION DISPLA V UNIT
CUMATE CONTROL UNIT
AUDIO UNIT
IMMOBIUZER RECEIVER UNIT
Without Navigation System:
CUMATE CONTROL UNIT
c_____
OJ
IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER UNIT AUDIO UNIT
(cont'd)
BACK 22-11
Protected by AR
Dashboard (cont'd)
EQUAUZER UNIT
KEYLESS RECEIVER UNIT
FOG UGHT RELAY

('02-03 models)
rwire colors: BLU/RED, ORN,
LWHT/BLU and BLU/RED
USA: NAVIGATION RELAY
('99 model)
rwire colors: VEL/BLK, BLK,
LREDIYEL and WHT/BLK
Canada: HIGH BEAM CUT RELAY
('99 model)
rwire colors: BLU, BLU/RED, ]
"y- LORN and ORN/WHT
[J TAILLIGHT RELAY
('99 model)
Wire colors: RED/GRN,
[REDIYEL RED/GRN and RED/E::'K
~
• ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT (PREMIUM)
• VSA CONTROL UNIT (TYPE S)
MULTIPLEX CONTROL
UNIT, PASSENGER'S
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKET RELAY
POWER WINDOW RELAY
22-12 BACK
I..!!!!..I
Door and Rear Bulkhead
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT. DOOR
POWER WINDOW
CONTROL UNIT
STEREO AMPLIFIER
ONSTAR SYSTEM INTERFACE UNIT

('03 model) ONSTAR SYSTEM RADIO
FREQUENCY MODULATOR
UNIT
ONSTAR CONTROL UNIT ('03 model)
('03 model)
BACK 22-13
Protected by AR
Seat
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
BACK
22-"14
Connectors and Harnesses ~
Connector Index
'99-01 Models
Identification numbers have been assigned to in-line connectors. The number is preceded by the letter "C" for connectors, "G" for ground
terminals or " TH for non-ground terminals.
Harness Location
Engine Compartment Dashboard Others (Roor, Door, Notes
Trunk and Roof!
Sta rter cable T1 T2and (+) (see oaoe 22-17)
Battery ground cable T3 (see page 22-17)
Gl and (-)
Engine ground cable T4 (see page 22-17)
G2
Engine wire harness Cl0l through Cl07, C (see page 22-18)
151
Tl0l and Tl02
Gl0l and Gl02
Knock sensor sub-harness C103 (see oage 22-18)
Right engine compartment wire G20l through G203 C20l through C204 (see page 22-30)
harness G402 and G403
Left engine compartment wire C10l and C102 C301 through C303 (see page 22-38)
Dashboard wire harness B C302 and C40l (see page 22-44)
(left branch)
Dashboard wire harness B C20l through C203, (see page 22-44)
(right branch) C402 and C403
G40l
Dashboard wire harness A C204, C30l , C401, C451 and C851 (see page 22-52)
C402, C452, C453,
C454, C501,
C551, C552, C60l,
C651 and C80l
G501 throuoh G504
Left side w ire harness C551 and C552 C553 through C555 (see page 22-62)
G551 and G552
Right side wire harness C501 C581 through C583 (see page 22-66)
G58l
Rear window defogger wire (see page 22-66)
harness
Rear wire harness C555 (see page 22-70)
G60l
Roof wire harness C651 (seepage 22-71)
Moonroof wire harness C601 (see oaae 22-71 )
Shift lock solenoid sub-harness C451 (see oaae 22-71)
Driver's door wire harness C631 (see oaae 22-72)
Driver's door sub-harness C631 (see oaae 22-72)
Front passenger's door wire C701 (see page 22-74)
harness
Front passenger's door sub- C70l (see page 22-74)
harness
Left rear door wire harness C554 (see oaae 22-76)
Right rear door wire harness C582 (see oage 22-77)
Driver's seat wire harness C553 (see oage 22-78)
Passenger's seat wire harness C581 (see page 22-81)
Ignition switch (seepage 22-84)
AfT sub-harness 1'00-01 models) C151 (see page 22-84)
G15l
Front accessory power socket sub- C403 (see page 22-86)
harness
Rear accessory power socket sub- C85l (see page 22-86)
harness
SRS main harness C801 (see page 22-87)
G801
SRS floor harness ('00-01 models) C583 (see oage 22-88)
BACK 22-15
Protected by AR
Connectors and Harnesses
Connector Index (co nt'd)

'02·03 Models
Identification numbers have been assigned to in-line connectors. The number is preceded by the letter "C" for connectors, " G" for ground
terminals or "T" for non-ground terminals.
Harness location
Engine Compartment Dashboard Others (Floor, Door, Notes
Trunk and Roof)
Starter cable T1 T2 T5 and (+) (see oaae22-17)
Battery ground cable T3 (see page 22-17)
G1and(-)
Engine ground cable T4 (see page 22-17)
G2
Engine wire harness C101 through C107, C151 (see page 22-26)
T101 and T102
G101 and G102
Knock sensor sub-harness C103 (see oage 22-26)
Right engine compartment wire G201 through G204 C201 through C205 (see page 22-34)
Left engine compartment wire C101 and C102 C301 through C304 (see page 22-42)
Dashboard wire harness B C302, C304 and C401 (see page 22-48)
(left branch)
Dashboard wire harness B C201 through C203, (see page 22-48)
(right branch) C402 and C404 I
G401
Dashboard wire harness A C301, C401, C451, C601, CS01 (see page 22-56)
(left branch) C452, C453, C454, C851
C551, C552, C556,
C557
G501 through G503
Dashboard wire harness A C204, C402 C404, C651 (see page 22-56)
(right branch) C501, C502, C558
G504
Left side wire harness C551 , C552, C556 and C553 through C555, (see page 22-64)
C559 C560 through C563,
G551 and G552
Right side w ire harness C501 and C502 C581 through C583 (see page 22-68)
G581
Rear window defogger wire (see page 22-68)
harness
Rear wire harness C555 (see page 22-70)
G601
OnStar system sub-harness C566 and C562 (see page 22-70)
('03 modell
Roof wire harness C651 and 652 (seepaae 22-71)
Moonroof wire harness C563, C601 (see page 22-71 )
and C652
Shift lock solenoid sub-harness C451 (see oaae 22-71 )
Driver's door wire harness C557 C631 and C632 (see oage 22-73)
Driver's door SUb-harness C631 (see oage 22-73)
Front passenger's door wire C558 C701 (see page 22-75)
harness
Front passenger's door C701 (see page 22-75)
sub- harness
Left rear door wire harness C554 (see oage 22-76)
Right rear door wire harness C582 (see oage 22-77)
Driver's seat wire harness C553 (see oage 22-80)
Front passenger's seat wire C581 (see page 22-83)
harness
Ignition switch (see oage 22-84)
AfT sub-harness C151 (see page 22-S4)
G151
Front accessory power socket C403 (see page 22-86)
sub-harness
Rear accessory power socket C851 (see page 22-86)
sub-harness
SRS main harness C801 (see page 22-90)
G801
SRS floor harness C560 and C583 (see oage 22-90)
22-16 BACK
I.!!!:..I
Connector to Harness Index
Starter Cable
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes

Tl 1 Right side of engine compartment Under-hood fuse/relay box
T2 6 Left side of engine compartment Starter motor
T5 2 Left side of engine compartment Under-hood ABS fuse/relay '02-03
box models
(+) Batterv Battery positive terminal
Battery Ground Cable

T3 5 Left side of enaine compartment Transmission housin~
Gl 4 Left side of engine compartment Body ground via battery
around cables
(-) Battery Batteryneaative terminal
Engine Ground Cable

T4 7 Left side of enaine compartment Transmission housina
G2 3 Left side of engine compartment Body ground via engine
around cable
BATTERY GROUND CABLE
BACK 22-17
Protected by AR
Connector to Harness Index (cont'd)

Engine Wire Harness ('99 modell
Alternator 44 4 Middle of engine compartment
AfT clutch pressure control valve A 26 2 Left side of engine compartment
AfT clutch pressure control valve B 27 2 Left side of engine compartment
Transmission range switch 17 10 Left side of engine compartment
CKPsensor 51 2 Right side of engine compartment
Countershaft speed sensor 18 2 Left side of engine compartment
EGR valve vacuum control solenoid 36 6 Left side of engine compartment
valve
Coolant temperature gauge sending 38 1 Left side of engine compartment
unit
Engine coolant temperature (ECn 37 2 Left side of engine compartment
sensor
Engine oil pressure switch 53 1 Right side of engine compartment
Fuel injector No.1 4 2 Middle of engine compartment
Fuel injector No. 4 46 2 Middle of engine compartment
Ignition coil No.1 5 3 Middle of engine compartment
Ignition coil No. 3 12 3 Middle of engine compartment
Ignition coil No.6 39 3 Middle of engine compartment I
Intake air temperature (IAn sensor 15 2 Left side of engine compartment

Idle air control (lAC) valve 35 3 Left side of engine compartment
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve 21 3 Left side of engine compartment
and shift control solenoid valve A
Mainshaft speed sensor 28 2 Left side of engine compartment
MAP sensor 19 3 Left side of engine compartment
,
PCM connector B 8 25 Under middle of dash
PCM connector C 9 31 Under middle of dash
PCM connector D 10 16 Under middle of dash
Primary heated oxygen sensor 13 4 Left side of engine compartment
(Primarv H02S)_ ._____. _ .- _.
.. _.- --
22-18 BACK
I.!!!..I
ENGINE WIRE HARNESS
23
24
54
53
22
26
27
28
29
25----------\-----~~~~(~
,cont'd)
BACK 22-19
Protected by AR

Engine Wire Harness ('99 Model) (cont'd)
Radiator fan switch A 22 2 Left side of engine compartment
Radiator fan switch B 50 2 Right side of engine compartment
Second clutch pressure switch 31 1 Left side of engine compartment
Shift control solenoid valve B 33 2 Left side of engine compartment
Shift control solenoid valve C 32 2 Left side of engine compartment
Starter solenoid 30 1 Left side of engine compartment
CMP (TOC) sensor AlB 49 4 Right side of engine compartment
Throttle position (TP) sensor 34 3 Left side of engine compartment
Third clutch pressure switch 29 1 Left side of engine compartment
Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) 14 3 Left side of engine compartment Navigation
VTEC pressure switch 54 2 Right side of engine compartment
VTEC solenoid valve 52 1 Right side of engine compartment
C101 23 14 Left side of engine compartment Left engine compartment
wire harness (see page 22-
38) i
C102 24 10 Left side of engine compartment Left engine compartment
38)
C103 48 1 Right side of engine compartment Knock sensor sub-harness I
C104 (Junction connector A) 20 8 Left side of engine compartment I
C105 (Junction connector B) 16 14 Left side of engine compartment
C106 (Junction connector C) 2 20 Under right side of dash
C107 (Junction connector 0) 3 20 Under richt side of dash
n01 1 Under-hood fuse/relay box
i
n02 43 Alternator
'-'i101. 25 Left side of engine comQartment - - _ .. -----
Knock Sensor SUb-harness ('99 Model)

Connector or Terminal Connects to
Knock sensor
C103 ine wire harness
22-20 BACK
I.!:J
ENGINE WIRE HARNESS
23
24
54
53
22
26
27
28
29
25----------+-----~~~~(~
BACK 22-21
Protected by AR

Engine Wire Harness ('OO..()1 Models)
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connectlto Notes
AIT clutch pressure control valve A 26 2 Left side of engine compartment
AIT clutch pressure control valve B 27 2 Left side of engine compartment
AIT clutch pressure control valve C 31 2 Left side of engine compartment
EGR valve vacuum control solenoid 37 6 Left side of engine compartment
valve
Coolant temperature gauge sending 40 1 Left side of engine compartment
unit
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) 38 2 Left side of engine compartment
sensor
Fourth clutch pressure switch 30 1 Left side of engine compartment
Fuel injector No. 1 4 2 Middle of engine compartment
Ignition coil No. " 44 3 Middle of engine compartment
Intake air temperature (lAT) sensor 14 2 Left side of engine compartment
Torque converter clutch lock-up 25 2 Left side of engine compartment
control solenoid valve
PCM connector D -
10_ L - L6__ JJnder middle~dash
22-22 BACK
Protected by AR ~
~
18
19
20
21
~~~~~~~~~~~t=~~~=::
53
::t ~5::~~:]jW=24
~ 25
26
27
28
29
30
31
4443
42 41 40
39 38
37 36
35
(cont'd)
BACK 22-23
Protected by AR

Engine Wire Harness ('00-01 Models) (cont'd)

Primary H02S 13 4 Left side of engine compartment
Radiator fan switch A 22 2 Left side of engine compartment
Radiator fan switch B 51 2 Right side of engine compartment
Shift control solenoid valve A 34 2 Left side of engine compartment
VTEC pressure switch 54 2 Right side of engine compartment
C101 20 14 Left side of engine compartment Left engine compartment <Nire
harness (see page 22-40)
C102 21 10 Left side of engine compartment Left engine compartment wire
C103 50 1 Right side of engine compartment Knock sensor sub-harness
C104 (Junction connector A) 19 8 Left side of engine compartment
C105 (Junction connector B) 15 14 Left side of engine compartment
C106 (Junction connector C) 2 20 Under right side of dash
C107 (Junction connector 0) 3 20 Under right side of dash
C151 23 8 On transmission housing AfT SUb-harness (see page 22-
84)
n01 1 Under-hood fuse/ralay box
n02 42 Alternator
G101 32 Left side of engine compartment Body ground via engine wire
harness
G102 56 Right side of engine compartment Body ground via engine wire
harness
Knock Sensor Sub-harness ('00-01 Models)

Knock sensor
C103
22-24 BACK
Protected by AR ~
I.!!::..I
18
19
20
21
22
~~~~~~23
~ It:iS=~~dU~=24
53
25
26
27
28
29
30
4443
42
41 40
39 38
37 36
35
BACK 22-25
Protected by AR

Engine Wire Harness ('02-03 Models)
AfT clutch pressure control valve A 30 2 Left side of engine compartment
AfT clutch pressure control valve B 29 2 Left side of engine compartment
AfT clutch pressure control valve C 34 2 Left side of engine compartment
EGR valve and EGR valve lift sensor 26 6 Left side of engine compartment
Engine coolant temperature (ECT) 28 2 Left side of engine compartment
sensor
Fourth clutch pressure switch 32 1 Transmission housing
Injector No.1 1 2 Middle of engine compartment
Injector No. 4 46 2 Middle of engine compartment
Intake manifold runner control (lMRC) 12 2 Middle of engine compartment TYPES
actuator
Intake air temperature (lAT) sensor 15 2 Middle of engine compartment
Lock-up control solenoid valve 38 2 Left side of engine compartment
PCM connector 0 10 16 Under middle of dash
Primary heated oxygen sensor 16 4 Left side of engine compartment
(Primary H02S)
Radiator fan switch B 25 2 Left side of engine compartment
~i!ltor fan switch C - - 53 2 -- RigJIt l;ide of engine compartment
22-26 BACK
I.!!::.J
11 12 13 1415 1617
18
19
20
2 21 22
23
24
56 25
26
27
28
29
30
52
34
39
(cont'd)
BACK 22-27
Protected by AR

Engine Wire Harness ('02-03 Models) (cont'd)

Shift control solenoid valve A 33 2 Left side of engine compartment I
VTEC oil pressure switch 51 2 Right side of engine compartment
I
Cl0l 22 14 Left side of engine compartment Left engine compartment
42) I
Cl02 23 10 Left side of engine compartment Left engine compartment
42)
Knock sensor sub-harness I
Cl03 50 1 Middle of engine compartment
Cl04 (Junction connector A) 14 8 Left side of engine compartment
Cl05 (Junction connector B) 20 14 Left side of engine compartment
Cl06 (Junction connector C) 3 20 Under middle of dash I
Cl07 (Junction connector 0) 4 20 Under middle of dash
C151 27 8 Left side of engine compartment AfT sub-harness (see page
22-841
Tl0l 2 Under-hood fuse/relay box I
Tl02 49 Alternator
Gl0l 39 Left side of engine compartment Engine ground via engine
wire harness
Gl02 56 Right side of engine compartment Engine ground via engine
wire harness
Knock Sensor Sub-harness ('02-03 Models)

Knock sensor
Cl03 ine wire harness
22-28 BACK
I..!.:..I
11 12 13 1415 16 17
18
19
20
2 21 22
23
24
56 25
26
27
54 28
29
30
52
51
34
39
BACK 22-29
Protected by AR

Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness ('99-2·· Models)
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavitie~ - Location Connects to Notes
ABS fail-safe relay 35 4 Right side of engine compartment
ABS pump motor relay 33 4 Right side of engine compartment
ABS right front wheel sensor 18 2 Right side of engine compartment
ABS{TCS control unit connector A 21 26 Behind right kick panel
ABS{TCS control unit connector B 22 16 Behind right kick panel
ABS{TCS control unit connector C 23 12 Behind right kick panel
ABS{TCS modulator unit 16 24 Right side of engine compartment
AlC compressor clutch 8 1 Middle of engine compartment
AlC pressure switch 7 2 Middle of engine compartment
Condenser fan motor 6 2 Middle of engine compartment
Cruise control actuator 17 4 Right side of engine compartment
ELD unit (see page 22-92) 40 3 Into under-hood fuse/relay box
High beam cut relay 28 4 Behind right kick panel Canada
('99 model)
Horn (high) 2 1 Behind middle of front bumper '99 model
Horn (low) 5 1 Behind middle of front bumper
Keyless buzzer 24 2 Behind right fender '00-01 models
Navigation relay 28 4 Behind right kick panel Navigation
('99 model)
Outside air temperature sensor 4 2 Behind middle of front bumper
Passenger's under-dash fuse/rely box 25 18 Behind right kick panel
connector C (see page 22-94)
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box 26 3 Behind right kick panel
connector D (see page 22-94)
Power steering pressure (PSP) switch 42 2 Right side of engine compartment
Radiator fan motor 3 2 Middle of engine compartment
Right headlight (high) 9 2 Behind right headlight
Right headlight (low) 10 2 Behind right headlight
Right side marker and turn signal 13 3 Behind right headlight
lights - -- - --------
22-30 BACK
I.!::..I
36 37 38 39
ABS RELAY BOX
VI_____
26'---~-ey'i<II.-r
23 1
22
2
21
20
19
(cont'd)
BACK 22-31
Protected by AR

Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness ('99-01 Models)(cont'd)
Secondary heated oxygen sensor 41 4 Right side of engine compartment
(Secondary H02S)
Security hood switch 1 2 Under hood latch
Taillight relay 29 4 Right side of engine compartment '99 model
TCS relay 34 4 Right side of engine compartment
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector 39 18 Right side of engine compartment
A (see page 22-92)
B (see page 22-92)
C (see page 22-92)
D (see page 22-92)
Washer fluid level switch 14 2 Behind right of front bumper Canada
Windshield washer motor 15 2 Behind right offront bumper
C201 32 16 Behind right side of dash Dashboard wire harness B
(see page 22-44)
(see page 22-44)
(see page 22-44)
C204 27 24 Behind right kick panel Dashboard wire harness A
(see page 22-52)
G201 11 Right side of engine compartment Body ground via right engine
compartment wire harness
G402 20 Behind right kick panel Body ground via right engine
G403 19 Behind right kick panel Body ground via right engine
22-32 BACK
I.!::..I
36 37 38 39
ABS RELAY BOX
PASSENGER'S
-----...
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
26----~M...._t_
23
22
2
21
RIGHT ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WIRE HARNESS
19
BACK 22-33
Protected by AR

Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness (Engine compartment) (,02-03 Models)

ABS fail-safe relay 3 4 Right side of engine compartment
ABS pump motor 14 2 Right side of engine compartment TYPES
ABS right front wheel sensor 35 2 Right side of engine compartment
ABS(TCS modulator unit 12 24 Right side of engine compartment PREMIUM
AlC compressor clutch 23 1 Middle of engine compartment
AlC pressure switch 22 4 Middle of engine compartment TYPES
AlC pressure switch 22 2 Middle of engine compartment PREMIUM
Condenserfan motor 21 2 Middle of engine compartment
Cruise control actuator 34 4 Right side of engine compartment
ELD unit 9 3 Into under-hood fuse/relay box
Fan control relay 2 5 Right side of engine compartment TYPES
Horn (low) 20 1 Behind middle of front bumper
Outside air temperature sensor 19 2 Behind middle offront bumper
Power steering pressure (PSP) switch 11 2 Right side of engine compartment
Radiator fan motor 17 2 Middle of engine compartment
Radiator fan switch A 16 2 Middle of engine compartment TYPES
Right fog light 26 2 Behind right fog light
Right headlight (high) 24 2 Behind right headlight
Right headlight (low) 25 2 Behind right headlight
Right parking/turn signal lights 27 3 Behind right headlight
Right side marker light 28 2 Behind right headlight
Secondary heated oxygen sensor 10 4 Right side of engine compartment
(Secondary H02S)
Security hood switch 18 2 Under hood latch
rcs relay 4 4 Right side of engine compartment PREMIUM
Under-hood fuse/relay box 8 18 Behind under-hood fuse/relay box
connector A (see page 22-92)
connector B (see page 22-92)
connector 0 (see page 22-92)
VSA relay 4 4 Right side of engine compartment TYPES
VSA modulator unit connector A 13 10 Right side of engine compartment TYPES
VSA modulator unit connector B 15 8 Right side of engine compartment TYPES
VSA throttle motor relay 1 4 Right side of engine compartment TYPES
Washer fluid level switch 29 2 Behind right of front bumper Canada
Windshield washer motor 30 2 Behind riaht of front bumoer
G201 32 Below right headlight Body ground, via right
engine compartment wire
harness
G202 36 Right side of engine compartment Body ground, via right
harness
G203 31 Below right headlight Body ground, via right
harness
G204 33 Right side of engine compartment Body ground, via right
-
harness
BACK
22-34
~
5 6 7 8
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAV BOX
12
14
17
18
(cont'd)
BACK 22-35
Protected by AR

Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness (Dashboard) ('02-03 Models)
ABS/TCS control unit connector A 12 26 Behind right kick panel PREMIUM
ABS/TCS control unit connector B 13 16 Behind right kick panel PREMIUM
ABS/TCS control unit connector C 14 12 Behind right kick panel PREMIUM
Diode A (for AlC) 1 2 Under right side of dash TYPES
Diode B (for AlC) 2 2 Under right side of dash TYPES
Diode C (for AlC) 3 2 Under right side of dash TYPES
Fog light relay 9 4 Under right side of dash
Keyless buzzer 8 2 Behind right fender
connector D (see page 22-94)
VSA control unit connector A 12 22 Behind right kick panel TYPES
VSA control unit connector B 13 16 Behind right kick panel TYPES
VSA control unit connector C 14 26 Behind right kick panel TYPES
C201 5 16 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness B
(see page 22-48)
C202 6 7 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness B
(see page 22-48)
C203 4 20 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness B TYPES
(see page 22-48)
C203 4 12 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness B PREMIUM
(see page 22-48)
C204 16 24 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness A
(see page 22-56) i
C205 (Junction connector) 7 20 Under right side of dash TYPES

G402 11 Under right side of dash Body ground, via right engine
G403 10 Under right side of dash Body ground, via right engine
BACK
22-36
I.!!!!.I
10
BACK 22-37
Protected by AR

Left Engine Compartment Wire Harness ('99 Model)
ABS left front wheel sensor 16 2 Left side of engine compartment
Brake fluid level switch connector (+) 2 1 Left side of engine compartment
Brake fluid level switch connector (-) 3 1 Left side of engine compartment
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box 12 5 Behind left kick panel
connector E (see page 22-93)
Engine mount control solenoid valve 25 2 Left side of engine compartment
EVAP canister purge valve 24 2 Left side of engine compartment
Left headlight (high) 21 2 Behind left headlight
Left headlight (low) 20 2 Behind left headlight
Left side marker and turn signal lights 19 3 Behind left headlight
Parking brake switch 11 1 Under left side of dash
Seat heater relay 4 4 Left side of engine compartment
Security horn 15 2 Left side of engine compartment
Security horn relay 5 4 Left side of engine compartment
Shift lock relay 6 4 Left side of engine compartment
Test tachometer connector 17 2 Left side of engine compartment
Windshield wiper intermittent relay 14 6 Left side of engine compartment
Windshield wiper motor 10 5 Left side of engine compartment
C101 23 14 Left side of engine compartment Engine wire harness
(see page 22-18)
(see page 22-18)
C301 7 18 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness A
(see page 22-52)
C302 8 20 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness B
(see page 22-44)
C303 (Junction connector E) 9 20 Under left side of dash
G301 18 Left side of engine compartment Body ground via left engine
G302 1 Left side of engine compartment Body ground via left engine
22-38 BACK
~
MULTI-RELAY BOX
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
14
17
21
18
BACK 22-39
Protected by AR

Left Engine Compartment Wire Harness ('00-01 Models)

Brake fluid level switch connector (-) 5 1 left side of engine compartment
Engine mount control solenoid valve 27 2 left side of engine compartment
EVAP canister purge valve 16 2 left side of engine compartment
High beam cut relay 10 4 left side of engine compartment
Horn (high) 24 1 left side of engine compartment
left headlight (highl 23 2 Behind left headlight
left side marker and turn signal lights 21 3 Behind left headlight
Seat heater relay l' 4 left side of engine compartment
Shift lock relay 3 4 left side of engine compartment
Taillight relay 2 4 left side of engine compartment
Test tachometer connector 19 2 left side of engine compartment
Windshield wiper intermittent relay 15 6 left side of engine compartment
Windshield wiper motor 9 5 left side of engine compartment
C101 25 14 left side of engine compartment Engine wire harness
(see page 22-22)
C102 26 10 left side of engine compartment Engine wire harness
(see page 22-22)
(see page 22-52)
(see page 22-44)
C303 (Junction connector E) 8 20 Under left side of dash
G301 20 Left side of engine compartment Body ground via left side wire
harness
G302 1 left side of engine compartment Body ground via left side wire
harness
22-40 BACK
Protected by AR ~
I.!!:..I
MULTI-RELAY BOX
15
19
BACK 22-41
Protected by AR

Left Engine Compartment Wire Harness ('02-03 Models)
ABS fuse/relay box connector A 20 2 Left side of engine compartment
ABS fuse/relay box connector B 19 3 Left side of engine compartment
Brake fluid level switch connector (-) 7 1 Left side of engine compartment
Diode (for daytime running lights) 11 2 Under left side of dash Canada
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box 13 5 Under left side of dash
Engine mount control solenoid valve 34 2 Left side of engine compartment
EVAP purge control solenoid valve 18 2 Left side of engine compartment
High beam cut relay 5 4 In multi-relay box Canada
Horn (high) 28 1 Below left headlight
Intake manifold runner control module 16 14 Behind left kick panel
Left fog light 27 2 Behind left fog light
Left front parking/turn signal light 24 3 Behind left headlight
Left front side marker light 23 2 Behind left headlight
Left headlight (high) 26 2 Behind left headlight
Seat heater main relay 2 4 In multi-relay box
Shift lock relay 3 5 In multi-relay box
Taillight relay 4 4 In multi-relay box
Test tachometer connector 22 2 Left side of engine compartment
Throttle position sensor 31 3 Left side of engine compartment TYPES
Throttle motor 30 2 Left side of engine compartment TYPES
Windshield wiper intermittent relay 17 6 Left side of engine compartment
Windshield wiper motor 12 5 Under left side of air scoop
(see page 22-26)
(see page 22-26)
(see page 22-56)
(see page 22-48)
(see page 22-48)
G301 29 Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via left engine
G302 1 Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via left engine
22-42 BACK
~
DRIVER'S
l
UNDER-DASH
j ::",:LAY BOX
~14
30
BACK 22-43
Protected by AR

Dashboard Wire Harness B (Left branch) ('99·01 Moo,,!s)

Brake switch 14 4 Under left side of dash
Cable reel 10 4 Under left side of dash
Combination light switch 11 14 Under left side of dash
Daytime running lights control unit 12 14 Under left side of dash Canada
connector 0 (see page 22-93)
connector P (see page 22-93)
connector Q (see page 22-93)
Ignition key switch 8 7 Under left side of dash
Immobilizer receiver unit 7 5 Under left side of dash
Intermittent dwell time controller 6 2 Under left side of dash
PGM-FI main relay 13 7 Under left side of dash
Windshield wiper/washer switch 9 8 Under left side of dash
C302 5 20 Under left side of dash Left engine compartment wire '99 model
C302 5 20 Under left side of dash Left engine compartment wire '00-01
harness (see page 22-40) models
(see page 22-52) i
22-44 BACK
I.!!:..I
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS B
11 10
DRIVER'S
UNDER·DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
(cont'd)
BACK 22-45
Protected by AR

Dashboard Wire Harness B (Right branch) ('99-01 Models)

Air mix control motor 10 5 Under right side of dash
Blower motor 9 2 Under right side of dash
Climate control unit connector A 17 12 Under middle of dash
Climate control unit connector B 19 20 Under middle of dash
Data link connector (DLC) 14 16 Under right side of dash
Evaporator temperature sensor 11 2 Under right side of dash
Fan control module 13 8 Under right side of dash
Mode control motor 18 10 Under left side of dash
Navigation display unit connector A 20 5 Under middle of dash
connector J (see page 22-94)
connector K (see page 22-94)
Power transistor 6 5 Behind right kick panel
Recirculation control motor 5 5 Under right side of dash
Trunk lid opener main switch 12 2 Under right side of dash
C201 2 16 Under right side of dash Right engine compartment
wire harness (see page 22-30)
(see page 22-52)
C403 15 2 Under middle of dash Front accessory power socket '99 model
sub-harness (see page 22-86)
C403 15 4 Under middle of dash Front accessory power socket '00-01
sub-harness (see~e 22-86) models
G401 16 Under middle of dash Body ground via dashboard
wiLE! hamE!~Et -
22-46 BACK
I.!!:..I
(Continues to Left Branch)

PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
2 4 FUSE/RELAY
BOX
20
19
18
7
-8
15
16
BACK 22-47
Protected by AR

Dashboard Wire Harness B (Left branch) ('02-03 Models)
Connector or Termina' Ref Cavities location Connec:tsto Notes

Brake pedal position switch 17 4 Under left side of dash I
I
Combination light switch 13 14 In steering column cover
Data link connector (DLC) 12 16 Under left side of dash '03 model
Daytime running lights control unit 15 14 Under left side of dash Canada
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box 1 20 Under left side of dash I
connector 0 (see page 22-93) I
connector P (see page 22-93)
connector Q (see page 22-93)
Ignition key switch/key light 10 7 In steering column cover
Immobilizer control unit-receiver 9 5 In steering column cover
Intermittent dwell time controller 8 2 In steering column cover
I
PGM-FI main relay 16 7 Under left side of dash
Steering angle sensor 11 5 In steering column cover TYPES
Windshield wiper/washer switch 7 8 In steering column cover
C302 5 20 Under left side of dash Left engine compartment wire
harness (see page 22-(2)
harness (see page 22-(2)
(see page 22-56)
22-48 BACK
l!!:.I
(Continues to right branch)
3 8
10
17
11
12
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
(cont'd)
BACK 22-49
Protected by AR
Connector to Harness Index (co nt'd)

Dashboard Wire Harness B (Right branch) ('02-03 Models)
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities location Connects to NotBS

Air mix control motor 11 5 Under right side of dash
Blower motor 10 2 Under right side of dash
Climate control unit connector A 18 12 Under middle of dash
Climate control unit connector B 20 20 Under middle of dash
Data link connector (DLC) 15 16 Under right side of dash '02 model
Evaporator temperature sensor 12 2 Under right side of dash
Fan control module 14 8 Under right side of dash
Mode control motor 19 10 Under left side of dash
Navigation display unit connector A 21 5 Under middle of dash
connector J (see page 22-94)
Power transistor 7 5 Behind right kick panel
Recirculation control motor 6 5 Under right side of dash
Trunk lid opener main switch 13 2 Under right side of dash
C203 5 20 Under right side of dash Right engine compartment TYPES
C203 5 12 Under right side of dash Right engine compartment PREMIUM
(see page 22-56)
C403 16 4 Under middle of dash Front accessory power socket
C404 2 2 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness A '03 model
(see Daae 22-56)
G401 17 Under middle of dash Body ground via dashboard
-----~-
- -- -- - - - - ~
---- wire hame~s B --- ~.
- - -~
22-50 BACK
Protected by AR ~
~
(Continues to left branch)
DASHBOAR o WIRE HARNESS B
PASSENGER'S
~afll~if~~BOX
21
20
19
18
9
10
BACK 22-51
Protected by AR

Dashboard Wire Harness A ('99-01 Models)
Audio unit connector A 35 12 Behind audio unit
Audio unit connector B 36 20 Behind audio unit
Clock 22 5 Behind middle of dash
Cruise control unit 15 14 Behind left side of dash
Cruise control main switchfTCS switch 7 8 Behind instrument panel
Dash lights brightness controller 5 6 Behind instrument panel
Driver's seat heater switch 42 6 Behind middle of dash
connector I (see page 22-93)
Equalizer unit 44 14 Under middle of dash
Gauge assembly connector A 12 30 Behind gauges
Gauge assembly connector B 13 14 Behind gauges
Gauge assembly connector C 14 18 Behind gauges
Glove box light 32 2 Behind glove box
Hazard warning switch 18 10 Behind middle of dash
In-car temperature sensor 16 2 Behind middle of dash
Moonroof switch 8 6 Behind instrument panel
Mode switch 41 8 Middle of floor '99 model
Mode switch 41 10 Middle of floor '00-01 models
Multiplex control unit, driver's 1 22 Behind left kick panel
connector B
Multiplex control unit, passenger's 29 22 Behind left kick panel
connector B
Navigation display unit connector B 23 20 Behind display unit
Passenger's seat heater switch 38 6 Behind middle of dash
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box 31 18 Behind left kick panel
connector H (see page 22-94)
PCM connector A 33 32 Behind middle of dash
PCM connector E 34 12 Behind middle of dash '99 model
PCM connector E 34 20 Behind middle of dash '00-01 models
Select/reset switch 17 5 Under middle of dash
Sunliaht sensor 19 2 Behind middle of dash - - - - - --
BACK
22-52
~
24
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS A
25
8
-- 26
7
6
5
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX _~..........
28
(cant'd)
BACK 22-53
Protected by AR

Dashboard Wire Harness A ('99-01 Models) (cont'd)
C204 26 24 Behind right kick panel Right engine compartment
I
C301 11 18 Behind left side of dash Left engine compartment wire '99 model
C301 11 18 Behind left side of dash Left engine compartment wire '00-01
I
harness (see page 22-40) models
C401 10 14 Behind left side of dash Dashboard wire harness B
(see page 22-44)
C402 21 14 Behind instrument panel Dashboard wire harness B I
(see page 22-44)
C451 43 2 Middle of floor between seats Shift lock solenoid sub-
C4S2 (Junction connector) 9 20 Behind left kick panel
C4S3 (Junction connector) 20 20 Behind middle of dash
C4S4 (Junction connector) 39 20 Behind middle of dash
CS01 27 10 Behind right kick panel Right side wire harness '99mod~'
(see page 22-66)
CS01 27 14 Behind right kick panel Right side wire harness '00-01 i
(see page 22-66) models I
CSS1 4 18 Behind left kick panel Left side wire harness
(see page 22-62)
C552 3 20 Behind left kick panel Left side wire harness Navigation
(see page 22-62) I
C601 6 7 Behind left kick panel Moonroof wire harness
(see page 22-71)
C6S1 25 2 Behind right kick panel Roof wire harness
i
(see page 22-71)
C801 45 3 Behind middle of dash SRS main harness '99 model
(see page 22-87)
C801 45 8 Behind middle of dash SRS main harness '00-01 I
(see page 22-88) models
C8S1 40 3 Middle of floor between seats Rear accessory power socket
GS01 24 Under middle of dash Body ground via dashboard
wire harness A
GS02 37 Under middle of dash Body ground via dashboard
wire harness A
G503 2 Behind left kick panel Body ground via dashboard
wire harness A
GS04 28 Behind right kick panel Body ground via dashboard
wire harness A
22-54 BACK
Protected by AR
24
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS A
25
26
DRIVER'S
UNDER·DAS
FUSE/RELAyHBOX
28
2
37
BACK 22-55
Protected by AR
Connector to Harness Index (co nt'd)

Dashboard Wire Harness A (Left branch) ('02-03 Models)
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connect. to Not.. :
Audio unit connector A 16 12 Behind audio unit I
Audio unit connector B 17 20 Behind audio unit

Clock 12 5 Behind clock
Cruise control unit 8 14 Under middle of dash
Cruise{TCSNSA switch 3 8 Under left side of dash
Dash lights brightness controller 34 6 Under left side of dash
Driver's seat heater switch 24 6 Behind console panel
Equalizer unit 30 14 Under middle of dash
Fog light switch 2 5 Behind left side of dash
Gauge assembly connector A 5 30 Behind gauge assembly
Gauge assembly connector B 6 14 Behind gauge assembly
Gauge assembly connector C 7 18 Behind gauge assembly
Hazard warning switch 11 10 Behind middle of dash Navigation
Hazard warning switch 13 10 Behind middle of dash
In-car temperature sensor 29 2 Behind middle of dash
Lateral acceleration (Lg) sensor 25 3 Under middle of dash TYPES
Memory erase signal (MES) connector 41 2 In driver's fuse/relay box
Moonroof switch 4 6 Behind left side of dash
Mode switch 22 10 Middle of floor
Multiplex control unit, driver's 43 22 Under left side of dash
connector B
Navigation display unit connector B 14 20 Behind navigation display
Passenger's seat heater switch 19 6 Behind console panel
PCM connector A 18 32 Under middle of dash
PCM connector E 28 20 Under middle of dash
Select/reset switch 9 5 Right side of gauge assembly
SRS unit connect.Qr C - - - 27 8 JJnder middle of~ash ___ --- -- ---- - -
22-56 BACK
L::..I
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS A (left branch)
2
15
43
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
19
21
31
39
(cont'd)
BACK 22-57
Protected by AR

Dashboard Wire Harness A (Left branch' ('02-03 Models' (cont'd,
(see page 22-48)
C451 23 2 Under console panel Shift lock solenoid
C452 (Junction connector) 1 20 Behind left side of dash
C453 (Junction connector) 10 20 Under middle of dash
C454 (Junction connector) 26 20 Under middle of dash
C551 36 22 Under left side of dash Left side wire harness
(see page 22-64)
C552 37 24 Under left side of dash Left side wire harness Navigation
(see page 22-64)
C552 37 13 Under left side of dash Left side wire harness '02 model
(see page 22-64)
C552 37 6 Under left side of dash Left side wire harness '03 model
(see page 22-64)
C556 38 4 Under left side of dash Left side wire harness
(see page 22-64)
C557 42 20 Under left side of dash Driver's door wire harness
(see page 22-73)
C559 40 6 Under left side of dash Left side wire harness '03 model,
(see page 22-64) Navigation
COO1 35 7 Under left side of dash Moonroof wire harness
(see page 22-71)
C801 15 4 Under middle of dash SRS main harness
(see page 22-90)
C851 21 3 Behind rear console Rear accessory power socket
sub-harness (see page 22-86l
G501 20 Under middle of dash Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness A
G502 31 Under middle of dash Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness A
G503 39 Under left side of dash Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness A
22-58 BACK
I.!!::..I
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS A (left branch)

9
2
15
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
20
42
21
31
(cont'd)
BACK 22-59
Protected by AR

Dashboard Wire Harness A (Right branch) ('02·03 Models)
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities location Connects to Notes
Glove box light 14 2 Behind glove box
Keyless receiver unit 13 7 Under right side of dash
Multiplex control unit, passenger's 12 22 Under right side of dash
connector B
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box 6 18 Under right side of dash
connector H (see page 22-94)
Sunlight sensor 1 2 Middle of dash
C402 2 16 Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness B
(see page 22-48)
C404 3 2 Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness B '03 model
(see page 22-48)
C501 11 20 Under right side of dash Right side wire harness
(see page 22-68)
C502 10 4 Under right side of dash Right side wire harness
(see page 22-68)
C558 8 13 Under right side of dash Passenger's door wire
C651 4 2 Under right side of dash Roof wire harness
(see Daoe 22-71)
G504 9 Behind right side dashboard Body ground, via dashboard
'----- cover - wire harness A
22-60 BACK
I.!:!..I
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS A (right branch)
- - - - - - - - - PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
14
13
12
BACK
22-61
Protected by AR

Left Side Wire Harness ('99-01 Models)
ABS left rear wheel sensor 13 2 Left side of trunk
Driver's door switch 7 1 Left B-pillar
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box 3 10 Left side of kick panel
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box 4 14 Left side of kick panel
EVAP bypass solenoid valve 12 2 Left side of trunk
EVAP control canister vent shut valve 10 2 Left side of trunk I
EVAP fuel tank pressure switch 11 3 Left side of trunk
Fuel pump /fuel gauge sending unit 19 5 Fuel tank
High mount brake light connector A 20 2 Middle of rear shelf
High mount brake light connector B 22 2 Middle of rear shelf
Left rear door switch 9 1 Left quarter panel I
Navigation service check connector 23 2 Left side oftrunk

Navigation unit connector A 16 12 Left side of trunk
Navigation unit connector B 14 16 Left side of trunk
Navigation unit connector C 18 8 Left side of trunk
Trunk light 21 2 Middle of rear shelf
C551 1 18 Left side of kick panel Dashboard wire harness A
C552 2 20 Left side of kick panel Dashboard wire harness A Navigation
C553 6 10 Under driver's seat Driver's seat wire harness '99 model
(see page 22-78)
C553 6 10 Under driver's seat Driver's seat wire harness '00-01
C554 8 10 Left B-pillar Left rear door wire harness
(see page 22-76)
C555 15 10 Left side of trunk Rear wire harness (see page
22-70)
G551 5 Under driver's seat Body ground via left side wire
harness
G552 17 Left side of trunk Body ground via left side wire
harness
22-62 BACK
I..!::.I
BACK 22-63
Protected by AR

left Side Wire Harness ('02-03 Models)
ABS left rear wheel sensor 22 2 Left side of trunk
Driver's door switch 28 1 Left B-pillar
Driver's seat belt tensioner 7 2 Left B-pillar
Driver's seat belt tension reducer 8 2 Left B-pillar
solenoid
Driver' s under-dash fuse/relay box 5 10 Under left side of dash
connector B (see page 22-93) I
EVAP bypass solenoid valve 25 2 Left side of trunk

EVAP control canister vent shut valve 23 2 Left side of trunk
EVAP fuel tank pressure switch 24 3 Left side of trunk
Fuel pump/fuel gauge sending unit 14 5 Fuel tank
High mount brake light connector A 11 2 Middle of rear shelf
High mount brake light connector B 13 2 Middle of rear shelf
Left rear door switch 26 1 Left quarter panel
Navigation service check connector 10 2 Left side of trunk
Navigation unit connector A 15 12 Left side of trunk
Navigation unit connector B 16 16 Left side of trunk
Navigation unit connector C 18 8 Left side of trunk
Trunk light 12 2 Middle of rear shelf
(see page 22-56)
C552 3 24 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness A Navigation
(see page 22-56)
C552 3 13 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness A '02 model
(see page 22-56)
C552 3 6 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness A '03 '03 model
model (see page 22-56)
C553 29 24 Under driver'S seat Driver's seat wire harness '02 model
(see page 22-80)
C553 29 22 Under driver's seat Driver's seat wire harness '03 model
(see page 22-80)
C554 27 10 Left B-pillar Left rear door wire harness I
(see page 22-76)
C555 20 10 Left side of trunk Rear wire harness (see page
22-70)
C556 2 4 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness A I
(see page 22-56)
C559 1 6 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness A '03 model,
C560 30 1 Under driver'S seat SRS floor harness (see page '03 model,
22-90) Navigation
C561 19 6 Left side of trunk OnStar system subharness '03 model, I
C562 21 21 Left side of trunk OnStar system subharness '03 model,
C563 9 8 Left C-pillar Moonroof wire harness (see '03 model,
I
pa~e 22-71) Naviaation
G551 31 Under driver's seat Body ground, via left side
wire harness
G552 17 Left side of trunk Body ground, via left side I
w ire harness
22-64 BACK
Protected by AR ~
I..!::..I
DRIVER'S 5
~NDER-DASH 6
USE/RELA V BOX 7
8
9
LEFT SIDE WIRE HAR NESS
21
17
BACK
22-65
Protected by AR

Right Side Wire Harness ('99·01 Models)
ABS right rear wheel sensor 9 2 Under right side of rear seat
OPDS unit 7 4 Under passenger's seat '00-01
models
Passenger's door switch 5 1 Right B-pillar
Right rear door switch 16 1 Right quarter panel
Stereo amplifier 15 12 Right quarter panel
Window antenna coil connector A 10 1 Middle of rear shelf
Woofer speaker 12 S Middle of rear shelf
CS01 1 10 Behind right kick panel Dashboard wire harness A '99 model
(see page 22-S2)
CS01 1 14 Behind right kick panel Dashboard wire harness A '00-01
(see page 22-S2) models
CS81 4 8 Under passenger's seat Passenger's seat wire harness '99 model
(see page 22-81 )
CS81 4 10 Under passenger's seat Passenger's seat wire harness '00-01
C582 6 10 Right B-pillar Right rear door wire harness
(see page 22-77)
CS83 8 1 Under passenger's seat SRS floor harness (see page '00-01
22-88) models
GS81 3 Under passenger's seat Body ground via right side
wire harness
Rear Window Defogger Wire Harness ('99·01 Models)

Rear window defogger connector A 14 1 Right C-pillar
(+)
Rear window defogger connector B 13 1 Left C-pillar
(-)
Window antenna coil connector B 11 2 Middle of rear shelf
BACK
22-66
Protected by AR ~
~
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER WIRE HARNESS
BACK
22-67
Protected by AR

Right Side Wire Harness ('02-03 Models)
ABS right rear wheel sensor 14 2 Under right side of rear seat
Front passenger's door switch 10 1 Right B-pillar
Front passenger's side seat belt 12 2 Right B-pillar
tensioner
Front passenger's side seat belt 13 2 Right B-pillar
tension reducer
OPDS unit connector 4 4 Under passenger's seat
Right rear door switch 3 1 Right quarter panel
Stereo amplifier 2 12 Right quarter panel
Window antenna coil connector A 17 1 Middle of rear shelf
Woofer speaker 19 5 Middle of rear shelf
Yaw rate sensor 15 4 Behind right rear quarter trim
(see page 22-56)
(see page 22-56)
CSS1 9 10 Under passenger's seat Passenger's seat wire harness
(see page 22-83)
C582 11 10 Right B-pillar Right rear door wire harness
(see page 22-77)
C583 5 1 Under passenger's seat SRS floor harness (see page
22-90)
G581 16 Under passenger's seat Body ground via right side
------ - - -
wire harness
Rear Window Defogger Wire Harness ('02-03 Models)

Rear window defogger connector A 1 1 Right C-pillar
(+)
Rear window defogger connector B 20 1 Left C-pillar
(- )
Window antenna coil connector B 18 2 Middle~frear shelf - - ---
22-68 BACK
l.!::.I
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER WIRE HARNESS
RIGHT SIDE WIRE HARNESS
17
16
BACK 22-69
Protected by AR

Rear Wire Harness
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connactsto Notes
Brake light failure sensor 8 6 Left side of trunk
Left taillight 7 8 Left side of trunk
License plate lights 10 2 Right side of trunk
Right taillight 12 8 Right side of trunk
Trailer lighting connector 6 6 Left side of trunk
Trunk lid latch switch and opener 11 6 Left side of trunk
solenoid
C555 3 10 Left side of trunk Left side wire harness (see '99-01
page 22-62) models
C555 3 10 Left side of trunk Left side harness (see page '02-03
22-64) models
G601 9 Middle of trunk Body ground via rear wire
harness
OnStar System Subharness (03 Model: With Navigation)

OnStar control unit connector A 15 32 Left side of trunk
OnStar control unit connector B 14 32 Left side of trunk
OnStar system interface unit 4 12 Left side of trunk
connector A
OnStar system interface unit 5 16 Left side of trunk
connector B
OnStar system radio frequency 13 25 Left side of trunk
modulator unit
C561 1 6 Left side oftrunk Left side wire harness (see
page 22-64)
C562 2 21 Left side oftrunk Left side wire harness (see
page 22-64)
ONSTAR SYSTEM SUB-HARNESS
15
13
2
12
REAR WIRE HARNESS
22-70
BACK
Protected by AR ~
I..!:.I
Roof Wire Harness

Automatic dimming mirror 4 3 Roof
Ceiling light 17 3 Roof
Driver's vanity mirror light 7 2 Roof
Onstar switches and microphone/ 15 16 Rear view mirror '03 model,
automatic dimming inside mirror Navigation
Passenger's vanity mirror light 16 2 Roof
Spotlights 5 3 Roof
C651 13 2 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness A '99-01
C651 13 2 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness A '02-03
C652 6 8 Roof Moonroof wire harness '03 model,
Navigation
Moonroof Wire Harness

Moonroof close relay 12 5 Behind left kick panel
Moonroof motor 2 2 Roof
Moonroof open relay 11 5 Behind left kick panel
Moonroof position switch 1 4 Roof
C563 3 8 Left C-pillar Left side wire harness (see '03 model,
page 22-64) Navigation
C601 10 7 Behind left kick panel Dashboard wire harness A '99-01
C601 10 7 Behind left kick panel Dashboard wire harness A '02-03
C652 6 8 Roof Roof wire harness '03 model,
Navigation
Shift Lock Solenoid Sub-harness

Shift lock solenoid 9 2 Middle of floor between seats
C451 8 2 Middle of floor between seats Dashboard wire harness A
(see page 22-56)
2 3 4 MOONROOF WIRE HARNESS
12
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

SUB-HARNESS
BACK 22-71
Protected by AR

Driver's Door Wire Harness ('99-01 Models)

Driver's door key cylinder switch 4 3 Driver's door
Driver's door lock actuator 1 2 Driver's door
Driver's door lock knob switch 2 3 Driver's door
Driver's door lock switch 8 3 Driver's door
Driver's door speaker 13 2 Driver's door
Driver's power window motor 15 4 Driver's door
connector F (see page 22-93)
connector G (see page 22-93)
Left power mirror actuator 9 6 Driver's door
Multiplex control unit, door connector B 6 2 Driver's door
Multiplex control unit, door connector A 5 20 Driver's door
Power mirror switch 7 10 Driver's door
Security indicator 3 2 Driver's door
C631 12 4 Driver's door Driver's door sub-harness
Driver's DOQr Sub-harness ('99-01 Models)
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connectlto Not..

Driver's door courtesy light 16 2 Driver's door
Trunk lid opener switch 14 2 Driver's door
C631 12 4 Driver's door Driver's door wire harness
3 4 5 6 7 8
10
11
----DRiVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
2 \ ,\\,~,,\~ / -I:.~
DRIVER'S DOOR WIRE HARNESS

DRIVER'S DOOR SUB-HARNESS
22-72 BACK
I.!!:..I
Driver's Door Wire Harness ('02-03 Models'

Connector or Terminll Ref Clvltles Locltion Connects to Notes
Driver's door key cylinder switch 4 3 Driver's door
Driver's door lock actuator 1 2 Driver's door
Driver's door lock knob switch 2 3 Driver's door
Driver's door lock switch 9 3 Driver's door
Driver's door speaker 17 2 Driver's door
Driver's power window motor 19 6 Driver's door
Driver's undercdash fuse/relay box 15 18 Under left side of dash
connector G (see page 22-93)
Driving position memory switch 10 10 Driver's door
Left power mirror actuator 11 13 Driver's door
Multiplex control unit, door connector A 5 20 Driver's door
Multiplex control unit, door connector B 7 2 Driver's door
Power mirror switch 8 13 Driver's door
Power window control unit 12 18 Driver's door
Security indicator 3 2 Driver's door
(see page 22-56)
C631 16 6 Driver's door Driver's door sub-harness
C632 (Junction connector) 6 20 Driver's door '03 model
Driver's Door Sub-harness ('02-03 Models'

Connedat' or Terminal Ref Clvities Location Connects to Notes
Driver's door counesy light 20 2 Driver's door
Trunk opener switch 18 2 Driver's door
C631 i6 6 Driver's door Driver's door wire harness
8 9 10
11
12
14
15
2 DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
DRIVER'S DOOR WIRE HARNESS
BACK 22-73
Protected by AR

Front Passenger's Door Wire Harness ('99·01 Models)

Passenger's door courtesy light 9 2 Passenger's door i
Passenger's door key cylinder switch 6 3 Passenger's door
Passenger's door lock actuator 8 2 Passenger's door I
Passenger's door lock knob switch 7 3 Passenger's door
Passenger's door lock switch 4 3 Passenger's door
I
Passenger's door speaker 11 2 Passenger's door
Passenger's power window motor 10 2 Passenger's door
Passenger's power window switch 5 6 Passenger's door
Right power mirror actuator 3 6 Passenger's door
C701 12 22 Passenger's door jamb area Front passenger's door
sub-harness
Front Passenger's Door Sub·harness ('99·01 Models)

C701 12 22 Passenger's door jamb area Front passenger's door wire
harness
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR WIRE HARNESS
FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR SUB·HARNESS
l'- ?'OI,i. --::1' /J I 8
PASSENGER'S
UNDER·DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BACK
22-74
I..!!!!:..I
Front Passenger's Door Wire Harness ('02-03 Models)

Front passenger's door courtesy light 9 2 Front passenger's door
Front passenger's door key cylinder 6 3 Front passenger's door
switch
Front passenger's door lock actuator 8 2 Front passenger's door
Front passenger's door lock knob 7 3 Front passenger's door
switch
Front passenger's door lock switch 4 3 Front passenger's door
Front passenger's door speaker 11 2 Front passenger's door
Front passenger's power window 10 2 Front passenger's door
motor
Front passenger's power window 5 6 Front passenger's door
switch
Right power mirror actuator 3 13 Front passenger's door
(see page 22-56)
C701 12 22 Front passenger's door jamb area Front passenger's door
sub-harness
Front Passenger's Door Sub·harness ('02·03 Models)

C701 12 22 Front passenger's door jamb area Front passenger's door wire
harness
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR WIRE HARNESS
~/;
PASSENGER'S
UNDER·DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
7
13
8
BACK 22-75
Protected by AR

Left Rear Door Wire Harness
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connactsto Notes
Left rear door lock actuator 5 2 Left rear door
Left rear door lock knob switch 6 3 Left rear door
Left rear door speaker 4 2 Left rear door
Left rear power window motor 1 2 Left rear door
Left rear power window switch 2 6 Left rear door
C554 3 10 Left rear door Left side wire harness (see '99-01
page 22-62) models
C554 3 10 Left rear door Left side wire harness (see '02-03
oaoe 22-64) -- models
1 2
LEFT REAR DOOR

WIRE HARNESS
22-76 BACK
I..:!!!...I
Right Rear Door Wire Harness

Right rear door lock actuator 4 2 Right rear door
Right rear door lock knob switch 3 3 Right rear door
Right rear door speaker 6 2 Right rear door
Right rear power window motor 5 2 Right rear door
Right rear power window switch 2 6 Right rear door
C582 1 10 Right rear door Right side wire harness (see '99-01
page 22-66) models
C582 1 10 Right rear door Right side wire harness (see '02-03
JlruLe 22-68) models
1 2
RIGHT REAR DOOR WIRE HARNESS

6 5
BACK 22-77
Protected by AR

Driver's Seat Wire Harness (S-way Adjustable) ('99 Modell
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to Not..
Driver's seat belt switch 9 2 Under driver's seat
Driver's seat heater 7 3 Under driver's seat
Driver's power seat adjustment switch 4 6 Left side of driver's seat
connector A
connectorB
Front up-down motor 5 4 Under driver's seat
Recline motor 1 2 Under driver's seat
Rear up-down motor 8 4 Under driver's seat
Slide motor 6 2 Under driver's seat
C553 3 10 Left side of driver's seat Left side wire harness (see
page 22-621
DRIVER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS

IS-way Adjustable)
22-78 BACK
l!!!:..I
Driver's Seat Wire Harness (S-way Adjustable) ('00-01 Models)

Driver's power seat adjustment switch 4 6 Left side of Driver's seat
connector A
Driver's power seat adjustment switch 2 6 Left side of Driver's seat
connector B
Driver's seat belt switch 9 3 Under Driver's seat
Driver's seat heater 7 4 Under Driver's seat
Front up-down motor 5 4 Under Driver's seat
Rear up-down motor 8 4 Under Driver's seat
Recline motor 1 2 Under Driver's seat
C553 3 10 Under driver's seat Left side wire harness (see
Dage 22-62)

IS-way Adjustable'
BACK 22-79
Protected by AR

Driver's Seat Wire Harness ('02-03 Models)
connector A
connector B
Driver's seat belt switch 13 3 Under driver's seat
Driver's seat heater 5 4 Under driver's seat
Front up-down motor 4 5 Under driver's seat
Power seat control unit connector A 8 20 Under driver's seat
Power seat control unit connector B 9 8 Under driver's seat
Power seat control unit connector C 10 12 Under driver's seat
Power seat control unit connector D 11 6 Under driver's seat
Rear up-down motor 14 5 Under driver's seat
Recline motor 1 6 Under driver's seat
Slide position sensor 12 3 Under driver's seat
C553 3 24 Under driver's seat Left side wire harness (see '02
page 22-64) model
C553 3 22 Under driver's seat Left side wire harness (see '03
oaoe 22-641 mode!
.-
12
9 8 7
22-80 BACK
L=!..I
Passenger's Seat wire Harness (4-way Adjustable) ('99 Modell

Passenger's power seat adjustment 4 6 Right side of passenger's seat
switch c.o nnector A
switch connector B
Passenger's seat heater 5 3 Under passenger's seat
Recline motor 1 2 Under passenger's seat
Slide motor 6 2 Under passenger's seat
C581 3 8 Right side of passenger's seat Right side wire harness (see
Dace 22-66)
PASSENGER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS

(4-way Adjustable)
2 6
5
4
BACK 22-81
Protected by AR

Passenger's Seat Wire Harness (4-way Adjustable) ('00-01 Models)
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connec:tsto Notes
switch connector A
switch connector B
Passenger's seat belt switch 7 3 Under passenger's seat
Passenger's seat heater S 4 Under passenger's seat
Recline motor 1 2 Under passenger's seat
Slide motor 3 2 Under passenger's seat
CSS1 6 10 Right side of passenger's seat Right side wire harness (see
-'!i1ge 22-66)
PASSENGER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS

(4-way Adjustablel
2
6
3
4
22-82 BACK
Protected by AR ~
I.!!!:..I
Front Passenger's Seat Wire Harness ('02-03 Models)

Front passenger's power seat 4 6 Right side of front passenger's seat
adjustment switch connector A
Front passenger's power seat 6 6 Right side of front passenger's seat
adjustment switch connector B
Front passenger's seat belt switch 1 3 Under front passenger's seat
Front passenger's seat heater 3 4 Under front passenger's seat
Recline motor 7 2 Under front passenger's seat
Slide motor 2 2 Under front passenger's seat
C581 5 10 Under front passenger's seat Right side wire harness (see
oaoe 22-68)
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT

3 WIRE HARNESS
BACK 22-83
Protected by AR

Ignition Switch Lead
Location Connect. to
Behind left kick panel
AfT Sub-harness ('00-03 Models)

Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connect. to Notes
AfT fluid temperature sensor 2 2 Left side of engine compartment
Third clutch pressure switch 3 1 On transmission housing
I
C151 4 8 On transmission housing Engine wire harness (see I
oaoe22-22)
G151 5 On transmission housing Body ground via AfT
sub-harness
22-84 BACK
~
IGNITION SWITCH LEAD
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY
BOX
A/T SUB-HARNESS
2
3
BACK
22-85
Protected by AR

Front Accessory Power Socket Sub-harness
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to Note:

Coin pocket light 1 2 Under middle of dash
Front accessory power socket 2 2 Under middle of dash
C403 3 2 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness B '99 mOvt
(see page 22-44)
C403 3 4 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness B '00-03
~~--- -- ~~ L. . -~- ---- - -_.. _----- -- - . ~
- Usee page 22-48) models
Rear Accessory Powe, Socket Sub-harness

Console box light 5 2 Behind console box
Rear accessory power socket 6 2 Behind console box
CB51 4 3 Behind console box Dashboard wire harness A '99-01
CB51 4 3 Behind console box Dashboard wire harness A '02-03
- ~
\Q
c=;
2
3
-\
~
FRONT ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
SUB-HARNESS
5
___ REAR ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
6 SUB-HARNESS
22-86 BACK
I.!:..I
SRS Main Harness ('99 Model)

connector N (see page 22-93)
Front passenger's airbag assembly 2 2 Behind glove box
Memory erase signal (MES) connector 6 2 Under left side of dash
SRS unit 4 18 Middle of floor
C801 1 3 Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness A
(see cage 22-52)
G801 3 Middle of floor Body ground via SRS main
harness
SRS MAIN HARNESS
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY
BOX
BACK
22-87
Protected by AR

SRS Main Harness ('0().()1 Models)
.
Front passenger's airbag assembly 7 4 Behind glove box
I
SRS memory erase signal (MES) 2 2 Behind left kick panel
connector
SRS unit connector B 4 1a Middle offloor
SRS unit connector C 11 a Middle offloor I
C801 6 a Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness A
(see DaDe 22-52)
Ga01 14 Middle of floor Body grouhd via SRS main
harness I
SRS Floor Harness ('00-01 Models)

Driver's side airbag inflator 12 2 Under driver's seat
Driver's side impact sensor 13 4 Left side of floor
Front passenger's side airbag inflator 9 2 Under front passenger's seat
Front passenger's side impact sensor 10 4 Right side of floor
SRS unit connector A 5 14 Middle offloor
C583 a 1 Under middle of dash Right side wire harness
(see Dace 22-66)
22-88 BACK
Protected by AR ~
L.::..I
SRS MAIN HARNESS 6
1---4--.
BACK 22-89
Protected by AR

SRS Main Harness ('02-03 Models)
Front passenger's airbag assembly 5 4 Under middle of dash
SRS unit connector B 1 18 Under middle of dash
C801 4 4 Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness A
G801 6 Under middle of dash Body ground via SRS main
harness
SRS Floor Harness ('02-03 Models)

Driver's side airbag inflator 15 2 Under driver's seat
Driver'S side impact sensor 17 4 Left B-pillar
Front passenger's side airbag inflator 10 2 Under front passenger's seat
Front passenger's side impact sensor 7 4 Right B-pillar
SRS unit connector A 2 14 Under middle of dash
I
C560 16 1 Under driver's seat Left side wire harness '03 model
NavigatIon
C583 12 1 Under front Dassenaer's seat Riaht side wire harness I
Dashboard Wire Harness A (SRS branch) ('02-03 Models)

Memory erase signal (MES) connector 20 2 Under left side of dash
SRS unit connector C 3 8 Under middle of dash
C801 - - ~
4_ - 4 _ Under middle of dash SRS main harness
Left Side Wire Harness (SRS branch) ('02-03 Models)

Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes I
Driver'S seat belt tensioner 14 2 Left B-piller
Driver's seat belt tension reducer 13 2 Left B-piller
solenoid I
C560 16 1 Under driver's seat SRS floor harness '03 model, I
Naviaation
Right Side Wire Harness (SRS branch) ('02-03 Models)

Front passenger's seat belt tensioner 8 2 Right B-piller
Front passenger's seat belt tension 9 2 Right B-piller
reducer solenoid
OPDS unit 11 4 Under front passenger's seat
C583 _ _ _tL -~
1 _ UnQer froDt Dassenger's seat SRS floor harness
22-90 BACK
~
14
BACK 22-91
Protected by AR
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index

Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
Socket Ref Terminal Connects to

A 15 18 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-30)
AlC compressor clutch relay 3 4
B 14 7 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-30)
Blower motor relay 11 4
C 13 3 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-30)
Condenser fan relay 1 4
D 12 16 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-30)
Diode 9 -
ELD Unit 4 3 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-30)
Horn relay 10 4
Headlight relay 1 7 4
Headlight relay 2 8 4
Radiator fan relay 2 4
T1 6 BattE!!Y positive cable (see page 22-17)
J1Q1_- 5 Engine wire !larness(see page 22-181. ____ . _ ..
1 2 3
4
12
11
13
9
"' I I ,'---' '---'
49~
W 50
) J LS I1Ilr--14
~§Ih ~ 111*--15
8- -
r1 r1
43 44
WL..JW
45
r1
22-92 BACK
I.!!:.I
Driver's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

A 11 10 Left side wire harness (see page 22-62)
B 3 14 Left side wire harness (see page 22-62)
C 10 5 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-38)
D 7 -- Not used
Diode 1 -- Driver's door curtesy light
Diode 2 -- Not used
E 4 20 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-38)
F 9 6 Driver's door wire harness (see page 22-72)
G 8 18 Driver's door wire harness (see page 22-72)
H 5 6 Not used
I 13 18 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-52)
J 12 2 Multiplex control inspection connector
K 14 18 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-52)
L 23 -- Not used
M 15 6 Ignition switch lead (see page 22-84)
Multiplex control unit, driver's, 6 24 (Plugs directly into the fuse box)
connector A
N 22 2 SRS main harness (see page 22-87)
a 21 20 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-44)
P 16 7 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-44)
Q 17 22 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-44)
R 26 1 Optional connector
Reverse relay 19 4
S 27 1 Optional connector
Starter cut relay 18 4
T 24 1 Optional connector
Turn signal/hazard relay 20 4
U 25 1 Ootional connector
26 27 12
25
13
14
2
3
15
16
8
I 17
22
DD
21
7 6
20 19 18
BACK
22-93
Protected by AR
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index (cont'd)

Passenger's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

A 10 20 Right side wire harness (see page 22-66)
Accessory power socket relay 15 4
B 4 4 Roof wire harness (see page 22-71)
C 9 18 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-30)
0 5 3 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-30)
Diode 1 -- Not used
Diode 2 -- Not used
Diode 3 -- Passenger's door curtesy light
E 8 2 Passenger's door wire harness (see page 22-74)
F 7 20 Passenger's door wire harness (see page 22-74)
G 6 -- Not used
H 18 18 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-52)
I 12 18 Dashboard wire harness A (see page 22-52)
J 17 16 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-44)
K 13 16 Dashboard wire harness B (see page 22-44)
Multiplex control unit, passenger's, 11 24 (Plugs directly into the fuse box)
connector A
Power window relay 14 4
Rear window defogger relav 16 - 4 ~ --- - - --~
-~~
-~
nnnnnnnn
8 7 6 5 432 1
10 I" UUUUUU~'
nnnnnnnn
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 2
uuuuuuuu ~3
II II .... 11
DOD
III
4
18 ~l ~) j) ~12
- 5
9""""""-
II I 1rr-- IL J"""-' -- ...,...1 13
8 6
7 16 15 14
22-94 BACK
~
Under-hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box ('02-03 Models)

A 4 2 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-42)
ABS pump motor relay 2
B 3 3 Left enaine comoartment wire harness (see page 22-42)
T5 1 Starter cable
4 3 2
BACK
22-95
Protected by AR
Power Distribution
Fuse to Components Index

Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
Fuse Amps Wire Color Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected

Number
41 120A -- Batterv. Power distribution
42 60A WHT Ignition switch (BAT)
43 20A RED/GRN Right headlight Daytime running lights control unit (Canada)
44 -- -- Not used
45 20A RED/YEL High beam indicator light, Left headlight, Daytime running lights control unit (Canada), High beam
cut relayJCanadl!l
46 15A WHT/GRN Data link connector (DLC). PGM-FI main rel~
47 20A WHT/YEL ABS/TCS control unit * 2, Brake lights, Cruise control unit, High mount brake light, Horns, Ignition
kev light Kev interlock solenoid Multiplex control unit driver's VSA control unit * 1
48 20A GRN" VSA modulator unit (via VSA relay)
BLU" ABS/TCS modulator unit (via TCS relay)
49 15A WHT/GRN Hazard warning lights
50 20A PNK" VSA control unit (via VSA throttle motor relill
51 40A WHT/BLU No.1 7 8 15 and 16 fuses (in the passenger's under-dash fuswel~bo>Q
52 20A BLU/RED Fog lights
53 40A WHT/GRN Rear window defogger (via rear window defogger relay in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay
box)
54 40A VEL No.9 10 11 12 and 13 fusesjin the~assenger's under-dash fuswelqyboxl
55 40A VEL/GRN No.2 3 4 5 and 6 fuses~n the~assel'lRer's under-dash fuse/rel~bo>Q
56 40A VEL/BLK Blower motor
57 30A" BLU/BLK Fan control relav. Radiator fan motor
20A" Radiator fan motor
58 30A" BLU/YEL Condenser fan motor
WHT No. 14 fuse (in the~asseoger's under-dash fuse/rel~box)
20A" BLU/YEL Condenser fan motor
WHT Fan control module
RED Compressor clutch
59 15A RED/GRN AfT gear position console light, Audio unit, Climate control unit, Clock, Cruise mainNSA (or TCS)
switch light, Dash light brightness controller, Gauge lights, Glove box light, Hazard warning light,
License plate light, Multiplex control units, Mode switch light, Moonroof switch light, Navigation
display and unit, Parking lights, Seat heater switch light, Side marker lights, Select/reset switch light,
Taillights Vanity mirror lights __ __
* 1: TYPE S
*2: PREMIUM
',_L 3
1k 11 I
DOD;",
CSSJ CS9] :2
/4
~
D~ I~ ~5
10. II ~~~J~
[e] ___ 6
~~~]411~
9. T-l~~~ x
n
~~
n n n
~_~
46 4748
L.J L..J L.J
8- III .-----. n n r1
7
~,
--B~~
• : Spare fuse
BACK
22-96
I.!!!!.I
Driver's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

Number
1 lSA RED/WHT PGM-FI main relay
RED/WHT SRS unit (VA)
orGRN
2 lOA PNKor SRS unit (VB)
GRN
3 7.SA BlK/YEl AlC compressor clutch relay, Blower motor relay, Climate control unit, Fan control module, Fan
control relay * 6 Rear window defoaaer relay, Recirculation control motor
4 7.SA VEl/BlK ABS/TCS control unit, Power mirror actuators, Power mirror defoggers, Seat heater relay, BSC
control unit
Fuse/relay Optional connector
box socket
5 7.5A VEl/RED Daytime runnina liahts control unit (Canada)
6 15A BlK/YEl Alternator, Charging system light, Cruise control main switch, Cruise control unit, ElD unit, Engine
mount control solenoid valve, EVAP bypass solenoid valve, EVAP canister vent shut valve, EVAP
canister purge valve,Fan control module, Gauge assembly, PCM, Primary and secondary heated
oxyaen sensors Intake manifold runner control, IMRC module * 6 VSA control unit * 6
7 7.5A VEl/GRN Multiplex control unit, driver's * 1, OPDS unit * 3, OnStar control unit * 5 (with Navigation) Shift lock
relay_* 1 Windshield washer motor * 1
8 7.5A VEl/BlK Accessory power socket relay, Navigation display and unit, Navigation relay * 3, Shift lock solenoid,
OnStar control unit * 5 (with Naviaation)
Fuse/relay Optional connector
box socket
9 7.5A VEL AfT reverse relay, Automatic dimming mirror, Back-up lights * 2, Brake light failure sensor, Tension
reducer solenoid * 4, Clock, DRl indicator light (Canada), Gauge assembly, Keyless receiver unit * 4,
Multiplex control unit, passenger's, Power seat control unit * 4, Shift lock relay * 3, OnStar switches
and microohone/automatic dimmina mirror * 5 (with Naviaation)
Fuse/relay Multiplex control unit, driver's
box socket
10 7.5A VEl/RED Hazard warning switch
11 15A BlK/YEl Ignition coils
12 30A GRN/BlK Windshield wiper/washer switch, Windshield wiper intermittent relay, Windshield wiper motor,
Windshield washer motor * 3 Multiolex control unit driver's * 3
13 7.5A BlU/ORN PCM PGM-FI main relay
* 1: 99 model
* 2: '99-01 models
* 3: '00-03 models
* 4: '02-03 models
* 5: '03 model
*6:TYPE S
11
7 6
(cont'd)
BACK 22-97
Protected by AR
Power Distribution
Fuse to Components Index (cont'd)

Passenger's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

Number
1 30A" GRN" Moonroof relays
20A" GRN/WHr' Power window control unit
2 20A RED Driver's power seat recline motor and rear up-down motor * 2 Power seat controlo unit * 4
3 20A WHT/GRN Driver's and Dassenaer's seat heaters
4 20A BLU Driver's Dower seat slide motor and front uD-down motor * 2 Driver's Dower seat control unit * 4
5 20A RED Front DaSSenQer's Dower seat slide motor Multiplex control unit DaSSenQer's * 4
6 20A WHT/RED Front passenQer's Dower seat recline motor
7 20A WHT/YEL Power window control unit * 4, Left rear power window switch, Moonroof relays, Multiplex
control unit door * 4
8 20A BLU/BLK Front DaSSenQer's Dower window switch
9 20A WHT/GRN Audio unit Front and rear accessory Dower sockets Stereo amDlifier
10 10A RED/YEL NaviQation disDlav and unit CnStar control unit * 5 (with NaviQation)
RED/BLU Daytime runninQ liQhts control unit (Canada)
11 7.5A WHT/BLU Ceiling light Courtesy light Power seat control unit * 4 SDotliQhts Trunk liQht
12 20A WHT Trunk lid opener solenoid
Fuse/relay Multiplex control unit, passenger's
box socket
13 7.5A WHT/YEL" Climate control unit, Clock, Gauge assembly, Immobilizer indicator light, Multiplex control units,
WHT/RED" driver'S and door, PCM (VBU), Security indicator light, Power window control unit, Fan control
module DrivinQ Dosition memory switch * 4 Keyless receiver unit * 4
Fuse/relay Multiplex control unit, passenger's
box socket
14 7.5A GRN AlC comDressor clutch * 6
15 20A" GRNIWHr' Driver's Dower w indow motor Power window control unit
30A" GRN" Moonroof relays
16 20A WHT/BLK Right rear power window switch
* 1: '99 model
* 2: '99-01 models
* 3: '00-03 models
* 4: '02-03 models
* 5: '03 model
* 6: TYPE S
1
2
3
8 6
22-98
BACK
I.!!!!:.I
Under-hood ABS Fuse/Relay Box 1'02-03 Models'
Fuse Amps Wire Color Componentls' or Circuitls' Protected

Number
61 40A -- ABS oumo motor
62 20A WHT/GRN ABS pump motor relay, Fail safe relay, TCS relay, VSA relay * 1, ABSITCS modulator unit, VSA
modulator unit * 1
63 7.SA GRN VSA control unit ABSITCS control unit
*1:TYPES
BACK 22-99
Protected by AR
Ground Distribution
Ground to Components Index
Ground Component or Circuit Grounded

G1 Battery, Transmission housing
G2 Engine block
G101, PCM (PG 1 and PG2 are BlK; lG 1 and lG2 are BRN/YEl)
and BlK: EGR valve, lAC valve, Ignition coils, PGM-FI main relay, Radiator fan switch A (PREMIUM),
G102 Radiator fan switch A and B (TYPE S), Transmisson range switch
('00-03 BRN/YEl: Data link connector (DlC), Immobilizer receiver unit, VTEC oil pressure switch
Models) Shift control solenoid valves ('99 model), VSS (with navigation) ('99 model)
Shielding between the PCM and these components have BRN/YEl ('99 model: BRN/BlK) wires: CKP/
TDC sensor ('99 model), CYP sensor ('99 model), CKP sensor, Knock sensor (KS), Primary and
secondary H02S, TDC 1/2 sensors
G151 lock-up control solenoid valve, Shift control solenoid valve A, Shift control solenoid valve B, Shift
control solenoid valve C
G201 Condenser fan motor ('99-01 models), Hood switch ('99-01 models), Keyless buzzer ('00-01 models),
Right headlight (low beam), Right front turn signal/parking lights, Right side marker light, Right fog
light, Windshield washer fluid level switch (Canada), Windshield washer motor
G202 ABS fail-safe relay, Blower motor relay, Cruise control actuator, ElD unit, Fan control relay (TYPE S),
Keyless buzzer ('02-03 models), Power steering pressure (PSP) switch, VSA control unit (TYPE S),
Navigation relay ('99 model)
G203 ABS pump motor, ABS/TCS modulator unit (PREMIUM), VSA control unit (TYPE S)
G204 Condensor fan motor ('02-03 models)" Radiator fan motor ('02-03 models), Radiator fan switch C
(TYPE S), Security hood switch ('02-03 models)
G301 left headlight (low beam), left side marker light, left fog light, left front turn signal/parking lights
G302 Brake fluid level switch, Seat heater relay, Security horn ('99 model), Shift lock relay, Windshield wiper
intermittent relay, Windshield wiper motor, Intake manifold runner control (lMRC) module (TYPE S)
G401 Climate control unit, Combination light switch (2 wires), Data link connector (DlC), Daytime running
lights control unit (Canada) (2 wires), Driver's door key cylinder switch, Driver's door lock switch,
Driver's door lock knob switch, Driving position memory switch, Fan control module, Front accessory
power socket, Ignition key switch, Multiplex control units, driver's and door, Multiplex control
inspection connector, Power transistor, Turn signal/hazard relay, Windshield wiper/washer switch
G402 ABS/TCS control unit (PREMIUM), VSA control unit (TYPE S) (4 wires)
G403 ABS/TCS control unit (PREMIUM) (2 wires), VSA control unit (TYPE S) (4 wires)
G501 AfT gear position indicator panel light, Clock, Console box light, Cruise/TCSNSA switch light, Cruise !
control unit, Fuel gauge sending unit, Gauge assembly (2 wires), Glove box light, Keyless receiver
unit, Mode switch, Moonroof switch and relays, Navigation display unit, Parking pin switch, Rear
.
accessoryQower socket, Seat heater switches, Select/reset switch
'99 model: Shielding between the audio unit and navigation unit have BRN/WHT (dashboard wire
harness A) and BRN/YEl (left side wire harness) wires
('99-02 models) Shielding between audio unit and navigation unit have BRN/WHT wire
G502 Audio unit, Stereo amplifier ('02-03 models)
G503 Driver's power seat control unit, multiplex control unit, driver's, Memory erase signal (MES)
connector
G504 Multiplex control unit, passenger's
G551 Driver's power seat control unit, driver's power seat switch (2 wires), Driver's seat belt switch, Driver's seat heater,
High mount brake light, Navigation unit, left power mirror defogger, left rear door lock knob switch, Multiplex
control unit, door (2 wires), Onstar control unit ('03 model), Power mirror switch, Power window control unit
G552 Fuel pump_ (FP)
G581 Accessory power socket relay, Automatic dimming mirror, Front passenger's power seat switch
('00-03 models) (2 wires), Front passenger's seat belt switch, Front passenger's seat heater, Multiplex
control unit, passenger's, OPDS unit ('00-03 models), Front passenger's door key cylinder switch,
Front passenger's door lock switch, Rear passenger's door lock knob switch, Power window relay,
Right power mirror defogger, Spotlights, Vanity mirror lights
G601 Brake/Taillights, Brake light failure sensor, License plate light, Rear turn signal lights, Trailer lighting
connector, Trunk lid latch switch, Trunk opener solenoid
G801 SRS unit (2 wires)
BACK
22-100
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box I...:!:..I
Removal and Installation
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 6. Disconnect the driver's or passenger's under-dash
SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures fuse/relay box connectors, and remove the driver's
in the SRS section before performing repairs or or passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
servicing (see page 23-17).
NOTE: The SRS main harness connector is a
Removal spring-loaded lock type (see page 23-17).
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio Installation
frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. 1. Connect the connectors to the driver's or
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, then install
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then the driver's or passenger' s under-dash fuse/relay
disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 box in the reverse order of removal.
minutes.
2. Install the left or right kick panel and access panel,
3. Remove the driver'S dashboard lower cover (see and the door sill molding.
page 20-65) or the passenger's dashboard lower
cover (see page 20-65). 3. Install the dashboard lower cover.
4. Remove the door sill molding, left or right kick 4. Connect both the negative cable and positive cable
panel (see page 20-55) and left dashboard side to the battery, enter the anti-theft code for the radio
cover (see step 1 on page 20-65) or right dashboard and the navigation system, then enter the
side cover (see step 5 on page 20-67). customer's radio station presets.
5. Remove the mounting bolt, and pull the driver's 5. Confirm that all systems work properly.
under-dash fuse/relay box (A) or passenger' s
under-dash fuse/relay box (6) away from the body.
BACK 22-101
Protected by AR
Battery
Battery Test
~WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow the
proper procedure, causing serious injury to anyone
nearby. Follow all procedures carefully and keep
sparks and open flames away from the battery.
Use either a JCI or Bear ARBST tester, and follow the

manufacturer's procedures. If you don't have one of
these computerized testers, follow this conventional
test procedure:
1. Be sure the temperature of the electrolyte is

between 70°F (21°C) and 100°F (38°C).
2. Inspect the battery case for cracks or leaks.
• If the case is damaged, replace the battery .•

• If the case looks OK, go to step 3.
3. Check the indicator EYE.
• If the EYE indicates the battery is charged, go to

step 4.
• If the EYE indicates a low charge, go to step 7.
4. Apply a 300 amp load for 15 seconds to remove the

surface charge.
5. Wait 15 seconds, then apply a test load of 280 amps

for 15 seconds.
S. Record battery voltage.
• If voltage is above 9.S volts, the battery is OK . •

• If voltage is below 9.S volts, go to step 7.
7. Charge the battery on High (40 amps) until the EYE

shows the battery is charged, plus an additional 30
minutes. If the battery charge is very low, it may be
necessary to bypass the charger's polarity
protection circuitry.
• If the EYE indicates the battery is charged w ithin

3 hours, the battery is OK .•
• If the EYE indicates the battery is not charged
within 3 hours, replace the battery.•
22-102 BACK
Relays a.=:.J
Power Relay Test
Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the type 1:
test listed for it.
NOTE The turn signal/hazard relay input test
(see page 22-176).
Relay Test
ABS fail-safe relay Normally-open
Accessory power socket relay type A
AlC compressor clutch relay
Condenser fan relay
Fog light relay ('02-03 models)
Headlight relay 1
Headlight relay 2
High beam cut relay (Canada)
Horn relay
Navigation relay ('99 model)
Power window relay
Radiator fan relay
Reverse relay type 2:
Seat heater relay
Security horn relay ('99 model)
Starter cut relay
Taillight relay
TCS relay
VSA relay (TYPE S)
VSA throttle motor relay
(TYPE S)
ABS pump motor relay Normally-open
Blower motor relay, type 1 type B
Blower motor relay, type 2
Rear window defogger relay
Windshield wiper intermittent Five terminal
relay type A
Fan control relay (TYPE S) Five terminal
Moonroof open and close type B
relays
Shift lock relay type 3:
Normally-open type A:
Check for continuity between the terminals .
• There should be continuity between the No.1 and

No.2 terminals when power and ground are
connected to the No.3 and No.4 terminals .
• There should be no continuity between the No.1 and
No.2 terminals when power is disconnected.
1--;---------------------------------------
(cont'd)
BACK 22-103
Protected by AR
Relays
Power Relay Test (cont'd)
Normally-open type B: ABS pump motor relay
Check for continuity between the terminals .
• There should be continuity between the No.1 and

No.3 terminals when power and ground are
connected to the No.2 and No.4 terminals .
• There should be no continuity between the No.1 and
No.3 terminals when power is disconnected.
1 2
I-~ - - - --- - - - - - - - -
Blower motor relay, type 1:
3 4
Rear window defogger relay
Blower motor relay, type 2:
22-104 BACK
Protected by AR ~
I..!::.I
Five-terminal type A: Five-terminal type B:
Check for continuity between the terminals. Check for continuity between the terminals.
• There should be continuity between the No.1 and • There should be continuity between the No. 1 and
No.2 terminals when power and ground are No.2 terminals when power and ground are
connected to the No.3 and No.5 terminals. connected to the NO.3 and No.5 terminals.
• There should be continuity between the No.2 and • There should be continuity between the No.1 and
No.4 terminals when power is disconnected. No. 4 terminals when power is disconnected.
~
3
5
... . . . .1J
1
2
4
5 1
Windshield wiper intermittent relay • Fan control relay

• Moonroof open and close relays
• Shift lock relay
BACK 22-105
Protected by AR
Ignition Switch
Test
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures switch position according to the table.
(see page 23-17). \ Terminal WHT/ BLK/ BLK/
BLK WHT VEL VEL WHT
Position \ (ACC) (BAT) (lG1) (lG2) (ST)
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio
and the navigation system, then write down the o (LOCK)
frequencies for the radio's preset buttons. I (ACC) " "
iliON) ~ ....()
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable. III (START) ~ ~
3. Remove the dashboard lower cover (see page 20- 6. If the continuity checks do not agree with the table,
65) replace the ignition switch.
4. Disconnect the 6P connector from the driver's 7. After reconnecting the battery, enter the anti-theft
under-dash fuse/relay box. code for the radio and the navigation system, then
enter the customer's radio station presets.
L.. , BLK/WHT
Wire side offemale

terminals
22-106 BACK
I...:!!..I
Replacement

(see page 23-17).

2. Disconnect the battery negative cable.
3. Remove the steering column covers

(see page 17-27)
4. Insert the ignition key, and turn it to "0".
5. Remove the screws (A), and replace the electrical

switch (B).
6. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal.
7. After reconnecting the battery, enter the anti-theft

codes for the radio and the navigation system, then
BACK
22-107
Protected by AR
Gauges
SELECTIRESET SWITCH
Test, page 22-128
GAUGE ASSEMBLV
Gauge Bulb Replacement, page 22-126
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

page 8-4
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE SENDING UNIT
('99 model)
page 10-7 VEHICLE SPEED PULSE SENSOR (VSP) (Navigation)
('99 model)
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Replacement, page 22-433
22-108 BACK
Protected by AR r:'I
~
CONNECTORB CONNECTORC CONNECTOR A
SPEEDOMETER
AfT GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
Test, page 22-131
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE

FUEL GAUGE
BACK 22-109
Protected by AR
Gauges
Circuit Diagram
'99 Model
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/lIELAY BOX IGNTlON SWITCH
+) No~WHT~ BLK/YEL
~
DR1VER'S
UNOER-DASH
No.6 No.9 FUSE/RELAY
IlSAI (7.5AI BOX
PASSENGER'S
IJN)£R-OASH
r
FUSE/RElAY BOX
BLKcm YEL
: " -" l r " -
• DAYTIME .
1 r~r«l i
:n
No.4!i
; CON11!Ol • • I20AI
1 UMT i<:=:>1
y; iY
i; T.!
L ..
;
(CIrIIdII
.. ~
FUSE
REDlYEL
'.;d .... .
(USAI B12 r,1 (~~ ) A17
I
iC7 GAUGE ASSEMBLY
,l-9
1i ;
; B6 1
IIGH IMMOBIUZEA ORL

BEAM INDICATOR INDICATOR
N>lCATOR lIGHT UOHT
lIGHT (1.4WI I1.4WJ
IUWI
Bl B9 All B4 B15
GRN/RED • MUlTJlW( I 81.U/WHT

~ ~ ~ !7
CONTROL UMT.
DRIVER'S IUSAI
• ABS/TCS
CONTROI.UNlT
·
• COMBINATION
lIGHT SWITCH
(USAI
• DAYTlME
RUNNING
lIGHTS
PCM
MULTIPlEX
AllBlNATOR
Y
GRN/REO
I
·•
DAYTIME
RUNNING
lIGHTS
CONTROL
I_ .._
UMT
.. _ .. J
•
•
1
•
.
CONTROl. CONTROl.
UMT UMT. "-" - " -'\
DllMR'S
Y .
GRN ¢>
PARKING
BRAKE
SWITCH
BRAKE
R.OO
l.EVE1.
t
Closed : Pldolpushld SWITCH
( Open : PIdoI releosld ( Closed : Root down )
Open : Root up
PARKING
, BRAKE
SWITCH BLK
L jl
(Conldol "-(USZ G302
22-110 BACK
I..:!!:..I
TURN SlGNALJHAZARI)
MlAY
LEFT RIGHT
GRN
YY U GRN
SRSUNIT
~U
Y 8lU
lEFT TURN
SIGNAl
IJGHTS
GRN 8lU ORN
RIIlIITTURN
SIGNAl
lIGHTS
GAUGE ASSEM8L Y 817 C14 82
ASS
IIIOICATOR
lIGHT
......._---L.., IUWI
SEAT BElT MAlRINCTION res LOW lEFT IIGIIT

MMINDER INDICATOR INDICATOR ENGINE 01. TURN TURN
lIGHT LAMPIMILI lIGHT PMSSURE SIGNAL SIGNAL
IUWI IUWI IUWI INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR
lIGHT lIGHT lIGHT
IUWI SRS IlWl IlWl
INDICATOR
lIGHT
11.4WJ
B14 A30 A29 A14 B16
RED BLU
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT,
DllVER'S
~ ;- YEL/MD
MULTIPlEX
CONTROL
UNIT,
DRMR'S
;-
Y
RED/BLU
PCM ASSITCS
CONTROl.
UNIT
Y
YEL/RED
ASSITCS
CONTROl
UNIT
"f-
YELJRED
ENGINE 01.
, SEAT BElT PRESSURE
SWITCH SWITCH
CIoIId : Unbuddtd
(Open : Buckled )
(Closed :Engines,. )
Open : Engine "",n,no
BIJ(
1
GSSl
(cont'd)
BACK
22-111
Protected by AR
Gauges
COMBWA11ON
UGHTSW/TQI
I
RED BLK
A15 GAUGUSSEMBlV
\ A I
I CRUISE DIMMING CIRCUIT I l STABlJZNl POWER CIRCUIT J
from )
( pmious
~:TOR M:g
=~
~~~ ~
Q)~: 100-
lIGHT 13Wx5) , ~ ,
pIgt
IlAW! ~ - ..; ---r-
~
(
"
\..J
1~--4-------r-----~~--------------------------------------~--------
Bl0 A16
"i
Cl0
---
~ ~ ..
CRUISE MUl'!lPlfX
CONTROl CONTROl
UNIT UNIT.
DRIVER'S
..lL.
G501
22-112
BACK
I..:!:!..I
No.13 f7.sA1
PASSENGER'S
FUSE
(~f:9')
GAUGE ASSEMBlY
I
WHT l
C8
MAINTENANCE WASHER
lOW FUEl REQUIRED LEVEl
INDICATOR NlfCATOR
lKlHT =TOR COOlANT
11.4W1 UGHT TEMPERATURE
IU~ IUWI GAUGE
C2 B3
r-"-"l
: ClIMATE BlU • MUlTl'lEX CONTROl
YElIGRN
I~I
UMT, DRIVER'S
• CRUISE CONTROl UNIT
, I
L.. _ .._j
Wllhout Navigllion)
( Syst.m
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
SENDING UNIT
PCM
G501
(cont'd)
BACK 22-113
Protected by AR
Gauges
·PCM
• ABSITCS
CONTlIOI.
UMr
Y U
TEST
TACHOMETER
CONNECTOR
BLU
AU GAUGUSS£M8I.Y
ODOITRIP/OIITSIOE AIR SAfETY

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY INDICATOR
BEEPER
MAIN CllCUIT
1Alt 1A18
'-+~'-"l
A2 88 87
YELIJLU
~
CLIMATE
.. 1
WHT RED
1
WHT GRN .
PNK
CONTROL
FUEL
GAUGE
UNIT
I
FUEL
GAUGe
SENDING
UMr
UNIT
OIITSIlE
AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
~~~ JI SELECT JIRESET
@..... II
flUID
LEVel
SWITCH
:
YEl/CJ!rj RED
4 SELECTIRESET
SWITCH
I
I
BLK ~ ~ ILK I
I
ClIolATE MUlTl'lfX
1 CONTROl
UNIT
CONTROL
UNIT,
ORNER'S
1 I
I
G501 G501
L.~.2... . fCInIdIl
_ ..'
BACK
22-114
Protected by AR ~
1.=.1
'00-01 Models
UNDER-HOOD RISE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCIf
HI--O-'\.J=-~<r'0.:--+-WHT ~ BLK/YEL
~
YL
DRIVER'S
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH
UNDER-DASH No.9 RISE/RELAY
17.5A) BOX
FUSE/RELAY BOX
f"""-'! ;-"-"1
I I i ~~~ i
iy'¢i ;)!y i T,
No.45
12OA) : CONTROL
: RED/YEL ! RED/WHT WHTn VEL

I. .. ...J L.. ..l .. j (To page)
IUSA) B12 ICanlda) B11 22-118 A17 C7 GAUGE ASSEMBLY
HIGH IMMOBILIZER CHARGING

BEAM INDICATOR SYSTEM
INDICATOR LIGHT LIGHT
LIGHT (1.4W) (1.4W)
I1.4W)
B1 B9 A21 B4 B5
PNK • MULTIPLEX
I
~ ~
GRN RED
~
GRN LU
~
CONTROL UNIT,
DRIVER'S IUSA)
• ABStTCS
CONTROL UNIT I
Y i
, COMBINATION PCM ALTERNATOR DAYTIME
LIGHT SWITCH RUNNING
(USA) UGHTS
, DAYTIME
RUNNING
LIGHTS
CONTROL
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL .. _
GRN RED
.. _ .. _ . )
I_.. _.. _
CONTROL
UNIT
..
UNIT UNIT.
DRIVER'S
GRN RED
Y ¢)
PARKING
BRAKE
BRAKE
FLUID
~
SWITCH LEVEL
SWITCH
(ClOsed : Pedal pushed )
Opon : Pedal relused (Closed : ROIl down )
Open : Aoat up
PARKING
, BRAKE
I
SWITCH
I
- .. - .. - .. ~ .. -ICanadl)
.. j - .. - .. - .. - ..
(USA)
~ G302
(cant'd)
BACK
22-115
Protected by AR
Gauges
SRSUNIT
GAUGE ASSEM8lV
I U
817
ASS
INDICATOR
LIGHT
,......--....., fUWl
SI)£ SEAT BELT MAI.fIlM:T1ON TCS LOW

AII8AG REIIIMl£R NlICATOR NlfCATOR ENGINE 01.
NlICATOR LIGHT LAMPfMfU LIGHT PRESSURE
LIGHT f1.4WI fUWI fUWl INDICATOR
fUWl LIGHT
fUWI SRS
INDICATOR
LIGHT
fUWl
I
813 I B14 1A30 I
AlB IA14 I B16
; RED/BLU
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT,
DRMR'S
~ ~
VEL D
MULTlI'LEX
CONTROL
UMT,
DfI\IER'S
;
OPOS
UMT
Y
~LU
PCM ABS/TCS
CONTROL
UNIT
Y
YEL/RED
WITCS
CONTROL
UNIT
YELlRED
~ cr-
,
DIlVER'S
SEAT BELT
m
' PRESSURE
SWITCH SWITCH
~ : Unbuckled )
: Buckled t:: : : Engine stopped
Engin.lllMing )
IIlJ(
1
G551
22-116 BACK
L:!!..I
TURN SlGNAlJHAZARD
RELAY
11FT IIIGIfT
YY
GIIN U GRN L
~
COMBIIIA11ON
LIGHT SWITCH
L!FTTIJRN
SIGNAL
UGHTS
GRN U GRN L
RIGHT TURN
SIGNAL
UGHTS
RED
Y
Cl4 B2 AIS GAUGE ASS£MBLV
GAUGE LIGHT 11.1ZW)
L!FT RIGHT CRUISE

TURN TURN INDICATOR
SIGNAL SIGNAL LIGHT GAUGE LIGHTS 13WlCS)
NHCATOR NlICATOR It.4W)
UGHT LIGHT
I3Wl I3Wl
Bl0 A16 ClO
CRUISE MULTPWt
CONTROL CONTROl.
UNIT UNIT.
ORIYBI'S
0501
(cant'd)
BACK 22-117
Protected by AR
Gauges
C~rcuit Diagram (cont'd)
, PCM
, ABS/TCS
CONIlIOL
UNIT
No.13 (7.5A1
PASSENGER'S
RISE
Y U
From
(22-115PIfII)
GAUGE ASSfM8lY
I
WHT
CI A13
SPEEDOMETER TACHOMETER
LOWRJEL
INDICATOR
UGIIT
(UWI
MAIN CIRCUIr
C2
1C9
BLUIWHT ,CLIMATE BlJ(
CONTlIOL
~
, MUL1l'I.EX
CONTROL
UNIT,
IlAMR'S
, CRUISE
CONTROL
UNIT
Y
r--:
~ PCM
1
G501
22-118 BACK
~
GAUGE ASSEMBlY
COOlANT OOOfTRl'/OIITSIlE AIR SAfETY

TEMPERATUR£ TEMPERATUR£ DISPlAY NlICATOR
GAUGE FUEL GAUGE
MAINaRCIJlT
B3 A19 A18 88 11 C3
VEL BAN V/HT GRN
PCM CUMATE
CONTROL
UNIT
FUEL
GAUGE
UNIT
FUEL
GAUGE
SENDNl
UMT
OUTSIIE
AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
LIGHTS
1O.84Wx21 :I SELECT
WASHER
FLUIl
LEVEL
SWITCH
SELECTIRESET
SWITCH
~
I
CUAATE
CONTIIOI.
UMT =x I
UNIT,
DRIVER'S
I- I
G501 0501 L.~ .. _ ..I
IConodI)
BACK 22-119
Protected by AR
Gauges
'02-03 Models
,UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH
-"'~WKT~
~
BLX/YEl
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RElAY
BDX
$J Na.13
n·5A1 lr.s1 I
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSEJRE1AY
BOX
~S~I_.! ~'!
I No.45 i I =NG i
WKTh
:
:"1:
12OAI.
I FUSE i¢)1 lHT i
,"1:
! ! : ! WKTiRED '
REDLY£l
Ll .. ....i
~
: CONTROl •
RED(WKT
L .. -L .. ....i
w
ITo.,. )
~-m A'7
ti C7 GAUGEASSEMIlY
r.. 1-··~!
! 't.. i
(= )
HIGH MIIDBlUZER OORGNl DII.
BEAM INDICATDR SYSTEM IM*:ATOR
..DlCATDR UIM UGHT lIGHT
UGHT IlAWI IlAWI IlAWI
11.4W1
11 B9 I A21 B4
• MUl11'l£X
.. .,,
-;-
CONTROllNT,
GRN/81.U
;
DRIVER'S IUSAI
~ ~
GRN/RED
·ABS/TCS
CONTROllNT Of
¥SA CONTROl
UNIT
, COMBINATION
lIGHT SWITCH
IUSAI
, DAYT7ME
!'eM AlTERNATDR
? DAYTIIE
RUNNNl
LIGIfTS
__
GRNIRED CONTROl. •
RUNNNl
UGHTS MUl.11'l£X _ .. _ .. _ .. J•
UNIT
CONTROl.
UNIT
CONTROl
UNIT,
.. .. .. _ . )
1C...dal DAMR'S
I
"1 I
PARKING
BRAKE
i
BRAKE
fLUI)
lEVEl
GRNrRN iw SWITCH
Cloud : Podal pushod
( Dpon : Podol rtIoIsod rI SWITCH
Cloud : Float down
(Dpon :FIoatup
'
PMKWG
BRAKE
I
I
1
SWITCH :
I
. I
I~i·-··-··-
· .. _ ..j IUSAJ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. ...: G3G2
22-120 BACK
L::..I
GAUGe ASSEM81.Y
(~ )A~--'-----------'--------------'-----------'--------------~--~
SIIE SEAT BELT MALFUNCTION LOW lRAKE

AllBAG REMINDER INDICATOR ENGWEOII. lAMP
OFf UGHT LAMPtMLl PRESSURE INOI:ATOR
INDICATOR IUW) IUWI NlICATOR LIGHT
UGHT UGIfT II.4WI
IUW) IUWI
113 814 A30 AI4 AI
; RED/ILU
MULTIPlEX
CONTROL
UNIT,
DRIVER'S
'~
YE ED
MULTIPLEX
CONTROl.
UNIT,
DRIVER'S
~
OPDS
UNT
Y
RED/BlU
PCM
Y
Y lRAKEUGHT
FALURE
SfNSOR
REOIBLU YELIJIED
~~ , SEAT BELT
(~: Unbucld.d
Open : Bucldod
ENGINE 01.
PRESSURE
SWITCH
(DOIId :Enginelloppod
Open : Engine running
I
Gal
(cont'd)
BACK
22-121
Protected by AR
Gauges
SRSUMT
I GAUGE ASSEMBLV
ASS
INDICATOR
UGKT
IUWl =-1
VSATOR
IUWl
~TOR
UGHT't
~~A11ON
III*:ATOR
IUWl LlGHT'I
IUWI
11& A29 115
~
'ABS/TCS
CONTROL
-;-
ABS/TCS
CONTROL
7
ORN
VSA
CONTNlL
;
VSA
CONTROl
UMT'Z UIIIT'Z UNIT'I UNIT"
, VSA
COHTlIOl
UNT'I
22-122 BACK
~
'I : TYPt:S
'2 :PREMIUM
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD
RELAY
LEFT RIGHT
YY
GAN IBlU GRN ;vEL
t
LEFT TURN
SIGNAL
UGHTS
GIIN BlU GAN VEL
t
RKlIfTTURN
SIGNAL
UGHTS
TAILUGHT
RELAY
1
C14 B2 AIS GAUGE ASSEMBLY
f>
I CRUISE DIMMING CllCUIT
I STABUZWG POWER CIICUIT
J
(~ '-~
D(
.-,
GAUGE LIGHT (tl2W)
(D ( D
C\
A/TGEAR
POSITION
INDICATOR
DLCD
BACKUGHT
(l.14Wx3)
LEFT
TURN
RIGHT
TURN
CRUISE
CONTROL
\::..,/
GAUGE LIGHTS (3Wri)
BACKLIGHT
(1.14W) ,
, ,
~
~
(TO
nlllt
P." )
SIGNAL
NlK:ATOR
LIGHT
SIGNAL
NltCATOR
LIGHT
IMlICATOR
LIGHT
(UW) C\ -
\::..,/
OWl I3WI
4>
{;>
BID A16 ClO
\
~ ~
RED IX
CRUISE MULTIPLEX
CONTROL CONTROL
UNIT UMT,
DRIVER'S
.... '-
G501
(cant'd)
BACK 22-123
Protected by AR
Gauges
• PCM
• AlSITCS
COHIlIOI.
UNTo.
VSA
CONTROL
UNIT
No.13 17.5A1
PASSENGER'S
Y
~
RJSE
~~)
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
I
WHl
C8
.u
A13
TEST
TACHOMETER
CONNECTOR
SPEEDOMETER TAa10METER
MAN CIRCUIT
C9 ·CUllATE
COHIlIOI. UNIT
BLK • MULT1'LEX
CONTROL UMT,
DRIVER'S
• CRUISE
CONTROl. UNT
• NAVlGATIlN
UNIT
'1
81.U
.~
PCM
G501
BACK
22-124
I..!!!:...I
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
COOLANT ODOITRIP/OUTSID£ AIR SAfETY

TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY INDICATOR
GAUGf RIEL GAUGE
MAIN CIRCUIT
B3 A2 AI9 All B8 87 C3
.. _ ..-
YEL/BLU BAN WHT D WHTGRN
PCM CLIMATE
2 CONTROL
UNIT
FUEL OUTSIDE WASHER
~2-
RIEL GAUGE All UGKTS FLUID
GAUGE SENDWG TEMPERATURE 1O.84Wx2J LEVEL
UNIT UNT SENSOR SWITCH
I SELECTIRESET
SWITCH
I
I I .1:
ClIMATE MULT1PI.EX
CONTROL CONTROl.
UNT UNT.
DllVER'S
G501 G501 I-- .. _

G201
.. _ . .1
:
fCanadiI
BACK 22-125
Protected by AR
Gauges
Gauge Bulb Replacement
Exploded View ('99-01 Models)
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL

SRS INDICATOR INDICATOR UGHT (3.0 WI
UGHT(1.4WI
LEFT TURN SIGNAL
INDICATOR UGHT (3.0 WI
WASHER LEVEL
INDICATOR UGHT
(1.4 WI (Canada)
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP (MILl
(1.4WI
GAUGEUGHT
(3.0 WI
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
INDICATOR REMINDER UGHT
(1.4WI
LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR UGHT
SEAT BELT (1.4WI
REMINDER UGHT
(1.4W) TCS INDICATOR UGHT
I (UWI
BRAKE LAMP INDICATOR I
UGHT (1.14 WI AfT GEAR POSmON
INDICATOR BACK UGHT
(1.14WI
22-126 BACK
I.!::..I
Exploded View ('02-03 Models)
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL

SRS INDICATOR INDICATOR LIGHT (3.0 W)
LlGHTI1.4W)
LEFT TURN SIGNAL
IMMOBILIZER INDICATOR LIGHT (3.0 W)
INDICATOR
LIGHT (1.4W)
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP (MIL)
(1.4W)
GAUGE LIGHT
(3.0W)
VSA ACTIVATION
INDICATOR
LlGHTI1 .4W)
(TYPES)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF LCD BACK

INDICATOR LIGHTS MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
LIGHT (1.4 W) 11.14Wx3) INDICATOR REMINDER
LOW FUEL INDICATOR LIGHT (1.4 W)
LIGHT (3.0 W) LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR LIGHT
SEAT BELT AfT GEAR POSmON (1.4W)
REMINDER LIGHT INDICATOR BACK LIGHT
BRAKE SYSTEM (1.4W) (1.14W) TCS INDICATOR LIGHT
LIGHT (1.4 W) (1 .4 W) (PREMIUM)
BRAKE LAMP INDICATOR
LIGHT (1 .14 W) VSA SYSTEM INDICATOR LIGHT
(1.4 W) (TYPE S)
BACK 22-127
Protected by AR
Gauges
Gauge Assembly Replacement Select/Reset Switch Test
1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-65). 1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-65).
2. Remove the screws (A) from the gauge assembly 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the selecV
(B), and spread a protective cloth (C) on the upper reset switch (B).
column cover.
D B
3. Disconnect the connectors (D), and remove the

gauge assembly.

switch position according to the table.
Terminal
Position
OFF
SELECT switch ON
RESET switch ON
4. If the continuity checks do not agree with the table,

remove the two screws, and replace the bulbs (C)
or the switch.
22-128 BACK
Protected by AR ~
t=:..I
Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
Before testing: 6. Connect the No.9 terminal of the 32P PCM

• '99 model: Check to see if diagnostic trouble code connector to the positive probe of a voltmeter, and
P0720 (9) is indicated. If it is, troubleshoot the DTC connect the negative probe to body ground.
(see page 14-70).
• '00-03 models: Check to see if diagnostic trouble code PCM 32P CONNECTOR (Connected)
P0720 (9) is indicated. If it is, troubleshoot the DTC
(see page 14-297).
• Inspect the No.9 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's under-
• Check for continuity between the C9 and C10
terminals and body ground (G501).
supported.
=
2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the gauge
assembly.
3. Connect the C2 terminal to the positive probe of a 7. Put the vehicle in neutral with the ignition switch
voltmeter, and connect the negative probe to body ON (II).
ground. To prevent damage to the gauge assembly,
lay the gauge assembly on a shop rag. 8. Slowly rotate (over 3 mph (2 km/h)) one wheel with
the other wheel blocked.
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS
14P CONNECTOR C
Does voltage pulse from 0 to about 5 V or more?
BLU/WHT YES-Go to step 9.
2 3 456 NO- Repair open in the BLU/WHTwire between

the countershaft speed sensor and the PCM, the
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
cruise control unit, or the multiplex control unit,
driver's .•

=
4. Put the vehicle in neutral with the ignition switch
ON (II).
5. Slowly rotate (over 3 mph (2 km/h)) one wheel with

the other wheel blocked.
Does voltage pulse from 0 to about 5 V or more?
YES- Replace the gauge assembly .•
NO-Goto step 6.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-129
Protected by AR
Gauges
Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit Maintenance Required Indicator

Troubleshooting (cont'd) Reset Procedure
9. Disconnect the 32P connector from the PCM. How to Reset:

Push the select switch and reset switch at the same
10. Check for continuity between No.9 terminal and time, turn the ignition switch ON (II), and hold them
body ground. more than 10 seconds.
Blinkina P -------
PCM 32P CONNECTOR (Disconnected) Miles (km) Maintenance Reminder Light
At 5,900 (9,440) Blinks for 10 seconds when
to 6,100 (9,760) the ignition switch is turned
213141 1516 ON (II).
At 7,400 (11,840) Comes on and stays on while
to 7,600 (12,160) the ignition switch is ON (II).
YES-Repair short to ground in the BLU/WHTwire

between the PCM and the gauge assembly, the
cruise control unit, or the driver's multiplex control
unit.•
NO - Check for these problems:

• Bent, loose or corroded terminals .
• A faulty PCM .•
22-130 BACK
I.!!!::..I
Outside Air Temperature Indicator Test
NOTE: To test the outside air temperature sensor Calibration:

(see page 21-54).
The outside air temperature indicator's displayed
Troubleshooting: temperature can be recalibrated ±3° to meet the
customer's expectations.
If the indicator displays "888" for more than 2 seconds
after selecting the outside air temperature display 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
mode, check for an open in the wire between the gauge
and the outside air temperature sensor. 2. Push and hold the reset and select buttons for 10
seconds. While you continue to hold the buttons,
the display will scroll through temperature settings
from +3° to -3° as shown.
=-
_I. =-
L. ,,
3. When the desired correction value appears on the

display, release the buttons, and the recalibrated
outside air temperature will be displayed.
If the outside temperature indicator display is off by

more than 3 degrees of the desired value, turn the
ignition switch OFF and repeat steps 1 - 3.
NOTE: To recalibrate the display to the true

temperature, remove the outside air temperature
sensor (A), but leave it connected. Submerge the
sensor and a thermometer (8) in a container of ice
water (e) . Select the calibration mode as described
above, then recalibrate the display to the true
temperature.
BACK 22-131
Protected by AR ~
Safety Indicator System ~
SAFETY INDICATOR
Input Test, page 22-136
I BRAKE LAMP I FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH
RIGHT REAR DOOR SWITCH
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH

Test, page 4-40
LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH

BRAKE LIGHT FAILURE SENSOR
Test, page 22-138
BACK 22-133
Protected by AR
Safety Indicator System
Circuit Diagram
UNDElI-lIOOO RJ&E/IlELA YlOX

lA' V
No.471l1A1
WllTnil --------------------------------
DRIVER'S
~
UNDER- DASH
IAT RJSE/IlELAYIOX
~1 BlX~~) I ,
No,llI1ZOA) No,1Z16OA)
~ ~
WIlT va
SAFrn' _TOIl ~tI1t _~)
MAWCllaJlT
SAfETY INDICATOIl CllaJIT

I
II IIRAJ(E
LAM~
I
t.lDlCATOII
IlAW)
DRMR'S ~~ AlGIIT
DDOA
_TOIl
LIGHT
FRDNT
=NGEIfS
_TOIl
REAlI
DDOA
fC)QTOII
REAlI
DDOII
INOICATOII
:t
ITR-TOII
WI
WI UGHT lIGHT UGIIT
WI W I WI
I 1 I Al
I
C5 CI C13 Cll Cll CS
I
GRN CIIIII GRN /a rm OlIN
MUlTNX
CONTROl
UNIT,
MUlT1P~
CONTROl
UNIT,
MUL"'~X
CDNTRDL
UNIT,
MUlTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT,
T I TRUNK
DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S ~IIT
Y Y Y Y Y
'CIIIII GRN ~l GRN/WHT OlIN
OlIN
DRMR'S
DDOA
SWITCH
I FRDNT
=NGER'S
SWITCH
I~~
=H
IRGIIT
AfAR
DDOII
SWITCH
t.-
BlX
LATCH
SWITCH
1
0601 G501
22-134 BACK
Protected by AR ~
I!::.I
tT
--------Mnlm------------------------------,
BRAKE PEDAL
, I'OSImN
SWITCH
ICIoood:"" depmoed}
---------~L----------~
m
;
• MULTI'LEX CONTROL
UNIT. ORNER'S
WHT ILK MnILK
• CllUISE CONTROL UNIT

• ABSITCS CONTROL UNIT
• TRAIWI LllHTWG
CONNEClDR
• PCM
6 1
2
--------MnIGRN BRAKE LIGHT FAILURE SENSOR
5 3
GRN
r----1
t-
ILK GRN GAN
t~ BRAKE
LllHT
1Z1WI
BRAKE
:::-
HIGHMOUNT
BRAKELllHT
I21WI
ILK ILK
I
CliOl 6551
BACK 22-135
Protected by AR
Safety Indicator Input Test
2. Disconnect the 30P connector A and 14P connector C from the gauge assembly.
3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system .
30P CONNECTOR A
WHT/GRN
I
A11A2
A151A161A171A181A19
Wire side of female terminels
14P CONNECTOR C
GRN GRN/ORN
\ ~
C2 C3 C4 C5
C7 C11 C12 C13 C14
! t
VEL BLK ORN GRN/WHT
Wire side of female ter;-dnels
'" GRN/VEL
22-136 BACK
L::!..I
4. Make these input tests at the connectors .
• If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system .
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
C9 BlK Under all Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G50l)
C7 VEL Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.9 (7.5 A) fuse in the
(II) There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
Al WHT/GRN Under all Check for continuity between An open in the wire
conditions the A 1 terminal and the brake
failure sensor No.2 terminal:
There should be continuity.
Check for continuity between Short to ground
the A 1 terminal and body
ground:
There should be no continuity.
5. Reconnect the connectors to the gauge assembly, and perform the following input tests at the appropriate
connector .
• If all the input tests prove OK, the gauge internal circuit must be faulty.
C4 GRN Front passenger's Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's door
door open There should be less than 1 V. switch
Front passenger's Check for voltage to ground: • An open in the wire
door closed There should be 5 V or more.
C5 GRN/ORN Driver's door open Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door switch
There should be less than 1 V. • An open in the wire
Driver's door Check for voltage to ground:
closed There should be 5 V or more.
C1l ORN Trunk lid open Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty trunk latch switch
Trunk lid closed Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G60l)
There should be 5 V or more.
C12 GRN/WHT Right rear door Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty right rear door switch
open There should be less than 1 V. • An open in the wire
Right rear door Check for voltage to ground:
C13 GRN/YEl left rear door open Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty left rear door switch
left rear door Check for voltage to ground:
BACK 22-137
Protected by AR
Brake Light Failure Sensor Test
1. Check to see if the brake lights come on when the 3. Make sure the BRAKE LAMP light in the safety
brake pedal is depressed. indicator does not come on and stay on when the
6P connector is disconnected and the engine is
• If all the brake lights come on, go to step 2. running. If the BRAKE LAMP light in the safety
• If one of the brake lights does not come on, check indicator comes on and stays on, check for:
whether the bulb is blown. If the bulb is OK, go to
step 2. • A short to ground in the WHT/GRN wire between
• If none of the brake lights come on, check the the safety indicator and the No.2 terminal of the
brake light circuit (see page 22-155). failure sensor.
• A faulty safety indicator circuit in the gauge
2. Open the trunk lid, and remove the left trunk side assembly.
trim panel (see page 20-58).
4. Reconnect the 6P connector.
5. Make sure the BRAKE LAMP light in the safety

indicator comes on and goes off when the No.5
terminal ofthe 6P connector is grounded, the brake
pedal is depressed, and the ignition switch is
turned from OFF to ON (II).
• If the BRAKE LAMP light in the safety indicator

comes on and stays on, check for a faulty sensor.
• If the BRAKE LAMP light goes off, check for:

- A poor ground (G601).
- An open in the wire.
Wire side of
female terminels
22-138 BACK
P Seat
Lights-on, Key-in, r o tBelt
e cReminder,
t e d bKey y Light
AR ~
Timer, and Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Systems I..:!..I
Circuit Diagram
DRlVER'S
--@-
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH
/GNJIllN SWITCH FUSEIRELAYBOX
BATTERY No.41 112OA) No.42I&oAI BAT
+ l--+-~~......-<r'-Jj-+--WHT 101 8U(JYa --I--O"'-~-+-........,
No.54 14OA1
PASSENGER'S No.59I15A1
UNDER-DASH FUSE
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
T
~--'
WHT/YElI'99~ RED1BlJ(
WHT/RED roa-CI3Modokl
Al A1Z A24
MUlTPLfX CONTROL UNIT, DRMR'S
an 817
lOW ENGINE
as AlB A13 Ali
01. PRESSURE CHARGNl SEAT BElT
ifIlICATOR SYImM REloWlER
UGHT UGHT lIGHT
Y Y Y
P -p
YELJRED
RED U
GRN ORN
BlJ(
(= .)
ENGINE 01.
PRESSURE
SWITCH
1
AlltRNAlOR
DRIVER'S
SEAT BELT
SWITCH
8IJ(
/GNT1ON
KEY
SWITCH
DRIVER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
1 --
G503
--
I 1
-
G551
--
G401
BACK 22-139
P r oSeat
Lights-on, Key-in, t e Belt
c t eReminder,
d b y Key AR Light
Timer, and Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Systems
1. Before testing these systems, troubleshoot the multiplex control system (see page 22-298).
Multiplex Control Unit, Driver's
2. Remove the driver's multiplex control unit from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
FUSE/RELAY BOX SOCKET
Al A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 Al0 All A12
A13 A14 A15 A16 - A17 A18 A19 A2.0 - A21 A22 A2.3 A2.4
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DRIVER'S CONNECTOR B

WHT/BLU
+
81 B3 1 84 1 85
81118121813181418151816
t
BLK VEL/RED
22-140 BACK
I!!!::.I
4. Make these input tests at the fuse/relay box socket, and the multiplex connector B.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace it.
obtained
A12 Fuse/relay Under all Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in the
box socket conditions There should be battery voltage. passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box
o An open in the wire
A24 Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.9 (7.5 A) fuse in the
A6 Combination light Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 59 (15 A) fuse in the
switch ON (iD) There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse/relay box
Jump 12 volts to • Faulty taillight relay
B16 (RED/GRN) o An open in the wire
terminal
A1 Under all Attach to ground: • Blown No. 47 (20 A) fuse in the
conditions Ignition key light should come under-hood fuse/relay box
on. • Faulty lED
A13 Ignition key is Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty ignition key switch
inserted into the There should be continuity. • Poor ground (G401)
ignition switch • An open in the wire
A16 Driver's door open Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door switch
There should be 1 V or less. o An open in the wire
A18 Driver's seat belt is Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's seat belt switch
buckled. There should be 1 V or less. • Poor ground (G551)
B5 WHT/BlU Engine running Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty charging system
There should be battery voltage. • An open in the wire
B11 BlK Under all Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G503)
B17 VEL/RED Ignition switch OFF Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty engine oil pressure switch
Ignition switch ON Check the low engine oil • Blown bulb
(II) indicator light operation. • An open in the wire
The indicator light should come
on.
Start the engine. Check for voltage to ground: • Insufficient oil
There should be battery voltage. • Improper lubrication
• Faulty engine oil pressure switch
• A short in the wire
BACK 22-141
Protected by AR
Exterior Lights
'99-01 Models
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR LIGHT

DRL INDICATOR LIGHT (Canada I
HIGH BEAM CUT RELAY
(Canada)
Test, page 22-103
TAILLIGHT RELAY
Test, page 22-103
COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH

DAYTIME RUNNING Test/Replacement,page 22-158
DASH LIGHTS BRIGHTNESS LIGHTS CONTROL
CONTROLLER UNIT (Canada)
Test, page 22-188 Input Test, page 22-163
HEADLIGHT RELAY 2
Test, page 22-103
HEADLIGHT RELAY 1
Test, page 22-103
22-142 BACK
I.!!!..I
HEADLIGHTS
HID Bulb Removal, page 22-166
Adjustment, page 22-168 FRONT TURN SIGNAL/FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT
HID Troubleshooting, page 22-165
REAR TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
HIGH MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT

LICENSE PLATE LIGHT

TAILLIGHTS and BRAKE UGHTS

BACK
22-143
Protected by AR
Exterior Lights
'02-03 Models
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR LIGHT

DRL INDICATOR LIGHT (Canada)
FOG LIGHT RELAY

FOG LIGHT SWITCH
Test, page 22-173 [Wire colors: BLU/RED, ORN,
Replacement, page 22-173 LWHT/BLU and BLU/RED
Test, page 22-103
COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH

DASH LIGHTS BRIGHTNESS DAYTIME RUNNING Test/Replacement, page 22-158
CONTROLLER
Test, page 22-188 LIGHTS CONTROL UNIT (Canada)
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
TAILLIGHT RELAY
~
ire colors: RED/BLK,
RED/GRN, RED/VEL
and RED/GRN
est, page 22-103
HIGH BEAM CUT RELAY (Canada)

[Wire colors: ORN/WHT, ORN, ]
LBLU/RED and BLU •
Test, page 22~103
22-144 BACK
~
7_L----::..L-~----=:::::....~::::=7'__"*'::::::::7;L_::::~ HEADLIGHTS
HID Buld Removal, page 22-166
HID Troubleshooting, page 22-165
FOG LIGHTS • FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LIGHTS

Replacement, page 22-172 • FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT
Adjustment, page 22-173 Bulb Replacement, page 22-172
REAR TURN SIGNAL LIGHT

HIGH MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
BACK-UP LIGHT
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT

TAILLIGHTS and BRAKE LIGHTS

BACK 22-145
Protected by AR
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - USA
'99-01 Models
BATTERY UNDER-HOODRJSE/RELAYBOX
Na.41112OA1 No.59(15A1
+~ , , a-vJ RED/GRN - - - - - - -
MULTIPUX
CONTROl. UNIT
DRIVER'S '
, BlU/WHT
\!
-.J
~c------ HEADUGHT
RELAY2 ~c---- -- HEADUGHT
RELAY 1
, ~I BLU/RED, BLU/RED--
~
No.45 No.43
I20Al I20AI
MUlTIPUX
CONTROl UNIT,
PASSENGER'S
1
REO[YB. RED/GRN REDlGRN
2 LEFT HIGH BEAM 2 lIGHT

HEADLIGHT rlDICATOR HEADUGHT
IHighbooml LIGHT IHiahbtaml
1 1&OWl 11.4W1 1 IIOWI
LEfT RIGHT
HEADUGIIT HEADLIGHT
ILowbooml (lowbtlml
135W1 135W)
6301 6201
22-146 BACK
1.=.1
MULTPLEX CONlROL
UNIT. DR~R'S
MULTIPLEX
CONlROL
BLU RED
II
REDLYEL
RE1GRN
RED/GRN
UNIT.
DRIVER'S
~-------~'1 TAILLIGHT
I
RELAY
MULTPLEX
RED VEL RED BLK CONlROL
REDr3HT UMT.
(Notulld) 4 6 DRIVER'S
~ I
J
~
- -
,'1 ____________________ • ..,..::.1-
LOW :' HIGH , .
~'
-
6.
DIMMER (=D)
(m) LJ RED/BLK
11 10 COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH 7
BLK ORN WHT
I
RED/BLK
,
RED/BLK
T
, T
~,
Rct
Q) QD
LEn RIGHT TAILLIGHTS NSE
FRONT FRONT (5Wx4) E
SIlE SIDE LIGHT
MARKER MARKER (5W)
UGHT LIGHT
(BW) I8Wl
?
I
BLK BLK
1 1 1 I
G401 G301 G201 CliOl
BACK
22-147
Protected by AR
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - USA (co nt'd)
'02·03 Models
UNl£fI-HOOD FIJSI:/RELAY BOX

SA IV
No.41112OAJ No.59fI5A)
\
"'-' RED/GRN
MULT1UX
CONTROL UN IT.
DRMR'S
BLU/WHT 3
~:-------~ H£ADLIGHT
RELAY 2 ~c------~ HEADLIGHT
RELAY I
BLU/A£D --r- BLU/A£D - -
No.45
flOA)
No.43
f20A)
-;
MULTI'lE
CONTROL UNIT.
PASSENG 'S
RED~YEL
RED/VEL
I I
REDIVEL
I
RED/YEL RED[GRN
2 liFT IIGHBEAM RKlIfT

HEADLIGHT INDICATOR HEADLIGHT
fHighbeom) LIGHT fHighbNm)
I fSOW) fUW) f60W)
ORN/WHT ORN/WHT OII\I/WHT
liFT RIGHT
HEADLIGHT HEADLIGHT
fLowb...) fLowbtom)
f35Wf f35W)
G301 G201
22-148 BACK
Protected by AR ~
l!:!..I
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT. D~IVER'S
, \
I
BlU/RED
11J
RED EL REDIGRN RED/GRN
~---- ---- ---:1 TAl.UGHT

RELAY
MULTPLEX MULTIPLEX
FOG LIGHT CONTROL UNIT. CONTROL UNIT,
RELAY DIIVER'S DRIVER'S
?
WHT SLU
9
?
RED'Iw:rr
4
RED/YEL
2
RED/YEL
6
REDl
1
RED/Jl.K
~
- - I ,....
I
.', ____________
.
J. ____________
.
~
,
,
~
I
,
.
LOW : HIGH , ,
I=DI~' 6
~
DIMMER 0
Iml
11 10 COMSIIIATION LIGHT SWITCH 5 7
SLK ORN WHT S~ RED Bl.K
~9
FOG LIGHT
RELAY
ttttt LEFT
FRONT
PARKING
LIGHT
15WI
RIGHT
FRONT
PARKIIIG
LIGHT
15W)
LEFT
FRONT
S/D£
MARKER
LIGHT
ISWI
RIGHT
FRONT
SIDE
MARKER
LIGHT
ISWI
TAIWGHTS
ISWx41
REfLK LICENSE
PLAn:
LIGHT
15W)
I I I I I
G401 G301 G201 G301 G201
I
Sf
G601
BACK
22-149
Protected by AR
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - Canada
'99-01 Models
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/R£LAYBOX
BATTERY No.59(1SAI
+~
No.41 (12BA)
, , , C0U:J I RED/GRN-
u
T
MULTl'LEX
HEADLIGKT
R£LAY2 ~~------~ HEADLlGKT
RELAY 1
CONTROL
UNIT,
DRIVER'S
No.4Z
(60AI
No.54
(4OA1
No.45
(20AI
No.a
(lOAl
•
-
?
cr
'-----~ BLU/RED -
PASSENGER'S
VEL RED~L UNDER-DASH
--~
RlSE/RELAY BOX
t---- RED/YEL
I B BLU-
~f
~ RED~l • GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
DR\. • ABSITCS
I
~ No.5
INDICATOR CONTROL
~
DIlVER'S .10 PASSENGER'S LlGKT UNIT
UNDER-DASH ~R-DASH
(lOA) r-
I I
RlSE/RElAY (7.5AI BOX /RElAY
BOX
jJU RED/VEl REDiVEl

BLUt
KT
RET~ REDfRN GRN1RED
13
C
\ \
6
DAYTINE RUNNING UGHTS CONTROL UNIT
~1 I
11
1
10
RED/ORN
MUlTlPlEX REDh
CONTROl
UNIT,
DRIVER'S r;1 INVERTER
fjvEjR 1
,Y
RED/WHT RED/WKT DRN/WHT ORN/wKT
IGNTOR
~NTo:' I
GRN(WIIT GRNrKT
PARKING
BRAKE
SWITCH
(=~) ~ ~
I~- ~ QI~
hFT
2
=-
HEADUGKT
HIGH BEAM
IIIDICATOR
lR1GKT
HEADLIGHT
BLK 1i'(lowIoumrr ORNr

T
ORNr I
BLK ~llJUGKT ORNtw
KT
1
be....1 (Low buml
(35W) (35WI
--- 0301
....I...L.
0201
22-150 BACK
Protected by AR r--:,
I!!!..I
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - RED/GRN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
-------t-------- BLU/RED - - - - -.....- - - - , MULTIPLEX CONTROL

UNIT,DRJYER'S
MUL11'I.EX
CONTROL
UNIT,
DRIVER'S
------nu--+----------------~
~
MULTPlEX
CONTIIOl.
nu RED
11
H
REDYEL
Y
RED
UNIT,
PASSENGER'S
R~~
IIGHBEAM
CUT RELAY
MULTPlEX
nU/RED CONTROL
UNIT,
DRIVER'S
RED/..YEL RED/
-----mw~T--~--------~
BLU RED
(Not ulod)
ORN
10
Y
RED T
PASSING
lOW : HIGH
)
(
DAYTlMERUNNING UGHTS
CONTROL UNIT
I DMMER
t-----.....------'
(:0)
o
(DE)
11 COMBINATION LIGHT SWlTQf

BU<
I
RED/BLK
,
RED/nK
I
RED/BU<
T
RED/U
LEfT
FRONT
SIDE
MARKER
UGHT
(aw)
AIGIfT
fIIONT
$lIE
MARKER
UGHT
(8W)
=HTS t~~ UGHT
(SW)
I
~1
I
G401
I I
G301 GZ01
I
G601
BACK 22-151
Protected by AR
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - Canada (cont'd)
'02-03 Models
UNDER- HOOD RJSE/RElAYBOX

BA~Y I No.41112OA) No.59115A)
+~'" (J""'-'Jl---....... RED/GRN -
~:- - -- --- - IEADUGHT

RElAYZ ~:- - --- -- - IEADUGHT
RElAY 1
? ?
No.42 No.54 No.45 No.a
(BOA) (4OA) I2OA) (2OA)
t I kU/RED-
YEL REDLYEL DIODE

I • RED/YEL I ~II kU--
;
(E~ ) • GAUGE ASSEMBLY
~YEL
REDIYEL
• ABS/TCS
CONTIIOI. UMl"
i I
• VSA CONTROl.
r
DllVER'S PASSENGER'S UNT
\JfUR-DASH No.5 No.1' UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RElAY V.SA) (IOAl ~!RELAY
BOX
YEL/RED RED/BLU REDIYEL RED1GRN RED/GRN GRN/RED
13
DAYTIME RUNNNG LIGHTS CONTROL UNT
11 10
I
RED/DAN
MULllPLEX
CONTIIOI.
UNT,
llAMA'S
OAN
Y
GRN/WHT
LEfT
I
HEADlIGHT
!Low""")
I35Wl
G301 G2lIl
22-152 BACK
~
--------------RfD/GRN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . . ,
MULTPLEX CONTROL
UNIT, DRJYER'S
7Y
if TI
-------~--------~U~D
~~
MULnPLEX
CONTROL
~
UNIT,
---------,1 k~HT
DRIVER'S
-----~---+----------,
~U/RED
MULTIPI.£X
CONTROL
UNIT,
PASSENGER'S
~U RED RED YEL RED ILK
7
REDI~K
--ORNIWHT -+----t-Q
MULTPLEX
CONTlIOI. UNIT,
DRIVER'S (=- )
Y
REDLWHT
?
RED/YEL
:
~,' - - -- - - - -- - - -:,,!. T
(
) DAYlWE RUNNING UGHTS
CONTROLUMT
I ~--~---~I ~ I
o o
4 7 COMBWATION LIGHT SWITCH
IJc 8J( REDt8LK
FOG LIGHT
RELAY
f~ FRONT
PARKING
LIGHT
15WI
-f- ·f~ f= f
FRONT
PARKING
LIGHT
I5WI
SIDE
MARKER
UGHT
15W1
SIDE
MARKER
LIGHT
I5WI
TAlWGHTS
15Wx41
f~~ PLATE
LIGHT
15WI
W BLK W w
r
I 1I 1 1 I
I
G401 G301 G201

1
G401 G301 G201 GaOl
BACK 22-153
Protected by AR
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - Back-up Lights
e+
BATTERY
!mER-HOOD RJSE/A£LAY BOX
No.•' (120A)
~
No.f2 IBOA)
WHT
--@-
IGtfTlON SWlTQi
BAT
IG,
BLK/YEL
No.9
17.5A)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
RJSE/RELAY
BOX
~ .L _________________________ _ REVERSE
RELAY
I
GAN/BLK
T
GRN/BLK
I
LEFT
BACK-UP
LIGHT
3 I'SW)
RIGHT
BACK-UP
LIGHT
3 (1SW)
1
, TAAUR
I.KJfI1NG
CONNECTOII
, NAVIGAT10N
UNIT
, AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
RANGE
SWITCH
3 IIIIdI-up light switch)
lOosed: In position [!])
DIMMING
MIRROR
BI
GSO, G'O, : '99 Model

G'O" G,D2 : 'OO-OJ Models
22-154 BACK
Protected by AR ~
I..!::...I
Circuit Diagram - Brake Lights
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RElAY BDX

BAmRY
No.47 (20AI
+~~~~------~--------------------~
IGMTION SWITCH
No.41112OA1 No.42 (&GAl WHTm
BRAKE PEDAl
POSITION
SWITCH
3 (Closed: Podol dtpressodl
BLKlYEL WHT BLK
SAFETY DRIVER'S
INDICATOR
~:E~~Ei~~H ....- - - - -.....------..
Y
BDX
'--11----'
WHTGRN WHT BlK
BRAKE lIGHT FAILURE SENSOR

• MULTflEX CONTROl
UNIT. DRIVER'S
• PCM
• CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
• ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT
WHT ILK
HIGH
MOUNT
BRAKE
lIGHTS
(21Wx21
'f-~
B
G601 G551
BACK
22-155
Protected by AR
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - Auto-off Headlights
'I '99ModeI
'2 '00-03 Models
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX "3 '02-03 Models
BATTERY I [ Canida
No.411120A) No.59!I5A)
+~-+I---------------------------------------,
No.54!4OA)
IGNITlON SWITCH
~_N_O._42_!6OA_).....I W~~
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
L-_ _ _ _
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BurEL WHT/YEl "

W~lRED"
~ !7.5A)
No.9
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
L..-1-_...J1 BOX
!Fuse/fllly box socket)
A24 AI2
MULTIPLEX A6
CONTROL UNIT, MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DRIVER'S
DODR
A171 A7 I AI5 A2 I AI3 AI6 AI4 BI3 AIO A22 BI6
~
BRN R~ REDIBlK
"r~::"'''F
BLKLRED BlU GRN/ORN BLK
HEADLIGHTS
RELAYS
REDfLK
FOG
UG~
, HEADLIGHTS
!HlGH)
' HIGH BEAM
INDICATOR
RED/yEL
R7
DRIVER'S
RELAY" LIG~
B~
IY
DOOR LOCK EXTERIOR
KNOB UGHTS
~_+-_--'I SWITCH 3 IGNITION DRIVER'S , MULTIPLEX
KEY DODR CONTROL UNIT,
SWITCH SWITCH PASSENGER'S
WHT/BLU ~bWJT RED/w~ BlU/RED
,DAmME
RUNNING
UGHTS
CONTROL
10 UNIT !Canlda)
~
BLK BLK
lOW
o
~------~----~' !m)
II 7
G401 G401 0401

I
0401
!
G401
22-156 BACK
I..!::..I
Circuit Diagram - Fog Lights
'02-03 Models
MULTlPI£X
COrmOlUNlT,
y
UNDER- HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX ORIVER'S
BAmRY
No.411120A)
+ ~-+~~~---------,
BLUrr
No.52
12OA)
No.45
¥ I20A)
t
COM~AmN REO ~
t COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
~
lIGHT SWITCH 2
LEFT TAIllIGHT
HEADlIGHT RELAY
WHT RED
5
3
Y
RED Bu(
4
~~~TOR
W IO.84W)
( D::w) FOG
lIGHT
SWITCH
2 5
BLU REO BLU RED RED
~~ ------- -- ---- --~ FOG

lIGHT
RELAY
~
DASH lIGHT
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROllER
I I
I T
1""
'f!
COMBINATION
lIGHT SWITCH
IDimmor switch)
r
11
G301 G201
I
G401
BACK 22-157
Protected by AR
Exterior Lights
Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement
'99-01 Models
2. Remove the steering column covers (see page 17-27).
3. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the combination light switch (B).
A
T ~
t7t51 31U4 7
10 ji1361 1~ 1
11
4. Remove the two screws, then pull out the combination light switch.
5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
• If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the
tables.
- If there is no continuity, replace the switch.
Light switch:
1\ Terminal
3 4 11 10 6 7
Position \
OFF
:00: .., ..ro
Headlight switch
I LOW ~
..ro v ..n
=D
r HIGH V"
.r.
"
J\
.... -0 i
OFF J
Passing switch
J. ON l.
0-
- -
.r.
Turn signal switch:

~ Terminal
12 13 14
Position \
LEFT n. -0
NEUTRAL
~
RIGHT -v I
22-158 BACK
Protected by AR ~
~
'02-03 Models
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. (see page 20-65).
2. Remove the steering column covers. (see page 17-27).
3. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the combination light switch (B).
4. Remove the two screws, then pull out the combination light switch.
5. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact .
• If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the
tables.
- If there is no continuity, replace the switch.
Light switch:
\ Terminal
2 3 4 5 11 10 9 6 7
Position \
OFF 0 0
:ar. 0 0 0- -0
Headlight switch
iD
LOW
0
0- -0
0 g 0
0- -0
HIGH
0
0- -0
{)
g- -0
0- -0
OFF
Passing switch
ON 0- -0 0- :-0_
Turn signal switch:
\ Terminal
12 13 14
Position \
LEFT
NEUTRAL
RIGHT
BACK 22-159
Protected by AR
Exterior Lights
1. Before testing the exterior light control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex control system (see page 22-298).
Multiplex Control Unit, Driver's:
Al /l\l. f!.a AI. A5 1>0 A7 1>0 f.S Al0 All A12
A13 A14 A16 A16 r-- A17 A18 A19 A20 - /l\l.1 A22 A23 /l\l.4

(Plugs into multiplex control unit, driver)
Bll/I93I94I96
Blll B121 B13
!
RED/WHT
!
RED/GRN

DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR A
GRN/ORN
2
\9 3 14
5 I 6 9 I 10
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR 0

BLU/WHT
M \,
1 2 3 4 E:l 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 1 15 16 17 18 19 20
- Wire side offemale terminals
22-160 BACK
Protected by AR ~
I.=:J
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Q
BLU/WHT RED/YEL
-, \ / r
1 2 3 4 J 5 IE=lJ 6 I 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 I 16 I 17
I 18 19 20 21 22
4. With the driver's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector or driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
socket.
• If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
Cavitv Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
A12 Fuse/relay box Under all Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in the
socket conditions There should be battery voltage. passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
• An ooen in the wire
A24 Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.9 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
(II) There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
5. Reconnect the driver's multiplex control unit to the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and perform the following input tests at the
appropriate connectors on the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. For driver's under-dash fuse/relay box connector socket location
(see page 22-93).
Cavitv Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
A3 GRN/ORN Driver's door open Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door switch.
There should be 1 V or less. • An open in the wire
Driver's door Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door switch
closed There should be 5 V or more. • A short to ground
816 RED/GRN Combination light Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
switch ON There should be about 12 V. • Faulty combination light switch
813 RED/WHT Passing switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty combination light switch
09 BLU/WHT Ignition key is in Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
the ignition switch There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty ignition switch
Ignition key is out Check for voltage to ground: • An open in the wire
ofthe ignition There should be 5 V or more.
switch
06 BLU/WHT Combination light Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
switch ON There should be about 12 V. • Faulty combination light switch
• Faulty headlight relay
07 RED/YEL Combination light Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
switch ON There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty combination light switch
(cont'd)
BACK 22-161
Protected by AR
Exterior Lights
Multiplex Control Unit, Door:
6. Remove the driver's door panel, and disconnect the 20P connector from the door multiplex control unit.
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DOOR CONNECTOR
PNK
I... J I
,
Al A2
/ / A4 A6 A7 A8
/ Al0
All A12
/ / A15 A16
,
A17 A18 A19
1/
BlK/RED
8. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit, and make these input tests.
A7 PNK Driver's door Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
lock knob There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty driver's door lock actuator
locked • An open in the wire
Driver's door Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
lock knob There should be 5 V or more. • Faulty driver's door lock actuator
unlocked • An open in the wire
• Short to ground
A17 BlK/RED Driver's door Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
lock knob There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty driver's door lock actuator
unlocked • An open in the wire
Driver's door Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
lock knob There should be 5 V or more. • Faulty driver's door lock actuator
locked • An open in the wire
• Short to ground
22-162 BACK
1..::..1
Daytime Running Lights Control Unit Input Test (Canada)
2. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the daytime running lights control unit (B).
RED/BLU RED/GRN
RED/WHT RED/VEL BlK GRN/WHT
A
BlK BLU/WHT RED/ORN GRN/RED
BLU/RED ORN/WHT VEL/RED
(cont'd)
BACK 22-163
Protected by AR
Exterior Lights
Daytime Running Lights Control Unit Input Test (Canada) (cont'd)
4. Make these input tests at the connector.
2 RED/BLU Under all Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 54 (40 A) fuse in the
conditions There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse/relay box
• Blown No. 10 (10 A) fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box
12 VEL/RED Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.5 (7.5 A) fuse in the
4 BLK Under all Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
7 BLK Under all Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
3 RED/YEL Combination light Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 45 (20 A) fuse in the
switch ON (iiD) There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse/relay box
• Faulty headlight relay 2
• Faulty combination light switch
5 RED/GRN Combination light Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 43 (20 A) fuse in the
switch ON (iD) There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse/relay box
• Faulty headlight relay 1
1 RED/WHT Combination light Connect a jumper wire between • Blown bulb
switch ON (iiD), No.3 and No.1 terminals • Faulty high beam cut relay
and dimmer switch Left headlight (HIGH) and high • Faulty combination light switch
inHIGH beam indicator light should • Poor ground (G401)
come on. • An open in the wire
11 RED/ORN Combination light Connect a jumper wire between • Blown bulb
switch ON (iD), No.5 and No.1 1 terminals. • Faulty high beam cut relay
and dimmer switch Right headlight (HIGH) should • Faulty combination light switch
inHIGH come on. • Poor ground (G401)
10 ORN/WHT Combination light Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty high beam cut relay
switch ON (iiD), There should be continuity. • Faulty combination light switch
and dimmer switch • Poor ground (G401)
in HIGH • An open in the wire
6 GRN/WHT Parking brake Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty parking brake switch
pedal There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
8 BLU/RED Under all Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty headlight relays
conditions There should be battery voltage. • An open in the wire
9 BLU/WHT Ignition switch ON Attach to ground: • Blown bulb
(II) The DRL indicator light should • An open in the wire
come on.
13 GRN/RED Ignition switch ON Attach to ground: • Blown bulb
(II) The brake system light should • An open in the wire
come on.
22-164 BACK
t=..I
HID Lamp System Troubleshooting

ilCAUTION the inverter unit 2P connector and body ground.
Never turn on the combination light switch before
fitting the HID bulbs to their bulb sockets and
INVERTER UNIT 2P CONNECTOR
completing the reassembly of the headlight
assembly.
1. Check the No. 43 (20 A) and No. 45 (20 A) fuses in

the under-hood fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES - Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse (s), and recheck. • =

2. Substitute a known-good HID bulb and turn the Wire side of female terminals
combination light switch ON.
Does the headlight low beam come on?
YES - Go to step 8.
YES-Replace the original HID bulb . •
NO-Repair open in the wire between the inverter
NO-Go to step 3. unit and body ground. If the wire is OK, check for
poor ground at G201 or G301 . •
3. Disconnect the 2P connector from the inverter unit.
8. Measure resistance between the No.1 and B
4. Turn the combination light switch ON. terminals and the No.2 and A terminal of the
igniter unit.
5. Measure voltage between the No.2 terminal of the
inverter unit 2P connector and body ground.
A
INVERTER UNIT 2P CONNECTOR
IGNITER
UNIT
=
Is there about 1-2 Q ?
YES-Substitute a known-good inverter, and
Is there battery voltage? recheck. If the symptom goes away, replace the
original inverter unit. •
YES-Go to step 6.
NO - Replace the igniter unit. •
hood fuse/relay box and the inverter unit. •
6. Turn the combination light switch OFF.
BACK
22-165
Protected by AR
Exterior Lights
HID Bulb Removal
AWARNING and the navigation system, then write down the
A transient high tension (25,000 V) occurs at the frequencies for the radio's preset buttons.
bulb sockets of the high intensity discharge (HID)
lamps when the combination light switch is turned 2. Combination light switch OFF.
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or
electrocution if you do not observe the cautions 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then
below. disconnect the positive cable.
4. Disconnect the headlight assembly 2P connector.

~CAUTION
• Never turn on the combination light switch 5. Remove the Torx bolt (A) using a Torx T20 bit.
before fitting the HID bulbs to their bulb sockets
and completing the reassembly of the headlight
assembly.
• Do not service the headlights assembly in wet
conditions, such as rain or snow, near a sprinkler
system, or when your hands are wet to prevent
electrocution.
• Do not touch the surface of the HID bulbs with
your bare hands and do not stain it with any oils
and fats.
• Do not disassemble the inverter unit and the
ignitor unit.
• Do not turn on the HID bulb by using a power
source other than the battery mounted on your
vehicle.
6. Turn the cover (8) 45° counterclockwise to remove

it from the headlight assembly.
22-166 BACK
~
7. Turn the socket (A) 45 0 counterclockwise to remove 9. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of removal.
it from the bulb (B).
10. After reconnecting the battery, enter the anti-theft
B code for the radio and the navigation system, then
8. Pull the retaining spring (A) away from the bulb (B),
then remove the bulb (B).
BACK 22-167
Protected by AR
Exterior Lights
Headlight Adjustment
2. Park the vehicle 7.5 m (25 ft) away from a wall or a

ACAUTION screen (A).
Headlights become very hot during use; do not
touch them or any attaching hardware immediately A
after they have been turned off.
Before adjusting the headlights:

• Park the vehicle on a level surface.
/ I 7.5 m (25ft)
• Make sure the tire pressures are correct.

• The driver or someone who weights the same should
sit in the driver's seat.
1. Clean the outer lens so that you can see the center
ofthe headlights (A).
»
3. Open the hood.
4. '99-00 models: Check the horizontal angle gauge.

The line on the adjustment screw indicator should
line up with the mark on the gauge.
22-168 BACK
~
5. Turn the low beams on. 7. If necessary, adjust the headlights to local
requirements by turning the horizontal
6. Determine ifthe headlights are aimed properly. adjuster '99-00 models (A) and the vertical adjuster
(8).
Vertical adjustment:
Measure the height of the headlights (A). The lights
should reflect 52 mm (2.1 in.) below headlight
height (8).
Horizontal adjustment:('99-00 Models):

The width of the refracting points (e) should be the
same as the width of the headlight central points (0,
E).
'99-00 Models
o E
I /
\B c
'01-03 Models
BACK 22-169
Protected by AR
Exterior Lights
Headlight Replacement Taillight Replacement
1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-101). 1. Open the trunk lid and pull back the trunk side trim
panel (see page 20-58).
2. Disconnect the connectors (A).
2. Disconnect the connectors from the taillight (B).
3. Remove the five mounting bolts (B), then remove
the headlight assembly (C). Brake/Taillight: 21/5W
Turn Signal Light: 21W
A Back-up Light: 18W
Headlight (high):60 W
(low): 35W 3. Remove the six mounting nuts (C), then pull out the
Front Turn Signal/ taillight.
Side Marker Light: 27/8 W
4. Install the taillight and note these items:
4. Install the headlight in the reverse order of removal.
• Inspect the gasket; replace it if it is distorted or
5. After replacement, adjust the headlights to local stays compressed.
requirements. • After installing the taillights, run water over them
to make sure they do not leak.
22-170
BACK
I...:!!..I
High Mount Brake Light License Plate Light Replacement
Replacement
1. Remove the two screws (A), and pull the license
plate light (B) off.
1. Remove the rear speaker grille.
License Plate Light Bulb: 5W
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the high
mount brake light.
3. Remove both bulbs from the light.
High Mount Brake

Light Bulb: 21W x 2
2. Turn the bulb socket (e) 45° counterclockwise,

remove it from the light, then replace the bulb (D).
4. Push the light rearward to release the clips.
5. Pull the light.
6. Clean the rear window and install the light in the

reverse order of removal.
BACK
22-171
Protected by AR
Exterior Lights
Bulb Replacement Fog Light Replacement
Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights: 1. Remove the mounting bolt from the fog light (A).
Front Side Marker Light:
B
1. Remove the inner fender (see page 20-129).
2. Disconnect the connectors (A) from t~e lights.
FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LIGHT: 24/5 W

FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT: 5W
-------
.=:g:;:: ::=~~~~~c;-=-::::::;;=:::::-
2. Release the hook (8) from the fog light.
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (C) and remove the

fog light assembly.
4. Turn the bulb socket (A) 45 0 counterclockwise to

remove it from the housing (8).
3. Turn the bulb socket (8) 45 0 counterclockwise to
remove them from the housing. FOG LIGHT: 51 W
4. Install the new bulb(s) in the reverse order of

removal.
22-172 BACK
~
Fog Light Adjustment Fog Light Switch Test/Replacement
'02-03 Models 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover. (see

page 20-65).
Before adjusting the headlights:
• Park the vehicle on a level surface. 2. Carefully push the fog light switch (A) out from
• Make sure the tire pressures are correct. behind the dashboard.
• The driver or someone who weights the same should
sit in the driver's seat.
Adjust the fog lights to local requirements by turning

the adjuster (A). 111 12 TIT 4 15 II
3. Disconnect the 5P connector (B) from the switch.

1\ Terminal
1 2 3 4 5
Position \
ON = 0- -0
'""" =
~
OFF ~=
BACK 22-173
Protected by AR
Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher
TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR LIGHTS

(In the gauge assembly)
Bulb Replacement, page 22-126
HAZARD WARNING SWITCH

Test, page 22-177
c
C
c
COMBINATION UGHT/TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Test, page 22-158
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY

DRIVER'S UNDER·DASH Input Test, page 22-176
FUSE/RELAY BOX
22-174 BACK
I.!!:.I
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH 'I : '99 Model
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY SOX IGNmON SWITCH FUSE/RELAY BOX '2 : '00-03 Models
~
~-+----'I
BAmR'Y No.41I1ZOA} NO.4216OA} BAT
+t-H~r"'-..o---<:r'-J:-+----WHT 8LKJYB.
IGI
No.49 115A} VEL/RED
~--------cr~--+------WHT/GRN ------------------------------~
COMBINATION
UGHTSWITCH
r - - - - - - GRN/BlU --------,
TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
I
RED BlK
ON
12 L \,' R. 14 LIGHT HAZARD
(O.B4WI WARNING
SWITCH
13
GRN/RED "I RED

GRN BlU"
.....---------+----- GRN/RED
TURN SlGNAL/ HAZARD RELAY

GRN BlU GRN L
MUlTll'l.£X
CONTROlUNfT,
LEFT TURN SIGNAl LIGHTS RIGHT TURN SIGNAl LIGHTS DRIVER'S
REAR FRONT INDICATOR INDICATOR FRONT REAR

121WI IZIWI 13W1 I3WI 127W} 121W}
LEFT RIGHT
1IIAUR
IJGHTWG
COfH:CTOR
SlI( SlI( SLK Ill( SlI( 8LK BlK
I
I
SlI(
0601 G301
1
G501 G201 GIGI G401
BACK 22-175
Protected by AR
Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher
Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test
1. Remove the turn signal/hazard relay (A) from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box (B).
2. Inspect the relay and fuse/relay box socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
3. Make these input tests at the fuse/relay box.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the turn signal/hazard relay must be faulty; replace it.
Cavi!}l Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
1 Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
2 Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the
There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty turn signal switch
Hazard warning switch Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 49 (15 A) fuse in the
ON There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse/relay box
• Faulty hazard warning switch
3 Ignition switch ON (II) Connect No.2 terminal to No.3 • Poor ground (G201, G301, G501,
and turn signal switch terminal: G601)
in Right or Left position Right or left turn signal lights • Faulty turn signal switch
should come on. • .An open in the wire
Hazard warning switch Connect No.2 terminal to No.3 • Poor ground (G2()1, G301, G501,
ON terminal: G601)
Hazard warning lights should • Faulty hazard warning switch
-- --
comeon. - -
• An open in the wire _
22-176 BACK
I..!::.I
Hazard Warning Switch Test
With Navigation System: Without Navigation System:

1. Remove the instrument panel. (see page 20-65). 1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-65).
2. Disconnect the 1OP connector (A) from the hazard 2. Disconnect the 1OP connector (A) from the hazard
warning switch (8). warning switch (8).
3. Pull the hazard warning sWitch out from the

instrument panel.

switch position according to the table. 3. Remove the two mounting screws (C).

\ Terminal
6 7 1 2 10 9 3 5
Position \
OFF 9- -@- fO 0 -0 :\ Terminal
ON Q r-@ rO 0 P -0 Position \ 6 7 1 2 10 9 3 5
0 -0 OFF 0 -@- fO 0 -0
0 -@- k) 0 k> -0
ON
0 r- -0
5. If necessary, check the illumination bulb (C).
5. If necessary, check the illumination bulb (D).
BACK 22-177
Protected by AR
Interior Lights
DRIVER'S
VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS
SPOTLIGHT
DRIVER'S DOOR SWITCH Test, page 22-180
PASSENGER'S
LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS
CEILING LIGHT
Test, page 22-181
PASSENGER'S DOOR
COURTESY LIGHT
PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH
DRIVER'S DOOR
COURTESY LIGHT
TRUNK LID LATCH SWITCH

Test, page 22-184
TRUNK LIGHT
Test, page 22-184
22-178 BACK
~
Circuit Diagram
==1fJ
BA~
+ m
PASSENGEII'S
110.11 ~~
P.5A1 BOX
I
WllTBLU
I
WHTIW
I
WHT LU
T
WIlT LU
-
UGHT
I5WI
IlIIMR'S
DOOfI
COURruY
UGHT
I1IW1
CWNG
UGHT
I7WI
PASSENGER'S
DOOfI
COURmy
UGHT
IUWI
:- .. _
1'I2-Ql_
.. ,
YE RED Bu( RED RED RED
DRlWI'S PASSENGER'S
UMlER-OASH IJM)SI-DASII SPDlUGlfTS
fUSE/RELAYBOX RJSE/RELAYBOX I lUWat
MUlTl'lEJl
MIJlTPlfX CONTROl.
CONT1IOL lINT,
UNT, PASSENGER'S
DRIVER'S ,----"----,
GRN ORN GN
I' ------ h 1,------ r'~N
ClOSE
PEN
ClOSE
DRIVER'S PASSENGfR'S GLOVE CONSOLl COIN

DOOfI DOOR BOX BOX I'OCXET
SWITCH SWITCH UGHT UGHT UGHT
~..;..) ~..;..) IUWI ~JWI IUWI
BLII
BIJ(
i~MULTPlfX
COHIlIOL
lINT,
1
, OIIIVEII'S
L .. _ .. _
GI01 GSal 0501 G5I1
BACK 22-179
Protected by AR
Interior Lights
Spotlight Test
1. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
screwdriver. switch position according to the table.
c 1\ Terminal
1 3
Position \
r;:
ON 0 = -0
LEFT
OFF
.......
RIGHT r-
ON 0 -.:::r -0
OFF
6_ B o o
2. Remove the four mounting screws (B).
3. Disconnect the 3P connector (C) from the

housing (D).
5. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulbs.

If the bulb are OK, replace the spotlights.
22-180 BACK
L::!..I
Ceiling Light Test
1. Turn the light switch OFF. 5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
2. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small
screwdriver. Terminal 1
Position
OFF
MIDDLE
ON
2 4
"
3
A-----
3. Remove the two mounting nuts (8) and the housing
(e).
6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb.
4. Disconnect the 3P connector (D) from the housing. If the bulb is OK, replace the ceiling light.
BACK 22-181
Protected by AR
Interior Lights
Vanity Mirror Lights Replacement Courtesy Light Replacement
1. Open me sunvisor. 1. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small
screwdriver.
2. Carefu ll Y pry off the lens (A) with a small
screwdriver. Courtesy Light: 3.8W
Vanity Mirror Light: 1.1W
-------
A 2. Remove the bulb (8) from the socket.
3. Remove the bulb (8) from the socket.
22-182 BACK
l!!!..I
Glove Box Light Replacement Console Box Light Replacement
1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-66). 1. Remove the rear console (see page 20-62).
2. Turn the bulb socket 45° counterclockwise from the 2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the rear
light housing. then remove the bulb (A). accessory socket sub-harness.
Glove Box Ligtht: 3.SW 3. Remove the beverageholder cover from the center
console.
A
4. Turn the bulb socket 45° counterclockwise from the
light housing. then remove the bulb (A).
Console Box Light: 3.SW
BACK 22-183
Protected by AR
Interior Lights
Trunk Light Test Trunk Latch Switch Test
1. Open the trunk lid. 1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Pry out the trunk light assembly. 2. Disconnect the 6P connector fro in the trunk lid latch.
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the

housing (B).
B -.1

1\ Terminal
1 4
I
I
Position \
OPEN 0 D
CLOSED
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the

trunk latch switch.
4. Open the trunk light cover (C).
5. Make sure that the bulb (D) is OK, then Check for
continuity between the No.1 and No.2 terminals.
Ifthere is no continuity, replace the trunk light.
22-184 BACK
Dash Lights Brightness Controller 1...::..1
Circuit Diagram
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
UNDER-HDOD ruSE/RElAY BOX FUSE/RElAY BOX
BA~ I No.• ~n2OA) No~I4OA

~-+-----YEL ------+......:)'0.....(;0-+---.
No.59 (15A)
FUSE
I
RED/BLK WHT/YEL 1'99 Model)
WHT/RED I'OO-OJ Models)
, . . . . - - - REDIBLK - - RED/BLX
lAS AU
B3
RED/BLX RED~HT
2 5
• AUDIOUMTLlGHT
• AfT GEAR POSITION LIGHT
• DRIVER'S SEAT HEATER SWITCH LIGHT
• PASSENGER'S SEAT HEATER SWITCH LIGHT
• CRUISE CONTllOL MAIN SWlTCHfTCS
g) .... DASHUGHTS
SWITCH LIGHT
UGHT ~J? BRIGHTNESS
CONTROUIR
MULTIfW(
• HAZARD WARNING SWITCH UGHT CONTROL
IO.56W1 UNIT,
• CLOCK
• MOOMIOOFSWlTCHUGHT DRIVER'S
• CUMATE CONTROL UNIT UGHT
• SEl!CTiR£SET SWITCH LIGIfT
• NAVIGATION DISPlAY LIGHT
1
•
LE- r
WHT RED
B4
A20
RED
A14
B,K
....
BACK 22-185
Protected by AR
Dash Lights Brightness Controller
,. Before testing the dash lights brightness control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex control system
(see page 22-298).
Al A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 N3 />8 A10 All A12
A13 A14 A15 A16 ~

A17 A18 A19 A20 . - - A21 A22 A23 A24
, - - -- - - '-------
RED/WHT WHT/RED
81
\ / 83184185
8111812181318141815

DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR I
RED
~
1 2 3 4 F=l 5 6 7 8
9
--
10 11 12
-
13 1 14 15 16 V 18

~I~I
16T17l 18 19
7 II8 9
20
22-186 BACK
I.!!:.I
4. With the driver's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector and driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box socket.
• If all the input tests prove OK,go to step 5.
A12 Fuse/relay Under all Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the
relay box
A14 Under all Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
B3 RED/WHT Adjusting dial Check for resistance between • Faulty dash lights brightness
and rotated the B3 and B4 terminals: There controller
B4 WHT/RED should be 0-20 k Q. • An open in the wire
5. Reconnect the driver'S multiplex control unit to the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and perform the following
input tests at the appropriate connectors on the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Cavi~. Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
03 RED/BlK Combination Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 59 (15A) fuse in the
light switch There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse/relay box
ON (;00=) or • Faulty combination light switch
(ID) • An open in the wire
16 RED Combination Attach to ground: Dash lights • An open in the wire
light switch should come on full bright.
ON (;00=) or
(ID)
BACK 22-187
Protected by AR
Dash Lights Brightness Controller
Controller Test
1. Remove the dashboard lower cover (see page 20-

65).
2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the controller.
111 121 ffi 6

15 1 11
3. Measure resistance between the No.4 and No.5

terminals while rotating the adjusting dial.
Resistance should vary from 0 to 20K ohms as the
dial is rotated.
4. If necessary, check the illumination bulb (A).
22-188 BACK
Entry Light Control System I..!:!..I
IGNITION KEY SWITCH

Test, page 22-191
IGNITION KEY LIGHT
Test, page 22-191
CEILING LIGHT
Test, page 22-181
PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH
DRIVER'S DOOR SWITCH
LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH RIGHT REAR DOOR SWITCH
BACK 22-189
Protected by AR
Entry Light Control System
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD RJSE/RELAYBOX IGNITION SWITCH

BAnERY I
No.42f80A)
~~1--o~o---<r~~----W~----+O
BlXlYEL
-----i[i--6~ ~ 5l,
IGNITION
KEY DRIVER'S
LiG~ UNDER-DASH
fLED) FUSE/RElAY
No.59fl5A) BOX CEnJNG
FUSE LiGHT
~1BlJ(
I
RED/BlJ( fF.../Nllybo......1I) Y
I
BLKJWHT
Al All A24 .:J2 A21
MULTIPLEX I A15 A2 MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, Bl B9 MULTPLEX CONTROL UNIT,

CONTROL UNIT, 0-- BRN DRIVER'S PNK
DOOR PASSENGER'S
A17 A13 A16 A17 A16 A14
BlKlAED BLU OlIN GIIN GRN GRN
UN-o. ,0 DRIVER'S
LOCK \ : OOORLOCK
KNOB 1 iGNITION DRIVER'S LEFT REAR RiG~REAR
PASSENGER'S
'----t-.J. SWITCH KEY DOOR DOOR DOOR DOOR
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
( Closed' ) faosect : Door Oplll) fClosed: Door opIII) fCioied : Door oplll) fCiosed : Door open)
Key inserted
I I
G401 G401
22-190 BACK
I.!!:..I
Ignition Key Switch Test Ignition Key Light Test
NOTE: For more key-in beeper information, refer to the 1. Remove the steering column upper and lower
circuit diagram (see page 22-190) and input test (see covers (see page 17-27).
page 22-192).
2. Disconnect the 7P connector.
When the ignition key is not removed, the key-in beeper
in the driver's multiplex control unit senses ground
through the closed ignition key switch. When you open
the driver's door, the beeper circuit senses ground
through the closed door switch.
1. Remove the steering column upper and lower

covers (see page 17-27).
2. Disconnect the 7P connector.
3. The LED should come on when power is connected

to the No.7 terminal and ground is connected to
No.6 terminal.
4. If the LED does not come on, replace the ignition

key switch.

terminals .
• There should be continuity with the key in the

ignition switch .
• There should be no continuity with the key
removed.

ignition key switch.
BACK 22-191
Protected by AR

1. Before testing the entry light control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex control system (see page 22-298).

f---
A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 f - - - A2l A22 A23 A24
- -- - -- - -
.-
GRN/ORN
4
5 10
\
GRN/YEL
RED/BLK BLU/WHT
n \ \
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 115 16 17 18 19 20
L..J
22-192 BACK
l!!!..I
4. With the driver's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector or driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box socket.
A1 Fuse/relay Under all Attach to ground: The ignition • Blown No. 47 (20 A) fuse in the
box socket conditions key light should come on. under-hood fuse/relay box
• Blown LED
• Faulty driver's fuse/relay box
A24 Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.9 (7.5 A) fuse in the
5. Reconnect the driver's multiplex control unit to the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and perform the following
input tests at the appropriate connectors on the back of the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
For driver's under-dash fuse/relay box connector socket location (see page 22-93) .
03 RED/BLK Combination Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 59 (15A) fuse in the
light switch There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse/relay box
ON • Faulty taillight relay.
09 BLU/WHT Ignition key is Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
in the ignition There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty ignition switch
switch • An open in the wire
Ignition key is Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty ignition switch
out of the There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
ignition switch
A3 GRN/ORN Driver's door Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door switch
open There should be 1 V or less. • An open in the wire
Driver's door Check for voltage to ground:
A10 GRN/YEL Left rear door Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty left rear door switch
open There should be 1 V or less. • An open in the wire
Left rear door Check for voltage to ground:
(cont'd)
BACK 22-193
Protected by AR
Multiplex Control Unit, Passenger's:
6. Remove the passenger's multiplex control unit from the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and disconnect
its connector.
FUSE' qELAY BOX SOCKET
Al M. /l:3 A4 A5 AS A7 M3 /l9 A10 All A12
A13 A14 A15 A16 f - - A17 A18 A19 A20 f - - A2l A22 M.3 A24
-,
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR A
1 2 3 4 5 n6 7
8 9 10111 12113 14 115 16117 18119 20
I
GRN/WHT
\
GRN
22-194 BACK
Protected by AR ~
~
8. With the passenger's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector and
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box socket.
o If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
o If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 9.
A22 Fuse/relay Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: o Blown No.9 (7.5 A) fuse in the
box socket ON (II) There should be battery voltage. driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
A21 Ceiling light Attach to ground: Ceiling light o Blown No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the
switch in the should come on. passenger's under-dash fuse/

middle relay box
position o Faulty ceiling light
9. Reconnect the passenger's multiplex control unit to the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and perform the
following input tests at the appropriate connectors on the back of the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
A16 GRN Passenger's Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty passenger's door switch
door open There should be 1 V or less. o An open in the wire
Passenger's Check for voltage to ground:

A14 GRN/WHT Right rear Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty right rear door switch
door open There should be 1 V or less. o An open in the wire
Right rear Check for voltage to ground:
(cont'd)
BACK 22-195
Protected by AR
10. Remove the driver's door panel and disconnect the 20P connector from the door multiplex control unit.
11. Inspect all connector and socket terminals to be sure they are making good contact.
• Ifthe terminals look OK, go to step 12.
A1 A2 A7 A8
A11 A12 A17 A18
+
BlK/RED
12. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit, and make the input test at the connector.
• If the input test prove OK, go to step 13.
obtained
A17 BlK/RED Driver's door Check for voltage to ground: Faulty driver'S door lock kuob
lock knob There should be less than 1 V. switch
unlocked Poor ground (G401)
An open in the wire -- ---
13. If all the input tests prove OK, one of the control units must be faulty. Substitute a known-good control unit for the
one that is most likely at fault, then recheck the system. If the system works properly, the original control unit is
faulty; replace it. If there is still a malfunction, substitute a known-good control unit for the next most likely unit to
be at fault, and recheck. If the system works properly, the original unit is faulty; replace it.
22-196 BACK
Stereo Sound System ~
WINDOW ANTENNA
Test, page 22-206
Repair, page 22-206
LEFT REAR
DOOR SPEAKER
RADIO REMOTE SWITCH

Test, page 22-205
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR SPEAKER

EQUAUZER UNIT
Removal, page 22-203
Connecter Terminals, page 22-201
AUDIO UNIT
Removal/lnstallation, page 22-202
Connector Terminals, page 22-200
WOOFER
STEREO AMPUFIER
Connector Terminals, page 22-201
WINDOW ANTENNA COIL

Test, page 22-205
BACK 22-197
Protected by AR
Stereo Sound System
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-ttOOO FUSE/IIElAY BOX

BAmRY
+
No.41 (12OAI No.S414OAI
YEL-----------,
DIlVER'S
UNDER-DASH
IGNITION SWITCH FUSE/RELAY BOX
~"'~"''''~ I
YELI.BlK
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
NoS
I2DAJ
With Nlvigllionl
'-"-"l
IWithout NlVigllionl
'-"-"l
MULl1fUX •
I 'um- mi 1 ~RY 1
NAVIGATION I CON11IOI.
UNIT, COMBINATION
y.
DISPLAY PASSENGER'S UGHTSWITCH
Y i<=>
I
GRN.IWHT I BLU
Y I
REDl8lK
WHTFD WHT/RED V
L. ..J._ ..I L.. ~.. _ ..1 G401 WHT/RED ACCESSORY
POWER
A4 All A2 SOCICET
AUDIO UNIT
e El
A3 A16 At;
GAY
BLU GAYjBlK I
BLUjGRN
BRNr REDIGRN
OMr+ "'rJ
LEFT REAR
DOOR SPEAKER
RIGHT REAR
DOOR SPEAKER
BB
DRIVER'S
DOOR SPEAKER
PASSENGER'S
DOOR SPEAKER
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROUER
SEEK
I
: UP
1---1
RADIO REMOTE SWITCH
G502
22-198 BACK
~
----------- :Shieldlng
,.... _
1'03..Modell .. _ _ _ _ _ _ ..., .. .. .. .. .. .. 1'99-02 MocWsI
:--·
i
_ --_· · __ ·_··_··_··-1
.
WINDOW NAVIGATION ONSTAR CONTROL UNIT NAVIGATION UNIT
- ANTENNA
r- UNIT ~\7--'-\l-\l~'
o,
c..=:::.. ........ -- .. - ........... ..
r:::
I .... .... .. .... .. ........... ..
:::~
WHT GAN WHTBLJ( LT RN WHT GRN WHT BIJ( lOIN ORN ~LU BLU GRN ~
,
·
·
ANTE A LEAD -'_'-
··-....... ................. ............ ..
.. ......
AI. AI2 All AI3 All AI2 AI3
L .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ ..~ _ .. _ .__ .. __ ._ .. __ . ~ . f--i
AUDIO UNIT
AI
WOOFER SPEAKER
BI B7 B2 B8 85 83 a. B9 Bl1 BI2
.................. -- -
..... ....
If:: --
--- --- --- ........
1 ( .......... - .. -......
........,.
--- -- .......... ........ "
WHTGRN : w:rr GRN OlIN BLU~RN WHiYR
WHT GRN
RD BIJ( GAY OlIN BLU BJ( BRN WHT
<±l
STEREO AMPUFIER
8 81 <±l
7
...... -_ ............ ..
......
..-.. ......
~......
l BLU GRN n
........ _-- ..........
--- -;---------- -~~~ ia

OlIN au
~
-- --- -- .......... - ........... --

qlY
-- --- -- ........ - --- --
I. 6 11 13 9
• 12 5 7
EQUALIZER UNIT
1
G502 6501
BACK 22-199
Protected by AR
Stereo Sound System
Audio Unit Connector Replacement
When replacing an audio unit connector, match the wires to the cavities as listed in the following table.
Cavities 11, 12, 13 and 14 of the connector A are used for the navigation system or onstar system.
Cavity Wire Connects to Cavity Wire Connects to

A1 ORN Radio switched power A11 ORN *3 Navigation unit (COM)
WHT/GRN *'
A2 WHT/RED ACC (Main stereo power A12 ORN/BlU * 3 Navigation unit (R +)
supply) lTGRN *'
A3 GRN/RED Radio remote switch A13 BlU/GRN * 3 Navigation unit (l +)
BlK/WHT*'
A4 GRN/WHT* ' Security input A14 WHT/BlK Navigation unit (MUTE)
BlU *2
A5 RED/YEl Right rear speaker (+ ) A15 BRN/WHT Right rear speaker (-)
A6 BlU/YEl left rear speaker (+) A16 GRY/WHT left rear speaker (-)
A7 RED/GRN Front passenger's door speaker A17 BRN/BlK Front passenger's door speaker
(+) (- )
AS BlU/GRN Driver's door speaker (+) A1S GRY/BlK Driver's door speaker (-)
AS RED/BlK Lights-on signal A1S RED Dash lights brightness
controller
A10 WHT/GRN Constant power A20 BlK Ground (G502)
* 1: With Navigation system * 3: 'SS-02 Models
* 2: Without Navigation system * 4: '03 Model

B1 WHT Equalizer unit (left output) B7 RED Equalizer unit (Right output)
B2 GRN Equalizer unit (SUM output) B8 BlK Equalizer unit (Common output)
B3 ORN Equalizer unit (left input) BS BlU/GRN Equalizer unit (Right input)
B4 ORN/BlU Equalizer unit (Common input) B10 -- Not used
B5 GRY Equalizer unit (Output shielding) B11 BlK Equalizer unit (Ground)
86 -- ~- -
Not used 812 VVHT/YEl Equalizer unit (Switched +8AT)
o co
Ol !1~l ol! I~ ~o
',----, '
~
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 Al AZ A3 A41 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 Al0
B7 B8 B9 B10 Bll B12 All A12 A13 A14iA15 A16 A17 A18 A19 AZO
22-200 BACK
1.::..1
Stereo Amplifier Connector and Equalizer Unit Connector Replacement
When replacing a stereo amplifier connector, match the When replacing an equalizer unit connector, match the
wires to the cavities as listed in the following table. wires to the cavities as listed in the following table.
Cavity 9 is not used. Cavitiy 2 is not used.

1 WHT/GRN Constant power 1 WHT/YEl Audio unit (Switched + BAT)
2 ORN Radio-switched power 2 -- Not used
3 WHT/GRN Woofer speaker (+) 3 BlU/GRN Stereo amplifier (BASS +)
4 WHT/GRN Woofer speaker (+) 4 ORN Audio unit (left output)
5 BlK Ground (G581) 5 BlU/GRN Audio unit (Right output)
6 WHT/GRN Constant~ower 6 RED Audio unit (Right input)
7 BlU/GRN Equalizer unit (BASS +) 7 BlK Audio unit (Ground)
8 ORN/BlU Equalizer unit (BASS - ) 8 GRY Stereo amplifier (BASS
9 -- Not used shielding)
10 BlK/WHT Woofer speaker ( - ) 9 GRY Audio unit (Output shielding)
11 BlK/WHT Woofer speaker ( - ) 10 ORN/BlU Stereo amplifier (BASS -)
12 BlK Ground (G581) 11 GRN Audio unit (SUM input)
12 ORN/BlU Audio unit (Common output)
13 BlK Audio unit (Common input)
14 WHT Audio unit (left input)
1 2 ..--. 31415
6 7 819 10111112
BACK 22-201
Protected by AR
Stereo Sound System
Audio Unit Removal/Installation

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. Remove the climate control unit (with Navigation)
SRS component locations, precautions and procedures or CD console box (without Navigation).
(see page 23-17).
NOTE:
• Put on gloves to protect your hands .
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related
parts.
frequencies for the radio's preset buttons and the
navigation system.
2. Remove the rear console (see page 20-62).
3. Remove the console panel (see page 20-63). 6. Install in the reverse order of removal, and note
these items:
4. Remove the six mounting screws, disconnect the
audio unit connectors (A), climate control unit • Make sure the audio unit connectors are plugged
connectors (with Navigation) (8) and the antenna in properly, and the antenna lead is connected
lead (C), then remove the audio unit (D). properly.
c B navigation system, then enter the customer's
22-202 BACK
~
Stereo Amplifier Replacement Equalizer Unit Replacement
1. Remove the rear seat (see page 20-95). 1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-65).
2. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the 2. Remove the rear console and console panel (see
amplifier. page 20-63).
3. Remove the audio unit (see page 22-202).
4. Remove the Navigation display unit on vehicles

with Navigation System (see page 22-434), or
remove the climate control unit on vehicles without
B Navigation System (see page 21-60).
5. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the

equalizer unit (B).
3. Remove the two mounting bolts (B) and the

amplifier.
4. Install the amplifier in the reverse order of removal.
6. Remove the bracket from the dashboard.
7. Remove the mounting screws (A), then remove the

equalizer unit from the bracket (B).
8. Install the equalizer unit in the reverse order of

removal.
BACK 22-203
Protected by AR
Stereo Sound System
Speaker Replacement
Front Speaker: Woofer:
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-6). 1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the three screws (A) from the speaker (8). 2. Disconnect the high mount brake light connectors,
and remove the bulbs.
c
3. Remove the woofer cover (A).
J A
D
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (C), then remove the

speaker.
Rear Speaker:
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-12).
2. Remove the three screws (A) from the speaker (8).
4. Disconnect the 5P connector (8) from the woofer

(C), then remove the four screws (D) and the
woofer.
A
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (C), then remove the

speaker.
22-204 BACK
~
Radio Remote Switch Test Window Antenna Coil Test
1. Remove the two screws (A) from the radio remote 1. Disconnect the connectors (A and 8) from the
switch (8). window antenna coil (C).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (C) from the radio

remote switch. 2. Check for continuity between terminal 82 and body
ground and between terminals A 1 and 81.
3. Measure resistance between the No. 1 and No. 2
terminals in each switch position according to the 3. If there is no continuity, replace the window
table. antenna coil by removing the rear shelf (see page
20-56).
Position Resistance
OFF About 3.6 kQ
....
(SEEK)
About 990 Q
•
(VOl. UP)
About 370 Q
... About 100 Q

(VOL. DOWN)
4. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the

radio remote switch.
BACK
22-205
Protected by AR
Stereo Sound System
Window Antenna Test Window Antenna Repair
1. Wrap aluminum foil (A) around the tip of the tester NOTE: To make an effective repair, the broken section
probe (8) as shown. must be no longer than 1 inch.
1. Lightly rub the area around the broken section (A)

with fine steel wool, then clean it with alcohol.
2. Touch one tester probe to the window antenna

terminal (A) here, and move the other tester probe c
along the antenna wires to check that continuity
exists. 2. Carefully mask above and below the broken portion
A\ of the window antenna wire (8) with cellophane

tape (C).
3. Using a small brush, apply a heavy coat of silver

conductive paint (A) extending about 1/8" on both
--~/.
sides of the break. Allow 30 minutes to dry.
NOTE: Thoroughly mix the paint before use.
[£J
0: )
3. If continuity does not exist, repair the window

antenna.
4. Check for continuity in the repaired wire.
5. Apply a second coat of paint in the same way. Let it

dry 3 hours before removing the tape.
22-206
BACK
Protected by AR ~
Homelink Remote Control System 1..::.1
Circuit Diagram Test
Turn on the spotlight.
• If the spotlight comes on, the Homelink's power and

ground circuits are OK. If the Homelink will not open
the customer's garage door, check that the Homelink
is programmed properly (see the owner's manual),
call Homelink at 800-355-3515 or on the internet, go
UIIlER-HOOD to www.homelink.jci.com
RISE/llELAY
BOX
• If the spotlight does not come on, check for these
problems:
- A blown No. 11 (7.5 AI fuse in the passenger's
- An open in the WHT/BlU wire between the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and
spotlight.
- An open in the BlK wire between the spotlight and
PASSENGER'S
No.n lNlER-DASH G581.
/7.5AJ RlSE/llELAY
lOX
'"--i----'
SPOTLIGHtS
BlX
0581
BACK 22-207
Protected by AR
Accessory Power Socket
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
+
No.41
(12OA!
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/llELAY
BOX
No.54
I40Al
IGNITION
SWITQI
VEl WIlT/ill!
~
.a DRIVER'S
n.sAl UMlER-DASH
~/REl.AY
ACCESSORY PASSENGER'S
POWBI lINDEll-DASH
SOCKET FUSEIIIElAY
BOX .
L . . - f - - - - - - f - - ' , RElAY
~
WIlT/RED
AUDIO
UNIT IcblERY
~~ POWER
SOCKET
BlJ(
I6501
1
G4Q1
I
GSa1
22-208 BACK
I..!!:..I
Front Socket Test/Replacement
1. Remove the rear console and front console trim 6. Remove the housing (A) and socket (8).
(see page 20-62).
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A).
---+--BLK
--+--WHT/RED
4. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are

all making good contact.
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded,

repair them as necessary, and recheck the
system.
5. Turn the ignition switch ACC (I), and check for

voltage between the No.1 and No.2 terminals.
• There should be battery voltage.

• If there is no battery voltage, check for:
- blown No.8 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-
- faulty accessory power socket relay.
- poor ground (G401, G 581)
- an open in the wire.
- blown No; 9 (20 A) in the passenger's under-
BACK 22-209
Protected by AR
Accessory Power Socket
Rear Socket Test/Replacement
1. Remove the rear console (see page 20-62). 5. Remove the housing (A) and socket (B).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A).
.... BlK
.} WHT/RED
3. Inspect the connector terminals to be sure they are

all making good contact.
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded,

repair them as necessary, and recheck the
system.
4. Turn the ignition switch ACC (I), and check for

voltage between the No.1 and No.2 terminals.
• There should be battery voltage.

• If there is no battery voltage.
- blown No.8 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-
- faulty accessory power socket relay.
- poor ground (GS01, GS81).
- blown No.9 (20 A) in the passenger's under-
22-210 BACK
Protected by AR ~
Trunk Lid Opener I.!!!..I
TRUNK LID OPENER MAIN SWITCH

Test, page 22-213
TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH

Test, page 22-213
TRUNK LID OPENER SOLENOID

Test, page 22-364
BACK 22-211
Protected by AR
Trunk Lid Opener
Circuit Diagram
e+
BAmRY
,UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAYBOX
No.41112OA1
~
No.5414O-'1
$J
YEl PASSENGER'S
No.12 UNDER- DASH
I20AI RJSE/RELA Y
BOX
~ ,
~UNK
OPI:NER
MAIN
Z SWITCH
MUlTl'lEX
CONTAOI.
-r
BlU
UMT, Z 11IUNK
PASSENGER'S UD
I
OPENER
I SWITCH
-y
l
WHT/RED
11IUNK
UD
OPENER
SOLENOID
G601
22-212 BACK
Protected by AR ~
l!!!:..I
Main Switch Test Switch Test
1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-66). 1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-6).
2. Remove the front passenger's console cover (see 2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the switch.
page 20-63).
3. Disconnect the 2P connector from the main switch.

terminals .
4. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2 • There should be continuity when the switch is
terminals. pushed.
• There should be no continuity when the switch is
• There should be continuity with the switch ON. released .
• There should be no continuity with the switch
OFF. 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the
switch.
main switch.
BACK 22-213
Protected by AR
Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror
Description Circuit Diagram
The automatic dimming inside mirror has a front-facing

lux level sensor (A), a rear-facing lux level sensor (B), UNDER-HOOD RJSE/RELAV BOX [j] : ONSTARSYmM
and a control unit. The control unit receives signals M~W
+ ~ '~
' ONSTARSYSmoI
from each sensor. Based on the difference between the
two lux levels (the light outside the vehicle and the light
~~~
from the headlights of the other vehicle, etc.), the
control unit controls the electro-chromic gel to reduce
the glare. This dimming function is canceled when the
transmission is in reverse, or when the automatic
dimming switch (e) is turned OFF.
~~
~ No'9
ONSTAR SYSTEM
:DASH
(75A) RJSE/RELAV
BOX
REVERSE
RElAY
A
WITHOUT ONSTAR SYSTEM

WHT GRNj
~ GRN/BlJ(
\J ~'
:"
·IIACI(-UPUGHTS
ofIAVIGATlON UNT
III :2 _
lJIANSMISSION AUTDMA11C IISIlE

RANGE DMMWG MIRROR
SWlTOi fHlo bull-in controIlI1ftl
(~ [H) ) ~I
13- : ! 11 :
I
A BlJ( . I I·BlJ(
'¢>!i
IIJ( ,
Ii: .
B
!1
I -:- I~!
GIGI : GS81J
1.._.. : J'
1.._.,
[] OJ
22-214 BACK
Protected by AR ~
I.!!!!!..I
Test/Replacement
Without OnStar System: OnStar System:
1. Remove the front ceiling light (see page 22-181). NOTE: Before testing, check the NO. 13 (7.5A) fuse. NO.
7, 10,11,13,14, and 15 terminals are OnStar switches
2. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the automatic microphone power, ground and signal lines.
inside dimming mirror (B). 1. Disconnect the 16P connector from the mirror.
16P CONNECTOR
RED/WHT BRN BLU/GRN
2. Check for voltage between the NO. 12 terminal and

3. Check for continuity between No. 3 terminal and body ground with the ignition switch ON (II).
body ground.
• If there is battery voltage, go to step 3.
• If there is continuity, go to step 4. • If there is no voltage, check for:
• Ifthere is no continuity, check for: - an open in the wire.
- poor ground (G5a1). 3. Check for voltage berween the NO. 16 terminal and
body ground with the ignition switch ON (II) and
4. Check for voltage between No.1 terminal and body AfT gear position in [RJ.
ground with the ignition switch ON (II).
• If there is battery voltage, replace the mirror by
• If there is battery voltage, go to step 5. removing torx screw.
• If there is no voltage, check for: • If there. is no voltage, check for:
- blown No. 9 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's - an open in the wire, or
under-dash fuse/relay box. - faulty reverse relay, or
- an open in the wire. - faulty transmission range switch.
5. Check for voltage between No.2 terminal and body

ground with the ignition switch ON (II) and
Transmission range switch in [RJ.
• If there is battery voltage, replace the mirror

assembly.
• If there in no voltage, check for:
- an open in the wire .
- faulty reverse relay.
- faulty Transmission range switch.
BACK 22-215
Protected by AR
Moonroof
MOONROOF SWITCH
Test, page 22-219
KEY -OFF TIMER CIRCUIT

(In the multiplex control unit, passenger's)
Input Test, page 22-321 MOONROOF MOTOR
Test, page 22-218
MOON ROOF
UMITSWITCH
Test, page 22-219
MOONROOF CLOSE RELAY

Wire colors: GRN/RED, GRN,
[ WHT/YEl, BlK, GRN/RED ]
MOONROOF OPEN RELAY
Wire colors: GRN/YEl, GRN,
[ WHT/YEl, BlK, GRY/YEl ]
Test, page 22-103
22-216 BACK
I.!:!..I
Circuit Diagram
I I
BAmRY No.41 1120AI No.51 (COAl MULTPLEX
'-0--+-~
\::r;J
WHT/BLU - ~=Jlr'f'
(Koy-offtim_)
r.0.l.~!._ .. _ .. _ .. _ •• _ .. _ .. _ •• _ .-; U
.....
r··-.. - . - . - . - . -··-r-··+I---'I-----I-tI PASSENGER'S

UNDER-DASH
i ~:------------------~ i:~W FUSE/RELAY
BOX
-.. - . - .. - . - . -.. ··n

('02-03 Modelsl
!! ,"-"-"-.. -.~
No.1
~ (30A)
'1<=>"1 No.1S I'
(30A)
No.7
(lOA)
~._ .. .J
r
GRN
I
GRN
aL aL
WHT IYEL aL WHT;tEL
rl-~T~ ~T-r-h
_____ \P :ROOF ~/_____ =ROOF
4----1- ~...J RELAY I...-9+-_+-, RELAY
J MOONROOF .I.
GRY VEL GRNrEL
'---._1~1@12. MOrOR .-+____GRN.....iRED GRN RED
~GRYtyEL -
MOONROOF
U/KI
., SWITCH
"
OPEN 0 '9 CLOSE OPEN )5' CLOSE No.59(I5A)

FUSE
'-i--+-'
GRYiYEL G)R:D VEL/IRED

2
Y
RED/BLK
6 4 S 3
OPEN : CLOSE : mr) ( D ( DLIGHT

(0.56Wx2)
2 MOONROOf SWITCH 1
BLK RED BLK
....... 1 7
MULTIPLEX
CONTROLUMT,
1
PASSENGER'S
G501 G501 G581
BACK 22-217
Protected by AR
Moonroof
Switch Test Motor Test

NOTE: The moonroof can still be operated for about 10 1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-59).
minutes after the ignition switch is turned from the "II"
to the "I" or "0" positions, as long as none of the doors 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the moonroof
have been opened. This provides a convenience to motor.
parked occupants while offering a degree of security
against unwanted or accidental moonroof operation.
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see

page 20-65).
2. Carefully pry out the switch from the dashboard,

and disconnect its connector.
m
3. Check the motor by connecting power and ground
according to the table.
1\ Terminal
1 2
Position \
OPEN e e
CLOSE e e
4. If the motor does not run, replace it.
NOTE: See closing force check (see page 20-53) for

A motor clutch test.


bulbs (A) or the switch.
22-218 BACK
I..!!!!..I
Limit Switch Test
1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-59).
2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the moonroof

limit switch.

NOTE: Turn the motor by hand with the wrench.
Terminal
Position
TILT
OPEN
CLOSE
4. If there is no continuity, replace the motor.
BACK 22-219
Protected by AR
Rear Window Defogger
-: Rear window defogger switch is built into the climate control unit.
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH-
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH- (Without navigation system)
(With navigation system)
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY

Test. page 22-103
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

Function Test. page 22-222
Defogger Wire Repair. page 22-222
WINDOW ANTENNA COIL

Test. page 22-205
22-220 BACK
Protected by AR ~
I.!!!!.I
Circuit Diagram
BAmRY
UNDER-HOOD FUSE / RELAY BDX
No.411120AI No.4216OA1
+ l---+--::J'-D--.....-eJ"U)-+----...
-&-
~
IGNITION SWITCH
'" m ~ =,,,,,,
LP FUSE/RELAYBOX
BlKJYEl
WHTIGRN
REAR
f~-------------------
PASSENGER'S wtlDOW
UNDER-DASH DEFOGGER
FUSE/RELAY BOX L-+-____________ ~~
RELAY
BLKIGRN BRN YEL
11
CUMATE CONTROL
REAR WINDOW
~
UNIT
(Rw window dtfogg«
.wi1l:h and deiogg«
DEFOGGER
SWITCH
tim« circu~ built into
climate control un~
) Il'IlICATOR
lLEDI
AI WINDOW ANTENNA COL
Bl
BLKlGRN
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
G401
BACK 22-221
Protected by AR
Rear Window Defogger
Function Test Defogger Wire Repair
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch or damage the defogger NOTE: To make an effective repair, the broken section
wires with the tester probe. must be no longer than 1 inch.
1. Check for voltage between the positive terminal (A) 1. Lightly rub the area around the broken section (A)
and body ground with the ignition switch and with fine steel wool, then clean it with alcohol.
defogger switch ON.
There should be battery voltage.
• If there is no voltage, check for:

- a faulty defogger relay.
- faulty window antenna coil.
- an open in the BLK/GRN wire.
B A
c
2. Carefully mask above and below the broken portion
of the defogger wire (B) with cellophane tape (C).
3. Using a small brush, apply a heavy coat of silver

conductive paint extending about 118" on both
sides of the break. Allow 25 minutes to dry.
Thoroughly mix the paint before use.
2. Check for continuity between the negative terminal

(B) and body ground.
If there is no continuity, check for an open in the
defogger ground wire.
3. Touch the voltmeter positive probe to the halfway

point of each defogger wire, and the negative
probe to the negative terminal.
There should be about 6 V with the ignition switch
and the defogger switch ON.
• If the voltage is as specified, the defogger wire is

OK.
• If the voltage is not as specified, repair the
defogger wire. 4. Check for continuity in the repaired wire.
- If it is more than 6 V, there is a break in the
negative half of the wire. 5. Apply a second coat of paint in the same way. Let it
- If it is less than 6 V, there is a break in the dry 3 hours before removing the tape.
positive half of the wire.
22-222 BACK
Clock l=!..I
Circuit Diagram Replacement
1. Remove the instrument panel (see page 20-65),

'1 : '99 Model
'Z : '00-03 Models
UNDER-HOOD RISE/RElAY BOX 2. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the clock.
No.4211OA1
No.54
14OA1
WHT~
BAT IGNTION
B~
161 SWITCH
$J ~
PASSENGER'S DRIVER'S
No.13 UNDER-DASH No.9 UI'tlER-DASH
17.5A1 FUSEJRELAY 17.5A1 FUSE/RELAY
BOX BOX
r-r;r-l
WIIT/YEL ~ WIlT/VEL ~ lL VEL
~~ WHT D~ \J COMBt.lAT1ON
UGHTSWITCH
3, Remove the two mounting screws (B) from the
clock.
·PCM
• GAUGE
ASSE_Y
GAUGE
ASSEMBLY Y
RED
4. Remove the clock from the instrument panel.
CLOCK Terminals
Cavity Wire Connect to
1 VEL IG1 (Main clock power
supply)
2 WHT/YEL*' Constant power
WHT/RED*2
3 RED/BlK Lights-on signal
4 RED Multiplex control unit,
driver's
5 BlK Ground
* 1: '99 Model
* 2: '00-03 Models
BLK RED
5. If necessary, replace the bulb (C).
~
MULTPLEX
CONTROl.
UNT,
DllVER'S
0501
BACK 22-223
Protected by AR
Horns
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELA V BOX
HORN RELAY HORN SWITCH

Test, page 22-103 Test, page 22-227
CABLE REEL
page 23-231
HORN (LOW)
Test/Replacement,
page 22-226
HORN (HIGH) ('00-03 models)
Test/Replacement, page 22-226
J
HORN (HIGH) ('99 model)
22-224 BACK
Protected by AR
Circuit Diagram
BAmRY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAYBOX
• IllWEUGIIT
• KEY INTBILOCK
SOLfNOll
• SECURITY HORN
~:~I "T
BLU D
r"-
I LTGRN/~~-" i
i~ i""~
I• CONTlIOl UMT I•
MULTI'LfX
· PASSENGBrS '
1.._ .. _ . J.
IONSTAR SYSTEM)
r"-"-"
I LTGIINIBW
iI ~ .I
ONSTAR
CABLE
REEL
HORN
(Low)
HHORN
(High)
• CONTROl •
. .. J
i..~._
CRUISE CONTROL
SET/llESUME/
CANCEl. SWITCH
BACK 22-225
Protected by AR
Horns
Horn Test/Replacement
1. Open the hood. 5. Test the horn by connecting battery power to the
terminal (A) and grounding the bracket (8). The
2. Remove the front bulkhead cover (see page 20-135). horn should sound.
B~
3. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-101).
(High horn for '00-03 models)
4. Disconnect the 1P connector (A), and remove the

low horn (8) and high horn (e) ('99 model) or (D)
('00-03 models).
B
c
6. If it fails to sound, replace it.
~
'~
........ ) < )
BACK
22-226
Protected by AR ~
~
Horn Switch Test
1. Remove the dashboard lower cover (see page 20- 5. Remove the driver's airbag assembly.
65).
6. Check for continuity between the cable reel No.2
2. Remove the steering column upper and lower terminal (A) and the horn switch positive terminal
covers (see page 17-27). (8).
3. Disconnect the dashboard wire harness 8 4P • If there is no continuity, check the cruise control
connector (A) from the cable reel (8). Set/Resume/Cancel switch. If the switch is OK,
replace the cable reel (see page 23-219) and
B check for proper operation.
• If there is continuity, replace the driver's airbag.
4. Check for continuity between the cable reel No.2

terminal and body ground in each switch position
according to the table .
• If there is continuity, the horn switch is OK .

• If there is no continuity, go to step 5.
\ Terminal
2 Body ground
Position \
Pushed 0 -0
Released
BACK
22-227
Protected by AR
Power Seats
Driver's Power Seat (S-way Adjustable):
REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR

Test, page 22-233
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR SLIDE MOTOR

Test, page 22-233 Test, page 22-233
Passenger's Power Seat (4-way Adjustable):
RECLINE MOTOR
Test, page 22-234
SLIDE MOTOR
Test, page 22-234
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
Test/Replacement,
page 22-232
BACK
22-228
Protected by AR ~
I.!!!:.I
Circuit Diagram - 8-way Adjustable
UNDfR-HOOD RlSE/RELAV BOX

BATTERY
No.41 (120AI No.5514GA1
VELIGRN
No.4
I20AI
~ No.2
12OA1
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAVBOX
BLU REO
B6 B2 POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
UP "
B5 A3 A4 AI A5 A6 A2 B4 B3 Bl
BIJ( GRN EL GN BLU VEL BU RED REDIVEL VEL VELIGRN BLK
FRONT UP-DOWN REAR UP-DOWN

MOTOR MOTOR
G551 G551
BACK 22-229
Protected by AR
Power Seats
Circuit Diagram - 4-way Adjustable
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/REI.AY BOX

i
BAmRY
No.41 112OA) No.55I40A)
+~--~~~~~~--~
YEL/GIIN
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
No.8 FUSE/RELAYBDX
(ZOA)
WHT.
81 83 POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENTSW1Ta!
BACK- FOR- BACK- '. fOR- '.

WARD WARD WARD WARD
B4 A4 A2 as B8 B2
BIJ(
RECLN
MOTOR
G581 G5IIl
22-230 BACK
I.!!!!!.I
Switch Test/Replacement
8-way Adjustable: 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each

,. Remove the adjustment switch cover (A) from the
driver's seat by removing the two screws (B), and 1\ Terminal
A1 A2 A3 A4 AS A6 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6
pulling off the adjustment switch knobs (C). Position \
FOR \.../
h 1\.../
SLIDE WARD
SWITCH BACK :\.../ "
WARD r-. Ir-. 1\..../
FOR 1\.../ \.../ J\
RECLINE WARD
SWITCH BACK
"
" t:::: h
'-...I
WARD
[V
J\ 1\.../
FRONT UP
UP-
DOWN "
SWITCH DOWI\ In \..../ J\ 1\..../
REAR UP [\..../ r-. r-. jV

UP-
DOWN
SWITCH DOWI\ i"
\.../ h \..../
A1 F====t A2
2. Disconnect the 6P connectors (D) from the
adjustment switch (E), then remove the switch from A3 A41A5 A6
the cover by removing its two mounting screws.
3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs.
F=L
81 82
83 841 85 86

switch.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-231
Protected by AR
Power Seats
Switch Test/Replacement (cont'd)
4-way Adjustable: 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each

1. Remove the adjustment switch cover (A) from the
passenger's seat by removing the two screws (B),
and pulling off the adjustment switch knobs (C).
"-Position
Terminal
\
A2 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6
FOR ,.. ..... ..... ,..

SLIDE WARD i
SWITCH BACK ..... ,.... ..... ,.... I
WARD
FOR .....
.("\ ..... i
RECLINE WARD C
SWITCH BACK ..... ,.. ..... ,..
WARD
[g]
2. Disconnect the 6P connectors (D) from the

adjustment switch (E), then remove the switch from
the cover by removing its two mounting screws.
I==l
81 82
3. Reinstall the adjustment switch knobs.
83 84 185 86

switch.
22-232 BACK
~
Motor Test
8-way Adjustable: 3. Test the motor. When the motor stops running,
disconnect battery power immediately.
1. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-78).
Recline motor:
2. Disconnect the 6P connectors from the adjustment
switch. 1\ Terminal
B3 B4
Position \
Forward <±> e
FRONT
UP-DOWN Wire side of Backward e <±>
MOTOR female terminals
Slide motor:
1\ Terminal
A1 A5
Position \
Forward e G)
Backward G) e
Front up-down motor:
SLIDE
MOTOR
1\ Terminal
A3 A4
Position \
UP <:8 e
Wire side of
DOWN e <:8
female terminals
Rear up-down motor:
1\ Terminal
A2 A6
Position \
UP <:8 e
DOWN e <:8
4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,

check for an open in the power seat wire harness
between the 6P connector and the 2P or 4P
connectors. If the harness is OK, replace the motor
'99 model (see page 20-84).
'00 model (see page 20-85),
BACK 22-233
Protected by AR
Power Seats
Motor Test (cont'd)
4-way Adjustable: 3. Test the motor. When the motor stops running,
disconnect battery power immediately.
1. Remove the passenger's seat (see page 20-78).
Recline motor:
2. Disconnect the 6P connectors from the adjustment
switch. 1\ Terminal
B5 B6
Position \
Forward e G)
Wire side of
female terminals
Backward G) e
Slide motor:
1\ Terminal
A2 A4
Position \
Forward e G)
-
Backward G) e
RECLINE
MOTOR

check for an open in the power seat wire harness
between the 6P connector and the 2P connectors. If
ADJUSTMENT the harness is OK, replace the motor
SWITCH '99 model (see page 20-84),
~ Wire side of '00 model (see page 20-85),
~
female terminals
22-234 BACK
Protected by AR ~
Power Mirrors I.!!:.I
POWER MIRROR and DEFOGGER SWITCH

Test, page 22-238
POWER MIRRORS
Function Test, page 22-237
Test, page 22-239
Mirror Actuator Replacement, page 22-240
BACK
22-235
Protected by AR
Power Mirrors
Circuit Diagram
Without DPMS
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAYBOX IGNITION SWITCH FUSE/RELAYBOX
M[B I~~' --@-.,---f§.I-II-....,

.
YjLK
r - - - - YEL/BLK
POWER MIIROR SWITCH
LEFT
dD--U~--GD
• ~~-----+--~
," ~~;ER
~~-~
.... AAA ~
""-1 vvv '1:::::7
r--- :r,- ------------------------------,q"

LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT
718 9 110
ORN~ BLU(wKr YEL/WHT alx
BLU GRN ORN~HT

LEFTMIIROR RIGHT MIRROR
LEFT
e
UP RIGHT DEFOGGER UP
e
RIGHT I DEFOGGER
BLU~T BLU10RN B!J< BLU/WHT LTGRN

r
ILK
I I
.......... .......... ........

G551 6511 G551
22-236
BACK
Protected by AR ~
a=:.J
Function Test
Without DPMS left mirror
1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-6). 6. Connect the No.1 terminal to the No.7 terminal,
and the No.4 (or No.9) terminal to body ground
with jumper wires. The left mirror should tilt down
(or swing left) with the ignition switch ON (II).
• If the mirror does not tilt down (or does not swing
left), check for an open in the BlU/WHT (or BlU/
ORN) wire between the left mirror and the 10P
connector. If the wire is OK, check the left mirror
actuator.
• If the mirror neither tilts down nor swings left,
repair the BlU/GRN wire.
• If the mirror works properly, check the mirror
switch.
BLU/WHT
Right mirror
Wire side of
female terminals 7. Connect the No.1 terminal to the No. 8 terminal,
and the No.4 (or No. 10) terminal to body ground
with jumper wires. The right mirror should tilt
down (or swing left) with the ignition switch ON (II).
BLU/GRN BLU/ORN • If the miror does not tilt down (or does not swing
left), check for an open in the BlU/WHT (or IT
GRN) wire between the right mirror and the 10P
2. Disconnect the 1OP connector from the power connector.
mirror switch. If the wire is OK, check the right mirror actuator.
• If the mirror neither tilts down nor swings left,
3. Choose the appropriate test based on the repair the YEL/WHT wire .
symptom: • If the mirror works properly, check the mirror
• Both mirrors don't work, go to step 4. switch.
• left mirror doesn't work, go to step 6.
• Right mirror doesn't work, go to step 7. Defogger
• Defogger doesn't work, go to step 8.
8. Connect the No.3 and No.6 terminals with a
Both mirrors jumper wire, and check for voltage between the No.
3 terminal and body ground. There should be
4. Check for voltage between the No.1 terminal and battery voltage and both mirrors should warm up
body ground with the ignition switch ON (II). with the ignition switch ON (II) .
There should be battery voltage. • If there is no voltage or neither warms up, check
• If there is no battery voltage, check for: for:
- blown No.4 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver'S under- - an open in the YEL/BlK and ORN/WHT wires.
dash fuse/relay box. - blown No.4 (7.5 A) in the driver's under-dash
- an open in the YEL/BlK wire. fuse/relay box.
• If there is battery voltage, go to step 5. - poor ground (G551, G581).
• If only one fails to warm up, check its defogger.
5. Check for continuity between the No.2 terminal • If both warm up, check the defogger switch.
and body ground.
• If there is no continuity, check for:
- an open in the BlK wire.
- poor ground (G551).
• If there is continuity, check both mirrors
individually as described in the next column.
BACK
22-237
Protected by AR
Power Mirrors
Power Mirror and Mirror Defogger Switch Test
1. Disconnect the 10P connector or 13P connector (A) 2. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
from the power mirror switch (8). switch position according to the table.
Mirror Switch:
1\ Termlnel 1 2 4 7 8 9 10
Position \ [2] [6] [5] [10 [11 [12 [13:
UP
DOWN
~ -0
A
l
lEFT ,.,
;..
-....,
RIGHT
UP
DOWN
0- f-<>
R
Fsmfffil
Sfffij10
LEFT
RIGHT
~
'99-02 models
~ Defogger Switch:
1\ Termlnel
3 6
Position
\ [1] [8]
'03 model
ON 0 -0
OFF
- --- - --- - - - --_ .. - .. - - - -
[] : '03 model

switch.
BACK
22-238
~
Power Mirror Actuator Test
'99·01 models: '02·03 models:

1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-6). 1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-6).
2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the power 2. Disconnect the 13P connector (A) from the power
mirror (B). mirror actuator (B).
B

3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and

3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and ground according to the table.
ground according to the tab~e.
f\ Terminal
6 7 8
Position \
1\ Terminal
4 5 t; TILT UP (~ (f)
Position \ TILT DOWN (f) e
TILT UP (f) e SWING LEFT C-:> (f)
TILT DOWN e (f) SWING RIGHT C-B e
SWING LEFT (f) e
SWING RIGHT e (f) 4. If the mirror fails to work properly, replace the
mirror actuator.
4. If the mirror fails to work properly, replace the
mirror actuator. Defogger Test
Defogger Test 5. Check for continuity between the No.4 and No.5
terminals of the 13P connector. There should be
5. Check for continuity between the No. 1 and No.2 continuity.
terminals of the 6P connector. There should be
continuity. 6. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the
switch.
6. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the
switch.
BACK
22-239
Protected by AR
Power Mirrors
Power Mirror Actuator Replacement

1. Remove the power mi rror from the door (see page 5. Remove the three screws (A) and the actuator (8).
20-25), and disconnect the 6P ('99-01 models) or
13P ('02-03 models) connector.
2. Cut the wire harness with wire cutters.
6. Route the wire harness (A) ofthe new actuator

through the hole in the bracket (B).
3. Record the terminal locations and wire colors.
4. Remove the mirror holder (see page 20-26).
~B
A
BACK
22-240
Protected by AR r--:-I
I..:!:..I
7. Insert the terminals into the connector as shown

below.
'99-0; models:
LEFT MIRROR RIGHT MIRROR

CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
BlK BLK
\ J
~
G! f
ORN
~l
'02-03 models:
lEFT MIRROR CONNECTOR
G):r~~Nmm
BlU/ORN \ BR~
BW/GRN RED/BlK
RIGHT MIRROR CONNECTOR
BRN/WHT GRN GRN/RED BlK ORN/WHT
1:1{1:kwcl(
lTr:: /
YEl/WHT
Bl~~ RED/BlK
8. Apply tape to seal the intersection of the wire

harness.
9. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

Be careful not to break the mirror when reinstalling
it to the actuator (see step 4 on page 20-26).
10. Reinstall the mirror assembly to the door.
11. Operate the power mirror to ensure smooth

operation.
BACK
22-241
Protected by AR
Driving Position Memory System (DPMS)
POWER MIRRORS
Actuator Test, page 22-239
Position Sensors Troubleshooting,
page 22-266
POWER MIRROR and DEFOGGER SWITCH

Test, page 22-238
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY SWITCH

Test, page 22-265
POWER MIRROR CONTROL CIRCUIT

(In the multiplex control unit, passenger's)
22-242
BACK
Protected by AR ~
~
RECLINE MOTOR
Test, page 22-274
RECLINE POSITION SENSOR
Troubleshooting,
REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR

Test, page 22-274
REAR UP-DOWN POSITION SENSOR
Troubleshooting,
SLIDE POSITION SENSOR

Troubleshooting,
page 22-266
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR

Test, page 22-274
FRONT UP-DOWN POSITION SENSOR POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
Troubleshooting, step 1 on page 22-268 Input Test, page 22-260
SLIDE MOTOR
Test, page 22-274
BACK
22-243
Protected by AR
System Descriptions
The driver's seat and the power mirrors have a memory feature. The seat and mirror adjustments can be regulated
separately. All the adjustments can be memorized by pressing the MEMO button on the driving position memory
switch, and then pressing one of the two position buttons within five seconds. Pressing the appropriate position
button will move the seat and the mirrors to the memorized position.
Disconnecting the battery will cancel the memorized positions.
Power Seat Position Sensors:

Each motor has a reed switch sensor which detects motor rotation and sends a pulse to the power seat control unit
when the motor rotates. The control unit stores the number of pulses in its memory, and the seat position is
memorized.
Power Mirror Position Sensors:

By means of a Hall-effect type tilt position sensor and swing position sensor, the power mirror control circuit in the
passenger's multiplex control unit detects the voltage changes caused by the movements of the mirrors.
These voltage changes are stored in memory, and the power mirror positions are memorized.
Memory Retrieval:
When one of the two buttons on the driving position memory switch is pressed with the vehicle parked (shift lever in
IE) and the driver door closed, the seat and the mirrors move to the memorized positions. The remote transmitters will
also activate the DPMS.
BACK
22-244
Protected by AR ~
I..!!:.I
General Troubleshooting Infomation
The self-diagnostic function of the driving position memory system detects system problems. This information can be
retrieved by displaying diagnostic trouble code.
Displaying the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and move the seat to a non-memorized position.
2. Press the MEMO button (A) and both position buttons (8) at the same time, and hold them.
c::=:l 1
c
c::=:l 2
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait at least 1 second, then release the three buttons.
4. After 1 second, the position button indicators (e) will blink to show the DTe.
DTC Indications
No System Problem Pattern:
If there is no DTe stored, the indicators blink only once (3 seconds).
MEMO button }
Pos. button 1
Pos. button 2 ::,J ON (II)
.: 1 sec or more I
:.. ..
!
: ' -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Ignition
switch OFF j=l- 0.""
:. 3 sec ~ :
Indicator 1
Indicator 2 }
ON
.. "oc .I only 1 blink
OFF
(cont'd)
BACK
22-245
Protected by AR
General Troubleshooting Infomation (cont'd)

System Problem Pattern:
If a system problem has occurred, the DTC is stored, the indicators flash the DTC. The first digit is indicated by the
number of long (1 second) blinks, and the second digit is indicated by the number of short (0.26 second) blinks.
There is a 3 second break between each DTC when there are multiple DTCs.
MEMO button}
Pos. button 1 ON
Pos. button 2
OFF-----I
ON (III
.. .
1 sec or more
: ----__+
.--......
Ignition SWitCh' J i.. 0.3 sec
OFF ~
two 0.26 sec blinks
: , 1 sec '
:..
,, - ;,
, -~-
Indicator 1 }
Indicator 2
;.... I'
ON! 1 sec I' ....
1 sec 1 U
, , l '
,
.. 3 sec break
j OTC " ,..tod
OFF :
Canceling the DTC Indication

• Turn the ignition switch OFF or
• Press the MEMO button, or the position button 1, or the position button 2, or
• Press one of the driving position adjustment switches.
Erasing the DTC from Memory

Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write down the frequencies for the radio's preset button.
Disconnect the battery negative cable for at least 30 seconds. After reconnecting the battery, enter the anti-theft code
for the radio, then enter the customer's radio station presets.
BACK
22-246
Protected by AR ~
~
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index
OTC Symptom Possible Cause Page

31 Seat can't be adjusted at all Faulty power seat adjustment (see page 22-260) for driver's
switch, or power seat control power seat control unit input
unit test
(see page 22-254) for power
seat adjustment switch test
32 Positions can't be stored or Faulty driving position memory (see page 22-260) for power
retrieved with the driving switch, power seat control unit seat control unit input test
position memory switch (failure (see page 22-265) for driving
to write or read in the power position memory switch test
seat control unit) (see page 22-260) for power
33 Positions can't be stored or Faulty driving position memory seat control unit input test
retrieved with the driving switch, or passenger's (see page 22-254) for multiplex
position memory switch (failure multiplex control unit control unit input
to write or read in the troubleshooti ng
passenger's multiplex control (see page 22-265) for driving
unit) position memory switch test
37 Seat can't be adjusted or can be Faulty transmission range (see page 14-144) for
adjusted even when the vehicle switch, or vehicle speed sensor transmission range switch test
moving circuit (see page 14-105) for
countershaft speed sensor test
(see page 22-129) for vehicle
speed sensor circuit
troubleshooting
BACK
22-247
Protected by AR
Circuit Diagram
DllVER'S
UM)£fI-DASH
~'~
BATTERY
UNDER-HOODFUSE/RELAY BOX
---@::IBLK/yELYEL--
IGNI'IlON SWITCH £NOffl;j
FUSE/REI.AYBOX
+~WHT 8AT No.417.5A1

IGZ YEL YEl/BLK ----+--------
PASSENGER'S
utIlER-DASH 1FuM/nIIv bollocbll
jl
FUSE/RELAYBOX
~YEL @No.l1l7.5A1 WHT/BI.U

No.1317.5A1
-1------+
No.55I40AI No.2IZOAI
~ YEl/GRN I ,O'...D RED --+---+--------
~8LU
~ I IFuu/"'..,bol .....1
IFuu/....y bollOCkltJ
I
WHTIflED
A12 I A24
~PN<r
MULT1PUX CONTROL UNIT. DllVER'S
A14 811 A16 A3 814 A2 819

• NAVlGAllON \NT
• GAUGE
ASSEMIIlY
• POWERSEAT
COHT1IOI.UMT
• GAUGE ASSEMBlY
aiK aiK GRNJDRN
• POWER • OIUISE
T
~ ~
SEAT 8LU1BLK BLUlWHT
CONTROL .=UMT
UNIT
COHTlIOI. UNIT V
Y
GRN{ORN
Y
8LUIWHT
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT.
DOOR
KEYLESS
RECEIVER
UNIT
MULTJlLEX
CONTORL UNIT.
PASSENGER'S
f
~
GRN/ORN
DRIVER'S
BLUr
=
DOOR
SWITCH V
LD:or-;p.,) (~I!l) PCM
G401
~
GS03
....... I
Gl0l
BACK
22-248
I..!::.I
TAILLIGHT
RELAY
--VEl
- VEl/8LK
?
REDI LK
5 DRIVI'lG POSmON MEMORY SWITCH
POSITION
MEMO BUTTONS
IFuJe/1IIIy box oocl<lI) 2 NlICATQRS BUTTON ~
WHT/YEl
- WHT/BLU Q~1~ ~2 C~I~ I~' 11,

-: ~
--R£D Y L !FUll/1liiy box oocl<lIl Y 4 3 6 7 9 8 10
--BLU-
IFuse/roiIY box oocl<lI)
~
REDIGRN YL YEL/WHT LTBLU 8LU YEL 8LK
~~ ~~ (To poge 22-252)

DASHUGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
83 D4 Al0 AS B2 86 Cl0 AS A19
C4
--PNK---<
87 A7
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
A17 AlB
(
A20 01 A3
MULTIPLEX
BrK ax aK 8LU BLK W~ GRN ORN CONTROL
J
UNIT,
OliVER'S
?
GRN RN
• PCM
• GAUGE
GRN ORN ASSEMBLY
• CRUISE
10 9 CONTROl
TRANSr.tSSKlN
RANGE ~q, DRIVER'S
DOOR
UNT
·Cl.NATE
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH CONTROl
3 ( 00Hd '
kI position [!]
J 3 (Closed '
In position 00 ) (~~ J UNT
• NAVlGA1lON
UNIT
..JJ...
G503
I I
G551 G1Gl
I
G1Gl
-' '- ...
G401
~
(cant'd)
BACK
22-249
Protected by AR
II:D/IIlJ( RED/IIlJ(
BI B2 DRIVER'S POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT SWlTOt
AIONT SUl£ REAR REaH

UP-DOWN UP-DOWN
UP './ DOWN './ FOA- '. / BACK- UP 'J DOWN '. / FOA- '. / BACK-
WARD 6 WARD WARD 6 WARD
~ 1M I~ 1M ~ IAi I~ I~
II:D. GAN. GRN. va. VEURED BlU/OIIN BlU/RED REDLWHT II:DLVEL
~ cz C8 Ai AI. C3 C9 CI C7
POWER SEAT CONTROL lINT
II ~ 85 II D2 os D3 D6
GRNIVEL G BlUIVEL ILU RED AEDJYEL YEUGRN
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR SLIIEMOTOR REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR REaHMOTOA
BACK
22-250
I.!!!!:..I
POWER SEAT CONTllOl UNIT
AI A2 en ca el2
"12
""
GRN Bu( BRN BLU Bu( WHT Bu( REDI K YEL/BlJ( BAN Bu(
h
BAN BAN
hBRN BAN
FRONT SlJ)£ REAR REa.M

UP-DOWN POSIT1ON UP-DOWN POSIT1ON
POSIT1ON SENSOR POSIIlON SENSOR
SENSOR SENSOR
WHTBu( BAN Bu(
(cont'd)
BACK 22-251
Protected by AR
TAUlGHT (From page )

RELAY 22-249
I I
RED/JILK
l
YEL/fK
r··+··_··(WIlh~Oggerll
1 .
I
VEL/JILl<
POWER MIRROR SWlTai
I DEFOGGER
I LEFT r--~--l;------'-- RIGHT
SWITCH
-"'
~;
I
\::Y I
o1J
~--'--~ -~
Cf (0.56W1
1......0 ~I
If6=.
(From Pl9!22-2491
DOWN
:t,----- -- ---------- :1"
I
LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT
1
I 10 11 13
~
(Fuse/relay box IOdIIII VEL
!l
ORNjWHT BLUjRED
PUR
~c
BLK BLU/BLK
184 183 1 B6 1 as A2 I A24 A22

DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
I POWER
MIRROR
DEFOGGER
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT. PASSENGER'S
(Pow. mirror control circuitl
.. (Tonext)
page
1_--_--_------1 AS B22 B9
~
BLK BLK
• MULTPLEX
CONTROL UNIT.
DRIVER'S
·POWERSUT
CONTROL UNIT
-'""- -'""- -'""-
G551 G581 G504
BACK
22-252
t.=:..I
- WItI! doIogger
DEFOGGER
SWITCH
Fr~
( ..........
page
I
L£FTMIRROR 7
T
ORN WHT
5 RlGHTMIlROR 7
ORNWHT
~~ ~: ~~ ~:
(±) (±)
M M
e (±) (±) (±)
UP RIGHT -DEFOGGER UP RIGHT -DEFOGGER
8 6 4 8 6 4
BLU GRN BLU 0lI'l

r BlU ~HT LT ~
B16
T." B15
MULTPLEX CONTROL UNIT, PASSENGER'S

1- B14 B12
IPow. mirTo. controI ..... ~J
1~
+
B18 B19 810
f7
GRN [wHT GRN RED GRN B~ B~
RED BLJ( BRN/WIfT RED ~

1 9 2 3 9 2
L£FT RIGHT
--Q Jt- ~ 0-
POWER POWER
MIRROR MIRROR
POSITION POSITION
SENSOR SENSOR
Tl.T SWWG Tl.T SWING
3 1
BAN WHT BRN WHT

....... ...-.:-
G551 G581
BACK 22-253
Protected by AR

1. Before testing the driving position memory control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex control system. Perform
the multiplex mode test first.
its connector.
3. Inspect all connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact .

A13 A14 A15 A16 --- A17 A18 A19 A20 - A21 A22 A23 A24
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, PASSENGER'S CONNECTOR B
RED/WHT ORN/WHT BLU/RED RED/BLK

\PU\ \ iLU/BLK \ ;RN/ iRN/RED
i ,
Bl 1B2 1B3 1B4 1B5 86IB71B8IB91810

1Blll B121 B131 B141B151 B161)<JB171B181B191B201 B211B22
/ e L / L T ! BLt/ORN\
LT GRN BLU/WHT BLU/GRN
BtN! BRN~H~ ~LK
GRN/WHT GRY
BLK
\
1 2 3 4
0 5 6 7
8 9 10 111 1 1
12 13 14 15 16 17
1
18 19 20
1
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR H
718
t
YEL Wire side of female terminels
BACK
22-254
Protected by AR ~
I.!!!...I
4. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors .
.
If ate
II h .,nput tests prove OK go to step 5.
AS BlK Under all conditions Check for continuity • Poor ground (G5S1)
to ground: • An open in the wire
There should be
continuity.
B22 BlK Under all conditions Check for continuity • Poor ground (G504)
to ground: • An open in the wire
There should be
continuity.
A2 Fuse/relay Under all conditions Check for voltage to • Blown No. 55 (40 A) fuse in the
box socket ground: under-hood fuse/relay box
There should be • Blown No.5 (20 A) fuse in the passenger's
battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty passenQer's fuse/relay box
H7 VEL Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to • Blown No.9 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
ground: under-dash fuse/relay box
There should be • An open in the wire
battery voltage.
A24 Fuse/relay Under all conditions Check for voltage to • Blown No. 54 (40 A) fuse in the
box socket ground: under-hood fuse/relay box
There should be • Blown No. 13 (15 A) fuse in the passenger's
battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty passenger's fuse/relay box
B5 BlU/BlK Ignition switches ON Check for voltage to • Blown No.4 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
(II) and power mirror ground: under-dash fuse/relay box
selector switch to right, There should be • Faulty power mirror switch
then press the power battery voltage. • An open in the wire
mirror switch "Right"
or "Down".
B3 PUR Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to • Blown No.4 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
and power mirror ground: under-dash fuse/relay box
selector switch to right, There should be • Faulty power mirror switch
mirror switch "left"
or "Down".
B2 RED/WHT Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to • Blown No.4 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
and press the power ground: under-dash fuse/relay box
mirror switch "UP". There should be • Faulty power mirror switch
battery voltage. • An open in the wire
B6 BlU/RED Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to • Blown No.4 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
selector switch to left, There should be • Faulty power mirror switch
mirror switch "Right"
or "Down".
B4 ORN/WHT Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to • Blown No.4 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
selector switch to left, There should be • Faulty power mirror switch
mirror switch "left"
or "Down".
(cont'd)
BACK
22-255
Protected by AR

813 YEL/WHT Connect battery Check right power mirror • Faulty right power mirror
power to 813 actuator operation: actuator
812 LTGRN terminal and 812 The mirror should swing left. • An open in the wire
terminal to 822
terminal
momentarily
813 YEL/WHT Connect battery Check right power mirror • Faulty right power mirror
814 8LU/WHT terminal and 814 The mirror should tilt down. • An open in the wire
terminal to 822
terminal
momentarily.
816 8LU/GRN Connect battery Check left power mirror • Faulty left power mirror
815 8LU/ORN terminal and 815 The mirror should swing left. • An open in the wire
terminal to 822
terminal
momentarily.
816 8LU/GRN Connect battery Check left power mirror • Faulty left power mirror
817 8RN terminal and B17 The mirror should tilt down. • An open in the wire
terminal to 822
terminal
- - - -- -
momentarily. - - - - --_ .. _--
PUR BLU/BlK BLU/RED RED/BlK
RED~HT
i i i
\ DRr-
i
/
i
= \
1'<0::::>'.
i 7"
"
GRN/RED
B1IB21B31B4IB5 B6IB71B8IB91B10
1B111B121B131B141 B151B161XJB171 B181B191B201 B211B22
~~T /oLU/ORN \ BIN rBRN}WH~ ~K

lTGRN BLU/WHT BLU/GRN GRN/WHT GRY
BACK
22-256
Protected by AR r--:,
l=::.J
5. Reconnect the passenger's multiplex control unit to the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these
input tests at the appropriate connectors on the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box .
88 RED/BlK Ignition switch ON Check for voltage between • Faulty power mirror position
(II) the terminals: sensor
819 BRN/WHT There should be about 5 V. • Faulty passenger's multiplex
control unit
• A short to ground
87 GRN Ignition switch ON Check for voltage between • Faulty power mirror position
819 BRN/WHT The voltage should change • An open in the wire
from about 1 V to 3 V when • A short to ground
the right mirror swings from
left to right
810 GRN/RED Ignition switch ON Check for voltage between • Faulty power mirror position
B19 BRN/WHT The voltage should change • An open in the wire
the right mirror tilts from up
to down.
818 GRN/WHT Ignition switch ON Check for voltage between • Faulty power mirror position
819 8RN/WHT The voltage should change • An open in the wire
the left mirror swings from
left to right.
B20 GRY Ignition switch ON Check for voltage between • Faulty power mirror position
B19 BRN/WHT The voltage should change • An open in the wire
the left mirror tilts from up to
down.
(cont'd)
BACK
22-257
Protected by AR
Multiplex control Unit, Driver's:
6. Remove the driver's unit from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and disconnect its connector.
7. Inspect all connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 All A12

A13 A14 A15 A16 - A17 A18 A19 A20 r-- A21 A22 A23 A24

PNK
~'Bl B31 B41 B5

B11
/
BlK BlU/WHT
I PNK/BlK
GRN/ORN
f
2 314
5 16 9 110

DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E
WHT/RED
I
2 3 4
10 11 12 13
\ BlU/BlK
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Q
213 4
12 113 114 II 15
BlK
/
BACK
22-258
Protected by AR ~
I.!!!!!..I
8. With the driver's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors .
015 BLK Under all Check for continuity to • Poor ground (G401 I
conditions ground: • An open in the wire
B11 BLK Under all Check for continuity to • Poor ground (G5031
A24 Fuse/relay Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.9 (7.5 A) fuse in the
box socket (II I There should be battery driver's under-dash fuse/relay
voltage. box
• Faulty driver's under-dash fuse/
relay box
E5 WHT/RED Under all Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 54 (40 AI fuse in the
conditions There should be battery under-hood fuse/relay box
voltage. • Blown No. 13 (15 AI fuse in the
passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box
E17 BLU/BLK Shift lever in [f] Check for continuity to • Poor ground (G1011
ground: • An open in the wire
There should be continuity. • Faulty transmission range
switch
B14 BLU/WHT Ignition switch OFF With PCM connector A (32PI • An open in the wire
disconnected, check for
continuity between the B14
terminal and the No.9
terminal of the PCM 32P
connector A:
B19 PNK/BLK Ignition switch OFF Check for continuity between • An open in the wire
the B19 and the keyless
receiver unit terminal No.12:
9. Reconnect the driver's multiplex control unit to the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests
at the appropriate connectors on the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
A3 GRN/ORN Driver's door open Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door switch
There should be 1 V or less. • Poor ground (G4011
Driver's door Check for voltage to ground: • An open in the wire
closed There should be 5 V or more. • A short to ground
10. If all the input tests prove OK, one of the control units must be faulty, Substitute a known-good control unit for the
one that is most likely at fault, then recheck the system. Ifthe system works properly, the original control unit is
BACK
22-259
Protected by AR
Power Seat Control Unit Input Test
1. Remove the driver's power seat (see page 20-78).

NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the interior trim.
2. Disconnect the connectors from the power seat control unit (A).
12P CONNECTOR C
BLU/ORN/PNK
GRN/WHT VEl/BlK RED/VEL
RED/WHT \.... \ .--. I BRN/WHT
Br ~El\RN
~11234561~ V\l
Wire side of
~I 7 8 9 10 11 12 1___ 11121f[415161 female terminals
RED/VEL I / \ \ BRN/BlK t ,
GRN/BlK RED/BlK
BlU/RED VEl/WHT
20P CONNECTOR A 8P CONNECTOR B

VEl/BlK
BLU
~ ~ \ f
6
16
, [I]ml~I:1 Wire side of
female terminals
BLU/VEl lRN / vtl !GRN}VEl

GRN/BlK
BLU/VEl
VEL/RED GRN/ORN BlK
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system .
BACK
22-260
I.!!:..I
4. With the power seat control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors .
A9 YEL Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.9 (7.5 A) fuse in the
A10 WHT/BLU Under all Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 54 (40 A) fuse in the
• Blown No. 11 (7.5 A) fuse in the
passenge~sunde~dash
fuse/relay box
B3 BLU Under all Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 55 (40 A) fuse in the
• Blown No. 4 (20 A) fuse in the
fuse/relay box
04 RED Under all Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 55 (40 A) fuse in the
• Blown No.2 (20 A) fuse in the
fuse/relay box
A20 BLK Under all Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G503)
B7 BLK Under all Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G551)
01 conditions There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
A3 BLU/WHT Ignition switch With PCM connector A (32P) • An open in the wire
OFF disconnected, check for
continuity between the A3
terminal and No.9 terminal of
the PCM 32P connector A:
A7 BLU/BLK Shift lever in [f] Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G101)
There should be continuity. • Faulty transmission range switch
A17 WHT Shift lever in [RJ Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G101)
There should be continuity. • Faulty transmission range switch
AS LTBLU Push the Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty driving position memory switch
position button 1 There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
A19 BLU/yEL Push the Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty driving position memory switch
position button 2 There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
C10 YEL/WHT Push the MEMO Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty driving position memory switch
button There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
B6 YEL Ignition switch Attach to ground: • Faulty driving position memory
ON (II) Indicator 2 should come on. switch indicator
B2 REO/GRN Ignition switch Attach to ground: • Faulty driving position memory
ON (II) Indicator 1 should come on. switch indicator
(cont'd)
BACK
22-261
Protected by AR
Power Seat Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)
NOTE: All connector view are from wire side of female terminals
20P CONNECTOR A 8P CONNECTOR B
BLU/BLK \
BLU/WHT
"
RED/BLK
\."
VEL/BLK
\ BLU/BLK
\
/I
LT BLU
VEL
WHT/BLU
BLU
\
RED/GRN
\ I
BLU
B~I ~ !""TC I ~ I~
[I]ml~I:1
I" I I 71 I I ("\ 11"
t' 1~~iliiIO±~
1 0
1112_ 1611181920 -BLK

,/ I I I I I I
f ~U/VEL GL ! ~EL ~LK ~RN/VEL

WHT/BLK
GRN/BLK VEL/R(. / GL/ORN
WHT BLU/VEL
12P CONNECTOR C 6P CONNECTOR 0

BLU/ORN PNK
--
VEL/BLK
RED/WHT
GRN/WHT
~II
\ BLK RED
\ \ I~ j
VEL RED
---1~ 1: 1:I~: 1,5,1,:

,..-BRN/WHT
11121ffilsl61
RED/VEL LI-..J.':~7--L..1-:-..J.I_~"""-L..I~..LI_-,I ___ BRN/BLK
GRN/BLK / VELIWHT\
! \
RED/VEL VEL/GRN
BLU/RED RED/BLK
obtained
B1 BLU Jump B3 terminal to B1 Check slide motor operation: • Faulty slide motor
terminal, and B5 terminal to There motor should run. • An open in the wire
B5 BLU/YEL B7 terminal. Reverse the
connections to operate the
motor in the other direction.
B4 GRN Jump B3 terminal to B4 Check front up-down motor • Faulty front up-down
terminal, and B8 terminal to operation: motor
B8 GRN/YEL B7 terminal. Reverse the There motor should run. • An open in the wire
02 REO Jump B3 terminal to 02 Check rear up-down motor • Faulty rear up-down
terminal, and 05 terminal to operation: motor
05 REO/YEL B7 terminal. Reverse the There motor should run. • An open in the wire
03 VEL Jump 83 terminal to 03 Check recline motor • Faulty recline motor
terminal, and 06 terminal to operation: • An open in the wire
06 VEL/GRN B7 terminal. Reverse the There motor should run.
--
motor in thE;l()1:her directioll"---_ -- --- ---
22-262
BACK
I...:!..I
obtained
AS RED/BLK Slide switch in "FORWARD" Check for continuity between • Faulty adjustment switch
the AS and A6 terminals: • An open in the wire
A6 YEL/BLK There should be continuity.
Slide switch is in the neutral Check for continuity between • Faulty adjustment switch
position. the AS and A6 terminals:
AS RED/BLK Slide switch in "BACKWARD" Check for continuity between • Faulty adjustment switch
the AS and A16 terminals: • An open in the wire
A16 YEL/RED There should be continuity.
Slide switch is in the neutral Check for continuity between • Faulty adjustment switch
position. the AS and A 16 terminals:
AS RED/BLK Recline switch in Check for continuity between • Faulty adjustment switch
"FORWARD" the AS and C1 terminals: • An open in the wire
C1 RED/WHT There should be continuity.
Recline switch is in the Check for continuity between • Faulty adjustment switch
neutral position. the AS and C1 terminals:
AS RED/BLK Recline switch in Check for continuity between • Faulty adjustment switch
"BACKWARD" the AS and C7 terminals: • An open in the wire
C7 RED/YEL There should be continuity.
AS RED/BLK Front up-down switch in Check for continuity between • Faulty adjustment switch
"DOWN" the AS and C8 terminals: • An open in the wire
C8 GRN/BLK There should be continuity.
Front up-down switch is in the Check for continuity between • Faulty adjustment switch
AS RED/BLK Front up-down switch in "UP" Check for continuity between • Faulty adjustment switch
the AS and C2 terminals: • An open in the wire
C2 GRN/WHT There should be continuity.
AS RED/BLK Rear up-down switch in "UP" Check for continuity between • Faulty adjustment switch
the AS and C3 terminals: • An open in the wire
C3 BLU/ORN There should be continuity.
Rear up-down switch is in the Check for continuity between • Faulty adjustment switch
AS RED/BLK Rear up-down switch in Check for continuity between • Faulty adjustment switch
"DOWN" the AS and C9 terminals: • An open in the wire
C9 BLU/RED There should be continuity.
Rear up-down switch is in the Check for continuity between • Faulty adjustment switch
(cont'd)
BACK
22-263
Protected by AR
Power Seat Control Unit Input Test (cont','.!)
5. Reconnect the connectors to the driver's power seat control unit, and make these input tests at the connectors.
o If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system .
NOTE: All connector views are from wire side of female terminals.
20P CONNECTOR A SP CONNECTOR B
BlU/WHT
BlU/BlK \
"
II
RED/BlK
\
VEl/BLK
\ BlU/BlK
....\ \
lTBlU
VEl
WHT/BLU
BlU
\
RED/GRN
\ I
BLU
B~I ;=r=:
, 1 .., 1 " 1 71 1 1 1 n 1,,, 1.------
, ' I 17t7171 uI' I I~ I'v mffil~I:1
"7 0
L U
_11,2 16 17 18 19 20 - B l K
/
VEl/R-(.J~""7"-/L.17G-RJ..~"7/-0.J.~-N-;::':-'~-l-U...J/~El
f GL / ~El ~lK ~RN/yEL
WHT/BlK
GRN/BlK
WHT BlU/VEL
12P CONNECTOR C 6P CONNECTOR 0

BlU/ORN
I
PNK
-- :> I
GRN/WHT \ /YEL/BlK BlK RED VEL RED
RED/WHT ""
5
~BRN/WHT \ \ /~ j
I: 1: 1: 11: 11 111: I 1 12 I fGl 1 1 5 6
RED,m1
GRN/BlK
I . I
vL/WHT\
I I I-BRN/BLK
! ,
RED/YEl VEl/GRN
BlU/RED RED/BlK
A1a GRN/ORN Driver's door open Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty driver's door switch
Driver's door Check for voltage to ground: o A short to ground

A2 BlU/BlK While slide motor Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty slide position sensor
running There should be 0 V to about o An open in the wire
5 V alternately. o A short to ground
A12 GRN/BlK While front Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty front up-down position
up-down motor There should be 0 V to about sensor

running 5 V alternately. o An open in the wire
o A short to Jlfound
C5 VEL/BlK While recline Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty recline position sensor
motor running There should be 0 V to about o An open in the wire
5 V alternately. o A short to ground
C11 RED/BlK While rear Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty rear up-down position
up-down motor There should be 0 V to about sensor

running 5 V alternately. o An open in the wire
o A short to ground
A1 BRN Ignition switch Measure voltage between A 1 o Faulty slide position sensor
ON (II) and A11: o Faulty front height position sensor
A11 WHT/BlK There should be 5 V. o Faulty driver's power seat control
unit
o A short to ground
C6 BRN/WHT Ignition switch Measure voltage between C6 o Faulty recline position sensor
ON (II) and C12: o Faulty rear height position sensor
C12 BRN/BlK There should be 5 V. o Faulty power seat control unit
0A. short to ground __ -
BACK
22-264
Protected by AR ~
I.!::..I
Driving Position Memory Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-6).
2. Disconnect the 1OP connector from the memory switch (A).
_-----A
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table.
'\ Terminal
2 3 4 7 8 9 10 5 6
Position \
OFF
MEMO
button ,...
...,
ON ()
Position 1
OFF
button ~
ON 0- --0 0 :v 0
Position 2 OFF
button
ON 0 0
I :'\
Indicator 1 0 \"y 0
Indicator 2
I :'\ ()
\"y
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulb (A) or the switch.
BACK
22-265
Protected by AR
Power Seat Position Sensor Troubleshooting

Slide Position Sensor: 5. Reconnect the 3P and 20P connectors.
1. Remove the driver's power seat (see page 20-78). 6. Check for voltage between the No.3 terminal of the
slide position sensor and body ground.
NOTE: Be careful to not scratch the interior trim.
2. Disconnect the 3P connector from the slide position

sensor and the 20P connector from the power seat
control unit.

the slide position sensor and A 11 terminal of the
power seat control unit.
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR A
171 ~ 17 18 19 110
16117 118 119 120
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO- Repair the open or the short in the BRN

wire .•
SLIDE POSITION SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
7. Check for voltage pulse between the No. 1 terminal
Is there continuity? of the slide position sensor and body ground when
the slide motor moves forward or backward.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Repair open in the WHT/BLK wire .•

the slide position sensor and A2 terminal of the
Does voltage pulse from 0 to about 5 V

5 I 6 I 7 I 8 I 9 I10 alternately?
16117118119120
YES - Replace the power seat control unit.•
NO-Check for a short in the wire. If the wire is OK,

Is there continuity? faulty slide position sensor; replace the slide motor
assembly.•
YES - Go to step 5.
NO-Repair the open in the BLU/BLK wire .•
BACK
22-266
l!::..I
Recline Position Sensor: 5. Reconnect the 6P and 12P connectors.
recline position sensor and body ground.
2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the recline
motor/position sensor and the 12P connector from
the power seat control unit.

the recline position sensor and C12 terminal of the
RECLINE POSITION SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
I--*"",~!..-f---i Wire side of female terminals
Is there about 5 V?
2 3 4 5
6 Wire side of
1-7+-a-t--g-t-,-0+-'-'+-'2-; female terminals YES-Go to step 7.
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT 12P CONNECTOR C NO- Repair the open or the short to ground in the
BRN/WHT wire .•
7. Check for voltage pulse between the No.5 terminal
YES - Go to step 4. of the recline position sensor and body ground
when the recline switch moves forward or
NO - Repair open in the BRN/BLK wire .• backward.

the recline position sensor and C5 terminal of the
2 3 4 5 6
7 a 9 '0 " '2 alternately?
YES - Replace the power seat control unit..

NO-Check for a short in the wire. If the wire is OK,
YES-Go to step 5. faulty recline position sensor; replace the recline
motor assembly.•
NO- Repair open in the YEl/BLK wire .•
(cont'd)
BACK
22-267
Protected by AR
Power Seat Position Sensor Troubleshooting (cont'd)
Front Up-Down Position Sensor: 5. Reconnect the 5P and 20P connectors.
front up-down position sensor and body ground.
2. Disconnect the 5P connector from the front up-

down position sensor and the 20P connector from
the power seat control unit.

the front up-down position sensor and A 11 terminal
of the power seat control unit.
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNrr 20P CONNECTOR A
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO- Repair the open or a short to ground in the

BRNwire .•
FRONT UP·DOWN posmoN SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
7. Check for voltage pulse between the No. 5 terminal
Is there continuity? of the front up-down position sensor and body
ground when the front up-down switch moves up
YES - Go to step 4. and down.
NO-Repair open in the WHT/BLK wire .•

the front up-down position sensor and A12 terminal

alternately?
YES - Replace the power seat control unit..
Is there continuity? NO - Check for a short in the wire. If the wire is OK.
faulty front up-down position sensor; replace th f.
YES-Go to step 5. front up-down motor assembly.•
NO - Repair open in the GRN/BLK wire .•
BACK
22-268
I..:!!:.I
Rear Up-Down Position Sensor: 5. Reconnect the 5P and 12P connectors.
rear up-down position sensor and body ground.
2. Disconnect the 5P connector from the rear up-down

position sensor and the 12P connector from the

the rear up-down position sensor and C12 terminal
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT 12P CONNECTOR C
23456
f-+--+---If-+--+---I Wire side of female terminals =
7 8 9 10 11 12
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 7.
Wire side of female terminals NO- Repair the open or the short to ground in the
BRN/WHT wire .•
REAR UP-DOWN POSITION SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
7. Check for voltage pulse between the No.1 terminal
Is there continuity? of the rear up-down position sensor and body
ground when the rear up-down switch moves up
YES-Go to step 4. and down.
NO-Repair open in the BRN/BlK wire .•

the rear up-down position sensor and C11 terminal
23456
7 8 9 10 11 12

alternately?
YES - Replace the power seat control unit.•
Is there continuity? NO-Check for a short in the wire. If the wire is OK,
faulty rear up-down position sensor; replace the
YES-Go to step 5. rear up-down motor assembly.•
NO- Repair open in the RED/BlK wire .•
BACK
22-269
Protected by AR
Power Mirror Position Sensor Troubleshooting
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the No.4 (7.5A) 5. Check for voltage between the B3 and B22
fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box and test terminals with the power mirror switch pressed to
the power mirrors. the Left or Down.
2. Check for voltage between the B2 and B22 Y..

terminals of the passenger's multiplex control unit PUR
with the power mirror switch pressed UP. ~
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, PASSENGER'S

CONNECTORB
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5
>< B6 B7 BB B9 B10
B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16IXIB17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22
Y..
BLK
RED/WHT
c::;--;> -
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5
>< B6 B7 BB B9 B10
B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B161XiB17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22
BLK
- YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair open in the PUR wire .•
Is there battery voltage? 6. Move the selector switch to Left.
YES-Go to step 3. 7. Check for voltage between the B6 and B22

terminals with the power mirror switch pressed to
NO-Repair open in the RED/WHT or BLK wire .• the Right or Down.
3. Move the selector switch to Right.
4. Check for voltage between the B5 and B22 Y..

terminals with the power mirror switch pressed to BLU/RED
the Right. ~
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5
>< B6 B1 BB B9 B10
B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B161XiB17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22
BLU/BLK BLK
-
B1IB21B31B4IB5 B6IB7IBBIB91B10
B111B121B131B141B151B16 B171B181B191B201B211B22
BLK
YES - Go to step 8.
NO-Repair open in the BLU/RED wire .•
YES - Go to step 5.
NO-Repair open in the BLU/BLK wire .•
BACK
22-270
Protected by AR ~
t=:..I
8. Check for voltage between the B4 and B22 12. Apply battery power to the B16 terminal and
terminals with the power mirror switch pressed to ground the B15 [or B17] terminal.
the left or Down.
'Y..
ORN/WHT B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 810
~ 811 B12 B13 814 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5
>< B6 B7 B8 B9 810
811 812 B13 B14 815 816IX/B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22
BLU/ORN BRN
BLK
~
Does left mirror swing left [or tilt down] ?

YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Check the power mirror actuator (see page
NO- Repair open in the ORN/WHT wire .• 22-239). If the mirror is OK, repair the open in the
BlU/GRN or BlU/ORN [BRN] wires .•
13. Reconnect the 22P connector B to the passenger's
10. Disconnect the passenger's multiplex control unit multiplex control unit.
22P connector B.
11. Apply battery power to the B 13 terminal and
ground the B12 [or B14] terminal. 15. Check for voltage between the B8 and B22
terminals.
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 810
RED/BLK
811 B12 B13 814 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10
LTGRN BLU/WHT 811 B12 B13 B14 815 816 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22
BLK
Does right mirror swing left [or tilt down] ?

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Goto step 12.
NO - Check the power mi rror actuator (see page
22-239). If the mirror is OK, repair the open in the NO-Repair open or short in the RED/BlK wire. If
YEL/WHT or IT GRN [BlU/WHT] wires .• the wire is OK, replace the passenger's multiplex
control unit.•
(cont'd)
BACK
22-271
Protected by AR
Power Mirror Position Sensor Troubleshooting (cont'd)
16. Check for voltage between the 88 and 819 18. Check for voltage between the 810 and 819
terminals. terminals while moving the mirror from up to down.
Bll B21 631 B41 B5
Is there about 5 V? Does the voltage change from about 1 V to 3 V?
YES-Go to step 17. YES-Gotostep 19.
NO- Repair open or short in the 8RN/WHT wire. If NO- Repair open or short in the GRN/RED wire. If
the wire is OK, faulty power mirror position sensor, the wire is OK, faulty right power mirror position
replace the power mirror actuator.. sensor, replace the right power mirror actuator .•
17. Check for voltage between the 87 and 819 19. Check for voltage between the 818 and 819
terminals while moving the mirror from right to left. terminals while moving the mirror from left to right.
BllB2I63IB4IB5 B61B1IBBIB9IB1J
'::L RN/WHT
Does the voltage change from about 3 V to 1 V? Does the voltage change from about 3 V to 1 V?
YES - Go to step 18. YES - Go to step 20.
NO- Repair open or short in the GRN wire. Ifthe NO-Repair open or short in the GRN/WHTwire.lf
wire is OK, faulty right power mirror position the wire is OK, faulty left power mirror position
sensor, replace the right power mirror actuator.• sensor, replace the left power mirror actuator.•
BACK
22-272
I.!!!!!..I
20. Check for voltage between the 820 and 819

terminals while moving the mirror from up to down.
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10
611 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16
GRY
Does the voltage change from about 1 V to 3 V?
YES-Substitute a known good passenger's

multiplex control unit, and recheck. If the systems
now work OK, replace the original passenger's
unit..
NO- Repair open or short in the GRY wire. If the

wire is OK, faulty left power mirror position sensor,
replace the left power mirror actuator.•
BACK
22-273
Protected by AR
Driver's Power Seat Motor Test
1. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-78). 3. Test the motor by connecting power and ground
according to the table. When the motor stops
2. Disconnect the connector from each power seat running, disconnect battery power immediately.
connector.
REAR UP-DOWN MOTOR

...,.. .......
SLIDE MOTOR
'" Position
SLIDE
Terminal
FORWARD
'" e0
1 2
'3_-
_..
MOTOR
BACKWARD
e
RECliNE
FORWARD
8 C±)
MOTOR
BACKWARD
-~----
C±)
~-
e
'" Position
FRONT
Terminal
UP
~
0
2
8
3
UP-DOWN
MOTOR DOWN
e C±)
FRONT UP-DOWN MOTOR '" Position
REAR
Terminal
UP
~
0
3
e
4
UP-DOWN
MOTOR
DOWN e C±)

replace it (see page 20-89).
RECLINE MOTOR
22~274
BACK
Seat Heaters ~
FRONT PASSENGER'S
SEAT-BACK HEATER
('99 model only)
Test, page 22-277
FRONT PASSENGER'S
SEAT CUSHION HEATER
Test, page 22-277
SEAT HEATER RELAY

('99 model)
1
Test, page 22-103
DRIVER'S SEAT-
BACK HEATER
Test, page 22-277
DRIVER'S SEAT CUSHION HEATER

Test, page 22-277
C____ --l
OJ
DRIVER'S SEAT HEATER SWITCH FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT HEATER SWITCH

Test/Replacement, page 22-277 Test/Replacement, page 22-277
BACK
22-275
Protected by AR
Seat Heaters
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-ItOOD FUSE/RELAYBOX
±) No~)
$
BATmff No.42I1OA)
I ,,:;;;. "" t§""r-----

IGNITION SWI'IQt
YEL
-v '-J.j YEL/GRN
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RRAY
No3
(lOA)
DII1II:R'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RElAY
I No.•
f1.SA)
BOX BOX
TH : THERMOSTAT [ON: Below 93"1' (3''C) J
OFF: Above 109'F ((3'C)
BR : BREAKER [ON : Below 86'F f30'C) J WHTLGRN YEl/JlU(
OFF: Above 122'F (SO'C) SEAT HEATER RELAY
HI : High
LO :Low
---=r
No.l0nOA) I No.l0(IOA)
PASSENGER'S PASSfNGER'S
FUSE FUSE
)7
~D/,.BUt
DRtVER'S SEAT
WHT/BLK
FRONT PASSENGER'S WHTr

Y
~'Iz
HEATER SWITCH SEAT HEATER SWlTCH
I~
rnyo w '9H1 LO o/~' YII
rn,?" E"I" II LO 0'
IIQ)
@ G?~TORS
UGHT lIGHT
(O.58Wl
I~::. 56W~ r.lDlCATORS
(O.56Wx2)
(O.saw)
;
MULTI'lEX
CONTlIOI.
WHT/BLU
...----WHT/~D
Bu(
I
-----+-.......
GRN1BLU B\x
. . . - - - - GRN/~D
;
MULTPLEX
CONTlIOI.
UNIT, UNIT,
DllVER'S DllVER'S
I3 I3
r" roO
I
I
I . . .
._ .. _ .. _. J L._ .. J
CUSHION BACK ~ BACK
('99 Model only!
DRMJrSSEAT FIIONT PASSfNGER'S

HEATER SEAT HEATER
I
G551
1
G501
1
G561
I
G302
BACK
22-276
~
Switch Test Seat Heater Test
1. Remove the console panel (see page 20-63). 1. Carefully remove the front seat (see page 20-78).
2. Push out the seat heater switch (A) from behind the 2. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2
center console panel. terminals, and the No.1 and No. 3 terminals. There
should be continuity.
3. Disconnect the 6P connector (8) from the switch. 3. If there is no continuity, replace the seat heater.
4. Check for continuity between the terminal in each

Terminal
6 4 5
Position
HIGH
ON
LOW
OFF

switch.
6. If necessary, check the illumination bulbs (C).
BACK 22-277
Protected by AR
Wiper/Washer
WINDSHIELD WASHER TUBE

WASHER RESERVOIR
WASHER LEVEL SWITCH

Test, page 22-287
WASHER MOTOR
Test, page 22-285
WINDSHIELD WIPER ARMS and UNKAGE

WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
INTERMITTENT WIPER CIRCUIT

(In the multiplex control unit, driver'S)
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR

Test, page 22-285
INTERMITTENT WIPER RELAY

Test, page 22-103
22-278 BACK
1.:...1
Circuit Diagram
DIlVER'S
HAmRY
e_--t_No_~_'
I UNDER-HOOD Fl./SE/RELAYBOX
-4---WHT-&- ~
IGNmoN SW1TCH
~
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
No.9(7.5A1
No.7
(7.5Al
~1-----------+tM----G~~----------------~
GRN BlK
r"r J"
: GRN BlK ;
I._ .. ,.... .. _ .. _ .. .. ..__ _ - __ _
.. .. .. ('11
.. ..
- "I
1..-.. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .....;•
YEL/GRN
A7 WINDSHIELD WPER/WASHER SWITCH
~.- .-- --
L _ ______ __ _
, SWITCH OfT ' 00

INT
~~~
/~- - --- "
00
HI
J\fK-MIST MIST
OfT/INT
Al A2 AS AI A4 A3
BlK/YEL
cr Vl1r
GRN BlK GRN1ILK
WINDSHELD
WPERMOTOR
1 --BLU/WHT
BLU/YEL
• ~
HI
LO
2
BLU
WINDSHEI.D
,
~ ..:j WIP£R
~
INTEAMITTENT
~ RElAY
GRN/RED
'----"~
GAUGE ASSEMBLY 5 3
BLU/WHT
Y BlK/YEL
$ ~
PNK 2 WASHER R.UID
1
LEVEL SWITCH
(Oosed : FIOIt down I
M
ILK
2
WNISHIELD
WASHER
MOTOR
BlK BLK BlK
I 1 L 11
'1 : '99 Modol
'2 : 'OO-OJ Modell
r...
G2Dl G2Dl G302 G401
(cont'd)
BACK
22-279
Protected by AR
WiperIWasher
1
(Fuse/"""v box tocbtI
A24 A22
all PNK B9
.. _Modekl
,...('00-03 .. _ .. _ .. .. _ .. _ .. _
,...('.ModoII . ..
114 . 115
:, ~GRN/WHT lID
ii~-
o BLU/WKT
~ !i
. II
MULTI'W:
JNTEIII1ITTENT INTERMIITENT CONTROL UNIT,
, DWEll TIME DWELlTM PASSENGER'S
: CONTROLlER PCM : CONTROU.ER
'B2
: GIIN/YEL -
B9
.
I
:
B2
GRN/YEl
116
L .. _ .. _ .. _ .L No.4712OAI
RISE L .. _ .. _ .. _. ...J
.Alo
-GRN
tmIMTTENT
WP£R CIRCUIT
In lilt MUI.TI'L£X
Y B22
J
( CONTROl UNIT,
DRIVER'S BRAKE PEDAL
, POSITION
SWITCH
(CIoHd : P_I dlprtllldl
wi IAI
--BlU/WKT o WHT/BLK
111
A3
• BlJ(Jlll
--GRN/lED ~
I r 115
USA : GIIN/lED
MULTI'L£X
CONTIIOI.
UNIT,
-F- 5
DRIVER'S
~
ICIIIIIdII
- - IlK/YEl
USA : GRN/RED
CanadI :GRN/WHT
PARKWG TRANSMISSION
BRAKE RANGE
SWITCH SWITCH
(CIoHd : Pedal puohodI (CIoHd : In poIiIion [l] I
I
G101
I I
G503 G504
22-280
BACK
I...:!..I
1. Before testing the wiper/washer control functions, troubleshoot the mUltiplex control system (see page 22-298).
2. Remove the driver's multiplex control unit from the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box, and disconnect its
connector.
3. Inspect all connector and socket terminals to be sure they are making good contact .
Al A2. A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 Al0 All A12

A13 A14 A15 A16 I - - A17 A18 A19 A2.0 t--- A2.1 A2.2 A2.3 A2.4

GRN/YEl ('00-03 models)
81
\ 810/
GRN/WHT ('00-03 models)
B3 B4 85
/ /
BlK BLU/WHT GRN/RED (USA)
GRN/WHT (Canada)
(cont'd)
BACK
22-281
Protected by AR
Wiper/Washer
Control Unit Input Test fcont'd)
under-dash fuse/relay box sockets .
A9 Fuse/relay Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.7 (7.5 A) [No. 12 (30
box socket (II) and Wiper There should be battery A) fuse] fuse in the driver's
switch a, INT voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty wiper switch
AS Brake pedal Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 47 (20 A) fuse in the
pushed There should be battery under-hood fuse/relay box
voltaQe. • An open in the wire
A11 Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 12 (30 A) fuse in the
(II) There should be battery driver's under-dash fuse/relay
voltage. box
• Faulty intermittent wiper relay
A21 Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.7 (7.5 A) [No. 12 (30
(II) and washer There should be battery A) fuse] fuse in the driver's
switch ON voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty washer switch
A23 Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 12 (30 A) fuse in the
voltage. box
A3 Shift lever in (f] Check for continuity to • Poor ground (G101)
ground: • Faulty AfT gear position switch
There should be continuity to • An open in the wire
Qround
A24 Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.9 (7.5 A) fuse in the
voltage. box
B9" GRN/YEL Intermittent dwell Check for resistance between • Faulty intermittent dwell time
B10" GRN/WHT time control ring the terminals: controller
turned It should vary from about 0 to • An open in the wire
30 k Q as the ring is turned.
B11 BlK Under all Check for continuity to • Poor ground (G503)
B14 BlU/WHT Under all Check for continuity between • An open in the wire
conditions the B14terminal and No.9
terminal of the PCM 32P
connector A:
B15 GRN/RED Parking brake Check for continuity to • Faulty parking brake switch
(USA) pedal pushed ground: • An open in the wire
GRN/WHT
(Canada)
[ ] : '99 model
I
* 1: '00-03 models
22-282 BACK
Protected by AR ~
~
5. Remove the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-101).
its connector.
7. Inspect all connector and socket terminals to be sure they are making good contact.
Al A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12
A13 Al4 Al5 Al6

--- A17 Al8 Al9 A20 ~ A2l A22 A23 A24
MULT'PLEX CONTROL UNIT, PASSENGER'S CONNECTOR
I:',m~::g]
GRN/~
('99mode1)
\
GRN/YEL
BL
('99 model)
8. With the passenger's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector and the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box sockets.
B22 BlK Under all conditions Check for continuity to • Poor ground (GS04)
A22 Fuse/relay Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to • Blown No. 9 (7.5 A) fuse in the
box socket (II) ground: driver's under-dash fuse/relay
There should be battery box
voltage. • An open in the wire
B16 * GRN!YEl Intermittent dwell Check for resistance • Faulty intermittent dwell time
1
time control ring between the terminals: It controller
815 * GRN/WHT turned should vary from about • An open in the wire
1
oto 30 kQ as the ring is
turned.
* 1: '99 model
BACK
22-283
Protected by AR
Wiper/Washer
Wiper/Washer Switch Test/Replacement

1. Remove the dashboard lower cover (see page 20-65).
2. Remove the steering column covers (see page 17-27).
3. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the wiper/washer switch (8), then remove the two screws (C) and the switch.
'r-lL--
A1 A2 A3 A4
A5
V A7 A8
4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the table. If the switch fails any
continuity check, replace the switch.
1\ Terminal
A1 A2 A3 A4 AS A7 AS B1 B2
Position \
OFF 0 0
INT
0 0
0 0
LO 0 0
HI 0 0
Mist switch ON 0 -0
Washer switch ON 0 -0
Intermittent dwell time
controller turned ""ArI(
0- 30kQ
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
22-284 BACK
~
Wiper Motor Test Washer Motor Test
1. Open the hood, and remove the cap nuts and the 1. Remove the right inner fender (see page 20-129).
wiper arms.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer
NOTE: Carefully remove the wiper arms, so that motor (B).
they do not touch the hood.
2. Remove the windshield wiper arms (see page 22-

286).
3. Disconnect the 5P connector(A) from the wiper

motor(B).
3. Test the washer motor by connecting battery

power and ground according to the table.
o If the motor fails to run smoothly, replace it.

o If the motor runs smoothly, but little or no
4. Test the motor by connecting battery power and washer fluid is pumped, check for a disconnected
ground according to the table. or blocked washer hose, or a clogged pump
Ifthe motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, outlet in the motor.
replace it.
\ Terminal
1 2
1\ Terminal
1 2 4 Battery
\
Position \ Connected (B 8
LOW SPEED 8 (B
HIGH SPEED 8 (B
5. Connect an analog voltmeter between the No.5 (+)

and No.3 (-) terminals, and run the motor at low
or high speed. The voltmeter should indicate 0 V
and 4 V or less alternately.
BACK
22-285
Protected by AR
Wiper/Washer
Wiper Motor Replacement

1. Remove the nuts (A) and remove the windshield 5. Scribe a line (A) across the link and windshield
wiper arms (B). wiper linkage to show the original adjustment.
Separate the windshield wiper linkage (B) from the
wiper motor (C).
Remove and
replace the clips A
18 N·m 11.8k
13Ibf.ft)
2. Remove the hood seal and cowl cover.
3. Remove the bolt (AI and windshield wiper linkage

assembly (B).
6. Install in the reverse order of removal, and note
these items:
• Grease the moving parts.

• Before reinstalling the wiper arms, turn the wiper
switch ON, then OFF to return the wiper shafts to
the park position.
• If necessary, replace any damaged clips.
• Check the wiper motor operation.
A C
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
4. Disconnect the 5P connector (C) from the wiper

motor (D).
BACK
22-286
Protected by AR r:'I
a.=!..I
Washer Reservoir Replacement Washer Fluid Level Switch Test
(Canada)
1. Pull away the right innerfender (see page 20-129).
2. Disconnect the washer tube (A) and washer motor 1. Remove the right inner fender (see page 20-129).
connector (B).
2. Disconnect the switch 2P connector (A).
3. Remove the three bolts (C) and the washer

reservoir (D). 3. Remove the washer level switch from the reservoir.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal. Check the NOTE: Fluid may flow out of the opening.
washer motor operation.
float (B) position according to the table.
,\ Terminal
1 2
Position \
flOAT UP
FLOAT DOWN 0 D
BACK
22-287
Protected by AR
Wiper /Washer
Washer Tube Replacement
1. Remove the right inner fender (see page 20-129).
2. Remove the windshield washer nozzles and clips, then remove the tube.
~ ~
~
3. Install in the reverse order of removal. Take care not to pinch the washer tube. Check the windshield washer
operation.
BACK
22-288
Immobilizer System ~
IMMOBILIZER INDICATOR LIGHT

Bulb Location, page 22-126
PCM
IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER UNIT Replacement,
Troubleshooting, page 22-293 step 1 on page 11-4
Replacement, page 22-294 Substitute known-good for testing,
step 1 on page 11-5
TRANSPONDER
__- __________ (Built into the ignition key)
/
IGNITION KEY
BACK
22-289
Protected by AR
Immobilizer System
Circuit Diagram

BATTERY i
No.411120AI No.5414OA1
+ ~L ~ •
No.46
liSA)
No.1115AI No.13 17.sAl

DRIVER'S DRIVER'S
FUSE FUSE WIlT1m .1'19 ModIII
WHT/IED 110-03~
WHT/GRN
'7 '7
REDlWHT BlUIORN WHTIm I" ModIII
WHTIIED 1'00-03 ModIIII
IMMOIIUZEII
~ • I I ~LJBlJ( NlCATOR
I.IGIIT
IlAWI
KEY
---q]
L....o----o--o-
~:- -- -- -- -- -- PGM-R
MAtI
~ __________+-______ ~~,RELAY
BI IIlkLYEL GAN/YEL
§) @
NOR.R IGPI IGP2 IMOal IMOEN
PCM LGI
BIIN
FUEL
PUMP
IFPI
BllNIBLK
Gl0l ;552 G101
BACK
22-290
Protected by AR ~
t=:.I
System Description
The vehicle is equipped with an immobilizer system that will disable the vehicle unless the proper ignition key is used.
This system consists of a transponder located in the ignition key, an immobilizer receiver unit, an indicator light, and
the PCM.
The vehicle has two kinds of keys.
• The black master key for:

- ignition switch.
- door locks.
- tailgate lock.
- glove box.
• The gray valet key for:

- ignition switch.
- door locks.
When the key is inserted in the ignition switch and turned to the (II) position, the immobilizer receiver unit sends
power to the transponder in the ignition key. The transponder then sends a coded signal back through the immobilizer
receiver unit to the PCM.
• The immobilizer system can store up to six key codes.

• If it is necessary to rewrite the PCM, the dealer needs the customer's vehicle, all its master keys and valet keys, and
the Honda PGM Tester equipped with an immobilizer program card with the latest version of PGM Tester sohtware.
Any key that is not learned during rewriting will no longer start the engine.
• It is possible to add ONE new key without reprogramming all of the keys (follow the prompts in the PGM Tester
IMMOBI menu).
• If the customer has lost his key, and cannot start the engine, contact Acura Customer Relations.
IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER UNIT
\
PCM FUEL SUPPLY
SYSTEM
IGNmON KEY
\
KEY CYLINDER
(Has built-in transponder)
(cont'd)
BACK
22-291
Protected by AR
Immobilizer System
o If the proper key has been used, the immobilizer indicator light will come on for about two seconds, then go off.
o If the wrong key has been used or the code was not received or recognized by the PCM, the indicator light will come
on for about two seconds, then it will blink until the ignition switch is turned OFF. For accurate immobilizer system
diagnosis get as much information from the customer as possible. A blinking indicator light means the key was not
recognized.
o If the ignition switch turned OFF, the indicator will blink for about five seconds to signal that the immobilizer system
has been set correctly, then the indicator will go off.
NOTE: Large metal objects, key fobs, other immobilizer keys, and other transpondars can interfere with the
immobilizer signal. If an intermittant program is suspected, remove the ignition key from the key ring.
Problem Part set PGM-Tester

required 7
CD Master or valet key has been lost or additional Blank key YES
master or valet key is required.
® All master and valet keys have been lost. Blank key x 2, or 3 YES
® Immobilizer receiver unit does not work. Immobilizer receiver unit NO
CD PCM does not work. PCM YES
® Ignition switch does not work. Ignition switch, Master keys, and valet key YES
(rekey all lock cylinders to the new keys)
~[)oor ke~der is broken. Door key cylinder (rekey the cylinc!gr)_ NO
22-292 BACK
~
Troubleshooting
Follow this procedure if the vehicle does not start, or 4. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the
after rewriting the PCM with the PGM-Tester and the immobilizer receiver unit (B).
vehicle does not start.
Note these items before troubleshooting:
• Due to the action of the immobilizer system, the

engine takes slightly more time to start than engines
of vehicle without an immobilizer system.
• When the system is normal, and the proper key is
inserted, the indicator light comes on for 2 seconds,
then it will go off.
• If the indicator starts to blink after 2 seconds, or if the
engine does not start, repeat the starting procedure.
If the engine still does not start, continue with this
procedure.
1. Using a scan tool, check for a Diagnostic Trouble

Code (DTC) (see page 11-3). Wire side of female teminals
Is DTe P160l indicated?
YES-Substitute the PCM with a known-good PCM 5. Check for voltage between the No.1 terminal and
and retest (see page 11-5).. body ground with the ignition switch turned ON (/I).
NO - Go to step 2. Is there battery voltage?
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) with the proper key. YES-Go to step 6.
3. Check to see if the immobilizer indicator light NO - Check for these problems:
comes on.
• A blown No.1 (15A) fuse in the driver's under-
Does the indicator light blink? dash fuse/relay box .•
• A blown No. 46 (15A) fuse in the under-hood fuse
YES-Go to step 4. /relay box .•
• An open in the YEL/BLK wire between the PGM-FI
NO-Check for these problems: main relay and the immobilizer receiver unit..
• A faulty PGM-FI main relay .•
• An open in the PNK wire between the gauge
assembly and PCM .•
• A faulty immobilizer indicator light..
• A blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the passenger's
under-dash fuse/relay box .•
(cont'd)
BACK
22-293
Protected by AR
Immobilizer System
Troubleshooting (cont'd) Immobilizer Receiver Unit

Replacement
6. Check for continuity between the No.4 terminal
and body ground.
NOTE: The PCM dose not need to be reprogrammed if
Is there continuity? only the receiver has been replaced.
YES-Go to step 7. 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see

page 20-65).
NO-Repair open in the BRN/BlK wire between the
immobilizer receiver unit and G101 .• 2. Remove the steering column covers (see page 17-
27).
and the PCM. 3. Disconnect the 5P and 7P connectors (A) from the
immobilizer receiver unit (8).
B
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair open in the RED wire between the

immobilizer receiver unit and PCM .•

and PCM.
YES-Replace the immobilizer receiver unit..
NO-Repair open in the BlU wire between the A

immobilizer receiver unit and PCM .•
4. Remove the screws (C) and the immobilizer

receiver unit from the ignition key cylinder (D).
6. After replacement, check the immobilizer system.
BACK
22-294
Protected by AR ~
Multiplex Control System I..!!!!..I
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, PASSENGER'S
IGNITION KEY LIGHT

Test,page 22-191
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DOOR

(Built into the power window master switch)
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DRIVER'S

(Has built-in beeper)
00DGU B
8 a °0 00
MULTIPLEX CONTROL INSPECTION CONNECTOR
BACK
22-295
Protected by AR
Circuit Diagram (Power, Ground, Communication Lines)
'I :'II,'03Mod11
UNDER-HOOD FUSIi/IIELAYBOX '2 :'00-03 ModII&
IGNIT10N
BAmRY
No.41IUDA) No.42I60A)
+ WHT~
IGI
No.51(4DAI
-=" WIfT/aLU
No.54I4DA)
-=" va ur
No.47(ZOA)
~,.,.
PASSENGER'S
UMJER-DASH
~ No.U
(7.5A)
~ (7.5A1
NoJ
IIIUVER'S
lJM)£R-DASH
FUSIi/IIELAY FUSIi/IIELAY BOX
BOX
WHTiYEL
7
r-- I -
~~ IGNITION
KEYUGHT
ILEDI
'-- I - fFuNlnIay box socbtI

6
WHT/Yn ., WHT [au

WHTIiED ., :l'm~ ::w~~ \H WHTBlU
AI AI AIZ A24 A24 A22
BEEPER
R
MULllPLEX AIS A2 MULTJIlEX al II MULnPLEX
CONTROL UNIT. >--BRN CONTROL UNIT, ;>--PN< - CONTIIOI. UNIT,
DOOR DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S
AIZ AIS A2 all AI3 AI4 AIS B22 AI TAU
. ~---------,~ POWEll
WN)()W
RElAY
GIIN !wHT BlU WHT aLK Ifust/niay box lOCko1l
~
No.I5(ZOA)
'-D-
PASSENG£R'S
UNDER-DASH
I IGN/TlON
....!.::::;- = X RISE/RELAY BOX
~,
KEY
SWITCH
3 (~~td ) r-; -0
_ INSPECTlON
CONNECTOR
U EX a~ all E~ U
i
1G4DI
....
0551
... ........
G503
1
u
0401
....
G504
... 1
G581
BACK
22-296
t.=!..I
System Description
The multiplex Control System has four internal Multiplex Communication

functions: To reduce the number of wire harnesses, digital signals
• Multiplexing (send multiple signals over shared are sent via shared multiplex communication lines
wires) rather than sending normal electrical signals through
• Wake up/sleep models (runs at full power only on individual wires.
demand to reduce battery draw) • The input signals from each switch are converted to
• Fail-safe (fixes or ignores faulty signals) digital signals at the central processing unit (CPU).
• Self-diagnosis (Mode 1 for the system, Mode 2 for The digital signals are sent from the transmitter unit
input lines) to the receiver unit as serial signals.
• The transmitted signal is converted to a switch signal
The system controls the function of the following at thE:! receiver unit, and it operates the related
circuits component.
• Engine Oil Pressure Indicator • There are exclusive communication lines between
• Seat Belt Reminder each of the multiplex control units:
• Lights-on Reminder - Door H Driver's (between the door and the driver's
• Key-in Reminder multiplex control units) Wire color: BRN
• Key Light Timer - Driver's H Passenger's (between the driver's and
• Dash Lights Brightness Control the passenger's multiplex control units) Wire color:
• Entry Light Control PNK
• Automatic Lights-off The control units always communicate via these lines
• Power Door Locks when the system is operating, and they stop
• Power Window (including key-off timer operation) communicating when the system is OFF.
• Wiper/Washer (including speed sensitive intermittent
wiper) Wake-up and Sleep
• Keyless Entry/Security Alarm The multiplex control system has "wake-up" and
• Interlock "sleep" functions to decrease parasitic draw on the
battery when the ignition switch is OFF.
• In the sleep mode, the multiplex control unit stops the
functions (communication and CPU control) when it
is not necessary for the system to operate.
• As soon as any operation is requested (for example,
door is unlocked), the related control unit in the sleep
mode immediately wakes up and begins to function.
This control unit also sends a wake-up signal to the
other control units via the communication lines.
• When"the ignition switch is turned OFF, and driver's
or front passenger's door opened, then closed, there
is about a 10 second delay before the control units go
from the wake-up mode to the sleep mode.
• If any door is open, the sleep mode will not function.
• If a key is in the ignition switch, the sleep mode will
not function.
Fail-safe
To prevent improper operation, the mUltiplex control
system has a fail-safe function. In the fail-safe mode,
the output signal is fixed when any part of the system
malfunctions (for example, a faulty control unit or
communication line).
Each control unit has a hardware fail-safe function that
fixes the output signal when there is any CPU
malfunction, and a software fail-safe function that
ignores the signal from the malfunctioning control unit
and allows the system to operate normally.
BACK
22-297
Protected by AR
Troubleshooting
Special Tool Required: 4. If there is a OTC, it will blink/beep, pause, then

MPCS Service Connector 07WAZ-001010A repeat the OTC as long as the ignition switch is ON
(II).
1. Check the driver's No.9 and the passenger's No. 13
fuses. Is there a repeating DTC?
Are the fuses OK? YES-Countthe blinks/beeps, then go to step 7.
YES - Go to step 2. NO-See if the SCS circuit is working properly. Go

to step 5.
NO-Find and repair the cause of the blown fuse .•
5. Check for continuity between the No.3 terminal in
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). If the driver'S seat the inspection connector and the A 15 terminal in
belt is unbuckled, the seat belt reminder will beep the driver's unit.
five times.
3. Check self-diagnosis function Mode 1 for a
diagnostic trouble code (OTC) by connecting the YES-Go to step 7.
special tool to the multiplex control inspection
socket (A). After about 5 seconds, the ignition key NO- Repair the open in the wire, and recheck for
light should come on and the beeper should beep OTCs .•
for 2 seconds, go off for 0.2 second, then blink and
beep for 0.2 second. This means that you are in 6. Check for continuity between the No.1 terminal of
Mode 1 of the self-diagnosis function. the inspection connector and body ground.
A YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Replace the driver's under dash fuse/relay

box and recheck for OTCs.•
7. One second after you go into self-diagnosis mode

1, the ignition key light and beeper indicate the OTC,
and repeat it every 3 seconds. If there is more than
one OTC, the system will indicate them in
ascending order, beginning from the OTC with the
lowest numerical value. Find your OTC in this table,
then go to step 8 and check the communication
lines.
07WAZ-001010A
DTC Cause
1 The driver's unit is not able to receive
MODE 1: IGNITION KEY LIGHT and BEEPER signals from the door unit.
2 The driver's unit is not able to receive
0.2 sec. signals from the passenger's unit.
ON
3 Malfunction in the driver's unit.
4 Signals from each unit do not match.
5 The passenger's unit is not able to
OFF
receive signals from the other units.
6 The door unit is not able to receive
0.2S8C.
2S8C. signals from the other units.
BACK
22-298
I.:!..I
8. With the ignition switch OFF, check for continuity 11. Confirm the sleep mode:
according to the table. • Check for voltage between each communication
line and body ground while shifting to the sleep
Communication Line Wire Continuity mode. There should be battery voltage.
Door unit to Driver's BRN YES • Check the parasitic draw at the battery while
unit shifting to the sleep mode. Amperage should
Driver's unit to PNK YES change from about 70 through 80 mA to less than
Passenger's unit 10 to 20 mA.
Is there continuity? 12. Confirm the wake up mode.

• When the ignition switch is turned ON (11), all of
YES-Go to step 9. the multiplex control units wake up at the same
time without "talking" to each other through the
NO-Check for an open in the wire .• communication lines.
• When any switch in the multiplex system is
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check for turned on, it wakes up its related control unit
voltage between the communication line and which, in turn, wakes up the other units.
ground
Communication Line Wire Voltage After confirming the sleep mode, look in the
Door unit to Driver's unit BRN 3.5-9.5 following tables for the switch most closely related
Drivers unit to PNK 3.0-10.0 to the problem. Operate that switch and see if its
Passenger's unit control unit wakes up.
Does the voltage match the table? NOTE: If any control unit is faulty and will not wake
up, several parts of the system will malfunction at
YES-Communication lines are OK. Go to step 10. the same time.
In each table below, the control unit is followed by
NO - Repair the line according to the following .• a list of the switches and input signals that can
wake it up.
• If the voltage is too high:
- Check for a short to another wire. Multiplex Control Unit, Passenger's
- Check for poor contact in the connector at the No. 130.5 A) passenger's fuse
receiving unit. Communication lines (BRN, PNK)
• If the voltage is too low: Front passenger's door switch (OPEN)
- Check for a short to ground or to another wire. Front passenger's door key cylinder switch
- Check for poor contact at the connector on the (LOCK!U N LOCK)
transmitting unit. Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK!
- Faulty circuit in the transmitting unit. UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch
10. Shift to the sleep mode: (UNLOCK)
• Turn the ignition switch OFF. Keyless transmitter (LOCK)
• Cancel the key-off operation timer in the power Keyless transmitter (UNLOCK)
window system by opening and closing one of Keyless transmitter (TRUNK)
the doors. Right rear door switch (OPEN)
• Make sure that the exterior lights are off. If you Right rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
do not operate any switches related to the Radio/navigation display security input
multiplex control units within one minute after * Grounded through the radio/navigation
meeting the above conditions, the system display connector. Test by disconnecting
function shifts to the sleep mode. (All of the connector from radio.
switches must be turned OFF except door lock
knob switches).
(cont'd)
BACK
22-299
Protected by AR
Troubleshooting (co nt'd)
Multiplex Control Unit, Driver's 14. Look in the following tables for the switch most
No. 9 (7.5 A) driver's fuse closely related to the problem. While still in Mode
Communication lines (BRN, PNK) 2, operate the switches to test the circuits between
Ignition key switch the switches and their control units. If the circuit is
Combination switch OK, the ignition key light should blink once and the
Driver's door switch (OPEN) beeper should beep once. If the circuit is faulty,
Left rear door switch (OPEN) there will be no indication.
Left rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Trunk latch switch (OPEN) Does the ignition key light blink and beeper beep?
Trunk key cylinder switch
Engine hood switch (OPEN) YES - The circuit is OK. Refer to the testis) for that
individual system._
Multiplex Control Unit, Door
No. 15 (20 A) passenger's fuse NO-Go to step 15.
Communication lines (BRN, PNK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK/ In each table below, the control unit is followed by
UNLOCK) a list of circuits that it can check in Mode 2.
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK/
UNLOCK) Multiplex Cont,.()LUnit, ~ilssenger's
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK) Front passenger's door switch (OPEN)
Front passenger's door key cylinder switch
Is the wake-up function OK? (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch(LOCK/
YES - Troubleshoot the individual system function UNLOCK)
that had a problem. Go to step 13. Front passenger's door lock knob switch
(UNLOCK)**
NO- Test power and ground to all three multiplex Keyless transmitter (LOCK)
control unit (see page 22-192) .• Keyless transmitter (UNLOCK)
Keyless transmitter (TRUNK)
13. From Mode 1, disconnect the special tool from the Right rear door switch (OPEN)
multiplex control inspection connector for about 10 Right rea r door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
seconds, then reconnect it. The ignition key light Radio/nav,gation display security input
should come on and the beeper should beep for 2 * Ground through radio connector.
seconds, then blink and beep twice more at 0.2 Test by disconnecting the connector from
second intervals. This means the system has gone radio/navigation display.
from Mode 1 to Mode 2. **When testing a door lock knob, be sure all
MODE 2: other door lock knobs are in the locked
position.
IGNITION KEY UGHT
2 ..c.
J
0.2 He.
ON
OFF
NOTE: To cancel mode 2, disconnect the SCS

service connector from the multiplex control
inspection connector for more than 10 seconds or
turn the ignition switch OFF.
BACK
22-300
II.!=:.J
Multiplex Control Unit, Driver's 15. Check 2 or 3 more circuits listed for that control unit.
Transmission range switch [f]
Brake switch (ON) Does the ignition key light blink and the beeper
Dash lights brightness controller (TURNING) beep for each circuit?
Driver's door switch (OPEN)
Driver's seat belt switch (UNLATCHED) VES- The additional circuits are OK. Repair the
Engine hood switch (OPEN) short or open in the circuit that failed the test in the
Combination light switch (ON) preceding step .•
Left rear door switch (OPEN)
Left rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) * NO- Multiplex failed circuits can mean that the
Parking brake switch (ON) control unit has failed without triggering a DTC.
Trunk latch switch (OPEN) Test a few more circuits. If they also fail, substitute
Windshield wiper/washer switch (except MIST a known-good control unit, then recheck. If the
switch) system works properly, the original control unit is
*When testing a door lock knob, be sure all faulty, replace it. there is still a malfunction,
other door lock knobs are in the locked substitute a know-good control unit for the next
position. most likery faulty control unit, then recheck. If the
system works properly, that control unit is faulty;
Multiplex Control Unit, Door replace it..
Driver's key cylinder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK/
UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock switch (UNLOCK)
Power window master switch
The key cylinder switches should only beep/flash when

turned to LOCK or UNLOCK. If they beep/flash when
returning to the neutral position, the switch is defective
or misaligned. Adjust or replace the affected key
cylinder switch.
BACK
22-301
Protected by AR
Muftiple'? ' ontrol Unit Input Test

Door Unit:
1. Remove the driver's door panel, and disconnect the connectors from the door multiplex control unit.
3. Make the following input tests at the connector A.
Wire side of
female terminal
A1 WHT/YEl Under all Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the
('99, '03 conditions There should be battery voltage. passenger's under-dash fuse/
models) relay box
WHT/RED • An open in the wire
('00-02
models) I
A2 GRN/WHT Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 15 (20A) fuse in the
('99-02 (II) There should be battery voltage. passenger's under-dash fuse/
models) relay box I
WHT/YEl • Faulty power window relay

('03 model) • An open in the wire
A12 BlK Under all Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
A19 BlK Under all Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G551)
---------
conditions There should be continui!y. • An open in the wire
BACK
22-302
I..:!::..I
Passenger's Unit
4. Remove the passenger's multiplex control unit from the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
S. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
6. Make the following input tests at the connector B and the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box socket.
Wire side of
female terminals
Al A2. M A4 Ar. A6 A1 M AS AID All A12
A13 A14 A15 A18 r-- Al1 A18 A19 A20 - A2.1 A22 A23 AU
A24 Fuse/relay Under all Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 13 (7.SA) fuse in the
relay box
• Faulty passenger's fuse/relay box
A8 Under all Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (GS81)
A22 Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.9 (7.SA) fuse in the
A12 Ignition switch OFF All power windows and • Poor ground (GS81)
Jump A 12 to A24 moonroof should operate. • Faulty power window relay
B22 BlK Under all Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (GS04)
(cont'd)
BACK
22-303
Protected by AR
Multiplex Control Unit Input Test (cont'd)

Driver's Unit:
9. Make the following input tests at the connector B and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box socket.
• If all the input tests prove OK, troubleshoot the Multiplex Control System (see page 22-298).
Wire side of
female terminals
relay box
A14 Under all Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
A24 Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.9 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's
(II) There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
A13 Ignition key is Check for continuity to ground: • Faulty ignition key switch
inserted into the There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
ignition switch • Poor ground (G401)
A1 Under all Attach to ground: Ignition key • Blown No. 47 (20A) fuse in the
conditions light should come on. under~hood fuse/relay box
• Blown lED
A15 Short the multiplex Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
control inspection There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
connector
terminals.
B11 BlK Under all Check for continuity 7 , ~ round: • Poor ground (G503)
'----- ----
conditions There should be com .. ity. • An open in the wire
22-304
BACK
Seat Belt Tension Reducer ~
Circuit Diagram
M@I~
IGNITIDN
1 SWITCH
No.9 DRIVERS
(7.5A) UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RB.AY
BOX
ilRrvER'S
TENSION
REDUCER
SOLENOID
TENSION
PASSENGER'S
REDUC£R
SOLENOID
T
SRSUNT
nf---3
~-t----'
BlU RED
• MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT,
DRIVER'S
• SEAT BELT
T
REMINDER LIGHT
• SRSUNIT
BLU RED
Y
RED/BLU BLU
2
DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S
SEAT BELT SEAT BELT
SWITCH SWITCH
I --
G551
I
G581
® aOHd, @
® Closed, ®
Opon: Buckled
Opon: Unbuckled
BACK
22-305
Protected by AR
Seat Belt Tension Reducer
Test
1. Remove the seat side trim (see page 20-55). 3. Check for voltage between the No. 1 (+) terminal
and body ground with the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the seat belt There should be battery voltage.
tension reducer (B).
• If there is no voltage, check for:
- a blown No.9 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's under-
B
- an open in the YEL wire.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and reconnect the 2P

connector to the seat belt tension reducer.
5. Check for voltage between the No.2 terminal and

body ground with the ignition switch ON (II) and
the seat belt unbuckled.
There should be battery voltage.
• If there is no voltage, check for a faulty seat belt

switch, short to body ground on the BLU/RED (or
YEL/BLU) wire, or replace the seat belttension
reducer.
Wire side of • If there is battery voltage, go to step 6.
female terminals

and body ground with the seat belt buckled.
• If there is no continuity, check for:

- poor ground (G551, G581).
- faulty seat belt switch.
BACK
22-306
Protected by AR ~
Power Windows t.=!..I
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
KEY -OFF TIMER CIRCUIT

J
In ~he multiplex control
[ Unit, passenger's
PASSENGER'S WINDOW SWITCH

Test, page 22-331
PASSENGER'S WINDOW MOTOR

Test, page 22-333
POWER WINDOW RELAY

Test, page 22-103 RIGHT REAR WINDOW SWITCH
Test,page 22-331
RIGHT REAR WINDOW MOTOR

Test, page 22-333
LEFT REAR WINDOW SWITCH

Test, page 22-331
LEFT REAR WINDOW MOTOR

Test, page 22-333
DRIVER'S WINDOW MOTOR

Test, page 22-332
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DRIVER'S
BACK
22-307
Protected by AR
Power Windows
Descriptions
'02-03 Models
The driver's window will stop and automatically open if you pinch your hand or something during auto-up operation.
The system is composed of the power window master switch, the power window control unit and the driver's window
motor.
The power window motor incorporates a pulser which generates pulses during the motor's operation and sends the
pulses to the power window control unit. As soon as the power window control unit detects no pulses from the pulser,
the control unit makes the power window motor stop and reverse.
POWER WINDOW MASTER

SWITCH
POWER WINDOW MOTOR '\ POWER WINDOW

CONTROL UNIT
Sensor
~@ IS-PeriodofP"'~+ IUUL
MAGNET ~ Period of pulses-- JLfl.J
:.-- Position when something
~ is pinched
Period of
pulses
Threshold value for
judgment of pinching
Resetting the power window control unit
Resetting the power window control unit is required after performing the following procedures:
• disconnecting the battery.

• removing the No.1 (20A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
• disconnecting the 18P connector from the power window control unit.
• removing the window regulator, glass or glass run channel.
1. Make sure the glass is installed properly.

3. Remove the No.1 (20A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) on for seconds, then turn it OFF. Reinstall the No.1 (20A) fuse in the driver's
5. Make sure the driver's window does not work in AUTO with the ignition switch ON (II).
7. Move the driver'S window all the way down by using the driver's switch.
8. Move the driver's window all the way up by using the driver's switch, when the window reaches the top, ho':ne
driver's window switch in the UP position for 2 seconds.
* If the window does not work in AUTO, reset the power window master switch according to the above procedures
again.
22-308
BACK
I.!!!..I
Circuit Diagram
'99 Model
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
UND£R-HOOO FUSEIRELA YBOX FUSftRElAy BOX
BAmRY
No.13 (7.5AI
YEL WHTIYEl -
·MUlJ1W(
CONTlIOI. UNIT,
No.51 UOAI
WHTIBlU - -i>
5 DRIVER'
ITo
S
..... 22-3111
·MUlJIIlEX
CONTROl UMT,
PASSfNGER'S
ITOpagl 22-3121
MULTIPlEX
CONTfIDl UNIT,
PASSfNGER'S
(;zmPlge )
-312
)1
~----------~~ POW8I
WNlOW
RElAY
GRNIWHT -
No.7
I20AI
~ No.8
I20AJ
~ No.16
I20AI
~ No.15
120AI
BI.K
W'T FIIDNT RIGIIT

REAR PASSfNGER'S REAR
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
Topage ) '~ ____y,-_~
(22-311
(To p.g. )
22-312
(cont'd)
BACK
22-309
Protected by AR
Power Windows
PASSENGER'S
SWITCH
r
(Frompltlt
\22-311,312
WHT VEL WHT RED
POWER MNDOW MASTER SWITCH

AI lin the MUlTI'tEX CONTROL UNIT, DOOR) B2
DN:DOWN
.~
DRIVER'S FRONT LEFT RIGHT
SWITCH PASSENGER'S REAR REAR
"$.0
......
'. UP/ ",DN UP/ ",DN UP/ ",DN
MAlI
SWITCH
UP: '-DN
I
---GRN/WHT
A2 .
~
1
H CONTROl. UNIT
J
l-
I I
<!\.:~-----~ ~ _____ Vo
~
~~jD lIGHTS
11.12Wx2)
A11 AID A4 A19 A12 II A15
I~ I~
~
REDl LU REDrl RD Ir"
2 1 3
MUlT1PlEX
CONTROl. UNIT
.- -- ---. DRIVER'S
lToPltll22-31
4
PUlSER aLK
DRIVER'S WINDOW
MOTOR B,K
~~ ~ ~ ~
G551 G401
BACK
22-310
I.!:..I
'99 Model
MULTIPLEX No.1317.5A)
CONTROL PASSENGER'S
UNrr, DOOR FUSE
Frompog. ) From pogo )
( 22-310 ( 22-309
I BRN
I
WHT EL
A12
Bl
MULTIPI.EX CONTROL UNIT, DRlVER'S o----PNK-
A16 A19 A7 A14

No.7I2OA)
PASSENGER'S
FUSE
GRN ORN From pogo GRN GRN BlU
( 22-3OS
y z
·t
WHT EL
3
5 6
LEn
~ .. REAR
swrrCH
DOWN .'
. " UP
,
~ ~
I I
DRIVER'S
DOORSwrrCH
ICIosed: Door open)
~,'~-----~ .. ~
-~
Ito j-----~j~
I 2
RED/BLU
1
I B
1
REDf
I 21 cro..-@ 1' POWER WINDOW

LEn REAR WINDOW MOTOR MAt.lSwrrCH
ITopoge22-310)
G401
(cont'd)
BACK
22-311
Protected by AR
Power Windows
No.1317.5A1
PASSENGER'S
FUSE
~:)
I
WHT{fEL
A24
B9
----< MUlTl'lEX CONTROl. UNIT. PASSENGER'S lKey-oII tIoNr cftoitI
r r
A15 AIZ AI AI. All
No.161ZOA) No.J1ZOA)
PASSENGER'S PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH UMIER-DASH
FUSE/RELAYBOX FUSE/RElAY BOX
~-1- )7
IFrom PII' ZZ-31191 IFrom PIlI ZZ- 3OI1
)7 81.U 81.Ufta.
POWER
WINDOW
RELAY
WHT~
T.. l
DOWN ,''1'', UP
RIGHT REAR
SWITCH
I
~3
DOWN
t
,''I'-, UP
II
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
SWITCH
(Top ..' )
ZZ-3119
~ ~ ~ ~
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
(~t' ) Bu(
~}- - ~
n'~
• I ~--?~j~
I Xl *' • n
"~-r ~-
_,-.n ~~
~ lIGHT REAR WINllOW MOTOR
POWER
WNlOWMOTOR
POWER
~
...... ....10...1.... WINDOW
MAIN SWITCH
WNIOW
MAIII SWITCH
lTopagoZZ-3111 ITo pagoZZ-3111
G5Il
22-312
BACK
I.!!:..I
'00-01 Models
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX
No.• ' (l2OA1 No.54(40AI No.I3(7.5A1

VEl WIfT/RED - -
WIfT/IIlU -
~
MULTIPI.£X
CONTROL UNIT.
PASSENGER'S
iToplge22-3151
MULTIPLEX
CONlROL UNIT.
PASSENGER'S
~OmPiflO
-315
)
,
- -- - - -- -- - -:~ POWER
WNlOW
RELAY
No.7
(2OAI
! No.8
(2OAI
! No.I6
120AI
t~·
(2OA1
GRN/WHT - -
lEFT FRONT lIGHT

REAR PASSENGER'S REAR
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
(TOpagl y
22-315
(To pagl
22-316
G581
(cont'd)
BACK
22-313
Protected by AR
Power Windows
DllYER'S lIMIER-DASH RJSE/RELAY BOX
MULTPLEX
--WHT/RED 8 CONTROL UNIT,
DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S
(To pago22-3151 SWITCH
~mp. )
- 315,316
WHT ~EL
)7
WHT RED
POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH
lin the MULTPLEX CONT1IOI. UNIT IOOORII B2
DN : DOWN IA ~ ~ ~
- vV'< 'tJ7 ~ ~
DRIVER'S RIGHT FRONT LEFT REAR RIGIIT REAR •

SWITCH r-
~~ h ,
,
UP :
'
'
, ':,~O
- UP '" ",DN UP '" ",DN UP ,,' ",DN
Ie MAti
SWITCH
....... ---- .. -..... __ .. _-- .... --- - -- ------- . -- .. _.. - .......... ....... - .... _..... ---- oo .... _ _ _
-- .... .... -- ... --- ......
---- .....
~
Al
. POWER WINDOW
IMMERSION
--GRN/WHT
A2 _ ..
r
aM:UT
I i
~ /~-- - ---~ ~-- - ---~,j~

I
,1,12
I
A19 All Al0 A' 81 1,1,15
BIJ( RED[IILU REDTL RiO III" IrK BRH
2 1 3 ~
MUlTl'lEX
CONTROL UNIT
.--- -- -- ---- --- - ---. IDriver'sl
(To page 22-31
4
PULSER
DRIVER'S WNlOW
MOTOR
J~
....... ... ... ... .... ....... .... ....
GS51 G551 G401 G551
22-314 BACK
Protected by AR ~
1.=..1
'00-01 Models
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT (DOOR)
From page ) From page ) From page )
( 22-314 ( 22-314 ( 22-313
I BRN
I
(Fuse/relay box socket)
I
(Fuse/relay box socket)
A2 A12 A24
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (Orivor's) MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (Passenger's)

(Kay-oil tim. c:irClitl
A14 A16 A19 A7 AS A15 A12

No.7 (2IIA)
PASSENGER'S LPNK
-1-
FUSE
(From page 22-313)
GRN ORN
)1 GRN GRNBLU
WHTi~L
LEFT REAR SWITCH
~ POWER
-f- W(NDOW
ll! RELAY
o;,
DOWN
, ''
,o-~,
,, q
, '
:0-- To page )
(22-313
FRONT
DRIVER'S • f- PASSENGER'S
DOOR SWITCH DOOR
(Closed: Door open) SWITCH
(Closed:
Door open
)
'I ~1-401.;.-1
RED/BLU REDfEL WHTsrREID
I ~
I I
--I.
LEFT REAR WINDOW MOTOR POWER WINDOW

MAIN SWITCH
(To page 22-314)
G4Gl G581
(cont'd)
BACK
22-315
Protected by AR
Power Windows
MUllJllfX CONT1IOI. UMT (P1IHftgtI'1' Q(ey-oII .... cftuiIl
A7 AS AI. Ala
No.III20AI
PASSENGER'S No.812OA1
FUSE PASSENGER'S
FUSE
y
IFrom pIgo22-3131
IFrom pIfIt 22-3131
WHT~
YEL/GRN VL
Y
BLUr,
BU BLU EL
FRONT
5 6 RIGHT REAR SWITCH 5 6 PASSENGER'S SWITCH
" UP
DOWN
, '
, '
,00hJ,
, '\ :0- ~
, '
DOWN
, '
,, '
UP
,0- ...0,
, \ :0-
, '
- I
- -- --- ----
_ _ _ .J ___ J
'- - -- ---- - ,.
n ~
n ~ ~
ov ___~ A~ AI'- ~-- - :.J q,.:--- ~ A" A" ~- - - :j
4 1 2 4 1 2
REDfU AEDr WHTr BLUr BlUr WHTr

'I ~ I' .
"'"---+--'-

~
POWER WINDOW
MAtI SWITCH
21~II
FRONT PASSENGER'S
WINDOW MOTOR
~
POWER WINDOW
MAJlSWlTCH
lTopogl22-3141 lToplgo22-3141
BACK
22-316
I.!!:..I
'02·03 Models
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX
BAmRY
No.41 (120A) No.54 (40A) No.13 (7.5A)
+}---!--crv.:-'-:J'-O- YEL
WHT/BLU -
~
MUlTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT, " " " - WHT/REO - -
PASSENGER'S
MULT(PLEX (To page 22-319)
CONTROL UNIT,
PASSENGER'S
~ompog. )
-319
1
~----------'l
POWER
WINDOW
RELAY
No.7
(ZOA)
~ No,8
(20A)
!No.16
(ZOA)
No.1
(ZOA)
WHT YEL GRN/WHT - -
WHT/YEL - -
BX
l t l
LEFT
REAR
SWITCH
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
SWITCH
RIGHT
REAR
SWITCH
(TO page
22-319 ) , y
J
(To page
22-320 )
....1"-
Gsa1
(cont'd)
BACK
22-317
Protected by AR
Power Windows
PASSENGER'S
SWITCHES
( FtomPlfll
m
227
WKTh
POWER WINDOW MASTER SWiTOI WHTLRED WHT(1!ED
lin 1IHI MULTPLn CONTROL UIIT. DOOR I A20 112
AI, ...
1~~ ,. _................................... -- . ............... -- . .............. -_ ......... .. -.... .. .............. _...................... . . .. __..
DN :DOWN
(Topego
)
22-319
DAMR'S I~' I~II 1=,
--- : 1\ ", AUTt:::J\: -;;UTD UP .· T ',DN Ilup ,' T ',DN Ilup " T ',DN I(. MAtI
SWITCH
_\_ ~:tX_U1:.;l_ ~~
<f
~ ... L·--tt:J··U--'·T"'·r __ _ _.... . ....... .. ........ __ ...... .. .... .. .... __ .... a _ _ .. __ ..... __ .... _ .. .. ..... _ .. _ .. J
I
A2 Al0 A15
I A12 I A19 lit
-WHT/GRN ~EL Ill< BLK
~
B!-K
1 1 I I 1
- WHT/YEL ORN~GRN ILKIjlED IILKr ,. ar
WHT[YEL
L.-
14 11 13 15 MULTIPlEX
CONTROL UNIT,
DRIVER'S
POWER WNlOWCONTlWL IMT ITo P'1II22-3111
Up.e DO!'IN<±>
P 1'2 WKT117 1'6

R£DtBLU REDIJEL
• B BLU 81 BUt
~luuj _.
DRMR'S WINDOW MOTOR
.u.. .u.. .u..

G551 0401 0561
22-318 BACK
I.!!:..I
'02-03 Models
IIUlTNX
CONTROL
UIfT(OOORI
(~l':'" ) From_ )
( ZZ-318 Fromptgt )
( ZZ-317
T B
T T
lfu••/rolly box socketl (fuse/reI.ybox lOdtetl
AIZ
MULTNX CONTROL UNIT. DRlVER'S MULTNX CONTROL UMT, PASSeNGER'S

(Kay-oft tim« drcuItl
Al4 A16 Al9 A1 AIS AIZ

No.112OA1
PASSENGER'S
FUSE PNK
(From paea ZZ-3111
GRNIDRN
7
WKT
GRN U
lfI'T REAR SWITCH
DRIVER'S FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR SWITCH DOOR
(00Nd : Door optIIl SWITCH
~Md";" )
lfI'T REAR WINDOW MOTOR POWERWf4DOW

MAIN SWITCH
(TopageZZ-3181
0401 GS81
(cont'd)
BACK
22-319
Protected by AR
Power Windows
MULTI'lEX CON1ROI. UNT. PASSENGER'S IKey-ofttim. circuitI
A7 AS AI' All
No.ISI20Al
PASSENGER'S No.112OA1
RISE PASSENGER'S
RISE
y
IFrom pogo 22-3171
IFrom PItt 22-3171
WHT/BLK
YElJIlRN YEL
Y
BLUIBLK
BLU BLUIYEL
FRONT
RIGHT REAR SWITCH PASSENGER'S SWITCH
Rror
21 ot-@Il
~r
l
POWER WINDOW
BLUr
21 oc-@Il
FRONT PASSENGER'S
BLUr
l
POWER WINlOW
MAIN SWITCH WHlOWMOTOR MAIN SWITCH
ITo PItt 22-3181 ITo pog. 22-3111
22-320 BACK
Protected by AR ~
I..:!:..I
'99-01 Models
1. Before testing the power window control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex control system (see page 22-298).
3. Inspect all connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact .
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX SOCKET
Al A2. A3 A4 A5 />S A7 /If, AS A10 All A12
A13 A14 A15 A16 I - - A17 AlB A19 A2.O r-- A2l A22 A2.3 A2.4
GRN GRN/ORN
\ I.
2 3 4
5 6 9 10
I
GRN/BLU
(cont'd)
BACK
22-321
Protected by AR
Power Windows
4. With the driver's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box socket.
A12 Fuse/relay Under all Check for voltage to ground: o Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the
relay box
A14 Check for continuity to ground: o Poor ground (G401)
There should be continuity. o An open in the wire
For driver's under-dash fuse/relay box connector socket location (see page 22-93).
o If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause then recheck the system.
A2 GRN JumpA2to Check the left rear window An open in the wire
battery motor operation:
voltage The window should go down.
A3 GRN/ORN Driver's door Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty driver's door switch
open There should be 1 V or less. o An open in the wire
Driver's door Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty driver's door switch
closed There should be 5 V or more. o Short to ground
A5 GRN/BLU JumpA5to Check the left rear window An open in the wire
battery motor operation:
voltage The window should go up.
BACK
22-322
a=:.J
Multiplex Control Unit, Passenger's
its connector.
Al A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 All A12
A13 A14 A15 A16 I - - A17 A18 A19 A20 - A21 A22 A23 A24
... .,
1
8
2
9 10 111
3
12
4
13
n
14
1
15 16
5
17 18
6
19
7
20
... 1 1 1
...
It
YEL YEL/GRN
\
GRN
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR F

BLU/YEL
n / ...
1 2 3 4151F==lJ617 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 I 16 I 17 I 18 19 20 21 22
I
BLU
(cont'd)
BACK
22-323
Protected by AR
Power Windows
8. With the passenger's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the passenger's under-
dash fuse/relay box socket.
box socket conditions There should be battery passenger's under-dash fuse/
voltage. relay box
• Faulty passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box
A12 Fuse/relay Under all Check for continuity to • Faulty power window relay
box socket conditions ground: Poor ground (G581)
A8 Fuse/relay Under all Check for continuity to • Poor ground (G581)
box socket conditions ground: • An open in the wire
There should be continuity. - -- - --- - - - ---
9. Reconnect the passenger's multiplex control unit to the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and perform the
following input tests at the appropriate connectors on the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
For passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box connector socket location (see page 22-94).
A16 GRN Front passenger's Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's door
door open There should be 1 V or less. switch
Front passenger's Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's door
door closed There should be 5 V or more. switch
• Short to ground
F18 BLU Jump F18 to Check the front passenger's • Faulty front passenger switch
battery voltage window motor operation: • An open in the wire
The window should go down. • Faulty window motor
F9 BLU/YEL Jump F9 to battery Check the front passenger's • Faulty front passenger switch
voltage window motor operation: • An open in the wire
The window should go up. • Faulty window motor
A12 YEL/GRN JumpA12to Check the right rear window • Faulty right rear switch I
battery voltage motor operation: • An open in the wire
The window should go down. • Faulty window motor
A11 YEL JumpA11to Check the right rear window • Faulty right rear switch
battery voltage motor operation: • An open in the wire
I
The window shoulc!JI<:> up. --
• Faulty window motor
BACK
22-324
l!!!:..I
10. Remove the door multiplex control unit from the driver's door, and disconnect its connectors.
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DOOR CONNECTOR A
WHT/VEl RED RED/VEL

~ GRN/WHT
t r +
(. ..J
n +
A1 A2
/ A4
/ A6 A7 A8
/ A10
Wire side of
female terminals
~/
A11 A12 A15 A16 An A18 A19
/
RED/BLU
t • BlK t
BlK
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DOOR CONNECTOR B
BlK
~
WHT/RED
+
Wire side of
female terminals
(cont'd)
BACK
22-325
Protected by AR
Power Windows
12. With the door multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors.
• If all the input test prove OK, go to step 13.
conditions There should be battery voltage. passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box
A2 GRN/WHT Ignition switch Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 15 (20A) fuse in the
ON (II) There should be battery voltage. passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box I
A12 BlK Under all Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (G401, G551)
A19 conditions There should be continuity. • An open in the wire i
B1
A11 RED/BlU Connect the Check the driver's window • Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the
A10 RED/YEl A10 terminal motor operation: passenger's under-dash fuse/
to the A12 The window should go up. relay box
terminal, and NOTE: Ifthe window is up, jump • Faulty driver's window motor
the A11 A 11 to A 12, and A 10 to A 1; the • An open in the wire
terminal to the window should go down.
- - ~HeJ'l'TlinaL _ '---- - - --
13. Reconnect the door multiplex control unit and perform the following input test.
A4 RED While Check for the voltage on the A4 • Faulty pulser
operating the and A 12 terminals: • Faulty driver'S window motor
driver's About 6 V should be indicated • An open in the wire
window switch as the driver's window motor • A short to ground in the wire
with the runs.
ignition switch
ON (II)
B2 WHT/RED Operating any Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401, G581)
passenger's There should be battery voltage. • Faulty passenger's switch
switch with • An open in the wire
master main
switch OFF,
and the
ignition switch
ON (II) ------
14. If all the input tests prove OK, one of the control units must be faulty. Substitute a known-good control unit for the
one that is most likely at fault, then check the system. If the system works properly, the original control unit is
BACK
22-326
~
'02-03 Models
1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-6).
2. Disconnect the 18P connector (A) from the power window control unit (8).
Wire side of
female terminals
WHT
BlK/WHT RED/VEL VEL BlK/RED BRN BLU
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded repair them as necessary, and recheck the system .
(cont'd)
BACK
22-327
Protected by AR
Power Windows

4. With the connetor still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors .
• If any test indicates a problem, find and correct, then recheck the system .
1 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity to • Poor ground (G551)
8 WHT/GRN Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.1 (20A) fuse in the
There should be battery driver's under-dash fuse/relay I
voltage. box
• An open in the wire i
7 WHT/yEL Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.7 (20A) fuse in the
I
(II) There should be battery passenger's under-dash I
voltage . fuse/relay box i
• Faulty power window relay

13 YEL Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty power window master
(II) and driver's There should be battery switch
window switch UP voltage. • An open in the wire
11 BLK/WHT Ignition switch ON I
I
(II) and driver's
window switch
AUTO UP I
I
Ignition switch ON
(II) and driver's
window switch
AUTO DOWN
15 BRN Ignition switch ON
(II) and driver's
wi ndow switch
DOWN
4 ORN/GRN Driver'S window Check for continuity to • Poor ground (G401)
switch DOWN ground: • Faulty power window master
There should be continuity. switch
• An o~en in the wire
4 ORN/GRN Driver's window Check for continuity between • Faulty power window master
14 BLK/RED switch OFF the No.4 and No. 14 switch
terminals: • An open in the wire
3 RED/BLU Connect the battery Check for driver's window • Faulty power window motor
power to the No. 12 motor: • An open in the wire
(+) and ground the It should run (the window
No.3 (-) terminals. moves down).
12 RED/YEL Connect the battery Check for driver's window • Faulty power window motor
power to the No.3 motor: • An open in the wire
(+ ) and ground the It should run (the window
No. 12 (-) terminals. moves up).
22-328 BACK
I.!!:!..I
5. Reconnect the 1SP connector to the power window control unit, and make these input tests at the connector .
17 WHT Ignition switch ON Check for voltage between • Faulty power window motor
9 BLK (II) the No. 17 (+) and No.9 (- ) • Faulty pulser
terminals: • An open in the wire
There should be battery
voltage.
5 RED While operating the Check for voltage between
driver's window the No.5 (+) and No.9 (-)
switch terminals:
There should be pulse
voltage (an analog voltmeter
needle should move back and
forth alternately; a digital
voltmeter should show the
average voltage between
0-5V).
16 BLU While operating the Check for voltage between
driver's window the No. 16 (+) and No.9 (-)
switch terminals:
There should be pulse
voltage (an analog voltmeter
needle should move back and
forth alternately; a digital
voltmeter should show the
average voltage between
0-5V).
BACK 22-329
Protected by AR
Power Windows
Master Switch Replacement
1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-6). 3. Remove the four mounting screws, then remove
the master switch (A) from the panel (8).
2. Remove the screws and master switch assembly.
22-330 BACK
~
Passenger's Window Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the passenger's door panel (see page 20- 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
6). switch position according to the table.
2. Remove the screws and passenger's switch

assembly.
3. Remove the three mounting screws, then remove

the passenger's switch (A) from the panel (B).

switch.
BACK
22-331
Protected by AR
Power Windows
Driver's Window Motor Test

Motor Test ('99-01 Models) Motor Test ('02-03 Models)
1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-6). 1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-6).
2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the window 2. Disconnect the 6P connector (A) from the window
motor. motor.
3. Test the motor in each direction by connecting

battery power and ground according to the table. ~
~CAUTION
~
When the motor stops running, disconnect
one lead immediately. Terminal side of male terminals
3. Test the motor in each direction by connecting

1\ Terminal
1 2
battery power and ground according to the table.
Direction \
UP e (±) ~CAUTION
DOWN
---
(±) e When the motor stops running, disconnect
one lead immediately.

replace it. 1\ Terminal
1 2
Pulser Test:
Direction \
UP (±) e
5. Connect the test leads of an analog ohmmeter to
the No.3 and No.4 terminals.
DOWN e (±)
6. Run the motor by connecting power and ground to 4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,
the No.1 and No.2 terminals. The ohmmeter replace it.
needle should move back and forth alternately.
7. Ifthe needle does not move back and forth, replace

the motor.
BACK
22-332
t=.!..I
Passenger's Window Motor Test
Pulser Test: 1. Remove the passenger's door panel (see page 20-
6).
5. Reconnect the 6P connector to the window motor.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the window
6. Check for voltage between the terminals. motor.
• There should be battery voltage between the

No. 6 (+) and No.4 (-) terminals when the
ignition switch ON (II).
• Connect an analog voltmeter between the No.5
(+) and No.4 (-) terminals, and run the window
motor at down or up. The voltmeter needle
should move back and forth alternately (a digital
voltmeter should show the average voltage
between 0 - 5 V).
• Connect an analog voltmeter between the No.3
(+) and No.4 (-) terminals, and run the window
motor at down or up. The voltmeter needle
should move back and forth alternately.
7. If there is no battery voltage or the needle does not

move back and forth, replace the motor.
3. Test the motor by connecting battery power and

ground according to the table. When the motor
stops running, disconnect one lead immediately.
1\ Terminal
1 2
Direction \
UP <±> e
DOWN e <±>

replace it.
BACK
22-333
Protected by AR
Keyless Entry/Security Alarm System
LOCK BUTTON
TRUNK BUTTON
UNLOCK BUTTON
'~NICBUTTON
TRANSMITTER
Test, page 22-366
Programming, page 22-366
HORN RELAY
Test, page 22-103
\ _ _ _ UNDER-HOOD
-~ FUSE/RELAY BOX
TAilliGHT RELAY
Test, page 22-103
HEADLIGHT RELAY 1
Test, page 22-103
HEADLIGHT RELAY 2
Test, page 22-103
SECURITY INDICATOR
Test, page 22-365
SECURITY HORN RELAY ('99 Modell

Test, page 22-103
SECURITY HORN ('99 Model)

Test, page 22-364
HOOD SWITCH HEADLIGHT

Test, page 22-365
22-334 BACK
l!!!!:..I
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR

Test, page 22-363 KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
Test, page 22-363
IGNITION KEY SWITCH
Test, page 22-191 FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR!
KNOB SWITCH
Knob Switch Test, page 22-362
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH
RIGHT REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR!
KNOB SWITCH
RIGHT REAR DOOR SWITCH
TRUNK LATCH SWITCH

Test, page 22-364
DRIVER'S DOOR
KEY CYLINDER
SWITCH KEYLESS RECEIVER UNIT
Test, ('99-01 Models)
page 22-363 (In the multiplex control unit, passenger's)
LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR!
KNOB SWITCH
Actuator Test, page 22-361 LEFT REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR!
Knob Switch Test, page 22-362 KNOB SWITCH
KEYLESS RECEIVER UNIT

('02-03 Models)
KEYLESS BUZZER ('00-03 Models)

Test, page 22-367
BACK
22-335
Protected by AR
System Description
Security Alarm System Panic Mode

The panic mode allows the security system to be set off
The security alarm system is armed automatically after by the remote transmitter to attract attention. When you
the doors, hood, and trunk lid are closed and locked. push and hold the PANIC button for about two seconds,
For the system to arm, the ignition switch must be off the alarm will sound and the exterior lights will flash for
and the key removed, and the security control unit must about 30 seconds.
receive signals that the doors, hood, and trunk lid are To immediately cancel the panic mode, press any
closed and locked. The alarm can be disarmed at any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition
time by unlocking either door with the key or the switch ON (II). The panic mode will not function if the
remote transmitter. key is in the ignition switch.
When everything is closed and locked, none of the Keyless Entry System
control unit inputs are grounded (switches open). The security alarm system receives lock (arm), unlock
Fifteen seconds after the doors are locked with the key, (disarm) and panic signals from the keyless entry
the driver's lock knob, or the remote transmitter, the control unit. The keyless entry system allows you to
system arms. The security indicator on the driver's door lock and unlock the vehicle with the remote transmitter.
panel flashes immediately after everything is closed When you push the LOCK button, all doors lock. When
and locked. you push the UNLOCK button once, only the driver's
door unlocks. The passenger's door will unlock when
If one of the switches is misadjusted or there is a short you push the button a second time.
in the system, the system will not arm. As long as the The two keyless remote transmitters also activate the
control unit continues to receive a ground signal, it Driving Position Memory System (DPMS). Each
senses that the vehicle is not closed and locked, and it transmitter is coded to send either the Memory 1 or
will not arm. Conversely, a switch that is slightly Memory 2 signal to the DPMS control unit. The code is
misadjusted can sound an alarm for no apparent reason. marked on the rear of each remote transmitter.
In this case, it may only take a significant change in The feature can be turned off by pressing the LOCK and
outside temperature, the vibration of a passing truck, or UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter at the same time,
someone bumping into the vehicle to make the alarm and waiting for the LED on transmitter to blink twice. To
sound. turn the feature back on, press and hold the LOCK and
UNLOCK buttons at the same time, and the LED will
If anything is opened or improperly unlocked after the blink once.
system is armed, the control unit receives a ground The ceiling light, if its switch is in the center position,
signal from that switch. The system sounds the alarm will come on when you press the UNLOCK button. If
when any of these things occur: you do not open a door, the light will go off in about 30
seconds, the doors will automatically relock, and the
• A door is forced open security system will rearm. If you relock the doors with
• A door is unlocked without using the key or the the remote transmitter within 30 seconds, the light will
remote transmitter go off immediately.
• The hood is opened You cannot lock or unlock the doors with the remote
• The trunk lid is opened without using the remote transmitter if a door is not fully closed, or if the key is in
transmitter the ignition switch. If the trunk or hood is not closed, the
• The audio unit is removed doors will lock and unlock, but the security system will
not be armed until the trunk lid and hood are closed.
When the system sound the alarm because of one of To open the trunk lid, push the Trunk Release button
these violations, the security horn sounds and the and hold it for about two seconds. The trunk lid will not
headlight (low beam), parking lights, taillights, and side open if the key is in the ignition switch.
marker lights flash for 120 seconds. The alarm then The system will signal you when the doors lock and
shuts off and the system rearms. The alarm can be unlock by flashing the parking lights, side marker lights,
stopped at any time by unlocking either door with the and taillights: once when they lock, and twice when
key or the remote transmtter. they unlock.
When you press the LOCK button a second time within
5 seconds after you have locked the doors, the horn will
sound once to verify that the security system will be set.
BACK
22-336
I..!!!!!:.I
Circuit Diagram
'99-01 Models
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
UND£R-HOOD RJSE/RELAYBOX IGNITION SWITCH FUSE/RElAY BOX
+ No."1'211A) N•. ~ 1&01.) ~

BAT I No.9 n.sA) I 'Me/roily boll.cht)
-=:
BATTERY
I::: I
l-+-",-,CT"'\.~-_-<r'-C-+---WHT BlK/YEl -~~--
~V:>-I-- ~_
m ~ : ~I---+:------WllT/RED ---+---11---
t:::~~
PASSENGER'S
N•.59 UNDER-DASH
liSA) FUSE/RELAY BOX WIIT/YEL "
WIlT/RED "
IMt/NIIy box soclel)
~--+----BRN----~
WHT/YEL " RED GRN -AED/GRN - -
WHTf:: ~
AIS 816
~:- --------
TAlUGHT
RELAY
MULT1PL£X CONTROL UNIT, DOOR MULWLEX CONTROL
UNIT, DRIVER'S
UNLOCI( LOCI( UNlOCK LOCK

~
A17 1.7
DOOR LOCK KNOB
A6 AI8 AI
t12 A22 AI 811 AIO
BRN RED GRNIlED BU< RED/BU< RED/YEL
PHI(
CJ KEY
BlUWHT 1lK/WHT
~B~- RED/IlK
i---q]]
~
I 3 3 I
UN-
LOCK -- ... -, ,
COMBINATION HEADLIGHT
UGHTSWITCH RELAYS
2 DRMR'S
DOOR LOCK
2 DllMR'S DOOR
KEY CYLNlElI 2="
kNOB SWI1'Ol
i LOCK
~
B;It SWITCH
i SWITCH
1
I I
EXTERIOR
lIGHTS
G503
(cont'd)
BACK
22-337
Protected by AR
' I :'99Modll
'2 : '00-01 Modell
------------------------------------------------nL
L"
----~I~- =~
0"
WHT/nL " WHT/RE

WHT/RED .,
SECUIITY
NlICATOA CElU'«i HEADlIGHT
(LHlI LIGHT RELAYS
YY
BlJ( BlU RED
A24 A23 A22 A21 A20
Bl B9 MULTl'LEX CONTROL UNIT,

MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT, DRIVER'S PM< PASSENGER'S
UNlOCK
B6 A\3 B9 aa A AI1 A\5
y! GAY BLU/GRN GRN/.ORN GRN
'O ~"f~
TRUNK
IGMTION l¥J DRIVER'S liFT REAR PASSENGER'S
=)
HOOD UD DOOR DOOR DOOR
SWITCH KEY ' KNOB LATCH
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
~.;... )
SWITCH
3 (~~Id ) ~~ ) &"...-~ )
(Closed :
2 (= ) \DOOfopon
I I
G201 G401
I
G551
I
GaOl
BACK
22-338
Protected by AR ~
~
., : With NlVigllioftlystem
· 2 : Without NlVigllion system
I'99Modo1I 1'00- 01 Modoisl

; " -" - "- "- "- "-"-' - "- "- "- " -"-"-" - " -1
I lIN)£R- HOOD FUSE/RfLAY BOX : UNDER-HOODFUSE/RfLAYBOX :
No.4712OA1 No.4712OAl
I FUSE FUSE
SECURITY HORN
HORN RELAY
R1:LAY
~H SECUIITY
HORN
if
LTG IIW
AS
I-
G302
R1:EL LT /BLU
L .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ ..-' 1_.. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ ..-'
MUlTl'l£X CONTROl UNTo PASSfNGfR'S

rOO-Ol Models!
r-"-"- "- "- ']
B22 821
I II
ILK
I.r"-ILU
o
'-"l "'f"l
.,
.
I'
·2
0 LTGRN!A£D
I
I
11i I I
0 0
i I¢)i I
i GRN
116 1 i I TRUNK
I
o 0
L.. ._ .. j L.. ..-.J KfYlESS

IUZZER M ~NER
SOl£HOI)
I
I
i
I :
I
G201
1._ .. _ .. _ .._ .. ...1
I
I: I
GaOl
(cont'd)
BACK
22-339
Protected by AR
DRIVER'S
DOOR LOCK
-------..,
ACTUATOR
r--WHTJRED ~--+1_2
IHTREAR
DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
~WHT/RED ~LTGRNJRED
FRONT 1'99 Modell •• ~
PASSENGER'S
DOOR LOCK rc ~SMITTER ) :
ACTUATOR
: I
~WHT/RED ~ LTGRN/RED I ,
LOCKe
AIO
lIGHT REAR
DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
~ WHTJRED ~ LTGRN/RED --+

All
UNLOCKe
I BII
! ! !~C"~
I L4 !1(7 )1
L .. _.. i
LOCK :
MULTlPLEX CONTROL UNIT, PASSENGER'S KEYLESS

RECEIVER
I•
TRUNK lINT L .. _ .. .
PANIC
UM.OCK UNLOCK LOCK UNl.OCK LOCK UNlOCK
A3 AI7 I AS A4 I All AI3 AI
DOOR LOCK KONB

BLuioRN IED~U
GRNjaLK
KEY
Q otW I
~u
I I
BLK/ORN
BLK
[p---j
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR LOCK
KNOB
SWITat
\ /:: -~ -- -- -- -- ----
atK
i
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
KEYCYlNIER
SWITat
m -1'
-- "
BLJ(
2
=NGER'S
DOOR LOCK
SWlTat
~--
Y
'
:
2
DOORLOCK
KNOB
SWlTat
t
BLJ(
1
G58I
BACK
22-340
I.!::..I
'02-03 Models
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
lHlER-HOOO AJSCIAELAV BOX GNITlON SWITCH FUSC/AELAY BOX
BAmRV No.41112OA1 No.42 16OA1

+ H-~O"'....J:)o-"",--c,,-.o--+---WHT ~
BAT
BlX/VEL
J 1 No.9 (7.SA1 IFuse/reily boll.chll
~,I40.J'.A)oo1~---YEL ~O.'317.SA ~I------WKT/RED IGI --+--- I ..

1 - - -....
~'-1J-I--
No.5514OA1
-----+-..N~
.~-+_-----
VELlGRN ----t--+--- WKT/AED
PASSENGliR'S
No.59 UNDER-DASH
115A1 AJSCIRELAYBOX WHT RED
IFuse/roily box •.,.btl
r---+----UN----~
WHT~EL REOI RN - REO/GRN 1 WKTIRED
AI AIS
r-+-----t, r'""'~B~~~~--~tA-'Z-~~-4-----
~c - - - ---- ~ TALUGItT
RELAY
MUlTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT. DOOR MULTPLEX CONTROL
UNIT, DRIVER'S
UNLOCK LOCK UNLOCK LOCK
1A17 A7 J A16 A6 AlB AI

JA12 811 Al0
BU GRN RED 1;X REO BlJ(
1
BLl flED DOOR LOCK KNOB
PNK (J KEY
BLU WKT BLl/WHT REOIVEL - -
f---c(]
~
3 I
UN- LOCK
LOCK
\-; ------ -_ ... -, . COMBINATION HEADLIGHT
LlGKT SWITCH RELAYS
Z DRIVER'S Z DRIVER'S DOOR Z =R'S
DOOR LOCK KEVCVLNlER
i
;
KNOB SWITCH LOCK
SWITCH
i jSWITCH
J
I I
EXTERIOR
LlGKTS
0401 G503
(cont'd)
BACK
22-341
Protected by AR
YEL
WHT/RED
WHT/RED
WHT VEL WHT RED YL (~)
G~
2
SECURITY
INDICATOR
7 S ,
fLED) KEYLESS RECEIVER UNIT
CEllING HEADUGHT
LIGHT RELAYS
1 3 2 4 6
r 11
RED/BLU GRN LU PNK ILK PNt( ~LU LT LU
1--
ILK/YOO' BLU/RED
GSOl
AS B18 B19 B20 121 A23 I A24 I A22 A21 A20
LOCK UNlOCK TRUNK PANIC
UNLOCK
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT. DRIVER'S ,...

B'
PNK
B9
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UMT.
PASSENGER'S
B6 A13 B6 A16 A17 A1S A14
YL BLU WIlT BLU GRN GRN ORN GRY ~L GRN
1 TRUNK
HOOD
SWITCH
Q' IGNmoN
KEY
SWITCH
UD
LATCH
DRIVER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
LEFT REAR
0001
SWIT
PASSENGER'S
OODR
SWITCH
RIGHT REAR
DOOR
SWITCH
~0Hd: SWITCH
&"sed: )
3~~) ~ open)
)
ood open ~Sed: )
open ooropen ~::.;.,) ~~)
BLK BLK BLK
1
G201
1
G401
1
G601
.JL .JL
BACK
22-342
I.!!!:..I
UND£R-HOOD RJSE/RfLA YBOX
No .• 712OAJ
RJSE
rl
HORN
(HIGH)
REEL LT GRN/ILU
AS
MULTIPlEX CONTROL UMT. PASSENGER'S
B22 821 AI II
i"r"
'I '2
f"-'- "l
.
I
I l LTGRN/RED
B6
. I
I NAVIGATION
DISPLAY
UNIT
wi BLU i
I 116
LJJ KEYLESS
BUZZER M ~R
TRUNK
SOUNOID
G504
r
G502
r
G202
r
G801
(cont'd)
BACK
22-343
Protected by AR
"I : WitII NniIIIion """"

"2 : WIthout Hiviption """"
~WHT/AED~
I£FTREAR
DOORI.OC1C
ACllJATOR
~WHT/AED ~LTGRH/AED -
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR I.OC1C
ACTUATOR
~WHT/IED ~LTGRN/IED -
IIGIIT REAR
DOORI.OC1C
ACTUATOR
~WHT/AED ~LTGRN/AED- Y
AID All 811
LOCK 0 UNLOCK(±)
MULTPI.£X CONT1IOL UMT, PASSENGER'S
UNLOCK UNLOCK I.OC1C UNLOCK LOCK UNLOCK

A3 A17 A5 A4 A16 AJ AU
DOOR I.OC1C KOMI
Q
T
II.U OlIN
KEY
[J::>--! I
GRNiu !
:
i 1
IlUBW
3 3
JORN1 BJ( lED 8LU
1
IEDIILU
r-1~
1
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR LOCK
(\/:.. ! 0,
• - - __ ._1.. _. _____',.,
, ,
FRONT
PASSENGER'S ", /0 I~ER'S \,.0 RIGHT REAR
DOORI.OC1C
,0 I£FTREAR
DOORI.OC1C
KEYCYLNlER DOOR LOCK ICN08 IINDB
ICN08 SWITCH SWITCH
SWITCH SWITCH SWlTCH
L.....-
"'-
2 2 2 2
'--
'2(:)
I~ I~
i i
T
IG581
I
001
BACK
22-344
~
'99-01 Models
1. Before testing the keyless entry/security control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex control system (see page
22-298).
Al A2. ~ A4 A5 /lS A7 ~ AS Al0 All A12
A13 A14 A15 A16 - A17 AlB A19 A2.0 - A2.1 A22 A2.3 A2.4
BLU/GRN
\
Bl B3 B4 B5
Bll B12 813 814 B15
!
BLK RED/GRN
,
GRN/ORN
2 3 4
5 6 9 10
BLU/WHT
n ~ I"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Fl
10 11 12 13 14/15 16 17 18 19 20
~ ...
(cont'd)
BACK
22-345
Protected by AR
• If all the input tests prove OK go to step 5.
B11 BLK Under all Check for continuity to • Poor ground (G503)
There should be continuity. I
box socket conditions There should be battery passenger's under-dash fuse/
voltage. relay box
A24 Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.9 (7.5A) fuse in the
voltage. box
• Faulty driver's fuse/relay box I
A10 Headlight switch The headlights should come • Poor ground (G401)
ON (liD) and jump on. • Faulty headlight relay 1 or 2
A 10 to battery • An open in the wire
voltage • Faulty combination light switch
A5 Under all Attach to ground: The • Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the
conditions security indicator should passenger's under-dash fuse/
come on. relay box
• Faulty security indicator
A22 Combination light Check for continuity to • Poor ground (G401)
switch ON ground: • Faulty combination light switch
Combination light Check for continuity to
switch OFF ground:
There should be no continuity. i
B16 RED/GRN Combination light Check for continuity to • Faulty taillight relay
switch OFF ground: • Faulty combination light switch
There should be no continuity. • An open in the wire
Combination light The taillights should come on.
switch ON and
jump B16to
battery voltaQe
BACK
22-346
~
For driver's under-dash fuse/relay box connector socket location (see page 22-93) .
09 8LU/WHT Ignition key is in Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
the ignition switch There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty ignition key switch
Ignition key is out Check for voltage to ground: • An open in the wire
of the ignition There should be 5 V or more.
switch
A3 GRN/ORN Driver's door open Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver' s door switch
There should be 1 V or less. • An open in the wire
Driver's door Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door switch
closed There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
86 YEL Hood open Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G20 1)
There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty hood switch
Hood closed Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty hood switch
There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
88 8LU/GRN Trunk lid open Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G601)
There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty trunk latch switch
Trunk lid closed Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty trunk latch switch
There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
89 GRY Left rear door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G551)
knob locked There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty left rear door lock
actuator
Left rear door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty left rear door lock
knob unlocked There should be 5 V or more. actuator
• Short to ground
(cont'd)
BACK
22-347
Protected by AR
Multiplex Control Unit, Passenger's
its connector.
Al A2. A3 A4 A5 />f, A7 PPJ p.g A10 All All
A13 A14 A15 A16 r-- A17 AlB A19 A2.0 r-- All A22 A23 A24
--- '----- -
MULTiPlEX CONTROL UNIT, PASSENGER'S CONNECTOR B
WHT/RED: '99 model

WHT: '00-01 models
/
81
I
YEL
811
LT GRN/RED
('00-01 models)
BLU
,,'-
820 I 821 I 822
BlK
n
rL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7j
8 9 10 111 1211 3 1411 5 16117 1811 9 20
RED/BLU GRN/WHT GRN
GRN/BLK
~
2 I 3
,
BlK/BLU
4 7
ORN
819 110 111

12 I 13 I 14 15 18 19 20 21 i 22
22-348
BACK
I.!:..I
8. With the passenger's mUltiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors and the passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box sockets.
A8 Fuse/relay box Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: o Poor ground (GS81)
socket There should be continuity. o An ooen in the wire
A9 Under all conditions Attach to ground: Horn should o Blown No. 47 (20A) fuse in the under-
sound. hood fuse/relay box
o Faulty horn relay
o Faulty horn
A20 Under all conditions Attach to ground: Headlights o Faulty headlight relay
should come on. o An ooen in the wire
A21 Ceiling light switch in Attach to ground: Ceiling light o Blown No. 11 (7.SA) fuse in the
the middle position should come on. passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
o Faulty ceiling light
A22 Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to ground: o Blown No.9 (7.SA) fuse in the driver's
There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
o An ooen in the wire
A23 Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: o Blown No.6 (20A) fuse in the
There should be battery voltage. passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
A24 Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: o Blown No. 13 (7 .SA) fuse in the
o Faulty passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box
B22 BLK Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: o Poor ground (GS04)
There should be continuitv. o An ooen in the wire
Al0 Fuse/relay box Jump A 10 to battery Check driver's door lock o Faulty passenger's under-dash fuse/
socket voltage, then jump B 11 operation: relay box
Bl1 YEL to body ground. The door should lock. o An open in the wire
o Faultv driver's actuator
All Fuse/relay box Jump A 10 to battery All passenger doors should lock. o Faulty passenger's under-dash fuse/
socket voltage and A 11 to relay box
body ground. o An open in the wire
o Faultv oassenaer's actuator
Bl WHT/RED Connectthe Bl Check trunk lid opener operation: o Poor ground (G601)
('99 model) terminal to the A24 Trunk lid should open. o Faulty trunk lid opener solenoid
WHT terminal momentarily. o An open in the wire
('00-01 models)
B20 LTGRN/RED Connectthe B20 Check buzzer operation: o Poor ground (G201)
('00-01 terminal to the A24 Buzzer should sound. o Faulty keyless buzzer
models) terminal momentarily. o An ooen in the wire
B14 BRN Under all conditions Check for continuity between B14 o An open in the wire
('99 model) terminal and keyless receiver lP
terminal:
B21 BLU Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: o An open in the wire
There shoudl be 1 V or less. o Poor ground (GS01)
o Faulty connections at the audio unit or
navigation display
o Faultv audio unit or naviaation di~ay
(cont'd)
BACK
22-349
Protected by AR

9. Reconnect the passenger's mUltiplex control unit to the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and perform the following input tests at the
appropriate connectors on the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
For passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box connector socket location (see page 22-94).
If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
F2 GRN/BlK Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: o Poor ground (GSB1)
lock knob unlocked There shoudl be 1 V or less. o An open in the wire
o Faulty front passenger's door lock
actuator
Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty front passenger's door lock
lock knob locked There should be S V or more. actuator
o Short to ground
FS BLU/ORN Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: o Poor ground (G5B1)
lock switch in UNLOCK There should be less than 1 V. o Faulty front passenger's door lock
switch
o An ODen in the wire
Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty front passenger's door lock
lock switch in the There should be S V or more. switch
neutral pOSition o Short to ground
F6 BlK/ORN Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: o Poor ground (GSB1)
lock switch in lOCK There should be 1 V or less. o Faulty front passenger's door lock
switch
Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground:There o Faulty front passenger's door lock
lock switch in the should be S V or more. switch
neutral position o Short to ground
F3 BlK/BLU Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: o Poor ground (G5B1)
lock key cylinder locked There should be 1 V or less. o Faulty front passenger's door lock key
cylinder switch
Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty front passenger's door lock key
lock key cylinder the There should be S V or more. cylinder switch
F7 ORN Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: o Poor ground (GSB1)
lock key cylinder There should be 1 V or less. o Faulty front passenger's door lock key
unlocked cylinder switch
Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty front passenger's door lock key
lock key cylinder the There should be S V or more. cylinder switch
A14 GRN/WHT Right rear door opened Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty right rear door switch
There should be 1 V or less. o An ODen in the wire
Right rear door closed Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty right rear door switch
There should be S V or more. o Short to around
A16 GRN Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty front passenger's door switch
opened There should be 1 V or less. o An open in the wire
Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty front passenger's door switch
closed THere should be S V or more. o Short to ground
AB RED/BlU Right rear door lock Check for voltage to ground: o Poor ground (GSB1)
knob unlocked There shoudl be 1 V or less. o Faulty right rear door lock switch
Right rear door lock Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty right rear door lock switch
-~ --~
knob locked There should be S V or more. o Short to around
BACK
22-350
~
10. Remove the door multiplex control unit, and disconnect its connector.
11. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are making good contact
BLU/WHT BlK/WHT
WHT/YEl
~ r ~ 1 ~~NK ! ..,
A1 A2
/ /A4 A6 A7 A8
/ A10
Wire side of
A11 A12
/ / A1 5 A16
t
A17 A1B A19
/ female terminals
t
BlK t BLU t GRN/RED
+
BRN BLK/RED
12. With the door multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector.
conditions There should be battery passenger's under-dash fuse/
voltage. relay box
• An ogen in the wire
A12 BlK Under all Check for continuity to • Poor ground (G401)
(cont'd)
BACK
22-351
Protected by AR
13. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit, make these input tests at the connector.
A6 BLU/WHT Driver's door key Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door key cylinder
cylinder switch in There should be less than 1 V. switch
LOCK • Poor ground (G401)
Driver's door key Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door key cylinder
cylinder switch in There should be 5 V or more. switch
the neutral • Short to ground
position
A16 BLU Driver's door key Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door key cylinder
cylinder switch in There should be less than 1 V. switch
UNLOCK • Poor ground (G401)
Driver's door key Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door key cylinder
cylinder switch in There should be 5 V or more. switch
position
A7 PNK Driver's door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door lock
knob locked There should be less than 1 V. actuator
• Poor ground (G401)
Driver's door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door lock
knob unlocked There should be 5 V or more. actuator
• Short to ground
A17 BLK/RED Driver's door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door lock
knob unlocked There should be less than 1 V. actuator
• Poor ground (G401)
Driver's door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door lock
knob locked There should be 5 V or more. actuator
• Short to ground
A8 BLK/WHT Driver's door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door lock switch
switch in LOCK There should be less than 1 V. • Poor ground (G401)
Driver's door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door lock switch
switch in the There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
neutral position I
A18 GRN/RED Driver's door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door lock switch I
switch in UNLOCK There should be less than 1 V. • Poor ground (G401) I

Driver's door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door lock switch
switch in the There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
neutral position
14. If all the input tests prove OK, one of the control units must be faulty, Substitute a known-good control unit for the
one that is most likely at fault, then recheck the system. If the system works properly, the original control unit is
BACK
22-352
Protected by AR ~
l!!!:..I
'02-03 Models
1. Before testing the keyless entry/security control functions, troubleshoot the multiplex control system (see page
22-298).
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12

A13 A14 A15 A16 I - - A17 A18 A19 A20 ""- A21 A22 A23 A24
BLU/GRN
I
81 B3 B4 85 88 89 810
811
BLK
! I
RED/GRN GRNIsLU \ PN~/BL~ T BLU
PNK/BLK
GRN/ORN
\
2 3 4
5 6 9 10

BLU/WHT
\
1 2 3 4 I==l 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1
18 19 20
(cont'd)
BACK
22-353
Protected by AR
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained .
B11 BLK Under all Check for continuity to • Poor ground (GS03) I

A12 Fuse/relay Under all Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 13 (7.S A) fuse in the
box socket conditions There should be battery passenger's under-dash
voltage. fuse/relay box
I
A24 Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.9 (7.S A) fuse in the !
voltage. box
A10 Headlight switch The headlights should come • Poor ground (G401)
ON (iD) and jump on. • Faulty headlight relay 1 or
A 10 to battery • An open in the wire
voltage • Faulty combination light sV'.~ ::.b....-
AS Under all Attach to ground: • Blown No. 13 (7.S A) fuse in the
conditions The security indicator should passenger's under-dash
come on. fuse/relay box
• Faulty security indicator I,
A22 Combination light Check for continuity to • Poor ground (G401)
switch ON ground: • Faulty combination light switch
Combination light Check for continuity to
switch OFF ground:
B16 RED/GRN Combination light Check for continuity to • Faulty taillight relay
switch OFF ground: • Faulty combination light switch
There should be no continuity. • An open in the wire
Combination light The taillights should come on.
switch ON and
jump B16to
battery voltage ---- J
22-354 BACK
Protected by AR ~
t=!..I
For driver'S under-dash fuse/relay box connector socket location (see page 22-93).
09 BLU/WHT Ignition key is in Check for voltage to ground: o Poor ground (G401)
the ignition switch There should be 1 V or less. o Faulty ignition key switch
Ignition key is out Check for voltage to ground: o An open in the wire
of the ignition There should be 5 V or more.

switch
A3 GRN/ORN Driver's door open Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty driver's door switch
Driver's door Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty driver's door switch
closed There should be 5 V or more. o Short to ground
B6 VEL Hood open Check for voltage to ground: o Poor ground (G201)
There should be 1 V or less. o Faulty hood switch
Hood closed Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty hood switch
There should be 5 V or more. o Short to ground
B8 BLU/GRN Trunk lid open Check for voltage to ground: o Poor ground (G601)
There should be 1 V or less. o Faulty trunk latch switch
Trunk lid closed Check for voltage to ground: o Faulty trunk latch switch
There should be 5 V or more. o Short to ground
(cont'd)
BACK
22-355
Protected by AR
its connector.
Al A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 All A12

A13 A14 A15 A16 ~
A17 A18 A19 A20 ~ A21 A22 A23 A24
;WHT
Bl B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 Bl0
Bll B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22
t
YEL Wire side of female terminals
\ \
BLU BLK
RED/BLU GRN/WHT GRN


GRN/BLK BLK/BLU BLU/ORN BLK/ORN ORN
\ I I I I
7
2 3 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 18 19 20 21 22
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR I
9 ~ 1 ;r; 11: 111: 11~ 118

LTGRN/RED
22-356
BACK
I..:!:..I
8. With the passenger's multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors and the passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box sockets .
A8 Fuse/relay box Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (GS81)
socket There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
A9 Under all conditions Attach to ground: Horn should • Blown No. 47 (20 A) fuse in the under-
sound. hood fuse/relay box
• Faulty horn relay
• Faulty horn
A20 Under all conditions Attach to ground: Headlights • Faulty headlight relay
should come on. • An open in the wire
A21 Ceiling light switch in Attach to ground: Ceiling light • Blown No. 11 (7 .5 A) fuse in the
the middle position should come on. passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty ceiling light
A22 Ignition switch ON (II) Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.9 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's
There should be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
A23 Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.6 (20 A) fuse in the
A24 Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 13 (7.5 A) fuse in the
• Faulty passenger's under-dash fuse/
relav box
B22 BlK Under all conditions Check for continuity to ground: • Poor ground (GS04)
Al0 Fuse/relay box Jump A1Dto battery Check driver's door lock • Faulty passenger's under-dash fuse/
socket voltage, then jump B1 1 operation: relay box
Bll VEL to body ground. The door should lock. • An open in the wire
• Faultv driver's actuator
All Fuse/relay box Jump A 10 to battery All passenger doors should lock. • Faulty passenger's under-dash fuse/
socket voltage and A 11 to relay box
body ground. • An open in the wire
• Faultv oasseoger's actuator
B1 WHT Jump B1 to battery Check trunk lid opener operation: • Poor ground (GOO1)
voltage momentarily. Trunk lid should open. • Faulty trunk lid opener solenoid
114 lTGRN/RED Jump B2D to battery Check buzzer operation: • Poor ground (G202)
voltage momentarily. Buzzer should sound. • Faulty keyless buzzer
(cont'd)
BACK
22-357
Protected by AR

9. Reconnect the passenger's multiplex control unit to the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and perform the following input tests at the
appropriate connectors on the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box. If a second key is not available for the key cylinder tests, make a
non-immobilizer copy.
For passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box connector socket location (see page 22-94) .
F5 BlU/ORN Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G581)
lock switch in UNLOCK There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty front passenger's door lock
switch
Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's door lock
lock switch in the There should be 5 V or more. switch
neutral position • Short to~ound
F6 BlK/ORN Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G581)
lock switch in lOCK There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty front passenger's door lock
switch
• An open in the wire --J
Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground:There • Faulty front passenger's door lOCK I
lock switch in the should be 5 V or more. switch I
neutral Dosition • Short to~ound
F3 BlK/BlU Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G581)
lock key cylinder locked There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty or misaligned front passenger's
door lock key cylinder switch
• An ~en in the wire
Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty or misalignedfront passenger's
lock key cylinder the There should be 5 V or more. door lock key cylinder switch
neutral Dosition • Short to ground
F7 ORN Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G581)
lock key cylinder There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty or misaligned front passenger's
unlocked door lock key cylinder switch
• An ~en in the wire
Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty or misaligned front passenger's
lock key cylinder the There should be 5 V or more. door lock key cylinder switch
neutral Dosition • Short to ground
A 14 GRN/WHT Right rear door opened Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty right rear door switch
There should be 1 V or less. • An QQen in the wire
Right rear door closed Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty right rear door switch
There should be 5 V or more. • Short to....9.round
A 16 GRN Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's door switch
opened There should be 1 V or less. • An open in the wire
Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's door switch
closed THere should be 5 V or more. • Short to....9.round
A8 RED/BlU Right and left rear door Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G581 \
lock knob unlocked * There should be 1 V or less. • Faulty right or left rear door lock
switch
Right and left rear door Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty right or left rear door lock
lock knob locked There should be 5 V or more. switch
• Short to~ound
F2 GRN/BlK Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G581)
lock knob unlocked * There should be 1 V or less. • An open in the wire
• Faulty front passenger's door lock
actuator
Front passenger's door Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's door lock
lock knob locked There should be 5 V or more. actuator
• Shortto~ound
B21 BlU Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • An open in the wire
There shoudl be 1 V or less. • Poor ground (G502)
• Faulty connections at the audio unit or
navigation display
• Faul~audio unit or navigation disolav
* : When testing, lock all passenger's doors then unlock them one at a time. Any shorted actuator or wire will affect the voltage tests on A8
andA2.
BACK
22-358
1.::..1
10. Remove the door multiplex control unit, and disconnect its connector.
11. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are making good contact
WHT/YEL BLU/WHT PNK BLK/WHT
\
A1 A2
V A4
\1/
V V
I~
A6 A7 A8 A10
A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20
I / /! \
BLK BRN BlU BlK/RED GRN/RED
12. With the door multiplex control unit still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector.
A1 WHT/YEL Under all Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the
conditions There should be battery passenger's under-dash fuse/
voltage. relay box
A12 BLK Under all Check for continuity to • Poor ground (G401)
(cont'd)
BACK
22-359
Protected by AR
13. Reconnect the connector to the door multiplex control unit, make these input tests at the connector .
AS BlU/WHT Driver's door key Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty or misaligned driver's
cylinder switch in There should be less than 1 V. door key cylinder switch
lOCK • Poor ground (G401)
Driver's door key Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty or misaligned driver's
cylinder switch in There should be 5 V or more. door key cylinder switch
position
A1S BlU Driver's door key Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty or misaligned driver's
cylinder switch in There should be less than 1 V. door key cylinder switch
UNLOCK • Poor ground (G40l)
Driver's door key Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty or misaligned driver's
cylinder swi

Acura TL 1999-2003

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Acura TL 1999-2003

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Protected by AR

Chassis and Paint Codes-

Chassis and Paint Codes-

Chassis and Paint Codes-

Chassis and Paint Codes-

Chassis and Paint Codes- .

Identification Number Locations ........ 1-7

Warning/Caution Label Locations ...... 1-8

Lift and Support Points ........................ 1-14

Towing .................................................. 1-15

Parts Marking ..... .... .............. ............. ... 1-16

Revised Component Terms ................. 1-17

Chassis and Paint Codes - 1999 Model

19U UA5 6 4 * X A 000001 J32A1 - 1000001

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle a. Engine Type

Chassis and Paint Codes - 2000 Model

19U UA5 6 4 * V A 000001 J32A 1 - 2000001

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle a. Engine Type

Chassis and Paint Codes - 2001 Model

19U UA5 6 6 * 1 A 000001 J32A 1 - 3400001

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle a. Engine Type

Chassis and Paint Codes - 2002 Model

Vehicle Identification Number En ine Number

19U UA5 6 6 * 2 A 000001 J32A1 - 4400001

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle a. Engine Type

Chassis and Paint Codes - 2003 Model

19U UA5 6 6 * 3 A 000001 J32A1 - 5400001

a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle a. Engine Type

Identification Number Locations

Warning/Caution Label Locations

SRS INFORMATION DRIVER MODULE

SIDE AIRBAG INFORMATION

Under-hood Emission Control Label (1999 Model)

Example: Engine Family:

XHNXV0 1. 2G12 TWC / H02S (Z)

Under-hood Emission Control Label (2000 and 2001 Models)

Emission Group Identification Engine and Evaporative Families:

VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

CANADIAN nER 1 a. Model Vear

Under-hood Emission Control Label (2002 Model)

THII VUIlC U: CONFOIIiIUTOU . .s . lU. 2 HNX V 03.2 X2,

2HfIIIX YIJ , lUI fw e/ HOUU ) a. Model Year

Under-hood Emission Control Label (2003 Model)

VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

CALIFORNIA ULEV 3 HNX R 0130 AAA

Lift and Support Points

If you are going to remove heavy components such as Floor Jack

2. Raise the hoist a few inches, and rock the vehicle

3. Raise the hoist to full height, and inspect the lift

Wheel Lift Equipment- The tow truck uses two

Sling-type Equipment- The tow truck uses metal

Revised Component Terms

00 and Earlier Models '01·03 Models

Revised Component Terms (co nt'd)

00 and Earlier Models '01-03 Models J

Standards and Service Limits

I Ignit ion coil

Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service limit

Fuel and Emissions

B 3.490-3.502 mm When worn or I

(0.1374-0.1379 in.) damaged

Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit

Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Umit

A"Ir Con d"t"